From 66fc093cc4d5c55fcbd4bf392395a49e6883e44c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Odoo Translation Bot Date: Wed, 20 Nov 2019 10:27:13 +0100 Subject: [PATCH] [I18N] Update translation terms from Transifex --- locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po | 1061 ++- locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po | 169 +- locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po | 50 +- locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/general.po | 114 +- locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po | 90 +- locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po | 5903 ++++++-------- locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po | 537 +- locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po | 136 +- locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po | 275 +- locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po | 4 +- locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po | 417 + locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po | 336 +- locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po | 515 ++ locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po | 168 + locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po | 1114 ++- locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po | 169 +- locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po | 50 +- locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/general.po | 114 +- locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po | 93 +- locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po | 5945 ++++++-------- locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po | 537 +- locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po | 136 +- locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po | 275 +- locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po | 4 +- locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po | 415 + locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po | 332 +- locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po | 516 ++ locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po | 168 + locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po | 1382 ++-- locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po | 236 +- locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po | 364 +- locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/general.po | 252 +- locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po | 103 +- locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po | 7083 ++++++----------- locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po | 613 +- locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po | 1094 ++- locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po | 1104 +-- locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po | 471 +- locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po | 415 + locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po | 879 ++- locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po | 519 ++ locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po | 173 + locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po | 1117 ++- locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po | 173 +- locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po | 53 +- locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/general.po | 114 +- locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po | 93 +- locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po | 6229 ++++++--------- locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po | 538 +- locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po | 136 +- locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po | 275 +- locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po | 4 +- locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po | 415 + locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po | 356 +- locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po | 517 ++ locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po | 173 + locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po | 1232 ++- locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po | 174 +- locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po | 57 +- locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/general.po | 177 +- locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po | 90 +- locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po | 7223 ++++++------------ locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po | 634 +- locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po | 1291 +++- locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po | 1050 ++- locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po | 479 +- locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po | 415 + locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po | 874 ++- locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po | 516 ++ locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po | 172 + locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po | 2700 ++++--- locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po | 500 +- locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po | 372 +- locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/general.po | 251 +- locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po | 104 +- locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po | 6697 +++++++--------- locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po | 598 +- locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po | 1234 ++- locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po | 893 ++- locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po | 395 +- locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po | 416 + locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po | 1181 ++- locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po | 519 ++ locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po | 173 + 84 files changed, 41067 insertions(+), 33874 deletions(-) create mode 100644 locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po create mode 100644 locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po create mode 100644 locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po create mode 100644 locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po create mode 100644 locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po create mode 100644 locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po create mode 100644 locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po create mode 100644 locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po create mode 100644 locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po create mode 100644 locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po create mode 100644 locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po create mode 100644 locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po create mode 100644 locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po create mode 100644 locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po create mode 100644 locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po create mode 100644 locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po create mode 100644 locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po create mode 100644 locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po diff --git a/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po index a44d721cd..885d39a69 100644 --- a/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po +++ b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po @@ -3,13 +3,19 @@ # This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # +# Translators: +# Mustafa Rawi , 2019 +# Nisrine Tagri , 2019 +# Yazeed Dandashi , 2019 +# #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:45+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Yazeed Dandashi , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Arabic (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/ar/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -88,11 +94,11 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/deferred_revenues.rst:24 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/installment_plans.rst:20 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/payment_terms.rst:19 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:18 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/check.rst:39 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/check.rst:103 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/credit_cards.rst:40 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/credit_cards.rst:113 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:19 msgid "Configuration" msgstr "" @@ -1391,36 +1397,6 @@ msgstr "" msgid "View *Bank Account* in our Online Demonstration" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:51 -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:146 -#: ../../accounting/others/analytic/timesheets.rst:78 -#: ../../accounting/payables/misc/employee_expense.rst:169 -#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:134 -#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:135 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:44 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:59 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:94 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:105 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/payment_terms.rst:31 -msgid "Todo" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:51 -msgid "add inherited field tooltip" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:53 -msgid "" -"**Display on reports :** Display this bank account on the documents that " -"will be printed or send to the customers" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:56 -msgid "" -"**Bank Identifier Code** = BIC : SWIFT Address assigned to a bank in order " -"to send automated payments quickly and accurately to the banks concerned" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:60 msgid "" "The initial balance of a bank statement will be set to the closing balance " @@ -1491,10 +1467,10 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/foreign_currency.rst:36 msgid "" "Once the Odoo is configured to support multiple currencies, you should " -"activate the currencies you plan to work with. To do that, go the menu " +"activate the currencies you plan to work with. To do that, go to the menu " ":menuselection:`Configuration --> Currencies`. All the currencies are " -"created by default, but you should activate the ones you plan to support. " -"(to activate a currency, check his active field)" +"created by default, but you should activate the ones you plan to support (to" +" activate a currency, check its \"Active\" field)." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/foreign_currency.rst:42 @@ -1595,9 +1571,9 @@ msgstr "" msgid "" "In the above report, the account receivable associated to Camptocamp is not " "managed in a secondary currency, which means that it keeps every transaction" -" in his own currency. If you prefer, you can set the account receivable of " -"this customer with a secondary currency and all his debts will automatically" -" be converted in this currency." +" in its own currency. If you prefer, you can set the account receivable for " +"this customer in a secondary currency and all its debts will automatically " +"be converted to this currency." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/foreign_currency.rst:115 @@ -1657,23 +1633,35 @@ msgid "Select 'General' for miscellaneous operations journals." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Use in Point of Sale" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Check this box if this journal define a payment method that can be used in a" -" point of sale." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Company" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Company related to this journal" msgstr "" +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Defines how the bank statements will be registered" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Synchronization Frequency" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Defines when a new bank statement" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "will be created when fetching new transactions" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "from your bank account." +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "Short Code" msgstr "" @@ -1711,7 +1699,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Credit Notes: Next Number" +msgid "Credit Notes Next Number" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 @@ -1753,23 +1741,65 @@ msgid "The currency used to enter statement" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Defines how the bank statements will be registered" +msgid "Communication Type" +msgstr "نوع التواصل" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "" +"You can set here the default communication that will appear on customer " +"invoices, once validated, to help the customer to refer to that particular " +"invoice when making the payment." +msgstr "" +"يمكنك من هنا تعيين وسيلة التواصل الافتراضية التي ستظهر على فواتير العميل " +"بمجرد اعتمادها، لمساعدة العميل على العودة لتلك الفاتورة تحديدًا عند القيام " +"بعملية السداد." + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Communication Standard" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Creation of Bank Statements" +msgid "" +"You can choose different models for each type of reference. The default one " +"is the Odoo reference." +msgstr "تستطيع اختيار نماذج مختلفة لكل مرجع. المرجع الإفتراضي هو مرجع أودو." + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Alias Name" +msgstr "اسم اللقب" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "It creates draft invoices and bills by sending an email." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Defines when a new bank statement" +msgid "Profit Account" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "will be created when fetching new transactions" +msgid "" +"Used to register a profit when the ending balance of a cash register differs" +" from what the system computes" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "from your bank account." +msgid "Loss Account" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Used to register a loss when the ending balance of a cash register differs " +"from what the system computes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Lock Posted Entries with Hash" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "" +"If ticked, the accounting entry or invoice receives a hash as soon as it is " +"posted and cannot be modified anymore." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 @@ -1815,55 +1845,6 @@ msgid "" "to your bank. Enable this option from the settings." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Profit Account" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Used to register a profit when the ending balance of a cash register differs" -" from what the system computes" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Loss Account" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Used to register a loss when the ending balance of a cash register differs " -"from what the system computes" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Group Invoice Lines" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"If this box is checked, the system will try to group the accounting lines " -"when generating them from invoices." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Post At Bank Reconciliation" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Whether or not the payments made in this journal should be generated in " -"draft state, so that the related journal entries are only posted when " -"performing bank reconciliation." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Alias Name for Vendor Bills" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "It creates draft vendor bill by sending an email." -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "Check Printing Payment Method Selected" msgstr "" @@ -1900,18 +1881,6 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Sequence number of the next printed check." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Amount Authorized Difference" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"This field depicts the maximum difference allowed between the ending balance" -" and the theoretical cash when closing a session, for non-POS managers. If " -"this maximum is reached, the user will have an error message at the closing " -"of his session saying that he needs to contact his manager." -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:25 msgid "Usage" msgstr "" @@ -4745,155 +4714,6 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Explanation of the fields:" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Status" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "When an asset is created, the status is 'Draft'." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"If the asset is confirmed, the status goes in 'Running' and the depreciation" -" lines can be posted in the accounting." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"You can manually close an asset when the depreciation is over. If the last " -"line of depreciation is posted, the asset automatically goes in that status." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Asset Category" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Category of asset" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Date" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Date of asset" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Depreciation Dates" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "The way to compute the date of the first depreciation." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Based on last day of purchase period: The depreciation dates will be based" -" on the last day of the purchase month or the purchase year (depending on " -"the periodicity of the depreciations)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Based on purchase date: The depreciation dates will be based on the " -"purchase date." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "First Depreciation Date" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Note that this date does not alter the computation of the first journal " -"entry in case of prorata temporis assets. It simply changes its accounting " -"date" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Gross Value" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Gross value of asset" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Salvage Value" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "It is the amount you plan to have that you cannot depreciate." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Computation Method" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Choose the method to use to compute the amount of depreciation lines." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Linear: Calculated on basis of: Gross Value / Number of Depreciations" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Degressive: Calculated on basis of: Residual Value * Degressive Factor" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Time Method Based On" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Choose the method to use to compute the dates and number of entries." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Number of Entries: Fix the number of entries and the time between 2 " -"depreciations." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Ending Date: Choose the time between 2 depreciations and the date the " -"depreciations won't go beyond." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Prorata Temporis" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Indicates that the first depreciation entry for this asset have to be done " -"from the asset date (purchase date) instead of the first January / Start " -"date of fiscal year" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Number of Depreciations" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "The number of depreciations needed to depreciate your asset" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Number of Months in a Period" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "The amount of time between two depreciations, in months" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:88 msgid "Try creating an *Asset* in our online demonstration" msgstr "" @@ -4979,18 +4799,6 @@ msgid "" "should be registered through a customer invoice." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:146 -msgid "→ This has to be changed in Odoo: selling an asset should:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:148 -msgid "remove all \"Red\" lines" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:149 -msgid "create a new line that deprecate the whole residual value" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:3 msgid "How to manage a financial budget?" msgstr "" @@ -5647,12 +5455,6 @@ msgid "" "Progress)." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/others/analytic/timesheets.rst:79 -msgid "" -"Add a link, and the document is under Sales --> Invoicing Methods --> " -"Services --> How to invoices blabla" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/others/analytic/timesheets.rst:82 msgid "" "We save a Sales Order with the service product **External Consulting**. An " @@ -6458,6 +6260,26 @@ msgid "" " entries." msgstr "" +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "Can Create Asset" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Technical field specifying if the account can generate asset depending on " +"it's type. It is used in the account form view." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "Asset Model" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "" +"If this is selected, an asset will be created automatically when Journal " +"Items on this account are posted." +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 msgid "Tags" msgstr "" @@ -6485,6 +6307,18 @@ msgid "" " for vendor/customer accounts." msgstr "" +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "Internal Group" +msgstr "مجموعة داخلية" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "" +"The 'Internal Group' is used to filter accounts based on the internal group " +"set on the account type." +msgstr "" +"خيار 'المجموعة الداخلية' يُستخدم لتصنيف الحسابات حسب المجموعة الداخلية " +"المُختارة في نوع الحساب." + #: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 msgid "Allow Reconciliation" msgstr "" @@ -7328,6 +7162,7 @@ msgid "Multi-currency invoices & Vendor Bills" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/multicurrencies/invoices_payments.rst:54 +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Invoices" msgstr "" @@ -8589,7 +8424,8 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:28 msgid "" "Go to :menuselection:`Invoicing / Accounting --> Configuration --> Settings`" -" and check *TaxCloud - Compute tax rates based on U.S. ZIP codes*." +" and check *TaxCloud - Compute tax rates based on U.S. ZIP codes* (note: " +"actually uses complete street address)." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:30 @@ -8604,7 +8440,7 @@ msgstr "" msgid "" "Click the Refresh Icon next to *Default Category* to import the TIC product " "categories from TaxCloud (Taxability Information Codes). Some categories may" -" imply specific rates." +" imply specific rates or attract product/service type exemptions." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:38 @@ -8614,8 +8450,8 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:40 msgid "" -"Set a specific TaxCloud Category on the *General Information* tab of the " -"Product, or on the Product Category." +"Set a specific TaxCloud TIC Category on the *General Information* tab of the" +" Product, or on the Product Category." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:42 @@ -9130,6 +8966,7 @@ msgid "Balance = Debit - Credit" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/overview/main_concepts/memento.rst:84 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:83 msgid "Journal Entries" msgstr "" @@ -10283,14 +10120,6 @@ msgid "" "invoice all your orders in batch)" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/payables/misc/employee_expense.rst:171 -msgid "" -"tip If you want to learn more; check the documentation page :doc: " -"../../../sale/invoicing/service/expense `*How to re-invoice expenses to your" -" customers* " -"`__" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/payables/misc/employee_expense.rst:176 msgid "Reimburse the employee" msgstr "" @@ -10563,6 +10392,22 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Technical field used for usability purposes" msgstr "" +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Technical field containing the invoice for which the payment has been " +"generated." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "" +"This does not especially correspond to the invoices reconciled with the " +"payment," +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "as it can have been generated first, and reconciled later" +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Hide Payment Method" msgstr "" @@ -10573,6 +10418,10 @@ msgid "" "only one available which is 'manual'" msgstr "" +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Payment Method" +msgstr "طريقة السداد" + #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Check: Pay bill by check and print it from Odoo." msgstr "" @@ -10592,6 +10441,27 @@ msgid "" "installed" msgstr "" +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Code" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Technical field used to adapt the interface to the payment type selected." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Saved payment token" +msgstr "رمز السداد السري المحفوظ" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Note that tokens from acquirers set to only authorize transactions (instead " +"of capturing the amount) are not available." +msgstr "" +"لاحظ أن الرموز السرية من معالجات السداد التي تم ضبطها لاعتماد المعاملات فقط " +"(بدلا من التقاط المبلغ) غير متاحة." + #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Show Partner Bank Account" msgstr "" @@ -10603,12 +10473,13 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 -msgid "Code" -msgstr "" +msgid "Require Partner Bank Account" +msgstr "يتطلب الحساب البنكي للشريك" #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "" -"Technical field used to adapt the interface to the payment type selected." +"Technical field used to know whether the field `partner_bank_account_id` " +"needs to be required or not in the payments form views" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 @@ -10622,6 +10493,14 @@ msgid "" "wrong, you can change it in the journal configuration page." msgstr "" +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Journal Item Label" +msgstr "عنوان عنصر اليومية" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Change label of the counterpart that will hold the payment difference" +msgstr "تغيير تسميه الحساب الذي يحتوي فرق السداد" + #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:80 msgid "Try paying a supplier bill with a check" msgstr "" @@ -10899,7 +10778,6 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:10 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:10 msgid "" "SEPA is supported by the banks of the 28 EU member states as well as " "Iceland, Norway, Switzerland, Andorra, Monaco and San Marino." @@ -11053,14 +10931,6 @@ msgstr "" msgid ":doc:`check`" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:134 -msgid "How to define a new bank?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:135 -msgid "How to reconcile bank statements?" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/bills_or_receipts.rst:3 msgid "When should I use supplier bills or purchase receipts?" msgstr "" @@ -11479,7 +11349,7 @@ msgid "Account Receivables" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices.rst:3 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:53 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:77 msgid "Customer Invoices" msgstr "" @@ -11631,6 +11501,162 @@ msgid "" " If needed, a rounding will be applied to the invoice." msgstr "" +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:3 +msgid "Credit Notes and Refunds" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:4 +msgid "" +"A **credit note**, or **credit memo**, is a document issued to a customer " +"that notifies them that they have been credited a certain amount." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:11 +msgid "There are several reasons that can lead to a credit note, such as:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:9 +msgid "a mistake in the invoice" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:10 +msgid "a return of the goods, or a rejection of the services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:11 +msgid "the goods delivered are damaged" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:14 +msgid "" +"Issuing a credit note is the only legal way to cancel, refund or modify a " +"validated invoice. Don’t forget to *register the payment* afterward if you " +"need to send money back to your customer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:20 +msgid "Issue a Credit Note" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:21 +msgid "" +"You can create a credit note from scratch by going to " +":menuselection:`Accounting --> Customers --> Credit Notes`, and by clicking " +"on *Create*. Filling the Credit Note’s form works the same way as the " +"Invoice’s form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:26 +msgid "" +"However, most of the time, credit notes are generated directly from the " +"invoices they are related to." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:29 +msgid "To do so, open the *Customer Invoice*, and click on *Add Credit Note*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:37 +msgid "You can choose between three options:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:35 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:44 +msgid "Partial Refund" +msgstr "استردتد جزئي" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:36 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:55 +msgid "Full Refund" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:37 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:66 +msgid "Full refund and new draft invoice" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:40 +msgid "" +"Credit Notes’ numbers start with “R” and are followed by the number of the " +"document they are related to (e.g., RINV/2019/0004)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:45 +msgid "" +"Odoo creates a draft credit note already prefilled with all the necessary " +"information from the original invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:48 +msgid "" +"This is the option to choose to do a partial refund, or if you want to " +"modify any detail on the credit note." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:52 +msgid "" +"This is the only option available for invoices that are already marked as " +"*Paid*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:56 +msgid "" +"Odoo creates a credit note, automatically validates it, and reconciles the " +"original invoice with it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:62 +msgid "" +"This is the option to choose to do a full refund or cancel a validated " +"invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:67 +msgid "" +"Odoo creates a credit note, automatically validates it, reconciles the " +"original invoice with it, and open a new draft invoice prefilled with the " +"same details from the original invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:71 +msgid "" +"This is the option to choose to modify the content of a validated invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:74 +msgid "Record a Vendor Refund" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:75 +msgid "" +"**Vendor Refunds** are recorded the same way you would do with invoices’ " +"credit notes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:77 +msgid "" +"You can either create a credit note from scratch by going to " +":menuselection:`Accounting --> Vendors --> Refund`, and by clicking on " +"*Create*, or by opening the validated *Vendor Bill*, and clicking on *Add " +"Credit Note*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:84 +msgid "" +"Issuing a credit note from an invoice creates a **reverse entry** that " +"zeroes out the journal items generated by the original invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:87 +msgid "Here is an example of an invoice’s journal entry:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:92 +msgid "" +"And here is the credit note’s journal entry generated to reverse the " +"original invoice above:" +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/deferred_revenues.rst:3 msgid "Deferred revenues: how to automate them?" msgstr "" @@ -12008,10 +12034,6 @@ msgstr "" msgid "This process is good for both services and physical products." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:44 -msgid "Read more: *Invoice based on sales orders.*" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:47 msgid "Sales Order ‣ Delivery Order ‣ Invoice" msgstr "" @@ -12031,10 +12053,6 @@ msgid "" "later), the customer will receive two invoices, one for each delivery order." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:59 -msgid "Read more: *Invoice based on delivery orders.*" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:62 msgid "eCommerce Order ‣ Invoice" msgstr "" @@ -12092,12 +12110,6 @@ msgid "" "use a regular sales order." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:94 -msgid "" -"Read more: - *How to invoice based on time and material?* - *How to manage" -" contracts and invoicing plans?*" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:99 msgid "Recurring Contracts ‣ Invoices" msgstr "" @@ -12109,10 +12121,6 @@ msgid "" " the contract." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:105 -msgid "Read more: *Subscription based invoicing.*" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:111 msgid "Creating an invoice manually" msgstr "" @@ -12195,12 +12203,6 @@ msgid "" "100%)" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/payment_terms.rst:31 -msgid "" -"screenshot payment term forms, after QDP have commited the change planned on" -" this object" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/payment_terms.rst:35 msgid "Using Payment Terms" msgstr "" @@ -12261,102 +12263,193 @@ msgstr "" msgid ":doc:`cash_discounts`" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:3 -msgid "How to edit or refund an invoice?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:4 -msgid "" -"In Odoo, it's not possible to modify an invoice that has been validated and " -"sent to the customer. If a mistake was made on a validated invoice, the " -"legal way to handle that is to refund the invoice, reconcile it with the " -"original invoice to close them and create a new invoice." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:10 -msgid "Modifying a validated invoice" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:12 -msgid "" -"If you need to modify an existing invoice, use the Refund Invoice button on " -"the invoice. In the refund method field, select \"Modify: create a refund, " -"reconcile, and create a new draft invoice\"." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:19 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:37 -msgid "Odoo will automatically:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:21 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:39 -msgid "Create a refund for your invoice" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:22 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:40 -msgid "" -"Reconcile the refund invoice with the original invoice (marking both as " -"Paid)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:23 -msgid "Create a new draft invoice you can modify" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:25 -msgid "" -"Then, you can modify the draft invoice and validate it once it's correct." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:28 -msgid "Cancelling an invoice" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:30 -msgid "" -"If you need to cancel an existing invoice, use the Refund Invoice button on " -"the invoice. In the refund method field, select \"Cancel: create a refund " -"and reconcile\"." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:42 -msgid "" -"Nothing else needs to be done. You can send the refund by regular mail or " -"email to your customer, if you already sent the original invoice." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:46 -msgid "Refunding part of an invoice" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:48 -msgid "" -"If you need to refund an existing invoice partially, use the Refund Invoice " -"button on the invoice. In the refund method field, select \"Create a draft " -"refund\"." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:55 -msgid "" -"Odoo will automatically create a draft refund. You may modify the refund " -"(example: remove the lines you do not want to refund) and validate it. Then," -" send the refund by regular mail or email to your customer." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:61 -msgid "" -"Refunding an invoice is different from refunding a payment. Usually, a " -"refund invoice is sent before the customer has done a payment. If the " -"customer has already paid, they should be reimbursed by doing a customer " -"payment refund." -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments.rst:3 msgid "Customer Payments" msgstr "" +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:3 +msgid "Batch Payments: SEPA Direct Debit (SDD)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:4 +msgid "" +"SEPA, the Single Euro Payments Area, is a payment-integration initiative of " +"the European Union for simplification of bank transfers denominated in EURO." +" With **SEPA Direct Debit**, your customers can sign a **mandate** that " +"authorizes you to collect future payments from their bank accounts " +"automatically." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:10 +msgid "" +"You can record your customer mandates in Odoo, and generate XML files " +"containing pending payments made with an SDD mandate." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:0 +msgid "" +"SDD is supported by all SEPA countries, which includes the 28 member states " +"of the European Union as well as additional countries." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:0 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:123 +msgid "" +"`List of all SEPA countries. `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:19 +msgid "" +"Go to :menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Settings` nd activate" +" the **SEPA Direct Debit (SDD)** feature. Enter the **Creditor Identifier** " +"of your company. This number is provided by your bank, or the authority " +"responsible for delivering them." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:28 +msgid "SEPA Direct Debit Mandates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:30 +msgid "Create a mandate" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:31 +msgid "" +"The SEPA Direct Debit Mandate is the document that your customers sign to " +"authorize you to collect money directly from their bank accounts." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:34 +msgid "" +"To create a new one, go to :menuselection:`Accounting --> Customers --> " +"Direct Debit Mandates`, click on *Create*, and fill out the new mandate’s " +"form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:41 +msgid "" +"First, export the PDF file by clicking on *Print*. It is then up to your " +"customer to sign this document. Once done, upload the signed file in the " +"**Original Document** field, and click on *Validate* to start running the " +"mandate." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:47 +msgid "" +"First, make sure, that the **IBAN bank accounts details** are correctly " +"recorded on the debtor’s contact form, under the *Accounting* tab, and in " +"your own *Bank Account* settings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:52 +msgid "Close or revoke a mandate" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Direct Debit mandates are closed automatically after their *End Date*. If " +"this field is left blank, then the mandate keeps being *Active* until it is " +"*Closed* or *Revoked*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:60 +msgid "" +"Clicking on **Close** updates the mandate’s end day to the current day. This" +" means that invoices made after the present day won’t be processed " +"automatically with an SDD payment." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:64 +msgid "" +"Clicking on **Revoke** disables the mandate immediately. No SDD payment can " +"be registered anymore, regardless of the invoice’s date. However, payments " +"that have already been registered will still be included to the next SDD XML" +" file." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:70 +msgid "" +"Once a mandate has been *closed* or *revoked*, it cannot be reactivated. If " +"a customer requires to pay with SDD payments again, you will have to create " +"a new mandate from scratch." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:75 +msgid "Get paid with SDD Batch Payments" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:78 +msgid "" +"All new posted invoice issued to customers with an active mandate will " +"automatically register payment and have their status marked as *Paid*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:82 +msgid "" +"If you have unpaid invoices that could be paid with a new mandate, it is " +"still possible to do it. Go on the invoice, click on *Register Payment* and " +"choose *SEPA Direct Debit* as payment method." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:87 +msgid "Generate SEPA Direct Debit XML files to submit payments" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:88 +msgid "" +"To submit your SDD payments to your bank, you will first generate an **XML " +"file** that can be uploaded directly to your bank interface." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:91 +msgid "" +"The files generated by Odoo follow the SEPA Direct Debit **PAIN.008.001.02**" +" specifications as required by the SEPA customer-to-bank Implementation " +"Guidelines, which ensures compatibility with the banks." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:95 +msgid "" +"To generate your XML file for the pending SDD payments, go to the related " +"*bank journal* on your *Accounting dashboard*, then click on *Direct Debit " +"Payments to Collect*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:102 +msgid "" +"Select all the payments in the list that you want to include in your SDD XML" +" file, then click on *Action* and select *Create Batch Payment*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:108 +msgid "" +"Odoo then takes you to your *Batch Payment*’s form. Click on *Validate* and " +"then download the SDD XML file." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:114 +msgid "Finally, upload this file to your bank to process the payments." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:117 +msgid "" +"You can retrieve all the generated SDD XML files by going to " +":menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Customers --> Batch " +"Payments`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:121 +msgid ":doc:`../../bank/setup/create_bank_account`" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:122 +msgid "" +"`Odoo Academy: SEPA Direct Debit Mandates (SDD) " +"`_" +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/check.rst:3 msgid "How to register customer payments by checks?" msgstr "" @@ -12848,128 +12941,6 @@ msgid "" "negative number of due days." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:3 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:29 -msgid "Get paid with SEPA" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:5 -msgid "" -"SEPA, the Single Euro Payments Area, is a payment-integration initiative of " -"the European Union for simplification of bank transfers denominated in EURO." -" SEPA Direct Debit allows you to withdraw money from the bank accounts of " -"your customers with their approval." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:13 -msgid "" -"With Odoo, you can record customer mandates, generate an SDD XML file " -"containing customer payments and upload it in your bank interface. The file " -"follows the SEPA Direct Debit PAIN.008.001.02 specifications. This is a " -"well-defined standard that makes consensus among banks." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:21 -msgid "" -"Go in :menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Settings` and " -"activate the SEPA Direct Debit (SDD) Feature. Enter the Creditor Identifier " -"of your company. This number is provided by your bank." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:32 -msgid "Direct Debit Mandates" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:34 -msgid "" -"Before withdrawing money from a customer bank account, your customer has to " -"sign a mandate. Go in :menuselection:`Accounting --> Sales --> Direct Debit " -"Mandates` and create a new mandate." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:41 -msgid "SEPA Direct Debit only works between IBAN Bank Accounts." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:43 -msgid "" -"Once you have entered all the information in the customer mandate, you can " -"print it and ask your customer to sign it. Once it is done, you can upload " -"the mandate signed by your customer on the mandate in Odoo." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:50 -msgid "You can now validate the mandate." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:55 -msgid "Let's create an invoice for that customer." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:57 -msgid "" -"When you will validate this invoice, the payment will be automatically " -"generated and your invoice will be directly marked as paid." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:61 -msgid "" -"If you already had some invoices for that customer that could be paid using " -"that mandate, it's still possible to do it. Go on the invoice, click on " -"register payment and choose the Sepa Direct Debit as payment method." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:67 -msgid "Generate SDD Files" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:69 -msgid "" -"You can generate the SDD File with all the customer payments to send to your" -" bank directly from the accounting dashboard :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:75 -msgid "" -"You select the payments in the list that you want to include in your SDD " -"File, click on action and select \"Generate Direct Debit XML\"." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:81 -msgid "" -"You can now download the XML file generated by Odoo and upload it in your " -"bank interface." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:85 -msgid "" -"You can retrieve all the generated XML by activating the developer mode and " -"going in :menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Payments --> SDD " -"Payment File`." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:89 -msgid "Close or revoke a mandate" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:91 -msgid "" -"The Direct Debit mandate will be closed automatically once the end date " -"defined on it is reached. However, you can **close** a mandate earlier than " -"initially planned. To do that, simply go on the mandate and click on the " -"\"Close\" button.The end date of the mandate will be updated to today's " -"date. This means you will not be able to pay invoices with an invoice date " -"superior to this end date. Be careful, once a mandate is closed, it cannot " -"be reopened." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:99 -msgid "" -"You can also **revoke** a mandate. In that case, you won't be able to pay " -"any invoice using that mandate anymore, no matter the invoice date.To do " -"that, simply go on the mandate and click on the \"Revoke\" button." -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/recording.rst:3 msgid "What are the different ways to record a payment?" msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po index 08bbfde5f..cc74332c7 100644 --- a/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po +++ b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po @@ -3,13 +3,18 @@ # This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # +# Translators: +# Mustafa Rawi , 2019 +# hoxhe Aits , 2019 +# #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: hoxhe Aits , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Arabic (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/ar/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -33,42 +38,48 @@ msgstr "" msgid "" "The system can generate leads instead of opportunities, in order to add a " "qualification step before converting a *Lead* into an *Opportunity* and " -"assigning to the right sales people. You can activate this mode from the CRM" -" Settings. It applies to all your sales channels by default. But you can " -"make it specific for specific channels from their configuration form." +"assigning to the right sales people." msgstr "" -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:13 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:9 +msgid "" +"You can activate this mode from the CRM Settings. It applies to all your " +"sales channels by default. But you can make it specific for specific " +"channels from their configuration form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:14 #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:41 -#: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:13 ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:12 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:8 ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:13 +#: ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:12 #: ../../crm/track_leads/prospect_visits.rst:12 msgid "Configuration" msgstr "" -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:15 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:16 msgid "" "For this feature to work, go to :menuselection:`CRM --> Configuration --> " "Settings` and activate the *Leads* feature." msgstr "" -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:21 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:22 msgid "" "You will now have a new submenu *Leads* under *Leads* where they will " "aggregate." msgstr "" -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:28 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:29 msgid "Convert a lead into an opportunity" msgstr "" -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:30 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:31 msgid "" "When you click on a *Lead* you will have the option to convert it to an " "opportunity and decide if it should still be assigned to the same " "channel/person and if you need to create a new customer." msgstr "" -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:37 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:38 msgid "" "If you already have an opportunity with that customer Odoo will " "automatically offer you to merge with that opportunity. In the same manner, " @@ -76,6 +87,44 @@ msgid "" "customer already exists." msgstr "" +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:44 +msgid "Merge opportunities" +msgstr "دمج الفرص" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:46 +msgid "" +"Odoo will also automatically propose to merge opportunities if they have the" +" same email address. When merging opportunities, Odoo merges the information" +" into the opportunity which was created first, giving priority to the " +"information present on the first opportunity." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:51 +msgid "" +"No information is lost: data from the other opportunity is logged in the " +"chatter and the information fields for easy access." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:57 +msgid "" +"Would you find a duplicate yourself, ...you can also merge opportunities or " +"leads even if the system doesn't propose it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:60 +msgid "" +"Here’s how, from the list view. Select the opportunities or leads you want " +"to merge and the action button will appear. Then, you can select merge." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:66 +msgid "..note::" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:67 +msgid "It is also possible to merge more than 2 opportunities or leads." +msgstr "" + #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_email.rst:3 msgid "Generate leads/opportunities from emails" msgstr "" @@ -185,6 +234,104 @@ msgid "" "CRM settings and refer to :doc:`convert`." msgstr "" +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:3 +msgid "Lead mining" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:4 +msgid "" +"In any business, getting quality leads is essential to keep the business " +"growing. Lead mining allows you to generate leads from scratch directly from" +" your database. Target your leads based on a set of criteria such as the " +"country, the size of the company, the industry your leads are coming from to" +" make them relevant to your business." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:10 +msgid "" +"For this feature to work, go to :menuselection:`CRM → Configuration → " +"Settings` and activate the **Lead Mining** feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:17 +msgid "Start generating leads" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:18 +msgid "" +"You will now have a new button **Generate Leads** available in your " +"pipeline. You are also able to create lead mining requests from the " +"**Configuration → Lead Mining Requests** and trough **Leads → Leads** where " +"you have the **Generate Leads** button" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:25 +msgid "" +"From there, click on the **Generate Leads** button, a window where you will " +"be able to pick your criteria will pop up." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:32 +msgid "" +"When choosing to target Companied and their contacts you can choose the " +"contacts you are getting based on Role or Seniority. When getting contact " +"information make sure to be aware of the latest EU regulation, get more " +"information about General Data Protection Regulation on `Odoo GDPR " +"`__," +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:37 +msgid "" +"You can decide to filter the leads you are getting depending on the size " +"(number of employees) of the companies. You can pick the countries your " +"leads are coming from. It is possible to pick multiple countries. You can " +"pick the industries your leads are coming from. It is possible to pick " +"multiple countries." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:41 +msgid "" +"You can choose the salesperson and the Salesteam the lead will be assigned " +"to. You can also add tags to track your generated leads." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:45 +msgid "The generated leads will have the name of the company." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:48 +msgid "Pricing" +msgstr "التسعير" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:49 +msgid "" +"This is an In-App Purchase feature, each generated lead will cost you one " +"credit. If you choose to get contact information each contact will also cost" +" us one additional credit. Here is the pricing for this `feature " +"`__, To buy credits you can " +"either go to CRM > Configuration > Settings > Buy Credits; or go to Settings" +" > In-App Purchases>View my Services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:62 +msgid "" +"The blue box will automatically tell you how many credits are going to be " +"consumed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:65 +msgid "" +"If you are on Odoo Online (SAAS) and have the Enterprise version, you " +"benefit from free trial credits to test the feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:67 +msgid "" +"More information about `In-App Purchases " +"`__," +" (IAP)." +msgstr "" + #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/send_quotes.rst:3 msgid "Send quotations" msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po index 12fb9d082..0b95c5df6 100644 --- a/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po +++ b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" "Language-Team: Arabic (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/ar/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" @@ -660,76 +660,74 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:39 msgid "" "In your Odoo instance, click on **Settings**. You will have a section " -"showing you the active users on your database. Click on **Manage access " -"rights.**" +"showing you the active users on your database. Click on **Manage Users.**" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:44 -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:82 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:43 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:80 msgid "|settings|" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:44 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:43 msgid "|browse_users|" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:47 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:46 msgid "You'll then see the list of your users." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:52 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:51 msgid "" "The pre-selected filter *Internal Users* shows your paying users (different " "from the *Portal Users* which are free). If you remove this filter, you'll " "get all your users (the ones you pay for and the portal ones)" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:57 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:56 msgid "" "In your list of users, click on the user you want to deactivate. As soon as " -"you are on the userform, go with your mouse cursor on the status **Active** " -"(top right). Click on Active and you will notice that the status will change" -" to **Inactive** immediately." +"you are on the userform, click on the Action drop down menu, and then click " +"on Archive." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:66 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:64 msgid "The user is now deactivated." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:68 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:66 msgid "**Never** deactivate the main user (*admin*)" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:71 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:69 msgid "Uninstalling Apps" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:73 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:71 msgid "" "Make sure you first test what you are about to do on a :ref:`duplicate " "` of your database before making any changes (*especially*" " installing/uninstalling apps)." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:77 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:75 msgid "" "In your Odoo instance click on **Settings**; in this app, you will be able " "to see how many applications you have installed. Click on **Browse Apps** to" " access the list of your installed applications." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:82 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:80 msgid "|browse_apps|" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:85 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:83 msgid "" "In your applications' dashboard, you will see all the icons of your " "applications. Click on the application you want to uninstall. Then, on the " "form of the application, click on **Uninstall**." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:92 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:90 msgid "" "Some applications have dependencies, like Invoicing, eCommerce, etc. " "Therefore, the system will give you a warning message to advise you of what " @@ -739,20 +737,20 @@ msgid "" " click **Confirm**." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:99 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:97 msgid "" "Last, after having checked the warning message (if any), click **Confirm**." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:104 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:102 msgid "You have finished uninstalling your application." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:107 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:105 msgid "Good to know" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:109 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:107 msgid "" "**Uninstalling apps, managing users, etc. is up to you**: no one else can " "know if your business flow is broken better than you. If we were to " @@ -762,7 +760,7 @@ msgid "" "operations." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:115 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:113 msgid "" "**Odoo Apps have dependencies**: this means that you may need to install " "modules that you do not actively use to access some features of Odoo you " @@ -772,7 +770,7 @@ msgid "" "to work properly." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:122 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:120 msgid "" "**Always test app installation/removal on a duplicate** (or on a free trial " "database): that way you can know what other apps may be required, etc. This " diff --git a/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/general.po b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/general.po index 994785ebe..7ff9adde0 100644 --- a/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/general.po +++ b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/general.po @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" "Language-Team: Arabic (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/ar/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" @@ -752,6 +752,110 @@ msgid "" "company). You must first import the companies and then the persons." msgstr "" +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase.rst:3 +msgid "In-App Purchase" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:3 +msgid "General guide about In-App Purchase (IAP) Services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:4 +msgid "" +"In-App Purchases (IAP) gives access to additional services through Odoo. For" +" instance, it allows me to send SMS Text Messages or to send Invoices by " +"post directly from my database." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:7 +msgid "Buying Credits" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Each IAP Service relies on prepaid credits to work and has its own pricing. " +"To consult my current balance or to recharge my account, go to *Settings> " +"Odoo IAP > View my Services*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:13 +msgid "" +"If I am on Odoo Online (SAAS) and have the Enterprise version, I benefit " +"from free credits to test our IAP features." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:16 +msgid "IAP accounts" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:17 +msgid "" +"Credits to use IAP services are stored on IAP accounts, which are specific " +"to each service and database. By default, IAP accounts are common to all " +"companies, but can be restricted to specific ones by going to *Settings app " +"> Activate the Developer Mode > Technical Settings > IAP Accoun*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:23 +msgid "IAP Portal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:24 +msgid "" +"The IAP Portal is a platform regrouping my IAP Services. It is accessible " +"from *Settings app > Odoo IAP > View my Services*. From there, I can view my" +" current balance, recharge my credits, review my consumption and set a " +"reminder to when credits are low." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:30 +msgid "Get notified when credits are low" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:31 +msgid "" +"To be notified when it’s time to recharge my credits, I’ll go to my IAP " +"Portal through *Settings app> Odoo IAP > View my Services*, unfold a service" +" and mark the Receive threshold warning option. Then, I’ll provide a minimum" +" amount of credits and email addresses. Now, every time that the limit is " +"reached, an automatic reminder will be sent to by email!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:38 +msgid "IAP services available" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:39 +msgid "" +"Different services are available depending on the hosting type of your " +"Database:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:41 +msgid "" +"*Odoo Online (SAAS)*: only the IAP services provided by Odoo can be used " +"(i.e. the SMS, Snailmail, Reveal and Partner Autocomplete features);" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:43 +msgid "" +"*Odoo.sh and Odoo Enterprise (on-premise)*: both the services provided by " +"Odoo and by third-party apps can be used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:46 +msgid "Offering my own services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:47 +msgid "" +"I am more than welcome to offer my own IAP services through Odoo Apps! It is" +" the perfect opportunity to get recurring revenue for an ongoing service use" +" rather than — and possibly instead of — a sole initial purchase. Please, " +"find more information at: `In-App Purchase " +"`_" +msgstr "" + #: ../../general/odoo_basics.rst:3 msgid "Basics" msgstr "" @@ -813,14 +917,6 @@ msgid "" "users>`_" msgstr "" -#: ../../general/odoo_basics/add_user.rst:47 -msgid "Todo" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../general/odoo_basics/add_user.rst:47 -msgid "Add link to How to add companies" -msgstr "" - #: ../../general/odoo_basics/choose_language.rst:3 msgid "Manage Odoo in your own language" msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po index 9d43ad59f..3864cdab3 100644 --- a/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po +++ b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" "Language-Team: Arabic (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/ar/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" @@ -21,6 +21,94 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Helpdesk" msgstr "" +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:3 +msgid "" +"After sales features: refund, coupon, return, repair, onsite interventions" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:4 +msgid "" +"As my business grows, having the tools to allow my helpdesk team to record, " +"track and manage issues raised easy and efficiently, is key. Odoo’s Helpdesk" +" app allows me to generate credit notes, return products, grant coupons, do " +"repairs and plan onsite interventions from a ticket’s page." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:7 +msgid "Set up the After Sales services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Go to *Configuration > Helpdesk Teams* and enable the After Sales options: " +"*Refunds, Returns, Coupons, Repairs and Onsite Interventions*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:14 +msgid "Generate credit notes from tickets" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:15 +msgid "" +"I can use a credit note to refund a customer or adjust the amount due. For " +"that, I’ll simply go to my ticket page, click on *Refund* and select the " +"corresponding *Invoice*. Clicking on *Reverse* the credit note will be " +"generated, and I can *Post* it while still being in the *Helpdesk* app." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:22 +msgid "Allow product returns from tickets" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:23 +msgid "" +"The process of a product return from my customer back to my warehouse will " +"be taken into action when, at the ticket page, I choose the option *Return*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:29 +msgid "Grant coupons from tickets" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:30 +msgid "" +"First, be sure to have your *Coupon Program* planned at the *Sales or " +"Website* app. At the *Helpdesk* app, I will open my ticket and click on " +"*Coupon*, choose the *Coupon Program > Generate*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:37 +msgid "Repairs from tickets" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:38 +msgid "" +"Clicking on *Repair* option, on my ticket page, a new repair order form will" +" be shown. Fill up the rest of the fields as needed and choose the next " +"step." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:44 +msgid "Plan onsite interventions from tickets" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:45 +msgid "" +"At the ticket page, I can now configure my onsite interventions exactly the " +"same way I would do being on the *Field Service* app, clicking on *Plan " +"Intervention*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:52 +msgid "" +"`Coupons `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:53 +msgid ":doc:`../manufacturing/repair/repair`" +msgstr "" + #: ../../helpdesk/getting_started.rst:3 msgid "Get started with Odoo Helpdesk" msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po index ef1058918..5ba014d76 100644 --- a/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po +++ b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po @@ -3,13 +3,20 @@ # This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # +# Translators: +# Amer Hazaa , 2019 +# Mustafa Rawi , 2019 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Osoul , 2019 +# #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Osoul , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Arabic (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/ar/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -17,7 +24,7 @@ msgstr "" "Language: ar\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=6; plural=n==0 ? 0 : n==1 ? 1 : n==2 ? 2 : n%100>=3 && n%100<=10 ? 3 : n%100>=11 && n%100<=99 ? 4 : 5;\n" -#: ../../inventory.rst:5 ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:64 +#: ../../inventory.rst:5 msgid "Inventory" msgstr "" @@ -30,277 +37,361 @@ msgid "Daily Operations" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:3 -msgid "How to do an inventory adjustment with barcodes?" +msgid "Process to an Inventory Adjustment with Barcodes" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:5 -msgid "From the Barcode application:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:7 -msgid "Click on **Inventory**" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:12 msgid "" -"Scan all the products (if you have 5 identical articles, scan it 5 times, or" -" use the keyboard to set the quantity)." +"To process an inventory adjustment by using barcodes, you first need to open" +" the *Barcode* app. Then, from the application, click on *Inventory " +"Adjustments*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:13 +msgid "" +"If you want to fully work with barcodes, you can download the sheet " +"*Commands for Inventory*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:16 msgid "" -"If you manage multiple locations, scan the location before scanning the " -"products. Eg. scan a shelf's barcode ; scan each product on the shelf ; " -"repeat for each shelf in the wharehouse." +"Once you have clicked on *Inventory Adjustments*, Odoo will automatically " +"create one. Note that, if you work with multi-location, you first need to " +"specify in which location the inventory adjustment takes place." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:20 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:24 msgid "" -"When you've scanned all the items of the location, validate the inventory " -"manually or by scanning the **Validate** barcode." +"If you don’t work with multi-location, you will be able to scan the " +"different products you want to include in the inventory adjustment." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:3 -msgid "How to process delivery orders?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:31 msgid "" -"There are two approaches to process delivery orders: you can either work on " -"printed documents (and scan lines on the documents), or on a screen (and " -"scan products directly)." +"If you have 5 identical articles, scan it 5 times or use the keyboard to set" +" the quantity." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:10 -msgid "Process printed delivery orders:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:12 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:34 msgid "" -"Print delivery orders of the day by selecting all documents from the **To " -"Do** list and print **Picking Operations** from the top menu." +"Besides using the barcode scanner, you can also manually add a product if " +"necessary. To do so, click on *Add Product* and fill the information in " +"manually." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:44 msgid "" -"Once you start processing your delivery orders, **scan the barcode** on the " -"top-right corner of the document to load the right record on the screen." +"When you have scanned all the items of the location, validate the inventory " +"manually or scan the *Validate* barcode." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:19 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:3 +msgid "Work with Barcode Nomenclature" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:5 msgid "" -"Then, **scan the barcode** of every product, or scan the barcode of the " -"product on the picking line if the barcode on the product is not easily " -"accessible, visible or is missing." +"There are different situations in which barcode nomenclatures can be useful." +" A well-known use case is the one of a point of sales that sells products in" +" bulk. The customers will scale their products themselves and get the " +"printed barcode to stick on the product. This barcode will contain the " +"weight of the product and help compute the price accordingly." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:23 -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:24 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:13 +msgid "Create a Barcode Nomenclature" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:15 msgid "" -"Once you scanned all products, scan the **Validate** barcode action to " -"finish the operation." +"Odoo supports *Barcode Nomenclatures*, which determine the mapping and " +"interpretation of the encoded information." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:30 -msgid "Process delivery orders from a computer or mobile device:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:32 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:18 msgid "" -"Load all the delivery orders marked as **To Do**, and open the first one." +"To configure the *Barcode Nomenclature*, you need to activate the debug " +"mode. To do so, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Barcode Nomenclature*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:35 -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:33 -msgid "Pick up and scan each listed product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:37 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:22 msgid "" -"When you've picked all the items, click the **Validate** button or scan the " -"**Validate barcode** action to finish the Operation." +"You can create a barcode nomenclature from there, and then add a line to " +"create your first rule." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:40 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:28 msgid "" -"Move to the next delivery order to process by clicking on the top-right " -"right **arrow** or scanning the **Pager-Next** barcode action." +"The first step is to specify the *rule name*, for example, *Weight Barcode* " +"with 3 decimals. Then, you have to specify the type for barcode " +"nomenclature, like the *Weighted Product*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:35 +msgid "" +"The *Barcode Pattern* is a regular expression that defines the structure of " +"the barcode. In this example, 21 defines the products on which the rule will" +" be applied. Those are the numbers by which the product barcode should " +"start. The 5 “dots” are the following numbers of the product barcode and are" +" there to identify the product in question. The “N” defines a number and the" +" “D” defines the decimals." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:43 +msgid "" +"You can define different rules and order their priority thanks to the " +"sequence. The first rule that matches the scanned barcode will then be " +"applied." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:48 +msgid "Configure your Product" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:50 +msgid "The barcode of the product should start by “21”;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:52 +msgid "" +"The 5 “dots” are the other numbers of your product barcode, allowing to " +"identify the product;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:54 +msgid "" +"The barcode should contain 0’s when you did defined D’s or N’s. In our case," +" we need to set 5 zeros because we condigures “21………{NNDDD}”;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:56 +msgid "" +"In EAN-13, the last number is a check number. Use an EAN13 generator to know" +" which digit it should be in your case." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:61 +msgid "" +"In case you weight 1,5kg of pasta, the balance will print you the following " +"barcode: *2112345015001*. If you scan this barcode in your PoS, or when " +"receiving the products in your barcode app, Odoo will automatically create a" +" new line for the product, for a quantity of 1,5kg." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:67 +msgid "" +"For the point of sale, a price depending on the quantity will also be " +"computed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:74 +msgid "Rule Types" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:76 +msgid "" +"**Priced Product**: it allows you to identify the product and specify its " +"price, used in PoS;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:78 +msgid "" +"**Discounted Product**: it allows you to create one barcode per applied " +"discount. Then, you can scan your product in the PoS and apply discounts on " +"the product by scanning the discount barcode;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:80 +msgid "" +"**Weighted Product**: it allows you to identify the product and specify its " +"weight, used in both PoS and in Inventory;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:82 +msgid "" +"**Client**: it allows you to identify the customer, for example used with " +"loyalty program;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:84 +msgid "" +"**Cashier**: it allows you to identify the cashier when entering the PoS;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:86 +msgid "" +"**Location**: it allows you to identify the location on a transfer when " +"multi-location is activated;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:88 +msgid "" +"**Package**: it allows you to identify packages on a transfer when packages " +"are activated;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:90 +msgid "" +"**Lot**: it allows you to identify the lot number of a product on a " +"transfer;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:92 +msgid "" +"**Credit Card**: it doesn’t need manual modification, exists for data from " +"the Mercury module;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:94 +msgid "" +"**Unit Product**: it allows you to identify a product for both PoS and " +"Transfers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:97 +msgid "" +"When the barcode pattern contains .*, it means that it can contain any " +"number of characters. Those characters can be any number." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:3 -msgid "How to do an internal transfer?" +msgid "Process to Transfers" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:5 -msgid "In Odoo, there are two types of internal transfers:" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:6 +msgid "Simple Transfers" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:7 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:8 msgid "" -"Those initiated automatically by the system (for example, a quality control)" +"To process a transfer from the *Barcode* app, the first step is to go to " +"*Operations*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:10 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:14 msgid "" -"Those created by a worker (for example, through the internal transfer area " -"of the dashboard)." +"Then, you have the choice to either enter an existing transfer, by going to " +"the corresponding operation type and manually selecting the one you want to " +"enter, or by scanning the barcode of the transfer." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:13 -msgid "To make an Internal Transfer:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:15 -msgid "From the home of the barcode application, scan the **source location**" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:17 -msgid "Pick up and **scan the products**" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:19 -msgid "Scan the **destination location**" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:21 -msgid "**Validate** the transfer to finish it" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:3 -msgid "How to handle lots and serial numbers with barcodes?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:24 msgid "" -"Lots Numbers can be encoded from incoming shipments, internal moves and " -"outgoing deliveries:" +"From there, you will be able to scan the products that are part of the " +"existing transfer and/or add new products to this transfer. Once all the " +"products have been scanned, you can validate the transfer to proceed with " +"the stock moves." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:33 msgid "" -"In the barcode interface, **scan** the products you want create a lot from" +"If you have different storage locations in your warehouse, you can add " +"additional steps for the different operation types." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:10 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:37 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:50 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:45 +msgid "Receipts" +msgstr "الإيصالات" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:39 msgid "" -"If this product should be manage by lots, a window opens to help you scan " -"the lots/serial numbers" +"When receiving a product in stock, you need to scan its barcode in order to " +"identify it in the system. Once done, you can either make it enter the main " +"location of the transfer, for example WH/Stock, or scan a location barcode " +"to make it enter a sub-location of the main location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:48 msgid "" -"**Scan** a lot barcode, **type** one manually or **leave empty** to generate" -" one automatically" +"If you want the product to enter WH/Stock in our example, you can simply " +"scan the next product." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:16 -msgid "Click or scan **Validate** once you are done" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:52 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery.rst:3 +msgid "Delivery Orders" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:18 -msgid "What is the difference between **Lots** and **Serial Numbers**?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:20 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:54 msgid "" -"**Lot** numbers are attributed to several identical products, so each time " -"you scan a lot number, Odoo will add one on the product count." +"When delivering a product, you have to scan the source location if it is " +"different than the one initially set on the transfer. Then, you can start " +"scanning the products that are delivered from this specific location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:24 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:62 msgid "" -"On the opposite, a **serial number** is unique, and represented by only one " -"barcode, sticked on only one item. This means that Odoo won't accept " -"scanning the same serial number more than once per operation." +"Once the different products have been scanned, you have the possibility to " +"scan another location, such as WH/Stock, and another page will be added to " +"your delivery order. You can move from one to the other thanks to the " +"*Previous* and *Next* buttons." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:32 -msgid "Here, we configured **Lu - Petit Beukelaer** tracking by lots." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:37 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:70 msgid "" -"Scan a product from this incoming shipment, then scan the lot number of each" -" product (you can also use the keyboard)." +"Now, you can validate your transfer. To do so, click on *Next* until you " +"reach the last page of the transfer. There, you will be able to validate it." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:43 -msgid "Click save/scan **Validate** and you are done." -msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:78 +msgid "Internal Transfers" +msgstr "تحركات داخلية" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:3 -msgid "How to process incoming receipts?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:80 msgid "" -"There are two approaches to process incoming receipts: you can either work " -"on printed documents (and scan lines on the documents), or on a screen (and " -"scan products directly)." +"When realizing an internal transfer with multi-location, you first have to " +"scan the source location of the product. Then, you can scan the product in " +"itself, before having to scan the barcode of the destination location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:10 -msgid "Process printed incoming receipts:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:12 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:85 msgid "" -"Print incoming receipts of the day by selecting all documents from the **To " -"Receive** list and print **Picking Operations** from the top menu." +"If the source and destination of the internal transfers are already correct," +" you don’t need to scan them." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:16 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:89 +msgid "Transfers with Tracked Products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:91 msgid "" -"Once you start processing your incoming receipts, scan the barcode on the " -"top-right corner of the document to load the right record on the screen." +"If you work with products tracked by lot/serial numbers, you have two ways " +"of working:" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:20 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:94 msgid "" -"Then, scan the barcode of every product, or scan the barcode of the product " -"on the picking line if the barcode on the product is not easily accessible, " -"visible or is missing." +"If you work with serial/lot numbers taking all products into consideration, " +"you can scan the barcode of the lot/serial number and Odoo will increase the" +" quantity of the product, setting its lot/serial number." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:28 -msgid "Process incoming receipts from a computer or mobile device:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:30 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:99 msgid "" -"Load all the incoming receipts marked as **To Receive**, and open the first " -"one." +"If you have the same lot/serial number for different products, you can work " +"by scanning the product barcode first, and then the barcode of the " +"lot/serial number." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:35 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:3 +msgid "Create a Transfer from Scratch" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:5 msgid "" -"When you've picked all the items, click the **Validate** button or scan the " -"**Validate** barcode action to finish the Operation." +"To create a transfer from the *Barcode* application, you first need to print" +" the operation type barcodes. To do so, you can download the *Stock barcode " +"sheet* from the home page of the app." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:12 msgid "" -"Move to the next incoming receipt to process by clicking on the top-right " -"right **arrow** or scanning the **Pager-Next** barcode action." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:42 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:137 -msgid "Example" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:44 -msgid "Open operation interface." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:49 -msgid "Scan." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:54 -msgid "" -"The picking appears. Scan items and/or fill in informations using the mouse " -"and keyboard." +"Once done, you can scan the one for which you want to create a new document." +" Then, an empty document will be created and you will be able to scan your " +"products to populate it." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup.rst:3 @@ -388,12 +479,12 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:3 -msgid "How to activate the barcodes in Odoo?" +msgid "Activate the Barcodes in Odoo" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:5 msgid "" -"The barcode scanning features can save you a lot of the time usually lost " +"The barcode scanning features can save you a lot of time usually lost " "switching between the keyboard, the mouse and the scanner. Properly " "attributing barcodes to products, pickings locations, etc. allows you to " "work more efficiently by controlling the software almost exclusively with " @@ -401,284 +492,31 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:12 -msgid "Set products barcodes" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:17 -msgid "" -"In order to fill a picking or to perform an inventory, you need to make sure" -" that your products are encoded in Odoo along with their barcodes. If this " -"is not already done, you can fill in the products barcodes through a handy " -"interface. Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings` " -"and click :menuselection:`Operations --> Barcode Scanner`. Click Save, and " -"go back into the previous screen to click Configure Product Barcodes. This " -"interface can also be accessed via the planner." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:28 -msgid "" -"Product variants: be careful to add barcodes directly on the variant, and " -"not the template product (otherwise you won't be able to differentiate " -"them)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:33 -msgid "Set locations barcodes" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:38 -msgid "" -"If you manage multiple locations, you will find useful to attribute a " -"barcode to each location and stick it on the location. You can configure the" -" locations barcodes in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> " -"Warehouse Management --> Locations`. There is button in the **Print** menu " -"that you can use to print the locations names and barcodes. There are 4 " -"barcodes per page, arranged in a way that is convenient to print on sticker " -"paper." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:47 -msgid "" -"Example of location naming: **warehouse short name** - **location short " -"name** - (**Corridor X** - **Shelf Y** - **Height Z**) Example: A032-025-133" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:54 -msgid "Barcode formats" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:56 -msgid "" -"Most retail products use EAN-13 barcodes. They cannot be made up without " -"proper authorization: you must pay the International Article Numbering " -"Association a fee in exchange for an EAN code sequence (that's why no two " -"products in a store will ever have the same EAN code)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:61 -msgid "" -"Still, as Odoo supports any string as a barcode, so you can always define " -"your own barcode format for internal use." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management.rst:3 -msgid "Warehouse Management" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment.rst:3 -msgid "Inventory Adjustment" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:3 -msgid "How to make the initial inventory?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:5 -msgid "" -"One of the most important feature in an warehouse management software is to " -"keep the inventory right." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Once your products have been defined, it is time to make your initial " -"inventory. You will reflect reality by inventorying the right quantities in " -"the right locations." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:55 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:34 -msgid "Product Configuration" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:15 -msgid "" -"In the Inventory module, open the :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> " -"Products`, then click on **Create** to create a new product. Configure the " -"product type so that it is **Stockable** and not a consumable." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:23 -msgid "Start the initial inventory" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:26 -msgid "Update the product quantity for one product" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:28 -msgid "" -"In the product you just created, you can see in the upper tiles that we have" -" 0 product On Hand. Click on the **Update qty on Hand** button." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:31 -msgid "" -"A new window opens. In the **New Quantity on Hand** field, type the quantity" -" of product you currently hold in stock, then click on **Apply**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:39 -msgid "" -"if you are using multiple locations for your warehouse, you will be able to " -"set the location of your product from this screen." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:42 -msgid "" -"You can now see from the On Hand tab that the quantity has been updated." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:47 -msgid "" -"Now, if you check the **Inventory Adjustments** in the **Inventory Control**" -" menu, you will see that a new line named \"INV: (name of your product)\" " -"has automatically been created and validated by the system." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:55 -msgid "Multiple products at once" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:57 -msgid "" -"Create all the products for which you want to follow the stock (as stockable" -" products). Once the required products in stock have been defined, use an " -"initial inventory operation to put the current quantities into the system by" -" location. Go to :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Inventory " -"Adjustments` to start your initial inventory." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:63 -msgid "" -"Give it a name (for example Initial Inventory) and select the stock location" -" of your inventory. Note that when you select a parent location (such as " -"Stock, which might be split into sub locations), you can also select the sub" -" (or child) locations." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:71 -msgid "" -"You can choose between making an inventory for all products, for a few or " -"only for one. In this case, we choose the **All products** option." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:79 -msgid "" -"If you need your stock valuation to be done in a different period than the " -"one that will be selected by default according to the inventory end date, " -"enter the corresponding accounting period in the Force Valuation Period " -"field. The accounting module needs to be installed." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:84 -msgid "" -"Click the **Start Inventory** button. Depending on the type of inventory you" -" have chosen (all products or selected ones) you might have to add products " -"manually by clicking on **Add an item**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:88 -msgid "" -"Add the **Real Quantity** that you have in your stock for each product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:92 -msgid "" -"additional information will be available according to the options you " -"activated (multi-locations, serial number, consignee stocks)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:98 -msgid "" -"Click the **Validate Inventory** button to confirm the inventory and post " -"it." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:102 -msgid "Reporting" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:104 -msgid "" -"To check the current stock, go to :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> " -"Products`, and click on the **list button**:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:3 -msgid "How to choose between minimum stock rule and make to order?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:5 -msgid "" -"**Minimum Stock rules** and **Make to Order** have similar consequences but " -"different rules. They should be used depending on your manufacturing and " -"delivery strategies." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:10 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:10 -msgid "Terminology" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:13 -msgid "Minimum stock rule" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:15 -msgid "" -"**Minimum Stock** rules are used to ensure that you always have the minimum " -"amount of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or " -"answer to your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its" -" minimum the system will automatically generate a procurement with the " -"quantity needed to reach the maximum stock level." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:22 -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:56 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:22 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:58 -msgid "Make to Order" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:24 -msgid "" -"The **Make to Order** function will trigger a **Purchase Order** of the " -"amount of the **Sales Order** related to the product. The system will " -"**not** check the current stock valuation. This means that a draft purchase " -"order will be generated regardless of the quantity on hand of the product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:30 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:12 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:37 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:34 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:29 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:9 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:50 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:28 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:21 -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:22 -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:25 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:159 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:164 -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:21 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:18 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:19 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:30 +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:16 +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:14 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:10 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:25 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:29 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:22 #: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:17 -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:23 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:10 #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:18 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:30 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:17 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:114 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:16 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:15 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:13 @@ -687,190 +525,71 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Configuration" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:33 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:33 -msgid "Minimum stock rules" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:35 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:14 msgid "" -"The Minimum Stock Rules configuration is available through the menu " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory Control --> Reordering Rule` in the " -"drop down menu. There, click on **Create** to set minimum and maximum stock " -"values for a given product." +"To use this feature, you first need to activate the *Barcode* functionality " +"via *Inventory > Settings > Barcode Scanner*. Once you have ticked the " +"feature, you can hit save." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Active" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:22 +msgid "Set Product Barcodes" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:24 msgid "" -"If the active field is set to False, it will allow you to hide the " -"orderpoint without removing it." +"You can easily assign barcodes to your different products via the " +"*Inventory* app. To do so, go to *Settings > Configure Products Barcodes*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Product Unit of Measure" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Default unit of measure used for all stock operations." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Procurement Group" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:31 msgid "" -"Moves created through this orderpoint will be put in this procurement group." -" If none is given, the moves generated by stock rules will be grouped into " -"one big picking." +"Then, you have the possibility to assign barcodes to your products directly " +"at creation on the product form." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Minimum Quantity" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:41 msgid "" -"When the virtual stock goes below the Min Quantity specified for this field," -" Odoo generates a procurement to bring the forecasted quantity to the Max " -"Quantity." +"Be careful to add barcodes directly on the product variants and not on the " +"template product. Otherwise, you won’t be able to differentiate them." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Maximum Quantity" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:46 +msgid "Set Locations Barcodes" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:48 msgid "" -"When the virtual stock goes below the Min Quantity, Odoo generates a " -"procurement to bring the forecasted quantity to the Quantity specified as " -"Max Quantity." +"If you manage multiple locations, you will find useful to attribute a " +"barcode to each location and stick it on the location. You can configure the" +" locations barcodes in *Inventory > Configuration > Locations*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Quantity Multiple" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:59 msgid "" -"The procurement quantity will be rounded up to this multiple. If it is 0, " -"the exact quantity will be used." +"You can easily print the barcode you allocate to the locations via the " +"*Print* menu." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Lead Time" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:63 +msgid "Barcode Formats" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:65 msgid "" -"Number of days after the orderpoint is triggered to receive the products or " -"to order to the vendor" +"Most retail products use EAN-13 barcodes. They cannot be made up without " +"proper authorization. You must pay the International Article Numbering " +"Association a fee in exchange for an EAN code sequence." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:45 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:69 msgid "" -"Then, click on your product to access the related product form and, on the " -"**Inventory submenu**, do not forget to select a supplier." +"Still, as Odoo supports any string as a barcode, you can always define your " +"own barcode format for internal use." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:52 -msgid "" -"Don't forget to select the right product type in the product form. A " -"consumable can not be stocked and will thus not be accounted for in the " -"stock valuation." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:58 -msgid "" -"The Make to Order configuration is available on your product form through " -"your :menuselection:`Inventory module --> Inventory control --> Products` " -"(or any other module where products are available)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:62 -msgid "On the product form, under **Inventory**, click on **Make To Order**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:68 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:70 -msgid "Choice between the two options" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:70 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:72 -msgid "" -"The choice between the two options is thus dependent of your inventory " -"strategy. If you prefer to have a buffer and always have at least a minimum " -"amount, the minimum stock rule should be used. If you want to reorder your " -"stocks only if your sale is confirmed it is better to use the Make to Order." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:3 -msgid "TaKing stock from different warehouses" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:5 -msgid "" -"When you plan to deliver a customer, you don’t know in advance if the " -"products will come from Warehouse A or Warehouse B. You may, in some cases, " -"need to take stock from different warehouses. With *Odoo*, you can configure" -" this by using the concept of virtual warehouses. Let us show you how to set" -" those virtual warehouses." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:12 -msgid "Set up virtual warehouses" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:14 -msgid "" -"Let’s say you have two warehouses: Warehouse A and Warehouse B. Create a new" -" warehouse, that will be a virtual one. It will allow you to take the stock " -"from A or B. To do so, go to your inventory app settings and enable the " -"multi-warehouses feature. Then, go to the warehouses menu and click on " -"create." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:24 -msgid "" -"The *Storage Location* feature will be automatically enabled. Good news, " -"because you will need it later in the process." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:27 -msgid "" -"Now, you have to make sure that the main stock locations of warehouse A and " -"warehouse B are children locations of the main stock location of warehouse A" -" + B. Go to the locations menu, and edit the main location of your two " -"warehouses. Then, change their parent location to main location of warehouse" -" A+B." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:37 -msgid "Sell a product from the virtual warehouse" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:39 -msgid "" -"Let’s say you have two products, one stored in warehouse A and one stored in" -" warehouse B. Now, you can create a new quotation for one of each product. " -"Go to other information and choose Warehouse A+B in the shipping " -"information." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:47 -msgid "" -"Once you have done it, you can convert it to a sales order. Then, a delivery" -" order will be automatically generated, with a product reserved in warehouse" -" A and one in warehouse B." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery.rst:3 -msgid "Delivery Orders" +#: ../../inventory/management.rst:3 +msgid "Warehouse Management" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:3 @@ -880,23 +599,13 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:6 ../../inventory/overview.rst:3 -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/overview.rst:3 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:6 @@ -995,12 +704,11 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:3 -msgid "" -"How to send products to customers directly from suppliers (drop-shipping)?" +msgid "Send Products to Customers Directly from Suppliers (Drop-shipping)" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:6 -msgid "What is drop-shipping?" +msgid "What is Drop-Shipping?" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:8 @@ -1008,138 +716,139 @@ msgid "" "Drop-Shipping is a system that allows orders taken from your store to be " "shipped straight from your supplier to your customer. On a usual delivery " "system, products are sent from your supplier to your warehouse to be put in " -"stock, and then shipped to your customers after ordering. With drop-" -"shipping, no item is stocked. When a customer places an order in your shop, " -"the item is delivered straight from the supplier to the customer. Therefore," -" the product doesn't need to get through your warehouse." +"stock and then shipped to your customers after ordering." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:18 -msgid "Points to be considered while implementing drop-shipping" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:13 +msgid "" +"With drop-shipping, no item is stocked. When a customer places an order in " +"your shop, the item is delivered straight from the supplier to the customer." +" Therefore, the product doesn't need to get through your warehouse." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:20 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:19 +msgid "Points to be Considered while Implementing Drop-Shipping" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:24 msgid "" "Use drop-shipping only for the products you can't or don't want to keep in " -"stock. One reason is that you'll always make smaller margins on items that " -"are drop-shipped, so you should keep it only for items that take up a lot of" -" space in your warehouse." +"stock." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:22 msgid "" -"Drop-shipping is best for niche products. Chances are that products that are" -" in high demand are being offered by large suppliers at a fraction of the " -"price you'll be able to charge, so using a more costly shipping method won't" -" be financially rewarding. But if your product is unique, then it makes " -"sense!" +"One reason is that you'll always make smaller margins on items that are " +"drop-shipped, so you should keep it only for items that take up a lot of " +"space in your warehouse." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:31 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:30 +msgid "Drop-shipping is best for niche products." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:27 msgid "" -"To protect your customers from bad experiences, test drop-shipping companies" -" for yourself beforehand and list the best ones." +"Chances are that products that are in high demand are being offered by large" +" suppliers at a fraction of the price you'll be able to charge, so using a " +"more costly shipping method won't be financially rewarding. But if your " +"product is unique, then it makes sense!" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:34 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:33 +msgid "To protect your customers from bad experiences." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:33 msgid "" -"Make sure time is not against you. Drop-shipping should take a reasonable " -"amount of time and surely not more than it would have taken you to handle it" -" all by yourself. It's also nice to be able to provide your customers with a" -" tracking number." +"Test drop-shipping companies for yourself beforehand and list the best ones." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:39 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:37 +msgid "Make sure time is not against you." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:36 msgid "" -"Items have to be available from your supplier. It's good to know if the " -"product you're selling is available upstream. If you don't have that " -"information, inform your customers that you don't hold the item in stock and" -" that it's subject to availability from a third party." +"Drop-shipping should take a reasonable amount of time and surely not more " +"than it would have taken you to handle it all by yourself. It's also nice to" +" be able to provide your customers with a tracking number." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:46 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:44 +msgid "Items have to be available from your supplier." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:40 msgid "" -"For more information and insights on Drop-shipping, read our blog on `What " -"is drop-shipping and how to use it `__." +"It's good to know if the product you're selling is available upstream. If " +"you don't have that information, inform your customers that you don't hold " +"the item in stock and that it's subject to availability from a third party." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:50 -msgid "Configuring drop-shipping" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:47 +msgid "" +"For more information and insights about Drop-Shipping, you can read our " +"blog: `*What is drop-shipping and how to use it* `__." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:52 +msgid "Configure Drop-Shipping" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:54 msgid "" -"Open the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`. Go " -"to **Location & Warehouse**, locate the **Dropshipping** option and tick the" -" box **Allow suppliers to deliver directly to your customers**. Then, click " -"on **Apply**." +"Activate the functionality in the *Purchase* application by going to " +"*Configuration > Settings*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:60 msgid "" -"Then go to the menu :menuselection:`Sales --> Configuration --> Settings`. " -"Locate **Order Routing** and tick the box **Choose specific routes on sales " -"order lines (advanced)**. Click on **Apply**." +"Then, go to the *Inventory* app, in *Configuration > Settings* to activate " +"the *Multi-Step Routes* feature. It will allow you to make the *Route* field" +" appear on the sale order lines to specify you send a product via drop-" +"shipping." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:67 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:68 msgid "" -"Now, open the menu :menuselection:`Sales --> Sales --> Products`. Add a " -"supplier to the products you want to dropship." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:74 -msgid "How to send products from the suppliers directly to the customers" +"Now, in the *Sales* app, go to *Products > Products*. Select the product you" +" would like to drop-ship and add a vendor pricelist which contains the right" +" supplier, via the purchase tab." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:76 -msgid "" -"Create a **Sales Order** and specify on a sales order line for your products" -" that the route is **Dropshipping**." +msgid "Send Products from the Suppliers Directly to the Customers" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:82 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:78 msgid "" -"Open the menu :menuselection:`Purchases --> Purchases --> Requests for " -"Quotation`. The draft purchase order is automatically created from the " -"procurement with the drop-shipping route. Once the order is confirmed, you " -"will see that one shipment has been created." +"Create a *Sales Order* and add the product on which you just set the vendor." +" Add the *Route* field thanks to the widget on the right of the sale order " +"line. Now, you are able to specify that your products’ route is *Drop-" +"Shipping*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:90 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:89 msgid "" -"To confirm the sending from the vendor to the customer, go back to " -"**Inventory** app. On the dashboard, click on **# TO RECEIVE** on the " -"dropship card." +"Once the sale order is confirmed, Odoo automatically generates a *Request " +"for Quotation* for the supplier who will proceed to the drop-shipping. You " +"can find it in the *Purchase* app, with the sale order as *Source Document*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:97 msgid "" -"It will open the list of drop-shipping transfers. Validate the transfer once" -" it has been done. The items will be directly delivered from the partner to " -"the customer without transiting to your warehouse." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:103 -msgid ":doc:`inventory_flow`" +"Once this *Purchase Order* is confirmed, a *Receipt Order* is created and " +"linked to it. The source location is the vendor location and the destination" +" location is the customer location. Then, the product won’t go through your " +"own stock when you validate the dropship document." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:105 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:63 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:159 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:129 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:70 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:179 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:124 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:222 -msgid "Todo" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:106 msgid "" -"Add link to this section when available * How to analyse the performance of " -"my vendors?" +"You can also easily access the dropship document directly from your " +"inventory dashboard." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:3 @@ -1274,173 +983,137 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:3 -msgid "How to process delivery orders in one step (shipping)?" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:3 +msgid "Process a Receipt in one step (Receipt)" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:5 msgid "" -"When an order goes to the shipping department for final delivery, Odoo is " -"set up by default to utilize a one-step operation: once all goods are " -"available, they are able to be shipped in a single delivery order." +"There is no configuration needed to receive in one step. The default " +"incoming shipments are configured to be directly received from the vendors " +"to the stock." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:9 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:9 msgid "" -"There is no configuration needed. The default outgoing shipments are " -"configured to be directly delivered from the stock." +"However, if advanced routes have been activated and you set another incoming" +" configuration on your warehouse, you can set it back to the one-step " +"receipt configuration. To do so, go to *Configuration > Warehouses* and edit" +" the warehouse in question." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:18 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:14 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:14 msgid "" -"However, if **advance routes** is activated and you set another shipping " -"configuration on your warehouse, you can set it back to the one-step " -"delivery configuration. Go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouses` " -"and edit the concerned warehouse." +"Set the *Incoming Shipments* option to *Receive goods directly (1 step)*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:21 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:21 +msgid "Create a Purchase Order" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:23 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:23 msgid "" -"Set the outgoing shippings the option to **Ship directly from stock (Ship " -"Only)**" +"To create a *Request for Quotation*, go to the *Purchase* application and " +"click on *Create*. Then, add some storable products to receive and confirm " +"the *RfQ*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:30 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:68 -msgid "Create a Sales Order" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:32 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:27 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:27 msgid "" -"Create a sales order (From quotation to sales order) with some products to " -"deliver." +"Notice that, now, we see 1 receipt associated with the purchase order you " +"just created. If you click on the button, you will see your receipt order." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:35 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:35 +msgid "Process a Receipt" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:37 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:37 msgid "" -"Notice that we now see ``1`` delivery associated with this sales order in " -"the **stat button** above the sales order." +"You can also fin the receipt directly from the *Inventory* app. When on the " +"dashboard, you can click the *1 TO PROCESS* button under the *Receipts* " +"Kanban card. Then, you will see your receipt." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:41 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:44 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:44 msgid "" -"If you click on the **1 Delivery** stat button, you should now see your " -"picking." +"Now, enter the picking that you want to process. You will be able to click " +"on *Validate* to complete the move directly as products coming from " +"suppliers are considered as being always available." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:45 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:99 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:88 -msgid "Process a Delivery" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:47 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:143 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:113 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:51 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:51 msgid "" -"Go to **Inventory** and click on the **# TO DO** link under the **Delivery " -"Orders** kanban card." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:53 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:110 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:130 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:149 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:99 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:119 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:99 -msgid "Click on the picking that you want to process." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:55 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Output** to the " -"**customer**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:58 -msgid "" -"This has completed the **Shipping Step** and the WH/OUT should now show " -"**Done** in the status column at the top of the page, which means the " -"product has been shipped to the customer." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:64 -msgid "" -"Ajouter un lien vers ces pages quand elles existeront - Process Overview: " -"From sales orders to delivery orders" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:67 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:163 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:133 -msgid "Process Overview: From purchase orders to receptions" +"Once you *Validate* the receipt, the products leave the *Supplier Location* " +"to enter your *WH/Stock Location*. You can easily see that the receipt took " +"place thanks to the status of the document, which is now *Done*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:3 -msgid "How can you change the packaging type for your sale order?" +msgid "Deliver Products in Packages" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:5 msgid "" -"Odoo gives you the possibility to change the default packaging type and " -"adapt the packaging the way you want it, depending on the weight of the " -"order." +"In Odoo, you have the possibility to deliver your products in different " +"packages, depending on the volume and or weight of your products." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:11 msgid "" -"In the **Inventory** module, Go to **Configuration** and then click on " -"**Settings**." +"First, you need to activate the *Delivery Packages* feature in the " +"*Inventory app > Configuration > Settings*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:18 +msgid "Proceed to a Delivery" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:20 msgid "" -"In :menuselection:`Traceability --> Packages`, flag **Record packages used " -"on packing : pallets, boxes,...**" +"Now, you can create a planned delivery with some products in it. You will " +"have the possibility to create new packages and assign them to the stock " +"move lines." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:24 -msgid "*Sale process*" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:26 -msgid "In the **Sales** module, go to **Sales** and click on **Sale Order**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:28 -msgid "Create your new Sale Order, and **Confirm the Sale**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:33 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:27 msgid "" -"Once you've confirmed the Sale, you need to click on **Delivery**, to be " -"redirected to the Delivery order." +"Then, you can define the package type from this window. Once the delivery " +"order is validated, you can retrieve which products have been included in " +"the package." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:36 -msgid "Click on **Edit**, and you can now change the packaging." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:41 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:34 msgid "" -"In the **Operations** tab, in the last column, change the **0** and put the " -"number of products that you want to pack together. Then click on **Put in " -"Pack**." +"A button will appear at the delivery stage, allowing you to find all the " +"packages which were part of the delivery order." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:48 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:44 +msgid "Use the Put in Pack button" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:46 msgid "" -"Choose the type of packaging that you want. You can also see that the weight" -" has been adapted to your package, and you can change it manually if you " -"want it to be more precise. Then click on **Save**." +"Another way to put products in packs is to use the *Put in Pack* button. It " +"will automatically assign a pack to the number of products which is set as " +"*Done* and duplicate the stock move line if necessary." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:52 -msgid "Repeat the operation until all the products are put in pack." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:54 -msgid "Finally, click on **Validate** to confirm the delivery." +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Then, you will be able to update the different packages created this way, " +"directly via the *Packages* button." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:3 @@ -1458,6 +1131,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:18 msgid "Configuring lead times" msgstr "" @@ -1473,6 +1147,7 @@ msgid "Configuration of the different lead times are made as follows:" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:22 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:28 msgid "At a product level" msgstr "" @@ -1532,6 +1207,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:67 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:74 msgid "At the company level" msgstr "" @@ -1593,6 +1269,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:110 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:134 msgid "At route level" msgstr "" @@ -1628,6 +1305,11 @@ msgid "" " display a warning." msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:137 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:173 +msgid "Example" +msgstr "" + #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:139 msgid "" "As an example, you may sell a car today (January 1st), that is purchased on " @@ -1658,352 +1340,288 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:3 -msgid "How to process delivery orders in three steps (pick + pack + ship)?" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:3 +msgid "Process a Receipt in three steps (Input + Quality + Stock)" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:5 msgid "" -"When an order goes to the shipping department for final delivery, Odoo is " -"set up by default on a **one-step** operation: once all goods are available," -" they can be shipped in bulk in a single delivery order. However, that " -"process may not reflect the reality and your company may require more steps " -"before shipping." +"In many companies, it is necessary to assess the received good. The goal is " +"to check that the products correspond to the quality requirements agreed " +"with the suppliers. Therefore, adding a *quality control step* in the goods " +"receipt process can become essential." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:14 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:10 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:10 msgid "" -"With the **three steps** process (**Pick + Pack + Ship**), the items are " -"transferred to a packing area, where they will be assembled by area of " -"destination, and then set to outbound trucks for final delivery to the " -"customers." +"Odoo uses routes to define exactly how you will handle the different receipt" +" steps. The configuration is done at the level of the warehouse. By default," +" the reception is a one-step process, but changing the configuration can " +"allow having 3 steps." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:19 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:15 msgid "" -"A few configuration steps are necessary in order to accomplish **Pick + Pack" -" + Ship** in Odoo. These steps create some additional locations, which by " -"default are called **Output** and **Packing Zone**. So, if your warehouse's " -"code is ``WH``, this configuration will create a location called " -"``WH/Output`` and another one called ``WH/Packing Zone``." +"The 3-steps flow is as follows: You receive the goods in an input area, then" +" transfer them into a quality area for *quality control*. When the quality " +"check has been processed, you can move the goods from QC to stock. Of " +"course, you may change the quantity and only transfer to stock the quantity " +"that is valid and decide that you will return the quantity that is not good." msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:23 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:23 +msgid "Multi-Step Routes" +msgstr "مسارات متعددة الخطوات" + #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:25 msgid "" -"Goods will move from **WH/Stock** to **WH/Packing Zone** in the first step. " -"Then move from **WH/Packing Zone** to **WH/Output**. Then finally it will be" -" delivered from **WH/Output** to its **final destination**." +"First, you will need to activate the *multi-step routes* option. Indeed, " +"routes provide a mechanism to chain different actions together. Here, we " +"will chain the picking to the shipping." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:30 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:29 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:29 msgid "" -"Check out :doc:`inventory_flow` to determine if this inventory flow is the " -"correct method for your needs." +"To activate *multi-step routes*, open the *inventory app*, and go to " +"*Configuration > Settings* and activate the option. By default, activating " +"*multi-step routes* will also activate *Storage Locations*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:37 -msgid "Install the Inventory module" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:38 +msgid "Warehouse configuration" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:39 -msgid "From the **App** menu, search and install the **Inventory** module." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:44 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:40 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:40 msgid "" -"You will also need to install the **Sales** module to be able to issue sales" -" orders." +"Now that *Multi-Step Routes* is activated, go to *Configuration > Warehouse*" +" and open the one you will use to deliver in 3 steps. Then, you can select " +"the option *Pack good, send goods in output and then deliver (3 steps)* as " +"*Outgoing Shipments*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:48 -msgid "Allow managing routes" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:48 +msgid "" +"Activating this option will lead to the creation of two new locations, " +"*Output* and *Packing Zone*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:50 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:51 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:51 msgid "" -"Odoo configures movement of delivery orders via **routes**. Routes provide a" -" mechanism to link different actions together. In this case, we will link " -"the picking step to the shipping step." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:54 -msgid "" -"To allow management of routes, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`" +"Of course, you can rename them if you want. To do so, go to *Configuration >" +" Locations* and select the one you want to rename. Change its name and hit " +"save." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:56 -msgid "" -"Under :menuselection:`Location & Warehouse --> Routes`, activate the radio " -"button **Advanced routing of products using rules**. Make sure that the " -"option **Manage several locations per warehouse** is activated as well." +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:56 +msgid "Create a Sales Order" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:64 -msgid "Configure the warehouse for Pick + Pack + Ship" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:58 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:58 +msgid "" +"In the *Sales* app, create a quotation with storable products to deliver. " +"Then, confirm it and three pickings will be created and linked to your sale " +"order." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:66 -msgid "" -"Go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouses` and edit the warehouse " -"that will be used." +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:65 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:65 +msgid "Now, click on the button. You should see three different pickings:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:67 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:67 +msgid "The first one, with a reference PICK, designates the picking process;" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:69 -msgid "" -"For outgoing shippings, set the option to **Make packages into a dedicated " -"location, bring them to the output location for shipping (Pick + Pack + " -"Ship).**" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:69 +msgid "The second one, with a reference PACK, is for the packing process;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:71 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:71 +msgid "The third one, with a reference OUT, designates the shipping process." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:77 -msgid "Create a Sale Order" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:77 +msgid "Process the picking, packing, and delivery" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:79 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:79 msgid "" -"From the **Sale** module, create a sales order with some products to " -"deliver." +"The first operation to be processed is the picking and has a *Ready* status," +" while the others are *Waiting Another Operation*. The packing will become " +"*Ready* as soon as the picking is marked as *Done*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:81 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:83 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:83 msgid "" -"Notice that we now see ``3`` transfers associated with this sales order in " -"the **stat button** above the sales order." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:87 -msgid "If you click the button, you should now see three different pickings:" +"You can enter the picking operation from here, or access it through the " +"inventory app." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:89 -msgid "The first with a reference **PICK** to designate the picking process," -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:91 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:89 msgid "" -"The second one with the reference **PACK** that is the packing process," +"Note that, if you have the product in stock, it will be automatically " +"reserved and you can validate the picking document." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:93 -msgid "The last with a reference **OUT** to designate the shipping process." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:102 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:91 -msgid "How to Process the Picking Step?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:104 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:95 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:95 msgid "" -"Ensure that you have enough product in stock and Go to **Inventory** and " -"click on the **Waiting** link under the **Pick** kanban card." +"Now that the picking has been validated, the packing order is ready to be " +"processed. Since the documents are chained, the products that have been " +"picked are automatically reserved on the packing order so you can directly " +"validate it." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:112 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:101 -msgid "Click on **Reserve** to reserve the products if they are available." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:114 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:106 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:106 msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Stock** to **WH/Packing" -" Zone**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:116 -msgid "" -"This has completed the picking Step and the **WH/PICK** should now show " -"**Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"moved from **WH/Stock** to **WH/Packing Zone** location, which makes the " -"product available for the next step (Packing)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:122 -msgid "How to Process the Packing Step?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:124 -msgid "" -"Go to **Inventory** and click on the **# TRANSFERS** link under the **Pack**" -" kanban card." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:132 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Packing Zone** to " -"**WH/Output**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:135 -msgid "" -"This has completed the packing step and the **WH/PACK** should now show " -"**Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"moved from **WH/Packing Zone** to **WH/Output location**, which makes the " -"product available for the next step (Shipping)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:141 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:111 -msgid "How to Process the Shipping Step?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:151 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Output** to the " -"**customer** (Click **Apply** to assign the quantities based on the " -"quantities listed in the **To Do** column)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:155 -msgid "" -"This has completed the shipping step and the **WH/OUT** should now show " -"**Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"shipped to the customer." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:160 -msgid "" -"Link to these sections when available - Process Overview: From sales orders" -" to delivery orders" +"Then, you can validate your packing. In doing so, the delivery order can be " +"processed. Once again, it will be ready to be validated so you can transfer " +"the products to the customer location." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:3 -msgid "How to process delivery orders in two steps (pick + ship)?" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:3 +msgid "Process a Receipt in two steps (Input + Stock)" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:8 msgid "" -"When an order goes to the shipping department for final delivery, Odoo is " -"set up by default to utilize a **one-step** operation: once all goods are " -"available, they are able to be shipped in a single delivery order. However, " -"your company's business process may have one or more steps that happen " -"before shipping. In the **two steps** process, the items in a delivery order" -" are **picked** in the warehouse and brought to an **output location** for " -"**shipping**. The goods are then shipped." +"Odoo uses routes to define exactly how you will handle the different receipt" +" steps. The configuration is done at the *Warehouse* level. By default, the " +"reception is a one-step process, but changing the configuration can allow " +"you to have 2 steps." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:16 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:13 msgid "" -"In order to accomplish a **Pick + Ship** delivery in Odoo, there are a few " -"necessary configuration steps. These steps create an additional location, " -"which by default is called **Output**. So, if your warehouse's code is " -"``WH``, this configuration will create a location called ``WH/Output``. " -"Goods will move from ``WH/Stock`` to ``WH/Output`` in the first step " -"(picking). Then, they move from ``WH/Output`` to ``WH/Customers`` (in the " -"case of sales orders) in the second step (shipping)." +"The 2 steps flow is like this: you receive the goods in an input area, then " +"transfer them to your stock. As long as the goods are not transferred in " +"your stock, they will not be available for further processing." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:32 -msgid "Allow management of routes" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:19 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:19 +msgid "Activate Multi-Step Routes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:21 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:21 +msgid "" +"The first step is to allow using *multi-step routes*. Indeed, routes provide" +" a mechanism to chain different actions together. In this case, we will " +"chain the unload step in the input area to the step entering the products in" +" stock." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:26 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:26 +msgid "" +"To allow *multi-step routes*, go to *Configuration > Settings* and activate " +"the feature. By default, activating *multi-step routes* will also activate " +"*Storage Locations*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:34 -msgid "" -"Odoo configures movement of delivery orders via the **routes**. Routes " -"provide a mechanism to chain different actions together. In this case, we " -"will chain the picking step to the shipping step." +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:34 +msgid "Configure warehouse for receipt in 2 steps" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:36 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:36 msgid "" -"To allow management of routes, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`." +"Once *multi-step routes* is activated, you can go to *Configuration > " +"Warehouse* and enter the warehouse which will use receipt in 2 steps. Then, " +"you can select the option *Receive goods in input and then stock (2 steps)* " +"for *Incoming Shipments*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:40 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:45 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:44 msgid "" -"Ensure that the radio button **Advanced routing of products using rules** is" -" checked." +"Activating this option will lead to the creation of a new *Input* location. " +"If you want to rename it, you can go to *Configuration > Locations > Select " +"Input* and update its name." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:46 -msgid "" -"Click on **Apply** at the top of the page to save changes (if you needed to " -"check the radio button above)." +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:54 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:52 +msgid "Create a purchase order" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:50 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:56 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:54 msgid "" -"If you checked option **Advanced routing of products using rules** you may " -"need to activate **Manage several locations per warehouse** if it wasn't " -"activated beforehand." +"In the *Purchase* application, you can create a *Request for Quotation* with" +" some storable products to receive from a supplier. Once the *RfQ* is " +"confirmed, the receipt picking will be created and automatically linked to " +"your purchase order." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:55 -msgid "Configure warehouse for Pick + Ship" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:65 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:62 +msgid "" +"Now, by clicking on the *1 Receipt* button, you will see the first picking " +"which will allow entering the product in the *input location*. Then, another" +" picking, an internal transfer, has been created in order to move the " +"products to *Stock*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:57 -msgid "" -"To configure a **Pick + Ship** move, go to :menuselection:`Configuration -->" -" Warehouses` and edit the warehouse that will be used." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:61 -msgid "" -"For outgoing shippings, set the option to **Bring goods to output location " -"before shipping (Pick + Ship)**" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:70 -msgid "" -"Install the **Sale** if it is not the case, and create a sales order with " -"some products to deliver." +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:71 +msgid "Process the picking and the delivery" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:73 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:70 msgid "" -"Notice that we now see ``2`` transfers associated with this sales order in " -"the **Delivery** stat button above the sales order." +"The receipt is the first one to be processed and has a *Ready* status while " +"the internal transfer will only become *Ready* once the receipt has been " +"marked as *Done*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:79 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:77 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:74 msgid "" -"If you click on the **2 Transfers** stat button, you should now see two " -"different pickings, one with a reference **PICK** to designate the picking " -"process and another with a reference **OUT** to designate the shipping " -"process." +"You can enter the receipt operation from the purchase order, or access it " +"through the inventory dashboard." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:93 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:84 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:80 msgid "" -"Ensure that you have enough product in stock, and go to **Inventory** and " -"click on the **Waiting** link under the **Pick** kanban card." +"By default, a receipt is always considered as ready to be processed. Then, " +"you will be able to directly click on *Validate* to mark it as done." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:103 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:92 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:87 msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Stock** to " -"**WH/Output**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:105 -msgid "" -"This has completed the picking step and the **WH/PICK** move should now show" -" **Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"moved from **WH/Stock** to **WH/Output** location, which makes the product " -"**available for the next step** (Shipping)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:121 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Output** to the " -"customer (Click **Apply** to assign the quantities based on the quantities " -"listed in the **To Do** column)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:125 -msgid "" -"This has completed the shipping step and the **WH/OUT** move should now show" -" **Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"shipped to the customer." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:130 -msgid "" -"link to these sections when they will be available - Process Overview: From" -" sales orders to delivery orders" +"Once the receipt has been validated, the internal transfer is ready to be " +"processed. As documents are chained, the products which have been received " +"are automatically reserved on the internal transfer. Once the transfer is " +"validated, those products enter the stock and you will be able to use them " +"to fulfill customer deliveries or manufacture products." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/incoming.rst:3 @@ -2085,294 +1703,11 @@ msgid "This is the default configuration in Odoo." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:68 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:126 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:97 msgid ":doc:`../delivery/inventory_flow`" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:71 -msgid "" -"Add section when available - How to analyse the performance of my vendors?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:3 -msgid "How to add a quality control step in goods receipt? (3 steps)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:8 -msgid "" -"In many companies, it is necessary to assess the received good. The goal is " -"to check that the products correspond to the quality requirements agreed " -"with the suppliers. Therefore, adding a quality control step in the goods " -"receipt process can become essential." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Odoo uses routes to define exactly how you will handle the different receipt" -" steps. The configuration is done at the level of the warehouse. By default," -" the reception is a one step process, but changing the configuration can " -"allow to have 2 or even 3 steps." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:18 -msgid "" -"The 3 steps flow is as follows: You receive the goods in an input area, then" -" transfer them into quality area for quality control. When the quality check" -" has been processed, you can move the goods from QC to stock. Of course, you" -" may change the quantity and only transfer to stock the quantity that is " -"valid and decide that you will return the quantity that is not good." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:25 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:18 -msgid "This is the case that will be explained in this document." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:31 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:24 -msgid "Use advanced routes" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:33 -msgid "" -"To allow management of routes, go to the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Configuration --> Settings`." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:39 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:32 -msgid "" -"Ensure that the routes option **Advance routing of product using rules** is " -"checked, then click on **Apply** to save changes." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:42 -msgid "" -"Make sure that **Manage several locations per warehouse** is also ticked." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:46 -msgid "How to add a quality control step in goods receipt?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:48 -msgid "" -"Go to the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Warehouse` " -"and choose the warehouse where you want to change reception methods." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:51 -msgid "" -"By default, warehouses are configured with one step reception (**Receive " -"goods directly into stock**)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:54 -msgid "" -"To add quality control before transfer goods into stock location, tick " -"**Unload in input location, go through a quality control before being " -"admitted in stock (3 steps)**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:62 -msgid "How to control a receipt?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:65 -msgid "How to process the receipt step ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:67 -msgid "" -"In the **Purchase** app, create a **Request for Quotation**. Click on the " -"**Confirm order** button. You can see that there is one **Shipment** related" -" to purchase order in the stat button above the purchase order form view. " -"This is the receipt step." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:75 -msgid "" -"Go to **Inventory** and click on the link **# TO RECEIVE** in the " -"**Receipts** card." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:80 -msgid "" -"Click on the receipt that you want to process. Click on **Validate** to " -"complete the move from the **Vendor** location to **WH/Input**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:83 -msgid "" -"This has completed the receipt step and the status column at the top of the " -"page for **WH/IN** should now show **Done**. The product has been moved from" -" the **Vendor** to the **WH/Input** location, which makes the product " -"available for the next step (Move to the quality control zone)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:89 -msgid "" -"How to move your product from the receipt zone to the quality control zone ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:91 -msgid "" -"Go to the **Inventory** dashboard. You will see that there is one transfer " -"ready (the move to the quality control zone) and one waiting (the move to " -"the stock after the control). Click on the link **# TRANSFERS** in the " -"**Internal Transfers** to process the quality control." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:101 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Input** to **WH/Quality" -" Control**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:104 -msgid "" -"This has completed the internal transfer step and the status column at the " -"top of the page for **WH/INT** should now show **Done**. The receipt is now " -"ready to be controlled." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:109 -msgid "How to to process the quality control ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:111 -msgid "" -"Go back to the **Inventory** dashboard. The waiting transfer is now ready. " -"Click on the link **# TRANSFERS** in the **Internal Transfers** card to " -"process the quality control." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:118 -msgid "" -"Click on the last picking to process. Click on **Validate** to complete the " -"move from **WH/Quality Control** to **WH/Stock**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:121 -msgid "" -"This has completed the quality control step and the status column at the top" -" of the page for **WH/INT** should now show **Done**. The receipt has been " -"controlled and has moved to your stock." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:127 -msgid ":doc:`two_steps`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:3 -msgid "How to unload your shipment to an input location? (2 steps)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:13 -msgid "" -"The 2 steps flow is the following : You receive the goods in an input area " -"then transfer them from input area to your stock. As long as the goods are " -"not transferred in your stock, they will not be available for further " -"processing." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:26 -msgid "" -"To allow management of routes, go to the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Configuration --> Settings`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:35 -msgid "" -"Make sure that **\"Manage several locations per warehouse\"** is also " -"ticked." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:39 -msgid "How to configure your warehouse ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:41 -msgid "" -"Go to the the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> " -"Warehouse` and choose the warehouse where you want to change reception " -"methods." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:44 -msgid "" -"By default, warehouses are configured with one step reception (option " -"**Receive goods directly into stock**)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:47 -msgid "" -"To add the control step, tick **Unload in input location then go to stock (2" -" steps)**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:54 -msgid "How to receipt a shipment in 2 steps?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:57 -msgid "How to process the Receipt step ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:59 -msgid "" -"In the purchase module, create a **Request for Quotation**, then click on " -"the **Confirm order** button. You can see that there is one **Shipment** " -"related to purchase order in the **stat button** above the purchase order " -"form view. This is the receipt step." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:67 -msgid "" -"Go to **Inventory** and click on the **# TO RECEIVE** link on the " -"**Receipts** card." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:73 -msgid "" -"Click on the receipt that you want to process, then click on **Validate** to" -" complete the move from the **Vendor** to **WH/Input**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:76 -msgid "" -"This has completed the Receipt Step and the move refered with **WH/IN**. The" -" product has been moved from the **Vendor** to the **WH/Input** location, " -"which makes the product available for the next step." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:81 -msgid "How to transfer the receipt to your stock ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:83 -msgid "" -"Go back to the **Inventory** dashboard. The waiting transfer is now ready. " -"Click on the **# TRANSFERS** in the **Internal Transfers** to process the " -"quality control." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:90 -msgid "" -"Click on the picking you want to process. Click on **Validate** to complete " -"the move from **WH/Input** to **WH/Stock**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:93 -msgid "" -"This has completed the internal transfer step and the move refered with " -"**WH/INT**. The receipt has been moved to your stock." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:98 -msgid ":doc:`three_steps`" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:68 +msgid "Process the receipt and the internal transfer" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers.rst:3 @@ -2384,9 +1719,6 @@ msgid "What's the difference between lots and serial numbers?" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:170 msgid "Introduction" msgstr "" @@ -2451,616 +1783,1420 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:46 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:135 msgid ":doc:`serial_numbers`" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:47 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:129 msgid ":doc:`lots`" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:3 -msgid "How to manage lots of identical products?" +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:3 +msgid "Manage expiration dates" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In many companies, products have expiration dates and they should be tracked" +" based on those dates. In the food industry, for example, tracking stocks " +"based on expiration dates is mandatory to avoid selling expired products to " +"customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:10 +msgid "" +"With Odoo, you can track your products based on their expiration dates, even" +" if they are already tracked by lots or serial numbers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:14 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:15 +msgid "Configurations" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:17 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:18 +msgid "Application configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:19 +msgid "" +"To use expiration dates tracking, open the *Inventory* application and go to" +" *Configuration > Settings* and activate the *Lots & Serial Numbers* and " +"*Expiration Dates* features." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:27 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:28 +#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:68 +#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:90 +msgid "Product configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:29 +msgid "" +"Now, you have the possibility to define different dates in the *inventory " +"tab* of the product form:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:32 +msgid "" +"Product Use Time: it’s the number of days before the goods start " +"deteriorating, without being dangerous yet. It will be computed using the " +"lot/serial number;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:34 +msgid "" +"Product Life Time: refers to the number of days before the goods may become " +"dangerous and must not be consumed. It will be computed on the lot/serial " +"number;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:36 +msgid "" +"Product Removal Time: shows the number of days before the goods should be " +"removed from the stock. It will be computed on the lot/serial number;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:38 +msgid "" +"Product Alert Time: refers to the number of days before an alert should be " +"raised on the lot/serial number." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:44 +msgid "Expiration Date on Lots/Serial Numbers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:46 +msgid "" +"When receiving a product in stock, the dates will automatically be updated " +"on the corresponding lot/serial number. This update will be based on the " +"reception date of the product and the times set on the product form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:58 +msgid "Expiration Alerts" +msgstr "تنبيهات انتهاء الصلاحية" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:60 +msgid "" +"You can access all your expiration alerts from the *inventory* app. To do " +"so, go to *Master Data > Lots/Serial Numbers*. There, you can use the pre-" +"existing filter that shows all the lots/serial numbers that exceeded their " +"alert date." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:3 +msgid "Manage lots of identical products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:5 msgid "" "Lots are useful for products you receive in great quantity and for which a " -"lot number can help in reportings, quality controls, or any other info. Lots" -" will help identify a number of pieces having for instance a production " +"lot number can help in reporting, quality controls, or any other info. Lots " +"will help identify a number of pieces having, for instance, a production " "fault. It can be useful for a batch production of clothes or food." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:14 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:11 msgid "" -"Odoo has the capacity to manage lots ensuring compliance with the " +"Odoo has the capacity to manage lots, ensuring compliance with the " "traceability requirements imposed by the majority of industries." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:17 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:14 msgid "" "The double-entry management in Odoo enables you to run very advanced " "traceability." msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:18 +msgid "Setting Up" +msgstr "" + #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:21 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:19 -msgid "Setting up" +msgid "Application Configuration" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:24 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:22 -msgid "Application configuration" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:26 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:23 msgid "" -"You need activate the tracking of lots in the settings. In the **Inventory**" -" application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`, select " -"**Track lots or serial numbers**" +"First, you need to activate the tracking of lot numbers. To do so, go to " +"*Inventory > Configuration > Settings* and tick *Lots & Serial Numbers*. " +"Then, click on save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:31 +msgid "Product Configuration" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:33 msgid "" -"In order to have an advanced management of the lots, you should also select " -"**Manage several locations per warehouse**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:39 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:31 -#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:27 -#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:26 -msgid "Then click on **Apply**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:42 -msgid "Operation types configuration" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:44 -msgid "" -"You also need to set up how you will manage lots for each operations. In the" -" **Inventory** application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Operation Types`." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:48 -msgid "" -"For each type (receipts, internal transfers, deliveries,...), you can set if" -" you can create new lot numbers or only use existing lot numbers." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:57 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:36 -msgid "" -"Finally, you have to configure which products you want to track in lots." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:59 -msgid "" -"Go into :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Products`, and open the " -"product of your choice. Click on **Edit**, and in the **Inventory** tab, " -"select **Tracking by Lots**, then click on **Save**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:67 -msgid "Manage lots" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:70 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:49 -msgid "Transfers" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:72 -msgid "" -"In order to process a transfer of a product tracked by lot, you have to " -"input the lot number(s)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:75 -msgid "Click on the lot icon :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:80 -msgid "" -"A window will pop-up. Click on **Add an item** and fill in the lot number " -"and the quantity." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:86 -msgid "" -"Depending on your operation type configuration, you will be able to fill in " -"new lot numbers, or only use existing ones." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:90 -msgid "In the scanner interface, you just have to scan the lot numbers." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:93 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:79 -msgid "Inventory adjustment" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:95 -msgid "Inventory of a product tracked by lot can be done in 2 ways:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:97 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:83 -msgid "Classic inventory by products" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:99 -msgid "Inventory of a lot" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:101 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:87 -msgid "" -"When doing a classic inventory, there is a **Serial Number** column. If the " -"product has already been assigned with a number, it is already pre-filled." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:105 -msgid "" -"Click on **Add an item** if the product has not been inventoried yet. You " -"can easily create lots, just type in a new lot number in the column." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:111 -msgid "" -"You can also just do the inventory of a lot. In this case, you will have to " -"fill in the **Lot number**. You can also create a new lot from here. Just " -"type in the number, a window will pop out to link the number to a product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:120 -msgid "Lots traceability" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:122 -msgid "" -"You can check the lot traceability from :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Inventory Control --> Serial Numbers/Lots`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:128 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:122 -msgid "You can have more details by clicking on the **Traceability** button :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:134 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:128 -msgid ":doc:`differences`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:3 -msgid "How to work with serial numbers?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Serial Number Tracking is used to track products with serial numbers on " -"every transactions. You can track the current location of the product with " -"serial numbers. When the products are moved from one location to another " -"location, the system will automatically identify the current location of the" -" product based on last movement of the product. So you can get the last " -"location where the products are moved." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:24 -msgid "" -"You need activate the tracking of serial numbers in the settings. In the " -"**Inventory** application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`, select **Track lots or serial numbers**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:38 -msgid "" -"Go into :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Products`, and open the " -"product of your choice. Click on **Edit**, and in the **Inventory** tab, " -"select **By Unique Serial Number**, then click on **Save**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:46 -msgid "Manage Serial Numbers" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:51 -msgid "" -"In order to process a transfer of a product tracked by serial number, you " -"have to input the number(s). In order to be able to assign serial numbers to" -" products with tracking features enabled you will first need to mark your " -"transfer as to do. Click on the **Mark as TODO** button to display the Lot " -"Split icon." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:57 -msgid "Click on the serial number icon :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:62 -msgid "" -"A window will pop-up. Click on **Add an item** and fill in the serial " +"Now, you have to configure which products you want to track by serial " "numbers." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:68 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:36 msgid "" -"If you move products that already have serial numbers assigned, those will " -"appear in the list. Just click on the **+** icon to confirm that you are " -"moving those serial numbers." +"Go to *Master Data > Products* and open the product of your choice. There, " +"click on *Edit* and select *Tracking by Lots* in the inventory tab." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:76 -msgid "In the scanner interface, you just have to scan the serial numbers." +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:47 +msgid "Manage Lots" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:81 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:52 msgid "" -"Inventory of a product tracked by serial numbers can be done in 2 ways:" +"In order to receive a product tracked by lots, you have to specify its lot " +"numbers. You have several ways of doing so:" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:85 -msgid "Inventory of a serial number" +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:55 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:65 +msgid "Manually assign the different lot numbers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:57 +msgid "Copy/paste lot numbers from an Excel file" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:59 +msgid "First, you need to open the detailed operations of your picking." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:67 +msgid "" +"When opening the detailed operations, you can click on *Add a line*. Then, " +"you will be able to fill the lot number in. Once done, you can click on *Add" +" a line* again to register a new lot number." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:75 +msgid "Copy/paste lot number from an Excel file" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:77 +msgid "" +"Once the spreadsheet containing the lot numbers you received from your " +"supplier and copy the list. Then, you can paste them in the *Lot/Serial " +"Number Name* column for Odoo to automatically create the necessary lines. " +"After that, you will have to manually enter the number of products that are " +"contained in each one of the lots." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:93 +msgid "Operation Types" +msgstr "أنواع العمليات" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:95 +msgid "" +"Of course, you also have the possibility to define how you will manage lots " +"for each operation type. To do so, open the *Inventory* app and go to " +"*Configuration > Operation Types*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:99 +msgid "" +"For each type (receipts, internal transfers, deliveries, …), you can decide " +"if you allow to create new lot numbers or only use existing ones. By " +"default, the creation of new lots is only allowed at product reception, and " +"using existing lot numbers isn’t allowed in this operation. If you have " +"inter-warehouse transfers and track products by lots, it can be useful to " +"allow using existing lot numbers in receipts too." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:111 +msgid "Lots traceability" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:113 +msgid "" +"The lot number given to the products allows you to keep track of where they " +"were received, put in stock, to whom they were sold and where they were " +"shipped to." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:117 +msgid "" +"To track an item, open the *Inventory* module and, in *Master Data > " +"Lots/Serial Numbers*, click on the lot number corresponding to your search." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:124 +msgid "" +"When you open the *Traceability* information, you see in which documents the" +" lot number has been used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:130 +msgid "" +"Now, if you want to locate the lot number, you can do so by clicking on the " +"*Location* stat button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:3 +msgid "Work with serial numbers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:5 +msgid "" +"To track products with serial numbers, you can use the serial number " +"tracking. With them, you can track the current location of the product and, " +"when the products are moved from one location to another, the system will " +"automatically identify the current location of the product, based on its " +"last movement." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:11 +msgid "" +"If you want to do it or run very advanced traceability, the Odoo double-" +"entry management is the feature you need." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:20 +msgid "" +"First, you need to activate the serial numbers tracking. To do so, go to " +"*Configuration > Settings* in the *Inventory* application. Then, enable the " +"feature and hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:30 +msgid "" +"Now, you have to configure the products you want to track by serial numbers." +" To do so, go to *Master Data > Products* and open the product of your " +"choice. Edit it and select *Tracking By Unique Serial Number* in the " +"*Inventory tab*. Then, click on save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:42 +msgid "Manage Serial Numbers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:47 +msgid "" +"To receive a product that is tracked by serial number, you have to specify " +"its serial number. Of course, you have several ways of doing so:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:50 +msgid "Manual assignation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:52 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:73 +msgid "Multi-assignation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:54 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:89 +msgid "Copy/pasting from an Excel file" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:56 +msgid "" +"Whatever could be your favorite way to assign serial numbers, you firstly " +"need to open the detailed operations of your picking." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:63 +msgid "Manual assignation of the different serial numbers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:65 +msgid "" +"When opening the detailed operations, you can click on *Add a line*. Then, " +"you will be able to fill in the serial number field. Once done, you can " +"click again on *Add a line* to register a new serial number." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:75 +msgid "" +"By using the multi-assignation of serial numbers, Odoo will automatically " +"create the necessary lines. To do so, you have to enter the first serial " +"number of your set and the number of products you have to assign a serial " +"number to." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:80 +msgid "Once done, click on *Assign Serial Numbers* and Odoo will do the rest." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:91 msgid "" -"Click on **Add an item** if the product has not been inventoried yet. You " -"can easily create serial numbers, just type in a new number in the column." +"To use copy/pasting, open the spreadsheet containing the serial numbers you " +"received and copy the list. Then, past them in the *Lot/Serial Number Name* " +"column of the wizard. Doing so, Odoo will automatically create the lines you" +" need." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:98 -msgid "The quantity should be 1 for each line." +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:106 +msgid "Operation types" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:100 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:108 msgid "" -"You can also just do the inventory of a serial number. In this case, you " -"will have to fill in the serial number. You can also create a new one from " -"here. Just type in the number, a window will pop out to link it to a " -"product." +"You also have the possibility to define how you will manage lots for each " +"operation type. To define it, go to *Configuration > Operation Types* in the" +" *Inventory* app." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:109 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:112 +msgid "" +"For each type, you can decide if you allow the creation of new lot numbers " +"or want to use existing ones. By default, the creation of new lots is only " +"allowed at product reception." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:120 +msgid "" +"If you have inter-warehouse transfers and track products by lots, it can be " +"useful to allow using existing lot numbers in receipts too." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:124 msgid "Serial Number traceability" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:111 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:126 msgid "" -"The serial number given to these items allow you to keep track of where they" -" were received, put in stock, to whom they were sold and where they were " -"shipped to." +"Using serial numbers allows you to keep track of where the products were " +"received, put in stock, to whom they were sold, and where they were shipped " +"to." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:115 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:130 msgid "" -"To track an item, open the **Inventory** module, and in " -":menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Serial Numbers/lots`, click on the " -"serial number corresponding to your search." +"Tracking an item is easy: open the *Inventory* app, and go to *Master Data >" +" Lots/Serial Numbers* and click on the serial number corresponding to your " +"search. Then, open the *Traceability* information. There, you will see in " +"which documents the serial number has been used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:142 +msgid "" +"And, if you want to locate a serial number, you can do so by clicking on the" +" *Location* button available on the serial number form." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/misc.rst:3 msgid "Miscellaneous Operations" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:2 -msgid "Immediate & Planned Transfers" +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:3 +msgid "Send Automated Emails at Delivery" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:4 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:8 msgid "" -"In Odoo, you can create two types of transfers: immediate or planned " -"transfers." +"First, go to the *Inventory* app, then to *Settings* and activate the *Email" +" Confirmation* feature. If you work in multi-company, this configuration is " +"company-specific." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:8 -msgid "Immediate Transfers" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:10 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:15 msgid "" -"When you create a transfer manually, it is by default an immediate transfer." +"When you enable this feature, Odoo automatically creates an email template. " +"Of course, you can modify it if necessary by clicking on the small arrow " +"next to its name." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:23 +msgid "Send email at delivery validation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:25 msgid "" -"In the case of an immediate transfer, you directly encode the products and " -"quantities you are processing, there is no reservation that applies. This is" -" why the column \"Initial Demand\" is not editable. You only fill in the " -"column \"Done\" for the quantities." +"On the inventory dashboard, click on *Create* and fill the form for a " +"specific partner. Once you have added some products in it, *Validate* it and" +" do the same for the delivery." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:18 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:32 msgid "" -"This is for example used when you are transferring goods from a location A " -"to a location B and that this is not planned (you are processing the " -"transfer right now)." +"Doing so, an automated email will be sent and will appear in the chatter." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:23 -msgid "Planned Transfers" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:38 msgid "" -"When a transfer is generated automatically (from a sales order or purchase " -"order for example), it is a planned transfer. This means that there is an " -"initial demand and that reservation applies on this initial demand." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:30 -msgid "" -"If you want to create a planned transfer manually, you can do it from the " -"inventory dashboard." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:36 -msgid "" -"In that case, you will have to enter the initial demand first (how many " -"units are you supposed to proceed), then to mark your transfer as to do. " -"Once this is done, you will be able to reserve the products and to process " -"the transfer." +"If you work with a shipping method, and then have a tracking link, it will " +"be included in the standard email template." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:3 -msgid "How to manage stock that you don't own?" +msgid "Manage Stock that you don't own" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Sometimes, suppliers can offer you to store and sell products without having" +" to buy those items. This technique is called *consignee stock*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:8 msgid "" -"Some suppliers can sometimes offer you to store and sell products without " -"having to buy those items: this technique is called **consignee stock**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:12 -msgid "" "Consignee stock is a great way for manufacturers and suppliers to launch new" -" products. As resellers may be reluctant to buying a product that they are " -"not sure to be able to sell, consignee stock will allow them to propose an " -"item to check its market without having to pay for it in the first place." +" products. As resellers may be reluctant to buy a product they are not sure " +"to be able to sell, consignee stock will allow them to offer an item to " +"check its market without having to pay for it in the first place." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:18 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:14 msgid "" -"Odoo has the ability to manage consignee stocks through the advanced " -"settings." +"Of course, Odoo has the ability to manage those consignee stocks through " +"advanced settings." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:24 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:20 msgid "" -"Open the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`, and" -" in the **Product Owners** section, select **Manage consignee stocks " -"(advanced)**, then click on **Apply**." +"To use this feature, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Settings* in the " +"inventory app. Then, enable the *Consignment* feature in the *Traceability* " +"section. Now, hit save." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:32 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:28 msgid "Reception of Consignee Stock" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:34 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:30 msgid "" -"In the Inventory's Dashboard, open the **Receipts** and create a new " -"reception. You can see that in the right side of the page, a new **Owner** " -"line has appeared. You can specify the partner which owns the stock or leave" -" it blank if you are the owner." +"When in the *Inventory* app, open the receipts and create a new reception. " +"On the right side, you will see that a new line called *Assign Owner* has " +"appeared. There, you can specify the partner which owns the stock." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:3 -msgid "How to configure and run schedulers?" +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:39 +msgid "If you are the owner, you can leave the field blank." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:6 -msgid "What is a scheduler" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:41 msgid "" -"The scheduler is the calculation engine which plans and prioritises " -"production and purchasing automatically according to the rules defined on " -"products. By default, the scheduler is set to run once a day (Odoo " -"automatically creates a **Scheduled Action** for this)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:14 -msgid "Calculating Requirements / Scheduling" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:16 -msgid "" -"Scheduling only validates procurements that are confirmed but not yet " -"started. These procurement reservations will themselves start production, " -"tasks or purchases depending on the configuration of the requested product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:21 -msgid "" -"You take into account the priority of operations when starting reservations " -"and procurements. Urgent requests, those with a date in the past, or " -"requests with a date earlier than the others will be started first. In case " -"there are not enough products in stock to satisfy all the requests, you can " -"be sure that the most urgent requests will be produced first." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:29 -msgid "Configure and run the scheduler" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:32 -msgid "Run the scheduler manually" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:34 -msgid "" -"This feature is not visible by default. You have to enable **debug mode** to" -" see this. To enable debug mode, go to :menuselection:`Help --> About` and " -"click on **Activate the developer mode**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:38 -msgid "" -"You can also start the scheduler manually from the menu " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Schedulers --> Run Schedulers`. The scheduler " -"uses all the relevant parameters defined for products, suppliers and the " -"company to determine the priorities between the different production orders," -" deliveries and supplier purchases." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:48 -msgid "Configure and run the scheduler (only for advanced users)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:50 -msgid "" -"This feature is not visible by default. You have to enable **debug mode** to" -" see this. To enable debug mode, go to :menuselection:`Help -> About` and " -"click on **Activate the developer mode**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:54 -msgid "" -"You can set the starting time of the scheduler by modifying the " -"corresponding action in the menu :menuselection:`Settings --> Technical --> " -"Automation --> Scheduled Actions`. Modify the Run mrp Scheduler " -"configuration." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:63 -msgid ":doc:`../delivery/scheduled_dates`" +"Once the receipt is validated, the products enter your stock but still " +"belong to the owner. They don’t impact your inventory valuation." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:3 -msgid "How to scrap products?" +msgid "Scrap Products" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In your warehouse, you sometimes find products that are damaged or that are " +"unusable due to expiry or for some other reasons. You often notice this " +"during picking or physical inventory. Since those products cannot be sold or" +" stored, you have to scrap them." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:10 +msgid "" +"When goods are scrapped, they are not reflected in the system as a part of " +"the inventory. The scrapped material will be physically moved to the scrap " +"area and not taken into account into inventory valuation." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:15 msgid "" "Scrap means waste that either has no economic value or only the value of its" -" basic material" +" basic material content, recoverable through recycling." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:11 -msgid "content recoverable through recycling." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:21 msgid "" -"In your warehouse you sometimes find products that are damaged or that are " -"unusable due to expiry or for some other reason. You often notice this " -"during picking or physical inventory." +"When you install the *Inventory* app, Odoo automatically creates a scrap " +"location. It’s named *Virtual Location/Scap*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:17 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:24 msgid "" -"Since you cannot normally sell or store these products, you have to scrap " -"product." +"Of course, you can create new scrap areas if needed. To do so, go to " +"*Inventory > Configuration > Settings* and activate the *Storage Locations* " +"feature." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:20 -msgid "" -"When goods are scrapped they are not reflected in the system as a part of " -"the inventory. The scrapped material will be physically moved to scrap area." +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:31 +msgid "Now, go to *Configuration > Locations* and create your scrap location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:27 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:34 msgid "" -"When you install inventory management, odoo automatically creates one " -"default scrap location, namely **Virtual location/Scrapped**." +"You have to check *Is a Scrap Location?* on the location form. In fact, " +"scrap locations cannot be used as normal storage locations and then, a " +"virtual location will be created for scrapped products." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:30 -msgid "" -"To create an extra scrap location, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Configuration --> Settings` and check **Manage several locations per " -"warehouse**, then click on **Apply**." +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:39 +msgid "Different ways to scrap products" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:41 msgid "" -"After applying **Manage several location per warehouse**, you can create a " -"new scrap location in :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouse Management" -" --> Locations.`" +"With Odoo, you have several ways to scrap products: from receipts, from a " +"delivery order, and from an internal transfer." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:43 -msgid "" -"To define a scrap location, you have to check **Is a Scrap Location?** on " -"location form view." +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:45 +msgid "Scrap from receipt" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:47 -msgid "Different ways to scrap product" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:49 -msgid "Odoo provides several ways to scrap products." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:52 -msgid "1) Scrap from Receipt (Initial Demand tab)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:54 msgid "" -"To scrap product from incoming shipment, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory -->" -" Dashboard --> Receipts`." +"Scrapping products from receipts is easy. Go to *Inventory > Dashboard > " +"Receipts* or click on *1 TO PROCESS* under the receipts location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:60 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:53 msgid "" -"Open the incoming shipment, and in the **Initial demand** tab, click on the " -"scrap products button." +"Now, open the receipt and validate the picking. Once the products entered " +"your stock, the Scrap button appears on the top left corner of your screen." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:67 -msgid "2) Scrap from delivery order (Initial Demand tab) ." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:69 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:57 msgid "" -"To scrap product from outgoing shipment, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory -->" -" Dashboard --> Delivery Orders`" +"You can scrap products that were part of the receipt from there. If you do " +"so, it will move them from available stock to the virtual scrap location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:75 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:68 +msgid "Scrap from delivery order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:70 msgid "" -"Open the outgoing shipment, and in the **Initial demand** tab, click on the " -"scrap products button on stock move in initial demand tab." +"To scrap products from a delivery order, go to *Inventory > Dashboard > " +"Delivery orders* or click on *1 TO PROCESS*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:82 -msgid "3) Scrap from internal transfer (Initial Demand tab)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:84 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:76 msgid "" -"To scrap product from internal transfer, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory -->" -" Dashboard --> Internal Transfers`" +"Once done, open the delivery order. You can see the scrap button in the " +"upper left of the document. If you scrap the product from there, it will be " +"moved from your available stock to the virtual scrap location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:90 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:80 msgid "" -"Open the internal transfer, and in the **Initial demand** tab, click on the " -"scrap products button on stock move in initial demand tab." +"You can find all the scrap orders made from the picking by clicking on the " +"button on the top right corner of the document." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:96 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:93 +msgid "Scrap from an internal transfer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:95 msgid "" -"When you click on scrap button, a popup will open. You can enter the " -"quantity of products, and specify the scrap location, then click on " -"**Scrap**." +"To do this, the flow is almost the same. In fact, you just have to go to " +"*Inventory > Dashboard > Internal Transfers*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:101 +msgid "" +"There, open the internal transfer that interests you. Now, click on the " +"scrap button that is on the top left of the document." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:104 msgid "" -"To allow change scrap location on wizard, you have to select **Manage " -"several location per warehouse** in the settings at " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`" +"When scrapping before validating the internal transfer, the product is, by " +"default, moved from the source location to the virtual scrap location. But, " +"if you scrap after validating the internal transfer, it will be moved from " +"the destination location, as opposed to the source location, to the virtual " +"scrap location." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:110 +msgid "" +"Of course, you can manually update the source location of the scrap order if" +" necessary." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:3 +msgid "Send Automated SMS at Delivery" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:8 +msgid "" +"To send automated SMS, you need to activate the *SMS Confirmation* feature. " +"To do so, go to the *Inventory* app *Settings* and enable the feature. In " +"multi-company, this feature is company-specific." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Of course, an SMS template already exists by default in Odoo. You can modify" +" it by clicking on the arrow on the right." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:22 +msgid "Send SMS at delivery validation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:24 +msgid "" +"To use this feature, try to *Create* a delivery order for a specific partner" +" and add some products to it. Then, *Validate* the delivery." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:30 +msgid "Now, the automated SMS that has been sent appears in the chatter." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:36 +msgid "" +"The partner which is set on the transfer needs to have a phone number " +"specified in its contact form for the SMS to be sent." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:39 +msgid "" +"If you work with a shipping method, and then have a tracking link, it will " +"be included in the SMS template." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning.rst:3 +msgid "Planning" +msgstr "التخطيط" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:3 +msgid "How is the Scheduled Delivery Date Computed?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In most cases, scheduled dates are computed to be able to plan deliveries, " +"receptions, and so on. Depending on your company’s habits, Odoo generates " +"scheduled dates via the scheduler." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:9 +msgid "" +"To make your life easier, the Odoo scheduler computes everything per line, " +"whether it’s a manufacturing order, a delivery order, a sale order, etc." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:14 +msgid "" +"The computed dates are dependent on the different lead times configured in " +"Odoo." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:20 +msgid "" +"Configuring lead times is the first move if you want to compute scheduled " +"dates. Those are the delays promised (in terms of delivery, manufacturing, " +"etc.) to your partners and/or clients." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:25 +msgid "In Odoo, you can configure different lead times." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:30 +msgid "" +"When configuring lead times at the product level, you have three different " +"types to take into account: supplier lead time, customer lead time, and " +"manufacturing lead time." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:35 +msgid "Supplier lead time" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:37 +msgid "" +"The supplier lead time is the time needed for the supplier to deliver your " +"purchased products. To configure it, select a product and click on the " +"inventory tab. There, you will have to add a vendor to your product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:44 +msgid "" +"Now, just open the vendor form and fill its *Delivery lead time*. In this " +"case, the delivery day will be equal to *Date of the Purchase Order + " +"Delivery Lead Time*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:52 +msgid "" +"Do not forget that it is possible to add different vendor pricelists and, " +"thus, different delivery lead times, depending on the vendor." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:56 +msgid "Customer Lead Time" +msgstr "توقيت مبادرة العميل" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:58 +msgid "" +"It is the time needed to get your product from your store/warehouse to your " +"customer. It can be configured for any product. To add it, select a product " +"and go to the inventory tab. There, simply indicate your *customer lead " +"time*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:67 +msgid "Manufacturing lead time" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:69 +msgid "" +"On the same page, it is possible to configure what’s called the " +"*Manufacturing Lead Time*. It is the time needed to manufacture the product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:76 +msgid "" +"At the company level, you can configure security days. Those are useful to " +"cope with eventual dalys and to be sure to meet your engagements. The idea " +"is to subtract backup days from the computed scheduled date in case of " +"delays." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:81 +msgid "" +"Once again, there are three different types of security lead times: for " +"sales, for purchases, and for manufacturing." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:85 +msgid "Security lead time for sales" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:87 +msgid "" +"In sales, security lead time corresponds to backup days to ensure you will " +"be able to deliver your clients in times. They are margins of errors for " +"delivery lead times. Security days are the same logic as the early " +"wristwatch, in order to arrive on time." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:92 +msgid "" +"The idea is to subtract the numbers of security days from the calculation " +"and, thus, to compute a scheduled date earlier than the one you promised to " +"your client. In that way, you are sure to be able to keep your commitment." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:97 +msgid "" +"To set up your security dates, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Settings* " +"and enable the feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:104 +msgid "Security lead time for purchase" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:106 +msgid "" +"It follows the same logic as security lead time for sales except that " +"security lead time for purchase is the margin of error for vendor lead " +"times, not for sales." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:110 +msgid "" +"When the system generates purchase orders for procuring products, they will " +"be scheduled that many days earlier to cope with unexpected vendor delays." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:114 +msgid "" +"To find purchase lead time, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Settings* and" +" enable the feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:121 +msgid "Security lead time for manufacturing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:123 +msgid "" +"The security lead time for manufacturing allows generating manufacturing " +"orders which are scheduled that many days earlier to cope with unexpected " +"manufacturing days." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:127 +msgid "" +"To configure it, go to *Manufacturing > Configuration > Settings* and enable" +" the *Security Lead Time* option. Then, hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:136 +msgid "" +"Sometimes, the internal transfers that a product might do may also influence" +" the computed date. The delays due to internal transfers can be specified in" +" the *Inventory* app when you create a new rule in a route." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:141 +msgid "" +"To specify them, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Routes* and add a push " +"rule to set a delay. Of course, you need to activate *Multi-step Routes* to " +"use this feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:149 +msgid "At the sale order level" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:152 +msgid "Expected date" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:154 +msgid "" +"In the *Sales* application, you have the possibility to activate the option " +"*Delivery Date*. It will allow you to see additional fields on the sale " +"order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:158 +msgid "" +"By enabling this option, Odoo will indicate the *Expected Date* in the " +"*Other Info* tab of the sales order. This one is automatically computed " +"based on the different lead times." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:165 +msgid "" +"If you set a *Commitment Date* to deliver your customer that is earlier than" +" the *Expected Date*, a warning message will appear on the screen." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:175 +msgid "" +"To better understand all the above info, here is an example. You may sell a " +"car today (January 1st), that is purchased on order, and you promise to " +"deliver your customer within 20 days (January 20th). In such a scenario, the" +" scheduler will trigger the following events, based on your configuration:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:181 +msgid "" +"January 19: this is the actual scheduled delivery (1 day of Sales Safety " +"Days);" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:183 +msgid "" +"January 18: you receive the product from your supplier (1 day of Purchase " +"days);" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:185 +msgid "" +"January 10: this is the deadline to order at your supplier (9 days of " +"Supplier Delivery Lead Time);" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:187 +msgid "" +"January 8: trigger a purchase request to your purchase team, since they " +"need, on average, 2 days to find the right supplier and order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:3 +msgid "Configure and Run Schedulers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:6 +msgid "What is a scheduler?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:8 +msgid "" +"The scheduler is the calculation engine that plans and prioritizes " +"production and purchasing. It does it automatically, according to the rules " +"defined on products. By default, the scheduler is set to run once a day." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:14 +msgid "Calculating Requirements / Scheduling" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:16 +msgid "" +"Scheduling only validates procurements that are confirmed but not yet " +"started. These procurement reservations will start production, tasks or " +"purchases themselves, depending on the configuration of the requested " +"product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:21 +msgid "" +"As a human would do, the scheduler takes the priority of operations into " +"account when starting reservations and procurements. Urgent requests will be" +" started first." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:26 +msgid "" +"In case there are not enough products in stock to satisfy all the requests, " +"you can be sure that the most urgent ones will be produced first." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:31 +msgid "Configure and run the scheduler" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:34 +msgid "Run the scheduler manually" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:36 +msgid "" +"To start the scheduler manually, go to *Inventory > Operations > Run " +"Schedulers*. The scheduler uses all the relevant parameters defined for " +"products, suppliers and the company to prioritize the different production " +"orders, deliveries and supplier purchases." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:45 +msgid "Configure and run the scheduler (for advanced users)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:47 +msgid "" +"To use this feature, you have to enable the debug mode. To do so, go to " +"*Settings > Activate the developer mode*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Then, go to *Settings > Technical > Automation > Scheduled Actions* and " +"modify the *Run MRP Scheduler Configuration*. There, you can set the " +"starting time of the scheduler." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products.rst:3 +msgid "Products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:3 +msgid "How to select the right replenishment strategy" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Minimum Stock rules and Make to Order have similar consequences but " +"different rules. They should be used depending on your manufacturing and " +"delivery strategies." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:10 +msgid "Terminology" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:13 +msgid "Minimum stock rule" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Minimum Stock rules are used to ensure that you always have the minimum " +"amount of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or " +"answer to your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its" +" minimum the system will automatically generate a procurement order with the" +" quantity needed to reach the maximum stock level." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:22 +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:58 +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:71 +msgid "Make to Order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:24 +msgid "" +"The Make to Order function will trigger a Purchase Order of the amount of " +"the Sales Order related to the product. The system will **not** check the " +"current stock. This means that a draft purchase order will be generated " +"regardless of the quantity on hand of the product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:33 +msgid "Minimum stock rules" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:35 +msgid "" +"The Minimum Stock Rules configuration is available through your Inventory " +"module. In the Inventory Control menu select \"Reordering Rule\" in the drop" +" down menu. There, click on \"Create\" to set minimum and maximum stock " +"values for a given product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:44 +msgid "" +"Show tooltips for \"minimum quantity\", \"maximum quantity\" and \"quantity " +"multiple\" fields" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:47 +msgid "" +"Then, click on your product to access the related product form and, on the " +"\"Inventory submenu\", do not forget to select a supplier." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:54 +msgid "" +"Don't forget to select the right product type. A consumable can not be " +"stocked and will thus not be accounted for in the stock valuation." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:60 +msgid "" +"The Make to Order configuration is available on your product form through " +"your :menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory control --> Products` (or any " +"other module where products are available)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:64 +msgid "On the product form, under Inventory, click on \"Make To Order\"." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:70 +msgid "Choice between the two options" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:72 +msgid "" +"The choice between the two options is thus dependent of your inventory " +"strategy. If you prefer to have a buffer and always have at least a minimum " +"amount, the minimum stock rule should be used. If you want to reorder your " +"stocks only if your sale is confirmed it is better to use the Make to Order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:3 +msgid "Use Different Units of Measure" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In some cases, handling products in different units of measure is necessary." +" For example, if you buy products in a country where the metric system is of" +" application and sell in a country where the imperial system is used, you " +"will need to convert the units. Another common use case is buying products " +"in bigger packs to your supplier and selling them in units to your " +"customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:12 +msgid "" +"You can set up Odoo to work with different units of measure for one product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:18 +msgid "" +"In the *Inventory* application, go to *Configuration > Settings*. In the " +"*Products* section, activate *Units of Measure*, then *Save*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:25 +msgid "Create New Units of Measure" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:27 +msgid "" +"In the *Inventory* application go to *Configuration > UoM*. There, hit " +"*Create*. As an example, we will create a Box of 6 units that we will use " +"for the Egg product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:34 +msgid "" +"The category is important for unit conversion, you will be able to convert " +"products from one unit to another only if those units belong to the same " +"category. The box of 6 is 6 times bigger than the reference unit of measure " +"for the category which is “Units” here." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:43 +msgid "Specify Units of Measure on your Products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:45 +msgid "" +"In the *Inventory application > Master Data > Products*, open the product " +"which you would like to change the purchase/sale unit of measure, and click " +"on *Edit*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:49 +msgid "" +"In the *General Information* tab, you can select the *Unit of Measure* in " +"which the product will be sold, which is also the unit in which internal " +"transfers will take place. You can also select the *Purchase Unit of " +"Measure*, which is the unit in which you purchase the product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:59 +msgid "Transfer from One Unit to Another" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:62 +msgid "Buy in the Pruchase UoM" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:64 +msgid "" +"In the *Purchase* application, *Create* a new request for quotation in which" +" you include the product with the different *Units of Measure* and *Confirm*" +" it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:71 +msgid "" +"On the automatically generated purchase orders, the UoM used is the Box of " +"6, meaning the Purchase UoM. You have of course the possibility to manually " +"modify the UoM if necessary. When you enter the *Receipt* which is linked to" +" the purchase order, you can observe that the 10 boxes of 6 units have been " +"converted in 60 units. Indeed, the stock is managed in units." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:82 +msgid "Replenishment" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:84 +msgid "" +"When doing a replenishment via the *Replenish* button on the product form, " +"you have the possibility to change the unit of measure." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:94 +msgid "Sell in bigger UoM" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:96 +msgid "" +"You can choose the unit of measure on the sale order document and decide to " +"sell the eggs by the dozen. When doing so, the price is automatically " +"computed from Units UoM to adapt to the selected *UoM*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:103 +msgid "" +"In the delivery order, the *UoM* used in the sale order is converted to the " +"*UoM* used for stock management, in our use case, the Units." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:3 +msgid "When Should you Use Packages, Units of Measure or Kits?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:6 +msgid "Units of Measure" +msgstr "وحدات القياس" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Units of measure specify the unit used to handle a product. In Odoo, you " +"have the possibility to specify the unit of measure in which you manage your" +" stock and the one which is used when purchasing the product to your " +"supplier." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:16 +msgid "" +"The *conversion* between the different units of measure is done " +"automatically. The only condition is that all the units have to be in the " +"*same category* (Unit, Weight, Volume, Length,...)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:20 +msgid "" +"For example, if I have the following reordering rule for the egg and I run " +"the scheduler, the quantity added in the automatically generated purchase " +"order will be in dozens but what will enter the stock will be units." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:35 +msgid "Packages" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:37 +msgid "" +"The package is the physical container in which you put one or several " +"products from a picking. For example, when you deliver a product, you can " +"decide to separate the quantity into two different packages. It then allows " +"you to have a report with the quantity of products for each package." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:50 +msgid "Packaging" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:52 +msgid "" +"The packaging is the physical container that protects your product. If you " +"are selling computers, the packaging contains the computer with the notice " +"and the power plug." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:56 +msgid "" +"In Odoo, packagings are used for indicative purposes on sale orders. They " +"can be specified on the product form, in the inventory tab." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:66 +msgid "" +"Another useful use of the packaging is for product reception. By scanning " +"the barcode of the packaging, Odoo adds the number of units contained in the" +" packing on the picking." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies.rst:3 +msgid "Inventory Adjustment" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:3 +msgid "Choose Between Reordering Rules and Make to Order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:5 +msgid "" +"*Reordering rules* and *make to order* do both allow to automatically " +"replenish products when necessary. The difference between those tools is how" +" they are triggered." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:9 +msgid "" +"*Reordering rules* are used to ensure that you always have a minimum amount " +"of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or answer to" +" your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its minimum " +"the system will automatically generate a procurement with the needed " +"quantity to reach the maximum stock level." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:15 +msgid "" +"The *Make to Order* route will trigger a procurement (purchase order or " +"manufacturing order) with the necessary quantity to fulfill a product " +"request (coming from a sale order or a manufacturing order). The system will" +" check the quantity on hand for the corresponding product and if the " +"available quantity is higher or equal to the necessary quantity, Odoo will " +"use what is in stock to fulfill the request. In case you don’t have enough " +"available stock to fully fulfill the product request, procurement will be " +"generated for the total quantity requested." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:28 +msgid "Reordering Rules" +msgstr "قواعد إعادة الطلب" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:30 +msgid "" +"The *Reordering Rules* configuration is available through the menu " +"*Inventory > Master Data > Reordering Rules*. There, click on *Create* to " +"set minimum and maximum stock values for a given product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:37 +msgid "" +"When the forecasted stock goes below the *Minimum Quantity* specified in " +"this field, Odoo generates a procurement to bring the forecasted quantity to" +" the *Maximum Quantity*. The *Quantity Multiple* is used to round the " +"procurement quantity up to this multiple. If it is 0, the exact quantity " +"will be used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:46 +msgid "" +"The *Lead time* is the number of days after the order point is triggered to " +"receive the products or to order them to the vendor." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:49 +msgid "" +"In case you work with multi-warehouses and/or multi-locations, you will be " +"able to specify different reordering rules for the same product in each " +"location." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:54 +msgid "" +"For the reordering rules to be triggered, on the corresponding product, a " +"route should be specified. In case you manufacture your products, make sure " +"to select the route *Manufacture* and create a *Bill of Material* for the " +"product. In case you purchase your products, make sure to select the route " +"*Buy* and add a *Vendor Pricelist*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:66 +msgid "" +"Don't forget to select the product type *storable* in the product form. A " +"consumable can not be stocked and won’t trigger reordering rules." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:73 +msgid "" +"The *Make To Order* configuration is available on your product form through " +"your *Inventory module > Master Data > Products* (or in any other module " +"where products are available)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:77 +msgid "" +"On the product form, in the *Inventory tab*, you can set a route. You can " +"choose *Make To Order* and another route, either *Buy* or *Manufacture*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:81 +msgid "" +"Again, if the *Buy* route is selected, make sure to set a *Vendor pricelist*" +" in the *Purchase tab*. In case you have set a *Manufacture* route, male " +"sure you have a *BoM* for this product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:3 +msgid "Resupply from another Warehouse" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:8 +msgid "" +"In order to be able to resupply from another warehouse, you need to activate" +" \\*multi-warehouses\\* and \\*multi-step routes\\*. Storage locations will " +"be automatically activated when activating multi-warehouses." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:16 +msgid "" +"You can then access your warehouses via \\*Inventory > Configuration > " +"Warehouses\\*. Create the necessary warehouses following this " +"`*documentation* " +"`__." +" Enter the warehouse which should be resupplied by another one. You will " +"have the possibility to directly indicate through which warehouse it gets " +"resupplied." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:26 +msgid "" +"By activating this option, a new route will now be available on your " +"products \\*Supply Product from Second warehouse\\*. It can now be selected," +" along with either a \\*reordering rule\\* or a \\*make to order\\*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:34 +msgid "" +"For the demonstration, I set a reordering rule with a minimum of 5 units in " +"stock and a maximum of 10 units in stock, having currently 0 units on hand. " +"I will run the scheduler by going to \\*Inventory > Operations > Run " +"scheduler\\*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:42 +msgid "" +"The system automatically creates two pickings, one \\*delivery order\\* from" +" my Second Warehouse which contains the necessary products, and a receipt in" +" my main warehouse WH/Stock for the same products. The source document is " +"the \\*reordering rule\\* which triggered the route \\*Supply Product from " +"Second warehouse\\*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/reporting.rst:3 @@ -3572,12 +3708,6 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:282 #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:263 #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:281 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:30 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:45 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:52 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:57 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:64 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:72 msgid "Configuration:" msgstr "" @@ -4013,956 +4143,359 @@ msgid "" "internal category" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts.rst:3 -msgid "Main Concepts" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:5 -msgid "Introduction to Inventory Management" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:7 -msgid "" -"A double-entry inventory has no stock input, output (disparition of " -"products) or transformation. Instead, all operations are stock moves between" -" locations (possibly virtual)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:16 -msgid "Operations" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:18 -msgid "" -"Stock moves represent the transit of goods and materials between locations." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:30 -msgid "Production Order" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:24 -msgid "Consume:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "2 Wheels: Stock → Production" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bike Frame: Stock → Production" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:26 -msgid "Produce:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:27 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Production → Stock" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Stock: the location the Manufacturing Order is initiated from" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Production: on the product form, field \"Production Location\"" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:36 -msgid "Drop-shipping" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:33 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Supplier → Customer" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:36 -msgid "Configurarion:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Supplier: on the product form" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Customer: on the sale order itself" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:45 -msgid "Client Delivery" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:39 -msgid "Pick" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:40 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Stock → Packing Zone" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:41 -msgid "Pack" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:42 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Packing Zone → Output" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:43 -#: ../../inventory/shipping.rst:3 -msgid "Shipping" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:44 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Output → Customer" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "on the pick+pack+ship route for the warehouse" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:52 -msgid "Inter-Warehouse transfer" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:49 -msgid "Transfer:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Warehouse 1 → Transit" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Transit → Warehouse 2" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Warehouse 2: the location the transfer is initiated from" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Warehouse 1: on the transit route" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:57 -msgid "Broken Product (scrapped)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:55 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Warehouse → Scrap" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:58 -msgid "Scrap: Scrap Location when creating the scrapping" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:60 -msgid "Missing products in inventory" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:61 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Warehouse → Inventory Loss" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:62 -msgid "Extra products in inventory" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:63 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Inventory Loss → Warehouse" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:65 -msgid "Inventory Loss: \"Inventory Location\" field on the product" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:72 -msgid "Reception" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Supplier → Input" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Input → Stock" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Supplier: purchase order supplier" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Input: \"destination\" field on the purchase order" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:75 -msgid "Analysis" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:77 -msgid "" -"Inventory analysis can use products count or products value (= number of " -"products * product cost)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:80 -msgid "For each inventory location, multiple data points can be analysed:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:148 -msgid "Procurements & Procurement Rules" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:150 -msgid "" -"A procurement is a request for a specific quantity of products to a specific" -" location. They can be created manually or automatically triggered by:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:159 -msgid "New sale orders" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:157 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:162 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:168 -msgid "Effect" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:157 -msgid "" -"A procurement is created at the customer location for every product ordered " -"by the customer (you have to deliver the customer)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:160 -msgid "" -"Procurement Location: on the customer, field \"Customer Location\" " -"(property)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:164 -msgid "Minimum Stock Rules" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:163 -msgid "A procurement is created at the rule's location." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:165 -msgid "Procurement location: on the rule, field \"Location\"" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:168 -msgid "Procurement rules" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:168 -msgid "A new procurement is created on the rule's source location" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:170 -msgid "" -"*Procurement rules* describe how procurements on specific locations should " -"be fulfilled e.g.:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:173 -msgid "where the product should come from (source location)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:174 -msgid "" -"whether the procurement is :abbr:`MTO (Made To Order)` or :abbr:`MTS (Made " -"To Stock)`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:179 -msgid "needs schema thing from FP" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:182 -msgid "Routes" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:184 -msgid "" -"Procurement rules are grouped in routes. Routes define paths the product " -"must follow. Routes may be applicable or not, depending on the products, " -"sales order lines, warehouse,..." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:188 -msgid "" -"To fulfill a procurement, the system will search for rules belonging to " -"routes that are defined in (by order of priority):" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:202 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses.rst:3 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses.rst:3 msgid "Warehouses" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:194 -msgid "Warehouse Route Example: Pick → Pack → Ship" +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:3 +msgid "What is the difference between warehouses and locations?" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:196 -msgid "Picking List:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:197 -msgid "Pick Zone → Pack Zone" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:198 -msgid "Pack List:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:199 -msgid "Pack Zone → Gate A" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:201 -msgid "Delivery Order:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:201 -msgid "Gate A → Customer" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:203 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:5 msgid "" -"Routes that describe how you organize your warehouse should be defined on " -"the warehouse." +"In Odoo, a **Warehouse** is the actual building/place in which your items " +"are stocked. You can setup multiple warehouses and create moves between " +"warehouses." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:212 -msgid "A Product" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:205 -msgid "Product Route Example: Quality Control" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:207 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:217 -msgid "Reception:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:208 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:218 -msgid "Supplier → Input" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:209 -msgid "Confirmation:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:210 -msgid "Input → Quality Control" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:212 -msgid "Storage:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:212 -msgid "Quality Control → Stock" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:221 -msgid "Product Category" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:215 -msgid "Product Category Route Example: cross-dock" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:219 -msgid "Cross-Docks:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:220 -msgid "Input → Output" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:221 -msgid "Delivery:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:222 -msgid "Output → Customer" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:227 -msgid "Sale Order Line" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:224 -msgid "Sale Order Line Example: Drop-shipping" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:227 -msgid "Order:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:227 -msgid "Supplier → Customer" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:230 -msgid "Push Rules" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:232 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:9 msgid "" -"Push rules trigger when products enter a specific location. They " -"automatically move the product to a new location. Whether a push rule can be" -" used depends on applicable routes." +"A **Location**, is a specific space within your warehouse. It can be " +"considered as a sublocation of your warehouse, as a shelf, a floor, an " +"aisle, etc. Therefore, a location is part of one warehouse only and it is " +"not possible to link one location to multiple warehouses. You can configure " +"as much locations as you need under one warehouse." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:240 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:88 -msgid "Quality Control" +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:15 +msgid "There are 3 types of locations:" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:239 -msgid "Product lands in Input" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:240 -msgid "Push 1: Input → Quality Control" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:241 -msgid "Push 2: Quality Control → Stock" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:244 -msgid "Warehouse Transit" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:243 -msgid "Product lands in Transit" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:244 -msgid "Push: Transit → Warehouse 2" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:247 -msgid "Procurement Groups" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:249 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:17 msgid "" -"Routes and rules define inventory moves. For every rule, a document type is " -"provided:" +"The **Physical Locations** are internal locations that are part of the " +"warehouses for which you are the owner. They can be the loading and " +"unloading area of your warehouse, a shelf or a department, etc." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:252 -msgid "Picking" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:253 -msgid "Packing" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:254 -msgid "Delivery Order" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:255 -msgid "Purchase Order" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:256 -msgid "..." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:258 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:21 msgid "" -"Moves are grouped within the same document type if their procurement group " -"and locations are the same." +"The **Partner Locations** are spaces within a customer and/or vendor's " +"warehouse. They work the same way as Physical Locations with the only " +"difference being that you are not the owner of the warehouse." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:261 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:25 msgid "" -"A sale order creates a procurement group so that pickings and delivery " -"orders of the same order are grouped. But you can define specific groups on " -"reordering rules too. (e.g. to group purchases of specific products " -"together)" +"The **Virtual Locations** are places that do not exist, but in which " +"products can be placed when they are not physically in an inventory yet (or " +"anymore). They come in handy when you want to place lost products out of " +"your stock (in the **Inventory loss**), or when you want to take into " +"account products that are on their way to your warehouse (**Procurements**)." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:3 -msgid "Terminologies" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:31 msgid "" -"**Warehouse**: A warehouse in Odoo is a location where you store products. " -"It is either a physical or a virtual warehouse. It could be a store or a " -"repository." +"In Odoo, locations are structured hierarchically. You can structure your " +"locations as a tree, dependent on a parent-child relationship. This gives " +"you more detailed levels of analysis of your stock operations and the " +"organization of your warehouses." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:9 -msgid "" -"**Location**: Locations are used to structure storage zones within a " -"warehouse. In addition to internal locations (your warehouse), Odoo has " -"locations for suppliers, customers, inventory loss counter-parts, etc." +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:37 +msgid ":doc:`warehouse_creation`" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:14 -msgid "" -"**Lots**: Lots are a batch of products identified with a unique barcode or " -"serial number. All items of a lot are from the same product. (e.g. a set of " -"24 bottle) Usually, lots come from manufacturing order batches or " -"procurements." +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:38 +msgid ":doc:`location_creation`" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:19 -msgid "" -"**Serial Number**: A serial number is a unique identifier of a specific " -"product. Technically, serial numbers are similar to having a lot of 1 unique" -" item." +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:3 +msgid "Create a New Location" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:23 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:8 msgid "" -"**Unit of Measure**: Define how the quantity of products is expressed. " -"Meters, Pounds, Pack of 24, Kilograms,… Unit of measure of the same category" -" (ex: size) can be converted to each others (m, cm, mm) using a fixed ratio." +"In order to be able to create different locations, you will need to activate" +" *Multi-Locations* in the settings which can be done from the *Inventory " +"application > Configuration > Settings*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:28 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:15 msgid "" -"**Consumable**: A product for which you do not want to manage the inventory " -"level (no quantity on hand or forecasted) but that you can receive and " -"deliver. When this product is needed Odoo suppose that you always have " -"enough stock." +"In the *Inventory application*, you can now go to *Configuration > " +"Locations* and hit *Create* in order to create a new location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:33 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:21 msgid "" -"**Stockable**: A product for which you want to manage the inventory level." +"Type the name of the location in the *Location Name* field, and select the " +"*Parent Location* in the list. The parent location can be a physical, " +"partner or virtual location, and you can add as many sub-locations as needed" +" to a location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:36 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:29 msgid "" -"**Package:** A package contains several products (identified by their serial" -" number/lots or not). Example: a box containing knives and forks." +"In case you want the location to be suggested when creating a Return or when" +" Scrapping a product, you should check *Is a Scrap Location?* and *Is a " +"Return Location?*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:40 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:33 msgid "" -"**Procurement**: A procurement is a request for a specific quantity of " -"products to a specific location. Procurement are automatically triggered by " -"other documents: Sale orders, Minimum Stock Rules, and Procurement rules. " -"You can trigger the procurement manually. When procurements are triggered " -"automatically, you should always pay attention for the exceptions (e.g. a " -"product should be purchased from a vendor, but no supplier is defined)." +"If you have the *Barcode* application installed, you can specify the barcode" +" which will correspond to this location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:48 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:37 msgid "" -"**Routes**: Routes define paths the product must follow. Routes may be " -"applicable or not, depending on the products, sales order lines, warehouse,…" -" To fulfill a procurement, the system will search for rules belonging to " -"routes that are defined in the related product/sale order." +"A warehouse also corresponds to a location. As the locations are " +"hierarchical, Odoo will create the parent location of the warehouse, " +"containing all the sublocations in it." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:54 -msgid "" -"**Push Rules**: Push rules trigger when products enter a specific location. " -"They automatically move the product to a new location. Whether a push rule " -"can be used depends on applicable routes." +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:3 +msgid "Create a New Warehouse" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:58 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:8 msgid "" -"**Procurement Rules** or **Pull Rules**: Procurement rules describe how " -"procurements on specific locations should be fulfilled e.g.: where the " -"product should come from (source location), whether the procurement is MTO " -"or MTS,..." +"In order to create a new warehouse, you should activate the *Multi-" +"Warehouse* settings. Note that the *Multi-Locations* settings will be " +"automatically activated at the same time." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:63 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:12 msgid "" -"**Procurement Group**: Routes and rules define inventory moves. For every " -"rule, a document type is provided: Picking, Packing, Delivery Order, " -"Purchase Order,… Moves are grouped within the same document type if their " -"procurement group and locations are the same." +"In order to do so, go to the *Inventory app > Configuration > Settings*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:69 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:18 msgid "" -"**Stock Moves**: Stock moves represent the transit of goods and materials " -"between locations." +"You can then go to *Inventory > Configuration > Warehouses* and hit *Create*" +" to add a new warehouse." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:72 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:24 msgid "" -"**Quantity On Hand**: The quantity of a specific product that is currently " -"in a warehouse or location." +"You will be able to enter your warehouse name. You should also choose a " +"short name for your warehouse which is 5-characters long and is used on the " +"different warehouse documents." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:75 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:28 msgid "" -"**Forecasted Quantity**: The quantity of products you can sell for a " -"specific warehouse or location. It is defined as the Quantity on Hand - " -"Future Delivery Orders + Future incoming shipments + Future manufactured " -"units." +"In the Address field, you can select an existing company or create one on-" +"the-go. Therefore, the address of your warehouse will be the same as the one" +" of the company you selected. You can also leave this field empty and edit " +"it afterward." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:80 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:36 msgid "" -"**Reordering Rules**: It defines the conditions for Odoo to automatically " -"trigger a request for procurement (buying at a supplier or launching a " -"manufacturing order). It is triggered when the forecasted quantity meets the" -" minimum stock rule." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:85 -msgid "" -"**Cross-Dock**: Cross-docking is a practice in the logistics of unloading " -"materials from an incoming semi-trailer truck or railroad car and loading " -"these materials directly into outbound trucks, trailers, or rail cars, with " -"no storage in between. (does not go to the stock, directly from incoming to " -"packing zone)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:91 -msgid "" -"**Drop-Shipping**: move products from the vendor/manufacturer directly to " -"the customer (could be retailer or consumer) without going through the usual" -" distribution channels. Products are sent directly from the vendor to the " -"customer, without passing through your own warehouse." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:97 -msgid "" -"**Removal Strategies**: the strategy to use to select which product to pick " -"for a specific operation. Example: FIFO, LIFO, FEFO." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:100 -msgid "" -"**Putaway Strategies**: the strategy to use to decide in which location a " -"specific product should be set when arriving somewhere. (example: cables " -"goes in rack 3, storage A)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:104 -msgid "" -"**Scrap**: A product that is broken or outdated. Scrapping a product removes" -" it from the stock." +"After the creation of your new warehouse, you can go back to the *Dashboard*" +" and you will see the new operation types automatically created by Odoo due " +"to the creation of a new warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/overview/process.rst:3 msgid "Process Overview" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:3 -msgid "From procurement to delivery" +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:3 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:25 +msgid "Deliver Products from Stock" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:6 +msgid "Create Storable/Consumable Products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:5 msgid "" -"Inventory is the heart of your business. It can be really complicated, but " -"with Odoo, doing a receipt or a delivery has never been easier. We will show" -" you in this document how easy to do a full process, from the receipt to the" -" delivery." +"The first step to use the inventory application is to create products in " +"your database via the menu *Master Data > Products*. Click the Create button" +" and enter the name of your product." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:12 msgid "" -"Odoo inventory is fully integrated with other applications, such as " -"**Purchase**, **Sales** or **Inventory**. But is not limited to those " -"processes, it is also fully integrated with our **e-Commerce**, " -"**Manufacturing** and **Repairs** applications." +"In case you set the product as *storable*, you will track the stock for this" +" product and know how many units are in stock and what is the forecasted " +"number of units. If you want to include a product on receipts/deliveries but" +" don’t need to track its stock, you can set it as *consumable*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:19 -msgid "How to process a receipt ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:22 -msgid "Install Purchase application" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:24 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:27 msgid "" -"First, you will need to install the **Purchase Management** application. Go " -"to :menuselection:`Apps` and install it." +"Once you have existing products, you can decide to create a delivery to " +"deliver products to your customers. The process in order to do so is " +"described in the following print screens." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:31 -msgid "Make a purchase order" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:33 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:37 msgid "" -"Go to the **Purchases** applications. The first screen is the **Request for " -"Quotation** list. Click on the **Create** button." +"On the delivery order, you can specify to whom the products will be " +"delivered along with the different products and their respective quantities." +" When the delivery is complete you can hit *Validate* and the products will " +"go out of your stock." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:36 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:45 msgid "" -"Fill in the **Vendor** information and click on **Add an Item** to add some " -"products to your request for quotation." +"In case you have a delivery that is planned but shouldn’t be immediately " +"validated, you can create a *planned delivery* with a scheduled date in the " +"future. You can indicate the initial demand for each product, corresponding " +"to what has been ordered by your customer. Once the document is filled in, " +"you can hit “Mark as to do” in order to consider it in your product " +"forecasts." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:42 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:56 +msgid "Deliver Products from Stock from a Sale Order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:58 msgid "" -"Click on **Confirm order** when you are sure about the products, prices and " -"quantity." +"If you have the *Sales* application installed, delivery can be directly " +"created by *validating a quotation*. You will be able to find the " +"corresponding delivery directly on the *sale order*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:46 -msgid "Retrieve the Receipt" +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:3 +msgid "Set your Initial Stock" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:48 -msgid "You can retrieve the receipt order in 2 ways:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:51 -msgid "From the purchase order" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:53 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:12 msgid "" -"On the top right of your purchase order, you will see a button with the " -"related **Receipt**:" +"Set the product as *storable*, in order to track the stock for this product " +"and be able to include it in an inventory adjustment." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:59 -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:136 -msgid "Click on it to see the **Transfer order**." +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:19 +msgid "Inventory Adjustment for Multiple Products" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:62 -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:139 -msgid "From the Inventory Dashboard" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:64 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:21 msgid "" -"When opening the **Inventory** application, click on **# to receive** to see" -" the list of your deliveries to process." +"Once you have created all your *storable products*, you can create an " +"*inventory adjustment* to determine their current stock level in Odoo. You " +"therefore need to go to *Operations > Inventory Adjustments* and create a " +"new one." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:70 -msgid "In the list, click on the one related to the purchase order:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:76 -msgid "Process the Receipt" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:81 -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:162 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:29 msgid "" -"To process the stock transfer. Simply click on **Validate** to complete the " -"transfer. A message will appear asking if you want to process the whole " -"order, accept it by clicking on **Apply**." +"You have to enter a title for your *inventory adjustment* and you can then " +"decide if you want to proceed to the *inventory adjustment* of all products " +"or only some of them. For a first *inventory adjustment*, I suggest you to " +"keep the *Products* field empty. You can then *Start Inventory*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:86 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:38 msgid "" -"Procurements can be automated. Please read our document " -":doc:`../../management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto` for more " -"information." +"If you already have some products in stock, Odoo will add the lines with the" +" theoretical quantity currently in stock. You can also add new lines with " +"your other products." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:91 -msgid "How to process a delivery order ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:94 -msgid "Install Sales application" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:96 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:46 msgid "" -"First, you will need to install the **Sales Management** application. Go to " -":menuselection:`Apps` and install it." +"If your products are tracked by Serial/Lot numbers, you will have an " +"additional column allowing you to specify those for the different units " +"added to the inventory adjustment." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:103 -msgid "Place a sale order" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:105 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:50 msgid "" -"Go to the **Sales** applications. Click on the **Quotations** button of your" -" team." +"Odoo will highlight in red the lines for which there is a difference between" +" the theoretical quantity on hand, which is automatically computed by the " +"system, and the counted quantity you manually entered. Once all the " +"necessary products have been entered, you can hit *Validate Inventory* and " +"the quantities on hand of your different products will be updated." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:111 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:58 +msgid "Inventory Adjustment for one Product" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:60 msgid "" -"You will get the list of all your quotations. Click on the **Create** " -"button." +"On each storable product, you have access to the *Update Quantity* button." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:114 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:66 msgid "" -"Fill in the **Customer informations** and click on **Add an Item** to add " -"some products to your quotation." +"When clicking this button, you see the current stock you have for this " +"product. You can edit the existing lines or create new ones to add stock of " +"your product in different locations and/or add new serial/lot numbers." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:120 -msgid "Click on **Confirm sale** to place the order." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:123 -msgid "Retrieve the Delivery order" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:125 -msgid "You can retrieve the delivery order in 2 ways:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:128 -msgid "From the sale order" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:130 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:74 msgid "" -"On the top right of your sale order, you will see a button with the related " -"**Delivery**:" +"Once you come back to your product, you see that the quantity on hand as " +"been updated taking your modification into account." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:141 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:81 msgid "" -"When opening the **Inventory** application, click on **# to do** to see the " -"list of your receipts to process." +"If you work with product variants, the quantity on hand will show you the " +"total quantity in stock for the product template, taking the different " +"variants into account." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:147 -msgid "In the list, click on the one related to the sale order:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:153 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:85 msgid "" -"If the product is not in stock, the sale order will be listed as **Waiting**" -" on your dashboard." +"By default, the quantity on hand of the product form will show you the " +"number of products that are part of your warehouse view location, meaning " +"which are part of an internal type sub-location of this warehouse. It means " +"that if you have any product in a location that isn’t under the main " +"warehouse location, they won’t appear in the stock on hand stat button." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:157 -msgid "Process the delivery" +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:3 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:22 +msgid "Receive Products in Stock" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:167 -msgid "E-Commerce orders are processed the same way." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:170 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:24 msgid "" -"You can easily integrate your delivery orders with different delivery " -"methods. Please read the document " -":doc:`../../shipping/setup/delivery_method`." +"Once you have existing products, you can decide to create a receipt to enter" +" products from your supplier in stock. The process in order to do so is " +"described in the following print screens." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:175 -msgid "Advanced flows" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:177 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:34 msgid "" -"In this document, the flows that are explained are the most simple ones. " -"Odoo also suit for companies having advanced warehouse management." +"On the receipt document, you can select the quantity of the different " +"products you receive and the supplier from who you received them. When the " +"receipt is complete, you can hit *Validate* and the products will enter your" +" stock." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:180 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:42 msgid "" -"By default, only **receipts** and **deliveries** are configured but you can " -"activate the use of multi-locations and multi-warehouses to do **internal " -"transfers**." +"In case you have a receipt that is planned but shouldn’t be immediately " +"validated, you can create a *planned receipt* with a scheduled date in the " +"future. You can indicate the initial demand for each product, corresponding " +"to what has been ordered to your supplier. Once the document is filled in, " +"you can hit “Mark as to do” in order to consider it in your product " +"forecasts." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:184 -msgid "**Routes**: you can automate flows with push and pull rules" +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:56 +msgid "Receive Products in Stock from Purchase Orders" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:186 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:58 msgid "" -"**Multi-step** receipts and deliveries can be easily configured for each " -"warehouse" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:189 -msgid "" -"Much more: **Barcode scanning**, **serial numbers**, **lots**, **cross-" -"docking**, **dropshipping**, integration with a **third-party** shipper, " -"**putaway** and **removal** strategies.... All of it is possible with Odoo." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start.rst:3 -msgid "Getting Started" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:3 -msgid "How to setup Odoo inventory?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:5 -msgid "" -"The Odoo Inventory application has an implementation guide that you should " -"follow to configure it. It's a step-by-step manual with links to the " -"different screens you need." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:9 -msgid "" -"Once you have installed the **Inventory** application, click on the top-" -"right progress bar to get access to the implementation guide." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:15 -msgid "The implementation guide helps you through the following steps:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:17 -msgid "Set up your warehouse" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:19 -msgid "Import your vendors" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:21 -msgid "Import your products" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:23 -msgid "Set up the initial inventory" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:25 -msgid "Configure your sales and purchase flows" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:27 -msgid "Set up replenishment mechanisms" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:29 -msgid "" -"Configure advanced features like package, traceability, routes and inventory" -" valuation." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:37 -msgid "" -"If you want to set up operations with barcode scanner in your warehouse, you" -" should install the **Barcode** application that adds features on top of the" -" inventory application. The barcode application will guide you to configure " -"and use your scanner optimally." +"If you have the *Purchase* application installed, receipts can be directly " +"created by validating a *request for quotation*. You will be able to find " +"the corresponding receipt directly on the *purchase order*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes.rst:3 @@ -4974,115 +4507,87 @@ msgid "Concepts" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:3 -msgid "How to organize a cross-dock in your warehouse?" +msgid "Organize a cross-dock in a warehouse" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:5 msgid "" -"Cross dock area is temporarily area where we are not storing any product " -"instead just managing place according to delivery for further customer. This" -" will save lot of time for inter warehouse transfer and storing process. We " -"are managing our products with docking area where product directly place " -"from supplier location and transfer this to gate pass for customer delivery." +"Cross-docking is the process of sending products that are received directly " +"to the customers, without making them enter the stock. The trucks are simply" +" unloaded in a *Cross-Dock* area in order to reorganize products and load " +"another truck." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:17 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:11 msgid "" -"For more information on how to organise your warehouse, read `What is cross " -"docking and is it for me? `_" +"For more information on how to organize your warehouse, read our blog: `What" +" is cross-docking and is it for me? `__" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:24 -msgid "Warehouse and routes" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:26 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:15 msgid "" -"In the **Inventory** module, open :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings" -" --> Location & Warehouse`, then in **Routes**, select **Advanced routing of" -" products using rules**, then click on **Apply**." +"In the *Inventory* app, open *Configuration > Settings* and activate the " +"*Multi-Step Routes*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:33 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:21 +msgid "Doing so will also enable the *Storage Locations* feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:23 msgid "" -"Open :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouse Management --> Warehouses`," -" then open the warehouse you want to cross-dock from and click on **Edit**." +"Now, both *Incoming* and *Outgoing* shipments should be configured to work " +"with 2 steps. To adapt the configuration, go to *Inventory > Configuration >" +" Warehouses* and edit your warehouse." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:28 +msgid "" +"This modification will lead to the creation of a *Cross-Docking* route that " +"can be found in *Inventory > Configuration > Routes*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:34 +msgid "Configure products with Cross-Dock Route" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:36 -msgid "In the **Warehouse Configuration** tab, select:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:38 msgid "" -"**Incoming Shipments**: Unload in input location then go to stock (2 steps)" +"Create the product that uses the *Cross-Dock Route* and then, in the " +"inventory tab, select the routes *Buy* and *Cross-Dock*. Now, in the " +"purchase tab, specify the vendor to who you buy the product and set a price " +"for it." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:41 -msgid "**Outgoing Shipments**: Ship directly from stock (Ship only)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:43 -msgid "then click on **Save**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:48 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:44 msgid "" -"This steps has generated a cross-docking route that you can see in " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configurations --> Routes --> Routes`." +"Once done, create a sale order for the product and confirm it. Odoo will " +"automatically create two transfers which will be linked to the sale order. " +"The first one is the transfer from the *Input Location* to the *Output " +"Location*, corresponding to the move of the product in the *Cross-Dock* " +"area. The second one is the delivery order from the *Output Location* to " +"your *Customer Location. Both are in state *Waiting Another Operation* " +"because we still need to order the product to our supplier." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:52 -msgid "Cross Docking Route" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:54 msgid "" -"We will use the route **Buy** for first part of the flow and create a route " -"for the remaining part:" +"Now, go to the *Purchase* app. There, you will find the purchase order that " +"has been automatically triggered by the system. Validate it and receive the " +"products in the *Input Location*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:60 msgid "" -"Each of the procurement rule will now be configured. Cross Dock location is " -"created as an internal physical location." +"When the products have been received from the supplier, you can go back to " +"your initial sale order and validate the internal transfer from *Input* to " +"*Output*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:67 -msgid ":menuselection:`Input --> Cross Dock`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:73 -msgid ":menuselection:`Cross Dock --> Output`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:79 -msgid ":menuselection:`Output --> Customer`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:82 -msgid "Product with cross dock" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:84 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:68 msgid "" -"We have created the Vegetable Fennel product and assigned the routes created" -" above as well as the **Buy** route." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:87 -msgid "" -"We have also specified a supplier and a minimum order rule which is needed " -"for replenishment of a stockable product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:95 -msgid ":doc:`use_routes`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:96 -msgid ":doc:`../../management/incoming/two_steps`" +"The delivery order is now ready to be processed and can be validated too." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:3 @@ -5111,7 +4616,6 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:26 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:9 msgid "Creating a new warehouse" msgstr "" @@ -5448,6 +4952,66 @@ msgstr "" msgid ":doc:`procurement_rule`" msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:3 +msgid "Taking stock from different warehouses" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When you plan to deliver a customer, you don’t know in advance if the " +"products will come from Warehouse A or Warehouse B. You may, in some cases, " +"need to take stock from different warehouses. With *Odoo*, you can configure" +" this by using the concept of virtual warehouses. Let us show you how to set" +" those virtual warehouses." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:8 +msgid "Set up virtual warehouses" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:10 +msgid "" +"Let’s say you have two warehouses: Warehouse A and Warehouse B. Create a new" +" warehouse, that will be a virtual one. It will allow you to take the stock " +"from A or B. To do so, go to your inventory app settings and enable the " +"multi-warehouses feature. Then, go to the warehouses menu and click on " +"create." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:16 +msgid "" +"The *Storage Location* feature will be automatically enabled. Good news, " +"because you will need it later in the process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:18 +msgid "" +"Now, you have to make sure that the main stock locations of warehouse A and " +"warehouse B are children locations of the main stock location of warehouse A" +" + B. Go to the locations menu, and edit the main location of your two " +"warehouses. Then, change their parent location to main location of warehouse" +" A+B." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:24 +msgid "Sell a product from the virtual warehouse" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:26 +msgid "" +"Let’s say you have two products, one stored in warehouse A and one stored in" +" warehouse B. Now, you can create a new quotation for one of each product. " +"Go to other information and choose Warehouse A+B in the shipping " +"information." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:31 +msgid "" +"Once you have done it, you can convert it to a sales order. Then, a delivery" +" order will be automatically generated, with a product reserved in warehouse" +" A and one in warehouse B." +msgstr "" + #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:3 msgid "How to use routes?" msgstr "" @@ -5674,94 +5238,68 @@ msgid "Putaway & Removal Strategies" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:3 -msgid "What is a putaway strategy?" +msgid "What is a Putaway Rule?" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:5 msgid "" "A good warehouse implementation takes care that products automatically move " -"to their appropriate destination location. Putaway is the process of taking " -"products off the receiving shipment and putting them into the most " -"appropriate location." +"to their appropriate destination location. To make that process easier, Odoo" +" uses *Putaway rules*. But what is a putaway rule? Putaway is the process of" +" taking products off the receiving shipments and directly putting them into " +"the most appropriate location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:7 msgid "" -"If for instance a warehouse contains volatile substances, it is important to" -" make sure that certain products are not stored close to each other because " -"of a potential chemical reaction." +"If, for example, a warehouse contains volatile substances, it is important " +"to make sure that certain products are not stored close to each other " +"because of a potential chemical reaction. That’s where putaway rules " +"intervene, to avoid storing products wrongly." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:17 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:12 msgid "" -"A putaway strategy follows the same principle as removal strategies but " -"affects the destination location. Putaway strategies are defined at the " -"location level (unlike removal strategies which are defined at the product " -"level)." +"In the *Inventory* app, go to *Configuration > Settings* and activate the " +"*Multi-Step Routes*. By doing so, the *Storage Locations* will be " +"automatically activated." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:18 +msgid "Setting up a Putaway Rule" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:20 msgid "" -"Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings` and check " -"option **Manage several location per warehouse & Advance routing of products" -" using rules**, then click on **Apply**." +"In some cases, like for a retail shop storing vegetables and fruits, we have" +" to store products in different locations to maintain product quality." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:33 -msgid "Setting up a strategy" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:35 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:22 msgid "" -"Let's take as an example a retail shop where we store vegetables and fruits." +"Let’s suppose there are one warehouse location *WH/Stock* and two sub-" +"locations *WH/Stock/Vegatable* and *WH/Stock/Fruits*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:24 msgid "" -"We have to store this type of product in different locations to maintain " -"product quality." +"To manage those locations, we will create putaway rules. To do so, open the " +"*Inventory* app and go to *Configuration > Putaway Rules*. Then, click on " +"create and configure your first rule indicating the main location the " +"product will enter before being redirected to the right location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:41 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:27 msgid "" -"Suppose there is one warehouse location **WH/Stock** and there is sub " -"location **WH/Stock/Vegetables** & **WH/Stock/Fruits**." +"The putaway rules can be defined either per product or per product category." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:44 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:32 msgid "" -"You can create a putaway strategy from :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Configuration --> Locations`. Open any location where you want to set a " -"putaway strategy, click on **Edit** and locate the option **Put Away " -"Strategy**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:52 -msgid "" -"Open the roll-down menu and click on **Create and Edit**. This will open a " -"form view of put away strategy on which you have to set a name for the " -"strategy, and set the method and fixed location for each category." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:59 -msgid "" -"When you have entered all the necessary information, click on **Save**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:61 -msgid "" -"Now, when you purchase products with those categories, they will " -"automatically be transferred to the correct location." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:64 -msgid "" -"To check current inventory, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory " -"Control --> Current Inventory`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:67 -msgid "There you can see current inventory by location." +"Now, if I purchase apples and carrots to my supplier, they will be grouped " +"in the same receipt but redirected to the right location automatically, " +"thanks to putaway rules. This information is available from *Inventory " +"Report*, under the reporting menu." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:3 @@ -6064,837 +5602,8 @@ msgstr "" msgid ":doc:`../../management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon`" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/settings.rst:3 -msgid "Settings" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products.rst:3 -msgid "Products" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:3 -msgid "How to select the right replenishment strategy" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:5 -msgid "" -"Minimum Stock rules and Make to Order have similar consequences but " -"different rules. They should be used depending on your manufacturing and " -"delivery strategies." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:15 -msgid "" -"Minimum Stock rules are used to ensure that you always have the minimum " -"amount of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or " -"answer to your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its" -" minimum the system will automatically generate a procurement order with the" -" quantity needed to reach the maximum stock level." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:24 -msgid "" -"The Make to Order function will trigger a Purchase Order of the amount of " -"the Sales Order related to the product. The system will **not** check the " -"current stock. This means that a draft purchase order will be generated " -"regardless of the quantity on hand of the product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:35 -msgid "" -"The Minimum Stock Rules configuration is available through your Inventory " -"module. In the Inventory Control menu select \"Reordering Rule\" in the drop" -" down menu. There, click on \"Create\" to set minimum and maximum stock " -"values for a given product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:44 -msgid "" -"Show tooltips for \"minimum quantity\", \"maximum quantity\" and \"quantity " -"multiple\" fields" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:47 -msgid "" -"Then, click on your product to access the related product form and, on the " -"\"Inventory submenu\", do not forget to select a supplier." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:54 -msgid "" -"Don't forget to select the right product type. A consumable can not be " -"stocked and will thus not be accounted for in the stock valuation." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:60 -msgid "" -"The Make to Order configuration is available on your product form through " -"your :menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory control --> Products` (or any " -"other module where products are available)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:64 -msgid "On the product form, under Inventory, click on \"Make To Order\"." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:3 -msgid "How to use different units of measure?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:8 -msgid "" -"In some cases, handling products in different unit of measures is necessary." -" For example, if you buy products in a country where the metric system is of" -" application and sell them in a country where the imperial system is used, " -"you will need to convert the units." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:13 -msgid "" -"You can set up Odoo to work with different units of measure for one product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:19 -msgid "" -"In the **Inventory** application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`. In the **Products** section, select **Some products may be " -"sold/purchased in different units of measure (advanced)**, then click on " -"**Apply**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:27 -msgid "Setting up units on your products" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:29 -msgid "" -"In :menuselection:`Master Data --> Products`, open the product which you " -"would like to change the purchase/sale unit of measure, and click on " -"**Edit**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:32 -msgid "" -"In the **Unit of Measure** section, select the unit in which the product " -"will be sold and in which internal transfers will be done." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:35 -msgid "" -"In the **Purchase Unit of Measure** section, select the unit in which you " -"purchase the product. When you're done, click on **Save**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:42 -msgid "Click on the edit button |edit| to create new unit of measures." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:46 -msgid "Transfer from one unit to another" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:48 -msgid "" -"When doing inter-unit transfers, the rounding is automatically done by Odoo." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:51 -msgid "" -"The unit of measure can be changed throughout the whole process. The only " -"condition is that the unit of measure is part of the same category." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:54 -msgid "In this example, we are in the egg business :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:56 -msgid "We buy eggs by trays (30 eggs)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:58 -msgid "We check all eggs individually when receiving it (quality control)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:60 -msgid "We sell eggs by the dozen to the customers" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:66 -msgid "" -"The **Sale price** is expressed in the **Product unit of measure**. The " -"**Cost price** is expressed in the **Purchase Unit of Measure**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:70 -msgid "" -"All internal transfers are expressed in the **Product Unit of Measure**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:74 -msgid "Procurement" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:76 -msgid "" -"When doing your procurement request, you can still change the unit of " -"measure." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:82 -msgid "The unit of measure can also be changed in the purchase order :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:90 -msgid "The quality control is done by unit." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:92 -msgid "" -"The basic unit of measure of our product is **Unit**. Therefore the quality " -"check is done by unit." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:99 -msgid "" -"The unit of measure can only be changed when the transfer status is " -"**Draft**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:103 -#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:74 -msgid "Delivery process" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:105 -msgid "" -"The eggs are sold by the dozen. You can choose the unit of measure on the " -"sale order document. When doing it, the price is automatically computed from" -" the unit to the dozen." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:112 -msgid "" -"In the delivery order, the initial demand is done in the sales order unit of" -" measure :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:118 -msgid "" -"But the transfer is done in the product unit of measure. Everything is " -"converted automatically :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:125 -msgid "" -"Create a link when the document is available - When should you use " -"packages, units of measure or kits?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:3 -msgid "When should you use packages, units of measure or kits?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:6 -msgid "Unit of measures" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Units of measures are an indication about the unit used to handle a product." -" Products can be expressed in multiple units of measure at once." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:11 -msgid "" -"Activate this option if you are working with several ones in your warehouse." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:14 -msgid "" -"The purchase unit of measure might be different that the one you use in your" -" warehouse." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:17 -msgid "" -"The selling unit of measure is set on the sale order and can be different." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:24 -msgid "" -"The conversion between the different units of measures is done " -"automatically. The only condition is that all the units have to be in the " -"same category (Unit, Weight, Volume, Length,...)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:29 -msgid "Packages" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:31 -msgid "" -"The package is the physical container in which you put one or several " -"product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:38 -msgid "Packaging" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:40 -msgid "Packaging is the physical container that protects your product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:42 -msgid "" -"If you are selling computers, the packaging contains the computer with the " -"notice and the power plug." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:45 -msgid "In Odoo, packagings are just used for indicative purpose." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:51 -msgid "" -"You can define on the **Packages** which **Packaging** it uses. But it is " -"only for indicative purpose." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:55 -msgid "When to use packages, packagings or unit of measures ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:57 -msgid "" -"For example, you are sellings eggs. In your warehouse, you manage the eggs " -"individually. Lots of eggs are scrapped and you do it egg by egg. The **unit" -" of measure** is ``Unit(s)``." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:61 -msgid "" -"If you are selling eggs by the dozen, the selling **unit of measure** is the" -" ``Dozen``. You will set it on your sale order." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:64 -msgid "" -"The ``cardboard trays`` that contains the dozen of eggs is the " -"**packaging**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:66 -msgid "" -"When you are selling several trays, you might wrap all the trays into a " -"``box`` or in a ``plastic`` wrapping. It is the **package**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:70 -msgid ":doc:`../../overview/start/setup`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:71 -msgid ":doc:`uom`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:3 -msgid "Using product variants" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:5 -msgid "" -"Product variants are used to manage products having different variations, " -"like size, color, etc. It allows managing the product at the template level " -"(for all variations) and at the variant level (specific attributes)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:10 -msgid "" -"As an example, a company selling t-shirts may have the following product:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:13 -msgid "B&C T-shirt" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:15 -msgid "Sizes: S, M, L, XL, XXL" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:16 -msgid "Colors: Blue, Red, White, Black" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:18 -msgid "" -"In this example, **B&C T-Shirt** is called the product template and **B&C " -"T-Shirt, S, Blue** is a variant. Sizes and color are **attributes**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:22 -msgid "" -"The above example has a total of 20 different products (5 sizes x 4 colors)." -" Each one of these products has its own inventory, sales, etc." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:26 -msgid "Impact of variants" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:28 -msgid "" -"**Barcode**: the code and barcode is associated to a variant, not the " -"template. Every variant may have its own barcode / SKU." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:31 -msgid "" -"**Price**: every product variant has its own public price that is computed " -"based on the template price ($20) with an optional extra for every variant " -"(+$3 for color red). However, you can define pricelist rules that apply on " -"the template or the variant." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:36 -msgid "" -"**Inventory**: the inventory is managed by product variant. You don't own " -"t-shirts, you only own \"T-shirts, S, Red\", or \"T-Shirts, M, Blue\". For " -"information purpose, on the product template form, you get the inventory " -"that is the sum of every variant. (but the actual inventory is computed by " -"variant)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:42 -msgid "" -"**Picture**: the picture is related to the variant, every variation of a " -"product may have its own primary picture." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:45 -msgid "" -"**Other fields**: most of the other fields belongs to the product template. " -"If you update them, it updates automatically all the variants. (example: " -"Income Account, Taxes)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:50 -msgid "Should you use variants?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:53 -msgid "When should you use variants?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:55 -msgid "Using variants has the following impacts:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:57 -msgid "" -"**eCommerce**: in your online shop, the customer will only see product " -"templates in the catalog page. Once the visitor click on such a product, he " -"will have options to choose amongst the variants (colors, sizes, …)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:62 -msgid "" -"**Manufacturing**: Using variants allows to define only one bill of material" -" for a product template and slight variations for some of the variants. " -"Example: instead of creating a Bill of Material for \"T-shirt, Red, S\", you" -" create a bill of material for \"T-shirt\" and add some lines that are " -"specific to the dimension S, and other lines specific to the color Red." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:69 -msgid "" -"**Pricing**: The default price of a product is computed using the price of " -"the product template and add the optional extra price on each dimension of " -"the variant. This way, variant prices are easier to maintain since you don't" -" have to set the price for every variant. However, it's possible to create " -"pricelist rules to fix price per variants too." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:77 -msgid "When should you avoid using variants?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:79 -msgid "" -"Using variants may add a level of complexity on the way you use Odoo. You " -"should consider using variants only if you need it to reduce the complexity " -"of managing lots of products that are similars." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:83 -msgid "" -"As an example, importing your initial product catalog is more complex if you" -" use variants. You can't just import a list of products, you must import " -"product templates and all their related variations." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:87 -msgid "" -"In addition to that, you should also carefully select the dimensions that " -"you manage as separate product templates and those as variants. As an " -"example, a company having these products:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:91 -msgid "Quality: T-Shirts, Polos, Shirts" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:93 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:105 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:110 -msgid "Color: Red, Blue" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:95 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:106 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:111 -msgid "Size: S, M, L, XL" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:97 -msgid "" -"In such a use case, you could create 1 template with three dimensions of " -"variants (Layout, T-Shirts, Polos). But, it's recommended to create two " -"different product templates as T-shirts may highly differ from polos or " -"shirts and customer expect to see these as two different products in the " -"e-Commerce:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:103 -msgid "Product Template: T-shirt" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:108 -msgid "Product Template: Polos" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:117 -msgid "Activate the variant feature" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:119 -msgid "" -"Before you can use product variants, you must first activate the product " -"variants in the settings. To do so, you must go to the Sales app. In the " -"menu :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`, locate the **Products " -"Variants** line, and tick the option **Products can have several " -"attributes**, then click on **Apply**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:129 -msgid "Creating products with variants" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:131 -msgid "" -"Once you have activated the variant option, you can add variants to your " -"products. To do so, go to the Sales module, :menuselection:`Sales --> " -"Products`. It is also accessible from the Purchase and inventory modules." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:135 -msgid "Now, click on the product you wish to add variants to." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:137 -msgid "" -"In the product page, a new tab called Variants has appeared. The number in " -"purple written on top is the number of variants this product currently has. " -"To add new variants, click on the tile. In the new window, click on " -"**Create**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:142 -msgid "" -"In **Attributes**, click on the rolldown menu and select the type of " -"variance you wish to add. If the variant does not yet exist, you can create " -"it on the fly by clicking on Create and edit…" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:149 -msgid "" -"In the Attributes window, the **Value** field is the description of the " -"attribute such as Green, Plastic or 32GB. The **Attribute** field is the " -"type of variant such as Color, Material or Memory." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:156 -msgid "" -"You can add a cost for the variant on the fly by adding it in the " -"**Attribute Price Extra** field, or choose to modify it later. Click on " -"**Save**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:160 -msgid "" -"You can also add a different barcode and internal reference to the variant." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:163 -msgid "" -"When you have entered all the specifications of the variant, click on " -"**Save**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:167 -msgid "Managing Product Variants" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:172 -msgid "" -"The examples below are all based on this product template that has two " -"variant attributes :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:175 -msgid "T-Shirt B&C" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:177 -msgid "Color: Red, Blue, White" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:179 -msgid "Size: S, M, L, XL, XXL" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:182 -msgid "Managing combination possibilities" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:184 -msgid "" -"By default, with the above product template, you get 15 different products " -"(3 colors, 5 sizes). If the XXL size only exists for red and blue t-shirts, " -"you can deactivate the white product variant." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:188 -msgid "" -"To do this, click on the **Variants** button, select the XXL, White T-shirt." -" From the product form, uncheck the **Active** box of the T-shirt White, " -"XXL." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:197 -msgid "" -"That deactivating a product is different than having an inventory of 0." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:200 -msgid "Setting a price per variant" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:202 -msgid "" -"You can add a cost over the main price for some of the variants of a " -"product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:205 -msgid "" -"Once you have activated the variant option, you can add variants to your " -"products. To do so, go to the Sales module, open :menuselection:`Sales --> " -"Products` and click on the product you want to modify. Click on the " -"**Variant Prices** button to access the list of variant values." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:213 -msgid "" -"Click on the variant name you wish to add a value to, to make the 3 fields " -"editable. In the **Attribute Price Extra** field, add the cost of the " -"variant that will be added to the original price." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:220 -msgid "When you have entered all the extra values, click on **Save**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:226 -msgid "Accounting Memento: Details of Journal Entries" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:227 -msgid "Process Overview: From Billing to Payment Orders" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:3 -msgid "What is the difference between warehouses and locations?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:5 -msgid "" -"In Odoo, a **Warehouse** is the actual building/place in which your items " -"are stocked. You can setup multiple warehouses and create moves between " -"warehouses." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:9 -msgid "" -"A **Location**, is a specific space within your warehouse. It can be " -"considered as a sublocation of your warehouse, as a shelf, a floor, an " -"aisle, etc. Therefore, a location is part of one warehouse only and it is " -"not possible to link one location to multiple warehouses. You can configure " -"as much locations as you need under one warehouse." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:15 -msgid "There are 3 types of locations:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:17 -msgid "" -"The **Physical Locations** are internal locations that are part of the " -"warehouses for which you are the owner. They can be the loading and " -"unloading area of your warehouse, a shelf or a department, etc." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:21 -msgid "" -"The **Partner Locations** are spaces within a customer and/or vendor's " -"warehouse. They work the same way as Physical Locations with the only " -"difference being that you are not the owner of the warehouse." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:25 -msgid "" -"The **Virtual Locations** are places that do not exist, but in which " -"products can be placed when they are not physically in an inventory yet (or " -"anymore). They come in handy when you want to place lost products out of " -"your stock (in the **Inventory loss**), or when you want to take into " -"account products that are on their way to your warehouse (**Procurements**)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:31 -msgid "" -"In Odoo, locations are structured hierarchically. You can structure your " -"locations as a tree, dependent on a parent-child relationship. This gives " -"you more detailed levels of analysis of your stock operations and the " -"organization of your warehouses." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:37 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:44 -msgid ":doc:`warehouse_creation`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:38 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:48 -msgid ":doc:`location_creation`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:3 -msgid "How to create a new location?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:9 -msgid "Creating a new location" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:11 -msgid "" -"In order to be able to create new locations, you must allow the system to " -"manage multiple locations. In the **Inventory** module, open the menu " -":menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`. In the **Location & Warehouse**" -" section, tick the **Manage several locations per warehouse** box, then " -"click on **Apply**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:20 -msgid "" -"In the **Inventory** module, open :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Warehouse Management --> Locations` In the Locations window, click on " -"**Create**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:24 -msgid "" -"Type the name of the location in the **Location Name** field, and select the" -" **Parent Location** in the list. The parent location can be a physical, " -"partner or virtual location, and you can add as many sub-locations as needed" -" to a location." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:29 -msgid "" -"You can also fill in the **Additional Information** fields and add a note to" -" describe your location." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:35 -msgid "When you are finished, click on **Save**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:38 -msgid "" -"A warehouse also corresponds to a location. As the locations are " -"hierarchical, Odoo will create the parent location of the warehouse, " -"containing all the sublocations in it." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:43 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:47 -msgid ":doc:`difference_warehouse_location`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:3 -msgid "How to create a new warehouse?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:11 -msgid "" -"In order to be able to create a new warehouse, you must allow the system to " -"manage multiple locations. In the **Inventory** module, open the menu " -":menuselection:`Settings --> Configuration`. In the **Location & Warehouse**" -" section, tick the **Manage several locations per warehouse** box, then " -"click on **apply**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:20 -msgid "" -"Open the menu :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouse Management --> " -"Warehouses`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:22 -msgid "" -"In the warehouses screen, click on **Create**. A new screen appears, with 3 " -"fields :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:25 -msgid "In **Warehouse Name**, insert the full name of the warehouse." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:27 -msgid "" -"In the **Short Name** field, insert a 5-characters code for your warehouse. " -"Keep in mind that this code is the one that will appear in the lists, so " -"make sure you choose a name that is easy to understand and easy to enter." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:32 -msgid "" -"In the **Address** field, you can select an existing company or create one " -"on-the-go. Therefore, the address of your warehouse will be the same as the " -"one of the company you selected. You can also leave this field empty and " -"edit it afterwards." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:40 -msgid "Click on **Save** to finish configuring your new warehouse." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:43 -msgid "" -"When you create a warehouse, the system will create the necessary picking " -"types and main child locations for this main location in the background." +#: ../../inventory/shipping.rst:3 +msgid "Shipping" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation.rst:3 @@ -7103,6 +5812,11 @@ msgid "" "you want to integrate :" msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:27 +#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:26 +msgid "Then click on **Apply**." +msgstr "" + #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:30 #: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:34 #: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:33 @@ -7171,11 +5885,6 @@ msgid "" "data**." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:68 -#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:90 -msgid "Product configuration" -msgstr "" - #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:70 #: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:92 msgid "" @@ -7391,6 +6100,10 @@ msgid "" ":doc:`third_party_shipper`" msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:74 +msgid "Delivery process" +msgstr "" + #: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:82 msgid "" "You can now choose the **Delivery Method** on your sale order. If you want " diff --git a/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po index 2cbb742f0..5bd8264dc 100644 --- a/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po +++ b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po @@ -3,13 +3,17 @@ # This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # +# Translators: +# Mustafa Rawi , 2019 +# #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Mustafa Rawi , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Arabic (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/ar/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -21,66 +25,70 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Internet of Things (IoT)" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:3 +#: ../../iot/config.rst:3 +msgid "Configuration" +msgstr "إعداد" + +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:3 msgid "Connect an IoT Box to your database" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:5 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:5 msgid "Install the Internet of Things (IoT) App on your Odoo Database." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:10 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:10 msgid "Go in the IoT App and click on Connect on the IoT Boxes page." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:15 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:15 msgid "Follow the steps to connect your IoT Box." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:21 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:21 msgid "Ethernet Connection" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:23 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:23 msgid "" "Connect to the IoT Box all the devices that have to be connected with cables" " (ethernet, usb devices, etc.)." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:26 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:26 msgid "Power on the IoT Box." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:28 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:28 msgid "Then click on the Scan button." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:34 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:34 msgid "WiFi Connection" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:36 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:36 msgid "Power on the IoT Box" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:38 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:38 msgid "Copy the token" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:43 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:43 msgid "" "Connect to the IoT Box WiFi Network (make sure there is no ethernet cable " "plugged in your computer)." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:49 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:49 msgid "" "You will be redirected to the IoT Box Homepage (if it doesn't work, connect " "to the IP address of the box). Give a name to your IoT Box (not required) " "and paste the token, then click on next." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:57 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:57 msgid "" "If you are on Runbot, do not forget to add the -all or -base in the token " "(e.g. this token **http://375228-saas-11-5-iot-" @@ -88,43 +96,43 @@ msgid "" "**http://375228-saas-11-5-iot-f3f920-all.runbot16.odoo.com\\|4957098401**)." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:63 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:63 msgid "" "Choose the WiFi network you want to connect with (enter the password if " "there is one) and click on Submit. Wait a few seconds before being " "redirected to your database." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:70 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:70 msgid "You should now see the IoT Box." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:76 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:76 msgid "IoT Box Schema" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/flash_sdcard.rst:3 +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:3 msgid "Flashing your SD Card" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/flash_sdcard.rst:5 +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:5 msgid "" "In some case, you may need to reflash your IoT Box’s SD Card to benefit from" " our latest updates." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/flash_sdcard.rst:9 +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:9 msgid "Updating your SD Card with Etcher" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/flash_sdcard.rst:11 +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:11 msgid "" "Go to Balena’s website and download `Etcher `__, " "It’s a free and open-source utility used for burning image files. Install " "and launch it." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/flash_sdcard.rst:15 +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:15 msgid "" "Now, download the latest image `here " "`__, and extract it from the " @@ -132,137 +140,137 @@ msgid "" "flash (where your SD Card is) and click on *Flash*!." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/flash_sdcard.rst:19 +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:19 msgid "" "Now, your image will be automatically updated. You just have to wait 5 " "minutes for it to finish." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/iot_notfound.rst:3 +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:3 msgid "IoT Box not found" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/iot_notfound.rst:5 +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:5 msgid "" "When using your IoT Box, a common issue you might encounter is that your box" " is not found on your database. Fortunately, there are a few easy steps you " "can follow to find your IoT box." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/iot_notfound.rst:10 +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:10 msgid "HTTPS Issues" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/iot_notfound.rst:12 +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:12 msgid "Your IoT Box is not found? You probably have https issues!" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/iot_notfound.rst:14 +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:14 msgid "" "To check it, go to your database and verify if your database address starts " "with an https (like https://www.odoo.com). If this is the case, then you may" " have problems with your IoT Box image. It should be version 18.12 or later." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/iot_notfound.rst:19 +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:19 msgid "" "If your IoT Box image is from an earlier version, then you will have to " "reflash the SD card of your IoT Box to update the image (the latest image " "can be found `here `__)." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/iot_notfound.rst:23 +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:23 msgid "" "You can find the documentation about SD card flashing here (`here " "`__)." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:3 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:3 msgid "Use the IoT Box for the PoS" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:9 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:9 msgid "Prerequisites" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:11 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:11 msgid "Before starting, make sure you have the following:" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:13 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:13 msgid "An IoT Box" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:15 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:15 msgid "A 2A Power adapter with pi 3 b+ 2.5 A" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:17 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:17 msgid "A computer or tablet with an up-to-date web browser" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:19 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:19 msgid "" "A running SaaS or Odoo instance with the Point of Sale and IoT apps " "installed" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:22 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:22 msgid "A local network setup with DHCP (this is the default setting)" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:24 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:24 msgid "" "An Epson USB TM-T20 Printer or another ESC/POS compatible printer " "(officially supported printers are listed at the `POS Hardware page " "`__)" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:28 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:28 msgid "A Honeywell Eclipse USB Barcode Scanner or another compatible scanner" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:30 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:30 msgid "An Epson compatible cash drawer" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:32 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:32 msgid "An RJ45 Ethernet Cable (optional, WiFi is built in)" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:35 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:35 msgid "Set Up" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:37 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:37 msgid "" "To connect hardware to the PoS, the first step is to connect an IoT Box to " "your database. For this, follow this `documentation " "`__." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:44 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:44 msgid "Then, you have to connect the peripheral devices to your IoT Box." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:46 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:46 msgid "" "Officially supported hardware is listed on `the POS Hardware page " "`__, but other hardware" " might work as well." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:50 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:50 msgid "**Printer**: Connect an ESC/POS printer to a USB port and power it on." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:53 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:53 msgid "" "**Cash drawer**: The cash drawer should be connected to the printer with an " "RJ25 cable." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:56 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:56 msgid "" "**Barcode scanner**: Connect your barcode scanner. In order for your barcode" " scanner to be compatible it must behave as a keyboard and must be " @@ -271,18 +279,18 @@ msgid "" "your barcode scanner." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:62 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:62 msgid "**Scale**: Connect your scale and power it on." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:64 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:64 msgid "" "**Ethernet**: If you do not wish to use Wi-Fi, plug in the Ethernet cable. " "Make sure this will connect the IoT Box to the same network as your POS " "device." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:68 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:68 msgid "" "**Wi-Fi**: The current version of the IoT Box has Wi-Fi built in. Make sure " "not to plug in an Ethernet cable when booting, because all Wi-Fi " @@ -290,26 +298,26 @@ msgid "" "on boot." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:73 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:73 msgid "" "Once it's done, you can connect the IoT Box to your PoS. For this, go in " "Point of Sale > Configuration > PoS, tick the box \"IoT Box\" and select the" " IoT Box you want to connect with. Save the changes." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:77 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:77 msgid "Set up is done, you can launch a new PoS Session." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:80 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:80 msgid "Troubleshoot" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:83 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:83 msgid "The PoS cannot connect to the IoT Box" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:85 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:85 msgid "" "The easiest way to make sure the IoT Box is properly set-up is to turn it on" " with the printer plugged in as it will print a receipt indicating any error" @@ -317,90 +325,90 @@ msgid "" "receipt is printed, check the following steps:" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:91 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:91 msgid "" "Make sure the IoT Box is powered on, indicated by a brightly lit red status " "LED." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:94 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:94 msgid "" "Make sure the IoT Box is ready, this is indicated by a brightly lit green " "status LED just next to the red power status LED. The IoT Box should be " "ready ~2 minutes after it is started." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:98 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:98 msgid "" "Make sure the IoT Box is connected to the same network as your POS device. " "Both the device and the IoT Box should be visible in the list of connected " "devices on your network router." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:102 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:102 msgid "" "If you specified the IoT Box's IP address in the configuration, make sure it" " corresponds to the ip address printed on the IoT Box's status receipt." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:106 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:106 msgid "Make sure that the POS is not loaded over HTTPS." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:108 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:108 msgid "" "A bug in Firefox's HTTP implementation might prevent the autodiscovery from " "working reliably. You could also manually set up the IoT Box's IP address in" " the POS configuration." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:113 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:113 msgid "The Barcode Scanner is not working" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:115 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:115 msgid "" "The barcode scanner must be configured in US QWERTY and emit an Enter after " "each barcode. This is the default configuration of most barcode readers. " "Refer to the barcode reader documentation for more information." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:120 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:120 msgid "" "The IoT Box needs a 2A power supply to work with some barcode scanners. If " "you are not using the provided power supply, make sure the one you use has " "enough power." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:124 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:124 msgid "" "Some barcode scanners will need more than 2A and will not work, or will work" " unreliably, even with the provided power supply. In those case you can plug" " the barcode scanner in a self-powered USB hub." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:129 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:129 msgid "" "Some poorly built barcode scanners do not advertise themselves as barcode " "scanners but as a usb keyboard instead, and will not be recognized by the " "IoT Box." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:134 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:134 msgid "The Barcode Scanner is not working reliably" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:136 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:136 msgid "" "Make sure that no more than one device with 'Scan via Proxy'/'Barcode " "Scanner' enabled are connected to the IoT Box at the same time." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:140 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:140 msgid "Printing the receipt takes too much time" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:142 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:142 msgid "" "A small delay before the first print is expected, as the IoT Box will do " "some preprocessing to speed up the next printings. If you suffer delays " @@ -408,33 +416,404 @@ msgid "" "and the IoT Box." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:148 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:148 msgid "Some characters are not correctly printed on the receipt" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:150 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:150 msgid "" "The IoT Box does not support all languages and characters. It currently " "supports Latin and Cyrillic based scripts, with basic Japanese support." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:155 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:155 msgid "The printer is offline" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:157 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:157 msgid "" "Make sure the printer is connected, powered, has enough paper and has its " "lid closed, and is not reporting an error. If the error persists, please " "contact support." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:162 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:162 msgid "The cashdrawer does not open" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:164 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:164 msgid "" "The cashdrawer should be connected to the printer and should be activated in" " the POS configuration." msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices.rst:3 +msgid "Devices" +msgstr "الأجهزة" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Camera" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When using your *IoT Box* in Odoo, you could need to use a camera. As it can" +" be done in a few steps, this device is really easy to configure. Then, you " +"can use it in your manufacturing process and link it to a control point. " +"Doing so will allow you to take pictures when you reach the chosen quality " +"control point." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:12 ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:13 +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:11 +msgid "Connection" +msgstr "الاتصال" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:14 +msgid "" +"To connect the camera to the *IoT Box*, simply combine the two by cable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:18 +msgid "In some cases, a serial to USB adapter could be needed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:20 +msgid "" +"If your camera is a `*supported one* `__, there is no need to set up anything as it will be detected as " +"soon as it is connected." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:27 +msgid "" +"In some cases, you could need to restart the box and download your camera’s " +"drivers from the box. To do so, go to your *IoT Box Home Page* and click on " +"*drivers list*. Then, click on load drivers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:35 +msgid "Link a Camera to a Quality Control Point" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:38 ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:42 +msgid "With the Manufacturing app" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:40 +msgid "" +"In your *Quality app*, you can setup the device on a *Quality Control " +"Point*. Go to the *Control Points* menu, under *Quality Control* and open " +"the control point you want to link with the camera." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:44 +msgid "" +"Now, you can edit the control point and select the device from the dropdown " +"list. Now, hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:50 +msgid "" +"Then, your camera can be used with the picked *Control Point*. During the " +"manufacturing process, reaching the *Quality Control Point* you chose before" +" will allow you to take a picture." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Footswitch" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When working, it is always better to have your two hands available. Using " +"Odoo’s *IoT Box* and a footswitch will allow it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:8 +msgid "" +"In fact, you will be able to go from one screen to another by using your " +"foot and the footswitch. Really convenient, it can be configured in a few " +"steps." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Connecting the footswitch to the *IoT Box* is easy, you just have to combine" +" the two by cable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:19 +msgid "In some cases, a serial to USB adapter may be needed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:21 +msgid "" +"If your footswitch is a `supported one `__, there is no need to set up anything since it will be " +"automatically detected when connected." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:28 +msgid "" +"If it is not a supported one, you may need to restart the box and download " +"your footswitch’s drivers from the box. To do so, go to the *IoT Box Home " +"Page* and click on *drivers list*. Then, click on load drivers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:37 +msgid "Link a Footswitch to a Workcenter" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:39 +msgid "" +"To link the footswitch to an action, it needs to be configured on a " +"workcenter. Go to the workcenter you want to use the footswitch in and add " +"the device in the *IoT Triggers* tab. Then, you can link it to an action and" +" also add a key to trigger it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:47 +msgid "" +"Note that the one that is first in the list will be chosen. So, the order " +"matters! In the picture above, using the footswitch will, for example, " +"automatically skip the current part of the process you work on." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:52 +msgid "" +"When you are on the work order screen, a status button indicates if you are " +"correctly connected to the footswitch." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Measurement Tool" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:5 +msgid "" +"With Odoo’s *IoT Box*, it is possible to connect measurement tools to your " +"database. Find the list of supported devices here: `Supported devices " +"`__,." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:10 +msgid "Connect in USB" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:12 +msgid "" +"To add a device connected by USB, just plug the USB cable in the *IoT Box*, " +"restart the Box and the device should appear in your Odoo database." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:19 +msgid "" +"If the device is not found, make sure the drivers have well been loaded on " +"your IoT Box. For this, connect to the *IoT Box Homepage* and click on load " +"drivers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:27 +msgid "Connect in Bluetooth" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:29 +msgid "" +"Activate the Bluetooth on your device (see your device manual for further " +"explanation) and the IoT Box will automatically try to connect to the " +"device." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:33 +msgid "Here is an example of what it should look like:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:39 +msgid "Link a measurement tool to a quality control point" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:44 +msgid "" +"In your *Quality app*, you can setup a device on your *Quality Control " +"Points*. To do so, go to the *Control Points* menu, under *Quality Control* " +"and open the control point to which you want to assign a measurement tool." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:49 +msgid "" +"Now, you can edit the control point and choose the device from the dropdown " +"list. Then, hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:55 +msgid "" +"Now, your measurement tool is linked to the chosen *Control Point*. The " +"value, which needs to be changed manually, will be automatically updated " +"while the tool is being used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Printer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When using your *IoT Box* in Odoo, you could need to use a printer. Doing so" +" is easy and convenient as it can be done in a few steps. Then, you can use " +"it to print receipts, orders or even reports in different Odoo apps." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:13 +msgid "" +"To connect the printer to the *IoT Box*, you just have to combine the two by" +" cable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:17 +msgid "Sometimes, a serial to USB adapter may be needed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:19 +msgid "" +"If your printer is a `supported one `__, there is no need to set up anything because it will be " +"automatically detected as soon as it is connected." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:24 +msgid "The printer can take up to two minutes to appear in your devices list." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:29 +msgid "" +"In some cases, you may need to restart the box and download your printer’s " +"drivers from the box. To do so, go to the *IoT Box Home Page* and click on " +"*drivers list*. Then, click on load drivers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:37 +msgid "Link the Printer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:40 +msgid "To Work Orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:42 +msgid "" +"You can link *Work Orders* to printers via a *Quality Control Point* to " +"print labels for manufactured products." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:45 +msgid "" +"To do so, you need to create a *Quality Control Point* from the *Quality* " +"app. Then, you can select the correct manufacturing operation and the work " +"order operation. In type, choose *Print Label* and hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Now, each time you reach the quality control point for the chosen product, a" +" *Print Label* button will appear." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:60 +msgid "To Reports" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:62 +msgid "" +"You can also link a type of report to a certain printer. In the *IoT* app, " +"go to the *Devices* menu and select the printer you want to set up." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:69 +msgid "Now, go to the *Printer Reports* tab." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:74 +msgid "" +"Hit edit and then, click on *Add a line*. In the window that shows up, check" +" all the types of reports that should be linked to this printer. Click on " +"select and save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:81 +msgid "" +"Now, each time you click on *Print* in the control panel, instead of " +"downloading a PDF, it will send it to the selected printer and automatically" +" print it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:86 +msgid "Print Receipts from the PoS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:88 +msgid "" +"You can link a printer to your *Point of Sale* app so you can print receipts" +" directly from your *PoS*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:91 +msgid "" +"Doing so is really easy. Go to your *Point of Sale* app and open your *PoS* " +"settings, under *Configuration*. There, click on *Edit* and check the *IoT " +"Box* feature. Then, enable the *Receipt Printer*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:98 +msgid "" +"Now, on your *PoS* view, you will be able to print different kinds of " +"tickets: **receipts**, **sale details** and **bills**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:101 +msgid "" +"For the receipt, it will be printed once the order is validated. The process" +" is automated when you enable the feature in your *PoS*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:104 +msgid "" +"Sales details can be printed by clicking on the printer icon on the navbar " +"at the top of the *PoS*. It will print the details of the sales of the " +"current day." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:111 +msgid "" +"As for the bill, it is only available in restaurant mode. In your restaurant" +" settings, activate bills and a *Bill* button will appear in the left panel." +" Click on it and it will print the bill." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:119 +msgid "Print Orders in the kitchen" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:121 +msgid "In restaurant mode, you can send order tickets to the kitchen." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:123 +msgid "" +"To do so, go to the *PoS* app and open your *PoS* settings. Then, tick " +"*Order Printer*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:129 +msgid "" +"Now, go to the *Printers* menu. Hit create and select the *IoT Box* with all" +" the categories of product that should be printed in the *Printer Product " +"Categories* field." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:136 +msgid "" +"In the *PoS*, when you add or remove a product from one of the selected " +"categories, the button *Order* will be green. If you click on it, a ticket " +"will be printed." +msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po index c4e9e39d3..d230e53b2 100644 --- a/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po +++ b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" "Language-Team: Arabic (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/ar/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" @@ -757,60 +757,47 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:17 msgid "" -"You can now define subcontractors contacts. When you purchase or receive " -"products from a contact of type subcontractor, the correct stock moves are " -"created to represent the subcontracting of the production." +"You can now define subcontracted *Bill of Materials*. Therefore, you need to" +" go to *Manufacturing > Master Data > Bill of Materials* and hit *Create*. " +"In this *BoM*, list the components which will be used by the subcontractor " +"to manufacture the subcontracted finished product. Specify that the *BoM* " +"type is *Subcontracting*." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:25 -msgid "" -"You can set the subcontractor as a vendor in case you plan to buy him the " -"subcontracted products via purchase orders." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:28 -msgid "" -"The next step is to create a *Bill of Material* of type *subcontracted*. In " -"this *BoM*, list the components you need to supply to the subcontractor." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:35 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:22 msgid "You can also define subcontractors on the BoM." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:37 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:24 msgid "If no subcontractor is set, the BoM can be used by any subcontractor" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:39 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:26 msgid "If some are set, the BoM can only be used for those subcontractors" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:45 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:32 msgid "Receive or buy a subcontracted product" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:47 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:34 msgid "You have two options to trigger the subcontracting of a product:" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:50 -msgid "**Option A**: You can buy the subcontracted product from your" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:36 +msgid "" +"**Option A**: You can buy the subcontracted product from your subcontractor" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:50 -msgid "subcontractor" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:52 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:38 msgid "**Option B**: You can directly receive the subcontracted product" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:54 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:40 msgid "Let’s start with option A (option B is just a simpler version of it)." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:56 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:42 msgid "" "Create a new purchase order. The vendor must be a subcontractor. The unit " "price should be the cost you are paying to the subcontractor for the " @@ -818,34 +805,34 @@ msgid "" "subcontracted product)." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:64 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:50 msgid "" "The validation of the purchase order automatically creates the receipt. " "Whenever you receive the product, you can validate the receipt. The " "following stock moves are created:" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:68 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:54 msgid "For the components" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:70 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:56 msgid "From Subcontracting To Production" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:72 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:58 msgid "For the subcontracted product" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:74 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:60 msgid "From Production to Subcontracting" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:76 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:62 msgid "From Subcontracting to Stock" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:78 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:64 msgid "" "The *Subcontracting Location* represents the place where the products are at" " your subcontractor’s warehouse. It is configured as an internal location, " @@ -853,35 +840,35 @@ msgid "" "stock." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:83 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:69 msgid "" "For option B, you can simply create the receipt manually with a partner of " "type subcontractor defined on it." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:87 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:73 msgid "Resupply the subcontractor with the components" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:89 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:75 msgid "" "There are 3 ways to manage the resupply of your subcontractor with the " "components:" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:94 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:80 msgid "**Manually**: You create a delivery order in which you set the" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:93 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:79 msgid "subcontractor as a partner and you choose the components to deliver." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:103 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:89 msgid "**With reordering rules**: You can define a *reordering rule*" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:100 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:86 msgid "" "on the *Subcontracting location* to ensure that they are always enough " "components sent to your subcontractors. When the reordering rule is " @@ -889,11 +876,11 @@ msgid "" "created." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:111 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:97 msgid "**On order**: You can also deliver the components to your" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:109 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:95 msgid "" "subcontractors each time you order a subcontracted product. For this, you " "need to tick the route *Resupply Subcontractor on Order* on the wanted " @@ -1052,73 +1039,64 @@ msgid "" "colors depending on the situation:" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:90 -msgid "**Green**: quantity of products which should be replenished to" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:89 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:88 msgid "" -"reach the expected safety stock considering the demand forecast and the " -"indirect demand forecast." +"**Green**: quantity of products which should be replenished to reach the " +"expected safety stock considering the demand forecast and the indirect " +"demand forecast." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:93 -msgid "**Grey**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:90 +msgid "" +"**Grey**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity " +"still matches current data." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:93 -msgid "quantity still matches current data." +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:92 +msgid "" +"**Red**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity " +"was too high considering current data." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:94 +msgid "" +"**Orange**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity" +" was too low considering current data." msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:96 -msgid "**Red**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:96 -msgid "quantity was too high considering current data." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:99 -msgid "**Orange**: replenishment order has already been generated, and" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:99 -msgid "its quantity was too low considering current data." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:101 msgid "" "The *Forecasted stock* line can also contain red cells, which means the " "stock will be negative during the period in question." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:105 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:100 msgid "What if I have underestimated the demand?" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:107 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:102 msgid "" "You can still increase the demand forecast. It will impact the quantity to " "replenish. The cell will become orange, and you’ll be able to launch a new " "replenishment." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:112 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:107 msgid "What if I have overestimated the demand?" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:114 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:109 msgid "" "You can decrease the demand forecast. The cell will become red to inform you" " that you’ve ordered more than planned. If you’re still able to do it, you " "can cancel some RFQ or MO manually." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:119 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:114 msgid "What if I wrongly added a product to the MPS?" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:121 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:116 msgid "" "You can easily remove a product from the MPS by clicking the small bin on " "the right of its name." diff --git a/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po index 2b8cee520..526518a06 100644 --- a/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po +++ b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" "Language-Team: Arabic (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/ar/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" @@ -41,6 +41,9 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:9 #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:10 #: ../../point_of_sale/overview/start.rst:22 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:12 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:12 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:13 #: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/setup.rst:9 #: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/split.rst:10 msgid "Configuration" @@ -877,7 +880,275 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../point_of_sale/overview/start.rst:133 msgid "" "To connect the PoS to hardware with an Odoo IoT Box, please see the section " -":doc:`../../../iot/connect` and :doc:`../../../iot/pos`" +":doc:`../../../iot/config/connect` and :doc:`../../../iot/config/pos`" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment.rst:3 +msgid "Payment Terminals" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:3 +msgid "Connect an Ingenico Payment Terminal to your PoS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Connecting a payment terminal allows you to offer a fluid payment flow to " +"your customers and ease the work of your cashiers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Please note that Ingenico is currently only available for customers in the " +"Benelux." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:15 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:15 +msgid "Connect a Payment Terminal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:17 +msgid "" +"Connecting an Ingenico Payment Terminal to Odoo is a feature that requires " +"an IoT Box. For more information on how to connect an IoT Box to your " +"database, please refer to `this documentation " +"`__." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:22 +msgid "" +"Once the IoT Box is up and running, you’ll need to link your payment " +"terminal to your PoS. Open the Point of Sale app and go to *Configuration > " +"Point of Sale*. Select a PoS, tick the IoT Box Device option and select your" +" payment terminal." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:31 +msgid "Configure the Lane/5000 for Ingenico BENELUX" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:33 +msgid "" +"Click on the F button of the terminal, then go in the *PoS Menu* > settings " +"menu and enter the settings password." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:36 +msgid "" +"Now, click on connexion change and TCP/IP. Type the IP of your *IoT Box* " +"(you can find it on the form view of your IoT Box). Then, enter 9000 as " +"port. The terminal will restart. Once it is done, go on your *IoT Box* form " +"in Odoo and verify that the terminal has been found." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:45 +msgid "Configure the payment method" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:47 +msgid "" +"First, go in the general settings of the POS app, and activate the Ingenico " +"setting." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Go back in *Point of Sale > Configuration > Point of Sale*, go in the " +"payments section and access your payment methods. Create a new payment " +"method for Ingenico, select the payment terminal option Ingenico, and select" +" your payment terminal device." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:62 +msgid "Pay with a payment terminal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:64 +msgid "" +"In your *PoS interface*, when processing a payment, select a *Payment " +"Method* using a payment terminal. Check that the amount in the tendered " +"column is the one that has to be sent to the payment terminal and click on " +"*Send*. When the payment is successful, the status will change to *Payment " +"Successful*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:73 +msgid "" +"If you want to cancel the payment request, click on cancel. You can still " +"retry to send the payment request." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:76 +msgid "" +"If there is any issue with the payment terminal, you can still force the " +"payment using the *Force Done*. This will allow you to validate the order in" +" Odoo even if the connexion between the terminal and Odoo has issues." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:82 +msgid "" +"This option will only be available if you received an error message telling " +"you the connexion failed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:85 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:103 +msgid "" +"Once your payment is processed, on the payment record, you’ll find the type " +"of card that has been used and the transaction ID." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:3 +msgid "Connect SIX/Worldline to your PoS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Connecting a SIX/Worldline payment terminal allows you to offer a fluid " +"payment flow to your customers and ease the work of your cashiers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:9 +msgid "Please note SIX/Worldine is currently only available for UE customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:17 +msgid "" +"Connecting a SIX/Worldline Payment Terminal to Odoo is a feature that " +"requires an IoT Box. For more information on how to connect an IoT Box to " +"your database, please refer to `this documentation " +"`__." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:22 +msgid "" +"Once the *IoT Box* is up and running, you’ll need to link it to your PoS. " +"Open the Point of Sale app and go to *Configuration > Point of Sale*. Select" +" a PoS, tick the IoT Box Device option and select your payment terminal." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:30 +msgid "" +"Then go to your *IoT Box homepage* (accessible from the IoT Box form view in" +" Odoo) and enter the ID of your Six payment terminal." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:36 +msgid "" +"You should now see that the terminal is connected to your IoT Box (it takes " +"+/- 1 min)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:43 +msgid "" +"The terminal should only be connected to the network with the Ethernet. Do " +"not connect it to the IoT Box with a USB Cable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:47 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:16 +msgid "Configure the Payment Method" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:49 +msgid "" +"First, go in the general settings of the POS app, and activate the SIX " +"setting." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:55 +msgid "" +"Back in *Point of Sale > Configuration > Point of Sale*, go in the payments " +"section and access your payment methods. Create a new payment method for " +"SIX, select the payment terminal option SIX, and select your payment " +"terminal device." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:64 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:40 +msgid "Pay with a Payment Terminal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:66 +msgid "" +"In your PoS interface, at the moment of the payment, select a payment method" +" using a payment terminal. Verify that the amount in the tendered column is " +"the one that has to be sent to the payment terminal and click on *Send*. If " +"you want to cancel the payment request, click on cancel." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:74 +msgid "" +"When the payment is done, the status will change to *Payment Successful*. " +"You can always reverse the last transaction by clicking on *Reverse*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:81 +msgid "" +"If there is any issue with the payment terminal, you can still force the " +"payment using the *Force Done*. This will allow you to validate the order in" +" Odoo even if the connexion between the terminal and Odoo encounters issues." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:87 +msgid "Close your Session" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:89 +msgid "" +"At the end of the day, before closing your session, you need to send the " +"balance of the payments to SIX. To do that, click on this button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:95 +msgid "" +"Once the balance has been sent, the SIX shift is closed, meaning you cannot " +"do additional operations with the SIX payment terminal (except if you reopen" +" a shift by clicking on the user name and selecting a cashier)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Vantiv Payment Terminal to your PoS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Connecting a Vantiv payment terminal allows you to offer a fluid payment " +"flow to your customers and ease the work of your cashiers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:9 +msgid "" +"Please note MercuryPay only operates with US and Canadian banks, making this" +" procedure only suitable for North American businesses." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:18 +msgid "" +"First, go in the general settings of the POS app, and activate the Vantiv " +"setting." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:24 +msgid "" +"Back in *Point of Sale > Configuration > Point of Sale*, go in the payments " +"section and access your payment methods. Create a new payment method for " +"Vantiv, select the payment terminal option Vantiv, and create new Vantiv " +"credentials." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:32 +msgid "" +"To create new Vantiv credentials, fill in your merchant ID and password, " +"then save. Make sure the credentials you just created are selected, then " +"save the payment method." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:42 +msgid "" +"In your PoS interface, at the moment of the payment, select your Vantiv " +"payment method and… that’s all." msgstr "" #: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant.rst:3 diff --git a/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po index bf71609ab..918ca4ea4 100644 --- a/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po +++ b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:47+0000\n" "Language-Team: Arabic (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/ar/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" @@ -1623,7 +1623,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../purchase/replenishment/flows/setup_stock_rule.rst:33 -msgid "See also: :doc:`../../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers`" +msgid "See also: :doc:`../../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers`" msgstr "" #: ../../purchase/replenishment/flows/setup_stock_rule.rst:35 diff --git a/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..104f12857 --- /dev/null +++ b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po @@ -0,0 +1,417 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2015-TODAY, Odoo S.A. +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +# Translators: +# Mustafa Rawi , 2019 +# Ali zuaby , 2019 +# Osoul , 2019 +# zahi chemaly , 2019 +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-11-20 09:24+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: zahi chemaly , 2019\n" +"Language-Team: Arabic (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/ar/)\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Language: ar\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=6; plural=n==0 ? 0 : n==1 ? 1 : n==2 ? 2 : n%100>=3 && n%100<=10 ? 3 : n%100>=11 && n%100<=99 ? 4 : 5;\n" + +#: ../../quality.rst:5 +msgid "Quality" +msgstr "جودة" + +#: ../../quality/alert.rst:3 +msgid "Alert" +msgstr "تنبيه" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:3 +msgid "Generate a Quality Alert from a Manufacturing Order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Speaking of manufacturing orders, you have two different situations to " +"consider in Odoo. Those two will result in two different processes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:8 +msgid "You work with a simple manufacturing flow;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:10 +msgid "You work with a complex manufacturing flow that includes routings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:13 +msgid "Simple manufacturing flow" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:15 +msgid "" +"If you work with simple manufacturing orders, the *Quality Alerts* will be " +"launched from the manufacturing order itself. When manufacturing a product " +"for which you need to process quality controls, a button *Quality Alert* " +"will appear on the top of your manufacturing order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:23 +msgid "" +"By clicking on the button, you can specify the quality problem that arose " +"during the process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:29 +msgid "" +"If one of the quality checks failed, the button will be highlighted on the " +"document. If not, the button won’t be highlighted." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:36 ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:50 +msgid "Manufacturing Flow with Routings" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:38 +msgid "" +"If you work with routings defined on your manufacturing orders, the quality " +"alerts will be launched directly from the work orders on which the quality " +"checks took place." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:48 +msgid "" +"Then, a button *Quality Alert* will be available from the work order view. " +"When you click on the button, you can specify the quality problem that " +"appeared during the process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:3 +msgid "Generate a Quality Alert from a Transfer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:6 +msgid "Use the Quality Alert" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Every time you perform some *Quality Checks* on a transfer, a *Quality " +"Alert* button appears. You can always use it. The button is automatically " +"highlighted once you have a failed quality check for the transfer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:16 +msgid "" +"If you click on that *Quality Alert* button, you can specify what was the " +"problem with the product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:22 +msgid "" +"The *Quality Alert* that is created from the transfer can be found via the " +"button appearing on the top right corner of the transfer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:28 +msgid "" +"You can also access all your *Quality Alerts* via the menu, accessible under" +" *Control*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks.rst:3 +msgid "Checks" +msgstr "شيكات" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:3 +msgid "Perform Quality Checks on Manufacturing Orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:5 +msgid "" +"There are two different situations to consider and that will differ in Odoo " +"processes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:8 +msgid "You work with simple manufacturing flows;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:10 +msgid "" +"You work with complex manufacturing flows that are represented by the use of" +" routings in Odoo." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:13 +msgid "Simple Manufacturing Flow" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:16 +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:53 +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:6 +msgid "Create the Quality Control Point" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:18 +msgid "" +"To create a quality control point, open the quality app and go to *Control >" +" Control Points*. There, hit create. Make sure to select *Manufacturing* as " +"operation and choose the type of quality check you want to perform." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:27 +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:69 +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:17 +msgid "Process the Quality Check" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:29 +msgid "" +"Once your *Quality Control Point* has been created, you can create a " +"manufacturing order for your product. Now, and before marking the " +"manufacturing as done, you can register the *Quality Checks*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:39 +msgid "" +"Once you have performed your quality checks, you can find them via the " +"*Quality Checks* button available on the manufacturing order form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:46 +msgid "" +"If you want to access all your quality checks, you can do this by opening " +"the quality checks menu, under quality control." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:55 +msgid "" +"If you want to create a *Quality Control Point*, open the *Quality* app and " +"go to *Control > Control Points*. Then, click on create. Make sure to select" +" *Manufacturing* as operation and select the work order operation on which " +"the quality check should be performed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:64 +msgid "" +"Choosing the work order operation is necessary if you want the quality " +"checks to be performed in the work orders. After that, you can choose the " +"type of quality check." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:71 +msgid "" +"Once your *Quality Control Point* has been configured, create a " +"manufacturing order for your product. You have to plan it if you want to " +"generate the necessary work orders." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:78 +msgid "" +"Now, process the work order and your quality check will appear. In this " +"example, the quality check requests to enter the serial number of the Table " +"Top component." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:3 +msgid "Perform Quality Checks on Transfers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:8 +msgid "" +"To create a *Quality Control Point*, open the *Quality* application. Then, " +"go to *Quality Control > Control Points > Create*. Now, you can define the " +"quality control point you want to apply to a specific product. Don’t forget " +"to select a transfer operation type." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:19 +msgid "" +"Let’s say that we will receive a laptop. First, create a planned receipt for" +" the product. Then, on the receipt, you will see a *Quality Checks* button " +"that appears to proceed to the quality check you configured before." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:27 +msgid "" +"By clicking on it, the instruction set on the quality control point will be " +"displayed and will require the check value." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:33 +msgid "" +"Once the quality check is done, you can find it linked to the corresponding " +"transfer and access it by clicking on the button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:39 +msgid "" +"But, if the quality check failed, the stat button will appear in red " +"(instead of green) and Odoo will suggest you to create a *Quality Alert* by " +"highlighting the corresponding button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:46 +msgid "" +"The quality checks can also be found in the *Quality* application by opening" +" the *Quality Checks* menu, under *Quality Control*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control.rst:3 +msgid "Control" +msgstr "التتبع" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:3 +msgid "Define Quality Control Points" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:6 +msgid "Quality Control Points" +msgstr "نقاط مراقبة الجودة" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:8 +msgid "" +"If it is the first *Quality Control Point* that you create, know that you " +"need to open the *Quality* app. Then, go to *Quality Control > Control " +"Points*. Once there, you have to define the product on which the quality " +"control will take place, as well as the operation at which it should take " +"place." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:14 +msgid "" +"The *Quality Control Points* can take place during transfers or during the " +"manufacturing process of the products. If you work with routings on your " +"*Bill of Materials*, you have to precise at which step of the manufacturing " +"process the quality control point should be applied." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:19 +msgid "" +"The control type defines at which frequency the quality checks should take " +"place:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:22 +msgid "" +"All Operations: all the operations will generate quality checks to perform;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:24 +msgid "" +"Randomly: the quality checks will only be performed on x% of the operation. " +"You must define the percentage yourself, on the control point;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:26 +msgid "" +"Periodically: the quality checks will be performed periodically. The " +"periodicity is based on the period you define (once a day, once a week)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:32 +msgid "Quality Control Point Types" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:34 +msgid "" +"Now that the rest is configured, you need to define the type of quality " +"check." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:38 +msgid "" +"Some of the types are only available with the manufacturing application." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:41 +msgid "Text" +msgstr "النص" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:43 +msgid "" +"This control point type allows you to give instructions to your workers " +"during the transfer, or the manufacturing process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:56 +msgid "Take a Picture" +msgstr "التقاط صورة" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:58 +msgid "" +"This control point type asks you to take a picture of the product in a " +"transfer, or when manufacturing it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:71 +msgid "Pass-Fail" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:73 +msgid "" +"This type of control point requires that you specify if the products pass or" +" fail a specific text. It can be applied for both transfers or manufacturing" +" orders." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:80 +msgid "" +"For this kind of control point type, you have the possibility to define a " +"failure message that will give instructions to follow in case of quality " +"check failure." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:94 +msgid "Take a Measure" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:96 +msgid "" +"This control point type requires you to enter the product’s measurements " +"during a transfer, or during the manufacturing process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:102 +msgid "" +"For this kind of control point type, you also have the possibility to define" +" a failure message that will give instructions to the worker." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:115 +msgid "Register Consumed Materials" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:117 +msgid "" +"This control point type requires you register the component serial/lot " +"numbers during the manufacturing process. It is only available if you work " +"with routings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:128 +msgid "Register By-Products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:130 +msgid "" +"With this control point type, you must register the serial/lot number of the" +" by-products that are manufactured. It is also only available with routings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:141 +msgid "Print Label" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:143 +msgid "" +"This control point type allows you to print labels to add to the product " +"during the manufacturing process." +msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po index d98d93e04..dc2cfd101 100644 --- a/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po +++ b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po @@ -3,13 +3,17 @@ # This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # +# Translators: +# Mustafa Rawi , 2019 +# #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:47+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Mustafa Rawi , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Arabic (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/ar/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -1013,6 +1017,332 @@ msgid "" "Attributes / Attribute / ID)." msgstr "" +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:3 +msgid "Using product variants" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Product variants are used to manage products having different variations, " +"like size, color, etc. It allows managing the product at the template level " +"(for all variations) and at the variant level (specific attributes)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:10 +msgid "" +"As an example, a company selling t-shirts may have the following product:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:13 +msgid "B&C T-shirt" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:15 +msgid "Sizes: S, M, L, XL, XXL" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:16 +msgid "Colors: Blue, Red, White, Black" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:18 +msgid "" +"In this example, **B&C T-Shirt** is called the product template and **B&C " +"T-Shirt, S, Blue** is a variant. Sizes and color are **attributes**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:22 +msgid "" +"The above example has a total of 20 different products (5 sizes x 4 colors)." +" Each one of these products has its own inventory, sales, etc." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:26 +msgid "Impact of variants" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:28 +msgid "" +"**Barcode**: the code and barcode is associated to a variant, not the " +"template. Every variant may have its own barcode / SKU." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:31 +msgid "" +"**Price**: every product variant has its own public price that is computed " +"based on the template price ($20) with an optional extra for every variant " +"(+$3 for color red). However, you can define pricelist rules that apply on " +"the template or the variant." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:36 +msgid "" +"**Inventory**: the inventory is managed by product variant. You don't own " +"t-shirts, you only own \"T-shirts, S, Red\", or \"T-Shirts, M, Blue\". For " +"information purpose, on the product template form, you get the inventory " +"that is the sum of every variant. (but the actual inventory is computed by " +"variant)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:42 +msgid "" +"**Picture**: the picture is related to the variant, every variation of a " +"product may have its own primary picture." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:45 +msgid "" +"**Other fields**: most of the other fields belongs to the product template. " +"If you update them, it updates automatically all the variants. (example: " +"Income Account, Taxes)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:50 +msgid "Should you use variants?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:53 +msgid "When should you use variants?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:55 +msgid "Using variants has the following impacts:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:57 +msgid "" +"**eCommerce**: in your online shop, the customer will only see product " +"templates in the catalog page. Once the visitor click on such a product, he " +"will have options to choose amongst the variants (colors, sizes, …)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:62 +msgid "" +"**Manufacturing**: Using variants allows to define only one bill of material" +" for a product template and slight variations for some of the variants. " +"Example: instead of creating a Bill of Material for \"T-shirt, Red, S\", you" +" create a bill of material for \"T-shirt\" and add some lines that are " +"specific to the dimension S, and other lines specific to the color Red." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:69 +msgid "" +"**Pricing**: The default price of a product is computed using the price of " +"the product template and add the optional extra price on each dimension of " +"the variant. This way, variant prices are easier to maintain since you don't" +" have to set the price for every variant. However, it's possible to create " +"pricelist rules to fix price per variants too." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:77 +msgid "When should you avoid using variants?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:79 +msgid "" +"Using variants may add a level of complexity on the way you use Odoo. You " +"should consider using variants only if you need it to reduce the complexity " +"of managing lots of products that are similars." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:83 +msgid "" +"As an example, importing your initial product catalog is more complex if you" +" use variants. You can't just import a list of products, you must import " +"product templates and all their related variations." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:87 +msgid "" +"In addition to that, you should also carefully select the dimensions that " +"you manage as separate product templates and those as variants. As an " +"example, a company having these products:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:91 +msgid "Quality: T-Shirts, Polos, Shirts" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:93 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:105 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:110 +msgid "Color: Red, Blue" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:95 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:106 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:111 +msgid "Size: S, M, L, XL" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:97 +msgid "" +"In such a use case, you could create 1 template with three dimensions of " +"variants (Layout, T-Shirts, Polos). But, it's recommended to create two " +"different product templates as T-shirts may highly differ from polos or " +"shirts and customer expect to see these as two different products in the " +"e-Commerce:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:103 +msgid "Product Template: T-shirt" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:108 +msgid "Product Template: Polos" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:114 +#: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:10 +msgid "Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:117 +msgid "Activate the variant feature" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:119 +msgid "" +"Before you can use product variants, you must first activate the product " +"variants in the settings. To do so, you must go to the Sales app. In the " +"menu :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`, locate the **Products " +"Variants** line, and tick the option **Products can have several " +"attributes**, then click on **Apply**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:129 +msgid "Creating products with variants" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:131 +msgid "" +"Once you have activated the variant option, you can add variants to your " +"products. To do so, go to the Sales module, :menuselection:`Sales --> " +"Products`. It is also accessible from the Purchase and inventory modules." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:135 +msgid "Now, click on the product you wish to add variants to." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:137 +msgid "" +"In the product page, a new tab called Variants has appeared. The number in " +"purple written on top is the number of variants this product currently has. " +"To add new variants, click on the tile. In the new window, click on " +"**Create**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:142 +msgid "" +"In **Attributes**, click on the rolldown menu and select the type of " +"variance you wish to add. If the variant does not yet exist, you can create " +"it on the fly by clicking on Create and edit…" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:149 +msgid "" +"In the Attributes window, the **Value** field is the description of the " +"attribute such as Green, Plastic or 32GB. The **Attribute** field is the " +"type of variant such as Color, Material or Memory." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:156 +msgid "" +"You can add a cost for the variant on the fly by adding it in the " +"**Attribute Price Extra** field, or choose to modify it later. Click on " +"**Save**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:160 +msgid "" +"You can also add a different barcode and internal reference to the variant." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:163 +msgid "" +"When you have entered all the specifications of the variant, click on " +"**Save**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:167 +msgid "Managing Product Variants" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:170 +msgid "Introduction" +msgstr "المقدمة" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:172 +msgid "" +"The examples below are all based on this product template that has two " +"variant attributes :" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:175 +msgid "T-Shirt B&C" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:177 +msgid "Color: Red, Blue, White" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:179 +msgid "Size: S, M, L, XL, XXL" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:182 +msgid "Managing combination possibilities" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:184 +msgid "" +"By default, with the above product template, you get 15 different products " +"(3 colors, 5 sizes). If the XXL size only exists for red and blue t-shirts, " +"you can deactivate the white product variant." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:188 +msgid "" +"To do this, click on the **Variants** button, select the XXL, White T-shirt." +" From the product form, uncheck the **Active** box of the T-shirt White, " +"XXL." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:197 +msgid "" +"That deactivating a product is different than having an inventory of 0." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:200 +msgid "Setting a price per variant" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:202 +msgid "" +"You can add a cost over the main price for some of the variants of a " +"product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:205 +msgid "" +"Once you have activated the variant option, you can add variants to your " +"products. To do so, go to the Sales module, open :menuselection:`Sales --> " +"Products` and click on the product you want to modify. Click on the " +"**Variant Prices** button to access the list of variant values." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:213 +msgid "" +"Click on the variant name you wish to add a value to, to make the 3 fields " +"editable. In the **Attribute Price Extra** field, add the cost of the " +"variant that will be added to the original price." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:220 +msgid "When you have entered all the extra values, click on **Save**." +msgstr "" + #: ../../sales/products_prices/taxes.rst:3 msgid "Set taxes" msgstr "" @@ -1579,10 +1909,6 @@ msgid "" "complete quotation in no time." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:10 -msgid "Configuration" -msgstr "" - #: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:12 msgid "" "For this feature to work, go to :menuselection:`Sales --> Configuration --> " diff --git a/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..f98a4b353 --- /dev/null +++ b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po @@ -0,0 +1,515 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2015-TODAY, Odoo S.A. +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +# Translators: +# Mustafa Rawi , 2019 +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-11-20 09:24+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Mustafa Rawi , 2019\n" +"Language-Team: Arabic (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/ar/)\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Language: ar\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=6; plural=n==0 ? 0 : n==1 ? 1 : n==2 ? 2 : n%100>=3 && n%100<=10 ? 3 : n%100>=11 && n%100<=99 ? 4 : 5;\n" + +#: ../../sms_marketing.rst:5 +msgid "SMS Marketing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:3 +msgid "Build, send and get reports from a SMS mailing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Why to use SMS? Using SMS Marketing as part of my communication strategies " +"can empower me to expand my markets, considering that in some countries " +"emails are not very used or used at all. It also helps to boost my " +"conversion rate, as this strategy has a high open-rate percentage among " +"people who use smartphones - people usually don’t keep unread SMSs!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:8 +msgid "" +"With Odoo’s SMS Marketing app you can plan, organize, schedule and keep " +"track of your mailings with its easy to use interface." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:12 +msgid "Install the app" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:14 +msgid "Go to *Apps*, search for *SMS Marketing* and click on *Install*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:17 +msgid "Build an SMS mailing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:19 +msgid "Go to *SMS Marketing > Create*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:24 +msgid "" +"First, I’ll be able to specify a *subject* name that will help me to " +"remember what the mailing is about. Under *recipients*, I’ll choose to whom " +"I’d like the SMS to be sent. If I choose *Contact*, all my Odoo contacts " +"(vendor, customers, etc.) will receive my SMS. From there, I can refine my " +"recipient list with the *add filter* option. In the example below, I choose " +"to send it to my contacts living in Belgium." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:31 +msgid "" +"The *Mailing list* option, on the other hand, allows me to choose mailing " +"lists I’ve created with specific contacts or people who have subscribed to " +"my Newsletters, or both! I’m allowed to select more than one *Mailing list*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:36 +msgid "" +"Under the *SMS Content* tab, links can be included and Odoo will " +"automatically generate *link trackers*. Thank to those, I’ll be able to get " +"data about those links." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:38 +msgid "" +"On *Settings* I have the option *include opt-out link* available. If " +"activated, the contact will be able to unsubscribe from the mailing list " +"he’s not interested in anymore." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:43 +msgid "" +"in the *Link Tracker* menu under *Configuration*, I can see the history of " +"my sent links, access them and look at statistics." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:48 +msgid "Double-check that you have the phone number of your contacts saved!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:52 +msgid "Sending my mailing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:56 +msgid "" +"Once I have my mailing created, I must choose when I would like it to be " +"delivered:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:58 +msgid "" +"**Put in queue**: the mailing will be triggered with the next automatic run." +" Interesting option if I don’t mind when the triggering will happen." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:59 +msgid "" +"**Send now**: sends the message immediately. Advised to use this option if " +"there are not that many recipients." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:60 +msgid "" +"**Schedule**: allows me to choose a day and time. Best option for mailings " +"that I would like to send during a specific event, to promote an offer while" +" it is active or to simply plan my content strategy in advance." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:61 +msgid "" +"**Test**: allows me to send an SMS to one or multiple numbers for test " +"purposes. Check, for example, if the link provided lands on the right page " +"while making sure they are responsive. If sending it to multiple numbers, I " +"must remember to use a comma between them." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:65 +msgid "Visualize reports" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:66 +msgid "" +"On the *Reporting* menu, with just a few clicks, I am capable of applying " +"filters, measures and adopt different layouts to do an analysis of the " +"performance of my SMS mailings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:71 +msgid "" +"I can also check the price to send an SMS on your country when clicking on " +"the *information* icon when creating a new SMS." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:76 +msgid "" +"**Buy Credits!** In order to take advantage of the app and its features, " +"make sure you’ve purchased credits. For more information on that access: " +":doc:`../sms_marketing/fqapricing`" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:3 +msgid "Contact lists and Blacklist" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:6 +msgid "Contact lists" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:7 +msgid "" +"Creating my own list of contacts, or importing it, is useful when I want to " +"create specific groups of people, such as the subscribers of my newsletter. " +"It is also the best way to get started if I am coming from another system " +"and already have built an audience. It makes the SMS distribution a lot " +"easier." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:9 +msgid "" +"Go to *Contacts lists > Contacts lists > Create*. I’ll choose a name for my " +"*Mailing list*, and activate the option *Public* if I would like to make the" +" mailing list accessible to my recipients in the unsubscription page to " +"allow them to update their subscription preferences." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:12 +msgid "" +"Once inside the list, I can again *Create* or *Import* contacts for that " +"specific list." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:18 +msgid "History with the Log Notes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:19 +msgid "" +"A record of the mailings sent is kept in the chatter of the recipient " +"(whether it is a contact or an opportunity, for example)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:24 +msgid "" +"This is important as I and my team can easily keep track and see a history " +"of interactions with my contacts or prospects, granting me the ability to " +"better understand them. Example: my sales representative can easily find out" +" which SMS mailing promotions a customer has received or not." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:29 +msgid "Blacklist" +msgstr "القائمة السوداء" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:30 +msgid "" +"If I’m coming from another software and have a list of clients who have " +"already asked to be blacklisted from my news, I can import those entries in " +"my database. For that, I’ll go to *Configuration > Phone Blacklist > " +"Import*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:3 +msgid "Integrations and Templates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:4 +msgid "" +"Using SMS to reach people can be a strategy not just used for advertisement " +"purposes but also as a reminder of events or issued invoices to your " +"costumers, for example. As you know, one of the biggest benefits of using " +"Odoo is the capability of the apps to be integrated. With the SMS Marketing " +"app isn’t different!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:9 +msgid "Organize Email Marketing and SMS campaigns" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:10 +msgid "" +"First, make sure to have the necessary feature activated. Go to the *Email " +"Marketing app > Configuration > Settings> activate the option Mailing " +"Campaigns*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Now, I’ll also have the menu *Campaigns* included in my *SMS Marketing* " +"page, allowing me to have an overview of my SMS mailings and my email " +"marketing ones." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:20 +msgid "" +"This feature is especially useful if I have aggregated campaigns, as I have " +"a global reporting view. In addition to that, I can create stages in my " +"kanban view to better organize the work being done." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:26 +msgid "Sending SMSs through the Contacts app" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:27 +msgid "" +"Sending SMSs through the contact’s form is available by default in Odoo. It " +"makes my work easier if I need to send an SMS to a specific contact, for " +"example. For that, I’ll go to the *Contacts* app, select the contact and " +"click on the *SMS* icon next to the phone number." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:33 +msgid "" +"If I’d like to send a message in a batch here, I could go to *List View > " +"select all the contacts > Action > Send SMS*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:39 +msgid "Set up SMS Templates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:40 +msgid "" +"To set up *SMS Templates*, I’ll go to the *Settings* app and activate the " +"*developer mode*. Now, back to *Settings* app, I’ll go to *Technical > " +"Phone/SMS section > SMS Templates* and create the content I need." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:48 +msgid "" +"Use *Dynamic Placeholders* to adapt automatically the content of the SMS to " +"the context." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:52 +msgid "" +"SMS Text Messaging is available throughout Odoo! Here are some of our extra " +"notable integrations:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:54 +msgid "*CRM*: send SMSs to your leads and opportunities." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:55 +msgid "*Subscription*: alert customers about their subscription." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:56 +msgid "*Accounting*: send payment reminders." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:57 +msgid "*Marketing Automation*: automate your SMS marketing campaigns." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:58 +msgid "" +"*Inventory*: send an automatic confirmation when a delivery order is done." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:59 +msgid "" +"*Sign*: receive a validation code to verify your identity before signing a " +"document online." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:60 +msgid "" +"*SEPA debit payment provider*: send a verification code to your customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:61 +msgid "" +"*Studio*: send an SMS according to your needs by using automated actions." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:63 +msgid "" +"For more information about SMS integrations in Odoo and a list of frequently" +" asked questions, go to `Pricing and FQA `__." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:3 +msgid "SMS Pricing and FAQ" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:6 +msgid "Pricing" +msgstr "التسعير" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:7 +msgid "" +"SMS Text Messaging is an In-App Purchase (IAP) service which requires " +"prepaid credits to work. The price of an SMS depends on the destination and " +"the length of the message. With 1 credit, I can send up to 92 SMSs." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:9 +msgid "" +"**For more information, please consult our FAQ page**: `Odoo SMS - FAQ " +"`_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:11 +msgid "" +"To buy credits I will go to *Settings > Buy Credits* (under *Send SMS*); or" +" go to *Settings > View my Services* (under *Odoo IAP*)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:18 +msgid "" +"If you are on Odoo Online (SAAS) and have the Enterprise version, you " +"benefit from free trial credits to test the feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:21 +msgid "FAQ" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:22 +msgid "**Is there an expiration time for my credits?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:24 +msgid "No, your credits won’t expire." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:26 +msgid "" +"**Can I send an SMS to a phone number (which is not a mobile phone) because " +"I see the icon in front of the field “phone”?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:28 +msgid "Only if that phone number supports SMS (e.g. SIP phones)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:30 +msgid "**Do I receive an invoice to buy my credits?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:32 +msgid "Yes." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:34 +msgid "**Can the recipient answer to me?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:36 +msgid "No, it is not possible to reply to the SMS." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:38 +msgid "" +"**What happens if I send multiple SMS but I do not have enough credits to " +"send them all?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:40 +msgid "" +"The whole transaction is counted as a single one, so no SMS will be sent " +"until you have enough credits to send them all." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:42 +msgid "**Do I have a history of the sent SMSs?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:44 +msgid "" +"Yes, the SMS is logged as a note under the chatter of the corresponding " +"record, and a complete history of SMS sent is available under Settings> " +"Activate the developer mode > Technical > SMS." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:46 +msgid "**Can I send as many SMSs I want at once?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:48 +msgid "Yes, if you have enough credits." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:50 +msgid "" +"**If I have a number that does not exist in the list of recipients, will I " +"lose credits?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:52 +msgid "" +"Not if the phone number is in the wrong format (e.g. too many digits). " +"Otherwise, if the SMS is sent to the wrong person or to a fake number, the " +"credit will be lost." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:54 +msgid "" +"**What happens if I send my SMS to a paying number (e.g.: a contest to win a" +" ticket for a festival)?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:56 +msgid "" +"The SMS will not be delivered to that kind of number, so you won’t be " +"charged." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:58 +msgid "" +"**Can I identify the numbers that do not exist when I send several SMSs?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:60 +msgid "Only the ones that have an invalid format." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:62 +msgid "**How does the GDPR regulation affect this service?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:64 +msgid "" +"Please find our Privacy Policy here: `Odoo IPA Purchase Privacy Policy " +"`__" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:66 +msgid "**How many types of SMS exist and how many characters make 1 SMS?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:68 +msgid "There are 2 types of SMS message:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:70 +msgid "" +"*Standard* (GSM-7): contains only characters from the GSM-7 set, which can " +"be seen in the following picture." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:75 +msgid "" +"*Unicode*: contains at least one character that is not in the previous " +"table. For Standard SMS the size limit is 160 characters, and for Unicode is" +" 70. Above these limits, the content is divided into a multi-part message. " +"The system will inform you in real-time about the number of SMS your message" +" represents." +msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..97680ff10 --- /dev/null +++ b/locale/ar/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po @@ -0,0 +1,168 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2015-TODAY, Odoo S.A. +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-11-20 09:24+0000\n" +"Language-Team: Arabic (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/ar/)\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Language: ar\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=6; plural=n==0 ? 0 : n==1 ? 1 : n==2 ? 2 : n%100>=3 && n%100<=10 ? 3 : n%100>=11 && n%100<=99 ? 4 : 5;\n" + +#: ../../social_marketing.rst:5 +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:2 +msgid "Social Marketing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:3 +msgid "Advanced Topics" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:4 +msgid "" +"One of the biggest challenges of a company is to engage efficiently with " +"their community. Odoo Social helps you to meet your audience with the help " +"of several supports: social media, push notifications, or live chat request." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:10 +msgid "Add your social media and create your feed" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:12 +msgid "" +"You first need to add your social media accounts. To do that, add a Stream " +"and choose your social media account. You’ll need to grant permissions to " +"Odoo Social Marketing application." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:19 +msgid "" +"Once it’s done, you’ll be redirected to your Feed and a column will be " +"automatically added with the publications of your freshly added account. You" +" can then add new streams to your Feed and customize your Kanban view as you" +" like." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:28 +msgid "" +"Adding social media accounts to your Feed will also add some KPIs on it:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:30 +msgid "Audience: Number of followers of your channel" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:32 +msgid "Engagement: Number of times people have engaged with your posts" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:35 +msgid "Stories: Number of times people who have engaged with your channel" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:35 +msgid "" +"have created stories on their friend’s or follower’s feed (Shares, " +"Retweet,..)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:37 +msgid "" +"You can access more information by clicking on the “Insights” link: this " +"will lead you to statistics of the selected social medium." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:41 +msgid "Publish content" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:43 +msgid "" +"To publish content on your social media accounts or send a push notification" +" to your subscribed users, either go to your Feed and click on New Post, or " +"use the “Posts” menu and create it from there. Select all the accounts where" +" you want to post your content, write your post and get an instant preview " +"of how it will look when published." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:49 +msgid "" +"If you select the push notifications, you’ll get some additional fields on " +"the form that will allow you to complete the push notifications " +"configuration and choose your segment between all your subscribed users. You" +" can also send push notifications via the Visitors menu, as explained in the" +" previous paragraph." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:56 +msgid "Enable push notifications on your website" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:58 +msgid "" +"The push notifications system uses a Firebase account, configured by " +"default. This feature allows you to send push notifications to your " +"website’s visitors after they subscribed to it. To enable push notifications" +" on your website, go to the Website application Settings, and configure the " +"notifications permission request." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:67 +msgid "" +"Once it’s done, a popup will appear to your website’s visitors, asking them " +"to allow push notifications. As soon as they subscribe to it, you can start " +"sending them push notifications through the Visitors menu. You can either " +"send it individually or target a bigger segment by selecting multiple " +"visitors in the list view (e.g. all the visitors that visited your " +"Homepage)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:75 +msgid "Interact with your online visitors" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:77 +msgid "" +"You can monitor your online visits via the Visitors menu. You’ll see every " +"visitors that landed on one of your tracked pages (you can configure your " +"tracked pages in the Website application), online or offline. Your online " +"visitors will be authenticated if they’re linked to a lead or an existing " +"partner. You will be able to contact them with an email, a message sms, a " +"push notification (if they have subscribed to it), or even send them a live " +"chat request that they will receive on their next move on one of your " +"tracked pages (if you installed the Live Chat application)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:91 +msgid "Configure your own Facebook and Twitter developer accounts" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:93 +msgid "" +"By default, the Social application is already configured with a Facebook and" +" Twitter developer accounts but you can use your own if necessary. Activate " +"the developer mode, go to Configuration > Settings and enter your own API " +"keys." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:102 +msgid "Configure your own Firebase API" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:104 +msgid "" +"By default, a Firebase project is running on your database so there’s no " +"need to configure it. If you have multiple websites, every website will be " +"linked to a different Firebase project. If you need to configure your own " +"Firebase project, please go to :menuselection:`Website --> Configuration -->" +" Settings` Web Push Notifications section." +msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po index 7774d1a4b..d6ef1dda7 100644 --- a/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po +++ b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po @@ -6,10 +6,7 @@ # Translators: # DE T2 , 2019 # Thorsten Vocks , 2019 -# Leon Grill , 2019 -# Chris Egal , 2019 # Wolfgang Taferner, 2019 -# Matt , 2019 # e2f , 2019 # Philipp Hug , 2019 # Ermin Trevisan , 2019 @@ -18,17 +15,20 @@ # Felix Schubert , 2019 # darenkster , 2019 # Johannes Croe , 2019 -# Martin Trigaux, 2019 # Rudolf Schnapka , 2019 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Matt , 2019 +# Leon Grill , 2019 +# Chris Egal , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:45+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: Rudolf Schnapka , 2019\n" +"Last-Translator: Chris Egal , 2019\n" "Language-Team: German (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/de/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -107,11 +107,11 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/deferred_revenues.rst:24 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/installment_plans.rst:20 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/payment_terms.rst:19 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:18 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/check.rst:39 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/check.rst:103 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/credit_cards.rst:40 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/credit_cards.rst:113 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:19 msgid "Configuration" msgstr "Konfiguration" @@ -1411,36 +1411,6 @@ msgstr "Inhaber der Bankverbindung, wenn dieser nicht der Kunde ist" msgid "View *Bank Account* in our Online Demonstration" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:51 -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:146 -#: ../../accounting/others/analytic/timesheets.rst:78 -#: ../../accounting/payables/misc/employee_expense.rst:169 -#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:134 -#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:135 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:44 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:59 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:94 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:105 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/payment_terms.rst:31 -msgid "Todo" -msgstr "Zu erledigen" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:51 -msgid "add inherited field tooltip" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:53 -msgid "" -"**Display on reports :** Display this bank account on the documents that " -"will be printed or send to the customers" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:56 -msgid "" -"**Bank Identifier Code** = BIC : SWIFT Address assigned to a bank in order " -"to send automated payments quickly and accurately to the banks concerned" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:60 msgid "" "The initial balance of a bank statement will be set to the closing balance " @@ -1511,10 +1481,10 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/foreign_currency.rst:36 msgid "" "Once the Odoo is configured to support multiple currencies, you should " -"activate the currencies you plan to work with. To do that, go the menu " +"activate the currencies you plan to work with. To do that, go to the menu " ":menuselection:`Configuration --> Currencies`. All the currencies are " -"created by default, but you should activate the ones you plan to support. " -"(to activate a currency, check his active field)" +"created by default, but you should activate the ones you plan to support (to" +" activate a currency, check its \"Active\" field)." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/foreign_currency.rst:42 @@ -1615,9 +1585,9 @@ msgstr "" msgid "" "In the above report, the account receivable associated to Camptocamp is not " "managed in a secondary currency, which means that it keeps every transaction" -" in his own currency. If you prefer, you can set the account receivable of " -"this customer with a secondary currency and all his debts will automatically" -" be converted in this currency." +" in its own currency. If you prefer, you can set the account receivable for " +"this customer in a secondary currency and all its debts will automatically " +"be converted to this currency." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/foreign_currency.rst:115 @@ -1679,25 +1649,35 @@ msgid "Select 'General' for miscellaneous operations journals." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Use in Point of Sale" -msgstr "Beim Point-of-Sale verwenden" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Check this box if this journal define a payment method that can be used in a" -" point of sale." -msgstr "" -"Aktivieren Sie diese Option, wenn dieses Journal eine Zahlungsmethode " -"definiert hat, die in einem Point-of-Sales verwendet werden kann." - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Company" msgstr "Unternehmen" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Company related to this journal" msgstr "Unternehmen für dieses Journal" +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Defines how the bank statements will be registered" +msgstr "Legt fest, wie Kontoauszüge verarbeitet werden" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Synchronization Frequency" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Defines when a new bank statement" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "will be created when fetching new transactions" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "from your bank account." +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "Short Code" msgstr "Kurzzeichen" @@ -1741,8 +1721,8 @@ msgstr "" " Journal nicht den gleichen Nummernkreis verwenden wollen" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Credit Notes: Next Number" -msgstr "Gutschriften: Nächste Zahl" +msgid "Credit Notes Next Number" +msgstr "Gutschriften Nächste Nummer" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "The next sequence number will be used for the next credit note." @@ -1785,23 +1765,72 @@ msgid "The currency used to enter statement" msgstr "Währung bei Erfassung des Kontoauszugs" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Defines how the bank statements will be registered" -msgstr "Legt fest, wie Kontoauszüge verarbeitet werden" +msgid "Communication Type" +msgstr "Kommunikationsart" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Creation of Bank Statements" -msgstr "Erstellung von Kontoauszügen" +msgid "" +"You can set here the default communication that will appear on customer " +"invoices, once validated, to help the customer to refer to that particular " +"invoice when making the payment." +msgstr "" +"Hier können Sie die Standardkommunikation festlegen, die nach der " +"Validierung auf Kundenrechnungen angezeigt wird, damit der Kunde bei der " +"Zahlung auf diese Rechnung zugreifen kann." #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Defines when a new bank statement" +msgid "Communication Standard" +msgstr "Kommunikationsstandard" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "" +"You can choose different models for each type of reference. The default one " +"is the Odoo reference." +msgstr "" +"Sie können für jede Art von Referenz verschiedene Modelle auswählen. Die " +"Standardeinstellung ist die Odoo-Referenz." + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Alias Name" +msgstr "Alias-Name" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "It creates draft invoices and bills by sending an email." +msgstr "" +"Es erstellt Entwurfrechnungen und Rechnungen durch Senden einer E-Mail." + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Profit Account" +msgstr "Erlöskonto" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Used to register a profit when the ending balance of a cash register differs" +" from what the system computes" +msgstr "" +"Wird verwendet, um einen Gewinn zu buchen, wenn der Saldo einer Kasse vom " +"errechneten bzw. erwarteten abweicht." + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Loss Account" +msgstr "Verlustkonto" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Used to register a loss when the ending balance of a cash register differs " +"from what the system computes" +msgstr "" +"Wird verwendet, um einen Verlust zu buchen, wenn der Saldo einer Kasse vom " +"errechneten bzw. erwarteten abweicht." + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Lock Posted Entries with Hash" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "will be created when fetching new transactions" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "from your bank account." +msgid "" +"If ticked, the accounting entry or invoice receives a hash as soon as it is " +"posted and cannot be modified anymore." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 @@ -1847,64 +1876,6 @@ msgid "" "to your bank. Enable this option from the settings." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Profit Account" -msgstr "Erlöskonto" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Used to register a profit when the ending balance of a cash register differs" -" from what the system computes" -msgstr "" -"Wird verwendet, um einen Gewinn zu buchen, wenn der Saldo einer Kasse vom " -"errechneten bzw. erwarteten abweicht." - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Loss Account" -msgstr "Verlustkonto" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Used to register a loss when the ending balance of a cash register differs " -"from what the system computes" -msgstr "" -"Wird verwendet, um einen Verlust zu buchen, wenn der Saldo einer Kasse vom " -"errechneten bzw. erwarteten abweicht." - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Group Invoice Lines" -msgstr "Rechnungszeilen zusammenfassen" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"If this box is checked, the system will try to group the accounting lines " -"when generating them from invoices." -msgstr "" -"Bei Auswahl versucht das System die Buchungszeilen bei der Erzeugung aus " -"Rechnungen zu gruppieren." - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Post At Bank Reconciliation" -msgstr "Buche bei Begleichung durch Bank" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Whether or not the payments made in this journal should be generated in " -"draft state, so that the related journal entries are only posted when " -"performing bank reconciliation." -msgstr "" -"Ob die in dieses Journal gebuchten Zahlungen im Entwurf angelegt werden oder" -" nicht, so dass die zugehörigen Journalposten nur bei Bankausgleich gebucht " -"werden." - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Alias Name for Vendor Bills" -msgstr "Alternativbezeichnung für Eingangsrechnungen" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "It creates draft vendor bill by sending an email." -msgstr "Dies erzeugt Eingangsrechnungen im Entwurf durch Emailversand." - #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "Check Printing Payment Method Selected" msgstr "Scheckdruck-Zahlungsweg ausgewählt" @@ -1945,23 +1916,6 @@ msgstr "Nächste Schecknummer" msgid "Sequence number of the next printed check." msgstr "Laufende Nummer für den nächsten Scheckdruck. " -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Amount Authorized Difference" -msgstr "Genehmigter Differenzbetrag" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"This field depicts the maximum difference allowed between the ending balance" -" and the theoretical cash when closing a session, for non-POS managers. If " -"this maximum is reached, the user will have an error message at the closing " -"of his session saying that he needs to contact his manager." -msgstr "" -"Dieses Feld zeigt die maximal zulässige Differenz zwischen dem Endsaldo und " -"dem errechneten Bargeld beim Schließen einer Sitzung für nicht-PoS-Manager. " -"Wenn dieses Maximum erreicht ist, erhält der Benutzer beim Schließen seiner " -"Sitzung eine Fehlermeldung, die ihn dazu auffordert, seinen Manager zu " -"kontaktieren." - #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:25 msgid "Usage" msgstr "Verwendung" @@ -4795,164 +4749,6 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Explanation of the fields:" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Status" -msgstr "Status" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "When an asset is created, the status is 'Draft'." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"If the asset is confirmed, the status goes in 'Running' and the depreciation" -" lines can be posted in the accounting." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"You can manually close an asset when the depreciation is over. If the last " -"line of depreciation is posted, the asset automatically goes in that status." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Asset Category" -msgstr "Anlagenkategorie" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Category of asset" -msgstr "Anlagenkategorien" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Date" -msgstr "Datum" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Date of asset" -msgstr "Datum Geschäftsausstattung" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Depreciation Dates" -msgstr "Abschreibungsdaten" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "The way to compute the date of the first depreciation." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Based on last day of purchase period: The depreciation dates will be based" -" on the last day of the purchase month or the purchase year (depending on " -"the periodicity of the depreciations)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Based on purchase date: The depreciation dates will be based on the " -"purchase date." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "First Depreciation Date" -msgstr "Abschreibungsbeginn" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Note that this date does not alter the computation of the first journal " -"entry in case of prorata temporis assets. It simply changes its accounting " -"date" -msgstr "" -"Bemerken Sie, dass dies bei Prorata Temporis - Anlagen, nicht die Berechnung" -" der ersten Journalbuchung beeinträchtigt. Es wird nur das Buchungsdatum " -"verändert." - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Gross Value" -msgstr "Bruttoerlös" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Gross value of asset" -msgstr "Bruttowert der Anlage" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Salvage Value" -msgstr "Liquidationswert" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "It is the amount you plan to have that you cannot depreciate." -msgstr "" -"Das ist der geplante Erinnerungswert, der nicht abgeschrieben werden kann." - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Computation Method" -msgstr "Berechnungsmethode" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Choose the method to use to compute the amount of depreciation lines." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Linear: Calculated on basis of: Gross Value / Number of Depreciations" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Degressive: Calculated on basis of: Residual Value * Degressive Factor" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Time Method Based On" -msgstr "Zeit-Verfahren basiert auf" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Choose the method to use to compute the dates and number of entries." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Number of Entries: Fix the number of entries and the time between 2 " -"depreciations." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Ending Date: Choose the time between 2 depreciations and the date the " -"depreciations won't go beyond." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Prorata Temporis" -msgstr "Pro rata temporis" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Indicates that the first depreciation entry for this asset have to be done " -"from the asset date (purchase date) instead of the first January / Start " -"date of fiscal year" -msgstr "" -"Signalisiert, dass der Abschreibungsbeginn dieser Anlage vom Zugangsdatum " -"(Kaufdatum) und nicht vom Geschäftsjahresbeginn abgeleitet wird" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Number of Depreciations" -msgstr "Anzahl der Abschreibungen" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "The number of depreciations needed to depreciate your asset" -msgstr "" -"Die Anzahl an Abschreibungen, die das Anlagegut über die Nutzungsdauer " -"vollständig abschreibt." - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Number of Months in a Period" -msgstr "Anzahl der Monate in Perioden" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "The amount of time between two depreciations, in months" -msgstr "" -"Die Zeitspanne, in Monaten, die zwischen zwei Abschreibungen liegen soll." - #: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:88 msgid "Try creating an *Asset* in our online demonstration" msgstr "" @@ -5038,18 +4834,6 @@ msgid "" "should be registered through a customer invoice." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:146 -msgid "→ This has to be changed in Odoo: selling an asset should:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:148 -msgid "remove all \"Red\" lines" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:149 -msgid "create a new line that deprecate the whole residual value" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:3 msgid "How to manage a financial budget?" msgstr "" @@ -5706,12 +5490,6 @@ msgid "" "Progress)." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/others/analytic/timesheets.rst:79 -msgid "" -"Add a link, and the document is under Sales --> Invoicing Methods --> " -"Services --> How to invoices blabla" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/others/analytic/timesheets.rst:82 msgid "" "We save a Sales Order with the service product **External Consulting**. An " @@ -6520,6 +6298,26 @@ msgstr "" "länderspezifsche Berichte zu generieren sowie den Jahresabschluss zu steuern" " und Eröffnungsbilanzbuchungen zu generieren" +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "Can Create Asset" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Technical field specifying if the account can generate asset depending on " +"it's type. It is used in the account form view." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "Asset Model" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "" +"If this is selected, an asset will be created automatically when Journal " +"Items on this account are posted." +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 msgid "Tags" msgstr "Stichwörter" @@ -6552,6 +6350,16 @@ msgstr "" "verwendet: Die Art Umlaufvermögen findet bei Bargeld oder Bankkonten " "Verwendung, Forderungen/Verbindlichkeiten sind für Kunden/Lieferanten." +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "Internal Group" +msgstr "Interne Gruppe" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "" +"The 'Internal Group' is used to filter accounts based on the internal group " +"set on the account type." +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 msgid "Allow Reconciliation" msgstr "Erlaube Abstimmung" @@ -7397,6 +7205,7 @@ msgid "Multi-currency invoices & Vendor Bills" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/multicurrencies/invoices_payments.rst:54 +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Invoices" msgstr "Rechnungen" @@ -8658,7 +8467,8 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:28 msgid "" "Go to :menuselection:`Invoicing / Accounting --> Configuration --> Settings`" -" and check *TaxCloud - Compute tax rates based on U.S. ZIP codes*." +" and check *TaxCloud - Compute tax rates based on U.S. ZIP codes* (note: " +"actually uses complete street address)." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:30 @@ -8673,7 +8483,7 @@ msgstr "" msgid "" "Click the Refresh Icon next to *Default Category* to import the TIC product " "categories from TaxCloud (Taxability Information Codes). Some categories may" -" imply specific rates." +" imply specific rates or attract product/service type exemptions." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:38 @@ -8683,8 +8493,8 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:40 msgid "" -"Set a specific TaxCloud Category on the *General Information* tab of the " -"Product, or on the Product Category." +"Set a specific TaxCloud TIC Category on the *General Information* tab of the" +" Product, or on the Product Category." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:42 @@ -9199,6 +9009,7 @@ msgid "Balance = Debit - Credit" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/overview/main_concepts/memento.rst:84 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:83 msgid "Journal Entries" msgstr "Buchungssätze" @@ -10352,14 +10163,6 @@ msgid "" "invoice all your orders in batch)" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/payables/misc/employee_expense.rst:171 -msgid "" -"tip If you want to learn more; check the documentation page :doc: " -"../../../sale/invoicing/service/expense `*How to re-invoice expenses to your" -" customers* " -"`__" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/payables/misc/employee_expense.rst:176 msgid "Reimburse the employee" msgstr "" @@ -10632,6 +10435,22 @@ msgstr "Rechnungen vorhanden" msgid "Technical field used for usability purposes" msgstr "Hilfs-Feld zur Bedienungserleichterung" +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Technical field containing the invoice for which the payment has been " +"generated." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "" +"This does not especially correspond to the invoices reconciled with the " +"payment," +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "as it can have been generated first, and reconciled later" +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Hide Payment Method" msgstr "Zahlungsmethode verbergen" @@ -10644,6 +10463,10 @@ msgstr "" "Hilfs-Feld zum Verstecken der Zahlweise, wenn das ausgewählte Journal nur " "eine anbietet, nämlich 'manuell'" +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Payment Method" +msgstr "Zahlungsmethode" + #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Check: Pay bill by check and print it from Odoo." msgstr "" @@ -10663,6 +10486,30 @@ msgid "" "installed" msgstr "" +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Code" +msgstr "Code" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Technical field used to adapt the interface to the payment type selected." +msgstr "" +"Hilfs-Feld zur Anpassung der Benutzerschnittstelle an die ausgewählte " +"Zahlweise." + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Saved payment token" +msgstr "Zahlungs-Token gespeichert" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Note that tokens from acquirers set to only authorize transactions (instead " +"of capturing the amount) are not available." +msgstr "" +"Beachten Sie, dass Token von Zahlungsanbietern, die nur für die " +"Autorisierung von Transaktionen festgelegt wurden (anstatt die Menge zu " +"erfassen) nicht verfügbar sind." + #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Show Partner Bank Account" msgstr "Partner Bankkonto anzeigen" @@ -10676,15 +10523,14 @@ msgstr "" "Zahlungsformularen angezeigt werden muss oder nicht" #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 -msgid "Code" -msgstr "Code" +msgid "Require Partner Bank Account" +msgstr "Benötige ein Partner Bankkonto" #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "" -"Technical field used to adapt the interface to the payment type selected." +"Technical field used to know whether the field `partner_bank_account_id` " +"needs to be required or not in the payments form views" msgstr "" -"Hilfs-Feld zur Anpassung der Benutzerschnittstelle an die ausgewählte " -"Zahlweise." #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Check Number" @@ -10700,6 +10546,16 @@ msgstr "" "ausgedruckter Scheck bereits eine laufende Nummer hat, können Sie dies über " "die Konfiguration Ihres Journals anpassen." +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Journal Item Label" +msgstr "Buchungstext" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Change label of the counterpart that will hold the payment difference" +msgstr "" +"Beschriftung des Gegenpostens ändern, der den Zahlungsunterschied halten " +"wird" + #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:80 msgid "Try paying a supplier bill with a check" msgstr "" @@ -10977,7 +10833,6 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:10 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:10 msgid "" "SEPA is supported by the banks of the 28 EU member states as well as " "Iceland, Norway, Switzerland, Andorra, Monaco and San Marino." @@ -11131,14 +10986,6 @@ msgstr "" msgid ":doc:`check`" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:134 -msgid "How to define a new bank?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:135 -msgid "How to reconcile bank statements?" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/bills_or_receipts.rst:3 msgid "When should I use supplier bills or purchase receipts?" msgstr "" @@ -11557,7 +11404,7 @@ msgid "Account Receivables" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices.rst:3 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:53 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:77 msgid "Customer Invoices" msgstr "Ausgangsrechnungen" @@ -11709,6 +11556,162 @@ msgid "" " If needed, a rounding will be applied to the invoice." msgstr "" +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:3 +msgid "Credit Notes and Refunds" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:4 +msgid "" +"A **credit note**, or **credit memo**, is a document issued to a customer " +"that notifies them that they have been credited a certain amount." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:11 +msgid "There are several reasons that can lead to a credit note, such as:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:9 +msgid "a mistake in the invoice" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:10 +msgid "a return of the goods, or a rejection of the services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:11 +msgid "the goods delivered are damaged" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:14 +msgid "" +"Issuing a credit note is the only legal way to cancel, refund or modify a " +"validated invoice. Don’t forget to *register the payment* afterward if you " +"need to send money back to your customer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:20 +msgid "Issue a Credit Note" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:21 +msgid "" +"You can create a credit note from scratch by going to " +":menuselection:`Accounting --> Customers --> Credit Notes`, and by clicking " +"on *Create*. Filling the Credit Note’s form works the same way as the " +"Invoice’s form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:26 +msgid "" +"However, most of the time, credit notes are generated directly from the " +"invoices they are related to." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:29 +msgid "To do so, open the *Customer Invoice*, and click on *Add Credit Note*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:37 +msgid "You can choose between three options:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:35 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:44 +msgid "Partial Refund" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:36 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:55 +msgid "Full Refund" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:37 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:66 +msgid "Full refund and new draft invoice" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:40 +msgid "" +"Credit Notes’ numbers start with “R” and are followed by the number of the " +"document they are related to (e.g., RINV/2019/0004)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:45 +msgid "" +"Odoo creates a draft credit note already prefilled with all the necessary " +"information from the original invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:48 +msgid "" +"This is the option to choose to do a partial refund, or if you want to " +"modify any detail on the credit note." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:52 +msgid "" +"This is the only option available for invoices that are already marked as " +"*Paid*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:56 +msgid "" +"Odoo creates a credit note, automatically validates it, and reconciles the " +"original invoice with it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:62 +msgid "" +"This is the option to choose to do a full refund or cancel a validated " +"invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:67 +msgid "" +"Odoo creates a credit note, automatically validates it, reconciles the " +"original invoice with it, and open a new draft invoice prefilled with the " +"same details from the original invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:71 +msgid "" +"This is the option to choose to modify the content of a validated invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:74 +msgid "Record a Vendor Refund" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:75 +msgid "" +"**Vendor Refunds** are recorded the same way you would do with invoices’ " +"credit notes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:77 +msgid "" +"You can either create a credit note from scratch by going to " +":menuselection:`Accounting --> Vendors --> Refund`, and by clicking on " +"*Create*, or by opening the validated *Vendor Bill*, and clicking on *Add " +"Credit Note*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:84 +msgid "" +"Issuing a credit note from an invoice creates a **reverse entry** that " +"zeroes out the journal items generated by the original invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:87 +msgid "Here is an example of an invoice’s journal entry:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:92 +msgid "" +"And here is the credit note’s journal entry generated to reverse the " +"original invoice above:" +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/deferred_revenues.rst:3 msgid "Deferred revenues: how to automate them?" msgstr "" @@ -12086,10 +12089,6 @@ msgstr "" msgid "This process is good for both services and physical products." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:44 -msgid "Read more: *Invoice based on sales orders.*" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:47 msgid "Sales Order ‣ Delivery Order ‣ Invoice" msgstr "" @@ -12109,10 +12108,6 @@ msgid "" "later), the customer will receive two invoices, one for each delivery order." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:59 -msgid "Read more: *Invoice based on delivery orders.*" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:62 msgid "eCommerce Order ‣ Invoice" msgstr "" @@ -12170,12 +12165,6 @@ msgid "" "use a regular sales order." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:94 -msgid "" -"Read more: - *How to invoice based on time and material?* - *How to manage" -" contracts and invoicing plans?*" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:99 msgid "Recurring Contracts ‣ Invoices" msgstr "" @@ -12187,10 +12176,6 @@ msgid "" " the contract." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:105 -msgid "Read more: *Subscription based invoicing.*" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:111 msgid "Creating an invoice manually" msgstr "" @@ -12273,12 +12258,6 @@ msgid "" "100%)" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/payment_terms.rst:31 -msgid "" -"screenshot payment term forms, after QDP have commited the change planned on" -" this object" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/payment_terms.rst:35 msgid "Using Payment Terms" msgstr "" @@ -12339,102 +12318,193 @@ msgstr "" msgid ":doc:`cash_discounts`" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:3 -msgid "How to edit or refund an invoice?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:4 -msgid "" -"In Odoo, it's not possible to modify an invoice that has been validated and " -"sent to the customer. If a mistake was made on a validated invoice, the " -"legal way to handle that is to refund the invoice, reconcile it with the " -"original invoice to close them and create a new invoice." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:10 -msgid "Modifying a validated invoice" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:12 -msgid "" -"If you need to modify an existing invoice, use the Refund Invoice button on " -"the invoice. In the refund method field, select \"Modify: create a refund, " -"reconcile, and create a new draft invoice\"." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:19 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:37 -msgid "Odoo will automatically:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:21 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:39 -msgid "Create a refund for your invoice" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:22 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:40 -msgid "" -"Reconcile the refund invoice with the original invoice (marking both as " -"Paid)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:23 -msgid "Create a new draft invoice you can modify" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:25 -msgid "" -"Then, you can modify the draft invoice and validate it once it's correct." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:28 -msgid "Cancelling an invoice" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:30 -msgid "" -"If you need to cancel an existing invoice, use the Refund Invoice button on " -"the invoice. In the refund method field, select \"Cancel: create a refund " -"and reconcile\"." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:42 -msgid "" -"Nothing else needs to be done. You can send the refund by regular mail or " -"email to your customer, if you already sent the original invoice." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:46 -msgid "Refunding part of an invoice" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:48 -msgid "" -"If you need to refund an existing invoice partially, use the Refund Invoice " -"button on the invoice. In the refund method field, select \"Create a draft " -"refund\"." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:55 -msgid "" -"Odoo will automatically create a draft refund. You may modify the refund " -"(example: remove the lines you do not want to refund) and validate it. Then," -" send the refund by regular mail or email to your customer." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:61 -msgid "" -"Refunding an invoice is different from refunding a payment. Usually, a " -"refund invoice is sent before the customer has done a payment. If the " -"customer has already paid, they should be reimbursed by doing a customer " -"payment refund." -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments.rst:3 msgid "Customer Payments" msgstr "Kundeneinzahlungen" +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:3 +msgid "Batch Payments: SEPA Direct Debit (SDD)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:4 +msgid "" +"SEPA, the Single Euro Payments Area, is a payment-integration initiative of " +"the European Union for simplification of bank transfers denominated in EURO." +" With **SEPA Direct Debit**, your customers can sign a **mandate** that " +"authorizes you to collect future payments from their bank accounts " +"automatically." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:10 +msgid "" +"You can record your customer mandates in Odoo, and generate XML files " +"containing pending payments made with an SDD mandate." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:0 +msgid "" +"SDD is supported by all SEPA countries, which includes the 28 member states " +"of the European Union as well as additional countries." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:0 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:123 +msgid "" +"`List of all SEPA countries. `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:19 +msgid "" +"Go to :menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Settings` nd activate" +" the **SEPA Direct Debit (SDD)** feature. Enter the **Creditor Identifier** " +"of your company. This number is provided by your bank, or the authority " +"responsible for delivering them." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:28 +msgid "SEPA Direct Debit Mandates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:30 +msgid "Create a mandate" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:31 +msgid "" +"The SEPA Direct Debit Mandate is the document that your customers sign to " +"authorize you to collect money directly from their bank accounts." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:34 +msgid "" +"To create a new one, go to :menuselection:`Accounting --> Customers --> " +"Direct Debit Mandates`, click on *Create*, and fill out the new mandate’s " +"form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:41 +msgid "" +"First, export the PDF file by clicking on *Print*. It is then up to your " +"customer to sign this document. Once done, upload the signed file in the " +"**Original Document** field, and click on *Validate* to start running the " +"mandate." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:47 +msgid "" +"First, make sure, that the **IBAN bank accounts details** are correctly " +"recorded on the debtor’s contact form, under the *Accounting* tab, and in " +"your own *Bank Account* settings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:52 +msgid "Close or revoke a mandate" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Direct Debit mandates are closed automatically after their *End Date*. If " +"this field is left blank, then the mandate keeps being *Active* until it is " +"*Closed* or *Revoked*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:60 +msgid "" +"Clicking on **Close** updates the mandate’s end day to the current day. This" +" means that invoices made after the present day won’t be processed " +"automatically with an SDD payment." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:64 +msgid "" +"Clicking on **Revoke** disables the mandate immediately. No SDD payment can " +"be registered anymore, regardless of the invoice’s date. However, payments " +"that have already been registered will still be included to the next SDD XML" +" file." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:70 +msgid "" +"Once a mandate has been *closed* or *revoked*, it cannot be reactivated. If " +"a customer requires to pay with SDD payments again, you will have to create " +"a new mandate from scratch." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:75 +msgid "Get paid with SDD Batch Payments" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:78 +msgid "" +"All new posted invoice issued to customers with an active mandate will " +"automatically register payment and have their status marked as *Paid*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:82 +msgid "" +"If you have unpaid invoices that could be paid with a new mandate, it is " +"still possible to do it. Go on the invoice, click on *Register Payment* and " +"choose *SEPA Direct Debit* as payment method." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:87 +msgid "Generate SEPA Direct Debit XML files to submit payments" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:88 +msgid "" +"To submit your SDD payments to your bank, you will first generate an **XML " +"file** that can be uploaded directly to your bank interface." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:91 +msgid "" +"The files generated by Odoo follow the SEPA Direct Debit **PAIN.008.001.02**" +" specifications as required by the SEPA customer-to-bank Implementation " +"Guidelines, which ensures compatibility with the banks." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:95 +msgid "" +"To generate your XML file for the pending SDD payments, go to the related " +"*bank journal* on your *Accounting dashboard*, then click on *Direct Debit " +"Payments to Collect*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:102 +msgid "" +"Select all the payments in the list that you want to include in your SDD XML" +" file, then click on *Action* and select *Create Batch Payment*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:108 +msgid "" +"Odoo then takes you to your *Batch Payment*’s form. Click on *Validate* and " +"then download the SDD XML file." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:114 +msgid "Finally, upload this file to your bank to process the payments." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:117 +msgid "" +"You can retrieve all the generated SDD XML files by going to " +":menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Customers --> Batch " +"Payments`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:121 +msgid ":doc:`../../bank/setup/create_bank_account`" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:122 +msgid "" +"`Odoo Academy: SEPA Direct Debit Mandates (SDD) " +"`_" +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/check.rst:3 msgid "How to register customer payments by checks?" msgstr "" @@ -12926,128 +12996,6 @@ msgid "" "negative number of due days." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:3 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:29 -msgid "Get paid with SEPA" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:5 -msgid "" -"SEPA, the Single Euro Payments Area, is a payment-integration initiative of " -"the European Union for simplification of bank transfers denominated in EURO." -" SEPA Direct Debit allows you to withdraw money from the bank accounts of " -"your customers with their approval." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:13 -msgid "" -"With Odoo, you can record customer mandates, generate an SDD XML file " -"containing customer payments and upload it in your bank interface. The file " -"follows the SEPA Direct Debit PAIN.008.001.02 specifications. This is a " -"well-defined standard that makes consensus among banks." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:21 -msgid "" -"Go in :menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Settings` and " -"activate the SEPA Direct Debit (SDD) Feature. Enter the Creditor Identifier " -"of your company. This number is provided by your bank." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:32 -msgid "Direct Debit Mandates" -msgstr "Lastschriftmandate" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:34 -msgid "" -"Before withdrawing money from a customer bank account, your customer has to " -"sign a mandate. Go in :menuselection:`Accounting --> Sales --> Direct Debit " -"Mandates` and create a new mandate." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:41 -msgid "SEPA Direct Debit only works between IBAN Bank Accounts." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:43 -msgid "" -"Once you have entered all the information in the customer mandate, you can " -"print it and ask your customer to sign it. Once it is done, you can upload " -"the mandate signed by your customer on the mandate in Odoo." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:50 -msgid "You can now validate the mandate." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:55 -msgid "Let's create an invoice for that customer." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:57 -msgid "" -"When you will validate this invoice, the payment will be automatically " -"generated and your invoice will be directly marked as paid." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:61 -msgid "" -"If you already had some invoices for that customer that could be paid using " -"that mandate, it's still possible to do it. Go on the invoice, click on " -"register payment and choose the Sepa Direct Debit as payment method." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:67 -msgid "Generate SDD Files" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:69 -msgid "" -"You can generate the SDD File with all the customer payments to send to your" -" bank directly from the accounting dashboard :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:75 -msgid "" -"You select the payments in the list that you want to include in your SDD " -"File, click on action and select \"Generate Direct Debit XML\"." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:81 -msgid "" -"You can now download the XML file generated by Odoo and upload it in your " -"bank interface." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:85 -msgid "" -"You can retrieve all the generated XML by activating the developer mode and " -"going in :menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Payments --> SDD " -"Payment File`." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:89 -msgid "Close or revoke a mandate" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:91 -msgid "" -"The Direct Debit mandate will be closed automatically once the end date " -"defined on it is reached. However, you can **close** a mandate earlier than " -"initially planned. To do that, simply go on the mandate and click on the " -"\"Close\" button.The end date of the mandate will be updated to today's " -"date. This means you will not be able to pay invoices with an invoice date " -"superior to this end date. Be careful, once a mandate is closed, it cannot " -"be reopened." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:99 -msgid "" -"You can also **revoke** a mandate. In that case, you won't be able to pay " -"any invoice using that mandate anymore, no matter the invoice date.To do " -"that, simply go on the mandate and click on the \"Revoke\" button." -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/recording.rst:3 msgid "What are the different ways to record a payment?" msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po index 21ab4fa1a..ddcb4f9df 100644 --- a/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po +++ b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po @@ -4,17 +4,18 @@ # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # # Translators: -# Martin Trigaux, 2019 # Leon Grill , 2019 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Jan Meyer, 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: Leon Grill , 2019\n" +"Last-Translator: Jan Meyer, 2019\n" "Language-Team: German (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/de/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -38,42 +39,48 @@ msgstr "" msgid "" "The system can generate leads instead of opportunities, in order to add a " "qualification step before converting a *Lead* into an *Opportunity* and " -"assigning to the right sales people. You can activate this mode from the CRM" -" Settings. It applies to all your sales channels by default. But you can " -"make it specific for specific channels from their configuration form." +"assigning to the right sales people." msgstr "" -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:13 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:9 +msgid "" +"You can activate this mode from the CRM Settings. It applies to all your " +"sales channels by default. But you can make it specific for specific " +"channels from their configuration form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:14 #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:41 -#: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:13 ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:12 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:8 ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:13 +#: ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:12 #: ../../crm/track_leads/prospect_visits.rst:12 msgid "Configuration" msgstr "Konfiguration" -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:15 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:16 msgid "" "For this feature to work, go to :menuselection:`CRM --> Configuration --> " "Settings` and activate the *Leads* feature." msgstr "" -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:21 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:22 msgid "" "You will now have a new submenu *Leads* under *Leads* where they will " "aggregate." msgstr "" -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:28 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:29 msgid "Convert a lead into an opportunity" msgstr "" -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:30 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:31 msgid "" "When you click on a *Lead* you will have the option to convert it to an " "opportunity and decide if it should still be assigned to the same " "channel/person and if you need to create a new customer." msgstr "" -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:37 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:38 msgid "" "If you already have an opportunity with that customer Odoo will " "automatically offer you to merge with that opportunity. In the same manner, " @@ -81,6 +88,44 @@ msgid "" "customer already exists." msgstr "" +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:44 +msgid "Merge opportunities" +msgstr "Chancen zusammenführen" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:46 +msgid "" +"Odoo will also automatically propose to merge opportunities if they have the" +" same email address. When merging opportunities, Odoo merges the information" +" into the opportunity which was created first, giving priority to the " +"information present on the first opportunity." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:51 +msgid "" +"No information is lost: data from the other opportunity is logged in the " +"chatter and the information fields for easy access." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:57 +msgid "" +"Would you find a duplicate yourself, ...you can also merge opportunities or " +"leads even if the system doesn't propose it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:60 +msgid "" +"Here’s how, from the list view. Select the opportunities or leads you want " +"to merge and the action button will appear. Then, you can select merge." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:66 +msgid "..note::" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:67 +msgid "It is also possible to merge more than 2 opportunities or leads." +msgstr "" + #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_email.rst:3 msgid "Generate leads/opportunities from emails" msgstr "" @@ -190,6 +235,104 @@ msgid "" "CRM settings and refer to :doc:`convert`." msgstr "" +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:3 +msgid "Lead mining" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:4 +msgid "" +"In any business, getting quality leads is essential to keep the business " +"growing. Lead mining allows you to generate leads from scratch directly from" +" your database. Target your leads based on a set of criteria such as the " +"country, the size of the company, the industry your leads are coming from to" +" make them relevant to your business." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:10 +msgid "" +"For this feature to work, go to :menuselection:`CRM → Configuration → " +"Settings` and activate the **Lead Mining** feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:17 +msgid "Start generating leads" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:18 +msgid "" +"You will now have a new button **Generate Leads** available in your " +"pipeline. You are also able to create lead mining requests from the " +"**Configuration → Lead Mining Requests** and trough **Leads → Leads** where " +"you have the **Generate Leads** button" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:25 +msgid "" +"From there, click on the **Generate Leads** button, a window where you will " +"be able to pick your criteria will pop up." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:32 +msgid "" +"When choosing to target Companied and their contacts you can choose the " +"contacts you are getting based on Role or Seniority. When getting contact " +"information make sure to be aware of the latest EU regulation, get more " +"information about General Data Protection Regulation on `Odoo GDPR " +"`__," +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:37 +msgid "" +"You can decide to filter the leads you are getting depending on the size " +"(number of employees) of the companies. You can pick the countries your " +"leads are coming from. It is possible to pick multiple countries. You can " +"pick the industries your leads are coming from. It is possible to pick " +"multiple countries." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:41 +msgid "" +"You can choose the salesperson and the Salesteam the lead will be assigned " +"to. You can also add tags to track your generated leads." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:45 +msgid "The generated leads will have the name of the company." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:48 +msgid "Pricing" +msgstr "Preiskalkulation" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:49 +msgid "" +"This is an In-App Purchase feature, each generated lead will cost you one " +"credit. If you choose to get contact information each contact will also cost" +" us one additional credit. Here is the pricing for this `feature " +"`__, To buy credits you can " +"either go to CRM > Configuration > Settings > Buy Credits; or go to Settings" +" > In-App Purchases>View my Services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:62 +msgid "" +"The blue box will automatically tell you how many credits are going to be " +"consumed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:65 +msgid "" +"If you are on Odoo Online (SAAS) and have the Enterprise version, you " +"benefit from free trial credits to test the feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:67 +msgid "" +"More information about `In-App Purchases " +"`__," +" (IAP)." +msgstr "" + #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/send_quotes.rst:3 msgid "Send quotations" msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po index 029812e46..2aff3bf39 100644 --- a/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po +++ b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" "Last-Translator: darenkster , 2019\n" "Language-Team: German (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/de/)\n" @@ -665,76 +665,74 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:39 msgid "" "In your Odoo instance, click on **Settings**. You will have a section " -"showing you the active users on your database. Click on **Manage access " -"rights.**" +"showing you the active users on your database. Click on **Manage Users.**" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:44 -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:82 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:43 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:80 msgid "|settings|" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:44 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:43 msgid "|browse_users|" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:47 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:46 msgid "You'll then see the list of your users." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:52 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:51 msgid "" "The pre-selected filter *Internal Users* shows your paying users (different " "from the *Portal Users* which are free). If you remove this filter, you'll " "get all your users (the ones you pay for and the portal ones)" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:57 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:56 msgid "" "In your list of users, click on the user you want to deactivate. As soon as " -"you are on the userform, go with your mouse cursor on the status **Active** " -"(top right). Click on Active and you will notice that the status will change" -" to **Inactive** immediately." +"you are on the userform, click on the Action drop down menu, and then click " +"on Archive." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:66 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:64 msgid "The user is now deactivated." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:68 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:66 msgid "**Never** deactivate the main user (*admin*)" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:71 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:69 msgid "Uninstalling Apps" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:73 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:71 msgid "" "Make sure you first test what you are about to do on a :ref:`duplicate " "` of your database before making any changes (*especially*" " installing/uninstalling apps)." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:77 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:75 msgid "" "In your Odoo instance click on **Settings**; in this app, you will be able " "to see how many applications you have installed. Click on **Browse Apps** to" " access the list of your installed applications." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:82 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:80 msgid "|browse_apps|" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:85 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:83 msgid "" "In your applications' dashboard, you will see all the icons of your " "applications. Click on the application you want to uninstall. Then, on the " "form of the application, click on **Uninstall**." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:92 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:90 msgid "" "Some applications have dependencies, like Invoicing, eCommerce, etc. " "Therefore, the system will give you a warning message to advise you of what " @@ -744,20 +742,20 @@ msgid "" " click **Confirm**." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:99 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:97 msgid "" "Last, after having checked the warning message (if any), click **Confirm**." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:104 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:102 msgid "You have finished uninstalling your application." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:107 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:105 msgid "Good to know" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:109 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:107 msgid "" "**Uninstalling apps, managing users, etc. is up to you**: no one else can " "know if your business flow is broken better than you. If we were to " @@ -767,7 +765,7 @@ msgid "" "operations." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:115 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:113 msgid "" "**Odoo Apps have dependencies**: this means that you may need to install " "modules that you do not actively use to access some features of Odoo you " @@ -777,7 +775,7 @@ msgid "" "to work properly." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:122 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:120 msgid "" "**Always test app installation/removal on a duplicate** (or on a free trial " "database): that way you can know what other apps may be required, etc. This " diff --git a/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/general.po b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/general.po index 81cc27534..47cc35736 100644 --- a/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/general.po +++ b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/general.po @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Martin Trigaux, 2019\n" "Language-Team: German (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/de/)\n" @@ -756,6 +756,110 @@ msgid "" "company). You must first import the companies and then the persons." msgstr "" +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase.rst:3 +msgid "In-App Purchase" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:3 +msgid "General guide about In-App Purchase (IAP) Services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:4 +msgid "" +"In-App Purchases (IAP) gives access to additional services through Odoo. For" +" instance, it allows me to send SMS Text Messages or to send Invoices by " +"post directly from my database." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:7 +msgid "Buying Credits" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Each IAP Service relies on prepaid credits to work and has its own pricing. " +"To consult my current balance or to recharge my account, go to *Settings> " +"Odoo IAP > View my Services*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:13 +msgid "" +"If I am on Odoo Online (SAAS) and have the Enterprise version, I benefit " +"from free credits to test our IAP features." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:16 +msgid "IAP accounts" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:17 +msgid "" +"Credits to use IAP services are stored on IAP accounts, which are specific " +"to each service and database. By default, IAP accounts are common to all " +"companies, but can be restricted to specific ones by going to *Settings app " +"> Activate the Developer Mode > Technical Settings > IAP Accoun*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:23 +msgid "IAP Portal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:24 +msgid "" +"The IAP Portal is a platform regrouping my IAP Services. It is accessible " +"from *Settings app > Odoo IAP > View my Services*. From there, I can view my" +" current balance, recharge my credits, review my consumption and set a " +"reminder to when credits are low." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:30 +msgid "Get notified when credits are low" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:31 +msgid "" +"To be notified when it’s time to recharge my credits, I’ll go to my IAP " +"Portal through *Settings app> Odoo IAP > View my Services*, unfold a service" +" and mark the Receive threshold warning option. Then, I’ll provide a minimum" +" amount of credits and email addresses. Now, every time that the limit is " +"reached, an automatic reminder will be sent to by email!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:38 +msgid "IAP services available" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:39 +msgid "" +"Different services are available depending on the hosting type of your " +"Database:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:41 +msgid "" +"*Odoo Online (SAAS)*: only the IAP services provided by Odoo can be used " +"(i.e. the SMS, Snailmail, Reveal and Partner Autocomplete features);" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:43 +msgid "" +"*Odoo.sh and Odoo Enterprise (on-premise)*: both the services provided by " +"Odoo and by third-party apps can be used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:46 +msgid "Offering my own services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:47 +msgid "" +"I am more than welcome to offer my own IAP services through Odoo Apps! It is" +" the perfect opportunity to get recurring revenue for an ongoing service use" +" rather than — and possibly instead of — a sole initial purchase. Please, " +"find more information at: `In-App Purchase " +"`_" +msgstr "" + #: ../../general/odoo_basics.rst:3 msgid "Basics" msgstr "" @@ -817,14 +921,6 @@ msgid "" "users>`_" msgstr "" -#: ../../general/odoo_basics/add_user.rst:47 -msgid "Todo" -msgstr "Zu erledigen" - -#: ../../general/odoo_basics/add_user.rst:47 -msgid "Add link to How to add companies" -msgstr "" - #: ../../general/odoo_basics/choose_language.rst:3 msgid "Manage Odoo in your own language" msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po index 2e81d7409..ae43c2ace 100644 --- a/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po +++ b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po @@ -6,15 +6,16 @@ # Translators: # DE T2 , 2019 # Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Leon Grill , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: Martin Trigaux, 2019\n" +"Last-Translator: Leon Grill , 2019\n" "Language-Team: German (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/de/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -26,6 +27,94 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Helpdesk" msgstr "Kundendienst" +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:3 +msgid "" +"After sales features: refund, coupon, return, repair, onsite interventions" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:4 +msgid "" +"As my business grows, having the tools to allow my helpdesk team to record, " +"track and manage issues raised easy and efficiently, is key. Odoo’s Helpdesk" +" app allows me to generate credit notes, return products, grant coupons, do " +"repairs and plan onsite interventions from a ticket’s page." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:7 +msgid "Set up the After Sales services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Go to *Configuration > Helpdesk Teams* and enable the After Sales options: " +"*Refunds, Returns, Coupons, Repairs and Onsite Interventions*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:14 +msgid "Generate credit notes from tickets" +msgstr "Gutschriften aus Tickets generieren" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:15 +msgid "" +"I can use a credit note to refund a customer or adjust the amount due. For " +"that, I’ll simply go to my ticket page, click on *Refund* and select the " +"corresponding *Invoice*. Clicking on *Reverse* the credit note will be " +"generated, and I can *Post* it while still being in the *Helpdesk* app." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:22 +msgid "Allow product returns from tickets" +msgstr "Produktrückgaben von Tickets zulassen" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:23 +msgid "" +"The process of a product return from my customer back to my warehouse will " +"be taken into action when, at the ticket page, I choose the option *Return*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:29 +msgid "Grant coupons from tickets" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:30 +msgid "" +"First, be sure to have your *Coupon Program* planned at the *Sales or " +"Website* app. At the *Helpdesk* app, I will open my ticket and click on " +"*Coupon*, choose the *Coupon Program > Generate*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:37 +msgid "Repairs from tickets" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:38 +msgid "" +"Clicking on *Repair* option, on my ticket page, a new repair order form will" +" be shown. Fill up the rest of the fields as needed and choose the next " +"step." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:44 +msgid "Plan onsite interventions from tickets" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:45 +msgid "" +"At the ticket page, I can now configure my onsite interventions exactly the " +"same way I would do being on the *Field Service* app, clicking on *Plan " +"Intervention*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:52 +msgid "" +"`Coupons `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:53 +msgid ":doc:`../manufacturing/repair/repair`" +msgstr "" + #: ../../helpdesk/getting_started.rst:3 msgid "Get started with Odoo Helpdesk" msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po index e2046f174..a0645341e 100644 --- a/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po +++ b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po @@ -5,27 +5,27 @@ # # Translators: # DE T2 , 2019 -# Thorsten Vocks , 2019 # Ermin Trevisan , 2019 # Anja Funk , 2019 # Katharina Moritz , 2019 -# Bülent Tiknas , 2019 # Wolfgang Taferner, 2019 -# darenkster , 2019 # Leon Grill , 2019 # Niki Waibel, 2019 +# e2f , 2019 +# Thorsten Vocks , 2019 # Chris Egal , 2019 # Martin Trigaux, 2019 -# Johannes Croe , 2019 +# Bülent Tiknas , 2019 +# Patrick Heuel , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: Johannes Croe , 2019\n" +"Last-Translator: Patrick Heuel , 2019\n" "Language-Team: German (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/de/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ msgstr "" "Language: de\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n" -#: ../../inventory.rst:5 ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:64 +#: ../../inventory.rst:5 msgid "Inventory" msgstr "Lager" @@ -46,287 +46,361 @@ msgid "Daily Operations" msgstr "Tagesgeschäft" #: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:3 -msgid "How to do an inventory adjustment with barcodes?" +msgid "Process to an Inventory Adjustment with Barcodes" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:5 -msgid "From the Barcode application:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:7 -msgid "Click on **Inventory**" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:12 msgid "" -"Scan all the products (if you have 5 identical articles, scan it 5 times, or" -" use the keyboard to set the quantity)." +"To process an inventory adjustment by using barcodes, you first need to open" +" the *Barcode* app. Then, from the application, click on *Inventory " +"Adjustments*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:13 +msgid "" +"If you want to fully work with barcodes, you can download the sheet " +"*Commands for Inventory*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:16 msgid "" -"If you manage multiple locations, scan the location before scanning the " -"products. Eg. scan a shelf's barcode ; scan each product on the shelf ; " -"repeat for each shelf in the wharehouse." +"Once you have clicked on *Inventory Adjustments*, Odoo will automatically " +"create one. Note that, if you work with multi-location, you first need to " +"specify in which location the inventory adjustment takes place." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:20 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:24 msgid "" -"When you've scanned all the items of the location, validate the inventory " -"manually or by scanning the **Validate** barcode." +"If you don’t work with multi-location, you will be able to scan the " +"different products you want to include in the inventory adjustment." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:3 -msgid "How to process delivery orders?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:31 msgid "" -"There are two approaches to process delivery orders: you can either work on " -"printed documents (and scan lines on the documents), or on a screen (and " -"scan products directly)." -msgstr "" -"Es gibt zwei Ansätze, um Lieferaufträge zu bearbeiten: Sie können entweder " -"auf gedruckten Dokumenten (und Scan der Zeilen auf den Dokumenten) oder auf " -"einem Bildschirm (und Scan der Produkte direkt) arbeiten." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:10 -msgid "Process printed delivery orders:" +"If you have 5 identical articles, scan it 5 times or use the keyboard to set" +" the quantity." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:12 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:34 msgid "" -"Print delivery orders of the day by selecting all documents from the **To " -"Do** list and print **Picking Operations** from the top menu." +"Besides using the barcode scanner, you can also manually add a product if " +"necessary. To do so, click on *Add Product* and fill the information in " +"manually." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:44 msgid "" -"Once you start processing your delivery orders, **scan the barcode** on the " -"top-right corner of the document to load the right record on the screen." +"When you have scanned all the items of the location, validate the inventory " +"manually or scan the *Validate* barcode." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:19 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:3 +msgid "Work with Barcode Nomenclature" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:5 msgid "" -"Then, **scan the barcode** of every product, or scan the barcode of the " -"product on the picking line if the barcode on the product is not easily " -"accessible, visible or is missing." +"There are different situations in which barcode nomenclatures can be useful." +" A well-known use case is the one of a point of sales that sells products in" +" bulk. The customers will scale their products themselves and get the " +"printed barcode to stick on the product. This barcode will contain the " +"weight of the product and help compute the price accordingly." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:23 -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:24 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:13 +msgid "Create a Barcode Nomenclature" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:15 msgid "" -"Once you scanned all products, scan the **Validate** barcode action to " -"finish the operation." +"Odoo supports *Barcode Nomenclatures*, which determine the mapping and " +"interpretation of the encoded information." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:30 -msgid "Process delivery orders from a computer or mobile device:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:32 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:18 msgid "" -"Load all the delivery orders marked as **To Do**, and open the first one." +"To configure the *Barcode Nomenclature*, you need to activate the debug " +"mode. To do so, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Barcode Nomenclature*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:35 -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:33 -msgid "Pick up and scan each listed product." -msgstr "Nehmen und scannen Sie jedes aufgelistete Produkt." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:37 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:22 msgid "" -"When you've picked all the items, click the **Validate** button or scan the " -"**Validate barcode** action to finish the Operation." +"You can create a barcode nomenclature from there, and then add a line to " +"create your first rule." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:40 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:28 msgid "" -"Move to the next delivery order to process by clicking on the top-right " -"right **arrow** or scanning the **Pager-Next** barcode action." +"The first step is to specify the *rule name*, for example, *Weight Barcode* " +"with 3 decimals. Then, you have to specify the type for barcode " +"nomenclature, like the *Weighted Product*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:35 +msgid "" +"The *Barcode Pattern* is a regular expression that defines the structure of " +"the barcode. In this example, 21 defines the products on which the rule will" +" be applied. Those are the numbers by which the product barcode should " +"start. The 5 “dots” are the following numbers of the product barcode and are" +" there to identify the product in question. The “N” defines a number and the" +" “D” defines the decimals." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:43 +msgid "" +"You can define different rules and order their priority thanks to the " +"sequence. The first rule that matches the scanned barcode will then be " +"applied." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:48 +msgid "Configure your Product" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:50 +msgid "The barcode of the product should start by “21”;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:52 +msgid "" +"The 5 “dots” are the other numbers of your product barcode, allowing to " +"identify the product;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:54 +msgid "" +"The barcode should contain 0’s when you did defined D’s or N’s. In our case," +" we need to set 5 zeros because we condigures “21………{NNDDD}”;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:56 +msgid "" +"In EAN-13, the last number is a check number. Use an EAN13 generator to know" +" which digit it should be in your case." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:61 +msgid "" +"In case you weight 1,5kg of pasta, the balance will print you the following " +"barcode: *2112345015001*. If you scan this barcode in your PoS, or when " +"receiving the products in your barcode app, Odoo will automatically create a" +" new line for the product, for a quantity of 1,5kg." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:67 +msgid "" +"For the point of sale, a price depending on the quantity will also be " +"computed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:74 +msgid "Rule Types" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:76 +msgid "" +"**Priced Product**: it allows you to identify the product and specify its " +"price, used in PoS;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:78 +msgid "" +"**Discounted Product**: it allows you to create one barcode per applied " +"discount. Then, you can scan your product in the PoS and apply discounts on " +"the product by scanning the discount barcode;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:80 +msgid "" +"**Weighted Product**: it allows you to identify the product and specify its " +"weight, used in both PoS and in Inventory;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:82 +msgid "" +"**Client**: it allows you to identify the customer, for example used with " +"loyalty program;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:84 +msgid "" +"**Cashier**: it allows you to identify the cashier when entering the PoS;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:86 +msgid "" +"**Location**: it allows you to identify the location on a transfer when " +"multi-location is activated;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:88 +msgid "" +"**Package**: it allows you to identify packages on a transfer when packages " +"are activated;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:90 +msgid "" +"**Lot**: it allows you to identify the lot number of a product on a " +"transfer;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:92 +msgid "" +"**Credit Card**: it doesn’t need manual modification, exists for data from " +"the Mercury module;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:94 +msgid "" +"**Unit Product**: it allows you to identify a product for both PoS and " +"Transfers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:97 +msgid "" +"When the barcode pattern contains .*, it means that it can contain any " +"number of characters. Those characters can be any number." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:3 -msgid "How to do an internal transfer?" +msgid "Process to Transfers" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:5 -msgid "In Odoo, there are two types of internal transfers:" -msgstr "In Odoo gibt es zwei Arten von internen Übertragungen:" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:6 +msgid "Simple Transfers" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:7 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:8 msgid "" -"Those initiated automatically by the system (for example, a quality control)" +"To process a transfer from the *Barcode* app, the first step is to go to " +"*Operations*." msgstr "" -"Diejenigen, die automatisch vom System initiiert werden (z.B. eine " -"Qualitätskontrolle)" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:10 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:14 msgid "" -"Those created by a worker (for example, through the internal transfer area " -"of the dashboard)." -msgstr "" -"Die von einem Arbeiter erzeugten (z. B. durch den internen Transferbereich " -"des Dashboards)." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:13 -msgid "To make an Internal Transfer:" +"Then, you have the choice to either enter an existing transfer, by going to " +"the corresponding operation type and manually selecting the one you want to " +"enter, or by scanning the barcode of the transfer." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:15 -msgid "From the home of the barcode application, scan the **source location**" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:17 -msgid "Pick up and **scan the products**" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:19 -msgid "Scan the **destination location**" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:21 -msgid "**Validate** the transfer to finish it" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:3 -msgid "How to handle lots and serial numbers with barcodes?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:24 msgid "" -"Lots Numbers can be encoded from incoming shipments, internal moves and " -"outgoing deliveries:" +"From there, you will be able to scan the products that are part of the " +"existing transfer and/or add new products to this transfer. Once all the " +"products have been scanned, you can validate the transfer to proceed with " +"the stock moves." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:33 msgid "" -"In the barcode interface, **scan** the products you want create a lot from" +"If you have different storage locations in your warehouse, you can add " +"additional steps for the different operation types." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:10 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:37 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:50 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:45 +msgid "Receipts" +msgstr "Anlieferungen" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:39 msgid "" -"If this product should be manage by lots, a window opens to help you scan " -"the lots/serial numbers" +"When receiving a product in stock, you need to scan its barcode in order to " +"identify it in the system. Once done, you can either make it enter the main " +"location of the transfer, for example WH/Stock, or scan a location barcode " +"to make it enter a sub-location of the main location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:48 msgid "" -"**Scan** a lot barcode, **type** one manually or **leave empty** to generate" -" one automatically" +"If you want the product to enter WH/Stock in our example, you can simply " +"scan the next product." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:16 -msgid "Click or scan **Validate** once you are done" -msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:52 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery.rst:3 +msgid "Delivery Orders" +msgstr "Lieferaufträge" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:18 -msgid "What is the difference between **Lots** and **Serial Numbers**?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:20 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:54 msgid "" -"**Lot** numbers are attributed to several identical products, so each time " -"you scan a lot number, Odoo will add one on the product count." +"When delivering a product, you have to scan the source location if it is " +"different than the one initially set on the transfer. Then, you can start " +"scanning the products that are delivered from this specific location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:24 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:62 msgid "" -"On the opposite, a **serial number** is unique, and represented by only one " -"barcode, sticked on only one item. This means that Odoo won't accept " -"scanning the same serial number more than once per operation." +"Once the different products have been scanned, you have the possibility to " +"scan another location, such as WH/Stock, and another page will be added to " +"your delivery order. You can move from one to the other thanks to the " +"*Previous* and *Next* buttons." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:32 -msgid "Here, we configured **Lu - Petit Beukelaer** tracking by lots." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:37 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:70 msgid "" -"Scan a product from this incoming shipment, then scan the lot number of each" -" product (you can also use the keyboard)." +"Now, you can validate your transfer. To do so, click on *Next* until you " +"reach the last page of the transfer. There, you will be able to validate it." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:43 -msgid "Click save/scan **Validate** and you are done." -msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:78 +msgid "Internal Transfers" +msgstr "Interne Transfers" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:3 -msgid "How to process incoming receipts?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:80 msgid "" -"There are two approaches to process incoming receipts: you can either work " -"on printed documents (and scan lines on the documents), or on a screen (and " -"scan products directly)." +"When realizing an internal transfer with multi-location, you first have to " +"scan the source location of the product. Then, you can scan the product in " +"itself, before having to scan the barcode of the destination location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:10 -msgid "Process printed incoming receipts:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:12 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:85 msgid "" -"Print incoming receipts of the day by selecting all documents from the **To " -"Receive** list and print **Picking Operations** from the top menu." +"If the source and destination of the internal transfers are already correct," +" you don’t need to scan them." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:16 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:89 +msgid "Transfers with Tracked Products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:91 msgid "" -"Once you start processing your incoming receipts, scan the barcode on the " -"top-right corner of the document to load the right record on the screen." +"If you work with products tracked by lot/serial numbers, you have two ways " +"of working:" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:20 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:94 msgid "" -"Then, scan the barcode of every product, or scan the barcode of the product " -"on the picking line if the barcode on the product is not easily accessible, " -"visible or is missing." -msgstr "" -"Dann scannen Sie den Barcode jedes Produkts oder scannen Sie den Barcode des" -" Produkts auf der Kommissionierlinie, wenn der Barcode auf dem Produkt nicht" -" leicht zugänglich oder sichtbar ist, oder fehlt." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:28 -msgid "Process incoming receipts from a computer or mobile device:" +"If you work with serial/lot numbers taking all products into consideration, " +"you can scan the barcode of the lot/serial number and Odoo will increase the" +" quantity of the product, setting its lot/serial number." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:30 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:99 msgid "" -"Load all the incoming receipts marked as **To Receive**, and open the first " -"one." +"If you have the same lot/serial number for different products, you can work " +"by scanning the product barcode first, and then the barcode of the " +"lot/serial number." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:35 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:3 +msgid "Create a Transfer from Scratch" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:5 msgid "" -"When you've picked all the items, click the **Validate** button or scan the " -"**Validate** barcode action to finish the Operation." +"To create a transfer from the *Barcode* application, you first need to print" +" the operation type barcodes. To do so, you can download the *Stock barcode " +"sheet* from the home page of the app." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:12 msgid "" -"Move to the next incoming receipt to process by clicking on the top-right " -"right **arrow** or scanning the **Pager-Next** barcode action." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:42 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:137 -msgid "Example" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:44 -msgid "Open operation interface." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:49 -msgid "Scan." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:54 -msgid "" -"The picking appears. Scan items and/or fill in informations using the mouse " -"and keyboard." +"Once done, you can scan the one for which you want to create a new document." +" Then, an empty document will be created and you will be able to scan your " +"products to populate it." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup.rst:3 @@ -414,12 +488,12 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:3 -msgid "How to activate the barcodes in Odoo?" +msgid "Activate the Barcodes in Odoo" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:5 msgid "" -"The barcode scanning features can save you a lot of the time usually lost " +"The barcode scanning features can save you a lot of time usually lost " "switching between the keyboard, the mouse and the scanner. Properly " "attributing barcodes to products, pickings locations, etc. allows you to " "work more efficiently by controlling the software almost exclusively with " @@ -427,284 +501,31 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:12 -msgid "Set products barcodes" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:17 -msgid "" -"In order to fill a picking or to perform an inventory, you need to make sure" -" that your products are encoded in Odoo along with their barcodes. If this " -"is not already done, you can fill in the products barcodes through a handy " -"interface. Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings` " -"and click :menuselection:`Operations --> Barcode Scanner`. Click Save, and " -"go back into the previous screen to click Configure Product Barcodes. This " -"interface can also be accessed via the planner." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:28 -msgid "" -"Product variants: be careful to add barcodes directly on the variant, and " -"not the template product (otherwise you won't be able to differentiate " -"them)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:33 -msgid "Set locations barcodes" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:38 -msgid "" -"If you manage multiple locations, you will find useful to attribute a " -"barcode to each location and stick it on the location. You can configure the" -" locations barcodes in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> " -"Warehouse Management --> Locations`. There is button in the **Print** menu " -"that you can use to print the locations names and barcodes. There are 4 " -"barcodes per page, arranged in a way that is convenient to print on sticker " -"paper." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:47 -msgid "" -"Example of location naming: **warehouse short name** - **location short " -"name** - (**Corridor X** - **Shelf Y** - **Height Z**) Example: A032-025-133" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:54 -msgid "Barcode formats" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:56 -msgid "" -"Most retail products use EAN-13 barcodes. They cannot be made up without " -"proper authorization: you must pay the International Article Numbering " -"Association a fee in exchange for an EAN code sequence (that's why no two " -"products in a store will ever have the same EAN code)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:61 -msgid "" -"Still, as Odoo supports any string as a barcode, so you can always define " -"your own barcode format for internal use." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management.rst:3 -msgid "Warehouse Management" -msgstr "Lager & Logistik" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment.rst:3 -msgid "Inventory Adjustment" -msgstr "Inventur" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:3 -msgid "How to make the initial inventory?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:5 -msgid "" -"One of the most important feature in an warehouse management software is to " -"keep the inventory right." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Once your products have been defined, it is time to make your initial " -"inventory. You will reflect reality by inventorying the right quantities in " -"the right locations." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:55 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:34 -msgid "Product Configuration" -msgstr "Produktkonfiguration" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:15 -msgid "" -"In the Inventory module, open the :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> " -"Products`, then click on **Create** to create a new product. Configure the " -"product type so that it is **Stockable** and not a consumable." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:23 -msgid "Start the initial inventory" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:26 -msgid "Update the product quantity for one product" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:28 -msgid "" -"In the product you just created, you can see in the upper tiles that we have" -" 0 product On Hand. Click on the **Update qty on Hand** button." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:31 -msgid "" -"A new window opens. In the **New Quantity on Hand** field, type the quantity" -" of product you currently hold in stock, then click on **Apply**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:39 -msgid "" -"if you are using multiple locations for your warehouse, you will be able to " -"set the location of your product from this screen." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:42 -msgid "" -"You can now see from the On Hand tab that the quantity has been updated." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:47 -msgid "" -"Now, if you check the **Inventory Adjustments** in the **Inventory Control**" -" menu, you will see that a new line named \"INV: (name of your product)\" " -"has automatically been created and validated by the system." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:55 -msgid "Multiple products at once" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:57 -msgid "" -"Create all the products for which you want to follow the stock (as stockable" -" products). Once the required products in stock have been defined, use an " -"initial inventory operation to put the current quantities into the system by" -" location. Go to :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Inventory " -"Adjustments` to start your initial inventory." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:63 -msgid "" -"Give it a name (for example Initial Inventory) and select the stock location" -" of your inventory. Note that when you select a parent location (such as " -"Stock, which might be split into sub locations), you can also select the sub" -" (or child) locations." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:71 -msgid "" -"You can choose between making an inventory for all products, for a few or " -"only for one. In this case, we choose the **All products** option." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:79 -msgid "" -"If you need your stock valuation to be done in a different period than the " -"one that will be selected by default according to the inventory end date, " -"enter the corresponding accounting period in the Force Valuation Period " -"field. The accounting module needs to be installed." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:84 -msgid "" -"Click the **Start Inventory** button. Depending on the type of inventory you" -" have chosen (all products or selected ones) you might have to add products " -"manually by clicking on **Add an item**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:88 -msgid "" -"Add the **Real Quantity** that you have in your stock for each product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:92 -msgid "" -"additional information will be available according to the options you " -"activated (multi-locations, serial number, consignee stocks)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:98 -msgid "" -"Click the **Validate Inventory** button to confirm the inventory and post " -"it." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:102 -msgid "Reporting" -msgstr "Berichtswesen" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:104 -msgid "" -"To check the current stock, go to :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> " -"Products`, and click on the **list button**:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:3 -msgid "How to choose between minimum stock rule and make to order?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:5 -msgid "" -"**Minimum Stock rules** and **Make to Order** have similar consequences but " -"different rules. They should be used depending on your manufacturing and " -"delivery strategies." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:10 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:10 -msgid "Terminology" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:13 -msgid "Minimum stock rule" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:15 -msgid "" -"**Minimum Stock** rules are used to ensure that you always have the minimum " -"amount of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or " -"answer to your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its" -" minimum the system will automatically generate a procurement with the " -"quantity needed to reach the maximum stock level." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:22 -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:56 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:22 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:58 -msgid "Make to Order" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:24 -msgid "" -"The **Make to Order** function will trigger a **Purchase Order** of the " -"amount of the **Sales Order** related to the product. The system will " -"**not** check the current stock valuation. This means that a draft purchase " -"order will be generated regardless of the quantity on hand of the product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:30 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:12 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:37 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:34 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:29 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:9 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:50 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:28 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:21 -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:22 -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:25 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:159 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:164 -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:21 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:18 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:19 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:30 +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:16 +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:14 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:10 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:25 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:29 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:22 #: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:17 -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:23 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:10 #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:18 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:30 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:17 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:114 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:16 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:15 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:13 @@ -713,206 +534,72 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Configuration" msgstr "Konfiguration" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:33 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:33 -msgid "Minimum stock rules" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:35 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:14 msgid "" -"The Minimum Stock Rules configuration is available through the menu " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory Control --> Reordering Rule` in the " -"drop down menu. There, click on **Create** to set minimum and maximum stock " -"values for a given product." +"To use this feature, you first need to activate the *Barcode* functionality " +"via *Inventory > Settings > Barcode Scanner*. Once you have ticked the " +"feature, you can hit save." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Active" -msgstr "Aktiv" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:22 +msgid "Set Product Barcodes" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:24 msgid "" -"If the active field is set to False, it will allow you to hide the " -"orderpoint without removing it." +"You can easily assign barcodes to your different products via the " +"*Inventory* app. To do so, go to *Settings > Configure Products Barcodes*." msgstr "" -"Durch Deaktivierung können Sie die Ansicht für den Bestellzeitpunkt " -"ausblenden." -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Product Unit of Measure" -msgstr "Produkteinheit" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Default unit of measure used for all stock operations." -msgstr "Standardmaßeinheit, die für alle Lagervorgänge verwendet wird." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Procurement Group" -msgstr "Beschaffungsgruppe" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:31 msgid "" -"Moves created through this orderpoint will be put in this procurement group." -" If none is given, the moves generated by stock rules will be grouped into " -"one big picking." +"Then, you have the possibility to assign barcodes to your products directly " +"at creation on the product form." msgstr "" -"Die vom Meldebestand ausgelösten Lieferungen werden in einer Gruppe " -"zusammengefasst. Wenn keine Gruppe angegeben wurde, werden alle Lieferungen " -"in einer einzigen großen Pickliste zusammengefasst." -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Minimum Quantity" -msgstr "Minimalbestand" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:41 msgid "" -"When the virtual stock goes below the Min Quantity specified for this field," -" Odoo generates a procurement to bring the forecasted quantity to the Max " -"Quantity." +"Be careful to add barcodes directly on the product variants and not on the " +"template product. Otherwise, you won’t be able to differentiate them." msgstr "" -"Wenn der verfügbare Bestand geringer ist als der hier definierte " -"Mindestbestand, erstellt Odoo einen Beschaffungsvorschlag zur " -"Wiederauffüllung des Lagers." -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Maximum Quantity" -msgstr "Maximale Menge" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:46 +msgid "Set Locations Barcodes" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:48 msgid "" -"When the virtual stock goes below the Min Quantity, Odoo generates a " -"procurement to bring the forecasted quantity to the Quantity specified as " -"Max Quantity." +"If you manage multiple locations, you will find useful to attribute a " +"barcode to each location and stick it on the location. You can configure the" +" locations barcodes in *Inventory > Configuration > Locations*." msgstr "" -"Wenn der verfügbare Bestand geringer ist als der hier definierte " -"Mindestbestand, erstellt Odoo einen Beschaffungsvorschlag zur " -"Wiederauffüllung des Lagers." -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Quantity Multiple" -msgstr "Vielfaches" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:59 msgid "" -"The procurement quantity will be rounded up to this multiple. If it is 0, " -"the exact quantity will be used." +"You can easily print the barcode you allocate to the locations via the " +"*Print* menu." msgstr "" -"Die zu beschaffende Menge wird auf dieses Vielfache aufgerundet. Wenn hier 0" -" eingetragen ist, wird die exakte Anzahl verwendet. " -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Lead Time" -msgstr "Vorlaufzeit" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:63 +msgid "Barcode Formats" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:65 msgid "" -"Number of days after the orderpoint is triggered to receive the products or " -"to order to the vendor" +"Most retail products use EAN-13 barcodes. They cannot be made up without " +"proper authorization. You must pay the International Article Numbering " +"Association a fee in exchange for an EAN code sequence." msgstr "" -"Anzahl der Tage, an denen der Auftragspunkt ausgelöst wird, um die Produkte " -"zu empfangen oder vom Verkäufer zu bestellen" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:45 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:69 msgid "" -"Then, click on your product to access the related product form and, on the " -"**Inventory submenu**, do not forget to select a supplier." +"Still, as Odoo supports any string as a barcode, you can always define your " +"own barcode format for internal use." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:52 -msgid "" -"Don't forget to select the right product type in the product form. A " -"consumable can not be stocked and will thus not be accounted for in the " -"stock valuation." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:58 -msgid "" -"The Make to Order configuration is available on your product form through " -"your :menuselection:`Inventory module --> Inventory control --> Products` " -"(or any other module where products are available)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:62 -msgid "On the product form, under **Inventory**, click on **Make To Order**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:68 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:70 -msgid "Choice between the two options" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:70 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:72 -msgid "" -"The choice between the two options is thus dependent of your inventory " -"strategy. If you prefer to have a buffer and always have at least a minimum " -"amount, the minimum stock rule should be used. If you want to reorder your " -"stocks only if your sale is confirmed it is better to use the Make to Order." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:3 -msgid "TaKing stock from different warehouses" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:5 -msgid "" -"When you plan to deliver a customer, you don’t know in advance if the " -"products will come from Warehouse A or Warehouse B. You may, in some cases, " -"need to take stock from different warehouses. With *Odoo*, you can configure" -" this by using the concept of virtual warehouses. Let us show you how to set" -" those virtual warehouses." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:12 -msgid "Set up virtual warehouses" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:14 -msgid "" -"Let’s say you have two warehouses: Warehouse A and Warehouse B. Create a new" -" warehouse, that will be a virtual one. It will allow you to take the stock " -"from A or B. To do so, go to your inventory app settings and enable the " -"multi-warehouses feature. Then, go to the warehouses menu and click on " -"create." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:24 -msgid "" -"The *Storage Location* feature will be automatically enabled. Good news, " -"because you will need it later in the process." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:27 -msgid "" -"Now, you have to make sure that the main stock locations of warehouse A and " -"warehouse B are children locations of the main stock location of warehouse A" -" + B. Go to the locations menu, and edit the main location of your two " -"warehouses. Then, change their parent location to main location of warehouse" -" A+B." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:37 -msgid "Sell a product from the virtual warehouse" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:39 -msgid "" -"Let’s say you have two products, one stored in warehouse A and one stored in" -" warehouse B. Now, you can create a new quotation for one of each product. " -"Go to other information and choose Warehouse A+B in the shipping " -"information." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:47 -msgid "" -"Once you have done it, you can convert it to a sales order. Then, a delivery" -" order will be automatically generated, with a product reserved in warehouse" -" A and one in warehouse B." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery.rst:3 -msgid "Delivery Orders" -msgstr "Lieferaufträge" +#: ../../inventory/management.rst:3 +msgid "Warehouse Management" +msgstr "Lager & Logistik" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:3 msgid "How do I cancel a delivery order?" @@ -921,23 +608,13 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:6 ../../inventory/overview.rst:3 -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/overview.rst:3 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:6 @@ -1036,12 +713,11 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:3 -msgid "" -"How to send products to customers directly from suppliers (drop-shipping)?" +msgid "Send Products to Customers Directly from Suppliers (Drop-shipping)" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:6 -msgid "What is drop-shipping?" +msgid "What is Drop-Shipping?" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:8 @@ -1049,138 +725,139 @@ msgid "" "Drop-Shipping is a system that allows orders taken from your store to be " "shipped straight from your supplier to your customer. On a usual delivery " "system, products are sent from your supplier to your warehouse to be put in " -"stock, and then shipped to your customers after ordering. With drop-" -"shipping, no item is stocked. When a customer places an order in your shop, " -"the item is delivered straight from the supplier to the customer. Therefore," -" the product doesn't need to get through your warehouse." +"stock and then shipped to your customers after ordering." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:18 -msgid "Points to be considered while implementing drop-shipping" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:13 +msgid "" +"With drop-shipping, no item is stocked. When a customer places an order in " +"your shop, the item is delivered straight from the supplier to the customer." +" Therefore, the product doesn't need to get through your warehouse." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:20 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:19 +msgid "Points to be Considered while Implementing Drop-Shipping" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:24 msgid "" "Use drop-shipping only for the products you can't or don't want to keep in " -"stock. One reason is that you'll always make smaller margins on items that " -"are drop-shipped, so you should keep it only for items that take up a lot of" -" space in your warehouse." +"stock." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:22 msgid "" -"Drop-shipping is best for niche products. Chances are that products that are" -" in high demand are being offered by large suppliers at a fraction of the " -"price you'll be able to charge, so using a more costly shipping method won't" -" be financially rewarding. But if your product is unique, then it makes " -"sense!" +"One reason is that you'll always make smaller margins on items that are " +"drop-shipped, so you should keep it only for items that take up a lot of " +"space in your warehouse." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:31 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:30 +msgid "Drop-shipping is best for niche products." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:27 msgid "" -"To protect your customers from bad experiences, test drop-shipping companies" -" for yourself beforehand and list the best ones." +"Chances are that products that are in high demand are being offered by large" +" suppliers at a fraction of the price you'll be able to charge, so using a " +"more costly shipping method won't be financially rewarding. But if your " +"product is unique, then it makes sense!" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:34 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:33 +msgid "To protect your customers from bad experiences." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:33 msgid "" -"Make sure time is not against you. Drop-shipping should take a reasonable " -"amount of time and surely not more than it would have taken you to handle it" -" all by yourself. It's also nice to be able to provide your customers with a" -" tracking number." +"Test drop-shipping companies for yourself beforehand and list the best ones." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:39 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:37 +msgid "Make sure time is not against you." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:36 msgid "" -"Items have to be available from your supplier. It's good to know if the " -"product you're selling is available upstream. If you don't have that " -"information, inform your customers that you don't hold the item in stock and" -" that it's subject to availability from a third party." +"Drop-shipping should take a reasonable amount of time and surely not more " +"than it would have taken you to handle it all by yourself. It's also nice to" +" be able to provide your customers with a tracking number." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:46 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:44 +msgid "Items have to be available from your supplier." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:40 msgid "" -"For more information and insights on Drop-shipping, read our blog on `What " -"is drop-shipping and how to use it `__." +"It's good to know if the product you're selling is available upstream. If " +"you don't have that information, inform your customers that you don't hold " +"the item in stock and that it's subject to availability from a third party." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:50 -msgid "Configuring drop-shipping" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:47 +msgid "" +"For more information and insights about Drop-Shipping, you can read our " +"blog: `*What is drop-shipping and how to use it* `__." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:52 +msgid "Configure Drop-Shipping" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:54 msgid "" -"Open the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`. Go " -"to **Location & Warehouse**, locate the **Dropshipping** option and tick the" -" box **Allow suppliers to deliver directly to your customers**. Then, click " -"on **Apply**." +"Activate the functionality in the *Purchase* application by going to " +"*Configuration > Settings*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:60 msgid "" -"Then go to the menu :menuselection:`Sales --> Configuration --> Settings`. " -"Locate **Order Routing** and tick the box **Choose specific routes on sales " -"order lines (advanced)**. Click on **Apply**." +"Then, go to the *Inventory* app, in *Configuration > Settings* to activate " +"the *Multi-Step Routes* feature. It will allow you to make the *Route* field" +" appear on the sale order lines to specify you send a product via drop-" +"shipping." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:67 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:68 msgid "" -"Now, open the menu :menuselection:`Sales --> Sales --> Products`. Add a " -"supplier to the products you want to dropship." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:74 -msgid "How to send products from the suppliers directly to the customers" +"Now, in the *Sales* app, go to *Products > Products*. Select the product you" +" would like to drop-ship and add a vendor pricelist which contains the right" +" supplier, via the purchase tab." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:76 -msgid "" -"Create a **Sales Order** and specify on a sales order line for your products" -" that the route is **Dropshipping**." +msgid "Send Products from the Suppliers Directly to the Customers" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:82 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:78 msgid "" -"Open the menu :menuselection:`Purchases --> Purchases --> Requests for " -"Quotation`. The draft purchase order is automatically created from the " -"procurement with the drop-shipping route. Once the order is confirmed, you " -"will see that one shipment has been created." +"Create a *Sales Order* and add the product on which you just set the vendor." +" Add the *Route* field thanks to the widget on the right of the sale order " +"line. Now, you are able to specify that your products’ route is *Drop-" +"Shipping*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:90 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:89 msgid "" -"To confirm the sending from the vendor to the customer, go back to " -"**Inventory** app. On the dashboard, click on **# TO RECEIVE** on the " -"dropship card." +"Once the sale order is confirmed, Odoo automatically generates a *Request " +"for Quotation* for the supplier who will proceed to the drop-shipping. You " +"can find it in the *Purchase* app, with the sale order as *Source Document*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:97 msgid "" -"It will open the list of drop-shipping transfers. Validate the transfer once" -" it has been done. The items will be directly delivered from the partner to " -"the customer without transiting to your warehouse." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:103 -msgid ":doc:`inventory_flow`" +"Once this *Purchase Order* is confirmed, a *Receipt Order* is created and " +"linked to it. The source location is the vendor location and the destination" +" location is the customer location. Then, the product won’t go through your " +"own stock when you validate the dropship document." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:105 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:63 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:159 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:129 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:70 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:179 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:124 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:222 -msgid "Todo" -msgstr "Zu erledigen" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:106 msgid "" -"Add link to this section when available * How to analyse the performance of " -"my vendors?" +"You can also easily access the dropship document directly from your " +"inventory dashboard." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:3 @@ -1315,173 +992,137 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:3 -msgid "How to process delivery orders in one step (shipping)?" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:3 +msgid "Process a Receipt in one step (Receipt)" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:5 msgid "" -"When an order goes to the shipping department for final delivery, Odoo is " -"set up by default to utilize a one-step operation: once all goods are " -"available, they are able to be shipped in a single delivery order." +"There is no configuration needed to receive in one step. The default " +"incoming shipments are configured to be directly received from the vendors " +"to the stock." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:9 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:9 msgid "" -"There is no configuration needed. The default outgoing shipments are " -"configured to be directly delivered from the stock." +"However, if advanced routes have been activated and you set another incoming" +" configuration on your warehouse, you can set it back to the one-step " +"receipt configuration. To do so, go to *Configuration > Warehouses* and edit" +" the warehouse in question." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:18 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:14 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:14 msgid "" -"However, if **advance routes** is activated and you set another shipping " -"configuration on your warehouse, you can set it back to the one-step " -"delivery configuration. Go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouses` " -"and edit the concerned warehouse." +"Set the *Incoming Shipments* option to *Receive goods directly (1 step)*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:21 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:21 +msgid "Create a Purchase Order" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:23 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:23 msgid "" -"Set the outgoing shippings the option to **Ship directly from stock (Ship " -"Only)**" +"To create a *Request for Quotation*, go to the *Purchase* application and " +"click on *Create*. Then, add some storable products to receive and confirm " +"the *RfQ*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:30 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:68 -msgid "Create a Sales Order" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:32 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:27 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:27 msgid "" -"Create a sales order (From quotation to sales order) with some products to " -"deliver." +"Notice that, now, we see 1 receipt associated with the purchase order you " +"just created. If you click on the button, you will see your receipt order." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:35 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:35 +msgid "Process a Receipt" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:37 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:37 msgid "" -"Notice that we now see ``1`` delivery associated with this sales order in " -"the **stat button** above the sales order." +"You can also fin the receipt directly from the *Inventory* app. When on the " +"dashboard, you can click the *1 TO PROCESS* button under the *Receipts* " +"Kanban card. Then, you will see your receipt." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:41 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:44 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:44 msgid "" -"If you click on the **1 Delivery** stat button, you should now see your " -"picking." +"Now, enter the picking that you want to process. You will be able to click " +"on *Validate* to complete the move directly as products coming from " +"suppliers are considered as being always available." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:45 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:99 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:88 -msgid "Process a Delivery" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:47 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:143 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:113 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:51 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:51 msgid "" -"Go to **Inventory** and click on the **# TO DO** link under the **Delivery " -"Orders** kanban card." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:53 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:110 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:130 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:149 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:99 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:119 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:99 -msgid "Click on the picking that you want to process." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:55 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Output** to the " -"**customer**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:58 -msgid "" -"This has completed the **Shipping Step** and the WH/OUT should now show " -"**Done** in the status column at the top of the page, which means the " -"product has been shipped to the customer." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:64 -msgid "" -"Ajouter un lien vers ces pages quand elles existeront - Process Overview: " -"From sales orders to delivery orders" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:67 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:163 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:133 -msgid "Process Overview: From purchase orders to receptions" +"Once you *Validate* the receipt, the products leave the *Supplier Location* " +"to enter your *WH/Stock Location*. You can easily see that the receipt took " +"place thanks to the status of the document, which is now *Done*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:3 -msgid "How can you change the packaging type for your sale order?" +msgid "Deliver Products in Packages" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:5 msgid "" -"Odoo gives you the possibility to change the default packaging type and " -"adapt the packaging the way you want it, depending on the weight of the " -"order." +"In Odoo, you have the possibility to deliver your products in different " +"packages, depending on the volume and or weight of your products." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:11 msgid "" -"In the **Inventory** module, Go to **Configuration** and then click on " -"**Settings**." +"First, you need to activate the *Delivery Packages* feature in the " +"*Inventory app > Configuration > Settings*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:18 +msgid "Proceed to a Delivery" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:20 msgid "" -"In :menuselection:`Traceability --> Packages`, flag **Record packages used " -"on packing : pallets, boxes,...**" +"Now, you can create a planned delivery with some products in it. You will " +"have the possibility to create new packages and assign them to the stock " +"move lines." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:24 -msgid "*Sale process*" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:26 -msgid "In the **Sales** module, go to **Sales** and click on **Sale Order**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:28 -msgid "Create your new Sale Order, and **Confirm the Sale**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:33 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:27 msgid "" -"Once you've confirmed the Sale, you need to click on **Delivery**, to be " -"redirected to the Delivery order." +"Then, you can define the package type from this window. Once the delivery " +"order is validated, you can retrieve which products have been included in " +"the package." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:36 -msgid "Click on **Edit**, and you can now change the packaging." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:41 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:34 msgid "" -"In the **Operations** tab, in the last column, change the **0** and put the " -"number of products that you want to pack together. Then click on **Put in " -"Pack**." +"A button will appear at the delivery stage, allowing you to find all the " +"packages which were part of the delivery order." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:48 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:44 +msgid "Use the Put in Pack button" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:46 msgid "" -"Choose the type of packaging that you want. You can also see that the weight" -" has been adapted to your package, and you can change it manually if you " -"want it to be more precise. Then click on **Save**." +"Another way to put products in packs is to use the *Put in Pack* button. It " +"will automatically assign a pack to the number of products which is set as " +"*Done* and duplicate the stock move line if necessary." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:52 -msgid "Repeat the operation until all the products are put in pack." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:54 -msgid "Finally, click on **Validate** to confirm the delivery." +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Then, you will be able to update the different packages created this way, " +"directly via the *Packages* button." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:3 @@ -1499,6 +1140,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:18 msgid "Configuring lead times" msgstr "" @@ -1514,6 +1156,7 @@ msgid "Configuration of the different lead times are made as follows:" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:22 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:28 msgid "At a product level" msgstr "" @@ -1573,6 +1216,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:67 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:74 msgid "At the company level" msgstr "" @@ -1634,6 +1278,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:110 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:134 msgid "At route level" msgstr "" @@ -1669,6 +1314,11 @@ msgid "" " display a warning." msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:137 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:173 +msgid "Example" +msgstr "" + #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:139 msgid "" "As an example, you may sell a car today (January 1st), that is purchased on " @@ -1699,352 +1349,288 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:3 -msgid "How to process delivery orders in three steps (pick + pack + ship)?" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:3 +msgid "Process a Receipt in three steps (Input + Quality + Stock)" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:5 msgid "" -"When an order goes to the shipping department for final delivery, Odoo is " -"set up by default on a **one-step** operation: once all goods are available," -" they can be shipped in bulk in a single delivery order. However, that " -"process may not reflect the reality and your company may require more steps " -"before shipping." +"In many companies, it is necessary to assess the received good. The goal is " +"to check that the products correspond to the quality requirements agreed " +"with the suppliers. Therefore, adding a *quality control step* in the goods " +"receipt process can become essential." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:14 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:10 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:10 msgid "" -"With the **three steps** process (**Pick + Pack + Ship**), the items are " -"transferred to a packing area, where they will be assembled by area of " -"destination, and then set to outbound trucks for final delivery to the " -"customers." +"Odoo uses routes to define exactly how you will handle the different receipt" +" steps. The configuration is done at the level of the warehouse. By default," +" the reception is a one-step process, but changing the configuration can " +"allow having 3 steps." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:19 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:15 msgid "" -"A few configuration steps are necessary in order to accomplish **Pick + Pack" -" + Ship** in Odoo. These steps create some additional locations, which by " -"default are called **Output** and **Packing Zone**. So, if your warehouse's " -"code is ``WH``, this configuration will create a location called " -"``WH/Output`` and another one called ``WH/Packing Zone``." +"The 3-steps flow is as follows: You receive the goods in an input area, then" +" transfer them into a quality area for *quality control*. When the quality " +"check has been processed, you can move the goods from QC to stock. Of " +"course, you may change the quantity and only transfer to stock the quantity " +"that is valid and decide that you will return the quantity that is not good." msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:23 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:23 +msgid "Multi-Step Routes" +msgstr "Mehrstufige Routen" + #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:25 msgid "" -"Goods will move from **WH/Stock** to **WH/Packing Zone** in the first step. " -"Then move from **WH/Packing Zone** to **WH/Output**. Then finally it will be" -" delivered from **WH/Output** to its **final destination**." +"First, you will need to activate the *multi-step routes* option. Indeed, " +"routes provide a mechanism to chain different actions together. Here, we " +"will chain the picking to the shipping." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:30 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:29 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:29 msgid "" -"Check out :doc:`inventory_flow` to determine if this inventory flow is the " -"correct method for your needs." +"To activate *multi-step routes*, open the *inventory app*, and go to " +"*Configuration > Settings* and activate the option. By default, activating " +"*multi-step routes* will also activate *Storage Locations*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:37 -msgid "Install the Inventory module" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:38 +msgid "Warehouse configuration" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:39 -msgid "From the **App** menu, search and install the **Inventory** module." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:44 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:40 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:40 msgid "" -"You will also need to install the **Sales** module to be able to issue sales" -" orders." +"Now that *Multi-Step Routes* is activated, go to *Configuration > Warehouse*" +" and open the one you will use to deliver in 3 steps. Then, you can select " +"the option *Pack good, send goods in output and then deliver (3 steps)* as " +"*Outgoing Shipments*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:48 -msgid "Allow managing routes" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:48 +msgid "" +"Activating this option will lead to the creation of two new locations, " +"*Output* and *Packing Zone*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:50 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:51 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:51 msgid "" -"Odoo configures movement of delivery orders via **routes**. Routes provide a" -" mechanism to link different actions together. In this case, we will link " -"the picking step to the shipping step." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:54 -msgid "" -"To allow management of routes, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`" +"Of course, you can rename them if you want. To do so, go to *Configuration >" +" Locations* and select the one you want to rename. Change its name and hit " +"save." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:56 -msgid "" -"Under :menuselection:`Location & Warehouse --> Routes`, activate the radio " -"button **Advanced routing of products using rules**. Make sure that the " -"option **Manage several locations per warehouse** is activated as well." +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:56 +msgid "Create a Sales Order" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:64 -msgid "Configure the warehouse for Pick + Pack + Ship" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:58 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:58 +msgid "" +"In the *Sales* app, create a quotation with storable products to deliver. " +"Then, confirm it and three pickings will be created and linked to your sale " +"order." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:66 -msgid "" -"Go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouses` and edit the warehouse " -"that will be used." +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:65 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:65 +msgid "Now, click on the button. You should see three different pickings:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:67 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:67 +msgid "The first one, with a reference PICK, designates the picking process;" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:69 -msgid "" -"For outgoing shippings, set the option to **Make packages into a dedicated " -"location, bring them to the output location for shipping (Pick + Pack + " -"Ship).**" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:69 +msgid "The second one, with a reference PACK, is for the packing process;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:71 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:71 +msgid "The third one, with a reference OUT, designates the shipping process." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:77 -msgid "Create a Sale Order" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:77 +msgid "Process the picking, packing, and delivery" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:79 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:79 msgid "" -"From the **Sale** module, create a sales order with some products to " -"deliver." +"The first operation to be processed is the picking and has a *Ready* status," +" while the others are *Waiting Another Operation*. The packing will become " +"*Ready* as soon as the picking is marked as *Done*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:81 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:83 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:83 msgid "" -"Notice that we now see ``3`` transfers associated with this sales order in " -"the **stat button** above the sales order." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:87 -msgid "If you click the button, you should now see three different pickings:" +"You can enter the picking operation from here, or access it through the " +"inventory app." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:89 -msgid "The first with a reference **PICK** to designate the picking process," -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:91 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:89 msgid "" -"The second one with the reference **PACK** that is the packing process," +"Note that, if you have the product in stock, it will be automatically " +"reserved and you can validate the picking document." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:93 -msgid "The last with a reference **OUT** to designate the shipping process." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:102 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:91 -msgid "How to Process the Picking Step?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:104 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:95 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:95 msgid "" -"Ensure that you have enough product in stock and Go to **Inventory** and " -"click on the **Waiting** link under the **Pick** kanban card." +"Now that the picking has been validated, the packing order is ready to be " +"processed. Since the documents are chained, the products that have been " +"picked are automatically reserved on the packing order so you can directly " +"validate it." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:112 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:101 -msgid "Click on **Reserve** to reserve the products if they are available." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:114 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:106 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:106 msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Stock** to **WH/Packing" -" Zone**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:116 -msgid "" -"This has completed the picking Step and the **WH/PICK** should now show " -"**Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"moved from **WH/Stock** to **WH/Packing Zone** location, which makes the " -"product available for the next step (Packing)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:122 -msgid "How to Process the Packing Step?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:124 -msgid "" -"Go to **Inventory** and click on the **# TRANSFERS** link under the **Pack**" -" kanban card." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:132 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Packing Zone** to " -"**WH/Output**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:135 -msgid "" -"This has completed the packing step and the **WH/PACK** should now show " -"**Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"moved from **WH/Packing Zone** to **WH/Output location**, which makes the " -"product available for the next step (Shipping)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:141 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:111 -msgid "How to Process the Shipping Step?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:151 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Output** to the " -"**customer** (Click **Apply** to assign the quantities based on the " -"quantities listed in the **To Do** column)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:155 -msgid "" -"This has completed the shipping step and the **WH/OUT** should now show " -"**Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"shipped to the customer." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:160 -msgid "" -"Link to these sections when available - Process Overview: From sales orders" -" to delivery orders" +"Then, you can validate your packing. In doing so, the delivery order can be " +"processed. Once again, it will be ready to be validated so you can transfer " +"the products to the customer location." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:3 -msgid "How to process delivery orders in two steps (pick + ship)?" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:3 +msgid "Process a Receipt in two steps (Input + Stock)" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:8 msgid "" -"When an order goes to the shipping department for final delivery, Odoo is " -"set up by default to utilize a **one-step** operation: once all goods are " -"available, they are able to be shipped in a single delivery order. However, " -"your company's business process may have one or more steps that happen " -"before shipping. In the **two steps** process, the items in a delivery order" -" are **picked** in the warehouse and brought to an **output location** for " -"**shipping**. The goods are then shipped." +"Odoo uses routes to define exactly how you will handle the different receipt" +" steps. The configuration is done at the *Warehouse* level. By default, the " +"reception is a one-step process, but changing the configuration can allow " +"you to have 2 steps." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:16 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:13 msgid "" -"In order to accomplish a **Pick + Ship** delivery in Odoo, there are a few " -"necessary configuration steps. These steps create an additional location, " -"which by default is called **Output**. So, if your warehouse's code is " -"``WH``, this configuration will create a location called ``WH/Output``. " -"Goods will move from ``WH/Stock`` to ``WH/Output`` in the first step " -"(picking). Then, they move from ``WH/Output`` to ``WH/Customers`` (in the " -"case of sales orders) in the second step (shipping)." +"The 2 steps flow is like this: you receive the goods in an input area, then " +"transfer them to your stock. As long as the goods are not transferred in " +"your stock, they will not be available for further processing." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:32 -msgid "Allow management of routes" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:19 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:19 +msgid "Activate Multi-Step Routes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:21 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:21 +msgid "" +"The first step is to allow using *multi-step routes*. Indeed, routes provide" +" a mechanism to chain different actions together. In this case, we will " +"chain the unload step in the input area to the step entering the products in" +" stock." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:26 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:26 +msgid "" +"To allow *multi-step routes*, go to *Configuration > Settings* and activate " +"the feature. By default, activating *multi-step routes* will also activate " +"*Storage Locations*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:34 -msgid "" -"Odoo configures movement of delivery orders via the **routes**. Routes " -"provide a mechanism to chain different actions together. In this case, we " -"will chain the picking step to the shipping step." +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:34 +msgid "Configure warehouse for receipt in 2 steps" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:36 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:36 msgid "" -"To allow management of routes, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`." +"Once *multi-step routes* is activated, you can go to *Configuration > " +"Warehouse* and enter the warehouse which will use receipt in 2 steps. Then, " +"you can select the option *Receive goods in input and then stock (2 steps)* " +"for *Incoming Shipments*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:40 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:45 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:44 msgid "" -"Ensure that the radio button **Advanced routing of products using rules** is" -" checked." +"Activating this option will lead to the creation of a new *Input* location. " +"If you want to rename it, you can go to *Configuration > Locations > Select " +"Input* and update its name." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:46 -msgid "" -"Click on **Apply** at the top of the page to save changes (if you needed to " -"check the radio button above)." +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:54 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:52 +msgid "Create a purchase order" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:50 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:56 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:54 msgid "" -"If you checked option **Advanced routing of products using rules** you may " -"need to activate **Manage several locations per warehouse** if it wasn't " -"activated beforehand." +"In the *Purchase* application, you can create a *Request for Quotation* with" +" some storable products to receive from a supplier. Once the *RfQ* is " +"confirmed, the receipt picking will be created and automatically linked to " +"your purchase order." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:55 -msgid "Configure warehouse for Pick + Ship" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:65 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:62 +msgid "" +"Now, by clicking on the *1 Receipt* button, you will see the first picking " +"which will allow entering the product in the *input location*. Then, another" +" picking, an internal transfer, has been created in order to move the " +"products to *Stock*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:57 -msgid "" -"To configure a **Pick + Ship** move, go to :menuselection:`Configuration -->" -" Warehouses` and edit the warehouse that will be used." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:61 -msgid "" -"For outgoing shippings, set the option to **Bring goods to output location " -"before shipping (Pick + Ship)**" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:70 -msgid "" -"Install the **Sale** if it is not the case, and create a sales order with " -"some products to deliver." +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:71 +msgid "Process the picking and the delivery" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:73 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:70 msgid "" -"Notice that we now see ``2`` transfers associated with this sales order in " -"the **Delivery** stat button above the sales order." +"The receipt is the first one to be processed and has a *Ready* status while " +"the internal transfer will only become *Ready* once the receipt has been " +"marked as *Done*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:79 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:77 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:74 msgid "" -"If you click on the **2 Transfers** stat button, you should now see two " -"different pickings, one with a reference **PICK** to designate the picking " -"process and another with a reference **OUT** to designate the shipping " -"process." +"You can enter the receipt operation from the purchase order, or access it " +"through the inventory dashboard." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:93 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:84 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:80 msgid "" -"Ensure that you have enough product in stock, and go to **Inventory** and " -"click on the **Waiting** link under the **Pick** kanban card." +"By default, a receipt is always considered as ready to be processed. Then, " +"you will be able to directly click on *Validate* to mark it as done." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:103 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:92 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:87 msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Stock** to " -"**WH/Output**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:105 -msgid "" -"This has completed the picking step and the **WH/PICK** move should now show" -" **Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"moved from **WH/Stock** to **WH/Output** location, which makes the product " -"**available for the next step** (Shipping)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:121 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Output** to the " -"customer (Click **Apply** to assign the quantities based on the quantities " -"listed in the **To Do** column)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:125 -msgid "" -"This has completed the shipping step and the **WH/OUT** move should now show" -" **Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"shipped to the customer." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:130 -msgid "" -"link to these sections when they will be available - Process Overview: From" -" sales orders to delivery orders" +"Once the receipt has been validated, the internal transfer is ready to be " +"processed. As documents are chained, the products which have been received " +"are automatically reserved on the internal transfer. Once the transfer is " +"validated, those products enter the stock and you will be able to use them " +"to fulfill customer deliveries or manufacture products." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/incoming.rst:3 @@ -2126,294 +1712,11 @@ msgid "This is the default configuration in Odoo." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:68 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:126 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:97 msgid ":doc:`../delivery/inventory_flow`" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:71 -msgid "" -"Add section when available - How to analyse the performance of my vendors?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:3 -msgid "How to add a quality control step in goods receipt? (3 steps)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:8 -msgid "" -"In many companies, it is necessary to assess the received good. The goal is " -"to check that the products correspond to the quality requirements agreed " -"with the suppliers. Therefore, adding a quality control step in the goods " -"receipt process can become essential." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Odoo uses routes to define exactly how you will handle the different receipt" -" steps. The configuration is done at the level of the warehouse. By default," -" the reception is a one step process, but changing the configuration can " -"allow to have 2 or even 3 steps." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:18 -msgid "" -"The 3 steps flow is as follows: You receive the goods in an input area, then" -" transfer them into quality area for quality control. When the quality check" -" has been processed, you can move the goods from QC to stock. Of course, you" -" may change the quantity and only transfer to stock the quantity that is " -"valid and decide that you will return the quantity that is not good." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:25 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:18 -msgid "This is the case that will be explained in this document." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:31 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:24 -msgid "Use advanced routes" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:33 -msgid "" -"To allow management of routes, go to the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Configuration --> Settings`." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:39 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:32 -msgid "" -"Ensure that the routes option **Advance routing of product using rules** is " -"checked, then click on **Apply** to save changes." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:42 -msgid "" -"Make sure that **Manage several locations per warehouse** is also ticked." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:46 -msgid "How to add a quality control step in goods receipt?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:48 -msgid "" -"Go to the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Warehouse` " -"and choose the warehouse where you want to change reception methods." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:51 -msgid "" -"By default, warehouses are configured with one step reception (**Receive " -"goods directly into stock**)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:54 -msgid "" -"To add quality control before transfer goods into stock location, tick " -"**Unload in input location, go through a quality control before being " -"admitted in stock (3 steps)**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:62 -msgid "How to control a receipt?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:65 -msgid "How to process the receipt step ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:67 -msgid "" -"In the **Purchase** app, create a **Request for Quotation**. Click on the " -"**Confirm order** button. You can see that there is one **Shipment** related" -" to purchase order in the stat button above the purchase order form view. " -"This is the receipt step." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:75 -msgid "" -"Go to **Inventory** and click on the link **# TO RECEIVE** in the " -"**Receipts** card." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:80 -msgid "" -"Click on the receipt that you want to process. Click on **Validate** to " -"complete the move from the **Vendor** location to **WH/Input**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:83 -msgid "" -"This has completed the receipt step and the status column at the top of the " -"page for **WH/IN** should now show **Done**. The product has been moved from" -" the **Vendor** to the **WH/Input** location, which makes the product " -"available for the next step (Move to the quality control zone)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:89 -msgid "" -"How to move your product from the receipt zone to the quality control zone ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:91 -msgid "" -"Go to the **Inventory** dashboard. You will see that there is one transfer " -"ready (the move to the quality control zone) and one waiting (the move to " -"the stock after the control). Click on the link **# TRANSFERS** in the " -"**Internal Transfers** to process the quality control." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:101 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Input** to **WH/Quality" -" Control**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:104 -msgid "" -"This has completed the internal transfer step and the status column at the " -"top of the page for **WH/INT** should now show **Done**. The receipt is now " -"ready to be controlled." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:109 -msgid "How to to process the quality control ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:111 -msgid "" -"Go back to the **Inventory** dashboard. The waiting transfer is now ready. " -"Click on the link **# TRANSFERS** in the **Internal Transfers** card to " -"process the quality control." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:118 -msgid "" -"Click on the last picking to process. Click on **Validate** to complete the " -"move from **WH/Quality Control** to **WH/Stock**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:121 -msgid "" -"This has completed the quality control step and the status column at the top" -" of the page for **WH/INT** should now show **Done**. The receipt has been " -"controlled and has moved to your stock." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:127 -msgid ":doc:`two_steps`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:3 -msgid "How to unload your shipment to an input location? (2 steps)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:13 -msgid "" -"The 2 steps flow is the following : You receive the goods in an input area " -"then transfer them from input area to your stock. As long as the goods are " -"not transferred in your stock, they will not be available for further " -"processing." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:26 -msgid "" -"To allow management of routes, go to the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Configuration --> Settings`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:35 -msgid "" -"Make sure that **\"Manage several locations per warehouse\"** is also " -"ticked." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:39 -msgid "How to configure your warehouse ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:41 -msgid "" -"Go to the the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> " -"Warehouse` and choose the warehouse where you want to change reception " -"methods." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:44 -msgid "" -"By default, warehouses are configured with one step reception (option " -"**Receive goods directly into stock**)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:47 -msgid "" -"To add the control step, tick **Unload in input location then go to stock (2" -" steps)**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:54 -msgid "How to receipt a shipment in 2 steps?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:57 -msgid "How to process the Receipt step ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:59 -msgid "" -"In the purchase module, create a **Request for Quotation**, then click on " -"the **Confirm order** button. You can see that there is one **Shipment** " -"related to purchase order in the **stat button** above the purchase order " -"form view. This is the receipt step." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:67 -msgid "" -"Go to **Inventory** and click on the **# TO RECEIVE** link on the " -"**Receipts** card." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:73 -msgid "" -"Click on the receipt that you want to process, then click on **Validate** to" -" complete the move from the **Vendor** to **WH/Input**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:76 -msgid "" -"This has completed the Receipt Step and the move refered with **WH/IN**. The" -" product has been moved from the **Vendor** to the **WH/Input** location, " -"which makes the product available for the next step." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:81 -msgid "How to transfer the receipt to your stock ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:83 -msgid "" -"Go back to the **Inventory** dashboard. The waiting transfer is now ready. " -"Click on the **# TRANSFERS** in the **Internal Transfers** to process the " -"quality control." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:90 -msgid "" -"Click on the picking you want to process. Click on **Validate** to complete " -"the move from **WH/Input** to **WH/Stock**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:93 -msgid "" -"This has completed the internal transfer step and the move refered with " -"**WH/INT**. The receipt has been moved to your stock." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:98 -msgid ":doc:`three_steps`" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:68 +msgid "Process the receipt and the internal transfer" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers.rst:3 @@ -2425,9 +1728,6 @@ msgid "What's the difference between lots and serial numbers?" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:170 msgid "Introduction" msgstr "Überblick" @@ -2492,616 +1792,1420 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:46 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:135 msgid ":doc:`serial_numbers`" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:47 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:129 msgid ":doc:`lots`" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:3 -msgid "How to manage lots of identical products?" +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:3 +msgid "Manage expiration dates" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In many companies, products have expiration dates and they should be tracked" +" based on those dates. In the food industry, for example, tracking stocks " +"based on expiration dates is mandatory to avoid selling expired products to " +"customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:10 +msgid "" +"With Odoo, you can track your products based on their expiration dates, even" +" if they are already tracked by lots or serial numbers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:14 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:15 +msgid "Configurations" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:17 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:18 +msgid "Application configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:19 +msgid "" +"To use expiration dates tracking, open the *Inventory* application and go to" +" *Configuration > Settings* and activate the *Lots & Serial Numbers* and " +"*Expiration Dates* features." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:27 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:28 +#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:68 +#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:90 +msgid "Product configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:29 +msgid "" +"Now, you have the possibility to define different dates in the *inventory " +"tab* of the product form:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:32 +msgid "" +"Product Use Time: it’s the number of days before the goods start " +"deteriorating, without being dangerous yet. It will be computed using the " +"lot/serial number;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:34 +msgid "" +"Product Life Time: refers to the number of days before the goods may become " +"dangerous and must not be consumed. It will be computed on the lot/serial " +"number;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:36 +msgid "" +"Product Removal Time: shows the number of days before the goods should be " +"removed from the stock. It will be computed on the lot/serial number;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:38 +msgid "" +"Product Alert Time: refers to the number of days before an alert should be " +"raised on the lot/serial number." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:44 +msgid "Expiration Date on Lots/Serial Numbers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:46 +msgid "" +"When receiving a product in stock, the dates will automatically be updated " +"on the corresponding lot/serial number. This update will be based on the " +"reception date of the product and the times set on the product form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:58 +msgid "Expiration Alerts" +msgstr "Ablaufbenachrichtigungen" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:60 +msgid "" +"You can access all your expiration alerts from the *inventory* app. To do " +"so, go to *Master Data > Lots/Serial Numbers*. There, you can use the pre-" +"existing filter that shows all the lots/serial numbers that exceeded their " +"alert date." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:3 +msgid "Manage lots of identical products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:5 msgid "" "Lots are useful for products you receive in great quantity and for which a " -"lot number can help in reportings, quality controls, or any other info. Lots" -" will help identify a number of pieces having for instance a production " +"lot number can help in reporting, quality controls, or any other info. Lots " +"will help identify a number of pieces having, for instance, a production " "fault. It can be useful for a batch production of clothes or food." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:14 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:11 msgid "" -"Odoo has the capacity to manage lots ensuring compliance with the " +"Odoo has the capacity to manage lots, ensuring compliance with the " "traceability requirements imposed by the majority of industries." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:17 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:14 msgid "" "The double-entry management in Odoo enables you to run very advanced " "traceability." msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:18 +msgid "Setting Up" +msgstr "" + #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:21 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:19 -msgid "Setting up" +msgid "Application Configuration" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:24 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:22 -msgid "Application configuration" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:26 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:23 msgid "" -"You need activate the tracking of lots in the settings. In the **Inventory**" -" application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`, select " -"**Track lots or serial numbers**" +"First, you need to activate the tracking of lot numbers. To do so, go to " +"*Inventory > Configuration > Settings* and tick *Lots & Serial Numbers*. " +"Then, click on save." msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:31 +msgid "Product Configuration" +msgstr "Produktkonfiguration" + #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:33 msgid "" -"In order to have an advanced management of the lots, you should also select " -"**Manage several locations per warehouse**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:39 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:31 -#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:27 -#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:26 -msgid "Then click on **Apply**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:42 -msgid "Operation types configuration" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:44 -msgid "" -"You also need to set up how you will manage lots for each operations. In the" -" **Inventory** application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Operation Types`." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:48 -msgid "" -"For each type (receipts, internal transfers, deliveries,...), you can set if" -" you can create new lot numbers or only use existing lot numbers." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:57 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:36 -msgid "" -"Finally, you have to configure which products you want to track in lots." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:59 -msgid "" -"Go into :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Products`, and open the " -"product of your choice. Click on **Edit**, and in the **Inventory** tab, " -"select **Tracking by Lots**, then click on **Save**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:67 -msgid "Manage lots" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:70 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:49 -msgid "Transfers" -msgstr "Bewegungen" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:72 -msgid "" -"In order to process a transfer of a product tracked by lot, you have to " -"input the lot number(s)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:75 -msgid "Click on the lot icon :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:80 -msgid "" -"A window will pop-up. Click on **Add an item** and fill in the lot number " -"and the quantity." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:86 -msgid "" -"Depending on your operation type configuration, you will be able to fill in " -"new lot numbers, or only use existing ones." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:90 -msgid "In the scanner interface, you just have to scan the lot numbers." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:93 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:79 -msgid "Inventory adjustment" -msgstr "Bestandsabgleich" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:95 -msgid "Inventory of a product tracked by lot can be done in 2 ways:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:97 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:83 -msgid "Classic inventory by products" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:99 -msgid "Inventory of a lot" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:101 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:87 -msgid "" -"When doing a classic inventory, there is a **Serial Number** column. If the " -"product has already been assigned with a number, it is already pre-filled." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:105 -msgid "" -"Click on **Add an item** if the product has not been inventoried yet. You " -"can easily create lots, just type in a new lot number in the column." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:111 -msgid "" -"You can also just do the inventory of a lot. In this case, you will have to " -"fill in the **Lot number**. You can also create a new lot from here. Just " -"type in the number, a window will pop out to link the number to a product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:120 -msgid "Lots traceability" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:122 -msgid "" -"You can check the lot traceability from :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Inventory Control --> Serial Numbers/Lots`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:128 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:122 -msgid "You can have more details by clicking on the **Traceability** button :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:134 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:128 -msgid ":doc:`differences`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:3 -msgid "How to work with serial numbers?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Serial Number Tracking is used to track products with serial numbers on " -"every transactions. You can track the current location of the product with " -"serial numbers. When the products are moved from one location to another " -"location, the system will automatically identify the current location of the" -" product based on last movement of the product. So you can get the last " -"location where the products are moved." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:24 -msgid "" -"You need activate the tracking of serial numbers in the settings. In the " -"**Inventory** application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`, select **Track lots or serial numbers**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:38 -msgid "" -"Go into :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Products`, and open the " -"product of your choice. Click on **Edit**, and in the **Inventory** tab, " -"select **By Unique Serial Number**, then click on **Save**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:46 -msgid "Manage Serial Numbers" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:51 -msgid "" -"In order to process a transfer of a product tracked by serial number, you " -"have to input the number(s). In order to be able to assign serial numbers to" -" products with tracking features enabled you will first need to mark your " -"transfer as to do. Click on the **Mark as TODO** button to display the Lot " -"Split icon." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:57 -msgid "Click on the serial number icon :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:62 -msgid "" -"A window will pop-up. Click on **Add an item** and fill in the serial " +"Now, you have to configure which products you want to track by serial " "numbers." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:68 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:36 msgid "" -"If you move products that already have serial numbers assigned, those will " -"appear in the list. Just click on the **+** icon to confirm that you are " -"moving those serial numbers." +"Go to *Master Data > Products* and open the product of your choice. There, " +"click on *Edit* and select *Tracking by Lots* in the inventory tab." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:76 -msgid "In the scanner interface, you just have to scan the serial numbers." +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:47 +msgid "Manage Lots" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:81 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:52 msgid "" -"Inventory of a product tracked by serial numbers can be done in 2 ways:" +"In order to receive a product tracked by lots, you have to specify its lot " +"numbers. You have several ways of doing so:" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:85 -msgid "Inventory of a serial number" +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:55 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:65 +msgid "Manually assign the different lot numbers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:57 +msgid "Copy/paste lot numbers from an Excel file" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:59 +msgid "First, you need to open the detailed operations of your picking." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:67 +msgid "" +"When opening the detailed operations, you can click on *Add a line*. Then, " +"you will be able to fill the lot number in. Once done, you can click on *Add" +" a line* again to register a new lot number." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:75 +msgid "Copy/paste lot number from an Excel file" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:77 +msgid "" +"Once the spreadsheet containing the lot numbers you received from your " +"supplier and copy the list. Then, you can paste them in the *Lot/Serial " +"Number Name* column for Odoo to automatically create the necessary lines. " +"After that, you will have to manually enter the number of products that are " +"contained in each one of the lots." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:93 +msgid "Operation Types" +msgstr "Vorgangstypen" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:95 +msgid "" +"Of course, you also have the possibility to define how you will manage lots " +"for each operation type. To do so, open the *Inventory* app and go to " +"*Configuration > Operation Types*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:99 +msgid "" +"For each type (receipts, internal transfers, deliveries, …), you can decide " +"if you allow to create new lot numbers or only use existing ones. By " +"default, the creation of new lots is only allowed at product reception, and " +"using existing lot numbers isn’t allowed in this operation. If you have " +"inter-warehouse transfers and track products by lots, it can be useful to " +"allow using existing lot numbers in receipts too." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:111 +msgid "Lots traceability" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:113 +msgid "" +"The lot number given to the products allows you to keep track of where they " +"were received, put in stock, to whom they were sold and where they were " +"shipped to." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:117 +msgid "" +"To track an item, open the *Inventory* module and, in *Master Data > " +"Lots/Serial Numbers*, click on the lot number corresponding to your search." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:124 +msgid "" +"When you open the *Traceability* information, you see in which documents the" +" lot number has been used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:130 +msgid "" +"Now, if you want to locate the lot number, you can do so by clicking on the " +"*Location* stat button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:3 +msgid "Work with serial numbers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:5 +msgid "" +"To track products with serial numbers, you can use the serial number " +"tracking. With them, you can track the current location of the product and, " +"when the products are moved from one location to another, the system will " +"automatically identify the current location of the product, based on its " +"last movement." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:11 +msgid "" +"If you want to do it or run very advanced traceability, the Odoo double-" +"entry management is the feature you need." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:20 +msgid "" +"First, you need to activate the serial numbers tracking. To do so, go to " +"*Configuration > Settings* in the *Inventory* application. Then, enable the " +"feature and hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:30 +msgid "" +"Now, you have to configure the products you want to track by serial numbers." +" To do so, go to *Master Data > Products* and open the product of your " +"choice. Edit it and select *Tracking By Unique Serial Number* in the " +"*Inventory tab*. Then, click on save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:42 +msgid "Manage Serial Numbers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:47 +msgid "" +"To receive a product that is tracked by serial number, you have to specify " +"its serial number. Of course, you have several ways of doing so:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:50 +msgid "Manual assignation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:52 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:73 +msgid "Multi-assignation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:54 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:89 +msgid "Copy/pasting from an Excel file" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:56 +msgid "" +"Whatever could be your favorite way to assign serial numbers, you firstly " +"need to open the detailed operations of your picking." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:63 +msgid "Manual assignation of the different serial numbers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:65 +msgid "" +"When opening the detailed operations, you can click on *Add a line*. Then, " +"you will be able to fill in the serial number field. Once done, you can " +"click again on *Add a line* to register a new serial number." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:75 +msgid "" +"By using the multi-assignation of serial numbers, Odoo will automatically " +"create the necessary lines. To do so, you have to enter the first serial " +"number of your set and the number of products you have to assign a serial " +"number to." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:80 +msgid "Once done, click on *Assign Serial Numbers* and Odoo will do the rest." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:91 msgid "" -"Click on **Add an item** if the product has not been inventoried yet. You " -"can easily create serial numbers, just type in a new number in the column." +"To use copy/pasting, open the spreadsheet containing the serial numbers you " +"received and copy the list. Then, past them in the *Lot/Serial Number Name* " +"column of the wizard. Doing so, Odoo will automatically create the lines you" +" need." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:98 -msgid "The quantity should be 1 for each line." +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:106 +msgid "Operation types" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:100 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:108 msgid "" -"You can also just do the inventory of a serial number. In this case, you " -"will have to fill in the serial number. You can also create a new one from " -"here. Just type in the number, a window will pop out to link it to a " -"product." +"You also have the possibility to define how you will manage lots for each " +"operation type. To define it, go to *Configuration > Operation Types* in the" +" *Inventory* app." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:109 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:112 +msgid "" +"For each type, you can decide if you allow the creation of new lot numbers " +"or want to use existing ones. By default, the creation of new lots is only " +"allowed at product reception." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:120 +msgid "" +"If you have inter-warehouse transfers and track products by lots, it can be " +"useful to allow using existing lot numbers in receipts too." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:124 msgid "Serial Number traceability" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:111 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:126 msgid "" -"The serial number given to these items allow you to keep track of where they" -" were received, put in stock, to whom they were sold and where they were " -"shipped to." +"Using serial numbers allows you to keep track of where the products were " +"received, put in stock, to whom they were sold, and where they were shipped " +"to." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:115 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:130 msgid "" -"To track an item, open the **Inventory** module, and in " -":menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Serial Numbers/lots`, click on the " -"serial number corresponding to your search." +"Tracking an item is easy: open the *Inventory* app, and go to *Master Data >" +" Lots/Serial Numbers* and click on the serial number corresponding to your " +"search. Then, open the *Traceability* information. There, you will see in " +"which documents the serial number has been used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:142 +msgid "" +"And, if you want to locate a serial number, you can do so by clicking on the" +" *Location* button available on the serial number form." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/misc.rst:3 msgid "Miscellaneous Operations" msgstr "Sonstige Operationen" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:2 -msgid "Immediate & Planned Transfers" +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:3 +msgid "Send Automated Emails at Delivery" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:4 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:8 msgid "" -"In Odoo, you can create two types of transfers: immediate or planned " -"transfers." +"First, go to the *Inventory* app, then to *Settings* and activate the *Email" +" Confirmation* feature. If you work in multi-company, this configuration is " +"company-specific." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:8 -msgid "Immediate Transfers" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:10 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:15 msgid "" -"When you create a transfer manually, it is by default an immediate transfer." +"When you enable this feature, Odoo automatically creates an email template. " +"Of course, you can modify it if necessary by clicking on the small arrow " +"next to its name." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:23 +msgid "Send email at delivery validation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:25 msgid "" -"In the case of an immediate transfer, you directly encode the products and " -"quantities you are processing, there is no reservation that applies. This is" -" why the column \"Initial Demand\" is not editable. You only fill in the " -"column \"Done\" for the quantities." +"On the inventory dashboard, click on *Create* and fill the form for a " +"specific partner. Once you have added some products in it, *Validate* it and" +" do the same for the delivery." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:18 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:32 msgid "" -"This is for example used when you are transferring goods from a location A " -"to a location B and that this is not planned (you are processing the " -"transfer right now)." +"Doing so, an automated email will be sent and will appear in the chatter." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:23 -msgid "Planned Transfers" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:38 msgid "" -"When a transfer is generated automatically (from a sales order or purchase " -"order for example), it is a planned transfer. This means that there is an " -"initial demand and that reservation applies on this initial demand." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:30 -msgid "" -"If you want to create a planned transfer manually, you can do it from the " -"inventory dashboard." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:36 -msgid "" -"In that case, you will have to enter the initial demand first (how many " -"units are you supposed to proceed), then to mark your transfer as to do. " -"Once this is done, you will be able to reserve the products and to process " -"the transfer." +"If you work with a shipping method, and then have a tracking link, it will " +"be included in the standard email template." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:3 -msgid "How to manage stock that you don't own?" +msgid "Manage Stock that you don't own" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Sometimes, suppliers can offer you to store and sell products without having" +" to buy those items. This technique is called *consignee stock*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:8 msgid "" -"Some suppliers can sometimes offer you to store and sell products without " -"having to buy those items: this technique is called **consignee stock**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:12 -msgid "" "Consignee stock is a great way for manufacturers and suppliers to launch new" -" products. As resellers may be reluctant to buying a product that they are " -"not sure to be able to sell, consignee stock will allow them to propose an " -"item to check its market without having to pay for it in the first place." +" products. As resellers may be reluctant to buy a product they are not sure " +"to be able to sell, consignee stock will allow them to offer an item to " +"check its market without having to pay for it in the first place." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:18 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:14 msgid "" -"Odoo has the ability to manage consignee stocks through the advanced " -"settings." +"Of course, Odoo has the ability to manage those consignee stocks through " +"advanced settings." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:24 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:20 msgid "" -"Open the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`, and" -" in the **Product Owners** section, select **Manage consignee stocks " -"(advanced)**, then click on **Apply**." +"To use this feature, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Settings* in the " +"inventory app. Then, enable the *Consignment* feature in the *Traceability* " +"section. Now, hit save." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:32 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:28 msgid "Reception of Consignee Stock" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:34 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:30 msgid "" -"In the Inventory's Dashboard, open the **Receipts** and create a new " -"reception. You can see that in the right side of the page, a new **Owner** " -"line has appeared. You can specify the partner which owns the stock or leave" -" it blank if you are the owner." +"When in the *Inventory* app, open the receipts and create a new reception. " +"On the right side, you will see that a new line called *Assign Owner* has " +"appeared. There, you can specify the partner which owns the stock." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:3 -msgid "How to configure and run schedulers?" +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:39 +msgid "If you are the owner, you can leave the field blank." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:6 -msgid "What is a scheduler" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:41 msgid "" -"The scheduler is the calculation engine which plans and prioritises " -"production and purchasing automatically according to the rules defined on " -"products. By default, the scheduler is set to run once a day (Odoo " -"automatically creates a **Scheduled Action** for this)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:14 -msgid "Calculating Requirements / Scheduling" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:16 -msgid "" -"Scheduling only validates procurements that are confirmed but not yet " -"started. These procurement reservations will themselves start production, " -"tasks or purchases depending on the configuration of the requested product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:21 -msgid "" -"You take into account the priority of operations when starting reservations " -"and procurements. Urgent requests, those with a date in the past, or " -"requests with a date earlier than the others will be started first. In case " -"there are not enough products in stock to satisfy all the requests, you can " -"be sure that the most urgent requests will be produced first." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:29 -msgid "Configure and run the scheduler" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:32 -msgid "Run the scheduler manually" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:34 -msgid "" -"This feature is not visible by default. You have to enable **debug mode** to" -" see this. To enable debug mode, go to :menuselection:`Help --> About` and " -"click on **Activate the developer mode**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:38 -msgid "" -"You can also start the scheduler manually from the menu " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Schedulers --> Run Schedulers`. The scheduler " -"uses all the relevant parameters defined for products, suppliers and the " -"company to determine the priorities between the different production orders," -" deliveries and supplier purchases." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:48 -msgid "Configure and run the scheduler (only for advanced users)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:50 -msgid "" -"This feature is not visible by default. You have to enable **debug mode** to" -" see this. To enable debug mode, go to :menuselection:`Help -> About` and " -"click on **Activate the developer mode**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:54 -msgid "" -"You can set the starting time of the scheduler by modifying the " -"corresponding action in the menu :menuselection:`Settings --> Technical --> " -"Automation --> Scheduled Actions`. Modify the Run mrp Scheduler " -"configuration." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:63 -msgid ":doc:`../delivery/scheduled_dates`" +"Once the receipt is validated, the products enter your stock but still " +"belong to the owner. They don’t impact your inventory valuation." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:3 -msgid "How to scrap products?" +msgid "Scrap Products" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In your warehouse, you sometimes find products that are damaged or that are " +"unusable due to expiry or for some other reasons. You often notice this " +"during picking or physical inventory. Since those products cannot be sold or" +" stored, you have to scrap them." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:10 +msgid "" +"When goods are scrapped, they are not reflected in the system as a part of " +"the inventory. The scrapped material will be physically moved to the scrap " +"area and not taken into account into inventory valuation." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:15 msgid "" "Scrap means waste that either has no economic value or only the value of its" -" basic material" +" basic material content, recoverable through recycling." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:11 -msgid "content recoverable through recycling." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:21 msgid "" -"In your warehouse you sometimes find products that are damaged or that are " -"unusable due to expiry or for some other reason. You often notice this " -"during picking or physical inventory." +"When you install the *Inventory* app, Odoo automatically creates a scrap " +"location. It’s named *Virtual Location/Scap*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:17 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:24 msgid "" -"Since you cannot normally sell or store these products, you have to scrap " -"product." +"Of course, you can create new scrap areas if needed. To do so, go to " +"*Inventory > Configuration > Settings* and activate the *Storage Locations* " +"feature." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:20 -msgid "" -"When goods are scrapped they are not reflected in the system as a part of " -"the inventory. The scrapped material will be physically moved to scrap area." +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:31 +msgid "Now, go to *Configuration > Locations* and create your scrap location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:27 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:34 msgid "" -"When you install inventory management, odoo automatically creates one " -"default scrap location, namely **Virtual location/Scrapped**." +"You have to check *Is a Scrap Location?* on the location form. In fact, " +"scrap locations cannot be used as normal storage locations and then, a " +"virtual location will be created for scrapped products." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:30 -msgid "" -"To create an extra scrap location, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Configuration --> Settings` and check **Manage several locations per " -"warehouse**, then click on **Apply**." +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:39 +msgid "Different ways to scrap products" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:41 msgid "" -"After applying **Manage several location per warehouse**, you can create a " -"new scrap location in :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouse Management" -" --> Locations.`" +"With Odoo, you have several ways to scrap products: from receipts, from a " +"delivery order, and from an internal transfer." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:43 -msgid "" -"To define a scrap location, you have to check **Is a Scrap Location?** on " -"location form view." +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:45 +msgid "Scrap from receipt" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:47 -msgid "Different ways to scrap product" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:49 -msgid "Odoo provides several ways to scrap products." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:52 -msgid "1) Scrap from Receipt (Initial Demand tab)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:54 msgid "" -"To scrap product from incoming shipment, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory -->" -" Dashboard --> Receipts`." +"Scrapping products from receipts is easy. Go to *Inventory > Dashboard > " +"Receipts* or click on *1 TO PROCESS* under the receipts location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:60 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:53 msgid "" -"Open the incoming shipment, and in the **Initial demand** tab, click on the " -"scrap products button." +"Now, open the receipt and validate the picking. Once the products entered " +"your stock, the Scrap button appears on the top left corner of your screen." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:67 -msgid "2) Scrap from delivery order (Initial Demand tab) ." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:69 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:57 msgid "" -"To scrap product from outgoing shipment, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory -->" -" Dashboard --> Delivery Orders`" +"You can scrap products that were part of the receipt from there. If you do " +"so, it will move them from available stock to the virtual scrap location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:75 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:68 +msgid "Scrap from delivery order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:70 msgid "" -"Open the outgoing shipment, and in the **Initial demand** tab, click on the " -"scrap products button on stock move in initial demand tab." +"To scrap products from a delivery order, go to *Inventory > Dashboard > " +"Delivery orders* or click on *1 TO PROCESS*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:82 -msgid "3) Scrap from internal transfer (Initial Demand tab)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:84 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:76 msgid "" -"To scrap product from internal transfer, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory -->" -" Dashboard --> Internal Transfers`" +"Once done, open the delivery order. You can see the scrap button in the " +"upper left of the document. If you scrap the product from there, it will be " +"moved from your available stock to the virtual scrap location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:90 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:80 msgid "" -"Open the internal transfer, and in the **Initial demand** tab, click on the " -"scrap products button on stock move in initial demand tab." +"You can find all the scrap orders made from the picking by clicking on the " +"button on the top right corner of the document." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:96 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:93 +msgid "Scrap from an internal transfer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:95 msgid "" -"When you click on scrap button, a popup will open. You can enter the " -"quantity of products, and specify the scrap location, then click on " -"**Scrap**." +"To do this, the flow is almost the same. In fact, you just have to go to " +"*Inventory > Dashboard > Internal Transfers*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:101 +msgid "" +"There, open the internal transfer that interests you. Now, click on the " +"scrap button that is on the top left of the document." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:104 msgid "" -"To allow change scrap location on wizard, you have to select **Manage " -"several location per warehouse** in the settings at " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`" +"When scrapping before validating the internal transfer, the product is, by " +"default, moved from the source location to the virtual scrap location. But, " +"if you scrap after validating the internal transfer, it will be moved from " +"the destination location, as opposed to the source location, to the virtual " +"scrap location." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:110 +msgid "" +"Of course, you can manually update the source location of the scrap order if" +" necessary." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:3 +msgid "Send Automated SMS at Delivery" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:8 +msgid "" +"To send automated SMS, you need to activate the *SMS Confirmation* feature. " +"To do so, go to the *Inventory* app *Settings* and enable the feature. In " +"multi-company, this feature is company-specific." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Of course, an SMS template already exists by default in Odoo. You can modify" +" it by clicking on the arrow on the right." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:22 +msgid "Send SMS at delivery validation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:24 +msgid "" +"To use this feature, try to *Create* a delivery order for a specific partner" +" and add some products to it. Then, *Validate* the delivery." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:30 +msgid "Now, the automated SMS that has been sent appears in the chatter." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:36 +msgid "" +"The partner which is set on the transfer needs to have a phone number " +"specified in its contact form for the SMS to be sent." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:39 +msgid "" +"If you work with a shipping method, and then have a tracking link, it will " +"be included in the SMS template." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning.rst:3 +msgid "Planning" +msgstr "Planung" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:3 +msgid "How is the Scheduled Delivery Date Computed?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In most cases, scheduled dates are computed to be able to plan deliveries, " +"receptions, and so on. Depending on your company’s habits, Odoo generates " +"scheduled dates via the scheduler." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:9 +msgid "" +"To make your life easier, the Odoo scheduler computes everything per line, " +"whether it’s a manufacturing order, a delivery order, a sale order, etc." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:14 +msgid "" +"The computed dates are dependent on the different lead times configured in " +"Odoo." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:20 +msgid "" +"Configuring lead times is the first move if you want to compute scheduled " +"dates. Those are the delays promised (in terms of delivery, manufacturing, " +"etc.) to your partners and/or clients." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:25 +msgid "In Odoo, you can configure different lead times." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:30 +msgid "" +"When configuring lead times at the product level, you have three different " +"types to take into account: supplier lead time, customer lead time, and " +"manufacturing lead time." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:35 +msgid "Supplier lead time" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:37 +msgid "" +"The supplier lead time is the time needed for the supplier to deliver your " +"purchased products. To configure it, select a product and click on the " +"inventory tab. There, you will have to add a vendor to your product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:44 +msgid "" +"Now, just open the vendor form and fill its *Delivery lead time*. In this " +"case, the delivery day will be equal to *Date of the Purchase Order + " +"Delivery Lead Time*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:52 +msgid "" +"Do not forget that it is possible to add different vendor pricelists and, " +"thus, different delivery lead times, depending on the vendor." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:56 +msgid "Customer Lead Time" +msgstr "Auslieferungszeit" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:58 +msgid "" +"It is the time needed to get your product from your store/warehouse to your " +"customer. It can be configured for any product. To add it, select a product " +"and go to the inventory tab. There, simply indicate your *customer lead " +"time*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:67 +msgid "Manufacturing lead time" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:69 +msgid "" +"On the same page, it is possible to configure what’s called the " +"*Manufacturing Lead Time*. It is the time needed to manufacture the product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:76 +msgid "" +"At the company level, you can configure security days. Those are useful to " +"cope with eventual dalys and to be sure to meet your engagements. The idea " +"is to subtract backup days from the computed scheduled date in case of " +"delays." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:81 +msgid "" +"Once again, there are three different types of security lead times: for " +"sales, for purchases, and for manufacturing." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:85 +msgid "Security lead time for sales" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:87 +msgid "" +"In sales, security lead time corresponds to backup days to ensure you will " +"be able to deliver your clients in times. They are margins of errors for " +"delivery lead times. Security days are the same logic as the early " +"wristwatch, in order to arrive on time." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:92 +msgid "" +"The idea is to subtract the numbers of security days from the calculation " +"and, thus, to compute a scheduled date earlier than the one you promised to " +"your client. In that way, you are sure to be able to keep your commitment." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:97 +msgid "" +"To set up your security dates, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Settings* " +"and enable the feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:104 +msgid "Security lead time for purchase" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:106 +msgid "" +"It follows the same logic as security lead time for sales except that " +"security lead time for purchase is the margin of error for vendor lead " +"times, not for sales." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:110 +msgid "" +"When the system generates purchase orders for procuring products, they will " +"be scheduled that many days earlier to cope with unexpected vendor delays." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:114 +msgid "" +"To find purchase lead time, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Settings* and" +" enable the feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:121 +msgid "Security lead time for manufacturing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:123 +msgid "" +"The security lead time for manufacturing allows generating manufacturing " +"orders which are scheduled that many days earlier to cope with unexpected " +"manufacturing days." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:127 +msgid "" +"To configure it, go to *Manufacturing > Configuration > Settings* and enable" +" the *Security Lead Time* option. Then, hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:136 +msgid "" +"Sometimes, the internal transfers that a product might do may also influence" +" the computed date. The delays due to internal transfers can be specified in" +" the *Inventory* app when you create a new rule in a route." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:141 +msgid "" +"To specify them, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Routes* and add a push " +"rule to set a delay. Of course, you need to activate *Multi-step Routes* to " +"use this feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:149 +msgid "At the sale order level" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:152 +msgid "Expected date" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:154 +msgid "" +"In the *Sales* application, you have the possibility to activate the option " +"*Delivery Date*. It will allow you to see additional fields on the sale " +"order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:158 +msgid "" +"By enabling this option, Odoo will indicate the *Expected Date* in the " +"*Other Info* tab of the sales order. This one is automatically computed " +"based on the different lead times." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:165 +msgid "" +"If you set a *Commitment Date* to deliver your customer that is earlier than" +" the *Expected Date*, a warning message will appear on the screen." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:175 +msgid "" +"To better understand all the above info, here is an example. You may sell a " +"car today (January 1st), that is purchased on order, and you promise to " +"deliver your customer within 20 days (January 20th). In such a scenario, the" +" scheduler will trigger the following events, based on your configuration:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:181 +msgid "" +"January 19: this is the actual scheduled delivery (1 day of Sales Safety " +"Days);" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:183 +msgid "" +"January 18: you receive the product from your supplier (1 day of Purchase " +"days);" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:185 +msgid "" +"January 10: this is the deadline to order at your supplier (9 days of " +"Supplier Delivery Lead Time);" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:187 +msgid "" +"January 8: trigger a purchase request to your purchase team, since they " +"need, on average, 2 days to find the right supplier and order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:3 +msgid "Configure and Run Schedulers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:6 +msgid "What is a scheduler?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:8 +msgid "" +"The scheduler is the calculation engine that plans and prioritizes " +"production and purchasing. It does it automatically, according to the rules " +"defined on products. By default, the scheduler is set to run once a day." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:14 +msgid "Calculating Requirements / Scheduling" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:16 +msgid "" +"Scheduling only validates procurements that are confirmed but not yet " +"started. These procurement reservations will start production, tasks or " +"purchases themselves, depending on the configuration of the requested " +"product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:21 +msgid "" +"As a human would do, the scheduler takes the priority of operations into " +"account when starting reservations and procurements. Urgent requests will be" +" started first." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:26 +msgid "" +"In case there are not enough products in stock to satisfy all the requests, " +"you can be sure that the most urgent ones will be produced first." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:31 +msgid "Configure and run the scheduler" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:34 +msgid "Run the scheduler manually" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:36 +msgid "" +"To start the scheduler manually, go to *Inventory > Operations > Run " +"Schedulers*. The scheduler uses all the relevant parameters defined for " +"products, suppliers and the company to prioritize the different production " +"orders, deliveries and supplier purchases." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:45 +msgid "Configure and run the scheduler (for advanced users)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:47 +msgid "" +"To use this feature, you have to enable the debug mode. To do so, go to " +"*Settings > Activate the developer mode*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Then, go to *Settings > Technical > Automation > Scheduled Actions* and " +"modify the *Run MRP Scheduler Configuration*. There, you can set the " +"starting time of the scheduler." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products.rst:3 +msgid "Products" +msgstr "Produkte" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:3 +msgid "How to select the right replenishment strategy" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Minimum Stock rules and Make to Order have similar consequences but " +"different rules. They should be used depending on your manufacturing and " +"delivery strategies." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:10 +msgid "Terminology" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:13 +msgid "Minimum stock rule" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Minimum Stock rules are used to ensure that you always have the minimum " +"amount of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or " +"answer to your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its" +" minimum the system will automatically generate a procurement order with the" +" quantity needed to reach the maximum stock level." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:22 +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:58 +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:71 +msgid "Make to Order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:24 +msgid "" +"The Make to Order function will trigger a Purchase Order of the amount of " +"the Sales Order related to the product. The system will **not** check the " +"current stock. This means that a draft purchase order will be generated " +"regardless of the quantity on hand of the product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:33 +msgid "Minimum stock rules" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:35 +msgid "" +"The Minimum Stock Rules configuration is available through your Inventory " +"module. In the Inventory Control menu select \"Reordering Rule\" in the drop" +" down menu. There, click on \"Create\" to set minimum and maximum stock " +"values for a given product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:44 +msgid "" +"Show tooltips for \"minimum quantity\", \"maximum quantity\" and \"quantity " +"multiple\" fields" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:47 +msgid "" +"Then, click on your product to access the related product form and, on the " +"\"Inventory submenu\", do not forget to select a supplier." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:54 +msgid "" +"Don't forget to select the right product type. A consumable can not be " +"stocked and will thus not be accounted for in the stock valuation." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:60 +msgid "" +"The Make to Order configuration is available on your product form through " +"your :menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory control --> Products` (or any " +"other module where products are available)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:64 +msgid "On the product form, under Inventory, click on \"Make To Order\"." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:70 +msgid "Choice between the two options" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:72 +msgid "" +"The choice between the two options is thus dependent of your inventory " +"strategy. If you prefer to have a buffer and always have at least a minimum " +"amount, the minimum stock rule should be used. If you want to reorder your " +"stocks only if your sale is confirmed it is better to use the Make to Order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:3 +msgid "Use Different Units of Measure" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In some cases, handling products in different units of measure is necessary." +" For example, if you buy products in a country where the metric system is of" +" application and sell in a country where the imperial system is used, you " +"will need to convert the units. Another common use case is buying products " +"in bigger packs to your supplier and selling them in units to your " +"customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:12 +msgid "" +"You can set up Odoo to work with different units of measure for one product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:18 +msgid "" +"In the *Inventory* application, go to *Configuration > Settings*. In the " +"*Products* section, activate *Units of Measure*, then *Save*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:25 +msgid "Create New Units of Measure" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:27 +msgid "" +"In the *Inventory* application go to *Configuration > UoM*. There, hit " +"*Create*. As an example, we will create a Box of 6 units that we will use " +"for the Egg product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:34 +msgid "" +"The category is important for unit conversion, you will be able to convert " +"products from one unit to another only if those units belong to the same " +"category. The box of 6 is 6 times bigger than the reference unit of measure " +"for the category which is “Units” here." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:43 +msgid "Specify Units of Measure on your Products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:45 +msgid "" +"In the *Inventory application > Master Data > Products*, open the product " +"which you would like to change the purchase/sale unit of measure, and click " +"on *Edit*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:49 +msgid "" +"In the *General Information* tab, you can select the *Unit of Measure* in " +"which the product will be sold, which is also the unit in which internal " +"transfers will take place. You can also select the *Purchase Unit of " +"Measure*, which is the unit in which you purchase the product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:59 +msgid "Transfer from One Unit to Another" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:62 +msgid "Buy in the Pruchase UoM" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:64 +msgid "" +"In the *Purchase* application, *Create* a new request for quotation in which" +" you include the product with the different *Units of Measure* and *Confirm*" +" it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:71 +msgid "" +"On the automatically generated purchase orders, the UoM used is the Box of " +"6, meaning the Purchase UoM. You have of course the possibility to manually " +"modify the UoM if necessary. When you enter the *Receipt* which is linked to" +" the purchase order, you can observe that the 10 boxes of 6 units have been " +"converted in 60 units. Indeed, the stock is managed in units." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:82 +msgid "Replenishment" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:84 +msgid "" +"When doing a replenishment via the *Replenish* button on the product form, " +"you have the possibility to change the unit of measure." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:94 +msgid "Sell in bigger UoM" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:96 +msgid "" +"You can choose the unit of measure on the sale order document and decide to " +"sell the eggs by the dozen. When doing so, the price is automatically " +"computed from Units UoM to adapt to the selected *UoM*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:103 +msgid "" +"In the delivery order, the *UoM* used in the sale order is converted to the " +"*UoM* used for stock management, in our use case, the Units." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:3 +msgid "When Should you Use Packages, Units of Measure or Kits?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:6 +msgid "Units of Measure" +msgstr "Mengeneinheiten" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Units of measure specify the unit used to handle a product. In Odoo, you " +"have the possibility to specify the unit of measure in which you manage your" +" stock and the one which is used when purchasing the product to your " +"supplier." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:16 +msgid "" +"The *conversion* between the different units of measure is done " +"automatically. The only condition is that all the units have to be in the " +"*same category* (Unit, Weight, Volume, Length,...)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:20 +msgid "" +"For example, if I have the following reordering rule for the egg and I run " +"the scheduler, the quantity added in the automatically generated purchase " +"order will be in dozens but what will enter the stock will be units." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:35 +msgid "Packages" +msgstr "Verpackungen" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:37 +msgid "" +"The package is the physical container in which you put one or several " +"products from a picking. For example, when you deliver a product, you can " +"decide to separate the quantity into two different packages. It then allows " +"you to have a report with the quantity of products for each package." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:50 +msgid "Packaging" +msgstr "Verpackung" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:52 +msgid "" +"The packaging is the physical container that protects your product. If you " +"are selling computers, the packaging contains the computer with the notice " +"and the power plug." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:56 +msgid "" +"In Odoo, packagings are used for indicative purposes on sale orders. They " +"can be specified on the product form, in the inventory tab." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:66 +msgid "" +"Another useful use of the packaging is for product reception. By scanning " +"the barcode of the packaging, Odoo adds the number of units contained in the" +" packing on the picking." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies.rst:3 +msgid "Inventory Adjustment" +msgstr "Inventur" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:3 +msgid "Choose Between Reordering Rules and Make to Order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:5 +msgid "" +"*Reordering rules* and *make to order* do both allow to automatically " +"replenish products when necessary. The difference between those tools is how" +" they are triggered." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:9 +msgid "" +"*Reordering rules* are used to ensure that you always have a minimum amount " +"of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or answer to" +" your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its minimum " +"the system will automatically generate a procurement with the needed " +"quantity to reach the maximum stock level." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:15 +msgid "" +"The *Make to Order* route will trigger a procurement (purchase order or " +"manufacturing order) with the necessary quantity to fulfill a product " +"request (coming from a sale order or a manufacturing order). The system will" +" check the quantity on hand for the corresponding product and if the " +"available quantity is higher or equal to the necessary quantity, Odoo will " +"use what is in stock to fulfill the request. In case you don’t have enough " +"available stock to fully fulfill the product request, procurement will be " +"generated for the total quantity requested." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:28 +msgid "Reordering Rules" +msgstr "Meldebestände" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:30 +msgid "" +"The *Reordering Rules* configuration is available through the menu " +"*Inventory > Master Data > Reordering Rules*. There, click on *Create* to " +"set minimum and maximum stock values for a given product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:37 +msgid "" +"When the forecasted stock goes below the *Minimum Quantity* specified in " +"this field, Odoo generates a procurement to bring the forecasted quantity to" +" the *Maximum Quantity*. The *Quantity Multiple* is used to round the " +"procurement quantity up to this multiple. If it is 0, the exact quantity " +"will be used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:46 +msgid "" +"The *Lead time* is the number of days after the order point is triggered to " +"receive the products or to order them to the vendor." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:49 +msgid "" +"In case you work with multi-warehouses and/or multi-locations, you will be " +"able to specify different reordering rules for the same product in each " +"location." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:54 +msgid "" +"For the reordering rules to be triggered, on the corresponding product, a " +"route should be specified. In case you manufacture your products, make sure " +"to select the route *Manufacture* and create a *Bill of Material* for the " +"product. In case you purchase your products, make sure to select the route " +"*Buy* and add a *Vendor Pricelist*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:66 +msgid "" +"Don't forget to select the product type *storable* in the product form. A " +"consumable can not be stocked and won’t trigger reordering rules." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:73 +msgid "" +"The *Make To Order* configuration is available on your product form through " +"your *Inventory module > Master Data > Products* (or in any other module " +"where products are available)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:77 +msgid "" +"On the product form, in the *Inventory tab*, you can set a route. You can " +"choose *Make To Order* and another route, either *Buy* or *Manufacture*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:81 +msgid "" +"Again, if the *Buy* route is selected, make sure to set a *Vendor pricelist*" +" in the *Purchase tab*. In case you have set a *Manufacture* route, male " +"sure you have a *BoM* for this product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:3 +msgid "Resupply from another Warehouse" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:8 +msgid "" +"In order to be able to resupply from another warehouse, you need to activate" +" \\*multi-warehouses\\* and \\*multi-step routes\\*. Storage locations will " +"be automatically activated when activating multi-warehouses." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:16 +msgid "" +"You can then access your warehouses via \\*Inventory > Configuration > " +"Warehouses\\*. Create the necessary warehouses following this " +"`*documentation* " +"`__." +" Enter the warehouse which should be resupplied by another one. You will " +"have the possibility to directly indicate through which warehouse it gets " +"resupplied." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:26 +msgid "" +"By activating this option, a new route will now be available on your " +"products \\*Supply Product from Second warehouse\\*. It can now be selected," +" along with either a \\*reordering rule\\* or a \\*make to order\\*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:34 +msgid "" +"For the demonstration, I set a reordering rule with a minimum of 5 units in " +"stock and a maximum of 10 units in stock, having currently 0 units on hand. " +"I will run the scheduler by going to \\*Inventory > Operations > Run " +"scheduler\\*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:42 +msgid "" +"The system automatically creates two pickings, one \\*delivery order\\* from" +" my Second Warehouse which contains the necessary products, and a receipt in" +" my main warehouse WH/Stock for the same products. The source document is " +"the \\*reordering rule\\* which triggered the route \\*Supply Product from " +"Second warehouse\\*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/reporting.rst:3 @@ -3613,12 +3717,6 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:282 #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:263 #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:281 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:30 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:45 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:52 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:57 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:64 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:72 msgid "Configuration:" msgstr "" @@ -4054,956 +4152,359 @@ msgid "" "internal category" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts.rst:3 -msgid "Main Concepts" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:5 -msgid "Introduction to Inventory Management" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:7 -msgid "" -"A double-entry inventory has no stock input, output (disparition of " -"products) or transformation. Instead, all operations are stock moves between" -" locations (possibly virtual)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:16 -msgid "Operations" -msgstr "Vorgänge" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:18 -msgid "" -"Stock moves represent the transit of goods and materials between locations." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:30 -msgid "Production Order" -msgstr "Fertigungsauftrag" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:24 -msgid "Consume:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "2 Wheels: Stock → Production" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bike Frame: Stock → Production" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:26 -msgid "Produce:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:27 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Production → Stock" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Stock: the location the Manufacturing Order is initiated from" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Production: on the product form, field \"Production Location\"" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:36 -msgid "Drop-shipping" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:33 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Supplier → Customer" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:36 -msgid "Configurarion:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Supplier: on the product form" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Customer: on the sale order itself" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:45 -msgid "Client Delivery" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:39 -msgid "Pick" -msgstr "Picken" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:40 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Stock → Packing Zone" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:41 -msgid "Pack" -msgstr "Paket" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:42 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Packing Zone → Output" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:43 -#: ../../inventory/shipping.rst:3 -msgid "Shipping" -msgstr "Versand" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:44 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Output → Customer" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "on the pick+pack+ship route for the warehouse" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:52 -msgid "Inter-Warehouse transfer" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:49 -msgid "Transfer:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Warehouse 1 → Transit" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Transit → Warehouse 2" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Warehouse 2: the location the transfer is initiated from" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Warehouse 1: on the transit route" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:57 -msgid "Broken Product (scrapped)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:55 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Warehouse → Scrap" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:58 -msgid "Scrap: Scrap Location when creating the scrapping" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:60 -msgid "Missing products in inventory" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:61 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Warehouse → Inventory Loss" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:62 -msgid "Extra products in inventory" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:63 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Inventory Loss → Warehouse" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:65 -msgid "Inventory Loss: \"Inventory Location\" field on the product" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:72 -msgid "Reception" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Supplier → Input" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Input → Stock" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Supplier: purchase order supplier" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Input: \"destination\" field on the purchase order" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:75 -msgid "Analysis" -msgstr "Analyse der Plandaten" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:77 -msgid "" -"Inventory analysis can use products count or products value (= number of " -"products * product cost)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:80 -msgid "For each inventory location, multiple data points can be analysed:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:148 -msgid "Procurements & Procurement Rules" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:150 -msgid "" -"A procurement is a request for a specific quantity of products to a specific" -" location. They can be created manually or automatically triggered by:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:159 -msgid "New sale orders" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:157 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:162 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:168 -msgid "Effect" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:157 -msgid "" -"A procurement is created at the customer location for every product ordered " -"by the customer (you have to deliver the customer)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:160 -msgid "" -"Procurement Location: on the customer, field \"Customer Location\" " -"(property)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:164 -msgid "Minimum Stock Rules" -msgstr "Meldebestandsregeln" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:163 -msgid "A procurement is created at the rule's location." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:165 -msgid "Procurement location: on the rule, field \"Location\"" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:168 -msgid "Procurement rules" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:168 -msgid "A new procurement is created on the rule's source location" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:170 -msgid "" -"*Procurement rules* describe how procurements on specific locations should " -"be fulfilled e.g.:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:173 -msgid "where the product should come from (source location)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:174 -msgid "" -"whether the procurement is :abbr:`MTO (Made To Order)` or :abbr:`MTS (Made " -"To Stock)`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:179 -msgid "needs schema thing from FP" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:182 -msgid "Routes" -msgstr "Routen" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:184 -msgid "" -"Procurement rules are grouped in routes. Routes define paths the product " -"must follow. Routes may be applicable or not, depending on the products, " -"sales order lines, warehouse,..." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:188 -msgid "" -"To fulfill a procurement, the system will search for rules belonging to " -"routes that are defined in (by order of priority):" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:202 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses.rst:3 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses.rst:3 msgid "Warehouses" msgstr "Lager" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:194 -msgid "Warehouse Route Example: Pick → Pack → Ship" +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:3 +msgid "What is the difference between warehouses and locations?" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:196 -msgid "Picking List:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:197 -msgid "Pick Zone → Pack Zone" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:198 -msgid "Pack List:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:199 -msgid "Pack Zone → Gate A" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:201 -msgid "Delivery Order:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:201 -msgid "Gate A → Customer" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:203 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:5 msgid "" -"Routes that describe how you organize your warehouse should be defined on " -"the warehouse." +"In Odoo, a **Warehouse** is the actual building/place in which your items " +"are stocked. You can setup multiple warehouses and create moves between " +"warehouses." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:212 -msgid "A Product" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:205 -msgid "Product Route Example: Quality Control" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:207 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:217 -msgid "Reception:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:208 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:218 -msgid "Supplier → Input" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:209 -msgid "Confirmation:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:210 -msgid "Input → Quality Control" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:212 -msgid "Storage:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:212 -msgid "Quality Control → Stock" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:221 -msgid "Product Category" -msgstr "Produktkategorie" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:215 -msgid "Product Category Route Example: cross-dock" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:219 -msgid "Cross-Docks:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:220 -msgid "Input → Output" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:221 -msgid "Delivery:" -msgstr "Lieferung:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:222 -msgid "Output → Customer" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:227 -msgid "Sale Order Line" -msgstr "Auftragspositionen" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:224 -msgid "Sale Order Line Example: Drop-shipping" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:227 -msgid "Order:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:227 -msgid "Supplier → Customer" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:230 -msgid "Push Rules" -msgstr "Push Regeln" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:232 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:9 msgid "" -"Push rules trigger when products enter a specific location. They " -"automatically move the product to a new location. Whether a push rule can be" -" used depends on applicable routes." +"A **Location**, is a specific space within your warehouse. It can be " +"considered as a sublocation of your warehouse, as a shelf, a floor, an " +"aisle, etc. Therefore, a location is part of one warehouse only and it is " +"not possible to link one location to multiple warehouses. You can configure " +"as much locations as you need under one warehouse." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:240 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:88 -msgid "Quality Control" -msgstr "Qualitätskontrolle" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:239 -msgid "Product lands in Input" +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:15 +msgid "There are 3 types of locations:" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:240 -msgid "Push 1: Input → Quality Control" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:241 -msgid "Push 2: Quality Control → Stock" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:244 -msgid "Warehouse Transit" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:243 -msgid "Product lands in Transit" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:244 -msgid "Push: Transit → Warehouse 2" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:247 -msgid "Procurement Groups" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:249 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:17 msgid "" -"Routes and rules define inventory moves. For every rule, a document type is " -"provided:" +"The **Physical Locations** are internal locations that are part of the " +"warehouses for which you are the owner. They can be the loading and " +"unloading area of your warehouse, a shelf or a department, etc." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:252 -msgid "Picking" -msgstr "Liefervorgang" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:253 -msgid "Packing" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:254 -msgid "Delivery Order" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:255 -msgid "Purchase Order" -msgstr "Beschaffungsauftrag" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:256 -msgid "..." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:258 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:21 msgid "" -"Moves are grouped within the same document type if their procurement group " -"and locations are the same." +"The **Partner Locations** are spaces within a customer and/or vendor's " +"warehouse. They work the same way as Physical Locations with the only " +"difference being that you are not the owner of the warehouse." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:261 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:25 msgid "" -"A sale order creates a procurement group so that pickings and delivery " -"orders of the same order are grouped. But you can define specific groups on " -"reordering rules too. (e.g. to group purchases of specific products " -"together)" +"The **Virtual Locations** are places that do not exist, but in which " +"products can be placed when they are not physically in an inventory yet (or " +"anymore). They come in handy when you want to place lost products out of " +"your stock (in the **Inventory loss**), or when you want to take into " +"account products that are on their way to your warehouse (**Procurements**)." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:3 -msgid "Terminologies" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:31 msgid "" -"**Warehouse**: A warehouse in Odoo is a location where you store products. " -"It is either a physical or a virtual warehouse. It could be a store or a " -"repository." +"In Odoo, locations are structured hierarchically. You can structure your " +"locations as a tree, dependent on a parent-child relationship. This gives " +"you more detailed levels of analysis of your stock operations and the " +"organization of your warehouses." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:9 -msgid "" -"**Location**: Locations are used to structure storage zones within a " -"warehouse. In addition to internal locations (your warehouse), Odoo has " -"locations for suppliers, customers, inventory loss counter-parts, etc." +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:37 +msgid ":doc:`warehouse_creation`" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:14 -msgid "" -"**Lots**: Lots are a batch of products identified with a unique barcode or " -"serial number. All items of a lot are from the same product. (e.g. a set of " -"24 bottle) Usually, lots come from manufacturing order batches or " -"procurements." +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:38 +msgid ":doc:`location_creation`" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:19 -msgid "" -"**Serial Number**: A serial number is a unique identifier of a specific " -"product. Technically, serial numbers are similar to having a lot of 1 unique" -" item." +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:3 +msgid "Create a New Location" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:23 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:8 msgid "" -"**Unit of Measure**: Define how the quantity of products is expressed. " -"Meters, Pounds, Pack of 24, Kilograms,… Unit of measure of the same category" -" (ex: size) can be converted to each others (m, cm, mm) using a fixed ratio." +"In order to be able to create different locations, you will need to activate" +" *Multi-Locations* in the settings which can be done from the *Inventory " +"application > Configuration > Settings*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:28 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:15 msgid "" -"**Consumable**: A product for which you do not want to manage the inventory " -"level (no quantity on hand or forecasted) but that you can receive and " -"deliver. When this product is needed Odoo suppose that you always have " -"enough stock." +"In the *Inventory application*, you can now go to *Configuration > " +"Locations* and hit *Create* in order to create a new location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:33 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:21 msgid "" -"**Stockable**: A product for which you want to manage the inventory level." +"Type the name of the location in the *Location Name* field, and select the " +"*Parent Location* in the list. The parent location can be a physical, " +"partner or virtual location, and you can add as many sub-locations as needed" +" to a location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:36 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:29 msgid "" -"**Package:** A package contains several products (identified by their serial" -" number/lots or not). Example: a box containing knives and forks." +"In case you want the location to be suggested when creating a Return or when" +" Scrapping a product, you should check *Is a Scrap Location?* and *Is a " +"Return Location?*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:40 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:33 msgid "" -"**Procurement**: A procurement is a request for a specific quantity of " -"products to a specific location. Procurement are automatically triggered by " -"other documents: Sale orders, Minimum Stock Rules, and Procurement rules. " -"You can trigger the procurement manually. When procurements are triggered " -"automatically, you should always pay attention for the exceptions (e.g. a " -"product should be purchased from a vendor, but no supplier is defined)." +"If you have the *Barcode* application installed, you can specify the barcode" +" which will correspond to this location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:48 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:37 msgid "" -"**Routes**: Routes define paths the product must follow. Routes may be " -"applicable or not, depending on the products, sales order lines, warehouse,…" -" To fulfill a procurement, the system will search for rules belonging to " -"routes that are defined in the related product/sale order." +"A warehouse also corresponds to a location. As the locations are " +"hierarchical, Odoo will create the parent location of the warehouse, " +"containing all the sublocations in it." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:54 -msgid "" -"**Push Rules**: Push rules trigger when products enter a specific location. " -"They automatically move the product to a new location. Whether a push rule " -"can be used depends on applicable routes." +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:3 +msgid "Create a New Warehouse" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:58 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:8 msgid "" -"**Procurement Rules** or **Pull Rules**: Procurement rules describe how " -"procurements on specific locations should be fulfilled e.g.: where the " -"product should come from (source location), whether the procurement is MTO " -"or MTS,..." +"In order to create a new warehouse, you should activate the *Multi-" +"Warehouse* settings. Note that the *Multi-Locations* settings will be " +"automatically activated at the same time." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:63 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:12 msgid "" -"**Procurement Group**: Routes and rules define inventory moves. For every " -"rule, a document type is provided: Picking, Packing, Delivery Order, " -"Purchase Order,… Moves are grouped within the same document type if their " -"procurement group and locations are the same." +"In order to do so, go to the *Inventory app > Configuration > Settings*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:69 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:18 msgid "" -"**Stock Moves**: Stock moves represent the transit of goods and materials " -"between locations." +"You can then go to *Inventory > Configuration > Warehouses* and hit *Create*" +" to add a new warehouse." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:72 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:24 msgid "" -"**Quantity On Hand**: The quantity of a specific product that is currently " -"in a warehouse or location." +"You will be able to enter your warehouse name. You should also choose a " +"short name for your warehouse which is 5-characters long and is used on the " +"different warehouse documents." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:75 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:28 msgid "" -"**Forecasted Quantity**: The quantity of products you can sell for a " -"specific warehouse or location. It is defined as the Quantity on Hand - " -"Future Delivery Orders + Future incoming shipments + Future manufactured " -"units." +"In the Address field, you can select an existing company or create one on-" +"the-go. Therefore, the address of your warehouse will be the same as the one" +" of the company you selected. You can also leave this field empty and edit " +"it afterward." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:80 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:36 msgid "" -"**Reordering Rules**: It defines the conditions for Odoo to automatically " -"trigger a request for procurement (buying at a supplier or launching a " -"manufacturing order). It is triggered when the forecasted quantity meets the" -" minimum stock rule." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:85 -msgid "" -"**Cross-Dock**: Cross-docking is a practice in the logistics of unloading " -"materials from an incoming semi-trailer truck or railroad car and loading " -"these materials directly into outbound trucks, trailers, or rail cars, with " -"no storage in between. (does not go to the stock, directly from incoming to " -"packing zone)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:91 -msgid "" -"**Drop-Shipping**: move products from the vendor/manufacturer directly to " -"the customer (could be retailer or consumer) without going through the usual" -" distribution channels. Products are sent directly from the vendor to the " -"customer, without passing through your own warehouse." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:97 -msgid "" -"**Removal Strategies**: the strategy to use to select which product to pick " -"for a specific operation. Example: FIFO, LIFO, FEFO." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:100 -msgid "" -"**Putaway Strategies**: the strategy to use to decide in which location a " -"specific product should be set when arriving somewhere. (example: cables " -"goes in rack 3, storage A)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:104 -msgid "" -"**Scrap**: A product that is broken or outdated. Scrapping a product removes" -" it from the stock." +"After the creation of your new warehouse, you can go back to the *Dashboard*" +" and you will see the new operation types automatically created by Odoo due " +"to the creation of a new warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/overview/process.rst:3 msgid "Process Overview" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:3 -msgid "From procurement to delivery" +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:3 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:25 +msgid "Deliver Products from Stock" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:6 +msgid "Create Storable/Consumable Products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:5 msgid "" -"Inventory is the heart of your business. It can be really complicated, but " -"with Odoo, doing a receipt or a delivery has never been easier. We will show" -" you in this document how easy to do a full process, from the receipt to the" -" delivery." +"The first step to use the inventory application is to create products in " +"your database via the menu *Master Data > Products*. Click the Create button" +" and enter the name of your product." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:12 msgid "" -"Odoo inventory is fully integrated with other applications, such as " -"**Purchase**, **Sales** or **Inventory**. But is not limited to those " -"processes, it is also fully integrated with our **e-Commerce**, " -"**Manufacturing** and **Repairs** applications." +"In case you set the product as *storable*, you will track the stock for this" +" product and know how many units are in stock and what is the forecasted " +"number of units. If you want to include a product on receipts/deliveries but" +" don’t need to track its stock, you can set it as *consumable*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:19 -msgid "How to process a receipt ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:22 -msgid "Install Purchase application" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:24 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:27 msgid "" -"First, you will need to install the **Purchase Management** application. Go " -"to :menuselection:`Apps` and install it." +"Once you have existing products, you can decide to create a delivery to " +"deliver products to your customers. The process in order to do so is " +"described in the following print screens." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:31 -msgid "Make a purchase order" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:33 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:37 msgid "" -"Go to the **Purchases** applications. The first screen is the **Request for " -"Quotation** list. Click on the **Create** button." +"On the delivery order, you can specify to whom the products will be " +"delivered along with the different products and their respective quantities." +" When the delivery is complete you can hit *Validate* and the products will " +"go out of your stock." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:36 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:45 msgid "" -"Fill in the **Vendor** information and click on **Add an Item** to add some " -"products to your request for quotation." +"In case you have a delivery that is planned but shouldn’t be immediately " +"validated, you can create a *planned delivery* with a scheduled date in the " +"future. You can indicate the initial demand for each product, corresponding " +"to what has been ordered by your customer. Once the document is filled in, " +"you can hit “Mark as to do” in order to consider it in your product " +"forecasts." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:42 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:56 +msgid "Deliver Products from Stock from a Sale Order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:58 msgid "" -"Click on **Confirm order** when you are sure about the products, prices and " -"quantity." +"If you have the *Sales* application installed, delivery can be directly " +"created by *validating a quotation*. You will be able to find the " +"corresponding delivery directly on the *sale order*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:46 -msgid "Retrieve the Receipt" +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:3 +msgid "Set your Initial Stock" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:48 -msgid "You can retrieve the receipt order in 2 ways:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:51 -msgid "From the purchase order" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:53 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:12 msgid "" -"On the top right of your purchase order, you will see a button with the " -"related **Receipt**:" +"Set the product as *storable*, in order to track the stock for this product " +"and be able to include it in an inventory adjustment." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:59 -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:136 -msgid "Click on it to see the **Transfer order**." +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:19 +msgid "Inventory Adjustment for Multiple Products" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:62 -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:139 -msgid "From the Inventory Dashboard" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:64 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:21 msgid "" -"When opening the **Inventory** application, click on **# to receive** to see" -" the list of your deliveries to process." +"Once you have created all your *storable products*, you can create an " +"*inventory adjustment* to determine their current stock level in Odoo. You " +"therefore need to go to *Operations > Inventory Adjustments* and create a " +"new one." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:70 -msgid "In the list, click on the one related to the purchase order:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:76 -msgid "Process the Receipt" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:81 -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:162 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:29 msgid "" -"To process the stock transfer. Simply click on **Validate** to complete the " -"transfer. A message will appear asking if you want to process the whole " -"order, accept it by clicking on **Apply**." +"You have to enter a title for your *inventory adjustment* and you can then " +"decide if you want to proceed to the *inventory adjustment* of all products " +"or only some of them. For a first *inventory adjustment*, I suggest you to " +"keep the *Products* field empty. You can then *Start Inventory*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:86 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:38 msgid "" -"Procurements can be automated. Please read our document " -":doc:`../../management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto` for more " -"information." +"If you already have some products in stock, Odoo will add the lines with the" +" theoretical quantity currently in stock. You can also add new lines with " +"your other products." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:91 -msgid "How to process a delivery order ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:94 -msgid "Install Sales application" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:96 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:46 msgid "" -"First, you will need to install the **Sales Management** application. Go to " -":menuselection:`Apps` and install it." +"If your products are tracked by Serial/Lot numbers, you will have an " +"additional column allowing you to specify those for the different units " +"added to the inventory adjustment." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:103 -msgid "Place a sale order" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:105 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:50 msgid "" -"Go to the **Sales** applications. Click on the **Quotations** button of your" -" team." +"Odoo will highlight in red the lines for which there is a difference between" +" the theoretical quantity on hand, which is automatically computed by the " +"system, and the counted quantity you manually entered. Once all the " +"necessary products have been entered, you can hit *Validate Inventory* and " +"the quantities on hand of your different products will be updated." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:111 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:58 +msgid "Inventory Adjustment for one Product" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:60 msgid "" -"You will get the list of all your quotations. Click on the **Create** " -"button." +"On each storable product, you have access to the *Update Quantity* button." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:114 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:66 msgid "" -"Fill in the **Customer informations** and click on **Add an Item** to add " -"some products to your quotation." +"When clicking this button, you see the current stock you have for this " +"product. You can edit the existing lines or create new ones to add stock of " +"your product in different locations and/or add new serial/lot numbers." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:120 -msgid "Click on **Confirm sale** to place the order." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:123 -msgid "Retrieve the Delivery order" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:125 -msgid "You can retrieve the delivery order in 2 ways:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:128 -msgid "From the sale order" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:130 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:74 msgid "" -"On the top right of your sale order, you will see a button with the related " -"**Delivery**:" +"Once you come back to your product, you see that the quantity on hand as " +"been updated taking your modification into account." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:141 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:81 msgid "" -"When opening the **Inventory** application, click on **# to do** to see the " -"list of your receipts to process." +"If you work with product variants, the quantity on hand will show you the " +"total quantity in stock for the product template, taking the different " +"variants into account." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:147 -msgid "In the list, click on the one related to the sale order:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:153 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:85 msgid "" -"If the product is not in stock, the sale order will be listed as **Waiting**" -" on your dashboard." +"By default, the quantity on hand of the product form will show you the " +"number of products that are part of your warehouse view location, meaning " +"which are part of an internal type sub-location of this warehouse. It means " +"that if you have any product in a location that isn’t under the main " +"warehouse location, they won’t appear in the stock on hand stat button." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:157 -msgid "Process the delivery" +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:3 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:22 +msgid "Receive Products in Stock" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:167 -msgid "E-Commerce orders are processed the same way." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:170 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:24 msgid "" -"You can easily integrate your delivery orders with different delivery " -"methods. Please read the document " -":doc:`../../shipping/setup/delivery_method`." +"Once you have existing products, you can decide to create a receipt to enter" +" products from your supplier in stock. The process in order to do so is " +"described in the following print screens." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:175 -msgid "Advanced flows" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:177 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:34 msgid "" -"In this document, the flows that are explained are the most simple ones. " -"Odoo also suit for companies having advanced warehouse management." +"On the receipt document, you can select the quantity of the different " +"products you receive and the supplier from who you received them. When the " +"receipt is complete, you can hit *Validate* and the products will enter your" +" stock." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:180 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:42 msgid "" -"By default, only **receipts** and **deliveries** are configured but you can " -"activate the use of multi-locations and multi-warehouses to do **internal " -"transfers**." +"In case you have a receipt that is planned but shouldn’t be immediately " +"validated, you can create a *planned receipt* with a scheduled date in the " +"future. You can indicate the initial demand for each product, corresponding " +"to what has been ordered to your supplier. Once the document is filled in, " +"you can hit “Mark as to do” in order to consider it in your product " +"forecasts." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:184 -msgid "**Routes**: you can automate flows with push and pull rules" +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:56 +msgid "Receive Products in Stock from Purchase Orders" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:186 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:58 msgid "" -"**Multi-step** receipts and deliveries can be easily configured for each " -"warehouse" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:189 -msgid "" -"Much more: **Barcode scanning**, **serial numbers**, **lots**, **cross-" -"docking**, **dropshipping**, integration with a **third-party** shipper, " -"**putaway** and **removal** strategies.... All of it is possible with Odoo." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start.rst:3 -msgid "Getting Started" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:3 -msgid "How to setup Odoo inventory?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:5 -msgid "" -"The Odoo Inventory application has an implementation guide that you should " -"follow to configure it. It's a step-by-step manual with links to the " -"different screens you need." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:9 -msgid "" -"Once you have installed the **Inventory** application, click on the top-" -"right progress bar to get access to the implementation guide." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:15 -msgid "The implementation guide helps you through the following steps:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:17 -msgid "Set up your warehouse" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:19 -msgid "Import your vendors" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:21 -msgid "Import your products" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:23 -msgid "Set up the initial inventory" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:25 -msgid "Configure your sales and purchase flows" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:27 -msgid "Set up replenishment mechanisms" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:29 -msgid "" -"Configure advanced features like package, traceability, routes and inventory" -" valuation." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:37 -msgid "" -"If you want to set up operations with barcode scanner in your warehouse, you" -" should install the **Barcode** application that adds features on top of the" -" inventory application. The barcode application will guide you to configure " -"and use your scanner optimally." +"If you have the *Purchase* application installed, receipts can be directly " +"created by validating a *request for quotation*. You will be able to find " +"the corresponding receipt directly on the *purchase order*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes.rst:3 @@ -5015,115 +4516,87 @@ msgid "Concepts" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:3 -msgid "How to organize a cross-dock in your warehouse?" +msgid "Organize a cross-dock in a warehouse" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:5 msgid "" -"Cross dock area is temporarily area where we are not storing any product " -"instead just managing place according to delivery for further customer. This" -" will save lot of time for inter warehouse transfer and storing process. We " -"are managing our products with docking area where product directly place " -"from supplier location and transfer this to gate pass for customer delivery." +"Cross-docking is the process of sending products that are received directly " +"to the customers, without making them enter the stock. The trucks are simply" +" unloaded in a *Cross-Dock* area in order to reorganize products and load " +"another truck." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:17 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:11 msgid "" -"For more information on how to organise your warehouse, read `What is cross " -"docking and is it for me? `_" +"For more information on how to organize your warehouse, read our blog: `What" +" is cross-docking and is it for me? `__" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:24 -msgid "Warehouse and routes" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:26 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:15 msgid "" -"In the **Inventory** module, open :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings" -" --> Location & Warehouse`, then in **Routes**, select **Advanced routing of" -" products using rules**, then click on **Apply**." +"In the *Inventory* app, open *Configuration > Settings* and activate the " +"*Multi-Step Routes*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:33 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:21 +msgid "Doing so will also enable the *Storage Locations* feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:23 msgid "" -"Open :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouse Management --> Warehouses`," -" then open the warehouse you want to cross-dock from and click on **Edit**." +"Now, both *Incoming* and *Outgoing* shipments should be configured to work " +"with 2 steps. To adapt the configuration, go to *Inventory > Configuration >" +" Warehouses* and edit your warehouse." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:28 +msgid "" +"This modification will lead to the creation of a *Cross-Docking* route that " +"can be found in *Inventory > Configuration > Routes*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:34 +msgid "Configure products with Cross-Dock Route" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:36 -msgid "In the **Warehouse Configuration** tab, select:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:38 msgid "" -"**Incoming Shipments**: Unload in input location then go to stock (2 steps)" +"Create the product that uses the *Cross-Dock Route* and then, in the " +"inventory tab, select the routes *Buy* and *Cross-Dock*. Now, in the " +"purchase tab, specify the vendor to who you buy the product and set a price " +"for it." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:41 -msgid "**Outgoing Shipments**: Ship directly from stock (Ship only)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:43 -msgid "then click on **Save**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:48 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:44 msgid "" -"This steps has generated a cross-docking route that you can see in " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configurations --> Routes --> Routes`." +"Once done, create a sale order for the product and confirm it. Odoo will " +"automatically create two transfers which will be linked to the sale order. " +"The first one is the transfer from the *Input Location* to the *Output " +"Location*, corresponding to the move of the product in the *Cross-Dock* " +"area. The second one is the delivery order from the *Output Location* to " +"your *Customer Location. Both are in state *Waiting Another Operation* " +"because we still need to order the product to our supplier." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:52 -msgid "Cross Docking Route" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:54 msgid "" -"We will use the route **Buy** for first part of the flow and create a route " -"for the remaining part:" +"Now, go to the *Purchase* app. There, you will find the purchase order that " +"has been automatically triggered by the system. Validate it and receive the " +"products in the *Input Location*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:60 msgid "" -"Each of the procurement rule will now be configured. Cross Dock location is " -"created as an internal physical location." +"When the products have been received from the supplier, you can go back to " +"your initial sale order and validate the internal transfer from *Input* to " +"*Output*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:67 -msgid ":menuselection:`Input --> Cross Dock`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:73 -msgid ":menuselection:`Cross Dock --> Output`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:79 -msgid ":menuselection:`Output --> Customer`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:82 -msgid "Product with cross dock" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:84 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:68 msgid "" -"We have created the Vegetable Fennel product and assigned the routes created" -" above as well as the **Buy** route." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:87 -msgid "" -"We have also specified a supplier and a minimum order rule which is needed " -"for replenishment of a stockable product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:95 -msgid ":doc:`use_routes`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:96 -msgid ":doc:`../../management/incoming/two_steps`" +"The delivery order is now ready to be processed and can be validated too." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:3 @@ -5152,7 +4625,6 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:26 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:9 msgid "Creating a new warehouse" msgstr "" @@ -5489,6 +4961,66 @@ msgstr "" msgid ":doc:`procurement_rule`" msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:3 +msgid "Taking stock from different warehouses" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When you plan to deliver a customer, you don’t know in advance if the " +"products will come from Warehouse A or Warehouse B. You may, in some cases, " +"need to take stock from different warehouses. With *Odoo*, you can configure" +" this by using the concept of virtual warehouses. Let us show you how to set" +" those virtual warehouses." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:8 +msgid "Set up virtual warehouses" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:10 +msgid "" +"Let’s say you have two warehouses: Warehouse A and Warehouse B. Create a new" +" warehouse, that will be a virtual one. It will allow you to take the stock " +"from A or B. To do so, go to your inventory app settings and enable the " +"multi-warehouses feature. Then, go to the warehouses menu and click on " +"create." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:16 +msgid "" +"The *Storage Location* feature will be automatically enabled. Good news, " +"because you will need it later in the process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:18 +msgid "" +"Now, you have to make sure that the main stock locations of warehouse A and " +"warehouse B are children locations of the main stock location of warehouse A" +" + B. Go to the locations menu, and edit the main location of your two " +"warehouses. Then, change their parent location to main location of warehouse" +" A+B." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:24 +msgid "Sell a product from the virtual warehouse" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:26 +msgid "" +"Let’s say you have two products, one stored in warehouse A and one stored in" +" warehouse B. Now, you can create a new quotation for one of each product. " +"Go to other information and choose Warehouse A+B in the shipping " +"information." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:31 +msgid "" +"Once you have done it, you can convert it to a sales order. Then, a delivery" +" order will be automatically generated, with a product reserved in warehouse" +" A and one in warehouse B." +msgstr "" + #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:3 msgid "How to use routes?" msgstr "" @@ -5717,94 +5249,68 @@ msgid "Putaway & Removal Strategies" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:3 -msgid "What is a putaway strategy?" +msgid "What is a Putaway Rule?" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:5 msgid "" "A good warehouse implementation takes care that products automatically move " -"to their appropriate destination location. Putaway is the process of taking " -"products off the receiving shipment and putting them into the most " -"appropriate location." +"to their appropriate destination location. To make that process easier, Odoo" +" uses *Putaway rules*. But what is a putaway rule? Putaway is the process of" +" taking products off the receiving shipments and directly putting them into " +"the most appropriate location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:7 msgid "" -"If for instance a warehouse contains volatile substances, it is important to" -" make sure that certain products are not stored close to each other because " -"of a potential chemical reaction." +"If, for example, a warehouse contains volatile substances, it is important " +"to make sure that certain products are not stored close to each other " +"because of a potential chemical reaction. That’s where putaway rules " +"intervene, to avoid storing products wrongly." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:17 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:12 msgid "" -"A putaway strategy follows the same principle as removal strategies but " -"affects the destination location. Putaway strategies are defined at the " -"location level (unlike removal strategies which are defined at the product " -"level)." +"In the *Inventory* app, go to *Configuration > Settings* and activate the " +"*Multi-Step Routes*. By doing so, the *Storage Locations* will be " +"automatically activated." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:18 +msgid "Setting up a Putaway Rule" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:20 msgid "" -"Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings` and check " -"option **Manage several location per warehouse & Advance routing of products" -" using rules**, then click on **Apply**." +"In some cases, like for a retail shop storing vegetables and fruits, we have" +" to store products in different locations to maintain product quality." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:33 -msgid "Setting up a strategy" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:35 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:22 msgid "" -"Let's take as an example a retail shop where we store vegetables and fruits." +"Let’s suppose there are one warehouse location *WH/Stock* and two sub-" +"locations *WH/Stock/Vegatable* and *WH/Stock/Fruits*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:24 msgid "" -"We have to store this type of product in different locations to maintain " -"product quality." +"To manage those locations, we will create putaway rules. To do so, open the " +"*Inventory* app and go to *Configuration > Putaway Rules*. Then, click on " +"create and configure your first rule indicating the main location the " +"product will enter before being redirected to the right location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:41 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:27 msgid "" -"Suppose there is one warehouse location **WH/Stock** and there is sub " -"location **WH/Stock/Vegetables** & **WH/Stock/Fruits**." +"The putaway rules can be defined either per product or per product category." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:44 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:32 msgid "" -"You can create a putaway strategy from :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Configuration --> Locations`. Open any location where you want to set a " -"putaway strategy, click on **Edit** and locate the option **Put Away " -"Strategy**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:52 -msgid "" -"Open the roll-down menu and click on **Create and Edit**. This will open a " -"form view of put away strategy on which you have to set a name for the " -"strategy, and set the method and fixed location for each category." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:59 -msgid "" -"When you have entered all the necessary information, click on **Save**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:61 -msgid "" -"Now, when you purchase products with those categories, they will " -"automatically be transferred to the correct location." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:64 -msgid "" -"To check current inventory, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory " -"Control --> Current Inventory`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:67 -msgid "There you can see current inventory by location." +"Now, if I purchase apples and carrots to my supplier, they will be grouped " +"in the same receipt but redirected to the right location automatically, " +"thanks to putaway rules. This information is available from *Inventory " +"Report*, under the reporting menu." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:3 @@ -6107,838 +5613,9 @@ msgstr "" msgid ":doc:`../../management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon`" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/settings.rst:3 -msgid "Settings" -msgstr "Einstellungen" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products.rst:3 -msgid "Products" -msgstr "Produkte" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:3 -msgid "How to select the right replenishment strategy" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:5 -msgid "" -"Minimum Stock rules and Make to Order have similar consequences but " -"different rules. They should be used depending on your manufacturing and " -"delivery strategies." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:15 -msgid "" -"Minimum Stock rules are used to ensure that you always have the minimum " -"amount of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or " -"answer to your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its" -" minimum the system will automatically generate a procurement order with the" -" quantity needed to reach the maximum stock level." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:24 -msgid "" -"The Make to Order function will trigger a Purchase Order of the amount of " -"the Sales Order related to the product. The system will **not** check the " -"current stock. This means that a draft purchase order will be generated " -"regardless of the quantity on hand of the product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:35 -msgid "" -"The Minimum Stock Rules configuration is available through your Inventory " -"module. In the Inventory Control menu select \"Reordering Rule\" in the drop" -" down menu. There, click on \"Create\" to set minimum and maximum stock " -"values for a given product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:44 -msgid "" -"Show tooltips for \"minimum quantity\", \"maximum quantity\" and \"quantity " -"multiple\" fields" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:47 -msgid "" -"Then, click on your product to access the related product form and, on the " -"\"Inventory submenu\", do not forget to select a supplier." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:54 -msgid "" -"Don't forget to select the right product type. A consumable can not be " -"stocked and will thus not be accounted for in the stock valuation." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:60 -msgid "" -"The Make to Order configuration is available on your product form through " -"your :menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory control --> Products` (or any " -"other module where products are available)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:64 -msgid "On the product form, under Inventory, click on \"Make To Order\"." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:3 -msgid "How to use different units of measure?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:8 -msgid "" -"In some cases, handling products in different unit of measures is necessary." -" For example, if you buy products in a country where the metric system is of" -" application and sell them in a country where the imperial system is used, " -"you will need to convert the units." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:13 -msgid "" -"You can set up Odoo to work with different units of measure for one product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:19 -msgid "" -"In the **Inventory** application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`. In the **Products** section, select **Some products may be " -"sold/purchased in different units of measure (advanced)**, then click on " -"**Apply**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:27 -msgid "Setting up units on your products" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:29 -msgid "" -"In :menuselection:`Master Data --> Products`, open the product which you " -"would like to change the purchase/sale unit of measure, and click on " -"**Edit**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:32 -msgid "" -"In the **Unit of Measure** section, select the unit in which the product " -"will be sold and in which internal transfers will be done." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:35 -msgid "" -"In the **Purchase Unit of Measure** section, select the unit in which you " -"purchase the product. When you're done, click on **Save**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:42 -msgid "Click on the edit button |edit| to create new unit of measures." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:46 -msgid "Transfer from one unit to another" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:48 -msgid "" -"When doing inter-unit transfers, the rounding is automatically done by Odoo." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:51 -msgid "" -"The unit of measure can be changed throughout the whole process. The only " -"condition is that the unit of measure is part of the same category." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:54 -msgid "In this example, we are in the egg business :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:56 -msgid "We buy eggs by trays (30 eggs)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:58 -msgid "We check all eggs individually when receiving it (quality control)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:60 -msgid "We sell eggs by the dozen to the customers" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:66 -msgid "" -"The **Sale price** is expressed in the **Product unit of measure**. The " -"**Cost price** is expressed in the **Purchase Unit of Measure**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:70 -msgid "" -"All internal transfers are expressed in the **Product Unit of Measure**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:74 -msgid "Procurement" -msgstr "Beschaffung" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:76 -msgid "" -"When doing your procurement request, you can still change the unit of " -"measure." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:82 -msgid "The unit of measure can also be changed in the purchase order :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:90 -msgid "The quality control is done by unit." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:92 -msgid "" -"The basic unit of measure of our product is **Unit**. Therefore the quality " -"check is done by unit." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:99 -msgid "" -"The unit of measure can only be changed when the transfer status is " -"**Draft**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:103 -#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:74 -msgid "Delivery process" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:105 -msgid "" -"The eggs are sold by the dozen. You can choose the unit of measure on the " -"sale order document. When doing it, the price is automatically computed from" -" the unit to the dozen." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:112 -msgid "" -"In the delivery order, the initial demand is done in the sales order unit of" -" measure :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:118 -msgid "" -"But the transfer is done in the product unit of measure. Everything is " -"converted automatically :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:125 -msgid "" -"Create a link when the document is available - When should you use " -"packages, units of measure or kits?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:3 -msgid "When should you use packages, units of measure or kits?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:6 -msgid "Unit of measures" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Units of measures are an indication about the unit used to handle a product." -" Products can be expressed in multiple units of measure at once." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:11 -msgid "" -"Activate this option if you are working with several ones in your warehouse." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:14 -msgid "" -"The purchase unit of measure might be different that the one you use in your" -" warehouse." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:17 -msgid "" -"The selling unit of measure is set on the sale order and can be different." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:24 -msgid "" -"The conversion between the different units of measures is done " -"automatically. The only condition is that all the units have to be in the " -"same category (Unit, Weight, Volume, Length,...)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:29 -msgid "Packages" -msgstr "Verpackungen" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:31 -msgid "" -"The package is the physical container in which you put one or several " -"product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:38 -msgid "Packaging" -msgstr "Verpackung" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:40 -msgid "Packaging is the physical container that protects your product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:42 -msgid "" -"If you are selling computers, the packaging contains the computer with the " -"notice and the power plug." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:45 -msgid "In Odoo, packagings are just used for indicative purpose." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:51 -msgid "" -"You can define on the **Packages** which **Packaging** it uses. But it is " -"only for indicative purpose." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:55 -msgid "When to use packages, packagings or unit of measures ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:57 -msgid "" -"For example, you are sellings eggs. In your warehouse, you manage the eggs " -"individually. Lots of eggs are scrapped and you do it egg by egg. The **unit" -" of measure** is ``Unit(s)``." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:61 -msgid "" -"If you are selling eggs by the dozen, the selling **unit of measure** is the" -" ``Dozen``. You will set it on your sale order." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:64 -msgid "" -"The ``cardboard trays`` that contains the dozen of eggs is the " -"**packaging**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:66 -msgid "" -"When you are selling several trays, you might wrap all the trays into a " -"``box`` or in a ``plastic`` wrapping. It is the **package**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:70 -msgid ":doc:`../../overview/start/setup`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:71 -msgid ":doc:`uom`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:3 -msgid "Using product variants" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:5 -msgid "" -"Product variants are used to manage products having different variations, " -"like size, color, etc. It allows managing the product at the template level " -"(for all variations) and at the variant level (specific attributes)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:10 -msgid "" -"As an example, a company selling t-shirts may have the following product:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:13 -msgid "B&C T-shirt" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:15 -msgid "Sizes: S, M, L, XL, XXL" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:16 -msgid "Colors: Blue, Red, White, Black" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:18 -msgid "" -"In this example, **B&C T-Shirt** is called the product template and **B&C " -"T-Shirt, S, Blue** is a variant. Sizes and color are **attributes**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:22 -msgid "" -"The above example has a total of 20 different products (5 sizes x 4 colors)." -" Each one of these products has its own inventory, sales, etc." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:26 -msgid "Impact of variants" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:28 -msgid "" -"**Barcode**: the code and barcode is associated to a variant, not the " -"template. Every variant may have its own barcode / SKU." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:31 -msgid "" -"**Price**: every product variant has its own public price that is computed " -"based on the template price ($20) with an optional extra for every variant " -"(+$3 for color red). However, you can define pricelist rules that apply on " -"the template or the variant." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:36 -msgid "" -"**Inventory**: the inventory is managed by product variant. You don't own " -"t-shirts, you only own \"T-shirts, S, Red\", or \"T-Shirts, M, Blue\". For " -"information purpose, on the product template form, you get the inventory " -"that is the sum of every variant. (but the actual inventory is computed by " -"variant)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:42 -msgid "" -"**Picture**: the picture is related to the variant, every variation of a " -"product may have its own primary picture." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:45 -msgid "" -"**Other fields**: most of the other fields belongs to the product template. " -"If you update them, it updates automatically all the variants. (example: " -"Income Account, Taxes)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:50 -msgid "Should you use variants?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:53 -msgid "When should you use variants?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:55 -msgid "Using variants has the following impacts:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:57 -msgid "" -"**eCommerce**: in your online shop, the customer will only see product " -"templates in the catalog page. Once the visitor click on such a product, he " -"will have options to choose amongst the variants (colors, sizes, …)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:62 -msgid "" -"**Manufacturing**: Using variants allows to define only one bill of material" -" for a product template and slight variations for some of the variants. " -"Example: instead of creating a Bill of Material for \"T-shirt, Red, S\", you" -" create a bill of material for \"T-shirt\" and add some lines that are " -"specific to the dimension S, and other lines specific to the color Red." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:69 -msgid "" -"**Pricing**: The default price of a product is computed using the price of " -"the product template and add the optional extra price on each dimension of " -"the variant. This way, variant prices are easier to maintain since you don't" -" have to set the price for every variant. However, it's possible to create " -"pricelist rules to fix price per variants too." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:77 -msgid "When should you avoid using variants?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:79 -msgid "" -"Using variants may add a level of complexity on the way you use Odoo. You " -"should consider using variants only if you need it to reduce the complexity " -"of managing lots of products that are similars." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:83 -msgid "" -"As an example, importing your initial product catalog is more complex if you" -" use variants. You can't just import a list of products, you must import " -"product templates and all their related variations." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:87 -msgid "" -"In addition to that, you should also carefully select the dimensions that " -"you manage as separate product templates and those as variants. As an " -"example, a company having these products:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:91 -msgid "Quality: T-Shirts, Polos, Shirts" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:93 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:105 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:110 -msgid "Color: Red, Blue" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:95 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:106 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:111 -msgid "Size: S, M, L, XL" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:97 -msgid "" -"In such a use case, you could create 1 template with three dimensions of " -"variants (Layout, T-Shirts, Polos). But, it's recommended to create two " -"different product templates as T-shirts may highly differ from polos or " -"shirts and customer expect to see these as two different products in the " -"e-Commerce:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:103 -msgid "Product Template: T-shirt" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:108 -msgid "Product Template: Polos" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:117 -msgid "Activate the variant feature" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:119 -msgid "" -"Before you can use product variants, you must first activate the product " -"variants in the settings. To do so, you must go to the Sales app. In the " -"menu :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`, locate the **Products " -"Variants** line, and tick the option **Products can have several " -"attributes**, then click on **Apply**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:129 -msgid "Creating products with variants" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:131 -msgid "" -"Once you have activated the variant option, you can add variants to your " -"products. To do so, go to the Sales module, :menuselection:`Sales --> " -"Products`. It is also accessible from the Purchase and inventory modules." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:135 -msgid "Now, click on the product you wish to add variants to." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:137 -msgid "" -"In the product page, a new tab called Variants has appeared. The number in " -"purple written on top is the number of variants this product currently has. " -"To add new variants, click on the tile. In the new window, click on " -"**Create**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:142 -msgid "" -"In **Attributes**, click on the rolldown menu and select the type of " -"variance you wish to add. If the variant does not yet exist, you can create " -"it on the fly by clicking on Create and edit…" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:149 -msgid "" -"In the Attributes window, the **Value** field is the description of the " -"attribute such as Green, Plastic or 32GB. The **Attribute** field is the " -"type of variant such as Color, Material or Memory." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:156 -msgid "" -"You can add a cost for the variant on the fly by adding it in the " -"**Attribute Price Extra** field, or choose to modify it later. Click on " -"**Save**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:160 -msgid "" -"You can also add a different barcode and internal reference to the variant." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:163 -msgid "" -"When you have entered all the specifications of the variant, click on " -"**Save**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:167 -msgid "Managing Product Variants" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:172 -msgid "" -"The examples below are all based on this product template that has two " -"variant attributes :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:175 -msgid "T-Shirt B&C" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:177 -msgid "Color: Red, Blue, White" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:179 -msgid "Size: S, M, L, XL, XXL" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:182 -msgid "Managing combination possibilities" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:184 -msgid "" -"By default, with the above product template, you get 15 different products " -"(3 colors, 5 sizes). If the XXL size only exists for red and blue t-shirts, " -"you can deactivate the white product variant." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:188 -msgid "" -"To do this, click on the **Variants** button, select the XXL, White T-shirt." -" From the product form, uncheck the **Active** box of the T-shirt White, " -"XXL." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:197 -msgid "" -"That deactivating a product is different than having an inventory of 0." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:200 -msgid "Setting a price per variant" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:202 -msgid "" -"You can add a cost over the main price for some of the variants of a " -"product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:205 -msgid "" -"Once you have activated the variant option, you can add variants to your " -"products. To do so, go to the Sales module, open :menuselection:`Sales --> " -"Products` and click on the product you want to modify. Click on the " -"**Variant Prices** button to access the list of variant values." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:213 -msgid "" -"Click on the variant name you wish to add a value to, to make the 3 fields " -"editable. In the **Attribute Price Extra** field, add the cost of the " -"variant that will be added to the original price." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:220 -msgid "When you have entered all the extra values, click on **Save**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:226 -msgid "Accounting Memento: Details of Journal Entries" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:227 -msgid "Process Overview: From Billing to Payment Orders" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:3 -msgid "What is the difference between warehouses and locations?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:5 -msgid "" -"In Odoo, a **Warehouse** is the actual building/place in which your items " -"are stocked. You can setup multiple warehouses and create moves between " -"warehouses." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:9 -msgid "" -"A **Location**, is a specific space within your warehouse. It can be " -"considered as a sublocation of your warehouse, as a shelf, a floor, an " -"aisle, etc. Therefore, a location is part of one warehouse only and it is " -"not possible to link one location to multiple warehouses. You can configure " -"as much locations as you need under one warehouse." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:15 -msgid "There are 3 types of locations:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:17 -msgid "" -"The **Physical Locations** are internal locations that are part of the " -"warehouses for which you are the owner. They can be the loading and " -"unloading area of your warehouse, a shelf or a department, etc." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:21 -msgid "" -"The **Partner Locations** are spaces within a customer and/or vendor's " -"warehouse. They work the same way as Physical Locations with the only " -"difference being that you are not the owner of the warehouse." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:25 -msgid "" -"The **Virtual Locations** are places that do not exist, but in which " -"products can be placed when they are not physically in an inventory yet (or " -"anymore). They come in handy when you want to place lost products out of " -"your stock (in the **Inventory loss**), or when you want to take into " -"account products that are on their way to your warehouse (**Procurements**)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:31 -msgid "" -"In Odoo, locations are structured hierarchically. You can structure your " -"locations as a tree, dependent on a parent-child relationship. This gives " -"you more detailed levels of analysis of your stock operations and the " -"organization of your warehouses." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:37 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:44 -msgid ":doc:`warehouse_creation`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:38 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:48 -msgid ":doc:`location_creation`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:3 -msgid "How to create a new location?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:9 -msgid "Creating a new location" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:11 -msgid "" -"In order to be able to create new locations, you must allow the system to " -"manage multiple locations. In the **Inventory** module, open the menu " -":menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`. In the **Location & Warehouse**" -" section, tick the **Manage several locations per warehouse** box, then " -"click on **Apply**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:20 -msgid "" -"In the **Inventory** module, open :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Warehouse Management --> Locations` In the Locations window, click on " -"**Create**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:24 -msgid "" -"Type the name of the location in the **Location Name** field, and select the" -" **Parent Location** in the list. The parent location can be a physical, " -"partner or virtual location, and you can add as many sub-locations as needed" -" to a location." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:29 -msgid "" -"You can also fill in the **Additional Information** fields and add a note to" -" describe your location." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:35 -msgid "When you are finished, click on **Save**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:38 -msgid "" -"A warehouse also corresponds to a location. As the locations are " -"hierarchical, Odoo will create the parent location of the warehouse, " -"containing all the sublocations in it." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:43 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:47 -msgid ":doc:`difference_warehouse_location`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:3 -msgid "How to create a new warehouse?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:11 -msgid "" -"In order to be able to create a new warehouse, you must allow the system to " -"manage multiple locations. In the **Inventory** module, open the menu " -":menuselection:`Settings --> Configuration`. In the **Location & Warehouse**" -" section, tick the **Manage several locations per warehouse** box, then " -"click on **apply**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:20 -msgid "" -"Open the menu :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouse Management --> " -"Warehouses`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:22 -msgid "" -"In the warehouses screen, click on **Create**. A new screen appears, with 3 " -"fields :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:25 -msgid "In **Warehouse Name**, insert the full name of the warehouse." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:27 -msgid "" -"In the **Short Name** field, insert a 5-characters code for your warehouse. " -"Keep in mind that this code is the one that will appear in the lists, so " -"make sure you choose a name that is easy to understand and easy to enter." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:32 -msgid "" -"In the **Address** field, you can select an existing company or create one " -"on-the-go. Therefore, the address of your warehouse will be the same as the " -"one of the company you selected. You can also leave this field empty and " -"edit it afterwards." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:40 -msgid "Click on **Save** to finish configuring your new warehouse." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:43 -msgid "" -"When you create a warehouse, the system will create the necessary picking " -"types and main child locations for this main location in the background." -msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/shipping.rst:3 +msgid "Shipping" +msgstr "Versand" #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation.rst:3 msgid "Shipping Operations" @@ -7146,6 +5823,11 @@ msgid "" "you want to integrate :" msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:27 +#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:26 +msgid "Then click on **Apply**." +msgstr "" + #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:30 #: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:34 #: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:33 @@ -7214,11 +5896,6 @@ msgid "" "data**." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:68 -#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:90 -msgid "Product configuration" -msgstr "" - #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:70 #: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:92 msgid "" @@ -7434,6 +6111,10 @@ msgid "" ":doc:`third_party_shipper`" msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:74 +msgid "Delivery process" +msgstr "" + #: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:82 msgid "" "You can now choose the **Delivery Method** on your sale order. If you want " diff --git a/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po index ec433f47c..9ee21602f 100644 --- a/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po +++ b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po @@ -5,15 +5,17 @@ # # Translators: # e2f , 2019 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Chris Egal , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: e2f , 2019\n" +"Last-Translator: Chris Egal , 2019\n" "Language-Team: German (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/de/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -25,66 +27,70 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Internet of Things (IoT)" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:3 +#: ../../iot/config.rst:3 +msgid "Configuration" +msgstr "Konfiguration" + +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:3 msgid "Connect an IoT Box to your database" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:5 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:5 msgid "Install the Internet of Things (IoT) App on your Odoo Database." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:10 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:10 msgid "Go in the IoT App and click on Connect on the IoT Boxes page." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:15 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:15 msgid "Follow the steps to connect your IoT Box." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:21 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:21 msgid "Ethernet Connection" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:23 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:23 msgid "" "Connect to the IoT Box all the devices that have to be connected with cables" " (ethernet, usb devices, etc.)." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:26 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:26 msgid "Power on the IoT Box." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:28 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:28 msgid "Then click on the Scan button." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:34 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:34 msgid "WiFi Connection" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:36 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:36 msgid "Power on the IoT Box" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:38 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:38 msgid "Copy the token" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:43 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:43 msgid "" "Connect to the IoT Box WiFi Network (make sure there is no ethernet cable " "plugged in your computer)." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:49 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:49 msgid "" "You will be redirected to the IoT Box Homepage (if it doesn't work, connect " "to the IP address of the box). Give a name to your IoT Box (not required) " "and paste the token, then click on next." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:57 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:57 msgid "" "If you are on Runbot, do not forget to add the -all or -base in the token " "(e.g. this token **http://375228-saas-11-5-iot-" @@ -92,43 +98,43 @@ msgid "" "**http://375228-saas-11-5-iot-f3f920-all.runbot16.odoo.com\\|4957098401**)." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:63 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:63 msgid "" "Choose the WiFi network you want to connect with (enter the password if " "there is one) and click on Submit. Wait a few seconds before being " "redirected to your database." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:70 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:70 msgid "You should now see the IoT Box." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:76 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:76 msgid "IoT Box Schema" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/flash_sdcard.rst:3 +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:3 msgid "Flashing your SD Card" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/flash_sdcard.rst:5 +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:5 msgid "" "In some case, you may need to reflash your IoT Box’s SD Card to benefit from" " our latest updates." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/flash_sdcard.rst:9 +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:9 msgid "Updating your SD Card with Etcher" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/flash_sdcard.rst:11 +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:11 msgid "" "Go to Balena’s website and download `Etcher `__, " "It’s a free and open-source utility used for burning image files. Install " "and launch it." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/flash_sdcard.rst:15 +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:15 msgid "" "Now, download the latest image `here " "`__, and extract it from the " @@ -136,137 +142,137 @@ msgid "" "flash (where your SD Card is) and click on *Flash*!." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/flash_sdcard.rst:19 +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:19 msgid "" "Now, your image will be automatically updated. You just have to wait 5 " "minutes for it to finish." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/iot_notfound.rst:3 +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:3 msgid "IoT Box not found" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/iot_notfound.rst:5 +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:5 msgid "" "When using your IoT Box, a common issue you might encounter is that your box" " is not found on your database. Fortunately, there are a few easy steps you " "can follow to find your IoT box." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/iot_notfound.rst:10 +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:10 msgid "HTTPS Issues" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/iot_notfound.rst:12 +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:12 msgid "Your IoT Box is not found? You probably have https issues!" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/iot_notfound.rst:14 +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:14 msgid "" "To check it, go to your database and verify if your database address starts " "with an https (like https://www.odoo.com). If this is the case, then you may" " have problems with your IoT Box image. It should be version 18.12 or later." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/iot_notfound.rst:19 +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:19 msgid "" "If your IoT Box image is from an earlier version, then you will have to " "reflash the SD card of your IoT Box to update the image (the latest image " "can be found `here `__)." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/iot_notfound.rst:23 +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:23 msgid "" "You can find the documentation about SD card flashing here (`here " "`__)." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:3 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:3 msgid "Use the IoT Box for the PoS" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:9 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:9 msgid "Prerequisites" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:11 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:11 msgid "Before starting, make sure you have the following:" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:13 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:13 msgid "An IoT Box" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:15 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:15 msgid "A 2A Power adapter with pi 3 b+ 2.5 A" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:17 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:17 msgid "A computer or tablet with an up-to-date web browser" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:19 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:19 msgid "" "A running SaaS or Odoo instance with the Point of Sale and IoT apps " "installed" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:22 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:22 msgid "A local network setup with DHCP (this is the default setting)" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:24 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:24 msgid "" "An Epson USB TM-T20 Printer or another ESC/POS compatible printer " "(officially supported printers are listed at the `POS Hardware page " "`__)" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:28 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:28 msgid "A Honeywell Eclipse USB Barcode Scanner or another compatible scanner" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:30 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:30 msgid "An Epson compatible cash drawer" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:32 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:32 msgid "An RJ45 Ethernet Cable (optional, WiFi is built in)" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:35 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:35 msgid "Set Up" msgstr "Einrichten" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:37 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:37 msgid "" "To connect hardware to the PoS, the first step is to connect an IoT Box to " "your database. For this, follow this `documentation " "`__." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:44 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:44 msgid "Then, you have to connect the peripheral devices to your IoT Box." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:46 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:46 msgid "" "Officially supported hardware is listed on `the POS Hardware page " "`__, but other hardware" " might work as well." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:50 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:50 msgid "**Printer**: Connect an ESC/POS printer to a USB port and power it on." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:53 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:53 msgid "" "**Cash drawer**: The cash drawer should be connected to the printer with an " "RJ25 cable." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:56 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:56 msgid "" "**Barcode scanner**: Connect your barcode scanner. In order for your barcode" " scanner to be compatible it must behave as a keyboard and must be " @@ -275,18 +281,18 @@ msgid "" "your barcode scanner." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:62 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:62 msgid "**Scale**: Connect your scale and power it on." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:64 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:64 msgid "" "**Ethernet**: If you do not wish to use Wi-Fi, plug in the Ethernet cable. " "Make sure this will connect the IoT Box to the same network as your POS " "device." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:68 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:68 msgid "" "**Wi-Fi**: The current version of the IoT Box has Wi-Fi built in. Make sure " "not to plug in an Ethernet cable when booting, because all Wi-Fi " @@ -294,26 +300,26 @@ msgid "" "on boot." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:73 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:73 msgid "" "Once it's done, you can connect the IoT Box to your PoS. For this, go in " "Point of Sale > Configuration > PoS, tick the box \"IoT Box\" and select the" " IoT Box you want to connect with. Save the changes." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:77 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:77 msgid "Set up is done, you can launch a new PoS Session." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:80 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:80 msgid "Troubleshoot" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:83 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:83 msgid "The PoS cannot connect to the IoT Box" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:85 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:85 msgid "" "The easiest way to make sure the IoT Box is properly set-up is to turn it on" " with the printer plugged in as it will print a receipt indicating any error" @@ -321,90 +327,90 @@ msgid "" "receipt is printed, check the following steps:" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:91 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:91 msgid "" "Make sure the IoT Box is powered on, indicated by a brightly lit red status " "LED." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:94 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:94 msgid "" "Make sure the IoT Box is ready, this is indicated by a brightly lit green " "status LED just next to the red power status LED. The IoT Box should be " "ready ~2 minutes after it is started." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:98 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:98 msgid "" "Make sure the IoT Box is connected to the same network as your POS device. " "Both the device and the IoT Box should be visible in the list of connected " "devices on your network router." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:102 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:102 msgid "" "If you specified the IoT Box's IP address in the configuration, make sure it" " corresponds to the ip address printed on the IoT Box's status receipt." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:106 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:106 msgid "Make sure that the POS is not loaded over HTTPS." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:108 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:108 msgid "" "A bug in Firefox's HTTP implementation might prevent the autodiscovery from " "working reliably. You could also manually set up the IoT Box's IP address in" " the POS configuration." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:113 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:113 msgid "The Barcode Scanner is not working" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:115 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:115 msgid "" "The barcode scanner must be configured in US QWERTY and emit an Enter after " "each barcode. This is the default configuration of most barcode readers. " "Refer to the barcode reader documentation for more information." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:120 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:120 msgid "" "The IoT Box needs a 2A power supply to work with some barcode scanners. If " "you are not using the provided power supply, make sure the one you use has " "enough power." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:124 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:124 msgid "" "Some barcode scanners will need more than 2A and will not work, or will work" " unreliably, even with the provided power supply. In those case you can plug" " the barcode scanner in a self-powered USB hub." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:129 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:129 msgid "" "Some poorly built barcode scanners do not advertise themselves as barcode " "scanners but as a usb keyboard instead, and will not be recognized by the " "IoT Box." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:134 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:134 msgid "The Barcode Scanner is not working reliably" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:136 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:136 msgid "" "Make sure that no more than one device with 'Scan via Proxy'/'Barcode " "Scanner' enabled are connected to the IoT Box at the same time." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:140 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:140 msgid "Printing the receipt takes too much time" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:142 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:142 msgid "" "A small delay before the first print is expected, as the IoT Box will do " "some preprocessing to speed up the next printings. If you suffer delays " @@ -412,33 +418,404 @@ msgid "" "and the IoT Box." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:148 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:148 msgid "Some characters are not correctly printed on the receipt" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:150 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:150 msgid "" "The IoT Box does not support all languages and characters. It currently " "supports Latin and Cyrillic based scripts, with basic Japanese support." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:155 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:155 msgid "The printer is offline" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:157 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:157 msgid "" "Make sure the printer is connected, powered, has enough paper and has its " "lid closed, and is not reporting an error. If the error persists, please " "contact support." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:162 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:162 msgid "The cashdrawer does not open" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:164 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:164 msgid "" "The cashdrawer should be connected to the printer and should be activated in" " the POS configuration." msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices.rst:3 +msgid "Devices" +msgstr "Geräte" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Camera" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When using your *IoT Box* in Odoo, you could need to use a camera. As it can" +" be done in a few steps, this device is really easy to configure. Then, you " +"can use it in your manufacturing process and link it to a control point. " +"Doing so will allow you to take pictures when you reach the chosen quality " +"control point." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:12 ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:13 +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:11 +msgid "Connection" +msgstr "Verbindung" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:14 +msgid "" +"To connect the camera to the *IoT Box*, simply combine the two by cable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:18 +msgid "In some cases, a serial to USB adapter could be needed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:20 +msgid "" +"If your camera is a `*supported one* `__, there is no need to set up anything as it will be detected as " +"soon as it is connected." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:27 +msgid "" +"In some cases, you could need to restart the box and download your camera’s " +"drivers from the box. To do so, go to your *IoT Box Home Page* and click on " +"*drivers list*. Then, click on load drivers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:35 +msgid "Link a Camera to a Quality Control Point" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:38 ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:42 +msgid "With the Manufacturing app" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:40 +msgid "" +"In your *Quality app*, you can setup the device on a *Quality Control " +"Point*. Go to the *Control Points* menu, under *Quality Control* and open " +"the control point you want to link with the camera." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:44 +msgid "" +"Now, you can edit the control point and select the device from the dropdown " +"list. Now, hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:50 +msgid "" +"Then, your camera can be used with the picked *Control Point*. During the " +"manufacturing process, reaching the *Quality Control Point* you chose before" +" will allow you to take a picture." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Footswitch" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When working, it is always better to have your two hands available. Using " +"Odoo’s *IoT Box* and a footswitch will allow it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:8 +msgid "" +"In fact, you will be able to go from one screen to another by using your " +"foot and the footswitch. Really convenient, it can be configured in a few " +"steps." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Connecting the footswitch to the *IoT Box* is easy, you just have to combine" +" the two by cable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:19 +msgid "In some cases, a serial to USB adapter may be needed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:21 +msgid "" +"If your footswitch is a `supported one `__, there is no need to set up anything since it will be " +"automatically detected when connected." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:28 +msgid "" +"If it is not a supported one, you may need to restart the box and download " +"your footswitch’s drivers from the box. To do so, go to the *IoT Box Home " +"Page* and click on *drivers list*. Then, click on load drivers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:37 +msgid "Link a Footswitch to a Workcenter" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:39 +msgid "" +"To link the footswitch to an action, it needs to be configured on a " +"workcenter. Go to the workcenter you want to use the footswitch in and add " +"the device in the *IoT Triggers* tab. Then, you can link it to an action and" +" also add a key to trigger it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:47 +msgid "" +"Note that the one that is first in the list will be chosen. So, the order " +"matters! In the picture above, using the footswitch will, for example, " +"automatically skip the current part of the process you work on." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:52 +msgid "" +"When you are on the work order screen, a status button indicates if you are " +"correctly connected to the footswitch." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Measurement Tool" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:5 +msgid "" +"With Odoo’s *IoT Box*, it is possible to connect measurement tools to your " +"database. Find the list of supported devices here: `Supported devices " +"`__,." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:10 +msgid "Connect in USB" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:12 +msgid "" +"To add a device connected by USB, just plug the USB cable in the *IoT Box*, " +"restart the Box and the device should appear in your Odoo database." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:19 +msgid "" +"If the device is not found, make sure the drivers have well been loaded on " +"your IoT Box. For this, connect to the *IoT Box Homepage* and click on load " +"drivers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:27 +msgid "Connect in Bluetooth" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:29 +msgid "" +"Activate the Bluetooth on your device (see your device manual for further " +"explanation) and the IoT Box will automatically try to connect to the " +"device." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:33 +msgid "Here is an example of what it should look like:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:39 +msgid "Link a measurement tool to a quality control point" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:44 +msgid "" +"In your *Quality app*, you can setup a device on your *Quality Control " +"Points*. To do so, go to the *Control Points* menu, under *Quality Control* " +"and open the control point to which you want to assign a measurement tool." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:49 +msgid "" +"Now, you can edit the control point and choose the device from the dropdown " +"list. Then, hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:55 +msgid "" +"Now, your measurement tool is linked to the chosen *Control Point*. The " +"value, which needs to be changed manually, will be automatically updated " +"while the tool is being used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Printer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When using your *IoT Box* in Odoo, you could need to use a printer. Doing so" +" is easy and convenient as it can be done in a few steps. Then, you can use " +"it to print receipts, orders or even reports in different Odoo apps." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:13 +msgid "" +"To connect the printer to the *IoT Box*, you just have to combine the two by" +" cable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:17 +msgid "Sometimes, a serial to USB adapter may be needed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:19 +msgid "" +"If your printer is a `supported one `__, there is no need to set up anything because it will be " +"automatically detected as soon as it is connected." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:24 +msgid "The printer can take up to two minutes to appear in your devices list." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:29 +msgid "" +"In some cases, you may need to restart the box and download your printer’s " +"drivers from the box. To do so, go to the *IoT Box Home Page* and click on " +"*drivers list*. Then, click on load drivers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:37 +msgid "Link the Printer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:40 +msgid "To Work Orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:42 +msgid "" +"You can link *Work Orders* to printers via a *Quality Control Point* to " +"print labels for manufactured products." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:45 +msgid "" +"To do so, you need to create a *Quality Control Point* from the *Quality* " +"app. Then, you can select the correct manufacturing operation and the work " +"order operation. In type, choose *Print Label* and hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Now, each time you reach the quality control point for the chosen product, a" +" *Print Label* button will appear." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:60 +msgid "To Reports" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:62 +msgid "" +"You can also link a type of report to a certain printer. In the *IoT* app, " +"go to the *Devices* menu and select the printer you want to set up." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:69 +msgid "Now, go to the *Printer Reports* tab." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:74 +msgid "" +"Hit edit and then, click on *Add a line*. In the window that shows up, check" +" all the types of reports that should be linked to this printer. Click on " +"select and save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:81 +msgid "" +"Now, each time you click on *Print* in the control panel, instead of " +"downloading a PDF, it will send it to the selected printer and automatically" +" print it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:86 +msgid "Print Receipts from the PoS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:88 +msgid "" +"You can link a printer to your *Point of Sale* app so you can print receipts" +" directly from your *PoS*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:91 +msgid "" +"Doing so is really easy. Go to your *Point of Sale* app and open your *PoS* " +"settings, under *Configuration*. There, click on *Edit* and check the *IoT " +"Box* feature. Then, enable the *Receipt Printer*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:98 +msgid "" +"Now, on your *PoS* view, you will be able to print different kinds of " +"tickets: **receipts**, **sale details** and **bills**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:101 +msgid "" +"For the receipt, it will be printed once the order is validated. The process" +" is automated when you enable the feature in your *PoS*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:104 +msgid "" +"Sales details can be printed by clicking on the printer icon on the navbar " +"at the top of the *PoS*. It will print the details of the sales of the " +"current day." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:111 +msgid "" +"As for the bill, it is only available in restaurant mode. In your restaurant" +" settings, activate bills and a *Bill* button will appear in the left panel." +" Click on it and it will print the bill." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:119 +msgid "Print Orders in the kitchen" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:121 +msgid "In restaurant mode, you can send order tickets to the kitchen." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:123 +msgid "" +"To do so, go to the *PoS* app and open your *PoS* settings. Then, tick " +"*Order Printer*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:129 +msgid "" +"Now, go to the *Printers* menu. Hit create and select the *IoT Box* with all" +" the categories of product that should be printed in the *Printer Product " +"Categories* field." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:136 +msgid "" +"In the *PoS*, when you add or remove a product from one of the selected " +"categories, the button *Order* will be green. If you click on it, a ticket " +"will be printed." +msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po index ed3c3252a..50f35a447 100644 --- a/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po +++ b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Leon Grill , 2019\n" "Language-Team: German (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/de/)\n" @@ -763,60 +763,47 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:17 msgid "" -"You can now define subcontractors contacts. When you purchase or receive " -"products from a contact of type subcontractor, the correct stock moves are " -"created to represent the subcontracting of the production." +"You can now define subcontracted *Bill of Materials*. Therefore, you need to" +" go to *Manufacturing > Master Data > Bill of Materials* and hit *Create*. " +"In this *BoM*, list the components which will be used by the subcontractor " +"to manufacture the subcontracted finished product. Specify that the *BoM* " +"type is *Subcontracting*." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:25 -msgid "" -"You can set the subcontractor as a vendor in case you plan to buy him the " -"subcontracted products via purchase orders." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:28 -msgid "" -"The next step is to create a *Bill of Material* of type *subcontracted*. In " -"this *BoM*, list the components you need to supply to the subcontractor." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:35 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:22 msgid "You can also define subcontractors on the BoM." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:37 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:24 msgid "If no subcontractor is set, the BoM can be used by any subcontractor" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:39 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:26 msgid "If some are set, the BoM can only be used for those subcontractors" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:45 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:32 msgid "Receive or buy a subcontracted product" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:47 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:34 msgid "You have two options to trigger the subcontracting of a product:" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:50 -msgid "**Option A**: You can buy the subcontracted product from your" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:36 +msgid "" +"**Option A**: You can buy the subcontracted product from your subcontractor" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:50 -msgid "subcontractor" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:52 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:38 msgid "**Option B**: You can directly receive the subcontracted product" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:54 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:40 msgid "Let’s start with option A (option B is just a simpler version of it)." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:56 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:42 msgid "" "Create a new purchase order. The vendor must be a subcontractor. The unit " "price should be the cost you are paying to the subcontractor for the " @@ -824,34 +811,34 @@ msgid "" "subcontracted product)." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:64 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:50 msgid "" "The validation of the purchase order automatically creates the receipt. " "Whenever you receive the product, you can validate the receipt. The " "following stock moves are created:" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:68 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:54 msgid "For the components" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:70 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:56 msgid "From Subcontracting To Production" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:72 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:58 msgid "For the subcontracted product" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:74 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:60 msgid "From Production to Subcontracting" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:76 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:62 msgid "From Subcontracting to Stock" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:78 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:64 msgid "" "The *Subcontracting Location* represents the place where the products are at" " your subcontractor’s warehouse. It is configured as an internal location, " @@ -859,35 +846,35 @@ msgid "" "stock." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:83 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:69 msgid "" "For option B, you can simply create the receipt manually with a partner of " "type subcontractor defined on it." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:87 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:73 msgid "Resupply the subcontractor with the components" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:89 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:75 msgid "" "There are 3 ways to manage the resupply of your subcontractor with the " "components:" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:94 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:80 msgid "**Manually**: You create a delivery order in which you set the" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:93 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:79 msgid "subcontractor as a partner and you choose the components to deliver." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:103 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:89 msgid "**With reordering rules**: You can define a *reordering rule*" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:100 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:86 msgid "" "on the *Subcontracting location* to ensure that they are always enough " "components sent to your subcontractors. When the reordering rule is " @@ -895,11 +882,11 @@ msgid "" "created." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:111 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:97 msgid "**On order**: You can also deliver the components to your" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:109 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:95 msgid "" "subcontractors each time you order a subcontracted product. For this, you " "need to tick the route *Resupply Subcontractor on Order* on the wanted " @@ -1058,73 +1045,64 @@ msgid "" "colors depending on the situation:" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:90 -msgid "**Green**: quantity of products which should be replenished to" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:89 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:88 msgid "" -"reach the expected safety stock considering the demand forecast and the " -"indirect demand forecast." +"**Green**: quantity of products which should be replenished to reach the " +"expected safety stock considering the demand forecast and the indirect " +"demand forecast." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:93 -msgid "**Grey**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:90 +msgid "" +"**Grey**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity " +"still matches current data." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:93 -msgid "quantity still matches current data." +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:92 +msgid "" +"**Red**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity " +"was too high considering current data." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:94 +msgid "" +"**Orange**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity" +" was too low considering current data." msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:96 -msgid "**Red**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:96 -msgid "quantity was too high considering current data." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:99 -msgid "**Orange**: replenishment order has already been generated, and" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:99 -msgid "its quantity was too low considering current data." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:101 msgid "" "The *Forecasted stock* line can also contain red cells, which means the " "stock will be negative during the period in question." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:105 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:100 msgid "What if I have underestimated the demand?" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:107 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:102 msgid "" "You can still increase the demand forecast. It will impact the quantity to " "replenish. The cell will become orange, and you’ll be able to launch a new " "replenishment." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:112 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:107 msgid "What if I have overestimated the demand?" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:114 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:109 msgid "" "You can decrease the demand forecast. The cell will become red to inform you" " that you’ve ordered more than planned. If you’re still able to do it, you " "can cancel some RFQ or MO manually." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:119 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:114 msgid "What if I wrongly added a product to the MPS?" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:121 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:116 msgid "" "You can easily remove a product from the MPS by clicking the small bin on " "the right of its name." diff --git a/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po index 6df32c4e6..7685c8cc2 100644 --- a/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po +++ b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Martin Trigaux, 2019\n" "Language-Team: German (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/de/)\n" @@ -48,6 +48,9 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:9 #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:10 #: ../../point_of_sale/overview/start.rst:22 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:12 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:12 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:13 #: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/setup.rst:9 #: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/split.rst:10 msgid "Configuration" @@ -884,7 +887,275 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../point_of_sale/overview/start.rst:133 msgid "" "To connect the PoS to hardware with an Odoo IoT Box, please see the section " -":doc:`../../../iot/connect` and :doc:`../../../iot/pos`" +":doc:`../../../iot/config/connect` and :doc:`../../../iot/config/pos`" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment.rst:3 +msgid "Payment Terminals" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:3 +msgid "Connect an Ingenico Payment Terminal to your PoS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Connecting a payment terminal allows you to offer a fluid payment flow to " +"your customers and ease the work of your cashiers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Please note that Ingenico is currently only available for customers in the " +"Benelux." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:15 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:15 +msgid "Connect a Payment Terminal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:17 +msgid "" +"Connecting an Ingenico Payment Terminal to Odoo is a feature that requires " +"an IoT Box. For more information on how to connect an IoT Box to your " +"database, please refer to `this documentation " +"`__." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:22 +msgid "" +"Once the IoT Box is up and running, you’ll need to link your payment " +"terminal to your PoS. Open the Point of Sale app and go to *Configuration > " +"Point of Sale*. Select a PoS, tick the IoT Box Device option and select your" +" payment terminal." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:31 +msgid "Configure the Lane/5000 for Ingenico BENELUX" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:33 +msgid "" +"Click on the F button of the terminal, then go in the *PoS Menu* > settings " +"menu and enter the settings password." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:36 +msgid "" +"Now, click on connexion change and TCP/IP. Type the IP of your *IoT Box* " +"(you can find it on the form view of your IoT Box). Then, enter 9000 as " +"port. The terminal will restart. Once it is done, go on your *IoT Box* form " +"in Odoo and verify that the terminal has been found." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:45 +msgid "Configure the payment method" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:47 +msgid "" +"First, go in the general settings of the POS app, and activate the Ingenico " +"setting." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Go back in *Point of Sale > Configuration > Point of Sale*, go in the " +"payments section and access your payment methods. Create a new payment " +"method for Ingenico, select the payment terminal option Ingenico, and select" +" your payment terminal device." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:62 +msgid "Pay with a payment terminal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:64 +msgid "" +"In your *PoS interface*, when processing a payment, select a *Payment " +"Method* using a payment terminal. Check that the amount in the tendered " +"column is the one that has to be sent to the payment terminal and click on " +"*Send*. When the payment is successful, the status will change to *Payment " +"Successful*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:73 +msgid "" +"If you want to cancel the payment request, click on cancel. You can still " +"retry to send the payment request." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:76 +msgid "" +"If there is any issue with the payment terminal, you can still force the " +"payment using the *Force Done*. This will allow you to validate the order in" +" Odoo even if the connexion between the terminal and Odoo has issues." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:82 +msgid "" +"This option will only be available if you received an error message telling " +"you the connexion failed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:85 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:103 +msgid "" +"Once your payment is processed, on the payment record, you’ll find the type " +"of card that has been used and the transaction ID." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:3 +msgid "Connect SIX/Worldline to your PoS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Connecting a SIX/Worldline payment terminal allows you to offer a fluid " +"payment flow to your customers and ease the work of your cashiers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:9 +msgid "Please note SIX/Worldine is currently only available for UE customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:17 +msgid "" +"Connecting a SIX/Worldline Payment Terminal to Odoo is a feature that " +"requires an IoT Box. For more information on how to connect an IoT Box to " +"your database, please refer to `this documentation " +"`__." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:22 +msgid "" +"Once the *IoT Box* is up and running, you’ll need to link it to your PoS. " +"Open the Point of Sale app and go to *Configuration > Point of Sale*. Select" +" a PoS, tick the IoT Box Device option and select your payment terminal." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:30 +msgid "" +"Then go to your *IoT Box homepage* (accessible from the IoT Box form view in" +" Odoo) and enter the ID of your Six payment terminal." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:36 +msgid "" +"You should now see that the terminal is connected to your IoT Box (it takes " +"+/- 1 min)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:43 +msgid "" +"The terminal should only be connected to the network with the Ethernet. Do " +"not connect it to the IoT Box with a USB Cable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:47 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:16 +msgid "Configure the Payment Method" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:49 +msgid "" +"First, go in the general settings of the POS app, and activate the SIX " +"setting." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:55 +msgid "" +"Back in *Point of Sale > Configuration > Point of Sale*, go in the payments " +"section and access your payment methods. Create a new payment method for " +"SIX, select the payment terminal option SIX, and select your payment " +"terminal device." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:64 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:40 +msgid "Pay with a Payment Terminal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:66 +msgid "" +"In your PoS interface, at the moment of the payment, select a payment method" +" using a payment terminal. Verify that the amount in the tendered column is " +"the one that has to be sent to the payment terminal and click on *Send*. If " +"you want to cancel the payment request, click on cancel." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:74 +msgid "" +"When the payment is done, the status will change to *Payment Successful*. " +"You can always reverse the last transaction by clicking on *Reverse*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:81 +msgid "" +"If there is any issue with the payment terminal, you can still force the " +"payment using the *Force Done*. This will allow you to validate the order in" +" Odoo even if the connexion between the terminal and Odoo encounters issues." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:87 +msgid "Close your Session" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:89 +msgid "" +"At the end of the day, before closing your session, you need to send the " +"balance of the payments to SIX. To do that, click on this button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:95 +msgid "" +"Once the balance has been sent, the SIX shift is closed, meaning you cannot " +"do additional operations with the SIX payment terminal (except if you reopen" +" a shift by clicking on the user name and selecting a cashier)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Vantiv Payment Terminal to your PoS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Connecting a Vantiv payment terminal allows you to offer a fluid payment " +"flow to your customers and ease the work of your cashiers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:9 +msgid "" +"Please note MercuryPay only operates with US and Canadian banks, making this" +" procedure only suitable for North American businesses." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:18 +msgid "" +"First, go in the general settings of the POS app, and activate the Vantiv " +"setting." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:24 +msgid "" +"Back in *Point of Sale > Configuration > Point of Sale*, go in the payments " +"section and access your payment methods. Create a new payment method for " +"Vantiv, select the payment terminal option Vantiv, and create new Vantiv " +"credentials." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:32 +msgid "" +"To create new Vantiv credentials, fill in your merchant ID and password, " +"then save. Make sure the credentials you just created are selected, then " +"save the payment method." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:42 +msgid "" +"In your PoS interface, at the moment of the payment, select your Vantiv " +"payment method and… that’s all." msgstr "" #: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant.rst:3 diff --git a/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po index 895fca7e6..dc3a55fc1 100644 --- a/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po +++ b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:47+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Martin Trigaux, 2019\n" "Language-Team: German (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/de/)\n" @@ -1644,7 +1644,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../purchase/replenishment/flows/setup_stock_rule.rst:33 -msgid "See also: :doc:`../../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers`" +msgid "See also: :doc:`../../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers`" msgstr "" #: ../../purchase/replenishment/flows/setup_stock_rule.rst:35 diff --git a/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1327c1222 --- /dev/null +++ b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po @@ -0,0 +1,415 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2015-TODAY, Odoo S.A. +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +# Translators: +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Leon Grill , 2019 +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-11-20 09:24+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Leon Grill , 2019\n" +"Language-Team: German (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/de/)\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Language: de\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n" + +#: ../../quality.rst:5 +msgid "Quality" +msgstr "Qualität" + +#: ../../quality/alert.rst:3 +msgid "Alert" +msgstr "Warnung" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:3 +msgid "Generate a Quality Alert from a Manufacturing Order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Speaking of manufacturing orders, you have two different situations to " +"consider in Odoo. Those two will result in two different processes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:8 +msgid "You work with a simple manufacturing flow;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:10 +msgid "You work with a complex manufacturing flow that includes routings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:13 +msgid "Simple manufacturing flow" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:15 +msgid "" +"If you work with simple manufacturing orders, the *Quality Alerts* will be " +"launched from the manufacturing order itself. When manufacturing a product " +"for which you need to process quality controls, a button *Quality Alert* " +"will appear on the top of your manufacturing order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:23 +msgid "" +"By clicking on the button, you can specify the quality problem that arose " +"during the process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:29 +msgid "" +"If one of the quality checks failed, the button will be highlighted on the " +"document. If not, the button won’t be highlighted." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:36 ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:50 +msgid "Manufacturing Flow with Routings" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:38 +msgid "" +"If you work with routings defined on your manufacturing orders, the quality " +"alerts will be launched directly from the work orders on which the quality " +"checks took place." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:48 +msgid "" +"Then, a button *Quality Alert* will be available from the work order view. " +"When you click on the button, you can specify the quality problem that " +"appeared during the process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:3 +msgid "Generate a Quality Alert from a Transfer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:6 +msgid "Use the Quality Alert" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Every time you perform some *Quality Checks* on a transfer, a *Quality " +"Alert* button appears. You can always use it. The button is automatically " +"highlighted once you have a failed quality check for the transfer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:16 +msgid "" +"If you click on that *Quality Alert* button, you can specify what was the " +"problem with the product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:22 +msgid "" +"The *Quality Alert* that is created from the transfer can be found via the " +"button appearing on the top right corner of the transfer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:28 +msgid "" +"You can also access all your *Quality Alerts* via the menu, accessible under" +" *Control*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks.rst:3 +msgid "Checks" +msgstr "Schecks" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:3 +msgid "Perform Quality Checks on Manufacturing Orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:5 +msgid "" +"There are two different situations to consider and that will differ in Odoo " +"processes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:8 +msgid "You work with simple manufacturing flows;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:10 +msgid "" +"You work with complex manufacturing flows that are represented by the use of" +" routings in Odoo." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:13 +msgid "Simple Manufacturing Flow" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:16 +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:53 +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:6 +msgid "Create the Quality Control Point" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:18 +msgid "" +"To create a quality control point, open the quality app and go to *Control >" +" Control Points*. There, hit create. Make sure to select *Manufacturing* as " +"operation and choose the type of quality check you want to perform." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:27 +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:69 +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:17 +msgid "Process the Quality Check" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:29 +msgid "" +"Once your *Quality Control Point* has been created, you can create a " +"manufacturing order for your product. Now, and before marking the " +"manufacturing as done, you can register the *Quality Checks*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:39 +msgid "" +"Once you have performed your quality checks, you can find them via the " +"*Quality Checks* button available on the manufacturing order form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:46 +msgid "" +"If you want to access all your quality checks, you can do this by opening " +"the quality checks menu, under quality control." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:55 +msgid "" +"If you want to create a *Quality Control Point*, open the *Quality* app and " +"go to *Control > Control Points*. Then, click on create. Make sure to select" +" *Manufacturing* as operation and select the work order operation on which " +"the quality check should be performed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:64 +msgid "" +"Choosing the work order operation is necessary if you want the quality " +"checks to be performed in the work orders. After that, you can choose the " +"type of quality check." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:71 +msgid "" +"Once your *Quality Control Point* has been configured, create a " +"manufacturing order for your product. You have to plan it if you want to " +"generate the necessary work orders." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:78 +msgid "" +"Now, process the work order and your quality check will appear. In this " +"example, the quality check requests to enter the serial number of the Table " +"Top component." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:3 +msgid "Perform Quality Checks on Transfers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:8 +msgid "" +"To create a *Quality Control Point*, open the *Quality* application. Then, " +"go to *Quality Control > Control Points > Create*. Now, you can define the " +"quality control point you want to apply to a specific product. Don’t forget " +"to select a transfer operation type." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:19 +msgid "" +"Let’s say that we will receive a laptop. First, create a planned receipt for" +" the product. Then, on the receipt, you will see a *Quality Checks* button " +"that appears to proceed to the quality check you configured before." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:27 +msgid "" +"By clicking on it, the instruction set on the quality control point will be " +"displayed and will require the check value." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:33 +msgid "" +"Once the quality check is done, you can find it linked to the corresponding " +"transfer and access it by clicking on the button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:39 +msgid "" +"But, if the quality check failed, the stat button will appear in red " +"(instead of green) and Odoo will suggest you to create a *Quality Alert* by " +"highlighting the corresponding button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:46 +msgid "" +"The quality checks can also be found in the *Quality* application by opening" +" the *Quality Checks* menu, under *Quality Control*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control.rst:3 +msgid "Control" +msgstr "Kontrolle" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:3 +msgid "Define Quality Control Points" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:6 +msgid "Quality Control Points" +msgstr "Qualitätsprüfpunkte" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:8 +msgid "" +"If it is the first *Quality Control Point* that you create, know that you " +"need to open the *Quality* app. Then, go to *Quality Control > Control " +"Points*. Once there, you have to define the product on which the quality " +"control will take place, as well as the operation at which it should take " +"place." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:14 +msgid "" +"The *Quality Control Points* can take place during transfers or during the " +"manufacturing process of the products. If you work with routings on your " +"*Bill of Materials*, you have to precise at which step of the manufacturing " +"process the quality control point should be applied." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:19 +msgid "" +"The control type defines at which frequency the quality checks should take " +"place:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:22 +msgid "" +"All Operations: all the operations will generate quality checks to perform;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:24 +msgid "" +"Randomly: the quality checks will only be performed on x% of the operation. " +"You must define the percentage yourself, on the control point;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:26 +msgid "" +"Periodically: the quality checks will be performed periodically. The " +"periodicity is based on the period you define (once a day, once a week)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:32 +msgid "Quality Control Point Types" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:34 +msgid "" +"Now that the rest is configured, you need to define the type of quality " +"check." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:38 +msgid "" +"Some of the types are only available with the manufacturing application." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:41 +msgid "Text" +msgstr "Text" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:43 +msgid "" +"This control point type allows you to give instructions to your workers " +"during the transfer, or the manufacturing process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:56 +msgid "Take a Picture" +msgstr "Bild aufnehmen" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:58 +msgid "" +"This control point type asks you to take a picture of the product in a " +"transfer, or when manufacturing it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:71 +msgid "Pass-Fail" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:73 +msgid "" +"This type of control point requires that you specify if the products pass or" +" fail a specific text. It can be applied for both transfers or manufacturing" +" orders." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:80 +msgid "" +"For this kind of control point type, you have the possibility to define a " +"failure message that will give instructions to follow in case of quality " +"check failure." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:94 +msgid "Take a Measure" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:96 +msgid "" +"This control point type requires you to enter the product’s measurements " +"during a transfer, or during the manufacturing process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:102 +msgid "" +"For this kind of control point type, you also have the possibility to define" +" a failure message that will give instructions to the worker." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:115 +msgid "Register Consumed Materials" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:117 +msgid "" +"This control point type requires you register the component serial/lot " +"numbers during the manufacturing process. It is only available if you work " +"with routings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:128 +msgid "Register By-Products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:130 +msgid "" +"With this control point type, you must register the serial/lot number of the" +" by-products that are manufactured. It is also only available with routings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:141 +msgid "Print Label" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:143 +msgid "" +"This control point type allows you to print labels to add to the product " +"during the manufacturing process." +msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po index 9137b5ff3..b857169b7 100644 --- a/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po +++ b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po @@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:47+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Martin Trigaux, 2019\n" "Language-Team: German (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/de/)\n" @@ -1018,6 +1018,332 @@ msgid "" "Attributes / Attribute / ID)." msgstr "" +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:3 +msgid "Using product variants" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Product variants are used to manage products having different variations, " +"like size, color, etc. It allows managing the product at the template level " +"(for all variations) and at the variant level (specific attributes)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:10 +msgid "" +"As an example, a company selling t-shirts may have the following product:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:13 +msgid "B&C T-shirt" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:15 +msgid "Sizes: S, M, L, XL, XXL" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:16 +msgid "Colors: Blue, Red, White, Black" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:18 +msgid "" +"In this example, **B&C T-Shirt** is called the product template and **B&C " +"T-Shirt, S, Blue** is a variant. Sizes and color are **attributes**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:22 +msgid "" +"The above example has a total of 20 different products (5 sizes x 4 colors)." +" Each one of these products has its own inventory, sales, etc." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:26 +msgid "Impact of variants" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:28 +msgid "" +"**Barcode**: the code and barcode is associated to a variant, not the " +"template. Every variant may have its own barcode / SKU." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:31 +msgid "" +"**Price**: every product variant has its own public price that is computed " +"based on the template price ($20) with an optional extra for every variant " +"(+$3 for color red). However, you can define pricelist rules that apply on " +"the template or the variant." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:36 +msgid "" +"**Inventory**: the inventory is managed by product variant. You don't own " +"t-shirts, you only own \"T-shirts, S, Red\", or \"T-Shirts, M, Blue\". For " +"information purpose, on the product template form, you get the inventory " +"that is the sum of every variant. (but the actual inventory is computed by " +"variant)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:42 +msgid "" +"**Picture**: the picture is related to the variant, every variation of a " +"product may have its own primary picture." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:45 +msgid "" +"**Other fields**: most of the other fields belongs to the product template. " +"If you update them, it updates automatically all the variants. (example: " +"Income Account, Taxes)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:50 +msgid "Should you use variants?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:53 +msgid "When should you use variants?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:55 +msgid "Using variants has the following impacts:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:57 +msgid "" +"**eCommerce**: in your online shop, the customer will only see product " +"templates in the catalog page. Once the visitor click on such a product, he " +"will have options to choose amongst the variants (colors, sizes, …)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:62 +msgid "" +"**Manufacturing**: Using variants allows to define only one bill of material" +" for a product template and slight variations for some of the variants. " +"Example: instead of creating a Bill of Material for \"T-shirt, Red, S\", you" +" create a bill of material for \"T-shirt\" and add some lines that are " +"specific to the dimension S, and other lines specific to the color Red." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:69 +msgid "" +"**Pricing**: The default price of a product is computed using the price of " +"the product template and add the optional extra price on each dimension of " +"the variant. This way, variant prices are easier to maintain since you don't" +" have to set the price for every variant. However, it's possible to create " +"pricelist rules to fix price per variants too." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:77 +msgid "When should you avoid using variants?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:79 +msgid "" +"Using variants may add a level of complexity on the way you use Odoo. You " +"should consider using variants only if you need it to reduce the complexity " +"of managing lots of products that are similars." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:83 +msgid "" +"As an example, importing your initial product catalog is more complex if you" +" use variants. You can't just import a list of products, you must import " +"product templates and all their related variations." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:87 +msgid "" +"In addition to that, you should also carefully select the dimensions that " +"you manage as separate product templates and those as variants. As an " +"example, a company having these products:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:91 +msgid "Quality: T-Shirts, Polos, Shirts" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:93 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:105 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:110 +msgid "Color: Red, Blue" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:95 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:106 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:111 +msgid "Size: S, M, L, XL" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:97 +msgid "" +"In such a use case, you could create 1 template with three dimensions of " +"variants (Layout, T-Shirts, Polos). But, it's recommended to create two " +"different product templates as T-shirts may highly differ from polos or " +"shirts and customer expect to see these as two different products in the " +"e-Commerce:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:103 +msgid "Product Template: T-shirt" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:108 +msgid "Product Template: Polos" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:114 +#: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:10 +msgid "Configuration" +msgstr "Konfiguration" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:117 +msgid "Activate the variant feature" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:119 +msgid "" +"Before you can use product variants, you must first activate the product " +"variants in the settings. To do so, you must go to the Sales app. In the " +"menu :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`, locate the **Products " +"Variants** line, and tick the option **Products can have several " +"attributes**, then click on **Apply**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:129 +msgid "Creating products with variants" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:131 +msgid "" +"Once you have activated the variant option, you can add variants to your " +"products. To do so, go to the Sales module, :menuselection:`Sales --> " +"Products`. It is also accessible from the Purchase and inventory modules." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:135 +msgid "Now, click on the product you wish to add variants to." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:137 +msgid "" +"In the product page, a new tab called Variants has appeared. The number in " +"purple written on top is the number of variants this product currently has. " +"To add new variants, click on the tile. In the new window, click on " +"**Create**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:142 +msgid "" +"In **Attributes**, click on the rolldown menu and select the type of " +"variance you wish to add. If the variant does not yet exist, you can create " +"it on the fly by clicking on Create and edit…" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:149 +msgid "" +"In the Attributes window, the **Value** field is the description of the " +"attribute such as Green, Plastic or 32GB. The **Attribute** field is the " +"type of variant such as Color, Material or Memory." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:156 +msgid "" +"You can add a cost for the variant on the fly by adding it in the " +"**Attribute Price Extra** field, or choose to modify it later. Click on " +"**Save**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:160 +msgid "" +"You can also add a different barcode and internal reference to the variant." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:163 +msgid "" +"When you have entered all the specifications of the variant, click on " +"**Save**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:167 +msgid "Managing Product Variants" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:170 +msgid "Introduction" +msgstr "Überblick" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:172 +msgid "" +"The examples below are all based on this product template that has two " +"variant attributes :" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:175 +msgid "T-Shirt B&C" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:177 +msgid "Color: Red, Blue, White" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:179 +msgid "Size: S, M, L, XL, XXL" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:182 +msgid "Managing combination possibilities" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:184 +msgid "" +"By default, with the above product template, you get 15 different products " +"(3 colors, 5 sizes). If the XXL size only exists for red and blue t-shirts, " +"you can deactivate the white product variant." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:188 +msgid "" +"To do this, click on the **Variants** button, select the XXL, White T-shirt." +" From the product form, uncheck the **Active** box of the T-shirt White, " +"XXL." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:197 +msgid "" +"That deactivating a product is different than having an inventory of 0." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:200 +msgid "Setting a price per variant" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:202 +msgid "" +"You can add a cost over the main price for some of the variants of a " +"product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:205 +msgid "" +"Once you have activated the variant option, you can add variants to your " +"products. To do so, go to the Sales module, open :menuselection:`Sales --> " +"Products` and click on the product you want to modify. Click on the " +"**Variant Prices** button to access the list of variant values." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:213 +msgid "" +"Click on the variant name you wish to add a value to, to make the 3 fields " +"editable. In the **Attribute Price Extra** field, add the cost of the " +"variant that will be added to the original price." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:220 +msgid "When you have entered all the extra values, click on **Save**." +msgstr "" + #: ../../sales/products_prices/taxes.rst:3 msgid "Set taxes" msgstr "Steuern festlegen" @@ -1584,10 +1910,6 @@ msgid "" "complete quotation in no time." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:10 -msgid "Configuration" -msgstr "Konfiguration" - #: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:12 msgid "" "For this feature to work, go to :menuselection:`Sales --> Configuration --> " diff --git a/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..d8af5dcee --- /dev/null +++ b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po @@ -0,0 +1,516 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2015-TODAY, Odoo S.A. +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +# Translators: +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Johannes Croe , 2019 +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-11-20 09:24+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Johannes Croe , 2019\n" +"Language-Team: German (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/de/)\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Language: de\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n" + +#: ../../sms_marketing.rst:5 +msgid "SMS Marketing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:3 +msgid "Build, send and get reports from a SMS mailing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Why to use SMS? Using SMS Marketing as part of my communication strategies " +"can empower me to expand my markets, considering that in some countries " +"emails are not very used or used at all. It also helps to boost my " +"conversion rate, as this strategy has a high open-rate percentage among " +"people who use smartphones - people usually don’t keep unread SMSs!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:8 +msgid "" +"With Odoo’s SMS Marketing app you can plan, organize, schedule and keep " +"track of your mailings with its easy to use interface." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:12 +msgid "Install the app" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:14 +msgid "Go to *Apps*, search for *SMS Marketing* and click on *Install*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:17 +msgid "Build an SMS mailing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:19 +msgid "Go to *SMS Marketing > Create*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:24 +msgid "" +"First, I’ll be able to specify a *subject* name that will help me to " +"remember what the mailing is about. Under *recipients*, I’ll choose to whom " +"I’d like the SMS to be sent. If I choose *Contact*, all my Odoo contacts " +"(vendor, customers, etc.) will receive my SMS. From there, I can refine my " +"recipient list with the *add filter* option. In the example below, I choose " +"to send it to my contacts living in Belgium." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:31 +msgid "" +"The *Mailing list* option, on the other hand, allows me to choose mailing " +"lists I’ve created with specific contacts or people who have subscribed to " +"my Newsletters, or both! I’m allowed to select more than one *Mailing list*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:36 +msgid "" +"Under the *SMS Content* tab, links can be included and Odoo will " +"automatically generate *link trackers*. Thank to those, I’ll be able to get " +"data about those links." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:38 +msgid "" +"On *Settings* I have the option *include opt-out link* available. If " +"activated, the contact will be able to unsubscribe from the mailing list " +"he’s not interested in anymore." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:43 +msgid "" +"in the *Link Tracker* menu under *Configuration*, I can see the history of " +"my sent links, access them and look at statistics." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:48 +msgid "Double-check that you have the phone number of your contacts saved!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:52 +msgid "Sending my mailing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:56 +msgid "" +"Once I have my mailing created, I must choose when I would like it to be " +"delivered:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:58 +msgid "" +"**Put in queue**: the mailing will be triggered with the next automatic run." +" Interesting option if I don’t mind when the triggering will happen." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:59 +msgid "" +"**Send now**: sends the message immediately. Advised to use this option if " +"there are not that many recipients." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:60 +msgid "" +"**Schedule**: allows me to choose a day and time. Best option for mailings " +"that I would like to send during a specific event, to promote an offer while" +" it is active or to simply plan my content strategy in advance." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:61 +msgid "" +"**Test**: allows me to send an SMS to one or multiple numbers for test " +"purposes. Check, for example, if the link provided lands on the right page " +"while making sure they are responsive. If sending it to multiple numbers, I " +"must remember to use a comma between them." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:65 +msgid "Visualize reports" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:66 +msgid "" +"On the *Reporting* menu, with just a few clicks, I am capable of applying " +"filters, measures and adopt different layouts to do an analysis of the " +"performance of my SMS mailings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:71 +msgid "" +"I can also check the price to send an SMS on your country when clicking on " +"the *information* icon when creating a new SMS." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:76 +msgid "" +"**Buy Credits!** In order to take advantage of the app and its features, " +"make sure you’ve purchased credits. For more information on that access: " +":doc:`../sms_marketing/fqapricing`" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:3 +msgid "Contact lists and Blacklist" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:6 +msgid "Contact lists" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:7 +msgid "" +"Creating my own list of contacts, or importing it, is useful when I want to " +"create specific groups of people, such as the subscribers of my newsletter. " +"It is also the best way to get started if I am coming from another system " +"and already have built an audience. It makes the SMS distribution a lot " +"easier." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:9 +msgid "" +"Go to *Contacts lists > Contacts lists > Create*. I’ll choose a name for my " +"*Mailing list*, and activate the option *Public* if I would like to make the" +" mailing list accessible to my recipients in the unsubscription page to " +"allow them to update their subscription preferences." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:12 +msgid "" +"Once inside the list, I can again *Create* or *Import* contacts for that " +"specific list." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:18 +msgid "History with the Log Notes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:19 +msgid "" +"A record of the mailings sent is kept in the chatter of the recipient " +"(whether it is a contact or an opportunity, for example)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:24 +msgid "" +"This is important as I and my team can easily keep track and see a history " +"of interactions with my contacts or prospects, granting me the ability to " +"better understand them. Example: my sales representative can easily find out" +" which SMS mailing promotions a customer has received or not." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:29 +msgid "Blacklist" +msgstr "Schwarze Liste" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:30 +msgid "" +"If I’m coming from another software and have a list of clients who have " +"already asked to be blacklisted from my news, I can import those entries in " +"my database. For that, I’ll go to *Configuration > Phone Blacklist > " +"Import*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:3 +msgid "Integrations and Templates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:4 +msgid "" +"Using SMS to reach people can be a strategy not just used for advertisement " +"purposes but also as a reminder of events or issued invoices to your " +"costumers, for example. As you know, one of the biggest benefits of using " +"Odoo is the capability of the apps to be integrated. With the SMS Marketing " +"app isn’t different!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:9 +msgid "Organize Email Marketing and SMS campaigns" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:10 +msgid "" +"First, make sure to have the necessary feature activated. Go to the *Email " +"Marketing app > Configuration > Settings> activate the option Mailing " +"Campaigns*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Now, I’ll also have the menu *Campaigns* included in my *SMS Marketing* " +"page, allowing me to have an overview of my SMS mailings and my email " +"marketing ones." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:20 +msgid "" +"This feature is especially useful if I have aggregated campaigns, as I have " +"a global reporting view. In addition to that, I can create stages in my " +"kanban view to better organize the work being done." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:26 +msgid "Sending SMSs through the Contacts app" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:27 +msgid "" +"Sending SMSs through the contact’s form is available by default in Odoo. It " +"makes my work easier if I need to send an SMS to a specific contact, for " +"example. For that, I’ll go to the *Contacts* app, select the contact and " +"click on the *SMS* icon next to the phone number." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:33 +msgid "" +"If I’d like to send a message in a batch here, I could go to *List View > " +"select all the contacts > Action > Send SMS*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:39 +msgid "Set up SMS Templates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:40 +msgid "" +"To set up *SMS Templates*, I’ll go to the *Settings* app and activate the " +"*developer mode*. Now, back to *Settings* app, I’ll go to *Technical > " +"Phone/SMS section > SMS Templates* and create the content I need." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:48 +msgid "" +"Use *Dynamic Placeholders* to adapt automatically the content of the SMS to " +"the context." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:52 +msgid "" +"SMS Text Messaging is available throughout Odoo! Here are some of our extra " +"notable integrations:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:54 +msgid "*CRM*: send SMSs to your leads and opportunities." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:55 +msgid "*Subscription*: alert customers about their subscription." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:56 +msgid "*Accounting*: send payment reminders." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:57 +msgid "*Marketing Automation*: automate your SMS marketing campaigns." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:58 +msgid "" +"*Inventory*: send an automatic confirmation when a delivery order is done." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:59 +msgid "" +"*Sign*: receive a validation code to verify your identity before signing a " +"document online." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:60 +msgid "" +"*SEPA debit payment provider*: send a verification code to your customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:61 +msgid "" +"*Studio*: send an SMS according to your needs by using automated actions." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:63 +msgid "" +"For more information about SMS integrations in Odoo and a list of frequently" +" asked questions, go to `Pricing and FQA `__." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:3 +msgid "SMS Pricing and FAQ" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:6 +msgid "Pricing" +msgstr "Preiskalkulation" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:7 +msgid "" +"SMS Text Messaging is an In-App Purchase (IAP) service which requires " +"prepaid credits to work. The price of an SMS depends on the destination and " +"the length of the message. With 1 credit, I can send up to 92 SMSs." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:9 +msgid "" +"**For more information, please consult our FAQ page**: `Odoo SMS - FAQ " +"`_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:11 +msgid "" +"To buy credits I will go to *Settings > Buy Credits* (under *Send SMS*); or" +" go to *Settings > View my Services* (under *Odoo IAP*)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:18 +msgid "" +"If you are on Odoo Online (SAAS) and have the Enterprise version, you " +"benefit from free trial credits to test the feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:21 +msgid "FAQ" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:22 +msgid "**Is there an expiration time for my credits?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:24 +msgid "No, your credits won’t expire." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:26 +msgid "" +"**Can I send an SMS to a phone number (which is not a mobile phone) because " +"I see the icon in front of the field “phone”?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:28 +msgid "Only if that phone number supports SMS (e.g. SIP phones)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:30 +msgid "**Do I receive an invoice to buy my credits?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:32 +msgid "Yes." +msgstr "Ja." + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:34 +msgid "**Can the recipient answer to me?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:36 +msgid "No, it is not possible to reply to the SMS." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:38 +msgid "" +"**What happens if I send multiple SMS but I do not have enough credits to " +"send them all?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:40 +msgid "" +"The whole transaction is counted as a single one, so no SMS will be sent " +"until you have enough credits to send them all." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:42 +msgid "**Do I have a history of the sent SMSs?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:44 +msgid "" +"Yes, the SMS is logged as a note under the chatter of the corresponding " +"record, and a complete history of SMS sent is available under Settings> " +"Activate the developer mode > Technical > SMS." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:46 +msgid "**Can I send as many SMSs I want at once?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:48 +msgid "Yes, if you have enough credits." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:50 +msgid "" +"**If I have a number that does not exist in the list of recipients, will I " +"lose credits?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:52 +msgid "" +"Not if the phone number is in the wrong format (e.g. too many digits). " +"Otherwise, if the SMS is sent to the wrong person or to a fake number, the " +"credit will be lost." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:54 +msgid "" +"**What happens if I send my SMS to a paying number (e.g.: a contest to win a" +" ticket for a festival)?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:56 +msgid "" +"The SMS will not be delivered to that kind of number, so you won’t be " +"charged." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:58 +msgid "" +"**Can I identify the numbers that do not exist when I send several SMSs?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:60 +msgid "Only the ones that have an invalid format." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:62 +msgid "**How does the GDPR regulation affect this service?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:64 +msgid "" +"Please find our Privacy Policy here: `Odoo IPA Purchase Privacy Policy " +"`__" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:66 +msgid "**How many types of SMS exist and how many characters make 1 SMS?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:68 +msgid "There are 2 types of SMS message:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:70 +msgid "" +"*Standard* (GSM-7): contains only characters from the GSM-7 set, which can " +"be seen in the following picture." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:75 +msgid "" +"*Unicode*: contains at least one character that is not in the previous " +"table. For Standard SMS the size limit is 160 characters, and for Unicode is" +" 70. Above these limits, the content is divided into a multi-part message. " +"The system will inform you in real-time about the number of SMS your message" +" represents." +msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e459f3c48 --- /dev/null +++ b/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po @@ -0,0 +1,168 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2015-TODAY, Odoo S.A. +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-11-20 09:24+0000\n" +"Language-Team: German (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/de/)\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Language: de\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n" + +#: ../../social_marketing.rst:5 +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:2 +msgid "Social Marketing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:3 +msgid "Advanced Topics" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:4 +msgid "" +"One of the biggest challenges of a company is to engage efficiently with " +"their community. Odoo Social helps you to meet your audience with the help " +"of several supports: social media, push notifications, or live chat request." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:10 +msgid "Add your social media and create your feed" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:12 +msgid "" +"You first need to add your social media accounts. To do that, add a Stream " +"and choose your social media account. You’ll need to grant permissions to " +"Odoo Social Marketing application." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:19 +msgid "" +"Once it’s done, you’ll be redirected to your Feed and a column will be " +"automatically added with the publications of your freshly added account. You" +" can then add new streams to your Feed and customize your Kanban view as you" +" like." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:28 +msgid "" +"Adding social media accounts to your Feed will also add some KPIs on it:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:30 +msgid "Audience: Number of followers of your channel" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:32 +msgid "Engagement: Number of times people have engaged with your posts" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:35 +msgid "Stories: Number of times people who have engaged with your channel" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:35 +msgid "" +"have created stories on their friend’s or follower’s feed (Shares, " +"Retweet,..)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:37 +msgid "" +"You can access more information by clicking on the “Insights” link: this " +"will lead you to statistics of the selected social medium." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:41 +msgid "Publish content" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:43 +msgid "" +"To publish content on your social media accounts or send a push notification" +" to your subscribed users, either go to your Feed and click on New Post, or " +"use the “Posts” menu and create it from there. Select all the accounts where" +" you want to post your content, write your post and get an instant preview " +"of how it will look when published." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:49 +msgid "" +"If you select the push notifications, you’ll get some additional fields on " +"the form that will allow you to complete the push notifications " +"configuration and choose your segment between all your subscribed users. You" +" can also send push notifications via the Visitors menu, as explained in the" +" previous paragraph." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:56 +msgid "Enable push notifications on your website" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:58 +msgid "" +"The push notifications system uses a Firebase account, configured by " +"default. This feature allows you to send push notifications to your " +"website’s visitors after they subscribed to it. To enable push notifications" +" on your website, go to the Website application Settings, and configure the " +"notifications permission request." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:67 +msgid "" +"Once it’s done, a popup will appear to your website’s visitors, asking them " +"to allow push notifications. As soon as they subscribe to it, you can start " +"sending them push notifications through the Visitors menu. You can either " +"send it individually or target a bigger segment by selecting multiple " +"visitors in the list view (e.g. all the visitors that visited your " +"Homepage)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:75 +msgid "Interact with your online visitors" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:77 +msgid "" +"You can monitor your online visits via the Visitors menu. You’ll see every " +"visitors that landed on one of your tracked pages (you can configure your " +"tracked pages in the Website application), online or offline. Your online " +"visitors will be authenticated if they’re linked to a lead or an existing " +"partner. You will be able to contact them with an email, a message sms, a " +"push notification (if they have subscribed to it), or even send them a live " +"chat request that they will receive on their next move on one of your " +"tracked pages (if you installed the Live Chat application)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:91 +msgid "Configure your own Facebook and Twitter developer accounts" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:93 +msgid "" +"By default, the Social application is already configured with a Facebook and" +" Twitter developer accounts but you can use your own if necessary. Activate " +"the developer mode, go to Configuration > Settings and enter your own API " +"keys." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:102 +msgid "Configure your own Firebase API" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:104 +msgid "" +"By default, a Firebase project is running on your database so there’s no " +"need to configure it. If you have multiple websites, every website will be " +"linked to a different Firebase project. If you need to configure your own " +"Firebase project, please go to :menuselection:`Website --> Configuration -->" +" Settings` Web Push Notifications section." +msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po index 8cab012ec..013698d77 100644 --- a/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po +++ b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po @@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ # Jean-Louis Bodren , 2019 # Xavier Belmere , 2019 # zoe , 2019 +# Olivier ANDRE , 2019 # Frédéric LIETART , 2019 # Malo Maisonneuve , 2019 # Bastien Foerster , 2019 @@ -17,13 +18,11 @@ # Tony Barbou , 2019 # ShevAbam, 2019 # Maxime Chambreuil , 2019 -# Olivier ANDRE , 2019 # Olivier Lenoir , 2019 # William Henrotin , 2019 # Guillaume Rancourt , 2019 # Florence Lambrechts , 2019 # Vincent M , 2019 -# Christophe CHAUVET , 2019 # Fabien Pinckaers , 2019 # Maxime Vanderhaeghe , 2019 # Frédéric Clementi , 2019 @@ -31,23 +30,25 @@ # Benjamin Frantzen, 2019 # Eloïse Stilmant , 2019 # Valaeys Stéphane , 2019 -# Martin Trigaux, 2019 # Xavier Symons , 2019 # Shark McGnark , 2019 # Jérôme Tanché , 2019 # Aurélien Pillevesse , 2019 # Fred Gilson , 2019 # Florent de Labarre , 2019 +# Christophe CHAUVET , 2019 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 # Cécile Collart , 2019 +# Alain van de Werve , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:45+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: Cécile Collart , 2019\n" +"Last-Translator: Alain van de Werve , 2019\n" "Language-Team: French (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/fr/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -135,11 +136,11 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/deferred_revenues.rst:24 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/installment_plans.rst:20 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/payment_terms.rst:19 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:18 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/check.rst:39 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/check.rst:103 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/credit_cards.rst:40 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/credit_cards.rst:113 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:19 msgid "Configuration" msgstr "Configuration" @@ -1788,36 +1789,6 @@ msgstr "" msgid "View *Bank Account* in our Online Demonstration" msgstr "Voir les *Comptes bancaires* dans notre Démonstration en Ligne" -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:51 -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:146 -#: ../../accounting/others/analytic/timesheets.rst:78 -#: ../../accounting/payables/misc/employee_expense.rst:169 -#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:134 -#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:135 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:44 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:59 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:94 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:105 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/payment_terms.rst:31 -msgid "Todo" -msgstr "À faire" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:51 -msgid "add inherited field tooltip" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:53 -msgid "" -"**Display on reports :** Display this bank account on the documents that " -"will be printed or send to the customers" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:56 -msgid "" -"**Bank Identifier Code** = BIC : SWIFT Address assigned to a bank in order " -"to send automated payments quickly and accurately to the banks concerned" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:60 msgid "" "The initial balance of a bank statement will be set to the closing balance " @@ -1907,16 +1878,11 @@ msgstr "Configurer des devises" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/foreign_currency.rst:36 msgid "" "Once the Odoo is configured to support multiple currencies, you should " -"activate the currencies you plan to work with. To do that, go the menu " +"activate the currencies you plan to work with. To do that, go to the menu " ":menuselection:`Configuration --> Currencies`. All the currencies are " -"created by default, but you should activate the ones you plan to support. " -"(to activate a currency, check his active field)" +"created by default, but you should activate the ones you plan to support (to" +" activate a currency, check its \"Active\" field)." msgstr "" -"Une fois qu'Odoo est configuré pour supporter plusieurs devises, vous devez " -"activer les devises que vous envisagez d'utiliser. Pour ce faire, allez dans" -" le menu :menuselection:`Configuration --> Devises`. Toutes les devises sont" -" créées par défaut, mais vous devez activer celles que vous allez utiliser. " -"(Pour activer une monnaie, cochez-la)" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/foreign_currency.rst:42 msgid "" @@ -2046,15 +2012,10 @@ msgstr "" msgid "" "In the above report, the account receivable associated to Camptocamp is not " "managed in a secondary currency, which means that it keeps every transaction" -" in his own currency. If you prefer, you can set the account receivable of " -"this customer with a secondary currency and all his debts will automatically" -" be converted in this currency." +" in its own currency. If you prefer, you can set the account receivable for " +"this customer in a secondary currency and all its debts will automatically " +"be converted to this currency." msgstr "" -"Dans le rapport ci-dessus, le compte client associé à Camptocamp n'est pas " -"géré dans une devise secondaire, ce qui signifie qu'il conserve toutes les " -"transactions dans sa propre monnaie. Si vous préférez, vous pouvez " -"configurer le compte de ce client avec une monnaie secondaire et toutes ses " -"dettes seront automatiquement converties dans cette devise." #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/foreign_currency.rst:115 msgid "" @@ -2126,25 +2087,35 @@ msgid "Select 'General' for miscellaneous operations journals." msgstr "Sélectionner 'General' pour le journal des opérations divers." #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Use in Point of Sale" -msgstr "Utiliser dans le point de vente" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Check this box if this journal define a payment method that can be used in a" -" point of sale." -msgstr "" -"Cochez cette case si ce journal défini une méthode de paiement qui peut être" -" utilisée dans le point de vente." - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Company" msgstr "Société" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Company related to this journal" msgstr "Société liée à ce journal" +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Defines how the bank statements will be registered" +msgstr "Définissez comment les relevés bancaires seront enregistrés" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Synchronization Frequency" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Defines when a new bank statement" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "will be created when fetching new transactions" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "from your bank account." +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "Short Code" msgstr "Code" @@ -2187,8 +2158,8 @@ msgstr "" "les factures et les avoirs créés à partir de ce journal." #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Credit Notes: Next Number" -msgstr "Avoirs : numéro suivant" +msgid "Credit Notes Next Number" +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "The next sequence number will be used for the next credit note." @@ -2231,23 +2202,69 @@ msgid "The currency used to enter statement" msgstr "La devise utilisée pour entrer les relevés" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Defines how the bank statements will be registered" -msgstr "Définissez comment les relevés bancaires seront enregistrés" +msgid "Communication Type" +msgstr "Type de communication" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Creation of Bank Statements" +msgid "" +"You can set here the default communication that will appear on customer " +"invoices, once validated, to help the customer to refer to that particular " +"invoice when making the payment." +msgstr "" +"Vous pouvez définir la communication par défaut qui apparaitra sur les " +"factures du client, une fois celle-ci validée, pour aider le client à se " +"référer à cette facture en particulier lors du paiement." + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Communication Standard" +msgstr "Standard de communication" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "" +"You can choose different models for each type of reference. The default one " +"is the Odoo reference." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Defines when a new bank statement" +msgid "Alias Name" +msgstr "Nom de l'alias" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "It creates draft invoices and bills by sending an email." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "will be created when fetching new transactions" +msgid "Profit Account" +msgstr "Compte de profit" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Used to register a profit when the ending balance of a cash register differs" +" from what the system computes" +msgstr "" +"Utilisé pour enregistrer un profit lorsque le solde final de la caisse est " +"différent de ce qui a été calculé par le système" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Loss Account" +msgstr "Compte de perte" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Used to register a loss when the ending balance of a cash register differs " +"from what the system computes" +msgstr "" +"Utilisé pour enregistrer une perte lorsque le solde final de la caisse est " +"différent de ce qui a été calculé par le système" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Lock Posted Entries with Hash" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "from your bank account." +msgid "" +"If ticked, the accounting entry or invoice receives a hash as soon as it is " +"posted and cannot be modified anymore." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 @@ -2295,61 +2312,6 @@ msgid "" "to your bank. Enable this option from the settings." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Profit Account" -msgstr "Compte de profit" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Used to register a profit when the ending balance of a cash register differs" -" from what the system computes" -msgstr "" -"Utilisé pour enregistrer un profit lorsque le solde final de la caisse est " -"différent de ce qui a été calculé par le système" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Loss Account" -msgstr "Compte de perte" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Used to register a loss when the ending balance of a cash register differs " -"from what the system computes" -msgstr "" -"Utilisé pour enregistrer une perte lorsque le solde final de la caisse est " -"différent de ce qui a été calculé par le système" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Group Invoice Lines" -msgstr "Grouper les lignes de facture" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"If this box is checked, the system will try to group the accounting lines " -"when generating them from invoices." -msgstr "" -"Si cette case est cochée, le système essaiera de grouper les lignes " -"comptables lorsqu'il les créera à partir des factures." - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Post At Bank Reconciliation" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Whether or not the payments made in this journal should be generated in " -"draft state, so that the related journal entries are only posted when " -"performing bank reconciliation." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Alias Name for Vendor Bills" -msgstr "Pseudonyme pour la facture fournisseur." - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "It creates draft vendor bill by sending an email." -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "Check Printing Payment Method Selected" msgstr "Méthode de paiement d'impression des chèques sélectionnées" @@ -2389,23 +2351,6 @@ msgstr "Numéro de chèque suivant" msgid "Sequence number of the next printed check." msgstr "Numéro de séquence du prochain chèque imprimé." -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Amount Authorized Difference" -msgstr "Montant d'écart autorisé" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"This field depicts the maximum difference allowed between the ending balance" -" and the theoretical cash when closing a session, for non-POS managers. If " -"this maximum is reached, the user will have an error message at the closing " -"of his session saying that he needs to contact his manager." -msgstr "" -"Ce champ montre la différence maximum autorisée entre la balance de fin et " -"le cash théorique lors de la fermeture d'une session, pour des non-managers " -"de POS. Si ce montant maximum est atteint, l'utilisateur verra apparaître un" -" message d'erreur lors de la fermeture de sa session disant qu'il doit " -"contacter son manager. " - #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:25 msgid "Usage" msgstr "Usage" @@ -2793,25 +2738,27 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:3 msgid "Colombia (ES)" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Colombia (ES)" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:5 msgid "**Facturación Electrónica para Colombia**" -msgstr "" +msgstr "**Facturación Electrónica para Colombia**" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:8 msgid "Introducción" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Introducción" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:10 msgid "" "La Facturación Electrónica para Colombia está disponible en Odoo V12 y " "requiere los siguientes Módulos:" msgstr "" +"La Facturación Electrónica para Colombia está disponible en Odoo V12 y " +"requiere los siguientes Módulos:" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:20 msgid "**l11n_co**:** Contiene los datos básicos para manejar el" -msgstr "" +msgstr "**l11n_co**:** Contiene los datos básicos para manejar el" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:14 msgid "" @@ -2825,11 +2772,11 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:0 msgid "b. Impuestos" -msgstr "" +msgstr "b. Impuestos" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:0 msgid "c. Retenciones" -msgstr "" +msgstr "c. Retenciones" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:0 msgid "d. Tipos de Documentos de Identificación" @@ -2837,7 +2784,7 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:25 msgid "**l10n_co_edi**: Este módulo incluye todos los campos" -msgstr "" +msgstr "**l10n_co_edi**: Este módulo incluye todos los campos" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:23 msgid "" @@ -2845,6 +2792,9 @@ msgid "" "generación de la Factura Electrónica, basado en los requisitos legales de la" " DIAN." msgstr "" +"adicionales que son requeridos para la Integración entre Carvajal T&S y la " +"generación de la Factura Electrónica, basado en los requisitos legales de la" +" DIAN." #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:28 msgid "Flujo General" @@ -2852,25 +2802,27 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:31 msgid "Configuración" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Configuración" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:34 msgid "1. Instalación de los módulos de Localización Colombiana" -msgstr "" +msgstr "1. Instalación de los módulos de Localización Colombiana" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:36 msgid "" "Para esto ve a las aplicaciones y busca “Colombia”, luego da click en " "Instalar a los primeros dos módulos:" msgstr "" +"Para esto ve a las aplicaciones y busca “Colombia”, luego da click en " +"Instalar a los primeros dos módulos:" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:39 msgid "cz" -msgstr "" +msgstr "cz" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:42 msgid "2. Configuración de las credenciales del Servicio Web de Carvajal T&S" -msgstr "" +msgstr "2. Configuración de las credenciales del Servicio Web de Carvajal T&S" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:46 msgid "" @@ -2878,12 +2830,17 @@ msgid "" "Servicio Web de Carvajal T&S, es necesario configurar el Usuario y las " "Credenciales. Esta información será provista por Carvajal T&S." msgstr "" +"Una vez que los módulos están instalados, para poderte conectar con el " +"Servicio Web de Carvajal T&S, es necesario configurar el Usuario y las " +"Credenciales. Esta información será provista por Carvajal T&S." #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:48 msgid "" "Ve a Facturación –> Configuración –> Configuración y busca la sección " "**Facturación Electrónica Colombiana**" msgstr "" +"Ve a Facturación –> Configuración –> Configuración y busca la sección " +"**Facturación Electrónica Colombiana**" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:56 msgid "" @@ -2893,6 +2850,11 @@ msgid "" " través de la siguiente liga: `Cenfinanciero " "`__," msgstr "" +"La funcionalidad de pruebas le permite conectarse e interactuar con el " +"ambiente piloto de Carvajal T&S, esto permite a los usuarios probar el flujo" +" completo y la integración con el Portal Financiero CEN, al cual se accede a" +" través de la siguiente liga: `Cenfinanciero " +"`__," #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:58 msgid "" @@ -2901,10 +2863,14 @@ msgid "" "información al ambiente de producción de Carvajal, para el cual es utilizada" " la siguiente URL: `Cenfinanciero `__," msgstr "" +"Una vez que el ambiente de producción está listo en Odoo y en Carvajal T&S " +"el ambiente de pruebas debe ser deshabilitado para poder enviar la " +"información al ambiente de producción de Carvajal, para el cual es utilizada" +" la siguiente URL: `Cenfinanciero `__," #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:64 msgid "3. Configuración de Información para PDF" -msgstr "" +msgstr "3. Configuración de Información para PDF" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:68 msgid "" @@ -2912,24 +2878,29 @@ msgid "" "definir los datos de la sección fiscal del PDF, así como de la información " "Bancaria." msgstr "" +"Como parte de la información configurable que es enviada en el XML, puedes " +"definir los datos de la sección fiscal del PDF, así como de la información " +"Bancaria." #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:70 msgid "" "Ve a Contabilidad – Configuración – Ajustes y busca la sección **Facturación" " Electrónica Colombiana**." msgstr "" +"Ve a Contabilidad – Configuración – Ajustes y busca la sección **Facturación" +" Electrónica Colombiana**." #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:76 msgid "4. Configuración de los Datos Principales Requeridos en el XML" -msgstr "" +msgstr "4. Configuración de los Datos Principales Requeridos en el XML" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:79 msgid "4.1 Contacto (Tercero)" -msgstr "" +msgstr "4.1 Contacto (Tercero)" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:82 msgid "4.1.1 Identificación" -msgstr "" +msgstr "4.1.1 Identificación" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:85 msgid "" @@ -2938,6 +2909,10 @@ msgid "" "cual ya es posible asignarles su número de identificación asociado al tipo " "de documento correspondiente." msgstr "" +"Como parte de la Localización Colombiana, los tipos de documentos definidos " +"por la DIAN ahora están disponibles en el formulario de Contactos, por lo " +"cual ya es posible asignarles su número de identificación asociado al tipo " +"de documento correspondiente." #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:93 msgid "" @@ -2945,6 +2920,9 @@ msgid "" "ingresada en Odoo incluyendo el Dígito de Verificación. Odoo separará este " "número cuando la información sea enviada a los proveedores terceros." msgstr "" +"Nota: Cuando el tipo de documento es RUT la identificación necesita ser " +"ingresada en Odoo incluyendo el Dígito de Verificación. Odoo separará este " +"número cuando la información sea enviada a los proveedores terceros." #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:99 msgid "4.1.2 Estructura Fiscal (RUT)" @@ -2956,6 +2934,9 @@ msgid "" "el documento de RUT), son incluidos como parte del módulo de Facturación " "Electrónica, dado que es información requerida por la DIAN." msgstr "" +"Los Códigos de tipo de Obligación aplicables a los terceros (sección 53 en " +"el documento de RUT), son incluidos como parte del módulo de Facturación " +"Electrónica, dado que es información requerida por la DIAN." #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:105 msgid "" @@ -2971,6 +2952,11 @@ msgid "" "Contribuyentes y Régimen simplificado, por lo se muestran solo estas dos " "opciones." msgstr "" +"Adicionalmente dos últimos campos fueron agregados para especificar el " +"régimen fiscal del contacto. Cabe aclarar que para envío de Factura " +"electrónica de Carvajal, únicamente se hace distinción de entre Grandes " +"Contribuyentes y Régimen simplificado, por lo se muestran solo estas dos " +"opciones." #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:118 msgid "4.2 Impuestos" @@ -2982,12 +2968,17 @@ msgid "" "importante considerar que un campo adicional llamado *Tipo de Valor* " "necesita ser configurado en la siguiente ruta:" msgstr "" +"Si tus transacciones de ventas incluyen productos con impuestos, es " +"importante considerar que un campo adicional llamado *Tipo de Valor* " +"necesita ser configurado en la siguiente ruta:" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:124 msgid "" "Contabilidad – > Configuración –> Impuestos: –> Opciones Avanzadas –>Tipo de" " Valor" msgstr "" +"Contabilidad – > Configuración –> Impuestos: –> Opciones Avanzadas –>Tipo de" +" Valor" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:129 msgid "" @@ -2996,10 +2987,14 @@ msgid "" "considerada para desplegar correctamente los impuestos en la representación " "gráfica de la Factura. (PDF)" msgstr "" +"Los impuestos para Retenciones (ICA, IVA y Fuente) también están incluidos " +"en las opciones para configurar tus impuestos, esta configuración es " +"considerada para desplegar correctamente los impuestos en la representación " +"gráfica de la Factura. (PDF)" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:138 msgid "4.3 Diarios" -msgstr "" +msgstr "4.3 Diarios" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:140 msgid "" @@ -3007,40 +3002,49 @@ msgid "" "resolución de la Facturación Electrónica, los Diarios de Ventas relacionados" " con tus documentos de facturación necesitan ser actualizados en Odoo." msgstr "" +"Una vez que la DIAN ha asignado la secuencia y prefijo oficiales para la " +"resolución de la Facturación Electrónica, los Diarios de Ventas relacionados" +" con tus documentos de facturación necesitan ser actualizados en Odoo." #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:145 msgid "" "La secuencia es configurada usando el modo de desarrollador en la siguiente " "ruta:" msgstr "" +"La secuencia es configurada usando el modo de desarrollador en la siguiente " +"ruta:" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:148 msgid "Contabilidad –> Configuración –> Diarios –> Liga de Secuencia" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Contabilidad –> Configuración –> Diarios –> Liga de Secuencia" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:153 msgid "" "Una vez que la secuencia es abierta, los campos de Prefijo y Siguiente " "Número deben ser configurados y sincronizados con el CEN Financiero." msgstr "" +"Una vez que la secuencia es abierta, los campos de Prefijo y Siguiente " +"Número deben ser configurados y sincronizados con el CEN Financiero." #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:160 msgid "4.4 Usuarios" -msgstr "" +msgstr "4.4 Usuarios" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:162 msgid "" "La plantilla por defecto que es usada por Odoo en la representación gráfica " "incluye el nombre del Vendedor, así que estos campos deben ser considerados:" msgstr "" +"La plantilla por defecto que es usada por Odoo en la representación gráfica " +"incluye el nombre del Vendedor, así que estos campos deben ser considerados:" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:170 msgid "Uso y Pruebas" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Uso y Pruebas" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:173 msgid "Facturas" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Facturas" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:175 msgid "" @@ -3048,6 +3052,9 @@ msgid "" "configuradas, es posible empezar a probar el flujo de la Facturación " "Electrónica siguiendo las instrucciones que se detallan a continuación:" msgstr "" +"Una vez que toda la información principal y las credenciales han sido " +"configuradas, es posible empezar a probar el flujo de la Facturación " +"Electrónica siguiendo las instrucciones que se detallan a continuación:" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:180 msgid "1. Invoice Creation" @@ -3060,12 +3067,18 @@ msgid "" "independientemente de si es creada desde una Orden de Venta o si es creado " "manualmente." msgstr "" +"El flujo de trabajo funcional que lleva lugar antes de la validación de una " +"factura continua siendo igual con Facturación Electrónica, " +"independientemente de si es creada desde una Orden de Venta o si es creado " +"manualmente." #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:187 msgid "" "Los cambios principales que son introducidos con la Facturación Electrónica " "son los siguientes:" msgstr "" +"Los cambios principales que son introducidos con la Facturación Electrónica " +"son los siguientes:" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:190 msgid "Hay tres tipos de documentos" @@ -3073,23 +3086,23 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:193 msgid "**Factura electrónica**. Este es el documento normal y aplica" -msgstr "" +msgstr "**Factura electrónica**. Este es el documento normal y aplica" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:193 msgid "para Facturas, Notas de Crédito y Notas de Débito." -msgstr "" +msgstr "para Facturas, Notas de Crédito y Notas de Débito." #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:196 msgid "**Factura de Importación**. Debe ser seleccionada para" -msgstr "" +msgstr "**Factura de Importación**. Debe ser seleccionada para" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:196 msgid "transacciones de importación." -msgstr "" +msgstr "transacciones de importación." #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:202 msgid "**Factura de Contingencia**. Esta es un caso excepcional y es" -msgstr "" +msgstr "**Factura de Contingencia**. Esta es un caso excepcional y es" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:199 msgid "" @@ -3097,6 +3110,9 @@ msgid "" "ERP y hay necesidad de crear la factura manualmente. Al ingresar esta " "factura en el ERP, se debe seleccionar este tipo." msgstr "" +"utilizada como un respaldo manual en caso que la compañía no pueda usar el " +"ERP y hay necesidad de crear la factura manualmente. Al ingresar esta " +"factura en el ERP, se debe seleccionar este tipo." #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:208 msgid "1. Invoice Validation" @@ -3108,6 +3124,9 @@ msgid "" "automáticamente al proveedor de la factura electrónica. Este archivo es " "desplegado en el historial." msgstr "" +"Después que la factura fue validada, un archivo XML es creado y enviado " +"automáticamente al proveedor de la factura electrónica. Este archivo es " +"desplegado en el historial." #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:217 msgid "" @@ -3116,10 +3135,14 @@ msgid "" " que es desplegado con el estatus de la Factura Electrónica, con el valor " "inicial **En Proceso**." msgstr "" +"Un campo adicional es ahora desplegado en la pestaña de “Otra Información” " +"con el nombre del archivo XML. Adicionalmente hay un segundo campo adicional" +" que es desplegado con el estatus de la Factura Electrónica, con el valor " +"inicial **En Proceso**." #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:226 msgid "1. Recepción del XML y PDF Legal" -msgstr "" +msgstr "1. Recepción del XML y PDF Legal" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:233 msgid "" @@ -3130,6 +3153,12 @@ msgid "" "(CUFE) y generan el PDF de la Factura (el cual incluye un código QR) y el " "CUFE." msgstr "" +"El proveedor de la Factura Electrónica recibe el archivo XML y procede a " +"validar la información y la estructura contenida. Si todo es correcto, el " +"estatus de la Factura cambia a “Validado”. Como parte de este proceso se " +"generar el XML Legal, el cual incluye una firma digital y un código único " +"(CUFE) y generan el PDF de la Factura (el cual incluye un código QR) y el " +"CUFE." #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:237 msgid "" @@ -3137,28 +3166,33 @@ msgid "" "el XML fue creado. Si este es el caso, las siguientes acciones son hechas " "automáticamente." msgstr "" +"Odoo envía una petición de actualización automáticamente para verificar que " +"el XML fue creado. Si este es el caso, las siguientes acciones son hechas " +"automáticamente." #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:240 msgid "El XML Legal y el PDF son incluidos en un archivo ZIP y desplegados" -msgstr "" +msgstr "El XML Legal y el PDF son incluidos en un archivo ZIP y desplegados" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:240 msgid "en el historial de la Factura." -msgstr "" +msgstr "en el historial de la Factura." #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:245 msgid "El estatus de la Factura Electrónica es cambiado a “Aceptado”." -msgstr "" +msgstr "El estatus de la Factura Electrónica es cambiado a “Aceptado”." #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:250 msgid "" "Nota: En caso que el PDF y el XML sean requeridos inmediatamente, es posible" " mandar manualmente la petición del estatus usando el siguiente botón:" msgstr "" +"Nota: En caso que el PDF y el XML sean requeridos inmediatamente, es posible" +" mandar manualmente la petición del estatus usando el siguiente botón:" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:258 msgid "1. Errores Frecuentes" -msgstr "" +msgstr "1. Errores Frecuentes" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:260 msgid "" @@ -3167,6 +3201,10 @@ msgid "" "detalles del error son recuperados en la petición de actualización y " "desplegados en el historial." msgstr "" +"Durante la validación del XML los errores más comunes usualmente están " +"relacionados con información principal faltante. En estos casos, los " +"detalles del error son recuperados en la petición de actualización y " +"desplegados en el historial." #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:268 msgid "" @@ -3174,10 +3212,13 @@ msgid "" "la nueva información y mandar la versión actualizada usando el siguiente " "botón:" msgstr "" +"Si la información principal es corregida, es posible re procesar el XML con " +"la nueva información y mandar la versión actualizada usando el siguiente " +"botón:" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:279 msgid "Casos de Uso adicionales" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Casos de Uso adicionales" #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:281 msgid "" @@ -3185,6 +3226,9 @@ msgid "" "el mismo que en las Facturas. Su flujo de trabajo funcional se mantiene " "igual." msgstr "" +"El proceso para las Notas de Crédito y Débito (Proveedores) es exactamente " +"el mismo que en las Facturas. Su flujo de trabajo funcional se mantiene " +"igual." #: ../../accounting/localizations/france.rst:3 msgid "France" @@ -3710,7 +3754,7 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:3 msgid "Italy (IT)" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Italy (IT)" #: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:5 msgid "" @@ -3720,10 +3764,15 @@ msgid "" "inventati, altrimenti il sistema dell’agenzia delle entrate non riconoscerà " "l’interscambio di informazioni." msgstr "" +"Questa guida spiegherà come utilizzare la fattura elettronica in Odoo e come" +" configurare correttamente i dati aziendali, i contatti e la contabilità. " +"Per testare la fattura elettronica i dati devono essere reali e non " +"inventati, altrimenti il sistema dell’agenzia delle entrate non riconoscerà " +"l’interscambio di informazioni." #: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:12 msgid "Configurare le informazioni sulla tua Azienda" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Configurare le informazioni sulla tua Azienda" #: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:14 msgid "" @@ -3733,12 +3782,19 @@ msgid "" "Aziende. Accedere quindi alle informazioni sulla Azienda per cui si desidera" " configurare la fatturazione elettronica." msgstr "" +"Il passo successivo è la configurazione delle informazioni necessarie al " +"funzionamento della fatturazione elettronica. Si può accedere alla schermata" +" dall’applicazione Impostazioni: selezionare “Utenti e aziende” e scegliere " +"Aziende. Accedere quindi alle informazioni sulla Azienda per cui si desidera" +" configurare la fatturazione elettronica." #: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:20 msgid "" "I dati necessari al funzionamento dello strumento di fatturazione " "elettronica sono i seguenti:" msgstr "" +"I dati necessari al funzionamento dello strumento di fatturazione " +"elettronica sono i seguenti:" #: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:23 msgid "" @@ -3756,6 +3812,9 @@ msgid "" " presso l’Agenzia delle Entrate per l’utilizzo dei servizi di fatturazione " "elettronica." msgstr "" +"Indirizzo PEC dell’ Azienda, tale indirizzo deve essere lo stesso registrato" +" presso l’Agenzia delle Entrate per l’utilizzo dei servizi di fatturazione " +"elettronica." #: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:34 msgid "" @@ -3764,12 +3823,18 @@ msgid "" "che l’Agenzia delle Entrate potrebbe cambiare questo indirizzo in seguito, " "previa comunicazione." msgstr "" +"Indirizzo PEC dell’Agenzia delle Entrate. La mail sarà fornito al momento " +"della registrazione della tua PEC presso l’Agenzia delle Entrate, ricorda " +"che l’Agenzia delle Entrate potrebbe cambiare questo indirizzo in seguito, " +"previa comunicazione." #: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:39 msgid "" "Partita IVA e Codice Fiscale. Per far si che la Fatturazione Elettronica " "funzioni correttamente, questi cambi devono essere compilati correttamente." msgstr "" +"Partita IVA e Codice Fiscale. Per far si che la Fatturazione Elettronica " +"funzioni correttamente, questi cambi devono essere compilati correttamente." #: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:43 msgid "" @@ -3784,13 +3849,15 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:54 msgid "1. Configurare le impostazioni per la Fatturazione Elettronica" -msgstr "" +msgstr "1. Configurare le impostazioni per la Fatturazione Elettronica" #: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:56 msgid "" "Numero di iscrizione nel registro Imprese tenuto presso la Camera di " "Commercio." msgstr "" +"Numero di iscrizione nel registro Imprese tenuto presso la Camera di " +"Commercio." #: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:59 msgid "" @@ -3799,10 +3866,14 @@ msgid "" "rilevanti ai fini dell’IVA. È possibile indicare in questo campo se " "l’Azienda si avvale di un Rappresentate Fiscale in Italia." msgstr "" +"Rappresentate Fiscale. Questa opzione è dedicata ad aziende con sede al di " +"fuori del territorio nazionale ma conducenti attività commerciali in Italia " +"rilevanti ai fini dell’IVA. È possibile indicare in questo campo se " +"l’Azienda si avvale di un Rappresentate Fiscale in Italia." #: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:70 msgid "1. Configurare il profilo dei clienti" -msgstr "" +msgstr "1. Configurare il profilo dei clienti" #: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:72 msgid "" @@ -3818,10 +3889,14 @@ msgid "" " e Indice PA *che deve contere i 6-7 caratteri contenuti nell’indice PA e " "necessari per la comunicazione tramite fattura elettronica*." msgstr "" +"Selezionando il nome del cliente e accedendo quindi ai suoi dati, si trovano" +" i seguenti campi che devono essere compilati: Indirizzo PEC, Codice Fiscale" +" e Indice PA *che deve contere i 6-7 caratteri contenuti nell’indice PA e " +"necessari per la comunicazione tramite fattura elettronica*." #: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:87 msgid "Il processo di fatturazione" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Il processo di fatturazione" #: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:89 msgid "" @@ -3831,23 +3906,29 @@ msgid "" "quindi inviata: lo stato della sua consegna verrà notificato all’utente " "tramite pop-up sulla parte iniziale della schermata della fattura." msgstr "" +"Si può procedere ad emettere una fattura seguendo le indicazioni " +"dell’applicazione. Il momento che determina il formale invio della fattura è" +" il momento in cui viene selezionata l’opzione “Valida”. La fattura viene " +"quindi inviata: lo stato della sua consegna verrà notificato all’utente " +"tramite pop-up sulla parte iniziale della schermata della fattura." #: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:102 msgid "I messaggi che possono apparire sono i seguenti:" -msgstr "" +msgstr "I messaggi che possono apparire sono i seguenti:" #: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:104 msgid "Fattura invitata. In attesa di accettazione" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Fattura invitata. In attesa di accettazione" #: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:106 msgid "Invio fallito. Puoi modificare la fattura ed inviarla di nuovo" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Invio fallito. Puoi modificare la fattura ed inviarla di nuovo" #: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:108 msgid "" "La fattura è stata correttamente inviata ed accettata dal destinatario." msgstr "" +"La fattura è stata correttamente inviata ed accettata dal destinatario." #: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:111 msgid "" @@ -3855,24 +3936,29 @@ msgid "" "dall’elenco delle Fatture nella forma di icone, accanto alla colonna “Stato”" " dall’applicazione contabilità." msgstr "" +"I vari stadi di spedizione e recezione della fattura sono visibili anche " +"dall’elenco delle Fatture nella forma di icone, accanto alla colonna “Stato”" +" dall’applicazione contabilità." #: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:115 msgid "*Icona Rossa:* Invio fallito" -msgstr "" +msgstr "*Icona Rossa:* Invio fallito" #: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:117 msgid "*Icona Gialla:* Fattura invitata. In attesa di accettazione" -msgstr "" +msgstr "*Icona Gialla:* Fattura invitata. In attesa di accettazione" #: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:119 msgid "*Icona Verde:* Fattura inviata e accettata dal destinatario" -msgstr "" +msgstr "*Icona Verde:* Fattura inviata e accettata dal destinatario" #: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:121 msgid "" "Per inviare la fattura tramite PEC e generare il file XML, basterà cliccare " "su invia. Il documento verrà poi mostrato tra gli allegati." msgstr "" +"Per inviare la fattura tramite PEC e generare il file XML, basterà cliccare " +"su invia. Il documento verrà poi mostrato tra gli allegati." #: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:3 msgid "Mexico" @@ -4872,7 +4958,7 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/localizations/spain.rst:10 msgid "PGCE PYMEs 2008" -msgstr "" +msgstr "PGCE PYMEs 2008" #: ../../accounting/localizations/spain.rst:11 msgid "PGCE Completo 2008" @@ -5079,7 +5165,7 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/localizations/switzerland.rst:115 #: ../../accounting/localizations/switzerland.rst:117 msgid "7.7%" -msgstr "" +msgstr "7.7%" #: ../../accounting/localizations/switzerland.rst:99 msgid "7.7% achat" @@ -5155,7 +5241,7 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/localizations/switzerland.rst:119 #: ../../accounting/localizations/switzerland.rst:121 msgid "3.7%" -msgstr "" +msgstr "3.7%" #: ../../accounting/localizations/switzerland.rst:107 msgid "3.7% achat" @@ -5421,168 +5507,6 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Explanation of the fields:" msgstr "Explication des champs :" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Status" -msgstr "État" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "When an asset is created, the status is 'Draft'." -msgstr "Lorsqu'une immobilisation est créée, le statut est « Brouillon »." - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"If the asset is confirmed, the status goes in 'Running' and the depreciation" -" lines can be posted in the accounting." -msgstr "" -"Si l'immobilisation est confirmée, l'état passe «En cours » et les lignes " -"d'amortissement peuvent être comptabilisées." - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"You can manually close an asset when the depreciation is over. If the last " -"line of depreciation is posted, the asset automatically goes in that status." -msgstr "" -"Vous pouvez fermer manuellement une immobilisation lorsque l'amortissement " -"est terminé. Si la dernière ligne de l'amortissement est comptabilisée, " -"l'immobilisation passe automatiquement dans ce statut." - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Asset Category" -msgstr "Catégorie d'immobilisation" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Category of asset" -msgstr "Catégorie d'immobilisation" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Date" -msgstr "Date" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Date of asset" -msgstr "Date de l'immobilisation" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Depreciation Dates" -msgstr "Dates de dépréciation" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "The way to compute the date of the first depreciation." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Based on last day of purchase period: The depreciation dates will be based" -" on the last day of the purchase month or the purchase year (depending on " -"the periodicity of the depreciations)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Based on purchase date: The depreciation dates will be based on the " -"purchase date." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "First Depreciation Date" -msgstr "Première date de dépréciation" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Note that this date does not alter the computation of the first journal " -"entry in case of prorata temporis assets. It simply changes its accounting " -"date" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Gross Value" -msgstr "Valeur brute" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Gross value of asset" -msgstr "Valeur brute des immobilisations" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Salvage Value" -msgstr "Valeur de récupération" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "It is the amount you plan to have that you cannot depreciate." -msgstr "Il s'agit de la part non dépréciable de l'immobilisation." - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Computation Method" -msgstr "Méthode de calcul" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Choose the method to use to compute the amount of depreciation lines." -msgstr "" -"Choisissez la méthode à utiliser pour calculer le montant des lignes " -"d'amortissement." - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Linear: Calculated on basis of: Gross Value / Number of Depreciations" -msgstr "" -"* Linéaire: Calculé sur la base de : Valeur brute / Nombre d'Amortissements" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Degressive: Calculated on basis of: Residual Value * Degressive Factor" -msgstr "" -"* Dégressif : Calculé sur la base de: Valeur résiduelle * Taux " -"d'amortissement Dégressif" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Time Method Based On" -msgstr "Méthode temporelle basée sur" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Choose the method to use to compute the dates and number of entries." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Number of Entries: Fix the number of entries and the time between 2 " -"depreciations." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Ending Date: Choose the time between 2 depreciations and the date the " -"depreciations won't go beyond." -msgstr "" -"* Date de fin : Choisissez le temps entre 2 amortissements et la date au " -"delà de laquelle les amortissements cesseront." - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Prorata Temporis" -msgstr "Prorata temporis" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Indicates that the first depreciation entry for this asset have to be done " -"from the asset date (purchase date) instead of the first January / Start " -"date of fiscal year" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Number of Depreciations" -msgstr "Nombre d'amortissements" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "The number of depreciations needed to depreciate your asset" -msgstr "" -"Le nombre d'amortissements nécessaire pour amortir votre immobilisation" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Number of Months in a Period" -msgstr "Nombre de mois dans une période" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "The amount of time between two depreciations, in months" -msgstr "La durée entre deux amortissements, en mois" - #: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:88 msgid "Try creating an *Asset* in our online demonstration" msgstr "" @@ -5700,18 +5624,6 @@ msgstr "" "immobilisation, mais il n'enregistrera pas la transaction de vente qui doit " "être enregistrée par le biais d'une facture client." -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:146 -msgid "→ This has to be changed in Odoo: selling an asset should:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:148 -msgid "remove all \"Red\" lines" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:149 -msgid "create a new line that deprecate the whole residual value" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:3 msgid "How to manage a financial budget?" msgstr "Comment gérer un budget financier ?" @@ -6173,7 +6085,7 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/adviser/fiscalyear.rst:93 msgid ":doc:`../configuration/fiscal_year`" -msgstr "" +msgstr ":doc:`../configuration/fiscal_year`" #: ../../accounting/others/adviser/reverse_entry.rst:3 msgid "Reverse an accounting entry automatically" @@ -6571,12 +6483,6 @@ msgstr "" "costs\" consultez : *Comment facturer en \"reinvoice costs\"* (travail en " "cours)." -#: ../../accounting/others/analytic/timesheets.rst:79 -msgid "" -"Add a link, and the document is under Sales --> Invoicing Methods --> " -"Services --> How to invoices blabla" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/others/analytic/timesheets.rst:82 msgid "" "We save a Sales Order with the service product **External Consulting**. An " @@ -7556,6 +7462,26 @@ msgstr "" "pour gérer les clôtures d'exercices (et établir les écritures " "correspondantes)" +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "Can Create Asset" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Technical field specifying if the account can generate asset depending on " +"it's type. It is used in the account form view." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "Asset Model" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "" +"If this is selected, an asset will be created automatically when Journal " +"Items on this account are posted." +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 msgid "Tags" msgstr "Étiquettes" @@ -7590,6 +7516,16 @@ msgstr "" "les comptes banquaires, payabls/recevables par les comptes des " "vendeurs/clients." +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "Internal Group" +msgstr "Groupe interne" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "" +"The 'Internal Group' is used to filter accounts based on the internal group " +"set on the account type." +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 msgid "Allow Reconciliation" msgstr "Autoriser le lettrage" @@ -7644,7 +7580,7 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/configuration/fiscal_year.rst:34 msgid ":doc:`../adviser/fiscalyear`" -msgstr "" +msgstr ":doc:`../adviser/fiscalyear`" #: ../../accounting/others/inventory.rst:3 msgid "Inventory" @@ -8615,6 +8551,7 @@ msgid "Multi-currency invoices & Vendor Bills" msgstr "Factures clients et fournisseurs multi-devises" #: ../../accounting/others/multicurrencies/invoices_payments.rst:54 +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Invoices" msgstr "Factures" @@ -9603,18 +9540,18 @@ msgstr ":doc:`create`" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/application.rst:85 #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/default_taxes.rst:29 msgid ":doc:`taxcloud`" -msgstr "" +msgstr ":doc:`taxcloud`" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/application.rst:86 #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/create.rst:70 #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/default_taxes.rst:31 msgid ":doc:`tax_included`" -msgstr "" +msgstr ":doc:`tax_included`" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/application.rst:87 #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/default_taxes.rst:30 msgid ":doc:`B2B_B2C`" -msgstr "" +msgstr ":doc:`B2B_B2C`" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:3 msgid "How to manage cash basis taxes" @@ -10097,7 +10034,8 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:28 msgid "" "Go to :menuselection:`Invoicing / Accounting --> Configuration --> Settings`" -" and check *TaxCloud - Compute tax rates based on U.S. ZIP codes*." +" and check *TaxCloud - Compute tax rates based on U.S. ZIP codes* (note: " +"actually uses complete street address)." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:30 @@ -10112,7 +10050,7 @@ msgstr "" msgid "" "Click the Refresh Icon next to *Default Category* to import the TIC product " "categories from TaxCloud (Taxability Information Codes). Some categories may" -" imply specific rates." +" imply specific rates or attract product/service type exemptions." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:38 @@ -10122,8 +10060,8 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:40 msgid "" -"Set a specific TaxCloud Category on the *General Information* tab of the " -"Product, or on the Product Category." +"Set a specific TaxCloud TIC Category on the *General Information* tab of the" +" Product, or on the Product Category." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:42 @@ -10760,6 +10698,7 @@ msgid "Balance = Debit - Credit" msgstr "Solde = Débit - Crédit" #: ../../accounting/overview/main_concepts/memento.rst:84 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:83 msgid "Journal Entries" msgstr "Pièces comptables" @@ -12180,14 +12119,6 @@ msgstr "" "sur son bon de commande. (ou ce sera fait automatiquement à la fin de la " "semaine ou du mois si vous facturez toutes vos commandes en une fois)" -#: ../../accounting/payables/misc/employee_expense.rst:171 -msgid "" -"tip If you want to learn more; check the documentation page :doc: " -"../../../sale/invoicing/service/expense `*How to re-invoice expenses to your" -" customers* " -"`__" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/payables/misc/employee_expense.rst:176 msgid "Reimburse the employee" msgstr "Rembourser l'employé" @@ -12529,6 +12460,22 @@ msgstr "Présente des factures" msgid "Technical field used for usability purposes" msgstr "Champ technique utilisé à des fins ergonomiques" +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Technical field containing the invoice for which the payment has been " +"generated." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "" +"This does not especially correspond to the invoices reconciled with the " +"payment," +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "as it can have been generated first, and reconciled later" +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Hide Payment Method" msgstr "Masquer la méthode de paiement" @@ -12541,6 +12488,10 @@ msgstr "" "Champ technique utilisé pour cacher la méthode de paiement si le journal " "sélectionné a seulement une méthode possible qui est \"manuelle\"" +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Payment Method" +msgstr "Moyen de paiement" + #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Check: Pay bill by check and print it from Odoo." msgstr "" @@ -12560,6 +12511,29 @@ msgid "" "installed" msgstr "" +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Code" +msgstr "Code" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Technical field used to adapt the interface to the payment type selected." +msgstr "" +"Champ technique utilisé pour adapter l'interface au type de paiement " +"sélectionné ." + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Saved payment token" +msgstr "Jeton de paiement enregistré" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Note that tokens from acquirers set to only authorize transactions (instead " +"of capturing the amount) are not available." +msgstr "" +"Notez que les jetons issus d'acquéreurs pouvant uniquement autoriser les " +"transactions (et non capturer le montant) ne sont pas disponibles." + #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Show Partner Bank Account" msgstr "" @@ -12571,15 +12545,16 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 -msgid "Code" -msgstr "Code" +msgid "Require Partner Bank Account" +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "" -"Technical field used to adapt the interface to the payment type selected." +"Technical field used to know whether the field `partner_bank_account_id` " +"needs to be required or not in the payments form views" msgstr "" -"Champ technique utilisé pour adapter l'interface au type de paiement " -"sélectionné ." +"Champ technique utilisé pour savoir si le champ `partner_bank_account_id` " +"doit être obligatoire ou non dans les vues du formulaire de paiement" #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Check Number" @@ -12596,6 +12571,16 @@ msgstr "" " est mauvaise, vous pouvez la changer dans la page de configuration du " "journal." +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Journal Item Label" +msgstr "Étiquette de pièce" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Change label of the counterpart that will hold the payment difference" +msgstr "" +"Changer le libellé de la contrepartie qui retiendra la différence de " +"paiement" + #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:80 msgid "Try paying a supplier bill with a check" msgstr "Essayez de payer une facture fournisseur avec un chèque" @@ -12970,7 +12955,6 @@ msgstr "" "transfer." #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:10 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:10 msgid "" "SEPA is supported by the banks of the 28 EU member states as well as " "Iceland, Norway, Switzerland, Andorra, Monaco and San Marino." @@ -13189,14 +13173,6 @@ msgstr "" msgid ":doc:`check`" msgstr ":doc:`check`" -#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:134 -msgid "How to define a new bank?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:135 -msgid "How to reconcile bank statements?" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/bills_or_receipts.rst:3 msgid "When should I use supplier bills or purchase receipts?" msgstr "" @@ -13736,7 +13712,7 @@ msgid "Account Receivables" msgstr "Comptes Débiteurs" #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices.rst:3 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:53 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:77 msgid "Customer Invoices" msgstr "Factures clients" @@ -13890,6 +13866,162 @@ msgid "" " If needed, a rounding will be applied to the invoice." msgstr "" +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:3 +msgid "Credit Notes and Refunds" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:4 +msgid "" +"A **credit note**, or **credit memo**, is a document issued to a customer " +"that notifies them that they have been credited a certain amount." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:11 +msgid "There are several reasons that can lead to a credit note, such as:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:9 +msgid "a mistake in the invoice" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:10 +msgid "a return of the goods, or a rejection of the services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:11 +msgid "the goods delivered are damaged" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:14 +msgid "" +"Issuing a credit note is the only legal way to cancel, refund or modify a " +"validated invoice. Don’t forget to *register the payment* afterward if you " +"need to send money back to your customer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:20 +msgid "Issue a Credit Note" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:21 +msgid "" +"You can create a credit note from scratch by going to " +":menuselection:`Accounting --> Customers --> Credit Notes`, and by clicking " +"on *Create*. Filling the Credit Note’s form works the same way as the " +"Invoice’s form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:26 +msgid "" +"However, most of the time, credit notes are generated directly from the " +"invoices they are related to." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:29 +msgid "To do so, open the *Customer Invoice*, and click on *Add Credit Note*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:37 +msgid "You can choose between three options:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:35 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:44 +msgid "Partial Refund" +msgstr "Remboursement partiel" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:36 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:55 +msgid "Full Refund" +msgstr "Remboursement intégral" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:37 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:66 +msgid "Full refund and new draft invoice" +msgstr "Avoir intégral et nouvelle facture brouillon" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:40 +msgid "" +"Credit Notes’ numbers start with “R” and are followed by the number of the " +"document they are related to (e.g., RINV/2019/0004)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:45 +msgid "" +"Odoo creates a draft credit note already prefilled with all the necessary " +"information from the original invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:48 +msgid "" +"This is the option to choose to do a partial refund, or if you want to " +"modify any detail on the credit note." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:52 +msgid "" +"This is the only option available for invoices that are already marked as " +"*Paid*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:56 +msgid "" +"Odoo creates a credit note, automatically validates it, and reconciles the " +"original invoice with it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:62 +msgid "" +"This is the option to choose to do a full refund or cancel a validated " +"invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:67 +msgid "" +"Odoo creates a credit note, automatically validates it, reconciles the " +"original invoice with it, and open a new draft invoice prefilled with the " +"same details from the original invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:71 +msgid "" +"This is the option to choose to modify the content of a validated invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:74 +msgid "Record a Vendor Refund" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:75 +msgid "" +"**Vendor Refunds** are recorded the same way you would do with invoices’ " +"credit notes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:77 +msgid "" +"You can either create a credit note from scratch by going to " +":menuselection:`Accounting --> Vendors --> Refund`, and by clicking on " +"*Create*, or by opening the validated *Vendor Bill*, and clicking on *Add " +"Credit Note*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:84 +msgid "" +"Issuing a credit note from an invoice creates a **reverse entry** that " +"zeroes out the journal items generated by the original invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:87 +msgid "Here is an example of an invoice’s journal entry:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:92 +msgid "" +"And here is the credit note’s journal entry generated to reverse the " +"original invoice above:" +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/deferred_revenues.rst:3 msgid "Deferred revenues: how to automate them?" msgstr "Revenus différés: comment les automatiser ?" @@ -14363,10 +14495,6 @@ msgid "This process is good for both services and physical products." msgstr "" "Cette méthode est valable aussi bien pour les services que les marchandises." -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:44 -msgid "Read more: *Invoice based on sales orders.*" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:47 msgid "Sales Order ‣ Delivery Order ‣ Invoice" msgstr "Commandes Client ‣ Bon de Livraison ‣ Facture" @@ -14395,10 +14523,6 @@ msgstr "" " (livraison partielle et le reste plus tard), le client recevra deux " "factures, une pour chaque bordereau de livraison." -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:59 -msgid "Read more: *Invoice based on delivery orders.*" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:62 msgid "eCommerce Order ‣ Invoice" msgstr "Commande eCommerce ‣ Facturation" @@ -14473,12 +14597,6 @@ msgstr "" "matériel. Quant aux entreprises de services qui facturent un prix fixe, " "elles utilisent une commande ordinaire." -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:94 -msgid "" -"Read more: - *How to invoice based on time and material?* - *How to manage" -" contracts and invoicing plans?*" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:99 msgid "Recurring Contracts ‣ Invoices" msgstr "Contrats Récurrents ‣ Factures" @@ -14493,10 +14611,6 @@ msgstr "" " La fréquence de la facturation et les services / produits facturés sont " "définis dans le contrat." -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:105 -msgid "Read more: *Subscription based invoicing.*" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:111 msgid "Creating an invoice manually" msgstr "Création d'une facture manuellement" @@ -14602,12 +14716,6 @@ msgstr "" "soit le solde. (Évitez 50% sous 10 jours et 50% sous 21 jours, parce que, " "avec les arrondis, ça pourrait ne pas donner exactement 100%)" -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/payment_terms.rst:31 -msgid "" -"screenshot payment term forms, after QDP have commited the change planned on" -" this object" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/payment_terms.rst:35 msgid "Using Payment Terms" msgstr "Utilisation des Conditions de Paiement" @@ -14692,129 +14800,193 @@ msgstr "" msgid ":doc:`cash_discounts`" msgstr ":doc:`cash_discounts`" -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:3 -msgid "How to edit or refund an invoice?" -msgstr "Comment modifier ou rembourser une facture ?" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:4 -msgid "" -"In Odoo, it's not possible to modify an invoice that has been validated and " -"sent to the customer. If a mistake was made on a validated invoice, the " -"legal way to handle that is to refund the invoice, reconcile it with the " -"original invoice to close them and create a new invoice." -msgstr "" -"Dans Odoo, il est impossible de modifier une facture qui a été validée et " -"envoyée au client. Si une erreur a été faite sur une facture validée, le " -"moyen légal pour traiter cela est de faire un avoir sur la facture, de le " -"rapprocher avec la facture originale pour les fermer et de créer une " -"nouvelle facture." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:10 -msgid "Modifying a validated invoice" -msgstr "Modification d'une facture validée" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:12 -msgid "" -"If you need to modify an existing invoice, use the Refund Invoice button on " -"the invoice. In the refund method field, select \"Modify: create a refund, " -"reconcile, and create a new draft invoice\"." -msgstr "" -"Si vous avez besoin de modifier une facture existante, utilisez le bouton " -"Avoir sur la facture. Dans le champ Méthode d'avoir, sélectionnez \"Modifier" -" : créer un avoir, le rapprocher et créer une nouvelle facture\"." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:19 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:37 -msgid "Odoo will automatically:" -msgstr "Odoo va automatiquement :" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:21 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:39 -msgid "Create a refund for your invoice" -msgstr "Créer un avoir sur votre facture" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:22 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:40 -msgid "" -"Reconcile the refund invoice with the original invoice (marking both as " -"Paid)" -msgstr "Rapprocher l'avoir avec la facture (en les marquant Payées)" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:23 -msgid "Create a new draft invoice you can modify" -msgstr "Créer une nouvelle facture brouillon que vous pouvez modifier" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:25 -msgid "" -"Then, you can modify the draft invoice and validate it once it's correct." -msgstr "" -"Ensuite, vous pouvez modifier la facture brouillon et la valider une fois " -"qu'elle est correcte." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:28 -msgid "Cancelling an invoice" -msgstr "Annulation d'une facture" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:30 -msgid "" -"If you need to cancel an existing invoice, use the Refund Invoice button on " -"the invoice. In the refund method field, select \"Cancel: create a refund " -"and reconcile\"." -msgstr "" -"Si vous devez annuler une facture existante, utilisez le bouton Avoir de la " -"facture. Dans le champ Méthode d'avoir, sélectionnez « Annuler: créer " -"l'avoir et lettrer »." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:42 -msgid "" -"Nothing else needs to be done. You can send the refund by regular mail or " -"email to your customer, if you already sent the original invoice." -msgstr "" -"Il n' y a presque rien d'autre à faire : si vous aviez déjà envoyé la " -"facture originale à votre client, vous devez juste lui envoyer l'avoir par " -"la poste ou par courriel." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:46 -msgid "Refunding part of an invoice" -msgstr "Remboursement d'une partie d'une facture" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:48 -msgid "" -"If you need to refund an existing invoice partially, use the Refund Invoice " -"button on the invoice. In the refund method field, select \"Create a draft " -"refund\"." -msgstr "" -"Si vous devez rembourser partiellement une facture existante, utilisez le " -"bouton Avoir de la facture. Dans le champ Méthode d'avoir, sélectionnez « " -"Créer un avoir en brouillon »." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:55 -msgid "" -"Odoo will automatically create a draft refund. You may modify the refund " -"(example: remove the lines you do not want to refund) and validate it. Then," -" send the refund by regular mail or email to your customer." -msgstr "" -"Odoo crée automatiquement un avoir brouillon. Vous pouvez le modifier (par " -"ex. : supprimer les lignes que vous ne souhaitez pas rembourser) et le " -"valider. Ensuite, envoyez l'avoir par la poste ou par courriel à votre " -"client." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:61 -msgid "" -"Refunding an invoice is different from refunding a payment. Usually, a " -"refund invoice is sent before the customer has done a payment. If the " -"customer has already paid, they should be reimbursed by doing a customer " -"payment refund." -msgstr "" -"Un avoir sur une facture est différent d'un remboursement de paiement. " -"Habituellement, un avoir est envoyé avant que le client ait payé. Si le " -"client a déjà payé, il doit être remboursé en faisant un remboursement de " -"paiement client." - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments.rst:3 msgid "Customer Payments" msgstr "Paiements client" +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:3 +msgid "Batch Payments: SEPA Direct Debit (SDD)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:4 +msgid "" +"SEPA, the Single Euro Payments Area, is a payment-integration initiative of " +"the European Union for simplification of bank transfers denominated in EURO." +" With **SEPA Direct Debit**, your customers can sign a **mandate** that " +"authorizes you to collect future payments from their bank accounts " +"automatically." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:10 +msgid "" +"You can record your customer mandates in Odoo, and generate XML files " +"containing pending payments made with an SDD mandate." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:0 +msgid "" +"SDD is supported by all SEPA countries, which includes the 28 member states " +"of the European Union as well as additional countries." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:0 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:123 +msgid "" +"`List of all SEPA countries. `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:19 +msgid "" +"Go to :menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Settings` nd activate" +" the **SEPA Direct Debit (SDD)** feature. Enter the **Creditor Identifier** " +"of your company. This number is provided by your bank, or the authority " +"responsible for delivering them." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:28 +msgid "SEPA Direct Debit Mandates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:30 +msgid "Create a mandate" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:31 +msgid "" +"The SEPA Direct Debit Mandate is the document that your customers sign to " +"authorize you to collect money directly from their bank accounts." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:34 +msgid "" +"To create a new one, go to :menuselection:`Accounting --> Customers --> " +"Direct Debit Mandates`, click on *Create*, and fill out the new mandate’s " +"form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:41 +msgid "" +"First, export the PDF file by clicking on *Print*. It is then up to your " +"customer to sign this document. Once done, upload the signed file in the " +"**Original Document** field, and click on *Validate* to start running the " +"mandate." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:47 +msgid "" +"First, make sure, that the **IBAN bank accounts details** are correctly " +"recorded on the debtor’s contact form, under the *Accounting* tab, and in " +"your own *Bank Account* settings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:52 +msgid "Close or revoke a mandate" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Direct Debit mandates are closed automatically after their *End Date*. If " +"this field is left blank, then the mandate keeps being *Active* until it is " +"*Closed* or *Revoked*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:60 +msgid "" +"Clicking on **Close** updates the mandate’s end day to the current day. This" +" means that invoices made after the present day won’t be processed " +"automatically with an SDD payment." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:64 +msgid "" +"Clicking on **Revoke** disables the mandate immediately. No SDD payment can " +"be registered anymore, regardless of the invoice’s date. However, payments " +"that have already been registered will still be included to the next SDD XML" +" file." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:70 +msgid "" +"Once a mandate has been *closed* or *revoked*, it cannot be reactivated. If " +"a customer requires to pay with SDD payments again, you will have to create " +"a new mandate from scratch." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:75 +msgid "Get paid with SDD Batch Payments" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:78 +msgid "" +"All new posted invoice issued to customers with an active mandate will " +"automatically register payment and have their status marked as *Paid*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:82 +msgid "" +"If you have unpaid invoices that could be paid with a new mandate, it is " +"still possible to do it. Go on the invoice, click on *Register Payment* and " +"choose *SEPA Direct Debit* as payment method." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:87 +msgid "Generate SEPA Direct Debit XML files to submit payments" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:88 +msgid "" +"To submit your SDD payments to your bank, you will first generate an **XML " +"file** that can be uploaded directly to your bank interface." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:91 +msgid "" +"The files generated by Odoo follow the SEPA Direct Debit **PAIN.008.001.02**" +" specifications as required by the SEPA customer-to-bank Implementation " +"Guidelines, which ensures compatibility with the banks." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:95 +msgid "" +"To generate your XML file for the pending SDD payments, go to the related " +"*bank journal* on your *Accounting dashboard*, then click on *Direct Debit " +"Payments to Collect*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:102 +msgid "" +"Select all the payments in the list that you want to include in your SDD XML" +" file, then click on *Action* and select *Create Batch Payment*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:108 +msgid "" +"Odoo then takes you to your *Batch Payment*’s form. Click on *Validate* and " +"then download the SDD XML file." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:114 +msgid "Finally, upload this file to your bank to process the payments." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:117 +msgid "" +"You can retrieve all the generated SDD XML files by going to " +":menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Customers --> Batch " +"Payments`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:121 +msgid ":doc:`../../bank/setup/create_bank_account`" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:122 +msgid "" +"`Odoo Academy: SEPA Direct Debit Mandates (SDD) " +"`_" +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/check.rst:3 msgid "How to register customer payments by checks?" msgstr "Comment enregistrer les paiements par chèques des clients ?" @@ -15433,128 +15605,6 @@ msgid "" "negative number of due days." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:3 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:29 -msgid "Get paid with SEPA" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:5 -msgid "" -"SEPA, the Single Euro Payments Area, is a payment-integration initiative of " -"the European Union for simplification of bank transfers denominated in EURO." -" SEPA Direct Debit allows you to withdraw money from the bank accounts of " -"your customers with their approval." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:13 -msgid "" -"With Odoo, you can record customer mandates, generate an SDD XML file " -"containing customer payments and upload it in your bank interface. The file " -"follows the SEPA Direct Debit PAIN.008.001.02 specifications. This is a " -"well-defined standard that makes consensus among banks." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:21 -msgid "" -"Go in :menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Settings` and " -"activate the SEPA Direct Debit (SDD) Feature. Enter the Creditor Identifier " -"of your company. This number is provided by your bank." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:32 -msgid "Direct Debit Mandates" -msgstr "Mandats de prélèvement automatique" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:34 -msgid "" -"Before withdrawing money from a customer bank account, your customer has to " -"sign a mandate. Go in :menuselection:`Accounting --> Sales --> Direct Debit " -"Mandates` and create a new mandate." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:41 -msgid "SEPA Direct Debit only works between IBAN Bank Accounts." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:43 -msgid "" -"Once you have entered all the information in the customer mandate, you can " -"print it and ask your customer to sign it. Once it is done, you can upload " -"the mandate signed by your customer on the mandate in Odoo." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:50 -msgid "You can now validate the mandate." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:55 -msgid "Let's create an invoice for that customer." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:57 -msgid "" -"When you will validate this invoice, the payment will be automatically " -"generated and your invoice will be directly marked as paid." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:61 -msgid "" -"If you already had some invoices for that customer that could be paid using " -"that mandate, it's still possible to do it. Go on the invoice, click on " -"register payment and choose the Sepa Direct Debit as payment method." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:67 -msgid "Generate SDD Files" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:69 -msgid "" -"You can generate the SDD File with all the customer payments to send to your" -" bank directly from the accounting dashboard :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:75 -msgid "" -"You select the payments in the list that you want to include in your SDD " -"File, click on action and select \"Generate Direct Debit XML\"." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:81 -msgid "" -"You can now download the XML file generated by Odoo and upload it in your " -"bank interface." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:85 -msgid "" -"You can retrieve all the generated XML by activating the developer mode and " -"going in :menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Payments --> SDD " -"Payment File`." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:89 -msgid "Close or revoke a mandate" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:91 -msgid "" -"The Direct Debit mandate will be closed automatically once the end date " -"defined on it is reached. However, you can **close** a mandate earlier than " -"initially planned. To do that, simply go on the mandate and click on the " -"\"Close\" button.The end date of the mandate will be updated to today's " -"date. This means you will not be able to pay invoices with an invoice date " -"superior to this end date. Be careful, once a mandate is closed, it cannot " -"be reopened." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:99 -msgid "" -"You can also **revoke** a mandate. In that case, you won't be able to pay " -"any invoice using that mandate anymore, no matter the invoice date.To do " -"that, simply go on the mandate and click on the \"Revoke\" button." -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/recording.rst:3 msgid "What are the different ways to record a payment?" msgstr "Quelles sont les différentes façons d'enregistrer un paiement ?" diff --git a/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po index 35670ac49..82226a5af 100644 --- a/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po +++ b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po @@ -4,21 +4,21 @@ # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # # Translators: -# Martin Trigaux, 2018 -# Xavier Belmere , 2018 -# Jérôme Tanché , 2018 -# Michell Portrait , 2019 +# Xavier Belmere , 2019 # Sébastien BÜHL , 2019 +# Michell Portrait , 2019 +# Jérôme Tanché , 2019 # Renaud de Colombel , 2019 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 12.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-07-03 08:44+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2018-10-19 08:14+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: Renaud de Colombel , 2019\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Martin Trigaux, 2019\n" "Language-Team: French (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/fr/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -42,25 +42,25 @@ msgstr "Convertir les pistes en opportunités" msgid "" "The system can generate leads instead of opportunities, in order to add a " "qualification step before converting a *Lead* into an *Opportunity* and " -"assigning to the right sales people. You can activate this mode from the CRM" -" Settings. It applies to all your sales channels by default. But you can " -"make it specific for specific channels from their configuration form." +"assigning to the right sales people." msgstr "" -"Le système peut générer des pistes plutôt que des opportunités, afin " -"d'ajouter une étape de qualification avant de convertir une *Piste* en " -"*Opportunité* et de l'assigner à la bonne équipe commerciale. Vous pouvez " -"activer ce mode dans la Configuration du module CRM. Il s'appliquera par " -"défaut à tous vos canaux de vente. Vous pouvez cependant l'adapter à des " -"canaux particuliers depuis leur formulaire de configuration." -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:13 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:9 +msgid "" +"You can activate this mode from the CRM Settings. It applies to all your " +"sales channels by default. But you can make it specific for specific " +"channels from their configuration form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:14 #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:41 -#: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:13 ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:12 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:8 ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:13 +#: ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:12 #: ../../crm/track_leads/prospect_visits.rst:12 msgid "Configuration" msgstr "Configuration" -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:15 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:16 msgid "" "For this feature to work, go to :menuselection:`CRM --> Configuration --> " "Settings` and activate the *Leads* feature." @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ msgstr "" "Pour activer cette fonctionnalité, allez dans :menuselection:`CRM --> " "Configuration --> Configuration` et cochez la case *Pistes*." -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:21 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:22 msgid "" "You will now have a new submenu *Leads* under *Leads* where they will " "aggregate." @@ -76,11 +76,11 @@ msgstr "" "Vous aurez maintenant un nouveau sous-menu *Pistes* sous *Pistes* où elles " "viendront s'ajouter." -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:28 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:29 msgid "Convert a lead into an opportunity" msgstr "Convertir une piste en opportunité" -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:30 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:31 msgid "" "When you click on a *Lead* you will have the option to convert it to an " "opportunity and decide if it should still be assigned to the same " @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ msgstr "" "au/à la même canal/personne et si vous avez besoin de créer un nouveau " "client." -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:37 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:38 msgid "" "If you already have an opportunity with that customer Odoo will " "automatically offer you to merge with that opportunity. In the same manner, " @@ -103,6 +103,44 @@ msgstr "" "Odoo vous proposera automatiquement de créer un lien vers un client qui " "existerait déjà." +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:44 +msgid "Merge opportunities" +msgstr "Fusionner les opportunités" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:46 +msgid "" +"Odoo will also automatically propose to merge opportunities if they have the" +" same email address. When merging opportunities, Odoo merges the information" +" into the opportunity which was created first, giving priority to the " +"information present on the first opportunity." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:51 +msgid "" +"No information is lost: data from the other opportunity is logged in the " +"chatter and the information fields for easy access." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:57 +msgid "" +"Would you find a duplicate yourself, ...you can also merge opportunities or " +"leads even if the system doesn't propose it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:60 +msgid "" +"Here’s how, from the list view. Select the opportunities or leads you want " +"to merge and the action button will appear. Then, you can select merge." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:66 +msgid "..note::" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:67 +msgid "It is also possible to merge more than 2 opportunities or leads." +msgstr "" + #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_email.rst:3 msgid "Generate leads/opportunities from emails" msgstr "Générer des pistes/opportunités à partir d'e-mails" @@ -166,12 +204,9 @@ msgstr "|image0|\\ |image1|" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:16 msgid "" -"With the CRM app installed, you benefit from ready-to-use contact form on " +"With the CRM app installed, you benefit from a ready-to-use contact form on " "your Odoo website that will generate leads/opportunities automatically." msgstr "" -"Quand l'application CRM est installée, vous profitez, sur votre site web " -"Odoo, d'un formulaire de contact prêt à l'emploi qui génère automatiquement " -"pistes/opportunités." #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:23 msgid "" @@ -192,52 +227,35 @@ msgstr "Créer un formulaire de contact personnalisé" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:34 msgid "" "You may want to know more from your visitor when they use the contact form " -"to contact you. You will then need to build a custom contact form on your " -"website. Those contact forms can generate multiple types of records in the " -"system (emails, leads/opportunities, project tasks, helpdesk tickets, " -"etc...)" +"to you will need to build a custom contact form on your website. These " +"contact forms can generate multiple types of records in the system (emails, " +"leads/opportunities, project tasks, helpdesk tickets, etc.)" msgstr "" -"Vous pouvez vouloir en apprendre plus sur vos visiteurs quand ils utilisent " -"le formulaire de contact pour vous joindre. Vous aurez alors besoin de " -"construire un formulaire de contact personnalisé sur votre site web. Ces " -"formulaires de contact peuvent générer de nombreux types d'enregistrements " -"dans le système (e-mails, pistes/opportunités, tâches, tickets de demande " -"d'assistance, etc…)" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:43 msgid "" -"You will need to install the free *Form Builder* module. Only available in " +"You will need to install the free *Form Builder* module, only available in " "Odoo Enterprise." msgstr "" -"Vous aurez besoin d'installer le module gratuit *Constructeur de " -"formulaires*. Accessible uniquement dans Odoo Entreprise." #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:52 msgid "" -"From any page you want your contact form to be in, in edit mode, drag the " -"form builder in the page and you will be able to add all the fields you " -"wish." +"First, go to the page where you want to put your contact form. In edit mode," +" drag the form builder onto the page, and you will be able to add all the " +"fields you wish." msgstr "" -"Depuis n'importe quelle page où vous voulez inclure votre formulaire de " -"contact, placez-vous en mode édition et glissez/déposez le constructeur de " -"formulaire. Vous pourrez alors ajouter tous les champs que vous souhaitez." #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:59 msgid "" -"By default any new contact form will send an email, you can switch to " +"By default, any new contact form will send an email. You can switch to " "lead/opportunity generation in *Change Form Parameters*." msgstr "" -"Par défaut, tout nouveau formulaire de contact enverra un e-mail, vous " -"pouvez remplacer ce mécanisme par la génération de piste/opportunité dans " -"*Modifier les paramètres du formulaire*." #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:63 msgid "" -"If the same visitor uses the contact form twice, the second information will" -" be added to the first lead/opportunity in the chatter." +"If the same visitor uses the contact form twice, the second entry will be " +"added to the first lead/opportunity in the chatter." msgstr "" -"Si un même visiteur utilise le formulaire de contact deux fois, la seconde " -"information sera ajoutée à la première piste/opportunité dans le chatter." #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:67 msgid "Generate leads instead of opportunities" @@ -245,14 +263,108 @@ msgstr "Générer des pistes plutôt que des opportunités" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:69 msgid "" -"When using a contact form, it is advised to use a qualification step before " -"assigning to the right sales people. To do so, activate *Leads* in CRM " -"settings and refer to :doc:`convert`." +"When using a contact form, you should use a qualification step before " +"assigning the form to the right sales people. To do so, activate *Leads* in " +"CRM settings and refer to :doc:`convert`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:3 +msgid "Lead mining" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:4 +msgid "" +"In any business, getting quality leads is essential to keep the business " +"growing. Lead mining allows you to generate leads from scratch directly from" +" your database. Target your leads based on a set of criteria such as the " +"country, the size of the company, the industry your leads are coming from to" +" make them relevant to your business." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:10 +msgid "" +"For this feature to work, go to :menuselection:`CRM → Configuration → " +"Settings` and activate the **Lead Mining** feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:17 +msgid "Start generating leads" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:18 +msgid "" +"You will now have a new button **Generate Leads** available in your " +"pipeline. You are also able to create lead mining requests from the " +"**Configuration → Lead Mining Requests** and trough **Leads → Leads** where " +"you have the **Generate Leads** button" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:25 +msgid "" +"From there, click on the **Generate Leads** button, a window where you will " +"be able to pick your criteria will pop up." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:32 +msgid "" +"When choosing to target Companied and their contacts you can choose the " +"contacts you are getting based on Role or Seniority. When getting contact " +"information make sure to be aware of the latest EU regulation, get more " +"information about General Data Protection Regulation on `Odoo GDPR " +"`__," +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:37 +msgid "" +"You can decide to filter the leads you are getting depending on the size " +"(number of employees) of the companies. You can pick the countries your " +"leads are coming from. It is possible to pick multiple countries. You can " +"pick the industries your leads are coming from. It is possible to pick " +"multiple countries." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:41 +msgid "" +"You can choose the salesperson and the Salesteam the lead will be assigned " +"to. You can also add tags to track your generated leads." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:45 +msgid "The generated leads will have the name of the company." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:48 +msgid "Pricing" +msgstr "Tarif" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:49 +msgid "" +"This is an In-App Purchase feature, each generated lead will cost you one " +"credit. If you choose to get contact information each contact will also cost" +" us one additional credit. Here is the pricing for this `feature " +"`__, To buy credits you can " +"either go to CRM > Configuration > Settings > Buy Credits; or go to Settings" +" > In-App Purchases>View my Services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:62 +msgid "" +"The blue box will automatically tell you how many credits are going to be " +"consumed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:65 +msgid "" +"If you are on Odoo Online (SAAS) and have the Enterprise version, you " +"benefit from free trial credits to test the feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:67 +msgid "" +"More information about `In-App Purchases " +"`__," +" (IAP)." msgstr "" -"Lorsque vous utilisez un formulaire de contact, il est recommandé de passer " -"par une étape de qualification avant d'assigner ces informations à la bonne " -"équipe commerciale. Pour ce faire, activez *Pistes* dans les paramètres du " -"CRM et reportez-vous à :doc:`convert`." #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/send_quotes.rst:3 msgid "Send quotations" diff --git a/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po index 3b79dc649..96c656247 100644 --- a/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po +++ b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po @@ -3,14 +3,20 @@ # This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # +# Translators: +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Lucas Deliege , 2019 +# Rémi FRANÇOIS , 2019 +# Jérôme Tanché , 2019 +# #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 11.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-07-27 11:08+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" -"Last-Translator: Lucas Deliege , 2018\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Jérôme Tanché , 2019\n" "Language-Team: French (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/fr/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -111,68 +117,152 @@ msgstr "Mettre à jour" #: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:53 msgid "" -"Make sure to be connected to the database you want to upgrade and access the" -" database management page. On the line of the database you want to upgrade, " -"click on the \"Upgrade\" button." +"Upgrading your database to a newer version of Odoo is a complex operation " +"that require time and caution. It is extremely important that you fully test" +" the process before upgrading your production database." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:57 +msgid "" +"Odoo releases new versions regularly (at least once a year), and upgrading " +"your database to enjoy new Odoo features is part of the Odoo Online " +"experience." msgstr "" #: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:60 msgid "" -"You have the possibility to choose the target version of the upgrade. By " -"default, we select the highest available version available for your " -"database; if you were already in the process of testing a migration, we will" -" automatically select the version you were already testing (even if we " -"released a more recent version during your tests)." +"The upgrade process can take some time, especially if you use multiple apps " +"or apps that manage sensitive data (e.g. Accounting, Inventory, etc.). In " +"general, the 'smaller' the database, the quickest the upgrade. A single-user" +" database that uses only CRM will be processed faster than a multi-company, " +"multi-user database that uses Accounting, Sales, Purchase and Manufacturing." msgstr "" #: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:66 msgid "" -"By clicking on the \"Test upgrade\" button an upgrade request will be " -"generated. If our automated system does not encounter any problem, you will " -"receive a \"Test\" version of your upgraded database." +"Unfortunately, it is impossible to give time estimates for every upgrade " +"request, since Odoo.com will test manually every database upgrade at least " +"once and will need to correct/adapt changes made to the standard Odoo Apps " +"(e.g. through Studio or through a Success Pack) on a case-by-case basis. " +"This can make the process slower, since requests are treated in the order " +"they arrive. This is especially true in the months following the release of " +"a new major version, which can lengthen the upgrade delay significantly." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:73 -msgid "" -"If our automatic system detect an issue during the creation of your test " -"database, our dedicated team will have to work on it. You will be notified " -"by email and the process will take up to 4 weeks." +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:74 +msgid "The upgrade process is quite simple from your point of view:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:76 +msgid "You request a test upgrade" msgstr "" #: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:77 msgid "" -"You will have the possibility to test it for 1 month. Inspect your data " -"(e.g. accounting reports, stock valuation, etc.), check that all your usual " -"flows work correctly (CRM flow, Sales flow, etc.)." +"Once all tests have been validated **by you**, you upgrade your actual " +"database" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:79 +msgid "" +"The process to request a test or a production (*actual*) upgrade is the " +"same." msgstr "" #: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:81 msgid "" -"Once you are ready and that everything is correct in your test migration, " -"you can click again on the Upgrade button, and confirm by clicking on " -"Upgrade (the button with the little rocket!) to switch your production " -"database to the new version." +"First, make sure to be connected to the database you want to upgrade and " +"access the `database management page `__." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:89 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:84 +msgid "" +"You have to have an active session with access to the Settings app in the " +"database you want to upgrade for the button to be visible." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:87 +msgid "" +"On the line of the database you want to upgrade, click on the \"Cog\" menu. " +"If an newer version of Odoo is available, you will see an 'Upgrade' button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:94 +msgid "" +"You have the possibility to choose the target version of the upgrade. By " +"default, we select the highest available version available for your " +"database; if you were already in the process of testing an upgrade, we will " +"automatically select the version you were already testing (even if we " +"released a more recent version during your tests)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:103 +msgid "" +"By clicking on the \"Test upgrade\" button, an upgrade request will be " +"generated. Only one request can be made at time for each database; if a " +"request has already been made, you will see an 'Upgrade Queued' note instead" +" and asking another request will not be possible." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:108 +msgid "" +"A test upgrade will create a copy of your database, upgrade it and make it " +"available to you automatically once successful. If this is the first test " +"you request for this particular database, a manual testing phase will be " +"done by Odoo.com - this could take time (up to several weeks). Subsequent " +"requests will not go through that manual testing step and will usually be " +"made available in a few hours. Once the test database is available, you " +"should receive an e-mail with the URL of the test database." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:116 +msgid "" +"**Testing your database is the most important step of the upgrade process!**" +" Even though we test all upgrades manually, we do not know your work " +"processes. A change in standard worfklows of Odoo in new versions might " +"require you to change internal processes, or some of the customizations you " +"made through Odoo Studio might now work properly. *It is up to you to make " +"sure that everything works as it should!* You can report issues with your " +"test database through our `Support page `__." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:124 +msgid "" +"Make sure to do one last test of your upgrade right before the final upgrade" +" (e.g. the day before) to ensure everything will run smoothly. Downgrading " +"is not possible and post-poning an upgrade is always easier than being " +"prevented to work by an upgrade issue after the fact!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:129 +msgid "" +"Once you are ready and you have validated all your tests, you can click " +"again on the Upgrade button and confirm by clicking on Upgrade (the button " +"with the little rocket!) to switch your production database to the new " +"version. Your database will then be taken offline within the next 10 minutes" +" and will be upgraded automatically; you receive a confirmation e-mail once " +"the process is completed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:139 msgid "" "Your database will be taken offline during the upgrade (usually between " "30min up to several hours for big databases), so make sure to plan your " "migration during non-business hours." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:96 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:146 msgid "Duplicating a database" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:98 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:148 msgid "" "Database duplication, renaming, custom DNS, etc. is not available for trial " "databases on our Online platform. Paid Databases and \"One App Free\" " "database can duplicate without problem." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:103 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:153 msgid "" "In the line of the database you want to duplicate, you will have a few " "buttons. To duplicate your database, just click **Duplicate**. You will have" @@ -183,37 +273,37 @@ msgstr "" "cliquer sur **Dupliquer**. Vous devrez donner un nom à votre copie, puis " "cliquez sur **Dupliquer la base de données**." -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:110 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:160 msgid "" "If you do not check the \"For testing purposes\" checkbox when duplicating a" " database, all external communication will remain active:" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:113 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:163 msgid "Emails are sent" msgstr "Les courriels sont envoyés" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:115 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:165 msgid "" "Payments are processed (in the e-commerce or Subscriptions apps, for " "example)" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:118 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:168 msgid "Delivery orders (shipping providers) are sent" msgstr "Les bons de livraison (fournisseurs d'expédition) sont envoyés" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:120 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:170 msgid "Etc." msgstr "Etc." -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:122 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:172 msgid "" "Make sure to check the checkbox \"For testing purposes\" if you want these " "behaviours to be disabled." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:125 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:175 msgid "" "After a few seconds, you will be logged in your duplicated database. Notice " "that the url uses the name you chose for your duplicated database." @@ -222,16 +312,16 @@ msgstr "" "données. Notez que l'URL utilise le nom que vous avez choisi lors de la " "duplication." -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:129 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:179 msgid "Duplicate databases expire automatically after 15 days." msgstr "" "Les copies de bases de données expirent automatiquement après 15 jours." -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:137 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:187 msgid "Rename a Database" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:139 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:189 msgid "" "To rename your database, make sure you are connected to the database you " "want to rename, access the `database management page " @@ -239,15 +329,15 @@ msgid "" "to give a new name to your database, then click **Rename Database**." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:150 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:200 msgid "Deleting a Database" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:152 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:202 msgid "You can only delete databases of which you are the administrator." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:154 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:204 msgid "" "When you delete your database all the data will be permanently lost. The " "deletion is instant and for all the Users. We advise you to do an instant " @@ -255,45 +345,45 @@ msgid "" "backup may be several hours old at that point." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:160 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:210 msgid "" "From the `database management page `__, " "on the line of the database you want to delete, click on the \"Delete\" " "button." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:167 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:217 msgid "" "Read carefully the warning message that will appear and proceed only if you " "fully understand the implications of deleting a database:" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:173 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:223 msgid "" "After a few seconds, the database will be deleted and the page will reload " "automatically." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:177 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:227 msgid "" "If you need to re-use this database name, it will be immediately available." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:179 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:229 msgid "" "It is not possible to delete a database if it is expired or linked to a " "Subscription. In these cases contact `Odoo Support " "`__" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:183 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:233 msgid "" "If you want to delete your Account, please contact `Odoo Support " "`__" msgstr "" #: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:7 -msgid "On-premise Database management" +msgid "On-premises Database management" msgstr "" #: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:10 @@ -320,8 +410,9 @@ msgid "" "message:" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:31 ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:97 -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:130 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:31 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:110 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:143 msgid "Solutions" msgstr "" @@ -365,7 +456,7 @@ msgid "Do you have the updated version of Odoo 9?" msgstr "" #: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:61 -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:190 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:176 msgid "" "From July 2016 onward, Odoo 9 now automatically change the uuid of a " "duplicated database; a manual operation is no longer required." @@ -395,41 +486,66 @@ msgid "" "invoicing proceed effortlessly for your and for us." msgstr "" +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:80 +msgid "Check your network and firewall settings" +msgstr "" + #: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:82 +msgid "" +"The Update notification must be able to reach Odoo's subscription validation" +" servers. In other words, make sure that the Odoo server is able to open " +"outgoing connections towards:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:86 +msgid "services.odoo.com on port 443 (or 80)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:87 +msgid "services.openerp.com on port 443 (or 80) for older deployments" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:89 +msgid "" +"Once you activated your database, you must keep these ports open, as the " +"Update notification runs once a week." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:95 msgid "Error message due to too many users" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:84 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:97 msgid "" "If you have more users in your local database than provisionned in your Odoo" " Enterprise subscription, you may encounter this message:" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:93 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:106 msgid "" "When the message appears you have 30 days before the expiration. The " "countdown is updated everyday." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:99 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:112 msgid "" "**Add more users** on your subscription: follow the link and Validate the " "upsell quotation and pay for the extra users." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:102 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:115 msgid "or" msgstr "ou" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:104 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:117 msgid "" "**Deactivate users** as explained in this `Documentation " "`__ and **Reject** the upsell quotation." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:109 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:122 msgid "" "Once your database has the correct number of users, the expiration message " "will disappear automatically after a few days, when the next verification " @@ -438,102 +554,51 @@ msgid "" "message disappear right away." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:116 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:129 msgid "Database expired error message" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:118 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:131 msgid "" "If your database reaches its expiration date before your renew your " "subscription, you will encounter this message:" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:126 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:139 msgid "" "This **blocking** message appears after a non-blocking message that lasts 30" " days. If you fail to take action before the end of the countdown, the " "database is expired." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:134 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:147 msgid "" "Renew your subscription: follow the link and renew your subscription - note " "that" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:133 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:146 msgid "" "if you wish to pay by Wire Transfer, your subscription will effectively be " "renewed only when the payment arrives, which can take a few days. Credit " "card payments are processed immediately." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:136 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:149 msgid "Contact our `Support `__" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:138 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:151 msgid "" "None of those solutions worked for you? Please contact our `Support " "`__" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:145 -msgid "Force an Update Notification" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:147 -msgid "" -"Update Notifications happen once every 7 days and keep your database up-to-" -"date with your Odoo Enterprise subscription. If you modify your subscription" -" (i.e. add more users, renew it for a year, etc.), your local database will " -"only be made aware of the change once every 7 days - this can cause " -"discrepancies between the state of your subscription and some notifications " -"in your App Switcher. When doing such an operation on your subscription, you" -" can force an Update using the following procedure:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:154 -msgid "Connect to the database with the **Administrator** account" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:155 -msgid "" -"Switch to the Developer mode by using the **About** option in the top-right " -"menu (in V9) / in **Settings** (in V10): click on **Activate the developer" -" mode**" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:158 -msgid "" -"Navigate to the \"Settings\" menu, then \"Technical\" > \"Automation\" > " -"\"Scheduled Actions\"" -msgstr "" - #: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:160 -msgid "" -"Find \"Update Notification\" in the list, click on it, and finally click on " -"the button \"**RUN MANUALLY**\"" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:162 -msgid "Refresh the page, the \"Expiration\" notification should be gone" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:165 -msgid "" -"You may have kept the same UUID on different databases and we receive " -"information from those databases too. So please read :ref:`this " -"documentation ` to know how to change the UUID. After the" -" change you can force a ping to speed up the verification, your production " -"database will then be correctly identified." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:174 msgid "Duplicate a database" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:176 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:162 msgid "" "You can duplicate your database by accessing the database manager on your " "server (/web/database/manager). In this page, you can easily " @@ -544,7 +609,7 @@ msgstr "" " cette page, vous pouvez facilement dupliquer votre base de données (entre " "autres choses)." -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:184 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:170 msgid "" "When you duplicate a local database, it is **strongly** advised to change " "the duplicated database's uuid (Unniversally Unique Identifier), since this " @@ -559,7 +624,7 @@ msgstr "" "même UUID pourrait entraîner des problèmes de facturation ou des problèmes " "d'iidentification à tous les niveaux." -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:193 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:179 msgid "" "The database uuid is currently accessible from the menu **Settings > " "Technical > System Parameters**, we advise you to use a `uuid generator " @@ -645,27 +710,23 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:39 msgid "" "In your Odoo instance, click on **Settings**. You will have a section " -"showing you the active users on your database. Click on **Manage access " -"rights.**" +"showing you the active users on your database. Click on **Manage Users.**" msgstr "" -"Dans votre instance Odoo, cliquez sur **Configuration**. Vous aurez une " -"section montrant les utilisateurs actifs sur votre base de données. Cliquez " -"sur **Gérer les droits d'accès**." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:44 -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:82 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:43 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:80 msgid "|settings|" msgstr "|settings|" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:44 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:43 msgid "|browse_users|" msgstr "|browse_users|" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:47 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:46 msgid "You'll then see the list of your users." msgstr "Vous verrez alors la liste de vos utilisateurs." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:52 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:51 msgid "" "The pre-selected filter *Internal Users* shows your paying users (different " "from the *Portal Users* which are free). If you remove this filter, you'll " @@ -676,38 +737,33 @@ msgstr "" "supprimez ce filtre, vous obtiendrez tous les utilisateurs (les payants et " "ceux du portail)" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:57 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:56 msgid "" "In your list of users, click on the user you want to deactivate. As soon as " -"you are on the userform, go with your mouse cursor on the status **Active** " -"(top right). Click on Active and you will notice that the status will change" -" to **Inactive** immediately." +"you are on the userform, click on the Action drop down menu, and then click " +"on Archive." msgstr "" -"Dans la liste de vos utilisateurs, cliquez sur celui que vous voulez " -"désactiver. Dans la fiche utilisateur, cliquez sur le bouton **Actif** (en " -"haut à droite). Vous constaterez que le statut changera immédiatement à " -"**Inactif**." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:66 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:64 msgid "The user is now deactivated." msgstr "L'utilisateur est maintenant désactivé." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:68 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:66 msgid "**Never** deactivate the main user (*admin*)" msgstr "Ne désactivez **jamais** l'utilisateur principal (*admin*)" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:71 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:69 msgid "Uninstalling Apps" msgstr "Désinstallation d'Applications" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:73 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:71 msgid "" "Make sure you first test what you are about to do on a :ref:`duplicate " "` of your database before making any changes (*especially*" " installing/uninstalling apps)." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:77 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:75 msgid "" "In your Odoo instance click on **Settings**; in this app, you will be able " "to see how many applications you have installed. Click on **Browse Apps** to" @@ -717,11 +773,11 @@ msgstr "" " verrez le nombre d'applications que vous avez installées. Cliquez sur " "**Parcourir les applications** pour accéder à la liste des applications." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:82 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:80 msgid "|browse_apps|" msgstr "|browse_apps|" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:85 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:83 msgid "" "In your applications' dashboard, you will see all the icons of your " "applications. Click on the application you want to uninstall. Then, on the " @@ -732,7 +788,7 @@ msgstr "" "désinstaller. Puis, sur la fiche de l'application, cliquez sur " "**Désinstaller**." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:92 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:90 msgid "" "Some applications have dependencies, like Invoicing, eCommerce, etc. " "Therefore, the system will give you a warning message to advise you of what " @@ -749,22 +805,22 @@ msgstr "" "vous êtes sûr que vous voulez toujours la désinstaller, alors cliquez sur " "**Confirmer**." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:99 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:97 msgid "" "Last, after having checked the warning message (if any), click **Confirm**." msgstr "" "Enfin, après avoir vérifié le message d'avertissement (le cas échéant), " "cliquez sur **Confirmer**." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:104 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:102 msgid "You have finished uninstalling your application." msgstr "Vous avez terminé la désinstallation de votre application." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:107 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:105 msgid "Good to know" msgstr "Bon à savoir" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:109 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:107 msgid "" "**Uninstalling apps, managing users, etc. is up to you**: no one else can " "know if your business flow is broken better than you. If we were to " @@ -781,7 +837,7 @@ msgstr "" "interrompue, parce que nous *ne savons pas comment vous travaillez* et ne " "pouvons donc pas valider ce types d'opérations." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:115 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:113 msgid "" "**Odoo Apps have dependencies**: this means that you may need to install " "modules that you do not actively use to access some features of Odoo you " @@ -798,7 +854,7 @@ msgstr "" " n'avez pas besoin du site web lui-même, il est requis pour que la " "fonctionnalité Offres en ligne fonctionne correctement." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:122 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:120 msgid "" "**Always test app installation/removal on a duplicate** (or on a free trial " "database): that way you can know what other apps may be required, etc. This " diff --git a/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/general.po b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/general.po index 47a630b33..8c31bfc61 100644 --- a/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/general.po +++ b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/general.po @@ -4,19 +4,19 @@ # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # # Translators: -# Martin Trigaux, 2018 -# Florian Hatat, 2018 -# Bertrand LATOUR , 2018 -# 1d432ba7e4292878d212aa334c4d2933, 2018 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Florian Hatat, 2019 +# Bertrand LATOUR , 2019 +# 1d432ba7e4292878d212aa334c4d2933, 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 12.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-11-07 15:38+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2018-10-19 08:15+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: 1d432ba7e4292878d212aa334c4d2933, 2018\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: 1d432ba7e4292878d212aa334c4d2933, 2019\n" "Language-Team: French (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/fr/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -32,6 +32,16 @@ msgstr "Général" msgid "Authentication" msgstr "Identification" +#: ../../general/auth/azure.rst:3 +msgid "OAuth" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/auth/azure.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Due to specific requirements in Azure's OAuth implementation, Microsoft " +"Azure OAuth identification is NOT compatible with Odoo at the moment." +msgstr "" + #: ../../general/auth/google.rst:3 msgid "How to allow users to sign in with their Google account" msgstr "" @@ -90,6 +100,60 @@ msgid "" "You have to insert your Client ID in the **General Settings**." msgstr "" +#: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:3 +msgid "How to allow users to sign in with LDAP" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:5 +msgid "Install the LDAP module in General Settings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:7 +msgid "Click on **Create** in Setup your LDAP Server." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:15 +msgid "Choose the company about to use the LDAP." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:20 +msgid "" +"In **Server Information**, enter the IP address of your server and the port " +"it listens to." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:22 +msgid "Tick **User TLS** if your server is compatible." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:27 +msgid "" +"In **Login Information**, enter ID and password of the account used to query" +" the server. If left empty, the server will be queried anonymously." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:32 +msgid "" +"In **Process Parameter**, enter the domain name of your LDAP server in LDAP " +"nomenclature (e.g. ``dc=example,dc=com``)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:34 +msgid "In **LDAP filter**, enter ``uid=%s``" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:39 +msgid "" +"In **User Information**, tick *Create User* if you want Odoo to create a " +"User profile the first time someone log in with LDAP." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:41 +msgid "" +"In **Template User**, indicate a template for the new profiles created. If " +"left blanked, the admin profile will be used as template." +msgstr "" + #: ../../general/base_import.rst:3 msgid "Data Import" msgstr "Importation de données" @@ -282,12 +346,12 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../general/base_import/import_faq.rst:81 msgid "" -"Odoo can automatically detect if a column is a date and it will try to guess" -" the date format from a set of most used date format. While this process can" -" work for a lot of simple date format, some exotic date format will not be " -"recognize and it is also possible to have some confusion (day and month " -"inverted as example) as it is difficult to guess correctly which part is the" -" day and which one is the month in a date like '01-03-2016'." +"Odoo can automatically detect if a column is a date, and it will try to " +"guess the date format from a set of most commonly used date formats. While " +"this process can work for many date formats, some date formats will not be " +"recognized. This can cause confusion due to day-month inversions; it is " +"difficult to guess which part of a date format is the day and which part is " +"the month in a date such as '01-03-2016'." msgstr "" #: ../../general/base_import/import_faq.rst:83 @@ -696,6 +760,110 @@ msgid "" "company). You must first import the companies and then the persons." msgstr "" +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase.rst:3 +msgid "In-App Purchase" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:3 +msgid "General guide about In-App Purchase (IAP) Services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:4 +msgid "" +"In-App Purchases (IAP) gives access to additional services through Odoo. For" +" instance, it allows me to send SMS Text Messages or to send Invoices by " +"post directly from my database." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:7 +msgid "Buying Credits" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Each IAP Service relies on prepaid credits to work and has its own pricing. " +"To consult my current balance or to recharge my account, go to *Settings> " +"Odoo IAP > View my Services*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:13 +msgid "" +"If I am on Odoo Online (SAAS) and have the Enterprise version, I benefit " +"from free credits to test our IAP features." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:16 +msgid "IAP accounts" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:17 +msgid "" +"Credits to use IAP services are stored on IAP accounts, which are specific " +"to each service and database. By default, IAP accounts are common to all " +"companies, but can be restricted to specific ones by going to *Settings app " +"> Activate the Developer Mode > Technical Settings > IAP Accoun*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:23 +msgid "IAP Portal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:24 +msgid "" +"The IAP Portal is a platform regrouping my IAP Services. It is accessible " +"from *Settings app > Odoo IAP > View my Services*. From there, I can view my" +" current balance, recharge my credits, review my consumption and set a " +"reminder to when credits are low." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:30 +msgid "Get notified when credits are low" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:31 +msgid "" +"To be notified when it’s time to recharge my credits, I’ll go to my IAP " +"Portal through *Settings app> Odoo IAP > View my Services*, unfold a service" +" and mark the Receive threshold warning option. Then, I’ll provide a minimum" +" amount of credits and email addresses. Now, every time that the limit is " +"reached, an automatic reminder will be sent to by email!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:38 +msgid "IAP services available" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:39 +msgid "" +"Different services are available depending on the hosting type of your " +"Database:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:41 +msgid "" +"*Odoo Online (SAAS)*: only the IAP services provided by Odoo can be used " +"(i.e. the SMS, Snailmail, Reveal and Partner Autocomplete features);" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:43 +msgid "" +"*Odoo.sh and Odoo Enterprise (on-premise)*: both the services provided by " +"Odoo and by third-party apps can be used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:46 +msgid "Offering my own services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:47 +msgid "" +"I am more than welcome to offer my own IAP services through Odoo Apps! It is" +" the perfect opportunity to get recurring revenue for an ongoing service use" +" rather than — and possibly instead of — a sole initial purchase. Please, " +"find more information at: `In-App Purchase " +"`_" +msgstr "" + #: ../../general/odoo_basics.rst:3 msgid "Basics" msgstr "" @@ -842,62 +1010,84 @@ msgstr "" msgid "How to generate an Unsplash access key" msgstr "" -#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:5 +#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:6 +msgid "" +"**As an SaaS user**, you are ready to use Unsplash. You won't need to follow" +" this guide to set up Unsplash informations, since you will use our own Odoo" +" Unsplash key in a transparent way." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:9 +msgid "Generate an Unsplash access key for **non-Saas** users" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:11 msgid "Create an account on `Unsplash.com `_." msgstr "" -#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:7 +#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:13 msgid "" "Go to your `applications dashboard " "`_ and click on **New " "Application**." msgstr "" -#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:12 +#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:18 msgid "Accept the conditions and click on **Accept terms**." msgstr "" -#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:17 +#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:23 msgid "" "You will be prompted to insert an **Application name** and a " -"**Description**. Once done, click on **Create application**." +"**Description**. Please prefix your application name by \"**Odoo:** \" so " +"that Unsplash can recognize it as an Odoo instance. Once done, click on " +"**Create application**." msgstr "" -#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:22 +#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:28 msgid "" "You should be redirected to your application details page. Scroll down a bit" " to find your **access key**." msgstr "" +#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:34 +msgid "" +"**As a non-SaaS user**, you won't be able to register for a production " +"Unsplash key and will be limited to your test key that has a restriction of " +"50 Unsplash requests per hour." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:37 +msgid ":doc:`unsplash_application_id`" +msgstr "" + #: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_application_id.rst:3 msgid "How to generate an Unsplash application ID" msgstr "" -#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_application_id.rst:5 +#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_application_id.rst:6 msgid "" "You should first create and set up your Unsplash application with this " -"tutorial: `How to generate an Unsplash access key " -"`_." +"tutorial: :doc:`unsplash_access_key`." msgstr "" -#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_application_id.rst:7 +#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_application_id.rst:8 msgid "" "Go to your `applications dashboard " "`_ and click on your newly created " "Unsplash application under **Your applications**." msgstr "" -#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_application_id.rst:12 +#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_application_id.rst:13 msgid "" "You will be redirected to your application details page. The **application " "ID** will be visible in your browser's URL. The URL should be something like" -" ``https://unsplash.com/oauth/applications/application_id``" +" ``https://unsplash.com/oauth/applications/``" msgstr "" -#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_application_id.rst:17 +#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_application_id.rst:19 msgid "" -"Note that if you `apply for a production account " -"`_ and it " -"got approved, your will also find your application ID in the UI. It will be " -"listed next to your **Access Key** on your application details page." +"**As a non-SaaS user**, you won't be able to register for a production " +"Unsplash key and will be limited to your test key that has a 50 Unsplash " +"requests per hour restriction." msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po index 836348b2a..33018afc9 100644 --- a/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po +++ b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po @@ -3,14 +3,19 @@ # This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # +# Translators: +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Jérôme Tanché , 2019 +# William Henrotin , 2019 +# #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 11.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-10-19 10:03+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" -"Last-Translator: William Henrotin , 2018\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: William Henrotin , 2019\n" "Language-Team: French (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/fr/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -22,6 +27,94 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Helpdesk" msgstr "Assistance" +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:3 +msgid "" +"After sales features: refund, coupon, return, repair, onsite interventions" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:4 +msgid "" +"As my business grows, having the tools to allow my helpdesk team to record, " +"track and manage issues raised easy and efficiently, is key. Odoo’s Helpdesk" +" app allows me to generate credit notes, return products, grant coupons, do " +"repairs and plan onsite interventions from a ticket’s page." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:7 +msgid "Set up the After Sales services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Go to *Configuration > Helpdesk Teams* and enable the After Sales options: " +"*Refunds, Returns, Coupons, Repairs and Onsite Interventions*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:14 +msgid "Generate credit notes from tickets" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:15 +msgid "" +"I can use a credit note to refund a customer or adjust the amount due. For " +"that, I’ll simply go to my ticket page, click on *Refund* and select the " +"corresponding *Invoice*. Clicking on *Reverse* the credit note will be " +"generated, and I can *Post* it while still being in the *Helpdesk* app." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:22 +msgid "Allow product returns from tickets" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:23 +msgid "" +"The process of a product return from my customer back to my warehouse will " +"be taken into action when, at the ticket page, I choose the option *Return*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:29 +msgid "Grant coupons from tickets" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:30 +msgid "" +"First, be sure to have your *Coupon Program* planned at the *Sales or " +"Website* app. At the *Helpdesk* app, I will open my ticket and click on " +"*Coupon*, choose the *Coupon Program > Generate*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:37 +msgid "Repairs from tickets" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:38 +msgid "" +"Clicking on *Repair* option, on my ticket page, a new repair order form will" +" be shown. Fill up the rest of the fields as needed and choose the next " +"step." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:44 +msgid "Plan onsite interventions from tickets" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:45 +msgid "" +"At the ticket page, I can now configure my onsite interventions exactly the " +"same way I would do being on the *Field Service* app, clicking on *Plan " +"Intervention*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:52 +msgid "" +"`Coupons `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:53 +msgid ":doc:`../manufacturing/repair/repair`" +msgstr "" + #: ../../helpdesk/getting_started.rst:3 msgid "Get started with Odoo Helpdesk" msgstr "" @@ -128,7 +221,7 @@ msgstr "" msgid "" "The final option to submit tickets is thru an API connection. View the " "documentation `*here* " -"`__." +"`__." msgstr "" #: ../../helpdesk/getting_started.rst:91 diff --git a/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po index e0b6b2e9c..e106f3412 100644 --- a/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po +++ b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po @@ -4,37 +4,33 @@ # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # # Translators: -# ShevAbam, 2018 -# Melanie Bernard , 2018 -# Frédéric LIETART , 2018 -# Eloïse Stilmant , 2018 -# Nicolas Seinlet , 2018 -# Xavier Symons , 2018 -# Benjamin Frantzen, 2018 -# Stéphane GUILLY , 2018 -# Katerina Katapodi , 2018 -# Xavier Belmere , 2018 -# Pierrick Brun , 2018 -# Fabien Pinckaers , 2018 -# Maxime Chambreuil , 2018 -# Lionel Sausin , 2018 -# Martin Trigaux, 2018 -# Clo , 2018 -# Nacim ABOURA , 2018 -# Jean-Louis Bodren , 2018 -# Shark McGnark , 2018 -# Jérôme Tanché , 2018 -# Laura Piraux , 2018 -# Thomas Dobbelsteyn , 2018 +# Lionel Sausin , 2019 +# Maxime Chambreuil , 2019 +# Frédéric LIETART , 2019 +# Melanie Bernard , 2019 +# Nicolas Seinlet , 2019 +# Fabien Pinckaers , 2019 +# Xavier Symons , 2019 +# Benjamin Frantzen, 2019 +# Stéphane GUILLY , 2019 +# Katerina Katapodi , 2019 +# Xavier Belmere , 2019 +# Jean-Louis Bodren , 2019 +# Shark McGnark , 2019 +# Pierrick Brun , 2019 +# Laura Piraux , 2019 +# Nathan Grognet , 2019 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Jérôme Tanché , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 12.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-11-07 15:38+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2018-10-19 08:15+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: Thomas Dobbelsteyn , 2018\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Jérôme Tanché , 2019\n" "Language-Team: French (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/fr/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -42,7 +38,7 @@ msgstr "" "Language: fr\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n > 1);\n" -#: ../../inventory.rst:5 ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:64 +#: ../../inventory.rst:5 msgid "Inventory" msgstr "Stock" @@ -55,292 +51,361 @@ msgid "Daily Operations" msgstr "Opérations journalières" #: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:3 -msgid "How to do an inventory adjustment with barcodes?" -msgstr "Comment réaliser un ajustement d'inventaire avec des codes à barres ?" +msgid "Process to an Inventory Adjustment with Barcodes" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:5 -msgid "From the Barcode application:" -msgstr "Depuis l'application code-barre :" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:7 -msgid "Click on **Inventory**" -msgstr "Cliquez sur **Inventaire**" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:12 msgid "" -"Scan all the products (if you have 5 identical articles, scan it 5 times, or" -" use the keyboard to set the quantity)." +"To process an inventory adjustment by using barcodes, you first need to open" +" the *Barcode* app. Then, from the application, click on *Inventory " +"Adjustments*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:13 +msgid "" +"If you want to fully work with barcodes, you can download the sheet " +"*Commands for Inventory*." msgstr "" -"Scannez tous les articles (Si vous avez 5 articles identiques, scannez-les 5" -" fois, ou utilisez le clavier pour préciser la quantité)." #: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:16 msgid "" -"If you manage multiple locations, scan the location before scanning the " -"products. Eg. scan a shelf's barcode ; scan each product on the shelf ; " -"repeat for each shelf in the wharehouse." +"Once you have clicked on *Inventory Adjustments*, Odoo will automatically " +"create one. Note that, if you work with multi-location, you first need to " +"specify in which location the inventory adjustment takes place." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:20 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:24 msgid "" -"When you've scanned all the items of the location, validate the inventory " -"manually or by scanning the **Validate** barcode." +"If you don’t work with multi-location, you will be able to scan the " +"different products you want to include in the inventory adjustment." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:3 -msgid "How to process delivery orders?" -msgstr "Comment traiter des ordres de livraison ?" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:31 msgid "" -"There are two approaches to process delivery orders: you can either work on " -"printed documents (and scan lines on the documents), or on a screen (and " -"scan products directly)." +"If you have 5 identical articles, scan it 5 times or use the keyboard to set" +" the quantity." msgstr "" -"Il y a deux approches pour procéder aux commandes de livraison: vous pouvez " -"soit travailler sur des documents papier (et scanner les lignes des " -"documents), ou sur un écran (et scanner les produits directement)." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:10 -msgid "Process printed delivery orders:" -msgstr "Traiter les ordres de livraison imprimés:" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:12 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:34 msgid "" -"Print delivery orders of the day by selecting all documents from the **To " -"Do** list and print **Picking Operations** from the top menu." +"Besides using the barcode scanner, you can also manually add a product if " +"necessary. To do so, click on *Add Product* and fill the information in " +"manually." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:44 msgid "" -"Once you start processing your delivery orders, **scan the barcode** on the " -"top-right corner of the document to load the right record on the screen." +"When you have scanned all the items of the location, validate the inventory " +"manually or scan the *Validate* barcode." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:19 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:3 +msgid "Work with Barcode Nomenclature" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:5 msgid "" -"Then, **scan the barcode** of every product, or scan the barcode of the " -"product on the picking line if the barcode on the product is not easily " -"accessible, visible or is missing." +"There are different situations in which barcode nomenclatures can be useful." +" A well-known use case is the one of a point of sales that sells products in" +" bulk. The customers will scale their products themselves and get the " +"printed barcode to stick on the product. This barcode will contain the " +"weight of the product and help compute the price accordingly." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:23 -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:24 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:13 +msgid "Create a Barcode Nomenclature" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:15 msgid "" -"Once you scanned all products, scan the **Validate** barcode action to " -"finish the operation." +"Odoo supports *Barcode Nomenclatures*, which determine the mapping and " +"interpretation of the encoded information." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:30 -msgid "Process delivery orders from a computer or mobile device:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:32 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:18 msgid "" -"Load all the delivery orders marked as **To Do**, and open the first one." +"To configure the *Barcode Nomenclature*, you need to activate the debug " +"mode. To do so, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Barcode Nomenclature*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:35 -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:33 -msgid "Pick up and scan each listed product." -msgstr "Ramassez et scannez chaque article listé." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:37 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:22 msgid "" -"When you've picked all the items, click the **Validate** button or scan the " -"**Validate barcode** action to finish the Operation." +"You can create a barcode nomenclature from there, and then add a line to " +"create your first rule." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:40 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:28 msgid "" -"Move to the next delivery order to process by clicking on the top-right " -"right **arrow** or scanning the **Pager-Next** barcode action." +"The first step is to specify the *rule name*, for example, *Weight Barcode* " +"with 3 decimals. Then, you have to specify the type for barcode " +"nomenclature, like the *Weighted Product*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:35 +msgid "" +"The *Barcode Pattern* is a regular expression that defines the structure of " +"the barcode. In this example, 21 defines the products on which the rule will" +" be applied. Those are the numbers by which the product barcode should " +"start. The 5 “dots” are the following numbers of the product barcode and are" +" there to identify the product in question. The “N” defines a number and the" +" “D” defines the decimals." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:43 +msgid "" +"You can define different rules and order their priority thanks to the " +"sequence. The first rule that matches the scanned barcode will then be " +"applied." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:48 +msgid "Configure your Product" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:50 +msgid "The barcode of the product should start by “21”;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:52 +msgid "" +"The 5 “dots” are the other numbers of your product barcode, allowing to " +"identify the product;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:54 +msgid "" +"The barcode should contain 0’s when you did defined D’s or N’s. In our case," +" we need to set 5 zeros because we condigures “21………{NNDDD}”;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:56 +msgid "" +"In EAN-13, the last number is a check number. Use an EAN13 generator to know" +" which digit it should be in your case." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:61 +msgid "" +"In case you weight 1,5kg of pasta, the balance will print you the following " +"barcode: *2112345015001*. If you scan this barcode in your PoS, or when " +"receiving the products in your barcode app, Odoo will automatically create a" +" new line for the product, for a quantity of 1,5kg." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:67 +msgid "" +"For the point of sale, a price depending on the quantity will also be " +"computed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:74 +msgid "Rule Types" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:76 +msgid "" +"**Priced Product**: it allows you to identify the product and specify its " +"price, used in PoS;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:78 +msgid "" +"**Discounted Product**: it allows you to create one barcode per applied " +"discount. Then, you can scan your product in the PoS and apply discounts on " +"the product by scanning the discount barcode;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:80 +msgid "" +"**Weighted Product**: it allows you to identify the product and specify its " +"weight, used in both PoS and in Inventory;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:82 +msgid "" +"**Client**: it allows you to identify the customer, for example used with " +"loyalty program;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:84 +msgid "" +"**Cashier**: it allows you to identify the cashier when entering the PoS;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:86 +msgid "" +"**Location**: it allows you to identify the location on a transfer when " +"multi-location is activated;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:88 +msgid "" +"**Package**: it allows you to identify packages on a transfer when packages " +"are activated;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:90 +msgid "" +"**Lot**: it allows you to identify the lot number of a product on a " +"transfer;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:92 +msgid "" +"**Credit Card**: it doesn’t need manual modification, exists for data from " +"the Mercury module;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:94 +msgid "" +"**Unit Product**: it allows you to identify a product for both PoS and " +"Transfers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:97 +msgid "" +"When the barcode pattern contains .*, it means that it can contain any " +"number of characters. Those characters can be any number." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:3 -msgid "How to do an internal transfer?" -msgstr "Comment faire un transfert interne ?" +msgid "Process to Transfers" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:5 -msgid "In Odoo, there are two types of internal transfers:" -msgstr "Dans Odoo, il y a deux types de transferts internes :" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:6 +msgid "Simple Transfers" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:7 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:8 msgid "" -"Those initiated automatically by the system (for example, a quality control)" +"To process a transfer from the *Barcode* app, the first step is to go to " +"*Operations*." msgstr "" -"Ceux initialisés automatiquement par le système (par exemple, un contrôle " -"qualité)" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:10 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:14 msgid "" -"Those created by a worker (for example, through the internal transfer area " -"of the dashboard)." -msgstr "" -"Ceux créés par un collègue (par exemple, via une zone de transfert interne " -"sur le tableau de bord)." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:13 -msgid "To make an Internal Transfer:" -msgstr "Pour faire un transfert Interne :" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:15 -msgid "From the home of the barcode application, scan the **source location**" -msgstr "" -"Depuis l'accueil de l'application code-barre, scanner l**'emplacement " -"source**" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:17 -msgid "Pick up and **scan the products**" +"Then, you have the choice to either enter an existing transfer, by going to " +"the corresponding operation type and manually selecting the one you want to " +"enter, or by scanning the barcode of the transfer." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:19 -msgid "Scan the **destination location**" -msgstr "Scanner l'**emplacement destination**" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:21 -msgid "**Validate** the transfer to finish it" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:3 -msgid "How to handle lots and serial numbers with barcodes?" -msgstr "" -"Comment traiter des lots et des numéros de série avec des codes à barres ?" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:24 msgid "" -"Lots Numbers can be encoded from incoming shipments, internal moves and " -"outgoing deliveries:" +"From there, you will be able to scan the products that are part of the " +"existing transfer and/or add new products to this transfer. Once all the " +"products have been scanned, you can validate the transfer to proceed with " +"the stock moves." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:33 msgid "" -"In the barcode interface, **scan** the products you want create a lot from" +"If you have different storage locations in your warehouse, you can add " +"additional steps for the different operation types." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:10 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:37 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:50 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:45 +msgid "Receipts" +msgstr "Réceptions" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:39 msgid "" -"If this product should be manage by lots, a window opens to help you scan " -"the lots/serial numbers" +"When receiving a product in stock, you need to scan its barcode in order to " +"identify it in the system. Once done, you can either make it enter the main " +"location of the transfer, for example WH/Stock, or scan a location barcode " +"to make it enter a sub-location of the main location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:48 msgid "" -"**Scan** a lot barcode, **type** one manually or **leave empty** to generate" -" one automatically" +"If you want the product to enter WH/Stock in our example, you can simply " +"scan the next product." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:16 -msgid "Click or scan **Validate** once you are done" -msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:52 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery.rst:3 +msgid "Delivery Orders" +msgstr "Livraisons" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:18 -msgid "What is the difference between **Lots** and **Serial Numbers**?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:20 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:54 msgid "" -"**Lot** numbers are attributed to several identical products, so each time " -"you scan a lot number, Odoo will add one on the product count." +"When delivering a product, you have to scan the source location if it is " +"different than the one initially set on the transfer. Then, you can start " +"scanning the products that are delivered from this specific location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:24 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:62 msgid "" -"On the opposite, a **serial number** is unique, and represented by only one " -"barcode, sticked on only one item. This means that Odoo won't accept " -"scanning the same serial number more than once per operation." +"Once the different products have been scanned, you have the possibility to " +"scan another location, such as WH/Stock, and another page will be added to " +"your delivery order. You can move from one to the other thanks to the " +"*Previous* and *Next* buttons." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:32 -msgid "Here, we configured **Lu - Petit Beukelaer** tracking by lots." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:37 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:70 msgid "" -"Scan a product from this incoming shipment, then scan the lot number of each" -" product (you can also use the keyboard)." +"Now, you can validate your transfer. To do so, click on *Next* until you " +"reach the last page of the transfer. There, you will be able to validate it." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:43 -msgid "Click save/scan **Validate** and you are done." -msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:78 +msgid "Internal Transfers" +msgstr "Transferts internes" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:3 -msgid "How to process incoming receipts?" -msgstr "Comment traiter des livraisons entrantes ?" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:80 msgid "" -"There are two approaches to process incoming receipts: you can either work " -"on printed documents (and scan lines on the documents), or on a screen (and " -"scan products directly)." +"When realizing an internal transfer with multi-location, you first have to " +"scan the source location of the product. Then, you can scan the product in " +"itself, before having to scan the barcode of the destination location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:10 -msgid "Process printed incoming receipts:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:12 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:85 msgid "" -"Print incoming receipts of the day by selecting all documents from the **To " -"Receive** list and print **Picking Operations** from the top menu." +"If the source and destination of the internal transfers are already correct," +" you don’t need to scan them." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:16 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:89 +msgid "Transfers with Tracked Products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:91 msgid "" -"Once you start processing your incoming receipts, scan the barcode on the " -"top-right corner of the document to load the right record on the screen." +"If you work with products tracked by lot/serial numbers, you have two ways " +"of working:" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:20 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:94 msgid "" -"Then, scan the barcode of every product, or scan the barcode of the product " -"on the picking line if the barcode on the product is not easily accessible, " -"visible or is missing." -msgstr "" -"Ensuite, scannez le code-barres de tous les produits, ou scannez le code-" -"barres du produit sur la ligne du transfert si celui-ci n'est pas facilement" -" accessible, visible ou est manquant." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:28 -msgid "Process incoming receipts from a computer or mobile device:" +"If you work with serial/lot numbers taking all products into consideration, " +"you can scan the barcode of the lot/serial number and Odoo will increase the" +" quantity of the product, setting its lot/serial number." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:30 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:99 msgid "" -"Load all the incoming receipts marked as **To Receive**, and open the first " -"one." +"If you have the same lot/serial number for different products, you can work " +"by scanning the product barcode first, and then the barcode of the " +"lot/serial number." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:35 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:3 +msgid "Create a Transfer from Scratch" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:5 msgid "" -"When you've picked all the items, click the **Validate** button or scan the " -"**Validate** barcode action to finish the Operation." +"To create a transfer from the *Barcode* application, you first need to print" +" the operation type barcodes. To do so, you can download the *Stock barcode " +"sheet* from the home page of the app." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:12 msgid "" -"Move to the next incoming receipt to process by clicking on the top-right " -"right **arrow** or scanning the **Pager-Next** barcode action." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:42 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:137 -msgid "Example" -msgstr "Exemple" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:44 -msgid "Open operation interface." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:49 -msgid "Scan." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:54 -msgid "" -"The picking appears. Scan items and/or fill in informations using the mouse " -"and keyboard." +"Once done, you can scan the one for which you want to create a new document." +" Then, an empty document will be created and you will be able to scan your " +"products to populate it." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup.rst:3 @@ -382,16 +447,16 @@ msgid "" "The **bluetooth scanner** can be paired with a smartphone or a tablet and is" " a good choice if you want to be mobile but don't need a big investment. An " "approach is to log in Odoo on you smartphone, pair the bluetooth scanner " -"with the smartphone and work in the warehouse with always the possibility to" -" check your smartphone from time to time and use the software 'manually'." +"with the smartphone and work in the warehouse with the possibility to check " +"your smartphone from time to time and use the software 'manually'." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:32 msgid "" "For heavy use, the **mobile computer scanner** is the handiest solution. It " -"consists in a small computer with a built-in barcode scanner. This one can " +"consists of a small computer with a built-in barcode scanner. This one can " "turn out to be a very productive solution, however you need to make sure " -"that is is capable of running Odoo smoothy. The most recent models using " +"that is is capable of running Odoo smoothly. The most recent models using " "Android + Google Chrome or Windows + Internet Explorer Mobile should do the " "job. However, due to the variety of models and configurations on the market," " it is essential to test it first." @@ -428,371 +493,44 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:3 -msgid "How to activate the barcodes in Odoo?" -msgstr "Comment activer les codes à barres dans Odoo ?" +msgid "Activate the Barcodes in Odoo" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:5 msgid "" -"The barcode scanning features can save you a lot of the time usually lost " +"The barcode scanning features can save you a lot of time usually lost " "switching between the keyboard, the mouse and the scanner. Properly " "attributing barcodes to products, pickings locations, etc. allows you to " "work more efficiently by controlling the software almost exclusively with " "the barcode scanner." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:17 -msgid "" -"Print this document to be able to use your barcode scanner to perform more " -"actions." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:19 -msgid "Document: |download_barcode|" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:23 -msgid "Set products barcodes" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:28 -msgid "" -"In order to fill a picking or to perform an inventory, you need to make sure" -" that your products are encoded in Odoo along with their barcodes. If this " -"is not already done, you can fill in the products barcodes through a handy " -"interface. Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings` " -"and click :menuselection:`Operations --> Barcode Scanner`. Click Save, and " -"go back into the previous screen to click Configure Product Barcodes. This " -"interface can also be accessed via the planner." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:39 -msgid "" -"Product variants: be careful to add barcodes directly on the variant, and " -"not the template product (otherwise you won't be able to differentiate " -"them)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:44 -msgid "Set locations barcodes" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:49 -msgid "" -"If you manage multiple locations, you will find useful to attribute a " -"barcode to each location and stick it on the location. You can configure the" -" locations barcodes in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> " -"Warehouse Management --> Locations`. There is button in the **Print** menu " -"that you can use to print the locations names and barcodes. There are 4 " -"barcodes per page, arranged in a way that is convenient to print on sticker " -"paper." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:58 -msgid "" -"Example of location naming: **warehouse short name** - **location short " -"name** - (**Corridor X** - **Shelf Y** - **Height Z**) Example: A032-025-133" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:65 -msgid "Barcode formats" -msgstr "Formats de code-barre" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:67 -msgid "" -"Most retail products use EAN-13 barcodes. They cannot be made up without " -"proper authorization: you must pay the International Article Numbering " -"Association a fee in exchange for an EAN code sequence (that's why no two " -"products in a store will ever have the same EAN code)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:72 -msgid "" -"Still, as Odoo supports any string as a barcode, so you can always define " -"your own barcode format for internal use." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management.rst:3 -msgid "Warehouse Management" -msgstr "Gestion d'entrepôt" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment.rst:3 -msgid "Inventory Adjustment" -msgstr "Ajustement de stock" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:3 -msgid "How to make the initial inventory?" -msgstr "Comment faire l'inventaire initial ?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:5 -msgid "" -"One of the most important feature in an warehouse management software is to " -"keep the inventory right." -msgstr "" -"Une des plus importantes caractéristiques d'un logiciel de gestion " -"d'entrepôt est de garder l'inventaire à jour." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Once your products have been defined, it is time to make your initial " -"inventory. You will reflect reality by inventorying the right quantities in " -"the right locations." -msgstr "" -"Une fois que vos articles ont été définis, il est temps de faire " -"l'inventaire initial. Vous refléterez la réalité en inventoriant les bonnes " -"quantités aux bons endroits." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:55 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:34 -msgid "Product Configuration" -msgstr "Configuration d'article" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:15 -msgid "" -"In the Inventory module, open the :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> " -"Products`, then click on **Create** to create a new product. Configure the " -"product type so that it is **Stockable** and not a consumable." -msgstr "" -"Dans le module d'inventaire, ouvrez :menuselection:`Gestion des stocks --> " -"Articles`, puis cliquez sur **Créer** pour créer un nouvel article. " -"Configurez le type d'article à **Produit stockable**, pas à consommable." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:23 -msgid "Start the initial inventory" -msgstr "Démarrer l'inventaire initial" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:26 -msgid "Update the product quantity for one product" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:28 -msgid "" -"In the product you just created, you can see in the upper tiles that we have" -" 0 product On Hand. Click on the **Update qty on Hand** button." -msgstr "" -"Dans l'article que vous venez de créer, vous pouvez voir dans les boutons en" -" haut que nous avons 0 produit en stock. Cliquez sur le lien **Mettre à jour" -" le stock disponible**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:31 -msgid "" -"A new window opens. In the **New Quantity on Hand** field, type the quantity" -" of product you currently hold in stock, then click on **Apply**." -msgstr "" -"Une nouvelle fenêtre apparaît. Dans le champ **Nouvelle quantité " -"disponible**, saisissez la quantité de produit que vous détenez actuellement" -" en stock, puis cliquez sur **Appliquer**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:39 -msgid "" -"if you are using multiple locations for your warehouse, you will be able to " -"set the location of your product from this screen." -msgstr "" -"si vous utilisez plusieurs emplacements dans votre entrepôt, vous serez en " -"mesure de définir l'emplacement de votre produit dans cet écran." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:42 -msgid "" -"You can now see from the On Hand tab that the quantity has been updated." -msgstr "" -"Vous pouvez maintenant voir dans le bouton En stock que la quantité a été " -"mise à jour." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:47 -msgid "" -"Now, if you check the **Inventory Adjustments** in the **Inventory Control**" -" menu, you will see that a new line named \"INV: (name of your product)\" " -"has automatically been created and validated by the system." -msgstr "" -"Maintenant, si vous vérifiez les **Ajustements de stock** dans le menu " -"**Gestion des stocks**, vous verrez qu'une nouvelle ligne nommée \"INV:(nom " -"de votre produit)\" a été automatiquement créée et validée par le système." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:55 -msgid "Multiple products at once" -msgstr "Plusieurs produits à la fois" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:57 -msgid "" -"Create all the products for which you want to follow the stock (as stockable" -" products). Once the required products in stock have been defined, use an " -"initial inventory operation to put the current quantities into the system by" -" location. Go to :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Inventory " -"Adjustments` to start your initial inventory." -msgstr "" -"Créez tous les articles dont vous voulez suivre le stock (comme produits " -"stockables). Une fois que les articles sont définis, utilisez une opération " -"d'inventaire initial pour définir les quantités actuelles par emplacement " -"dans le système. Aller à :menuselection:`Gestion des stocks --> Ajustements " -"de stock` pour commencer votre inventaire initial." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:63 -msgid "" -"Give it a name (for example Initial Inventory) and select the stock location" -" of your inventory. Note that when you select a parent location (such as " -"Stock, which might be split into sub locations), you can also select the sub" -" (or child) locations." -msgstr "" -"Donnez-lui un nom (par exemple Inventaire initial) et sélectionnez " -"l'emplacement du stock de votre inventaire. Notez que lorsque vous " -"sélectionnez un emplacement parent (comme Stock, qui peut être divisé en " -"sous-emplacements), vous pouvez également sélectionner les sous-emplacements" -" (ou enfants)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:71 -msgid "" -"You can choose between making an inventory for all products, for a few or " -"only for one. In this case, we choose the **All products** option." -msgstr "" -"Vous pouvez choisir de faire un inventaire de tous les produits, de " -"quelques-uns ou d'un seul. Dans cet exemple, nous choisissons l'option " -"**Tous les produits**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:79 -msgid "" -"If you need your stock valuation to be done in a different period than the " -"one that will be selected by default according to the inventory end date, " -"enter the corresponding accounting period in the Force Valuation Period " -"field. The accounting module needs to be installed." -msgstr "" -"Si vous avez besoin de faire votre valorisation de stock pour une période " -"différente de celle correspondant à la date de fin d'inventaire, saisissez " -"la période comptable correspondante dans le champ Forcer la date comptable. " -"Le module de comptabilité doit être installé." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:84 -msgid "" -"Click the **Start Inventory** button. Depending on the type of inventory you" -" have chosen (all products or selected ones) you might have to add products " -"manually by clicking on **Add an item**." -msgstr "" -"Cliquez sur le bouton **Inventaire de départ**. Selon le type d'inventaire " -"que vous avez choisi (tous les produits ou une sélection), vous pourriez " -"avoir à ajouter des articles manuellement en cliquant sur **Ajouter un " -"élément**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:88 -msgid "" -"Add the **Real Quantity** that you have in your stock for each product." -msgstr "Saisissez la **Quantité réelle** de chaque article en stock." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:92 -msgid "" -"additional information will be available according to the options you " -"activated (multi-locations, serial number, consignee stocks)." -msgstr "" -"des informations supplémentaires seront disponibles selon les options que " -"vous avez activées (multi-emplacements, numéro de série, stocks consignés)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:98 -msgid "" -"Click the **Validate Inventory** button to confirm the inventory and post " -"it." -msgstr "" -"Cliquez sur le bouton **Valider l'inventaire** pour confirmer l'inventaire " -"et le publier." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:102 -msgid "Reporting" -msgstr "Analyse" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:104 -msgid "" -"To check the current stock, go to :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> " -"Products`, and click on the **list button**:" -msgstr "" -"Pour vérifier le stock actuel, allez à :menuselection:`Gestion des stocks " -"--> Articles`, et cliquez sur le **bouton de vue en liste** :" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:3 -msgid "How to choose between minimum stock rule and make to order?" -msgstr "" -"Comment choisir entre des règles de stock minimum et l'approvisionnement à " -"la commande ?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:5 -msgid "" -"**Minimum Stock rules** and **Make to Order** have similar consequences but " -"different rules. They should be used depending on your manufacturing and " -"delivery strategies." -msgstr "" -"Les règles de **Stock Minimum** et d'**Approvisionnement à la commande** ont" -" des conséquences similaires, mais des règles différentes. Elles doivent " -"être utilisés en fonction de vos stratégies de fabrication et de livraison." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:10 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:10 -msgid "Terminology" -msgstr "Terminologie" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:13 -msgid "Minimum stock rule" -msgstr "Règle de stock minimum" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:15 -msgid "" -"**Minimum Stock** rules are used to ensure that you always have the minimum " -"amount of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or " -"answer to your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its" -" minimum the system will automatically generate a procurement with the " -"quantity needed to reach the maximum stock level." -msgstr "" -"Les règles de **Stock Minimum** sont utilisées pour être surs d'avoir " -"toujours des matières premières en stock afin de fabriquer vos articles " -"et/ou de répondre aux besoins de vos clients. Lorsque le niveau de stock " -"d'un article atteint son minimum, le système génère automatiquement un " -"approvisionnement avec la quantité nécessaire pour atteindre le niveau de " -"stock maximum." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:22 -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:56 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:22 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:58 -msgid "Make to Order" -msgstr "Approvisionnement à la commande" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:24 -msgid "" -"The **Make to Order** function will trigger a **Purchase Order** of the " -"amount of the **Sales Order** related to the product. The system will " -"**not** check the current stock valuation. This means that a draft purchase " -"order will be generated regardless of the quantity on hand of the product." -msgstr "" -"La fonction **Approvisionnement à la commande** déclenchera une **Commande " -"Fournisseur** de la quantité de la **Commande Client** relative à l'article." -" Le système ne vérifiera **pas** la quantité déjà en stock. Cela signifie " -"qu'une commande forunisseur à l'état brouillon sera générée, indépendamment " -"de la quantité en stock de l'article." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:30 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:12 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:12 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:37 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:34 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:29 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:9 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:50 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:28 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:21 -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:22 -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:25 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:159 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:164 -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:21 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:18 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:19 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:30 +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:16 +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:14 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:10 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:25 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:29 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:22 -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:18 -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:23 +#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:17 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:10 #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:18 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:30 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:17 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:114 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:16 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:15 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:13 @@ -801,166 +539,72 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Configuration" msgstr "Configuration" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:33 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:33 -msgid "Minimum stock rules" -msgstr "Règles de stock minimum" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:35 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:14 msgid "" -"The Minimum Stock Rules configuration is available through the menu " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory Control --> Reordering Rule` in the " -"drop down menu. There, click on **Create** to set minimum and maximum stock " -"values for a given product." +"To use this feature, you first need to activate the *Barcode* functionality " +"via *Inventory > Settings > Barcode Scanner*. Once you have ticked the " +"feature, you can hit save." msgstr "" -"La configuration des Règles de Stock Minimum est disponible via le menu " -":menuselection:`Inventaire --> Gestion des stocks --> Règles de " -"réapprovisionnement`. Là, cliquez sur **Créer** pour définir les valeurs de " -"stock minimum et maximum pour un article donné." -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Active" -msgstr "Actif" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:22 +msgid "Set Product Barcodes" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:24 msgid "" -"If the active field is set to False, it will allow you to hide the " -"orderpoint without removing it." +"You can easily assign barcodes to your different products via the " +"*Inventory* app. To do so, go to *Settings > Configure Products Barcodes*." msgstr "" -"Si le champ \"Actif\" n'est pas coché, cela vous permettra de cacher les " -"points de commande sans les supprimer." -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Product Unit of Measure" -msgstr "Unité de mesure d'article" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Default unit of measure used for all stock operations." -msgstr "" -"Unité de mesure par défaut utilisée pour toutes les opérations de stock" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Procurement Group" -msgstr "Groupe d'approvisionnement" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:31 msgid "" -"Moves created through this orderpoint will be put in this procurement group." -" If none is given, the moves generated by stock rules will be grouped into " -"one big picking." +"Then, you have the possibility to assign barcodes to your products directly " +"at creation on the product form." msgstr "" -"Les mouvements créés à travers cette règle de réapprovisionnement seront mis" -" dans ce groupe d'approvisionnement. Si aucun n'est donné, les mouvements " -"générés par les règles de stock seront groupés dans un seul transfert." -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Minimum Quantity" -msgstr "Quantité minimum" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:41 msgid "" -"When the virtual stock goes below the Min Quantity specified for this field," -" Odoo generates a procurement to bring the forecasted quantity to the Max " -"Quantity." +"Be careful to add barcodes directly on the product variants and not on the " +"template product. Otherwise, you won’t be able to differentiate them." msgstr "" -"Quand le stock virtuel tombe en dessous de la quantité mini indiquée dans de" -" champ, Odoo génère un approvisionnement pour ramener la quantité prévue à " -"la quantité maxi." -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Maximum Quantity" -msgstr "Quantité maximale" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:46 +msgid "Set Locations Barcodes" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:48 msgid "" -"When the virtual stock goes below the Min Quantity, Odoo generates a " -"procurement to bring the forecasted quantity to the Quantity specified as " -"Max Quantity." +"If you manage multiple locations, you will find useful to attribute a " +"barcode to each location and stick it on the location. You can configure the" +" locations barcodes in *Inventory > Configuration > Locations*." msgstr "" -"Quand le stock virtuel tombe en dessous de la quantité mini, Odoo génère un " -"approvisionnement pour ramener la quantité prévue à la quantité indiquée " -"ici." -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Quantity Multiple" -msgstr "Quantité multiple de" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:59 msgid "" -"The procurement quantity will be rounded up to this multiple. If it is 0, " -"the exact quantity will be used." +"You can easily print the barcode you allocate to the locations via the " +"*Print* menu." msgstr "" -"La quantité à approvisionner sera arrondie à ce multiple. S'il est à 0, la " -"quantité exacte sera utilisée." -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Lead Time" -msgstr "Délai" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:63 +msgid "Barcode Formats" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:65 msgid "" -"Number of days after the orderpoint is triggered to receive the products or " -"to order to the vendor" +"Most retail products use EAN-13 barcodes. They cannot be made up without " +"proper authorization. You must pay the International Article Numbering " +"Association a fee in exchange for an EAN code sequence." msgstr "" -"Nombre de jours pour déclancher la règle de point de commande pour recevoir " -"les produits ou pour commander chez le fournisseur." -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:45 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:69 msgid "" -"Then, click on your product to access the related product form and, on the " -"**Inventory submenu**, do not forget to select a supplier." +"Still, as Odoo supports any string as a barcode, you can always define your " +"own barcode format for internal use." msgstr "" -"Ensuite, cliquez sur votre article pour accéder à sa fiche, et dans l'onglet" -" **Inventaire**, n'oubliez pas de sélectionner un fournisseur." -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:52 -msgid "" -"Don't forget to select the right product type in the product form. A " -"consumable can not be stocked and will thus not be accounted for in the " -"stock valuation." -msgstr "" -"N'oubliez pas de sélectionner le type d'article correct dans la fiche du " -"produit. Un consommable ne peut pas être stocké, et ne sera donc pas pris en" -" compte dans l'évaluation des stocks." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:58 -msgid "" -"The Make to Order configuration is available on your product form through " -"your :menuselection:`Inventory module --> Inventory control --> Products` " -"(or any other module where products are available)." -msgstr "" -"La configuration de l'Approvisionnement à la commande est disponible sur la " -"fiche article via :menuselection:`Inventaire --> Gestion des Stocks --> " -"Articles` (ou depuis tout autre module où les articles sont disponibles)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:62 -msgid "On the product form, under **Inventory**, click on **Make To Order**." -msgstr "" -"Dans la fiche article, dans l'onglet **Inventaire**, cochez la case " -"**Approvisionnement à la commande**. " - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:68 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:70 -msgid "Choice between the two options" -msgstr "Choix entre les deux options" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:70 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:72 -msgid "" -"The choice between the two options is thus dependent of your inventory " -"strategy. If you prefer to have a buffer and always have at least a minimum " -"amount, the minimum stock rule should be used. If you want to reorder your " -"stocks only if your sale is confirmed it is better to use the Make to Order." -msgstr "" -"Le choix entre les deux options est donc dépendant de votre stratégie " -"d'inventaire. Si vous préférez avoir un stock tampon et toujours avoir au " -"moins un stock minimum, la règle de stock minimum doit être utilisée. Si " -"vous souhaitez réapprovisionner vos stocks seulement si votre vente est " -"confirmée, il est préférable d'utiliser l'Approvisionnement à la commande." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery.rst:3 -msgid "Delivery Orders" -msgstr "Livraisons" +#: ../../inventory/management.rst:3 +msgid "Warehouse Management" +msgstr "Gestion d'entrepôt" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:3 msgid "How do I cancel a delivery order?" @@ -969,23 +613,13 @@ msgstr "Comment puis-je annuler un ordre de livraison" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:6 ../../inventory/overview.rst:3 -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/overview.rst:3 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:6 @@ -1114,195 +748,152 @@ msgstr "" "pouvez utiliser puisque vous les avez créées." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:3 -msgid "" -"How to send products to customers directly from suppliers (drop-shipping)?" +msgid "Send Products to Customers Directly from Suppliers (Drop-shipping)" msgstr "" -"Comment envoyer des articles aux clients directement par les fournisseurs " -"(livraison directe) ?" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:6 -msgid "What is drop-shipping?" -msgstr "Qu'est-ce que la livraison directe ?" +msgid "What is Drop-Shipping?" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:8 msgid "" "Drop-Shipping is a system that allows orders taken from your store to be " "shipped straight from your supplier to your customer. On a usual delivery " "system, products are sent from your supplier to your warehouse to be put in " -"stock, and then shipped to your customers after ordering. With drop-" -"shipping, no item is stocked. When a customer places an order in your shop, " -"the item is delivered straight from the supplier to the customer. Therefore," -" the product doesn't need to get through your warehouse." +"stock and then shipped to your customers after ordering." msgstr "" -"La livraison directe est un système qui permet à des commandes prises dans " -"votre magasin, d'être expédiés directement par votre fournisseur à votre " -"client. Dans un système de livraison habituel, les produits sont envoyés par" -" votre fournisseur à votre entrepôt pour être stockés, puis expédiés à vos " -"clients après la commande. Avec la livraison directe, aucun article n'est " -"stocké. Quand un client passe une commande dans votre boutique, l'article " -"est livré directement du fournisseur au client. Par conséquent, le produit " -"n'a pas besoin de passer par votre entrepôt." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:18 -msgid "Points to be considered while implementing drop-shipping" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:13 +msgid "" +"With drop-shipping, no item is stocked. When a customer places an order in " +"your shop, the item is delivered straight from the supplier to the customer." +" Therefore, the product doesn't need to get through your warehouse." msgstr "" -"Points à prendre en considération lors de la mise en place de la livraison " -"directe" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:20 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:19 +msgid "Points to be Considered while Implementing Drop-Shipping" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:24 msgid "" "Use drop-shipping only for the products you can't or don't want to keep in " -"stock. One reason is that you'll always make smaller margins on items that " -"are drop-shipped, so you should keep it only for items that take up a lot of" -" space in your warehouse." +"stock." msgstr "" -"Utilisez la livraison directe seulement pour les produits que vous ne pouvez" -" pas, ou ne voulez pas, garder en stock. Une raison est que vous ferez " -"toujours de plus petites marges sur les articles qui sont livrés " -"directement, donc vous ne devriez l'utiliser que pour les articles qui " -"prennent beaucoup d'espace dans votre entrepôt." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:22 msgid "" -"Drop-shipping is best for niche products. Chances are that products that are" -" in high demand are being offered by large suppliers at a fraction of the " -"price you'll be able to charge, so using a more costly shipping method won't" -" be financially rewarding. But if your product is unique, then it makes " -"sense!" +"One reason is that you'll always make smaller margins on items that are " +"drop-shipped, so you should keep it only for items that take up a lot of " +"space in your warehouse." msgstr "" -"La livraison directe est mieux adaptée aux produits de niche. Il y a des " -"risques que les produits qui sont en forte demande soient proposés par de " -"gros fournisseurs à une fraction du prix que vous pouvez facturer, donc " -"utiliser une méthode de transport plus coûteuse ne sera pas judicieux " -"financièrement. Mais si votre produit est unique, alors ça a du sens !" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:31 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:30 +msgid "Drop-shipping is best for niche products." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:27 msgid "" -"To protect your customers from bad experiences, test drop-shipping companies" -" for yourself beforehand and list the best ones." +"Chances are that products that are in high demand are being offered by large" +" suppliers at a fraction of the price you'll be able to charge, so using a " +"more costly shipping method won't be financially rewarding. But if your " +"product is unique, then it makes sense!" msgstr "" -"Pour éviter de mauvaises expériences à vos clients, testez au préalable les " -"entreprises de livraison directe pour vous-même et sélectionnez les " -"meilleures." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:34 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:33 +msgid "To protect your customers from bad experiences." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:33 msgid "" -"Make sure time is not against you. Drop-shipping should take a reasonable " -"amount of time and surely not more than it would have taken you to handle it" -" all by yourself. It's also nice to be able to provide your customers with a" -" tracking number." +"Test drop-shipping companies for yourself beforehand and list the best ones." msgstr "" -"Assurez-vous que le temps n'est pas contre vous. La livraison directe " -"nécessite un délai raisonnable, sûrement pas plus long que si vous aviez " -"géré tout cela vous-même. De plus, il est agréable de pouvoir fournir à vos " -"clients un numéro de suivi." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:39 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:37 +msgid "Make sure time is not against you." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:36 msgid "" -"Items have to be available from your supplier. It's good to know if the " -"product you're selling is available upstream. If you don't have that " -"information, inform your customers that you don't hold the item in stock and" -" that it's subject to availability from a third party." +"Drop-shipping should take a reasonable amount of time and surely not more " +"than it would have taken you to handle it all by yourself. It's also nice to" +" be able to provide your customers with a tracking number." msgstr "" -"Les articles doivent être disponibles chez votre fournisseur. Il est bon de " -"savoir si le produit que vous vendez est disponible en amont. Si vous ne " -"disposez pas de cette information, informez vos clients que vous ne détenez " -"pas l'article en stock et qu'il est soumis à la disponibilité d'un tiers." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:46 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:44 +msgid "Items have to be available from your supplier." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:40 msgid "" -"For more information and insights on Drop-shipping, read our blog on `What " -"is drop-shipping and how to use it `__." +"It's good to know if the product you're selling is available upstream. If " +"you don't have that information, inform your customers that you don't hold " +"the item in stock and that it's subject to availability from a third party." msgstr "" -"Pour plus d'informations et d'idées sur la livraison directe, lisez notre " -"blog `Qu'est-ce que la livraison directe et comment l'utiliser " -"`__." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:50 -msgid "Configuring drop-shipping" -msgstr "Configuration de la livraison directe" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:47 +msgid "" +"For more information and insights about Drop-Shipping, you can read our " +"blog: `*What is drop-shipping and how to use it* `__." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:52 -msgid "" -"Open the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`. Go " -"to **Location & Warehouse**, locate the **Dropshipping** option and tick the" -" box **Allow suppliers to deliver directly to your customers**. Then, click " -"on **Apply**." +msgid "Configure Drop-Shipping" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:54 +msgid "" +"Activate the functionality in the *Purchase* application by going to " +"*Configuration > Settings*." msgstr "" -"Ouvrez le menu :menuselection:`Inventaire --> Configuration --> Settings`. " -"Allez à **Emplacement & Entrepôt**, localisez la rubrique **Livraison " -"directe**et cochez la case **Permettre aux fournisseurs de livrer " -"directement à vos clients**. Ensuite, cliquez sur **Appliquer**." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:60 msgid "" -"Then go to the menu :menuselection:`Sales --> Configuration --> Settings`. " -"Locate **Order Routing** and tick the box **Choose specific routes on sales " -"order lines (advanced)**. Click on **Apply**." +"Then, go to the *Inventory* app, in *Configuration > Settings* to activate " +"the *Multi-Step Routes* feature. It will allow you to make the *Route* field" +" appear on the sale order lines to specify you send a product via drop-" +"shipping." msgstr "" -"Puis allez dans le menu :menuselection:`Ventes --> Configuration --> " -"Configuration`. Localisez **Routage des commandes** et cochez la case " -"**Choisir des routes spécifiques à chaque ligne de commande (avancé)**. " -"Cliquez sur **Appliquer**." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:67 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:68 msgid "" -"Now, open the menu :menuselection:`Sales --> Sales --> Products`. Add a " -"supplier to the products you want to dropship." +"Now, in the *Sales* app, go to *Products > Products*. Select the product you" +" would like to drop-ship and add a vendor pricelist which contains the right" +" supplier, via the purchase tab." msgstr "" -"Maintenant, ouvrez le menu :menuselection:`Ventes --> Ventes --> Articles`. " -"Ajoutez un fournisseur aux articles que vous voulez livrer directement." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:74 -msgid "How to send products from the customers directly to the suppliers" -msgstr "" -"Comment renvoyer des articles directement des clients aux fournisseurs ?" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:76 -msgid "" -"Create a **Sales Order** and specify on a sales order line for your products" -" that the route is **Dropshipping**." +msgid "Send Products from the Suppliers Directly to the Customers" msgstr "" -"Créez une **Commande Client** et précisez sur une ligne de commande pour vos" -" articles que la route est **Livraison directe**." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:82 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:78 msgid "" -"Open the menu :menuselection:`Purchases --> Purchases --> Requests for " -"Quotation`. The draft purchase order is automatically created from the " -"procurement with the drop-shipping route. Once the order is confirmed, you " -"will see that one shipment has been created." +"Create a *Sales Order* and add the product on which you just set the vendor." +" Add the *Route* field thanks to the widget on the right of the sale order " +"line. Now, you are able to specify that your products’ route is *Drop-" +"Shipping*." msgstr "" -"Ouvrez le menu :menuselection:`Achats --> Achat --> Demande de prix`. La " -"commande fournisseur brouillon est automatiquement créée par " -"l'approvisionnement avec la route livraison directe. Une fois que la " -"commande est confirmée, vous verrez qu'une expédition a été créée." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:90 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:89 msgid "" -"To confirm the sending from the vendor to the customer, go back to " -"**Inventory** app. On the dashboard, click on **# TO RECEIVE** on the " -"dropship card." +"Once the sale order is confirmed, Odoo automatically generates a *Request " +"for Quotation* for the supplier who will proceed to the drop-shipping. You " +"can find it in the *Purchase* app, with the sale order as *Source Document*." msgstr "" -"Pour confirmer l'envoi du fournisseur au client, revenez dans l'application " -"**Inventaire**. Sur le tableau de bord, cliquez sur **# A RECEVOIR** de la " -"fiche kanban Livraison directe." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:97 msgid "" -"It will open the list of drop-shipping transfers. Validate the transfer once" -" it has been done. The items will be directly delivered from the partner to " -"the customer without transiting to your warehouse." +"Once this *Purchase Order* is confirmed, a *Receipt Order* is created and " +"linked to it. The source location is the vendor location and the destination" +" location is the customer location. Then, the product won’t go through your " +"own stock when you validate the dropship document." msgstr "" -"Cela va ouvrir la liste des transferts en livraison directe. Validez le " -"transfert une fois qu'il a été réalisé. Les articles seront directement " -"livrés du fournisseur au client sans passer par votre entrepôt." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:103 -msgid ":doc:`inventory_flow`" -msgstr ":doc:`inventory_flow`" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:105 +msgid "" +"You can also easily access the dropship document directly from your " +"inventory dashboard." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:3 msgid "How to choose the right inventory flow to handle delivery orders?" @@ -1479,208 +1070,138 @@ msgstr "" " le type Bottom Half, voici la différence :" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:3 -msgid "How to process delivery orders in one step (shipping)?" -msgstr "Comment traiter des ordres de livraison en une étape (expédition) ?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:8 -msgid "" -"When an order goes to the shipping department for final delivery, Odoo is " -"set up by default to utilize a one-step operation: once all goods are " -"available, they are able to be shipped in a single delivery order." +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:3 +msgid "Process a Receipt in one step (Receipt)" msgstr "" -"Quand une commande arrive au service expédition pour la livraison finale, " -"Odoo est configuré par défaut pour une seule étape : quand tous les produits" -" sont disponibles, ils peuvent être expédiés dans un seul ordre de " -"livraison." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:5 msgid "" -"There is no configuration needed. The default outgoing shipments are " -"configured to be directly delivered from the stock." +"There is no configuration needed to receive in one step. The default " +"incoming shipments are configured to be directly received from the vendors " +"to the stock." msgstr "" -"Il n'y a pas de configuration nécessaire. Les expéditions par défaut sont " -"configurées pour être livrées directement depuis le stock." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:18 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:9 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:9 msgid "" -"However, if **advance routes** is activated and you set another shipping " -"configuration on your warehouse, you can set it back to the one-step " -"delivery configuration. Go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouses` " -"and edit the concerned warehouse." +"However, if advanced routes have been activated and you set another incoming" +" configuration on your warehouse, you can set it back to the one-step " +"receipt configuration. To do so, go to *Configuration > Warehouses* and edit" +" the warehouse in question." msgstr "" -"Toutefois, si le routage avancé est activé et que vous définissez une autre " -"configuration d'expédition sur votre entrepôt, vous pourrez revenir à la " -"configuration de livraison en une seule étape. Aller à " -":menuselection:`Configuration --> Entrepôts` et modifier l'entrepôt " -"concerné." + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:14 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:14 +msgid "" +"Set the *Incoming Shipments* option to *Receive goods directly (1 step)*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:21 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:21 +msgid "Create a Purchase Order" +msgstr "Créez un Bon de Commande" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:23 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:23 msgid "" -"Set the outgoing shippings the option to **Ship directly from stock (Ship " -"Only)**" +"To create a *Request for Quotation*, go to the *Purchase* application and " +"click on *Create*. Then, add some storable products to receive and confirm " +"the *RfQ*." msgstr "" -"Configurez l'option Expéditions à **Expédition directe depuis le stock (en 1" -" étape)**" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:30 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:68 -msgid "Create a Sales Order" -msgstr "Créez une commande client" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:32 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:27 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:27 msgid "" -"Create a sales order (From quotation to sales order) with some products to " -"deliver." +"Notice that, now, we see 1 receipt associated with the purchase order you " +"just created. If you click on the button, you will see your receipt order." msgstr "" -"Créer une commande client (du devis à la commande) avec quelques articles à " -"livrer." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:35 -msgid "" -"Notice that we now see ``1`` delivery associated with this sales order in " -"the **stat button** above the sales order." -msgstr "" -"Notez que nous voyons maintenant ``1` livraison associée à cette commande " -"client, dans le **bouton** en haut de la commande." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:41 -msgid "" -"If you click on the **1 Delivery** stat button, you should now see your " -"picking." -msgstr "" -"Si vous cliquez sur le bouton **1 Livraison**, vous devriez maintenant voir " -"votre opération de stock." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:45 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:99 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:88 -msgid "Process a Delivery" -msgstr "Traiter une livraison" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:47 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:143 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:113 -msgid "" -"Go to **Inventory** and click on the **# TO DO** link under the **Delivery " -"Orders** kanban card." -msgstr "" -"Allez dans le module **Inventaire**, et cliquez sur le lien **# A FAIRE** " -"dans la fiche kanban **Livraisons**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:53 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:110 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:130 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:149 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:99 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:119 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:99 -msgid "Click on the picking that you want to process." -msgstr "Cliquez sur l'opération de stock que vous voulez traiter." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:55 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Output** to the " -"**customer**." +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:35 +msgid "Process a Receipt" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:58 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:37 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:37 msgid "" -"This has completed the **Shipping Step** and the WH/OUT should now show " -"**Done** in the status column at the top of the page, which means the " -"product has been shipped to the customer." +"You can also fin the receipt directly from the *Inventory* app. When on the " +"dashboard, you can click the *1 TO PROCESS* button under the *Receipts* " +"Kanban card. Then, you will see your receipt." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:44 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:44 +msgid "" +"Now, enter the picking that you want to process. You will be able to click " +"on *Validate* to complete the move directly as products coming from " +"suppliers are considered as being always available." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:51 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:51 +msgid "" +"Once you *Validate* the receipt, the products leave the *Supplier Location* " +"to enter your *WH/Stock Location*. You can easily see that the receipt took " +"place thanks to the status of the document, which is now *Done*." msgstr "" -"Ceci a terminé l'**Etape d'Expédition**, et le WH/OUT doit maintenant " -"indiquer **Terminé** dans la ligne d'état en haut de la page, ce qui indique" -" que la commande a été expédiée au client." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:3 -msgid "How can you change the packaging type for your sale order?" +msgid "Deliver Products in Packages" msgstr "" -"Comment pouvez-vous changer le type d'emballage sur votre bon de commande " -"client ?" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:5 msgid "" -"Odoo gives you the possibility to change the default packaging type and " -"adapt the packaging the way you want it, depending on the weight of the " -"order." +"In Odoo, you have the possibility to deliver your products in different " +"packages, depending on the volume and or weight of your products." msgstr "" -"Odoo vous permet de changer le type d'emballage par défaut, et d'adapter " -"l'emballage comme vous le souhaitez, en fonction du poids de la commande." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:11 msgid "" -"In the **Inventory** module, Go to **Configuration** and then click on " -"**Settings**." +"First, you need to activate the *Delivery Packages* feature in the " +"*Inventory app > Configuration > Settings*." msgstr "" -"Dans le module **Inventaire**, allez dans **Configuration** puis cliquez sur" -" **Configuration**." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:18 +msgid "Proceed to a Delivery" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:20 msgid "" -"In :menuselection:`Traceability --> Packages`, flag **Record packages used " -"on packing : pallets, boxes,...**" +"Now, you can create a planned delivery with some products in it. You will " +"have the possibility to create new packages and assign them to the stock " +"move lines." msgstr "" -"Dans :menuselection:`Traçabilité --> Colis`, cochez **Enregister les paquets" -" à utiliser: palettes, boîtes, ...**" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:24 -msgid "*Sale process*" -msgstr "*Processus de vente*" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:26 -msgid "In the **Sales** module, go to **Sales** and click on **Sale Order**." -msgstr "" -"Dans le module **Ventes**, allez dans **Ventes** et cliquez sur **Bons de " -"commande**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:28 -msgid "Create your new Sale Order, and **Confirm the Sale**." -msgstr "Créez votre nouvelle commande client, et **Confirmer la vente**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:33 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:27 msgid "" -"Once you've confirmed the Sale, you need to click on **Delivery**, to be " -"redirected to the Delivery order." +"Then, you can define the package type from this window. Once the delivery " +"order is validated, you can retrieve which products have been included in " +"the package." msgstr "" -"Une fois que vous aurez confirmé la Vente, vous devrez cliquer sur " -"**Livraison** pour être redirigé vers l'ordre de Livraison." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:36 -msgid "Click on **Edit**, and you can now change the packaging." -msgstr "" -"Cliquez sur **Modifier**, et vous pouvez maintenant changer l'emballage." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:41 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:34 msgid "" -"In the **Operations** tab, in the last column, change the **0** and put the " -"number of products that you want to pack together. Then click on **Put in " -"Pack**." +"A button will appear at the delivery stage, allowing you to find all the " +"packages which were part of the delivery order." msgstr "" -"Dans l'onglet **Opérations**, dans la dernière colonne, changez le **0** et " -"saisissez le nombre d'articles que vous voulez emballer ensemble. Puis " -"cliquez sur **Ajouter au colis**." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:48 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:44 +msgid "Use the Put in Pack button" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:46 msgid "" -"Choose the type of packaging that you want. You can also see that the weight" -" has been adapted to your package, and you can change it manually if you " -"want it to be more precise. Then click on **Save**." +"Another way to put products in packs is to use the *Put in Pack* button. It " +"will automatically assign a pack to the number of products which is set as " +"*Done* and duplicate the stock move line if necessary." msgstr "" -"Choisissez le type d'emballage que vous souhaitez. Vous pouvez aussi voir " -"que le poids à été adapté à votre colisage, et vous pouvez le changer " -"manuellement si vous voulez être plus précis. Puis cliquez sur " -"**Sauvegarder**." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:52 -msgid "Repeat the operation until all the products are put in pack." +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Then, you will be able to update the different packages created this way, " +"directly via the *Packages* button." msgstr "" -"Répétez l'opération jusqu'à ce que tous les produits soient mis dans des " -"colis." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:54 -msgid "Finally, click on **Validate** to confirm the delivery." -msgstr "Pour finir, cliquer sur **Valider** pour confirmer la livraison." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:3 msgid "How is the scheduled delivery date computed?" @@ -1703,6 +1224,7 @@ msgstr "" " Les dates calculées dépendent des délais qui sont configurés dans Odoo." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:18 msgid "Configuring lead times" msgstr "Configuration des délais de mise en œuvre" @@ -1719,6 +1241,7 @@ msgstr "" "La configuration des différents délais d'exécution se fait comme suit :" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:22 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:28 msgid "At a product level" msgstr "Au niveau article" @@ -1797,6 +1320,7 @@ msgstr "" "voulez créer des routes de fabrication." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:67 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:74 msgid "At the company level" msgstr "Au niveau société" @@ -1836,12 +1360,9 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:84 msgid "" -"To set ut your security dates, go to :menuselection:`Settings --> General " +"To set up your security dates, go to :menuselection:`Settings --> General " "settings` and click on **Configure your company data**." msgstr "" -"Pour configurer vos dates de sécurité, allez à :menuselection:`Configuration" -" --> Paramètres Généraux` et cliquez sur **Configurer les données de la " -"société**." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:90 msgid "" @@ -1883,6 +1404,7 @@ msgstr "" "défaut." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:110 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:134 msgid "At route level" msgstr "Au niveau routage" @@ -1929,6 +1451,11 @@ msgstr "" "antérieure à la date calculée théorique, Odoo affichera automatiquement une " "alerte." +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:137 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:173 +msgid "Example" +msgstr "Exemple" + #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:139 msgid "" "As an example, you may sell a car today (January 1st), that is purchased on " @@ -1971,463 +1498,289 @@ msgstr "" "et commander." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:3 -msgid "How to process delivery orders in three steps (pick + pack + ship)?" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:3 +msgid "Process a Receipt in three steps (Input + Quality + Stock)" msgstr "" -"Comment traiter des ordres de livraison en trois étapes (collecte + " -"emballage + expédition) ?" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:5 msgid "" -"When an order goes to the shipping department for final delivery, Odoo is " -"set up by default on a **one-step** operation: once all goods are available," -" they can be shipped in bulk in a single delivery order. However, that " -"process may not reflect the reality and your company may require more steps " -"before shipping." +"In many companies, it is necessary to assess the received good. The goal is " +"to check that the products correspond to the quality requirements agreed " +"with the suppliers. Therefore, adding a *quality control step* in the goods " +"receipt process can become essential." msgstr "" -"Quand une commande arrive au service expédition pour la livraison finale, " -"Odoo est configuré par défaut pour **une seule étape** : quand tous les " -"produits sont disponibles, ils peuvent être expédiés dans un seul ordre de " -"livraison. Toutefois, ce processus peut ne pas refléter la réalité et votre " -"entreprise peut nécessiter plusieurs étapes avant l'expédition." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:14 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:10 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:10 msgid "" -"With the **three steps** process (**Pick + Pack + Ship**), the items are " -"transferred to a packing area, where they will be assembled by area of " -"destination, and then set to outbound trucks for final delivery to the " -"customers." +"Odoo uses routes to define exactly how you will handle the different receipt" +" steps. The configuration is done at the level of the warehouse. By default," +" the reception is a one-step process, but changing the configuration can " +"allow having 3 steps." msgstr "" -"Avec le processus **trois étapes** (**Préparation + Emballage + " -"Expédition**), les articles sont transférés dans une zone d'emballage, où " -"ils seront assemblés par zone de destination, et rassemblés dans des camions" -" de livraison afin d'être livrés aux clients." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:19 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:15 msgid "" -"A few configuration steps are necessary in order to accomplish **Pick + Pack" -" + Ship** in Odoo. These steps create some additional locations, which by " -"default are called **Output** and **Packing Zone**. So, if your warehouse's " -"code is ``WH``, this configuration will create a location called " -"``WH/Output`` and another one called ``WH/Packing Zone``." +"The 3-steps flow is as follows: You receive the goods in an input area, then" +" transfer them into a quality area for *quality control*. When the quality " +"check has been processed, you can move the goods from QC to stock. Of " +"course, you may change the quantity and only transfer to stock the quantity " +"that is valid and decide that you will return the quantity that is not good." msgstr "" -"Quelques étapes de configuration sont nécessaires afin d'accomplir les " -"opérations **Préparation + Emballage + Expédition**. Ces étapes créent des " -"emplacements supplémentaires, qui sont appelées par défaut **Zone " -"Expédition** et **Zone Emballage**. Ainsi, si votre code d'entrepôt est " -"``WH`, cette configuration créera un emplacement appelé ``WH/Zone " -"Expédition`` et un autre appelé ``WH/Zone Emballage``. " + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:23 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:23 +msgid "Multi-Step Routes" +msgstr "Routes en plusieurs étapes" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:25 msgid "" -"Goods will move from **WH/Stock** to **WH/Packing Zone** in the first step. " -"Then move from **WH/Packing Zone** to **WH/Output**. Then finally it will be" -" delivered from **WH/Output** to its **final destination**." +"First, you will need to activate the *multi-step routes* option. Indeed, " +"routes provide a mechanism to chain different actions together. Here, we " +"will chain the picking to the shipping." msgstr "" -"Les marchandises sont transférées de **WH/Stock** vers **WH/Zone Emballage**" -" dans la première étape. Puis de **WH/Zone Emballage** vers **WH/Zone " -"Expédition**. Finalement elles seront livrées de **WH/Zone Expédition** vers" -" leur **destination finale**." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:30 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:29 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:29 msgid "" -"Check out :doc:`inventory_flow` to determine if this inventory flow is the " -"correct method for your needs." +"To activate *multi-step routes*, open the *inventory app*, and go to " +"*Configuration > Settings* and activate the option. By default, activating " +"*multi-step routes* will also activate *Storage Locations*." msgstr "" -"Consultez :doc:`inventory_flow` pour vérifier si ce circuit de stock est " -"celui qui correspond à vos besoins." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:37 -msgid "Install the Inventory module" -msgstr "Installez le module Inventaire" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:39 -msgid "From the **App** menu, search and install the **Inventory** module." +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:38 +msgid "Warehouse configuration" msgstr "" -"Depuis le menu **Applications**, recherchez et installez le module " -"**Inventaire**." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:44 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:40 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:40 msgid "" -"You will also need to install the **Sales** module to be able to issue sales" -" orders." +"Now that *Multi-Step Routes* is activated, go to *Configuration > Warehouse*" +" and open the one you will use to deliver in 3 steps. Then, you can select " +"the option *Pack good, send goods in output and then deliver (3 steps)* as " +"*Outgoing Shipments*." msgstr "" -"Vous devrez aussi installer le module **Ventes** pour pouvoir passer des " -"commandes client." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:48 -msgid "Allow managing routes" -msgstr "Permettre la gestion des routes" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:50 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:48 msgid "" -"Odoo configures movement of delivery orders via **routes**. Routes provide a" -" mechanism to link different actions together. In this case, we will link " -"the picking step to the shipping step." +"Activating this option will lead to the creation of two new locations, " +"*Output* and *Packing Zone*." msgstr "" -"Odoo configure le transfert des ordres de livraison par des **routes**. Les " -"routes fournissent un mécanisme pour lier différentes actions entre elles. " -"Dans ce cas, nous allons lier l'étape de préparation à l'étape d'expédition." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:54 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:51 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:51 msgid "" -"To allow management of routes, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`" +"Of course, you can rename them if you want. To do so, go to *Configuration >" +" Locations* and select the one you want to rename. Change its name and hit " +"save." msgstr "" -"Pour permettre la gestion des routes, allez à :menuselection:`Configuration " -"--> Configuration`" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:56 -msgid "" -"Under :menuselection:`Location & Warehouse --> Routes`, activate the radio " -"button **Advanced routing of products using rules**. Make sure that the " -"option **Manage several locations per warehouse** is activated as well." -msgstr "" -"Dans :menuselection:`Emplacement & Entrepôt --> Routes`, cochez le bouton " -"radio **Routage avancé des articles en utilisant des règles**. Vérifiez que " -"l'option **Gérer plusieurs emplacements par entrepôt** est également " -"activée." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:64 -msgid "Configure the warehouse for Pick + Pack + Ship" -msgstr "Configurez l'entrepôt pour Préparation + Emballage + Expédition" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:66 -msgid "" -"Go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouses` and edit the warehouse " -"that will be used." -msgstr "" -"Allez à :menuselection:`Configuration --> Entrepôts` et modifiez l'entrepôt " -"qui sera utilisé." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:69 -msgid "" -"For outgoing shippings, set the option to **Make packages into a dedicated " -"location, bring them to the output location for shipping (Pick + Pack + " -"Ship).**" -msgstr "" -"Pour les expéditions, sélectionnez l'option **Faire les colis à un " -"emplacement dédié, puis les amener à l'emplacement de sortie pour expédition" -" (prélèvement + colisage + expédition)**" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:77 -msgid "Create a Sale Order" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:56 +msgid "Create a Sales Order" msgstr "Créez une commande client" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:58 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:58 +msgid "" +"In the *Sales* app, create a quotation with storable products to deliver. " +"Then, confirm it and three pickings will be created and linked to your sale " +"order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:65 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:65 +msgid "Now, click on the button. You should see three different pickings:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:67 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:67 +msgid "The first one, with a reference PICK, designates the picking process;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:69 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:69 +msgid "The second one, with a reference PACK, is for the packing process;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:71 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:71 +msgid "The third one, with a reference OUT, designates the shipping process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:77 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:77 +msgid "Process the picking, packing, and delivery" +msgstr "" + #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:79 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:79 msgid "" -"From the **Sale** module, create a sales order with some products to " -"deliver." +"The first operation to be processed is the picking and has a *Ready* status," +" while the others are *Waiting Another Operation*. The packing will become " +"*Ready* as soon as the picking is marked as *Done*." msgstr "" -"Depuis le module **Ventes**, créez une commande client avec quelques " -"articles à expédier." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:81 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:83 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:83 msgid "" -"Notice that we now see ``3`` transfers associated with this sales order in " -"the **stat button** above the sales order." +"You can enter the picking operation from here, or access it through the " +"inventory app." msgstr "" -"Notez que nous voyons maintenant ``3` livraisons associées à cette commande " -"client, dans le **bouton** en haut de la commande." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:87 -msgid "If you click the button, you should now see three different pickings:" -msgstr "" -"Si vous cliquez sur le bouton, vous devez maintenant voir trois opérations " -"de stock différentes :" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:89 -msgid "The first with a reference **PICK** to designate the picking process," -msgstr "" -"La première avec une référence **PICK** pour l'opération de prélèvement" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:91 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:89 msgid "" -"The second one with the reference **PACK** that is the packing process," +"Note that, if you have the product in stock, it will be automatically " +"reserved and you can validate the picking document." msgstr "" -"La seconde avec une référence **PACK** qui est l'opération de colisage," -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:93 -msgid "The last with a reference **OUT** to designate the shipping process." -msgstr "La dernière avec une référence **OUT** pour l'opération d'expédition." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:102 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:91 -msgid "How to Process the Picking Step?" -msgstr "Comment Traiter l'Etape de Préparation ?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:104 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:95 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:95 msgid "" -"Ensure that you have enough product in stock and Go to **Inventory** and " -"click on the **Waiting** link under the **Pick** kanban card." +"Now that the picking has been validated, the packing order is ready to be " +"processed. Since the documents are chained, the products that have been " +"picked are automatically reserved on the packing order so you can directly " +"validate it." msgstr "" -"Vérifiez que vous avez suffisamment d'articles en stock, allez dans le " -"module **Inventaire**, et cliquez sur le lien **En retard** dans la fiche " -"kanban **Préparation**." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:112 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:101 -msgid "Click on **Reserve** to reserve the products if they are available." -msgstr "" -"Cliquez sur **Réserver** pour réserver les produits s'ils sont disponibles." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:114 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:106 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:106 msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Stock** to **WH/Packing" -" Zone**." +"Then, you can validate your packing. In doing so, the delivery order can be " +"processed. Once again, it will be ready to be validated so you can transfer " +"the products to the customer location." msgstr "" -"Cliquer sur **Valider** afin d'effectuer le transfert de **WH/Stock** vers " -"**WH/Zone Empaquetage**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:116 -msgid "" -"This has completed the picking Step and the **WH/PICK** should now show " -"**Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"moved from **WH/Stock** to **WH/Packing Zone** location, which makes the " -"product available for the next step (Packing)." -msgstr "" -"Ceci a terminé l'**Etape de Préparation**, et le WH/PICK doit maintenant " -"indiquer **Terminé** dans la ligne d'état en haut de la page. L'article a " -"été déplacé de l'emplacement **WH/Stock** à l'emplacement **WH/Packing " -"Zone**, ce qui le rend disponible pour l'étape suivante (Emballage)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:122 -msgid "How to Process the Packing Step?" -msgstr "Comment traiter l'Etape d'Emballage ?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:124 -msgid "" -"Go to **Inventory** and click on the **# TRANSFERS** link under the **Pack**" -" kanban card." -msgstr "" -"Allez dans le module **Inventaire**, et cliquez sur le lien **# A " -"TRANSFERER** dans la fiche kanban **Emballage**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:132 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Packing Zone** to " -"**WH/Output**." -msgstr "" -"Cliquer sur **Valider** afin d'effectuer le transfert de **WH/Zone " -"Empaquetage** vers **WH/Sortie**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:135 -msgid "" -"This has completed the packing step and the **WH/PACK** should now show " -"**Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"moved from **WH/Packing Zone** to **WH/Output location**, which makes the " -"product available for the next step (Shipping)." -msgstr "" -"Ceci a terminé l'étape de colisage, et le WH/PACK doit maintenant indiquer " -"**Terminé** dans la ligne d'état en haut de la page. L'article a été " -"transféré de l'emplacement **WH/Packing Zone** à l'emplacement " -"**WH/Output**, ce qui le rend disponible pour l'étape suivante (Expédition)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:141 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:111 -msgid "How to Process the Shipping Step?" -msgstr "Comment Traiter l'Etape d'Expédition ?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:151 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Output** to the " -"**customer** (Click **Apply** to assign the quantities based on the " -"quantities listed in the **To Do** column)." -msgstr "" -"Cliquez sur **Valider** afin d'effectuer le transfert de **WH/Output** vers " -"le **client** (Cliquez sur **Appliquer** pour assigner les quantités listées" -" dans la colonne **A Faire**)" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:155 -msgid "" -"This has completed the shipping step and the **WH/OUT** should now show " -"**Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"shipped to the customer." -msgstr "" -"Ceci a terminé l'**Etape d'Expédition**, et le WH/OUT doit maintenant " -"indiquer **Terminé** dans la ligne d'état en haut de la page. La commande a " -"été expédiée au client." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:3 -msgid "How to process delivery orders in two steps (pick + ship)?" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:3 +msgid "Process a Receipt in two steps (Input + Stock)" msgstr "" -"Comment traiter des ordres de livraison en deux étapes (collecte + " -"expédition) ?" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:8 msgid "" -"When an order goes to the shipping department for final delivery, Odoo is " -"set up by default to utilize a **one-step** operation: once all goods are " -"available, they are able to be shipped in a single delivery order. However, " -"your company's business process may have one or more steps that happen " -"before shipping. In the **two steps** process, the items in a delivery order" -" are **picked** in the warehouse and brought to an **output location** for " -"**shipping**. The goods are then shipped." -msgstr "" -"Quand une commande arrive au service expédition pour la livraison finale, " -"Odoo est configuré par défaut pour **une seule étape** : quand tous les " -"produits sont disponibles, ils peuvent être expédiés dans un seul ordre de " -"livraison. Toutefois, votre entreprise a peut-être plusieurs étapes avant " -"l'expédition. Dans le circuit **deux étapes**, les articles de l'ordre de " -"livraison sont **prélévés** dans l'entrepôt et amenés à un **emplacement de " -"sortie** pour **expédition**. Les marchandises sont ensuite expédiées." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:16 -msgid "" -"In order to accomplish a **Pick + Ship** delivery in Odoo, there are a few " -"necessary configuration steps. These steps create an additional location, " -"which by default is called **Output**. So, if your warehouse's code is " -"``WH``, this configuration will create a location called ``WH/Output``. " -"Goods will move from ``WH/Stock`` to ``WH/Output`` in the first step " -"(picking). Then, they move from ``WH/Output`` to ``WH/Customers`` (in the " -"case of sales orders) in the second step (shipping)." +"Odoo uses routes to define exactly how you will handle the different receipt" +" steps. The configuration is done at the *Warehouse* level. By default, the " +"reception is a one-step process, but changing the configuration can allow " +"you to have 2 steps." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:32 -msgid "Allow management of routes" -msgstr "Permettre la gestion des routes" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:13 +msgid "" +"The 2 steps flow is like this: you receive the goods in an input area, then " +"transfer them to your stock. As long as the goods are not transferred in " +"your stock, they will not be available for further processing." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:19 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:19 +msgid "Activate Multi-Step Routes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:21 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:21 +msgid "" +"The first step is to allow using *multi-step routes*. Indeed, routes provide" +" a mechanism to chain different actions together. In this case, we will " +"chain the unload step in the input area to the step entering the products in" +" stock." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:26 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:26 +msgid "" +"To allow *multi-step routes*, go to *Configuration > Settings* and activate " +"the feature. By default, activating *multi-step routes* will also activate " +"*Storage Locations*." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:34 -msgid "" -"Odoo configures movement of delivery orders via the **routes**. Routes " -"provide a mechanism to chain different actions together. In this case, we " -"will chain the picking step to the shipping step." +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:34 +msgid "Configure warehouse for receipt in 2 steps" msgstr "" -"Odoo configure le transfert des ordres de livraison par les **routes**. Les " -"routes fournissent un mécanisme pour lier différentes actions entre elles. " -"Dans ce cas, nous allons lier l'étape de préparation à l'étape d'expédition." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:36 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:36 msgid "" -"To allow management of routes, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`." +"Once *multi-step routes* is activated, you can go to *Configuration > " +"Warehouse* and enter the warehouse which will use receipt in 2 steps. Then, " +"you can select the option *Receive goods in input and then stock (2 steps)* " +"for *Incoming Shipments*." msgstr "" -"Pour permettre la gestion des routes, allez à :menuselection:`Configuration " -"--> Configuration`" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:40 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:45 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:44 msgid "" -"Ensure that the radio button **Advanced routing of products using rules** is" -" checked." +"Activating this option will lead to the creation of a new *Input* location. " +"If you want to rename it, you can go to *Configuration > Locations > Select " +"Input* and update its name." msgstr "" -"Assurez-vous que le bouton radio **Routage avancé des article en utilisant " -"des règles** est coché." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:46 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:54 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:52 +msgid "Create a purchase order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:56 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:54 msgid "" -"Click on **Apply** at the top of the page to save changes (if you needed to " -"check the radio button above)." +"In the *Purchase* application, you can create a *Request for Quotation* with" +" some storable products to receive from a supplier. Once the *RfQ* is " +"confirmed, the receipt picking will be created and automatically linked to " +"your purchase order." msgstr "" -"Cliquez sur **Appliquer** en haut de la page pour sauvegarder les " -"modifications (si vous avez du cocher le bouton radio ci-dessus)." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:50 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:65 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:62 msgid "" -"If you checked option **Advanced routing of products using rules** you may " -"need to activate **Manage several locations per warehouse** if it wasn't " -"activated beforehand." +"Now, by clicking on the *1 Receipt* button, you will see the first picking " +"which will allow entering the product in the *input location*. Then, another" +" picking, an internal transfer, has been created in order to move the " +"products to *Stock*." msgstr "" -"Si vous avez coché l'option **Routage avancé des produits en utilisant des " -"règles**, vous devrez peut-être activer **Gérer plusieurs emplacements par " -"entrepôt** si cela n'avait pas été activé au préalable." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:55 -msgid "Configure warehouse for Pick + Ship" -msgstr "Configurez l'entrepôt pour Préparation + Expédition" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:57 -msgid "" -"To configure a **Pick + Ship** move, go to :menuselection:`Configuration -->" -" Warehouses` and edit the warehouse that will be used." +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:71 +msgid "Process the picking and the delivery" msgstr "" -"Pour configurer un mouvement **Préparation + Expédition**, allez à " -":menuselection:`Configuration --> Entrepôts` et modifiez l'entrepôt qui sera" -" utilisé." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:61 -msgid "" -"For outgoing shippings, set the option to **Bring goods to output location " -"before shipping (Pick + Ship)**" -msgstr "" -"Pour les expéditions, sélectionnez l'option **Apporter les marchandises à " -"l'emplacement de sortie avant l'expédition (préparation + expédition)**" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:70 -msgid "" -"Install the **Sale** if it is not the case, and create a sales order with " -"some products to deliver." -msgstr "" -"Installez le module **Ventes** si nécessaire, et créez une commande client " -"avec quelques articles à expédier." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:73 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:70 msgid "" -"Notice that we now see ``2`` transfers associated with this sales order in " -"the **Delivery** stat button above the sales order." +"The receipt is the first one to be processed and has a *Ready* status while " +"the internal transfer will only become *Ready* once the receipt has been " +"marked as *Done*." msgstr "" -"Notez que nous voyons maintenant ``2` livraisons associées à cette commande " -"client, dans le **bouton** en haut de la commande." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:79 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:77 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:74 msgid "" -"If you click on the **2 Transfers** stat button, you should now see two " -"different pickings, one with a reference **PICK** to designate the picking " -"process and another with a reference **OUT** to designate the shipping " -"process." +"You can enter the receipt operation from the purchase order, or access it " +"through the inventory dashboard." msgstr "" -"Si vous cliquez sur le bouton **2 Livraison**, vous devriez maintenant voir " -"deux opérations de stock différentes, une avec une référence **PICK** pour " -"l'opération de préparation, et une autre avec une référence **OUT** pour " -"l'opération d'expédition." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:93 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:84 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:80 msgid "" -"Ensure that you have enough product in stock, and go to **Inventory** and " -"click on the **Waiting** link under the **Pick** kanban card." +"By default, a receipt is always considered as ready to be processed. Then, " +"you will be able to directly click on *Validate* to mark it as done." msgstr "" -"Vérifiez que vous avez suffisamment d'articles en stock, allez dans le " -"module **Inventaire**, et cliquez sur le lien **En retard** dans la fiche " -"kanban **Préparation**." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:103 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:92 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:87 msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Stock** to " -"**WH/Output**." +"Once the receipt has been validated, the internal transfer is ready to be " +"processed. As documents are chained, the products which have been received " +"are automatically reserved on the internal transfer. Once the transfer is " +"validated, those products enter the stock and you will be able to use them " +"to fulfill customer deliveries or manufacture products." msgstr "" -"Cliquez sur **Valider** afin d'effectuer le transfert de **WH/Stock** vers " -"**WH/Output**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:105 -msgid "" -"This has completed the picking step and the **WH/PICK** move should now show" -" **Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"moved from **WH/Stock** to **WH/Output** location, which makes the product " -"**available for the next step** (Shipping)." -msgstr "" -"Ceci a terminé l'**Etape de Préparation**, et le WH/PICK doit maintenant " -"indiquer **Terminé** dans la ligne d'état en haut de la page. L'article a " -"été déplacé de l'emplacement **WH/Stock** à l'emplacement **WH/Output**, ce " -"qui le rend disponible pour l'étape suivante (Expédition)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:121 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Output** to the " -"customer (Click **Apply** to assign the quantities based on the quantities " -"listed in the **To Do** column)" -msgstr "" -"Cliquez sur **Valider** afin d'effectuer le transfert de **WH/Output** vers " -"le client (Cliquez sur **Appliquer** pour assigner les quantités listées " -"dans la colonne **A Faire**)" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:125 -msgid "" -"This has completed the shipping step and the **WH/OUT** move should now show" -" **Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"shipped to the customer." -msgstr "" -"Ceci a terminé l'**Etape d'Expédition**, et le WH/OUT doit maintenant " -"indiquer **Terminé** dans la ligne d'état en haut de la page. La commande a " -"été expédiée au client." #: ../../inventory/management/incoming.rst:3 msgid "Incoming Shipments" @@ -2532,387 +1885,12 @@ msgid "This is the default configuration in Odoo." msgstr "C'est la configuration par défaut dans Odoo." #: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:68 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:126 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:97 msgid ":doc:`../delivery/inventory_flow`" msgstr ":doc:`../delivery/inventory_flow`" -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:3 -msgid "How to add a quality control step in goods receipt? (3 steps)" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:68 +msgid "Process the receipt and the internal transfer" msgstr "" -"Comment ajouter une étape de contrôle qualité à la réception des " -"marchandises ? (3 étapes)" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:8 -msgid "" -"In many companies, it is necessary to assess the received good. The goal is " -"to check that the products correspond to the quality requirements agreed " -"with the suppliers. Therefore, adding a quality control step in the goods " -"receipt process can become essential." -msgstr "" -"Dans de nombreuses entreprises, il est nécessaire d'évaluer les marchandises" -" reçues. L'objectif est de vérifier que les produits correspondent aux " -"exigences de qualité convenues avec les fournisseurs. Par conséquent, " -"l'ajout d'une étape de contrôle qualité dans le processus de réception des " -"marchandises devient essentiel." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Odoo uses routes to define exactly how you will handle the different receipt" -" steps. The configuration is done at the level of the warehouse. By default," -" the reception is a one step process, but changing the configuration can " -"allow to have 2 or even 3 steps." -msgstr "" -"Odoo utilise des routes pour définir exactement comment vous allez gérer les" -" différentes étapes de réception. La configuration se fait au niveau de " -"l'entrepôt. Par défaut, la réception est un processus en une seule étape, " -"mais changer la configuration permet d'avoir 2 ou même 3 étapes." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:18 -msgid "" -"The 3 steps flow is as follows: You receive the goods in an input area, then" -" transfer them into quality area for quality control. When the quality check" -" has been processed, you can move the goods from QC to stock. Of course, you" -" may change the quantity and only transfer to stock the quantity that is " -"valid and decide that you will return the quantity that is not good." -msgstr "" -"Le flux en 3 étapes est comme suit : Vous recevez les marchandises dans une " -"zone d'entrée, puis vous les transférez dans une zone qualité pour le " -"contrôle. Quand le contrôle qualité a été réalisé, vous pouvez transférer " -"les marchandises de la zone qualité au stock. Bien sûr, vous pouvez changer " -"les quantités et seulement transférer dans le stock la quantité d'articles " -"conformes, et décider de renvoyer les articles non conformes." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:25 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:18 -msgid "This is the case that will be explained in this document." -msgstr "C'est celui qui est expliqué dans ce document." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:31 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:24 -msgid "Use advanced routes" -msgstr "Utilisez des routages avancés" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:33 -msgid "" -"To allow management of routes, go to the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Configuration --> Settings`." -msgstr "" -"Pour permettre la gestion des routes, allez dans le menu " -":menuselection:`Inventaire --> Configuration --> Configuration`" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:39 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:32 -msgid "" -"Ensure that the routes option **Advance routing of product using rules** is " -"checked, then click on **Apply** to save changes." -msgstr "" -"Assurez-vous que l'option **Routage avancé des articles en utilisant des " -"règles** est cochée, puis cliquez sur **Appliquer** pour sauvegarder les " -"modifications." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:42 -msgid "" -"Make sure that **Manage several locations per warehouse** is also ticked." -msgstr "" -"Assurez-vous que l'option **Gérer plusieurs emplacements par entrepôt** est " -"également cochée." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:46 -msgid "How to add a quality control step in goods receipt?" -msgstr "" -"Comment ajouter une étape de contrôle qualité à la réception des " -"marchandises ?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:48 -msgid "" -"Go to the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Warehouse` " -"and choose the warehouse where you want to change reception methods." -msgstr "" -"Allez dans le menu :menuselection:`Inventaire --> Configuration --> " -"Entrepôts` et choisissez l'entrepôt où vous voulez changer les méthodes de " -"réception." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:51 -msgid "" -"By default, warehouses are configured with one step reception (**Receive " -"goods directly into stock**)." -msgstr "" -"Par défaut, les entrepôts sont configurés pour la réception en une étape " -"(**Marchandises reçues directement en stock**). " - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:54 -msgid "" -"To add quality control before transfer goods into stock location, tick " -"**Unload in input location, go through a quality control before being " -"admitted in stock (3 steps)**." -msgstr "" -"Pour ajouter le contrôle qualité avant le transfert des marchandises en " -"stock, cochez **Décharger dans l'emplacement d'entrée, passer par un " -"contrôle qualité avant d'être admis en stock (3 étapes)**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:62 -msgid "How to control a receipt?" -msgstr "Comment contrôler une réception ?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:65 -msgid "How to process the receipt step ?" -msgstr "Comment traiter l'étape de réception ?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:67 -msgid "" -"In the **Purchase** app, create a **Request for Quotation**. Click on the " -"**Confirm order** button. You can see that there is one **Shipment** related" -" to purchase order in the stat button above the purchase order form view. " -"This is the receipt step." -msgstr "" -"Dans le module **Achats**, créez une **Demande de prix**. Cliquez sur le " -"bouton **Confirmer la commande**. Vous pouvez voir qu'il y a une " -"**Expédition** relative à la commande fournisseur dans le bouton en haut de " -"la fiche de la commande. C'est l'étape de réception." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:75 -msgid "" -"Go to **Inventory** and click on the link **# TO RECEIVE** in the " -"**Receipts** card." -msgstr "" -"Allez dans le module **Inventaire**, et cliquez sur le lien **# A RECEVOIR**" -" dans la fiche kanban **Réceptions**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:80 -msgid "" -"Click on the receipt that you want to process. Click on **Validate** to " -"complete the move from the **Vendor** location to **WH/Input**." -msgstr "" -"Cliquez sur la réception que vous voulez traiter, puis cliquer sur " -"**Valider** afin d'effectuer le transfert de l'emplacement **Fournisseur** " -"vers **WH/Input**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:83 -msgid "" -"This has completed the receipt step and the status column at the top of the " -"page for **WH/IN** should now show **Done**. The product has been moved from" -" the **Vendor** to the **WH/Input** location, which makes the product " -"available for the next step (Move to the quality control zone)" -msgstr "" -"Ceci a terminé l'étape de réception**, et la ligne d'état en haut de la page" -" pour **WH/IN** doit maintenant indiquer **Terminé**. L'article a été " -"transféré du **Fournisseur** à l'emplacement **WH/Input**, ce qui le rend " -"disponible pour l'étape suivante (Transfert dans la zone de contrôle " -"qualité)" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:89 -msgid "" -"How to move your product from the receipt zone to the quality control zone ?" -msgstr "" -"Comment transférer vos articles de la zone de réception à la zone de " -"contrôle qualité ?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:91 -msgid "" -"Go to the **Inventory** dashboard. You will see that there is one transfer " -"ready (the move to the quality control zone) and one waiting (the move to " -"the stock after the control). Click on the link **# TRANSFERS** in the " -"**Internal Transfers** to process the quality control." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:101 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Input** to **WH/Quality" -" Control**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:104 -msgid "" -"This has completed the internal transfer step and the status column at the " -"top of the page for **WH/INT** should now show **Done**. The receipt is now " -"ready to be controlled." -msgstr "" -"Ceci a terminé l'étape de transfert interne, et la ligne d'état en haut de " -"la page pour **WH/INT** doit maintenant indiquer **Terminé**. L'article est " -"maintenant prêt a être contrôlé." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:109 -msgid "How to to process the quality control ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:111 -msgid "" -"Go back to the **Inventory** dashboard. The waiting transfer is now ready. " -"Click on the link **# TRANSFERS** in the **Internal Transfers** card to " -"process the quality control." -msgstr "" -"Revenez dans le tableau de bord du module **Inventaire**. Le transfert en " -"attente est maintenant prêt. Cliquez sur le lien **# Transferts** dans la " -"fiche kanban **Transferts internes** pour procéder au contrôle qualité." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:118 -msgid "" -"Click on the last picking to process. Click on **Validate** to complete the " -"move from **WH/Quality Control** to **WH/Stock**." -msgstr "" -"Cliquez sur la dernière opération de stock à traiter. Cliquez sur " -"**Valider** afin d'effectuer le transfert de **WH/Quality Control** vers " -"**WH/Stock**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:121 -msgid "" -"This has completed the quality control step and the status column at the top" -" of the page for **WH/INT** should now show **Done**. The receipt has been " -"controlled and has moved to your stock." -msgstr "" -"Ceci a terminé l'étape de contrôle qualité, et la ligne d'état en haut de la" -" page pour **WH/INT** doit maintenant indiquer **Terminé**. L'article a été " -"contrôlé et transféré dans votre stock." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:127 -msgid ":doc:`two_steps`" -msgstr ":doc:`two_steps`" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:3 -msgid "How to unload your shipment to an input location? (2 steps)" -msgstr "" -"Comment décharger votre expédition à un emplacement d'entrée ? (2 étapes)" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:13 -msgid "" -"The 2 steps flow is the following : You receive the goods in an input area " -"then transfer them from input area to your stock. As long as the goods are " -"not transferred in your stock, they will not be available for further " -"processing." -msgstr "" -"Le flux en 2 étapes est le suivant : Vous recevez les marchandises dans une " -"zone d'entrée, puis vous les transférez de la zone d'entrée au stock. Tant " -"que les marchandises ne sont pas transférés dans le stock, elles ne sont pas" -" disponibles pour un traitement ultérieur." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:26 -msgid "" -"To allow management of routes, go to the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Configuration --> Settings`" -msgstr "" -"Pour permettre la gestion des routes, allez dans le menu " -":menuselection:`Inventaire --> Configuration --> Configuration`" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:35 -msgid "" -"Make sure that **\"Manage several locations per warehouse\"** is also " -"ticked." -msgstr "" -"Assurez-vous que l'option **Gérer plusieurs emplacements par entrepôt** est " -"également cochée." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:39 -msgid "How to configure your warehouse ?" -msgstr "Comment configurer votre entrepôt ?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:41 -msgid "" -"Go to the the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> " -"Warehouse` and choose the warehouse where you want to change reception " -"methods." -msgstr "" -"Allez dans le menu :menuselection:`Inventaire --> Configuration --> " -"Entrepôts` et choisissez l'entrepôt où vous voulez changer les méthodes de " -"réception." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:44 -msgid "" -"By default, warehouses are configured with one step reception (option " -"**Receive goods directly into stock**)." -msgstr "" -"Par défaut, les entrepôts sont configurés pour la réception en une étape " -"(option **Marchandises reçues directement en stock**)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:47 -msgid "" -"To add the control step, tick **Unload in input location then go to stock (2" -" steps)**." -msgstr "" -"Pour ajouter l'étape de contrôle, cochez **Décharger dans l'emplacement " -"d'entrée puis aller en stock (2 étapes)**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:54 -msgid "How to receipt a shipment in 2 steps?" -msgstr "Comment réceptionner une expédition en 2 étapes ?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:57 -msgid "How to process the Receipt step ?" -msgstr "Comment traiter l'étape de Réception ?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:59 -msgid "" -"In the purchase module, create a **Request for Quotation**, then click on " -"the **Confirm order** button. You can see that there is one **Shipment** " -"related to purchase order in the **stat button** above the purchase order " -"form view. This is the receipt step." -msgstr "" -"Dans le module Achats, créez une **Demande de prix**, puis cliquez sur le " -"bouton **Confirmer la commande**. Vous pouvez voir qu'il y a une " -"**Expédition** relative à la commande fournisseur, dans le bouton en haut de" -" la fiche de la commande fournisseur. C'est l'étape de réception." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:67 -msgid "" -"Go to **Inventory** and click on the **# TO RECEIVE** link on the " -"**Receipts** card." -msgstr "" -"Allez dans le module **Inventaire**, et cliquez sur le lien **# A RECEVOIR**" -" dans la fiche kanban **Réceptions**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:73 -msgid "" -"Click on the receipt that you want to process, then click on **Validate** to" -" complete the move from the **Vendor** to **WH/Input**." -msgstr "" -"Cliquez sur la réception que vous voulez traiter, puis cliquer sur " -"**Valider** afin d'effectuer le transfert du **Fournisseur** vers " -"**WH/Input**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:76 -msgid "" -"This has completed the Receipt Step and the move refered with **WH/IN**. The" -" product has been moved from the **Vendor** to the **WH/Input** location, " -"which makes the product available for the next step." -msgstr "" -"Ceci a terminé l'Etape de Réception, et l'opération de stock référencée par " -"**WH/IN**. L'article a été transféré du **Fournisseur** à l'emplacement " -"**WH/Input**, ce qui le rend disponible pour l'étape suivante." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:81 -msgid "How to transfer the receipt to your stock ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:83 -msgid "" -"Go back to the **Inventory** dashboard. The waiting transfer is now ready. " -"Click on the **# TRANSFERS** in the **Internal Transfers** to process the " -"quality control." -msgstr "" -"Revenez dans le tableau de bord du module **Inventaire**. Le transfert en " -"attente est maintenant prêt. Cliquez sur **# Transferts** dans la fiche " -"kanban **Transferts internes** pour procéder au contrôle qualité." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:90 -msgid "" -"Click on the picking you want to process. Click on **Validate** to complete " -"the move from **WH/Input** to **WH/Stock**." -msgstr "" -"Cliquez sur l'opération de stock que vous voulez traiter. Cliquez sur " -"**Valider** afin d'effectuer le transfert de **WH/Input** vers **WH/Stock**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:93 -msgid "" -"This has completed the internal transfer step and the move refered with " -"**WH/INT**. The receipt has been moved to your stock." -msgstr "" -"Ceci a terminé l'étape de transfert interne, et l'opération de stock " -"référencée par **WH/INT**.La réception a été transférée dans votre stock." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:98 -msgid ":doc:`three_steps`" -msgstr ":doc:`three_steps`" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers.rst:3 msgid "Lots and Serial Numbers" @@ -2923,9 +1901,6 @@ msgid "What's the difference between lots and serial numbers?" msgstr "Quelle est la différence entre des lots et des numéros de série ?" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:170 msgid "Introduction" msgstr "Introduction" @@ -2990,699 +1965,1427 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:46 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:135 msgid ":doc:`serial_numbers`" msgstr ":doc:`serial_numbers`" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:47 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:129 msgid ":doc:`lots`" msgstr ":doc:`lots`" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:3 -msgid "How to manage lots of identical products?" -msgstr "Comment gérer des lots d'articles identiques ?" +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:3 +msgid "Manage expiration dates" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In many companies, products have expiration dates and they should be tracked" +" based on those dates. In the food industry, for example, tracking stocks " +"based on expiration dates is mandatory to avoid selling expired products to " +"customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:10 +msgid "" +"With Odoo, you can track your products based on their expiration dates, even" +" if they are already tracked by lots or serial numbers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:14 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:15 +msgid "Configurations" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:17 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:18 +msgid "Application configuration" +msgstr "Configuration de l'application" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:19 +msgid "" +"To use expiration dates tracking, open the *Inventory* application and go to" +" *Configuration > Settings* and activate the *Lots & Serial Numbers* and " +"*Expiration Dates* features." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:27 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:28 +#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:68 +#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:90 +msgid "Product configuration" +msgstr "Configuration d'article" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:29 +msgid "" +"Now, you have the possibility to define different dates in the *inventory " +"tab* of the product form:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:32 +msgid "" +"Product Use Time: it’s the number of days before the goods start " +"deteriorating, without being dangerous yet. It will be computed using the " +"lot/serial number;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:34 +msgid "" +"Product Life Time: refers to the number of days before the goods may become " +"dangerous and must not be consumed. It will be computed on the lot/serial " +"number;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:36 +msgid "" +"Product Removal Time: shows the number of days before the goods should be " +"removed from the stock. It will be computed on the lot/serial number;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:38 +msgid "" +"Product Alert Time: refers to the number of days before an alert should be " +"raised on the lot/serial number." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:44 +msgid "Expiration Date on Lots/Serial Numbers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:46 +msgid "" +"When receiving a product in stock, the dates will automatically be updated " +"on the corresponding lot/serial number. This update will be based on the " +"reception date of the product and the times set on the product form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:58 +msgid "Expiration Alerts" +msgstr "Alertes d'expiration" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:60 +msgid "" +"You can access all your expiration alerts from the *inventory* app. To do " +"so, go to *Master Data > Lots/Serial Numbers*. There, you can use the pre-" +"existing filter that shows all the lots/serial numbers that exceeded their " +"alert date." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:3 +msgid "Manage lots of identical products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:5 msgid "" "Lots are useful for products you receive in great quantity and for which a " -"lot number can help in reportings, quality controls, or any other info. Lots" -" will help identify a number of pieces having for instance a production " +"lot number can help in reporting, quality controls, or any other info. Lots " +"will help identify a number of pieces having, for instance, a production " "fault. It can be useful for a batch production of clothes or food." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:14 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:11 msgid "" -"Odoo has the capacity to manage lots ensuring compliance with the " +"Odoo has the capacity to manage lots, ensuring compliance with the " "traceability requirements imposed by the majority of industries." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:17 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:14 msgid "" "The double-entry management in Odoo enables you to run very advanced " "traceability." msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:18 +msgid "Setting Up" +msgstr "" + #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:21 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:19 -msgid "Setting up" +msgid "Application Configuration" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:24 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:22 -msgid "Application configuration" -msgstr "Configuration de l'application" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:26 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:23 msgid "" -"You need activate the tracking of lots in the settings. In the **Inventory**" -" application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`, select " -"**Track lots or serial numbers**" +"First, you need to activate the tracking of lot numbers. To do so, go to " +"*Inventory > Configuration > Settings* and tick *Lots & Serial Numbers*. " +"Then, click on save." msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:31 +msgid "Product Configuration" +msgstr "Configuration d'article" + #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:33 msgid "" -"In order to have an advanced management of the lots, you should also select " -"**Manage several locations per warehouse**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:39 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:31 -#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:27 -#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:26 -msgid "Then click on **Apply**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:42 -msgid "Operation types configuration" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:44 -msgid "" -"You also need to set up how you will manage lots for each operations. In the" -" **Inventory** application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Operation Types`." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:48 -msgid "" -"For each type (receipts, internal transfers, deliveries,...), you can set if" -" you can create new lot numbers or only use existing lot numbers." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:57 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:36 -msgid "" -"Finally, you have to configure which products you want to track in lots." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:59 -msgid "" -"Go into :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Products`, and open the " -"product of your choice. Click on **Edit**, and in the **Inventory** tab, " -"select **Tracking by Lots**, then click on **Save**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:67 -msgid "Manage lots" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:70 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:49 -msgid "Transfers" -msgstr "Transferts" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:72 -msgid "" -"In order to process a transfer of a product tracked by lot, you have to " -"input the lot number(s)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:75 -msgid "Click on the lot icon :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:80 -msgid "" -"A window will pop-up. Click on **Add an item** and fill in the lot number " -"and the quantity." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:86 -msgid "" -"Depending on your operation type configuration, you will be able to fill in " -"new lot numbers, or only use existing ones." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:90 -msgid "In the scanner interface, you just have to scan the lot numbers." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:93 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:79 -msgid "Inventory adjustment" -msgstr "Ajustement de stock" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:95 -msgid "Inventory of a product tracked by lot can be done in 2 ways:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:97 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:83 -msgid "Classic inventory by products" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:99 -msgid "Inventory of a lot" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:101 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:87 -msgid "" -"When doing a classic inventory, there is a **Serial Number** column. If the " -"product has already been assigned with a number, it is already pre-filled." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:105 -msgid "" -"Click on **Add an item** if the product has not been inventoried yet. You " -"can easily create lots, just type in a new lot number in the column." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:111 -msgid "" -"You can also just do the inventory of a lot. In this case, you will have to " -"fill in the **Lot number**. You can also create a new lot from here. Just " -"type in the number, a window will pop out to link the number to a product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:120 -msgid "Lots traceability" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:122 -msgid "" -"You can check the lot traceability from :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Inventory Control --> Serial Numbers/Lots`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:128 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:122 -msgid "You can have more details by clicking on the **Traceability** button :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:134 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:128 -msgid ":doc:`differences`" -msgstr ":doc:`differences`" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:3 -msgid "How to work with serial numbers?" -msgstr "Comment travailler avec des numéros de série ?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Serial Number Tracking is used to track products with serial numbers on " -"every transactions. You can track the current location of the product with " -"serial numbers. When the products are moved from one location to another " -"location, the system will automatically identify the current location of the" -" product based on last movement of the product. So you can get the last " -"location where the products are moved." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:24 -msgid "" -"You need activate the tracking of serial numbers in the settings. In the " -"**Inventory** application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`, select **Track lots or serial numbers**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:38 -msgid "" -"Go into :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Products`, and open the " -"product of your choice. Click on **Edit**, and in the **Inventory** tab, " -"select **By Unique Serial Number**, then click on **Save**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:46 -msgid "Manage Serial Numbers" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:51 -msgid "" -"In order to process a transfer of a product tracked by serial number, you " -"have to input the number(s). In order to be able to assign serial numbers to" -" products with tracking features enabled you will first need to mark your " -"transfer as to do. Click on the **Mark as TODO** button to display the Lot " -"Split icon." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:57 -msgid "Click on the serial number icon :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:62 -msgid "" -"A window will pop-up. Click on **Add an item** and fill in the serial " +"Now, you have to configure which products you want to track by serial " "numbers." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:68 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:36 msgid "" -"If you move products that already have serial numbers assigned, those will " -"appear in the list. Just click on the **+** icon to to confirm that you are " -"moving those serial numbers." +"Go to *Master Data > Products* and open the product of your choice. There, " +"click on *Edit* and select *Tracking by Lots* in the inventory tab." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:76 -msgid "In the scanner interface, you just have to scan the serial numbers." +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:47 +msgid "Manage Lots" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:81 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:52 msgid "" -"Inventory of a product tracked by serial numbers can be done in 2 ways:" +"In order to receive a product tracked by lots, you have to specify its lot " +"numbers. You have several ways of doing so:" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:85 -msgid "Inventory of a serial number" +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:55 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:65 +msgid "Manually assign the different lot numbers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:57 +msgid "Copy/paste lot numbers from an Excel file" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:59 +msgid "First, you need to open the detailed operations of your picking." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:67 +msgid "" +"When opening the detailed operations, you can click on *Add a line*. Then, " +"you will be able to fill the lot number in. Once done, you can click on *Add" +" a line* again to register a new lot number." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:75 +msgid "Copy/paste lot number from an Excel file" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:77 +msgid "" +"Once the spreadsheet containing the lot numbers you received from your " +"supplier and copy the list. Then, you can paste them in the *Lot/Serial " +"Number Name* column for Odoo to automatically create the necessary lines. " +"After that, you will have to manually enter the number of products that are " +"contained in each one of the lots." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:93 +msgid "Operation Types" +msgstr "Types d'opérations" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:95 +msgid "" +"Of course, you also have the possibility to define how you will manage lots " +"for each operation type. To do so, open the *Inventory* app and go to " +"*Configuration > Operation Types*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:99 +msgid "" +"For each type (receipts, internal transfers, deliveries, …), you can decide " +"if you allow to create new lot numbers or only use existing ones. By " +"default, the creation of new lots is only allowed at product reception, and " +"using existing lot numbers isn’t allowed in this operation. If you have " +"inter-warehouse transfers and track products by lots, it can be useful to " +"allow using existing lot numbers in receipts too." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:111 +msgid "Lots traceability" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:113 +msgid "" +"The lot number given to the products allows you to keep track of where they " +"were received, put in stock, to whom they were sold and where they were " +"shipped to." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:117 +msgid "" +"To track an item, open the *Inventory* module and, in *Master Data > " +"Lots/Serial Numbers*, click on the lot number corresponding to your search." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:124 +msgid "" +"When you open the *Traceability* information, you see in which documents the" +" lot number has been used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:130 +msgid "" +"Now, if you want to locate the lot number, you can do so by clicking on the " +"*Location* stat button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:3 +msgid "Work with serial numbers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:5 +msgid "" +"To track products with serial numbers, you can use the serial number " +"tracking. With them, you can track the current location of the product and, " +"when the products are moved from one location to another, the system will " +"automatically identify the current location of the product, based on its " +"last movement." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:11 +msgid "" +"If you want to do it or run very advanced traceability, the Odoo double-" +"entry management is the feature you need." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:20 +msgid "" +"First, you need to activate the serial numbers tracking. To do so, go to " +"*Configuration > Settings* in the *Inventory* application. Then, enable the " +"feature and hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:30 +msgid "" +"Now, you have to configure the products you want to track by serial numbers." +" To do so, go to *Master Data > Products* and open the product of your " +"choice. Edit it and select *Tracking By Unique Serial Number* in the " +"*Inventory tab*. Then, click on save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:42 +msgid "Manage Serial Numbers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:47 +msgid "" +"To receive a product that is tracked by serial number, you have to specify " +"its serial number. Of course, you have several ways of doing so:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:50 +msgid "Manual assignation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:52 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:73 +msgid "Multi-assignation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:54 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:89 +msgid "Copy/pasting from an Excel file" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:56 +msgid "" +"Whatever could be your favorite way to assign serial numbers, you firstly " +"need to open the detailed operations of your picking." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:63 +msgid "Manual assignation of the different serial numbers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:65 +msgid "" +"When opening the detailed operations, you can click on *Add a line*. Then, " +"you will be able to fill in the serial number field. Once done, you can " +"click again on *Add a line* to register a new serial number." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:75 +msgid "" +"By using the multi-assignation of serial numbers, Odoo will automatically " +"create the necessary lines. To do so, you have to enter the first serial " +"number of your set and the number of products you have to assign a serial " +"number to." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:80 +msgid "Once done, click on *Assign Serial Numbers* and Odoo will do the rest." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:91 msgid "" -"Click on **Add an item** if the product has not been inventoried yet. You " -"can easily create serial numbers, just type in a new number in the column." +"To use copy/pasting, open the spreadsheet containing the serial numbers you " +"received and copy the list. Then, past them in the *Lot/Serial Number Name* " +"column of the wizard. Doing so, Odoo will automatically create the lines you" +" need." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:98 -msgid "The quantity should be 1 for each line." +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:106 +msgid "Operation types" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:100 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:108 msgid "" -"You can also just do the inventory of a serial number. In this case, you " -"will have to fill in the serial number. You can also create a new one from " -"here. Just type in the number, a window will pop out to link it to a " -"product." +"You also have the possibility to define how you will manage lots for each " +"operation type. To define it, go to *Configuration > Operation Types* in the" +" *Inventory* app." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:109 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:112 +msgid "" +"For each type, you can decide if you allow the creation of new lot numbers " +"or want to use existing ones. By default, the creation of new lots is only " +"allowed at product reception." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:120 +msgid "" +"If you have inter-warehouse transfers and track products by lots, it can be " +"useful to allow using existing lot numbers in receipts too." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:124 msgid "Serial Number traceability" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:111 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:126 msgid "" -"The serial number given to these items allow you to keep track of where they" -" were received, put in stock, to whom they were sold and where they were " -"shipped to." +"Using serial numbers allows you to keep track of where the products were " +"received, put in stock, to whom they were sold, and where they were shipped " +"to." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:115 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:130 msgid "" -"To track an item, open the **Inventory** module, and in " -":menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Serial Numbers/lots`, click on the " -"serial number corresponding to your search." +"Tracking an item is easy: open the *Inventory* app, and go to *Master Data >" +" Lots/Serial Numbers* and click on the serial number corresponding to your " +"search. Then, open the *Traceability* information. There, you will see in " +"which documents the serial number has been used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:142 +msgid "" +"And, if you want to locate a serial number, you can do so by clicking on the" +" *Location* button available on the serial number form." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/misc.rst:3 msgid "Miscellaneous Operations" msgstr "Opérations diverses" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:2 -msgid "Immediate & Planned Transfers" +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:3 +msgid "Send Automated Emails at Delivery" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:4 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:8 msgid "" -"In Odoo, you can create two types of transfers: immediate or planned " -"transfers." +"First, go to the *Inventory* app, then to *Settings* and activate the *Email" +" Confirmation* feature. If you work in multi-company, this configuration is " +"company-specific." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:8 -msgid "Immediate Transfers" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:10 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:15 msgid "" -"When you create a transfer manually, it is by default an immediate transfer." +"When you enable this feature, Odoo automatically creates an email template. " +"Of course, you can modify it if necessary by clicking on the small arrow " +"next to its name." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:23 +msgid "Send email at delivery validation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:25 msgid "" -"In the case of an immediate transfer, you directly encode the products and " -"quantities you are processing, there is no reservation that applies. This is" -" why the column \"Initial Demand\" is not editable. You only fill in the " -"column \"Done\" for the quantities." +"On the inventory dashboard, click on *Create* and fill the form for a " +"specific partner. Once you have added some products in it, *Validate* it and" +" do the same for the delivery." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:18 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:32 msgid "" -"This is for example used when you are transferring goods from a location A " -"to a location B and that this is not planned (you are processing the " -"transfer right now)." +"Doing so, an automated email will be sent and will appear in the chatter." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:23 -msgid "Planned Transfers" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:38 msgid "" -"When a transfer is generated automatically (from a sales order or purchase " -"order for example), it is a planned transfer. This means that there is an " -"initial demand and that reservation applies on this initial demand." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:30 -msgid "" -"If you want to create a planned transfer manually, you can do it from the " -"inventory dashboard." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:36 -msgid "" -"In that case, you will have to enter the initial demand first (how many " -"units are you supposed to proceed), then to mark your transfer as to do. " -"Once this is done, you will be able to reserve the products and to process " -"the transfer." +"If you work with a shipping method, and then have a tracking link, it will " +"be included in the standard email template." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:3 -msgid "How to manage stock that you don't own?" -msgstr "Comment gérer un stock que vous ne possédez pas ?" +msgid "Manage Stock that you don't own" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Sometimes, suppliers can offer you to store and sell products without having" +" to buy those items. This technique is called *consignee stock*." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:8 msgid "" -"Some suppliers can sometimes offer you to store and sell products without " -"having to buy those items: this technique is called **consignee stock**." -msgstr "" -"Certains fournisseurs peuvent parfois vous permettre de stocker et de vendre" -" leurs produits sans que vous ayez à les acheter : cette technique est " -"appelée **Stock consignataire**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:12 -msgid "" "Consignee stock is a great way for manufacturers and suppliers to launch new" -" products. As resellers may be reluctant to buying a product that they are " -"not sure to be able to sell, consignee stock will allow them to propose an " -"item to check its market without having to pay for it in the first place." +" products. As resellers may be reluctant to buy a product they are not sure " +"to be able to sell, consignee stock will allow them to offer an item to " +"check its market without having to pay for it in the first place." msgstr "" -"Le stock consignataire est un excellent moyen pour les fabricants et les " -"fournisseurs pour lancer de nouveaux produits. Comme les revendeurs peuvent " -"être réticents à acheter un produit qu'ils ne sont pas sûrs de pouvoir " -"vendre, le stock consignataire va leur permettre de proposer un article pour" -" vérifier son marché sans devoir d'abord l'acheter." -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:18 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:14 msgid "" -"Odoo has the ability to manage consignee stocks through the advanced " -"settings." +"Of course, Odoo has the ability to manage those consignee stocks through " +"advanced settings." msgstr "" -"Odoo a la capacité de gérer les stocks consignataires à travers les " -"paramètres avancés." -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:24 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:20 msgid "" -"Open the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`, and" -" in the **Product Owners** section, select **Manage consignee stocks " -"(advanced)**, then click on **Apply**." +"To use this feature, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Settings* in the " +"inventory app. Then, enable the *Consignment* feature in the *Traceability* " +"section. Now, hit save." msgstr "" -"Ouvrez le menu :menuselection:`Inventaire --> Configuration --> " -"Configuration`, et dans la section **Propriétaire du produit** , " -"sélectionnez **Gérer les stocks consignataires (avancé)**, puis cliquez sur " -"**Appliquer**." -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:32 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:28 msgid "Reception of Consignee Stock" msgstr "Réception de Stock Consignataire" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:34 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:30 msgid "" -"In the Inventory's Dashboard, open the **Receipts** and create a new " -"reception. You can see that in the right side of the page, a new **Owner** " -"line has appeared. You can specify the partner which owns the stock or leave" -" it blank if you are the owner." +"When in the *Inventory* app, open the receipts and create a new reception. " +"On the right side, you will see that a new line called *Assign Owner* has " +"appeared. There, you can specify the partner which owns the stock." msgstr "" -"Dans le Tableau de bord de l'Inventaire, ouvrez les **Réceptions** et créez " -"une nouvelle réception. Vous pouvez voir que dans la partie droite de la " -"page, une nouvelle ligne **Propriétaire** est apparue. Vous pouvez spécifier" -" le partenaire qui détient le stock, ou laisser le champ vide si vous êtes " -"le propriétaire." -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:3 -msgid "How to configure and run schedulers?" -msgstr "Comment configurer et lancer des planificateurs ?" +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:39 +msgid "If you are the owner, you can leave the field blank." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:6 -msgid "What is a scheduler" -msgstr "Qu'est-ce qu'un planificateur" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:41 msgid "" -"The scheduler is the calculation engine which plans and prioritises " -"production and purchasing automatically according to the rules defined on " -"products. By default, the scheduler is set to run once a day (Odoo " -"automatically creates a **Scheduled Action** for this)." +"Once the receipt is validated, the products enter your stock but still " +"belong to the owner. They don’t impact your inventory valuation." msgstr "" -"Le planificateur est le moteur de calcul qui planifie et priorise la " -"production et les achats automatiquement en fonction des règles définies sur" -" les articles. Par défaut, le planificateur est configuré pour s'exécuter " -"une fois par jour (Odoo crée automatiquement une **Action Planifiée** pour " -"cela)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:14 -msgid "Calculating Requirements / Scheduling" -msgstr "Calcul des besoins / Planification" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:16 -msgid "" -"Scheduling only validates procurements that are confirmed but not yet " -"started. These procurement reservations will themselves start production, " -"tasks or purchases depending on the configuration of the requested product." -msgstr "" -"La planification ne valide que les approvisionnements qui sont confirmés, " -"mais pas encore lancés. Ces réservations d'approvisionnement vont elles-" -"mêmes lancer la production, des tâches ou des achats en fonction de la " -"configuration du produit demandé." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:21 -msgid "" -"You take into account the priority of operations when starting reservations " -"and procurements. Urgent requests, those with a date in the past, or " -"requests with a date earlier than the others will be started first. In case " -"there are not enough products in stock to satisfy all the requests, you can " -"be sure that the most urgent requests will be produced first." -msgstr "" -"Vous prenez en compte la priorité des opérations lors du démarrage des " -"réservations et des approvisionnements. Les demandes urgentes, celles avec " -"une date dans le passé, ou celles avec une date antérieure aux autres seront" -" lancées en premier. Dans le cas où il n'y a pas assez de produits en stock " -"pour satisfaire toutes les demandes, vous pouvez être sûr que les demandes " -"les plus urgentes seront produites en premier." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:29 -msgid "Configure and run the scheduler" -msgstr "Configurez et lancez le planificateur" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:32 -msgid "Run the scheduler manually" -msgstr "Lancez le planificateur manuellement" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:34 -msgid "" -"This feature is not visible by default. You have to enable **debug mode** to" -" see this. To enable debug mode, go to :menuselection:`Help --> About` and " -"click on **Activate the developer mode**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:38 -msgid "" -"You can also start the scheduler manually from the menu " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Schedulers --> Run Schedulers`. The scheduler " -"uses all the relevant parameters defined for products, suppliers and the " -"company to determine the priorities between the different production orders," -" deliveries and supplier purchases." -msgstr "" -"Vous pouvez lancer le planificateur manuellement depuis le menu " -":menuselection:`Inventaire --> Planificateurs --> Lancer les " -"planificateurs`. Le planificateur utilise tous les paramètres pertinents " -"définis pour les produits, les fournisseurs et l'entreprise afin de " -"déterminer les priorités entre les différents ordres de production, de " -"livraison et les commandes fournisseurs." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:48 -msgid "Configure and run the scheduler (only for advanced users)" -msgstr "" -"Configurez et lancez le planificateur (seulement pour les utilisateurs " -"avancés)" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:50 -msgid "" -"This feature is not visible by default. You have to enable **debug mode** to" -" see this. To enable debug mode, go to :menuselection:`Help -> About` and " -"click on **Activate the developer mode**." -msgstr "" -"Cette fonctionnalité n'est pas visible par défaut. Vous devez activer le " -"**mode debug** pour la voir. Pour activer le mode debug, allez dans " -":menuselection:`Aide -> A propos` et cliquez sur **Activer le mode " -"développeur**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:54 -msgid "" -"You can set the starting time of the scheduler by modifying the " -"corresponding action in the menu :menuselection:`Settings --> Technical --> " -"Automation --> Scheduled Actions`. Modify the Run mrp Scheduler " -"configuration." -msgstr "" -"Vous pouvez régler l'heure de lancement du planificateur en modifiant " -"l'action correspondante dans le menu :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Technique --> Automatisation --> Actions planifiées`. Modifiez la " -"configuration de \"Run mrp scheduler\"." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:63 -msgid ":doc:`../delivery/scheduled_dates`" -msgstr ":doc:`../delivery/scheduled_dates`" #: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:3 -msgid "How to scrap products?" -msgstr "Comment mettre au rebut des produits ?" +msgid "Scrap Products" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In your warehouse, you sometimes find products that are damaged or that are " +"unusable due to expiry or for some other reasons. You often notice this " +"during picking or physical inventory. Since those products cannot be sold or" +" stored, you have to scrap them." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:10 +msgid "" +"When goods are scrapped, they are not reflected in the system as a part of " +"the inventory. The scrapped material will be physically moved to the scrap " +"area and not taken into account into inventory valuation." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:15 msgid "" "Scrap means waste that either has no economic value or only the value of its" -" basic material" -msgstr "" -"Mettre au rebut des déchets qui soit n'ont pas de valeur économique, ou " -"seulement la valeur de leurs matériaux de base valorisables par recyclage." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:11 -msgid "content recoverable through recycling." +" basic material content, recoverable through recycling." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:21 msgid "" -"In your warehouse you sometimes find products that are damaged or that are " -"unusable due to expiry or for some other reason. You often notice this " -"during picking or physical inventory." -msgstr "" -"Dans votre entrepôt vous trouvez parfois des produits qui sont endommagés ou" -" qui sont inutilisables en raison d'une expiration ou pour une autre raison." -" Vous remarquez en général cela pendant la collecte ou lors d'un inventaire " -"physique." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:17 -msgid "" -"Since you cannot normally sell or store these products, you have to scrap " -"product." -msgstr "" -"Puisque vous ne pouvez normalement pas vendre ou stocker ces articles, vous " -"devez les mettre au rebut." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:20 -msgid "" -"When goods are scrapped they are not reflected in the system as a part of " -"the inventory. The scrapped material will be physically moved to scrap area." -msgstr "" -"Lorsque des marchandises sont mises au rebut elles ne sont plus prises en " -"compte dans le système en tant que partie de l'inventaire. Les marchandises " -"mises au rebut seront transférées physiquement dans la zone rebut." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:27 -msgid "" -"When you install inventory management, odoo automatically creates one " -"default scrap location, namely **Virtual location/Scrapped**." -msgstr "" -"Lorsque vous installez la gestion des stocks, Odoo crée automatiquement un " -"emplacement de mise au rebut par défaut, nommé **Virtual " -"location/Scrapped**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:30 -msgid "" -"To create an extra scrap location, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Configuration --> Settings` and check **Manage several locations per " -"warehouse**, then click on **Apply**." +"When you install the *Inventory* app, Odoo automatically creates a scrap " +"location. It’s named *Virtual Location/Scap*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:24 msgid "" -"After applying **Manage several location per warehouse**, you can create a " -"new scrap location in :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouse Management" -" --> Locations.`" +"Of course, you can create new scrap areas if needed. To do so, go to " +"*Inventory > Configuration > Settings* and activate the *Storage Locations* " +"feature." msgstr "" -"Après avoir appliquer **Gérer plusieurs emplacements par entrepôt**, vous " -"pouvez créer un nouvel emplacement de mise au rebut dans " -":menuselection:`Configuration --> Gestion d'entrepôt --> Emplacements`." -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:43 -msgid "" -"To define a scrap location, you have to check **Is a Scrap Location?** on " -"location form view." +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:31 +msgid "Now, go to *Configuration > Locations* and create your scrap location." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:34 +msgid "" +"You have to check *Is a Scrap Location?* on the location form. In fact, " +"scrap locations cannot be used as normal storage locations and then, a " +"virtual location will be created for scrapped products." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:39 +msgid "Different ways to scrap products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:41 +msgid "" +"With Odoo, you have several ways to scrap products: from receipts, from a " +"delivery order, and from an internal transfer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:45 +msgid "Scrap from receipt" msgstr "" -"Pour définir un emplacement de mise au rebut, vous devez cocher **Est un " -"emplacement de rebut ?** sur la fiche de l'emplacement." #: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:47 -msgid "Different ways to scrap product" -msgstr "Différentes façons de mettre un article au rebut" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:49 -msgid "Odoo provides several ways to scrap products." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:52 -msgid "1) Scrap from Receipt (Initial Demand tab)." -msgstr "1) Mise au rebut à la Réception (onglet Demande Initiale)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:54 msgid "" -"To scrap product from incoming shipment, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory -->" -" Dashboard --> Receipts`." +"Scrapping products from receipts is easy. Go to *Inventory > Dashboard > " +"Receipts* or click on *1 TO PROCESS* under the receipts location." msgstr "" -"Pour mettre des articles au rebut à la réception, allez à " -":menuselection:`Inventaire --> Tableau de bord --> Réceptions`." -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:60 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:53 msgid "" -"Open the incoming shipment, and in the **Initial demand** tab, click on the " -"scrap products button." +"Now, open the receipt and validate the picking. Once the products entered " +"your stock, the Scrap button appears on the top left corner of your screen." msgstr "" -"Ouvrez la réception, et dans l'onglet **Demande initiale**, cliquez sur le " -"bouton Mettre au rebut." -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:67 -msgid "2) Scrap from delivery order (Initial Demand tab) ." -msgstr "2) Mettre au rebut à l'expédition (onglet Demande initiale)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:69 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:57 msgid "" -"To scrap product from outgoing shipment, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory -->" -" Dashboard --> Delivery Orders`" +"You can scrap products that were part of the receipt from there. If you do " +"so, it will move them from available stock to the virtual scrap location." msgstr "" -"Pour mettre des articles au rebut à l'expédition, allez à " -":menuselection:`Inventaire --> Tableau de bord --> Livraisons`" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:75 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:68 +msgid "Scrap from delivery order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:70 msgid "" -"Open the outgoing shipment, and in the **Initial demand** tab, click on the " -"scrap products button on stock move in initial demand tab." +"To scrap products from a delivery order, go to *Inventory > Dashboard > " +"Delivery orders* or click on *1 TO PROCESS*." msgstr "" -"Ouvrez l'expédition, et dans l'onglet **Demande initiale**, cliquez sur le " -"bouton Mettre au rebut sur la ligne d'opération de stock." -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:82 -msgid "3) Scrap from internal transfer (Initial Demand tab)." -msgstr "" -"3) Mettre au rebut depuis un transfert interne (onglet Demande initiale)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:84 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:76 msgid "" -"To scrap product from internal transfer, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory -->" -" Dashboard --> Internal Transfers`" +"Once done, open the delivery order. You can see the scrap button in the " +"upper left of the document. If you scrap the product from there, it will be " +"moved from your available stock to the virtual scrap location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:90 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:80 msgid "" -"Open the internal transfer, and in the **Initial demand** tab, click on the " -"scrap products button on stock move in initial demand tab." +"You can find all the scrap orders made from the picking by clicking on the " +"button on the top right corner of the document." msgstr "" -"Ouvrez le transfert interne, et dans l'onglet **Demande initiale**, cliquez " -"sur le bouton Mettre au rebut sur la ligne d'opération de stock." -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:96 -msgid "" -"When you click on scrap button, a popup will open. You can enter the " -"quantity of products, and specify the scrap location, then click on " -"**Scrap**." +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:93 +msgid "Scrap from an internal transfer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:95 +msgid "" +"To do this, the flow is almost the same. In fact, you just have to go to " +"*Inventory > Dashboard > Internal Transfers*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:101 +msgid "" +"There, open the internal transfer that interests you. Now, click on the " +"scrap button that is on the top left of the document." msgstr "" -"Quand vous cliquez sur le bouton Mettre au rebut, une fenêtre popup " -"apparaît. Vous pouvez saisir la quantité d'articles, et préciser " -"l'emplacement de mise au rebut, puis cliquez sur **Rebut**." #: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:104 msgid "" -"To allow change scrap location on wizard, you have to select **Manage " -"several location per warehouse** in the settings at " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`" +"When scrapping before validating the internal transfer, the product is, by " +"default, moved from the source location to the virtual scrap location. But, " +"if you scrap after validating the internal transfer, it will be moved from " +"the destination location, as opposed to the source location, to the virtual " +"scrap location." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:110 +msgid "" +"Of course, you can manually update the source location of the scrap order if" +" necessary." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:3 +msgid "Send Automated SMS at Delivery" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:8 +msgid "" +"To send automated SMS, you need to activate the *SMS Confirmation* feature. " +"To do so, go to the *Inventory* app *Settings* and enable the feature. In " +"multi-company, this feature is company-specific." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Of course, an SMS template already exists by default in Odoo. You can modify" +" it by clicking on the arrow on the right." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:22 +msgid "Send SMS at delivery validation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:24 +msgid "" +"To use this feature, try to *Create* a delivery order for a specific partner" +" and add some products to it. Then, *Validate* the delivery." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:30 +msgid "Now, the automated SMS that has been sent appears in the chatter." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:36 +msgid "" +"The partner which is set on the transfer needs to have a phone number " +"specified in its contact form for the SMS to be sent." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:39 +msgid "" +"If you work with a shipping method, and then have a tracking link, it will " +"be included in the SMS template." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning.rst:3 +msgid "Planning" +msgstr "Planification" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:3 +msgid "How is the Scheduled Delivery Date Computed?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In most cases, scheduled dates are computed to be able to plan deliveries, " +"receptions, and so on. Depending on your company’s habits, Odoo generates " +"scheduled dates via the scheduler." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:9 +msgid "" +"To make your life easier, the Odoo scheduler computes everything per line, " +"whether it’s a manufacturing order, a delivery order, a sale order, etc." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:14 +msgid "" +"The computed dates are dependent on the different lead times configured in " +"Odoo." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:20 +msgid "" +"Configuring lead times is the first move if you want to compute scheduled " +"dates. Those are the delays promised (in terms of delivery, manufacturing, " +"etc.) to your partners and/or clients." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:25 +msgid "In Odoo, you can configure different lead times." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:30 +msgid "" +"When configuring lead times at the product level, you have three different " +"types to take into account: supplier lead time, customer lead time, and " +"manufacturing lead time." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:35 +msgid "Supplier lead time" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:37 +msgid "" +"The supplier lead time is the time needed for the supplier to deliver your " +"purchased products. To configure it, select a product and click on the " +"inventory tab. There, you will have to add a vendor to your product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:44 +msgid "" +"Now, just open the vendor form and fill its *Delivery lead time*. In this " +"case, the delivery day will be equal to *Date of the Purchase Order + " +"Delivery Lead Time*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:52 +msgid "" +"Do not forget that it is possible to add different vendor pricelists and, " +"thus, different delivery lead times, depending on the vendor." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:56 +msgid "Customer Lead Time" +msgstr "Délai de livraison au client" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:58 +msgid "" +"It is the time needed to get your product from your store/warehouse to your " +"customer. It can be configured for any product. To add it, select a product " +"and go to the inventory tab. There, simply indicate your *customer lead " +"time*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:67 +msgid "Manufacturing lead time" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:69 +msgid "" +"On the same page, it is possible to configure what’s called the " +"*Manufacturing Lead Time*. It is the time needed to manufacture the product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:76 +msgid "" +"At the company level, you can configure security days. Those are useful to " +"cope with eventual dalys and to be sure to meet your engagements. The idea " +"is to subtract backup days from the computed scheduled date in case of " +"delays." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:81 +msgid "" +"Once again, there are three different types of security lead times: for " +"sales, for purchases, and for manufacturing." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:85 +msgid "Security lead time for sales" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:87 +msgid "" +"In sales, security lead time corresponds to backup days to ensure you will " +"be able to deliver your clients in times. They are margins of errors for " +"delivery lead times. Security days are the same logic as the early " +"wristwatch, in order to arrive on time." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:92 +msgid "" +"The idea is to subtract the numbers of security days from the calculation " +"and, thus, to compute a scheduled date earlier than the one you promised to " +"your client. In that way, you are sure to be able to keep your commitment." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:97 +msgid "" +"To set up your security dates, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Settings* " +"and enable the feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:104 +msgid "Security lead time for purchase" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:106 +msgid "" +"It follows the same logic as security lead time for sales except that " +"security lead time for purchase is the margin of error for vendor lead " +"times, not for sales." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:110 +msgid "" +"When the system generates purchase orders for procuring products, they will " +"be scheduled that many days earlier to cope with unexpected vendor delays." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:114 +msgid "" +"To find purchase lead time, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Settings* and" +" enable the feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:121 +msgid "Security lead time for manufacturing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:123 +msgid "" +"The security lead time for manufacturing allows generating manufacturing " +"orders which are scheduled that many days earlier to cope with unexpected " +"manufacturing days." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:127 +msgid "" +"To configure it, go to *Manufacturing > Configuration > Settings* and enable" +" the *Security Lead Time* option. Then, hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:136 +msgid "" +"Sometimes, the internal transfers that a product might do may also influence" +" the computed date. The delays due to internal transfers can be specified in" +" the *Inventory* app when you create a new rule in a route." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:141 +msgid "" +"To specify them, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Routes* and add a push " +"rule to set a delay. Of course, you need to activate *Multi-step Routes* to " +"use this feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:149 +msgid "At the sale order level" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:152 +msgid "Expected date" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:154 +msgid "" +"In the *Sales* application, you have the possibility to activate the option " +"*Delivery Date*. It will allow you to see additional fields on the sale " +"order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:158 +msgid "" +"By enabling this option, Odoo will indicate the *Expected Date* in the " +"*Other Info* tab of the sales order. This one is automatically computed " +"based on the different lead times." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:165 +msgid "" +"If you set a *Commitment Date* to deliver your customer that is earlier than" +" the *Expected Date*, a warning message will appear on the screen." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:175 +msgid "" +"To better understand all the above info, here is an example. You may sell a " +"car today (January 1st), that is purchased on order, and you promise to " +"deliver your customer within 20 days (January 20th). In such a scenario, the" +" scheduler will trigger the following events, based on your configuration:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:181 +msgid "" +"January 19: this is the actual scheduled delivery (1 day of Sales Safety " +"Days);" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:183 +msgid "" +"January 18: you receive the product from your supplier (1 day of Purchase " +"days);" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:185 +msgid "" +"January 10: this is the deadline to order at your supplier (9 days of " +"Supplier Delivery Lead Time);" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:187 +msgid "" +"January 8: trigger a purchase request to your purchase team, since they " +"need, on average, 2 days to find the right supplier and order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:3 +msgid "Configure and Run Schedulers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:6 +msgid "What is a scheduler?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:8 +msgid "" +"The scheduler is the calculation engine that plans and prioritizes " +"production and purchasing. It does it automatically, according to the rules " +"defined on products. By default, the scheduler is set to run once a day." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:14 +msgid "Calculating Requirements / Scheduling" +msgstr "Calcul des besoins / Planification" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:16 +msgid "" +"Scheduling only validates procurements that are confirmed but not yet " +"started. These procurement reservations will start production, tasks or " +"purchases themselves, depending on the configuration of the requested " +"product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:21 +msgid "" +"As a human would do, the scheduler takes the priority of operations into " +"account when starting reservations and procurements. Urgent requests will be" +" started first." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:26 +msgid "" +"In case there are not enough products in stock to satisfy all the requests, " +"you can be sure that the most urgent ones will be produced first." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:31 +msgid "Configure and run the scheduler" +msgstr "Configurez et lancez le planificateur" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:34 +msgid "Run the scheduler manually" +msgstr "Lancez le planificateur manuellement" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:36 +msgid "" +"To start the scheduler manually, go to *Inventory > Operations > Run " +"Schedulers*. The scheduler uses all the relevant parameters defined for " +"products, suppliers and the company to prioritize the different production " +"orders, deliveries and supplier purchases." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:45 +msgid "Configure and run the scheduler (for advanced users)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:47 +msgid "" +"To use this feature, you have to enable the debug mode. To do so, go to " +"*Settings > Activate the developer mode*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Then, go to *Settings > Technical > Automation > Scheduled Actions* and " +"modify the *Run MRP Scheduler Configuration*. There, you can set the " +"starting time of the scheduler." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products.rst:3 +msgid "Products" +msgstr "Articles" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:3 +msgid "How to select the right replenishment strategy" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Minimum Stock rules and Make to Order have similar consequences but " +"different rules. They should be used depending on your manufacturing and " +"delivery strategies." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:10 +msgid "Terminology" +msgstr "Terminologie" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:13 +msgid "Minimum stock rule" +msgstr "Règle de stock minimum" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Minimum Stock rules are used to ensure that you always have the minimum " +"amount of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or " +"answer to your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its" +" minimum the system will automatically generate a procurement order with the" +" quantity needed to reach the maximum stock level." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:22 +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:58 +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:71 +msgid "Make to Order" +msgstr "Approvisionnement à la commande" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:24 +msgid "" +"The Make to Order function will trigger a Purchase Order of the amount of " +"the Sales Order related to the product. The system will **not** check the " +"current stock. This means that a draft purchase order will be generated " +"regardless of the quantity on hand of the product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:33 +msgid "Minimum stock rules" +msgstr "Règles de stock minimum" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:35 +msgid "" +"The Minimum Stock Rules configuration is available through your Inventory " +"module. In the Inventory Control menu select \"Reordering Rule\" in the drop" +" down menu. There, click on \"Create\" to set minimum and maximum stock " +"values for a given product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:44 +msgid "" +"Show tooltips for \"minimum quantity\", \"maximum quantity\" and \"quantity " +"multiple\" fields" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:47 +msgid "" +"Then, click on your product to access the related product form and, on the " +"\"Inventory submenu\", do not forget to select a supplier." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:54 +msgid "" +"Don't forget to select the right product type. A consumable can not be " +"stocked and will thus not be accounted for in the stock valuation." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:60 +msgid "" +"The Make to Order configuration is available on your product form through " +"your :menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory control --> Products` (or any " +"other module where products are available)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:64 +msgid "On the product form, under Inventory, click on \"Make To Order\"." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:70 +msgid "Choice between the two options" +msgstr "Choix entre les deux options" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:72 +msgid "" +"The choice between the two options is thus dependent of your inventory " +"strategy. If you prefer to have a buffer and always have at least a minimum " +"amount, the minimum stock rule should be used. If you want to reorder your " +"stocks only if your sale is confirmed it is better to use the Make to Order." +msgstr "" +"Le choix entre les deux options est donc dépendant de votre stratégie " +"d'inventaire. Si vous préférez avoir un stock tampon et toujours avoir au " +"moins un stock minimum, la règle de stock minimum doit être utilisée. Si " +"vous souhaitez réapprovisionner vos stocks seulement si votre vente est " +"confirmée, il est préférable d'utiliser l'Approvisionnement à la commande." + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:3 +msgid "Use Different Units of Measure" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In some cases, handling products in different units of measure is necessary." +" For example, if you buy products in a country where the metric system is of" +" application and sell in a country where the imperial system is used, you " +"will need to convert the units. Another common use case is buying products " +"in bigger packs to your supplier and selling them in units to your " +"customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:12 +msgid "" +"You can set up Odoo to work with different units of measure for one product." +msgstr "" +"Vous pouvez configurer Odoo pour travailler avec différentes unités de " +"mesure pour un article." + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:18 +msgid "" +"In the *Inventory* application, go to *Configuration > Settings*. In the " +"*Products* section, activate *Units of Measure*, then *Save*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:25 +msgid "Create New Units of Measure" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:27 +msgid "" +"In the *Inventory* application go to *Configuration > UoM*. There, hit " +"*Create*. As an example, we will create a Box of 6 units that we will use " +"for the Egg product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:34 +msgid "" +"The category is important for unit conversion, you will be able to convert " +"products from one unit to another only if those units belong to the same " +"category. The box of 6 is 6 times bigger than the reference unit of measure " +"for the category which is “Units” here." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:43 +msgid "Specify Units of Measure on your Products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:45 +msgid "" +"In the *Inventory application > Master Data > Products*, open the product " +"which you would like to change the purchase/sale unit of measure, and click " +"on *Edit*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:49 +msgid "" +"In the *General Information* tab, you can select the *Unit of Measure* in " +"which the product will be sold, which is also the unit in which internal " +"transfers will take place. You can also select the *Purchase Unit of " +"Measure*, which is the unit in which you purchase the product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:59 +msgid "Transfer from One Unit to Another" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:62 +msgid "Buy in the Pruchase UoM" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:64 +msgid "" +"In the *Purchase* application, *Create* a new request for quotation in which" +" you include the product with the different *Units of Measure* and *Confirm*" +" it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:71 +msgid "" +"On the automatically generated purchase orders, the UoM used is the Box of " +"6, meaning the Purchase UoM. You have of course the possibility to manually " +"modify the UoM if necessary. When you enter the *Receipt* which is linked to" +" the purchase order, you can observe that the 10 boxes of 6 units have been " +"converted in 60 units. Indeed, the stock is managed in units." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:82 +msgid "Replenishment" +msgstr "Réapprovisionnement" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:84 +msgid "" +"When doing a replenishment via the *Replenish* button on the product form, " +"you have the possibility to change the unit of measure." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:94 +msgid "Sell in bigger UoM" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:96 +msgid "" +"You can choose the unit of measure on the sale order document and decide to " +"sell the eggs by the dozen. When doing so, the price is automatically " +"computed from Units UoM to adapt to the selected *UoM*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:103 +msgid "" +"In the delivery order, the *UoM* used in the sale order is converted to the " +"*UoM* used for stock management, in our use case, the Units." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:3 +msgid "When Should you Use Packages, Units of Measure or Kits?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:6 +msgid "Units of Measure" +msgstr "Unités de mesure" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Units of measure specify the unit used to handle a product. In Odoo, you " +"have the possibility to specify the unit of measure in which you manage your" +" stock and the one which is used when purchasing the product to your " +"supplier." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:16 +msgid "" +"The *conversion* between the different units of measure is done " +"automatically. The only condition is that all the units have to be in the " +"*same category* (Unit, Weight, Volume, Length,...)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:20 +msgid "" +"For example, if I have the following reordering rule for the egg and I run " +"the scheduler, the quantity added in the automatically generated purchase " +"order will be in dozens but what will enter the stock will be units." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:35 +msgid "Packages" +msgstr "Colis" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:37 +msgid "" +"The package is the physical container in which you put one or several " +"products from a picking. For example, when you deliver a product, you can " +"decide to separate the quantity into two different packages. It then allows " +"you to have a report with the quantity of products for each package." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:50 +msgid "Packaging" +msgstr "Conditionnement" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:52 +msgid "" +"The packaging is the physical container that protects your product. If you " +"are selling computers, the packaging contains the computer with the notice " +"and the power plug." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:56 +msgid "" +"In Odoo, packagings are used for indicative purposes on sale orders. They " +"can be specified on the product form, in the inventory tab." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:66 +msgid "" +"Another useful use of the packaging is for product reception. By scanning " +"the barcode of the packaging, Odoo adds the number of units contained in the" +" packing on the picking." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies.rst:3 +msgid "Inventory Adjustment" +msgstr "Ajustement de stock" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:3 +msgid "Choose Between Reordering Rules and Make to Order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:5 +msgid "" +"*Reordering rules* and *make to order* do both allow to automatically " +"replenish products when necessary. The difference between those tools is how" +" they are triggered." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:9 +msgid "" +"*Reordering rules* are used to ensure that you always have a minimum amount " +"of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or answer to" +" your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its minimum " +"the system will automatically generate a procurement with the needed " +"quantity to reach the maximum stock level." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:15 +msgid "" +"The *Make to Order* route will trigger a procurement (purchase order or " +"manufacturing order) with the necessary quantity to fulfill a product " +"request (coming from a sale order or a manufacturing order). The system will" +" check the quantity on hand for the corresponding product and if the " +"available quantity is higher or equal to the necessary quantity, Odoo will " +"use what is in stock to fulfill the request. In case you don’t have enough " +"available stock to fully fulfill the product request, procurement will be " +"generated for the total quantity requested." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:28 +msgid "Reordering Rules" +msgstr "Règles de réapprovisionnement" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:30 +msgid "" +"The *Reordering Rules* configuration is available through the menu " +"*Inventory > Master Data > Reordering Rules*. There, click on *Create* to " +"set minimum and maximum stock values for a given product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:37 +msgid "" +"When the forecasted stock goes below the *Minimum Quantity* specified in " +"this field, Odoo generates a procurement to bring the forecasted quantity to" +" the *Maximum Quantity*. The *Quantity Multiple* is used to round the " +"procurement quantity up to this multiple. If it is 0, the exact quantity " +"will be used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:46 +msgid "" +"The *Lead time* is the number of days after the order point is triggered to " +"receive the products or to order them to the vendor." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:49 +msgid "" +"In case you work with multi-warehouses and/or multi-locations, you will be " +"able to specify different reordering rules for the same product in each " +"location." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:54 +msgid "" +"For the reordering rules to be triggered, on the corresponding product, a " +"route should be specified. In case you manufacture your products, make sure " +"to select the route *Manufacture* and create a *Bill of Material* for the " +"product. In case you purchase your products, make sure to select the route " +"*Buy* and add a *Vendor Pricelist*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:66 +msgid "" +"Don't forget to select the product type *storable* in the product form. A " +"consumable can not be stocked and won’t trigger reordering rules." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:73 +msgid "" +"The *Make To Order* configuration is available on your product form through " +"your *Inventory module > Master Data > Products* (or in any other module " +"where products are available)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:77 +msgid "" +"On the product form, in the *Inventory tab*, you can set a route. You can " +"choose *Make To Order* and another route, either *Buy* or *Manufacture*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:81 +msgid "" +"Again, if the *Buy* route is selected, make sure to set a *Vendor pricelist*" +" in the *Purchase tab*. In case you have set a *Manufacture* route, male " +"sure you have a *BoM* for this product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:3 +msgid "Resupply from another Warehouse" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:8 +msgid "" +"In order to be able to resupply from another warehouse, you need to activate" +" \\*multi-warehouses\\* and \\*multi-step routes\\*. Storage locations will " +"be automatically activated when activating multi-warehouses." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:16 +msgid "" +"You can then access your warehouses via \\*Inventory > Configuration > " +"Warehouses\\*. Create the necessary warehouses following this " +"`*documentation* " +"`__." +" Enter the warehouse which should be resupplied by another one. You will " +"have the possibility to directly indicate through which warehouse it gets " +"resupplied." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:26 +msgid "" +"By activating this option, a new route will now be available on your " +"products \\*Supply Product from Second warehouse\\*. It can now be selected," +" along with either a \\*reordering rule\\* or a \\*make to order\\*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:34 +msgid "" +"For the demonstration, I set a reordering rule with a minimum of 5 units in " +"stock and a maximum of 10 units in stock, having currently 0 units on hand. " +"I will run the scheduler by going to \\*Inventory > Operations > Run " +"scheduler\\*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:42 +msgid "" +"The system automatically creates two pickings, one \\*delivery order\\* from" +" my Second Warehouse which contains the necessary products, and a receipt in" +" my main warehouse WH/Stock for the same products. The source document is " +"the \\*reordering rule\\* which triggered the route \\*Supply Product from " +"Second warehouse\\*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/reporting.rst:3 @@ -4195,12 +3898,6 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:282 #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:263 #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:281 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:30 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:45 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:52 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:57 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:64 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:72 msgid "Configuration:" msgstr "Configuration :" @@ -4639,1150 +4336,389 @@ msgid "" "internal category" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts.rst:3 -msgid "Main Concepts" -msgstr "Concepts principaux" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:5 -msgid "Introduction to Inventory Management" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:7 -msgid "" -"A double-entry inventory has no stock input, output (disparition of " -"products) or transformation. Instead, all operations are stock moves between" -" locations (possibly virtual)." -msgstr "" -"Un inventaire en double-entrée n'a pas de stock d'entrée, de sortie " -"(disparition des produits) ou de transformation. Au lieu de cela, toutes les" -" opérations sont des mouvements de stock entre des emplacements " -"(éventuellement virtuels)." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:16 -msgid "Operations" -msgstr "Opérations" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:18 -msgid "" -"Stock moves represent the transit of goods and materials between locations." -msgstr "" -"Les mouvements de stock représentent le transit de marchandises et de " -"matériels entre des emplacements." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:30 -msgid "Production Order" -msgstr "Ordre de fabrication" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:24 -msgid "Consume:" -msgstr "Consommer :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "2 Wheels: Stock → Production" -msgstr "2 Roues : Stock → Production" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bike Frame: Stock → Production" -msgstr "1 Cadre de Vélo : Stock → production" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:26 -msgid "Produce:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:27 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Production → Stock" -msgstr "1 Vélo : Production → Stock" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Stock: the location the Manufacturing Order is initiated from" -msgstr "" -"Stock : l'emplacement à partir duquel l'Ordre de Fabrication est lancé" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Production: on the product form, field \"Production Location\"" -msgstr "Production : sur la fiche de l'article, le champ \"Lieu de Production\"" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:36 -msgid "Drop-shipping" -msgstr "Livraison directe" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:33 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Supplier → Customer" -msgstr "1 Vélo : Fournisseur → Client" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:36 -msgid "Configurarion:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Supplier: on the product form" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Customer: on the sale order itself" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:45 -msgid "Client Delivery" -msgstr "Livraison Client" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:39 -msgid "Pick" -msgstr "Préparer" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:40 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Stock → Packing Zone" -msgstr "1 Vélo: Stock → Zone Emballage" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:41 -msgid "Pack" -msgstr "Colis" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:42 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Packing Zone → Output" -msgstr "1 Vélo: Zone Emballage → Zone Expédition" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:43 -#: ../../inventory/shipping.rst:3 -msgid "Shipping" -msgstr "Expédition" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:44 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Output → Customer" -msgstr "1 Vélo : Sortie → Client" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "on the pick+pack+ship route for the warehouse" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:52 -msgid "Inter-Warehouse transfer" -msgstr "Transferts inter-entrepôts" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:49 -msgid "Transfer:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Warehouse 1 → Transit" -msgstr "1 Vélo : Entrpôt 1 → Transit" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Transit → Warehouse 2" -msgstr "1 Vélo : Transit → Entrepôt 2" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Warehouse 2: the location the transfer is initiated from" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Warehouse 1: on the transit route" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:57 -msgid "Broken Product (scrapped)" -msgstr "Article cassé (mise au rebut)" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:55 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Warehouse → Scrap" -msgstr "1 Vélo : Entrepôt → Rebut" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:58 -msgid "Scrap: Scrap Location when creating the scrapping" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:60 -msgid "Missing products in inventory" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:61 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Warehouse → Inventory Loss" -msgstr "1 Vélo : Entrepôt → Perte de Stock" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:62 -msgid "Extra products in inventory" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:63 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Inventory Loss → Warehouse" -msgstr "1 Inventory Loss: Perte de Stock → Entrepôt" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:65 -msgid "Inventory Loss: \"Inventory Location\" field on the product" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:72 -msgid "Reception" -msgstr "Réception" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Supplier → Input" -msgstr "1 Vélo : Fournisseur → Entrée" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Input → Stock" -msgstr "1 Vélo : Entrée → Stock" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Supplier: purchase order supplier" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Input: \"destination\" field on the purchase order" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:75 -msgid "Analysis" -msgstr "Analyses" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:77 -msgid "" -"Inventory analysis can use products count or products value (= number of " -"products * product cost)." -msgstr "" -"L'analyse de l'inventaire peut utiliser le nombre d'articles ou la valeur " -"des articles (= nombre d'articles * coût de l'article)." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:80 -msgid "For each inventory location, multiple data points can be analysed:" -msgstr "" -"Pour chaque emplacement de stock, plusieurs données peuvent être analysées :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:148 -msgid "Procurements & Procurement Rules" -msgstr "Achats & Règles d'approvisionnement" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:150 -msgid "" -"A procurement is a request for a specific quantity of products to a specific" -" location. They can be created manually or automatically triggered by:" -msgstr "" -"Un approvisionnement est une demande pour une quantité spécifique de " -"produits à un endroit précis. Ils peuvent être créés manuellement ou " -"automatiquement déclenchés par :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:159 -msgid "New sale orders" -msgstr "De nouvelles commandes client" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:157 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:162 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:168 -msgid "Effect" -msgstr "Résultat" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:157 -msgid "" -"A procurement is created at the customer location for every product ordered " -"by the customer (you have to deliver the customer)" -msgstr "" -"Un approvisionnement est créé à l'emplacement client pour chaque article " -"commandé par le client (vous devez livrer le client)" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:160 -msgid "" -"Procurement Location: on the customer, field \"Customer Location\" " -"(property)" -msgstr "" -"Lieu d'Approvisionnement : dans la fiche client, dans le champ **Adresse** " -"(propriété)" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:164 -msgid "Minimum Stock Rules" -msgstr "Règles de stock minimum" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:163 -msgid "A procurement is created at the rule's location." -msgstr "" -"Un approvisionnement est réalisé à l'emplacement défini dans la règle." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:165 -msgid "Procurement location: on the rule, field \"Location\"" -msgstr "" -"Lieu d'Approvisionnement : dans le formulaire de la règle, dans le champ " -"**Lieu**" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:168 -msgid "Procurement rules" -msgstr "des Règles d'approvisionnement" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:168 -msgid "A new procurement is created on the rule's source location" -msgstr "" -"Un nouvel approvisionnement est réalisé à l'emplacement défini dans la règle" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:170 -msgid "" -"*Procurement rules* describe how procurements on specific locations should " -"be fulfilled e.g.:" -msgstr "" -"Les *règles d'approvisionnement* décrivent comment les approvisionnements " -"pour des emplacements spécifiques doivent être réalisés, par ex. :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:173 -msgid "where the product should come from (source location)" -msgstr "d'où le produit doit provenir (emplacement source)" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:174 -msgid "" -"whether the procurement is :abbr:`MTO (Made To Order)` or :abbr:`MTS (Made " -"To Stock)`" -msgstr "" -"si l'approvisionnement est :abbr:`MTO (Make To Order)` ou :abbr:`MTS (Make " -"To Stock)`" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:182 -msgid "Routes" -msgstr "Routes" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:184 -msgid "" -"Procurement rules are grouped in routes. Routes define paths the product " -"must follow. Routes may be applicable or not, depending on the products, " -"sales order lines, warehouse,..." -msgstr "" -"Les règles d'approvisionnement sont regroupées en routes. Les routes " -"définissent les chemins que le produit doit suivre. Les routes peuvent être " -"applicables ou non, selon les produits, les lignes de commande client, " -"l'entrepôt, ..." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:188 -msgid "" -"To fulfill a procurement, the system will search for rules belonging to " -"routes that are defined in (by order of priority):" -msgstr "" -"Pour réaliser un approvisionnement, le système recherchera des règles " -"appartenant à des routes qui sont définis dans (par ordre de priorité) :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:202 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses.rst:3 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses.rst:3 msgid "Warehouses" msgstr "Entrepôts" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:194 -msgid "Warehouse Route Example: Pick → Pack → Ship" -msgstr "Exemple de Route d'Entrepôt : Collecte → Emballage → Expédition" +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:3 +msgid "What is the difference between warehouses and locations?" +msgstr "Quelle sont les différences entre des entrepôts et des emplacements ?" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:196 -msgid "Picking List:" -msgstr "Liste de Prélèvement :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:197 -msgid "Pick Zone → Pack Zone" -msgstr "Zone de Prélèvement → Zone d'Emballage" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:198 -msgid "Pack List:" -msgstr "Liste de Colisage :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:199 -msgid "Pack Zone → Gate A" -msgstr "Zone d'Emballage → Quai A" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:201 -msgid "Delivery Order:" -msgstr "Ordre de Livraison :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:201 -msgid "Gate A → Customer" -msgstr "Quai A → Client" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:203 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:5 msgid "" -"Routes that describe how you organize your warehouse should be defined on " -"the warehouse." +"In Odoo, a **Warehouse** is the actual building/place in which your items " +"are stocked. You can setup multiple warehouses and create moves between " +"warehouses." msgstr "" -"Les routes qui décrivent la manière dont vous organisez votre entrepôt " -"doivent être définies sur l'entrepôt." +"Dans Odoo, un **Entrepôt** est le bâtiment où vos articles sont stockés. " +"Vous pouvez configurer plusieurs entrepôts et créer des mouvements entre " +"entrepôts." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:212 -msgid "A Product" -msgstr "Un Article" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:205 -msgid "Product Route Example: Quality Control" -msgstr "Exemple de Route d'Article : Contrôle Qualité" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:207 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:217 -msgid "Reception:" -msgstr "Réception :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:208 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:218 -msgid "Supplier → Input" -msgstr "Fournisseur → Entrée de Stock" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:209 -msgid "Confirmation:" -msgstr "Confirmation :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:210 -msgid "Input → Quality Control" -msgstr "Entrée de Stock → Contrôle Qualité" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:212 -msgid "Storage:" -msgstr "Stockage :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:212 -msgid "Quality Control → Stock" -msgstr "Contrôle Qualité → Stock" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:221 -msgid "Product Category" -msgstr "Catégorie d'article" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:215 -msgid "Product Category Route Example: cross-dock" -msgstr "Exemple de Route de Catégorie d'Article : transbordement" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:219 -msgid "Cross-Docks:" -msgstr "Transbordements :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:220 -msgid "Input → Output" -msgstr "Entrée de Stock → Sortie de Stock" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:221 -msgid "Delivery:" -msgstr "Livraison :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:222 -msgid "Output → Customer" -msgstr "Sortie de Stock → Client" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:227 -msgid "Sale Order Line" -msgstr "Ligne de commande" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:224 -msgid "Sale Order Line Example: Drop-shipping" -msgstr "Exemple de Route de Ligne de Commande Client : Livraison Directe" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:227 -msgid "Order:" -msgstr "Commande :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:227 -msgid "Supplier → Customer" -msgstr "Fournisseur → Client" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:230 -msgid "Push Rules" -msgstr "Règles de flux poussés" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:232 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:9 msgid "" -"Push rules trigger when products enter a specific location. They " -"automatically move the product to a new location. Whether a push rule can be" -" used depends on applicable routes." +"A **Location**, is a specific space within your warehouse. It can be " +"considered as a sublocation of your warehouse, as a shelf, a floor, an " +"aisle, etc. Therefore, a location is part of one warehouse only and it is " +"not possible to link one location to multiple warehouses. You can configure " +"as much locations as you need under one warehouse." msgstr "" -"Les règles de flux poussé se déclenchent lorsque les articles entrent dans " -"un emplacement spécifique. Ils déplacent automatiquement l'article à un " -"nouvel emplacement. Le fait qu'une règle de flux poussé puisse être utilisée" -" dépend des routes applicables." +"Un **Emplacement** est un espace spécifique dans votre entrepôt. Il peut " +"être considéré comme une sous-localisation de votre entrepôt, ça peut être " +"une étagère, un plancher, une allée, etc... Par conséquent, un emplacement " +"fait partie d'un seul entrepôt et il est impossible de relier un emplacement" +" à plusieurs entrepôts. Vous pouvez configurer autant d'emplacements que " +"vous voulez dans un entrepôt." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:240 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:88 -msgid "Quality Control" -msgstr "Contrôle qualité" +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:15 +msgid "There are 3 types of locations:" +msgstr "Il existe 3 types d'emplacements :" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:239 -msgid "Product lands in Input" -msgstr "L'article arrive en Entrée de Stock" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:240 -msgid "Push 1: Input → Quality Control" -msgstr "Flux poussé 1 : Entrée de Stock → Contrôle Qualité" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:241 -msgid "Push 2: Quality Control → Stock" -msgstr "Flux poussé 2 : Contrôle Qualité → Stock" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:244 -msgid "Warehouse Transit" -msgstr "Passage en Entrepôt" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:243 -msgid "Product lands in Transit" -msgstr "L'article arrive en Transit" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:244 -msgid "Push: Transit → Warehouse 2" -msgstr "Flux poussé : Transit → Entrepôt 2" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:247 -msgid "Procurement Groups" -msgstr "Groupes d'Approvisionnement" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:249 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:17 msgid "" -"Routes and rules define inventory moves. For every rule, a document type is " -"provided:" +"The **Physical Locations** are internal locations that are part of the " +"warehouses for which you are the owner. They can be the loading and " +"unloading area of your warehouse, a shelf or a department, etc." msgstr "" -"Les routes et les règles définissent des mouvement de stock. Pour chaque " -"règle, un type de document est fourni :" +"Les **Emplacements Physiques** sont des emplacements internes qui font " +"partie des entrepôts que vous possédez. Ça peut être les zones de chargement" +" et de déchargement de votre entrepôt, une étagère, un service, etc..." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:252 -msgid "Picking" -msgstr "Opération de manutention" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:253 -msgid "Packing" -msgstr "Emballage" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:254 -msgid "Delivery Order" -msgstr "Ordre de Livraison" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:255 -msgid "Purchase Order" -msgstr "Commande fournisseur" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:256 -msgid "..." -msgstr "..." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:258 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:21 msgid "" -"Moves are grouped within the same document type if their procurement group " -"and locations are the same." +"The **Partner Locations** are spaces within a customer and/or vendor's " +"warehouse. They work the same way as Physical Locations with the only " +"difference being that you are not the owner of the warehouse." msgstr "" -"Les mouvements sont regroupés dans le même type de document si leur groupe " -"d'approvisionnement et les emplacements sont les mêmes." +"Les **Emplacements des Partenaires** sont des espaces dans l'entrepôt d'un " +"client et/ou d'un fournisseur. Ils fonctionnent de la même manière que les " +"Emplacements Physiques, la seule différence étant que vous n'êtes pas " +"propriétaire de l'entrepôt." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:261 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:25 msgid "" -"A sale order creates a procurement group so that pickings and delivery " -"orders of the same order are grouped. But you can define specific groups on " -"reordering rules too. (e.g. to group purchases of specific products " -"together)" +"The **Virtual Locations** are places that do not exist, but in which " +"products can be placed when they are not physically in an inventory yet (or " +"anymore). They come in handy when you want to place lost products out of " +"your stock (in the **Inventory loss**), or when you want to take into " +"account products that are on their way to your warehouse (**Procurements**)." msgstr "" -"Une commande client crée un groupe d'approvisionnement, de sorte que les " -"prélèvements et les ordres de livraison de la même commande sont regroupés. " -"Mais vous pouvez aussi définir des groupes spécifiques sur les règles de " -"réapprovisionnement (par ex. pour regrouper des achats d'articles " -"spécifiques ensemble)." +"Les **Emplacements Virtuels** sont des lieux qui n'existent pas, mais dans " +"lesquels les produits peuvent être placés quand ils ne sont pas encore (ou " +"plus) physiquement dans un stock. Ils sont utilisés lorsque vous voulez " +"placer des articles perdus hors de votre stock (dans la **Perte de stock**)," +" ou lorsque vous voulez prendre en compte des articles qui sont sur le " +"chemin de votre entrepôt (**Approvisionnement**) ." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:3 -msgid "Terminologies" -msgstr "Terminologies" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:31 msgid "" -"**Warehouse**: A warehouse in Odoo is a location where you store products. " -"It is either a physical or a virtual warehouse. It could be a store or a " -"repository." +"In Odoo, locations are structured hierarchically. You can structure your " +"locations as a tree, dependent on a parent-child relationship. This gives " +"you more detailed levels of analysis of your stock operations and the " +"organization of your warehouses." msgstr "" -"**Entrepôt** : Un entrepôt dans Odoo est un endroit où vous stockez des " -"produits. C'est soit un entrepôt physique, soit un entrepôt virtuel. Ça peut" -" être un magasin ou un dépôt." +"Dans Odoo, les emplacements sont organisés hiérarchiquement. Vous pouvez " +"organiser vos emplacements comme un arbre, avec des relations parent-enfant." +" Cela vous donne des niveaux plus détaillés de l'analyse de vos opérations " +"de stock et de l'organisation de vos entrepôts." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:9 -msgid "" -"**Location**: Locations are used to structure storage zones within a " -"warehouse. In addition to internal locations (your warehouse), Odoo has " -"locations for suppliers, customers, inventory loss counter-parts, etc." -msgstr "" -"**Emplacement**: Les emplacements sont utilisés pour structurer les zones de" -" stockage dans un entrepôt. En plus des emplacements internes (votre " -"entrepôt), Odoo a des emplacements pour les fournisseurs, les clients, les " -"pertes d'inventaire, etc." +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:37 +msgid ":doc:`warehouse_creation`" +msgstr ":doc:`warehouse_creation`" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:14 -msgid "" -"**Lots**: Lots are a batch of products identified with a unique barcode or " -"serial number. All items of a lot are from the same product. (e.g. a set of " -"24 bottle) Usually, lots come from manufacturing order batches or " -"procurements." -msgstr "" -"**Lots**: Les lots sont des ensembles de produits identifiés avec un code à " -"barres ou un numéro de série uniques. Tous les éléments d'un lot sont de la " -"même produit. (par ex. un ensemble de 24 bouteilles) Habituellement, les " -"lots proviennent de la fabrication de lots de commande, ou " -"d'approvisionnements." +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:38 +msgid ":doc:`location_creation`" +msgstr ":doc:`location_creation`" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:19 -msgid "" -"**Serial Number**: A serial number is a unique identifier of a specific " -"product. Technically, serial numbers are similar to having a lot of 1 unique" -" item." +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:3 +msgid "Create a New Location" msgstr "" -"**Numéro de série**: Un numéro de série est un identifiant unique d'un " -"produit spécifique. Techniquement, les numéros de série reviennent à avoir " -"un lot de 1 pièce unique." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:23 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:8 msgid "" -"**Unit of Measure**: Define how the quantity of products is expressed. " -"Meters, Pounds, Pack of 24, Kilograms,… Unit of measure of the same category" -" (ex: size) can be converted to each others (m, cm, mm) using a fixed ratio." +"In order to be able to create different locations, you will need to activate" +" *Multi-Locations* in the settings which can be done from the *Inventory " +"application > Configuration > Settings*." msgstr "" -"**Unité de mesure**: Définit comment la quantité de produits est exprimée. " -"Mètres, Livres, Paquet de 24, Kilogrammes,... Les unités de mesure de la " -"même catégorie (ex: taille) peuvent être converties les unes vers les autres" -" (m, cm, mm) en utilisant un rapport fixe." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:28 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:15 msgid "" -"**Consumable**: A product for which you do not want to manage the inventory " -"level (no quantity on hand or forecasted) but that you can receive and " -"deliver. When this product is needed Odoo suppose that you always have " -"enough stock." +"In the *Inventory application*, you can now go to *Configuration > " +"Locations* and hit *Create* in order to create a new location." msgstr "" -"**Consommable**: Un produit pour lequel vous ne souhaitez pas gérer le " -"niveau de stock (pas de quantité en stock ou prévue), mais que vous pouvez " -"recevoir et livrer. Lorsque ce produit est nécessaire, Odoo suppose que vous" -" en avez toujours assez en stock." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:33 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:21 msgid "" -"**Stockable**: A product for which you want to manage the inventory level." +"Type the name of the location in the *Location Name* field, and select the " +"*Parent Location* in the list. The parent location can be a physical, " +"partner or virtual location, and you can add as many sub-locations as needed" +" to a location." msgstr "" -"**Stockable**: Un produit pour lequel vous souhaitez gérer le niveau des " -"stocks." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:36 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:29 msgid "" -"**Package:** A package contains several products (identified by their serial" -" number/lots or not). Example: a box containing knives and forks." +"In case you want the location to be suggested when creating a Return or when" +" Scrapping a product, you should check *Is a Scrap Location?* and *Is a " +"Return Location?*." msgstr "" -"**Paquet**: Un paquet contient plusieurs produits (identifiés par leur " -"numéro de série/lots ou pas). Exemple: une boîte contenant des couteaux et " -"des fourchettes." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:40 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:33 msgid "" -"**Procurement**: A procurement is a request for a specific quantity of " -"products to a specific location. Procurement are automatically triggered by " -"other documents: Sale orders, Minimum Stock Rules, and Procurement rules. " -"You can trigger the procurement manually. When procurements are triggered " -"automatically, you should always pay attention for the exceptions (e.g. a " -"product should be purchased from a vendor, but no supplier is defined)." +"If you have the *Barcode* application installed, you can specify the barcode" +" which will correspond to this location." msgstr "" -"**Approvisionnement**: Un approvisionnement est une demande pour une " -"quantité spécifique de produits à un endroit précis. Les approvisionnements " -"sont automatiquement déclenchés par d'autres documents : Commandes Clients, " -"Règles de Stock Minimum et Règles d'Approvisionnement. Vous pouvez " -"déclencher l'approvisionnement manuellement. Lorsque les approvisionnements " -"sont déclenchés automatiquement, vous devez toujours être attentif aux " -"exceptions (par exemple, un produit doit être acheté auprès d'un " -"fournisseur, mais aucun fournisseur n'est défini)." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:48 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:37 msgid "" -"**Routes**: Routes define paths the product must follow. Routes may be " -"applicable or not, depending on the products, sales order lines, warehouse,…" -" To fulfill a procurement, the system will search for rules belonging to " -"routes that are defined in the related product/sale order." +"A warehouse also corresponds to a location. As the locations are " +"hierarchical, Odoo will create the parent location of the warehouse, " +"containing all the sublocations in it." msgstr "" -"**Routes**: Les routes définissent les chemins que l'article doit suivre. " -"Les routes s'appliquent ou non, selon les articles, les commandes client, " -"l'entrepôt,... Pour réaliser à un approvisionnement, le système recherchera " -"des règles appartenant à des routes qui sont définies dans l'article et/ou " -"la commande concernés." +"Un entrepôt correspond également à un emplacement. Comme les emplacements " +"sont hiérarchiques, Odoo va créer l'emplacement parent entrepôt, contenant " +"tous les sous-emplacements." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:54 -msgid "" -"**Push Rules**: Push rules trigger when products enter a specific location. " -"They automatically move the product to a new location. Whether a push rule " -"can be used depends on applicable routes." +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:3 +msgid "Create a New Warehouse" msgstr "" -"**Règles de flux poussé** : les règles de flux poussé se déclenchent lorsque" -" les articles entrent dans un emplacement spécifique. Elles déplacent " -"automatiquement l'article vers un nouvel emplacement. Le fait qu'une règle " -"de flux poussé soit utilisée dépend des routes applicables." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:58 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:8 msgid "" -"**Procurement Rules** or **Pull Rules**: Procurement rules describe how " -"procurements on specific locations should be fulfilled e.g.: where the " -"product should come from (source location), whether the procurement is MTO " -"or MTS,..." +"In order to create a new warehouse, you should activate the *Multi-" +"Warehouse* settings. Note that the *Multi-Locations* settings will be " +"automatically activated at the same time." msgstr "" -"**Règles d'Approvisionnement** or **Règles de Flux Tiré**: les Règles " -"d'Approvisionnement décrivent comment les approvisionnements d'emplacements " -"spécifiques doivent être réalisés. Par ex. : d'où un produit doit provenir " -"(emplacement source), si l'approvisionnement est MTO ou MTS,..." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:63 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:12 msgid "" -"**Procurement Group**: Routes and rules define inventory moves. For every " -"rule, a document type is provided: Picking, Packing, Delivery Order, " -"Purchase Order,… Moves are grouped within the same document type if their " -"procurement group and locations are the same." +"In order to do so, go to the *Inventory app > Configuration > Settings*." msgstr "" -"**Groupe d'Approvisionnement**: les Routes et les règles définissent les " -"mouvements de stocks. Pour chaque règle, un type de document est fourni : " -"Prélèvement, Colisage, Ordre de livraison, Commande Fournisseur, ... Les " -"mouvements sont regroupés dans le même type de document si leur groupe " -"d'approvisionnement et les emplacements sont les mêmes." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:69 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:18 msgid "" -"**Stock Moves**: Stock moves represent the transit of goods and materials " -"between locations." +"You can then go to *Inventory > Configuration > Warehouses* and hit *Create*" +" to add a new warehouse." msgstr "" -"**Mouvements de Stock** : les Mouvements de Stock représentent le transfert " -"de marchandise ou de matériels entre emplacements." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:72 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:24 msgid "" -"**Quantity On Hand**: The quantity of a specific product that is currently " -"in a warehouse or location." +"You will be able to enter your warehouse name. You should also choose a " +"short name for your warehouse which is 5-characters long and is used on the " +"different warehouse documents." msgstr "" -"**Quantité En Inventaire** : la quantité d'un article spécifique qui est " -"actuellement dans un entrepôt ou un emplacement." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:75 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:28 msgid "" -"**Forecasted Quantity**: The quantity of products you can sell for a " -"specific warehouse or location. It is defined as the Quantity on Hand - " -"Future Delivery Orders + Future incoming shipments + Future manufactured " -"units." +"In the Address field, you can select an existing company or create one on-" +"the-go. Therefore, the address of your warehouse will be the same as the one" +" of the company you selected. You can also leave this field empty and edit " +"it afterward." msgstr "" -"**Quantité Prévisionnelle** : la quantité d'articles que vous pouvez vendre," -" pour un entrepôt ou un emplacement spécifique. Elle est définie comme la " -"Quantité en Inventaire - les Futures Livraisons Sortantes + les Futures " -"Livraisons Entrantes + les Futures Unités Fabriquées." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:80 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:36 msgid "" -"**Reordering Rules**: It defines the conditions for Odoo to automatically " -"trigger a request for procurement (buying at a supplier or launching a " -"manufacturing order). It is triggered when the forecasted quantity meets the" -" minimum stock rule." +"After the creation of your new warehouse, you can go back to the *Dashboard*" +" and you will see the new operation types automatically created by Odoo due " +"to the creation of a new warehouse." msgstr "" -"**Règles de Réapprovisionnement** : elle définit les conditions pour qu'Odoo" -" déclenche automatiquement une requête d'approvisionnement (achat à un " -"fournisseur ou lancement d'un ordre de fabrication). Elle est déclenchée " -"lorsque la quantité prévisionnelle atteint la règle de stock minimum." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:85 -msgid "" -"**Cross-Dock**: Cross-docking is a practice in the logistics of unloading " -"materials from an incoming semi-trailer truck or railroad car and loading " -"these materials directly into outbound trucks, trailers, or rail cars, with " -"no storage in between. (does not go to the stock, directly from incoming to " -"packing zone)" -msgstr "" -"**Transborder**: le transbordement est une pratique logistique, de " -"déchargement de matériels à partir d'un camion ou wagon entrant, suivi du " -"chargement directement dans les camions ou wagons sortants, sans stockage " -"entre les deux (directement de la zone d'entrée à la zone d'emballage)." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:91 -msgid "" -"**Drop-Shipping**: move products from the vendor/manufacturer directly to " -"the customer (could be retailer or consumer) without going through the usual" -" distribution channels. Products are sent directly from the vendor to the " -"customer, without passing through your own warehouse." -msgstr "" -"**Livraison Directe** : transfère les articles directement du " -"fournisseur/fabricant au client (qui peut être un détaillant ou un " -"consommateur) sans passer par les canaux de distribution habituels. Les " -"produits sont envoyés directement du fournisseur au client, sans passer par " -"votre propre entrepôt." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:97 -msgid "" -"**Removal Strategies**: the strategy to use to select which product to pick " -"for a specific operation. Example: FIFO, LIFO, FEFO." -msgstr "" -"**Stratégies d'Enlèvement** : la stratégie à utiliser pour choisir quel " -"produit prélever pour une opération spécifique. Exemple : FIFO, LIFO, FEFO." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:100 -msgid "" -"**Putaway Strategies**: the strategy to use to decide in which location a " -"specific product should be set when arriving somewhere. (example: cables " -"goes in rack 3, storage A)" -msgstr "" -"**Stratégies d'Entrée en Stock** : la stratégie à utiliser pour décider à " -"quel endroit chaque article doit être rangé à son arrivée. (exemple: les " -"câbles vont dans le rack 3, stockage A)" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:104 -msgid "" -"**Scrap**: A product that is broken or outdated. Scrapping a product removes" -" it from the stock." -msgstr "" -"**Mise au rebut** : Un article cassé ou obsolète. La mise au rebut d'un " -"article le supprime du stock." #: ../../inventory/overview/process.rst:3 msgid "Process Overview" msgstr "Vue d'ensemble des processus" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:3 -msgid "From procurement to delivery" -msgstr "De l'approvisionnement à la livraison" +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:3 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:25 +msgid "Deliver Products from Stock" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:6 +msgid "Create Storable/Consumable Products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:5 msgid "" -"Inventory is the heart of your business. It can be really complicated, but " -"with Odoo, doing a receipt or a delivery has never been easier. We will show" -" you in this document how easy to do a full process, from the receipt to the" -" delivery." +"The first step to use the inventory application is to create products in " +"your database via the menu *Master Data > Products*. Click the Create button" +" and enter the name of your product." msgstr "" -"La gestion du stock est le cœur de votre entreprise. Ça peut être parfois " -"compliqué, mais avec Odoo, faire une réception ou une livraison n'a jamais " -"été aussi facile. Nous allons vous montrer dans ce document comment faire " -"facilement un cycle complet, de la réception à la livraison." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:12 msgid "" -"Odoo inventory is fully integrated with other applications, such as " -"**Purchase**, **Sales** or **Inventory**. But is not limited to those " -"processes, it is also fully integrated with our **e-Commerce**, " -"**Manufacturing** and **Repairs** applications." +"In case you set the product as *storable*, you will track the stock for this" +" product and know how many units are in stock and what is the forecasted " +"number of units. If you want to include a product on receipts/deliveries but" +" don’t need to track its stock, you can set it as *consumable*." msgstr "" -"La Gestion du stock dans Odoo est entièrement interfacée avec les autres " -"applications, comme les **Achats** ou les **Ventes**. Mais pas seulement, " -"car elle est également entièrement interfacée avec les applications de " -"**eCommerce **, de **Fabrication** et de **Maintenance**." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:19 -msgid "How to process a receipt ?" -msgstr "Comment traiter une réception ?" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:22 -msgid "Install Purchase application" -msgstr "Installez l'application de Gestion des achats" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:24 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:27 msgid "" -"First, you will need to install the **Purchase Management** application. Go " -"to :menuselection:`Apps` and install it." +"Once you have existing products, you can decide to create a delivery to " +"deliver products to your customers. The process in order to do so is " +"described in the following print screens." msgstr "" -"Tout d'abord, vous devrez Installer l'application de **Gestion des achats**." -" Allez dans **Applications** et installez-la." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:31 -msgid "Make a purchase order" -msgstr "Passez une commande fournisseur" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:33 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:37 msgid "" -"Go to the **Purchases** applications. The first screen is the **Request for " -"Quotation** list. Click on the **Create** button." +"On the delivery order, you can specify to whom the products will be " +"delivered along with the different products and their respective quantities." +" When the delivery is complete you can hit *Validate* and the products will " +"go out of your stock." msgstr "" -"Allez dans l'application **Achats**. Le premier écran est la liste **Demande" -" de Prix**. Cliquez sur le bouton **Créer**." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:36 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:45 msgid "" -"Fill in the **Vendor** information and click on **Add an Item** to add some " -"products to your request for quotation." +"In case you have a delivery that is planned but shouldn’t be immediately " +"validated, you can create a *planned delivery* with a scheduled date in the " +"future. You can indicate the initial demand for each product, corresponding " +"to what has been ordered by your customer. Once the document is filled in, " +"you can hit “Mark as to do” in order to consider it in your product " +"forecasts." msgstr "" -"Complétez les informations **Fournisseur** puis cliquez sur **Ajouter un " -"élément** pour ajouter quelques articles à votre demande de prix." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:42 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:56 +msgid "Deliver Products from Stock from a Sale Order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:58 msgid "" -"Click on **Confirm order** when you are sure about the products, prices and " -"quantity." +"If you have the *Sales* application installed, delivery can be directly " +"created by *validating a quotation*. You will be able to find the " +"corresponding delivery directly on the *sale order*." msgstr "" -"Cliquez sur **Confirmer la commande** quand vous êtes sûr des articles, des " -"prix et des quantités." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:46 -msgid "Retrieve the Receipt" -msgstr "Récupérez la réception" +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:3 +msgid "Set your Initial Stock" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:48 -msgid "You can retrieve the receipt order in 2 ways:" -msgstr "Vous pouvez récupérer l'ordre de réception de 2 façons :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:51 -msgid "From the purchase order" -msgstr "Depuis la commande fournisseur" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:53 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:12 msgid "" -"On the top right of your purchase order, you will see a button with the " -"related **Receipt**:" +"Set the product as *storable*, in order to track the stock for this product " +"and be able to include it in an inventory adjustment." msgstr "" -"En haut à droite de votre commande fournisseur, vous trouverez un bouton " -"avec la **Réception** concernée :" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:59 -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:136 -msgid "Click on it to see the **Transfer order**." -msgstr "Cliquez dessus pour voir l'**Ordre de Transfert**." +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:19 +msgid "Inventory Adjustment for Multiple Products" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:62 -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:139 -msgid "From the Inventory Dashboard" -msgstr "Depuis le Tableau de bord de la Gestion de l'inventaire" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:64 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:21 msgid "" -"When opening the **Inventory** application, click on **# to receive** to see" -" the list of your deliveries to process." +"Once you have created all your *storable products*, you can create an " +"*inventory adjustment* to determine their current stock level in Odoo. You " +"therefore need to go to *Operations > Inventory Adjustments* and create a " +"new one." msgstr "" -"A l'ouverture de l'application de **Gestion de l'inventaire**, cliquez sur " -"**# à recevoir** pour voir la liste des réceptions à traiter." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:70 -msgid "In the list, click on the one related to the purchase order:" -msgstr "Dans la liste, cliquez sur celle relative à la commande fournisseur :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:76 -msgid "Process the Receipt" -msgstr "Traitez la Réception" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:81 -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:162 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:29 msgid "" -"To process the stock transfer. Simply click on **Validate** to complete the " -"transfer. A message will appear asking if you want to process the whole " -"order, accept it by clicking on **Apply**." +"You have to enter a title for your *inventory adjustment* and you can then " +"decide if you want to proceed to the *inventory adjustment* of all products " +"or only some of them. For a first *inventory adjustment*, I suggest you to " +"keep the *Products* field empty. You can then *Start Inventory*." msgstr "" -"Pour traiter le transfert de stock, cliquez simplement sur **Valider** pour " -"terminer le transfert. Un message apparaîtra, vous demandant si vous " -"souhaitez traiter l'ensemble de la commande, acceptez-le en cliquant sur " -"**Appliquer**." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:86 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:38 msgid "" -"Procurements can be automated. Please read our document " -":doc:`../../management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto` for more " -"information." +"If you already have some products in stock, Odoo will add the lines with the" +" theoretical quantity currently in stock. You can also add new lines with " +"your other products." msgstr "" -"Les approvisionnements peuvent être automatisés. Pour plus d'informations, " -"lisez notre documentation " -":doc:`../../management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto`." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:91 -msgid "How to process a delivery order ?" -msgstr "Comment traiter un ordre de livraison ?" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:94 -msgid "Install Sales application" -msgstr "Installez l'application de Ventes" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:96 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:46 msgid "" -"First, you will need to install the **Sales Management** application. Go to " -":menuselection:`Apps` and install it." +"If your products are tracked by Serial/Lot numbers, you will have an " +"additional column allowing you to specify those for the different units " +"added to the inventory adjustment." msgstr "" -"Tout d'abord, vous devrez installer l'application **Gestion des ventes**. " -"Aller à :menuselection:`Applications` et installez-la." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:103 -msgid "Place a sale order" -msgstr "Passez une Commande Client" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:105 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:50 msgid "" -"Go to the **Sales** applications. Click on the **Quotations** button of your" -" team." +"Odoo will highlight in red the lines for which there is a difference between" +" the theoretical quantity on hand, which is automatically computed by the " +"system, and the counted quantity you manually entered. Once all the " +"necessary products have been entered, you can hit *Validate Inventory* and " +"the quantities on hand of your different products will be updated." msgstr "" -"Allez dans l'application de **Ventes**. Cliquez sur le bouton **Devis** de " -"votre équipe." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:111 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:58 +msgid "Inventory Adjustment for one Product" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:60 msgid "" -"You will get the list of all your quotations. Click on the **Create** " -"button." +"On each storable product, you have access to the *Update Quantity* button." msgstr "" -"Vous obtiendrez la liste de tous vos devis. Cliquez sur le bouton **Créer**." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:114 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:66 msgid "" -"Fill in the **Customer informations** and click on **Add an Item** to add " -"some products to your quotation." +"When clicking this button, you see the current stock you have for this " +"product. You can edit the existing lines or create new ones to add stock of " +"your product in different locations and/or add new serial/lot numbers." msgstr "" -"Complétez les informations **Client**, puis cliquez sur **Ajouter un " -"élément** pour ajouter quelques articles à votre devis." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:120 -msgid "Click on **Confirm sale** to place the order." -msgstr "Cliquez sur **Confirmer la vente** pour passer la commande." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:123 -msgid "Retrieve the Delivery order" -msgstr "Récupérez l'ordre de Livraison" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:125 -msgid "You can retrieve the delivery order in 2 ways:" -msgstr "Vous pouvez récupérer l'ordre de livraison de 2 façons :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:128 -msgid "From the sale order" -msgstr "Depuis la commande client" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:130 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:74 msgid "" -"On the top right of your sale order, you will see a button with the related " -"**Delivery**:" +"Once you come back to your product, you see that the quantity on hand as " +"been updated taking your modification into account." msgstr "" -"En haut à droite de votre commande client, vous trouverez un bouton avec la " -"**Livraison** concernée :" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:141 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:81 msgid "" -"When opening the **Inventory** application, click on **# to do** to see the " -"list of your receipts to process." +"If you work with product variants, the quantity on hand will show you the " +"total quantity in stock for the product template, taking the different " +"variants into account." msgstr "" -"A l'ouverture de l'application de **Gestion de l'inventaire**, cliquez sur " -"**# à faire** pour voir la liste des livraisons à traiter." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:147 -msgid "In the list, click on the one related to the sale order:" -msgstr "Dans la liste, cliquez sur celle relative à la commande client :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:153 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:85 msgid "" -"If the product is not in stock, the sale order will be listed as **Waiting**" -" on your dashboard." +"By default, the quantity on hand of the product form will show you the " +"number of products that are part of your warehouse view location, meaning " +"which are part of an internal type sub-location of this warehouse. It means " +"that if you have any product in a location that isn’t under the main " +"warehouse location, they won’t appear in the stock on hand stat button." msgstr "" -"Si l'article n'est pas en stock, la commande client sera **En attente** sur " -"votre tableau de bord." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:157 -msgid "Process the delivery" -msgstr "Traiter la livraison" +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:3 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:22 +msgid "Receive Products in Stock" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:167 -msgid "E-Commerce orders are processed the same way." -msgstr "Les commandes de eCommerce sont traitées de la même façon." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:170 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:24 msgid "" -"You can easily integrate your delivery orders with different delivery " -"methods. Please read the document " -":doc:`../../shipping/setup/delivery_method`." +"Once you have existing products, you can decide to create a receipt to enter" +" products from your supplier in stock. The process in order to do so is " +"described in the following print screens." msgstr "" -"Vous pouvez facilement intégrer vos ordres de livraison avec différentes " -"méthodes de livraison. Lisez le document " -":doc:`../../shipping/setup/delivery_method`." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:175 -msgid "Advanced flows" -msgstr "Flux avancés" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:177 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:34 msgid "" -"In this document, the flows that are explained are the most simple ones. " -"Odoo also suit for companies having advanced warehouse management." +"On the receipt document, you can select the quantity of the different " +"products you receive and the supplier from who you received them. When the " +"receipt is complete, you can hit *Validate* and the products will enter your" +" stock." msgstr "" -"Dans ce document, seuls les flux plus simples sont expliqués. Odoo convient " -"aussi aux entreprises ayant une gestion d'entrepôt avancé." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:180 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:42 msgid "" -"By default, only **receipts** and **deliveries** are configured but you can " -"activate the use of multi-locations and multi-warehouses to do **internal " -"transfers**." +"In case you have a receipt that is planned but shouldn’t be immediately " +"validated, you can create a *planned receipt* with a scheduled date in the " +"future. You can indicate the initial demand for each product, corresponding " +"to what has been ordered to your supplier. Once the document is filled in, " +"you can hit “Mark as to do” in order to consider it in your product " +"forecasts." msgstr "" -"Par défaut, seules les **réceptions** et les **livraisons** sont " -"configurées, mais vous pouvez activer l'utilisation multi-emplacements et " -"multi-entrepôts, et faire ainsi des **transferts internes**." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:184 -msgid "**Routes**: you can automate flows with push and pull rules" +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:56 +msgid "Receive Products in Stock from Purchase Orders" msgstr "" -"**Routes** : vous pouvez automatiser les flux avec des règles de flux " -"poussés et tirés" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:186 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:58 msgid "" -"**Multi-step** receipts and deliveries can be easily configured for each " -"warehouse" +"If you have the *Purchase* application installed, receipts can be directly " +"created by validating a *request for quotation*. You will be able to find " +"the corresponding receipt directly on the *purchase order*." msgstr "" -"Des réceptions et des livraisons **Multi-étapes** peuvent être facilement " -"configurées" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:189 -msgid "" -"Much more: **Barcode scanning**, **serial numbers**, **lots**, **cross-" -"docking**, **dropshipping**, integration with a **third-party** shipper, " -"**putaway** and **removal** strategies.... All of it is possible with Odoo." -msgstr "" -"Encore plus de fonctionnalités : **Lecture de Codes à Barres**, **Numéros de" -" Série**, **Lots**, **Transbordement**, **Livraison Directe**, interface " -"avec un transporteur **tiers**, stratégies de **Rangement en rayon** et " -"d'**Enlèvement**... Tout cela est possible avec Odoo." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start.rst:3 -msgid "Getting Started" -msgstr "Commencer" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:3 -msgid "How to setup Odoo inventory?" -msgstr "Comment configurer l'inventaire dans Odoo ?" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:5 -msgid "" -"The Odoo Inventory application has an implementation guide that you should " -"follow to configure it. It's a step-by-step manual with links to the " -"different screens you need." -msgstr "" -"L'application de Gestion de l'inventaire d'Odoo dispose d'un guide de mise " -"en œuvre que vous devriez suivre pour la configurer. C'est un manuel pas à " -"pas, avec des liens vers les différents écrans dont vous avez besoin." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:9 -msgid "" -"Once you have installed the **Inventory** application, click on the top-" -"right progress bar to get access to the implementation guide." -msgstr "" -"Une fois que vous avez installé l'application de **Gestion de " -"l'inventaire**, cliquez sur la barre de progression en haut à droite pour " -"accéder au guide de mise en œuvre." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:15 -msgid "The implementation guide helps you through the following steps:" -msgstr "Le guide de mise en œuvre vous aide avec les étapes suivantes :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:17 -msgid "Set up your warehouse" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:19 -msgid "Import your vendors" -msgstr "Importez vos fournisseurs" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:21 -msgid "Import your products" -msgstr "Importez vos articles" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:23 -msgid "Set up the initial inventory" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:25 -msgid "Configure your sales and purchase flows" -msgstr "Configurez vos flux de ventes et d'achats" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:27 -msgid "Set up replenishment mechanisms" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:29 -msgid "" -"Configure advanced features like package, traceability, routes and inventory" -" valuation." -msgstr "" -"Configurez les fonctionnalités avancées comme l'emballage, la traçabilité, " -"les routes et la valorisation des stocks." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:37 -msgid "" -"If you want to set up operations with barcode scanner in your warehouse, you" -" should install the **Barcode** application that adds features on top of the" -" inventory application. The barcode application will guide you to configure " -"and use your scanner optimally." -msgstr "" -"Si, dans votre entrepôt, vous voulez gérer les opérations avec des lecteurs " -"de codes à barres, vous devez installer l'application **Codes à Barres**, " -"qui ajoute des fonctionnalités à l'application de Gestion de l'inventaire. " -"L'application de codes à barres vous guidera pour configurer et d'utiliser " -"votre scanner de manière optimale." #: ../../inventory/routes.rst:3 msgid "Advanced Routes" @@ -5793,117 +4729,89 @@ msgid "Concepts" msgstr "Concepts" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:3 -msgid "How to organize a cross-dock in your warehouse?" -msgstr "Comment organiser un transbordement dans votre entrepôt ?" +msgid "Organize a cross-dock in a warehouse" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:5 msgid "" -"Cross dock area is temporarily area where we are not storing any product " -"instead just managing place according to delivery for further customer. This" -" will save lot of time for inter warehouse transfer and storing process. We " -"are managing our products with docking area where product directly place " -"from supplier location and transfer this to gate pass for customer delivery." +"Cross-docking is the process of sending products that are received directly " +"to the customers, without making them enter the stock. The trucks are simply" +" unloaded in a *Cross-Dock* area in order to reorganize products and load " +"another truck." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:17 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:11 msgid "" -"For more information on how to organise your warehouse, read `What is cross " -"docking and is it for me? `_" +"For more information on how to organize your warehouse, read our blog: `What" +" is cross-docking and is it for me? `__" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:24 -msgid "Warehouse and routes" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:26 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:15 msgid "" -"In the **Inventory** module, open :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings" -" --> Location & Warehouse`, then in **Routes**, select **Advanced routing of" -" products using rules**, then click on **Apply**." +"In the *Inventory* app, open *Configuration > Settings* and activate the " +"*Multi-Step Routes*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:33 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:21 +msgid "Doing so will also enable the *Storage Locations* feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:23 msgid "" -"Open :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouse Management --> Warehouses`," -" then open the warehouse you want to cross-dock from and click on **Edit**." +"Now, both *Incoming* and *Outgoing* shipments should be configured to work " +"with 2 steps. To adapt the configuration, go to *Inventory > Configuration >" +" Warehouses* and edit your warehouse." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:28 +msgid "" +"This modification will lead to the creation of a *Cross-Docking* route that " +"can be found in *Inventory > Configuration > Routes*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:34 +msgid "Configure products with Cross-Dock Route" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:36 -msgid "In the **Warehouse Configuration** tab, select:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:38 msgid "" -"**Incoming Shipments**: Unload in input location then go to stock (2 steps)" +"Create the product that uses the *Cross-Dock Route* and then, in the " +"inventory tab, select the routes *Buy* and *Cross-Dock*. Now, in the " +"purchase tab, specify the vendor to who you buy the product and set a price " +"for it." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:41 -msgid "**Outgoing Shipments**: Ship directly from stock (Ship only)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:43 -msgid "then click on **Save**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:48 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:44 msgid "" -"This steps has generated a cross-docking route that you can see in " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configurations --> Routes --> Routes`." +"Once done, create a sale order for the product and confirm it. Odoo will " +"automatically create two transfers which will be linked to the sale order. " +"The first one is the transfer from the *Input Location* to the *Output " +"Location*, corresponding to the move of the product in the *Cross-Dock* " +"area. The second one is the delivery order from the *Output Location* to " +"your *Customer Location. Both are in state *Waiting Another Operation* " +"because we still need to order the product to our supplier." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:52 -msgid "Cross Docking Route" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:54 msgid "" -"We will use the route **Buy** for first part of the flow and create a route " -"for the remaining part:" +"Now, go to the *Purchase* app. There, you will find the purchase order that " +"has been automatically triggered by the system. Validate it and receive the " +"products in the *Input Location*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:60 msgid "" -"Each of the procurement rule will now be configured. Cross Dock location is " -"created as an internal physical location." +"When the products have been received from the supplier, you can go back to " +"your initial sale order and validate the internal transfer from *Input* to " +"*Output*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:67 -msgid ":menuselection:`Input --> Cross Dock`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:73 -msgid ":menuselection:`Cross Dock --> Output`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:79 -msgid ":menuselection:`Output --> Customer`" -msgstr ":menuselection:`Sortie de Stock --> Client`" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:82 -msgid "Product with cross dock" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:84 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:68 msgid "" -"We have created the Vegetable Fennel product and assigned the routes created" -" above as well as the **Buy** route." +"The delivery order is now ready to be processed and can be validated too." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:87 -msgid "" -"We have also specified a supplier and a minimum order rule which is needed " -"for replenishment of a stockable product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:95 -msgid ":doc:`use_routes`" -msgstr ":doc:`use_routes`" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:96 -msgid ":doc:`../../management/incoming/two_steps`" -msgstr ":doc:`../../management/incoming/two_steps`" - #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:3 msgid "How to do inter-warehouses transfers?" msgstr "Comment faire des transferts inter-entrepôts ?" @@ -5930,7 +4838,6 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:26 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:9 msgid "Creating a new warehouse" msgstr "Création d'un nouvel entrepôt" @@ -6115,7 +5022,7 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:45 msgid "" "Here you can set the conditions of your rule. There are 3 types of action " -"possibles :" +"possible :" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:48 @@ -6124,11 +5031,11 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:50 msgid "" -"Manufacturing rules that will trigger the creation of manufacturing orders." +"Manufacturing rules that will trigger the creation of manufacturing orders" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:53 -msgid "Buy rules that will trigger the creation of purchase orders." +msgid "Buy rules that will trigger the creation of purchase orders" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:56 @@ -6185,7 +5092,7 @@ msgid "" "inventory control system are that forecasts are often inaccurate as sales " "can be unpredictable and vary from one year to the next. Another problem " "with push inventory control systems is that if too much product is left in " -"inventory. This increases the company's costs for storing these goods. An " +"inventory, this increases the company's costs for storing these goods. An " "advantage to the push system is that the company is fairly assured it will " "have enough product on hand to complete customer orders, preventing the " "inability to meet customer demand for the product." @@ -6267,6 +5174,66 @@ msgstr "" msgid ":doc:`procurement_rule`" msgstr ":doc:`procurement_rule`" +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:3 +msgid "Taking stock from different warehouses" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When you plan to deliver a customer, you don’t know in advance if the " +"products will come from Warehouse A or Warehouse B. You may, in some cases, " +"need to take stock from different warehouses. With *Odoo*, you can configure" +" this by using the concept of virtual warehouses. Let us show you how to set" +" those virtual warehouses." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:8 +msgid "Set up virtual warehouses" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:10 +msgid "" +"Let’s say you have two warehouses: Warehouse A and Warehouse B. Create a new" +" warehouse, that will be a virtual one. It will allow you to take the stock " +"from A or B. To do so, go to your inventory app settings and enable the " +"multi-warehouses feature. Then, go to the warehouses menu and click on " +"create." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:16 +msgid "" +"The *Storage Location* feature will be automatically enabled. Good news, " +"because you will need it later in the process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:18 +msgid "" +"Now, you have to make sure that the main stock locations of warehouse A and " +"warehouse B are children locations of the main stock location of warehouse A" +" + B. Go to the locations menu, and edit the main location of your two " +"warehouses. Then, change their parent location to main location of warehouse" +" A+B." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:24 +msgid "Sell a product from the virtual warehouse" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:26 +msgid "" +"Let’s say you have two products, one stored in warehouse A and one stored in" +" warehouse B. Now, you can create a new quotation for one of each product. " +"Go to other information and choose Warehouse A+B in the shipping " +"information." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:31 +msgid "" +"Once you have done it, you can convert it to a sales order. Then, a delivery" +" order will be automatically generated, with a product reserved in warehouse" +" A and one in warehouse B." +msgstr "" + #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:3 msgid "How to use routes?" msgstr "Comment utiliser des routages ?" @@ -6452,94 +5419,44 @@ msgid "Product Costing" msgstr "Coûts des Articles" #: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:3 -msgid "How to integrate landed costs in the cost of the product?" -msgstr "Comment intégrer les coûts à l'arrivée dans le coût des articles ?" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:8 -msgid "Landed costs include all charges associated to a good transfer." +msgid "" +"How to integrate additional costs in the cost of the product? (landed costs)" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:10 -msgid "Landed cost includes = Cost of product + Shipping + Customs + Risk" +#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:8 +msgid "" +"The landed cost feature in Odoo allows to include additional costs " +"(shipment, insurance, customs duties, etc.) into the cost of the product." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:12 msgid "" -"All of these components might not be applicable in every shipment, but " -"relevant components must be considered as a part of the landed cost. We have" -" to identify landed cost to decide sale price of product because it will " -"impact on company profits." +"Landed costs can only be applied to products with a FIFO costing method and " +"an automated inventory valuation (which requires the accounting application " +"to be installed)." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:21 -msgid "Applications configuration" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:23 +#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:20 msgid "" -"First, you need to activate the use of the landed costs. Go to " -":menuselection:`Inventory application --> Configuration --> Setting`. Check " -"accounting option **Include landed costs in product costing computation** & " -"**Perpetual inventory valuation**, then click on **Apply** to save changes." +"First, you need to activate the landed costs feature in " +":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:32 +#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:27 +msgid "Add costs to products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:29 msgid "" -"Then go to the :menuselection:`Purchase application --> Configuration --> " -"Setting`. Choose costing method **Use a 'Fixed', 'Real' or 'Average' price " -"costing method**, then click on **Apply** to save changes." +"Go in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Operations --> Landed Costs` and click " +"on the **Create** button. You then have to select the transfers on which you" +" want to attribute additional costs and the costs lines you want to add up. " +"Once it's done, click on the **Compute** button to see how the costs lines " +"will be split accross your transfers lines." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:40 -msgid "Landed Cost Types" -msgstr "Types de coûts logistiques" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:42 -msgid "" -"Start by creating specific products to indicate your various **Landed " -"Costs**, such as freight, insurance or custom duties. Go to " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Landed Cost types`." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:50 -msgid "" -"Landed costs are only possible for products configured in real time " -"valuation with real price costing method. The costing method is configured " -"on the product category." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:55 -msgid "Link landed costs to a transfer" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:57 -msgid "" -"To calculate landed costs, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory " -"Control --> Landed Costs`." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:60 -msgid "" -"Click on the **Create** button and select the picking(s) you want to " -"attribute landed costs." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:66 -msgid "" -"Select the account journal in which to post the landed costs. We recommend " -"you to create a specific journal for landed costs. Therefore it will be " -"easier to keep track of your postings." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:73 -msgid "" -"Click the **Compute** button to see how the landed costs will be split " -"across the picking lines." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:79 -msgid "" -"To confirm the landed costs attribution, click on the **Validate** button." +#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:38 +msgid "To confirm, click on the **Validate** button." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies.rst:3 @@ -6547,94 +5464,68 @@ msgid "Putaway & Removal Strategies" msgstr "Stratégies de rangement et de suppression" #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:3 -msgid "What is a putaway strategy?" -msgstr "Qu'est-ce qu'une stratégie d'entrée ?" +msgid "What is a Putaway Rule?" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:5 msgid "" "A good warehouse implementation takes care that products automatically move " -"to their appropriate destination location. Putaway is the process of taking " -"products off the receiving shipment and putting them into the most " -"appropriate location." +"to their appropriate destination location. To make that process easier, Odoo" +" uses *Putaway rules*. But what is a putaway rule? Putaway is the process of" +" taking products off the receiving shipments and directly putting them into " +"the most appropriate location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:7 msgid "" -"If for instance a warehouse contains volatile substances, it is important to" -" make sure that certain products are not stored close to each other because " -"of a potential chemical reaction." +"If, for example, a warehouse contains volatile substances, it is important " +"to make sure that certain products are not stored close to each other " +"because of a potential chemical reaction. That’s where putaway rules " +"intervene, to avoid storing products wrongly." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:17 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:12 msgid "" -"A putaway strategy follows the same principle as removal strategies but " -"affects the destination location. Putaway strategies are defined at the " -"location level (unlike removal strategies which are defined at the product " -"level)." +"In the *Inventory* app, go to *Configuration > Settings* and activate the " +"*Multi-Step Routes*. By doing so, the *Storage Locations* will be " +"automatically activated." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:18 +msgid "Setting up a Putaway Rule" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:20 msgid "" -"Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings` and check " -"option **Manage several location per warehouse & Advance routing of products" -" using rules**, then click on **Apply**." +"In some cases, like for a retail shop storing vegetables and fruits, we have" +" to store products in different locations to maintain product quality." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:33 -msgid "Setting up a strategy" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:35 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:22 msgid "" -"Let's take as an example a retail shop where we store vegetables and fruits." +"Let’s suppose there are one warehouse location *WH/Stock* and two sub-" +"locations *WH/Stock/Vegatable* and *WH/Stock/Fruits*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:24 msgid "" -"We have to store this type of product in different locations to maintain " -"product quality." +"To manage those locations, we will create putaway rules. To do so, open the " +"*Inventory* app and go to *Configuration > Putaway Rules*. Then, click on " +"create and configure your first rule indicating the main location the " +"product will enter before being redirected to the right location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:41 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:27 msgid "" -"Suppose there is one warehouse location **WH/Stock** and there is sub " -"location **WH/Stock/Vegetables** & **WH/Stock/Fruits**." +"The putaway rules can be defined either per product or per product category." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:44 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:32 msgid "" -"You can create a putaway strategy from :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Configuration --> Locations`. Open any location where you want to set a " -"putaway strategy, click on **Edit** and locate the option **Put Away " -"Strategy**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:52 -msgid "" -"Open the roll-down menu and click on **Create and Edit**. This will open a " -"form view of put away strategy on which you have to set a name for the " -"strategy, and set the method and fixed location for each category." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:59 -msgid "" -"When you have entered all the necessary information, click on **Save**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:61 -msgid "" -"Now, when you purchase products with those categories, they will " -"automatically be transferred to the correct location." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:64 -msgid "" -"To check current inventory, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory " -"Control --> Current Inventory`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:67 -msgid "There you can see current inventory by location." +"Now, if I purchase apples and carrots to my supplier, they will be grouped " +"in the same receipt but redirected to the right location automatically, " +"thanks to putaway rules. This information is available from *Inventory " +"Report*, under the reporting menu." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:3 @@ -6796,7 +5687,7 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:125 msgid "" "**Removal Date:** This is the date on which the goods with this serial/lot " -"number should be removed from the stock. Using the FEFO removal strategym " +"number should be removed from the stock. Using the FEFO removal strategy " "goods are picked for delivery orders using this date." msgstr "" @@ -6937,1072 +5828,9 @@ msgstr ":doc:`../../management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental`" msgid ":doc:`../../management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon`" msgstr ":doc:`../../management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon`" -#: ../../inventory/settings.rst:3 -msgid "Settings" -msgstr "Configuration" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products.rst:3 -msgid "Products" -msgstr "Articles" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:3 -msgid "How to select the right replenishment strategy" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:5 -msgid "" -"Minimum Stock rules and Make to Order have similar consequences but " -"different rules. They should be used depending on your manufacturing and " -"delivery strategies." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:15 -msgid "" -"Minimum Stock rules are used to ensure that you always have the minimum " -"amount of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or " -"answer to your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its" -" minimum the system will automatically generate a procurement order with the" -" quantity needed to reach the maximum stock level." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:24 -msgid "" -"The Make to Order function will trigger a Purchase Order of the amount of " -"the Sales Order related to the product. The system will **not** check the " -"current stock. This means that a draft purchase order will be generated " -"regardless of the quantity on hand of the product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:35 -msgid "" -"The Minimum Stock Rules configuration is available through your Inventory " -"module. In the Inventory Control menu select \"Reordering Rule\" in the drop" -" down menu. There, click on \"Create\" to set minimum and maximum stock " -"values for a given product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:44 -msgid "" -"Show tooltips for \"minimum quantity\", \"maximum quantity\" and \"quantity " -"multiple\" fields" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:47 -msgid "" -"Then, click on your product to access the related product form and, on the " -"\"Inventory submenu\", do not forget to select a supplier." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:54 -msgid "" -"Don't forget to select the right product type. A consumable can not be " -"stocked and will thus not be accounted for in the stock valuation." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:60 -msgid "" -"The Make to Order configuration is available on your product form through " -"your :menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory control --> Products` (or any " -"other module where products are available)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:64 -msgid "On the product form, under Inventory, click on \"Make To Order\"." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:3 -msgid "How to use different units of measure?" -msgstr "Comment utiliser différentes unités de mesure ?" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:8 -msgid "" -"In some cases, handling products in different unit of measures is necessary." -" For example, if you buy products in a country where the metric system is of" -" application and sell the in a country where the imperial system is used, " -"you will need to convert the units." -msgstr "" -"Dans certains cas, la gestion d'articles avec différentes unités de mesure " -"est nécessaire. Par exemple, si vous achetez des produits dans un pays qui " -"utilise le système métrique, et les vendez dans un pays qui utilise le " -"système impérial, vous aurez besoin de convertir les unités." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:13 -msgid "" -"You can set up Odoo to work with different units of measure for one product." -msgstr "" -"Vous pouvez configurer Odoo pour travailler avec différentes unités de " -"mesure pour un article." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:19 -msgid "" -"In the **Inventory** application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`. In the **Products** section, select **Some products may be " -"sold/purchased in different units of measure (advanced)**, then click on " -"**Apply**." -msgstr "" -"Dans l'application **Inventaire**, allez à :menuselection:`Configuration -->" -" Configuration`. Dans la section **Articles**, sélectionnez **Certains " -"articles peuvent être vendus/achetés avec différentes unités de mesure " -"(avancé)**, puis cliquez sur **Appliquer**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:27 -msgid "Setting up units on your products" -msgstr "Définnissez des unités sur vos articles" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:29 -msgid "" -"In :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Products`, open the product which " -"you would like to change the purchase/sale unit of measure, and click on " -"**Edit**." -msgstr "" -"Dans :menuselection:`Gestion des stocks --> Articles`, ouvrez l'article dont" -" vous souhaitez modifier l'unité de mesure d'achat/de vente, et cliquez sur " -"**Modifier**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:32 -msgid "" -"In the **Unit of Measure** section, select the unit in which the product " -"will be sold and in which internal transfers will be done." -msgstr "" -"Dans le champ **Unité de mesure**, sélectionnez l'unité dans laquelle le " -"produit sera vendu et dans laquelle les transferts internes seront faits." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:35 -msgid "" -"In the **Purchase Unit of Measure** section, select the unit in which you " -"purchase the product. When you're done, click on **Save**." -msgstr "" -"Dans le champ **Unité de mesure d'achat**, sélectionnez l'unité dans " -"laquelle vous achetez l'article. Quand vous avez terminé, cliquez sur " -"**Sauvegarder**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:42 -msgid "Click on the edit button |edit| to create new unit of measures." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:46 -msgid "Transfer from one unit to another" -msgstr "Convertissez d'une unité à une autre" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:48 -msgid "" -"When doing inter-unit transfers, the rounding is automatically done by Odoo." -msgstr "" -"Lors de la conversion entre unités, l'arrondi est fait automatiquement par " -"Odoo." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:51 -msgid "" -"The unit of measure can be changed throughout the whole process. The only " -"condition is that the unit of measure is part of the same category." -msgstr "" -"L'unité de mesure peut être changée à tout moment. La seule condition est " -"que l'unité de mesure fasse partie de la même catégorie." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:54 -msgid "In this example, we are in the egg business :" -msgstr "Dans cet exemple, dans le commerce des œufs :" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:56 -msgid "We buy eggs by trays (30 eggs)" -msgstr "Nous achetons des œufs par plateaux (30 œufs)" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:58 -msgid "We check all eggs individually when receiving it (quality control)" -msgstr "" -"Nous vérifions tous les œufs individuellement à la réception (contrôle " -"qualité)" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:60 -msgid "We sell eggs by the dozen to the customers" -msgstr "Nous vendons les œufs à la douzaine aux clients" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:66 -msgid "" -"The **Sale price** is expressed in the **Product unit of measure**. The " -"**Cost price** is expressed in the **Purchase Unit of Measure**." -msgstr "" -"Le **Prix de vente** est exprimé dans l'**Unité de mesure de l'article**. Le" -" **Prix d'achat** est exprimé dans l'**Unité de mesure d'achat**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:70 -msgid "" -"All internal transfers are expressed in the **Product Unit of Measure**." -msgstr "" -"Tous les transferts internes sont exprimés en **Unité de mesure de " -"l'article**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:74 -msgid "Procurement" -msgstr "Approvisionnement" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:76 -msgid "" -"When doing your procurement request, you can still change the unit of " -"measure." -msgstr "" -"Quand vous faites votre demande d'approvisionnement, vous pouvez encore " -"modifier l'unité de mesure." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:82 -msgid "The unit of measure can also be changed in the purchase order :" -msgstr "" -"L'unité de mesure peut également être modifiée dans la commande fournisseur " -":" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:90 -msgid "The quality control is done by unit." -msgstr "Le contrôle qualité est réalisé à l'unité." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:92 -msgid "" -"The basic unit of measure of our product is **Unit**. Therefore the quality " -"check is done by unit." -msgstr "" -"L'unité de mesure de base de notre produit est l'**Unité**. Par conséquent, " -"le contrôle qualité se fait à l'unité." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:99 -msgid "" -"The unit of measure can only be changed when the transfer status is " -"**Draft**." -msgstr "" -"L'unité de mesure ne peut être changée que lorsque le transfert est à l'état" -" **Brouillon**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:103 -#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:74 -msgid "Delivery process" -msgstr "Processus de livraison" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:105 -msgid "" -"The eggs are sold by the dozen. You can choose the unit of measure on the " -"sale order document. When doing it, the price is automatically computed from" -" the unit to the dozen." -msgstr "" -"Les œufs sont vendus à la douzaine. Vous pouvez choisir l'unité de mesure " -"sur le document de la commande client. En faisant cela, le prix est " -"automatiquement calculé à partir de l'unité vers la douzaine." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:112 -msgid "" -"In the delivery order, the initial demand is done in the sales order unit of" -" measure :" -msgstr "" -"Dans l'ordre de livraison, la demande initiale est effectuée dans l'unité de" -" mesure de la commande client :" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:118 -msgid "" -"But the transfer is done in the product unit of measure. Everything is " -"converted automatically :" -msgstr "" -"Mais le transfert est effectué dans l'unité de mesure de l'article. Tout est" -" automatiquement converti :" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:3 -msgid "When should you use packages, units of measure or kits?" -msgstr "Quand utiliser des emballages, des unités de mesure ou des kits ?" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:6 -msgid "Unit of measures" -msgstr "Unités de mesure" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Units of measures are an indication about the unit used to handle a product." -" Products can be expressed in multiple units of measure at once." -msgstr "" -"Les unités de mesures sont une indication sur l'unité utilisée pour gérer un" -" article. Les articles peuvent être décrits dans plusieurs unités de mesure." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:11 -msgid "" -"Activate this option if you are working with several ones in your warehouse." -msgstr "" -"Activez cette option si vous utilisez plusieurs unités de mesure dans votre " -"entrepôt." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:14 -msgid "" -"The purchase unit of measure might be different that the one you use in your" -" warehouse." -msgstr "" -"L'unité de mesure d'achat peut être différente de celle que vous utilisez " -"dans votre entrepôt." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:17 -msgid "" -"The selling unit of measure is set on the sale order and can be different." -msgstr "" -"L'unité de mesure de vente est définie sur la commande client, et peut être " -"différente." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:24 -msgid "" -"The conversion between the different units of measures is done " -"automatically. The only condition is that all the units have to be in the " -"same category (Unit, Weight, Volume, Length,...)" -msgstr "" -"La conversion entre les différentes unités de mesure est faite " -"automatiquement. La seule condition est que toutes les unités soient dans la" -" même catégorie (Unité, Poids, Volume, Longueur,...)" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:29 -msgid "Packages" -msgstr "Colis" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:31 -msgid "" -"The package is the physical container in which you put one or several " -"product." -msgstr "" -"L'emballage est le conteneur physique dans lequel vous mettez un ou " -"plusieurs articles." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:38 -msgid "Packaging" -msgstr "Conditionnement" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:40 -msgid "Packaging is the physical container that protects your product." -msgstr "L'emballage est le conteneur physique qui protège votre produit." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:42 -msgid "" -"If you are selling computers, the packaging contains the computer with the " -"notice and the power plug." -msgstr "" -"Si vous vendez des ordinateurs, l'emballage contient l'ordinateur, la notice" -" et le câble d'alimentation." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:45 -msgid "In Odoo, packagings are just used for indicative purpose." -msgstr "Dans Odoo, les emballages ne sont utilisées qu'à titre indicatif." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:51 -msgid "" -"You can define on the **Packages** which **Packaging** it uses. But it is " -"only for indicative purpose." -msgstr "" -"Dans les **Colis*, vous pouvez définir quel **Emballage** est utilisé. Mais " -"c'est seulement à titre indicatif." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:55 -msgid "When to use packages, packagings or unit of measures ?" -msgstr "Quand utiliser des colis, des emballages ou des unités de mesure ?" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:57 -msgid "" -"For example, you are sellings eggs. In your warehouse, you manage the eggs " -"individually. Lots of eggs are scrapped and you do it egg by egg. The **unit" -" of measure** is ``Unit(s)``." -msgstr "" -"Par exemple, supposons que vous vendez des œufs. Dans votre entrepôt, vous " -"gérez les œufs individuellement. De nombreux œufs sont mis au rebut et vous " -"le faites œuf par œuf. L'**unité de mesure** est l'`` Unité``." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:61 -msgid "" -"If you are selling eggs by the dozen, the selling **unit of measure** is the" -" ``Dozen``. You will set it on your sale order." -msgstr "" -"Si vous vendez des œufs à la douzaine, l'**unité de mesure** de vente est la" -" ``Douzaine``. Vous le définirez sur votre commande client." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:64 -msgid "" -"The ``cardboard trays`` that contains the dozen of eggs is the " -"**packaging**." -msgstr "" -"Le ``plateau en carton`` qui contient la douzaine d'œufs est " -"l'**emballage**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:66 -msgid "" -"When you are selling several trays, you might wrap all the trays into a " -"``box`` or in a ``plastic`` wrapping. It is the **package**." -msgstr "" -"Lorsque vous vendez plusieurs plateaux, vous pouvez rassembler tous les " -"plateaux dans une ``boite`` ou dans un emballage en ``plastique``. C'est le " -"**colis**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:70 -msgid ":doc:`../../overview/start/setup`" -msgstr ":doc:`../../overview/start/setup`" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:71 -msgid ":doc:`uom`" -msgstr ":doc:`uom`" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:3 -msgid "Using product variants" -msgstr "Utilisation de variantes d'articles" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:5 -msgid "" -"Product variants are used to manage products having different variations, " -"like size, color, etc. It allows managing the product at the template level " -"(for all variations) and at the variant level (specific attributes)." -msgstr "" -"Les variantes d'article sont utilisées pour gérer les produits ayant " -"différentes variations, comme la taille, la couleur, etc. Il permet de gérer" -" l'article au niveau du modèle (pour toutes les variantes) et au niveau de " -"la variante (attributs spécifiques)." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:10 -msgid "" -"As an example, a company selling t-shirts may have the following product:" -msgstr "" -"A titre d'exemple, une entreprise qui vend des t-shirts peut avoir l'article" -" suivant :" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:13 -msgid "B&C T-shirt" -msgstr "B&C T-shirt" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:15 -msgid "Sizes: S, M, L, XL, XXL" -msgstr "Tailles : S, M, L, XL, XXL" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:16 -msgid "Colors: Blue, Red, White, Black" -msgstr "Couleurs : Bleu, Rouge, Blanc, Noir" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:18 -msgid "" -"In this example, **B&C T-Shirt** is called the product template and **B&C " -"T-Shirt, S, Blue** is a variant. Sizes and color are **attributes**." -msgstr "" -"Dans cet exemple, **B&C T-Shirt** est le modèle d'article, et **B&C T-Shirt," -" S, Bleu** est une variante. La taille et la couleur sont des **attributs**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:22 -msgid "" -"The above example has a total of 20 different products (5 sizes x 4 colors)." -" Each one of these products has its own inventory, sales, etc." -msgstr "" -"L'exemple ci-dessus a un total de 20 articles différents (5 tailles x 4 " -"couleurs). Chacun de ces articles a son propre stock, ses propres ventes, " -"etc..." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:26 -msgid "Impact of variants" -msgstr "Impact des variantes" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:28 -msgid "" -"**Barcode**: the code and barcode is associated to a variant, not the " -"template. Every variant may have its own barcode / SKU." -msgstr "" -"**Code à barres**: le code et le code à barres est associé à la variante, " -"pas au modèle. Chaque variante peut avoir son propre code à barres / UGS." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:31 -msgid "" -"**Price**: every product variant has its own public price that is computed " -"based on the template price ($20) with an optional extra for every variant " -"(+$3 for color red). However, you can define pricelist rules that apply on " -"the template or the variant." -msgstr "" -"**Prix**: chaque variante du produit a son propre prix public qui est " -"calculée en fonction du prix du modèle (20€) avec un prix supplémentaire " -"pour chaque variante (+3€ pour la couleur rouge). Cependant, vous pouvez " -"définir des règles sur le tarif qui s'appliquent au modèle ou à la variante." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:36 -msgid "" -"**Inventory**: the inventory is managed by product variant. You don't own " -"t-shirts, you only own \"T-shirts, S, Red\", or \"T-Shirts, M, Blue\". For " -"information purpose, on the product template form, you get the inventory " -"that is the sum of every variant. (but the actual inventory is computed by " -"variant)" -msgstr "" -"**Inventaire**: le stock est géré par variante de produit. Vous ne possédez " -"pas des t-shirts, vous possédez des \"T-shirts, S, Rouge\", ou des " -"\"T-shirts, M, Bleu\". A titre d'information, sur la fiche du modèle " -"d'article, est indiqué l'inventaire qui est la somme de toutes les " -"variantes. (Mais l'inventaire réel est calculé par variante)" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:42 -msgid "" -"**Picture**: the picture is related to the variant, every variation of a " -"product may have its own primary picture." -msgstr "" -"**Image**: l'image est liée à la variante, chaque variante d'un article peut" -" avoir sa propre image." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:45 -msgid "" -"**Other fields**: most of the other fields belongs to the product template. " -"If you update them, it updates automatically all the variants. (example: " -"Income Account, Taxes)" -msgstr "" -"**Autres champs**: la plupart des autres champs appartiennent au modèle " -"d'article. Si vous les mettez à jour, cela met automatiquement à jour toutes" -" les variantes (par ex. : compte de revenus, taxes)." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:50 -msgid "Should you use variants?" -msgstr "Devez-vous utiliser des variantes ?" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:53 -msgid "When should you use variants?" -msgstr "Quand devez-vous utiliser des variantes ?" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:55 -msgid "Using variants has the following impacts:" -msgstr "L'utilisation de variantes a les conséquences suivantes :" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:57 -msgid "" -"**eCommerce**: in your online shop, the customer will only see product " -"templates in the catalog page. Once the visitor click on such a product, he " -"will have options to choose amongst the variants (colors, sizes, …)" -msgstr "" -"**eCommerce** : dans votre boutique en ligne, le client ne verra que les " -"modèles d'article dans le catalogue. Une fois que le visiteur clique sur un " -"tel article, il aura des options à choisir parmi les variantes (couleurs, " -"tailles, ...)" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:62 -msgid "" -"**Manufacturing**: Using variants allows to define only one bill of material" -" for a product template and slight variations for some of the variants. " -"Example: instead of creating a Bill of Material for \"T-shirt, Red, S\", you" -" create a bill of material for \"T-shirt\" and add some lines that are " -"specific to the dimension S, and other lines specific to the color Red." -msgstr "" -"**Fabrication**: l'utilisation de variantes permet de définir une seule " -"nomenclature par modèle d'article, et de légères variations pour certaines " -"des variantes. Exemple: au lieu de créer une nomenclature pour \"T-shirt, " -"Rouge, S\", vous créez une nomenclature pour \"T-shirt\" et vous ajoutez " -"quelques lignes qui sont spécifiques à la dimension S, et d'autres " -"spécifiques à la la couleur Rouge." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:69 -msgid "" -"**Pricing**: The default price of a product is computed using the price of " -"the product template and add the optional extra price on each dimension of " -"the variant. This way, variant prices are easier to maintain since you don't" -" have to set the price for every variant. However, it's possible to create " -"pricelist rules to fix price per variants too." -msgstr "" -"**Tarification**: le prix par défaut d'un article est calculé en utilisant " -"le prix du modèle d'article, et en ajoutant le prix supplémentaire pour " -"chaque attirbut de la variante. De cette façon, les prix des variantes sont " -"plus faciles à maintenir puisque vous n'êtes pas obligé de définir le prix " -"pour chaque variante. Il est toutefois aussi possible de créer des règles de" -" tarif pour fixer le prix par variante." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:77 -msgid "When should you avoid using variants?" -msgstr "Quand devez-vous éviter d'utiliser des variantes ?" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:79 -msgid "" -"Using variants may add a level of complexity on the way you use Odoo. You " -"should consider using variants only if you need it to reduce the complexity " -"of managing lots of products that are similars." -msgstr "" -"L'utilisation de variantes peut ajouter un niveau de complexité sur la façon" -" dont vous utilisez Odoo. Vous ne devez envisager d'utiliser des variantes " -"que pour réduire la complexité de la gestion des lots d'articles qui sont " -"similaires." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:83 -msgid "" -"As an example, importing your initial product catalog is more complex if you" -" use variants. You can't just import a list of products, you must import " -"product templates and all their related variations." -msgstr "" -"Par exemple, l'importation de votre liste d'articles pré-existants est plus " -"complexe si vous utilisez des variantes. Vous ne pouvez pas juste importer " -"une liste d'articles, vous devez importer les modèles d'articles et leur " -"variantes." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:87 -msgid "" -"In addition to that, you should also carefully select the dimensions that " -"you manage as separate product templates and those as variants. As an " -"example, a company having these products:" -msgstr "" -"En plus de cela, vous devez également sélectionner avec soin les " -"caractéristiques que vous gérez en tant que modèles de d'articles distincts " -"et ceux que vous gérez en variantes. A titre d'exemple, une entreprise ayant" -" ces produits :" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:91 -msgid "Quality: T-Shirts, Polos, Shirts" -msgstr "Qualité : T-Shirts, Polos, Shirts" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:93 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:105 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:110 -msgid "Color: Red, Blue" -msgstr "Couleur : Rouge, Bleu" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:95 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:106 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:111 -msgid "Size: S, M, L, XL" -msgstr "Taille : S, M, L, XL" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:97 -msgid "" -"In such a use case, you could create 1 template with three dimensions of " -"variants (Layout, T-Shirts, Polos). But, it's recommended to create two " -"different product templates as T-shirts may highly differ from polos or " -"shirts and customer expect to see these as two different products in the " -"e-Commerce:" -msgstr "" -"Dans une telle situation, vous pourriez créer 1 modèle avec trois dimensions" -" de variantes (Qualité, Couleur, Taille). Mais il est plutôt recommandé de " -"créer trois modèles de produits différents, car des T-shirts diffèrent " -"fortement des polos ou des chemises, et les clients s'attendent à voir cela " -"comme trois produits différents dans les boutiques de eCommerce:" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:103 -msgid "Product Template: T-shirt" -msgstr "Modèle d'article : T-shirt" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:108 -msgid "Product Template: Polos" -msgstr "Modèle d'article : Polos" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:117 -msgid "Activate the variant feature" -msgstr "Activer la fonctionnalité de variante" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:119 -msgid "" -"Before you can use product variants, you must first activate the product " -"variants in the settings. To do so, you must go to the Sales app. In the " -"menu :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`, locate the **Products " -"Variants** line, and tick the option **Products can have several " -"attributes**, then click on **Apply**." -msgstr "" -"Avant de pouvoir utiliser des variantes d'articles, vous devez d'abord " -"activer les variantes d'article dans les réglages. Pour ce faire, vous devez" -" aller dans l'application de Ventes. Dans le menu " -":menuselection:`Configuration --> Configuration`, recherchez la ligne " -"**Variantes d'articles**, et cochez l'option **Les produits peuvent avoir " -"plusieurs attributs...**, puis cliquez sur **Appliquer**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:129 -msgid "Creating products with variants" -msgstr "Création d'articles avec des variantes" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:131 -msgid "" -"Once you have activated the variant option, you can add variants to your " -"products. To do so, go to the Sales module, :menuselection:`Sales --> " -"Products`. It is also accessible from the Purchase and inventory modules." -msgstr "" -"Une fois que vous avez activé l'option de variante, vous pouvez ajouter des " -"variantes à vos articles. Pour ce faire, allez dans l'application de Ventes," -" puis dans :menuselection:`Ventes --> Articles`. C'est également accessible " -"à partir des applications Achats et Inventaire." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:135 -msgid "Now, click on the product you wish to add variants to." -msgstr "" -"Maintenant, cliquez sur l'article auquel vous voulez ajouter des variantes." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:137 -msgid "" -"In the product page, a new tab called Variants has appeared. The number in " -"purple written on top is the number of variants this product currently has. " -"To add new variants, click on the tile. In the new window, click on " -"**Create**." -msgstr "" -"Sur la fiche article, un nouvel onglet appelé Variantes est présent. Le " -"nombre écrit en violet en haut de la fiche est le nombre de variantes que " -"l'article possède actuellement. Pour ajouter de nouvelles variantes, cliquez" -" sur ce bouton \"# Variantes\". Dans la nouvelle fenêtre, cliquez sur " -"**Créer**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:142 -msgid "" -"In **Attributes**, click on the rolldown menu and select the type of " -"variance you wish to add. If the variant does not yet exist, you can create " -"it on the fly by clicking on Create and edit…" -msgstr "" -"Dans **Caractéristiques**, cliquez sur le menu déroulant et sélectionnez le " -"type de la variante que vous souhaitez ajouter. Si la variante n'existe pas " -"encore, vous pouvez la créer à la volée en cliquant sur Créer et modifier " -"..." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:149 -msgid "" -"In the Attributes window, the **Value** field is the description of the " -"attribute such as Green, Plastic or 32GB. The **Attribute** field is the " -"type of variant such as Color, Material or Memory." -msgstr "" -"Dans la fenêtre Caractéristiques, le champ **Valeur** est la description de " -"l'attribut tel que Vert, Plastique ou 32Go. Le champ **Attribut** est le " -"type de variante, comme Couleur, Matériau ou Mémoire." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:156 -msgid "" -"You can add a cost for the variant on the fly by adding it in the " -"**Attribute Price Extra** field, or choose to modify it later. Click on " -"**Save**." -msgstr "" -"Vous pouvez ajouter à la volée un coût pour la variante, dans le champ " -"**Supplément pour cette caractéristique**, ou choisir de le modifier " -"ultérieurement. Cliquez sur **Sauvegarder**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:160 -msgid "" -"You can also add a different barcode and internal reference to the variant." -msgstr "" -"Vous pouvez également ajouter un code à barres et une référence interne " -"différents à la variante." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:163 -msgid "" -"When you have entered all the specifications of the variant, click on " -"**Save**." -msgstr "" -"Lorsque vous avez saisi toutes les spécifications de la variante, cliquez " -"sur **Sauvegarder**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:167 -msgid "Managing Product Variants" -msgstr "Gestion des Variantes d'Article" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:172 -msgid "" -"The examples below are all based on this product template that has two " -"variant attributes :" -msgstr "" -"Les exemples ci-dessous sont tous basés sur ce modèle d'article qui a deux " -"variantes :" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:175 -msgid "T-Shirt B&C" -msgstr "T-Shirt B&C" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:177 -msgid "Color: Red, Blue, White" -msgstr "Couleur : Rouge, Bleu, Blanc" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:179 -msgid "Size: S, M, L, XL, XXL" -msgstr "Taille : S, M, L, XL, XXL" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:182 -msgid "Managing combination possibilities" -msgstr "Gestion des possibilités de combinaison" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:184 -msgid "" -"By default, with the above product template, you get 15 different products " -"(3 colors, 5 sizes). If the XXL size only exists for red and blue t-shirts, " -"you can deactivate the white product variant." -msgstr "" -"Par défaut, avec le modèle d'article ci-dessus, vous avez 15 articles " -"différents (3 couleurs, 5 tailles). Si la taille XXL n'existe que pour des " -"t-shirts rouges et bleus, vous pouvez désactiver la variante blanche." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:188 -msgid "" -"To do this, click on the **Variants** button, select the XXL, White T-shirt." -" From the product form, uncheck the **Active** box of the T-shirt White, " -"XXL." -msgstr "" -"Pour ce faire, cliquez sur le bouton **15 Variantes**, sélectionnez le " -"T-shirt XXL, Rouge. Dans la fiche de l'article, décochez la case **Actif**. " -"Faites de même pour l'article T-shirt XXL, Bleu." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:197 -msgid "" -"That deactivating a product is different than having an inventory of 0." -msgstr "" -"Cette désactivation d'article est une chose différente que d'avoir un " -"inventaire de 0." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:200 -msgid "Setting a price per variant" -msgstr "Définition d'un prix par variante" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:202 -msgid "" -"You can add a cost over the main price for some of the variants of a " -"product." -msgstr "" -"Vous pouvez ajouter un coût à ajouter au prix principal pour certaines " -"variantes d'un article." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:205 -msgid "" -"Once you have activated the variant option, you can add variants to your " -"products. To do so, go to the Sales module, open :menuselection:`Sales --> " -"Products` and click on the product you want to modify. Click on the " -"**Variant Prices** button to access the list of variant values." -msgstr "" -"Une fois que vous avez activé l'option de variante, vous pouvez ajouter des " -"variantes à vos articles. Pour ce faire, allez dans l'application de Ventes," -" puis dans :menuselection:`Ventes --> Articles` et cliquez sur l'article que" -" vous voulez modifier. Cliquez sur le bouton **Prix de la Variante** pour " -"accéder à la liste des valeurs de variante." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:213 -msgid "" -"Click on the variant name you wish to add a value to, to make the 3 fields " -"editable. In the **Attribute Price Extra** field, add the cost of the " -"variant that will be added to the original price." -msgstr "" -"Cliquez sur le nom de la variante à laquelle vous souhaitez ajouter une " -"valeur, pour rendre les 3 champs modifiables. Dans le champ **Supplément " -"pour cette caractéristique**, ajoutez le coût de la variante qui sera ajouté" -" au prix initial." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:220 -msgid "When you have entered all the extra values, click on **Save**." -msgstr "" -"Lorsque vous avez saisi toutes les valeurs supplémentaires, cliquez sur " -"**Sauvegarder**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:3 -msgid "What is the difference between warehouses and locations?" -msgstr "Quelle sont les différences entre des entrepôts et des emplacements ?" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:5 -msgid "" -"In Odoo, a **Warehouse** is the actual building/place in which your items " -"are stocked. You can setup multiple warehouses and create moves between " -"warehouses." -msgstr "" -"Dans Odoo, un **Entrepôt** est le bâtiment où vos articles sont stockés. " -"Vous pouvez configurer plusieurs entrepôts et créer des mouvements entre " -"entrepôts." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:9 -msgid "" -"A **Location**, is a specific space within your warehouse. It can be " -"considered as a sublocation of your warehouse, as a shelf, a floor, an " -"aisle, etc. Therefore, a location is part of one warehouse only and it is " -"not possible to link one location to multiple warehouses. You can configure " -"as much locations as you need under one warehouse." -msgstr "" -"Un **Emplacement** est un espace spécifique dans votre entrepôt. Il peut " -"être considéré comme une sous-localisation de votre entrepôt, ça peut être " -"une étagère, un plancher, une allée, etc... Par conséquent, un emplacement " -"fait partie d'un seul entrepôt et il est impossible de relier un emplacement" -" à plusieurs entrepôts. Vous pouvez configurer autant d'emplacements que " -"vous voulez dans un entrepôt." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:15 -msgid "There are 3 types of locations:" -msgstr "Il existe 3 types d'emplacements :" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:17 -msgid "" -"The **Physical Locations** are internal locations that are part of the " -"warehouses for which you are the owner. They can be the loading and " -"unloading area of your warehouse, a shelf or a department, etc." -msgstr "" -"Les **Emplacements Physiques** sont des emplacements internes qui font " -"partie des entrepôts que vous possédez. Ça peut être les zones de chargement" -" et de déchargement de votre entrepôt, une étagère, un service, etc..." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:21 -msgid "" -"The **Partner Locations** are spaces within a customer and/or vendor's " -"warehouse. They work the same way as Physical Locations with the only " -"difference being that you are not the owner of the warehouse." -msgstr "" -"Les **Emplacements des Partenaires** sont des espaces dans l'entrepôt d'un " -"client et/ou d'un fournisseur. Ils fonctionnent de la même manière que les " -"Emplacements Physiques, la seule différence étant que vous n'êtes pas " -"propriétaire de l'entrepôt." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:25 -msgid "" -"The **Virtual Locations** are places that do not exist, but in which " -"products can be placed when they are not physically in an inventory yet (or " -"anymore). They come in handy when you want to place lost products out of " -"your stock (in the **Inventory loss**), or when you want to take into " -"account products that are on their way to your warehouse (**Procurements**)." -msgstr "" -"Les **Emplacements Virtuels** sont des lieux qui n'existent pas, mais dans " -"lesquels les produits peuvent être placés quand ils ne sont pas encore (ou " -"plus) physiquement dans un stock. Ils sont utilisés lorsque vous voulez " -"placer des articles perdus hors de votre stock (dans la **Perte de stock**)," -" ou lorsque vous voulez prendre en compte des articles qui sont sur le " -"chemin de votre entrepôt (**Approvisionnement**) ." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:31 -msgid "" -"In Odoo, locations are structured hierarchically. You can structure your " -"locations as a tree, dependent on a parent-child relationship. This gives " -"you more detailed levels of analysis of your stock operations and the " -"organization of your warehouses." -msgstr "" -"Dans Odoo, les emplacements sont organisés hiérarchiquement. Vous pouvez " -"organiser vos emplacements comme un arbre, avec des relations parent-enfant." -" Cela vous donne des niveaux plus détaillés de l'analyse de vos opérations " -"de stock et de l'organisation de vos entrepôts." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:37 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:44 -msgid ":doc:`warehouse_creation`" -msgstr ":doc:`warehouse_creation`" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:38 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:48 -msgid ":doc:`location_creation`" -msgstr ":doc:`location_creation`" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:3 -msgid "How to create a new location?" -msgstr "Comment créer un nouvel emplacement ?" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:9 -msgid "Creating a new location" -msgstr "Création d'un nouvel emplacement" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:11 -msgid "" -"In order to be able to create new locations, you must allow the system to " -"manage multiple locations. In the **Inventory** module, open the menu " -":menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`. In the **Location & Warehouse**" -" section, tick the **Manage several locations per warehouse** box, then " -"click on **Apply**." -msgstr "" -"Pour pouvoir créer de nouveaux emplacements, vous devez permettre au système" -" de gérer plusieurs sites. Dans le module **Inventaire**, ouvrez le menu " -":menuselection:`Configuration --> Configuration`. Dans la section " -"**Emplacement & Entrepôt**, cochez la case **Gérer plusieurs emplacements " -"par entrepôt**, puis cliquez sur **Appliquer**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:20 -msgid "" -"In the **Inventory** module, open :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Warehouse Management --> Locations` In the Locations window, click on " -"**Create**." -msgstr "" -"Dans le module **Inventaire**, ouvrez :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Gestion d'entrepôt --> Emplacements` Dans la fenêtre Emplacements, cliquez " -"sur **Créer**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:24 -msgid "" -"Type the name of the location in the **Location Name** field, and select the" -" **Parent Location** in the list. The parent location can be a physical, " -"partner or virtual location, and you can add as many sub-locations as needed" -" to a location." -msgstr "" -"Saisissez le nom de l'emplacement dans le champ **Nom de l'emplacement**, et" -" sélectionnez l'**Emplacement Parent** dans la liste. L'emplacement parent " -"peut être un emplacement physique, un partenaire ou un emplacement virtuel, " -"et vous pouvez ajouter autant de sous-emplacements que nécessaire dans un " -"emplacement." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:29 -msgid "" -"You can also fill in the **Additional Information** fields and add a note to" -" describe your location." -msgstr "" -"Vous pouvez également remplir les champs **Information complémentaire** et " -"ajouter une note pour décrire votre emplacement." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:35 -msgid "When you are finished, click on **Save**." -msgstr "Lorsque vous avez terminé, cliquez sur **Sauvegarder**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:38 -msgid "" -"A warehouse also corresponds to a location. As the locations are " -"hierarchical, Odoo will create the parent location of the warehouse, " -"containing all the sublocations in it." -msgstr "" -"Un entrepôt correspond également à un emplacement. Comme les emplacements " -"sont hiérarchiques, Odoo va créer l'emplacement parent entrepôt, contenant " -"tous les sous-emplacements." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:43 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:47 -msgid ":doc:`difference_warehouse_location`" -msgstr ":doc:`difference_warehouse_location`" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:3 -msgid "How to create a new warehouse?" -msgstr "Comment créer un nouvel entrepôt ?" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:11 -msgid "" -"In order to be able to create a new warehouse, you must allow the system to " -"manage multiple locations. In the **Inventory** module, open the menu " -":menuselection:`Settings --> Configuration`. In the **Location & Warehouse**" -" section, tick the **Manage several locations per warehouse** box, then " -"click on **apply**." -msgstr "" -"Pour pouvoir créer de nouveaux entrepôts, vous devez permettre au système de" -" gérer plusieurs sites. Dans le module **Inventaire**, ouvrez le menu " -":menuselection:`Configuration --> Configuration`. Dans la section " -"**Emplacement & Entrepôt**, cochez la case **Gérer plusieurs emplacements " -"par entrepôt**, puis cliquez sur **Appliquer**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:20 -msgid "" -"Open the menu :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouse Management --> " -"Warehouses`" -msgstr "" -"Ouvrez :menuselection:`Configuration --> Gestion d'entrepôt --> Entrepôts`" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:22 -msgid "" -"In the warehouses screen, click on **Create**. A new screen appears, with 3 " -"fields :" -msgstr "" -"Dans l'écran des entrepôts, cliquez sur **Créer**. Un nouvel écran apparaît," -" avec 3 champs :" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:25 -msgid "In **Warehouse Name**, insert the full name of the warehouse." -msgstr "Dans **Nom de l'entrepôt**, insérez le nom complet de l'entrepôt." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:27 -msgid "" -"In the **Short Name** field, insert a 5-characters code for your warehouse. " -"Keep in mind that this code is the one that will appear in the lists, so " -"make sure you choose a name that is easy to understand and easy to enter." -msgstr "" -"Dans le champ **Nom court**, insérer un code à 5 caractères pour votre " -"entrepôt. Gardez à l'esprit que ce code est celui qui apparaîtra dans les " -"listes, alors assurez-vous de choisir un nom qui soit facile à comprendre et" -" à saisir." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:32 -msgid "" -"In the **Address** field, you can select an existing company or create one " -"on-the-go. Therefore, the address of your warehouse will be the same as the " -"one of the company you selected. You can also leave this field empty and " -"edit it afterwards." -msgstr "" -"Dans le champ **Adresse**, vous pouvez sélectionner une entreprise existante" -" ou en créer une à la volée. Ainsi, l'adresse de votre entrepôt sera la même" -" que celle de la société que vous avez sélectionnée. Vous pouvez aussi " -"laisser ce champ vide et le modifier ultérieurement." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:40 -msgid "Click on **Save** to finish configuring your new warehouse." -msgstr "" -"Cliquez sur **Sauvegarder** pour terminer la configuration de votre nouvel " -"entrepôt." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:43 -msgid "" -"When you create a warehouse, the system will create the necessary picking " -"types and main child locations for this main location in the background." -msgstr "" -"Lorsque vous créez un entrepôt, le système va autoamtiquement créer les " -"types de prélèvement nécessaires et les principaux emplacements enfants pour" -" cet emplacement principal." +#: ../../inventory/shipping.rst:3 +msgid "Shipping" +msgstr "Expédition" #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation.rst:3 msgid "Shipping Operations" @@ -8157,7 +5985,8 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:64 msgid "" -"The real shipping cost are computed when the delivery order is validated." +"The real shipping cost is computed when the delivery order is validated, you" +" can see the real cost in the chatter of the delivery order." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:70 @@ -8214,6 +6043,11 @@ msgid "" "you want to integrate :" msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:27 +#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:26 +msgid "Then click on **Apply**." +msgstr "" + #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:30 #: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:34 #: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:33 @@ -8282,11 +6116,6 @@ msgid "" "data**." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:68 -#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:90 -msgid "Product configuration" -msgstr "Configuration d'article" - #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:70 #: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:92 msgid "" @@ -8505,6 +6334,10 @@ msgid "" ":doc:`third_party_shipper`" msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:74 +msgid "Delivery process" +msgstr "Processus de livraison" + #: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:82 msgid "" "You can now choose the **Delivery Method** on your sale order. If you want " diff --git a/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po index fc34ad7d4..7e8e804f5 100644 --- a/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po +++ b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po @@ -4,22 +4,24 @@ # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # # Translators: -# e2f , 2018 -# Martin Trigaux, 2018 -# Nacim ABOURA , 2018 -# Jean-Louis Bodren , 2018 -# Laura Piraux , 2018 -# Cécile Collart , 2018 +# e2f , 2019 +# Nacim ABOURA , 2019 +# Jean-Louis Bodren , 2019 +# Laura Piraux , 2019 # Gunther Clauwaert , 2019 +# Cécile Collart , 2019 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Florian Hatat, 2019 +# Eloïse Stilmant , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 11.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-10-19 10:03+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2018-10-19 08:15+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: Gunther Clauwaert , 2019\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Eloïse Stilmant , 2019\n" "Language-Team: French (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/fr/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -31,68 +33,70 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Internet of Things (IoT)" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:3 +#: ../../iot/config.rst:3 +msgid "Configuration" +msgstr "Configuration" + +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:3 msgid "Connect an IoT Box to your database" -msgstr "Connecteer een IoT Box aan uw databank" +msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:5 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:5 msgid "Install the Internet of Things (IoT) App on your Odoo Database." -msgstr "Installeer de Internet of Things (IoT) App in uw Odoo Databank." +msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:10 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:10 msgid "Go in the IoT App and click on Connect on the IoT Boxes page." -msgstr "Ga naar de IoT App en klik op Connecteer met de IoT Boxes pagina." +msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:15 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:15 msgid "Follow the steps to connect your IoT Box." -msgstr "Volg de stappen om uw IoT Box te connecteren" +msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:21 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:21 msgid "Ethernet Connection" msgstr "Connexion Ethernet" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:23 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:23 msgid "" "Connect to the IoT Box all the devices that have to be connected with cables" " (ethernet, usb devices, etc.)." msgstr "" -"Connecteer aan de IoT Box alle apparaten die moeten worden verbonden met " -"kabels (ethernet, usb-apparaten, enz.)." -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:26 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:26 msgid "Power on the IoT Box." msgstr "Mettez la POSBox sous tension" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:28 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:28 msgid "Then click on the Scan button." -msgstr "Klik vervolgens op de knop Scannen." +msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:34 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:34 msgid "WiFi Connection" msgstr "Connexion WIFI" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:36 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:36 msgid "Power on the IoT Box" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:38 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:38 msgid "Copy the token" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:43 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:43 msgid "" "Connect to the IoT Box WiFi Network (make sure there is no ethernet cable " "plugged in your computer)." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:49 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:49 msgid "" "You will be redirected to the IoT Box Homepage (if it doesn't work, connect " "to the IP address of the box). Give a name to your IoT Box (not required) " "and paste the token, then click on next." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:57 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:57 msgid "" "If you are on Runbot, do not forget to add the -all or -base in the token " "(e.g. this token **http://375228-saas-11-5-iot-" @@ -100,105 +104,179 @@ msgid "" "**http://375228-saas-11-5-iot-f3f920-all.runbot16.odoo.com\\|4957098401**)." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:63 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:63 msgid "" "Choose the WiFi network you want to connect with (enter the password if " "there is one) and click on Submit. Wait a few seconds before being " "redirected to your database." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:70 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:70 msgid "You should now see the IoT Box." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:76 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:76 msgid "IoT Box Schema" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:3 +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:3 +msgid "Flashing your SD Card" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In some case, you may need to reflash your IoT Box’s SD Card to benefit from" +" our latest updates." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:9 +msgid "Updating your SD Card with Etcher" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:11 +msgid "" +"Go to Balena’s website and download `Etcher `__, " +"It’s a free and open-source utility used for burning image files. Install " +"and launch it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Now, download the latest image `here " +"`__, and extract it from the " +"zip file. Then, open *Etcher* and select the image. Select the drive to " +"flash (where your SD Card is) and click on *Flash*!." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:19 +msgid "" +"Now, your image will be automatically updated. You just have to wait 5 " +"minutes for it to finish." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:3 +msgid "IoT Box not found" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When using your IoT Box, a common issue you might encounter is that your box" +" is not found on your database. Fortunately, there are a few easy steps you " +"can follow to find your IoT box." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:10 +msgid "HTTPS Issues" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:12 +msgid "Your IoT Box is not found? You probably have https issues!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:14 +msgid "" +"To check it, go to your database and verify if your database address starts " +"with an https (like https://www.odoo.com). If this is the case, then you may" +" have problems with your IoT Box image. It should be version 18.12 or later." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:19 +msgid "" +"If your IoT Box image is from an earlier version, then you will have to " +"reflash the SD card of your IoT Box to update the image (the latest image " +"can be found `here `__)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:23 +msgid "" +"You can find the documentation about SD card flashing here (`here " +"`__)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:3 msgid "Use the IoT Box for the PoS" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:9 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:9 msgid "Prerequisites" msgstr "Prérequis" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:11 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:11 msgid "Before starting, make sure you have the following:" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:13 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:13 msgid "An IoT Box" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:15 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:15 msgid "A 2A Power adapter with pi 3 b+ 2.5 A" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:17 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:17 msgid "A computer or tablet with an up-to-date web browser" msgstr "Un ordinateur ou une tablette avec un navigateur web à jour" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:19 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:19 msgid "" "A running SaaS or Odoo instance with the Point of Sale and IoT apps " "installed" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:22 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:22 msgid "A local network setup with DHCP (this is the default setting)" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:24 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:24 msgid "" "An Epson USB TM-T20 Printer or another ESC/POS compatible printer " "(officially supported printers are listed at the `POS Hardware page " "`__)" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:28 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:28 msgid "A Honeywell Eclipse USB Barcode Scanner or another compatible scanner" msgstr "" "Un scanner code à barre USB Eclipse Honeywell ou tout autre scanner " "compatible" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:30 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:30 msgid "An Epson compatible cash drawer" msgstr "Un tiroir-caisse compatible Epson" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:32 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:32 msgid "An RJ45 Ethernet Cable (optional, WiFi is built in)" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:35 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:35 msgid "Set Up" msgstr "Configurer" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:37 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:37 msgid "" "To connect hardware to the PoS, the first step is to connect an IoT Box to " "your database. For this, follow this `documentation " "`__." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:44 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:44 msgid "Then, you have to connect the peripheral devices to your IoT Box." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:46 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:46 msgid "" "Officially supported hardware is listed on `the POS Hardware page " "`__, but other hardware" " might work as well." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:50 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:50 msgid "**Printer**: Connect an ESC/POS printer to a USB port and power it on." msgstr "" "**Imprimante**: Connectez une imprimante ESC/POS à un port USB et mettez la " "en marche." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:53 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:53 msgid "" "**Cash drawer**: The cash drawer should be connected to the printer with an " "RJ25 cable." @@ -206,7 +284,7 @@ msgstr "" "**Tiroir caisse**: Le tiroir caisse devrait être connecté à l'imprimante " "avec un cable RJ25." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:56 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:56 msgid "" "**Barcode scanner**: Connect your barcode scanner. In order for your barcode" " scanner to be compatible it must behave as a keyboard and must be " @@ -220,19 +298,19 @@ msgstr "" "barres par le caractère Entrer (keycode 28). Il s'agit le plus souvent de la" " configuration par défaut de votre scanner de code-barres." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:62 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:62 msgid "**Scale**: Connect your scale and power it on." msgstr "" "**Balance**: Connectez votre balance électronique et mettez la en marche." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:64 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:64 msgid "" "**Ethernet**: If you do not wish to use Wi-Fi, plug in the Ethernet cable. " "Make sure this will connect the IoT Box to the same network as your POS " "device." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:68 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:68 msgid "" "**Wi-Fi**: The current version of the IoT Box has Wi-Fi built in. Make sure " "not to plug in an Ethernet cable when booting, because all Wi-Fi " @@ -240,26 +318,26 @@ msgid "" "on boot." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:73 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:73 msgid "" "Once it's done, you can connect the IoT Box to your PoS. For this, go in " "Point of Sale > Configuration > PoS, tick the box \"IoT Box\" and select the" " IoT Box you want to connect with. Save the changes." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:77 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:77 msgid "Set up is done, you can launch a new PoS Session." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:80 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:80 msgid "Troubleshoot" msgstr "Problèmes" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:83 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:83 msgid "The PoS cannot connect to the IoT Box" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:85 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:85 msgid "" "The easiest way to make sure the IoT Box is properly set-up is to turn it on" " with the printer plugged in as it will print a receipt indicating any error" @@ -267,48 +345,48 @@ msgid "" "receipt is printed, check the following steps:" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:91 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:91 msgid "" "Make sure the IoT Box is powered on, indicated by a brightly lit red status " "LED." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:94 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:94 msgid "" "Make sure the IoT Box is ready, this is indicated by a brightly lit green " "status LED just next to the red power status LED. The IoT Box should be " "ready ~2 minutes after it is started." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:98 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:98 msgid "" "Make sure the IoT Box is connected to the same network as your POS device. " "Both the device and the IoT Box should be visible in the list of connected " "devices on your network router." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:102 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:102 msgid "" "If you specified the IoT Box's IP address in the configuration, make sure it" " corresponds to the ip address printed on the IoT Box's status receipt." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:106 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:106 msgid "Make sure that the POS is not loaded over HTTPS." msgstr "Assurez-vous que la page du PdV n'est pas chargé en HTTPS." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:108 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:108 msgid "" "A bug in Firefox's HTTP implementation might prevent the autodiscovery from " "working reliably. You could also manually set up the IoT Box's IP address in" " the POS configuration." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:113 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:113 msgid "The Barcode Scanner is not working" msgstr "Le scanner de code barre ne fonctionne pas correctement" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:115 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:115 msgid "" "The barcode scanner must be configured in US QWERTY and emit an Enter after " "each barcode. This is the default configuration of most barcode readers. " @@ -319,14 +397,14 @@ msgstr "" "la plupart des scanners. Vérifiez le manuel du scanner pour plus " "d'information." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:120 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:120 msgid "" "The IoT Box needs a 2A power supply to work with some barcode scanners. If " "you are not using the provided power supply, make sure the one you use has " "enough power." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:124 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:124 msgid "" "Some barcode scanners will need more than 2A and will not work, or will work" " unreliably, even with the provided power supply. In those case you can plug" @@ -336,28 +414,28 @@ msgstr "" "façon instable, même avec l'alimentation fournie. Dans ce cas, vous devrez " "utiliser une alimentation externe pour le scanner." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:129 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:129 msgid "" "Some poorly built barcode scanners do not advertise themselves as barcode " "scanners but as a usb keyboard instead, and will not be recognized by the " "IoT Box." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:134 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:134 msgid "The Barcode Scanner is not working reliably" msgstr "Le scanner de codes-barres ne fonctionne pas de manière fiable" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:136 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:136 msgid "" "Make sure that no more than one device with 'Scan via Proxy'/'Barcode " "Scanner' enabled are connected to the IoT Box at the same time." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:140 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:140 msgid "Printing the receipt takes too much time" msgstr "L'impression du reçu prend trop de temps" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:142 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:142 msgid "" "A small delay before the first print is expected, as the IoT Box will do " "some preprocessing to speed up the next printings. If you suffer delays " @@ -365,21 +443,21 @@ msgid "" "and the IoT Box." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:148 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:148 msgid "Some characters are not correctly printed on the receipt" msgstr "Certains caractères ne sont pas correctement imprimés sur le reçu" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:150 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:150 msgid "" "The IoT Box does not support all languages and characters. It currently " "supports Latin and Cyrillic based scripts, with basic Japanese support." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:155 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:155 msgid "The printer is offline" msgstr "L'imprimante est hors ligne" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:157 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:157 msgid "" "Make sure the printer is connected, powered, has enough paper and has its " "lid closed, and is not reporting an error. If the error persists, please " @@ -389,14 +467,385 @@ msgstr "" "suffisamment de papier, que son couvercle est fermé et qu'elle ne signale " "aucune erreur. Si l'erreur persiste, contactez le support technique." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:162 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:162 msgid "The cashdrawer does not open" msgstr "Le tiroir caisse n'ouvre pas" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:164 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:164 msgid "" "The cashdrawer should be connected to the printer and should be activated in" " the POS configuration." msgstr "" "Le tiroir-caisse doit être connecté à l'imprimante et doit être activé dans " "la configuration PdV." + +#: ../../iot/devices.rst:3 +msgid "Devices" +msgstr "Périphériques" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Camera" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When using your *IoT Box* in Odoo, you could need to use a camera. As it can" +" be done in a few steps, this device is really easy to configure. Then, you " +"can use it in your manufacturing process and link it to a control point. " +"Doing so will allow you to take pictures when you reach the chosen quality " +"control point." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:12 ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:13 +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:11 +msgid "Connection" +msgstr "Connexion" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:14 +msgid "" +"To connect the camera to the *IoT Box*, simply combine the two by cable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:18 +msgid "In some cases, a serial to USB adapter could be needed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:20 +msgid "" +"If your camera is a `*supported one* `__, there is no need to set up anything as it will be detected as " +"soon as it is connected." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:27 +msgid "" +"In some cases, you could need to restart the box and download your camera’s " +"drivers from the box. To do so, go to your *IoT Box Home Page* and click on " +"*drivers list*. Then, click on load drivers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:35 +msgid "Link a Camera to a Quality Control Point" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:38 ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:42 +msgid "With the Manufacturing app" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:40 +msgid "" +"In your *Quality app*, you can setup the device on a *Quality Control " +"Point*. Go to the *Control Points* menu, under *Quality Control* and open " +"the control point you want to link with the camera." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:44 +msgid "" +"Now, you can edit the control point and select the device from the dropdown " +"list. Now, hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:50 +msgid "" +"Then, your camera can be used with the picked *Control Point*. During the " +"manufacturing process, reaching the *Quality Control Point* you chose before" +" will allow you to take a picture." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Footswitch" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When working, it is always better to have your two hands available. Using " +"Odoo’s *IoT Box* and a footswitch will allow it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:8 +msgid "" +"In fact, you will be able to go from one screen to another by using your " +"foot and the footswitch. Really convenient, it can be configured in a few " +"steps." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Connecting the footswitch to the *IoT Box* is easy, you just have to combine" +" the two by cable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:19 +msgid "In some cases, a serial to USB adapter may be needed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:21 +msgid "" +"If your footswitch is a `supported one `__, there is no need to set up anything since it will be " +"automatically detected when connected." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:28 +msgid "" +"If it is not a supported one, you may need to restart the box and download " +"your footswitch’s drivers from the box. To do so, go to the *IoT Box Home " +"Page* and click on *drivers list*. Then, click on load drivers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:37 +msgid "Link a Footswitch to a Workcenter" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:39 +msgid "" +"To link the footswitch to an action, it needs to be configured on a " +"workcenter. Go to the workcenter you want to use the footswitch in and add " +"the device in the *IoT Triggers* tab. Then, you can link it to an action and" +" also add a key to trigger it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:47 +msgid "" +"Note that the one that is first in the list will be chosen. So, the order " +"matters! In the picture above, using the footswitch will, for example, " +"automatically skip the current part of the process you work on." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:52 +msgid "" +"When you are on the work order screen, a status button indicates if you are " +"correctly connected to the footswitch." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Measurement Tool" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:5 +msgid "" +"With Odoo’s *IoT Box*, it is possible to connect measurement tools to your " +"database. Find the list of supported devices here: `Supported devices " +"`__,." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:10 +msgid "Connect in USB" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:12 +msgid "" +"To add a device connected by USB, just plug the USB cable in the *IoT Box*, " +"restart the Box and the device should appear in your Odoo database." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:19 +msgid "" +"If the device is not found, make sure the drivers have well been loaded on " +"your IoT Box. For this, connect to the *IoT Box Homepage* and click on load " +"drivers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:27 +msgid "Connect in Bluetooth" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:29 +msgid "" +"Activate the Bluetooth on your device (see your device manual for further " +"explanation) and the IoT Box will automatically try to connect to the " +"device." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:33 +msgid "Here is an example of what it should look like:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:39 +msgid "Link a measurement tool to a quality control point" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:44 +msgid "" +"In your *Quality app*, you can setup a device on your *Quality Control " +"Points*. To do so, go to the *Control Points* menu, under *Quality Control* " +"and open the control point to which you want to assign a measurement tool." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:49 +msgid "" +"Now, you can edit the control point and choose the device from the dropdown " +"list. Then, hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:55 +msgid "" +"Now, your measurement tool is linked to the chosen *Control Point*. The " +"value, which needs to be changed manually, will be automatically updated " +"while the tool is being used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Printer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When using your *IoT Box* in Odoo, you could need to use a printer. Doing so" +" is easy and convenient as it can be done in a few steps. Then, you can use " +"it to print receipts, orders or even reports in different Odoo apps." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:13 +msgid "" +"To connect the printer to the *IoT Box*, you just have to combine the two by" +" cable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:17 +msgid "Sometimes, a serial to USB adapter may be needed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:19 +msgid "" +"If your printer is a `supported one `__, there is no need to set up anything because it will be " +"automatically detected as soon as it is connected." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:24 +msgid "The printer can take up to two minutes to appear in your devices list." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:29 +msgid "" +"In some cases, you may need to restart the box and download your printer’s " +"drivers from the box. To do so, go to the *IoT Box Home Page* and click on " +"*drivers list*. Then, click on load drivers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:37 +msgid "Link the Printer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:40 +msgid "To Work Orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:42 +msgid "" +"You can link *Work Orders* to printers via a *Quality Control Point* to " +"print labels for manufactured products." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:45 +msgid "" +"To do so, you need to create a *Quality Control Point* from the *Quality* " +"app. Then, you can select the correct manufacturing operation and the work " +"order operation. In type, choose *Print Label* and hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Now, each time you reach the quality control point for the chosen product, a" +" *Print Label* button will appear." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:60 +msgid "To Reports" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:62 +msgid "" +"You can also link a type of report to a certain printer. In the *IoT* app, " +"go to the *Devices* menu and select the printer you want to set up." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:69 +msgid "Now, go to the *Printer Reports* tab." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:74 +msgid "" +"Hit edit and then, click on *Add a line*. In the window that shows up, check" +" all the types of reports that should be linked to this printer. Click on " +"select and save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:81 +msgid "" +"Now, each time you click on *Print* in the control panel, instead of " +"downloading a PDF, it will send it to the selected printer and automatically" +" print it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:86 +msgid "Print Receipts from the PoS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:88 +msgid "" +"You can link a printer to your *Point of Sale* app so you can print receipts" +" directly from your *PoS*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:91 +msgid "" +"Doing so is really easy. Go to your *Point of Sale* app and open your *PoS* " +"settings, under *Configuration*. There, click on *Edit* and check the *IoT " +"Box* feature. Then, enable the *Receipt Printer*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:98 +msgid "" +"Now, on your *PoS* view, you will be able to print different kinds of " +"tickets: **receipts**, **sale details** and **bills**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:101 +msgid "" +"For the receipt, it will be printed once the order is validated. The process" +" is automated when you enable the feature in your *PoS*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:104 +msgid "" +"Sales details can be printed by clicking on the printer icon on the navbar " +"at the top of the *PoS*. It will print the details of the sales of the " +"current day." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:111 +msgid "" +"As for the bill, it is only available in restaurant mode. In your restaurant" +" settings, activate bills and a *Bill* button will appear in the left panel." +" Click on it and it will print the bill." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:119 +msgid "Print Orders in the kitchen" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:121 +msgid "In restaurant mode, you can send order tickets to the kitchen." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:123 +msgid "" +"To do so, go to the *PoS* app and open your *PoS* settings. Then, tick " +"*Order Printer*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:129 +msgid "" +"Now, go to the *Printers* menu. Hit create and select the *IoT Box* with all" +" the categories of product that should be printed in the *Printer Product " +"Categories* field." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:136 +msgid "" +"In the *PoS*, when you add or remove a product from one of the selected " +"categories, the button *Order* will be green. If you click on it, a ticket " +"will be printed." +msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po index f8c351628..4e038d110 100644 --- a/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po +++ b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po @@ -4,19 +4,18 @@ # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # # Translators: -# Martin Trigaux, 2018 -# Jérôme Tanché , 2018 -# Xavier Belmere , 2018 -# Renaud de Colombel , 2019 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Jérôme Tanché , 2019 +# thomas quertinmont , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 11.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-10-19 10:03+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2018-10-19 08:15+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: Renaud de Colombel , 2019\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: thomas quertinmont , 2019\n" "Language-Team: French (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/fr/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -32,206 +31,281 @@ msgstr "Fabrication" msgid "Manufacturing Management" msgstr "" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:3 +msgid "Using an alternative Work Center" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:5 +msgid "" +"For many manufacturing companies, a common issue is to have to manufacture, " +"at the same time, several products usually produced at the same work center." +" If in practice, employees can manufacture the goods at another work center," +" it is not that simple." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:10 +msgid "" +"You need to keep track of the job: which work center has been used and when," +" so you can schedule maintenance efficiently. With Odoo, you can configure " +"it so you can keep tracking manufacturing orders and your employees have an " +"alternative work center to use." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:15 +msgid "" +"This way, your process becomes more efficient, and less non-productive time " +"will be noticed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:20 +msgid "Configure your Work Centers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:22 +msgid "" +"The first thing to do is to go to the *Manufacturing* app settings. Then, " +"enable the *Work Orders* feature and hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:30 +msgid "" +"Now, go to the *Work Centers* menu under *Master Data* and create two new " +"work centers. Add the second work centers as an alternative to the first and" +" vice versa." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:39 +msgid "" +"The next step is to create your *routing*. Add your work center and an " +"operation to it before saving." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:47 +msgid "" +"Then, you can create your *Bill of Materials* and add components and routing" +" to it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:56 +msgid "Create your Work Orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:58 +msgid "" +"Now that everything is configured, you can create your *Work Orders*. Go to " +"the *Manufacturing Orders* menu and hit *Create*. There, add your product " +"and plan it. In the *Work Orders* list, you can find it ready to be " +"assembled." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:68 +msgid "" +"Each new *Work Order*, which will be created before the end of the first " +"one, will be scheduled at the alternative work center you configured." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:78 +msgid "" +"Keep in mind that, if you add time after production to your work center, you" +" may have work orders scheduled for your alternative work center even if the" +" usual one is free." +msgstr "" + #: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:3 -msgid "How to create a Bill of Materials" +msgid "Create Bills of Materials" msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:5 msgid "" -"A bill of materials (BoM) is a document that describes the component " -"products, the quantity of each component, and the process required to " -"manufacture a product, including a routing and individual steps." +"A *Bill of Materials* is a document defining the quantity of each component " +"required to manufacture a finished product. It also includes the routing and" +" individual steps of the manufacturing process." msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:9 msgid "" -"In Odoo, each product may have multiple BoMs associated with it, but a BoM " -"can only be associated with a single product. A single BoM can, however, " -"describe multiple variants of the same product." +"With Odoo, you can link multiple BoMs to each product and use it to describe" +" multiple variants of them. Each BoM will, yet, be associated with one " +"product only." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:14 -msgid "Setting up a Basic BoM" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:16 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:13 msgid "" -"If you choose to manage your manufacturing operations using manufacturing " -"orders only, you will define basic bills of materials without routings." +"This feature will help optimize your manufacturing process while saving you " +"time." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:17 +msgid "Setting up a BoM" msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:19 msgid "" -"Before creating your first bill of materials, you will need to create a " -"product and at least one component (components are considered products in " -"Odoo). You can do so from :menuselection:`Master Data --> Products`, or on " -"the fly from the relevant fields on the BoM form. Review the Inventory " -"chapter for more information about configuring products. Once you have " -"created a product and at least one component, select them from the relevant " -"dropdown menus to add them to your bill of materials. A new bill of " -"materials can be created from :menuselection:`Master Data --> Bills of " -"Materials`, or using the button on the top of the product form." +"You can use BoMs without routings. You will use this if you choose to manage" +" your manufacturing operations using manufacturing orders only. In other " +"words, you choose to realize your manufacturing process in one step and do " +"not track the steps the product goes through." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:24 +msgid "" +"Before creating your *BoM*, you have to create the product using the *BoM* " +"and, at least, one of the components. Go to the *Master Data* menu > " +"*Products* and create both the finished product and the component." msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:29 msgid "" -"Under the **Miscellaneous** tab, you can fill additional fields. " -"**Sequence** defines the order in which your BoMs will be selected for " -"production orders, with lower numbers having higher priority. **Version** " -"allows you to track changes to your BoM over time." +"Once done, go to the *Bills of Materials* menu under *Master Data*. Now, " +"create it. Choose the product from the dropdown menu and add your components" +" and the quantity. In this case, keep the default *BoM* type, which is " +"*Manufacture this Product*." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:35 -msgid "Adding a Routing to a BoM" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:38 +msgid "Using the same BoM to describe Variants" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:37 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:40 msgid "" -"A routing defines a series of operations required to manufacture a product " -"and the work center at which each operation is performed. A routing may be " -"added to multiple BoMs, though a BoM may only have one routing. For more " -"information about configuring routings, review the chapter on routings." +"As said above, you can use *BoM* for *Product Variants*. It is basically the" +" same as for the standard product." msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:43 msgid "" -"After enabling routings from :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`, " -"you will be able to add a routing to a bill of materials by selecting a " -"routing from the dropdown list or creating one on the fly." +"If your *BoM* is for one variant only, then specify which one in the " +"*Product Variant* field. If not, specify the variant it is consumed for on " +"each component line. You can add several variants for each component." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:47 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:52 +msgid "Adding a routing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:54 msgid "" -"You may define the work operation or step in which each component is " -"consumed using the field, **Consumed in Operation** under the **Components**" -" tab. Similarly, you can define the operation at which the product will be " -"produced under the **Miscellaneous** tab using the field **Produced at " -"Operation**. If this field is left blank, the products will be " -"consumed/produced at the final operation in the routing." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:58 -msgid "Adding Byproducts to a BoM" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:60 -msgid "" -"In Odoo, a byproduct is any product produced by a BoM in addition to the " -"primary product." +"You can add routing to your *BoM*. You will do this if you need to define a " +"series of operations required by your manufacturing process. To use it, " +"enable the *Work Orders* feature in the *Manufacturing* app settings." msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:63 msgid "" -"To add byproducts to a BoM, you will first need to enable them from " -":menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`." +"Each *BoM* can have only one routing while each routing can be used multiple" +" times." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:69 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:66 msgid "" -"Once byproducts are enabled, you can add them to your bills of materials " -"under the **Byproducts** tab of the bill of materials. You can add any " -"product or products as byproducts. Byproducts are produced in the same step " -"of the routing as the primary product of the BoM." +"Now that you have created your routing, add it to your *BoM*. You can select" +" when, in the work operations, your components are consumed with the " +"dropdown menu." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:78 -msgid "Setting up a BoM for a Product With Sub-Assemblies" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:74 +msgid "Adding By-Products" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:80 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:5 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:76 msgid "" -"A subassembly is a manufactured product which is intended to be used as a " -"component of another manufactured product. You may wish to employ sub-" -"assemblies to simplify a complex BoM, to more accurately represent your " -"manufacturing flow, or to use the same subassembly in multiple BoMs. A BoM " -"that employs subassemblies is often referred to as a multi-level BoM." +"In Odoo, a *by-product* is any product produced by a *BoM* in addition to " +"the primary product." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:87 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:12 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:79 msgid "" -"Multi-level bills of materials in Odoo are accomplished by creating a top-" -"level BoM and subassembly BoMs. Next, the procurement route of the " -"subassembly product is defined. This ensures that every time a manufacturing" -" order for the top-level product is created, a manufacturing order for each " -"subassembly is created as well." +"To add *by-products* to a *BoM*, you will first need to enable them from the" +" *Manufacturing* app settings." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:94 -msgid "Configure the Top-Level Product BoM" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:96 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:21 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:85 msgid "" -"To configure a multi-level BoM, create the top-level product and its BoM. " -"Include any subassemblies in the list of components. Create a BoM for each " -"subassembly as you would for any product." +"Once the feature is enabled, you can add your *By-Products* to your *BoMs*. " +"You can add as many *By-Products* as you want. Just keep in mind that you " +"need to register during which operation your by-product is produced." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:104 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:29 -msgid "Configure the Subassembly Product Data" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:3 +msgid "Use flexible components consumption" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:106 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:31 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:5 msgid "" -"On the product form of the subassembly, you must select the routes " -"**Manufacture** and **Make To Order**. The **Manufacture** route takes " -"precedence over the **Buy** route, so selecting the latter will have no " -"effect." +"Sometimes, you might need more components than usual to manufacture a " +"product. Let’s say that you produce a desk combination of 4 desks and two " +"chairs but your customer asks you one more desk. Alright, you can do that. " +"But you will need to register it!" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:114 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:39 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:10 msgid "" -"If you would like to be able to purchase the subassembly in addition to " -"manufacturing it, select **Can be Purchased**. All other fields on the " -"subassembly product form may be configured according to your preference." +"In case this happens, Odoo has the *flexible components consumption* feature" +" available. If you enable it, you will be able to consume as many components" +" as needed and it will make you save time in the registration of your items " +"consumption." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:120 -msgid "Using a Single BoM to Describe Several Variants of a Single Product" -msgstr "" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:16 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:31 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:66 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:9 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:9 +msgid "Configuration" +msgstr "Configuration" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:122 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:5 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:18 msgid "" -"Odoo allows you to use one bill of materials for multiple variants of the " -"same product. Simply enable variants from :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`." +"Using flexible component consumption is easy and can be done in a few steps." +" All you need is a *BoM* and a *Quality Control Point*. Therefore, you will " +"need to activate the feature *Quality* in the *MRP* app settings." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:129 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:12 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:23 msgid "" -"You will then be able to specify which component lines are to be used in the" -" manufacture of each product variant. You may specify multiple variants for " -"each line. If no variant is specified, the line will be used for all " -"variants." +"First, open the *BoM* you want to use for flexible component consumption and" +" edit it. In the *Miscellaneous* tab, choose *Flexible* as the consumption " +"type. Then, save." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:134 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:17 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:30 msgid "" -"When defining variant BoMs on a line-item-basis, the **Product Variant** " -"field in the main section of the BoM should be left blank. This field is " -"used when creating a BoM for one variant of a product only." +"Now, in the *Quality* app, open the *Control Point* menu, under *Quality " +"Control* and create a new *Quality Control Point*. Choose your product, your" +" operation and work order operation. Then, choose *Register Consumed " +"Materials* as type." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:38 +msgid "" +"Next, go back to your *Manufacturing* app and create a *Manufacturing " +"order*. Choose the product for which you have created the flexible *BoM*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:42 +msgid "" +"Then, confirm it and launch the process step. While processing, you will " +"have the possibility to consume more components than expected in the *BoM*. " +"To do so, click on *Continue Consumption*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:49 +msgid "" +"When the job is over, you will find a summary of your component consumption " +"in the *Finished Steps* tab of your work order." msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:3 -msgid "How to Sell a Set of Products as a Kit" +msgid "Sell sets of products as kits" msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:5 msgid "" "A *kit* is a set of components that are delivered without first being " -"assembled or mixed. Kits are described in Odoo using *bills of materials*. " -"There are two basic ways to configure kits, depending on how stock of the " -"kit product is to be managed. In either case, both the Inventory and " -"Manufacturing apps must be installed." +"assembled or mixed. *Kits* are described in Odoo using *Bills of Materials*." +" There are two basic ways to configure *kits*, depending on how the stock of" +" the kit product is to be managed. In either case, both the *Inventory* and " +"*Manufacturing* apps must be installed." msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:12 @@ -240,176 +314,583 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:14 msgid "" -"If you would like to assemble kits as they are ordered, managing stock of " -"the kit *components* only, you will use a Kit BoM without a manufacturing " -"step." +"If you want to assemble kits as they are ordered, managing stock of the kit " +"components only, you will use a *Kit BoM* without a manufacturing step." msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:18 msgid "" -"A product using a Kit BoM will appear as a single line item on a quotation " -"and sales order, but will generate a delivery order with one line item for " -"each of the components of the kit. In the examples below, the image at left " -"shows a sales order for the kit \"Custom Computer Kit\", while the image at " -"right shows the corresponding delivery order." +"A product using a *Kit BoM* will appear as a single line item on a quotation" +" and sales order, but will generate a delivery order with one line item for " +"each of the components of the kit. In the examples below, the first image " +"shows a sales order for the kit *Custom Computer Kit*, while the second " +"image shows the corresponding delivery order." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:24 -msgid "|image0|\\ |image1|" -msgstr "|image0|\\ |image1|" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:27 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:62 -msgid "Configuration" -msgstr "Configuration" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:29 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:33 msgid "" -"From the **Products** menu in either the Inventory or Manufacturing app, " -"create each component product as you would any other product, then create " -"the top-level, or kit product. The kit product should have only the route " -"**Manufacture** set. Because you cannot track the stock of kit products, the" -" Product Type should be set to **Consumable**. Because a kit product cannot " -"be purchased, **Can be Purchased** should be unchecked." +"From the *Products menu* in either the *Inventory* or *Manufacturing* app, " +"create each component product as you would with any other product, then " +"create the top-level, or kit product. The kit product should have only the " +"*route Manufacture* set, in the *Inventory tab*. Because you cannot track " +"the stock of kit products, the *Product Type* should be set to Consumable. " +"Because a kit product cannot be purchased, then, *Can be Purchased* should " +"be unchecked." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:37 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:41 msgid "" "All other parameters on the kit product may be modified according to your " -"preference. The component products require no special configuration." +"preference. The component products require no particular configuration." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:44 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:48 msgid "" -"Once the products are configured, create a bill of materials for the kit " -"product. Add each component and its quantity. Select the BoM Type **Ship " -"this product as a set of components**. All other options may be left with " -"their default values." +"Once the products are configured, create a *bill of materials* for the kit " +"product. Add each component and its quantity. Select the *BoM Type Ship this" +" product as a set of components*. All other options may be left with their " +"default values." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:53 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:57 msgid "Manage Stock of Kit Product and Component Products" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:55 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:59 msgid "" -"If you would like to manage stock of the top-level kit product, you will use" -" a standard BoM with a manufacturing step instead of a Kit BoM. When using a" -" standard BoM to assemble kits, a manufacturing order will be created. The " -"manufacturing order must be registered as completed before the kit product " -"will appear in your stock." +"If you want to manage stock of the *top-level kit product*, you will use a " +"standard *BoM* with a manufacturing step instead of a *Kit BoM*. When using " +"a standard BoM to assemble kits, a *manufacturing order* will be created. " +"The *manufacturing order* must be registered as completed before the kit " +"product will appear in your stock." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:64 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:68 msgid "" -"On the kit product, select the route **Manufacture**. You may also select " -"**Make to Order**, which will create a manufacturing order whenever a sales " -"order is confirmed. Select the product type **Stockable Product** to enable " +"On the kit product, select the *route Manufacture*. You may also select " +"*Make to Order*, which will create a *manufacturing order* whenever a sales " +"order is confirmed. Select the product type *Storable Product* to enable " "stock management." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:72 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:76 msgid "" -"When you create the bill of materials, select the BoM Type **Manufacture " -"this product**. The assembly of the kit will be described by a manufacturing" -" order rather than a packing operation." +"When you create the *bill of materials*, select the BoM Type *Manufacture " +"this product*. The assembly of the kit will be described by a *manufacturing" +" order* rather than a packing operation." msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:3 -msgid "How to process a manufacturing order" +msgid "Process Manufacturing Orders" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:6 -msgid "Introduction" -msgstr "Introduction" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:8 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:5 msgid "" -"There are two basic ways to manage manufacturing in Odoo. The first way " -"manages work with one document only. This document is the **manufacturing " -"order**. The second way uses additional documents to give you more precise " -"control over the manufacturing process. In this way, **Manufacturing " -"orders** are divided into one or more steps defined by **work orders**, " -"performed in an order defined by **routings**." +"In Odoo, you can manage your manufacturing process in two different ways. " +"You can work with one document, or decide to have more information and " +"control over it." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:17 -msgid "How to manage manufacturing without routings" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:9 +msgid "" +"In the first case, Odoo makes things easier and helps you manage work with " +"one document only: the manufacturing order. No complex steps during the " +"process, you just have to schedule the job and record the production." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:14 +msgid "" +"But, if you need more control, you can use additional documents (steps) to " +"your manufacturing process. This way, *Manufacturing Orders* are divided " +"into one or more steps defined by *Work Orders* and performed in a sequence " +"defined by *routings*." msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:19 msgid "" -"You will most likely use manufacturing orders without routings if all the " -"work to produce your product is performed in one place, by one person, in " -"one step, and/or you do not need the level of granular control afforded by " -"work orders and routings." +"Using Odoo will allow you to precisely schedule the job, analyze your " +"efficiency but also have ease when realizing each step of your manufacturing" +" process." msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:24 -msgid "" -"Managing your operations in this way is the default behavior in Odoo. There " -"are two basic phases from planning to production:" +msgid "Manage Manufacturing Without Routings" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:27 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:52 -msgid "Create manufacturing orders" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:26 +msgid "" +"If your manufacturing process is limited to one place, one person and one " +"step, you will probably use manufacturing orders without routings." msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:29 -msgid "Record Production" -msgstr "Enregistrer la production" +msgid "" +"In Odoo, it is the default behavior. If work this way, there are two basic " +"phases from planning to production:" +msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:32 -msgid "How to manage manufacturing with routings and work orders" +msgid "Create a manufacturing order" msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:34 +msgid "Record the production" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:37 +msgid "Manage Manufacturing with Routings and Work Centers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:39 msgid "" -"To use work orders and routings, you will need to enable the option **Manage" -" production by work orders** From :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`. You will then be able to add routings to bills of materials, and " -"configure some additional related fields. You will also be able to create " -"**work centers**, the locations at which work orders are performed." +"To use *Work Centers* and *Routings*, you will need to enable the *Work " +"Orders* feature. To do so, go to the *Manufacturing* app settings." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:41 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:46 msgid "" -"When manufacturing with routings and work orders, each work order is " -"scheduled individually. You will also have access to time and capacity " -"planning, and reports on costing and efficiency on a work center level." +"Now, you can add routings to *BoMs* and configure your operations taking " +"place at different *work centers*. The *Work Centers* are the locations at " +"which work orders are performed." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:45 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:53 msgid "" -"Manufacturing using routings can be broken down into several steps. When " -"configuring your BoM, you will need to add a routing defining the component " -"work orders. After planning the manufacturing order, you will have the added" -" step of scheduling work orders." +"When manufacturing this way, each *Work Order* is scheduled individually. " +"You will also have access to time and capacity planning, as well as reports " +"on costing and efficiency for each *Work Center*." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:50 -msgid "The workflow is thus divided into three basic phases, as follows:" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:60 +msgid "Thus, the workflow is divided into three basic phases:" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:54 -msgid "Schedule the associated work orders." +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:62 +msgid "Create the manufacturing order" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:56 -msgid "Perform the scheduled work and record production." +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:67 +msgid "Schedule the associated work orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:72 +msgid "Perform the scheduled work and record production" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:3 +msgid "Plan Work Orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In some cases, companies need to schedule their work orders. Doing so, they " +"can organize the work for the whole day and be sure everything goes well. It" +" helps to avoid scheduling multiple work orders at the same time when you " +"don’t have the capacity to do so." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:10 +msgid "" +"With Odoo, companies can schedule the planned start date for their " +"manufacturing orders. No possible duplication, no potential issues with the " +"planning. And, if you plan two work orders at the same work center, at the " +"same hour, the second one will be scheduled right after the first one, " +"avoiding work superposition." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:17 +msgid "Create the Work Orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:19 +msgid "" +"The first thing you need to do is to open the *Manufacturing* app. Then, Go " +"to the settings and enable the *Work Orders* feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:25 +msgid "" +"Now, go to the *Manufacturing Orders* menu and hit *Create*. Choose your " +"product and add a *Planned Start Date*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:32 +msgid "" +"The “Deadline Start” field is informative. It shows you until when you can " +"launch the manufacturing order to fulfill the initial demand." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:35 +msgid "" +"Mark your *Manufacturing Order* as todo and plan it. By going to the " +"*Planning* menu, you can access to the scheduled orders. Here is the one we " +"just created:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:43 +msgid "" +"If you plan two work orders at the same hour, the second one will be " +"scheduled after the first one if the jobs need to be done at the same work " +"center. The start date will, then, be automatically updated considering the " +"first free slot on the work center." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:48 +msgid "" +"If you overrun the planned date and begin the job later, you will have a " +"track of it in the *Time Tracking* tab of your work order." msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:3 msgid "How to manage BoMs for product variants" msgstr "" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Odoo allows you to use one bill of materials for multiple variants of the " +"same product. Simply enable variants from :menuselection:`Configuration --> " +"Settings`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:12 +msgid "" +"You will then be able to specify which component lines are to be used in the" +" manufacture of each product variant. You may specify multiple variants for " +"each line. If no variant is specified, the line will be used for all " +"variants." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:17 +msgid "" +"When defining variant BoMs on a line-item-basis, the **Product Variant** " +"field in the main section of the BoM should be left blank. This field is " +"used when creating a BoM for one variant of a product only." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:3 +msgid "Set routings on kit Bills of materials" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:5 +msgid "" +"It often happens that you want to use kit BoM’s within manufactured product " +"BoM’s in order to lighten the list of components for this manufactured " +"product. When doing so, you would like to have the possibility to specify, " +"for each kit component, in which operation they are consumed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:11 +msgid "" +"We will see the three use cases that you can face in these kinds of " +"configurations." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:15 +msgid "Finished Product & Kit Component have the same Routing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:18 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:63 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:107 +msgid "Create BoM for the Finished Product" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:20 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:65 +msgid "" +"Create a manufactured BoM for the finished product which includes a kit " +"component. Set a routing on your BoM, for example, *Assemble Furniture*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:28 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:73 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:117 +msgid "Create a Kit BoM for the Kit Component" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:30 +msgid "" +"Update the kit component to define its BoM. Make sure that the routing which" +" is set on this BoM is the same one than on the Finished Product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:36 +msgid "" +"You can define the operations in which the kit components are used directly " +"in the BoM of the kit." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:40 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:84 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:127 +msgid "Manufacturing Order" +msgstr "Ordre de fabrication" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:42 +msgid "" +"In the list of components, the kit is split. Two work orders are created as " +"we have two operations defined in the *Assemble Furniture* routing. The " +"components of the kits are well consumed in the operations defined in the " +"kit BoM." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:57 +msgid "Finished Product & Kit Component haven’t the same Routing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:60 +msgid "Kit Consumption set on Finished Product BoM" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:75 +msgid "" +"Update the kit component to define its BoM. In this use case, the routing " +"which is set on this Kit BoM is different than the one of the Finished " +"Product. Specify the operations at which the kit components are consumed in " +"this BoM." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:86 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:129 +msgid "" +"When the manufacturing order is created for the Manufactured product, the " +"kit is split among its components. When the manufacturing order is planned, " +"three work orders are created in our case, one coming from the routing of " +"the manufactured products, the two other ones coming from the routing of the" +" kit BoM." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:95 +msgid "The components are all consumed during their respective operations." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:104 +msgid "Kit Consumption set on Kit BoM" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:109 +msgid "" +"Create a manufactured BoM for the finished product which includes a kit " +"component. Set a routing on your BoM, for example, *Assemble Furniture*. " +"Precise the consumption of the components on this BoM." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:119 +msgid "" +"Update the kit component to define its BoM. In this use case, the routing " +"which is set on this Kit BoM is different than the one of the Finished " +"Product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:138 +msgid "" +"All the components of the kits are consumed during the first operation. The " +"last component is consumed during the second operation." +msgstr "" + #: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:3 -msgid "How to manage semi-finished products" +msgid "Manage semi-finished products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In Odoo, you can use subassembly products to simplify a complex *Bill of " +"Materials* or to represent your manufacturing flow more accurately. A " +"*subassembly product* is a manufactured product that is used as a component " +"to make another one." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:10 +msgid "" +"A *BoM* that employs *subassemblies* is referred to as a multi-level BoM. " +"Those are accomplished by creating a *top-level BoM* and *subassembly ones*." +" This process requires a route that will ensure that every time a " +"manufacturing order for the top-level product is created, another one will " +"be for subassemblies." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:17 +msgid "Configure the Subassembly Product" msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:19 -msgid "Configure the Top -Level Product BoM" +msgid "" +"To configure a *multi-level BoM*, you will need a top-level product but also" +" its subassemblies. The first step is to create a product form for each of " +"the subassemblies. Select the routes *Manufacture* and *Replenish on Order*." +" Now, hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:27 +msgid "" +"In the *Bill of Materials* menu, under *Master Data*, create a new *Bill of " +"Materials*. Choose the product you just created and add its components." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:35 +msgid "Configure the Main BoM" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:37 +msgid "" +"Now, you can configure the top-level product and its *BoM*. Include any " +"subassemblies in the list of components." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:43 +msgid "" +"Now, each time you will plan a manufacturing order for the top-level " +"product, a manufacturing order will be created for the subassembly one. " +"Then, you will have to manufacture the subassembly in order to make it " +"available before manufacturing the finished product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:3 +msgid "Subcontract the manufacturing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Some businesses subcontract the production of some finished products through" +" subcontractors. This can be easily managed through Odoo." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:11 +msgid "" +"Go to the *Manufacturing app > Configuration > Settings* and tick the box " +"*Subcontracting*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:17 +msgid "" +"You can now define subcontracted *Bill of Materials*. Therefore, you need to" +" go to *Manufacturing > Master Data > Bill of Materials* and hit *Create*. " +"In this *BoM*, list the components which will be used by the subcontractor " +"to manufacture the subcontracted finished product. Specify that the *BoM* " +"type is *Subcontracting*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:22 +msgid "You can also define subcontractors on the BoM." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:24 +msgid "If no subcontractor is set, the BoM can be used by any subcontractor" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:26 +msgid "If some are set, the BoM can only be used for those subcontractors" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:32 +msgid "Receive or buy a subcontracted product" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:34 +msgid "You have two options to trigger the subcontracting of a product:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:36 +msgid "" +"**Option A**: You can buy the subcontracted product from your subcontractor" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:38 +msgid "**Option B**: You can directly receive the subcontracted product" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:40 +msgid "Let’s start with option A (option B is just a simpler version of it)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:42 +msgid "" +"Create a new purchase order. The vendor must be a subcontractor. The unit " +"price should be the cost you are paying to the subcontractor for the " +"subcontracting (thus, it’s not necessarily the total cost of the " +"subcontracted product)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:50 +msgid "" +"The validation of the purchase order automatically creates the receipt. " +"Whenever you receive the product, you can validate the receipt. The " +"following stock moves are created:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:54 +msgid "For the components" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:56 +msgid "From Subcontracting To Production" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:58 +msgid "For the subcontracted product" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:60 +msgid "From Production to Subcontracting" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:62 +msgid "From Subcontracting to Stock" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:64 +msgid "" +"The *Subcontracting Location* represents the place where the products are at" +" your subcontractor’s warehouse. It is configured as an internal location, " +"the components that are sent to the subcontractor are still valued in your " +"stock." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:69 +msgid "" +"For option B, you can simply create the receipt manually with a partner of " +"type subcontractor defined on it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:73 +msgid "Resupply the subcontractor with the components" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:75 +msgid "" +"There are 3 ways to manage the resupply of your subcontractor with the " +"components:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:80 +msgid "**Manually**: You create a delivery order in which you set the" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:79 +msgid "subcontractor as a partner and you choose the components to deliver." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:89 +msgid "**With reordering rules**: You can define a *reordering rule*" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:86 +msgid "" +"on the *Subcontracting location* to ensure that they are always enough " +"components sent to your subcontractors. When the reordering rule is " +"triggered, a delivery order is created for the product is automatically " +"created." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:97 +msgid "**On order**: You can also deliver the components to your" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:95 +msgid "" +"subcontractors each time you order a subcontracted product. For this, you " +"need to tick the route *Resupply Subcontractor on Order* on the wanted " +"components." msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/unbuild.rst:3 @@ -470,6 +951,163 @@ msgid "" "BoM back in stock." msgstr "" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:3 +msgid "Use the Master Production Schedule" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:5 +msgid "" +"The Master Production Schedule (MPS) is a valuable tool to plan your " +"production based on your demand forecast." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:11 +msgid "" +"Go to the *Manufacturing app > Configuration > Settings* and activate the " +"Master Production Schedule feature before hitting save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:18 +msgid "" +"In the manufacturing settings, you can define the time range of your MPS " +"(month/week/day) and the number of periods you want to display." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:20 +msgid "" +"Now, go in *Planning > Master Production Schedule* and click on add a " +"product. You can now define your safety stock target (= the stock you want " +"to have on hand at the end of the period) and the minimum and maximum " +"quantities to replenish." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:29 +msgid "" +"The products are ordered in the MPS based on their sequence. You can " +"rearrange that sequence by going on the list of your products and reorganize" +" them with drag and drop." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:36 +msgid "" +"In the MPS view, you can decide which information you would like to show by " +"clicking on *rows*. Some fields can be added to the view, such as *Actual " +"demand*, which will show which quantity of products has already been ordered" +" for the period, or *Available to Promise*, which allows you to know what " +"can still be sold during the period (what you plan to replenish - what is " +"already sold during the period). You can also decide to hide some " +"information if it isn’t necessary." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:48 +msgid "Estimate your demand and launch replenishment" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:50 +msgid "" +"The next step is to estimate the demand for the period. This estimation " +"should be entered in the row *Demand Forecast*. You can easily, at any time," +" compare the demand forecast with the actual demand (= confirmed sales). The" +" demand forecast for a finished product will impact the indirect demand for " +"its components." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:59 +msgid "" +"Then, the quantity to replenish for the different periods will be " +"automatically computed. The replenishments you are supposed to launch based " +"on your lead times (vendor lead time or manufacturing lead time) are " +"displayed in green. You can now launch the replenishment by clicking on the " +"replenish button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:65 +msgid "" +"Depending on the configuration of the product (buy vs. manufacture), " +"requests for quotations or manufacturing orders will be created. You can " +"easily access those by clicking on the *Actual Replenishment* cell." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:75 +msgid "" +"In case you manually edit the *To replenish* quantity, a small cross will " +"appear on the left. In case you want to go back to the automatically " +"computed value given by Odoo, you can click the cross." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:83 +msgid "Cells color signification" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:85 +msgid "" +"The cells, which are part of the *To replenish* line, can take different " +"colors depending on the situation:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:88 +msgid "" +"**Green**: quantity of products which should be replenished to reach the " +"expected safety stock considering the demand forecast and the indirect " +"demand forecast." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:90 +msgid "" +"**Grey**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity " +"still matches current data." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:92 +msgid "" +"**Red**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity " +"was too high considering current data." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:94 +msgid "" +"**Orange**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity" +" was too low considering current data." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:96 +msgid "" +"The *Forecasted stock* line can also contain red cells, which means the " +"stock will be negative during the period in question." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:100 +msgid "What if I have underestimated the demand?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:102 +msgid "" +"You can still increase the demand forecast. It will impact the quantity to " +"replenish. The cell will become orange, and you’ll be able to launch a new " +"replenishment." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:107 +msgid "What if I have overestimated the demand?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:109 +msgid "" +"You can decrease the demand forecast. The cell will become red to inform you" +" that you’ve ordered more than planned. If you’re still able to do it, you " +"can cancel some RFQ or MO manually." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:114 +msgid "What if I wrongly added a product to the MPS?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:116 +msgid "" +"You can easily remove a product from the MPS by clicking the small bin on " +"the right of its name." +msgstr "" + #: ../../manufacturing/overview.rst:5 msgid "Overview" msgstr "Vue d'ensemble" @@ -491,7 +1129,7 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/repair/repair.rst:10 msgid "Create a Repair Order" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Créer un Ordre de Réparation" #: ../../manufacturing/repair/repair.rst:12 msgid "" diff --git a/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po index 74c05f23d..0f854b3e0 100644 --- a/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po +++ b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po @@ -4,22 +4,23 @@ # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # # Translators: -# Jérôme Tanché , 2018 -# Xavier Belmere , 2018 -# Eloïse Stilmant , 2018 -# Laura Piraux , 2018 -# Cécile Collart , 2018 -# Julien Bertrand , 2018 -# Martin Trigaux, 2018 +# Xavier Belmere , 2019 +# Eloïse Stilmant , 2019 +# André Madeira Cortes , 2019 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Jérôme Tanché , 2019 +# Laura Piraux , 2019 +# Julien Bertrand , 2019 +# Cécile Collart , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 11.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-10-19 10:03+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2018-10-19 08:15+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: Martin Trigaux, 2018\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Cécile Collart , 2019\n" "Language-Team: French (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/fr/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -49,13 +50,16 @@ msgstr "" "pour vous et vos clients." #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:9 -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:9 #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/mercury.rst:25 #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:8 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:9 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:10 #: ../../point_of_sale/overview/start.rst:22 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:12 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:12 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:13 #: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/setup.rst:9 #: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/split.rst:10 -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:10 msgid "Configuration" msgstr "Configuration" @@ -64,8 +68,9 @@ msgid "" "To use a barcode scanner, go to :menuselection:`Point of Sale --> " "Configuration --> Point of sale` and select your PoS interface." msgstr "" -"To use a barcode scanner, go to :menuselection:`Point of Sale --> " -"Configuration --> Point of sale` and select your PoS interface." +"Pour utiliser un lecteur de codes-barres, rendez-vous sur: menuselection: " +"`Point de Ventes -> Configuration -> Point de Ventes` et sélectionnez votre " +"interface PoS." #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:14 msgid "" @@ -76,16 +81,10 @@ msgstr "" "sélectionnez-le." #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:21 -msgid "You can find more about Barcode Nomenclature here (ADD HYPERLINK)" -msgstr "" -"Vous pouvez en savoir plus au sujet de la nomenclature des codes-barres ici " -"(ADD HYPERLINK)" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:25 msgid "Add barcodes to product" msgstr "Ajoutez des codes-barres à vos produits" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:27 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:23 msgid "" "Go to :menuselection:`Point of Sale --> Catalog --> Products` and select a " "product." @@ -93,7 +92,7 @@ msgstr "" "Allez à :menuselection:`Point de Vente --> Catalogue --> Produits` et " "sélectionnez un produit." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:30 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:26 msgid "" "Under the general information tab, you can find a barcode field where you " "can input any barcode." @@ -101,11 +100,11 @@ msgstr "" "Sous l'onglet Informations générales, vous pouvez trouver le champ du code-" "barres dans lequel vous pouvez entrer n'importe quel code-barres." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:37 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:33 msgid "Scanning products" msgstr "Scannez des produits" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:39 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:35 msgid "" "From your PoS interface, scan any barcode with your barcode scanner. The " "product will be added, you can scan the same product to add it multiple " @@ -116,235 +115,6 @@ msgstr "" "même produit pour l'ajouter plusieurs fois ou alors modifier la quantité " "manuellement sur l'écran." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:3 -msgid "Using discount tags with a barcode scanner" -msgstr "Utilisez des étiquettes de remise avec un scanner de codes-barres" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:5 -msgid "" -"If you want to sell your products with a discount, for a product getting " -"close to its expiration date for example, you can use discount tags. They " -"allow you to scan discount barcodes." -msgstr "" -"Si vous souhaitez vendre vos produits avec un rabais, par exemple pour un " -"produit se rapprochant de sa date d'expiration, vous pouvez utiliser des " -"étiquettes de remise. Ils vous permettent de scanner des codes-barres à prix" -" réduit." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:10 -msgid "" -"To use discount tags you will need to use a barcode scanner, you can see the" -" documentation about it `here `__" -msgstr "" -"Pour utiliser les étiquettes de remise, vous devrez utiliser un scanner de " -"codes-barres, vous pouvez lire la documentation à ce sujet `ici " -"`__" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:15 -msgid "Barcode Nomenclature" -msgstr "Nomenclature de code-barres" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:17 -msgid "To use discounts tags, we need to learn about barcode nomenclature." -msgstr "" -"Pour utiliser les étiquettes de remises, nous devons apprendre la " -"nomenclature des codes-barres." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:19 -msgid "" -"Let's say you want to have a discount for the product with the following " -"barcode:" -msgstr "" -"Supposons que vous souhaitiez bénéficier d'une remise sur le produit avec le" -" code-barres suivant:" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:25 -msgid "" -"You can find the *Default Nomenclature* under the settings of your PoS " -"interface." -msgstr "" -"Vous pouvez trouver la *Nomenclature par défaut* dans les paramètres de " -"votre interface PdV." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:34 -msgid "" -"Let's say you want 50% discount on a product you have to start your barcode " -"with 22 (for the discount barcode nomenclature) and then 50 (for the %) " -"before adding the product barcode. In our example, the barcode would be:" -msgstr "" -"Disons que vous voulez 50% de remise sur un produit, vous devez commencer " -"votre code-barres par 22 (pour la nomenclature du code-barres de réduction) " -"puis 50 (pour le%) avant d'ajouter le code-barres du produit. Dans notre " -"exemple, le code-barres serait:" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:43 -msgid "Scan the products & tags" -msgstr "Scannez les produits et tags" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:45 -msgid "You first have to scan the desired product (in our case, a lemon)." -msgstr "" -"Vous devez d'abord scanner le produit désiré (dans notre cas, un citron)." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:50 -msgid "" -"And then scan the discount tag. The discount will be applied and you can " -"finish the transaction." -msgstr "" -"Ensuite scannez l'étiquette de remise. La réduction sera appliquée et vous " -"pourrez terminer la transaction." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:3 -msgid "Manage a loyalty program" -msgstr "Gérez un programme de fidélité" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:5 -msgid "" -"Encourage your customers to continue to shop at your point of sale with a " -"*Loyalty Program*." -msgstr "" -"Encouragez vos clients à continuer à faire leurs achats dans votre Point de " -"Vente avec un *programme de fidélité*." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:11 -msgid "" -"To activate the *Loyalty Program* feature, go to :menuselection:`Point of " -"Sale --> Configuration --> Point of sale` and select your PoS interface. " -"Under the Pricing features, select *Loyalty Program*" -msgstr "" -"Pour activer la fonction *Programme Fidélité*, allez à :menuselection:`Point" -" de Vente --> Configuration --> Point de Vente` et sélectionnez votre " -"interface PdV. Sous les fonctionnalités de Tarif, sélectionnez *Programme " -"de fidélité*" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:19 -msgid "From there you can create and edit your loyalty programs." -msgstr "De là, vous pouvez créer et éditer vos programmes de fidélité." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:24 -msgid "" -"You can decide what type of program you wish to use, if the reward is a " -"discount or a gift, make it specific to some products or cover your whole " -"range. Apply rules so that it is only valid in specific situation and " -"everything in between." -msgstr "" -"Vous pouvez décider du type de programme que vous souhaitez utiliser, si la " -"récompense est un rabais ou un cadeau, le rendre spécifique à certains " -"produits ou couvrir toute votre gamme. Appliquez des règles pour qu'elles ne" -" soient valides que dans une situation spécifique et tout ce qui se trouve " -"entre les deux." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:30 -msgid "Use the loyalty program in your PoS interface" -msgstr "Utilisez le programme de fidélité dans votre interface PdV" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:32 -msgid "" -"When a customer is set, you will now see the points they will get for the " -"transaction and they will accumulate until they are spent. They are spent " -"using the button *Rewards* when they have enough points according to the " -"rules defined in the loyalty program." -msgstr "" -"Lorsqu'un client est défini, vous verrez désormais les points qu'il " -"obtiendra pour la transaction et ils s'accumuleront jusqu'à ce qu'ils soient" -" dépensés. Ils sont dépensés en utilisant le bouton *Récompenses* quand ils " -"ont assez de points selon les règles définies dans le programme de fidélité." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:40 -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:45 -msgid "" -"You can see the price is instantly updated to reflect the pricelist. You can" -" finalize the order in your usual way." -msgstr "" -"Vous pouvez voir que le prix est instantanément mis à jour pour refléter la " -"liste de prix. Vous pouvez finaliser la commande de votre manière " -"habituelle." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:44 -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:49 -msgid "" -"If you select a customer with a default pricelist, it will be applied. You " -"can of course change it." -msgstr "" -"Si vous sélectionnez un client avec une liste de prix par défaut, il sera " -"appliqué. Vous pouvez bien sûr en changer." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:3 -msgid "Apply manual discounts" -msgstr "Appliquez des remises manuelles" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:5 -msgid "" -"If you seldom use discounts, applying manual discounts might be the easiest " -"solution for your Point of Sale." -msgstr "" -"Si vous utilisez rarement des remises, appliquer des remises manuelles peut " -"être la solution la plus simple pour votre point de vente." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:8 -msgid "" -"You can either apply a discount on the whole order or on specific products." -msgstr "" -"Vous pouvez soit appliquer une réduction sur l'ensemble de la commande ou " -"sur des produits spécifiques." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:12 -msgid "Apply a discount on a product" -msgstr "Appliquez une remise sur un produit" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:14 -msgid "From your session interface, use *Disc* button." -msgstr "Depuis votre interface de session, utilisez le bouton *Rem* ." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:19 -msgid "" -"You can then input a discount (in percentage) over the product that is " -"currently selected and the discount will be applied." -msgstr "" -"Vous pouvez ensuite entrer une remise (en pourcentage) sur le produit " -"actuellement sélectionné et la réduction sera appliquée." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:23 -msgid "Apply a global discount" -msgstr "Appliquez une remise globale" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:25 -msgid "" -"To apply a discount on the whole order, go to :menuselection:`Point of Sales" -" --> Configuration --> Point of sale` and select your PoS interface." -msgstr "" -"Pour appliquer une remise sur l'ensemble de la commande, rendez-vous sur " -":menuselection:`Point de Vente --> Configuration --> Point de Vente` et " -"sélectionnez votre interface PdV." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:28 -msgid "" -"Under the *Pricing* category, you will find *Global Discounts* select it." -msgstr "" -"Sous la catégorie *Prix* , vous trouverez *Remise Globales* sélectionnez-le." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:34 -msgid "You now have a new *Discount* button in your PoS interface." -msgstr "" -"Vous avez maintenant un nouveau bouton *Remise* dans votre interface PoS." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:39 -msgid "" -"Once clicked you can then enter your desired discount (in percentages)." -msgstr "" -"Une fois cliqué vous pouvez alors entrer la remise désirée (en " -"pourcentages)." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:44 -msgid "" -"On this example, you can see a global discount of 50% as well as a specific " -"product discount also at 50%." -msgstr "" -"Sur cet exemple, vous pouvez voir une réduction globale de 50% ainsi qu'une " -"réduction de 50% spécifique au produit." - #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/mercury.rst:3 msgid "Accept credit card payment using Mercury" msgstr "Acceptez le paiement par carte de crédit en utilisant Mercury" @@ -437,105 +207,95 @@ msgstr "" "Vous avez maintenant une nouvelle option de paiement par carte de crédit " "lors de la validation d'un paiement." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:3 -msgid "Manage multiple cashiers" -msgstr "Gérez plusieurs caissiers" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:5 -msgid "" -"With Odoo Point of Sale, you can easily manage multiple cashiers. This " -"allows you to keep track on who is working in the Point of Sale and when." +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:3 +msgid "Log in with employee" msgstr "" -"Avec Odoo Point de Vente, vous pouvez facilement gérer plusieurs caissiers. " -"Cela vous permet de savoir qui travaille dans le Point de Vente et quand." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:9 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:5 msgid "" -"There are three different ways of switching between cashiers in Odoo. They " -"are all explained below." +"With Odoo *Point of Sale*, you can manage multiple cashiers. This feature " +"allows you to keep track of who is working, when and how much each cashier " +"made for that session." msgstr "" -"Il existe trois manières différentes de passer d'un caissier à l'autre dans " -"Odoo. Elles sont toutes expliquées ci-dessous." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:13 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:9 msgid "" -"To manage multiple cashiers, you need to have several users (at least two)." +"There are three ways to switch cashiers in Odoo: by *selecting the cashier*," +" by *entering a PIN code* or by *scanning a barcode*." msgstr "" -"Pour gérer plusieurs caissiers, vous devez avoir plusieurs utilisateurs (au " -"moins deux)." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:17 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:13 +msgid "" +"To manage multiple cashiers, you need several employees (at least two)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:16 +msgid "Set up log in with employees" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:18 +msgid "" +"To enable the feature, go to your *PoS settings* and check log in with " +"employees on your *PoS form*. Then, add the employees that have access to " +"the cash register." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:25 +msgid "Now, you can switch cashier easily." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:28 msgid "Switch without pin codes" msgstr "Changer sans code PIN" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:19 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:30 msgid "" -"The easiest way to switch cashiers is without a code. Simply press on the " -"name of the current cashier in your PoS interface." +"The easiest way to switch cashiers is without a code. To do so, click on the" +" cashier name in your PoS interface." msgstr "" -"Le moyen le plus simple de changer de caissier est sans code. Appuyez " -"simplement sur le nom de la caisse actuelle dans votre interface PdV." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:25 -msgid "You will then be able to change between different users." -msgstr "Vous serez alors en mesure de choisir entre différents utilisateurs." +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:36 +msgid "Now, you just have to click on your name." +msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:30 -msgid "And the cashier will be changed." -msgstr "Et le caissier sera changé." +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:42 +msgid "Switch cashier with pin codes" +msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:33 -msgid "Switch cashiers with pin codes" -msgstr "Changer de caissier avec des codes PIN" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:35 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:44 msgid "" -"You can also set a pin code on each user. To do so, go to " -":menuselection:`Settings --> Manage Access rights` and select the user." +"You can set a pin code on each cashier. To set up a pin code, go to the " +"employee form and add a security PIN, in the *HR settings tab*." msgstr "" -"Vous pouvez également définir un code PIN sur chaque utilisateur. Pour ce " -"faire, allez à :menuselection:`Paramètres --> Gérer les droits d'accès` et " -"sélectionnez l'utilisateur." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:41 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:50 +msgid "Now, when switching cashier, a PIN password will be asked." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:56 +msgid "Switch cashier with barcodes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:58 msgid "" -"On the user page, under the *Point of Sale* tab you can add a Security PIN." +"You can ask your employees to log themselves with their badges. To do so, " +"set up a barcode at the same place you add the PIN code. Print the badge and" +" when they will scan it, the cashier will be switched to that employee." msgstr "" -"Sur la page de l'utilisateur, sous l'onglet *Point de Vente*, vous pouvez " -"ajouter un code PIN de sécurité." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:47 -msgid "Now when you switch users you will be asked to input a PIN password." +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:67 +msgid "Find who was the cashier" msgstr "" -"Maintenant, lorsque vous changez d'utilisateur, il vous sera demandé de " -"saisir un mot de passe ou \"code PIN\"." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:53 -msgid "Switch cashiers with barcodes" -msgstr "Changer de caissier avec des codes-barres" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:55 -msgid "You can also ask your cashiers to log themselves in with their badges." -msgstr "" -"Vous pouvez également demander à vos caissiers de se connecter avec leurs " -"badges." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:57 -msgid "Back where you put a security PIN code, you could also put a barcode." -msgstr "" -"Là où vous aviez mis un code PIN de sécurité, vous pouvez également mettre " -"un code-barres." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:62 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:69 msgid "" -"When they scan their barcode, the cashier will be switched to that user." +"Once you have closed your *PoS session*, you can have an overview of the " +"amount each cashier sold for. To do so, go to the orders menu." msgstr "" -"Quand il scanne son code-barres, le caissier sera basculé vers cet " -"utilisateur." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:64 -msgid "Barcode nomenclature link later on" -msgstr "Lien vers la nomenclature des codes-barres plus tard" +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:75 +msgid "Now, you can open the order and have a summary of the sold products." +msgstr "" #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:3 msgid "Reprint Receipts" @@ -551,11 +311,8 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:10 msgid "" "To activate *Reprint Receipt*, go to :menuselection:`Point of Sale --> " -"Configuration --> Point of sale` and select your PoS interface." +"Configuration --> Point of sale`. and select your PoS interface." msgstr "" -"Pour activer la fonction *Ré-impression du reçu*, allez à :menuelection: " -"`Point de Vente --> Configuration --> Point de Vente` et sélectionnez votre " -"interface PdV." #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:13 msgid "" @@ -564,21 +321,324 @@ msgstr "" "Dans la catégorie Bills & Receipts, vous trouverez l'option *Ré-impression " "du reçu*." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:20 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:17 +msgid "" +"In order to allow the option reprint receipt, you need to activate the " +"receipt printer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:23 msgid "Reprint a receipt" msgstr "Ré-imprimer un reçu" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:22 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:25 msgid "On your PoS interface, you now have a *Reprint receipt* button." msgstr "" "Sur votre interface PdV, vous avez maintenant un bouton *Ré-impression du " "reçu*." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:27 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:30 msgid "When you use it, you can then reprint your last receipt." msgstr "" "Lorsque vous l'utilisez, vous pouvez ensuite réimprimer votre dernier reçu." +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features.rst:3 +msgid "Advanced Pricing Features" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:3 +msgid "Using discount tags with a barcode scanner" +msgstr "Utilisez des étiquettes de remise avec un scanner de codes-barres" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:5 +msgid "" +"If you want to sell your products with a discount, for a product getting " +"close to its expiration date for example, you can use discount tags. They " +"allow you to scan discount barcodes." +msgstr "" +"Si vous souhaitez vendre vos produits avec un rabais, par exemple pour un " +"produit se rapprochant de sa date d'expiration, vous pouvez utiliser des " +"étiquettes de remise. Ils vous permettent de scanner des codes-barres à prix" +" réduit." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:10 +msgid "To use discount tags you will need to use a barcode scanner." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:13 +msgid "Barcode Nomenclature" +msgstr "Nomenclature de code-barres" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:15 +msgid "To use discounts tags, we need to learn about barcode nomenclature." +msgstr "" +"Pour utiliser les étiquettes de remises, nous devons apprendre la " +"nomenclature des codes-barres." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:17 +msgid "" +"Let's say you want to have a discount for the product with the following " +"barcode:" +msgstr "" +"Supposons que vous souhaitiez bénéficier d'une remise sur le produit avec le" +" code-barres suivant:" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:23 +msgid "" +"You can find the *Default Nomenclature* under the settings of your PoS " +"interface." +msgstr "" +"Vous pouvez trouver la *Nomenclature par défaut* dans les paramètres de " +"votre interface PdV." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:32 +msgid "" +"Let's say you want 50% discount on a product you have to start your barcode " +"with 22 (for the discount barcode nomenclature) and then 50 (for the %) " +"before adding the product barcode. In our example, the barcode would be:" +msgstr "" +"Disons que vous voulez 50% de remise sur un produit, vous devez commencer " +"votre code-barres par 22 (pour la nomenclature du code-barres de réduction) " +"puis 50 (pour le%) avant d'ajouter le code-barres du produit. Dans notre " +"exemple, le code-barres serait:" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:41 +msgid "Scan the products & tags" +msgstr "Scannez les produits et tags" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:43 +msgid "You first have to scan the desired product (in our case, a lemon)." +msgstr "" +"Vous devez d'abord scanner le produit désiré (dans notre cas, un citron)." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:48 +msgid "" +"And then scan the discount tag. The discount will be applied and you can " +"finish the transaction." +msgstr "" +"Ensuite scannez l'étiquette de remise. La réduction sera appliquée et vous " +"pourrez terminer la transaction." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:3 +msgid "Manage a loyalty program" +msgstr "Gérez un programme de fidélité" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Encourage your customers to continue to shop at your point of sale with a " +"*Loyalty Program*." +msgstr "" +"Encouragez vos clients à continuer à faire leurs achats dans votre Point de " +"Vente avec un *programme de fidélité*." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:11 +msgid "" +"To activate the *Loyalty Program* feature, go to :menuselection:`Point of " +"Sale --> Configuration --> Point of sale` and select your PoS interface. " +"Under the Pricing features, select *Loyalty Program*" +msgstr "" +"Pour activer la fonction *Programme Fidélité*, allez à :menuselection:`Point" +" de Vente --> Configuration --> Point de Vente` et sélectionnez votre " +"interface PdV. Sous les fonctionnalités de Tarif, sélectionnez *Programme " +"de fidélité*" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:19 +msgid "From there you can create and edit your loyalty programs." +msgstr "De là, vous pouvez créer et éditer vos programmes de fidélité." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:24 +msgid "" +"You can decide what type of program you wish to use, if the reward is a " +"discount or a gift, make it specific to some products or cover your whole " +"range. Apply rules so that it is only valid in specific situation and " +"everything in between." +msgstr "" +"Vous pouvez décider du type de programme que vous souhaitez utiliser, si la " +"récompense est un rabais ou un cadeau, le rendre spécifique à certains " +"produits ou couvrir toute votre gamme. Appliquez des règles pour qu'elles ne" +" soient valides que dans une situation spécifique et tout ce qui se trouve " +"entre les deux." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:30 +msgid "Use the loyalty program in your PoS interface" +msgstr "Utilisez le programme de fidélité dans votre interface PdV" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:32 +msgid "" +"When a customer is set, you will now see the points they will get for the " +"transaction and they will accumulate until they are spent. They are spent " +"using the button *Rewards* when they have enough points according to the " +"rules defined in the loyalty program." +msgstr "" +"Lorsqu'un client est défini, vous verrez désormais les points qu'il " +"obtiendra pour la transaction et ils s'accumuleront jusqu'à ce qu'ils soient" +" dépensés. Ils sont dépensés en utilisant le bouton *Récompenses* quand ils " +"ont assez de points selon les règles définies dans le programme de fidélité." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:40 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:45 +msgid "" +"You can see the price is instantly updated to reflect the pricelist. You can" +" finalize the order in your usual way." +msgstr "" +"Vous pouvez voir que le prix est instantanément mis à jour pour refléter la " +"liste de prix. Vous pouvez finaliser la commande de votre manière " +"habituelle." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:44 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:49 +msgid "" +"If you select a customer with a default pricelist, it will be applied. You " +"can of course change it." +msgstr "" +"Si vous sélectionnez un client avec une liste de prix par défaut, il sera " +"appliqué. Vous pouvez bien sûr en changer." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:3 +msgid "Apply manual discounts" +msgstr "Appliquez des remises manuelles" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:5 +msgid "" +"If you seldom use discounts, applying manual discounts might be the easiest " +"solution for your Point of Sale." +msgstr "" +"Si vous utilisez rarement des remises, appliquer des remises manuelles peut " +"être la solution la plus simple pour votre point de vente." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:8 +msgid "" +"You can either apply a discount on the whole order or on specific products." +msgstr "" +"Vous pouvez soit appliquer une réduction sur l'ensemble de la commande ou " +"sur des produits spécifiques." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:12 +msgid "Apply a discount on a product" +msgstr "Appliquez une remise sur un produit" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:14 +msgid "From your session interface, use *Disc* button." +msgstr "Depuis votre interface de session, utilisez le bouton *Rem* ." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:19 +msgid "" +"You can then input a discount (in percentage) over the product that is " +"currently selected and the discount will be applied." +msgstr "" +"Vous pouvez ensuite entrer une remise (en pourcentage) sur le produit " +"actuellement sélectionné et la réduction sera appliquée." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:23 +msgid "Apply a global discount" +msgstr "Appliquez une remise globale" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:25 +msgid "" +"To apply a discount on the whole order, go to :menuselection:`Point of Sales" +" --> Configuration --> Point of sale` and select your PoS interface." +msgstr "" +"Pour appliquer une remise sur l'ensemble de la commande, rendez-vous sur " +":menuselection:`Point de Vente --> Configuration --> Point de Vente` et " +"sélectionnez votre interface PdV." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:28 +msgid "" +"Under the *Pricing* category, you will find *Global Discounts* select it." +msgstr "" +"Sous la catégorie *Prix* , vous trouverez *Remise Globales* sélectionnez-le." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:34 +msgid "You now have a new *Discount* button in your PoS interface." +msgstr "" +"Vous avez maintenant un nouveau bouton *Remise* dans votre interface PoS." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:39 +msgid "" +"Once clicked you can then enter your desired discount (in percentages)." +msgstr "" +"Une fois cliqué vous pouvez alors entrer la remise désirée (en " +"pourcentages)." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:44 +msgid "" +"On this example, you can see a global discount of 50% as well as a specific " +"product discount also at 50%." +msgstr "" +"Sur cet exemple, vous pouvez voir une réduction globale de 50% ainsi qu'une " +"réduction de 50% spécifique au produit." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:3 +msgid "Apply time-limited discounts" +msgstr "Appliquez des remises limitées dans le temps" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Entice your customers and increase your revenue by offering time-limited or " +"seasonal discounts. Odoo has a powerful pricelist feature to support a " +"pricing strategy tailored to your business." +msgstr "" +"Encouragez vos clients et augmentez vos revenus en offrant des remises " +"limitées dans le temps ou saisonnières. Odoo dispose d'une fonction poussée " +"de liste de prix pour soutenir une stratégie de tarification adaptée à votre" +" activité." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:12 +msgid "" +"To activate the *Pricelists* feature, go to :menuselection:`Point of Sales " +"--> Configuration --> Point of sale` and select your PoS interface." +msgstr "" +"Pour activer la fonction *Liste de Prix*, accédez à :menuselection:`Point de" +" vente --> Configuration --> Point de vente` et sélectionnez votre interface" +" PoS." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:18 +msgid "" +"Choose the pricelists you want to make available in this Point of Sale and " +"define the default pricelist. You can access all your pricelists by clicking" +" on *Pricelists*." +msgstr "" +"Choisissez les listes de prix que vous souhaitez mettre à disposition dans " +"ce Point de Vente et définissez la liste de prix par défaut. Vous pouvez " +"accéder à toutes vos Listes de Prix en cliquant sur *Liste de prix*." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:23 +msgid "Create a pricelist" +msgstr "Créez une liste de prix" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:25 +msgid "" +"By default, you have a *Public Pricelist* to create more, go to " +":menuselection:`Point of Sale --> Catalog --> Pricelists`" +msgstr "" +"By default, you have a *Public Pricelist* to create more, go to " +":menuselection:`Point of Sale --> Catalog --> Pricelists`" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:31 +msgid "" +"You can set several criterias to use a specific price: periods, min. " +"quantity (meet a minimum ordered quantity and get a price break), etc. You " +"can also chose to only apply that pricelist on specific products or on the " +"whole range." +msgstr "" +"Vous pouvez définir plusieurs critères pour utiliser un prix spécifique: " +"périodes, quantité min. (répondre à une quantité minimum commandée et " +"obtenir une réduction de prix), etc. Vous pouvez également choisir " +"d'appliquer uniquement cette liste de prix sur des produits spécifiques ou " +"sur toute la gamme." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:37 +msgid "Using a pricelist in the PoS interface" +msgstr "Utilisation d'une liste de prix dans l'interface PoS" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:39 +msgid "" +"You now have a new button above the *Customer* one, use it to instantly " +"select the right pricelist." +msgstr "" +"Vous avez maintenant un nouveau bouton au-dessus de celui nommé *Client*, " +"utilisez-le pour sélectionner instantanément la bonne liste de prix." + #: ../../point_of_sale/analyze.rst:3 msgid "Analyze sales" msgstr "Analysez les ventes" @@ -653,7 +713,7 @@ msgstr "" "(Enterprise Edition) est une application certifiée " "` _. De plus " "amples informations sur le module de données fiscales peuvent être trouvées " -"sur le site officiel `_." +"sur le `site officiel `_." #: ../../point_of_sale/belgian_fdm/setup.rst:20 msgid "Required hardware" @@ -666,10 +726,10 @@ msgid "" "certifies#FDM%20certifiés>`_ per POS, all of them should work, but the " "Cleancash SC-B is recommended, you will also need:" msgstr "" -"Un `Module de données fiscales certifié par le gouvernement " -"` _ par PdV, tous devraient fonctionner, mais le " -"Cleancash SC-B est recommandé, vous aurez également besoin de:" +"Un `Module de données fiscales `_ certifié par le gouvernement par " +"PdV, tous devraient fonctionner, mais le Cleancash SC-B est recommandé, vous" +" aurez également besoin de:" #: ../../point_of_sale/belgian_fdm/setup.rst:27 msgid "" @@ -679,7 +739,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Câble serial null modem par FDM (`exemple `__)" +"DB9-FM~SCNM9FM>`__)" #: ../../point_of_sale/belgian_fdm/setup.rst:29 msgid "" @@ -763,8 +823,8 @@ msgstr "" "La certification accordée par le gouvernement est limitée à l'utilisation " "sur l'instance SaaS d'odoo.com. L'utilisation du module à partir de la " "source ou d'une version modifiée **ne sera pas** certifiée. Pour les clients" -" sur site, nous supportons aussi l'utilisation d'un module fisacle. " -"Cependant, une version figée du module peut etre distribuée a la demande " +" sur site, nous supportons aussi l'utilisation d'un module fiscale. " +"Cependant, une version figée du module peut être distribuée a la demande " "pour les clients Enterprise." #: ../../point_of_sale/belgian_fdm/setup.rst:79 @@ -1065,10 +1125,276 @@ msgstr "C'est fait, vous avez maintenant fermé votre première session de PdV." #: ../../point_of_sale/overview/start.rst:133 msgid "" "To connect the PoS to hardware with an Odoo IoT Box, please see the section " -":doc:`../../../iot/connect` and :doc:`../../../iot/pos`" +":doc:`../../../iot/config/connect` and :doc:`../../../iot/config/pos`" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment.rst:3 +msgid "Payment Terminals" +msgstr "Terminaux de paiement" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:3 +msgid "Connect an Ingenico Payment Terminal to your PoS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Connecting a payment terminal allows you to offer a fluid payment flow to " +"your customers and ease the work of your cashiers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Please note that Ingenico is currently only available for customers in the " +"Benelux." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:15 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:15 +msgid "Connect a Payment Terminal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:17 +msgid "" +"Connecting an Ingenico Payment Terminal to Odoo is a feature that requires " +"an IoT Box. For more information on how to connect an IoT Box to your " +"database, please refer to `this documentation " +"`__." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:22 +msgid "" +"Once the IoT Box is up and running, you’ll need to link your payment " +"terminal to your PoS. Open the Point of Sale app and go to *Configuration > " +"Point of Sale*. Select a PoS, tick the IoT Box Device option and select your" +" payment terminal." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:31 +msgid "Configure the Lane/5000 for Ingenico BENELUX" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:33 +msgid "" +"Click on the F button of the terminal, then go in the *PoS Menu* > settings " +"menu and enter the settings password." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:36 +msgid "" +"Now, click on connexion change and TCP/IP. Type the IP of your *IoT Box* " +"(you can find it on the form view of your IoT Box). Then, enter 9000 as " +"port. The terminal will restart. Once it is done, go on your *IoT Box* form " +"in Odoo and verify that the terminal has been found." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:45 +msgid "Configure the payment method" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:47 +msgid "" +"First, go in the general settings of the POS app, and activate the Ingenico " +"setting." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Go back in *Point of Sale > Configuration > Point of Sale*, go in the " +"payments section and access your payment methods. Create a new payment " +"method for Ingenico, select the payment terminal option Ingenico, and select" +" your payment terminal device." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:62 +msgid "Pay with a payment terminal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:64 +msgid "" +"In your *PoS interface*, when processing a payment, select a *Payment " +"Method* using a payment terminal. Check that the amount in the tendered " +"column is the one that has to be sent to the payment terminal and click on " +"*Send*. When the payment is successful, the status will change to *Payment " +"Successful*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:73 +msgid "" +"If you want to cancel the payment request, click on cancel. You can still " +"retry to send the payment request." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:76 +msgid "" +"If there is any issue with the payment terminal, you can still force the " +"payment using the *Force Done*. This will allow you to validate the order in" +" Odoo even if the connexion between the terminal and Odoo has issues." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:82 +msgid "" +"This option will only be available if you received an error message telling " +"you the connexion failed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:85 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:103 +msgid "" +"Once your payment is processed, on the payment record, you’ll find the type " +"of card that has been used and the transaction ID." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:3 +msgid "Connect SIX/Worldline to your PoS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Connecting a SIX/Worldline payment terminal allows you to offer a fluid " +"payment flow to your customers and ease the work of your cashiers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:9 +msgid "Please note SIX/Worldine is currently only available for UE customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:17 +msgid "" +"Connecting a SIX/Worldline Payment Terminal to Odoo is a feature that " +"requires an IoT Box. For more information on how to connect an IoT Box to " +"your database, please refer to `this documentation " +"`__." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:22 +msgid "" +"Once the *IoT Box* is up and running, you’ll need to link it to your PoS. " +"Open the Point of Sale app and go to *Configuration > Point of Sale*. Select" +" a PoS, tick the IoT Box Device option and select your payment terminal." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:30 +msgid "" +"Then go to your *IoT Box homepage* (accessible from the IoT Box form view in" +" Odoo) and enter the ID of your Six payment terminal." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:36 +msgid "" +"You should now see that the terminal is connected to your IoT Box (it takes " +"+/- 1 min)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:43 +msgid "" +"The terminal should only be connected to the network with the Ethernet. Do " +"not connect it to the IoT Box with a USB Cable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:47 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:16 +msgid "Configure the Payment Method" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:49 +msgid "" +"First, go in the general settings of the POS app, and activate the SIX " +"setting." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:55 +msgid "" +"Back in *Point of Sale > Configuration > Point of Sale*, go in the payments " +"section and access your payment methods. Create a new payment method for " +"SIX, select the payment terminal option SIX, and select your payment " +"terminal device." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:64 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:40 +msgid "Pay with a Payment Terminal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:66 +msgid "" +"In your PoS interface, at the moment of the payment, select a payment method" +" using a payment terminal. Verify that the amount in the tendered column is " +"the one that has to be sent to the payment terminal and click on *Send*. If " +"you want to cancel the payment request, click on cancel." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:74 +msgid "" +"When the payment is done, the status will change to *Payment Successful*. " +"You can always reverse the last transaction by clicking on *Reverse*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:81 +msgid "" +"If there is any issue with the payment terminal, you can still force the " +"payment using the *Force Done*. This will allow you to validate the order in" +" Odoo even if the connexion between the terminal and Odoo encounters issues." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:87 +msgid "Close your Session" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:89 +msgid "" +"At the end of the day, before closing your session, you need to send the " +"balance of the payments to SIX. To do that, click on this button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:95 +msgid "" +"Once the balance has been sent, the SIX shift is closed, meaning you cannot " +"do additional operations with the SIX payment terminal (except if you reopen" +" a shift by clicking on the user name and selecting a cashier)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Vantiv Payment Terminal to your PoS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Connecting a Vantiv payment terminal allows you to offer a fluid payment " +"flow to your customers and ease the work of your cashiers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:9 +msgid "" +"Please note MercuryPay only operates with US and Canadian banks, making this" +" procedure only suitable for North American businesses." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:18 +msgid "" +"First, go in the general settings of the POS app, and activate the Vantiv " +"setting." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:24 +msgid "" +"Back in *Point of Sale > Configuration > Point of Sale*, go in the payments " +"section and access your payment methods. Create a new payment method for " +"Vantiv, select the payment terminal option Vantiv, and create new Vantiv " +"credentials." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:32 +msgid "" +"To create new Vantiv credentials, fill in your merchant ID and password, " +"then save. Make sure the credentials you just created are selected, then " +"save the payment method." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:42 +msgid "" +"In your PoS interface, at the moment of the payment, select your Vantiv " +"payment method and… that’s all." msgstr "" -"Pour connecter le PdV au matériel avec une IoT Box, consultez la section " -":doc:`../../../iot/connect` et :doc:`../../../iot/pos`" #: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant.rst:3 msgid "Advanced Restaurant Features" @@ -1150,15 +1476,14 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:16 msgid "" "Under the IoT Box / Hardware Proxy category, you will find *Order Printers*." +" Note that you need an IoT Box to connect your Printer to the PoS." msgstr "" -"Sous la catégorie IoT Box / Hardware, vous trouverez *Imprimantes de " -"commandes*." -#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:19 +#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:20 msgid "Add a printer" msgstr "Ajoutez une imprimante" -#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:21 +#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:22 msgid "" "In your configuration menu you will now have a *Order Printers* option where" " you can add the printer." @@ -1166,23 +1491,23 @@ msgstr "" "Dans votre menu de configuration, vous aurez maintenant une option " "*Imprimantes de Commandes* où vous pouvez ajouter l'imprimante." -#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:28 +#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:29 msgid "Print a kitchen/bar order" msgstr "Imprimer une commande de la cuisine/du bar" -#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:33 +#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:34 msgid "Select or create a printer." msgstr "Sélectionnez ou créez une imprimante." -#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:36 +#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:37 msgid "Print the order in the kitchen/bar" msgstr "Imprimer la commande dans la cuisine /le bar" -#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:38 +#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:39 msgid "On your PoS interface, you now have a *Order* button." msgstr "Sur votre interface PdV, vous avez maintenant un bouton *Commande*." -#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:43 +#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:44 msgid "" "When you press it, it will print the order on your kitchen/bar printer." msgstr "" @@ -1434,7 +1759,7 @@ msgstr "" "Une fois sur l'interface de paiement, vous avez maintenant un nouveau bouton" " * Pourboires*" -#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/tips.rst:31 +#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/tips.rst:28 msgid "Add the tip your customer wants to leave and process to the payment." msgstr "" "Ajoutez le pourboire que votre client veut donner et passez au paiement." @@ -1699,74 +2024,3 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Comme vous pouvez le voir, le total est en négatif, pour terminer le " "remboursement il vous suffit de traiter le paiement." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:3 -msgid "Apply time-limited discounts" -msgstr "Appliquez des remises limitées dans le temps" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:5 -msgid "" -"Entice your customers and increase your revenue by offering time-limited or " -"seasonal discounts. Odoo has a powerful pricelist feature to support a " -"pricing strategy tailored to your business." -msgstr "" -"Encouragez vos clients et augmentez vos revenus en offrant des remises " -"limitées dans le temps ou saisonnières. Odoo dispose d'une fonction poussée " -"de liste de prix pour soutenir une stratégie de tarification adaptée à votre" -" activité." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:12 -msgid "" -"To activate the *Pricelists* feature, go to :menuselection:`Point of Sales " -"--> Configuration --> Point of sale` and select your PoS interface." -msgstr "" -"Pour activer la fonction *Liste de Prix*, accédez à :menuselection:`Point de" -" vente --> Configuration --> Point de vente` et sélectionnez votre interface" -" PoS." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:18 -msgid "" -"Choose the pricelists you want to make available in this Point of Sale and " -"define the default pricelist. You can access all your pricelists by clicking" -" on *Pricelists*." -msgstr "" -"Choisissez les listes de prix que vous souhaitez mettre à disposition dans " -"ce Point de Vente et définissez la liste de prix par défaut. Vous pouvez " -"accéder à toutes vos Listes de Prix en cliquant sur *Liste de prix*." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:23 -msgid "Create a pricelist" -msgstr "Créez une liste de prix" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:25 -msgid "" -"By default, you have a *Public Pricelist* to create more, go to " -":menuselection:`Point of Sale --> Catalog --> Pricelists`" -msgstr "" -"By default, you have a *Public Pricelist* to create more, go to " -":menuselection:`Point of Sale --> Catalog --> Pricelists`" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:31 -msgid "" -"You can set several criterias to use a specific price: periods, min. " -"quantity (meet a minimum ordered quantity and get a price break), etc. You " -"can also chose to only apply that pricelist on specific products or on the " -"whole range." -msgstr "" -"Vous pouvez définir plusieurs critères pour utiliser un prix spécifique: " -"périodes, quantité min. (répondre à une quantité minimum commandée et " -"obtenir une réduction de prix), etc. Vous pouvez également choisir " -"d'appliquer uniquement cette liste de prix sur des produits spécifiques ou " -"sur toute la gamme." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:37 -msgid "Using a pricelist in the PoS interface" -msgstr "Utilisation d'une liste de prix dans l'interface PoS" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:39 -msgid "" -"You now have a new button above the *Customer* one, use it to instantly " -"select the right pricelist." -msgstr "" -"Vous avez maintenant un nouveau bouton au-dessus de celui nommé *Client*, " -"utilisez-le pour sélectionner instantanément la bonne liste de prix." diff --git a/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po index 2a0085e8f..43aca2539 100644 --- a/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po +++ b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po @@ -4,18 +4,19 @@ # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # # Translators: -# Benjamin Frantzen, 2018 -# Jérôme Tanché , 2018 -# Martin Trigaux, 2018 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Benjamin Frantzen, 2019 +# Jérôme Tanché , 2019 +# Oriane Malburny , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 12.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-11-07 15:38+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2018-10-19 08:15+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: Martin Trigaux, 2018\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:47+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Oriane Malburny , 2019\n" "Language-Team: French (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/fr/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -50,7 +51,7 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/3_way_matching.rst:18 #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/analyze.rst:24 #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/approvals.rst:9 -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:31 +#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:10 #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/create.rst:13 #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/lock_orders.rst:9 #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/reception.rst:14 @@ -652,457 +653,55 @@ msgid "Once approved, the purchase order follows the normal process." msgstr "Une fois approuvé, le bon de commande suit le processus normal." #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:3 -msgid "Control supplier bills" -msgstr "" +msgid "Bill Control" +msgstr "Contrôle de facture" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:5 msgid "" -"The **Purchase** application allows you to manage your purchase orders, " -"incoming products, and vendor bills all seamlessly in one place." +"With Odoo, you can define a setting to help the control of your bills. *Bill" +" Control* lets you choose if the supplier sends you the bill before or after" +" you receive the goods." msgstr "" -"L'application **Achats** vous permet de gérer vos commandes fournisseurs, la" -" réception des produits, et les factures fournisseurs, tout cela de façon " -"transparente et à un seul endroit." -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:8 +#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:12 msgid "" -"If you want to set up a vendor bill control process, the first thing you " -"need to do is to have purchase data in Odoo. Knowing what has been purchased" -" and received is the first step towards understanding your purchase " -"management processes." +"For this feature to work, go to :menuselection:`Purchases --> Configuration " +"--> Settings` and select which way you want to control your bills." msgstr "" -"Si vous voulez mettre en place un processus de contrôle des factures " -"fournisseurs, la première chose que vous devez faire est d'avoir des données" -" d'achat dans Odoo. Savoir ce qui a été acheté et receptionné est la " -"première étape vers la compréhension de vos processus de gestion des achats." -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:13 -msgid "Here is the standard work flow in Odoo:" -msgstr "Voici le cheminement standard dans Odoo :" +#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:20 +msgid "Change the control policy" +msgstr "" -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:15 +#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:22 msgid "" -"You begin with a **Request for Quotation (RFQ)** to send out to your " -"vendor(s)." +"While the setting above will be your default method of bill control, you can" +" always select which way you want to invoice your product on each product " +"page under the *Purchase* tab." msgstr "" -"Vous commencez avec une **Demande de Prix (DP)** à envoyer à vos " -"fournisseur(s)." -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:18 +#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:26 msgid "" -"Once the vendor has accepted the RFQ, confirm the RFQ into a **Purchase " -"Order (PO)**." +"You might want to use different settings for different types of products." msgstr "" -"Une fois que le vendeur a accepté la Demande de Prix, confirmez-la en **Bon " -"de Commande (BC)**." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:21 -msgid "" -"Confirming the PO generates an **Incoming Shipment** if you purchased any " -"stockable products." -msgstr "" -"La confirmation du BC génère une **Expédition** si vous avez acheté des " -"produits stockables." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:24 -msgid "" -"Upon receiving a **Vendor Bill** from your Vendor, validate the bill with " -"products received in the previous step to ensure accuracy." -msgstr "" -"Lors de la réception d'une **Facture Fournisseur**, validez-la avec les " -"produits reçus à l'étape précédente pour en vérifier l'exactitude." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:27 -msgid "" -"This process may be done by three different people within the company, or " -"only one." -msgstr "" -"Ce processus peut être réalisé par trois personnes différentes au sein de " -"l'entreprise, ou une seule." #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:34 -msgid "Installing the Purchase and Inventory applications" +msgid "Verify your Vendor Bill" msgstr "" -"Installez les applications Gestion des achats et Gestion de l'inventaire" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:36 msgid "" -"From the **Apps** application, search for the **Purchase** module and " -"install it. Due to certain dependencies, installing purchase will " -"automatically install the **Inventory** and **Accounting** applications." +"If you didn’t receive any of your product yet on *Purchase Order* under the " +"*Shipment* tab," msgstr "" -"À partir du module **Applications**, recherchez le module **Gestion des " -"achats** et installez-le. En raison de certaines dépendances, cela " -"installera aussi automatiquement les applications **Gestion de " -"l'inventaire** et **Comptabilité et finance**." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:41 -msgid "Creating products" -msgstr "Création d'articles" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:43 msgid "" -"Creating products in Odoo is essential for quick and efficient purchasing " -"within Odoo. Simply navigate to the **Products** submenu under **Purchase**," -" and click **Create**." +"Depending on the billing policy defined above. If you're supposed to be " +"billed based on ordered quantity, Odoo will suggest a bill for the number of" +" units ordered. If you're supposed to be billed based on the received " +"quantities, Odoo will suggest a bill for 0 as shown above." msgstr "" -"La création d'articles dans Odoo est essentielle pour des achats rapides et " -"efficaces avec Odoo. Il suffit de naviguer vers :menuselection:`Achat --> " -"Articles`, et de cliquer sur **Créer**." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:50 -msgid "" -"When creating the product, Pay attention to the **Product Type** field, as " -"it is important:" -msgstr "" -"Lors de la création du produit, prêtez attention au champ **Type " -"d'article**, car il est important:" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:53 -msgid "" -"Products that are set as **Stockable** or **Consumable** will allow you to " -"keep track of their inventory levels. These options imply stock management " -"and will allow for receiving these kinds of products." -msgstr "" -"Les articles qui sont définis comme **Stockable** ou **Consommable** peuvent" -" être suivis en inventaire. Ces options impliquent la gestion des stocks et " -"la réception sur ces types d'articles." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:58 -msgid "" -"Conversely, products that are set as a **Service** or **Digital Product** " -"will not imply stock management, simply due to the fact that there is no " -"inventory to manage. You will not be able to receive products under either " -"of these designations." -msgstr "" -"A l'inverse, les articles qui sont définis comme **Service** ou **Produit " -"numérique** n'impliquent pas la gestion des stocks, tout simplement en " -"raison du fait qu'il n'y a pas d'inventaire à gérer. Vous ne pourrez pas non" -" plus réceptionner des articles de l'un ou l'autre de ces types." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:64 -msgid "" -"It is recommended that you create a **Miscellaneous** product for all " -"purchases that occur infrequently and do not require inventory valuation or " -"management. If you create such a product, it is recommend to set the product" -" type to **Service**." -msgstr "" -"Il est conseillé de créer un article **Divers** pour tous les achats qui se " -"produisent rarement et ne nécessitent pas de valorisation ou de gestion des " -"stocks. Si vous créez un tel article, il est recommandé de définir le type " -"d'article à **Service**." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:70 -msgid "Managing your Vendor Bills" -msgstr "Gestion de vos Factures Fournisseurs" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:73 -msgid "Purchasing products or services" -msgstr "Achat de marchandises ou de services" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:75 -msgid "" -"From the purchase application, you can create a purchase order with as many " -"products as you need. If the vendor sends you a confirmation or quotation " -"for an order, you may record the order reference number in the **Vendor " -"Reference** field. This will enable you to easily match the PO with the the " -"vendor bill later (as the vendor bill will probably include the Vendor " -"Reference)" -msgstr "" -"Depuis l'application Achats, vous pouvez créer un bon de commande avec " -"autant d'articles que vous le désirez. Si le fournisseur vous envoie une " -"confirmation ou un devis pour une commande, vous pouvez enregistrer le " -"numéro de commande dans le champ **Référence Fournisseur**. Cela vous " -"permettra de faciliter le rapprochement ultérieur du bon de commande avec la" -" facture fournisseur (car la facture fournisseur contiendra probablement la " -"référence fournisseur)" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:85 -msgid "" -"Validate the purchase order and receive the products from the **Inventory** " -"application." -msgstr "" -"Validez la commande fournisseur et réceptionnez les produits avec " -"l'application **Inventaire**." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:89 -msgid "Receiving Products" -msgstr "Réception des Produits" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:91 -msgid "" -"If you purchased any stockable products that you manage the inventory of, " -"you will need to receive the products from the **Inventory** application " -"after you confirm a purchase order. From the **Inventory** dashboard, you " -"should see a button linking you directly to the transfer of products. This " -"button is outlined in red below:" -msgstr "" -"Si vous avez acheté des articles stockables que vous gérez en inventaire, " -"vous aurez besoin de réceptionner les articles dans l'application " -"**Inventaire** après avoir confirmé la commande d'achat. Dans le tableau de " -"bord de l'**Inventaire**, vous trouverez un bouton vous reliant directement " -"au transfert des articles. Ce bouton est entouré en rouge dans " -"l'illustration ci-dessous :" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:100 -msgid "" -"Navigating this route will take you to a list of all orders awaiting to be " -"received." -msgstr "" -"Cliquer sur ce bouton vous amènera à une liste de toutes les commandes en " -"attente de réception." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:106 -msgid "" -"If you have a lot of awaiting orders, apply a filter using the search bar in" -" the upper right. With this search bar, you may filter based on the " -"**Vendor** (or **Partner**), the product, or the source document, also known" -" as the reference of your purchase order. You also have the capability to " -"group the orders by different criteria under **Group By**. Selecting an item" -" from this list will open the following screen where you then will receive " -"the products." -msgstr "" -"Si vous avez beaucoup de commandes en attente, appliquer un filtre en " -"utilisant la barre de recherche en haut à droite. Avec cette barre de " -"recherche, vous pouvez filtrer en fonction du **Fournisseur** (ou " -"**Partenaire*), de l'article ou du document source, c'est à dire la " -"référence de votre commande d'achat. Vous avez également la possibilité de " -"regrouper les commandes selon différents critères avec la fonctionnalité " -"**Grouper Par**. La sélection d'un élément de cette liste va ouvrir l'écran " -"suivant où vous effectuerez alors la réception des produits." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:117 -msgid "Purchasing **Service** products does not trigger a delivery order." -msgstr "" -"L'achat d'articles de type **Service** ne déclenche pas de bon de livraison." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:120 -msgid "Managing Vendor Bills" -msgstr "Gestion des factures fournisseurs" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:122 -msgid "" -"When you receive a **Vendor Bill** for a previous purchase, be sure to " -"record it in the **Purchases** application under the **Control Menu**. You " -"need to create a new vendor bill even if you already registered a purchase " -"order." -msgstr "" -"Lorsque vous recevez une **Facture Fournisseur** d'un achat précédent, " -"assurez-vous de l'enregistrer dans l'application **Achats** par le menu " -"**Contrôle**. Vous devez créer une nouvelle facture fournisseur, même si " -"vous avez déjà enregistré un bon de commande." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:130 -msgid "" -"The first thing you will need to do upon creating a **Vendor Bill** is to " -"select the appropriate **Vendor** as this will also pull up any associated " -"accounting or pricelist information. From there, you can choose to specify " -"any one or multiple purchase orders to populate the vendor bill with. When " -"you select a purchase order from the list, Odoo will pull any uninvoiced " -"products associated to that purchase order and automatically populate that " -"information below. If you are having a hard time finding the appropriate " -"vendor bill, you may search through the list by inputting the vendor " -"reference number or your internal purchase order number." -msgstr "" -"La première chose que vous devez faire lors de la création d'une **Facture " -"Fournisseur** est de sélectionner le **Fournisseur** concerné, car cela va " -"ainsi récupérer toutes les informations de comptabilité ou de listes de prix" -" qui lui sont associées. De là, vous pouvez choisir de spécifier un ou " -"plusieurs bons de commande pour remplir la facture. Lorsque vous " -"sélectionnez une bon de commande à partir de la liste, Odoo va récupérer " -"tous les articles non facturés associés à cette commande et va remplir " -"automatiquement les informations comme ci-dessous. Si vous avez des " -"difficultés à trouver la facture du fournisseur concerné, vous pouvez " -"effectuer une recherche dans la liste en saisissant la référence du " -"fournisseur ou votre numéro interne de commande." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:144 -msgid "" -"While the invoice is in draft state, you can make any modifications you need" -" (i.e. remove or add product lines, modify quantities, and change prices)." -msgstr "" -"Tant que la facture est à l'état brouillon, vous pouvez faire toutes les " -"modifications que vous voulez (par ex. supprimer ou ajouter des lignes " -"d'articles, modifier les quantités et les prix)." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:149 -msgid "Your vendor may send you several bills for the same purchase order if:" -msgstr "" -"Votre fournisseur peut vous envoyer plusieurs factures pour le même Bon de " -"Commande si :" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:151 -msgid "" -"Your vendor is in back-order and is sending you invoices as they ship the " -"products." -msgstr "" -"Votre fournisseur est en reliquats et vous envoie les factures lorsqu'il " -"expédie les articles." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:154 -msgid "Your vendor is sending you a partial bill or asking for a deposit." -msgstr "" -"Votre fournisseur vous envoie une facture partielle ou vous demande un " -"acompte." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:156 -msgid "" -"Every time you record a new vendor bill, Odoo will automatically populate " -"the product quantities based on what has been received from the vendor. If " -"this value is showing a zero, this means that you have not yet received this" -" product and simply serves as a reminder that the product is not in hand and" -" you may need to inquire further into this. At any point in time, before you" -" validate the vendor bill, you may override this zero quantity." -msgstr "" -"Chaque fois que vous enregistrez une nouvelle facture fournisseur, Odoo " -"remplit automatiquement les quantités en fonction de ce qui a été " -"réceptionné. Si cette valeur affiche un zéro, cela signifie que vous n'avez " -"pas encore reçu cet article et sert simplement à vous rappeler que l'article" -" n'est pas en stock et que vous devriez vous renseigner davantage à ce " -"sujet. A tout moment, avant de valider la facture fournisseur, vous pouvez " -"modifier cette quantité qui est à zéro." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:165 -msgid "Vendor Bill Matching" -msgstr "Rapprochement de Facture Fournisseur" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:168 -msgid "What to do if your vendor bill does not match what you received" -msgstr "" -"Que faire si votre facture fournisseur ne correspond pas à ce que vous avez " -"reçu" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:170 -msgid "" -"If the bill you receive from the vendor has different quantities than what " -"Odoo automatically populates as quantities, this could be due to several " -"reasons:" -msgstr "" -"Si la facture que vous recevez du fournisseur a des quantités différentes de" -" celles qu'Odoo a remplies automatiquement, cela peut être dû à plusieurs " -"raisons :" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:174 -msgid "" -"The vendor is incorrectly charging you for products and/or services that you" -" have not ordered." -msgstr "" -"Te fournisseur vous a facturé des articles et/ou des services que vous " -"n'avez pas commandés." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:177 -msgid "" -"The vendor is billing you for products that you might not have received yet," -" as the invoicing control may be based on ordered or received quantities." -msgstr "" -"Te vendeur vous a facturé des articles que vous n'avez pas encore reçus, " -"alors que le contrôle de facturation est basé sur les quantités commandées " -"et reçues." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:181 -msgid "Or the vendor did not bill you for previously purchased products." -msgstr "Ou le vendeur ne vous a pas facturé des articles déjà achetés." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:183 -msgid "" -"In these instances it is recommended that you verify that the bill, and any " -"associated purchase order to the vendor, are accurate and that you " -"understand what you have ordered and what you have already received." -msgstr "" -"Dans ces situations, il est recommandé de vérifier que la facture, et toute " -"commande associées au vendeur, sont exactes, et que vous comprenez ce que " -"vous avez commandé et ce que vous avez déjà réceptionné." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:187 -msgid "" -"If you are unable to find a purchase order related to a vendor bill, this " -"could be due to one of a few reasons:" -msgstr "" -"Si vous ne parvenez pas à trouver un commande relié à une facture " -"fournisseur, cela peut être dû à l'une des raisons suivantes :" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:190 -msgid "" -"The vendor has already invoiced you for this purchase order, therefore it is" -" not going to appear anywhere in the selection." -msgstr "" -"Le fournisseur vous a déjà facturé pour cette commande, donc elle ne va " -"apparaître nulle part dans la sélection." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:193 -msgid "" -"Someone in the company forgot to record a purchase order for this vendor." -msgstr "" -"Quelqu'un dans votre entreprise a oublié d'enregistrer une commande pour ce " -"fournisseur." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:196 -msgid "Or the vendor is charging you for something you did not order." -msgstr "" -"Ou le fournisseur vous facture quelque chose que vous n'avez pas commandé." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:199 -msgid "How product quantities are managed" -msgstr "Comment les quantités d'articles sont gérées" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:201 -msgid "" -"By default, services are managed based on ordered quantities, while " -"stockables and consumables are managed based on received quantities." -msgstr "" -"Par défaut, les services sont gérés en fonction des quantités commandées, " -"alors que les articles stockables et les consommables sont gérés en fonction" -" des quantités reçues." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:204 -msgid "" -"If you need to manage products based on ordered quantities over received " -"quantities, you will need to enable **Debug Mode** from the **About Odoo** " -"information. Once debug mode is activated, select the product(s) you wish to" -" modify, and you should see a new field appear, labeled **Control Purchase " -"Bills**." -msgstr "" -"Si vous avez besoin de gérer les produits en fonction des quantités " -"commandées plutôt qu'en fonction des quantités reçues, vous devez activer le" -" **Mode Développeur**, dans la fenêtre d'information **A propos de**. Une " -"fois le mode développeur activé, sélectionnez les article(s) que vous " -"souhaitez modifier, et vous devriez voir un nouveau champ, marqué **Contrôle" -" des factures d'achats**." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:213 -msgid "" -"You can then change the default management method for the selected product " -"to be based on either:" -msgstr "" -"Vous pouvez alors modifier la méthode de gestion par défaut pour l'article " -"sélectionné, qui pour être basée sur :" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:216 -msgid "Ordered quantities" -msgstr "Quantités commandées" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:218 -msgid "Received quantities" -msgstr "Quantités reçues" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:221 -msgid "Batch Billing" -msgstr "Facturation par lots" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:223 -msgid "" -"When creating a vendor bill and selecting the appropriate purchase order, " -"you may continue to select additional purchase orders and Odoo will add the " -"additional line items from that purchase order. If you have not deleted the " -"previous line items from the first purchase order the bill will be linked to" -" all the appropriate purchase orders." -msgstr "" -"Lors de la création d'une facture fournisseur et après avoir sélectionné la " -"commande concernée, vous pouvez continuer à sélectionner des bons de " -"commande supplémentaires et Odoo va ajouter les lignes supplémentaires à " -"partir de ces bons de commande .. Si vous n'avez pas supprimé les lignes " -"précédentes du premier bon de commande, la facture sera liée à tous les bons" -" de commande sélectionnés." #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/cancel.rst:3 msgid "Cancel a purchase order" @@ -1327,6 +926,8 @@ msgstr "Fournisseur" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/create.rst:0 msgid "You can find a vendor by its Name, TIN, Email or Internal Reference." msgstr "" +"Vous pouvez trouver un fournisseur par son nom, numéro de TVA, courriel ou " +"sa référence interne." #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/create.rst:0 msgid "Vendor Reference" @@ -2302,7 +1903,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../purchase/replenishment/flows/setup_stock_rule.rst:33 -msgid "See also: :doc:`../../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers`" +msgid "See also: :doc:`../../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers`" msgstr "" #: ../../purchase/replenishment/flows/setup_stock_rule.rst:35 diff --git a/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..41e557854 --- /dev/null +++ b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po @@ -0,0 +1,415 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2015-TODAY, Odoo S.A. +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +# Translators: +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Cécile Collart , 2019 +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-11-20 09:24+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Cécile Collart , 2019\n" +"Language-Team: French (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/fr/)\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Language: fr\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n > 1);\n" + +#: ../../quality.rst:5 +msgid "Quality" +msgstr "Qualité" + +#: ../../quality/alert.rst:3 +msgid "Alert" +msgstr "Alerte" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:3 +msgid "Generate a Quality Alert from a Manufacturing Order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Speaking of manufacturing orders, you have two different situations to " +"consider in Odoo. Those two will result in two different processes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:8 +msgid "You work with a simple manufacturing flow;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:10 +msgid "You work with a complex manufacturing flow that includes routings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:13 +msgid "Simple manufacturing flow" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:15 +msgid "" +"If you work with simple manufacturing orders, the *Quality Alerts* will be " +"launched from the manufacturing order itself. When manufacturing a product " +"for which you need to process quality controls, a button *Quality Alert* " +"will appear on the top of your manufacturing order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:23 +msgid "" +"By clicking on the button, you can specify the quality problem that arose " +"during the process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:29 +msgid "" +"If one of the quality checks failed, the button will be highlighted on the " +"document. If not, the button won’t be highlighted." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:36 ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:50 +msgid "Manufacturing Flow with Routings" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:38 +msgid "" +"If you work with routings defined on your manufacturing orders, the quality " +"alerts will be launched directly from the work orders on which the quality " +"checks took place." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:48 +msgid "" +"Then, a button *Quality Alert* will be available from the work order view. " +"When you click on the button, you can specify the quality problem that " +"appeared during the process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:3 +msgid "Generate a Quality Alert from a Transfer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:6 +msgid "Use the Quality Alert" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Every time you perform some *Quality Checks* on a transfer, a *Quality " +"Alert* button appears. You can always use it. The button is automatically " +"highlighted once you have a failed quality check for the transfer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:16 +msgid "" +"If you click on that *Quality Alert* button, you can specify what was the " +"problem with the product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:22 +msgid "" +"The *Quality Alert* that is created from the transfer can be found via the " +"button appearing on the top right corner of the transfer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:28 +msgid "" +"You can also access all your *Quality Alerts* via the menu, accessible under" +" *Control*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks.rst:3 +msgid "Checks" +msgstr "Chèques" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:3 +msgid "Perform Quality Checks on Manufacturing Orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:5 +msgid "" +"There are two different situations to consider and that will differ in Odoo " +"processes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:8 +msgid "You work with simple manufacturing flows;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:10 +msgid "" +"You work with complex manufacturing flows that are represented by the use of" +" routings in Odoo." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:13 +msgid "Simple Manufacturing Flow" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:16 +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:53 +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:6 +msgid "Create the Quality Control Point" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:18 +msgid "" +"To create a quality control point, open the quality app and go to *Control >" +" Control Points*. There, hit create. Make sure to select *Manufacturing* as " +"operation and choose the type of quality check you want to perform." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:27 +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:69 +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:17 +msgid "Process the Quality Check" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:29 +msgid "" +"Once your *Quality Control Point* has been created, you can create a " +"manufacturing order for your product. Now, and before marking the " +"manufacturing as done, you can register the *Quality Checks*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:39 +msgid "" +"Once you have performed your quality checks, you can find them via the " +"*Quality Checks* button available on the manufacturing order form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:46 +msgid "" +"If you want to access all your quality checks, you can do this by opening " +"the quality checks menu, under quality control." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:55 +msgid "" +"If you want to create a *Quality Control Point*, open the *Quality* app and " +"go to *Control > Control Points*. Then, click on create. Make sure to select" +" *Manufacturing* as operation and select the work order operation on which " +"the quality check should be performed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:64 +msgid "" +"Choosing the work order operation is necessary if you want the quality " +"checks to be performed in the work orders. After that, you can choose the " +"type of quality check." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:71 +msgid "" +"Once your *Quality Control Point* has been configured, create a " +"manufacturing order for your product. You have to plan it if you want to " +"generate the necessary work orders." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:78 +msgid "" +"Now, process the work order and your quality check will appear. In this " +"example, the quality check requests to enter the serial number of the Table " +"Top component." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:3 +msgid "Perform Quality Checks on Transfers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:8 +msgid "" +"To create a *Quality Control Point*, open the *Quality* application. Then, " +"go to *Quality Control > Control Points > Create*. Now, you can define the " +"quality control point you want to apply to a specific product. Don’t forget " +"to select a transfer operation type." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:19 +msgid "" +"Let’s say that we will receive a laptop. First, create a planned receipt for" +" the product. Then, on the receipt, you will see a *Quality Checks* button " +"that appears to proceed to the quality check you configured before." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:27 +msgid "" +"By clicking on it, the instruction set on the quality control point will be " +"displayed and will require the check value." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:33 +msgid "" +"Once the quality check is done, you can find it linked to the corresponding " +"transfer and access it by clicking on the button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:39 +msgid "" +"But, if the quality check failed, the stat button will appear in red " +"(instead of green) and Odoo will suggest you to create a *Quality Alert* by " +"highlighting the corresponding button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:46 +msgid "" +"The quality checks can also be found in the *Quality* application by opening" +" the *Quality Checks* menu, under *Quality Control*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control.rst:3 +msgid "Control" +msgstr "Contrôle" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:3 +msgid "Define Quality Control Points" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:6 +msgid "Quality Control Points" +msgstr "Points de contrôle qualité" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:8 +msgid "" +"If it is the first *Quality Control Point* that you create, know that you " +"need to open the *Quality* app. Then, go to *Quality Control > Control " +"Points*. Once there, you have to define the product on which the quality " +"control will take place, as well as the operation at which it should take " +"place." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:14 +msgid "" +"The *Quality Control Points* can take place during transfers or during the " +"manufacturing process of the products. If you work with routings on your " +"*Bill of Materials*, you have to precise at which step of the manufacturing " +"process the quality control point should be applied." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:19 +msgid "" +"The control type defines at which frequency the quality checks should take " +"place:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:22 +msgid "" +"All Operations: all the operations will generate quality checks to perform;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:24 +msgid "" +"Randomly: the quality checks will only be performed on x% of the operation. " +"You must define the percentage yourself, on the control point;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:26 +msgid "" +"Periodically: the quality checks will be performed periodically. The " +"periodicity is based on the period you define (once a day, once a week)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:32 +msgid "Quality Control Point Types" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:34 +msgid "" +"Now that the rest is configured, you need to define the type of quality " +"check." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:38 +msgid "" +"Some of the types are only available with the manufacturing application." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:41 +msgid "Text" +msgstr "Texte" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:43 +msgid "" +"This control point type allows you to give instructions to your workers " +"during the transfer, or the manufacturing process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:56 +msgid "Take a Picture" +msgstr "Prendre une photo" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:58 +msgid "" +"This control point type asks you to take a picture of the product in a " +"transfer, or when manufacturing it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:71 +msgid "Pass-Fail" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:73 +msgid "" +"This type of control point requires that you specify if the products pass or" +" fail a specific text. It can be applied for both transfers or manufacturing" +" orders." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:80 +msgid "" +"For this kind of control point type, you have the possibility to define a " +"failure message that will give instructions to follow in case of quality " +"check failure." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:94 +msgid "Take a Measure" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:96 +msgid "" +"This control point type requires you to enter the product’s measurements " +"during a transfer, or during the manufacturing process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:102 +msgid "" +"For this kind of control point type, you also have the possibility to define" +" a failure message that will give instructions to the worker." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:115 +msgid "Register Consumed Materials" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:117 +msgid "" +"This control point type requires you register the component serial/lot " +"numbers during the manufacturing process. It is only available if you work " +"with routings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:128 +msgid "Register By-Products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:130 +msgid "" +"With this control point type, you must register the serial/lot number of the" +" by-products that are manufactured. It is also only available with routings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:141 +msgid "Print Label" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:143 +msgid "" +"This control point type allows you to print labels to add to the product " +"during the manufacturing process." +msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po index 454879b64..557921e21 100644 --- a/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po +++ b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po @@ -3,14 +3,25 @@ # This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # +# Translators: +# Saad Thaifa , 2019 +# Maxime Chambreuil , 2019 +# Benjamin Frantzen, 2019 +# Eloïse Stilmant , 2019 +# Nacim ABOURA , 2019 +# Ikati Group SAS , 2019 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Jérôme Tanché , 2019 +# Xavier Belmere , 2019 +# #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 11.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-10-19 10:03+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" -"Last-Translator: Eloïse Stilmant , 2018\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:47+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Xavier Belmere , 2019\n" "Language-Team: French (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/fr/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -796,129 +807,152 @@ msgid "" " to your business. A pricelist is a list of prices or price rules that Odoo " "searches to determine the suggested price. You can set several critarias to " "use a specific price: periods, min. sold quantity (meet a minimum order " -"quantity and get a price break), etc. As pricelists only suggest prices, " -"they can be overridden by users completing sales orders. Choose your pricing" -" strategy from :menuselection:`Sales --> Settings`." +"quantity and get a price break), etc." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:16 -msgid "Several prices per product" +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:9 +msgid "" +"As pricelists only suggest prices, they can be overridden by vendors " +"completing sales orders. Choose your pricing strategy from " +":menuselection:`Sales --> Settings`." msgstr "" #: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:18 msgid "" +"*A single sale price per product :* doesn't let you adapt prices, it use " +"default product price ;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:19 +msgid "" +"*Different prices per customer segment :* you will set several prices per " +"products ;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:20 +msgid "" +"*Advanced pricing based on formula :* will let you apply discounts, margins " +"and roundings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:23 +msgid "Several prices per product" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:25 +msgid "" "To apply several prices per product, select *Different prices per customer " "segment* in :menuselection:`Sales --> Settings`. Then open the *Sales* tab " "in the product detail form. You can settle following strategies." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:23 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:30 msgid "Prices per customer segment" msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:25 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:32 msgid "" "Create pricelists for your customer segments: e.g. registered, premium, etc." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:30 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:37 msgid "" "The default pricelist applied to any new customer is *Public Pricelist*. To " "segment your customers, open the customer detail form and change the *Sale " "Pricelist* in the *Sales & Purchases* tab." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:38 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:45 msgid "Temporary prices" msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:40 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:47 msgid "Apply deals for bank holidays, etc. Enter start and end dates dates." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:46 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:53 msgid "" "Make sure you have default prices set in the pricelist outside of the deals " "period. Otherwise you might have issues once the period over." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:50 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:57 msgid "Prices per minimum quantity" msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:56 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:63 msgid "" "The prices order does not matter. The system is smart and applies first " "prices that match the order date and/or the minimal quantities." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:60 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:67 msgid "Discounts, margins, roundings" msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:62 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:69 msgid "" -"The third option allows to set price change rules. Changes can be relative " -"to the product list/catalog price, the product cost price, or to another " -"pricelist. Changes are calculated via discounts or surcharges and can be " -"forced to fit within floor (minumum margin) and ceilings (maximum margins). " -"Prices can be rounded to the nearest cent/dollar or multiple of either " -"(nearest 5 cents, nearest 10 dollars)." +"*Advanced pricing based on formula* allows to set price change rules. " +"Changes can be relative to the product list/catalog price, the product cost " +"price, or to another pricelist. Changes are calculated via discounts or " +"surcharges and can be forced to fit within floor (minumum margin) and " +"ceilings (maximum margins). Prices can be rounded to the nearest cent/dollar" +" or multiple of either (nearest 5 cents, nearest 10 dollars)." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:69 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:76 msgid "" "Once installed go to :menuselection:`Sales --> Configuration --> Pricelists`" " (or :menuselection:`Website Admin --> Catalog --> Pricelists` if you use " "e-Commerce)." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:77 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:84 msgid "" "Each pricelist item can be associated to either all products, to a product " "internal category (set of products) or to a specific product. Like in second" " option, you can set dates and minimum quantities." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:84 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:91 msgid "" "Once again the system is smart. If a rule is set for a particular item and " "another one for its category, Odoo will take the rule of the item." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:86 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:93 msgid "Make sure at least one pricelist item covers all your products." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:88 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:95 msgid "There are 3 modes of computation: fix price, discount & formula." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:93 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:100 msgid "Here are different price settings made possible thanks to formulas." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:96 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:103 msgid "Discounts with roundings" msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:98 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:105 msgid "e.g. 20% discounts with prices rounded up to 9.99." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:104 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:111 msgid "Costs with markups (retail)" msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:106 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:113 msgid "e.g. sale price = 2*cost (100% markup) with $5 of minimal margin." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:112 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:119 msgid "Prices per country" msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:113 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:120 msgid "" "Pricelists can be set by countries group. Any new customer recorded in Odoo " "gets a default pricelist, i.e. the first one in the list matching the " @@ -926,39 +960,39 @@ msgid "" "pricelist without any country group." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:116 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:123 msgid "The default pricelist can be replaced when creating a sales order." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:118 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:125 msgid "You can change the pricelists sequence by drag & drop in list view." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:121 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:128 msgid "Compute and show discount % to customers" msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:123 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:130 msgid "" "In case of discount, you can show the public price and the computed discount" " % on printed sales orders and in your eCommerce catalog. To do so:" msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:125 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:132 msgid "" "Check *Allow discounts on sales order lines* in :menuselection:`Sales --> " "Configuration --> Settings --> Quotations & Sales --> Discounts`." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:126 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:133 msgid "Apply the option in the pricelist setup form." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:133 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:140 msgid ":doc:`currencies`" msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:134 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:141 msgid ":doc:`../../../ecommerce/maximizing_revenue/pricing`" msgstr "" @@ -1052,10 +1086,757 @@ msgid "" "Attributes / Attribute / ID)." msgstr "" +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:3 +msgid "Using product variants" +msgstr "Utilisation de variantes d'articles" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Product variants are used to manage products having different variations, " +"like size, color, etc. It allows managing the product at the template level " +"(for all variations) and at the variant level (specific attributes)." +msgstr "" +"Les variantes d'article sont utilisées pour gérer les produits ayant " +"différentes variations, comme la taille, la couleur, etc. Il permet de gérer" +" l'article au niveau du modèle (pour toutes les variantes) et au niveau de " +"la variante (attributs spécifiques)." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:10 +msgid "" +"As an example, a company selling t-shirts may have the following product:" +msgstr "" +"A titre d'exemple, une entreprise qui vend des t-shirts peut avoir l'article" +" suivant :" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:13 +msgid "B&C T-shirt" +msgstr "B&C T-shirt" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:15 +msgid "Sizes: S, M, L, XL, XXL" +msgstr "Tailles : S, M, L, XL, XXL" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:16 +msgid "Colors: Blue, Red, White, Black" +msgstr "Couleurs : Bleu, Rouge, Blanc, Noir" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:18 +msgid "" +"In this example, **B&C T-Shirt** is called the product template and **B&C " +"T-Shirt, S, Blue** is a variant. Sizes and color are **attributes**." +msgstr "" +"Dans cet exemple, **B&C T-Shirt** est le modèle d'article, et **B&C T-Shirt," +" S, Bleu** est une variante. La taille et la couleur sont des **attributs**." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:22 +msgid "" +"The above example has a total of 20 different products (5 sizes x 4 colors)." +" Each one of these products has its own inventory, sales, etc." +msgstr "" +"L'exemple ci-dessus a un total de 20 articles différents (5 tailles x 4 " +"couleurs). Chacun de ces articles a son propre stock, ses propres ventes, " +"etc..." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:26 +msgid "Impact of variants" +msgstr "Impact des variantes" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:28 +msgid "" +"**Barcode**: the code and barcode is associated to a variant, not the " +"template. Every variant may have its own barcode / SKU." +msgstr "" +"**Code à barres**: le code et le code à barres est associé à la variante, " +"pas au modèle. Chaque variante peut avoir son propre code à barres / UGS." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:31 +msgid "" +"**Price**: every product variant has its own public price that is computed " +"based on the template price ($20) with an optional extra for every variant " +"(+$3 for color red). However, you can define pricelist rules that apply on " +"the template or the variant." +msgstr "" +"**Prix**: chaque variante du produit a son propre prix public qui est " +"calculée en fonction du prix du modèle (20€) avec un prix supplémentaire " +"pour chaque variante (+3€ pour la couleur rouge). Cependant, vous pouvez " +"définir des règles sur le tarif qui s'appliquent au modèle ou à la variante." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:36 +msgid "" +"**Inventory**: the inventory is managed by product variant. You don't own " +"t-shirts, you only own \"T-shirts, S, Red\", or \"T-Shirts, M, Blue\". For " +"information purpose, on the product template form, you get the inventory " +"that is the sum of every variant. (but the actual inventory is computed by " +"variant)" +msgstr "" +"**Inventaire**: le stock est géré par variante de produit. Vous ne possédez " +"pas des t-shirts, vous possédez des \"T-shirts, S, Rouge\", ou des " +"\"T-shirts, M, Bleu\". A titre d'information, sur la fiche du modèle " +"d'article, est indiqué l'inventaire qui est la somme de toutes les " +"variantes. (Mais l'inventaire réel est calculé par variante)" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:42 +msgid "" +"**Picture**: the picture is related to the variant, every variation of a " +"product may have its own primary picture." +msgstr "" +"**Image**: l'image est liée à la variante, chaque variante d'un article peut" +" avoir sa propre image." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:45 +msgid "" +"**Other fields**: most of the other fields belongs to the product template. " +"If you update them, it updates automatically all the variants. (example: " +"Income Account, Taxes)" +msgstr "" +"**Autres champs**: la plupart des autres champs appartiennent au modèle " +"d'article. Si vous les mettez à jour, cela met automatiquement à jour toutes" +" les variantes (par ex. : compte de revenus, taxes)." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:50 +msgid "Should you use variants?" +msgstr "Devez-vous utiliser des variantes ?" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:53 +msgid "When should you use variants?" +msgstr "Quand devez-vous utiliser des variantes ?" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:55 +msgid "Using variants has the following impacts:" +msgstr "L'utilisation de variantes a les conséquences suivantes :" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:57 +msgid "" +"**eCommerce**: in your online shop, the customer will only see product " +"templates in the catalog page. Once the visitor click on such a product, he " +"will have options to choose amongst the variants (colors, sizes, …)" +msgstr "" +"**eCommerce** : dans votre boutique en ligne, le client ne verra que les " +"modèles d'article dans le catalogue. Une fois que le visiteur clique sur un " +"tel article, il aura des options à choisir parmi les variantes (couleurs, " +"tailles, ...)" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:62 +msgid "" +"**Manufacturing**: Using variants allows to define only one bill of material" +" for a product template and slight variations for some of the variants. " +"Example: instead of creating a Bill of Material for \"T-shirt, Red, S\", you" +" create a bill of material for \"T-shirt\" and add some lines that are " +"specific to the dimension S, and other lines specific to the color Red." +msgstr "" +"**Fabrication**: l'utilisation de variantes permet de définir une seule " +"nomenclature par modèle d'article, et de légères variations pour certaines " +"des variantes. Exemple: au lieu de créer une nomenclature pour \"T-shirt, " +"Rouge, S\", vous créez une nomenclature pour \"T-shirt\" et vous ajoutez " +"quelques lignes qui sont spécifiques à la dimension S, et d'autres " +"spécifiques à la la couleur Rouge." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:69 +msgid "" +"**Pricing**: The default price of a product is computed using the price of " +"the product template and add the optional extra price on each dimension of " +"the variant. This way, variant prices are easier to maintain since you don't" +" have to set the price for every variant. However, it's possible to create " +"pricelist rules to fix price per variants too." +msgstr "" +"**Tarification**: le prix par défaut d'un article est calculé en utilisant " +"le prix du modèle d'article, et en ajoutant le prix supplémentaire pour " +"chaque attirbut de la variante. De cette façon, les prix des variantes sont " +"plus faciles à maintenir puisque vous n'êtes pas obligé de définir le prix " +"pour chaque variante. Il est toutefois aussi possible de créer des règles de" +" tarif pour fixer le prix par variante." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:77 +msgid "When should you avoid using variants?" +msgstr "Quand devez-vous éviter d'utiliser des variantes ?" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:79 +msgid "" +"Using variants may add a level of complexity on the way you use Odoo. You " +"should consider using variants only if you need it to reduce the complexity " +"of managing lots of products that are similars." +msgstr "" +"L'utilisation de variantes peut ajouter un niveau de complexité sur la façon" +" dont vous utilisez Odoo. Vous ne devez envisager d'utiliser des variantes " +"que pour réduire la complexité de la gestion des lots d'articles qui sont " +"similaires." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:83 +msgid "" +"As an example, importing your initial product catalog is more complex if you" +" use variants. You can't just import a list of products, you must import " +"product templates and all their related variations." +msgstr "" +"Par exemple, l'importation de votre liste d'articles pré-existants est plus " +"complexe si vous utilisez des variantes. Vous ne pouvez pas juste importer " +"une liste d'articles, vous devez importer les modèles d'articles et leur " +"variantes." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:87 +msgid "" +"In addition to that, you should also carefully select the dimensions that " +"you manage as separate product templates and those as variants. As an " +"example, a company having these products:" +msgstr "" +"En plus de cela, vous devez également sélectionner avec soin les " +"caractéristiques que vous gérez en tant que modèles de d'articles distincts " +"et ceux que vous gérez en variantes. A titre d'exemple, une entreprise ayant" +" ces produits :" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:91 +msgid "Quality: T-Shirts, Polos, Shirts" +msgstr "Qualité : T-Shirts, Polos, Shirts" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:93 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:105 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:110 +msgid "Color: Red, Blue" +msgstr "Couleur : Rouge, Bleu" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:95 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:106 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:111 +msgid "Size: S, M, L, XL" +msgstr "Taille : S, M, L, XL" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:97 +msgid "" +"In such a use case, you could create 1 template with three dimensions of " +"variants (Layout, T-Shirts, Polos). But, it's recommended to create two " +"different product templates as T-shirts may highly differ from polos or " +"shirts and customer expect to see these as two different products in the " +"e-Commerce:" +msgstr "" +"Dans une telle situation, vous pourriez créer 1 modèle avec trois dimensions" +" de variantes (Qualité, Couleur, Taille). Mais il est plutôt recommandé de " +"créer trois modèles de produits différents, car des T-shirts diffèrent " +"fortement des polos ou des chemises, et les clients s'attendent à voir cela " +"comme trois produits différents dans les boutiques de eCommerce:" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:103 +msgid "Product Template: T-shirt" +msgstr "Modèle d'article : T-shirt" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:108 +msgid "Product Template: Polos" +msgstr "Modèle d'article : Polos" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:114 +#: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:10 +msgid "Configuration" +msgstr "Configuration" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:117 +msgid "Activate the variant feature" +msgstr "Activer la fonctionnalité de variante" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:119 +msgid "" +"Before you can use product variants, you must first activate the product " +"variants in the settings. To do so, you must go to the Sales app. In the " +"menu :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`, locate the **Products " +"Variants** line, and tick the option **Products can have several " +"attributes**, then click on **Apply**." +msgstr "" +"Avant de pouvoir utiliser des variantes d'articles, vous devez d'abord " +"activer les variantes d'article dans les réglages. Pour ce faire, vous devez" +" aller dans l'application de Ventes. Dans le menu " +":menuselection:`Configuration --> Configuration`, recherchez la ligne " +"**Variantes d'articles**, et cochez l'option **Les produits peuvent avoir " +"plusieurs attributs...**, puis cliquez sur **Appliquer**." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:129 +msgid "Creating products with variants" +msgstr "Création d'articles avec des variantes" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:131 +msgid "" +"Once you have activated the variant option, you can add variants to your " +"products. To do so, go to the Sales module, :menuselection:`Sales --> " +"Products`. It is also accessible from the Purchase and inventory modules." +msgstr "" +"Une fois que vous avez activé l'option de variante, vous pouvez ajouter des " +"variantes à vos articles. Pour ce faire, allez dans l'application de Ventes," +" puis dans :menuselection:`Ventes --> Articles`. C'est également accessible " +"à partir des applications Achats et Inventaire." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:135 +msgid "Now, click on the product you wish to add variants to." +msgstr "" +"Maintenant, cliquez sur l'article auquel vous voulez ajouter des variantes." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:137 +msgid "" +"In the product page, a new tab called Variants has appeared. The number in " +"purple written on top is the number of variants this product currently has. " +"To add new variants, click on the tile. In the new window, click on " +"**Create**." +msgstr "" +"Sur la fiche article, un nouvel onglet appelé Variantes est présent. Le " +"nombre écrit en violet en haut de la fiche est le nombre de variantes que " +"l'article possède actuellement. Pour ajouter de nouvelles variantes, cliquez" +" sur ce bouton \"# Variantes\". Dans la nouvelle fenêtre, cliquez sur " +"**Créer**." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:142 +msgid "" +"In **Attributes**, click on the rolldown menu and select the type of " +"variance you wish to add. If the variant does not yet exist, you can create " +"it on the fly by clicking on Create and edit…" +msgstr "" +"Dans **Caractéristiques**, cliquez sur le menu déroulant et sélectionnez le " +"type de la variante que vous souhaitez ajouter. Si la variante n'existe pas " +"encore, vous pouvez la créer à la volée en cliquant sur Créer et modifier " +"..." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:149 +msgid "" +"In the Attributes window, the **Value** field is the description of the " +"attribute such as Green, Plastic or 32GB. The **Attribute** field is the " +"type of variant such as Color, Material or Memory." +msgstr "" +"Dans la fenêtre Caractéristiques, le champ **Valeur** est la description de " +"l'attribut tel que Vert, Plastique ou 32Go. Le champ **Attribut** est le " +"type de variante, comme Couleur, Matériau ou Mémoire." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:156 +msgid "" +"You can add a cost for the variant on the fly by adding it in the " +"**Attribute Price Extra** field, or choose to modify it later. Click on " +"**Save**." +msgstr "" +"Vous pouvez ajouter à la volée un coût pour la variante, dans le champ " +"**Supplément pour cette caractéristique**, ou choisir de le modifier " +"ultérieurement. Cliquez sur **Sauvegarder**." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:160 +msgid "" +"You can also add a different barcode and internal reference to the variant." +msgstr "" +"Vous pouvez également ajouter un code à barres et une référence interne " +"différents à la variante." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:163 +msgid "" +"When you have entered all the specifications of the variant, click on " +"**Save**." +msgstr "" +"Lorsque vous avez saisi toutes les spécifications de la variante, cliquez " +"sur **Sauvegarder**." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:167 +msgid "Managing Product Variants" +msgstr "Gestion des Variantes d'Article" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:170 +msgid "Introduction" +msgstr "Introduction" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:172 +msgid "" +"The examples below are all based on this product template that has two " +"variant attributes :" +msgstr "" +"Les exemples ci-dessous sont tous basés sur ce modèle d'article qui a deux " +"variantes :" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:175 +msgid "T-Shirt B&C" +msgstr "T-Shirt B&C" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:177 +msgid "Color: Red, Blue, White" +msgstr "Couleur : Rouge, Bleu, Blanc" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:179 +msgid "Size: S, M, L, XL, XXL" +msgstr "Taille : S, M, L, XL, XXL" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:182 +msgid "Managing combination possibilities" +msgstr "Gestion des possibilités de combinaison" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:184 +msgid "" +"By default, with the above product template, you get 15 different products " +"(3 colors, 5 sizes). If the XXL size only exists for red and blue t-shirts, " +"you can deactivate the white product variant." +msgstr "" +"Par défaut, avec le modèle d'article ci-dessus, vous avez 15 articles " +"différents (3 couleurs, 5 tailles). Si la taille XXL n'existe que pour des " +"t-shirts rouges et bleus, vous pouvez désactiver la variante blanche." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:188 +msgid "" +"To do this, click on the **Variants** button, select the XXL, White T-shirt." +" From the product form, uncheck the **Active** box of the T-shirt White, " +"XXL." +msgstr "" +"Pour ce faire, cliquez sur le bouton **15 Variantes**, sélectionnez le " +"T-shirt XXL, Rouge. Dans la fiche de l'article, décochez la case **Actif**. " +"Faites de même pour l'article T-shirt XXL, Bleu." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:197 +msgid "" +"That deactivating a product is different than having an inventory of 0." +msgstr "" +"Cette désactivation d'article est une chose différente que d'avoir un " +"inventaire de 0." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:200 +msgid "Setting a price per variant" +msgstr "Définition d'un prix par variante" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:202 +msgid "" +"You can add a cost over the main price for some of the variants of a " +"product." +msgstr "" +"Vous pouvez ajouter un coût à ajouter au prix principal pour certaines " +"variantes d'un article." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:205 +msgid "" +"Once you have activated the variant option, you can add variants to your " +"products. To do so, go to the Sales module, open :menuselection:`Sales --> " +"Products` and click on the product you want to modify. Click on the " +"**Variant Prices** button to access the list of variant values." +msgstr "" +"Une fois que vous avez activé l'option de variante, vous pouvez ajouter des " +"variantes à vos articles. Pour ce faire, allez dans l'application de Ventes," +" puis dans :menuselection:`Ventes --> Articles` et cliquez sur l'article que" +" vous voulez modifier. Cliquez sur le bouton **Prix de la Variante** pour " +"accéder à la liste des valeurs de variante." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:213 +msgid "" +"Click on the variant name you wish to add a value to, to make the 3 fields " +"editable. In the **Attribute Price Extra** field, add the cost of the " +"variant that will be added to the original price." +msgstr "" +"Cliquez sur le nom de la variante à laquelle vous souhaitez ajouter une " +"valeur, pour rendre les 3 champs modifiables. Dans le champ **Supplément " +"pour cette caractéristique**, ajoutez le coût de la variante qui sera ajouté" +" au prix initial." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:220 +msgid "When you have entered all the extra values, click on **Save**." +msgstr "" +"Lorsque vous avez saisi toutes les valeurs supplémentaires, cliquez sur " +"**Sauvegarder**." + #: ../../sales/products_prices/taxes.rst:3 msgid "Set taxes" msgstr "" +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon.rst:3 +msgid "Amazon MWS Connector" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:3 +msgid "Manage Amazon orders in Odoo" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:6 +msgid "Synchronization of orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Orders are automatically fetched from Amazon and synchronized in Odoo at " +"regular intervals. The synchronization is based on the Amazon status: only " +"orders whose status has changed since the last synchronization are fetched " +"from Amazon. For **FBA** (Fulfilled by Amazon), only **Shipped** and " +"**Canceled** orders are fetched. For **FBM** (Fulfilled by Merchant), the " +"same is done for **Unshipped** and **Canceled** orders. For each " +"synchronized order, a sales order and a customer are created in Odoo if they" +" are not yet registered." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:15 +msgid "" +"If you did not request access to Personally Identifiable Information of your" +" customers in the `Developer Registration and Assessment form `_, the customers are created anonymously (the name, postal " +"address and phone number are omitted) and named **Amazon Customer**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:20 +msgid "" +"When an order is canceled in Amazon and was already synchronized in Odoo, " +"the corresponding sales order is canceled in Odoo. When an order is canceled" +" in Odoo, a notification is sent to Amazon who will mark it as such in " +"Seller Central and notify the customer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:25 +msgid "" +"To force the synchronization of an order whose status has not changed since " +"the last synchronization, activate the **Developer mode**, navigate to your " +"Amazon account and modify the date under :menuselection:`Orders Follow-up " +"--> Last Order Sync`. Pick a date anterior to the last status change of the " +"order that you wish to synchronize and save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:30 +msgid "" +"To synchronize immediately the orders of your Amazon account, open that " +"later's form in **Developer mode** and click the button **SYNC ORDERS**. The" +" same can be done with order cancellations and pickings by clicking the " +"buttons **SYNC CANCELLATIONS** and **SYNC PICKINGS**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:36 +msgid "Manage deliveries in FBM" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:38 +msgid "" +"When a **FBM** (Fulfilled by Merchant) order is synchronized in Odoo, a " +"picking is created along with the sales order and the customer. You can " +"either ship all the ordered products to your customer at once or ship " +"products partially by using backorders." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:42 +msgid "" +"When a picking related to the order is confirmed, a notification is sent to " +"Amazon who will, in turn, notify the customer that the order (or a part of " +"it) is on its way." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:46 +msgid "Follow deliveries in FBA" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:48 +msgid "" +"When a **FBA** (Fulfilled by Amazon) order is synchronized in Odoo, a stock " +"move is recorded for each sales order item so that it is saved in your " +"system. Inventory managers can find such moves in :menuselection:`Inventory " +"--> Reporting --> Product Moves`. They pick up products in a specific " +"inventory location called **Amazon**. This location represents your stock in" +" Amazon's warehouses and allows you to manage the stock of your products " +"under the FBA program." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:54 +msgid "" +"To follow your Amazon (FBA) stock in Odoo, you can make an inventory " +"adjustment after replenishing it. You can also trigger an automated " +"replenishment from reordering rules on the Amazon location." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:58 +msgid "" +"The Amazon location is configurable by Amazon account managed in Odoo. All " +"accounts of the same company use the same location by default. It is however" +" possible to follow the stock by marketplace. First, remove the marketplace " +"for which you want to follow the stock separately from the list of " +"synchronized marketplaces. Then, create another registration for this " +"account and remove all marketplaces, except the one to isolate from the " +"others. Finally, assign another stock location to the second registration of" +" your account." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:67 +msgid "Issue invoices and register payments" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:69 +msgid "" +"You can issue invoices for Amazon orders in Odoo. Click **Create Invoice** " +"in the sales order to do so. You can also do it in batch from the list view " +"of orders. Then, confirm and send the invoices to your customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:73 +msgid "" +"To display only Amazon-related orders on the list view, you can filter " +"orders based on the sales team." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:76 +msgid "" +"As the customer has paid Amazon as an intermediary, you should register " +"invoice payments in a payment journal dedicated to Amazon (e.g. Amazon " +"Payments, with a dedicated intermediary account). You can do the same with " +"the vendor bill received from Amazon and dedicated to commissions. When you " +"receive the balance on your bank account at the end of the month and record " +"your bank statements in Odoo, you simply credit the Amazon intermediary " +"account by the amount received." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:83 +msgid "Follow your Amazon sales in sales reporting" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:85 +msgid "" +"As a sales team is set on your account under the tab **Order Follow-up**, " +"this helps you give quick glances at the figures in just a few clicks in " +"Sales reporting. By default, your account's sales team is shared between all" +" of your company's accounts." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:89 +msgid "" +"If you wish, you can change the sales team on your account for another to " +"perform a separate reporting for the sales of this account." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:92 +msgid "" +"It is also possible to perform reporting on a per-marketplace basis in a " +"similar fashion. First, remove the marketplace you wish to track separately " +"from the list of synchronized marketplaces. Then, create another " +"registration for this account and remove all marketplaces, except the one to" +" isolate from the others. Finally, assign another sales team to one of the " +"two registrations of your account." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:3 +msgid "Configure Amazon MWS Connector in Odoo" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:6 +msgid "Get your Amazon MWS Credentials" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:8 +msgid "" +"In order to integrate Amazon with Odoo, a seller account on professional " +"selling plan is required." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:13 +msgid "" +"Visit the `Amazon Marketplace Web Service documentation " +"`_" +" and follow the instructions to register as a developer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:17 +msgid "" +"Fill the Developer Registration and Assessment form as suggested below and " +"provide your own contact information in the **Developer contact " +"information** section. For the other sections, take care to adapt your " +"responses accordingly to your business case. In particular, select the " +"correct region of your seller account and uncheck the **Merchant Fulfilled " +"Shipping** function if you plan to sell exclusively with the Fulfillment by " +"Amazon service." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:23 +msgid "" +"If you select the **Merchant Fulfilled Shipping** function (i.e. you request" +" access to Personally Identifiable Information (PII) of your customers), " +"Amazon may request you to fill out a second form, depending on the data " +"protection policy in the region of your seller account (e.g. GDPR in " +"Europe)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:32 +msgid "Register your Amazon account in Odoo" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:34 +msgid "" +"To register your seller account in Odoo, navigate to :menuselection:`Sales " +"--> Configuration --> Settings --> Connectors --> Amazon Sync --> Amazon " +"Accounts` and click on **CREATE**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:37 +msgid "" +"The **Seller ID** can be found in Seller Central under the link **Your " +"Merchant Token** on the **Seller Account Information** page. The **Access " +"Key** and the **Secret Key** can be found in Developer Central (where the " +"Developer Registration and Assessment form was located)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:41 +msgid "" +"Once the account is registered, the marketplaces available to this account " +"are synchronized and listed under the **Marketplaces** tab. If you wish, you" +" can remove some from the list of synchronized marketplaces to disable their" +" synchronization." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:46 +msgid "Match database products in Amazon orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:51 +msgid "" +"When an Amazon order is synchronized, up to three sales order items are " +"created in Odoo for each product sold on Amazon: one for the marketplace " +"product, one for the shipping charges (if any) and one for the gift wrapping" +" charges (if any)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:55 +msgid "" +"The selection of a database product for a sales order item is done by " +"matching its **internal reference** with the **SKU** for marketplace items, " +"the **shipping code** for delivery charges, and the **gift wrapping** code " +"for gift wrapping charges." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:59 +msgid "" +"For marketplace products, matchings are saved as **Amazon Offers** which are" +" listed under the **Offers** stat button on the account form. Offers are " +"automatically created when the matching is established and are used for " +"subsequent orders to lookup SKUs. If no offer with a matching SKU is found, " +":ref:`the internal reference is used instead `." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:64 +msgid "" +"It is possible to force the matching of a marketplace item with a specific " +"product by changing either the product or the SKU of an offer. The offer can" +" be manually created if it was not automatically done yet. This is useful if" +" you do not use the internal reference as the SKU or if you sell the product" +" under different conditions." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:69 +msgid "" +"If no database product with a matching internal reference is found for a " +"given SKU or gift wrapping code, a default database product **Amazon Sale** " +"is used. The same is done with the default product **Amazon Shipping** and " +"the shipping code." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:73 +msgid "" +"To modify the default products, activate the **Developer mode** and navigate" +" to :menuselection:`Sales --> Configuration --> Settings --> Connectors --> " +"Amazon Sync --> Default Products`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:78 +msgid "Configure taxes of products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:80 +msgid "" +"To allow for tax reporting of Amazon sales with Odoo, the taxes applied to " +"the sales order items are those set on the product or determined by the " +"fiscal position. Make sure to have set the correct taxes on your products in" +" Odoo or to have it done by a fiscal position, to avoid discrepancies in the" +" subtotals between Seller Central and Odoo." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:85 +msgid "" +"As Amazon does not necessarily apply the same taxes as those configured in " +"Odoo, it may happen that order totals differ by a few cents from that on " +"Seller Central. Those differences can be resolved with a write-off when " +"reconciling the payments in Odoo." +msgstr "" + #: ../../sales/sale_ebay.rst:3 msgid "eBay" msgstr "eBay" @@ -1070,7 +1851,7 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/deadline.rst:5 msgid "" -"As you send quotations, it is important to set a quotation deadline; Both to" +"As you send quotations, it is important to set a quotation deadline, both to" " entice your customer into action with the fear of missing out on an offer " "and to protect yourself. You don't want to have to fulfill an order at a " "price that is no longer cost effective for you." @@ -1098,7 +1879,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/deadline.rst:29 -msgid "On your customer side, they will see this." +msgid "On your customer side, they will see this:" msgstr "" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/different_addresses.rst:3 @@ -1310,10 +2091,6 @@ msgid "" "complete quotation in no time." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:10 -msgid "Configuration" -msgstr "Configuration" - #: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:12 msgid "" "For this feature to work, go to :menuselection:`Sales --> Configuration --> " diff --git a/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..cccad20ef --- /dev/null +++ b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po @@ -0,0 +1,519 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2015-TODAY, Odoo S.A. +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +# Translators: +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Richard Mathot , 2019 +# Eloïse Stilmant , 2019 +# Cécile Collart , 2019 +# William Henrotin , 2019 +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-11-20 09:24+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: William Henrotin , 2019\n" +"Language-Team: French (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/fr/)\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Language: fr\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n > 1);\n" + +#: ../../sms_marketing.rst:5 +msgid "SMS Marketing" +msgstr "Marketing par SMS" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:3 +msgid "Build, send and get reports from a SMS mailing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Why to use SMS? Using SMS Marketing as part of my communication strategies " +"can empower me to expand my markets, considering that in some countries " +"emails are not very used or used at all. It also helps to boost my " +"conversion rate, as this strategy has a high open-rate percentage among " +"people who use smartphones - people usually don’t keep unread SMSs!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:8 +msgid "" +"With Odoo’s SMS Marketing app you can plan, organize, schedule and keep " +"track of your mailings with its easy to use interface." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:12 +msgid "Install the app" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:14 +msgid "Go to *Apps*, search for *SMS Marketing* and click on *Install*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:17 +msgid "Build an SMS mailing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:19 +msgid "Go to *SMS Marketing > Create*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:24 +msgid "" +"First, I’ll be able to specify a *subject* name that will help me to " +"remember what the mailing is about. Under *recipients*, I’ll choose to whom " +"I’d like the SMS to be sent. If I choose *Contact*, all my Odoo contacts " +"(vendor, customers, etc.) will receive my SMS. From there, I can refine my " +"recipient list with the *add filter* option. In the example below, I choose " +"to send it to my contacts living in Belgium." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:31 +msgid "" +"The *Mailing list* option, on the other hand, allows me to choose mailing " +"lists I’ve created with specific contacts or people who have subscribed to " +"my Newsletters, or both! I’m allowed to select more than one *Mailing list*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:36 +msgid "" +"Under the *SMS Content* tab, links can be included and Odoo will " +"automatically generate *link trackers*. Thank to those, I’ll be able to get " +"data about those links." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:38 +msgid "" +"On *Settings* I have the option *include opt-out link* available. If " +"activated, the contact will be able to unsubscribe from the mailing list " +"he’s not interested in anymore." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:43 +msgid "" +"in the *Link Tracker* menu under *Configuration*, I can see the history of " +"my sent links, access them and look at statistics." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:48 +msgid "Double-check that you have the phone number of your contacts saved!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:52 +msgid "Sending my mailing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:56 +msgid "" +"Once I have my mailing created, I must choose when I would like it to be " +"delivered:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:58 +msgid "" +"**Put in queue**: the mailing will be triggered with the next automatic run." +" Interesting option if I don’t mind when the triggering will happen." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:59 +msgid "" +"**Send now**: sends the message immediately. Advised to use this option if " +"there are not that many recipients." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:60 +msgid "" +"**Schedule**: allows me to choose a day and time. Best option for mailings " +"that I would like to send during a specific event, to promote an offer while" +" it is active or to simply plan my content strategy in advance." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:61 +msgid "" +"**Test**: allows me to send an SMS to one or multiple numbers for test " +"purposes. Check, for example, if the link provided lands on the right page " +"while making sure they are responsive. If sending it to multiple numbers, I " +"must remember to use a comma between them." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:65 +msgid "Visualize reports" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:66 +msgid "" +"On the *Reporting* menu, with just a few clicks, I am capable of applying " +"filters, measures and adopt different layouts to do an analysis of the " +"performance of my SMS mailings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:71 +msgid "" +"I can also check the price to send an SMS on your country when clicking on " +"the *information* icon when creating a new SMS." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:76 +msgid "" +"**Buy Credits!** In order to take advantage of the app and its features, " +"make sure you’ve purchased credits. For more information on that access: " +":doc:`../sms_marketing/fqapricing`" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:3 +msgid "Contact lists and Blacklist" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:6 +msgid "Contact lists" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:7 +msgid "" +"Creating my own list of contacts, or importing it, is useful when I want to " +"create specific groups of people, such as the subscribers of my newsletter. " +"It is also the best way to get started if I am coming from another system " +"and already have built an audience. It makes the SMS distribution a lot " +"easier." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:9 +msgid "" +"Go to *Contacts lists > Contacts lists > Create*. I’ll choose a name for my " +"*Mailing list*, and activate the option *Public* if I would like to make the" +" mailing list accessible to my recipients in the unsubscription page to " +"allow them to update their subscription preferences." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:12 +msgid "" +"Once inside the list, I can again *Create* or *Import* contacts for that " +"specific list." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:18 +msgid "History with the Log Notes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:19 +msgid "" +"A record of the mailings sent is kept in the chatter of the recipient " +"(whether it is a contact or an opportunity, for example)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:24 +msgid "" +"This is important as I and my team can easily keep track and see a history " +"of interactions with my contacts or prospects, granting me the ability to " +"better understand them. Example: my sales representative can easily find out" +" which SMS mailing promotions a customer has received or not." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:29 +msgid "Blacklist" +msgstr "Blacklist" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:30 +msgid "" +"If I’m coming from another software and have a list of clients who have " +"already asked to be blacklisted from my news, I can import those entries in " +"my database. For that, I’ll go to *Configuration > Phone Blacklist > " +"Import*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:3 +msgid "Integrations and Templates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:4 +msgid "" +"Using SMS to reach people can be a strategy not just used for advertisement " +"purposes but also as a reminder of events or issued invoices to your " +"costumers, for example. As you know, one of the biggest benefits of using " +"Odoo is the capability of the apps to be integrated. With the SMS Marketing " +"app isn’t different!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:9 +msgid "Organize Email Marketing and SMS campaigns" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:10 +msgid "" +"First, make sure to have the necessary feature activated. Go to the *Email " +"Marketing app > Configuration > Settings> activate the option Mailing " +"Campaigns*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Now, I’ll also have the menu *Campaigns* included in my *SMS Marketing* " +"page, allowing me to have an overview of my SMS mailings and my email " +"marketing ones." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:20 +msgid "" +"This feature is especially useful if I have aggregated campaigns, as I have " +"a global reporting view. In addition to that, I can create stages in my " +"kanban view to better organize the work being done." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:26 +msgid "Sending SMSs through the Contacts app" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:27 +msgid "" +"Sending SMSs through the contact’s form is available by default in Odoo. It " +"makes my work easier if I need to send an SMS to a specific contact, for " +"example. For that, I’ll go to the *Contacts* app, select the contact and " +"click on the *SMS* icon next to the phone number." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:33 +msgid "" +"If I’d like to send a message in a batch here, I could go to *List View > " +"select all the contacts > Action > Send SMS*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:39 +msgid "Set up SMS Templates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:40 +msgid "" +"To set up *SMS Templates*, I’ll go to the *Settings* app and activate the " +"*developer mode*. Now, back to *Settings* app, I’ll go to *Technical > " +"Phone/SMS section > SMS Templates* and create the content I need." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:48 +msgid "" +"Use *Dynamic Placeholders* to adapt automatically the content of the SMS to " +"the context." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:52 +msgid "" +"SMS Text Messaging is available throughout Odoo! Here are some of our extra " +"notable integrations:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:54 +msgid "*CRM*: send SMSs to your leads and opportunities." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:55 +msgid "*Subscription*: alert customers about their subscription." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:56 +msgid "*Accounting*: send payment reminders." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:57 +msgid "*Marketing Automation*: automate your SMS marketing campaigns." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:58 +msgid "" +"*Inventory*: send an automatic confirmation when a delivery order is done." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:59 +msgid "" +"*Sign*: receive a validation code to verify your identity before signing a " +"document online." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:60 +msgid "" +"*SEPA debit payment provider*: send a verification code to your customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:61 +msgid "" +"*Studio*: send an SMS according to your needs by using automated actions." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:63 +msgid "" +"For more information about SMS integrations in Odoo and a list of frequently" +" asked questions, go to `Pricing and FQA `__." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:3 +msgid "SMS Pricing and FAQ" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:6 +msgid "Pricing" +msgstr "Tarif" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:7 +msgid "" +"SMS Text Messaging is an In-App Purchase (IAP) service which requires " +"prepaid credits to work. The price of an SMS depends on the destination and " +"the length of the message. With 1 credit, I can send up to 92 SMSs." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:9 +msgid "" +"**For more information, please consult our FAQ page**: `Odoo SMS - FAQ " +"`_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:11 +msgid "" +"To buy credits I will go to *Settings > Buy Credits* (under *Send SMS*); or" +" go to *Settings > View my Services* (under *Odoo IAP*)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:18 +msgid "" +"If you are on Odoo Online (SAAS) and have the Enterprise version, you " +"benefit from free trial credits to test the feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:21 +msgid "FAQ" +msgstr "FAQ" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:22 +msgid "**Is there an expiration time for my credits?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:24 +msgid "No, your credits won’t expire." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:26 +msgid "" +"**Can I send an SMS to a phone number (which is not a mobile phone) because " +"I see the icon in front of the field “phone”?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:28 +msgid "Only if that phone number supports SMS (e.g. SIP phones)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:30 +msgid "**Do I receive an invoice to buy my credits?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:32 +msgid "Yes." +msgstr "Oui." + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:34 +msgid "**Can the recipient answer to me?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:36 +msgid "No, it is not possible to reply to the SMS." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:38 +msgid "" +"**What happens if I send multiple SMS but I do not have enough credits to " +"send them all?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:40 +msgid "" +"The whole transaction is counted as a single one, so no SMS will be sent " +"until you have enough credits to send them all." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:42 +msgid "**Do I have a history of the sent SMSs?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:44 +msgid "" +"Yes, the SMS is logged as a note under the chatter of the corresponding " +"record, and a complete history of SMS sent is available under Settings> " +"Activate the developer mode > Technical > SMS." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:46 +msgid "**Can I send as many SMSs I want at once?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:48 +msgid "Yes, if you have enough credits." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:50 +msgid "" +"**If I have a number that does not exist in the list of recipients, will I " +"lose credits?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:52 +msgid "" +"Not if the phone number is in the wrong format (e.g. too many digits). " +"Otherwise, if the SMS is sent to the wrong person or to a fake number, the " +"credit will be lost." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:54 +msgid "" +"**What happens if I send my SMS to a paying number (e.g.: a contest to win a" +" ticket for a festival)?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:56 +msgid "" +"The SMS will not be delivered to that kind of number, so you won’t be " +"charged." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:58 +msgid "" +"**Can I identify the numbers that do not exist when I send several SMSs?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:60 +msgid "Only the ones that have an invalid format." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:62 +msgid "**How does the GDPR regulation affect this service?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:64 +msgid "" +"Please find our Privacy Policy here: `Odoo IPA Purchase Privacy Policy " +"`__" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:66 +msgid "**How many types of SMS exist and how many characters make 1 SMS?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:68 +msgid "There are 2 types of SMS message:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:70 +msgid "" +"*Standard* (GSM-7): contains only characters from the GSM-7 set, which can " +"be seen in the following picture." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:75 +msgid "" +"*Unicode*: contains at least one character that is not in the previous " +"table. For Standard SMS the size limit is 160 characters, and for Unicode is" +" 70. Above these limits, the content is divided into a multi-part message. " +"The system will inform you in real-time about the number of SMS your message" +" represents." +msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b33772931 --- /dev/null +++ b/locale/fr/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po @@ -0,0 +1,173 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2015-TODAY, Odoo S.A. +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +# Translators: +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Nacim ABOURA , 2019 +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-11-20 09:24+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Nacim ABOURA , 2019\n" +"Language-Team: French (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/fr/)\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Language: fr\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n > 1);\n" + +#: ../../social_marketing.rst:5 +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:2 +msgid "Social Marketing" +msgstr "Marketing social" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:3 +msgid "Advanced Topics" +msgstr "Rubriques avancées" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:4 +msgid "" +"One of the biggest challenges of a company is to engage efficiently with " +"their community. Odoo Social helps you to meet your audience with the help " +"of several supports: social media, push notifications, or live chat request." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:10 +msgid "Add your social media and create your feed" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:12 +msgid "" +"You first need to add your social media accounts. To do that, add a Stream " +"and choose your social media account. You’ll need to grant permissions to " +"Odoo Social Marketing application." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:19 +msgid "" +"Once it’s done, you’ll be redirected to your Feed and a column will be " +"automatically added with the publications of your freshly added account. You" +" can then add new streams to your Feed and customize your Kanban view as you" +" like." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:28 +msgid "" +"Adding social media accounts to your Feed will also add some KPIs on it:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:30 +msgid "Audience: Number of followers of your channel" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:32 +msgid "Engagement: Number of times people have engaged with your posts" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:35 +msgid "Stories: Number of times people who have engaged with your channel" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:35 +msgid "" +"have created stories on their friend’s or follower’s feed (Shares, " +"Retweet,..)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:37 +msgid "" +"You can access more information by clicking on the “Insights” link: this " +"will lead you to statistics of the selected social medium." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:41 +msgid "Publish content" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:43 +msgid "" +"To publish content on your social media accounts or send a push notification" +" to your subscribed users, either go to your Feed and click on New Post, or " +"use the “Posts” menu and create it from there. Select all the accounts where" +" you want to post your content, write your post and get an instant preview " +"of how it will look when published." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:49 +msgid "" +"If you select the push notifications, you’ll get some additional fields on " +"the form that will allow you to complete the push notifications " +"configuration and choose your segment between all your subscribed users. You" +" can also send push notifications via the Visitors menu, as explained in the" +" previous paragraph." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:56 +msgid "Enable push notifications on your website" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:58 +msgid "" +"The push notifications system uses a Firebase account, configured by " +"default. This feature allows you to send push notifications to your " +"website’s visitors after they subscribed to it. To enable push notifications" +" on your website, go to the Website application Settings, and configure the " +"notifications permission request." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:67 +msgid "" +"Once it’s done, a popup will appear to your website’s visitors, asking them " +"to allow push notifications. As soon as they subscribe to it, you can start " +"sending them push notifications through the Visitors menu. You can either " +"send it individually or target a bigger segment by selecting multiple " +"visitors in the list view (e.g. all the visitors that visited your " +"Homepage)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:75 +msgid "Interact with your online visitors" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:77 +msgid "" +"You can monitor your online visits via the Visitors menu. You’ll see every " +"visitors that landed on one of your tracked pages (you can configure your " +"tracked pages in the Website application), online or offline. Your online " +"visitors will be authenticated if they’re linked to a lead or an existing " +"partner. You will be able to contact them with an email, a message sms, a " +"push notification (if they have subscribed to it), or even send them a live " +"chat request that they will receive on their next move on one of your " +"tracked pages (if you installed the Live Chat application)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:91 +msgid "Configure your own Facebook and Twitter developer accounts" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:93 +msgid "" +"By default, the Social application is already configured with a Facebook and" +" Twitter developer accounts but you can use your own if necessary. Activate " +"the developer mode, go to Configuration > Settings and enter your own API " +"keys." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:102 +msgid "Configure your own Firebase API" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:104 +msgid "" +"By default, a Firebase project is running on your database so there’s no " +"need to configure it. If you have multiple websites, every website will be " +"linked to a different Firebase project. If you need to configure your own " +"Firebase project, please go to :menuselection:`Website --> Configuration -->" +" Settings` Web Push Notifications section." +msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po index 230edc80a..38310c548 100644 --- a/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po +++ b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po @@ -4,28 +4,28 @@ # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # # Translators: -# Cas Vissers , 2019 # Volluta , 2019 -# dpms , 2019 # Julia van Orsouw , 2019 # Julia van Orsouw , 2019 # Pol Van Dingenen , 2019 # Eric Geens , 2019 # Martien van Geene , 2019 -# Gunther Clauwaert , 2019 +# Thomas Pot , 2019 # Martin Trigaux, 2019 # Erwin van der Ploeg , 2019 # Yenthe Van Ginneken , 2019 -# Thomas Pot , 2019 +# Gunther Clauwaert , 2019 +# dpms , 2019 +# Maxim Vandenbroucke , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:45+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: Thomas Pot , 2019\n" +"Last-Translator: Maxim Vandenbroucke , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Dutch (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/nl/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -112,11 +112,11 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/deferred_revenues.rst:24 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/installment_plans.rst:20 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/payment_terms.rst:19 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:18 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/check.rst:39 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/check.rst:103 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/credit_cards.rst:40 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/credit_cards.rst:113 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:19 msgid "Configuration" msgstr "Configuratie" @@ -1625,36 +1625,6 @@ msgstr "" msgid "View *Bank Account* in our Online Demonstration" msgstr "Bekijk de *Bankrekening* in onze online demonstratie" -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:51 -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:146 -#: ../../accounting/others/analytic/timesheets.rst:78 -#: ../../accounting/payables/misc/employee_expense.rst:169 -#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:134 -#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:135 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:44 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:59 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:94 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:105 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/payment_terms.rst:31 -msgid "Todo" -msgstr "Te doen" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:51 -msgid "add inherited field tooltip" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:53 -msgid "" -"**Display on reports :** Display this bank account on the documents that " -"will be printed or send to the customers" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:56 -msgid "" -"**Bank Identifier Code** = BIC : SWIFT Address assigned to a bank in order " -"to send automated payments quickly and accurately to the banks concerned" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:60 msgid "" "The initial balance of a bank statement will be set to the closing balance " @@ -1725,10 +1695,10 @@ msgstr "Configureer valuta" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/foreign_currency.rst:36 msgid "" "Once the Odoo is configured to support multiple currencies, you should " -"activate the currencies you plan to work with. To do that, go the menu " +"activate the currencies you plan to work with. To do that, go to the menu " ":menuselection:`Configuration --> Currencies`. All the currencies are " -"created by default, but you should activate the ones you plan to support. " -"(to activate a currency, check his active field)" +"created by default, but you should activate the ones you plan to support (to" +" activate a currency, check its \"Active\" field)." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/foreign_currency.rst:42 @@ -1829,9 +1799,9 @@ msgstr "" msgid "" "In the above report, the account receivable associated to Camptocamp is not " "managed in a secondary currency, which means that it keeps every transaction" -" in his own currency. If you prefer, you can set the account receivable of " -"this customer with a secondary currency and all his debts will automatically" -" be converted in this currency." +" in its own currency. If you prefer, you can set the account receivable for " +"this customer in a secondary currency and all its debts will automatically " +"be converted to this currency." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/foreign_currency.rst:115 @@ -1893,25 +1863,35 @@ msgid "Select 'General' for miscellaneous operations journals." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Use in Point of Sale" -msgstr "Gebruiken in Kassa" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Check this box if this journal define a payment method that can be used in a" -" point of sale." -msgstr "" -"Vink deze optie aan indien dit dagboek een betalingsmethodeis voor gebruik " -"binnen de kassa." - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Company" msgstr "Bedrijf" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Company related to this journal" msgstr "Bedrijf gerelateerd aan dit dagboek" +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Defines how the bank statements will be registered" +msgstr "Definieert hoe bankafschriften geregistreerd worden" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Synchronization Frequency" +msgstr "Synchronisatie frequentie" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Defines when a new bank statement" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "will be created when fetching new transactions" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "from your bank account." +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "Short Code" msgstr "Korte code" @@ -1954,8 +1934,8 @@ msgstr "" "credit facturen vanuit dit dagboek" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Credit Notes: Next Number" -msgstr "Creditfacturen: Volgend nummer" +msgid "Credit Notes Next Number" +msgstr "Creditfacturen volgende nummer" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "The next sequence number will be used for the next credit note." @@ -1999,23 +1979,73 @@ msgid "The currency used to enter statement" msgstr "De gebruikte valuta" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Defines how the bank statements will be registered" -msgstr "Definieert hoe bankafschriften geregistreerd worden" +msgid "Communication Type" +msgstr "Communicatiesoort" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Creation of Bank Statements" -msgstr "Aanmaken van bankafschriften" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Defines when a new bank statement" +msgid "" +"You can set here the default communication that will appear on customer " +"invoices, once validated, to help the customer to refer to that particular " +"invoice when making the payment." msgstr "" +"U kunt geen standaard communicatie plaatsen die getoond zal worden op de " +"klanten factuur, eens bevestigd, om de klant bij te staan als verwijzing " +"naar dat bijzonder factuur bij het uitvoeren van de betaling." #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "will be created when fetching new transactions" +msgid "Communication Standard" +msgstr "Standaard communicatie" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "" +"You can choose different models for each type of reference. The default one " +"is the Odoo reference." msgstr "" +"U kunt verschillende modellen kiezen voor elk type referentie. De standaard " +"is de Odoo-referentie." #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "from your bank account." +msgid "Alias Name" +msgstr "Alias naam" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "It creates draft invoices and bills by sending an email." +msgstr "" +"Het maakt concept verkoopfacturen en leveranciersfacturen bij het versturen " +"van een e-mail." + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Profit Account" +msgstr "Winst & Verlies rekening" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Used to register a profit when the ending balance of a cash register differs" +" from what the system computes" +msgstr "" +"Gebruikt om winst te registreren wanneer de eindsaldo van een kasregister " +"verschilt van wat het systeem berekend" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Loss Account" +msgstr "Verliesrekening" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Used to register a loss when the ending balance of a cash register differs " +"from what the system computes" +msgstr "" +"Gebruikt om verlies te registreren wanneer de eindsaldo van een kasregister " +"verschilt van wat het systeem berekend" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Lock Posted Entries with Hash" +msgstr "Vergrendel ingevoerde gegevens met Hash" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "" +"If ticked, the accounting entry or invoice receives a hash as soon as it is " +"posted and cannot be modified anymore." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 @@ -2061,65 +2091,6 @@ msgid "" "to your bank. Enable this option from the settings." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Profit Account" -msgstr "Winst & Verlies rekening" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Used to register a profit when the ending balance of a cash register differs" -" from what the system computes" -msgstr "" -"Gebruikt om winst te registreren wanneer de eindsaldo van een kasregister " -"verschilt van wat het systeem berekend" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Loss Account" -msgstr "Verliesrekening" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Used to register a loss when the ending balance of a cash register differs " -"from what the system computes" -msgstr "" -"Gebruikt om verlies te registreren wanneer de eindsaldo van een kasregister " -"verschilt van wat het systeem berekend" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Group Invoice Lines" -msgstr "Groepeer factuurregels" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"If this box is checked, the system will try to group the accounting lines " -"when generating them from invoices." -msgstr "" -"Als dit is aangevinkt, dan zal het systeem proberen de boekingsregels te " -"groeperen bij het genereren vanaf facturen." - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Post At Bank Reconciliation" -msgstr "Boeken bij bank aflettering" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Whether or not the payments made in this journal should be generated in " -"draft state, so that the related journal entries are only posted when " -"performing bank reconciliation." -msgstr "" -"Of de betalingen in dit dagboek wel of niet moeten worden aangemaakt in " -"concept, zodat gekoppelde boekingen alleen worden geboekt bij het afletteren" -" van de bankafschriften." - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Alias Name for Vendor Bills" -msgstr "Alias naam voor leveranciersfacturen" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "It creates draft vendor bill by sending an email." -msgstr "" -"Het maakt een concept leveranciersfactuur bij het versturen van een e-mail." - #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "Check Printing Payment Method Selected" msgstr "Cheque afdrukken betaaalmethode geselecteerd" @@ -2159,22 +2130,6 @@ msgstr "Volgende cheque numer" msgid "Sequence number of the next printed check." msgstr "Reeksnummer van de volgende afgedrukte cheque." -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Amount Authorized Difference" -msgstr "Toegestane bedrag afwijking" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"This field depicts the maximum difference allowed between the ending balance" -" and the theoretical cash when closing a session, for non-POS managers. If " -"this maximum is reached, the user will have an error message at the closing " -"of his session saying that he needs to contact his manager." -msgstr "" -"Dit veld toont het maximale verschil toegestaan tussen de eindsaldo en het " -"theoretische bedrag wanneer u de kassa sluit, voor niet-kassa managers. Als " -"het maximum is bereikt krijgt de gebruiker een foutboodschap op het scherm " -"om de manager te contacteren." - #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:25 msgid "Usage" msgstr "Gebruik" @@ -5019,163 +4974,6 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Explanation of the fields:" msgstr "Verklaring van de velden:" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Status" -msgstr "Status" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "When an asset is created, the status is 'Draft'." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"If the asset is confirmed, the status goes in 'Running' and the depreciation" -" lines can be posted in the accounting." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"You can manually close an asset when the depreciation is over. If the last " -"line of depreciation is posted, the asset automatically goes in that status." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Asset Category" -msgstr "Activacategorie" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Category of asset" -msgstr "Activacategorie" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Date" -msgstr "Datum" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Date of asset" -msgstr "Datum van activa" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Depreciation Dates" -msgstr "Afschrijvingdatums" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "The way to compute the date of the first depreciation." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Based on last day of purchase period: The depreciation dates will be based" -" on the last day of the purchase month or the purchase year (depending on " -"the periodicity of the depreciations)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Based on purchase date: The depreciation dates will be based on the " -"purchase date." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "First Depreciation Date" -msgstr "Eerst afschrijvingsdatum" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Note that this date does not alter the computation of the first journal " -"entry in case of prorata temporis assets. It simply changes its accounting " -"date" -msgstr "" -"Merk op dat deze datum de berekening van de eerste dagboek boeking niet " -"wijzigt bij prorate temporis assets. Het veranderd simpelweg de boekhoud " -"datum" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Gross Value" -msgstr "Bruto waarde" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Gross value of asset" -msgstr "Bruto waarde van activa" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Salvage Value" -msgstr "Restwaarde" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "It is the amount you plan to have that you cannot depreciate." -msgstr "" -"Het is het bedrag dat u van plan bent te hebben, dat u niet kunt " -"afschrijven." - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Computation Method" -msgstr "Berekeningsmethode" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Choose the method to use to compute the amount of depreciation lines." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Linear: Calculated on basis of: Gross Value / Number of Depreciations" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Degressive: Calculated on basis of: Residual Value * Degressive Factor" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Time Method Based On" -msgstr "Tijdmethode gebaseerd op" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Choose the method to use to compute the dates and number of entries." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Number of Entries: Fix the number of entries and the time between 2 " -"depreciations." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Ending Date: Choose the time between 2 depreciations and the date the " -"depreciations won't go beyond." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Prorata Temporis" -msgstr "Prorata Temporis" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Indicates that the first depreciation entry for this asset have to be done " -"from the asset date (purchase date) instead of the first January / Start " -"date of fiscal year" -msgstr "" -"Geeft aan dat de eerste afschrijving mutatie voor deze activa moet gedaan " -"zijn van de activa datum (inkoopdatum) in plaats van de eerste van januari /" -" startdatum van het boekjaar" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Number of Depreciations" -msgstr "Aantal afschrijvingen" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "The number of depreciations needed to depreciate your asset" -msgstr "Het aantal afschrijvingen nodig om de activa af te schrijven." - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Number of Months in a Period" -msgstr "Aantal maanden in de periode" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "The amount of time between two depreciations, in months" -msgstr "De hoeveelheid tijd tussen twee afschrijvingen, in maanden" - #: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:88 msgid "Try creating an *Asset* in our online demonstration" msgstr "" @@ -5261,18 +5059,6 @@ msgid "" "should be registered through a customer invoice." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:146 -msgid "→ This has to be changed in Odoo: selling an asset should:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:148 -msgid "remove all \"Red\" lines" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:149 -msgid "create a new line that deprecate the whole residual value" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:3 msgid "How to manage a financial budget?" msgstr "Hoe beheer ik een financieel budget?" @@ -5933,12 +5719,6 @@ msgid "" "Progress)." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/others/analytic/timesheets.rst:79 -msgid "" -"Add a link, and the document is under Sales --> Invoicing Methods --> " -"Services --> How to invoices blabla" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/others/analytic/timesheets.rst:82 msgid "" "We save a Sales Order with the service product **External Consulting**. An " @@ -6751,6 +6531,28 @@ msgstr "" "rapportagedoeleinden en bepaalt de handelswijze bij het afsluiten van het " "boekjaar en het openen van de balans." +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "Can Create Asset" +msgstr "Kan activa aanmaken" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Technical field specifying if the account can generate asset depending on " +"it's type. It is used in the account form view." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "Asset Model" +msgstr "Soort activa" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "" +"If this is selected, an asset will be created automatically when Journal " +"Items on this account are posted." +msgstr "" +"Als dit is geselecteerd, wordt een activa automatisch aangemaakt wanneer " +"boekingen voor dit dagboek worden geboekt." + #: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 msgid "Tags" msgstr "Labels" @@ -6781,6 +6583,18 @@ msgstr "" "verschillende rekeningen: liquiditeit is voor kas- en bankrekeningen, " "crediteuren/debiteuren is voor leverancier-/klantfacturen." +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "Internal Group" +msgstr "Interne groep" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "" +"The 'Internal Group' is used to filter accounts based on the internal group " +"set on the account type." +msgstr "" +"De 'Interne Groep' is gebruikt om de rekeningen te filteren gebaseerd op de " +"interne groep voor dit rekening type." + #: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 msgid "Allow Reconciliation" msgstr "Afletteren toestaan" @@ -7638,6 +7452,7 @@ msgid "Multi-currency invoices & Vendor Bills" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/multicurrencies/invoices_payments.rst:54 +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Invoices" msgstr "Facturen" @@ -9005,7 +8820,8 @@ msgstr "In Odoo" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:28 msgid "" "Go to :menuselection:`Invoicing / Accounting --> Configuration --> Settings`" -" and check *TaxCloud - Compute tax rates based on U.S. ZIP codes*." +" and check *TaxCloud - Compute tax rates based on U.S. ZIP codes* (note: " +"actually uses complete street address)." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:30 @@ -9020,7 +8836,7 @@ msgstr "" msgid "" "Click the Refresh Icon next to *Default Category* to import the TIC product " "categories from TaxCloud (Taxability Information Codes). Some categories may" -" imply specific rates." +" imply specific rates or attract product/service type exemptions." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:38 @@ -9030,8 +8846,8 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:40 msgid "" -"Set a specific TaxCloud Category on the *General Information* tab of the " -"Product, or on the Product Category." +"Set a specific TaxCloud TIC Category on the *General Information* tab of the" +" Product, or on the Product Category." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:42 @@ -9557,6 +9373,7 @@ msgid "Balance = Debit - Credit" msgstr "Balans = Debet - Credit" #: ../../accounting/overview/main_concepts/memento.rst:84 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:83 msgid "Journal Entries" msgstr "Boekingen" @@ -10721,14 +10538,6 @@ msgid "" "invoice all your orders in batch)" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/payables/misc/employee_expense.rst:171 -msgid "" -"tip If you want to learn more; check the documentation page :doc: " -"../../../sale/invoicing/service/expense `*How to re-invoice expenses to your" -" customers* " -"`__" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/payables/misc/employee_expense.rst:176 msgid "Reimburse the employee" msgstr "Werknemer terugbetalen" @@ -11005,6 +10814,22 @@ msgstr "Heeft facturen" msgid "Technical field used for usability purposes" msgstr "Technisch veld gebruikt voor gebruiksvriendelijke doeleinden" +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Technical field containing the invoice for which the payment has been " +"generated." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "" +"This does not especially correspond to the invoices reconciled with the " +"payment," +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "as it can have been generated first, and reconciled later" +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Hide Payment Method" msgstr "Verberg betalinsgmethode" @@ -11017,6 +10842,10 @@ msgstr "" "Technisch veld gebruikt om de betaalmethode te verbergen als het " "geselecteerde dagboek maar één betalingsmethode heeft die 'handmatig' is" +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Payment Method" +msgstr "Betalingsmethode" + #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Check: Pay bill by check and print it from Odoo." msgstr "" @@ -11036,6 +10865,30 @@ msgid "" "installed" msgstr "" +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Code" +msgstr "Code" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Technical field used to adapt the interface to the payment type selected." +msgstr "" +"Technisch veld dat gebruikt wordt om de interface te wijzigen naar de " +"geselecteerde betaaalmethode." + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Saved payment token" +msgstr "Bewaarde betalingstoken" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Note that tokens from acquirers set to only authorize transactions (instead " +"of capturing the amount) are not available." +msgstr "" +"Let op dat tokens van verwerkers ingesteld op alleen geautoriseerde " +"transacties (in plaats van het vastleggen van het bedrag) niet beschikbaar " +"zijn." + #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Show Partner Bank Account" msgstr "Geef bankrekening relatie weer" @@ -11050,15 +10903,17 @@ msgstr "" "het formulier betalings overzicht." #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 -msgid "Code" -msgstr "Code" +msgid "Require Partner Bank Account" +msgstr "Vereist bankrekening klant" #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "" -"Technical field used to adapt the interface to the payment type selected." +"Technical field used to know whether the field `partner_bank_account_id` " +"needs to be required or not in the payments form views" msgstr "" -"Technisch veld dat gebruikt wordt om de interface te wijzigen naar de " -"geselecteerde betaaalmethode." +"Technisch veld gebruikt om aan te geven of het veld " +"'partner_bank_account_id' noodzakelijk is om al dan niet weer te geven in " +"het formulier betalingsoverzicht." #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Check Number" @@ -11074,6 +10929,14 @@ msgstr "" "Als uw voorgedrukt papier al nummers bevat of als het huidige nummer fout is" " kan u dit wijzigen op de dagboek configuratie pagina." +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Journal Item Label" +msgstr "Boekingsregel label" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Change label of the counterpart that will hold the payment difference" +msgstr "Wijzig label van de tegelrekening welke het betaalverschil bevat" + #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:80 msgid "Try paying a supplier bill with a check" msgstr "" @@ -11352,7 +11215,6 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:10 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:10 msgid "" "SEPA is supported by the banks of the 28 EU member states as well as " "Iceland, Norway, Switzerland, Andorra, Monaco and San Marino." @@ -11512,14 +11374,6 @@ msgstr "" msgid ":doc:`check`" msgstr ":doc:`check`" -#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:134 -msgid "How to define a new bank?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:135 -msgid "How to reconcile bank statements?" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/bills_or_receipts.rst:3 msgid "When should I use supplier bills or purchase receipts?" msgstr "Wanneer moet ik leveranciersrekeningen of inkooprekeningen gebruiken?" @@ -11952,7 +11806,7 @@ msgid "Account Receivables" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices.rst:3 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:53 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:77 msgid "Customer Invoices" msgstr "Klantfacturen" @@ -12104,6 +11958,162 @@ msgid "" " If needed, a rounding will be applied to the invoice." msgstr "" +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:3 +msgid "Credit Notes and Refunds" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:4 +msgid "" +"A **credit note**, or **credit memo**, is a document issued to a customer " +"that notifies them that they have been credited a certain amount." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:11 +msgid "There are several reasons that can lead to a credit note, such as:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:9 +msgid "a mistake in the invoice" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:10 +msgid "a return of the goods, or a rejection of the services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:11 +msgid "the goods delivered are damaged" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:14 +msgid "" +"Issuing a credit note is the only legal way to cancel, refund or modify a " +"validated invoice. Don’t forget to *register the payment* afterward if you " +"need to send money back to your customer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:20 +msgid "Issue a Credit Note" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:21 +msgid "" +"You can create a credit note from scratch by going to " +":menuselection:`Accounting --> Customers --> Credit Notes`, and by clicking " +"on *Create*. Filling the Credit Note’s form works the same way as the " +"Invoice’s form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:26 +msgid "" +"However, most of the time, credit notes are generated directly from the " +"invoices they are related to." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:29 +msgid "To do so, open the *Customer Invoice*, and click on *Add Credit Note*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:37 +msgid "You can choose between three options:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:35 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:44 +msgid "Partial Refund" +msgstr "Gedeeltelijke Terugbetaling" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:36 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:55 +msgid "Full Refund" +msgstr "Volledige Terugbetaling" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:37 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:66 +msgid "Full refund and new draft invoice" +msgstr "Volledige terugbetaling en nieuwe concept factuur" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:40 +msgid "" +"Credit Notes’ numbers start with “R” and are followed by the number of the " +"document they are related to (e.g., RINV/2019/0004)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:45 +msgid "" +"Odoo creates a draft credit note already prefilled with all the necessary " +"information from the original invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:48 +msgid "" +"This is the option to choose to do a partial refund, or if you want to " +"modify any detail on the credit note." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:52 +msgid "" +"This is the only option available for invoices that are already marked as " +"*Paid*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:56 +msgid "" +"Odoo creates a credit note, automatically validates it, and reconciles the " +"original invoice with it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:62 +msgid "" +"This is the option to choose to do a full refund or cancel a validated " +"invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:67 +msgid "" +"Odoo creates a credit note, automatically validates it, reconciles the " +"original invoice with it, and open a new draft invoice prefilled with the " +"same details from the original invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:71 +msgid "" +"This is the option to choose to modify the content of a validated invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:74 +msgid "Record a Vendor Refund" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:75 +msgid "" +"**Vendor Refunds** are recorded the same way you would do with invoices’ " +"credit notes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:77 +msgid "" +"You can either create a credit note from scratch by going to " +":menuselection:`Accounting --> Vendors --> Refund`, and by clicking on " +"*Create*, or by opening the validated *Vendor Bill*, and clicking on *Add " +"Credit Note*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:84 +msgid "" +"Issuing a credit note from an invoice creates a **reverse entry** that " +"zeroes out the journal items generated by the original invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:87 +msgid "Here is an example of an invoice’s journal entry:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:92 +msgid "" +"And here is the credit note’s journal entry generated to reverse the " +"original invoice above:" +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/deferred_revenues.rst:3 msgid "Deferred revenues: how to automate them?" msgstr "" @@ -12501,10 +12511,6 @@ msgstr "" msgid "This process is good for both services and physical products." msgstr "Het proces is goed voor beide diensten en fysieke producten." -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:44 -msgid "Read more: *Invoice based on sales orders.*" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:47 msgid "Sales Order ‣ Delivery Order ‣ Invoice" msgstr "" @@ -12527,10 +12533,6 @@ msgstr "" "wat echt geleverd is. Indien u backorders doet (deels leveren en de rest " "later), zal de klant twee facturen ontvangen, één voor elke leveringsorder." -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:59 -msgid "Read more: *Invoice based on delivery orders.*" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:62 msgid "eCommerce Order ‣ Invoice" msgstr "eCommerce Order ‣ Factuur" @@ -12592,12 +12594,6 @@ msgid "" "use a regular sales order." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:94 -msgid "" -"Read more: - *How to invoice based on time and material?* - *How to manage" -" contracts and invoicing plans?*" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:99 msgid "Recurring Contracts ‣ Invoices" msgstr "Herhalende contracten ‣ Facturen" @@ -12612,10 +12608,6 @@ msgstr "" "De frequentie van het factuur en de diensten/producten die gefactureerd " "worden zijn gedefinieerd op het contract." -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:105 -msgid "Read more: *Subscription based invoicing.*" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:111 msgid "Creating an invoice manually" msgstr "Manueel een factuur aanmaken" @@ -12705,12 +12697,6 @@ msgid "" "100%)" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/payment_terms.rst:31 -msgid "" -"screenshot payment term forms, after QDP have commited the change planned on" -" this object" -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/payment_terms.rst:35 msgid "Using Payment Terms" msgstr "Betalingstermijnen gebruiken" @@ -12772,102 +12758,193 @@ msgstr "" msgid ":doc:`cash_discounts`" msgstr ":doc:`cash_discounts`" -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:3 -msgid "How to edit or refund an invoice?" -msgstr "Hoe een factuur te wijzigen of terug te betalen?" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:4 -msgid "" -"In Odoo, it's not possible to modify an invoice that has been validated and " -"sent to the customer. If a mistake was made on a validated invoice, the " -"legal way to handle that is to refund the invoice, reconcile it with the " -"original invoice to close them and create a new invoice." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:10 -msgid "Modifying a validated invoice" -msgstr "Een gevalideerde factuur wijzigen" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:12 -msgid "" -"If you need to modify an existing invoice, use the Refund Invoice button on " -"the invoice. In the refund method field, select \"Modify: create a refund, " -"reconcile, and create a new draft invoice\"." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:19 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:37 -msgid "Odoo will automatically:" -msgstr "Odoo zal automatisch" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:21 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:39 -msgid "Create a refund for your invoice" -msgstr "Maak een terugbetaling voor uw factuur" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:22 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:40 -msgid "" -"Reconcile the refund invoice with the original invoice (marking both as " -"Paid)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:23 -msgid "Create a new draft invoice you can modify" -msgstr "Maak een nieuwe conceptfactuur die u kan wijzigen" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:25 -msgid "" -"Then, you can modify the draft invoice and validate it once it's correct." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:28 -msgid "Cancelling an invoice" -msgstr "Een factuur annuleren" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:30 -msgid "" -"If you need to cancel an existing invoice, use the Refund Invoice button on " -"the invoice. In the refund method field, select \"Cancel: create a refund " -"and reconcile\"." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:42 -msgid "" -"Nothing else needs to be done. You can send the refund by regular mail or " -"email to your customer, if you already sent the original invoice." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:46 -msgid "Refunding part of an invoice" -msgstr "Een deel van een factuur terugbetalen" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:48 -msgid "" -"If you need to refund an existing invoice partially, use the Refund Invoice " -"button on the invoice. In the refund method field, select \"Create a draft " -"refund\"." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:55 -msgid "" -"Odoo will automatically create a draft refund. You may modify the refund " -"(example: remove the lines you do not want to refund) and validate it. Then," -" send the refund by regular mail or email to your customer." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:61 -msgid "" -"Refunding an invoice is different from refunding a payment. Usually, a " -"refund invoice is sent before the customer has done a payment. If the " -"customer has already paid, they should be reimbursed by doing a customer " -"payment refund." -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments.rst:3 msgid "Customer Payments" msgstr "Klantbetalingen" +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:3 +msgid "Batch Payments: SEPA Direct Debit (SDD)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:4 +msgid "" +"SEPA, the Single Euro Payments Area, is a payment-integration initiative of " +"the European Union for simplification of bank transfers denominated in EURO." +" With **SEPA Direct Debit**, your customers can sign a **mandate** that " +"authorizes you to collect future payments from their bank accounts " +"automatically." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:10 +msgid "" +"You can record your customer mandates in Odoo, and generate XML files " +"containing pending payments made with an SDD mandate." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:0 +msgid "" +"SDD is supported by all SEPA countries, which includes the 28 member states " +"of the European Union as well as additional countries." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:0 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:123 +msgid "" +"`List of all SEPA countries. `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:19 +msgid "" +"Go to :menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Settings` nd activate" +" the **SEPA Direct Debit (SDD)** feature. Enter the **Creditor Identifier** " +"of your company. This number is provided by your bank, or the authority " +"responsible for delivering them." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:28 +msgid "SEPA Direct Debit Mandates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:30 +msgid "Create a mandate" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:31 +msgid "" +"The SEPA Direct Debit Mandate is the document that your customers sign to " +"authorize you to collect money directly from their bank accounts." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:34 +msgid "" +"To create a new one, go to :menuselection:`Accounting --> Customers --> " +"Direct Debit Mandates`, click on *Create*, and fill out the new mandate’s " +"form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:41 +msgid "" +"First, export the PDF file by clicking on *Print*. It is then up to your " +"customer to sign this document. Once done, upload the signed file in the " +"**Original Document** field, and click on *Validate* to start running the " +"mandate." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:47 +msgid "" +"First, make sure, that the **IBAN bank accounts details** are correctly " +"recorded on the debtor’s contact form, under the *Accounting* tab, and in " +"your own *Bank Account* settings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:52 +msgid "Close or revoke a mandate" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Direct Debit mandates are closed automatically after their *End Date*. If " +"this field is left blank, then the mandate keeps being *Active* until it is " +"*Closed* or *Revoked*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:60 +msgid "" +"Clicking on **Close** updates the mandate’s end day to the current day. This" +" means that invoices made after the present day won’t be processed " +"automatically with an SDD payment." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:64 +msgid "" +"Clicking on **Revoke** disables the mandate immediately. No SDD payment can " +"be registered anymore, regardless of the invoice’s date. However, payments " +"that have already been registered will still be included to the next SDD XML" +" file." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:70 +msgid "" +"Once a mandate has been *closed* or *revoked*, it cannot be reactivated. If " +"a customer requires to pay with SDD payments again, you will have to create " +"a new mandate from scratch." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:75 +msgid "Get paid with SDD Batch Payments" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:78 +msgid "" +"All new posted invoice issued to customers with an active mandate will " +"automatically register payment and have their status marked as *Paid*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:82 +msgid "" +"If you have unpaid invoices that could be paid with a new mandate, it is " +"still possible to do it. Go on the invoice, click on *Register Payment* and " +"choose *SEPA Direct Debit* as payment method." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:87 +msgid "Generate SEPA Direct Debit XML files to submit payments" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:88 +msgid "" +"To submit your SDD payments to your bank, you will first generate an **XML " +"file** that can be uploaded directly to your bank interface." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:91 +msgid "" +"The files generated by Odoo follow the SEPA Direct Debit **PAIN.008.001.02**" +" specifications as required by the SEPA customer-to-bank Implementation " +"Guidelines, which ensures compatibility with the banks." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:95 +msgid "" +"To generate your XML file for the pending SDD payments, go to the related " +"*bank journal* on your *Accounting dashboard*, then click on *Direct Debit " +"Payments to Collect*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:102 +msgid "" +"Select all the payments in the list that you want to include in your SDD XML" +" file, then click on *Action* and select *Create Batch Payment*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:108 +msgid "" +"Odoo then takes you to your *Batch Payment*’s form. Click on *Validate* and " +"then download the SDD XML file." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:114 +msgid "Finally, upload this file to your bank to process the payments." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:117 +msgid "" +"You can retrieve all the generated SDD XML files by going to " +":menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Customers --> Batch " +"Payments`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:121 +msgid ":doc:`../../bank/setup/create_bank_account`" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:122 +msgid "" +"`Odoo Academy: SEPA Direct Debit Mandates (SDD) " +"`_" +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/check.rst:3 msgid "How to register customer payments by checks?" msgstr "" @@ -13361,128 +13438,6 @@ msgid "" "negative number of due days." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:3 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:29 -msgid "Get paid with SEPA" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:5 -msgid "" -"SEPA, the Single Euro Payments Area, is a payment-integration initiative of " -"the European Union for simplification of bank transfers denominated in EURO." -" SEPA Direct Debit allows you to withdraw money from the bank accounts of " -"your customers with their approval." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:13 -msgid "" -"With Odoo, you can record customer mandates, generate an SDD XML file " -"containing customer payments and upload it in your bank interface. The file " -"follows the SEPA Direct Debit PAIN.008.001.02 specifications. This is a " -"well-defined standard that makes consensus among banks." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:21 -msgid "" -"Go in :menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Settings` and " -"activate the SEPA Direct Debit (SDD) Feature. Enter the Creditor Identifier " -"of your company. This number is provided by your bank." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:32 -msgid "Direct Debit Mandates" -msgstr "Incasso mandaten" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:34 -msgid "" -"Before withdrawing money from a customer bank account, your customer has to " -"sign a mandate. Go in :menuselection:`Accounting --> Sales --> Direct Debit " -"Mandates` and create a new mandate." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:41 -msgid "SEPA Direct Debit only works between IBAN Bank Accounts." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:43 -msgid "" -"Once you have entered all the information in the customer mandate, you can " -"print it and ask your customer to sign it. Once it is done, you can upload " -"the mandate signed by your customer on the mandate in Odoo." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:50 -msgid "You can now validate the mandate." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:55 -msgid "Let's create an invoice for that customer." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:57 -msgid "" -"When you will validate this invoice, the payment will be automatically " -"generated and your invoice will be directly marked as paid." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:61 -msgid "" -"If you already had some invoices for that customer that could be paid using " -"that mandate, it's still possible to do it. Go on the invoice, click on " -"register payment and choose the Sepa Direct Debit as payment method." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:67 -msgid "Generate SDD Files" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:69 -msgid "" -"You can generate the SDD File with all the customer payments to send to your" -" bank directly from the accounting dashboard :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:75 -msgid "" -"You select the payments in the list that you want to include in your SDD " -"File, click on action and select \"Generate Direct Debit XML\"." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:81 -msgid "" -"You can now download the XML file generated by Odoo and upload it in your " -"bank interface." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:85 -msgid "" -"You can retrieve all the generated XML by activating the developer mode and " -"going in :menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Payments --> SDD " -"Payment File`." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:89 -msgid "Close or revoke a mandate" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:91 -msgid "" -"The Direct Debit mandate will be closed automatically once the end date " -"defined on it is reached. However, you can **close** a mandate earlier than " -"initially planned. To do that, simply go on the mandate and click on the " -"\"Close\" button.The end date of the mandate will be updated to today's " -"date. This means you will not be able to pay invoices with an invoice date " -"superior to this end date. Be careful, once a mandate is closed, it cannot " -"be reopened." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:99 -msgid "" -"You can also **revoke** a mandate. In that case, you won't be able to pay " -"any invoice using that mandate anymore, no matter the invoice date.To do " -"that, simply go on the mandate and click on the \"Revoke\" button." -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/recording.rst:3 msgid "What are the different ways to record a payment?" msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po index 10f7d119a..c9a7bd45a 100644 --- a/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po +++ b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po @@ -9,15 +9,16 @@ # Pol Van Dingenen , 2019 # Maxim Vandenbroucke , 2019 # Jurre Claassen , 2019 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: Jurre Claassen , 2019\n" +"Last-Translator: Martin Trigaux, 2019\n" "Language-Team: Dutch (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/nl/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -41,25 +42,25 @@ msgstr "Converteer leads naar prospects" msgid "" "The system can generate leads instead of opportunities, in order to add a " "qualification step before converting a *Lead* into an *Opportunity* and " -"assigning to the right sales people. You can activate this mode from the CRM" -" Settings. It applies to all your sales channels by default. But you can " -"make it specific for specific channels from their configuration form." +"assigning to the right sales people." msgstr "" -"Het systeem kan leads genereren in plaats van opportuniteiten, om zo een " -"kwalificatie stap toe te voegen voordat u een * Lead * in een * " -"Opportuniteit* omzet en aan een verkoopmedewerkers toewijst. U kunt deze " -"modus activeren via de CRM-instellingen. Dit is standaard van toepassing op " -"al uw verkoopkanalen. Maar u kunt het specifiek maken voor specifieke " -"kanalen vanuit het configuratieformulier." -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:13 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:9 +msgid "" +"You can activate this mode from the CRM Settings. It applies to all your " +"sales channels by default. But you can make it specific for specific " +"channels from their configuration form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:14 #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:41 -#: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:13 ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:12 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:8 ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:13 +#: ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:12 #: ../../crm/track_leads/prospect_visits.rst:12 msgid "Configuration" msgstr "Configuratie" -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:15 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:16 msgid "" "For this feature to work, go to :menuselection:`CRM --> Configuration --> " "Settings` and activate the *Leads* feature." @@ -67,7 +68,7 @@ msgstr "" "Ga voor deze functie naar: menuselectie: `CRM -> Configuratie -> " "Instellingen` en activeer de * Leads * functie." -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:21 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:22 msgid "" "You will now have a new submenu *Leads* under *Leads* where they will " "aggregate." @@ -75,11 +76,11 @@ msgstr "" "U heeft nu een nieuw submenu * Leads * onder * Pijplijn * waar leads zullen " "toegevoegd worden." -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:28 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:29 msgid "Convert a lead into an opportunity" msgstr "Converteer een lead in een opportuniteit" -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:30 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:31 msgid "" "When you click on a *Lead* you will have the option to convert it to an " "opportunity and decide if it should still be assigned to the same " @@ -89,7 +90,7 @@ msgstr "" "een opportuniteit en te beslissen of deze nog steeds moet worden toegewezen " "aan hetzelfde kanaal / dezelfde persoon en of u een nieuwe klant moet maken." -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:37 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:38 msgid "" "If you already have an opportunity with that customer Odoo will " "automatically offer you to merge with that opportunity. In the same manner, " @@ -100,6 +101,44 @@ msgstr "" "mogelijkheid om ze samen te smelten. Op dezelfde manier biedt Odoo u " "automatisch een link naar een bestaande klant als die klant al bestaat." +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:44 +msgid "Merge opportunities" +msgstr "Prospects samenvoegen" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:46 +msgid "" +"Odoo will also automatically propose to merge opportunities if they have the" +" same email address. When merging opportunities, Odoo merges the information" +" into the opportunity which was created first, giving priority to the " +"information present on the first opportunity." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:51 +msgid "" +"No information is lost: data from the other opportunity is logged in the " +"chatter and the information fields for easy access." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:57 +msgid "" +"Would you find a duplicate yourself, ...you can also merge opportunities or " +"leads even if the system doesn't propose it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:60 +msgid "" +"Here’s how, from the list view. Select the opportunities or leads you want " +"to merge and the action button will appear. Then, you can select merge." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:66 +msgid "..note::" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:67 +msgid "It is also possible to merge more than 2 opportunities or leads." +msgstr "" + #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_email.rst:3 msgid "Generate leads/opportunities from emails" msgstr "Genereer leads/opportuniteiten vanuit e-mails" @@ -225,6 +264,104 @@ msgid "" "CRM settings and refer to :doc:`convert`." msgstr "" +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:3 +msgid "Lead mining" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:4 +msgid "" +"In any business, getting quality leads is essential to keep the business " +"growing. Lead mining allows you to generate leads from scratch directly from" +" your database. Target your leads based on a set of criteria such as the " +"country, the size of the company, the industry your leads are coming from to" +" make them relevant to your business." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:10 +msgid "" +"For this feature to work, go to :menuselection:`CRM → Configuration → " +"Settings` and activate the **Lead Mining** feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:17 +msgid "Start generating leads" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:18 +msgid "" +"You will now have a new button **Generate Leads** available in your " +"pipeline. You are also able to create lead mining requests from the " +"**Configuration → Lead Mining Requests** and trough **Leads → Leads** where " +"you have the **Generate Leads** button" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:25 +msgid "" +"From there, click on the **Generate Leads** button, a window where you will " +"be able to pick your criteria will pop up." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:32 +msgid "" +"When choosing to target Companied and their contacts you can choose the " +"contacts you are getting based on Role or Seniority. When getting contact " +"information make sure to be aware of the latest EU regulation, get more " +"information about General Data Protection Regulation on `Odoo GDPR " +"`__," +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:37 +msgid "" +"You can decide to filter the leads you are getting depending on the size " +"(number of employees) of the companies. You can pick the countries your " +"leads are coming from. It is possible to pick multiple countries. You can " +"pick the industries your leads are coming from. It is possible to pick " +"multiple countries." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:41 +msgid "" +"You can choose the salesperson and the Salesteam the lead will be assigned " +"to. You can also add tags to track your generated leads." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:45 +msgid "The generated leads will have the name of the company." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:48 +msgid "Pricing" +msgstr "Prijzen" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:49 +msgid "" +"This is an In-App Purchase feature, each generated lead will cost you one " +"credit. If you choose to get contact information each contact will also cost" +" us one additional credit. Here is the pricing for this `feature " +"`__, To buy credits you can " +"either go to CRM > Configuration > Settings > Buy Credits; or go to Settings" +" > In-App Purchases>View my Services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:62 +msgid "" +"The blue box will automatically tell you how many credits are going to be " +"consumed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:65 +msgid "" +"If you are on Odoo Online (SAAS) and have the Enterprise version, you " +"benefit from free trial credits to test the feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:67 +msgid "" +"More information about `In-App Purchases " +"`__," +" (IAP)." +msgstr "" + #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/send_quotes.rst:3 msgid "Send quotations" msgstr "Verstuur offertes" diff --git a/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po index 87a7abc36..75cc59d0d 100644 --- a/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po +++ b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Martien van Geene , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Dutch (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/nl/)\n" @@ -711,61 +711,56 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:39 msgid "" "In your Odoo instance, click on **Settings**. You will have a section " -"showing you the active users on your database. Click on **Manage access " -"rights.**" +"showing you the active users on your database. Click on **Manage Users.**" msgstr "" -"Klik op **Instellingen** in uw Odoo instantie. U zal een sectie hebben die u" -" de actieve gebruikers op uw database toont. Klik op **Beheer " -"toegangsrechten.**" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:44 -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:82 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:43 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:80 msgid "|settings|" msgstr "|settings|" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:44 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:43 msgid "|browse_users|" msgstr "|browse_users|" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:47 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:46 msgid "You'll then see the list of your users." msgstr "U ziet vervolgens de lijst van uw gebruikers." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:52 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:51 msgid "" "The pre-selected filter *Internal Users* shows your paying users (different " "from the *Portal Users* which are free). If you remove this filter, you'll " "get all your users (the ones you pay for and the portal ones)" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:57 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:56 msgid "" "In your list of users, click on the user you want to deactivate. As soon as " -"you are on the userform, go with your mouse cursor on the status **Active** " -"(top right). Click on Active and you will notice that the status will change" -" to **Inactive** immediately." +"you are on the userform, click on the Action drop down menu, and then click " +"on Archive." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:66 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:64 msgid "The user is now deactivated." msgstr "De gebruiker is nu gedeactiveerd." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:68 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:66 msgid "**Never** deactivate the main user (*admin*)" msgstr "Deactiveer **nooit** de hoofdgebruiker (*admin*)" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:71 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:69 msgid "Uninstalling Apps" msgstr "Apps deïnstalleren" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:73 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:71 msgid "" "Make sure you first test what you are about to do on a :ref:`duplicate " "` of your database before making any changes (*especially*" " installing/uninstalling apps)." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:77 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:75 msgid "" "In your Odoo instance click on **Settings**; in this app, you will be able " "to see how many applications you have installed. Click on **Browse Apps** to" @@ -775,18 +770,18 @@ msgstr "" "hoeveel applicaties u geïnstalleerd hebt. Klik op **Doorzoek apps** om de " "lijst van geïnstalleerde apps te bekijken." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:82 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:80 msgid "|browse_apps|" msgstr "|browse_apps|" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:85 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:83 msgid "" "In your applications' dashboard, you will see all the icons of your " "applications. Click on the application you want to uninstall. Then, on the " "form of the application, click on **Uninstall**." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:92 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:90 msgid "" "Some applications have dependencies, like Invoicing, eCommerce, etc. " "Therefore, the system will give you a warning message to advise you of what " @@ -796,22 +791,22 @@ msgid "" " click **Confirm**." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:99 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:97 msgid "" "Last, after having checked the warning message (if any), click **Confirm**." msgstr "" "Klik als laatste, na het controleren van de waarschuwing (indien er een is)," " op **Bevestigen**." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:104 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:102 msgid "You have finished uninstalling your application." msgstr "U bent klaar met het verwijderen van uw applicatie." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:107 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:105 msgid "Good to know" msgstr "Goed om te weten" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:109 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:107 msgid "" "**Uninstalling apps, managing users, etc. is up to you**: no one else can " "know if your business flow is broken better than you. If we were to " @@ -821,7 +816,7 @@ msgid "" "operations." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:115 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:113 msgid "" "**Odoo Apps have dependencies**: this means that you may need to install " "modules that you do not actively use to access some features of Odoo you " @@ -831,7 +826,7 @@ msgid "" "to work properly." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:122 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:120 msgid "" "**Always test app installation/removal on a duplicate** (or on a free trial " "database): that way you can know what other apps may be required, etc. This " diff --git a/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/general.po b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/general.po index 7c2e80c6a..8928bb670 100644 --- a/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/general.po +++ b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/general.po @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Maxim Vandenbroucke , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Dutch (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/nl/)\n" @@ -904,6 +904,110 @@ msgstr "" "gekoppeld aan het eerste bedrijf). U dient eerst de bedrijven en dan de " "personen te importeren." +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase.rst:3 +msgid "In-App Purchase" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:3 +msgid "General guide about In-App Purchase (IAP) Services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:4 +msgid "" +"In-App Purchases (IAP) gives access to additional services through Odoo. For" +" instance, it allows me to send SMS Text Messages or to send Invoices by " +"post directly from my database." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:7 +msgid "Buying Credits" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Each IAP Service relies on prepaid credits to work and has its own pricing. " +"To consult my current balance or to recharge my account, go to *Settings> " +"Odoo IAP > View my Services*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:13 +msgid "" +"If I am on Odoo Online (SAAS) and have the Enterprise version, I benefit " +"from free credits to test our IAP features." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:16 +msgid "IAP accounts" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:17 +msgid "" +"Credits to use IAP services are stored on IAP accounts, which are specific " +"to each service and database. By default, IAP accounts are common to all " +"companies, but can be restricted to specific ones by going to *Settings app " +"> Activate the Developer Mode > Technical Settings > IAP Accoun*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:23 +msgid "IAP Portal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:24 +msgid "" +"The IAP Portal is a platform regrouping my IAP Services. It is accessible " +"from *Settings app > Odoo IAP > View my Services*. From there, I can view my" +" current balance, recharge my credits, review my consumption and set a " +"reminder to when credits are low." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:30 +msgid "Get notified when credits are low" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:31 +msgid "" +"To be notified when it’s time to recharge my credits, I’ll go to my IAP " +"Portal through *Settings app> Odoo IAP > View my Services*, unfold a service" +" and mark the Receive threshold warning option. Then, I’ll provide a minimum" +" amount of credits and email addresses. Now, every time that the limit is " +"reached, an automatic reminder will be sent to by email!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:38 +msgid "IAP services available" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:39 +msgid "" +"Different services are available depending on the hosting type of your " +"Database:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:41 +msgid "" +"*Odoo Online (SAAS)*: only the IAP services provided by Odoo can be used " +"(i.e. the SMS, Snailmail, Reveal and Partner Autocomplete features);" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:43 +msgid "" +"*Odoo.sh and Odoo Enterprise (on-premise)*: both the services provided by " +"Odoo and by third-party apps can be used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:46 +msgid "Offering my own services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:47 +msgid "" +"I am more than welcome to offer my own IAP services through Odoo Apps! It is" +" the perfect opportunity to get recurring revenue for an ongoing service use" +" rather than — and possibly instead of — a sole initial purchase. Please, " +"find more information at: `In-App Purchase " +"`_" +msgstr "" + #: ../../general/odoo_basics.rst:3 msgid "Basics" msgstr "Basisprincipes" @@ -988,14 +1092,6 @@ msgstr "" "`Gebruikers deactiveren <../../db_management/documentation.html" "#deactivating-users>`_" -#: ../../general/odoo_basics/add_user.rst:47 -msgid "Todo" -msgstr "Te doen" - -#: ../../general/odoo_basics/add_user.rst:47 -msgid "Add link to How to add companies" -msgstr "" - #: ../../general/odoo_basics/choose_language.rst:3 msgid "Manage Odoo in your own language" msgstr "Beheer Odoo in uw eigen taal" diff --git a/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po index ee1dbef09..28afc9abd 100644 --- a/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po +++ b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po @@ -7,15 +7,16 @@ # Martin Trigaux, 2019 # Yenthe Van Ginneken , 2019 # Gunther Clauwaert , 2019 +# Erwin van der Ploeg , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: Gunther Clauwaert , 2019\n" +"Last-Translator: Erwin van der Ploeg , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Dutch (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/nl/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -27,6 +28,94 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Helpdesk" msgstr "Helpdesk" +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:3 +msgid "" +"After sales features: refund, coupon, return, repair, onsite interventions" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:4 +msgid "" +"As my business grows, having the tools to allow my helpdesk team to record, " +"track and manage issues raised easy and efficiently, is key. Odoo’s Helpdesk" +" app allows me to generate credit notes, return products, grant coupons, do " +"repairs and plan onsite interventions from a ticket’s page." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:7 +msgid "Set up the After Sales services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Go to *Configuration > Helpdesk Teams* and enable the After Sales options: " +"*Refunds, Returns, Coupons, Repairs and Onsite Interventions*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:14 +msgid "Generate credit notes from tickets" +msgstr "Genereer creditfacturen van tickets" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:15 +msgid "" +"I can use a credit note to refund a customer or adjust the amount due. For " +"that, I’ll simply go to my ticket page, click on *Refund* and select the " +"corresponding *Invoice*. Clicking on *Reverse* the credit note will be " +"generated, and I can *Post* it while still being in the *Helpdesk* app." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:22 +msgid "Allow product returns from tickets" +msgstr "Sta productretouren toe op tickets" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:23 +msgid "" +"The process of a product return from my customer back to my warehouse will " +"be taken into action when, at the ticket page, I choose the option *Return*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:29 +msgid "Grant coupons from tickets" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:30 +msgid "" +"First, be sure to have your *Coupon Program* planned at the *Sales or " +"Website* app. At the *Helpdesk* app, I will open my ticket and click on " +"*Coupon*, choose the *Coupon Program > Generate*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:37 +msgid "Repairs from tickets" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:38 +msgid "" +"Clicking on *Repair* option, on my ticket page, a new repair order form will" +" be shown. Fill up the rest of the fields as needed and choose the next " +"step." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:44 +msgid "Plan onsite interventions from tickets" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:45 +msgid "" +"At the ticket page, I can now configure my onsite interventions exactly the " +"same way I would do being on the *Field Service* app, clicking on *Plan " +"Intervention*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:52 +msgid "" +"`Coupons `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:53 +msgid ":doc:`../manufacturing/repair/repair`" +msgstr "" + #: ../../helpdesk/getting_started.rst:3 msgid "Get started with Odoo Helpdesk" msgstr "Starten met Odoo Helpdesk" diff --git a/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po index e3c3b7c6a..be836d0e7 100644 --- a/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po +++ b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po @@ -4,24 +4,20 @@ # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # # Translators: -# Xavier Symons , 2019 -# Onno van Koolwijk , 2019 +# Gunther Clauwaert , 2019 # Cas Vissers , 2019 -# Alain van Hall , 2019 # Martin Trigaux, 2019 # Erwin van der Ploeg , 2019 # Yenthe Van Ginneken , 2019 -# Arnaud De Moyer , 2019 -# Gunther Clauwaert , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: Gunther Clauwaert , 2019\n" +"Last-Translator: Yenthe Van Ginneken , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Dutch (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/nl/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -29,7 +25,7 @@ msgstr "" "Language: nl\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n" -#: ../../inventory.rst:5 ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:64 +#: ../../inventory.rst:5 msgid "Inventory" msgstr "Voorraad" @@ -42,348 +38,362 @@ msgid "Daily Operations" msgstr "Dagelijkse bewerkingen" #: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:3 -msgid "How to do an inventory adjustment with barcodes?" -msgstr "Hoe een voorraad wijziging te doen met barcodes?" +msgid "Process to an Inventory Adjustment with Barcodes" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:5 -msgid "From the Barcode application:" -msgstr "Vanuit de Barcode applicatie:" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:7 -msgid "Click on **Inventory**" -msgstr "Klik op **Voorraad**" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:12 msgid "" -"Scan all the products (if you have 5 identical articles, scan it 5 times, or" -" use the keyboard to set the quantity)." +"To process an inventory adjustment by using barcodes, you first need to open" +" the *Barcode* app. Then, from the application, click on *Inventory " +"Adjustments*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:13 +msgid "" +"If you want to fully work with barcodes, you can download the sheet " +"*Commands for Inventory*." msgstr "" -"Scan alle producten (Indien u 5 identieke producten heeft scant u deze 5 " -"keer of gebruikt u het toetsenbord om de hoeveelheid in te stellen)." #: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:16 msgid "" -"If you manage multiple locations, scan the location before scanning the " -"products. Eg. scan a shelf's barcode ; scan each product on the shelf ; " -"repeat for each shelf in the wharehouse." +"Once you have clicked on *Inventory Adjustments*, Odoo will automatically " +"create one. Note that, if you work with multi-location, you first need to " +"specify in which location the inventory adjustment takes place." msgstr "" -"Indien u meerdere locaties beheerd scant u eerst de locatie voordat u de " -"producten scant. Scan bijvoorbeeld de barcode van een schap; scan elk " -"product op het schap; en herhaal dit voor elk schap in het magazijn." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:20 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:24 msgid "" -"When you've scanned all the items of the location, validate the inventory " -"manually or by scanning the **Validate** barcode." +"If you don’t work with multi-location, you will be able to scan the " +"different products you want to include in the inventory adjustment." msgstr "" -"Wanneer u alle producten van de locatie heeft gescand valideert u de " -"voorraad manueel of door de barcode **Valideer** te scannen." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:3 -msgid "How to process delivery orders?" -msgstr "Hoe uitgaande leveringen te verwerken?" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:31 msgid "" -"There are two approaches to process delivery orders: you can either work on " -"printed documents (and scan lines on the documents), or on a screen (and " -"scan products directly)." +"If you have 5 identical articles, scan it 5 times or use the keyboard to set" +" the quantity." msgstr "" -"Er zijn twee aanpakken om leveringen te verwerken: u kan werken op " -"afgedrukte documenten (en regels scannen van het document), of van een " -"scherm (en scan direct producten)." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:10 -msgid "Process printed delivery orders:" -msgstr "Verwerk afgedrukte afleverorders:" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:12 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:34 msgid "" -"Print delivery orders of the day by selecting all documents from the **To " -"Do** list and print **Picking Operations** from the top menu." +"Besides using the barcode scanner, you can also manually add a product if " +"necessary. To do so, click on *Add Product* and fill the information in " +"manually." msgstr "" -"Print uitgaande leveringen van vandaag door alle documenten te selecteren " -"vanuit de **Te Doen** lijst en print **Lever operaties** vanuit het bovenste" -" menu." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:44 msgid "" -"Once you start processing your delivery orders, **scan the barcode** on the " -"top-right corner of the document to load the right record on the screen." +"When you have scanned all the items of the location, validate the inventory " +"manually or scan the *Validate* barcode." msgstr "" -"Eenmaal u uitgaande leveringen begint te verwerken klikt u op **Scan de " -"barcode** in de rechterbovenhoek van het document op het juiste record te " -"openen op het scherm." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:19 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:3 +msgid "Work with Barcode Nomenclature" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:5 msgid "" -"Then, **scan the barcode** of every product, or scan the barcode of the " -"product on the picking line if the barcode on the product is not easily " -"accessible, visible or is missing." +"There are different situations in which barcode nomenclatures can be useful." +" A well-known use case is the one of a point of sales that sells products in" +" bulk. The customers will scale their products themselves and get the " +"printed barcode to stick on the product. This barcode will contain the " +"weight of the product and help compute the price accordingly." msgstr "" -"*Scan de barcode** vervolgens van elk product of scan de barcode van het " -"product op de verzamellijst regel als de barcode op het product niet " -"gemakkelijk toegankelijk is, niet goed zichtbaar is of ontbreekt." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:23 -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:24 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:13 +msgid "Create a Barcode Nomenclature" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:15 msgid "" -"Once you scanned all products, scan the **Validate** barcode action to " -"finish the operation." +"Odoo supports *Barcode Nomenclatures*, which determine the mapping and " +"interpretation of the encoded information." msgstr "" -"Nadat u alle producten heeft gescand klikt u op de **Valideer** barcode " -"actie om de operatie te voltooien." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:30 -msgid "Process delivery orders from a computer or mobile device:" -msgstr "Verwerk uitgaande leveringen vanuit een computer of mobiel toestel:" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:32 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:18 msgid "" -"Load all the delivery orders marked as **To Do**, and open the first one." +"To configure the *Barcode Nomenclature*, you need to activate the debug " +"mode. To do so, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Barcode Nomenclature*." msgstr "" -"Laad alle uitgaande leveringen die gemarkeerd zijn als **Te doen** en open " -"de eerste." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:35 -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:33 -msgid "Pick up and scan each listed product." -msgstr "Haal elk product op en scan het." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:37 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:22 msgid "" -"When you've picked all the items, click the **Validate** button or scan the " -"**Validate barcode** action to finish the Operation." +"You can create a barcode nomenclature from there, and then add a line to " +"create your first rule." msgstr "" -"Wanneer u alle items heeft verzameld klikt u op de **Valideer** knop of " -"scant u de **Valideer barcode** actie om de operatie te voltooien." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:40 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:28 msgid "" -"Move to the next delivery order to process by clicking on the top-right " -"right **arrow** or scanning the **Pager-Next** barcode action." +"The first step is to specify the *rule name*, for example, *Weight Barcode* " +"with 3 decimals. Then, you have to specify the type for barcode " +"nomenclature, like the *Weighted Product*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:35 +msgid "" +"The *Barcode Pattern* is a regular expression that defines the structure of " +"the barcode. In this example, 21 defines the products on which the rule will" +" be applied. Those are the numbers by which the product barcode should " +"start. The 5 “dots” are the following numbers of the product barcode and are" +" there to identify the product in question. The “N” defines a number and the" +" “D” defines the decimals." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:43 +msgid "" +"You can define different rules and order their priority thanks to the " +"sequence. The first rule that matches the scanned barcode will then be " +"applied." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:48 +msgid "Configure your Product" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:50 +msgid "The barcode of the product should start by “21”;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:52 +msgid "" +"The 5 “dots” are the other numbers of your product barcode, allowing to " +"identify the product;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:54 +msgid "" +"The barcode should contain 0’s when you did defined D’s or N’s. In our case," +" we need to set 5 zeros because we condigures “21………{NNDDD}”;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:56 +msgid "" +"In EAN-13, the last number is a check number. Use an EAN13 generator to know" +" which digit it should be in your case." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:61 +msgid "" +"In case you weight 1,5kg of pasta, the balance will print you the following " +"barcode: *2112345015001*. If you scan this barcode in your PoS, or when " +"receiving the products in your barcode app, Odoo will automatically create a" +" new line for the product, for a quantity of 1,5kg." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:67 +msgid "" +"For the point of sale, a price depending on the quantity will also be " +"computed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:74 +msgid "Rule Types" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:76 +msgid "" +"**Priced Product**: it allows you to identify the product and specify its " +"price, used in PoS;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:78 +msgid "" +"**Discounted Product**: it allows you to create one barcode per applied " +"discount. Then, you can scan your product in the PoS and apply discounts on " +"the product by scanning the discount barcode;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:80 +msgid "" +"**Weighted Product**: it allows you to identify the product and specify its " +"weight, used in both PoS and in Inventory;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:82 +msgid "" +"**Client**: it allows you to identify the customer, for example used with " +"loyalty program;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:84 +msgid "" +"**Cashier**: it allows you to identify the cashier when entering the PoS;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:86 +msgid "" +"**Location**: it allows you to identify the location on a transfer when " +"multi-location is activated;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:88 +msgid "" +"**Package**: it allows you to identify packages on a transfer when packages " +"are activated;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:90 +msgid "" +"**Lot**: it allows you to identify the lot number of a product on a " +"transfer;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:92 +msgid "" +"**Credit Card**: it doesn’t need manual modification, exists for data from " +"the Mercury module;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:94 +msgid "" +"**Unit Product**: it allows you to identify a product for both PoS and " +"Transfers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:97 +msgid "" +"When the barcode pattern contains .*, it means that it can contain any " +"number of characters. Those characters can be any number." msgstr "" -"Ga naar de volgende uitgaande leveringen om te verwerken door te klikken op " -"de **pijl** rechtsboven of door de **Volgende pagina** barcode actie te " -"scannen." #: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:3 -msgid "How to do an internal transfer?" -msgstr "Hoe een interne overplaatsing te doen?" +msgid "Process to Transfers" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:5 -msgid "In Odoo, there are two types of internal transfers:" -msgstr "In Odoo zijn er twee soorten interne verplaatsingen:" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:6 +msgid "Simple Transfers" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:7 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:8 msgid "" -"Those initiated automatically by the system (for example, a quality control)" +"To process a transfer from the *Barcode* app, the first step is to go to " +"*Operations*." msgstr "" -"Die automatisch zijn geïnitialiseerd door het systeem (bijvoorbeeld, een " -"kwaliteitscontrole)" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:10 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:14 msgid "" -"Those created by a worker (for example, through the internal transfer area " -"of the dashboard)." +"Then, you have the choice to either enter an existing transfer, by going to " +"the corresponding operation type and manually selecting the one you want to " +"enter, or by scanning the barcode of the transfer." msgstr "" -"Die aangemaakt door een werker (bijvoorbeeld, via de interne verplaatsing " -"locatie van het dashboard)." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:13 -msgid "To make an Internal Transfer:" -msgstr "Om een interne overplaatsing aan te maken:" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:15 -msgid "From the home of the barcode application, scan the **source location**" -msgstr "" -"Vanuit de thuispagina of de barcode applicatie scant u de **Bronlocatie**" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:17 -msgid "Pick up and **scan the products**" -msgstr "Haal de producten op en **Scan de producten**" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:19 -msgid "Scan the **destination location**" -msgstr "Scan de **Bestemmingslocatie**" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:21 -msgid "**Validate** the transfer to finish it" -msgstr "**Valideer** de overplaatsing om ze af te werken" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:3 -msgid "How to handle lots and serial numbers with barcodes?" -msgstr "Hoe partijen en serienummers beheren met barcodes?" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:24 msgid "" -"Lots Numbers can be encoded from incoming shipments, internal moves and " -"outgoing deliveries:" +"From there, you will be able to scan the products that are part of the " +"existing transfer and/or add new products to this transfer. Once all the " +"products have been scanned, you can validate the transfer to proceed with " +"the stock moves." msgstr "" -"Partijnummers kunnen worden gecodeerd van binnenkomende zendingen, interne " -"mutaties en uitgaande leveringen:" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:33 msgid "" -"In the barcode interface, **scan** the products you want create a lot from" +"If you have different storage locations in your warehouse, you can add " +"additional steps for the different operation types." msgstr "" -"In de barcode interface, **scan** de producten waarvan u een partij wilt " -"aanmaken" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:10 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:37 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:50 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:45 +msgid "Receipts" +msgstr "Ontvangsten" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:39 msgid "" -"If this product should be manage by lots, a window opens to help you scan " -"the lots/serial numbers" +"When receiving a product in stock, you need to scan its barcode in order to " +"identify it in the system. Once done, you can either make it enter the main " +"location of the transfer, for example WH/Stock, or scan a location barcode " +"to make it enter a sub-location of the main location." msgstr "" -"Indien dit product beheerd moet worden door partijen opent zich een scherm " -"dat u helpt om de partij/serienummers in te scannen" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:48 msgid "" -"**Scan** a lot barcode, **type** one manually or **leave empty** to generate" -" one automatically" +"If you want the product to enter WH/Stock in our example, you can simply " +"scan the next product." msgstr "" -"**Scan** een partij barcode, **type** er manueel één in of **laat leeg** om " -"automatisch een barcode te genereren" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:16 -msgid "Click or scan **Validate** once you are done" -msgstr "Klik of scan **Valideer** wanneer u klaar bent" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:52 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery.rst:3 +msgid "Delivery Orders" +msgstr "Leveringen" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:18 -msgid "What is the difference between **Lots** and **Serial Numbers**?" -msgstr "Wat is het verschil tussen **Partijen** en **Serienummers**?" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:20 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:54 msgid "" -"**Lot** numbers are attributed to several identical products, so each time " -"you scan a lot number, Odoo will add one on the product count." +"When delivering a product, you have to scan the source location if it is " +"different than the one initially set on the transfer. Then, you can start " +"scanning the products that are delivered from this specific location." msgstr "" -"Partijnummers zijn kenmerkend aan meerdere identieke producten, dus elke " -"keer als u een partijnummer scant, zal Odoo eentje toevoegen aan het product" -" aantal." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:24 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:62 msgid "" -"On the opposite, a **serial number** is unique, and represented by only one " -"barcode, sticked on only one item. This means that Odoo won't accept " -"scanning the same serial number more than once per operation." +"Once the different products have been scanned, you have the possibility to " +"scan another location, such as WH/Stock, and another page will be added to " +"your delivery order. You can move from one to the other thanks to the " +"*Previous* and *Next* buttons." msgstr "" -"Aan de andere kant, is een \"serienummer\" uniek en vertegenwoordigd door " -"één barcode, geplaatst op één item. Dit betekent dat Odoo het zelfde " -"serienummer maar één keer scant per handeling." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:32 -msgid "Here, we configured **Lu - Petit Beukelaer** tracking by lots." -msgstr "" -"Hier hebben we **Lu - Petit Beukelaer** geconfigureerd om tracering met " -"partijen te doen." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:37 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:70 msgid "" -"Scan a product from this incoming shipment, then scan the lot number of each" -" product (you can also use the keyboard)." +"Now, you can validate your transfer. To do so, click on *Next* until you " +"reach the last page of the transfer. There, you will be able to validate it." msgstr "" -"Scan een product van de inkomende zending en scan vervolgens het " -"partijnummer van elk product (u kunt ook het toetsenbord gebruiken)." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:43 -msgid "Click save/scan **Validate** and you are done." -msgstr "Click bewaar/scan **Valideer** en u bent klaar." +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:78 +msgid "Internal Transfers" +msgstr "Interne verplaatsingen" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:3 -msgid "How to process incoming receipts?" -msgstr "Hoe ontvangsten te verwerken?" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:80 msgid "" -"There are two approaches to process incoming receipts: you can either work " -"on printed documents (and scan lines on the documents), or on a screen (and " -"scan products directly)." +"When realizing an internal transfer with multi-location, you first have to " +"scan the source location of the product. Then, you can scan the product in " +"itself, before having to scan the barcode of the destination location." msgstr "" -"Er zijn twee mogelijkheden om ontvangsten te verwerken: u kan werken op " -"afgedrukte documenten (en lijnen scannen van het document), of van een " -"scherm (en scan direct producten)." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:10 -msgid "Process printed incoming receipts:" -msgstr "Verwerk afgedrukte aankooporders:" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:12 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:85 msgid "" -"Print incoming receipts of the day by selecting all documents from the **To " -"Receive** list and print **Picking Operations** from the top menu." +"If the source and destination of the internal transfers are already correct," +" you don’t need to scan them." msgstr "" -"Print ontvangsten van vandaag door alle documenten te selecteren vanuit de " -"**Te Doen** lijst en print **Lever operaties** vanuit het bovenste menu." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:16 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:89 +msgid "Transfers with Tracked Products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:91 msgid "" -"Once you start processing your incoming receipts, scan the barcode on the " -"top-right corner of the document to load the right record on the screen." +"If you work with products tracked by lot/serial numbers, you have two ways " +"of working:" msgstr "" -"Als u eenmaal uw ontvangsten begint te verwerken scant u de streepjescode in" -" de rechterbovenhoek van uw document om de juiste ontvangstoperatie te " -"openen op het scherm." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:20 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:94 msgid "" -"Then, scan the barcode of every product, or scan the barcode of the product " -"on the picking line if the barcode on the product is not easily accessible, " -"visible or is missing." +"If you work with serial/lot numbers taking all products into consideration, " +"you can scan the barcode of the lot/serial number and Odoo will increase the" +" quantity of the product, setting its lot/serial number." msgstr "" -"Scan dan de barcode van elk product, of scan de barcode van het product op " -"de verzamellijst als de barcode op het product niet gemakkelijk " -"toegankelijk/zichtbaar is of ontbreekt." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:28 -msgid "Process incoming receipts from a computer or mobile device:" -msgstr "Verwerk inkomende leveringen vanuit een computer of mobiel toestel:" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:30 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:99 msgid "" -"Load all the incoming receipts marked as **To Receive**, and open the first " -"one." +"If you have the same lot/serial number for different products, you can work " +"by scanning the product barcode first, and then the barcode of the " +"lot/serial number." msgstr "" -"Laad alle inkomende leveringen die gemarkeerd zijn als **Te ontvangen** en " -"open de eerste." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:35 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:3 +msgid "Create a Transfer from Scratch" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:5 msgid "" -"When you've picked all the items, click the **Validate** button or scan the " -"**Validate** barcode action to finish the Operation." +"To create a transfer from the *Barcode* application, you first need to print" +" the operation type barcodes. To do so, you can download the *Stock barcode " +"sheet* from the home page of the app." msgstr "" -"Wanneer u alle items heeft ontvangen klikt u op de **Valideer** knop of " -"scant u de **Valideer barcode** actie om de operatie te voltooien." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:12 msgid "" -"Move to the next incoming receipt to process by clicking on the top-right " -"right **arrow** or scanning the **Pager-Next** barcode action." +"Once done, you can scan the one for which you want to create a new document." +" Then, an empty document will be created and you will be able to scan your " +"products to populate it." msgstr "" -"Ga naar de volgende te verwerken ontvangst door te klikken op de **pijl** " -"rechtsboven of door de **Volgende pagina** streepjescode actie te scannen." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:42 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:137 -msgid "Example" -msgstr "Voorbeeld" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:44 -msgid "Open operation interface." -msgstr "Open operaties interface." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:49 -msgid "Scan." -msgstr "Scan." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:54 -msgid "" -"The picking appears. Scan items and/or fill in informations using the mouse " -"and keyboard." -msgstr "" -"De selectie vind plaats. Scan uw artikelen en/of voeg informatie toe via " -"muis of keyboard handelingen. " #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup.rst:3 msgid "Setup" @@ -493,348 +503,44 @@ msgstr "" "('CR suffix AAN', 'Voeg enter toe na suffix', enz.)" #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:3 -msgid "How to activate the barcodes in Odoo?" -msgstr "Hoe barcodes te activeren in Odoo?" +msgid "Activate the Barcodes in Odoo" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:5 msgid "" -"The barcode scanning features can save you a lot of the time usually lost " +"The barcode scanning features can save you a lot of time usually lost " "switching between the keyboard, the mouse and the scanner. Properly " "attributing barcodes to products, pickings locations, etc. allows you to " "work more efficiently by controlling the software almost exclusively with " "the barcode scanner." msgstr "" -"De functies voor barcodescanning kunnen u veel tijd doen besparen dat " -"meestal verloren gaat door het schakelen tussen het toetsenbord, de muis en " -"de scanner. Het op de juiste manier toewijzen van streepjescodes aan " -"producten, locaties voor pickings, enz. stelt u in staat efficiënter te " -"werken door de software bijna uitsluitend te besturen met de barcodescanner." #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:12 -msgid "Set products barcodes" -msgstr "Stel product barcodes in" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:17 -msgid "" -"In order to fill a picking or to perform an inventory, you need to make sure" -" that your products are encoded in Odoo along with their barcodes. If this " -"is not already done, you can fill in the products barcodes through a handy " -"interface. Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings` " -"and click :menuselection:`Operations --> Barcode Scanner`. Click Save, and " -"go back into the previous screen to click Configure Product Barcodes. This " -"interface can also be accessed via the planner." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:28 -msgid "" -"Product variants: be careful to add barcodes directly on the variant, and " -"not the template product (otherwise you won't be able to differentiate " -"them)." -msgstr "" -"Productvarianten: wees voorzichtig met streepjescodes " -"direct op een variant toe te voegen en niet op het sjabloonproduct (anders " -"kan u ze niet onderscheiden)." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:33 -msgid "Set locations barcodes" -msgstr "Stel locatie barcodes in" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:38 -msgid "" -"If you manage multiple locations, you will find useful to attribute a " -"barcode to each location and stick it on the location. You can configure the" -" locations barcodes in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> " -"Warehouse Management --> Locations`. There is button in the **Print** menu " -"that you can use to print the locations names and barcodes. There are 4 " -"barcodes per page, arranged in a way that is convenient to print on sticker " -"paper." -msgstr "" -"Als u meerdere locaties beheert, is het handig om aan elke locatie een " -"streepjescode toe te wijzen en deze op de locatie te plakken. U kunt de " -"streepjescode van de locaties configureren in: menuselectie: `Voorraad -> " -"Configuratie -> Magazijnbeheer -> Locaties`. Er is een knop in het menu ** " -"Afdrukken ** die u kunt gebruiken om de namen van locaties en streepjescodes" -" af te drukken. Er zijn 4 streepjescodes per pagina, zodanig gerangschikt " -"dat het handig is om op stickerpapier af te drukken." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:47 -msgid "" -"Example of location naming: **warehouse short name** - **location short " -"name** - (**Corridor X** - **Shelf Y** - **Height Z**) Example: A032-025-133" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:54 -msgid "Barcode formats" -msgstr "Barcode formaten" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:56 -msgid "" -"Most retail products use EAN-13 barcodes. They cannot be made up without " -"proper authorization: you must pay the International Article Numbering " -"Association a fee in exchange for an EAN code sequence (that's why no two " -"products in a store will ever have the same EAN code)." -msgstr "" -"EAN-13 barcodes: gebruikt door de meeste producthandelaren," -" ze kunnen niet gemaakt worden zonder een autorisatie: bij de internationale" -" artikelnummer associatie kan u een EAN code reeks aankopen (de reden waarom" -" twee producten nooit dezelfde EAN code hebben)." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:61 -msgid "" -"Still, as Odoo supports any string as a barcode, so you can always define " -"your own barcode format for internal use." -msgstr "" -"Odoo ondersteund elke string als barcode dus u kan altijd uw eigen barcode " -"formaat definiëren voor intern gebruik." - -#: ../../inventory/management.rst:3 -msgid "Warehouse Management" -msgstr "Magazijnbeheer" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment.rst:3 -msgid "Inventory Adjustment" -msgstr "Voorraad aanpassing" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:3 -msgid "How to make the initial inventory?" -msgstr "Hoe de initiële voorraad te maken?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:5 -msgid "" -"One of the most important feature in an warehouse management software is to " -"keep the inventory right." -msgstr "" -"Een van de belangrijkste kenmerken van een warehouse management software is " -"het bijhouden van een correcte voorraad." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Once your products have been defined, it is time to make your initial " -"inventory. You will reflect reality by inventorying the right quantities in " -"the right locations." -msgstr "" -"Zodra uw producten zijn gedefinieerd, is het tijd om uw eerste inventaris op" -" te maken. Dit wordt meteen een weerspiegeling van de realiteit door de " -"juiste hoeveelheden op de juiste locaties te inventariseren." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:55 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:34 -msgid "Product Configuration" -msgstr "Product configuratie" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:15 -msgid "" -"In the Inventory module, open the :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> " -"Products`, then click on **Create** to create a new product. Configure the " -"product type so that it is **Stockable** and not a consumable." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:23 -msgid "Start the initial inventory" -msgstr "Start de initiële voorraad" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:26 -msgid "Update the product quantity for one product" -msgstr "Update de producthoeveelheid voor één product" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:28 -msgid "" -"In the product you just created, you can see in the upper tiles that we have" -" 0 product On Hand. Click on the **Update qty on Hand** button." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:31 -msgid "" -"A new window opens. In the **New Quantity on Hand** field, type the quantity" -" of product you currently hold in stock, then click on **Apply**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:39 -msgid "" -"if you are using multiple locations for your warehouse, you will be able to " -"set the location of your product from this screen." -msgstr "" -"Indien u meerdere locaties gebruikt voor uw magazijn kan u de locatie van uw" -" product instellen vanuit dit scherm." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:42 -msgid "" -"You can now see from the On Hand tab that the quantity has been updated." -msgstr "" -"U kan nu vanuit de Beschikbare Hvh tab zien dat de hoeveelheid is geüpdatet." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:47 -msgid "" -"Now, if you check the **Inventory Adjustments** in the **Inventory Control**" -" menu, you will see that a new line named \"INV: (name of your product)\" " -"has automatically been created and validated by the system." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:55 -msgid "Multiple products at once" -msgstr "Meerdere producten in één keer" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:57 -msgid "" -"Create all the products for which you want to follow the stock (as stockable" -" products). Once the required products in stock have been defined, use an " -"initial inventory operation to put the current quantities into the system by" -" location. Go to :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Inventory " -"Adjustments` to start your initial inventory." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:63 -msgid "" -"Give it a name (for example Initial Inventory) and select the stock location" -" of your inventory. Note that when you select a parent location (such as " -"Stock, which might be split into sub locations), you can also select the sub" -" (or child) locations." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:71 -msgid "" -"You can choose between making an inventory for all products, for a few or " -"only for one. In this case, we choose the **All products** option." -msgstr "" -"U kan kiezen tussen het aanmaken van een voorraad voor alle producten, voor " -"een paar producten of maar één product. In dit geval kiezen we de **Alle " -"producten** optie." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:79 -msgid "" -"If you need your stock valuation to be done in a different period than the " -"one that will be selected by default according to the inventory end date, " -"enter the corresponding accounting period in the Force Valuation Period " -"field. The accounting module needs to be installed." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:84 -msgid "" -"Click the **Start Inventory** button. Depending on the type of inventory you" -" have chosen (all products or selected ones) you might have to add products " -"manually by clicking on **Add an item**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:88 -msgid "" -"Add the **Real Quantity** that you have in your stock for each product." -msgstr "" -"Voeg de ** Reële hoeveelheid ** toe die u voor elk product in voorraad hebt " -"." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:92 -msgid "" -"additional information will be available according to the options you " -"activated (multi-locations, serial number, consignee stocks)." -msgstr "" -"aanvullende informatie zal beschikbaar zijn volgens de opties die u hebt " -"geactiveerd (multi-locaties, serienummer, consignatie)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:98 -msgid "" -"Click the **Validate Inventory** button to confirm the inventory and post " -"it." -msgstr "" -"Klik de **Valideer voorraad** knop om de voorraad te bevestigen en ze te " -"plaatsen." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:102 -msgid "Reporting" -msgstr "Rapportages" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:104 -msgid "" -"To check the current stock, go to :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> " -"Products`, and click on the **list button**:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:3 -msgid "How to choose between minimum stock rule and make to order?" -msgstr "Hoe te kiezen tussen de minimale stockregel en maak op order?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:5 -msgid "" -"**Minimum Stock rules** and **Make to Order** have similar consequences but " -"different rules. They should be used depending on your manufacturing and " -"delivery strategies." -msgstr "" -"Minimale voorraadregels en Maak op Order hebben soortgelijke gevolgen maar " -"verschillende regels. Ze moeten worden gebruikt, afhankelijk van uw " -"productie- en levering- strategieën." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:10 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:10 -msgid "Terminology" -msgstr "Terminologie" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:13 -msgid "Minimum stock rule" -msgstr "Minimale stockregel" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:15 -msgid "" -"**Minimum Stock** rules are used to ensure that you always have the minimum " -"amount of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or " -"answer to your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its" -" minimum the system will automatically generate a procurement with the " -"quantity needed to reach the maximum stock level." -msgstr "" -"Minimum voorraadregels worden gebruikt om ervoor te zorgen dat u altijd het " -"minimale aantal producten op voorraad heeft om uw producten te kunnen " -"vervaardigen en / of te beantwoorden aan uw klantenbehoeften. Wanneer het " -"voorraadniveau van een product het minimum bereikt, zal het systeem " -"automatisch een inkooporder genereren met de hoeveelheid die nodig is om het" -" maximale voorraadniveau te bereiken." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:22 -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:56 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:22 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:58 -msgid "Make to Order" -msgstr "Maak op order" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:24 -msgid "" -"The **Make to Order** function will trigger a **Purchase Order** of the " -"amount of the **Sales Order** related to the product. The system will " -"**not** check the current stock valuation. This means that a draft purchase " -"order will be generated regardless of the quantity on hand of the product." -msgstr "" -"Met de functie Maak op Order wordt een aankooporder geactiveerd dat gelijk " -"is aan het aantal bestelde producten. Het systeem zal de huidige voorraad **" -" niet ** controleren. Dit betekent dat een concept aankooporder wordt " -"gegenereerd, ongeacht de beschikbare hoeveelheid." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:30 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:12 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:37 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:34 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:29 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:9 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:50 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:28 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:21 -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:22 -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:25 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:159 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:164 -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:21 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:18 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:19 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:30 +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:16 +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:14 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:10 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:25 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:29 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:22 #: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:17 -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:23 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:10 #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:18 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:30 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:17 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:114 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:16 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:15 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:13 @@ -843,216 +549,72 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Configuration" msgstr "Configuratie" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:33 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:33 -msgid "Minimum stock rules" -msgstr "Minimale stockregels" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:35 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:14 msgid "" -"The Minimum Stock Rules configuration is available through the menu " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory Control --> Reordering Rule` in the " -"drop down menu. There, click on **Create** to set minimum and maximum stock " -"values for a given product." +"To use this feature, you first need to activate the *Barcode* functionality " +"via *Inventory > Settings > Barcode Scanner*. Once you have ticked the " +"feature, you can hit save." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Active" -msgstr "Actief" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:22 +msgid "Set Product Barcodes" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:24 msgid "" -"If the active field is set to False, it will allow you to hide the " -"orderpoint without removing it." +"You can easily assign barcodes to your different products via the " +"*Inventory* app. To do so, go to *Settings > Configure Products Barcodes*." msgstr "" -"Als het actief veld uit staat, kunt u de minimale voorraadregel verbergen " -"zonder deze te verwijderen." -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Product Unit of Measure" -msgstr "Maateenheid product" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Default unit of measure used for all stock operations." -msgstr "Standaard maateenheid gebruikt voor alle voorraadbewegingen." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Procurement Group" -msgstr "Verwervingsgroep" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:31 msgid "" -"Moves created through this orderpoint will be put in this procurement group." -" If none is given, the moves generated by stock rules will be grouped into " -"one big picking." +"Then, you have the possibility to assign barcodes to your products directly " +"at creation on the product form." msgstr "" -"Mutaties welke worden aangemaakt door deze aanvulregel worden geplaatst in " -"deze verwervingsgroep. Indien niets is ingevoerd, worden de mutaties, " -"gegenereerd door de voorraadregels, gegroepeerd in één grote levering." -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Minimum Quantity" -msgstr "Minimale hoeveelheid" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:41 msgid "" -"When the virtual stock goes below the Min Quantity specified for this field," -" Odoo generates a procurement to bring the forecasted quantity to the Max " -"Quantity." +"Be careful to add barcodes directly on the product variants and not on the " +"template product. Otherwise, you won’t be able to differentiate them." msgstr "" -"Wanneer een virtuele voorraad onder de minimale voorraad komt, zoals " -"gespecificeerd in dit veld, zal Odoo een verwervingsopdracht genereren om de" -" verwachte voorraad aan te vullen tot de maximale hoeveelheid." -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Maximum Quantity" -msgstr "Maximale hoeveelheid" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:46 +msgid "Set Locations Barcodes" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:48 msgid "" -"When the virtual stock goes below the Min Quantity, Odoo generates a " -"procurement to bring the forecasted quantity to the Quantity specified as " -"Max Quantity." +"If you manage multiple locations, you will find useful to attribute a " +"barcode to each location and stick it on the location. You can configure the" +" locations barcodes in *Inventory > Configuration > Locations*." msgstr "" -"Wanneer een virtuele voorraad onder de minimale voorraad komt, zoals " -"gespecificeerd in dit veld, zal Odoo een verwervingsopdracht genereren om de" -" voorraadprognose aan te vullen tot de maximale hoeveelheid." -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Quantity Multiple" -msgstr "Veelvoud" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:59 msgid "" -"The procurement quantity will be rounded up to this multiple. If it is 0, " -"the exact quantity will be used." +"You can easily print the barcode you allocate to the locations via the " +"*Print* menu." msgstr "" -"De verwerving hoeveelheid zal worden afgerond op deze veelvoud. Bij 0 wordt " -"de exacte hoeveelheid gebruikt." -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Lead Time" -msgstr "Doorlooptijd" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:63 +msgid "Barcode Formats" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:65 msgid "" -"Number of days after the orderpoint is triggered to receive the products or " -"to order to the vendor" +"Most retail products use EAN-13 barcodes. They cannot be made up without " +"proper authorization. You must pay the International Article Numbering " +"Association a fee in exchange for an EAN code sequence." msgstr "" -"Aantal dagen nadat de aanvulregel is uitgevoerd om producten te ontvangen of" -" een order te maken bij de leverancier" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:45 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:69 msgid "" -"Then, click on your product to access the related product form and, on the " -"**Inventory submenu**, do not forget to select a supplier." -msgstr "" -"Klik vervolgens op uw product om het gerelateerde productformulier en het " -"\"Voorraad submenu\" te zien, vergeet geen leverancier aan te duiden." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:52 -msgid "" -"Don't forget to select the right product type in the product form. A " -"consumable can not be stocked and will thus not be accounted for in the " -"stock valuation." -msgstr "" -"Vergeet niet het juiste soort product te selecteren. Een verbruik product " -"kan niet gestockeerd worden en wordt dus niet gebruikt in de stock " -"berekening." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:58 -msgid "" -"The Make to Order configuration is available on your product form through " -"your :menuselection:`Inventory module --> Inventory control --> Products` " -"(or any other module where products are available)." +"Still, as Odoo supports any string as a barcode, you can always define your " +"own barcode format for internal use." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:62 -msgid "On the product form, under **Inventory**, click on **Make To Order**." -msgstr "Klik in het product scherm onder Inventaris op \"Maak op Order\"." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:68 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:70 -msgid "Choice between the two options" -msgstr "Kies tussen de twee opties" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:70 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:72 -msgid "" -"The choice between the two options is thus dependent of your inventory " -"strategy. If you prefer to have a buffer and always have at least a minimum " -"amount, the minimum stock rule should be used. If you want to reorder your " -"stocks only if your sale is confirmed it is better to use the Make to Order." -msgstr "" -"De keuze tussen de twee opties is dus afhankelijk van uw voorraadstrategie. " -"Als u de voorkeur geeft aan een buffer en steeds een minimum aantal op " -"voorraad wenst, moet de minimumvoorraadregel worden gebruikt. Als u uw " -"voorraden alleen wenst aan te vullen als uw verkoop is bevestigd, is het " -"beter om de Maak op order route te gebruiken." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:3 -msgid "TaKing stock from different warehouses" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:5 -msgid "" -"When you plan to deliver a customer, you don’t know in advance if the " -"products will come from Warehouse A or Warehouse B. You may, in some cases, " -"need to take stock from different warehouses. With *Odoo*, you can configure" -" this by using the concept of virtual warehouses. Let us show you how to set" -" those virtual warehouses." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:12 -msgid "Set up virtual warehouses" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:14 -msgid "" -"Let’s say you have two warehouses: Warehouse A and Warehouse B. Create a new" -" warehouse, that will be a virtual one. It will allow you to take the stock " -"from A or B. To do so, go to your inventory app settings and enable the " -"multi-warehouses feature. Then, go to the warehouses menu and click on " -"create." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:24 -msgid "" -"The *Storage Location* feature will be automatically enabled. Good news, " -"because you will need it later in the process." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:27 -msgid "" -"Now, you have to make sure that the main stock locations of warehouse A and " -"warehouse B are children locations of the main stock location of warehouse A" -" + B. Go to the locations menu, and edit the main location of your two " -"warehouses. Then, change their parent location to main location of warehouse" -" A+B." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:37 -msgid "Sell a product from the virtual warehouse" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:39 -msgid "" -"Let’s say you have two products, one stored in warehouse A and one stored in" -" warehouse B. Now, you can create a new quotation for one of each product. " -"Go to other information and choose Warehouse A+B in the shipping " -"information." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/virtual_warehouses.rst:47 -msgid "" -"Once you have done it, you can convert it to a sales order. Then, a delivery" -" order will be automatically generated, with a product reserved in warehouse" -" A and one in warehouse B." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery.rst:3 -msgid "Delivery Orders" -msgstr "Leveringen" +#: ../../inventory/management.rst:3 +msgid "Warehouse Management" +msgstr "Magazijnbeheer" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:3 msgid "How do I cancel a delivery order?" @@ -1061,23 +623,13 @@ msgstr "Hoe een inkooporder annuleren?" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:6 ../../inventory/overview.rst:3 -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/overview.rst:3 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:6 @@ -1195,152 +747,151 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:3 -msgid "" -"How to send products to customers directly from suppliers (drop-shipping)?" +msgid "Send Products to Customers Directly from Suppliers (Drop-shipping)" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:6 -msgid "What is drop-shipping?" -msgstr "Wat is drop shipping?" +msgid "What is Drop-Shipping?" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:8 msgid "" "Drop-Shipping is a system that allows orders taken from your store to be " "shipped straight from your supplier to your customer. On a usual delivery " "system, products are sent from your supplier to your warehouse to be put in " -"stock, and then shipped to your customers after ordering. With drop-" -"shipping, no item is stocked. When a customer places an order in your shop, " -"the item is delivered straight from the supplier to the customer. Therefore," -" the product doesn't need to get through your warehouse." +"stock and then shipped to your customers after ordering." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:18 -msgid "Points to be considered while implementing drop-shipping" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:13 +msgid "" +"With drop-shipping, no item is stocked. When a customer places an order in " +"your shop, the item is delivered straight from the supplier to the customer." +" Therefore, the product doesn't need to get through your warehouse." msgstr "" -"Punten om rekening mee te houden bij de implementatie van drop-shipping" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:20 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:19 +msgid "Points to be Considered while Implementing Drop-Shipping" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:24 msgid "" "Use drop-shipping only for the products you can't or don't want to keep in " -"stock. One reason is that you'll always make smaller margins on items that " -"are drop-shipped, so you should keep it only for items that take up a lot of" -" space in your warehouse." +"stock." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:22 msgid "" -"Drop-shipping is best for niche products. Chances are that products that are" -" in high demand are being offered by large suppliers at a fraction of the " -"price you'll be able to charge, so using a more costly shipping method won't" -" be financially rewarding. But if your product is unique, then it makes " -"sense!" +"One reason is that you'll always make smaller margins on items that are " +"drop-shipped, so you should keep it only for items that take up a lot of " +"space in your warehouse." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:31 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:30 +msgid "Drop-shipping is best for niche products." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:27 msgid "" -"To protect your customers from bad experiences, test drop-shipping companies" -" for yourself beforehand and list the best ones." +"Chances are that products that are in high demand are being offered by large" +" suppliers at a fraction of the price you'll be able to charge, so using a " +"more costly shipping method won't be financially rewarding. But if your " +"product is unique, then it makes sense!" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:34 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:33 +msgid "To protect your customers from bad experiences." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:33 msgid "" -"Make sure time is not against you. Drop-shipping should take a reasonable " -"amount of time and surely not more than it would have taken you to handle it" -" all by yourself. It's also nice to be able to provide your customers with a" -" tracking number." +"Test drop-shipping companies for yourself beforehand and list the best ones." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:39 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:37 +msgid "Make sure time is not against you." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:36 msgid "" -"Items have to be available from your supplier. It's good to know if the " -"product you're selling is available upstream. If you don't have that " -"information, inform your customers that you don't hold the item in stock and" -" that it's subject to availability from a third party." +"Drop-shipping should take a reasonable amount of time and surely not more " +"than it would have taken you to handle it all by yourself. It's also nice to" +" be able to provide your customers with a tracking number." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:46 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:44 +msgid "Items have to be available from your supplier." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:40 msgid "" -"For more information and insights on Drop-shipping, read our blog on `What " -"is drop-shipping and how to use it `__." +"It's good to know if the product you're selling is available upstream. If " +"you don't have that information, inform your customers that you don't hold " +"the item in stock and that it's subject to availability from a third party." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:50 -msgid "Configuring drop-shipping" -msgstr "Configureer drop-shipping" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:47 +msgid "" +"For more information and insights about Drop-Shipping, you can read our " +"blog: `*What is drop-shipping and how to use it* `__." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:52 +msgid "Configure Drop-Shipping" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:54 msgid "" -"Open the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`. Go " -"to **Location & Warehouse**, locate the **Dropshipping** option and tick the" -" box **Allow suppliers to deliver directly to your customers**. Then, click " -"on **Apply**." +"Activate the functionality in the *Purchase* application by going to " +"*Configuration > Settings*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:60 msgid "" -"Then go to the menu :menuselection:`Sales --> Configuration --> Settings`. " -"Locate **Order Routing** and tick the box **Choose specific routes on sales " -"order lines (advanced)**. Click on **Apply**." +"Then, go to the *Inventory* app, in *Configuration > Settings* to activate " +"the *Multi-Step Routes* feature. It will allow you to make the *Route* field" +" appear on the sale order lines to specify you send a product via drop-" +"shipping." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:67 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:68 msgid "" -"Now, open the menu :menuselection:`Sales --> Sales --> Products`. Add a " -"supplier to the products you want to dropship." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:74 -msgid "How to send products from the suppliers directly to the customers" +"Now, in the *Sales* app, go to *Products > Products*. Select the product you" +" would like to drop-ship and add a vendor pricelist which contains the right" +" supplier, via the purchase tab." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:76 -msgid "" -"Create a **Sales Order** and specify on a sales order line for your products" -" that the route is **Dropshipping**." +msgid "Send Products from the Suppliers Directly to the Customers" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:82 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:78 msgid "" -"Open the menu :menuselection:`Purchases --> Purchases --> Requests for " -"Quotation`. The draft purchase order is automatically created from the " -"procurement with the drop-shipping route. Once the order is confirmed, you " -"will see that one shipment has been created." +"Create a *Sales Order* and add the product on which you just set the vendor." +" Add the *Route* field thanks to the widget on the right of the sale order " +"line. Now, you are able to specify that your products’ route is *Drop-" +"Shipping*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:90 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:89 msgid "" -"To confirm the sending from the vendor to the customer, go back to " -"**Inventory** app. On the dashboard, click on **# TO RECEIVE** on the " -"dropship card." +"Once the sale order is confirmed, Odoo automatically generates a *Request " +"for Quotation* for the supplier who will proceed to the drop-shipping. You " +"can find it in the *Purchase* app, with the sale order as *Source Document*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:97 msgid "" -"It will open the list of drop-shipping transfers. Validate the transfer once" -" it has been done. The items will be directly delivered from the partner to " -"the customer without transiting to your warehouse." +"Once this *Purchase Order* is confirmed, a *Receipt Order* is created and " +"linked to it. The source location is the vendor location and the destination" +" location is the customer location. Then, the product won’t go through your " +"own stock when you validate the dropship document." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:103 -msgid ":doc:`inventory_flow`" -msgstr ":doc:`inventory_flow`" - #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:105 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:63 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:159 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:129 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:70 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:179 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:124 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:222 -msgid "Todo" -msgstr "Te doen" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:106 msgid "" -"Add link to this section when available * How to analyse the performance of " -"my vendors?" +"You can also easily access the dropship document directly from your " +"inventory dashboard." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:3 @@ -1477,176 +1028,139 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:3 -msgid "How to process delivery orders in one step (shipping)?" -msgstr "Hoe leverorders in één stap verwerken (verzending)?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:8 -msgid "" -"When an order goes to the shipping department for final delivery, Odoo is " -"set up by default to utilize a one-step operation: once all goods are " -"available, they are able to be shipped in a single delivery order." +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:3 +msgid "Process a Receipt in one step (Receipt)" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:5 msgid "" -"There is no configuration needed. The default outgoing shipments are " -"configured to be directly delivered from the stock." +"There is no configuration needed to receive in one step. The default " +"incoming shipments are configured to be directly received from the vendors " +"to the stock." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:18 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:9 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:9 msgid "" -"However, if **advance routes** is activated and you set another shipping " -"configuration on your warehouse, you can set it back to the one-step " -"delivery configuration. Go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouses` " -"and edit the concerned warehouse." +"However, if advanced routes have been activated and you set another incoming" +" configuration on your warehouse, you can set it back to the one-step " +"receipt configuration. To do so, go to *Configuration > Warehouses* and edit" +" the warehouse in question." msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:14 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:14 +msgid "" +"Set the *Incoming Shipments* option to *Receive goods directly (1 step)*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:21 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:21 +msgid "Create a Purchase Order" +msgstr "Maak een inkooporder" + #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:23 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:23 msgid "" -"Set the outgoing shippings the option to **Ship directly from stock (Ship " -"Only)**" +"To create a *Request for Quotation*, go to the *Purchase* application and " +"click on *Create*. Then, add some storable products to receive and confirm " +"the *RfQ*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:30 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:68 -msgid "Create a Sales Order" -msgstr "Maak een verkooporder aan" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:32 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:27 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:27 msgid "" -"Create a sales order (From quotation to sales order) with some products to " -"deliver." +"Notice that, now, we see 1 receipt associated with the purchase order you " +"just created. If you click on the button, you will see your receipt order." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:35 -msgid "" -"Notice that we now see ``1`` delivery associated with this sales order in " -"the **stat button** above the sales order." +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:35 +msgid "Process a Receipt" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:41 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:37 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:37 msgid "" -"If you click on the **1 Delivery** stat button, you should now see your " -"picking." +"You can also fin the receipt directly from the *Inventory* app. When on the " +"dashboard, you can click the *1 TO PROCESS* button under the *Receipts* " +"Kanban card. Then, you will see your receipt." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:45 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:99 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:88 -msgid "Process a Delivery" -msgstr "Verwerk een levering" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:47 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:143 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:113 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:44 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:44 msgid "" -"Go to **Inventory** and click on the **# TO DO** link under the **Delivery " -"Orders** kanban card." +"Now, enter the picking that you want to process. You will be able to click " +"on *Validate* to complete the move directly as products coming from " +"suppliers are considered as being always available." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:53 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:110 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:130 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:149 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:99 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:119 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:99 -msgid "Click on the picking that you want to process." -msgstr "Klik op de verzamellijst die u wilt verwerken." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:55 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:51 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:51 msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Output** to the " -"**customer**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:58 -msgid "" -"This has completed the **Shipping Step** and the WH/OUT should now show " -"**Done** in the status column at the top of the page, which means the " -"product has been shipped to the customer." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:64 -msgid "" -"Ajouter un lien vers ces pages quand elles existeront - Process Overview: " -"From sales orders to delivery orders" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:67 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:163 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:133 -msgid "Process Overview: From purchase orders to receptions" +"Once you *Validate* the receipt, the products leave the *Supplier Location* " +"to enter your *WH/Stock Location*. You can easily see that the receipt took " +"place thanks to the status of the document, which is now *Done*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:3 -msgid "How can you change the packaging type for your sale order?" -msgstr "Hoe kan u het soort verpakking wijzigen voor uw verkooporder?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Odoo gives you the possibility to change the default packaging type and " -"adapt the packaging the way you want it, depending on the weight of the " -"order." +msgid "Deliver Products in Packages" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:5 msgid "" -"In the **Inventory** module, Go to **Configuration** and then click on " -"**Settings**." +"In Odoo, you have the possibility to deliver your products in different " +"packages, depending on the volume and or weight of your products." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:11 +msgid "" +"First, you need to activate the *Delivery Packages* feature in the " +"*Inventory app > Configuration > Settings*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:18 +msgid "Proceed to a Delivery" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:20 msgid "" -"In :menuselection:`Traceability --> Packages`, flag **Record packages used " -"on packing : pallets, boxes,...**" +"Now, you can create a planned delivery with some products in it. You will " +"have the possibility to create new packages and assign them to the stock " +"move lines." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:24 -msgid "*Sale process*" -msgstr "*Verkoopproces*" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:26 -msgid "In the **Sales** module, go to **Sales** and click on **Sale Order**." -msgstr "" -"Ga naar **Verkopen** en klik op **Verkooporder** in de **Verkoop** module." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:28 -msgid "Create your new Sale Order, and **Confirm the Sale**." -msgstr "Maak uw nieuwe verkooporder en **Bevestig de verkoop**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:33 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:27 msgid "" -"Once you've confirmed the Sale, you need to click on **Delivery**, to be " -"redirected to the Delivery order." +"Then, you can define the package type from this window. Once the delivery " +"order is validated, you can retrieve which products have been included in " +"the package." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:36 -msgid "Click on **Edit**, and you can now change the packaging." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:41 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:34 msgid "" -"In the **Operations** tab, in the last column, change the **0** and put the " -"number of products that you want to pack together. Then click on **Put in " -"Pack**." +"A button will appear at the delivery stage, allowing you to find all the " +"packages which were part of the delivery order." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:48 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:44 +msgid "Use the Put in Pack button" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:46 msgid "" -"Choose the type of packaging that you want. You can also see that the weight" -" has been adapted to your package, and you can change it manually if you " -"want it to be more precise. Then click on **Save**." +"Another way to put products in packs is to use the *Put in Pack* button. It " +"will automatically assign a pack to the number of products which is set as " +"*Done* and duplicate the stock move line if necessary." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:52 -msgid "Repeat the operation until all the products are put in pack." +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Then, you will be able to update the different packages created this way, " +"directly via the *Packages* button." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:54 -msgid "Finally, click on **Validate** to confirm the delivery." -msgstr "Klik uiteindelijk op **Valideren** om de levering te bevestigen." - #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:3 msgid "How is the scheduled delivery date computed?" msgstr "" @@ -1662,6 +1176,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:18 msgid "Configuring lead times" msgstr "" @@ -1677,6 +1192,7 @@ msgid "Configuration of the different lead times are made as follows:" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:22 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:28 msgid "At a product level" msgstr "Op een productniveau" @@ -1736,6 +1252,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:67 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:74 msgid "At the company level" msgstr "Op bedrijfsniveau" @@ -1797,6 +1314,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:110 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:134 msgid "At route level" msgstr "Op route niveau" @@ -1832,6 +1350,11 @@ msgid "" " display a warning." msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:137 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:173 +msgid "Example" +msgstr "Voorbeeld" + #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:139 msgid "" "As an example, you may sell a car today (January 1st), that is purchased on " @@ -1867,367 +1390,288 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:3 -msgid "How to process delivery orders in three steps (pick + pack + ship)?" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:3 +msgid "Process a Receipt in three steps (Input + Quality + Stock)" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:5 msgid "" -"When an order goes to the shipping department for final delivery, Odoo is " -"set up by default on a **one-step** operation: once all goods are available," -" they can be shipped in bulk in a single delivery order. However, that " -"process may not reflect the reality and your company may require more steps " -"before shipping." +"In many companies, it is necessary to assess the received good. The goal is " +"to check that the products correspond to the quality requirements agreed " +"with the suppliers. Therefore, adding a *quality control step* in the goods " +"receipt process can become essential." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:14 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:10 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:10 msgid "" -"With the **three steps** process (**Pick + Pack + Ship**), the items are " -"transferred to a packing area, where they will be assembled by area of " -"destination, and then set to outbound trucks for final delivery to the " -"customers." +"Odoo uses routes to define exactly how you will handle the different receipt" +" steps. The configuration is done at the level of the warehouse. By default," +" the reception is a one-step process, but changing the configuration can " +"allow having 3 steps." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:19 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:15 msgid "" -"A few configuration steps are necessary in order to accomplish **Pick + Pack" -" + Ship** in Odoo. These steps create some additional locations, which by " -"default are called **Output** and **Packing Zone**. So, if your warehouse's " -"code is ``WH``, this configuration will create a location called " -"``WH/Output`` and another one called ``WH/Packing Zone``." +"The 3-steps flow is as follows: You receive the goods in an input area, then" +" transfer them into a quality area for *quality control*. When the quality " +"check has been processed, you can move the goods from QC to stock. Of " +"course, you may change the quantity and only transfer to stock the quantity " +"that is valid and decide that you will return the quantity that is not good." msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:23 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:23 +msgid "Multi-Step Routes" +msgstr "Multi-stap routes" + #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:25 msgid "" -"Goods will move from **WH/Stock** to **WH/Packing Zone** in the first step. " -"Then move from **WH/Packing Zone** to **WH/Output**. Then finally it will be" -" delivered from **WH/Output** to its **final destination**." +"First, you will need to activate the *multi-step routes* option. Indeed, " +"routes provide a mechanism to chain different actions together. Here, we " +"will chain the picking to the shipping." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:30 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:29 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:29 msgid "" -"Check out :doc:`inventory_flow` to determine if this inventory flow is the " -"correct method for your needs." +"To activate *multi-step routes*, open the *inventory app*, and go to " +"*Configuration > Settings* and activate the option. By default, activating " +"*multi-step routes* will also activate *Storage Locations*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:37 -msgid "Install the Inventory module" -msgstr "Installeer de Voorraad module" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:39 -msgid "From the **App** menu, search and install the **Inventory** module." +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:38 +msgid "Warehouse configuration" msgstr "" -"Zoek naar de **Magazijn** module en installeer ze vanuit het **App** menu." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:44 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:40 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:40 msgid "" -"You will also need to install the **Sales** module to be able to issue sales" -" orders." +"Now that *Multi-Step Routes* is activated, go to *Configuration > Warehouse*" +" and open the one you will use to deliver in 3 steps. Then, you can select " +"the option *Pack good, send goods in output and then deliver (3 steps)* as " +"*Outgoing Shipments*." msgstr "" -"U moet ook de **Verkopen** module installeren om verkooporders te kunnen " -"aanmaken." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:48 -msgid "Allow managing routes" -msgstr "Sta beheren van magazijnen toe" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:50 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:48 msgid "" -"Odoo configures movement of delivery orders via **routes**. Routes provide a" -" mechanism to link different actions together. In this case, we will link " -"the picking step to the shipping step." +"Activating this option will lead to the creation of two new locations, " +"*Output* and *Packing Zone*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:54 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:51 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:51 msgid "" -"To allow management of routes, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`" +"Of course, you can rename them if you want. To do so, go to *Configuration >" +" Locations* and select the one you want to rename. Change its name and hit " +"save." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:56 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:56 +msgid "Create a Sales Order" +msgstr "Maak een verkooporder aan" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:58 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:58 msgid "" -"Under :menuselection:`Location & Warehouse --> Routes`, activate the radio " -"button **Advanced routing of products using rules**. Make sure that the " -"option **Manage several locations per warehouse** is activated as well." +"In the *Sales* app, create a quotation with storable products to deliver. " +"Then, confirm it and three pickings will be created and linked to your sale " +"order." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:64 -msgid "Configure the warehouse for Pick + Pack + Ship" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:65 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:65 +msgid "Now, click on the button. You should see three different pickings:" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:66 -msgid "" -"Go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouses` and edit the warehouse " -"that will be used." +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:67 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:67 +msgid "The first one, with a reference PICK, designates the picking process;" msgstr "" -"Ga naar :menuselection:`Configuratie --> Magazijnen` en bewerk het magazijn " -"dat gebruikt zal worden." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:69 -msgid "" -"For outgoing shippings, set the option to **Make packages into a dedicated " -"location, bring them to the output location for shipping (Pick + Pack + " -"Ship).**" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:69 +msgid "The second one, with a reference PACK, is for the packing process;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:71 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:71 +msgid "The third one, with a reference OUT, designates the shipping process." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:77 -msgid "Create a Sale Order" -msgstr "Maak een verkooporder" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:77 +msgid "Process the picking, packing, and delivery" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:79 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:79 msgid "" -"From the **Sale** module, create a sales order with some products to " -"deliver." -msgstr "" -"Vanuit de **Verkopen** menu maakt u een verkooporder met een paar producten " -"die geleverd moeten worden." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:81 -msgid "" -"Notice that we now see ``3`` transfers associated with this sales order in " -"the **stat button** above the sales order." +"The first operation to be processed is the picking and has a *Ready* status," +" while the others are *Waiting Another Operation*. The packing will become " +"*Ready* as soon as the picking is marked as *Done*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:87 -msgid "If you click the button, you should now see three different pickings:" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:83 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:83 +msgid "" +"You can enter the picking operation from here, or access it through the " +"inventory app." msgstr "" -"Indien u op de knop klikt zou u nu drie verschillende verzamellijsten moeten" -" zien:" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:89 -msgid "The first with a reference **PICK** to designate the picking process," -msgstr "" -"De eerste met een referentie **PICK** om het verzamelproces aan te geven," - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:91 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:89 msgid "" -"The second one with the reference **PACK** that is the packing process," -msgstr "De tweede met de referentie **PACK** dat het verpakkingsproces is," - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:93 -msgid "The last with a reference **OUT** to designate the shipping process." -msgstr "" -"De laatste met een referentie **OUT** om de verzendwijze aan te geven." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:102 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:91 -msgid "How to Process the Picking Step?" +"Note that, if you have the product in stock, it will be automatically " +"reserved and you can validate the picking document." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:104 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:95 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:95 msgid "" -"Ensure that you have enough product in stock and Go to **Inventory** and " -"click on the **Waiting** link under the **Pick** kanban card." +"Now that the picking has been validated, the packing order is ready to be " +"processed. Since the documents are chained, the products that have been " +"picked are automatically reserved on the packing order so you can directly " +"validate it." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:112 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:101 -msgid "Click on **Reserve** to reserve the products if they are available." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:114 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:106 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:106 msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Stock** to **WH/Packing" -" Zone**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:116 -msgid "" -"This has completed the picking Step and the **WH/PICK** should now show " -"**Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"moved from **WH/Stock** to **WH/Packing Zone** location, which makes the " -"product available for the next step (Packing)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:122 -msgid "How to Process the Packing Step?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:124 -msgid "" -"Go to **Inventory** and click on the **# TRANSFERS** link under the **Pack**" -" kanban card." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:132 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Packing Zone** to " -"**WH/Output**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:135 -msgid "" -"This has completed the packing step and the **WH/PACK** should now show " -"**Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"moved from **WH/Packing Zone** to **WH/Output location**, which makes the " -"product available for the next step (Shipping)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:141 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:111 -msgid "How to Process the Shipping Step?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:151 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Output** to the " -"**customer** (Click **Apply** to assign the quantities based on the " -"quantities listed in the **To Do** column)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:155 -msgid "" -"This has completed the shipping step and the **WH/OUT** should now show " -"**Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"shipped to the customer." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:160 -msgid "" -"Link to these sections when available - Process Overview: From sales orders" -" to delivery orders" +"Then, you can validate your packing. In doing so, the delivery order can be " +"processed. Once again, it will be ready to be validated so you can transfer " +"the products to the customer location." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:3 -msgid "How to process delivery orders in two steps (pick + ship)?" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:3 +msgid "Process a Receipt in two steps (Input + Stock)" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:8 msgid "" -"When an order goes to the shipping department for final delivery, Odoo is " -"set up by default to utilize a **one-step** operation: once all goods are " -"available, they are able to be shipped in a single delivery order. However, " -"your company's business process may have one or more steps that happen " -"before shipping. In the **two steps** process, the items in a delivery order" -" are **picked** in the warehouse and brought to an **output location** for " -"**shipping**. The goods are then shipped." +"Odoo uses routes to define exactly how you will handle the different receipt" +" steps. The configuration is done at the *Warehouse* level. By default, the " +"reception is a one-step process, but changing the configuration can allow " +"you to have 2 steps." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:16 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:13 msgid "" -"In order to accomplish a **Pick + Ship** delivery in Odoo, there are a few " -"necessary configuration steps. These steps create an additional location, " -"which by default is called **Output**. So, if your warehouse's code is " -"``WH``, this configuration will create a location called ``WH/Output``. " -"Goods will move from ``WH/Stock`` to ``WH/Output`` in the first step " -"(picking). Then, they move from ``WH/Output`` to ``WH/Customers`` (in the " -"case of sales orders) in the second step (shipping)." +"The 2 steps flow is like this: you receive the goods in an input area, then " +"transfer them to your stock. As long as the goods are not transferred in " +"your stock, they will not be available for further processing." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:32 -msgid "Allow management of routes" -msgstr "Sta het beheren van magazijnen toe" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:19 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:19 +msgid "Activate Multi-Step Routes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:21 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:21 +msgid "" +"The first step is to allow using *multi-step routes*. Indeed, routes provide" +" a mechanism to chain different actions together. In this case, we will " +"chain the unload step in the input area to the step entering the products in" +" stock." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:26 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:26 +msgid "" +"To allow *multi-step routes*, go to *Configuration > Settings* and activate " +"the feature. By default, activating *multi-step routes* will also activate " +"*Storage Locations*." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:34 -msgid "" -"Odoo configures movement of delivery orders via the **routes**. Routes " -"provide a mechanism to chain different actions together. In this case, we " -"will chain the picking step to the shipping step." +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:34 +msgid "Configure warehouse for receipt in 2 steps" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:36 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:36 msgid "" -"To allow management of routes, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`." +"Once *multi-step routes* is activated, you can go to *Configuration > " +"Warehouse* and enter the warehouse which will use receipt in 2 steps. Then, " +"you can select the option *Receive goods in input and then stock (2 steps)* " +"for *Incoming Shipments*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:40 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:45 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:44 msgid "" -"Ensure that the radio button **Advanced routing of products using rules** is" -" checked." +"Activating this option will lead to the creation of a new *Input* location. " +"If you want to rename it, you can go to *Configuration > Locations > Select " +"Input* and update its name." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:46 -msgid "" -"Click on **Apply** at the top of the page to save changes (if you needed to " -"check the radio button above)." -msgstr "" -"Klik bovenaan de pagina op **Toepassen** om de wijzigingen te bewaren " -"(indien u het keuzerondje hierboven moest aanduiden)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:50 -msgid "" -"If you checked option **Advanced routing of products using rules** you may " -"need to activate **Manage several locations per warehouse** if it wasn't " -"activated beforehand." +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:54 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:52 +msgid "Create a purchase order" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:55 -msgid "Configure warehouse for Pick + Ship" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:56 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:54 +msgid "" +"In the *Purchase* application, you can create a *Request for Quotation* with" +" some storable products to receive from a supplier. Once the *RfQ* is " +"confirmed, the receipt picking will be created and automatically linked to " +"your purchase order." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:57 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:65 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:62 msgid "" -"To configure a **Pick + Ship** move, go to :menuselection:`Configuration -->" -" Warehouses` and edit the warehouse that will be used." +"Now, by clicking on the *1 Receipt* button, you will see the first picking " +"which will allow entering the product in the *input location*. Then, another" +" picking, an internal transfer, has been created in order to move the " +"products to *Stock*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:61 -msgid "" -"For outgoing shippings, set the option to **Bring goods to output location " -"before shipping (Pick + Ship)**" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:71 +msgid "Process the picking and the delivery" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:70 -msgid "" -"Install the **Sale** if it is not the case, and create a sales order with " -"some products to deliver." -msgstr "" -"Installeer de **Verkopen** module als dit niet het geval is en maak een " -"verkooporder met een paar producten om te leveren." - #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:73 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:70 msgid "" -"Notice that we now see ``2`` transfers associated with this sales order in " -"the **Delivery** stat button above the sales order." +"The receipt is the first one to be processed and has a *Ready* status while " +"the internal transfer will only become *Ready* once the receipt has been " +"marked as *Done*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:79 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:77 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:74 msgid "" -"If you click on the **2 Transfers** stat button, you should now see two " -"different pickings, one with a reference **PICK** to designate the picking " -"process and another with a reference **OUT** to designate the shipping " -"process." +"You can enter the receipt operation from the purchase order, or access it " +"through the inventory dashboard." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:93 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:84 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:80 msgid "" -"Ensure that you have enough product in stock, and go to **Inventory** and " -"click on the **Waiting** link under the **Pick** kanban card." +"By default, a receipt is always considered as ready to be processed. Then, " +"you will be able to directly click on *Validate* to mark it as done." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:103 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:92 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:87 msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Stock** to " -"**WH/Output**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:105 -msgid "" -"This has completed the picking step and the **WH/PICK** move should now show" -" **Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"moved from **WH/Stock** to **WH/Output** location, which makes the product " -"**available for the next step** (Shipping)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:121 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Output** to the " -"customer (Click **Apply** to assign the quantities based on the quantities " -"listed in the **To Do** column)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:125 -msgid "" -"This has completed the shipping step and the **WH/OUT** move should now show" -" **Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"shipped to the customer." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:130 -msgid "" -"link to these sections when they will be available - Process Overview: From" -" sales orders to delivery orders" +"Once the receipt has been validated, the internal transfer is ready to be " +"processed. As documents are chained, the products which have been received " +"are automatically reserved on the internal transfer. Once the transfer is " +"validated, those products enter the stock and you will be able to use them " +"to fulfill customer deliveries or manufacture products." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/incoming.rst:3 @@ -2309,302 +1753,13 @@ msgid "This is the default configuration in Odoo." msgstr "Dit is de standaard configuratie in Odoo." #: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:68 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:126 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:97 msgid ":doc:`../delivery/inventory_flow`" msgstr ":doc:`../delivery/inventory_flow`" -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:71 -msgid "" -"Add section when available - How to analyse the performance of my vendors?" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:68 +msgid "Process the receipt and the internal transfer" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:3 -msgid "How to add a quality control step in goods receipt? (3 steps)" -msgstr "" -"Hoe een kwaliteitscontrole stap toe te voegen bij het ontvangen van uw " -"goederen? (3 stappen)" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:8 -msgid "" -"In many companies, it is necessary to assess the received good. The goal is " -"to check that the products correspond to the quality requirements agreed " -"with the suppliers. Therefore, adding a quality control step in the goods " -"receipt process can become essential." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Odoo uses routes to define exactly how you will handle the different receipt" -" steps. The configuration is done at the level of the warehouse. By default," -" the reception is a one step process, but changing the configuration can " -"allow to have 2 or even 3 steps." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:18 -msgid "" -"The 3 steps flow is as follows: You receive the goods in an input area, then" -" transfer them into quality area for quality control. When the quality check" -" has been processed, you can move the goods from QC to stock. Of course, you" -" may change the quantity and only transfer to stock the quantity that is " -"valid and decide that you will return the quantity that is not good." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:25 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:18 -msgid "This is the case that will be explained in this document." -msgstr "Dit is het geval dat wordt uitgelegd in dit document." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:31 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:24 -msgid "Use advanced routes" -msgstr "Gebruik geavanceerde routes" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:33 -msgid "" -"To allow management of routes, go to the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Configuration --> Settings`." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:39 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:32 -msgid "" -"Ensure that the routes option **Advance routing of product using rules** is " -"checked, then click on **Apply** to save changes." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:42 -msgid "" -"Make sure that **Manage several locations per warehouse** is also ticked." -msgstr "" -"Verzeker u ervan dat de optie **Beheer meerdere locaties per magazijn** is " -"aangevinkt." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:46 -msgid "How to add a quality control step in goods receipt?" -msgstr "" -"Hoe een kwaliteitscontrole stap toe te voegen bij het ontvangen van uw " -"goederen?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:48 -msgid "" -"Go to the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Warehouse` " -"and choose the warehouse where you want to change reception methods." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:51 -msgid "" -"By default, warehouses are configured with one step reception (**Receive " -"goods directly into stock**)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:54 -msgid "" -"To add quality control before transfer goods into stock location, tick " -"**Unload in input location, go through a quality control before being " -"admitted in stock (3 steps)**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:62 -msgid "How to control a receipt?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:65 -msgid "How to process the receipt step ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:67 -msgid "" -"In the **Purchase** app, create a **Request for Quotation**. Click on the " -"**Confirm order** button. You can see that there is one **Shipment** related" -" to purchase order in the stat button above the purchase order form view. " -"This is the receipt step." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:75 -msgid "" -"Go to **Inventory** and click on the link **# TO RECEIVE** in the " -"**Receipts** card." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:80 -msgid "" -"Click on the receipt that you want to process. Click on **Validate** to " -"complete the move from the **Vendor** location to **WH/Input**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:83 -msgid "" -"This has completed the receipt step and the status column at the top of the " -"page for **WH/IN** should now show **Done**. The product has been moved from" -" the **Vendor** to the **WH/Input** location, which makes the product " -"available for the next step (Move to the quality control zone)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:89 -msgid "" -"How to move your product from the receipt zone to the quality control zone ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:91 -msgid "" -"Go to the **Inventory** dashboard. You will see that there is one transfer " -"ready (the move to the quality control zone) and one waiting (the move to " -"the stock after the control). Click on the link **# TRANSFERS** in the " -"**Internal Transfers** to process the quality control." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:101 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Input** to **WH/Quality" -" Control**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:104 -msgid "" -"This has completed the internal transfer step and the status column at the " -"top of the page for **WH/INT** should now show **Done**. The receipt is now " -"ready to be controlled." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:109 -msgid "How to to process the quality control ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:111 -msgid "" -"Go back to the **Inventory** dashboard. The waiting transfer is now ready. " -"Click on the link **# TRANSFERS** in the **Internal Transfers** card to " -"process the quality control." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:118 -msgid "" -"Click on the last picking to process. Click on **Validate** to complete the " -"move from **WH/Quality Control** to **WH/Stock**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:121 -msgid "" -"This has completed the quality control step and the status column at the top" -" of the page for **WH/INT** should now show **Done**. The receipt has been " -"controlled and has moved to your stock." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:127 -msgid ":doc:`two_steps`" -msgstr ":doc:`two_steps`" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:3 -msgid "How to unload your shipment to an input location? (2 steps)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:13 -msgid "" -"The 2 steps flow is the following : You receive the goods in an input area " -"then transfer them from input area to your stock. As long as the goods are " -"not transferred in your stock, they will not be available for further " -"processing." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:26 -msgid "" -"To allow management of routes, go to the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Configuration --> Settings`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:35 -msgid "" -"Make sure that **\"Manage several locations per warehouse\"** is also " -"ticked." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:39 -msgid "How to configure your warehouse ?" -msgstr "Hoe configureer ik mijn magazijn?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:41 -msgid "" -"Go to the the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> " -"Warehouse` and choose the warehouse where you want to change reception " -"methods." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:44 -msgid "" -"By default, warehouses are configured with one step reception (option " -"**Receive goods directly into stock**)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:47 -msgid "" -"To add the control step, tick **Unload in input location then go to stock (2" -" steps)**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:54 -msgid "How to receipt a shipment in 2 steps?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:57 -msgid "How to process the Receipt step ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:59 -msgid "" -"In the purchase module, create a **Request for Quotation**, then click on " -"the **Confirm order** button. You can see that there is one **Shipment** " -"related to purchase order in the **stat button** above the purchase order " -"form view. This is the receipt step." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:67 -msgid "" -"Go to **Inventory** and click on the **# TO RECEIVE** link on the " -"**Receipts** card." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:73 -msgid "" -"Click on the receipt that you want to process, then click on **Validate** to" -" complete the move from the **Vendor** to **WH/Input**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:76 -msgid "" -"This has completed the Receipt Step and the move refered with **WH/IN**. The" -" product has been moved from the **Vendor** to the **WH/Input** location, " -"which makes the product available for the next step." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:81 -msgid "How to transfer the receipt to your stock ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:83 -msgid "" -"Go back to the **Inventory** dashboard. The waiting transfer is now ready. " -"Click on the **# TRANSFERS** in the **Internal Transfers** to process the " -"quality control." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:90 -msgid "" -"Click on the picking you want to process. Click on **Validate** to complete " -"the move from **WH/Input** to **WH/Stock**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:93 -msgid "" -"This has completed the internal transfer step and the move refered with " -"**WH/INT**. The receipt has been moved to your stock." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:98 -msgid ":doc:`three_steps`" -msgstr ":doc:`three_steps`" - #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers.rst:3 msgid "Lots and Serial Numbers" msgstr "Partijen en serienummers" @@ -2614,9 +1769,6 @@ msgid "What's the difference between lots and serial numbers?" msgstr "Wat is het verschil tussen partijen en serienummers?" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:170 msgid "Introduction" msgstr "Introductie" @@ -2681,629 +1833,1450 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:46 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:135 msgid ":doc:`serial_numbers`" msgstr ":doc:`serial_numbers`" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:47 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:129 msgid ":doc:`lots`" msgstr ":doc:`lots`" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:3 -msgid "How to manage lots of identical products?" -msgstr "Hoe partijen te beheren van identieke producten?" +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:3 +msgid "Manage expiration dates" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In many companies, products have expiration dates and they should be tracked" +" based on those dates. In the food industry, for example, tracking stocks " +"based on expiration dates is mandatory to avoid selling expired products to " +"customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:10 +msgid "" +"With Odoo, you can track your products based on their expiration dates, even" +" if they are already tracked by lots or serial numbers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:14 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:15 +msgid "Configurations" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:17 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:18 +msgid "Application configuration" +msgstr "Applicatie configuratie" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:19 +msgid "" +"To use expiration dates tracking, open the *Inventory* application and go to" +" *Configuration > Settings* and activate the *Lots & Serial Numbers* and " +"*Expiration Dates* features." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:27 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:28 +#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:68 +#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:90 +msgid "Product configuration" +msgstr "Product configuratie" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:29 +msgid "" +"Now, you have the possibility to define different dates in the *inventory " +"tab* of the product form:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:32 +msgid "" +"Product Use Time: it’s the number of days before the goods start " +"deteriorating, without being dangerous yet. It will be computed using the " +"lot/serial number;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:34 +msgid "" +"Product Life Time: refers to the number of days before the goods may become " +"dangerous and must not be consumed. It will be computed on the lot/serial " +"number;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:36 +msgid "" +"Product Removal Time: shows the number of days before the goods should be " +"removed from the stock. It will be computed on the lot/serial number;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:38 +msgid "" +"Product Alert Time: refers to the number of days before an alert should be " +"raised on the lot/serial number." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:44 +msgid "Expiration Date on Lots/Serial Numbers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:46 +msgid "" +"When receiving a product in stock, the dates will automatically be updated " +"on the corresponding lot/serial number. This update will be based on the " +"reception date of the product and the times set on the product form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:58 +msgid "Expiration Alerts" +msgstr "Verval waarschuwingen" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:60 +msgid "" +"You can access all your expiration alerts from the *inventory* app. To do " +"so, go to *Master Data > Lots/Serial Numbers*. There, you can use the pre-" +"existing filter that shows all the lots/serial numbers that exceeded their " +"alert date." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:3 +msgid "Manage lots of identical products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:5 msgid "" "Lots are useful for products you receive in great quantity and for which a " -"lot number can help in reportings, quality controls, or any other info. Lots" -" will help identify a number of pieces having for instance a production " +"lot number can help in reporting, quality controls, or any other info. Lots " +"will help identify a number of pieces having, for instance, a production " "fault. It can be useful for a batch production of clothes or food." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:14 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:11 msgid "" -"Odoo has the capacity to manage lots ensuring compliance with the " +"Odoo has the capacity to manage lots, ensuring compliance with the " "traceability requirements imposed by the majority of industries." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:17 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:14 msgid "" "The double-entry management in Odoo enables you to run very advanced " "traceability." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:21 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:19 -msgid "Setting up" -msgstr "Opzetten" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:24 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:22 -msgid "Application configuration" -msgstr "Applicatie configuratie" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:26 -msgid "" -"You need activate the tracking of lots in the settings. In the **Inventory**" -" application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`, select " -"**Track lots or serial numbers**" +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:18 +msgid "Setting Up" msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:21 +msgid "Application Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:23 +msgid "" +"First, you need to activate the tracking of lot numbers. To do so, go to " +"*Inventory > Configuration > Settings* and tick *Lots & Serial Numbers*. " +"Then, click on save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:31 +msgid "Product Configuration" +msgstr "Product configuratie" + #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:33 msgid "" -"In order to have an advanced management of the lots, you should also select " -"**Manage several locations per warehouse**." +"Now, you have to configure which products you want to track by serial " +"numbers." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:39 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:31 -#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:27 -#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:26 -msgid "Then click on **Apply**." -msgstr "Klik vervolgens op **Toepassen**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:42 -msgid "Operation types configuration" -msgstr "Soorten operatie configuratie" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:44 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:36 msgid "" -"You also need to set up how you will manage lots for each operations. In the" -" **Inventory** application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Operation Types`." +"Go to *Master Data > Products* and open the product of your choice. There, " +"click on *Edit* and select *Tracking by Lots* in the inventory tab." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:48 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:47 +msgid "Manage Lots" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:52 msgid "" -"For each type (receipts, internal transfers, deliveries,...), you can set if" -" you can create new lot numbers or only use existing lot numbers." +"In order to receive a product tracked by lots, you have to specify its lot " +"numbers. You have several ways of doing so:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:55 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:65 +msgid "Manually assign the different lot numbers" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:57 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:36 -msgid "" -"Finally, you have to configure which products you want to track in lots." +msgid "Copy/paste lot numbers from an Excel file" msgstr "" -"Uiteindelijk moet u nog aangeven welke producten u wilt traceren in " -"partijen." #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:59 -msgid "" -"Go into :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Products`, and open the " -"product of your choice. Click on **Edit**, and in the **Inventory** tab, " -"select **Tracking by Lots**, then click on **Save**." +msgid "First, you need to open the detailed operations of your picking." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:67 -msgid "Manage lots" -msgstr "Beheer partijen" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:70 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:49 -msgid "Transfers" -msgstr "Verplaatsingen" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:72 msgid "" -"In order to process a transfer of a product tracked by lot, you have to " -"input the lot number(s)." +"When opening the detailed operations, you can click on *Add a line*. Then, " +"you will be able to fill the lot number in. Once done, you can click on *Add" +" a line* again to register a new lot number." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:75 -msgid "Click on the lot icon :" -msgstr "Klik op het lot icoon:" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:80 -msgid "" -"A window will pop-up. Click on **Add an item** and fill in the lot number " -"and the quantity." -msgstr "" -"Een venster verschijnt. Klik op **Voeg item toe** en vul het lotnummer en de" -" hoeveelheid in." - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:86 -msgid "" -"Depending on your operation type configuration, you will be able to fill in " -"new lot numbers, or only use existing ones." +msgid "Copy/paste lot number from an Excel file" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:90 -msgid "In the scanner interface, you just have to scan the lot numbers." -msgstr "In de scanner interface hoeft u enkel de lotnummers in te scannen." +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:77 +msgid "" +"Once the spreadsheet containing the lot numbers you received from your " +"supplier and copy the list. Then, you can paste them in the *Lot/Serial " +"Number Name* column for Odoo to automatically create the necessary lines. " +"After that, you will have to manually enter the number of products that are " +"contained in each one of the lots." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:93 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:79 -msgid "Inventory adjustment" -msgstr "Voorraad aanpassing" +msgid "Operation Types" +msgstr "Bewerkingsoorten" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:95 -msgid "Inventory of a product tracked by lot can be done in 2 ways:" +msgid "" +"Of course, you also have the possibility to define how you will manage lots " +"for each operation type. To do so, open the *Inventory* app and go to " +"*Configuration > Operation Types*." msgstr "" -"Voorraad van een product getraceerd op partij kan op 2 manieren gedaan " -"worden:" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:97 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:83 -msgid "Classic inventory by products" -msgstr "Klassieke voorraad op producten" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:99 -msgid "Inventory of a lot" -msgstr "Voorraad van een partij" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:101 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:87 msgid "" -"When doing a classic inventory, there is a **Serial Number** column. If the " -"product has already been assigned with a number, it is already pre-filled." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:105 -msgid "" -"Click on **Add an item** if the product has not been inventoried yet. You " -"can easily create lots, just type in a new lot number in the column." +"For each type (receipts, internal transfers, deliveries, …), you can decide " +"if you allow to create new lot numbers or only use existing ones. By " +"default, the creation of new lots is only allowed at product reception, and " +"using existing lot numbers isn’t allowed in this operation. If you have " +"inter-warehouse transfers and track products by lots, it can be useful to " +"allow using existing lot numbers in receipts too." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:111 -msgid "" -"You can also just do the inventory of a lot. In this case, you will have to " -"fill in the **Lot number**. You can also create a new lot from here. Just " -"type in the number, a window will pop out to link the number to a product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:120 msgid "Lots traceability" msgstr "Partij traceerbaarheid" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:122 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:113 msgid "" -"You can check the lot traceability from :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Inventory Control --> Serial Numbers/Lots`" -msgstr "" -"U kan de partij traceerbaarheid controleren vanuit :menuselection:`Voorraad " -"--> Voorraadcontrole --> Serienummers/Partijen`" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:128 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:122 -msgid "You can have more details by clicking on the **Traceability** button :" -msgstr "" -"U kan meer details krijgen door te klikken op de **Traceerbaarheid** knop:" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:134 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:128 -msgid ":doc:`differences`" -msgstr ":doc:`differences`" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:3 -msgid "How to work with serial numbers?" -msgstr "Hoe met serienummers werken?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Serial Number Tracking is used to track products with serial numbers on " -"every transactions. You can track the current location of the product with " -"serial numbers. When the products are moved from one location to another " -"location, the system will automatically identify the current location of the" -" product based on last movement of the product. So you can get the last " -"location where the products are moved." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:24 -msgid "" -"You need activate the tracking of serial numbers in the settings. In the " -"**Inventory** application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`, select **Track lots or serial numbers**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:38 -msgid "" -"Go into :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Products`, and open the " -"product of your choice. Click on **Edit**, and in the **Inventory** tab, " -"select **By Unique Serial Number**, then click on **Save**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:46 -msgid "Manage Serial Numbers" -msgstr "Serienummers beheren" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:51 -msgid "" -"In order to process a transfer of a product tracked by serial number, you " -"have to input the number(s). In order to be able to assign serial numbers to" -" products with tracking features enabled you will first need to mark your " -"transfer as to do. Click on the **Mark as TODO** button to display the Lot " -"Split icon." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:57 -msgid "Click on the serial number icon :" -msgstr "Klik op het serienummer icoon:" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:62 -msgid "" -"A window will pop-up. Click on **Add an item** and fill in the serial " -"numbers." -msgstr "" -"Een venster verschijnt. Klik op **Voeg item toe** en vul de serienummers in." - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:68 -msgid "" -"If you move products that already have serial numbers assigned, those will " -"appear in the list. Just click on the **+** icon to confirm that you are " -"moving those serial numbers." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:76 -msgid "In the scanner interface, you just have to scan the serial numbers." -msgstr "In de scanner interface hoeft u enkel de serienummer in te scannen." - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:81 -msgid "" -"Inventory of a product tracked by serial numbers can be done in 2 ways:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:85 -msgid "Inventory of a serial number" -msgstr "Voorraad van een serienummer" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:91 -msgid "" -"Click on **Add an item** if the product has not been inventoried yet. You " -"can easily create serial numbers, just type in a new number in the column." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:98 -msgid "The quantity should be 1 for each line." -msgstr "De hoeveelheid moet 1 zijn voor elke lijn." - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:100 -msgid "" -"You can also just do the inventory of a serial number. In this case, you " -"will have to fill in the serial number. You can also create a new one from " -"here. Just type in the number, a window will pop out to link it to a " -"product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:109 -msgid "Serial Number traceability" -msgstr "Traceerbaarheid serienummer" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:111 -msgid "" -"The serial number given to these items allow you to keep track of where they" -" were received, put in stock, to whom they were sold and where they were " +"The lot number given to the products allows you to keep track of where they " +"were received, put in stock, to whom they were sold and where they were " "shipped to." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:115 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:117 msgid "" -"To track an item, open the **Inventory** module, and in " -":menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Serial Numbers/lots`, click on the " -"serial number corresponding to your search." +"To track an item, open the *Inventory* module and, in *Master Data > " +"Lots/Serial Numbers*, click on the lot number corresponding to your search." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:124 +msgid "" +"When you open the *Traceability* information, you see in which documents the" +" lot number has been used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:130 +msgid "" +"Now, if you want to locate the lot number, you can do so by clicking on the " +"*Location* stat button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:3 +msgid "Work with serial numbers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:5 +msgid "" +"To track products with serial numbers, you can use the serial number " +"tracking. With them, you can track the current location of the product and, " +"when the products are moved from one location to another, the system will " +"automatically identify the current location of the product, based on its " +"last movement." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:11 +msgid "" +"If you want to do it or run very advanced traceability, the Odoo double-" +"entry management is the feature you need." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:20 +msgid "" +"First, you need to activate the serial numbers tracking. To do so, go to " +"*Configuration > Settings* in the *Inventory* application. Then, enable the " +"feature and hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:30 +msgid "" +"Now, you have to configure the products you want to track by serial numbers." +" To do so, go to *Master Data > Products* and open the product of your " +"choice. Edit it and select *Tracking By Unique Serial Number* in the " +"*Inventory tab*. Then, click on save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:42 +msgid "Manage Serial Numbers" +msgstr "Serienummers beheren" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:47 +msgid "" +"To receive a product that is tracked by serial number, you have to specify " +"its serial number. Of course, you have several ways of doing so:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:50 +msgid "Manual assignation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:52 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:73 +msgid "Multi-assignation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:54 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:89 +msgid "Copy/pasting from an Excel file" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:56 +msgid "" +"Whatever could be your favorite way to assign serial numbers, you firstly " +"need to open the detailed operations of your picking." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:63 +msgid "Manual assignation of the different serial numbers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:65 +msgid "" +"When opening the detailed operations, you can click on *Add a line*. Then, " +"you will be able to fill in the serial number field. Once done, you can " +"click again on *Add a line* to register a new serial number." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:75 +msgid "" +"By using the multi-assignation of serial numbers, Odoo will automatically " +"create the necessary lines. To do so, you have to enter the first serial " +"number of your set and the number of products you have to assign a serial " +"number to." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:80 +msgid "Once done, click on *Assign Serial Numbers* and Odoo will do the rest." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:91 +msgid "" +"To use copy/pasting, open the spreadsheet containing the serial numbers you " +"received and copy the list. Then, past them in the *Lot/Serial Number Name* " +"column of the wizard. Doing so, Odoo will automatically create the lines you" +" need." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:106 +msgid "Operation types" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:108 +msgid "" +"You also have the possibility to define how you will manage lots for each " +"operation type. To define it, go to *Configuration > Operation Types* in the" +" *Inventory* app." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:112 +msgid "" +"For each type, you can decide if you allow the creation of new lot numbers " +"or want to use existing ones. By default, the creation of new lots is only " +"allowed at product reception." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:120 +msgid "" +"If you have inter-warehouse transfers and track products by lots, it can be " +"useful to allow using existing lot numbers in receipts too." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:124 +msgid "Serial Number traceability" +msgstr "Traceerbaarheid serienummer" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:126 +msgid "" +"Using serial numbers allows you to keep track of where the products were " +"received, put in stock, to whom they were sold, and where they were shipped " +"to." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:130 +msgid "" +"Tracking an item is easy: open the *Inventory* app, and go to *Master Data >" +" Lots/Serial Numbers* and click on the serial number corresponding to your " +"search. Then, open the *Traceability* information. There, you will see in " +"which documents the serial number has been used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:142 +msgid "" +"And, if you want to locate a serial number, you can do so by clicking on the" +" *Location* button available on the serial number form." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/misc.rst:3 msgid "Miscellaneous Operations" msgstr "Memoriaal" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:2 -msgid "Immediate & Planned Transfers" +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:3 +msgid "Send Automated Emails at Delivery" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:4 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:8 msgid "" -"In Odoo, you can create two types of transfers: immediate or planned " -"transfers." +"First, go to the *Inventory* app, then to *Settings* and activate the *Email" +" Confirmation* feature. If you work in multi-company, this configuration is " +"company-specific." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:8 -msgid "Immediate Transfers" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:10 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:15 msgid "" -"When you create a transfer manually, it is by default an immediate transfer." +"When you enable this feature, Odoo automatically creates an email template. " +"Of course, you can modify it if necessary by clicking on the small arrow " +"next to its name." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:23 +msgid "Send email at delivery validation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:25 msgid "" -"In the case of an immediate transfer, you directly encode the products and " -"quantities you are processing, there is no reservation that applies. This is" -" why the column \"Initial Demand\" is not editable. You only fill in the " -"column \"Done\" for the quantities." +"On the inventory dashboard, click on *Create* and fill the form for a " +"specific partner. Once you have added some products in it, *Validate* it and" +" do the same for the delivery." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:18 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:32 msgid "" -"This is for example used when you are transferring goods from a location A " -"to a location B and that this is not planned (you are processing the " -"transfer right now)." +"Doing so, an automated email will be sent and will appear in the chatter." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:23 -msgid "Planned Transfers" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:38 msgid "" -"When a transfer is generated automatically (from a sales order or purchase " -"order for example), it is a planned transfer. This means that there is an " -"initial demand and that reservation applies on this initial demand." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:30 -msgid "" -"If you want to create a planned transfer manually, you can do it from the " -"inventory dashboard." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:36 -msgid "" -"In that case, you will have to enter the initial demand first (how many " -"units are you supposed to proceed), then to mark your transfer as to do. " -"Once this is done, you will be able to reserve the products and to process " -"the transfer." +"If you work with a shipping method, and then have a tracking link, it will " +"be included in the standard email template." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:3 -msgid "How to manage stock that you don't own?" -msgstr "Hoe stock te beheren die u niet bezit?" +msgid "Manage Stock that you don't own" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Sometimes, suppliers can offer you to store and sell products without having" +" to buy those items. This technique is called *consignee stock*." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:8 msgid "" -"Some suppliers can sometimes offer you to store and sell products without " -"having to buy those items: this technique is called **consignee stock**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:12 -msgid "" "Consignee stock is a great way for manufacturers and suppliers to launch new" -" products. As resellers may be reluctant to buying a product that they are " -"not sure to be able to sell, consignee stock will allow them to propose an " -"item to check its market without having to pay for it in the first place." +" products. As resellers may be reluctant to buy a product they are not sure " +"to be able to sell, consignee stock will allow them to offer an item to " +"check its market without having to pay for it in the first place." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:18 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:14 msgid "" -"Odoo has the ability to manage consignee stocks through the advanced " -"settings." +"Of course, Odoo has the ability to manage those consignee stocks through " +"advanced settings." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:24 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:20 msgid "" -"Open the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`, and" -" in the **Product Owners** section, select **Manage consignee stocks " -"(advanced)**, then click on **Apply**." +"To use this feature, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Settings* in the " +"inventory app. Then, enable the *Consignment* feature in the *Traceability* " +"section. Now, hit save." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:32 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:28 msgid "Reception of Consignee Stock" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:34 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:30 msgid "" -"In the Inventory's Dashboard, open the **Receipts** and create a new " -"reception. You can see that in the right side of the page, a new **Owner** " -"line has appeared. You can specify the partner which owns the stock or leave" -" it blank if you are the owner." +"When in the *Inventory* app, open the receipts and create a new reception. " +"On the right side, you will see that a new line called *Assign Owner* has " +"appeared. There, you can specify the partner which owns the stock." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:3 -msgid "How to configure and run schedulers?" -msgstr "Hoe planners te configureren en te laten lopen?" +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:39 +msgid "If you are the owner, you can leave the field blank." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:6 -msgid "What is a scheduler" -msgstr "Wat is een planner?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:41 msgid "" -"The scheduler is the calculation engine which plans and prioritises " -"production and purchasing automatically according to the rules defined on " -"products. By default, the scheduler is set to run once a day (Odoo " -"automatically creates a **Scheduled Action** for this)." +"Once the receipt is validated, the products enter your stock but still " +"belong to the owner. They don’t impact your inventory valuation." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:14 -msgid "Calculating Requirements / Scheduling" -msgstr "Berekenen vereisten / Planning" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:16 -msgid "" -"Scheduling only validates procurements that are confirmed but not yet " -"started. These procurement reservations will themselves start production, " -"tasks or purchases depending on the configuration of the requested product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:21 -msgid "" -"You take into account the priority of operations when starting reservations " -"and procurements. Urgent requests, those with a date in the past, or " -"requests with a date earlier than the others will be started first. In case " -"there are not enough products in stock to satisfy all the requests, you can " -"be sure that the most urgent requests will be produced first." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:29 -msgid "Configure and run the scheduler" -msgstr "De planner configureren en laten lopen" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:32 -msgid "Run the scheduler manually" -msgstr "Voer de planner manueel uit" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:34 -msgid "" -"This feature is not visible by default. You have to enable **debug mode** to" -" see this. To enable debug mode, go to :menuselection:`Help --> About` and " -"click on **Activate the developer mode**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:38 -msgid "" -"You can also start the scheduler manually from the menu " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Schedulers --> Run Schedulers`. The scheduler " -"uses all the relevant parameters defined for products, suppliers and the " -"company to determine the priorities between the different production orders," -" deliveries and supplier purchases." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:48 -msgid "Configure and run the scheduler (only for advanced users)" -msgstr "" -"Configureer en laat de scanner lopen (alleen voor geavanceerde gebruikers)" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:50 -msgid "" -"This feature is not visible by default. You have to enable **debug mode** to" -" see this. To enable debug mode, go to :menuselection:`Help -> About` and " -"click on **Activate the developer mode**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:54 -msgid "" -"You can set the starting time of the scheduler by modifying the " -"corresponding action in the menu :menuselection:`Settings --> Technical --> " -"Automation --> Scheduled Actions`. Modify the Run mrp Scheduler " -"configuration." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:63 -msgid ":doc:`../delivery/scheduled_dates`" -msgstr ":doc:`../delivery/scheduled_dates`" - #: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:3 -msgid "How to scrap products?" -msgstr "Hoe producten afkeuren?" +msgid "Scrap Products" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In your warehouse, you sometimes find products that are damaged or that are " +"unusable due to expiry or for some other reasons. You often notice this " +"during picking or physical inventory. Since those products cannot be sold or" +" stored, you have to scrap them." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:10 +msgid "" +"When goods are scrapped, they are not reflected in the system as a part of " +"the inventory. The scrapped material will be physically moved to the scrap " +"area and not taken into account into inventory valuation." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:15 msgid "" "Scrap means waste that either has no economic value or only the value of its" -" basic material" -msgstr "" -"Afkeuren betekend rest die geen economische waarde heeft of enkel de waarde " -"van het basismateriaal" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:11 -msgid "content recoverable through recycling." -msgstr "inhoud recupereerbaar via recyclage." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:13 -msgid "" -"In your warehouse you sometimes find products that are damaged or that are " -"unusable due to expiry or for some other reason. You often notice this " -"during picking or physical inventory." +" basic material content, recoverable through recycling." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:17 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:21 msgid "" -"Since you cannot normally sell or store these products, you have to scrap " -"product." +"When you install the *Inventory* app, Odoo automatically creates a scrap " +"location. It’s named *Virtual Location/Scap*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:20 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:24 msgid "" -"When goods are scrapped they are not reflected in the system as a part of " -"the inventory. The scrapped material will be physically moved to scrap area." +"Of course, you can create new scrap areas if needed. To do so, go to " +"*Inventory > Configuration > Settings* and activate the *Storage Locations* " +"feature." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:27 -msgid "" -"When you install inventory management, odoo automatically creates one " -"default scrap location, namely **Virtual location/Scrapped**." +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:31 +msgid "Now, go to *Configuration > Locations* and create your scrap location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:30 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:34 msgid "" -"To create an extra scrap location, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Configuration --> Settings` and check **Manage several locations per " -"warehouse**, then click on **Apply**." +"You have to check *Is a Scrap Location?* on the location form. In fact, " +"scrap locations cannot be used as normal storage locations and then, a " +"virtual location will be created for scrapped products." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:38 -msgid "" -"After applying **Manage several location per warehouse**, you can create a " -"new scrap location in :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouse Management" -" --> Locations.`" +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:39 +msgid "Different ways to scrap products" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:43 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:41 msgid "" -"To define a scrap location, you have to check **Is a Scrap Location?** on " -"location form view." +"With Odoo, you have several ways to scrap products: from receipts, from a " +"delivery order, and from an internal transfer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:45 +msgid "Scrap from receipt" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:47 -msgid "Different ways to scrap product" -msgstr "Verschillende manieren om producten af te keuren" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:49 -msgid "Odoo provides several ways to scrap products." -msgstr "Odoo biedt verschillende manieren aan om producten af te keuren." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:52 -msgid "1) Scrap from Receipt (Initial Demand tab)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:54 msgid "" -"To scrap product from incoming shipment, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory -->" -" Dashboard --> Receipts`." +"Scrapping products from receipts is easy. Go to *Inventory > Dashboard > " +"Receipts* or click on *1 TO PROCESS* under the receipts location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:60 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:53 msgid "" -"Open the incoming shipment, and in the **Initial demand** tab, click on the " -"scrap products button." +"Now, open the receipt and validate the picking. Once the products entered " +"your stock, the Scrap button appears on the top left corner of your screen." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:67 -msgid "2) Scrap from delivery order (Initial Demand tab) ." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:69 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:57 msgid "" -"To scrap product from outgoing shipment, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory -->" -" Dashboard --> Delivery Orders`" +"You can scrap products that were part of the receipt from there. If you do " +"so, it will move them from available stock to the virtual scrap location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:75 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:68 +msgid "Scrap from delivery order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:70 msgid "" -"Open the outgoing shipment, and in the **Initial demand** tab, click on the " -"scrap products button on stock move in initial demand tab." +"To scrap products from a delivery order, go to *Inventory > Dashboard > " +"Delivery orders* or click on *1 TO PROCESS*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:82 -msgid "3) Scrap from internal transfer (Initial Demand tab)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:84 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:76 msgid "" -"To scrap product from internal transfer, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory -->" -" Dashboard --> Internal Transfers`" +"Once done, open the delivery order. You can see the scrap button in the " +"upper left of the document. If you scrap the product from there, it will be " +"moved from your available stock to the virtual scrap location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:90 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:80 msgid "" -"Open the internal transfer, and in the **Initial demand** tab, click on the " -"scrap products button on stock move in initial demand tab." +"You can find all the scrap orders made from the picking by clicking on the " +"button on the top right corner of the document." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:96 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:93 +msgid "Scrap from an internal transfer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:95 msgid "" -"When you click on scrap button, a popup will open. You can enter the " -"quantity of products, and specify the scrap location, then click on " -"**Scrap**." +"To do this, the flow is almost the same. In fact, you just have to go to " +"*Inventory > Dashboard > Internal Transfers*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:101 +msgid "" +"There, open the internal transfer that interests you. Now, click on the " +"scrap button that is on the top left of the document." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:104 msgid "" -"To allow change scrap location on wizard, you have to select **Manage " -"several location per warehouse** in the settings at " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`" +"When scrapping before validating the internal transfer, the product is, by " +"default, moved from the source location to the virtual scrap location. But, " +"if you scrap after validating the internal transfer, it will be moved from " +"the destination location, as opposed to the source location, to the virtual " +"scrap location." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:110 +msgid "" +"Of course, you can manually update the source location of the scrap order if" +" necessary." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:3 +msgid "Send Automated SMS at Delivery" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:8 +msgid "" +"To send automated SMS, you need to activate the *SMS Confirmation* feature. " +"To do so, go to the *Inventory* app *Settings* and enable the feature. In " +"multi-company, this feature is company-specific." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Of course, an SMS template already exists by default in Odoo. You can modify" +" it by clicking on the arrow on the right." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:22 +msgid "Send SMS at delivery validation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:24 +msgid "" +"To use this feature, try to *Create* a delivery order for a specific partner" +" and add some products to it. Then, *Validate* the delivery." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:30 +msgid "Now, the automated SMS that has been sent appears in the chatter." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:36 +msgid "" +"The partner which is set on the transfer needs to have a phone number " +"specified in its contact form for the SMS to be sent." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:39 +msgid "" +"If you work with a shipping method, and then have a tracking link, it will " +"be included in the SMS template." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning.rst:3 +msgid "Planning" +msgstr "Planning" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:3 +msgid "How is the Scheduled Delivery Date Computed?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In most cases, scheduled dates are computed to be able to plan deliveries, " +"receptions, and so on. Depending on your company’s habits, Odoo generates " +"scheduled dates via the scheduler." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:9 +msgid "" +"To make your life easier, the Odoo scheduler computes everything per line, " +"whether it’s a manufacturing order, a delivery order, a sale order, etc." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:14 +msgid "" +"The computed dates are dependent on the different lead times configured in " +"Odoo." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:20 +msgid "" +"Configuring lead times is the first move if you want to compute scheduled " +"dates. Those are the delays promised (in terms of delivery, manufacturing, " +"etc.) to your partners and/or clients." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:25 +msgid "In Odoo, you can configure different lead times." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:30 +msgid "" +"When configuring lead times at the product level, you have three different " +"types to take into account: supplier lead time, customer lead time, and " +"manufacturing lead time." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:35 +msgid "Supplier lead time" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:37 +msgid "" +"The supplier lead time is the time needed for the supplier to deliver your " +"purchased products. To configure it, select a product and click on the " +"inventory tab. There, you will have to add a vendor to your product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:44 +msgid "" +"Now, just open the vendor form and fill its *Delivery lead time*. In this " +"case, the delivery day will be equal to *Date of the Purchase Order + " +"Delivery Lead Time*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:52 +msgid "" +"Do not forget that it is possible to add different vendor pricelists and, " +"thus, different delivery lead times, depending on the vendor." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:56 +msgid "Customer Lead Time" +msgstr "Levertijd aan klant" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:58 +msgid "" +"It is the time needed to get your product from your store/warehouse to your " +"customer. It can be configured for any product. To add it, select a product " +"and go to the inventory tab. There, simply indicate your *customer lead " +"time*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:67 +msgid "Manufacturing lead time" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:69 +msgid "" +"On the same page, it is possible to configure what’s called the " +"*Manufacturing Lead Time*. It is the time needed to manufacture the product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:76 +msgid "" +"At the company level, you can configure security days. Those are useful to " +"cope with eventual dalys and to be sure to meet your engagements. The idea " +"is to subtract backup days from the computed scheduled date in case of " +"delays." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:81 +msgid "" +"Once again, there are three different types of security lead times: for " +"sales, for purchases, and for manufacturing." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:85 +msgid "Security lead time for sales" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:87 +msgid "" +"In sales, security lead time corresponds to backup days to ensure you will " +"be able to deliver your clients in times. They are margins of errors for " +"delivery lead times. Security days are the same logic as the early " +"wristwatch, in order to arrive on time." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:92 +msgid "" +"The idea is to subtract the numbers of security days from the calculation " +"and, thus, to compute a scheduled date earlier than the one you promised to " +"your client. In that way, you are sure to be able to keep your commitment." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:97 +msgid "" +"To set up your security dates, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Settings* " +"and enable the feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:104 +msgid "Security lead time for purchase" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:106 +msgid "" +"It follows the same logic as security lead time for sales except that " +"security lead time for purchase is the margin of error for vendor lead " +"times, not for sales." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:110 +msgid "" +"When the system generates purchase orders for procuring products, they will " +"be scheduled that many days earlier to cope with unexpected vendor delays." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:114 +msgid "" +"To find purchase lead time, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Settings* and" +" enable the feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:121 +msgid "Security lead time for manufacturing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:123 +msgid "" +"The security lead time for manufacturing allows generating manufacturing " +"orders which are scheduled that many days earlier to cope with unexpected " +"manufacturing days." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:127 +msgid "" +"To configure it, go to *Manufacturing > Configuration > Settings* and enable" +" the *Security Lead Time* option. Then, hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:136 +msgid "" +"Sometimes, the internal transfers that a product might do may also influence" +" the computed date. The delays due to internal transfers can be specified in" +" the *Inventory* app when you create a new rule in a route." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:141 +msgid "" +"To specify them, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Routes* and add a push " +"rule to set a delay. Of course, you need to activate *Multi-step Routes* to " +"use this feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:149 +msgid "At the sale order level" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:152 +msgid "Expected date" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:154 +msgid "" +"In the *Sales* application, you have the possibility to activate the option " +"*Delivery Date*. It will allow you to see additional fields on the sale " +"order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:158 +msgid "" +"By enabling this option, Odoo will indicate the *Expected Date* in the " +"*Other Info* tab of the sales order. This one is automatically computed " +"based on the different lead times." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:165 +msgid "" +"If you set a *Commitment Date* to deliver your customer that is earlier than" +" the *Expected Date*, a warning message will appear on the screen." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:175 +msgid "" +"To better understand all the above info, here is an example. You may sell a " +"car today (January 1st), that is purchased on order, and you promise to " +"deliver your customer within 20 days (January 20th). In such a scenario, the" +" scheduler will trigger the following events, based on your configuration:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:181 +msgid "" +"January 19: this is the actual scheduled delivery (1 day of Sales Safety " +"Days);" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:183 +msgid "" +"January 18: you receive the product from your supplier (1 day of Purchase " +"days);" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:185 +msgid "" +"January 10: this is the deadline to order at your supplier (9 days of " +"Supplier Delivery Lead Time);" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:187 +msgid "" +"January 8: trigger a purchase request to your purchase team, since they " +"need, on average, 2 days to find the right supplier and order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:3 +msgid "Configure and Run Schedulers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:6 +msgid "What is a scheduler?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:8 +msgid "" +"The scheduler is the calculation engine that plans and prioritizes " +"production and purchasing. It does it automatically, according to the rules " +"defined on products. By default, the scheduler is set to run once a day." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:14 +msgid "Calculating Requirements / Scheduling" +msgstr "Berekenen vereisten / Planning" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:16 +msgid "" +"Scheduling only validates procurements that are confirmed but not yet " +"started. These procurement reservations will start production, tasks or " +"purchases themselves, depending on the configuration of the requested " +"product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:21 +msgid "" +"As a human would do, the scheduler takes the priority of operations into " +"account when starting reservations and procurements. Urgent requests will be" +" started first." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:26 +msgid "" +"In case there are not enough products in stock to satisfy all the requests, " +"you can be sure that the most urgent ones will be produced first." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:31 +msgid "Configure and run the scheduler" +msgstr "De planner configureren en laten lopen" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:34 +msgid "Run the scheduler manually" +msgstr "Voer de planner manueel uit" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:36 +msgid "" +"To start the scheduler manually, go to *Inventory > Operations > Run " +"Schedulers*. The scheduler uses all the relevant parameters defined for " +"products, suppliers and the company to prioritize the different production " +"orders, deliveries and supplier purchases." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:45 +msgid "Configure and run the scheduler (for advanced users)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:47 +msgid "" +"To use this feature, you have to enable the debug mode. To do so, go to " +"*Settings > Activate the developer mode*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Then, go to *Settings > Technical > Automation > Scheduled Actions* and " +"modify the *Run MRP Scheduler Configuration*. There, you can set the " +"starting time of the scheduler." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products.rst:3 +msgid "Products" +msgstr "Producten" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:3 +msgid "How to select the right replenishment strategy" +msgstr "Hoe de correcte bevoorrading strategie te kiezen" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Minimum Stock rules and Make to Order have similar consequences but " +"different rules. They should be used depending on your manufacturing and " +"delivery strategies." +msgstr "" +"Minimale voorraadregels en Maak op Order hebben soortgelijke gevolgen maar " +"verschillende regels. Ze moeten worden gebruikt, afhankelijk van uw " +"productie- en levering- strategieën." + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:10 +msgid "Terminology" +msgstr "Terminologie" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:13 +msgid "Minimum stock rule" +msgstr "Minimale stockregel" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Minimum Stock rules are used to ensure that you always have the minimum " +"amount of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or " +"answer to your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its" +" minimum the system will automatically generate a procurement order with the" +" quantity needed to reach the maximum stock level." +msgstr "" +"Minimum voorraadregels worden gebruikt om ervoor te zorgen dat u altijd het " +"minimale aantal producten op voorraad heeft om uw producten te kunnen " +"vervaardigen en / of te beantwoorden aan uw klantenbehoeften. Wanneer het " +"voorraadniveau van een product het minimum bereikt, zal het systeem " +"automatisch een inkooporder genereren met de hoeveelheid die nodig is om het" +" maximale voorraadniveau te bereiken." + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:22 +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:58 +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:71 +msgid "Make to Order" +msgstr "Maak op order" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:24 +msgid "" +"The Make to Order function will trigger a Purchase Order of the amount of " +"the Sales Order related to the product. The system will **not** check the " +"current stock. This means that a draft purchase order will be generated " +"regardless of the quantity on hand of the product." +msgstr "" +"Met de functie Maak op Order wordt een aankooporder geactiveerd dat gelijk " +"is aan het aantal bestelde producten. Het systeem zal de huidige voorraad **" +" niet ** controleren. Dit betekent dat een concept aankooporder wordt " +"gegenereerd, ongeacht de beschikbare hoeveelheid." + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:33 +msgid "Minimum stock rules" +msgstr "Minimale stockregels" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:35 +msgid "" +"The Minimum Stock Rules configuration is available through your Inventory " +"module. In the Inventory Control menu select \"Reordering Rule\" in the drop" +" down menu. There, click on \"Create\" to set minimum and maximum stock " +"values for a given product." +msgstr "" +"De Minimum voorraad regels configuratie is beschikbaar door de Voorraad " +"module. In het Voorraadbeheer menu selecteer \"Aanvulopdracht regels\" in " +"het drop down menu. Druk daar op \"Aanmaken\" om minimum en maximum stock " +"waarden in te geven voor een bepaald product." + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:44 +msgid "" +"Show tooltips for \"minimum quantity\", \"maximum quantity\" and \"quantity " +"multiple\" fields" +msgstr "" +"Toon tooltips voor de velden *minimale hoeveelheid*, *maximale hoeveelheid* " +"en *meerdere hoeveelheden*" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:47 +msgid "" +"Then, click on your product to access the related product form and, on the " +"\"Inventory submenu\", do not forget to select a supplier." +msgstr "" +"Klik vervolgens op uw product om het gerelateerde productformulier en het " +"\"Voorraad submenu\" te zien, vergeet geen leverancier aan te duiden." + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:54 +msgid "" +"Don't forget to select the right product type. A consumable can not be " +"stocked and will thus not be accounted for in the stock valuation." +msgstr "" +"Vergeet niet het juiste soort product te selecteren. Een verbruik product " +"kan niet gestockeerd worden en wordt dus niet gebruikt in de stock " +"berekening." + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:60 +msgid "" +"The Make to Order configuration is available on your product form through " +"your :menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory control --> Products` (or any " +"other module where products are available)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:64 +msgid "On the product form, under Inventory, click on \"Make To Order\"." +msgstr "Klik in het product scherm onder Inventaris op \"Maak op Order\"." + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:70 +msgid "Choice between the two options" +msgstr "Kies tussen de twee opties" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:72 +msgid "" +"The choice between the two options is thus dependent of your inventory " +"strategy. If you prefer to have a buffer and always have at least a minimum " +"amount, the minimum stock rule should be used. If you want to reorder your " +"stocks only if your sale is confirmed it is better to use the Make to Order." +msgstr "" +"De keuze tussen de twee opties is dus afhankelijk van uw voorraadstrategie. " +"Als u de voorkeur geeft aan een buffer en steeds een minimum aantal op " +"voorraad wenst, moet de minimumvoorraadregel worden gebruikt. Als u uw " +"voorraden alleen wenst aan te vullen als uw verkoop is bevestigd, is het " +"beter om de Maak op order route te gebruiken." + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:3 +msgid "Use Different Units of Measure" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In some cases, handling products in different units of measure is necessary." +" For example, if you buy products in a country where the metric system is of" +" application and sell in a country where the imperial system is used, you " +"will need to convert the units. Another common use case is buying products " +"in bigger packs to your supplier and selling them in units to your " +"customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:12 +msgid "" +"You can set up Odoo to work with different units of measure for one product." +msgstr "" +"U kan Odoo opzetten om te werken met meerdere maateenheden voor een product." + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:18 +msgid "" +"In the *Inventory* application, go to *Configuration > Settings*. In the " +"*Products* section, activate *Units of Measure*, then *Save*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:25 +msgid "Create New Units of Measure" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:27 +msgid "" +"In the *Inventory* application go to *Configuration > UoM*. There, hit " +"*Create*. As an example, we will create a Box of 6 units that we will use " +"for the Egg product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:34 +msgid "" +"The category is important for unit conversion, you will be able to convert " +"products from one unit to another only if those units belong to the same " +"category. The box of 6 is 6 times bigger than the reference unit of measure " +"for the category which is “Units” here." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:43 +msgid "Specify Units of Measure on your Products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:45 +msgid "" +"In the *Inventory application > Master Data > Products*, open the product " +"which you would like to change the purchase/sale unit of measure, and click " +"on *Edit*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:49 +msgid "" +"In the *General Information* tab, you can select the *Unit of Measure* in " +"which the product will be sold, which is also the unit in which internal " +"transfers will take place. You can also select the *Purchase Unit of " +"Measure*, which is the unit in which you purchase the product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:59 +msgid "Transfer from One Unit to Another" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:62 +msgid "Buy in the Pruchase UoM" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:64 +msgid "" +"In the *Purchase* application, *Create* a new request for quotation in which" +" you include the product with the different *Units of Measure* and *Confirm*" +" it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:71 +msgid "" +"On the automatically generated purchase orders, the UoM used is the Box of " +"6, meaning the Purchase UoM. You have of course the possibility to manually " +"modify the UoM if necessary. When you enter the *Receipt* which is linked to" +" the purchase order, you can observe that the 10 boxes of 6 units have been " +"converted in 60 units. Indeed, the stock is managed in units." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:82 +msgid "Replenishment" +msgstr "Heraanvulling" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:84 +msgid "" +"When doing a replenishment via the *Replenish* button on the product form, " +"you have the possibility to change the unit of measure." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:94 +msgid "Sell in bigger UoM" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:96 +msgid "" +"You can choose the unit of measure on the sale order document and decide to " +"sell the eggs by the dozen. When doing so, the price is automatically " +"computed from Units UoM to adapt to the selected *UoM*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:103 +msgid "" +"In the delivery order, the *UoM* used in the sale order is converted to the " +"*UoM* used for stock management, in our use case, the Units." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:3 +msgid "When Should you Use Packages, Units of Measure or Kits?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:6 +msgid "Units of Measure" +msgstr "Maateenheid" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Units of measure specify the unit used to handle a product. In Odoo, you " +"have the possibility to specify the unit of measure in which you manage your" +" stock and the one which is used when purchasing the product to your " +"supplier." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:16 +msgid "" +"The *conversion* between the different units of measure is done " +"automatically. The only condition is that all the units have to be in the " +"*same category* (Unit, Weight, Volume, Length,...)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:20 +msgid "" +"For example, if I have the following reordering rule for the egg and I run " +"the scheduler, the quantity added in the automatically generated purchase " +"order will be in dozens but what will enter the stock will be units." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:35 +msgid "Packages" +msgstr "Verpakkingen" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:37 +msgid "" +"The package is the physical container in which you put one or several " +"products from a picking. For example, when you deliver a product, you can " +"decide to separate the quantity into two different packages. It then allows " +"you to have a report with the quantity of products for each package." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:50 +msgid "Packaging" +msgstr "Verpakking" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:52 +msgid "" +"The packaging is the physical container that protects your product. If you " +"are selling computers, the packaging contains the computer with the notice " +"and the power plug." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:56 +msgid "" +"In Odoo, packagings are used for indicative purposes on sale orders. They " +"can be specified on the product form, in the inventory tab." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:66 +msgid "" +"Another useful use of the packaging is for product reception. By scanning " +"the barcode of the packaging, Odoo adds the number of units contained in the" +" packing on the picking." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies.rst:3 +msgid "Inventory Adjustment" +msgstr "Voorraad aanpassing" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:3 +msgid "Choose Between Reordering Rules and Make to Order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:5 +msgid "" +"*Reordering rules* and *make to order* do both allow to automatically " +"replenish products when necessary. The difference between those tools is how" +" they are triggered." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:9 +msgid "" +"*Reordering rules* are used to ensure that you always have a minimum amount " +"of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or answer to" +" your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its minimum " +"the system will automatically generate a procurement with the needed " +"quantity to reach the maximum stock level." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:15 +msgid "" +"The *Make to Order* route will trigger a procurement (purchase order or " +"manufacturing order) with the necessary quantity to fulfill a product " +"request (coming from a sale order or a manufacturing order). The system will" +" check the quantity on hand for the corresponding product and if the " +"available quantity is higher or equal to the necessary quantity, Odoo will " +"use what is in stock to fulfill the request. In case you don’t have enough " +"available stock to fully fulfill the product request, procurement will be " +"generated for the total quantity requested." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:28 +msgid "Reordering Rules" +msgstr "Aanvulopdrachtregels" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:30 +msgid "" +"The *Reordering Rules* configuration is available through the menu " +"*Inventory > Master Data > Reordering Rules*. There, click on *Create* to " +"set minimum and maximum stock values for a given product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:37 +msgid "" +"When the forecasted stock goes below the *Minimum Quantity* specified in " +"this field, Odoo generates a procurement to bring the forecasted quantity to" +" the *Maximum Quantity*. The *Quantity Multiple* is used to round the " +"procurement quantity up to this multiple. If it is 0, the exact quantity " +"will be used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:46 +msgid "" +"The *Lead time* is the number of days after the order point is triggered to " +"receive the products or to order them to the vendor." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:49 +msgid "" +"In case you work with multi-warehouses and/or multi-locations, you will be " +"able to specify different reordering rules for the same product in each " +"location." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:54 +msgid "" +"For the reordering rules to be triggered, on the corresponding product, a " +"route should be specified. In case you manufacture your products, make sure " +"to select the route *Manufacture* and create a *Bill of Material* for the " +"product. In case you purchase your products, make sure to select the route " +"*Buy* and add a *Vendor Pricelist*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:66 +msgid "" +"Don't forget to select the product type *storable* in the product form. A " +"consumable can not be stocked and won’t trigger reordering rules." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:73 +msgid "" +"The *Make To Order* configuration is available on your product form through " +"your *Inventory module > Master Data > Products* (or in any other module " +"where products are available)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:77 +msgid "" +"On the product form, in the *Inventory tab*, you can set a route. You can " +"choose *Make To Order* and another route, either *Buy* or *Manufacture*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:81 +msgid "" +"Again, if the *Buy* route is selected, make sure to set a *Vendor pricelist*" +" in the *Purchase tab*. In case you have set a *Manufacture* route, male " +"sure you have a *BoM* for this product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:3 +msgid "Resupply from another Warehouse" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:8 +msgid "" +"In order to be able to resupply from another warehouse, you need to activate" +" \\*multi-warehouses\\* and \\*multi-step routes\\*. Storage locations will " +"be automatically activated when activating multi-warehouses." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:16 +msgid "" +"You can then access your warehouses via \\*Inventory > Configuration > " +"Warehouses\\*. Create the necessary warehouses following this " +"`*documentation* " +"`__." +" Enter the warehouse which should be resupplied by another one. You will " +"have the possibility to directly indicate through which warehouse it gets " +"resupplied." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:26 +msgid "" +"By activating this option, a new route will now be available on your " +"products \\*Supply Product from Second warehouse\\*. It can now be selected," +" along with either a \\*reordering rule\\* or a \\*make to order\\*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:34 +msgid "" +"For the demonstration, I set a reordering rule with a minimum of 5 units in " +"stock and a maximum of 10 units in stock, having currently 0 units on hand. " +"I will run the scheduler by going to \\*Inventory > Operations > Run " +"scheduler\\*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:42 +msgid "" +"The system automatically creates two pickings, one \\*delivery order\\* from" +" my Second Warehouse which contains the necessary products, and a receipt in" +" my main warehouse WH/Stock for the same products. The source document is " +"the \\*reordering rule\\* which triggered the route \\*Supply Product from " +"Second warehouse\\*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/reporting.rst:3 @@ -3819,12 +3792,6 @@ msgstr "54.68" #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:282 #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:263 #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:281 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:30 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:45 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:52 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:57 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:64 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:72 msgid "Configuration:" msgstr "Configuratie:" @@ -4260,964 +4227,359 @@ msgid "" "internal category" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts.rst:3 -msgid "Main Concepts" -msgstr "Belangrijkste concepten" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:5 -msgid "Introduction to Inventory Management" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:7 -msgid "" -"A double-entry inventory has no stock input, output (disparition of " -"products) or transformation. Instead, all operations are stock moves between" -" locations (possibly virtual)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:16 -msgid "Operations" -msgstr "Bewerkingen" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:18 -msgid "" -"Stock moves represent the transit of goods and materials between locations." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:30 -msgid "Production Order" -msgstr "Productieorder" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:24 -msgid "Consume:" -msgstr "Verbruik:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "2 Wheels: Stock → Production" -msgstr "2 wielen: Stock → Productie" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bike Frame: Stock → Production" -msgstr "1 Fietsframe: Stock → Productie" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:26 -msgid "Produce:" -msgstr "Produceer:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:27 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Production → Stock" -msgstr "1 fiets: productie → Stock" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Stock: the location the Manufacturing Order is initiated from" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Production: on the product form, field \"Production Location\"" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:36 -msgid "Drop-shipping" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:33 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Supplier → Customer" -msgstr "1 fiets: Leverancier → Klant" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:36 -msgid "Configurarion:" -msgstr "Configuratie:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Supplier: on the product form" -msgstr "Leverancier: op het product formulier" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Customer: on the sale order itself" -msgstr "Klant: op de verkooporder zelf" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:45 -msgid "Client Delivery" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:39 -msgid "Pick" -msgstr "Pick" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:40 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Stock → Packing Zone" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:41 -msgid "Pack" -msgstr "Verpakking" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:42 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Packing Zone → Output" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:43 -#: ../../inventory/shipping.rst:3 -msgid "Shipping" -msgstr "Afleveradres" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:44 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Output → Customer" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "on the pick+pack+ship route for the warehouse" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:52 -msgid "Inter-Warehouse transfer" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:49 -msgid "Transfer:" -msgstr "Overplaatsing:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Warehouse 1 → Transit" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Transit → Warehouse 2" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Warehouse 2: the location the transfer is initiated from" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Warehouse 1: on the transit route" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:57 -msgid "Broken Product (scrapped)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:55 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Warehouse → Scrap" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:58 -msgid "Scrap: Scrap Location when creating the scrapping" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:60 -msgid "Missing products in inventory" -msgstr "Ontbrekende producten in voorraad" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:61 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Warehouse → Inventory Loss" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:62 -msgid "Extra products in inventory" -msgstr "Extra producten in voorraad" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:63 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Inventory Loss → Warehouse" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:65 -msgid "Inventory Loss: \"Inventory Location\" field on the product" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:72 -msgid "Reception" -msgstr "Ontvangst" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Supplier → Input" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Input → Stock" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Supplier: purchase order supplier" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Input: \"destination\" field on the purchase order" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:75 -msgid "Analysis" -msgstr "Analyse" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:77 -msgid "" -"Inventory analysis can use products count or products value (= number of " -"products * product cost)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:80 -msgid "For each inventory location, multiple data points can be analysed:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:148 -msgid "Procurements & Procurement Rules" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:150 -msgid "" -"A procurement is a request for a specific quantity of products to a specific" -" location. They can be created manually or automatically triggered by:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:159 -msgid "New sale orders" -msgstr "Nieuwe verkooporders" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:157 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:162 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:168 -msgid "Effect" -msgstr "Effect" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:157 -msgid "" -"A procurement is created at the customer location for every product ordered " -"by the customer (you have to deliver the customer)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:160 -msgid "" -"Procurement Location: on the customer, field \"Customer Location\" " -"(property)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:164 -msgid "Minimum Stock Rules" -msgstr "Minimale voorraadregels" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:163 -msgid "A procurement is created at the rule's location." -msgstr "Een inkoop is aangemaakt op de regel zijn locatie." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:165 -msgid "Procurement location: on the rule, field \"Location\"" -msgstr "Inkoop locatie: op de regel, veld \"Locatie\"" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:168 -msgid "Procurement rules" -msgstr "Inkoopregels" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:168 -msgid "A new procurement is created on the rule's source location" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:170 -msgid "" -"*Procurement rules* describe how procurements on specific locations should " -"be fulfilled e.g.:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:173 -msgid "where the product should come from (source location)" -msgstr "waar het product vandaan moet komen (bronlocatie)" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:174 -msgid "" -"whether the procurement is :abbr:`MTO (Made To Order)` or :abbr:`MTS (Made " -"To Stock)`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:179 -msgid "needs schema thing from FP" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:182 -msgid "Routes" -msgstr "Routes" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:184 -msgid "" -"Procurement rules are grouped in routes. Routes define paths the product " -"must follow. Routes may be applicable or not, depending on the products, " -"sales order lines, warehouse,..." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:188 -msgid "" -"To fulfill a procurement, the system will search for rules belonging to " -"routes that are defined in (by order of priority):" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:202 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses.rst:3 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses.rst:3 msgid "Warehouses" msgstr "Magazijnen" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:194 -msgid "Warehouse Route Example: Pick → Pack → Ship" -msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:3 +msgid "What is the difference between warehouses and locations?" +msgstr "Wat is het verschil tussen magazijnen en locaties?" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:196 -msgid "Picking List:" -msgstr "Verzamellijst:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:197 -msgid "Pick Zone → Pack Zone" -msgstr "Verzamelzone → Verpakkingszone" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:198 -msgid "Pack List:" -msgstr "Verzamellijst:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:199 -msgid "Pack Zone → Gate A" -msgstr "Verpakkingszone → Poort A" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:201 -msgid "Delivery Order:" -msgstr "Ontvangst order:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:201 -msgid "Gate A → Customer" -msgstr "Poort A → Klant" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:203 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:5 msgid "" -"Routes that describe how you organize your warehouse should be defined on " -"the warehouse." +"In Odoo, a **Warehouse** is the actual building/place in which your items " +"are stocked. You can setup multiple warehouses and create moves between " +"warehouses." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:212 -msgid "A Product" -msgstr "Een product" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:205 -msgid "Product Route Example: Quality Control" -msgstr "Product route voorbeeld: Kwaliteitscontrole" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:207 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:217 -msgid "Reception:" -msgstr "Ontvangst:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:208 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:218 -msgid "Supplier → Input" -msgstr "Leverancier → Input" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:209 -msgid "Confirmation:" -msgstr "Bevestiging:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:210 -msgid "Input → Quality Control" -msgstr "Input → Kwaliteitscontrole" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:212 -msgid "Storage:" -msgstr "Opslag:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:212 -msgid "Quality Control → Stock" -msgstr "Kwaliteitscontrole → Stock" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:221 -msgid "Product Category" -msgstr "Productcategorie" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:215 -msgid "Product Category Route Example: cross-dock" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:219 -msgid "Cross-Docks:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:220 -msgid "Input → Output" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:221 -msgid "Delivery:" -msgstr "Levering:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:222 -msgid "Output → Customer" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:227 -msgid "Sale Order Line" -msgstr "Verkooporderregel" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:224 -msgid "Sale Order Line Example: Drop-shipping" -msgstr "Verkooporderlijn voorbeeld: dropshipping" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:227 -msgid "Order:" -msgstr "Order:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:227 -msgid "Supplier → Customer" -msgstr "Leverancier → Klant" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:230 -msgid "Push Rules" -msgstr "Push regels" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:232 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:9 msgid "" -"Push rules trigger when products enter a specific location. They " -"automatically move the product to a new location. Whether a push rule can be" -" used depends on applicable routes." +"A **Location**, is a specific space within your warehouse. It can be " +"considered as a sublocation of your warehouse, as a shelf, a floor, an " +"aisle, etc. Therefore, a location is part of one warehouse only and it is " +"not possible to link one location to multiple warehouses. You can configure " +"as much locations as you need under one warehouse." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:240 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:88 -msgid "Quality Control" -msgstr "Kwaliteitscontrole" +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:15 +msgid "There are 3 types of locations:" +msgstr "Er zijn 3 soorten locaties:" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:239 -msgid "Product lands in Input" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:240 -msgid "Push 1: Input → Quality Control" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:241 -msgid "Push 2: Quality Control → Stock" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:244 -msgid "Warehouse Transit" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:243 -msgid "Product lands in Transit" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:244 -msgid "Push: Transit → Warehouse 2" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:247 -msgid "Procurement Groups" -msgstr "Verwervingsgroepen" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:249 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:17 msgid "" -"Routes and rules define inventory moves. For every rule, a document type is " -"provided:" +"The **Physical Locations** are internal locations that are part of the " +"warehouses for which you are the owner. They can be the loading and " +"unloading area of your warehouse, a shelf or a department, etc." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:252 -msgid "Picking" -msgstr "Picken" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:253 -msgid "Packing" -msgstr "Verpakking" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:254 -msgid "Delivery Order" -msgstr "Ontvangst order" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:255 -msgid "Purchase Order" -msgstr "Inkooporder" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:256 -msgid "..." -msgstr "..." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:258 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:21 msgid "" -"Moves are grouped within the same document type if their procurement group " -"and locations are the same." +"The **Partner Locations** are spaces within a customer and/or vendor's " +"warehouse. They work the same way as Physical Locations with the only " +"difference being that you are not the owner of the warehouse." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:261 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:25 msgid "" -"A sale order creates a procurement group so that pickings and delivery " -"orders of the same order are grouped. But you can define specific groups on " -"reordering rules too. (e.g. to group purchases of specific products " -"together)" +"The **Virtual Locations** are places that do not exist, but in which " +"products can be placed when they are not physically in an inventory yet (or " +"anymore). They come in handy when you want to place lost products out of " +"your stock (in the **Inventory loss**), or when you want to take into " +"account products that are on their way to your warehouse (**Procurements**)." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:3 -msgid "Terminologies" -msgstr "Terminologie" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:31 msgid "" -"**Warehouse**: A warehouse in Odoo is a location where you store products. " -"It is either a physical or a virtual warehouse. It could be a store or a " -"repository." +"In Odoo, locations are structured hierarchically. You can structure your " +"locations as a tree, dependent on a parent-child relationship. This gives " +"you more detailed levels of analysis of your stock operations and the " +"organization of your warehouses." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:9 -msgid "" -"**Location**: Locations are used to structure storage zones within a " -"warehouse. In addition to internal locations (your warehouse), Odoo has " -"locations for suppliers, customers, inventory loss counter-parts, etc." +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:37 +msgid ":doc:`warehouse_creation`" +msgstr ":doc:`warehouse_creation`" + +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:38 +msgid ":doc:`location_creation`" +msgstr ":doc:`location_creation`" + +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:3 +msgid "Create a New Location" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:14 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:8 msgid "" -"**Lots**: Lots are a batch of products identified with a unique barcode or " -"serial number. All items of a lot are from the same product. (e.g. a set of " -"24 bottle) Usually, lots come from manufacturing order batches or " -"procurements." +"In order to be able to create different locations, you will need to activate" +" *Multi-Locations* in the settings which can be done from the *Inventory " +"application > Configuration > Settings*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:19 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:15 msgid "" -"**Serial Number**: A serial number is a unique identifier of a specific " -"product. Technically, serial numbers are similar to having a lot of 1 unique" -" item." +"In the *Inventory application*, you can now go to *Configuration > " +"Locations* and hit *Create* in order to create a new location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:23 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:21 msgid "" -"**Unit of Measure**: Define how the quantity of products is expressed. " -"Meters, Pounds, Pack of 24, Kilograms,… Unit of measure of the same category" -" (ex: size) can be converted to each others (m, cm, mm) using a fixed ratio." +"Type the name of the location in the *Location Name* field, and select the " +"*Parent Location* in the list. The parent location can be a physical, " +"partner or virtual location, and you can add as many sub-locations as needed" +" to a location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:28 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:29 msgid "" -"**Consumable**: A product for which you do not want to manage the inventory " -"level (no quantity on hand or forecasted) but that you can receive and " -"deliver. When this product is needed Odoo suppose that you always have " -"enough stock." +"In case you want the location to be suggested when creating a Return or when" +" Scrapping a product, you should check *Is a Scrap Location?* and *Is a " +"Return Location?*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:33 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:33 msgid "" -"**Stockable**: A product for which you want to manage the inventory level." +"If you have the *Barcode* application installed, you can specify the barcode" +" which will correspond to this location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:36 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:37 msgid "" -"**Package:** A package contains several products (identified by their serial" -" number/lots or not). Example: a box containing knives and forks." +"A warehouse also corresponds to a location. As the locations are " +"hierarchical, Odoo will create the parent location of the warehouse, " +"containing all the sublocations in it." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:40 -msgid "" -"**Procurement**: A procurement is a request for a specific quantity of " -"products to a specific location. Procurement are automatically triggered by " -"other documents: Sale orders, Minimum Stock Rules, and Procurement rules. " -"You can trigger the procurement manually. When procurements are triggered " -"automatically, you should always pay attention for the exceptions (e.g. a " -"product should be purchased from a vendor, but no supplier is defined)." +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:3 +msgid "Create a New Warehouse" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:48 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:8 msgid "" -"**Routes**: Routes define paths the product must follow. Routes may be " -"applicable or not, depending on the products, sales order lines, warehouse,…" -" To fulfill a procurement, the system will search for rules belonging to " -"routes that are defined in the related product/sale order." +"In order to create a new warehouse, you should activate the *Multi-" +"Warehouse* settings. Note that the *Multi-Locations* settings will be " +"automatically activated at the same time." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:54 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:12 msgid "" -"**Push Rules**: Push rules trigger when products enter a specific location. " -"They automatically move the product to a new location. Whether a push rule " -"can be used depends on applicable routes." +"In order to do so, go to the *Inventory app > Configuration > Settings*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:58 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:18 msgid "" -"**Procurement Rules** or **Pull Rules**: Procurement rules describe how " -"procurements on specific locations should be fulfilled e.g.: where the " -"product should come from (source location), whether the procurement is MTO " -"or MTS,..." +"You can then go to *Inventory > Configuration > Warehouses* and hit *Create*" +" to add a new warehouse." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:63 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:24 msgid "" -"**Procurement Group**: Routes and rules define inventory moves. For every " -"rule, a document type is provided: Picking, Packing, Delivery Order, " -"Purchase Order,… Moves are grouped within the same document type if their " -"procurement group and locations are the same." +"You will be able to enter your warehouse name. You should also choose a " +"short name for your warehouse which is 5-characters long and is used on the " +"different warehouse documents." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:69 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:28 msgid "" -"**Stock Moves**: Stock moves represent the transit of goods and materials " -"between locations." +"In the Address field, you can select an existing company or create one on-" +"the-go. Therefore, the address of your warehouse will be the same as the one" +" of the company you selected. You can also leave this field empty and edit " +"it afterward." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:72 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:36 msgid "" -"**Quantity On Hand**: The quantity of a specific product that is currently " -"in a warehouse or location." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:75 -msgid "" -"**Forecasted Quantity**: The quantity of products you can sell for a " -"specific warehouse or location. It is defined as the Quantity on Hand - " -"Future Delivery Orders + Future incoming shipments + Future manufactured " -"units." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:80 -msgid "" -"**Reordering Rules**: It defines the conditions for Odoo to automatically " -"trigger a request for procurement (buying at a supplier or launching a " -"manufacturing order). It is triggered when the forecasted quantity meets the" -" minimum stock rule." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:85 -msgid "" -"**Cross-Dock**: Cross-docking is a practice in the logistics of unloading " -"materials from an incoming semi-trailer truck or railroad car and loading " -"these materials directly into outbound trucks, trailers, or rail cars, with " -"no storage in between. (does not go to the stock, directly from incoming to " -"packing zone)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:91 -msgid "" -"**Drop-Shipping**: move products from the vendor/manufacturer directly to " -"the customer (could be retailer or consumer) without going through the usual" -" distribution channels. Products are sent directly from the vendor to the " -"customer, without passing through your own warehouse." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:97 -msgid "" -"**Removal Strategies**: the strategy to use to select which product to pick " -"for a specific operation. Example: FIFO, LIFO, FEFO." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:100 -msgid "" -"**Putaway Strategies**: the strategy to use to decide in which location a " -"specific product should be set when arriving somewhere. (example: cables " -"goes in rack 3, storage A)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:104 -msgid "" -"**Scrap**: A product that is broken or outdated. Scrapping a product removes" -" it from the stock." +"After the creation of your new warehouse, you can go back to the *Dashboard*" +" and you will see the new operation types automatically created by Odoo due " +"to the creation of a new warehouse." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/overview/process.rst:3 msgid "Process Overview" msgstr "Proces overzicht" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:3 -msgid "From procurement to delivery" +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:3 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:25 +msgid "Deliver Products from Stock" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:6 +msgid "Create Storable/Consumable Products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:5 msgid "" -"Inventory is the heart of your business. It can be really complicated, but " -"with Odoo, doing a receipt or a delivery has never been easier. We will show" -" you in this document how easy to do a full process, from the receipt to the" -" delivery." +"The first step to use the inventory application is to create products in " +"your database via the menu *Master Data > Products*. Click the Create button" +" and enter the name of your product." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:12 msgid "" -"Odoo inventory is fully integrated with other applications, such as " -"**Purchase**, **Sales** or **Inventory**. But is not limited to those " -"processes, it is also fully integrated with our **e-Commerce**, " -"**Manufacturing** and **Repairs** applications." +"In case you set the product as *storable*, you will track the stock for this" +" product and know how many units are in stock and what is the forecasted " +"number of units. If you want to include a product on receipts/deliveries but" +" don’t need to track its stock, you can set it as *consumable*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:19 -msgid "How to process a receipt ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:22 -msgid "Install Purchase application" -msgstr "Installeer Inkoop applicatie" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:24 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:27 msgid "" -"First, you will need to install the **Purchase Management** application. Go " -"to :menuselection:`Apps` and install it." +"Once you have existing products, you can decide to create a delivery to " +"deliver products to your customers. The process in order to do so is " +"described in the following print screens." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:31 -msgid "Make a purchase order" -msgstr "Maak een inkooporder" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:33 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:37 msgid "" -"Go to the **Purchases** applications. The first screen is the **Request for " -"Quotation** list. Click on the **Create** button." +"On the delivery order, you can specify to whom the products will be " +"delivered along with the different products and their respective quantities." +" When the delivery is complete you can hit *Validate* and the products will " +"go out of your stock." msgstr "" -"Ga naar de **Aankopen** applicatie. Het eerste scherm is de " -"**Offerteaanvraag** lijst. Klik op de knop **Aanmaken**." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:36 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:45 msgid "" -"Fill in the **Vendor** information and click on **Add an Item** to add some " -"products to your request for quotation." +"In case you have a delivery that is planned but shouldn’t be immediately " +"validated, you can create a *planned delivery* with a scheduled date in the " +"future. You can indicate the initial demand for each product, corresponding " +"to what has been ordered by your customer. Once the document is filled in, " +"you can hit “Mark as to do” in order to consider it in your product " +"forecasts." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:42 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:56 +msgid "Deliver Products from Stock from a Sale Order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:58 msgid "" -"Click on **Confirm order** when you are sure about the products, prices and " -"quantity." +"If you have the *Sales* application installed, delivery can be directly " +"created by *validating a quotation*. You will be able to find the " +"corresponding delivery directly on the *sale order*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:46 -msgid "Retrieve the Receipt" +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:3 +msgid "Set your Initial Stock" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:48 -msgid "You can retrieve the receipt order in 2 ways:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:51 -msgid "From the purchase order" -msgstr "Van het verkooporder" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:53 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:12 msgid "" -"On the top right of your purchase order, you will see a button with the " -"related **Receipt**:" +"Set the product as *storable*, in order to track the stock for this product " +"and be able to include it in an inventory adjustment." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:59 -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:136 -msgid "Click on it to see the **Transfer order**." -msgstr "Klik erop om de **overschrijvingsopdracht** te zien." +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:19 +msgid "Inventory Adjustment for Multiple Products" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:62 -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:139 -msgid "From the Inventory Dashboard" -msgstr "Vanuit het magazijn dashboard" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:64 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:21 msgid "" -"When opening the **Inventory** application, click on **# to receive** to see" -" the list of your deliveries to process." +"Once you have created all your *storable products*, you can create an " +"*inventory adjustment* to determine their current stock level in Odoo. You " +"therefore need to go to *Operations > Inventory Adjustments* and create a " +"new one." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:70 -msgid "In the list, click on the one related to the purchase order:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:76 -msgid "Process the Receipt" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:81 -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:162 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:29 msgid "" -"To process the stock transfer. Simply click on **Validate** to complete the " -"transfer. A message will appear asking if you want to process the whole " -"order, accept it by clicking on **Apply**." +"You have to enter a title for your *inventory adjustment* and you can then " +"decide if you want to proceed to the *inventory adjustment* of all products " +"or only some of them. For a first *inventory adjustment*, I suggest you to " +"keep the *Products* field empty. You can then *Start Inventory*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:86 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:38 msgid "" -"Procurements can be automated. Please read our document " -":doc:`../../management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto` for more " -"information." +"If you already have some products in stock, Odoo will add the lines with the" +" theoretical quantity currently in stock. You can also add new lines with " +"your other products." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:91 -msgid "How to process a delivery order ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:94 -msgid "Install Sales application" -msgstr "Installeer de Verkoop applicatie" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:96 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:46 msgid "" -"First, you will need to install the **Sales Management** application. Go to " -":menuselection:`Apps` and install it." +"If your products are tracked by Serial/Lot numbers, you will have an " +"additional column allowing you to specify those for the different units " +"added to the inventory adjustment." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:103 -msgid "Place a sale order" -msgstr "Plaats een verkooporder" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:105 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:50 msgid "" -"Go to the **Sales** applications. Click on the **Quotations** button of your" -" team." +"Odoo will highlight in red the lines for which there is a difference between" +" the theoretical quantity on hand, which is automatically computed by the " +"system, and the counted quantity you manually entered. Once all the " +"necessary products have been entered, you can hit *Validate Inventory* and " +"the quantities on hand of your different products will be updated." msgstr "" -"Ga naar de **Verkopen** applicatie. Klik op de **Offertes** knop van uw " -"team." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:111 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:58 +msgid "Inventory Adjustment for one Product" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:60 msgid "" -"You will get the list of all your quotations. Click on the **Create** " -"button." -msgstr "U krijgt een lijst van al uw offertes. Klik op de **Aanmaken** knop." +"On each storable product, you have access to the *Update Quantity* button." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:114 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:66 msgid "" -"Fill in the **Customer informations** and click on **Add an Item** to add " -"some products to your quotation." +"When clicking this button, you see the current stock you have for this " +"product. You can edit the existing lines or create new ones to add stock of " +"your product in different locations and/or add new serial/lot numbers." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:120 -msgid "Click on **Confirm sale** to place the order." -msgstr "Klik op **Bevestig verkoop** om het order te plaatsen." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:123 -msgid "Retrieve the Delivery order" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:125 -msgid "You can retrieve the delivery order in 2 ways:" -msgstr "U kan de afleverorders ontvangen op 2 manieren:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:128 -msgid "From the sale order" -msgstr "Vanuit het verkooporde" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:130 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:74 msgid "" -"On the top right of your sale order, you will see a button with the related " -"**Delivery**:" +"Once you come back to your product, you see that the quantity on hand as " +"been updated taking your modification into account." msgstr "" -"In de rechtse bovenhoek van uw verkooporder ziet u de knop met de " -"gerelateerde **Levering**:" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:141 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:81 msgid "" -"When opening the **Inventory** application, click on **# to do** to see the " -"list of your receipts to process." +"If you work with product variants, the quantity on hand will show you the " +"total quantity in stock for the product template, taking the different " +"variants into account." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:147 -msgid "In the list, click on the one related to the sale order:" -msgstr "Klik in de lijst op degene gerelateerd aan de verkooporder:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:153 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:85 msgid "" -"If the product is not in stock, the sale order will be listed as **Waiting**" -" on your dashboard." +"By default, the quantity on hand of the product form will show you the " +"number of products that are part of your warehouse view location, meaning " +"which are part of an internal type sub-location of this warehouse. It means " +"that if you have any product in a location that isn’t under the main " +"warehouse location, they won’t appear in the stock on hand stat button." msgstr "" -"Indien het product niet in stock is zal de verkooporder getoond worden als " -"**Wachtend** op uw dashboard." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:157 -msgid "Process the delivery" -msgstr "Verwerk de levering" +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:3 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:22 +msgid "Receive Products in Stock" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:167 -msgid "E-Commerce orders are processed the same way." -msgstr "E-Commerce orders worden op dezelfde manier verwerkt." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:170 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:24 msgid "" -"You can easily integrate your delivery orders with different delivery " -"methods. Please read the document " -":doc:`../../shipping/setup/delivery_method`." +"Once you have existing products, you can decide to create a receipt to enter" +" products from your supplier in stock. The process in order to do so is " +"described in the following print screens." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:175 -msgid "Advanced flows" -msgstr "Geavanceerde flows" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:177 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:34 msgid "" -"In this document, the flows that are explained are the most simple ones. " -"Odoo also suit for companies having advanced warehouse management." +"On the receipt document, you can select the quantity of the different " +"products you receive and the supplier from who you received them. When the " +"receipt is complete, you can hit *Validate* and the products will enter your" +" stock." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:180 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:42 msgid "" -"By default, only **receipts** and **deliveries** are configured but you can " -"activate the use of multi-locations and multi-warehouses to do **internal " -"transfers**." +"In case you have a receipt that is planned but shouldn’t be immediately " +"validated, you can create a *planned receipt* with a scheduled date in the " +"future. You can indicate the initial demand for each product, corresponding " +"to what has been ordered to your supplier. Once the document is filled in, " +"you can hit “Mark as to do” in order to consider it in your product " +"forecasts." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:184 -msgid "**Routes**: you can automate flows with push and pull rules" +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:56 +msgid "Receive Products in Stock from Purchase Orders" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:186 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:58 msgid "" -"**Multi-step** receipts and deliveries can be easily configured for each " -"warehouse" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:189 -msgid "" -"Much more: **Barcode scanning**, **serial numbers**, **lots**, **cross-" -"docking**, **dropshipping**, integration with a **third-party** shipper, " -"**putaway** and **removal** strategies.... All of it is possible with Odoo." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start.rst:3 -msgid "Getting Started" -msgstr "Aan de slag" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:3 -msgid "How to setup Odoo inventory?" -msgstr "Hoe Odoo voorraad op te zetten?" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:5 -msgid "" -"The Odoo Inventory application has an implementation guide that you should " -"follow to configure it. It's a step-by-step manual with links to the " -"different screens you need." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:9 -msgid "" -"Once you have installed the **Inventory** application, click on the top-" -"right progress bar to get access to the implementation guide." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:15 -msgid "The implementation guide helps you through the following steps:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:17 -msgid "Set up your warehouse" -msgstr "Zet uw magazijn op" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:19 -msgid "Import your vendors" -msgstr "Importeer uw fabrikanten" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:21 -msgid "Import your products" -msgstr "Importeer uw producten" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:23 -msgid "Set up the initial inventory" -msgstr "Zet de initiële voorraad op" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:25 -msgid "Configure your sales and purchase flows" -msgstr "Configureer uw verkoop in inkoop flows" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:27 -msgid "Set up replenishment mechanisms" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:29 -msgid "" -"Configure advanced features like package, traceability, routes and inventory" -" valuation." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:37 -msgid "" -"If you want to set up operations with barcode scanner in your warehouse, you" -" should install the **Barcode** application that adds features on top of the" -" inventory application. The barcode application will guide you to configure " -"and use your scanner optimally." +"If you have the *Purchase* application installed, receipts can be directly " +"created by validating a *request for quotation*. You will be able to find " +"the corresponding receipt directly on the *purchase order*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes.rst:3 @@ -5229,117 +4591,89 @@ msgid "Concepts" msgstr "Concepten" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:3 -msgid "How to organize a cross-dock in your warehouse?" +msgid "Organize a cross-dock in a warehouse" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:5 msgid "" -"Cross dock area is temporarily area where we are not storing any product " -"instead just managing place according to delivery for further customer. This" -" will save lot of time for inter warehouse transfer and storing process. We " -"are managing our products with docking area where product directly place " -"from supplier location and transfer this to gate pass for customer delivery." +"Cross-docking is the process of sending products that are received directly " +"to the customers, without making them enter the stock. The trucks are simply" +" unloaded in a *Cross-Dock* area in order to reorganize products and load " +"another truck." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:17 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:11 msgid "" -"For more information on how to organise your warehouse, read `What is cross " -"docking and is it for me? `_" +"For more information on how to organize your warehouse, read our blog: `What" +" is cross-docking and is it for me? `__" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:24 -msgid "Warehouse and routes" -msgstr "Magazijnen en routes" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:26 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:15 msgid "" -"In the **Inventory** module, open :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings" -" --> Location & Warehouse`, then in **Routes**, select **Advanced routing of" -" products using rules**, then click on **Apply**." +"In the *Inventory* app, open *Configuration > Settings* and activate the " +"*Multi-Step Routes*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:33 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:21 +msgid "Doing so will also enable the *Storage Locations* feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:23 msgid "" -"Open :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouse Management --> Warehouses`," -" then open the warehouse you want to cross-dock from and click on **Edit**." +"Now, both *Incoming* and *Outgoing* shipments should be configured to work " +"with 2 steps. To adapt the configuration, go to *Inventory > Configuration >" +" Warehouses* and edit your warehouse." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:28 +msgid "" +"This modification will lead to the creation of a *Cross-Docking* route that " +"can be found in *Inventory > Configuration > Routes*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:34 +msgid "Configure products with Cross-Dock Route" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:36 -msgid "In the **Warehouse Configuration** tab, select:" -msgstr "In het **Magazijn configuratie** tabblad selecteert u:" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:38 msgid "" -"**Incoming Shipments**: Unload in input location then go to stock (2 steps)" +"Create the product that uses the *Cross-Dock Route* and then, in the " +"inventory tab, select the routes *Buy* and *Cross-Dock*. Now, in the " +"purchase tab, specify the vendor to who you buy the product and set a price " +"for it." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:41 -msgid "**Outgoing Shipments**: Ship directly from stock (Ship only)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:43 -msgid "then click on **Save**." -msgstr "klik vervolgens op **Opslaan**." - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:48 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:44 msgid "" -"This steps has generated a cross-docking route that you can see in " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configurations --> Routes --> Routes`." +"Once done, create a sale order for the product and confirm it. Odoo will " +"automatically create two transfers which will be linked to the sale order. " +"The first one is the transfer from the *Input Location* to the *Output " +"Location*, corresponding to the move of the product in the *Cross-Dock* " +"area. The second one is the delivery order from the *Output Location* to " +"your *Customer Location. Both are in state *Waiting Another Operation* " +"because we still need to order the product to our supplier." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:52 -msgid "Cross Docking Route" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:54 msgid "" -"We will use the route **Buy** for first part of the flow and create a route " -"for the remaining part:" +"Now, go to the *Purchase* app. There, you will find the purchase order that " +"has been automatically triggered by the system. Validate it and receive the " +"products in the *Input Location*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:60 msgid "" -"Each of the procurement rule will now be configured. Cross Dock location is " -"created as an internal physical location." +"When the products have been received from the supplier, you can go back to " +"your initial sale order and validate the internal transfer from *Input* to " +"*Output*." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:67 -msgid ":menuselection:`Input --> Cross Dock`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:73 -msgid ":menuselection:`Cross Dock --> Output`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:79 -msgid ":menuselection:`Output --> Customer`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:82 -msgid "Product with cross dock" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:84 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:68 msgid "" -"We have created the Vegetable Fennel product and assigned the routes created" -" above as well as the **Buy** route." +"The delivery order is now ready to be processed and can be validated too." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:87 -msgid "" -"We have also specified a supplier and a minimum order rule which is needed " -"for replenishment of a stockable product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:95 -msgid ":doc:`use_routes`" -msgstr ":doc:`use_routes`" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:96 -msgid ":doc:`../../management/incoming/two_steps`" -msgstr ":doc:`../../management/incoming/two_steps`" - #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:3 msgid "How to do inter-warehouses transfers?" msgstr "" @@ -5366,7 +4700,6 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:26 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:9 msgid "Creating a new warehouse" msgstr "Nieuw magazijn aanmaken" @@ -5705,6 +5038,66 @@ msgstr "" msgid ":doc:`procurement_rule`" msgstr ":doc:`procurement_rule`" +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:3 +msgid "Taking stock from different warehouses" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When you plan to deliver a customer, you don’t know in advance if the " +"products will come from Warehouse A or Warehouse B. You may, in some cases, " +"need to take stock from different warehouses. With *Odoo*, you can configure" +" this by using the concept of virtual warehouses. Let us show you how to set" +" those virtual warehouses." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:8 +msgid "Set up virtual warehouses" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:10 +msgid "" +"Let’s say you have two warehouses: Warehouse A and Warehouse B. Create a new" +" warehouse, that will be a virtual one. It will allow you to take the stock " +"from A or B. To do so, go to your inventory app settings and enable the " +"multi-warehouses feature. Then, go to the warehouses menu and click on " +"create." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:16 +msgid "" +"The *Storage Location* feature will be automatically enabled. Good news, " +"because you will need it later in the process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:18 +msgid "" +"Now, you have to make sure that the main stock locations of warehouse A and " +"warehouse B are children locations of the main stock location of warehouse A" +" + B. Go to the locations menu, and edit the main location of your two " +"warehouses. Then, change their parent location to main location of warehouse" +" A+B." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:24 +msgid "Sell a product from the virtual warehouse" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:26 +msgid "" +"Let’s say you have two products, one stored in warehouse A and one stored in" +" warehouse B. Now, you can create a new quotation for one of each product. " +"Go to other information and choose Warehouse A+B in the shipping " +"information." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:31 +msgid "" +"Once you have done it, you can convert it to a sales order. Then, a delivery" +" order will be automatically generated, with a product reserved in warehouse" +" A and one in warehouse B." +msgstr "" + #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:3 msgid "How to use routes?" msgstr "Hoe routes te gebruiken?" @@ -5935,101 +5328,70 @@ msgid "Putaway & Removal Strategies" msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:3 -msgid "What is a putaway strategy?" +msgid "What is a Putaway Rule?" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:5 msgid "" "A good warehouse implementation takes care that products automatically move " -"to their appropriate destination location. Putaway is the process of taking " -"products off the receiving shipment and putting them into the most " -"appropriate location." +"to their appropriate destination location. To make that process easier, Odoo" +" uses *Putaway rules*. But what is a putaway rule? Putaway is the process of" +" taking products off the receiving shipments and directly putting them into " +"the most appropriate location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:7 msgid "" -"If for instance a warehouse contains volatile substances, it is important to" -" make sure that certain products are not stored close to each other because " -"of a potential chemical reaction." +"If, for example, a warehouse contains volatile substances, it is important " +"to make sure that certain products are not stored close to each other " +"because of a potential chemical reaction. That’s where putaway rules " +"intervene, to avoid storing products wrongly." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:17 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:12 msgid "" -"A putaway strategy follows the same principle as removal strategies but " -"affects the destination location. Putaway strategies are defined at the " -"location level (unlike removal strategies which are defined at the product " -"level)." +"In the *Inventory* app, go to *Configuration > Settings* and activate the " +"*Multi-Step Routes*. By doing so, the *Storage Locations* will be " +"automatically activated." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:18 +msgid "Setting up a Putaway Rule" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:20 msgid "" -"Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings` and check " -"option **Manage several location per warehouse & Advance routing of products" -" using rules**, then click on **Apply**." +"In some cases, like for a retail shop storing vegetables and fruits, we have" +" to store products in different locations to maintain product quality." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:33 -msgid "Setting up a strategy" -msgstr "Een strategie opzetten" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:35 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:22 msgid "" -"Let's take as an example a retail shop where we store vegetables and fruits." +"Let’s suppose there are one warehouse location *WH/Stock* and two sub-" +"locations *WH/Stock/Vegatable* and *WH/Stock/Fruits*." msgstr "" -"Laten we een voorbeeld nemen van een winkel waar we groenten en fruit " -"bewaren." -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:24 msgid "" -"We have to store this type of product in different locations to maintain " -"product quality." +"To manage those locations, we will create putaway rules. To do so, open the " +"*Inventory* app and go to *Configuration > Putaway Rules*. Then, click on " +"create and configure your first rule indicating the main location the " +"product will enter before being redirected to the right location." msgstr "" -"We moeten dit type van product in verschillende locaties opslaan om " -"productkwaliteit te onderhouden." -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:41 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:27 msgid "" -"Suppose there is one warehouse location **WH/Stock** and there is sub " -"location **WH/Stock/Vegetables** & **WH/Stock/Fruits**." +"The putaway rules can be defined either per product or per product category." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:44 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:32 msgid "" -"You can create a putaway strategy from :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Configuration --> Locations`. Open any location where you want to set a " -"putaway strategy, click on **Edit** and locate the option **Put Away " -"Strategy**." +"Now, if I purchase apples and carrots to my supplier, they will be grouped " +"in the same receipt but redirected to the right location automatically, " +"thanks to putaway rules. This information is available from *Inventory " +"Report*, under the reporting menu." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:52 -msgid "" -"Open the roll-down menu and click on **Create and Edit**. This will open a " -"form view of put away strategy on which you have to set a name for the " -"strategy, and set the method and fixed location for each category." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:59 -msgid "" -"When you have entered all the necessary information, click on **Save**." -msgstr "" -"Wanneer u alle nodige informatie heeft ingevuld klikt u op **Opslaan**." - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:61 -msgid "" -"Now, when you purchase products with those categories, they will " -"automatically be transferred to the correct location." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:64 -msgid "" -"To check current inventory, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory " -"Control --> Current Inventory`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:67 -msgid "There you can see current inventory by location." -msgstr "Daar kan u de huidige voorraad zien per locatie." - #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:3 msgid "What is a removal strategy (FIFO, LIFO, and FEFO)?" msgstr "" @@ -6334,888 +5696,9 @@ msgstr ":doc:`../../management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental`" msgid ":doc:`../../management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon`" msgstr ":doc:`../../management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon`" -#: ../../inventory/settings.rst:3 -msgid "Settings" -msgstr "Instellingen" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products.rst:3 -msgid "Products" -msgstr "Producten" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:3 -msgid "How to select the right replenishment strategy" -msgstr "Hoe de correcte bevoorrading strategie te kiezen" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:5 -msgid "" -"Minimum Stock rules and Make to Order have similar consequences but " -"different rules. They should be used depending on your manufacturing and " -"delivery strategies." -msgstr "" -"Minimale voorraadregels en Maak op Order hebben soortgelijke gevolgen maar " -"verschillende regels. Ze moeten worden gebruikt, afhankelijk van uw " -"productie- en levering- strategieën." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:15 -msgid "" -"Minimum Stock rules are used to ensure that you always have the minimum " -"amount of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or " -"answer to your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its" -" minimum the system will automatically generate a procurement order with the" -" quantity needed to reach the maximum stock level." -msgstr "" -"Minimum voorraadregels worden gebruikt om ervoor te zorgen dat u altijd het " -"minimale aantal producten op voorraad heeft om uw producten te kunnen " -"vervaardigen en / of te beantwoorden aan uw klantenbehoeften. Wanneer het " -"voorraadniveau van een product het minimum bereikt, zal het systeem " -"automatisch een inkooporder genereren met de hoeveelheid die nodig is om het" -" maximale voorraadniveau te bereiken." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:24 -msgid "" -"The Make to Order function will trigger a Purchase Order of the amount of " -"the Sales Order related to the product. The system will **not** check the " -"current stock. This means that a draft purchase order will be generated " -"regardless of the quantity on hand of the product." -msgstr "" -"Met de functie Maak op Order wordt een aankooporder geactiveerd dat gelijk " -"is aan het aantal bestelde producten. Het systeem zal de huidige voorraad **" -" niet ** controleren. Dit betekent dat een concept aankooporder wordt " -"gegenereerd, ongeacht de beschikbare hoeveelheid." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:35 -msgid "" -"The Minimum Stock Rules configuration is available through your Inventory " -"module. In the Inventory Control menu select \"Reordering Rule\" in the drop" -" down menu. There, click on \"Create\" to set minimum and maximum stock " -"values for a given product." -msgstr "" -"De Minimum voorraad regels configuratie is beschikbaar door de Voorraad " -"module. In het Voorraadbeheer menu selecteer \"Aanvulopdracht regels\" in " -"het drop down menu. Druk daar op \"Aanmaken\" om minimum en maximum stock " -"waarden in te geven voor een bepaald product." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:44 -msgid "" -"Show tooltips for \"minimum quantity\", \"maximum quantity\" and \"quantity " -"multiple\" fields" -msgstr "" -"Toon tooltips voor de velden *minimale hoeveelheid*, *maximale hoeveelheid* " -"en *meerdere hoeveelheden*" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:47 -msgid "" -"Then, click on your product to access the related product form and, on the " -"\"Inventory submenu\", do not forget to select a supplier." -msgstr "" -"Klik vervolgens op uw product om het gerelateerde productformulier en het " -"\"Voorraad submenu\" te zien, vergeet geen leverancier aan te duiden." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:54 -msgid "" -"Don't forget to select the right product type. A consumable can not be " -"stocked and will thus not be accounted for in the stock valuation." -msgstr "" -"Vergeet niet het juiste soort product te selecteren. Een verbruik product " -"kan niet gestockeerd worden en wordt dus niet gebruikt in de stock " -"berekening." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:60 -msgid "" -"The Make to Order configuration is available on your product form through " -"your :menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory control --> Products` (or any " -"other module where products are available)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:64 -msgid "On the product form, under Inventory, click on \"Make To Order\"." -msgstr "Klik in het product scherm onder Inventaris op \"Maak op Order\"." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:3 -msgid "How to use different units of measure?" -msgstr "Hoe verschillende maateenheden te gebruiken?" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:8 -msgid "" -"In some cases, handling products in different unit of measures is necessary." -" For example, if you buy products in a country where the metric system is of" -" application and sell them in a country where the imperial system is used, " -"you will need to convert the units." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:13 -msgid "" -"You can set up Odoo to work with different units of measure for one product." -msgstr "" -"U kan Odoo opzetten om te werken met meerdere maateenheden voor een product." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:19 -msgid "" -"In the **Inventory** application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`. In the **Products** section, select **Some products may be " -"sold/purchased in different units of measure (advanced)**, then click on " -"**Apply**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:27 -msgid "Setting up units on your products" -msgstr "Eenheden instellen op uw producten" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:29 -msgid "" -"In :menuselection:`Master Data --> Products`, open the product which you " -"would like to change the purchase/sale unit of measure, and click on " -"**Edit**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:32 -msgid "" -"In the **Unit of Measure** section, select the unit in which the product " -"will be sold and in which internal transfers will be done." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:35 -msgid "" -"In the **Purchase Unit of Measure** section, select the unit in which you " -"purchase the product. When you're done, click on **Save**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:42 -msgid "Click on the edit button |edit| to create new unit of measures." -msgstr "Klik op de wijzigen knop |edit| om nieuwe maateenheden aan te maken." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:46 -msgid "Transfer from one unit to another" -msgstr "Overplaatsen van één eenheid naar een andere" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:48 -msgid "" -"When doing inter-unit transfers, the rounding is automatically done by Odoo." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:51 -msgid "" -"The unit of measure can be changed throughout the whole process. The only " -"condition is that the unit of measure is part of the same category." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:54 -msgid "In this example, we are in the egg business :" -msgstr "In dit voorbeeld zitten we in de eieren markt:" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:56 -msgid "We buy eggs by trays (30 eggs)" -msgstr "We kopen eieren per schaal (30 eieren)" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:58 -msgid "We check all eggs individually when receiving it (quality control)" -msgstr "" -"We controleren alle eieren individueel wanneer we ze ontvangen " -"(kwaliteitscontrole)" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:60 -msgid "We sell eggs by the dozen to the customers" -msgstr "We verkopen eieren per dozijn aan de klanten" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:66 -msgid "" -"The **Sale price** is expressed in the **Product unit of measure**. The " -"**Cost price** is expressed in the **Purchase Unit of Measure**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:70 -msgid "" -"All internal transfers are expressed in the **Product Unit of Measure**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:74 -msgid "Procurement" -msgstr "Verwerving" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:76 -msgid "" -"When doing your procurement request, you can still change the unit of " -"measure." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:82 -msgid "The unit of measure can also be changed in the purchase order :" -msgstr "De maateenheid kan ook gewijzigd worden op de inkooporder:" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:90 -msgid "The quality control is done by unit." -msgstr "De kwaliteitscontrole is gedaan per eenheid." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:92 -msgid "" -"The basic unit of measure of our product is **Unit**. Therefore the quality " -"check is done by unit." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:99 -msgid "" -"The unit of measure can only be changed when the transfer status is " -"**Draft**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:103 -#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:74 -msgid "Delivery process" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:105 -msgid "" -"The eggs are sold by the dozen. You can choose the unit of measure on the " -"sale order document. When doing it, the price is automatically computed from" -" the unit to the dozen." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:112 -msgid "" -"In the delivery order, the initial demand is done in the sales order unit of" -" measure :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:118 -msgid "" -"But the transfer is done in the product unit of measure. Everything is " -"converted automatically :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:125 -msgid "" -"Create a link when the document is available - When should you use " -"packages, units of measure or kits?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:3 -msgid "When should you use packages, units of measure or kits?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:6 -msgid "Unit of measures" -msgstr "Maateenheden" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Units of measures are an indication about the unit used to handle a product." -" Products can be expressed in multiple units of measure at once." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:11 -msgid "" -"Activate this option if you are working with several ones in your warehouse." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:14 -msgid "" -"The purchase unit of measure might be different that the one you use in your" -" warehouse." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:17 -msgid "" -"The selling unit of measure is set on the sale order and can be different." -msgstr "" -"De maateenheid voor de verkoop is ingesteld op het verkooporder en kan " -"anders zijn." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:24 -msgid "" -"The conversion between the different units of measures is done " -"automatically. The only condition is that all the units have to be in the " -"same category (Unit, Weight, Volume, Length,...)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:29 -msgid "Packages" -msgstr "Verpakkingen" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:31 -msgid "" -"The package is the physical container in which you put one or several " -"product." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:38 -msgid "Packaging" -msgstr "Verpakking" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:40 -msgid "Packaging is the physical container that protects your product." -msgstr "Verpakking in de fysieke container die uw product beschermd." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:42 -msgid "" -"If you are selling computers, the packaging contains the computer with the " -"notice and the power plug." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:45 -msgid "In Odoo, packagings are just used for indicative purpose." -msgstr "In Odoo worden verpakkingen gebruikt voor indicatieve doeleinden." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:51 -msgid "" -"You can define on the **Packages** which **Packaging** it uses. But it is " -"only for indicative purpose." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:55 -msgid "When to use packages, packagings or unit of measures ?" -msgstr "Wilt u pakketten, verpakkingen of maateenheden gebruiken?" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:57 -msgid "" -"For example, you are sellings eggs. In your warehouse, you manage the eggs " -"individually. Lots of eggs are scrapped and you do it egg by egg. The **unit" -" of measure** is ``Unit(s)``." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:61 -msgid "" -"If you are selling eggs by the dozen, the selling **unit of measure** is the" -" ``Dozen``. You will set it on your sale order." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:64 -msgid "" -"The ``cardboard trays`` that contains the dozen of eggs is the " -"**packaging**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:66 -msgid "" -"When you are selling several trays, you might wrap all the trays into a " -"``box`` or in a ``plastic`` wrapping. It is the **package**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:70 -msgid ":doc:`../../overview/start/setup`" -msgstr ":doc:`../../overview/start/setup`" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:71 -msgid ":doc:`uom`" -msgstr ":doc:`uom`" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:3 -msgid "Using product variants" -msgstr "Product varianten gebruiken" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:5 -msgid "" -"Product variants are used to manage products having different variations, " -"like size, color, etc. It allows managing the product at the template level " -"(for all variations) and at the variant level (specific attributes)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:10 -msgid "" -"As an example, a company selling t-shirts may have the following product:" -msgstr "" -"Als een voorbeeld van een bedrijf dat t-shirts verkoopt kan het de volgende " -"producten hebben:" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:13 -msgid "B&C T-shirt" -msgstr "B&C T-shirt" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:15 -msgid "Sizes: S, M, L, XL, XXL" -msgstr "Groottes: S, M, L, XL, XXL" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:16 -msgid "Colors: Blue, Red, White, Black" -msgstr "Kleuren: Blauw, Rood, Wit, Zwart" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:18 -msgid "" -"In this example, **B&C T-Shirt** is called the product template and **B&C " -"T-Shirt, S, Blue** is a variant. Sizes and color are **attributes**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:22 -msgid "" -"The above example has a total of 20 different products (5 sizes x 4 colors)." -" Each one of these products has its own inventory, sales, etc." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:26 -msgid "Impact of variants" -msgstr "Impact van varianten" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:28 -msgid "" -"**Barcode**: the code and barcode is associated to a variant, not the " -"template. Every variant may have its own barcode / SKU." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:31 -msgid "" -"**Price**: every product variant has its own public price that is computed " -"based on the template price ($20) with an optional extra for every variant " -"(+$3 for color red). However, you can define pricelist rules that apply on " -"the template or the variant." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:36 -msgid "" -"**Inventory**: the inventory is managed by product variant. You don't own " -"t-shirts, you only own \"T-shirts, S, Red\", or \"T-Shirts, M, Blue\". For " -"information purpose, on the product template form, you get the inventory " -"that is the sum of every variant. (but the actual inventory is computed by " -"variant)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:42 -msgid "" -"**Picture**: the picture is related to the variant, every variation of a " -"product may have its own primary picture." -msgstr "" -"**Foto**: de foto is gerelateerd aan de variant, elke variatie van een " -"product heeft mogelijk zijn eigen primaire foto." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:45 -msgid "" -"**Other fields**: most of the other fields belongs to the product template. " -"If you update them, it updates automatically all the variants. (example: " -"Income Account, Taxes)" -msgstr "" -"**Andere velden**: de meeste andere velden behoren tot het productsjabloon. " -"Indien u ze update updaten automatisch alle varianten. (bijvoorbeeld: " -"inkomende rekening, belastingen)" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:50 -msgid "Should you use variants?" -msgstr "Zou u varianten moeten gebruiken?" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:53 -msgid "When should you use variants?" -msgstr "Wanneer moet u varianten gebruiken?" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:55 -msgid "Using variants has the following impacts:" -msgstr "Varianten gebruiken heeft de volgende gevolgen:" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:57 -msgid "" -"**eCommerce**: in your online shop, the customer will only see product " -"templates in the catalog page. Once the visitor click on such a product, he " -"will have options to choose amongst the variants (colors, sizes, …)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:62 -msgid "" -"**Manufacturing**: Using variants allows to define only one bill of material" -" for a product template and slight variations for some of the variants. " -"Example: instead of creating a Bill of Material for \"T-shirt, Red, S\", you" -" create a bill of material for \"T-shirt\" and add some lines that are " -"specific to the dimension S, and other lines specific to the color Red." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:69 -msgid "" -"**Pricing**: The default price of a product is computed using the price of " -"the product template and add the optional extra price on each dimension of " -"the variant. This way, variant prices are easier to maintain since you don't" -" have to set the price for every variant. However, it's possible to create " -"pricelist rules to fix price per variants too." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:77 -msgid "When should you avoid using variants?" -msgstr "Wanneer zou u varianten moeten vermijden?" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:79 -msgid "" -"Using variants may add a level of complexity on the way you use Odoo. You " -"should consider using variants only if you need it to reduce the complexity " -"of managing lots of products that are similars." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:83 -msgid "" -"As an example, importing your initial product catalog is more complex if you" -" use variants. You can't just import a list of products, you must import " -"product templates and all their related variations." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:87 -msgid "" -"In addition to that, you should also carefully select the dimensions that " -"you manage as separate product templates and those as variants. As an " -"example, a company having these products:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:91 -msgid "Quality: T-Shirts, Polos, Shirts" -msgstr "Kwaliteit: T-Shirts, Polo's, Shirts" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:93 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:105 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:110 -msgid "Color: Red, Blue" -msgstr "Kleur: Rood, Blauw" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:95 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:106 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:111 -msgid "Size: S, M, L, XL" -msgstr "Grootte: S, M, L, XL" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:97 -msgid "" -"In such a use case, you could create 1 template with three dimensions of " -"variants (Layout, T-Shirts, Polos). But, it's recommended to create two " -"different product templates as T-shirts may highly differ from polos or " -"shirts and customer expect to see these as two different products in the " -"e-Commerce:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:103 -msgid "Product Template: T-shirt" -msgstr "Productsjabloon: T-shirt" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:108 -msgid "Product Template: Polos" -msgstr "Productsjabloon: Polo's" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:117 -msgid "Activate the variant feature" -msgstr "Activeer de varianten optie" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:119 -msgid "" -"Before you can use product variants, you must first activate the product " -"variants in the settings. To do so, you must go to the Sales app. In the " -"menu :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`, locate the **Products " -"Variants** line, and tick the option **Products can have several " -"attributes**, then click on **Apply**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:129 -msgid "Creating products with variants" -msgstr "Producten aanmaken met varianten" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:131 -msgid "" -"Once you have activated the variant option, you can add variants to your " -"products. To do so, go to the Sales module, :menuselection:`Sales --> " -"Products`. It is also accessible from the Purchase and inventory modules." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:135 -msgid "Now, click on the product you wish to add variants to." -msgstr "Klik nu op het product als u er varianten aan wilt toevoegen." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:137 -msgid "" -"In the product page, a new tab called Variants has appeared. The number in " -"purple written on top is the number of variants this product currently has. " -"To add new variants, click on the tile. In the new window, click on " -"**Create**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:142 -msgid "" -"In **Attributes**, click on the rolldown menu and select the type of " -"variance you wish to add. If the variant does not yet exist, you can create " -"it on the fly by clicking on Create and edit…" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:149 -msgid "" -"In the Attributes window, the **Value** field is the description of the " -"attribute such as Green, Plastic or 32GB. The **Attribute** field is the " -"type of variant such as Color, Material or Memory." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:156 -msgid "" -"You can add a cost for the variant on the fly by adding it in the " -"**Attribute Price Extra** field, or choose to modify it later. Click on " -"**Save**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:160 -msgid "" -"You can also add a different barcode and internal reference to the variant." -msgstr "" -"U kan ook een verschillende barcode en interne referentie toevoegen aan de " -"variant." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:163 -msgid "" -"When you have entered all the specifications of the variant, click on " -"**Save**." -msgstr "" -"Wanneer u alle specificaties van de variant hebt ingesteld klikt u op " -"**Opslaan**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:167 -msgid "Managing Product Variants" -msgstr "Productvarianten beheren" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:172 -msgid "" -"The examples below are all based on this product template that has two " -"variant attributes :" -msgstr "" -"De onderstaande voorbeelden zijn allemaal gebaseerd op dit productsjabloon " -"dat twee variant attributen heeft:" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:175 -msgid "T-Shirt B&C" -msgstr "T-Shirt B&C" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:177 -msgid "Color: Red, Blue, White" -msgstr "Kleur: Rood, Blauw, Wit" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:179 -msgid "Size: S, M, L, XL, XXL" -msgstr "Grootte: S, M, L, XL, XXL" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:182 -msgid "Managing combination possibilities" -msgstr "Combinatie mogelijkheden beheren" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:184 -msgid "" -"By default, with the above product template, you get 15 different products " -"(3 colors, 5 sizes). If the XXL size only exists for red and blue t-shirts, " -"you can deactivate the white product variant." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:188 -msgid "" -"To do this, click on the **Variants** button, select the XXL, White T-shirt." -" From the product form, uncheck the **Active** box of the T-shirt White, " -"XXL." -msgstr "" -"Om dit te doen klikt u op de **Varianten** knop, selecteert u XXL, wit " -"t-shirt. Vanuit het product scherm vinkt u de optie **Actief** uit voor het " -"witte XXL t-shirt." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:197 -msgid "" -"That deactivating a product is different than having an inventory of 0." -msgstr "" -"Dat de-activering van een product anders is dan een voorraad van 0 te " -"hebben." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:200 -msgid "Setting a price per variant" -msgstr "Een prijs instellen per variant" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:202 -msgid "" -"You can add a cost over the main price for some of the variants of a " -"product." -msgstr "" -"U kan een kost toevoegen bovenop de standaard prijs voor sommige varianten " -"van een product." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:205 -msgid "" -"Once you have activated the variant option, you can add variants to your " -"products. To do so, go to the Sales module, open :menuselection:`Sales --> " -"Products` and click on the product you want to modify. Click on the " -"**Variant Prices** button to access the list of variant values." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:213 -msgid "" -"Click on the variant name you wish to add a value to, to make the 3 fields " -"editable. In the **Attribute Price Extra** field, add the cost of the " -"variant that will be added to the original price." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:220 -msgid "When you have entered all the extra values, click on **Save**." -msgstr "Wanneer u alle extra waardes heeft ingegeven klikt u op **Opslaan**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:226 -msgid "Accounting Memento: Details of Journal Entries" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:227 -msgid "Process Overview: From Billing to Payment Orders" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:3 -msgid "What is the difference between warehouses and locations?" -msgstr "Wat is het verschil tussen magazijnen en locaties?" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:5 -msgid "" -"In Odoo, a **Warehouse** is the actual building/place in which your items " -"are stocked. You can setup multiple warehouses and create moves between " -"warehouses." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:9 -msgid "" -"A **Location**, is a specific space within your warehouse. It can be " -"considered as a sublocation of your warehouse, as a shelf, a floor, an " -"aisle, etc. Therefore, a location is part of one warehouse only and it is " -"not possible to link one location to multiple warehouses. You can configure " -"as much locations as you need under one warehouse." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:15 -msgid "There are 3 types of locations:" -msgstr "Er zijn 3 soorten locaties:" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:17 -msgid "" -"The **Physical Locations** are internal locations that are part of the " -"warehouses for which you are the owner. They can be the loading and " -"unloading area of your warehouse, a shelf or a department, etc." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:21 -msgid "" -"The **Partner Locations** are spaces within a customer and/or vendor's " -"warehouse. They work the same way as Physical Locations with the only " -"difference being that you are not the owner of the warehouse." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:25 -msgid "" -"The **Virtual Locations** are places that do not exist, but in which " -"products can be placed when they are not physically in an inventory yet (or " -"anymore). They come in handy when you want to place lost products out of " -"your stock (in the **Inventory loss**), or when you want to take into " -"account products that are on their way to your warehouse (**Procurements**)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:31 -msgid "" -"In Odoo, locations are structured hierarchically. You can structure your " -"locations as a tree, dependent on a parent-child relationship. This gives " -"you more detailed levels of analysis of your stock operations and the " -"organization of your warehouses." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:37 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:44 -msgid ":doc:`warehouse_creation`" -msgstr ":doc:`warehouse_creation`" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:38 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:48 -msgid ":doc:`location_creation`" -msgstr ":doc:`location_creation`" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:3 -msgid "How to create a new location?" -msgstr "Hoe een nieuwe locatie aan te maken?" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:9 -msgid "Creating a new location" -msgstr "Een nieuwe locatie aanmaken" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:11 -msgid "" -"In order to be able to create new locations, you must allow the system to " -"manage multiple locations. In the **Inventory** module, open the menu " -":menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`. In the **Location & Warehouse**" -" section, tick the **Manage several locations per warehouse** box, then " -"click on **Apply**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:20 -msgid "" -"In the **Inventory** module, open :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Warehouse Management --> Locations` In the Locations window, click on " -"**Create**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:24 -msgid "" -"Type the name of the location in the **Location Name** field, and select the" -" **Parent Location** in the list. The parent location can be a physical, " -"partner or virtual location, and you can add as many sub-locations as needed" -" to a location." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:29 -msgid "" -"You can also fill in the **Additional Information** fields and add a note to" -" describe your location." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:35 -msgid "When you are finished, click on **Save**." -msgstr "Klik op **Opslaan** wanneer u klaar bent." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:38 -msgid "" -"A warehouse also corresponds to a location. As the locations are " -"hierarchical, Odoo will create the parent location of the warehouse, " -"containing all the sublocations in it." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:43 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:47 -msgid ":doc:`difference_warehouse_location`" -msgstr ":doc:`difference_warehouse_location`" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:3 -msgid "How to create a new warehouse?" -msgstr "Hoe een nieuw magazijn aan te maken?" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:11 -msgid "" -"In order to be able to create a new warehouse, you must allow the system to " -"manage multiple locations. In the **Inventory** module, open the menu " -":menuselection:`Settings --> Configuration`. In the **Location & Warehouse**" -" section, tick the **Manage several locations per warehouse** box, then " -"click on **apply**." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:20 -msgid "" -"Open the menu :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouse Management --> " -"Warehouses`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:22 -msgid "" -"In the warehouses screen, click on **Create**. A new screen appears, with 3 " -"fields :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:25 -msgid "In **Warehouse Name**, insert the full name of the warehouse." -msgstr "In **Magazijn naam** geeft u de volledige naam van het magazijn in." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:27 -msgid "" -"In the **Short Name** field, insert a 5-characters code for your warehouse. " -"Keep in mind that this code is the one that will appear in the lists, so " -"make sure you choose a name that is easy to understand and easy to enter." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:32 -msgid "" -"In the **Address** field, you can select an existing company or create one " -"on-the-go. Therefore, the address of your warehouse will be the same as the " -"one of the company you selected. You can also leave this field empty and " -"edit it afterwards." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:40 -msgid "Click on **Save** to finish configuring your new warehouse." -msgstr "" -"Klik op **Opslaan** om de configuratie van uw nieuwe magazijn te bewaren." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:43 -msgid "" -"When you create a warehouse, the system will create the necessary picking " -"types and main child locations for this main location in the background." -msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/shipping.rst:3 +msgid "Shipping" +msgstr "Afleveradres" #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation.rst:3 msgid "Shipping Operations" @@ -7434,6 +5917,11 @@ msgid "" "you want to integrate :" msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:27 +#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:26 +msgid "Then click on **Apply**." +msgstr "Klik vervolgens op **Toepassen**." + #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:30 #: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:34 #: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:33 @@ -7505,11 +5993,6 @@ msgid "" "data**." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:68 -#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:90 -msgid "Product configuration" -msgstr "Product configuratie" - #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:70 #: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:92 msgid "" @@ -7727,6 +6210,10 @@ msgid "" ":doc:`third_party_shipper`" msgstr "" +#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:74 +msgid "Delivery process" +msgstr "" + #: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:82 msgid "" "You can now choose the **Delivery Method** on your sale order. If you want " diff --git a/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po index cdf024540..454bc833a 100644 --- a/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po +++ b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po @@ -4,18 +4,19 @@ # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # # Translators: +# Gunther Clauwaert , 2019 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 # Erwin van der Ploeg , 2019 # Yenthe Van Ginneken , 2019 -# Gunther Clauwaert , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: Gunther Clauwaert , 2019\n" +"Last-Translator: Yenthe Van Ginneken , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Dutch (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/nl/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -27,27 +28,31 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Internet of Things (IoT)" msgstr "Internet of Things (IoT)" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:3 +#: ../../iot/config.rst:3 +msgid "Configuration" +msgstr "Configuratie" + +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:3 msgid "Connect an IoT Box to your database" msgstr "Verbind een IoT box aan uw databank" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:5 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:5 msgid "Install the Internet of Things (IoT) App on your Odoo Database." msgstr "Installeer de Internet of Things (IoT) App in uw Odoo Databank." -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:10 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:10 msgid "Go in the IoT App and click on Connect on the IoT Boxes page." msgstr "Ga naar de IoT App en klik op Connecteer met de IoT Boxes pagina." -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:15 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:15 msgid "Follow the steps to connect your IoT Box." msgstr "Volg de stappen om uw IoT Box te connecteren" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:21 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:21 msgid "Ethernet Connection" msgstr "Ethernet Verbinding" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:23 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:23 msgid "" "Connect to the IoT Box all the devices that have to be connected with cables" " (ethernet, usb devices, etc.)." @@ -55,27 +60,27 @@ msgstr "" "Connecteer aan de IoT Box alle apparaten die moeten worden verbonden met " "kabels (ethernet, usb-apparaten, enz.)." -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:26 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:26 msgid "Power on the IoT Box." msgstr "Schakel de IoT box in." -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:28 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:28 msgid "Then click on the Scan button." msgstr "Klik vervolgens op de Scan knop." -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:34 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:34 msgid "WiFi Connection" msgstr "WiFi Verbinding" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:36 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:36 msgid "Power on the IoT Box" msgstr "Schakel de IoT box in." -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:38 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:38 msgid "Copy the token" msgstr "Kopieer de token" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:43 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:43 msgid "" "Connect to the IoT Box WiFi Network (make sure there is no ethernet cable " "plugged in your computer)." @@ -83,7 +88,7 @@ msgstr "" "Maak verbinding met het IoT Box WiFi-netwerk (zorg ervoor dat er geen " "ethernetkabel op uw computer is aangesloten)." -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:49 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:49 msgid "" "You will be redirected to the IoT Box Homepage (if it doesn't work, connect " "to the IP address of the box). Give a name to your IoT Box (not required) " @@ -93,7 +98,7 @@ msgstr "" " verbinden met het IP-adres van de box). Geef een naam aan uw IoT-box (niet " "verplicht) en gebruik het token, klik vervolgens op Volgende." -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:57 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:57 msgid "" "If you are on Runbot, do not forget to add the -all or -base in the token " "(e.g. this token **http://375228-saas-11-5-iot-" @@ -105,7 +110,7 @@ msgstr "" "f3f920.runbot16.odoo.com\\|4957098401** moet worden " "**http://375228-saas-11-5-iot-f3f920-all.runbot16.odoo.com\\|4957098401**)." -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:63 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:63 msgid "" "Choose the WiFi network you want to connect with (enter the password if " "there is one) and click on Submit. Wait a few seconds before being " @@ -115,36 +120,36 @@ msgstr "" "in als dit er is) en klik op Verzenden. Wacht een paar seconden voordat u " "wordt omgeleid naar uw database." -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:70 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:70 msgid "You should now see the IoT Box." msgstr "Je zou nu de IoT Box moeten zien." -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:76 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:76 msgid "IoT Box Schema" msgstr "IoT Box Schema" -#: ../../iot/flash_sdcard.rst:3 +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:3 msgid "Flashing your SD Card" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/flash_sdcard.rst:5 +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:5 msgid "" "In some case, you may need to reflash your IoT Box’s SD Card to benefit from" " our latest updates." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/flash_sdcard.rst:9 +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:9 msgid "Updating your SD Card with Etcher" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/flash_sdcard.rst:11 +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:11 msgid "" "Go to Balena’s website and download `Etcher `__, " "It’s a free and open-source utility used for burning image files. Install " "and launch it." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/flash_sdcard.rst:15 +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:15 msgid "" "Now, download the latest image `here " "`__, and extract it from the " @@ -152,86 +157,86 @@ msgid "" "flash (where your SD Card is) and click on *Flash*!." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/flash_sdcard.rst:19 +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:19 msgid "" "Now, your image will be automatically updated. You just have to wait 5 " "minutes for it to finish." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/iot_notfound.rst:3 +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:3 msgid "IoT Box not found" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/iot_notfound.rst:5 +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:5 msgid "" "When using your IoT Box, a common issue you might encounter is that your box" " is not found on your database. Fortunately, there are a few easy steps you " "can follow to find your IoT box." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/iot_notfound.rst:10 +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:10 msgid "HTTPS Issues" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/iot_notfound.rst:12 +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:12 msgid "Your IoT Box is not found? You probably have https issues!" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/iot_notfound.rst:14 +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:14 msgid "" "To check it, go to your database and verify if your database address starts " "with an https (like https://www.odoo.com). If this is the case, then you may" " have problems with your IoT Box image. It should be version 18.12 or later." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/iot_notfound.rst:19 +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:19 msgid "" "If your IoT Box image is from an earlier version, then you will have to " "reflash the SD card of your IoT Box to update the image (the latest image " "can be found `here `__)." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/iot_notfound.rst:23 +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:23 msgid "" "You can find the documentation about SD card flashing here (`here " "`__)." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:3 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:3 msgid "Use the IoT Box for the PoS" msgstr "Gebruik de IoT Box voor de Kassa" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:9 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:9 msgid "Prerequisites" msgstr "Vereisten" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:11 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:11 msgid "Before starting, make sure you have the following:" msgstr "Controleer voordat u begint of u over het volgende beschikt:" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:13 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:13 msgid "An IoT Box" msgstr "Een IoT Box" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:15 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:15 msgid "A 2A Power adapter with pi 3 b+ 2.5 A" msgstr "Een 2A Voedingsadapter met pi 3 b+ 2.5 A" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:17 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:17 msgid "A computer or tablet with an up-to-date web browser" msgstr "Een computer of tablet met een geüpdatet webbrowser" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:19 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:19 msgid "" "A running SaaS or Odoo instance with the Point of Sale and IoT apps " "installed" msgstr "Een functionerende SaaS of Odoo instantie met de Kassa geïnstalleerd" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:22 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:22 msgid "A local network setup with DHCP (this is the default setting)" msgstr "Een lokale netwerk opzet met DHCP (dit is de standaard instelling)" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:24 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:24 msgid "" "An Epson USB TM-T20 Printer or another ESC/POS compatible printer " "(officially supported printers are listed at the `POS Hardware page " @@ -241,24 +246,24 @@ msgstr "" "(Officieel ondersteunde hardware is opgelijst op `de Kassa Hardware pagina " "`__)" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:28 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:28 msgid "A Honeywell Eclipse USB Barcode Scanner or another compatible scanner" msgstr "" "Een Honeywell Eclipse USB Barcode scanner of een ander compatibel apparaat" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:30 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:30 msgid "An Epson compatible cash drawer" msgstr "Een Epson compatibele kassa lade" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:32 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:32 msgid "An RJ45 Ethernet Cable (optional, WiFi is built in)" msgstr "Een RJ45 Ethernet kabel (optioneel, WiFi is ingebouwd)" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:35 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:35 msgid "Set Up" msgstr "Instellen" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:37 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:37 msgid "" "To connect hardware to the PoS, the first step is to connect an IoT Box to " "your database. For this, follow this `documentation " @@ -268,11 +273,11 @@ msgstr "" " te sluiten op uw database. Volg hiervoor deze `documentatie " "'`__." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:44 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:44 msgid "Then, you have to connect the peripheral devices to your IoT Box." msgstr "Vervolgens moet u de randapparatuur op uw IoT Box aansluiten." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:46 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:46 msgid "" "Officially supported hardware is listed on `the POS Hardware page " "`__, but other hardware" @@ -282,13 +287,13 @@ msgstr "" "`_, maar andere " "hardware werkt mogelijk ook." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:50 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:50 msgid "**Printer**: Connect an ESC/POS printer to a USB port and power it on." msgstr "" "**Printer**: Connecteer een ECS/Kassa printer met een USB poort en zet deze " "aan." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:53 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:53 msgid "" "**Cash drawer**: The cash drawer should be connected to the printer with an " "RJ25 cable." @@ -296,7 +301,7 @@ msgstr "" "**Kassalade**: De kassalade moet geconnecteerd zijn met de printer via een " "RJ25 kabel." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:56 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:56 msgid "" "**Barcode scanner**: Connect your barcode scanner. In order for your barcode" " scanner to be compatible it must behave as a keyboard and must be " @@ -310,11 +315,11 @@ msgstr "" "een enter karakter (toetscode 28). Dit is normaal gezien de normale " "configuratie van uw barcode scanner." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:62 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:62 msgid "**Scale**: Connect your scale and power it on." msgstr "**Weegschaal**: Connecteer uw weegschaal en zet ze aan." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:64 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:64 msgid "" "**Ethernet**: If you do not wish to use Wi-Fi, plug in the Ethernet cable. " "Make sure this will connect the IoT Box to the same network as your POS " @@ -324,7 +329,7 @@ msgstr "" "Verzeker u van dat dit de IoT Box connecteert met hetzelfde netwerk als uw " "Kassa." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:68 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:68 msgid "" "**Wi-Fi**: The current version of the IoT Box has Wi-Fi built in. Make sure " "not to plug in an Ethernet cable when booting, because all Wi-Fi " @@ -336,7 +341,7 @@ msgstr "" "Wi-Fi-functionaliteit zal worden omzeild wanneer een bekabelde " "netwerkverbinding beschikbaar is bij het opstarten." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:73 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:73 msgid "" "Once it's done, you can connect the IoT Box to your PoS. For this, go in " "Point of Sale > Configuration > PoS, tick the box \"IoT Box\" and select the" @@ -347,19 +352,19 @@ msgstr "" "vakje \"IoT Box\" aan en selecteert u de IoT Box waarmee u verbinding wilt " "maken. Sla de wijzigingen op." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:77 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:77 msgid "Set up is done, you can launch a new PoS Session." msgstr "De installatie is voltooid, u kunt een nieuwe Kassa-sessie starten." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:80 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:80 msgid "Troubleshoot" msgstr "Troubleshoot" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:83 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:83 msgid "The PoS cannot connect to the IoT Box" msgstr "De PoS kan niet connecteren met de IoT Box" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:85 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:85 msgid "" "The easiest way to make sure the IoT Box is properly set-up is to turn it on" " with the printer plugged in as it will print a receipt indicating any error" @@ -372,7 +377,7 @@ msgstr "" "foutmelding op wordt geprint of het IP adres van de IoT Box indien alles in " "orde is. Controleer de volgende stappen als er geen ticket wordt geprint:" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:91 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:91 msgid "" "Make sure the IoT Box is powered on, indicated by a brightly lit red status " "LED." @@ -380,7 +385,7 @@ msgstr "" "Verzeker u ervan dat de IoT Box van stroom voorzien is, dit is aangegeven " "als de LED een heldere rode kleur uitstraalt." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:94 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:94 msgid "" "Make sure the IoT Box is ready, this is indicated by a brightly lit green " "status LED just next to the red power status LED. The IoT Box should be " @@ -390,7 +395,7 @@ msgstr "" " groene status LED net naast de rode status LED. De IoT Box zou klaar moeten" " zijn ~2 minuten nadat deze is opgestart." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:98 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:98 msgid "" "Make sure the IoT Box is connected to the same network as your POS device. " "Both the device and the IoT Box should be visible in the list of connected " @@ -400,7 +405,7 @@ msgstr "" " uw Kassa. Beide het toestel en de IoT Box moeten zichtbaar zijn in de " "lijst van verbonden toestellen op uw netwerk router." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:102 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:102 msgid "" "If you specified the IoT Box's IP address in the configuration, make sure it" " corresponds to the ip address printed on the IoT Box's status receipt." @@ -409,11 +414,11 @@ msgstr "" "verzekeren dat deze correspondeert met de informatie op het geprinte IoT Box" " status ticket." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:106 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:106 msgid "Make sure that the POS is not loaded over HTTPS." msgstr "Verzeker u er van dat de POS niet over HTTPS laad." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:108 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:108 msgid "" "A bug in Firefox's HTTP implementation might prevent the autodiscovery from " "working reliably. You could also manually set up the IoT Box's IP address in" @@ -423,11 +428,11 @@ msgstr "" "automatische ontdekking. Wanneer u Firefox gebruikt moet u manueel de IoT " "Box zijn IP adres ingeven in de Kassa configuratie." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:113 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:113 msgid "The Barcode Scanner is not working" msgstr "De Barcode Scanner werkt niet" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:115 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:115 msgid "" "The barcode scanner must be configured in US QWERTY and emit an Enter after " "each barcode. This is the default configuration of most barcode readers. " @@ -437,7 +442,7 @@ msgstr "" "toevoegen achter de barcode. Dit is de standaard configuratie voor de meeste" " barcode lezers. Kijk naar de barcode documentatie voor meer informatie." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:120 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:120 msgid "" "The IoT Box needs a 2A power supply to work with some barcode scanners. If " "you are not using the provided power supply, make sure the one you use has " @@ -447,7 +452,7 @@ msgstr "" "scanners. Zorg ervoor dat de voeding die u gebruikt genoeg kracht heeft " "indien u niet de meegeleverde voeding gebruikt." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:124 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:124 msgid "" "Some barcode scanners will need more than 2A and will not work, or will work" " unreliably, even with the provided power supply. In those case you can plug" @@ -457,7 +462,7 @@ msgstr "" "onbetrouwbaar werken, zelfs met de meegeleverde voeding. In die gevallen kan" " u een barcode scanner inpluggen in een zelfvoorzienende USB hub." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:129 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:129 msgid "" "Some poorly built barcode scanners do not advertise themselves as barcode " "scanners but as a usb keyboard instead, and will not be recognized by the " @@ -467,11 +472,11 @@ msgstr "" "scanners maar als usb toetsenborden en zullen niet herkend worden door de " "IoT Box." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:134 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:134 msgid "The Barcode Scanner is not working reliably" msgstr "De Barcode Scanner werkt niet betrouwbaar" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:136 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:136 msgid "" "Make sure that no more than one device with 'Scan via Proxy'/'Barcode " "Scanner' enabled are connected to the IoT Box at the same time." @@ -480,11 +485,11 @@ msgstr "" "'Scan via Proxy'/'Barcode Scanner' is ingeschakeld en geconnecteerd met de " "IoT Box ." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:140 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:140 msgid "Printing the receipt takes too much time" msgstr "Het ticket printen duurt te lang" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:142 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:142 msgid "" "A small delay before the first print is expected, as the IoT Box will do " "some preprocessing to speed up the next printings. If you suffer delays " @@ -496,11 +501,11 @@ msgstr "" "versnellen. Als u hierna nog vertragingen heeft bij het printen is dit " "mogelijk door een slechte netwerkconnectie tussen de Kassa en de IoT Box." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:148 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:148 msgid "Some characters are not correctly printed on the receipt" msgstr "Sommige karakters zijn niet correct afgedrukt op het ticket" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:150 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:150 msgid "" "The IoT Box does not support all languages and characters. It currently " "supports Latin and Cyrillic based scripts, with basic Japanese support." @@ -509,11 +514,11 @@ msgstr "" "momenteel Latin en Cyrillic gebaseerde scripts, met basis Japanse " "ondersteuning." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:155 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:155 msgid "The printer is offline" msgstr "De printer is offline" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:157 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:157 msgid "" "Make sure the printer is connected, powered, has enough paper and has its " "lid closed, and is not reporting an error. If the error persists, please " @@ -523,14 +528,385 @@ msgstr "" " dat het deksel gesloten is en dat de printer geen fouten meld. Gelieve " "support te contacteren als deze fout zich blijft voordoen." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:162 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:162 msgid "The cashdrawer does not open" msgstr "De kassalade opent niet" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:164 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:164 msgid "" "The cashdrawer should be connected to the printer and should be activated in" " the POS configuration." msgstr "" "De kassalade moet verbonden zijn met de printer en moet geactiveerd worden " "in de POS configuratie." + +#: ../../iot/devices.rst:3 +msgid "Devices" +msgstr "Apparaten" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Camera" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When using your *IoT Box* in Odoo, you could need to use a camera. As it can" +" be done in a few steps, this device is really easy to configure. Then, you " +"can use it in your manufacturing process and link it to a control point. " +"Doing so will allow you to take pictures when you reach the chosen quality " +"control point." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:12 ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:13 +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:11 +msgid "Connection" +msgstr "Connectie" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:14 +msgid "" +"To connect the camera to the *IoT Box*, simply combine the two by cable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:18 +msgid "In some cases, a serial to USB adapter could be needed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:20 +msgid "" +"If your camera is a `*supported one* `__, there is no need to set up anything as it will be detected as " +"soon as it is connected." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:27 +msgid "" +"In some cases, you could need to restart the box and download your camera’s " +"drivers from the box. To do so, go to your *IoT Box Home Page* and click on " +"*drivers list*. Then, click on load drivers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:35 +msgid "Link a Camera to a Quality Control Point" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:38 ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:42 +msgid "With the Manufacturing app" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:40 +msgid "" +"In your *Quality app*, you can setup the device on a *Quality Control " +"Point*. Go to the *Control Points* menu, under *Quality Control* and open " +"the control point you want to link with the camera." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:44 +msgid "" +"Now, you can edit the control point and select the device from the dropdown " +"list. Now, hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:50 +msgid "" +"Then, your camera can be used with the picked *Control Point*. During the " +"manufacturing process, reaching the *Quality Control Point* you chose before" +" will allow you to take a picture." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Footswitch" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When working, it is always better to have your two hands available. Using " +"Odoo’s *IoT Box* and a footswitch will allow it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:8 +msgid "" +"In fact, you will be able to go from one screen to another by using your " +"foot and the footswitch. Really convenient, it can be configured in a few " +"steps." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Connecting the footswitch to the *IoT Box* is easy, you just have to combine" +" the two by cable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:19 +msgid "In some cases, a serial to USB adapter may be needed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:21 +msgid "" +"If your footswitch is a `supported one `__, there is no need to set up anything since it will be " +"automatically detected when connected." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:28 +msgid "" +"If it is not a supported one, you may need to restart the box and download " +"your footswitch’s drivers from the box. To do so, go to the *IoT Box Home " +"Page* and click on *drivers list*. Then, click on load drivers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:37 +msgid "Link a Footswitch to a Workcenter" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:39 +msgid "" +"To link the footswitch to an action, it needs to be configured on a " +"workcenter. Go to the workcenter you want to use the footswitch in and add " +"the device in the *IoT Triggers* tab. Then, you can link it to an action and" +" also add a key to trigger it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:47 +msgid "" +"Note that the one that is first in the list will be chosen. So, the order " +"matters! In the picture above, using the footswitch will, for example, " +"automatically skip the current part of the process you work on." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:52 +msgid "" +"When you are on the work order screen, a status button indicates if you are " +"correctly connected to the footswitch." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Measurement Tool" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:5 +msgid "" +"With Odoo’s *IoT Box*, it is possible to connect measurement tools to your " +"database. Find the list of supported devices here: `Supported devices " +"`__,." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:10 +msgid "Connect in USB" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:12 +msgid "" +"To add a device connected by USB, just plug the USB cable in the *IoT Box*, " +"restart the Box and the device should appear in your Odoo database." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:19 +msgid "" +"If the device is not found, make sure the drivers have well been loaded on " +"your IoT Box. For this, connect to the *IoT Box Homepage* and click on load " +"drivers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:27 +msgid "Connect in Bluetooth" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:29 +msgid "" +"Activate the Bluetooth on your device (see your device manual for further " +"explanation) and the IoT Box will automatically try to connect to the " +"device." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:33 +msgid "Here is an example of what it should look like:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:39 +msgid "Link a measurement tool to a quality control point" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:44 +msgid "" +"In your *Quality app*, you can setup a device on your *Quality Control " +"Points*. To do so, go to the *Control Points* menu, under *Quality Control* " +"and open the control point to which you want to assign a measurement tool." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:49 +msgid "" +"Now, you can edit the control point and choose the device from the dropdown " +"list. Then, hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:55 +msgid "" +"Now, your measurement tool is linked to the chosen *Control Point*. The " +"value, which needs to be changed manually, will be automatically updated " +"while the tool is being used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Printer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When using your *IoT Box* in Odoo, you could need to use a printer. Doing so" +" is easy and convenient as it can be done in a few steps. Then, you can use " +"it to print receipts, orders or even reports in different Odoo apps." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:13 +msgid "" +"To connect the printer to the *IoT Box*, you just have to combine the two by" +" cable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:17 +msgid "Sometimes, a serial to USB adapter may be needed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:19 +msgid "" +"If your printer is a `supported one `__, there is no need to set up anything because it will be " +"automatically detected as soon as it is connected." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:24 +msgid "The printer can take up to two minutes to appear in your devices list." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:29 +msgid "" +"In some cases, you may need to restart the box and download your printer’s " +"drivers from the box. To do so, go to the *IoT Box Home Page* and click on " +"*drivers list*. Then, click on load drivers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:37 +msgid "Link the Printer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:40 +msgid "To Work Orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:42 +msgid "" +"You can link *Work Orders* to printers via a *Quality Control Point* to " +"print labels for manufactured products." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:45 +msgid "" +"To do so, you need to create a *Quality Control Point* from the *Quality* " +"app. Then, you can select the correct manufacturing operation and the work " +"order operation. In type, choose *Print Label* and hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Now, each time you reach the quality control point for the chosen product, a" +" *Print Label* button will appear." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:60 +msgid "To Reports" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:62 +msgid "" +"You can also link a type of report to a certain printer. In the *IoT* app, " +"go to the *Devices* menu and select the printer you want to set up." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:69 +msgid "Now, go to the *Printer Reports* tab." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:74 +msgid "" +"Hit edit and then, click on *Add a line*. In the window that shows up, check" +" all the types of reports that should be linked to this printer. Click on " +"select and save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:81 +msgid "" +"Now, each time you click on *Print* in the control panel, instead of " +"downloading a PDF, it will send it to the selected printer and automatically" +" print it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:86 +msgid "Print Receipts from the PoS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:88 +msgid "" +"You can link a printer to your *Point of Sale* app so you can print receipts" +" directly from your *PoS*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:91 +msgid "" +"Doing so is really easy. Go to your *Point of Sale* app and open your *PoS* " +"settings, under *Configuration*. There, click on *Edit* and check the *IoT " +"Box* feature. Then, enable the *Receipt Printer*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:98 +msgid "" +"Now, on your *PoS* view, you will be able to print different kinds of " +"tickets: **receipts**, **sale details** and **bills**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:101 +msgid "" +"For the receipt, it will be printed once the order is validated. The process" +" is automated when you enable the feature in your *PoS*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:104 +msgid "" +"Sales details can be printed by clicking on the printer icon on the navbar " +"at the top of the *PoS*. It will print the details of the sales of the " +"current day." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:111 +msgid "" +"As for the bill, it is only available in restaurant mode. In your restaurant" +" settings, activate bills and a *Bill* button will appear in the left panel." +" Click on it and it will print the bill." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:119 +msgid "Print Orders in the kitchen" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:121 +msgid "In restaurant mode, you can send order tickets to the kitchen." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:123 +msgid "" +"To do so, go to the *PoS* app and open your *PoS* settings. Then, tick " +"*Order Printer*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:129 +msgid "" +"Now, go to the *Printers* menu. Hit create and select the *IoT Box* with all" +" the categories of product that should be printed in the *Printer Product " +"Categories* field." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:136 +msgid "" +"In the *PoS*, when you add or remove a product from one of the selected " +"categories, the button *Order* will be green. If you click on it, a ticket " +"will be printed." +msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po index 266444e04..b547d9905 100644 --- a/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po +++ b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Gunther Clauwaert , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Dutch (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/nl/)\n" @@ -767,60 +767,47 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:17 msgid "" -"You can now define subcontractors contacts. When you purchase or receive " -"products from a contact of type subcontractor, the correct stock moves are " -"created to represent the subcontracting of the production." +"You can now define subcontracted *Bill of Materials*. Therefore, you need to" +" go to *Manufacturing > Master Data > Bill of Materials* and hit *Create*. " +"In this *BoM*, list the components which will be used by the subcontractor " +"to manufacture the subcontracted finished product. Specify that the *BoM* " +"type is *Subcontracting*." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:25 -msgid "" -"You can set the subcontractor as a vendor in case you plan to buy him the " -"subcontracted products via purchase orders." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:28 -msgid "" -"The next step is to create a *Bill of Material* of type *subcontracted*. In " -"this *BoM*, list the components you need to supply to the subcontractor." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:35 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:22 msgid "You can also define subcontractors on the BoM." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:37 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:24 msgid "If no subcontractor is set, the BoM can be used by any subcontractor" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:39 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:26 msgid "If some are set, the BoM can only be used for those subcontractors" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:45 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:32 msgid "Receive or buy a subcontracted product" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:47 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:34 msgid "You have two options to trigger the subcontracting of a product:" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:50 -msgid "**Option A**: You can buy the subcontracted product from your" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:36 +msgid "" +"**Option A**: You can buy the subcontracted product from your subcontractor" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:50 -msgid "subcontractor" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:52 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:38 msgid "**Option B**: You can directly receive the subcontracted product" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:54 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:40 msgid "Let’s start with option A (option B is just a simpler version of it)." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:56 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:42 msgid "" "Create a new purchase order. The vendor must be a subcontractor. The unit " "price should be the cost you are paying to the subcontractor for the " @@ -828,34 +815,34 @@ msgid "" "subcontracted product)." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:64 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:50 msgid "" "The validation of the purchase order automatically creates the receipt. " "Whenever you receive the product, you can validate the receipt. The " "following stock moves are created:" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:68 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:54 msgid "For the components" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:70 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:56 msgid "From Subcontracting To Production" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:72 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:58 msgid "For the subcontracted product" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:74 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:60 msgid "From Production to Subcontracting" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:76 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:62 msgid "From Subcontracting to Stock" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:78 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:64 msgid "" "The *Subcontracting Location* represents the place where the products are at" " your subcontractor’s warehouse. It is configured as an internal location, " @@ -863,35 +850,35 @@ msgid "" "stock." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:83 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:69 msgid "" "For option B, you can simply create the receipt manually with a partner of " "type subcontractor defined on it." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:87 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:73 msgid "Resupply the subcontractor with the components" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:89 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:75 msgid "" "There are 3 ways to manage the resupply of your subcontractor with the " "components:" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:94 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:80 msgid "**Manually**: You create a delivery order in which you set the" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:93 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:79 msgid "subcontractor as a partner and you choose the components to deliver." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:103 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:89 msgid "**With reordering rules**: You can define a *reordering rule*" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:100 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:86 msgid "" "on the *Subcontracting location* to ensure that they are always enough " "components sent to your subcontractors. When the reordering rule is " @@ -899,11 +886,11 @@ msgid "" "created." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:111 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:97 msgid "**On order**: You can also deliver the components to your" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:109 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:95 msgid "" "subcontractors each time you order a subcontracted product. For this, you " "need to tick the route *Resupply Subcontractor on Order* on the wanted " @@ -1062,73 +1049,64 @@ msgid "" "colors depending on the situation:" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:90 -msgid "**Green**: quantity of products which should be replenished to" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:89 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:88 msgid "" -"reach the expected safety stock considering the demand forecast and the " -"indirect demand forecast." +"**Green**: quantity of products which should be replenished to reach the " +"expected safety stock considering the demand forecast and the indirect " +"demand forecast." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:93 -msgid "**Grey**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:90 +msgid "" +"**Grey**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity " +"still matches current data." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:93 -msgid "quantity still matches current data." +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:92 +msgid "" +"**Red**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity " +"was too high considering current data." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:94 +msgid "" +"**Orange**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity" +" was too low considering current data." msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:96 -msgid "**Red**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:96 -msgid "quantity was too high considering current data." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:99 -msgid "**Orange**: replenishment order has already been generated, and" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:99 -msgid "its quantity was too low considering current data." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:101 msgid "" "The *Forecasted stock* line can also contain red cells, which means the " "stock will be negative during the period in question." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:105 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:100 msgid "What if I have underestimated the demand?" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:107 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:102 msgid "" "You can still increase the demand forecast. It will impact the quantity to " "replenish. The cell will become orange, and you’ll be able to launch a new " "replenishment." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:112 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:107 msgid "What if I have overestimated the demand?" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:114 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:109 msgid "" "You can decrease the demand forecast. The cell will become red to inform you" " that you’ve ordered more than planned. If you’re still able to do it, you " "can cancel some RFQ or MO manually." msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:119 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:114 msgid "What if I wrongly added a product to the MPS?" msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:121 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:116 msgid "" "You can easily remove a product from the MPS by clicking the small bin on " "the right of its name." diff --git a/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po index 88ba06f59..cfe52def2 100644 --- a/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po +++ b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Yenthe Van Ginneken , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Dutch (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/nl/)\n" @@ -48,6 +48,9 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:9 #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:10 #: ../../point_of_sale/overview/start.rst:22 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:12 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:12 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:13 #: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/setup.rst:9 #: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/split.rst:10 msgid "Configuration" @@ -908,7 +911,275 @@ msgstr "Het is klaar, u heeft nu uw eerste kassa sessie afgesloten." #: ../../point_of_sale/overview/start.rst:133 msgid "" "To connect the PoS to hardware with an Odoo IoT Box, please see the section " -":doc:`../../../iot/connect` and :doc:`../../../iot/pos`" +":doc:`../../../iot/config/connect` and :doc:`../../../iot/config/pos`" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment.rst:3 +msgid "Payment Terminals" +msgstr "Betaalterminals" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:3 +msgid "Connect an Ingenico Payment Terminal to your PoS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Connecting a payment terminal allows you to offer a fluid payment flow to " +"your customers and ease the work of your cashiers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Please note that Ingenico is currently only available for customers in the " +"Benelux." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:15 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:15 +msgid "Connect a Payment Terminal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:17 +msgid "" +"Connecting an Ingenico Payment Terminal to Odoo is a feature that requires " +"an IoT Box. For more information on how to connect an IoT Box to your " +"database, please refer to `this documentation " +"`__." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:22 +msgid "" +"Once the IoT Box is up and running, you’ll need to link your payment " +"terminal to your PoS. Open the Point of Sale app and go to *Configuration > " +"Point of Sale*. Select a PoS, tick the IoT Box Device option and select your" +" payment terminal." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:31 +msgid "Configure the Lane/5000 for Ingenico BENELUX" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:33 +msgid "" +"Click on the F button of the terminal, then go in the *PoS Menu* > settings " +"menu and enter the settings password." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:36 +msgid "" +"Now, click on connexion change and TCP/IP. Type the IP of your *IoT Box* " +"(you can find it on the form view of your IoT Box). Then, enter 9000 as " +"port. The terminal will restart. Once it is done, go on your *IoT Box* form " +"in Odoo and verify that the terminal has been found." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:45 +msgid "Configure the payment method" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:47 +msgid "" +"First, go in the general settings of the POS app, and activate the Ingenico " +"setting." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Go back in *Point of Sale > Configuration > Point of Sale*, go in the " +"payments section and access your payment methods. Create a new payment " +"method for Ingenico, select the payment terminal option Ingenico, and select" +" your payment terminal device." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:62 +msgid "Pay with a payment terminal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:64 +msgid "" +"In your *PoS interface*, when processing a payment, select a *Payment " +"Method* using a payment terminal. Check that the amount in the tendered " +"column is the one that has to be sent to the payment terminal and click on " +"*Send*. When the payment is successful, the status will change to *Payment " +"Successful*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:73 +msgid "" +"If you want to cancel the payment request, click on cancel. You can still " +"retry to send the payment request." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:76 +msgid "" +"If there is any issue with the payment terminal, you can still force the " +"payment using the *Force Done*. This will allow you to validate the order in" +" Odoo even if the connexion between the terminal and Odoo has issues." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:82 +msgid "" +"This option will only be available if you received an error message telling " +"you the connexion failed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:85 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:103 +msgid "" +"Once your payment is processed, on the payment record, you’ll find the type " +"of card that has been used and the transaction ID." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:3 +msgid "Connect SIX/Worldline to your PoS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Connecting a SIX/Worldline payment terminal allows you to offer a fluid " +"payment flow to your customers and ease the work of your cashiers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:9 +msgid "Please note SIX/Worldine is currently only available for UE customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:17 +msgid "" +"Connecting a SIX/Worldline Payment Terminal to Odoo is a feature that " +"requires an IoT Box. For more information on how to connect an IoT Box to " +"your database, please refer to `this documentation " +"`__." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:22 +msgid "" +"Once the *IoT Box* is up and running, you’ll need to link it to your PoS. " +"Open the Point of Sale app and go to *Configuration > Point of Sale*. Select" +" a PoS, tick the IoT Box Device option and select your payment terminal." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:30 +msgid "" +"Then go to your *IoT Box homepage* (accessible from the IoT Box form view in" +" Odoo) and enter the ID of your Six payment terminal." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:36 +msgid "" +"You should now see that the terminal is connected to your IoT Box (it takes " +"+/- 1 min)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:43 +msgid "" +"The terminal should only be connected to the network with the Ethernet. Do " +"not connect it to the IoT Box with a USB Cable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:47 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:16 +msgid "Configure the Payment Method" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:49 +msgid "" +"First, go in the general settings of the POS app, and activate the SIX " +"setting." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:55 +msgid "" +"Back in *Point of Sale > Configuration > Point of Sale*, go in the payments " +"section and access your payment methods. Create a new payment method for " +"SIX, select the payment terminal option SIX, and select your payment " +"terminal device." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:64 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:40 +msgid "Pay with a Payment Terminal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:66 +msgid "" +"In your PoS interface, at the moment of the payment, select a payment method" +" using a payment terminal. Verify that the amount in the tendered column is " +"the one that has to be sent to the payment terminal and click on *Send*. If " +"you want to cancel the payment request, click on cancel." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:74 +msgid "" +"When the payment is done, the status will change to *Payment Successful*. " +"You can always reverse the last transaction by clicking on *Reverse*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:81 +msgid "" +"If there is any issue with the payment terminal, you can still force the " +"payment using the *Force Done*. This will allow you to validate the order in" +" Odoo even if the connexion between the terminal and Odoo encounters issues." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:87 +msgid "Close your Session" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:89 +msgid "" +"At the end of the day, before closing your session, you need to send the " +"balance of the payments to SIX. To do that, click on this button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:95 +msgid "" +"Once the balance has been sent, the SIX shift is closed, meaning you cannot " +"do additional operations with the SIX payment terminal (except if you reopen" +" a shift by clicking on the user name and selecting a cashier)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Vantiv Payment Terminal to your PoS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Connecting a Vantiv payment terminal allows you to offer a fluid payment " +"flow to your customers and ease the work of your cashiers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:9 +msgid "" +"Please note MercuryPay only operates with US and Canadian banks, making this" +" procedure only suitable for North American businesses." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:18 +msgid "" +"First, go in the general settings of the POS app, and activate the Vantiv " +"setting." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:24 +msgid "" +"Back in *Point of Sale > Configuration > Point of Sale*, go in the payments " +"section and access your payment methods. Create a new payment method for " +"Vantiv, select the payment terminal option Vantiv, and create new Vantiv " +"credentials." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:32 +msgid "" +"To create new Vantiv credentials, fill in your merchant ID and password, " +"then save. Make sure the credentials you just created are selected, then " +"save the payment method." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:42 +msgid "" +"In your PoS interface, at the moment of the payment, select your Vantiv " +"payment method and… that’s all." msgstr "" #: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant.rst:3 diff --git a/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po index 5a2aa00ec..f221e251c 100644 --- a/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po +++ b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:47+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Gunther Clauwaert , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Dutch (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/nl/)\n" @@ -1693,7 +1693,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../purchase/replenishment/flows/setup_stock_rule.rst:33 -msgid "See also: :doc:`../../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers`" +msgid "See also: :doc:`../../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers`" msgstr "" #: ../../purchase/replenishment/flows/setup_stock_rule.rst:35 diff --git a/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..8c0f8b51b --- /dev/null +++ b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po @@ -0,0 +1,415 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2015-TODAY, Odoo S.A. +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +# Translators: +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Erwin van der Ploeg , 2019 +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-11-20 09:24+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Erwin van der Ploeg , 2019\n" +"Language-Team: Dutch (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/nl/)\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Language: nl\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n" + +#: ../../quality.rst:5 +msgid "Quality" +msgstr "Kwaliteit" + +#: ../../quality/alert.rst:3 +msgid "Alert" +msgstr "Waarschuwing" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:3 +msgid "Generate a Quality Alert from a Manufacturing Order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Speaking of manufacturing orders, you have two different situations to " +"consider in Odoo. Those two will result in two different processes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:8 +msgid "You work with a simple manufacturing flow;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:10 +msgid "You work with a complex manufacturing flow that includes routings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:13 +msgid "Simple manufacturing flow" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:15 +msgid "" +"If you work with simple manufacturing orders, the *Quality Alerts* will be " +"launched from the manufacturing order itself. When manufacturing a product " +"for which you need to process quality controls, a button *Quality Alert* " +"will appear on the top of your manufacturing order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:23 +msgid "" +"By clicking on the button, you can specify the quality problem that arose " +"during the process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:29 +msgid "" +"If one of the quality checks failed, the button will be highlighted on the " +"document. If not, the button won’t be highlighted." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:36 ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:50 +msgid "Manufacturing Flow with Routings" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:38 +msgid "" +"If you work with routings defined on your manufacturing orders, the quality " +"alerts will be launched directly from the work orders on which the quality " +"checks took place." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:48 +msgid "" +"Then, a button *Quality Alert* will be available from the work order view. " +"When you click on the button, you can specify the quality problem that " +"appeared during the process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:3 +msgid "Generate a Quality Alert from a Transfer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:6 +msgid "Use the Quality Alert" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Every time you perform some *Quality Checks* on a transfer, a *Quality " +"Alert* button appears. You can always use it. The button is automatically " +"highlighted once you have a failed quality check for the transfer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:16 +msgid "" +"If you click on that *Quality Alert* button, you can specify what was the " +"problem with the product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:22 +msgid "" +"The *Quality Alert* that is created from the transfer can be found via the " +"button appearing on the top right corner of the transfer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:28 +msgid "" +"You can also access all your *Quality Alerts* via the menu, accessible under" +" *Control*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks.rst:3 +msgid "Checks" +msgstr "Cheques" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:3 +msgid "Perform Quality Checks on Manufacturing Orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:5 +msgid "" +"There are two different situations to consider and that will differ in Odoo " +"processes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:8 +msgid "You work with simple manufacturing flows;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:10 +msgid "" +"You work with complex manufacturing flows that are represented by the use of" +" routings in Odoo." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:13 +msgid "Simple Manufacturing Flow" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:16 +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:53 +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:6 +msgid "Create the Quality Control Point" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:18 +msgid "" +"To create a quality control point, open the quality app and go to *Control >" +" Control Points*. There, hit create. Make sure to select *Manufacturing* as " +"operation and choose the type of quality check you want to perform." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:27 +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:69 +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:17 +msgid "Process the Quality Check" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:29 +msgid "" +"Once your *Quality Control Point* has been created, you can create a " +"manufacturing order for your product. Now, and before marking the " +"manufacturing as done, you can register the *Quality Checks*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:39 +msgid "" +"Once you have performed your quality checks, you can find them via the " +"*Quality Checks* button available on the manufacturing order form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:46 +msgid "" +"If you want to access all your quality checks, you can do this by opening " +"the quality checks menu, under quality control." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:55 +msgid "" +"If you want to create a *Quality Control Point*, open the *Quality* app and " +"go to *Control > Control Points*. Then, click on create. Make sure to select" +" *Manufacturing* as operation and select the work order operation on which " +"the quality check should be performed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:64 +msgid "" +"Choosing the work order operation is necessary if you want the quality " +"checks to be performed in the work orders. After that, you can choose the " +"type of quality check." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:71 +msgid "" +"Once your *Quality Control Point* has been configured, create a " +"manufacturing order for your product. You have to plan it if you want to " +"generate the necessary work orders." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:78 +msgid "" +"Now, process the work order and your quality check will appear. In this " +"example, the quality check requests to enter the serial number of the Table " +"Top component." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:3 +msgid "Perform Quality Checks on Transfers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:8 +msgid "" +"To create a *Quality Control Point*, open the *Quality* application. Then, " +"go to *Quality Control > Control Points > Create*. Now, you can define the " +"quality control point you want to apply to a specific product. Don’t forget " +"to select a transfer operation type." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:19 +msgid "" +"Let’s say that we will receive a laptop. First, create a planned receipt for" +" the product. Then, on the receipt, you will see a *Quality Checks* button " +"that appears to proceed to the quality check you configured before." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:27 +msgid "" +"By clicking on it, the instruction set on the quality control point will be " +"displayed and will require the check value." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:33 +msgid "" +"Once the quality check is done, you can find it linked to the corresponding " +"transfer and access it by clicking on the button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:39 +msgid "" +"But, if the quality check failed, the stat button will appear in red " +"(instead of green) and Odoo will suggest you to create a *Quality Alert* by " +"highlighting the corresponding button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:46 +msgid "" +"The quality checks can also be found in the *Quality* application by opening" +" the *Quality Checks* menu, under *Quality Control*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control.rst:3 +msgid "Control" +msgstr "Controle" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:3 +msgid "Define Quality Control Points" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:6 +msgid "Quality Control Points" +msgstr "Kwaliteit controlepunten" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:8 +msgid "" +"If it is the first *Quality Control Point* that you create, know that you " +"need to open the *Quality* app. Then, go to *Quality Control > Control " +"Points*. Once there, you have to define the product on which the quality " +"control will take place, as well as the operation at which it should take " +"place." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:14 +msgid "" +"The *Quality Control Points* can take place during transfers or during the " +"manufacturing process of the products. If you work with routings on your " +"*Bill of Materials*, you have to precise at which step of the manufacturing " +"process the quality control point should be applied." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:19 +msgid "" +"The control type defines at which frequency the quality checks should take " +"place:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:22 +msgid "" +"All Operations: all the operations will generate quality checks to perform;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:24 +msgid "" +"Randomly: the quality checks will only be performed on x% of the operation. " +"You must define the percentage yourself, on the control point;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:26 +msgid "" +"Periodically: the quality checks will be performed periodically. The " +"periodicity is based on the period you define (once a day, once a week)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:32 +msgid "Quality Control Point Types" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:34 +msgid "" +"Now that the rest is configured, you need to define the type of quality " +"check." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:38 +msgid "" +"Some of the types are only available with the manufacturing application." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:41 +msgid "Text" +msgstr "Tekst" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:43 +msgid "" +"This control point type allows you to give instructions to your workers " +"during the transfer, or the manufacturing process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:56 +msgid "Take a Picture" +msgstr "Neem een foto" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:58 +msgid "" +"This control point type asks you to take a picture of the product in a " +"transfer, or when manufacturing it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:71 +msgid "Pass-Fail" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:73 +msgid "" +"This type of control point requires that you specify if the products pass or" +" fail a specific text. It can be applied for both transfers or manufacturing" +" orders." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:80 +msgid "" +"For this kind of control point type, you have the possibility to define a " +"failure message that will give instructions to follow in case of quality " +"check failure." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:94 +msgid "Take a Measure" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:96 +msgid "" +"This control point type requires you to enter the product’s measurements " +"during a transfer, or during the manufacturing process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:102 +msgid "" +"For this kind of control point type, you also have the possibility to define" +" a failure message that will give instructions to the worker." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:115 +msgid "Register Consumed Materials" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:117 +msgid "" +"This control point type requires you register the component serial/lot " +"numbers during the manufacturing process. It is only available if you work " +"with routings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:128 +msgid "Register By-Products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:130 +msgid "" +"With this control point type, you must register the serial/lot number of the" +" by-products that are manufactured. It is also only available with routings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:141 +msgid "Print Label" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:143 +msgid "" +"This control point type allows you to print labels to add to the product " +"during the manufacturing process." +msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po index baf4f9f90..e5b5c2087 100644 --- a/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po +++ b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po @@ -8,18 +8,18 @@ # Erwin van der Ploeg , 2019 # Pol Van Dingenen , 2019 # Maxim Vandenbroucke , 2019 -# Yenthe Van Ginneken , 2019 # Vincent van Reenen , 2019 # Gunther Clauwaert , 2019 +# Yenthe Van Ginneken , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:47+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: Gunther Clauwaert , 2019\n" +"Last-Translator: Yenthe Van Ginneken , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Dutch (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/nl/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -1131,6 +1131,352 @@ msgid "" "Attributes / Attribute / ID)." msgstr "" +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:3 +msgid "Using product variants" +msgstr "Product varianten gebruiken" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Product variants are used to manage products having different variations, " +"like size, color, etc. It allows managing the product at the template level " +"(for all variations) and at the variant level (specific attributes)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:10 +msgid "" +"As an example, a company selling t-shirts may have the following product:" +msgstr "" +"Als een voorbeeld van een bedrijf dat t-shirts verkoopt kan het de volgende " +"producten hebben:" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:13 +msgid "B&C T-shirt" +msgstr "B&C T-shirt" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:15 +msgid "Sizes: S, M, L, XL, XXL" +msgstr "Groottes: S, M, L, XL, XXL" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:16 +msgid "Colors: Blue, Red, White, Black" +msgstr "Kleuren: Blauw, Rood, Wit, Zwart" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:18 +msgid "" +"In this example, **B&C T-Shirt** is called the product template and **B&C " +"T-Shirt, S, Blue** is a variant. Sizes and color are **attributes**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:22 +msgid "" +"The above example has a total of 20 different products (5 sizes x 4 colors)." +" Each one of these products has its own inventory, sales, etc." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:26 +msgid "Impact of variants" +msgstr "Impact van varianten" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:28 +msgid "" +"**Barcode**: the code and barcode is associated to a variant, not the " +"template. Every variant may have its own barcode / SKU." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:31 +msgid "" +"**Price**: every product variant has its own public price that is computed " +"based on the template price ($20) with an optional extra for every variant " +"(+$3 for color red). However, you can define pricelist rules that apply on " +"the template or the variant." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:36 +msgid "" +"**Inventory**: the inventory is managed by product variant. You don't own " +"t-shirts, you only own \"T-shirts, S, Red\", or \"T-Shirts, M, Blue\". For " +"information purpose, on the product template form, you get the inventory " +"that is the sum of every variant. (but the actual inventory is computed by " +"variant)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:42 +msgid "" +"**Picture**: the picture is related to the variant, every variation of a " +"product may have its own primary picture." +msgstr "" +"**Foto**: de foto is gerelateerd aan de variant, elke variatie van een " +"product heeft mogelijk zijn eigen primaire foto." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:45 +msgid "" +"**Other fields**: most of the other fields belongs to the product template. " +"If you update them, it updates automatically all the variants. (example: " +"Income Account, Taxes)" +msgstr "" +"**Andere velden**: de meeste andere velden behoren tot het productsjabloon. " +"Indien u ze update updaten automatisch alle varianten. (bijvoorbeeld: " +"inkomende rekening, belastingen)" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:50 +msgid "Should you use variants?" +msgstr "Zou u varianten moeten gebruiken?" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:53 +msgid "When should you use variants?" +msgstr "Wanneer moet u varianten gebruiken?" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:55 +msgid "Using variants has the following impacts:" +msgstr "Varianten gebruiken heeft de volgende gevolgen:" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:57 +msgid "" +"**eCommerce**: in your online shop, the customer will only see product " +"templates in the catalog page. Once the visitor click on such a product, he " +"will have options to choose amongst the variants (colors, sizes, …)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:62 +msgid "" +"**Manufacturing**: Using variants allows to define only one bill of material" +" for a product template and slight variations for some of the variants. " +"Example: instead of creating a Bill of Material for \"T-shirt, Red, S\", you" +" create a bill of material for \"T-shirt\" and add some lines that are " +"specific to the dimension S, and other lines specific to the color Red." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:69 +msgid "" +"**Pricing**: The default price of a product is computed using the price of " +"the product template and add the optional extra price on each dimension of " +"the variant. This way, variant prices are easier to maintain since you don't" +" have to set the price for every variant. However, it's possible to create " +"pricelist rules to fix price per variants too." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:77 +msgid "When should you avoid using variants?" +msgstr "Wanneer zou u varianten moeten vermijden?" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:79 +msgid "" +"Using variants may add a level of complexity on the way you use Odoo. You " +"should consider using variants only if you need it to reduce the complexity " +"of managing lots of products that are similars." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:83 +msgid "" +"As an example, importing your initial product catalog is more complex if you" +" use variants. You can't just import a list of products, you must import " +"product templates and all their related variations." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:87 +msgid "" +"In addition to that, you should also carefully select the dimensions that " +"you manage as separate product templates and those as variants. As an " +"example, a company having these products:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:91 +msgid "Quality: T-Shirts, Polos, Shirts" +msgstr "Kwaliteit: T-Shirts, Polo's, Shirts" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:93 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:105 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:110 +msgid "Color: Red, Blue" +msgstr "Kleur: Rood, Blauw" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:95 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:106 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:111 +msgid "Size: S, M, L, XL" +msgstr "Grootte: S, M, L, XL" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:97 +msgid "" +"In such a use case, you could create 1 template with three dimensions of " +"variants (Layout, T-Shirts, Polos). But, it's recommended to create two " +"different product templates as T-shirts may highly differ from polos or " +"shirts and customer expect to see these as two different products in the " +"e-Commerce:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:103 +msgid "Product Template: T-shirt" +msgstr "Productsjabloon: T-shirt" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:108 +msgid "Product Template: Polos" +msgstr "Productsjabloon: Polo's" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:114 +#: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:10 +msgid "Configuration" +msgstr "Configuratie" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:117 +msgid "Activate the variant feature" +msgstr "Activeer de varianten optie" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:119 +msgid "" +"Before you can use product variants, you must first activate the product " +"variants in the settings. To do so, you must go to the Sales app. In the " +"menu :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`, locate the **Products " +"Variants** line, and tick the option **Products can have several " +"attributes**, then click on **Apply**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:129 +msgid "Creating products with variants" +msgstr "Producten aanmaken met varianten" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:131 +msgid "" +"Once you have activated the variant option, you can add variants to your " +"products. To do so, go to the Sales module, :menuselection:`Sales --> " +"Products`. It is also accessible from the Purchase and inventory modules." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:135 +msgid "Now, click on the product you wish to add variants to." +msgstr "Klik nu op het product als u er varianten aan wilt toevoegen." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:137 +msgid "" +"In the product page, a new tab called Variants has appeared. The number in " +"purple written on top is the number of variants this product currently has. " +"To add new variants, click on the tile. In the new window, click on " +"**Create**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:142 +msgid "" +"In **Attributes**, click on the rolldown menu and select the type of " +"variance you wish to add. If the variant does not yet exist, you can create " +"it on the fly by clicking on Create and edit…" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:149 +msgid "" +"In the Attributes window, the **Value** field is the description of the " +"attribute such as Green, Plastic or 32GB. The **Attribute** field is the " +"type of variant such as Color, Material or Memory." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:156 +msgid "" +"You can add a cost for the variant on the fly by adding it in the " +"**Attribute Price Extra** field, or choose to modify it later. Click on " +"**Save**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:160 +msgid "" +"You can also add a different barcode and internal reference to the variant." +msgstr "" +"U kan ook een verschillende barcode en interne referentie toevoegen aan de " +"variant." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:163 +msgid "" +"When you have entered all the specifications of the variant, click on " +"**Save**." +msgstr "" +"Wanneer u alle specificaties van de variant hebt ingesteld klikt u op " +"**Opslaan**." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:167 +msgid "Managing Product Variants" +msgstr "Productvarianten beheren" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:170 +msgid "Introduction" +msgstr "Introductie" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:172 +msgid "" +"The examples below are all based on this product template that has two " +"variant attributes :" +msgstr "" +"De onderstaande voorbeelden zijn allemaal gebaseerd op dit productsjabloon " +"dat twee variant attributen heeft:" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:175 +msgid "T-Shirt B&C" +msgstr "T-Shirt B&C" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:177 +msgid "Color: Red, Blue, White" +msgstr "Kleur: Rood, Blauw, Wit" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:179 +msgid "Size: S, M, L, XL, XXL" +msgstr "Grootte: S, M, L, XL, XXL" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:182 +msgid "Managing combination possibilities" +msgstr "Combinatie mogelijkheden beheren" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:184 +msgid "" +"By default, with the above product template, you get 15 different products " +"(3 colors, 5 sizes). If the XXL size only exists for red and blue t-shirts, " +"you can deactivate the white product variant." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:188 +msgid "" +"To do this, click on the **Variants** button, select the XXL, White T-shirt." +" From the product form, uncheck the **Active** box of the T-shirt White, " +"XXL." +msgstr "" +"Om dit te doen klikt u op de **Varianten** knop, selecteert u XXL, wit " +"t-shirt. Vanuit het product scherm vinkt u de optie **Actief** uit voor het " +"witte XXL t-shirt." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:197 +msgid "" +"That deactivating a product is different than having an inventory of 0." +msgstr "" +"Dat de-activering van een product anders is dan een voorraad van 0 te " +"hebben." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:200 +msgid "Setting a price per variant" +msgstr "Een prijs instellen per variant" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:202 +msgid "" +"You can add a cost over the main price for some of the variants of a " +"product." +msgstr "" +"U kan een kost toevoegen bovenop de standaard prijs voor sommige varianten " +"van een product." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:205 +msgid "" +"Once you have activated the variant option, you can add variants to your " +"products. To do so, go to the Sales module, open :menuselection:`Sales --> " +"Products` and click on the product you want to modify. Click on the " +"**Variant Prices** button to access the list of variant values." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:213 +msgid "" +"Click on the variant name you wish to add a value to, to make the 3 fields " +"editable. In the **Attribute Price Extra** field, add the cost of the " +"variant that will be added to the original price." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:220 +msgid "When you have entered all the extra values, click on **Save**." +msgstr "Wanneer u alle extra waardes heeft ingegeven klikt u op **Opslaan**." + #: ../../sales/products_prices/taxes.rst:3 msgid "Set taxes" msgstr "Stel BTW in" @@ -1698,10 +2044,6 @@ msgid "" "complete quotation in no time." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:10 -msgid "Configuration" -msgstr "Configuratie" - #: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:12 msgid "" "For this feature to work, go to :menuselection:`Sales --> Configuration --> " diff --git a/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..ac8a881b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po @@ -0,0 +1,517 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2015-TODAY, Odoo S.A. +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +# Translators: +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Erwin van der Ploeg , 2019 +# Yenthe Van Ginneken , 2019 +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-11-20 09:24+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Yenthe Van Ginneken , 2019\n" +"Language-Team: Dutch (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/nl/)\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Language: nl\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n" + +#: ../../sms_marketing.rst:5 +msgid "SMS Marketing" +msgstr "SMS marketing" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:3 +msgid "Build, send and get reports from a SMS mailing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Why to use SMS? Using SMS Marketing as part of my communication strategies " +"can empower me to expand my markets, considering that in some countries " +"emails are not very used or used at all. It also helps to boost my " +"conversion rate, as this strategy has a high open-rate percentage among " +"people who use smartphones - people usually don’t keep unread SMSs!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:8 +msgid "" +"With Odoo’s SMS Marketing app you can plan, organize, schedule and keep " +"track of your mailings with its easy to use interface." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:12 +msgid "Install the app" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:14 +msgid "Go to *Apps*, search for *SMS Marketing* and click on *Install*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:17 +msgid "Build an SMS mailing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:19 +msgid "Go to *SMS Marketing > Create*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:24 +msgid "" +"First, I’ll be able to specify a *subject* name that will help me to " +"remember what the mailing is about. Under *recipients*, I’ll choose to whom " +"I’d like the SMS to be sent. If I choose *Contact*, all my Odoo contacts " +"(vendor, customers, etc.) will receive my SMS. From there, I can refine my " +"recipient list with the *add filter* option. In the example below, I choose " +"to send it to my contacts living in Belgium." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:31 +msgid "" +"The *Mailing list* option, on the other hand, allows me to choose mailing " +"lists I’ve created with specific contacts or people who have subscribed to " +"my Newsletters, or both! I’m allowed to select more than one *Mailing list*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:36 +msgid "" +"Under the *SMS Content* tab, links can be included and Odoo will " +"automatically generate *link trackers*. Thank to those, I’ll be able to get " +"data about those links." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:38 +msgid "" +"On *Settings* I have the option *include opt-out link* available. If " +"activated, the contact will be able to unsubscribe from the mailing list " +"he’s not interested in anymore." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:43 +msgid "" +"in the *Link Tracker* menu under *Configuration*, I can see the history of " +"my sent links, access them and look at statistics." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:48 +msgid "Double-check that you have the phone number of your contacts saved!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:52 +msgid "Sending my mailing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:56 +msgid "" +"Once I have my mailing created, I must choose when I would like it to be " +"delivered:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:58 +msgid "" +"**Put in queue**: the mailing will be triggered with the next automatic run." +" Interesting option if I don’t mind when the triggering will happen." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:59 +msgid "" +"**Send now**: sends the message immediately. Advised to use this option if " +"there are not that many recipients." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:60 +msgid "" +"**Schedule**: allows me to choose a day and time. Best option for mailings " +"that I would like to send during a specific event, to promote an offer while" +" it is active or to simply plan my content strategy in advance." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:61 +msgid "" +"**Test**: allows me to send an SMS to one or multiple numbers for test " +"purposes. Check, for example, if the link provided lands on the right page " +"while making sure they are responsive. If sending it to multiple numbers, I " +"must remember to use a comma between them." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:65 +msgid "Visualize reports" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:66 +msgid "" +"On the *Reporting* menu, with just a few clicks, I am capable of applying " +"filters, measures and adopt different layouts to do an analysis of the " +"performance of my SMS mailings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:71 +msgid "" +"I can also check the price to send an SMS on your country when clicking on " +"the *information* icon when creating a new SMS." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:76 +msgid "" +"**Buy Credits!** In order to take advantage of the app and its features, " +"make sure you’ve purchased credits. For more information on that access: " +":doc:`../sms_marketing/fqapricing`" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:3 +msgid "Contact lists and Blacklist" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:6 +msgid "Contact lists" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:7 +msgid "" +"Creating my own list of contacts, or importing it, is useful when I want to " +"create specific groups of people, such as the subscribers of my newsletter. " +"It is also the best way to get started if I am coming from another system " +"and already have built an audience. It makes the SMS distribution a lot " +"easier." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:9 +msgid "" +"Go to *Contacts lists > Contacts lists > Create*. I’ll choose a name for my " +"*Mailing list*, and activate the option *Public* if I would like to make the" +" mailing list accessible to my recipients in the unsubscription page to " +"allow them to update their subscription preferences." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:12 +msgid "" +"Once inside the list, I can again *Create* or *Import* contacts for that " +"specific list." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:18 +msgid "History with the Log Notes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:19 +msgid "" +"A record of the mailings sent is kept in the chatter of the recipient " +"(whether it is a contact or an opportunity, for example)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:24 +msgid "" +"This is important as I and my team can easily keep track and see a history " +"of interactions with my contacts or prospects, granting me the ability to " +"better understand them. Example: my sales representative can easily find out" +" which SMS mailing promotions a customer has received or not." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:29 +msgid "Blacklist" +msgstr "Blacklist" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:30 +msgid "" +"If I’m coming from another software and have a list of clients who have " +"already asked to be blacklisted from my news, I can import those entries in " +"my database. For that, I’ll go to *Configuration > Phone Blacklist > " +"Import*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:3 +msgid "Integrations and Templates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:4 +msgid "" +"Using SMS to reach people can be a strategy not just used for advertisement " +"purposes but also as a reminder of events or issued invoices to your " +"costumers, for example. As you know, one of the biggest benefits of using " +"Odoo is the capability of the apps to be integrated. With the SMS Marketing " +"app isn’t different!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:9 +msgid "Organize Email Marketing and SMS campaigns" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:10 +msgid "" +"First, make sure to have the necessary feature activated. Go to the *Email " +"Marketing app > Configuration > Settings> activate the option Mailing " +"Campaigns*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Now, I’ll also have the menu *Campaigns* included in my *SMS Marketing* " +"page, allowing me to have an overview of my SMS mailings and my email " +"marketing ones." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:20 +msgid "" +"This feature is especially useful if I have aggregated campaigns, as I have " +"a global reporting view. In addition to that, I can create stages in my " +"kanban view to better organize the work being done." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:26 +msgid "Sending SMSs through the Contacts app" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:27 +msgid "" +"Sending SMSs through the contact’s form is available by default in Odoo. It " +"makes my work easier if I need to send an SMS to a specific contact, for " +"example. For that, I’ll go to the *Contacts* app, select the contact and " +"click on the *SMS* icon next to the phone number." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:33 +msgid "" +"If I’d like to send a message in a batch here, I could go to *List View > " +"select all the contacts > Action > Send SMS*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:39 +msgid "Set up SMS Templates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:40 +msgid "" +"To set up *SMS Templates*, I’ll go to the *Settings* app and activate the " +"*developer mode*. Now, back to *Settings* app, I’ll go to *Technical > " +"Phone/SMS section > SMS Templates* and create the content I need." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:48 +msgid "" +"Use *Dynamic Placeholders* to adapt automatically the content of the SMS to " +"the context." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:52 +msgid "" +"SMS Text Messaging is available throughout Odoo! Here are some of our extra " +"notable integrations:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:54 +msgid "*CRM*: send SMSs to your leads and opportunities." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:55 +msgid "*Subscription*: alert customers about their subscription." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:56 +msgid "*Accounting*: send payment reminders." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:57 +msgid "*Marketing Automation*: automate your SMS marketing campaigns." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:58 +msgid "" +"*Inventory*: send an automatic confirmation when a delivery order is done." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:59 +msgid "" +"*Sign*: receive a validation code to verify your identity before signing a " +"document online." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:60 +msgid "" +"*SEPA debit payment provider*: send a verification code to your customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:61 +msgid "" +"*Studio*: send an SMS according to your needs by using automated actions." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:63 +msgid "" +"For more information about SMS integrations in Odoo and a list of frequently" +" asked questions, go to `Pricing and FQA `__." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:3 +msgid "SMS Pricing and FAQ" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:6 +msgid "Pricing" +msgstr "Prijzen" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:7 +msgid "" +"SMS Text Messaging is an In-App Purchase (IAP) service which requires " +"prepaid credits to work. The price of an SMS depends on the destination and " +"the length of the message. With 1 credit, I can send up to 92 SMSs." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:9 +msgid "" +"**For more information, please consult our FAQ page**: `Odoo SMS - FAQ " +"`_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:11 +msgid "" +"To buy credits I will go to *Settings > Buy Credits* (under *Send SMS*); or" +" go to *Settings > View my Services* (under *Odoo IAP*)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:18 +msgid "" +"If you are on Odoo Online (SAAS) and have the Enterprise version, you " +"benefit from free trial credits to test the feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:21 +msgid "FAQ" +msgstr "FAQ" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:22 +msgid "**Is there an expiration time for my credits?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:24 +msgid "No, your credits won’t expire." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:26 +msgid "" +"**Can I send an SMS to a phone number (which is not a mobile phone) because " +"I see the icon in front of the field “phone”?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:28 +msgid "Only if that phone number supports SMS (e.g. SIP phones)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:30 +msgid "**Do I receive an invoice to buy my credits?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:32 +msgid "Yes." +msgstr "Ja." + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:34 +msgid "**Can the recipient answer to me?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:36 +msgid "No, it is not possible to reply to the SMS." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:38 +msgid "" +"**What happens if I send multiple SMS but I do not have enough credits to " +"send them all?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:40 +msgid "" +"The whole transaction is counted as a single one, so no SMS will be sent " +"until you have enough credits to send them all." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:42 +msgid "**Do I have a history of the sent SMSs?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:44 +msgid "" +"Yes, the SMS is logged as a note under the chatter of the corresponding " +"record, and a complete history of SMS sent is available under Settings> " +"Activate the developer mode > Technical > SMS." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:46 +msgid "**Can I send as many SMSs I want at once?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:48 +msgid "Yes, if you have enough credits." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:50 +msgid "" +"**If I have a number that does not exist in the list of recipients, will I " +"lose credits?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:52 +msgid "" +"Not if the phone number is in the wrong format (e.g. too many digits). " +"Otherwise, if the SMS is sent to the wrong person or to a fake number, the " +"credit will be lost." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:54 +msgid "" +"**What happens if I send my SMS to a paying number (e.g.: a contest to win a" +" ticket for a festival)?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:56 +msgid "" +"The SMS will not be delivered to that kind of number, so you won’t be " +"charged." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:58 +msgid "" +"**Can I identify the numbers that do not exist when I send several SMSs?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:60 +msgid "Only the ones that have an invalid format." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:62 +msgid "**How does the GDPR regulation affect this service?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:64 +msgid "" +"Please find our Privacy Policy here: `Odoo IPA Purchase Privacy Policy " +"`__" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:66 +msgid "**How many types of SMS exist and how many characters make 1 SMS?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:68 +msgid "There are 2 types of SMS message:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:70 +msgid "" +"*Standard* (GSM-7): contains only characters from the GSM-7 set, which can " +"be seen in the following picture." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:75 +msgid "" +"*Unicode*: contains at least one character that is not in the previous " +"table. For Standard SMS the size limit is 160 characters, and for Unicode is" +" 70. Above these limits, the content is divided into a multi-part message. " +"The system will inform you in real-time about the number of SMS your message" +" represents." +msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..982995156 --- /dev/null +++ b/locale/nl/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po @@ -0,0 +1,173 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2015-TODAY, Odoo S.A. +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +# Translators: +# Erwin van der Ploeg , 2019 +# Yenthe Van Ginneken , 2019 +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-11-20 09:24+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Yenthe Van Ginneken , 2019\n" +"Language-Team: Dutch (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/nl/)\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Language: nl\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=2; plural=(n != 1);\n" + +#: ../../social_marketing.rst:5 +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:2 +msgid "Social Marketing" +msgstr "Social marketing" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:3 +msgid "Advanced Topics" +msgstr "Geavanceerde onderwerpen" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:4 +msgid "" +"One of the biggest challenges of a company is to engage efficiently with " +"their community. Odoo Social helps you to meet your audience with the help " +"of several supports: social media, push notifications, or live chat request." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:10 +msgid "Add your social media and create your feed" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:12 +msgid "" +"You first need to add your social media accounts. To do that, add a Stream " +"and choose your social media account. You’ll need to grant permissions to " +"Odoo Social Marketing application." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:19 +msgid "" +"Once it’s done, you’ll be redirected to your Feed and a column will be " +"automatically added with the publications of your freshly added account. You" +" can then add new streams to your Feed and customize your Kanban view as you" +" like." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:28 +msgid "" +"Adding social media accounts to your Feed will also add some KPIs on it:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:30 +msgid "Audience: Number of followers of your channel" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:32 +msgid "Engagement: Number of times people have engaged with your posts" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:35 +msgid "Stories: Number of times people who have engaged with your channel" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:35 +msgid "" +"have created stories on their friend’s or follower’s feed (Shares, " +"Retweet,..)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:37 +msgid "" +"You can access more information by clicking on the “Insights” link: this " +"will lead you to statistics of the selected social medium." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:41 +msgid "Publish content" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:43 +msgid "" +"To publish content on your social media accounts or send a push notification" +" to your subscribed users, either go to your Feed and click on New Post, or " +"use the “Posts” menu and create it from there. Select all the accounts where" +" you want to post your content, write your post and get an instant preview " +"of how it will look when published." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:49 +msgid "" +"If you select the push notifications, you’ll get some additional fields on " +"the form that will allow you to complete the push notifications " +"configuration and choose your segment between all your subscribed users. You" +" can also send push notifications via the Visitors menu, as explained in the" +" previous paragraph." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:56 +msgid "Enable push notifications on your website" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:58 +msgid "" +"The push notifications system uses a Firebase account, configured by " +"default. This feature allows you to send push notifications to your " +"website’s visitors after they subscribed to it. To enable push notifications" +" on your website, go to the Website application Settings, and configure the " +"notifications permission request." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:67 +msgid "" +"Once it’s done, a popup will appear to your website’s visitors, asking them " +"to allow push notifications. As soon as they subscribe to it, you can start " +"sending them push notifications through the Visitors menu. You can either " +"send it individually or target a bigger segment by selecting multiple " +"visitors in the list view (e.g. all the visitors that visited your " +"Homepage)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:75 +msgid "Interact with your online visitors" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:77 +msgid "" +"You can monitor your online visits via the Visitors menu. You’ll see every " +"visitors that landed on one of your tracked pages (you can configure your " +"tracked pages in the Website application), online or offline. Your online " +"visitors will be authenticated if they’re linked to a lead or an existing " +"partner. You will be able to contact them with an email, a message sms, a " +"push notification (if they have subscribed to it), or even send them a live " +"chat request that they will receive on their next move on one of your " +"tracked pages (if you installed the Live Chat application)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:91 +msgid "Configure your own Facebook and Twitter developer accounts" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:93 +msgid "" +"By default, the Social application is already configured with a Facebook and" +" Twitter developer accounts but you can use your own if necessary. Activate " +"the developer mode, go to Configuration > Settings and enter your own API " +"keys." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:102 +msgid "Configure your own Firebase API" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:104 +msgid "" +"By default, a Firebase project is running on your database so there’s no " +"need to configure it. If you have multiple websites, every website will be " +"linked to a different Firebase project. If you need to configure your own " +"Firebase project, please go to :menuselection:`Website --> Configuration -->" +" Settings` Web Push Notifications section." +msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po index 065cd8d09..1f17dd920 100644 --- a/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po +++ b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:45+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Alina Lisnenko , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Ukrainian (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/uk/)\n" @@ -103,11 +103,11 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/deferred_revenues.rst:24 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/installment_plans.rst:20 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/payment_terms.rst:19 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:18 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/check.rst:39 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/check.rst:103 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/credit_cards.rst:40 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/credit_cards.rst:113 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:19 msgid "Configuration" msgstr "Налаштування" @@ -1795,40 +1795,6 @@ msgstr "" msgid "View *Bank Account* in our Online Demonstration" msgstr "Перегляньте *банківський рахунок* у нашій демо онлайн" -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:51 -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:146 -#: ../../accounting/others/analytic/timesheets.rst:78 -#: ../../accounting/payables/misc/employee_expense.rst:169 -#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:134 -#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:135 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:44 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:59 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:94 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:105 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/payment_terms.rst:31 -msgid "Todo" -msgstr "Зробити" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:51 -msgid "add inherited field tooltip" -msgstr "додайте підказку успадкованого поля" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:53 -msgid "" -"**Display on reports :** Display this bank account on the documents that " -"will be printed or send to the customers" -msgstr "" -"**Відображати на звітах:** Відобразіть цей банківський рахунок на " -"документах, які будуть надруковані або надіслані клієнтам" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:56 -msgid "" -"**Bank Identifier Code** = BIC : SWIFT Address assigned to a bank in order " -"to send automated payments quickly and accurately to the banks concerned" -msgstr "" -"**Код ідентифікатора банку** = BIC : SWIFT Призначена адреса банку з метою " -"швидкого та точного відправлення автоматизованих платежів у відповідні банки" - #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:60 msgid "" "The initial balance of a bank statement will be set to the closing balance " @@ -1917,16 +1883,11 @@ msgstr "Налаштуйте валюту" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/foreign_currency.rst:36 msgid "" "Once the Odoo is configured to support multiple currencies, you should " -"activate the currencies you plan to work with. To do that, go the menu " +"activate the currencies you plan to work with. To do that, go to the menu " ":menuselection:`Configuration --> Currencies`. All the currencies are " -"created by default, but you should activate the ones you plan to support. " -"(to activate a currency, check his active field)" +"created by default, but you should activate the ones you plan to support (to" +" activate a currency, check its \"Active\" field)." msgstr "" -"Після того, як Odoo налаштована на підтримку кількох валют, ви повинні " -"активізувати валюти, з якими ви плануєте працювати. Для цього перейдіть у " -"меню :menuselection:`Налаштування --> Валюти`. Всі валюти створені за " -"замовчуванням, але ви повинні активувати ті, які ви плануєте підтримувати. " -"(щоб активувати валюту, перевірте її активне поле) " #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/foreign_currency.rst:42 msgid "" @@ -2054,15 +2015,10 @@ msgstr "" msgid "" "In the above report, the account receivable associated to Camptocamp is not " "managed in a secondary currency, which means that it keeps every transaction" -" in his own currency. If you prefer, you can set the account receivable of " -"this customer with a secondary currency and all his debts will automatically" -" be converted in this currency." +" in its own currency. If you prefer, you can set the account receivable for " +"this customer in a secondary currency and all its debts will automatically " +"be converted to this currency." msgstr "" -"У вищезгаданому звіті дебіторська заборгованість, пов'язана з Camptocamp, не" -" керується в другорядній валюті, а це означає, що вона зберігає кожну " -"транзакцію у власній валюті. Якщо хочете, ви можете встановити дебіторську " -"заборгованість цього клієнта з додатковою валютою, і всі його борги " -"автоматично конвертуються у цю валюту." #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/foreign_currency.rst:115 msgid "" @@ -2134,25 +2090,35 @@ msgid "Select 'General' for miscellaneous operations journals." msgstr "Виберіть 'Загальні' для журналів різних операцій." #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Use in Point of Sale" -msgstr "Використовуйте точку продаж" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Check this box if this journal define a payment method that can be used in a" -" point of sale." -msgstr "" -"Позначте це, якщо цей журнал визначає спосіб оплати, який може бути " -"використаний в точці продажу." - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Company" msgstr "Компанія" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Company related to this journal" msgstr "Компанія-власник цього журналу" +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Defines how the bank statements will be registered" +msgstr "Визначає, як будуть зареєстровані банківські виписки" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Synchronization Frequency" +msgstr "Частота синхронізації" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Defines when a new bank statement" +msgstr "Визначає, коли з'явилася нова банківська виписка" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "will be created when fetching new transactions" +msgstr "буде створено при завантаженні нових транзакцій" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "from your bank account." +msgstr "з вашого банківського рахунку." + #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "Short Code" msgstr "Короткий код" @@ -2193,8 +2159,8 @@ msgstr "" "рахунків-фактур та сторно, створених з цього журналу" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Credit Notes: Next Number" -msgstr "Сторно: наступний номер" +msgid "Credit Notes Next Number" +msgstr "Наступний номер сторно" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "The next sequence number will be used for the next credit note." @@ -2237,24 +2203,74 @@ msgid "The currency used to enter statement" msgstr "Валюта, використана для запису виписки" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Defines how the bank statements will be registered" -msgstr "Визначає, як будуть зареєстровані банківські виписки" +msgid "Communication Type" +msgstr "Тип зв'язку" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Creation of Bank Statements" -msgstr "Створення банківської виписки" +msgid "" +"You can set here the default communication that will appear on customer " +"invoices, once validated, to help the customer to refer to that particular " +"invoice when making the payment." +msgstr "" +"Тут ви можете встановити стандартну комунікацію, яка буде відображатися на " +"рахунках-фактурах клієнтів, після перевірки, щоби допомогти клієнту " +"звернутися до цього конкретного рахунку при здійсненні платежу." #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Defines when a new bank statement" -msgstr "Визначає, коли з'явилася нова банківська виписка" +msgid "Communication Standard" +msgstr "Стандарт зв'язку" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "will be created when fetching new transactions" -msgstr "буде створено при завантаженні нових транзакцій" +msgid "" +"You can choose different models for each type of reference. The default one " +"is the Odoo reference." +msgstr "" +"Ви можете обрати різні моделі для кожного типу референсу. Референс Odoo " +"встановлюється за замовчуванням." #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "from your bank account." -msgstr "з вашого банківського рахунку." +msgid "Alias Name" +msgstr "Ім'я псевдоніма" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "It creates draft invoices and bills by sending an email." +msgstr "Це створює чернетки рахунків через надсилання електронної пошти." + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Profit Account" +msgstr "Рахунок доходів" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Used to register a profit when the ending balance of a cash register differs" +" from what the system computes" +msgstr "" +"Використовується для відображення доходу, коли наприкінці періоду баланс по " +"касі не співпадає з тим, що обчислено системою." + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Loss Account" +msgstr "Рахунок для браку і втрат" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Used to register a loss when the ending balance of a cash register differs " +"from what the system computes" +msgstr "" +"Використовується для відображення витрат, коли наприкінці періоду баланс по " +"касі не співпадає з тим, що обчислено системою." + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Lock Posted Entries with Hash" +msgstr "Блокуйте опубліковані записи з гешем" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "" +"If ticked, the accounting entry or invoice receives a hash as soon as it is " +"posted and cannot be modified anymore." +msgstr "" +"Якщо позначено, бухгалтерський запис або рахунок-фактура отримує геш, як " +"тільки його буде опубліковано, і його більше не можна буде змінити." #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "For Incoming Payments" @@ -2312,65 +2328,6 @@ msgstr "" "SEPA Credit Transfer: сплачуйте рахунок з файлу SEPA Credit Transfer, який " "ви передаєте в свій банк. Увімкніть цю опцію в налаштуваннях." -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Profit Account" -msgstr "Рахунок доходів" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Used to register a profit when the ending balance of a cash register differs" -" from what the system computes" -msgstr "" -"Використовується для відображення доходу, коли наприкінці періоду баланс по " -"касі не співпадає з тим, що обчислено системою." - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Loss Account" -msgstr "Рахунок для браку і втрат" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Used to register a loss when the ending balance of a cash register differs " -"from what the system computes" -msgstr "" -"Використовується для відображення витрат, коли наприкінці періоду баланс по " -"касі не співпадає з тим, що обчислено системою." - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Group Invoice Lines" -msgstr "Згрупувати рядки рахунків" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"If this box is checked, the system will try to group the accounting lines " -"when generating them from invoices." -msgstr "" -"Якщо позначено, то система буде намагатися згрупувати рядки проведень, які " -"створюватимуться на основі рахунків." - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Post At Bank Reconciliation" -msgstr "Публікувати на узгодженні з банком" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Whether or not the payments made in this journal should be generated in " -"draft state, so that the related journal entries are only posted when " -"performing bank reconciliation." -msgstr "" -"Незалежно від того, чи потрібно здійснювати платежі, у цьому журналі мають " -"генеруватися у стані чернетки, так що пов'язані записи журналу публікуються " -"тільки при виконанні банківського узгодження." - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Alias Name for Vendor Bills" -msgstr "Ім'я псевдоніма для рахунків постачальника" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "It creates draft vendor bill by sending an email." -msgstr "" -"Він створює чернетку рахунка постачальника, відправивши електронний лист." - #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "Check Printing Payment Method Selected" msgstr "Метод оплати друкованим чеком вибрано" @@ -2410,23 +2367,6 @@ msgstr "Наступний номер чеку" msgid "Sequence number of the next printed check." msgstr "Послідовність номера наступного друкованого чеку" -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Amount Authorized Difference" -msgstr "Різниця авторизованої суми" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"This field depicts the maximum difference allowed between the ending balance" -" and the theoretical cash when closing a session, for non-POS managers. If " -"this maximum is reached, the user will have an error message at the closing " -"of his session saying that he needs to contact his manager." -msgstr "" -"Це поле відображає максимальну різницю, дозволену між кінцевим балансом і " -"теоретичною готівкою при закритті сеансу, для менеджерів, що не належать до " -"точки продажу. Якщо цей максимум досягнуто, користувачеві з'явиться " -"повідомлення про помилку під час закриття його сеансу, вказуючи, що йому " -"потрібно звернутися до менеджера." - #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:25 msgid "Usage" msgstr "Застосування" @@ -6074,178 +6014,6 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Explanation of the fields:" msgstr "Пояснення полів: " -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Status" -msgstr "Статус" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "When an asset is created, the status is 'Draft'." -msgstr "Коли актив створено, статус є \"Чернеткою\"." - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"If the asset is confirmed, the status goes in 'Running' and the depreciation" -" lines can be posted in the accounting." -msgstr "" -"Якщо актив підтверджено, статус переходить у \"Запуск\", а рядки амортизації" -" можуть бути опубліковані в бухгалтерському обліку." - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"You can manually close an asset when the depreciation is over. If the last " -"line of depreciation is posted, the asset automatically goes in that status." -msgstr "" -"Ви можете вручну закрити актив, коли амортизація закінчиться. Якщо " -"опубліковано останній рядок амортизації, актив автоматично переходить у цей " -"статус." - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Asset Category" -msgstr "Категорія активу" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Category of asset" -msgstr "Категорія активу" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Date" -msgstr "Дата" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Date of asset" -msgstr "Дата активу" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Depreciation Dates" -msgstr "Дати амортизації" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "The way to compute the date of the first depreciation." -msgstr "Спосіб обчислення дати першої амортизації." - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Based on last day of purchase period: The depreciation dates will be based" -" on the last day of the purchase month or the purchase year (depending on " -"the periodicity of the depreciations)." -msgstr "" -"* На підставі останнього дня періоду придбання: Дати амортизації " -"базуватимуться на останньому дні місяця купівлі або року купівлі (залежно " -"від періодичності амортизації)." - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Based on purchase date: The depreciation dates will be based on the " -"purchase date." -msgstr "" -"* На підставі дати придбання: Дати амортизації базуватимуться на даті " -"придбання." - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "First Depreciation Date" -msgstr "Перша дата амортизації" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Note that this date does not alter the computation of the first journal " -"entry in case of prorata temporis assets. It simply changes its accounting " -"date" -msgstr "" -"Зверніть увагу, що ця дата не змінює обчислення першого запису журналу у " -"випадку активів з дати експлуатації. Він просто змінює свою бухгалтерську " -"дату" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Gross Value" -msgstr "Початкове значення" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Gross value of asset" -msgstr "Валова вартість активу" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Salvage Value" -msgstr "Кінцева сума" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "It is the amount you plan to have that you cannot depreciate." -msgstr "Це сума, яку ви плануєте отримати, ви не можете знецінити." - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Computation Method" -msgstr "Спосіб розрахунку" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Choose the method to use to compute the amount of depreciation lines." -msgstr "Виберіть метод для обчислення суми рядків амортизації." - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Linear: Calculated on basis of: Gross Value / Number of Depreciations" -msgstr "" -"* Лінійний: Розраховується на основі: валової вартості/кількості амортизацій" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Degressive: Calculated on basis of: Residual Value * Degressive Factor" -msgstr "" -"* Регресивний: Розраховується на основі: залишкової вартості * Регресивного " -"фактора" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Time Method Based On" -msgstr "На основі методу часу" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Choose the method to use to compute the dates and number of entries." -msgstr "Виберіть метод для обчислення дати та кількості записів." - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Number of Entries: Fix the number of entries and the time between 2 " -"depreciations." -msgstr "" -"* Кількість записів: Виправлення кількості записів та часу між двома " -"амортизаціями." - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Ending Date: Choose the time between 2 depreciations and the date the " -"depreciations won't go beyond." -msgstr "" -"* Дата закінчення: Виберіть час між двома амортизаціями та датою, коли " -"амортизація не перевищуватиме." - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Prorata Temporis" -msgstr "З дати експлуатації" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Indicates that the first depreciation entry for this asset have to be done " -"from the asset date (purchase date) instead of the first January / Start " -"date of fiscal year" -msgstr "" -"Вказує, що перший запис амортизації для цього активу має бути зроблений з " -"дати активу (дата купівлі) замість першого січня / початкової дати звітного " -"періоду" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Number of Depreciations" -msgstr "Кількість амортизацій" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "The number of depreciations needed to depreciate your asset" -msgstr "Кількість амортизацій, необхідна для списання вашого активу" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Number of Months in a Period" -msgstr "Кількість місяців у періоді" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "The amount of time between two depreciations, in months" -msgstr "Час між двома амортизаціями в місяцях" - #: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:88 msgid "Try creating an *Asset* in our online demonstration" msgstr "Спробуйте створити *Актив* в нашій демо-версії онлайн" @@ -6357,18 +6125,6 @@ msgstr "" "транзакція з продажу, яка повинна бути зареєстрована через рахунок-фактуру " "клієнта." -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:146 -msgid "→ This has to be changed in Odoo: selling an asset should:" -msgstr "→ Це потрібно змінити в Odoo: продаж активу повинен:" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:148 -msgid "remove all \"Red\" lines" -msgstr "вилучіть усі \"Червоні\" рядки" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:149 -msgid "create a new line that deprecate the whole residual value" -msgstr "створіть новий рядок, який робить старими усі залишкові значення" - #: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:3 msgid "How to manage a financial budget?" msgstr "Як управляти фінансовим бюджетом?" @@ -7250,14 +7006,6 @@ msgstr "" "продаж, в залежності від часу та матеріалу, перегляньте таку інформацію: *Як" " виставляти рахунки на основі часу та матеріалів* (робота в процесі)." -#: ../../accounting/others/analytic/timesheets.rst:79 -msgid "" -"Add a link, and the document is under Sales --> Invoicing Methods --> " -"Services --> How to invoices blabla" -msgstr "" -"Додайте посилання, і документ під Продажі --> Методи виставлення рахунків " -"--> Послуги --> Як виставляти рахунки blabla" - #: ../../accounting/others/analytic/timesheets.rst:82 msgid "" "We save a Sales Order with the service product **External Consulting**. An " @@ -8218,6 +7966,30 @@ msgstr "" "до законодавства конкретних країн і встановлення правил для закриття " "звітного періоду та створення відкритих записів." +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "Can Create Asset" +msgstr "Може створити актив" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Technical field specifying if the account can generate asset depending on " +"it's type. It is used in the account form view." +msgstr "" +"Технічне поле із зазначенням, чи рахунок може генерувати актив залежно від " +"його типу. Він використовується в режимі перегляду форми рахунку." + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "Asset Model" +msgstr "Модель активу" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "" +"If this is selected, an asset will be created automatically when Journal " +"Items on this account are posted." +msgstr "" +"Якщо цей параметр вибрано, об'єкт буде створено автоматично, коли буде " +"опубліковано елементи журналу на цьому обліковому записі." + #: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 msgid "Tags" msgstr "Теги" @@ -8249,6 +8021,18 @@ msgstr "" "кредиторська/дебіторська заборгованість - для рахунків " "постачальників/клієнтів." +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "Internal Group" +msgstr "Внутрішня група" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "" +"The 'Internal Group' is used to filter accounts based on the internal group " +"set on the account type." +msgstr "" +"\"Внутрішня група\" використовується для фільтрації рахунків на основі " +"внутрішнього набору груп для типу рахунку." + #: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 msgid "Allow Reconciliation" msgstr "Дозвольте узгодження" @@ -9264,6 +9048,7 @@ msgid "Multi-currency invoices & Vendor Bills" msgstr "Мультивалютні рахунки-фактури та рахунки постачальників" #: ../../accounting/others/multicurrencies/invoices_payments.rst:54 +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Invoices" msgstr "Рахунки" @@ -10899,11 +10684,9 @@ msgstr "В Odoo" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:28 msgid "" "Go to :menuselection:`Invoicing / Accounting --> Configuration --> Settings`" -" and check *TaxCloud - Compute tax rates based on U.S. ZIP codes*." +" and check *TaxCloud - Compute tax rates based on U.S. ZIP codes* (note: " +"actually uses complete street address)." msgstr "" -"Перейдіть до :menuselection:`Виставлення рахунку/Бухоблік --> Налаштування " -"--> Налаштування` та перевірте *TaxCloud - Вирахувати ставки податку на " -"основі індексу США*." #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:30 msgid "Enter your TaxCloud credentials." @@ -10917,11 +10700,8 @@ msgstr "Натисніть ЗБЕРЕГТИ, щоби зберегти ваші msgid "" "Click the Refresh Icon next to *Default Category* to import the TIC product " "categories from TaxCloud (Taxability Information Codes). Some categories may" -" imply specific rates." +" imply specific rates or attract product/service type exemptions." msgstr "" -"Натисніть на іконку Оновити поруч із *Категорія за замовчуванням* для " -"імпорту категорій товарів TIC з TaxCloud (Інформаційні коди оподаткування). " -"Деякі категорії можуть передбачати конкретні ставки." #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:38 msgid "" @@ -10932,11 +10712,9 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:40 msgid "" -"Set a specific TaxCloud Category on the *General Information* tab of the " -"Product, or on the Product Category." +"Set a specific TaxCloud TIC Category on the *General Information* tab of the" +" Product, or on the Product Category." msgstr "" -"Встановіть конкретну категорію на вкладці Товару *Загальна інформація* або " -"на Категорії товару." #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:42 msgid "" @@ -11599,6 +11377,7 @@ msgid "Balance = Debit - Credit" msgstr "Баланс = Дебет - Кредит" #: ../../accounting/overview/main_concepts/memento.rst:84 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:83 msgid "Journal Entries" msgstr "Записи в журналі" @@ -13008,18 +12787,6 @@ msgstr "" "наприкінці тижня/місяця, якщо ви будете оплачувати всі ваші замовлення в " "пакетному режимі)." -#: ../../accounting/payables/misc/employee_expense.rst:171 -msgid "" -"tip If you want to learn more; check the documentation page :doc: " -"../../../sale/invoicing/service/expense `*How to re-invoice expenses to your" -" customers* " -"`__" -msgstr "" -"занотуйте, якщо ви хочете дізнатися більше; перевірте сторінку документації " -":doc: ../../../sale/invoicing/service/expense `*Як повторно виставити в " -"рахунку витрати вашим клієнтам* " -"`__" - #: ../../accounting/payables/misc/employee_expense.rst:176 msgid "Reimburse the employee" msgstr "Відшкодування працівнику" @@ -13360,6 +13127,22 @@ msgstr "Має рахунки" msgid "Technical field used for usability purposes" msgstr "Технічне поле використовується для зручності використання" +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Technical field containing the invoice for which the payment has been " +"generated." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "" +"This does not especially correspond to the invoices reconciled with the " +"payment," +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "as it can have been generated first, and reconciled later" +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Hide Payment Method" msgstr "Сховати метод оплати" @@ -13372,6 +13155,10 @@ msgstr "" "Технічне поле, яке використовується для приховання способу оплати, якщо у " "вибраному журналі є лише один доступний, який є \"ручним\"" +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Payment Method" +msgstr "Спосіб оплати" + #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Check: Pay bill by check and print it from Odoo." msgstr "Чек: сплачуйте рахунок чеком та надрукуйте його з Odoo." @@ -13399,6 +13186,29 @@ msgstr "" "ви передаєте в свій банк. Щоб включити кредитний переказ SEPA, модуль " "account_sepa повинен бути встановлений" +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Code" +msgstr "Код" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Technical field used to adapt the interface to the payment type selected." +msgstr "" +"Технічне поле, яке використовується для адаптації інтерфейсу до обраного " +"типу платежу." + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Saved payment token" +msgstr "Збережені токени оплати" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Note that tokens from acquirers set to only authorize transactions (instead " +"of capturing the amount) are not available." +msgstr "" +"Зверніть увагу, що токени від покупців, призначені для авторизації " +"транзакцій (замість отримання суми), недоступні." + #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Show Partner Bank Account" msgstr "Показати банківський рахунок партнера" @@ -13412,15 +13222,16 @@ msgstr "" "поле `partner_bank_account_id` у вигляді форми платежів" #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 -msgid "Code" -msgstr "Код" +msgid "Require Partner Bank Account" +msgstr "Необхідний банківський рахунок партнера" #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "" -"Technical field used to adapt the interface to the payment type selected." +"Technical field used to know whether the field `partner_bank_account_id` " +"needs to be required or not in the payments form views" msgstr "" -"Технічне поле, яке використовується для адаптації інтерфейсу до обраного " -"типу платежу." +"Технічне поле використовується для того, аби дізнатися, чи поле " +"`partner_bank_account_id` обов’язково вводити у формі платежів чи ні" #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Check Number" @@ -13436,6 +13247,15 @@ msgstr "" "надрукованому чеку вже є цифри або якщо поточна нумерація неправильна, її " "можна змінити на сторінці налаштування журналу." +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Journal Item Label" +msgstr "Мітка запису у журналі" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Change label of the counterpart that will hold the payment difference" +msgstr "" +"Змініть ярлик відповідного партнера, який буде містити різницю в оплаті" + #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:80 msgid "Try paying a supplier bill with a check" msgstr "Спробуйте сплатити рахунок постачальника чеком" @@ -13800,7 +13620,6 @@ msgstr "" "банківського переказу." #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:10 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:10 msgid "" "SEPA is supported by the banks of the 28 EU member states as well as " "Iceland, Norway, Switzerland, Andorra, Monaco and San Marino." @@ -14017,14 +13836,6 @@ msgstr "" msgid ":doc:`check`" msgstr ":doc:`check`" -#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:134 -msgid "How to define a new bank?" -msgstr "Як визначити новий банк?" - -#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:135 -msgid "How to reconcile bank statements?" -msgstr "Як узгодити банківські виписки?" - #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/bills_or_receipts.rst:3 msgid "When should I use supplier bills or purchase receipts?" msgstr "" @@ -14602,7 +14413,7 @@ msgid "Account Receivables" msgstr "Розрахунок з дебіторами" #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices.rst:3 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:53 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:77 msgid "Customer Invoices" msgstr "Рахунки клієнта" @@ -14803,6 +14614,162 @@ msgstr "" "в якому ви можете просто вибрати один із методів округлення, створених " "раніше. Якщо потрібно, округлення буде застосовано до рахунку-фактури." +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:3 +msgid "Credit Notes and Refunds" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:4 +msgid "" +"A **credit note**, or **credit memo**, is a document issued to a customer " +"that notifies them that they have been credited a certain amount." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:11 +msgid "There are several reasons that can lead to a credit note, such as:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:9 +msgid "a mistake in the invoice" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:10 +msgid "a return of the goods, or a rejection of the services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:11 +msgid "the goods delivered are damaged" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:14 +msgid "" +"Issuing a credit note is the only legal way to cancel, refund or modify a " +"validated invoice. Don’t forget to *register the payment* afterward if you " +"need to send money back to your customer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:20 +msgid "Issue a Credit Note" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:21 +msgid "" +"You can create a credit note from scratch by going to " +":menuselection:`Accounting --> Customers --> Credit Notes`, and by clicking " +"on *Create*. Filling the Credit Note’s form works the same way as the " +"Invoice’s form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:26 +msgid "" +"However, most of the time, credit notes are generated directly from the " +"invoices they are related to." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:29 +msgid "To do so, open the *Customer Invoice*, and click on *Add Credit Note*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:37 +msgid "You can choose between three options:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:35 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:44 +msgid "Partial Refund" +msgstr "Повернення частинами" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:36 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:55 +msgid "Full Refund" +msgstr "Повне повернення" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:37 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:66 +msgid "Full refund and new draft invoice" +msgstr "Повне повернення та нова чернетка рахунка" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:40 +msgid "" +"Credit Notes’ numbers start with “R” and are followed by the number of the " +"document they are related to (e.g., RINV/2019/0004)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:45 +msgid "" +"Odoo creates a draft credit note already prefilled with all the necessary " +"information from the original invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:48 +msgid "" +"This is the option to choose to do a partial refund, or if you want to " +"modify any detail on the credit note." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:52 +msgid "" +"This is the only option available for invoices that are already marked as " +"*Paid*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:56 +msgid "" +"Odoo creates a credit note, automatically validates it, and reconciles the " +"original invoice with it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:62 +msgid "" +"This is the option to choose to do a full refund or cancel a validated " +"invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:67 +msgid "" +"Odoo creates a credit note, automatically validates it, reconciles the " +"original invoice with it, and open a new draft invoice prefilled with the " +"same details from the original invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:71 +msgid "" +"This is the option to choose to modify the content of a validated invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:74 +msgid "Record a Vendor Refund" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:75 +msgid "" +"**Vendor Refunds** are recorded the same way you would do with invoices’ " +"credit notes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:77 +msgid "" +"You can either create a credit note from scratch by going to " +":menuselection:`Accounting --> Vendors --> Refund`, and by clicking on " +"*Create*, or by opening the validated *Vendor Bill*, and clicking on *Add " +"Credit Note*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:84 +msgid "" +"Issuing a credit note from an invoice creates a **reverse entry** that " +"zeroes out the journal items generated by the original invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:87 +msgid "Here is an example of an invoice’s journal entry:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:92 +msgid "" +"And here is the credit note’s journal entry generated to reverse the " +"original invoice above:" +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/deferred_revenues.rst:3 msgid "Deferred revenues: how to automate them?" msgstr "Доходи майбутніх періодів: як автоматизувати їх?" @@ -15271,10 +15238,6 @@ msgstr "" msgid "This process is good for both services and physical products." msgstr "Цей процес корисний як для надання послуг, так і для продажу товарів." -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:44 -msgid "Read more: *Invoice based on sales orders.*" -msgstr "Читати більше: *Рахунок на основі замовлення на продаж.*" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:47 msgid "Sales Order ‣ Delivery Order ‣ Invoice" msgstr "Замовлення на продаж ‣ Замовлення на доставку ‣ Рахунок-фактура" @@ -15303,10 +15266,6 @@ msgstr "" "решта пізніше), клієнт отримає два рахунки-фактури, по одному для кожного " "замовлення на доставку." -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:59 -msgid "Read more: *Invoice based on delivery orders.*" -msgstr "Читати більше: *Рахунок на основі замовлення на доставку.*" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:62 msgid "eCommerce Order ‣ Invoice" msgstr "Замовлення в електронній комерції ‣ Рахунок-фактура" @@ -15379,14 +15338,6 @@ msgstr "" "послуг компанії, які виставляють рахунки-фактури за встановлену ціну, вони " "використовують звичайний замовлення на продаж." -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:94 -msgid "" -"Read more: - *How to invoice based on time and material?* - *How to manage" -" contracts and invoicing plans?*" -msgstr "" -"Читати більше: - *Як виставити рахунок на основі часу та матеріалів?* - " -"*Як керувати планом контрактів та виставленням рахунків?*" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:99 msgid "Recurring Contracts ‣ Invoices" msgstr "Повторювані контракти ‣ Рахунки-фактури" @@ -15401,10 +15352,6 @@ msgstr "" "Частота виставлення рахунків та послуг/товарів, на які виставлено рахунок, " "визначаються на контракті." -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:105 -msgid "Read more: *Subscription based invoicing.*" -msgstr "Читати більше: *Виставлення рахунків на основі підписки.*" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/overview.rst:111 msgid "Creating an invoice manually" msgstr "Створення рахунка-фактури вручну" @@ -15512,14 +15459,6 @@ msgstr "" "(не робіть 50% через 10 днів, а 50% - за 21 день, тому що з округленням це " "може бути не рівно 100%)" -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/payment_terms.rst:31 -msgid "" -"screenshot payment term forms, after QDP have commited the change planned on" -" this object" -msgstr "" -"зробіть скріншот форм терміну оплати, після того, як QDP здійснило " -"заплановані зміни на цьому об'єкті" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/payment_terms.rst:35 msgid "Using Payment Terms" msgstr "Використання умов оплати" @@ -15599,132 +15538,193 @@ msgstr "" msgid ":doc:`cash_discounts`" msgstr ":doc:`cash_discounts`" -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:3 -msgid "How to edit or refund an invoice?" -msgstr "Як редагувати або робити повернення по рахунку-фактурі?" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:4 -msgid "" -"In Odoo, it's not possible to modify an invoice that has been validated and " -"sent to the customer. If a mistake was made on a validated invoice, the " -"legal way to handle that is to refund the invoice, reconcile it with the " -"original invoice to close them and create a new invoice." -msgstr "" -"В Odoo неможливо змінити рахунок-фактуру, який було перевірено та надіслано " -"клієнту. Якщо помилка була зроблена на підтвердженому рахунку-фактурі, в " -"юридичний спосіб це можна вирішити так: повернути рахунок-фактуру, узгодити " -"його з оригінальним рахунком-фактурою, закрити його та створити новий " -"рахунок-фактуру." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:10 -msgid "Modifying a validated invoice" -msgstr "Змінення підтвердженого рахунка-фактури" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:12 -msgid "" -"If you need to modify an existing invoice, use the Refund Invoice button on " -"the invoice. In the refund method field, select \"Modify: create a refund, " -"reconcile, and create a new draft invoice\"." -msgstr "" -"Якщо вам потрібно змінити існуючий рахунок-фактуру, скористайтеся кнопкою " -"\"Рахунок-фактура\" у рахунку-фактурі. У полі методу повернення виберіть " -"\"Змінити: створити повернення, узгодити та створити новий рахунок-" -"фактуру\"." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:19 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:37 -msgid "Odoo will automatically:" -msgstr "Odoo буде автоматично:" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:21 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:39 -msgid "Create a refund for your invoice" -msgstr "Створювати повернення для вашого рахунка-фактури" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:22 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:40 -msgid "" -"Reconcile the refund invoice with the original invoice (marking both as " -"Paid)" -msgstr "" -"Узгоджувати рахунок-фактуру з оригінальним рахунком-фактурою (позначаючи " -"обидва як сплачено)" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:23 -msgid "Create a new draft invoice you can modify" -msgstr "Створить новий рахунок-фактуру, який можна змінити" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:25 -msgid "" -"Then, you can modify the draft invoice and validate it once it's correct." -msgstr "" -"Потім ви можете змінити проект рахунка-фактури та підтвердити його, коли він" -" буде правильним." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:28 -msgid "Cancelling an invoice" -msgstr "Скасування рахунка-фактури" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:30 -msgid "" -"If you need to cancel an existing invoice, use the Refund Invoice button on " -"the invoice. In the refund method field, select \"Cancel: create a refund " -"and reconcile\"." -msgstr "" -"Якщо вам потрібно скасувати існуючий рахунок-фактуру, скористайтеся кнопкою " -"\"Рахунок-фактура\" у рахунку-фактурі. У полі методу повернення виберіть " -"\"Скасувати: створити повернення та узгодити\"." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:42 -msgid "" -"Nothing else needs to be done. You can send the refund by regular mail or " -"email to your customer, if you already sent the original invoice." -msgstr "" -"Нічого ще не потрібно робити. Ви можете відправити повернення звичайною " -"поштою або електронною поштою своєму клієнту, якщо ви вже відправили " -"оригінальний рахунок-фактуру." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:46 -msgid "Refunding part of an invoice" -msgstr "Повернення по рахунку-фактурі" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:48 -msgid "" -"If you need to refund an existing invoice partially, use the Refund Invoice " -"button on the invoice. In the refund method field, select \"Create a draft " -"refund\"." -msgstr "" -"Якщо вам потрібно частково повернути наявний рахунок-фактуру, скористайтеся " -"кнопкою \"Рахунок-фактура\" у рахунку-фактурі. У полі методу повернення " -"виберіть \"Створити повернення\"." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:55 -msgid "" -"Odoo will automatically create a draft refund. You may modify the refund " -"(example: remove the lines you do not want to refund) and validate it. Then," -" send the refund by regular mail or email to your customer." -msgstr "" -"Odoo автоматично створить чернетку повернення. Ви можете змінити повернення " -"(наприклад, видаліть рядки, які ви не хочете відшкодувати) та перевірити їх." -" Потім відправте повернення звичайною поштою або електронною поштою своєму " -"клієнту." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:61 -msgid "" -"Refunding an invoice is different from refunding a payment. Usually, a " -"refund invoice is sent before the customer has done a payment. If the " -"customer has already paid, they should be reimbursed by doing a customer " -"payment refund." -msgstr "" -"Повернення по рахунку-фактурі відрізняється від повернення платежу. Зазвичай" -" повернення по рахунку-фактурі надсилається до того, як клієнт здійснив " -"оплату. Якщо клієнт уже заплатив, кошти повинні бути відшкодовані, " -"здійснивши оплату повернення клієнту." - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments.rst:3 msgid "Customer Payments" msgstr "Платежі клієнта" +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:3 +msgid "Batch Payments: SEPA Direct Debit (SDD)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:4 +msgid "" +"SEPA, the Single Euro Payments Area, is a payment-integration initiative of " +"the European Union for simplification of bank transfers denominated in EURO." +" With **SEPA Direct Debit**, your customers can sign a **mandate** that " +"authorizes you to collect future payments from their bank accounts " +"automatically." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:10 +msgid "" +"You can record your customer mandates in Odoo, and generate XML files " +"containing pending payments made with an SDD mandate." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:0 +msgid "" +"SDD is supported by all SEPA countries, which includes the 28 member states " +"of the European Union as well as additional countries." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:0 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:123 +msgid "" +"`List of all SEPA countries. `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:19 +msgid "" +"Go to :menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Settings` nd activate" +" the **SEPA Direct Debit (SDD)** feature. Enter the **Creditor Identifier** " +"of your company. This number is provided by your bank, or the authority " +"responsible for delivering them." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:28 +msgid "SEPA Direct Debit Mandates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:30 +msgid "Create a mandate" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:31 +msgid "" +"The SEPA Direct Debit Mandate is the document that your customers sign to " +"authorize you to collect money directly from their bank accounts." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:34 +msgid "" +"To create a new one, go to :menuselection:`Accounting --> Customers --> " +"Direct Debit Mandates`, click on *Create*, and fill out the new mandate’s " +"form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:41 +msgid "" +"First, export the PDF file by clicking on *Print*. It is then up to your " +"customer to sign this document. Once done, upload the signed file in the " +"**Original Document** field, and click on *Validate* to start running the " +"mandate." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:47 +msgid "" +"First, make sure, that the **IBAN bank accounts details** are correctly " +"recorded on the debtor’s contact form, under the *Accounting* tab, and in " +"your own *Bank Account* settings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:52 +msgid "Close or revoke a mandate" +msgstr "Закрийте чи скасуйте мандат" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Direct Debit mandates are closed automatically after their *End Date*. If " +"this field is left blank, then the mandate keeps being *Active* until it is " +"*Closed* or *Revoked*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:60 +msgid "" +"Clicking on **Close** updates the mandate’s end day to the current day. This" +" means that invoices made after the present day won’t be processed " +"automatically with an SDD payment." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:64 +msgid "" +"Clicking on **Revoke** disables the mandate immediately. No SDD payment can " +"be registered anymore, regardless of the invoice’s date. However, payments " +"that have already been registered will still be included to the next SDD XML" +" file." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:70 +msgid "" +"Once a mandate has been *closed* or *revoked*, it cannot be reactivated. If " +"a customer requires to pay with SDD payments again, you will have to create " +"a new mandate from scratch." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:75 +msgid "Get paid with SDD Batch Payments" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:78 +msgid "" +"All new posted invoice issued to customers with an active mandate will " +"automatically register payment and have their status marked as *Paid*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:82 +msgid "" +"If you have unpaid invoices that could be paid with a new mandate, it is " +"still possible to do it. Go on the invoice, click on *Register Payment* and " +"choose *SEPA Direct Debit* as payment method." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:87 +msgid "Generate SEPA Direct Debit XML files to submit payments" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:88 +msgid "" +"To submit your SDD payments to your bank, you will first generate an **XML " +"file** that can be uploaded directly to your bank interface." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:91 +msgid "" +"The files generated by Odoo follow the SEPA Direct Debit **PAIN.008.001.02**" +" specifications as required by the SEPA customer-to-bank Implementation " +"Guidelines, which ensures compatibility with the banks." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:95 +msgid "" +"To generate your XML file for the pending SDD payments, go to the related " +"*bank journal* on your *Accounting dashboard*, then click on *Direct Debit " +"Payments to Collect*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:102 +msgid "" +"Select all the payments in the list that you want to include in your SDD XML" +" file, then click on *Action* and select *Create Batch Payment*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:108 +msgid "" +"Odoo then takes you to your *Batch Payment*’s form. Click on *Validate* and " +"then download the SDD XML file." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:114 +msgid "Finally, upload this file to your bank to process the payments." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:117 +msgid "" +"You can retrieve all the generated SDD XML files by going to " +":menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Customers --> Batch " +"Payments`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:121 +msgid ":doc:`../../bank/setup/create_bank_account`" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:122 +msgid "" +"`Odoo Academy: SEPA Direct Debit Mandates (SDD) " +"`_" +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/check.rst:3 msgid "How to register customer payments by checks?" msgstr "Як зареєструвати клієнтські оплати чеком?" @@ -16371,172 +16371,6 @@ msgstr "" "Якщо ви бажаєте отримати нагадування перед фактичною датою, встановіть " "від'ємне число днів." -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:3 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:29 -msgid "Get paid with SEPA" -msgstr "Отримайте оплату із SEPA" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:5 -msgid "" -"SEPA, the Single Euro Payments Area, is a payment-integration initiative of " -"the European Union for simplification of bank transfers denominated in EURO." -" SEPA Direct Debit allows you to withdraw money from the bank accounts of " -"your customers with their approval." -msgstr "" -"SEPA, єдина зона євро платежів, є ініціативою Європейського Союзу з " -"платіжної інтеграції для спрощення банківських переказів, виражених у євро. " -"Прямий дебет SEPA дозволяє вам вилучати гроші з банківських рахунків ваших " -"клієнтів із затвердженням." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:13 -msgid "" -"With Odoo, you can record customer mandates, generate an SDD XML file " -"containing customer payments and upload it in your bank interface. The file " -"follows the SEPA Direct Debit PAIN.008.001.02 specifications. This is a " -"well-defined standard that makes consensus among banks." -msgstr "" -"За допомогою Odoo ви можете записувати мандати клієнтів, створювати XML-файл" -" SDD, що містить платежі клієнтів, і завантажити його у ваш банківський " -"інтерфейс. Файл слідує специфікаціям SEPA Direct Debit PAIN.008.001.02. Це " -"чітко визначений стандарт, який робить консенсус між банками." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:21 -msgid "" -"Go in :menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Settings` and " -"activate the SEPA Direct Debit (SDD) Feature. Enter the Creditor Identifier " -"of your company. This number is provided by your bank." -msgstr "" -"Перейдіть до :menuselection:`Бухоблік --> Налаштування --> Налаштування` та " -"активуйте функцію прямого дебету SEPA (SDD). Введіть ідентифікатор кредитора" -" вашої компанії. Цей номер надається вашим банком." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:32 -msgid "Direct Debit Mandates" -msgstr "Мандати прямого дебету" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:34 -msgid "" -"Before withdrawing money from a customer bank account, your customer has to " -"sign a mandate. Go in :menuselection:`Accounting --> Sales --> Direct Debit " -"Mandates` and create a new mandate." -msgstr "" -"Перш ніж вилучати гроші з рахунку клієнта, ваш клієнт повинен підписати " -"мандат. Перейдіть до :menuselection:`Бухобліку --> Продажі --> Прямі " -"дебетові мандати` та створіть новий мандат." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:41 -msgid "SEPA Direct Debit only works between IBAN Bank Accounts." -msgstr "Прямий дебет SEPA працює лише між банківськими рахунками IBAN." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:43 -msgid "" -"Once you have entered all the information in the customer mandate, you can " -"print it and ask your customer to sign it. Once it is done, you can upload " -"the mandate signed by your customer on the mandate in Odoo." -msgstr "" -"Після того, як ви введете всю інформацію в мандат замовника, ви можете " -"роздрукувати його та попросити клієнта його підписати. Як тільки це буде " -"зроблено, ви зможете завантажити мандат, підписаний вашим клієнтом в мандат " -"в Odoo." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:50 -msgid "You can now validate the mandate." -msgstr "Тепер ви можете перевірити мандат." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:55 -msgid "Let's create an invoice for that customer." -msgstr "Давайте створимо рахунок для клієнта." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:57 -msgid "" -"When you will validate this invoice, the payment will be automatically " -"generated and your invoice will be directly marked as paid." -msgstr "" -"Коли ви підтвердите цей рахунок-фактуру, платіж буде автоматично створено, а" -" ваш рахунок-фактура буде безпосередньо позначено як оплачений." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:61 -msgid "" -"If you already had some invoices for that customer that could be paid using " -"that mandate, it's still possible to do it. Go on the invoice, click on " -"register payment and choose the Sepa Direct Debit as payment method." -msgstr "" -"Якщо у вас вже є рахунки-фактури для цього клієнта, які можуть бути " -"виплачені за допомогою цього мандату, це все-таки можливо. Перейдіть на " -"рахунок-фактуру, натисніть на реєстровий платіж і виберіть спосіб оплати " -"прямого дебету Sepa." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:67 -msgid "Generate SDD Files" -msgstr "Створення файлів SDD" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:69 -msgid "" -"You can generate the SDD File with all the customer payments to send to your" -" bank directly from the accounting dashboard :" -msgstr "" -"Ви можете створити файл SDD з усіма платіжками клієнтів, щоби відправити їх " -"у свій банк безпосередньо з інформаційної панелі бухобліку:" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:75 -msgid "" -"You select the payments in the list that you want to include in your SDD " -"File, click on action and select \"Generate Direct Debit XML\"." -msgstr "" -"Ви вибираєте платежі у списку, який ви хочете включити до вашого файлу SDD, " -"натисніть на дію та виберіть \"Генерувати прямий дебет XML\"." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:81 -msgid "" -"You can now download the XML file generated by Odoo and upload it in your " -"bank interface." -msgstr "" -"Тепер ви можете завантажити файл XML, створений Odoo, і завантажити його у " -"свій банківський інтерфейс." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:85 -msgid "" -"You can retrieve all the generated XML by activating the developer mode and " -"going in :menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Payments --> SDD " -"Payment File`." -msgstr "" -"Ви можете отримати весь згенерований XML, активуючи режим розробника та " -"переходячи на :menuselection:`Бухоблік --> Налаштування --> Платежі --> Файл" -" оплати SDD`." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:89 -msgid "Close or revoke a mandate" -msgstr "Закрийте чи скасуйте мандат" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:91 -msgid "" -"The Direct Debit mandate will be closed automatically once the end date " -"defined on it is reached. However, you can **close** a mandate earlier than " -"initially planned. To do that, simply go on the mandate and click on the " -"\"Close\" button.The end date of the mandate will be updated to today's " -"date. This means you will not be able to pay invoices with an invoice date " -"superior to this end date. Be careful, once a mandate is closed, it cannot " -"be reopened." -msgstr "" -"Мандат \"Прямий дебет\" буде автоматично закритий, коли визначена дата " -"закінчення буде досягнута. Тим не менш, ви можете **закрити** мандат раніше," -" ніж спочатку планувалося. Для цього просто пропустіть мандат і натисніть " -"кнопку \"Закрити\". Дата завершення мандату буде оновлено до сьогоднішньої " -"дати. Це означає, що ви не зможете сплатити рахунки з датою накладної, що " -"перевищує цю дату закінчення. Будьте уважні, як тільки мандат буде закрито, " -"його неможливо відновити." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:99 -msgid "" -"You can also **revoke** a mandate. In that case, you won't be able to pay " -"any invoice using that mandate anymore, no matter the invoice date.To do " -"that, simply go on the mandate and click on the \"Revoke\" button." -msgstr "" -"Ви також можете **відкликати** мандат. У такому випадку ви не зможете " -"заплатити будь-який рахунок-фактуру за цим мандатом, незалежно від дати " -"рахунку-фактури. Для цього просто перейдіть до мандату та натисніть кнопку " -"\"Скасувати\"." - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/recording.rst:3 msgid "What are the different ways to record a payment?" msgstr "Які є способи запису оплати?" diff --git a/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po index 93e44fcef..b141deff4 100644 --- a/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po +++ b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po @@ -4,17 +4,17 @@ # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # # Translators: -# Martin Trigaux, 2019 # Alina Lisnenko , 2019 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: Alina Lisnenko , 2019\n" +"Last-Translator: Martin Trigaux, 2019\n" "Language-Team: Ukrainian (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/uk/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -38,25 +38,25 @@ msgstr "Перетворення лідів у нагоди" msgid "" "The system can generate leads instead of opportunities, in order to add a " "qualification step before converting a *Lead* into an *Opportunity* and " -"assigning to the right sales people. You can activate this mode from the CRM" -" Settings. It applies to all your sales channels by default. But you can " -"make it specific for specific channels from their configuration form." +"assigning to the right sales people." msgstr "" -"Система може генерувати ліди, а не нагоди, для того, щоб додати " -"кваліфікаційний крок перед перетворенням *Ліда* в *Нагоду* і присвоєння " -"потрібним продавцям. Ви можете активувати цей режим із налаштувань CRM. Він " -"застосовується до всіх ваших каналів продажів за замовчуванням. Але ви " -"можете зробити його специфічним для певних каналів за формою їх " -"налаштування." -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:13 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:9 +msgid "" +"You can activate this mode from the CRM Settings. It applies to all your " +"sales channels by default. But you can make it specific for specific " +"channels from their configuration form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:14 #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:41 -#: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:13 ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:12 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:8 ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:13 +#: ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:12 #: ../../crm/track_leads/prospect_visits.rst:12 msgid "Configuration" msgstr "Налаштування" -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:15 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:16 msgid "" "For this feature to work, go to :menuselection:`CRM --> Configuration --> " "Settings` and activate the *Leads* feature." @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ msgstr "" "Щоб ця функція працювала, перейдіть на :menuselection:`CRM --> Налаштування " "--> Налаштування` та активуйте функцію *Ліди*." -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:21 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:22 msgid "" "You will now have a new submenu *Leads* under *Leads* where they will " "aggregate." @@ -72,11 +72,11 @@ msgstr "" "Тепер у вас з'явиться нове підменю *Ліди* у розділі *Ліди*, де вони " "накопичуються." -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:28 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:29 msgid "Convert a lead into an opportunity" msgstr "Конвертуйте лід у нагоду" -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:30 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:31 msgid "" "When you click on a *Lead* you will have the option to convert it to an " "opportunity and decide if it should still be assigned to the same " @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ msgstr "" "нагоду і вирішити, чи слід його ще призначити тому ж каналу/продавцю, і якщо" " вам потрібно створити нового клієнта." -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:37 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:38 msgid "" "If you already have an opportunity with that customer Odoo will " "automatically offer you to merge with that opportunity. In the same manner, " @@ -97,6 +97,44 @@ msgstr "" "об'єднати цю нагоду. Точно так само Odoo автоматично запропонує вам зв'язати" " з існуючим клієнтом, якщо цей клієнт вже існує." +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:44 +msgid "Merge opportunities" +msgstr "Об'єднати нагоди" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:46 +msgid "" +"Odoo will also automatically propose to merge opportunities if they have the" +" same email address. When merging opportunities, Odoo merges the information" +" into the opportunity which was created first, giving priority to the " +"information present on the first opportunity." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:51 +msgid "" +"No information is lost: data from the other opportunity is logged in the " +"chatter and the information fields for easy access." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:57 +msgid "" +"Would you find a duplicate yourself, ...you can also merge opportunities or " +"leads even if the system doesn't propose it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:60 +msgid "" +"Here’s how, from the list view. Select the opportunities or leads you want " +"to merge and the action button will appear. Then, you can select merge." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:66 +msgid "..note::" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:67 +msgid "It is also possible to merge more than 2 opportunities or leads." +msgstr "" + #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_email.rst:3 msgid "Generate leads/opportunities from emails" msgstr "Генеруйте ліди/нагоди з електронної пошти" @@ -241,6 +279,104 @@ msgstr "" "кваліфікації перед призначенням форми правильному продавцю. Зробивши це, " "активуйте *Ліди* у налаштуваннях CRM та перейдіть на :doc:`convert`." +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:3 +msgid "Lead mining" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:4 +msgid "" +"In any business, getting quality leads is essential to keep the business " +"growing. Lead mining allows you to generate leads from scratch directly from" +" your database. Target your leads based on a set of criteria such as the " +"country, the size of the company, the industry your leads are coming from to" +" make them relevant to your business." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:10 +msgid "" +"For this feature to work, go to :menuselection:`CRM → Configuration → " +"Settings` and activate the **Lead Mining** feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:17 +msgid "Start generating leads" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:18 +msgid "" +"You will now have a new button **Generate Leads** available in your " +"pipeline. You are also able to create lead mining requests from the " +"**Configuration → Lead Mining Requests** and trough **Leads → Leads** where " +"you have the **Generate Leads** button" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:25 +msgid "" +"From there, click on the **Generate Leads** button, a window where you will " +"be able to pick your criteria will pop up." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:32 +msgid "" +"When choosing to target Companied and their contacts you can choose the " +"contacts you are getting based on Role or Seniority. When getting contact " +"information make sure to be aware of the latest EU regulation, get more " +"information about General Data Protection Regulation on `Odoo GDPR " +"`__," +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:37 +msgid "" +"You can decide to filter the leads you are getting depending on the size " +"(number of employees) of the companies. You can pick the countries your " +"leads are coming from. It is possible to pick multiple countries. You can " +"pick the industries your leads are coming from. It is possible to pick " +"multiple countries." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:41 +msgid "" +"You can choose the salesperson and the Salesteam the lead will be assigned " +"to. You can also add tags to track your generated leads." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:45 +msgid "The generated leads will have the name of the company." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:48 +msgid "Pricing" +msgstr "Ціноутворення" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:49 +msgid "" +"This is an In-App Purchase feature, each generated lead will cost you one " +"credit. If you choose to get contact information each contact will also cost" +" us one additional credit. Here is the pricing for this `feature " +"`__, To buy credits you can " +"either go to CRM > Configuration > Settings > Buy Credits; or go to Settings" +" > In-App Purchases>View my Services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:62 +msgid "" +"The blue box will automatically tell you how many credits are going to be " +"consumed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:65 +msgid "" +"If you are on Odoo Online (SAAS) and have the Enterprise version, you " +"benefit from free trial credits to test the feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:67 +msgid "" +"More information about `In-App Purchases " +"`__," +" (IAP)." +msgstr "" + #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/send_quotes.rst:3 msgid "Send quotations" msgstr "Надсилання комерційних пропозицій" diff --git a/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po index f4960e1b3..a26498df3 100644 --- a/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po +++ b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Alina Lisnenko , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Ukrainian (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/uk/)\n" @@ -880,27 +880,23 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:39 msgid "" "In your Odoo instance, click on **Settings**. You will have a section " -"showing you the active users on your database. Click on **Manage access " -"rights.**" +"showing you the active users on your database. Click on **Manage Users.**" msgstr "" -"У своїй версії Odoo натисніть **Налаштування**. У вас буде розділ, який " -"покаже вам активних користувачів у вашій базі даних. Натисніть **Керувати " -"правами доступу**." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:44 -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:82 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:43 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:80 msgid "|settings|" msgstr "|settings|" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:44 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:43 msgid "|browse_users|" msgstr "|browse_users|" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:47 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:46 msgid "You'll then see the list of your users." msgstr "Після цього ви побачите список ваших користувачів." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:52 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:51 msgid "" "The pre-selected filter *Internal Users* shows your paying users (different " "from the *Portal Users* which are free). If you remove this filter, you'll " @@ -911,31 +907,26 @@ msgstr "" "Якщо ви видалите цей фільтр, ви отримаєте всіх своїх користувачів (тих, кого" " ви оплачуєте, а також портальні)." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:57 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:56 msgid "" "In your list of users, click on the user you want to deactivate. As soon as " -"you are on the userform, go with your mouse cursor on the status **Active** " -"(top right). Click on Active and you will notice that the status will change" -" to **Inactive** immediately." +"you are on the userform, click on the Action drop down menu, and then click " +"on Archive." msgstr "" -"У своєму списку користувачів натисніть на користувача, якого ви бажаєте " -"деактивувати. Як тільки ви зайдете на користувацьку форму, перейдіть за " -"допомогою курсора миші на статус **Активний** (угорі праворуч). Натисніть на" -" Активний, і ви помітите, що статус негайно зміниться на **Неактивний**." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:66 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:64 msgid "The user is now deactivated." msgstr "Користувача деактивовано." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:68 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:66 msgid "**Never** deactivate the main user (*admin*)" msgstr "**Ніколи** не деактивуйте головного користувача (**адміністратора**)." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:71 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:69 msgid "Uninstalling Apps" msgstr "Видалення додатків" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:73 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:71 msgid "" "Make sure you first test what you are about to do on a :ref:`duplicate " "` of your database before making any changes (*especially*" @@ -945,7 +936,7 @@ msgstr "" "перевірте, що ви збираєтесь робити на :ref:`тестовій ` " "базі даних. " -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:77 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:75 msgid "" "In your Odoo instance click on **Settings**; in this app, you will be able " "to see how many applications you have installed. Click on **Browse Apps** to" @@ -955,11 +946,11 @@ msgstr "" "побачити, скільки програм було встановлено. Натисніть **Переглянути " "додатки**, щоб отримати доступ до списку встановлених програм." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:82 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:80 msgid "|browse_apps|" msgstr "|browse_apps|" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:85 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:83 msgid "" "In your applications' dashboard, you will see all the icons of your " "applications. Click on the application you want to uninstall. Then, on the " @@ -969,7 +960,7 @@ msgstr "" "програму, яку ви хочете видалити. Потім, за формою додатку, натисніть кнопку" " **Видалити**." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:92 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:90 msgid "" "Some applications have dependencies, like Invoicing, eCommerce, etc. " "Therefore, the system will give you a warning message to advise you of what " @@ -984,22 +975,22 @@ msgstr "" "видалено (і дані в них назавжди зникнуть). Якщо ви впевнені, що все одно " "хочете видалити додаток, натисніть кнопку **Підтвердити**." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:99 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:97 msgid "" "Last, after having checked the warning message (if any), click **Confirm**." msgstr "" "Нарешті, після перевірки попередження (якщо воно є), натисніть кнопку " "**Підтвердити**." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:104 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:102 msgid "You have finished uninstalling your application." msgstr "Ви завершили видалення вашого модуля." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:107 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:105 msgid "Good to know" msgstr "Варто знати" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:109 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:107 msgid "" "**Uninstalling apps, managing users, etc. is up to you**: no one else can " "know if your business flow is broken better than you. If we were to " @@ -1015,7 +1006,7 @@ msgstr "" "зламаний, оскільки ми не знаємо, як ви працюєте, і тому не можемо перевірити" " такі операції." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:115 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:113 msgid "" "**Odoo Apps have dependencies**: this means that you may need to install " "modules that you do not actively use to access some features of Odoo you " @@ -1032,7 +1023,7 @@ msgstr "" "Веб-сайту, це необхідно, щоби функція комерційних пропозицій онлайн " "працювала належним чином." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:122 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:120 msgid "" "**Always test app installation/removal on a duplicate** (or on a free trial " "database): that way you can know what other apps may be required, etc. This " diff --git a/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/general.po b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/general.po index 18544c7fa..8a5cc1aa4 100644 --- a/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/general.po +++ b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/general.po @@ -4,7 +4,6 @@ # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # # Translators: -# Martin Trigaux, 2019 # Alina Lisnenko , 2019 # #, fuzzy @@ -12,7 +11,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Alina Lisnenko , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Ukrainian (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/uk/)\n" @@ -32,13 +31,15 @@ msgstr "Аутентифікація" #: ../../general/auth/azure.rst:3 msgid "OAuth" -msgstr "" +msgstr "OAuth" #: ../../general/auth/azure.rst:5 msgid "" "Due to specific requirements in Azure's OAuth implementation, Microsoft " "Azure OAuth identification is NOT compatible with Odoo at the moment." msgstr "" +"Відповідно до спеціальних вимог у впровадженні Azure OAuth, ідентифікація " +"Microsoft Azure OAuth на даний момент НЕ сумісна з Odoo." #: ../../general/auth/google.rst:3 msgid "How to allow users to sign in with their Google account" @@ -118,57 +119,68 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:3 msgid "How to allow users to sign in with LDAP" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Як дозволити користувачам входити через LDAP" #: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:5 msgid "Install the LDAP module in General Settings." -msgstr "" +msgstr "Встановіть модуль LDAP у Загальних налаштуваннях." #: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:7 msgid "Click on **Create** in Setup your LDAP Server." -msgstr "" +msgstr "Натисніть **Створити** у налаштуваннях вашого сервера LDAP." #: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:15 msgid "Choose the company about to use the LDAP." -msgstr "" +msgstr "Оберіть про компанію для використання LDAP." #: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:20 msgid "" "In **Server Information**, enter the IP address of your server and the port " "it listens to." msgstr "" +"В **Інформації сервера**, введіть IP-адресу вашого сервера та його порт." #: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:22 msgid "Tick **User TLS** if your server is compatible." -msgstr "" +msgstr "Позначте **TLS користувача**, якщо ваш сервер сумісний." #: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:27 msgid "" "In **Login Information**, enter ID and password of the account used to query" " the server. If left empty, the server will be queried anonymously." msgstr "" +"В **інформації входу**, введіть ID та пароль облікового запису, який " +"використовується для запиту сервера. Якщо залишите порожнім, сервер буде " +"запитуватися анонімно." #: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:32 msgid "" "In **Process Parameter**, enter the domain name of your LDAP server in LDAP " "nomenclature (e.g. ``dc=example,dc=com``)." msgstr "" +"В **Параметрах оброки**, введіть доменне ім'я вашого сервера LDAP в " +"номенклатурі LDAP (напр. ``dc=example,dc=com``)." #: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:34 msgid "In **LDAP filter**, enter ``uid=%s``" -msgstr "" +msgstr "У **фільтрі LDAP**, введіть ``uid=%s``" #: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:39 msgid "" "In **User Information**, tick *Create User* if you want Odoo to create a " "User profile the first time someone log in with LDAP." msgstr "" +"В **Інформації користувача** позначте *Створити користувача*, якщо ви " +"хочете, щоби Odoo створила профіль користувача, коли хтось вперше увійде " +"через LDAP." #: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:41 msgid "" "In **Template User**, indicate a template for the new profiles created. If " "left blanked, the admin profile will be used as template." msgstr "" +"У **Шаблоні користувача**, вкажіть шаблон для новостворених профілів. Якщо " +"залишити заблокованим, профіль адміна, буде використовуватися як шаблон." #: ../../general/base_import.rst:3 msgid "Data Import" @@ -429,6 +441,12 @@ msgid "" "difficult to guess which part of a date format is the day and which part is " "the month in a date such as '01-03-2016'." msgstr "" +"Odoo може автоматично визначити, чи колонка є датою, та спробує вгадати " +"формат дати з набору найчастіше використовуваних форматів дати. Хоча цей " +"процес може працювати для багатьох форматів дат, деякі формати дати не " +"будуть розпізнані. Це може спричинити плутанину через перетворення дня в " +"місяць; важко здогадатися, яка частина формату дати - це день, а яка - " +"місяць у такій даті, як '01-03-2016 '." #: ../../general/base_import/import_faq.rst:83 msgid "" @@ -971,8 +989,8 @@ msgstr "" "(company_1), а Ерік працює в компанії Organi. Зв'язок між особами та " "компаніями здійснюється за допомогою зовнішнього ідентифікатора компаній. " "Нам довелося привласнювати \"Зовнішній ID\" за назвою таблиці, щоб уникнути " -"конфлікту ідентифікатора між особами та компаніями (person_1 та company_1, " -"які поділилися однаковим ідентифікатором 1 в оригінальній базі даних)." +"конфлікту ID між особами та компаніями (person_1 та company_1, які " +"поділилися однаковим ID 1 в оригінальній базі даних)." #: ../../general/base_import/import_faq.rst:250 msgid "" @@ -986,6 +1004,110 @@ msgstr "" "пов'язані з першою компанією). Спочатку потрібно імпортувати компанії, а " "потім особи." +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase.rst:3 +msgid "In-App Purchase" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:3 +msgid "General guide about In-App Purchase (IAP) Services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:4 +msgid "" +"In-App Purchases (IAP) gives access to additional services through Odoo. For" +" instance, it allows me to send SMS Text Messages or to send Invoices by " +"post directly from my database." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:7 +msgid "Buying Credits" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Each IAP Service relies on prepaid credits to work and has its own pricing. " +"To consult my current balance or to recharge my account, go to *Settings> " +"Odoo IAP > View my Services*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:13 +msgid "" +"If I am on Odoo Online (SAAS) and have the Enterprise version, I benefit " +"from free credits to test our IAP features." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:16 +msgid "IAP accounts" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:17 +msgid "" +"Credits to use IAP services are stored on IAP accounts, which are specific " +"to each service and database. By default, IAP accounts are common to all " +"companies, but can be restricted to specific ones by going to *Settings app " +"> Activate the Developer Mode > Technical Settings > IAP Accoun*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:23 +msgid "IAP Portal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:24 +msgid "" +"The IAP Portal is a platform regrouping my IAP Services. It is accessible " +"from *Settings app > Odoo IAP > View my Services*. From there, I can view my" +" current balance, recharge my credits, review my consumption and set a " +"reminder to when credits are low." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:30 +msgid "Get notified when credits are low" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:31 +msgid "" +"To be notified when it’s time to recharge my credits, I’ll go to my IAP " +"Portal through *Settings app> Odoo IAP > View my Services*, unfold a service" +" and mark the Receive threshold warning option. Then, I’ll provide a minimum" +" amount of credits and email addresses. Now, every time that the limit is " +"reached, an automatic reminder will be sent to by email!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:38 +msgid "IAP services available" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:39 +msgid "" +"Different services are available depending on the hosting type of your " +"Database:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:41 +msgid "" +"*Odoo Online (SAAS)*: only the IAP services provided by Odoo can be used " +"(i.e. the SMS, Snailmail, Reveal and Partner Autocomplete features);" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:43 +msgid "" +"*Odoo.sh and Odoo Enterprise (on-premise)*: both the services provided by " +"Odoo and by third-party apps can be used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:46 +msgid "Offering my own services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:47 +msgid "" +"I am more than welcome to offer my own IAP services through Odoo Apps! It is" +" the perfect opportunity to get recurring revenue for an ongoing service use" +" rather than — and possibly instead of — a sole initial purchase. Please, " +"find more information at: `In-App Purchase " +"`_" +msgstr "" + #: ../../general/odoo_basics.rst:3 msgid "Basics" msgstr "Основне" @@ -1066,17 +1188,9 @@ msgid "" "`Deactivating Users <../../db_management/documentation.html#deactivating-" "users>`_" msgstr "" -"`Деактивувати користувачів <../../db_management/documentation.html" +"`Деактивування користувачів <../../db_management/documentation.html" "#deactivating-users>`_" -#: ../../general/odoo_basics/add_user.rst:47 -msgid "Todo" -msgstr "Зробити" - -#: ../../general/odoo_basics/add_user.rst:47 -msgid "Add link to How to add companies" -msgstr "" - #: ../../general/odoo_basics/choose_language.rst:3 msgid "Manage Odoo in your own language" msgstr "Управляйте Odoo вашою рідною мовою" @@ -1187,10 +1301,14 @@ msgid "" " this guide to set up Unsplash informations, since you will use our own Odoo" " Unsplash key in a transparent way." msgstr "" +"**Як користувач SaaS**, ви готові використовувати Unsplash. Вас не потрібно " +"буде слідкувати за цим посібником, щоби встановити інформацію Unsplash, з " +"того часу, як ви будете використовувати наш власний ключ Odoo Unsplash у " +"прозорий спосіб." #: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:9 msgid "Generate an Unsplash access key for **non-Saas** users" -msgstr "" +msgstr "Створіть ключ доступу Unsplash для користувача **не Saas**" #: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:11 msgid "Create an account on `Unsplash.com `_." @@ -1218,6 +1336,10 @@ msgid "" "that Unsplash can recognize it as an Odoo instance. Once done, click on " "**Create application**." msgstr "" +"Вам буде запропоновано вставити **Назву заявки** та **Опис**.Будь ласка, " +"префіксуйте назву вашого модуля за \"** Odoo: **\", щоби Unsplash міг " +"розпізнати його як екземпляр Odoo. Після завершення натисніть на **Створити " +"додаток**." #: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:28 msgid "" @@ -1233,10 +1355,13 @@ msgid "" "Unsplash key and will be limited to your test key that has a restriction of " "50 Unsplash requests per hour." msgstr "" +"**Як не користувач SaaS**, ви не зможете зареєструватися для робочого ключа " +"Unsplash та будете обмежені у доступі до тестового ключа, що має обмеження у" +" 50 запитів Unsplash на годину." #: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:37 msgid ":doc:`unsplash_application_id`" -msgstr "" +msgstr ":doc:`unsplash_application_id`" #: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_application_id.rst:3 msgid "How to generate an Unsplash application ID" @@ -1247,6 +1372,8 @@ msgid "" "You should first create and set up your Unsplash application with this " "tutorial: :doc:`unsplash_access_key`." msgstr "" +"Вам спершу потрібно створити та встановити ваш додаток Unsplash з цим " +"посібником: :doc:`unsplash_access_key`." #: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_application_id.rst:8 msgid "" @@ -1264,6 +1391,9 @@ msgid "" "ID** will be visible in your browser's URL. The URL should be something like" " ``https://unsplash.com/oauth/applications/``" msgstr "" +"Вас буде перенаправлено на сторінку деталей вашого модуля. **ID модуля** " +"буде видимий у вашій URL-адресі браузера. URL-адреса повинна бути схожа на " +"``https://unsplash.com/oauth/applications/``" #: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_application_id.rst:19 msgid "" @@ -1271,3 +1401,6 @@ msgid "" "Unsplash key and will be limited to your test key that has a 50 Unsplash " "requests per hour restriction." msgstr "" +"**Як не користувач SaaS**, ви не зможете зареєструватися для робочого ключа " +"Unsplash та будете обмежені у доступі до тестового ключа, який має обмеження" +" у 50 запитів Unsplash на годину." diff --git a/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po index 63b465571..ba532a341 100644 --- a/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po +++ b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-10-03 11:39+0200\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" "PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Alina Lisnenko , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Ukrainian (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/uk/)\n" @@ -25,6 +25,94 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Helpdesk" msgstr "Служба підтримки" +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:3 +msgid "" +"After sales features: refund, coupon, return, repair, onsite interventions" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:4 +msgid "" +"As my business grows, having the tools to allow my helpdesk team to record, " +"track and manage issues raised easy and efficiently, is key. Odoo’s Helpdesk" +" app allows me to generate credit notes, return products, grant coupons, do " +"repairs and plan onsite interventions from a ticket’s page." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:7 +msgid "Set up the After Sales services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Go to *Configuration > Helpdesk Teams* and enable the After Sales options: " +"*Refunds, Returns, Coupons, Repairs and Onsite Interventions*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:14 +msgid "Generate credit notes from tickets" +msgstr "Створити сторно із заявки" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:15 +msgid "" +"I can use a credit note to refund a customer or adjust the amount due. For " +"that, I’ll simply go to my ticket page, click on *Refund* and select the " +"corresponding *Invoice*. Clicking on *Reverse* the credit note will be " +"generated, and I can *Post* it while still being in the *Helpdesk* app." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:22 +msgid "Allow product returns from tickets" +msgstr "Дозволити повернення товару із заявки" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:23 +msgid "" +"The process of a product return from my customer back to my warehouse will " +"be taken into action when, at the ticket page, I choose the option *Return*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:29 +msgid "Grant coupons from tickets" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:30 +msgid "" +"First, be sure to have your *Coupon Program* planned at the *Sales or " +"Website* app. At the *Helpdesk* app, I will open my ticket and click on " +"*Coupon*, choose the *Coupon Program > Generate*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:37 +msgid "Repairs from tickets" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:38 +msgid "" +"Clicking on *Repair* option, on my ticket page, a new repair order form will" +" be shown. Fill up the rest of the fields as needed and choose the next " +"step." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:44 +msgid "Plan onsite interventions from tickets" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:45 +msgid "" +"At the ticket page, I can now configure my onsite interventions exactly the " +"same way I would do being on the *Field Service* app, clicking on *Plan " +"Intervention*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:52 +msgid "" +"`Coupons `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:53 +msgid ":doc:`../manufacturing/repair/repair`" +msgstr "" + #: ../../helpdesk/getting_started.rst:3 msgid "Get started with Odoo Helpdesk" msgstr "Почніть Службу підтримку в Odoo" diff --git a/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po index 05bbf5c3f..57f561a5c 100644 --- a/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po +++ b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po @@ -4,17 +4,18 @@ # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # # Translators: -# Martin Trigaux, 2018 -# Alina Lisnenko , 2018 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Bohdan Lisnenko, 2019 +# Alina Lisnenko , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 12.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-11-07 15:38+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2018-10-19 08:15+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: Alina Lisnenko , 2018\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Alina Lisnenko , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Ukrainian (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/uk/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -22,7 +23,7 @@ msgstr "" "Language: uk\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n % 1 == 0 && n % 10 == 1 && n % 100 != 11 ? 0 : n % 1 == 0 && n % 10 >= 2 && n % 10 <= 4 && (n % 100 < 12 || n % 100 > 14) ? 1 : n % 1 == 0 && (n % 10 ==0 || (n % 10 >=5 && n % 10 <=9) || (n % 100 >=11 && n % 100 <=14 )) ? 2: 3);\n" -#: ../../inventory.rst:5 ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:64 +#: ../../inventory.rst:5 msgid "Inventory" msgstr "Склад" @@ -35,347 +36,366 @@ msgid "Daily Operations" msgstr "Щоденні операції" #: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:3 -msgid "How to do an inventory adjustment with barcodes?" -msgstr "Як зробити коригування запасів зі штрих-кодом?" +msgid "Process to an Inventory Adjustment with Barcodes" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:5 -msgid "From the Barcode application:" -msgstr "З додатку Штрих-коду:" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:7 -msgid "Click on **Inventory**" -msgstr "Натисніть на **Склад**" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:12 msgid "" -"Scan all the products (if you have 5 identical articles, scan it 5 times, or" -" use the keyboard to set the quantity)." +"To process an inventory adjustment by using barcodes, you first need to open" +" the *Barcode* app. Then, from the application, click on *Inventory " +"Adjustments*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:13 +msgid "" +"If you want to fully work with barcodes, you can download the sheet " +"*Commands for Inventory*." msgstr "" -"Відскануйте всі товари (якщо у вас 5 ідентичних пунктів, перевірте 5 разів " -"або скористайтеся клавіатурою, щоби встановити кількість)." #: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:16 msgid "" -"If you manage multiple locations, scan the location before scanning the " -"products. Eg. scan a shelf's barcode ; scan each product on the shelf ; " -"repeat for each shelf in the wharehouse." +"Once you have clicked on *Inventory Adjustments*, Odoo will automatically " +"create one. Note that, if you work with multi-location, you first need to " +"specify in which location the inventory adjustment takes place." msgstr "" -"Якщо ви керуєте кількома місцезнаходженнями, перевірте місцезнаходження " -"перед скануванням товарів. Напр., сканування штрих-коду полиці; сканування " -"кожного товару на полиці; повторіть для кожної полиці складу." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:20 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:24 msgid "" -"When you've scanned all the items of the location, validate the inventory " -"manually or by scanning the **Validate** barcode." +"If you don’t work with multi-location, you will be able to scan the " +"different products you want to include in the inventory adjustment." msgstr "" -"Коли ви перевірили всі елементи місцезнаходження, перевірте інвентаризацію " -"вручну або скануючи **Перевірити** штрих-код." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:3 -msgid "How to process delivery orders?" -msgstr "Як обробляти замовлення на доставку?" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:31 msgid "" -"There are two approaches to process delivery orders: you can either work on " -"printed documents (and scan lines on the documents), or on a screen (and " -"scan products directly)." +"If you have 5 identical articles, scan it 5 times or use the keyboard to set" +" the quantity." msgstr "" -"Існує два підходи для обробки замовлень на доставку: ви можете працювати над" -" друкованими документами (і рядками сканування в документах), або на екрані " -"(і сканувати товари безпосередньо)." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:10 -msgid "Process printed delivery orders:" -msgstr "Процес друкованих замовлень на доставку:" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:12 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:34 msgid "" -"Print delivery orders of the day by selecting all documents from the **To " -"Do** list and print **Picking Operations** from the top menu." +"Besides using the barcode scanner, you can also manually add a product if " +"necessary. To do so, click on *Add Product* and fill the information in " +"manually." msgstr "" -"Роздрукуйте замовлення на доставку за день, вибравши всі документи зі списку" -" **Зробити** і друкуючи **Операції комплектування** у верхньому меню." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:44 msgid "" -"Once you start processing your delivery orders, **scan the barcode** on the " -"top-right corner of the document to load the right record on the screen." +"When you have scanned all the items of the location, validate the inventory " +"manually or scan the *Validate* barcode." msgstr "" -"Коли ви починаєте обробляти замовлення на доставку, **сканування штрих-" -"коду** у верхньому правому куті документа дозволяє завантажити потрібний " -"запис на екрані." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:19 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:3 +msgid "Work with Barcode Nomenclature" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:5 msgid "" -"Then, **scan the barcode** of every product, or scan the barcode of the " -"product on the picking line if the barcode on the product is not easily " -"accessible, visible or is missing." +"There are different situations in which barcode nomenclatures can be useful." +" A well-known use case is the one of a point of sales that sells products in" +" bulk. The customers will scale their products themselves and get the " +"printed barcode to stick on the product. This barcode will contain the " +"weight of the product and help compute the price accordingly." msgstr "" -"Потім **сканування штрих-коду** кожного товару або сканування штрих-коду " -"товару на рядку комплектування, якщо штрих-код на товарі важкодоступний, " -"видимий або відсутній." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:23 -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:24 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:13 +msgid "Create a Barcode Nomenclature" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:15 msgid "" -"Once you scanned all products, scan the **Validate** barcode action to " -"finish the operation." +"Odoo supports *Barcode Nomenclatures*, which determine the mapping and " +"interpretation of the encoded information." msgstr "" -"Після того як ви відскануєте всі товари, відскануйте дію **перевірки** " -"штрих-коду, щоб завершити операцію." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:30 -msgid "Process delivery orders from a computer or mobile device:" -msgstr "" -"Процес обробки замовлення на доставку з комп'ютера або мобільного пристрою:" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:32 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:18 msgid "" -"Load all the delivery orders marked as **To Do**, and open the first one." +"To configure the *Barcode Nomenclature*, you need to activate the debug " +"mode. To do so, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Barcode Nomenclature*." msgstr "" -"Завантажте всі замовлення на доставку, позначені як **Зробити**, і відкрийте" -" перше." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:35 -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:33 -msgid "Pick up and scan each listed product." -msgstr "Підніміть і відскануйте кожний із зазначених товарів." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:37 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:22 msgid "" -"When you've picked all the items, click the **Validate** button or scan the " -"**Validate barcode** action to finish the Operation." +"You can create a barcode nomenclature from there, and then add a line to " +"create your first rule." msgstr "" -"Коли ви виберете всі елементи, натисніть кнопку **Перевірити** або перевірте" -" дію **Дійсний штрих-код**, щоб завершити операцію." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:40 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:28 msgid "" -"Move to the next delivery order to process by clicking on the top-right " -"right **arrow** or scanning the **Pager-Next** barcode action." +"The first step is to specify the *rule name*, for example, *Weight Barcode* " +"with 3 decimals. Then, you have to specify the type for barcode " +"nomenclature, like the *Weighted Product*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:35 +msgid "" +"The *Barcode Pattern* is a regular expression that defines the structure of " +"the barcode. In this example, 21 defines the products on which the rule will" +" be applied. Those are the numbers by which the product barcode should " +"start. The 5 “dots” are the following numbers of the product barcode and are" +" there to identify the product in question. The “N” defines a number and the" +" “D” defines the decimals." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:43 +msgid "" +"You can define different rules and order their priority thanks to the " +"sequence. The first rule that matches the scanned barcode will then be " +"applied." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:48 +msgid "Configure your Product" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:50 +msgid "The barcode of the product should start by “21”;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:52 +msgid "" +"The 5 “dots” are the other numbers of your product barcode, allowing to " +"identify the product;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:54 +msgid "" +"The barcode should contain 0’s when you did defined D’s or N’s. In our case," +" we need to set 5 zeros because we condigures “21………{NNDDD}”;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:56 +msgid "" +"In EAN-13, the last number is a check number. Use an EAN13 generator to know" +" which digit it should be in your case." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:61 +msgid "" +"In case you weight 1,5kg of pasta, the balance will print you the following " +"barcode: *2112345015001*. If you scan this barcode in your PoS, or when " +"receiving the products in your barcode app, Odoo will automatically create a" +" new line for the product, for a quantity of 1,5kg." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:67 +msgid "" +"For the point of sale, a price depending on the quantity will also be " +"computed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:74 +msgid "Rule Types" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:76 +msgid "" +"**Priced Product**: it allows you to identify the product and specify its " +"price, used in PoS;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:78 +msgid "" +"**Discounted Product**: it allows you to create one barcode per applied " +"discount. Then, you can scan your product in the PoS and apply discounts on " +"the product by scanning the discount barcode;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:80 +msgid "" +"**Weighted Product**: it allows you to identify the product and specify its " +"weight, used in both PoS and in Inventory;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:82 +msgid "" +"**Client**: it allows you to identify the customer, for example used with " +"loyalty program;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:84 +msgid "" +"**Cashier**: it allows you to identify the cashier when entering the PoS;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:86 +msgid "" +"**Location**: it allows you to identify the location on a transfer when " +"multi-location is activated;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:88 +msgid "" +"**Package**: it allows you to identify packages on a transfer when packages " +"are activated;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:90 +msgid "" +"**Lot**: it allows you to identify the lot number of a product on a " +"transfer;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:92 +msgid "" +"**Credit Card**: it doesn’t need manual modification, exists for data from " +"the Mercury module;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:94 +msgid "" +"**Unit Product**: it allows you to identify a product for both PoS and " +"Transfers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:97 +msgid "" +"When the barcode pattern contains .*, it means that it can contain any " +"number of characters. Those characters can be any number." msgstr "" -"Перемістіть до наступного замовлення на доставку, натиснувши **стрілку** " -"зверху праворуч або скануючи дію на штрих-коді **Pager-Next**." #: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:3 -msgid "How to do an internal transfer?" -msgstr "Як зробити внутрішнє переміщення?" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:5 -msgid "In Odoo, there are two types of internal transfers:" -msgstr "В Odoo існує два типи внутрішніх переміщень:" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:7 -msgid "" -"Those initiated automatically by the system (for example, a quality control)" -msgstr "Ті, що ініціюються автоматично системою (наприклад, контроль якості)." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:10 -msgid "" -"Those created by a worker (for example, through the internal transfer area " -"of the dashboard)." +msgid "Process to Transfers" msgstr "" -"Ті, що створюються працівником (наприклад, через внутрішню область передачі " -"інформаційної панелі)." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:13 -msgid "To make an Internal Transfer:" -msgstr "Щоб зробити внутрішнє переміщення:" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:15 -msgid "From the home of the barcode application, scan the **source location**" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:6 +msgid "Simple Transfers" msgstr "" -"З домашнього додатку штрих-коду відскануйте **місцезнаходження джерела**." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:17 -msgid "Pick up and **scan the products**" -msgstr "Підніміть і **відскануйте товари**." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:19 -msgid "Scan the **destination location**" -msgstr "Сканування **місця призначення**." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:21 -msgid "**Validate** the transfer to finish it" -msgstr "**Перевірте** переміщення, щоб закінчити його." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:3 -msgid "How to handle lots and serial numbers with barcodes?" -msgstr "Як обробляти партії та серійні номери зі штрих-кодами?" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:8 msgid "" -"Lots Numbers can be encoded from incoming shipments, internal moves and " -"outgoing deliveries:" +"To process a transfer from the *Barcode* app, the first step is to go to " +"*Operations*." msgstr "" -"Партійні номери можуть бути закодовані з вхідних відправлень, внутрішніх " -"переміщень і вихідних доставок:" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:14 msgid "" -"In the barcode interface, **scan** the products you want create a lot from" +"Then, you have the choice to either enter an existing transfer, by going to " +"the corresponding operation type and manually selecting the one you want to " +"enter, or by scanning the barcode of the transfer." msgstr "" -"В інтерфейсі штрих-коду **відскануйте** товари, які ви хочете створити в " -"партії" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:10 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:24 msgid "" -"If this product should be manage by lots, a window opens to help you scan " -"the lots/serial numbers" +"From there, you will be able to scan the products that are part of the " +"existing transfer and/or add new products to this transfer. Once all the " +"products have been scanned, you can validate the transfer to proceed with " +"the stock moves." msgstr "" -"Якщо цей товар має керуватися партіями, відкриється вікно, яке допоможе вам " -"відсканувати партії/серійні номери" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:33 msgid "" -"**Scan** a lot barcode, **type** one manually or **leave empty** to generate" -" one automatically" +"If you have different storage locations in your warehouse, you can add " +"additional steps for the different operation types." msgstr "" -"**Відскануйте** штрих-код партії, **введіть** його вручну або **залиште " -"порожнім**, щоб автоматично створити його" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:16 -msgid "Click or scan **Validate** once you are done" -msgstr "Клікніть або відскануйте **Перевірити** після завершення" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:37 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:50 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:45 +msgid "Receipts" +msgstr "Надходження" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:18 -msgid "What is the difference between **Lots** and **Serial Numbers**?" -msgstr "У чому різниця між **Партіями** та **Серійними номерами**?" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:20 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:39 msgid "" -"**Lot** numbers are attributed to several identical products, so each time " -"you scan a lot number, Odoo will add one on the product count." +"When receiving a product in stock, you need to scan its barcode in order to " +"identify it in the system. Once done, you can either make it enter the main " +"location of the transfer, for example WH/Stock, or scan a location barcode " +"to make it enter a sub-location of the main location." msgstr "" -"Номери **партій** відносяться до кількох однакових товарів, тому кожен раз, " -"коли ви скануєте партійні номери, Odoo додасть один до кількості товарів." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:24 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:48 msgid "" -"On the opposite, a **serial number** is unique, and represented by only one " -"barcode, sticked on only one item. This means that Odoo won't accept " -"scanning the same serial number more than once per operation." +"If you want the product to enter WH/Stock in our example, you can simply " +"scan the next product." msgstr "" -"З іншого боку, **серійний номер** унікальний, і представлений лише одним " -"штрих-кодом, прикріпленим лише до одного елемента. Це означає, що Odoo не " -"прийматиме сканування одного і того ж серійного номера більше одного разу за" -" операцію." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:32 -msgid "Here, we configured **Lu - Petit Beukelaer** tracking by lots." -msgstr "Тут ми налаштували відстеження **Lu - Petit Beukelaer** за партіями." +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:52 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery.rst:3 +msgid "Delivery Orders" +msgstr "Замовлення на доставку" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:37 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:54 msgid "" -"Scan a product from this incoming shipment, then scan the lot number of each" -" product (you can also use the keyboard)." +"When delivering a product, you have to scan the source location if it is " +"different than the one initially set on the transfer. Then, you can start " +"scanning the products that are delivered from this specific location." msgstr "" -"Відскануйте товари з цієї вхідної відправки, після чого перевірте номер " -"партії кожного товару (також можна скористатись клавіатурою)." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:43 -msgid "Click save/scan **Validate** and you are done." -msgstr "Натисніть Зберегти/Сканувати **Перевірити**, і ви закінчите." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:3 -msgid "How to process incoming receipts?" -msgstr "Як обробляти вхідні поставки?" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:62 msgid "" -"There are two approaches to process incoming receipts: you can either work " -"on printed documents (and scan lines on the documents), or on a screen (and " -"scan products directly)." +"Once the different products have been scanned, you have the possibility to " +"scan another location, such as WH/Stock, and another page will be added to " +"your delivery order. You can move from one to the other thanks to the " +"*Previous* and *Next* buttons." msgstr "" -"Існує два підходи до обробки вхідних поставок: ви можете працювати на " -"друкованих документах (і сканувати рядки на документах), або на екрані (і " -"сканувати товари безпосередньо)." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:10 -msgid "Process printed incoming receipts:" -msgstr "Процес друкованих вхідних поставок:" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:12 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:70 msgid "" -"Print incoming receipts of the day by selecting all documents from the **To " -"Receive** list and print **Picking Operations** from the top menu." +"Now, you can validate your transfer. To do so, click on *Next* until you " +"reach the last page of the transfer. There, you will be able to validate it." msgstr "" -"Надрукуйте вхідні поставки за день, вибравши всі документи зі списку " -"**Прийняти** та друкуючи **Операції комплектування** у верхньому меню." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:16 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:78 +msgid "Internal Transfers" +msgstr "Внутрішні переміщення" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:80 msgid "" -"Once you start processing your incoming receipts, scan the barcode on the " -"top-right corner of the document to load the right record on the screen." +"When realizing an internal transfer with multi-location, you first have to " +"scan the source location of the product. Then, you can scan the product in " +"itself, before having to scan the barcode of the destination location." msgstr "" -"Коли ви почнете обробку вхідних поставок, відскануйте штрих-код у верхньому " -"правому куті документа, щоб завантажити потрібний запис на екрані." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:20 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:85 msgid "" -"Then, scan the barcode of every product, or scan the barcode of the product " -"on the picking line if the barcode on the product is not easily accessible, " -"visible or is missing." +"If the source and destination of the internal transfers are already correct," +" you don’t need to scan them." msgstr "" -"Потім відскануйте штрих-код кожного товару або штрих-код товару на рядку " -"комплектування, якщо штрих-код на товарі важкодоступний, видимий або " -"відсутній." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:28 -msgid "Process incoming receipts from a computer or mobile device:" -msgstr "Обробка вхідних поставок з комп'ютера або мобільного пристрою:" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:89 +msgid "Transfers with Tracked Products" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:30 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:91 msgid "" -"Load all the incoming receipts marked as **To Receive**, and open the first " -"one." +"If you work with products tracked by lot/serial numbers, you have two ways " +"of working:" msgstr "" -"Завантажте всі вхідні поставки, позначені як **Прийняти**, і відкрийте " -"першу." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:35 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:94 msgid "" -"When you've picked all the items, click the **Validate** button or scan the " -"**Validate** barcode action to finish the Operation." +"If you work with serial/lot numbers taking all products into consideration, " +"you can scan the barcode of the lot/serial number and Odoo will increase the" +" quantity of the product, setting its lot/serial number." msgstr "" -"Коли ви виберете всі елементи, натисніть кнопку **Перевірити** або " -"відскануйте дію штрих-коду **Перевірити**, щоб завершити операцію." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:99 msgid "" -"Move to the next incoming receipt to process by clicking on the top-right " -"right **arrow** or scanning the **Pager-Next** barcode action." +"If you have the same lot/serial number for different products, you can work " +"by scanning the product barcode first, and then the barcode of the " +"lot/serial number." msgstr "" -"Перемістіть до наступної вхідної поставки, щоб обробити її, натиснувши " -"**стрілку** в правому верхньому куті або скануючи дію на штрих-коді **Pager-" -"Next**." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:42 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:137 -msgid "Example" -msgstr "Приклад" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:3 +msgid "Create a Transfer from Scratch" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:44 -msgid "Open operation interface." -msgstr "Відкритий операційний інтерфейс." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:49 -msgid "Scan." -msgstr "Відскануйте." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:54 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:5 msgid "" -"The picking appears. Scan items and/or fill in informations using the mouse " -"and keyboard." +"To create a transfer from the *Barcode* application, you first need to print" +" the operation type barcodes. To do so, you can download the *Stock barcode " +"sheet* from the home page of the app." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:12 +msgid "" +"Once done, you can scan the one for which you want to create a new document." +" Then, an empty document will be created and you will be able to scan your " +"products to populate it." msgstr "" -"Відобразиться комплектування. Відскануйте елементи та/або заповнення " -"інформації за допомогою миші та клавіатури." #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup.rst:3 msgid "Setup" -msgstr "Встановіть" +msgstr "Встановити" #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:3 msgid "Set up your barcode scanner" @@ -423,33 +443,20 @@ msgid "" "The **bluetooth scanner** can be paired with a smartphone or a tablet and is" " a good choice if you want to be mobile but don't need a big investment. An " "approach is to log in Odoo on you smartphone, pair the bluetooth scanner " -"with the smartphone and work in the warehouse with always the possibility to" -" check your smartphone from time to time and use the software 'manually'." +"with the smartphone and work in the warehouse with the possibility to check " +"your smartphone from time to time and use the software 'manually'." msgstr "" -"**Сканер Bluetooth** може бути з'єднаний зі смартфоном або планшетом, і це " -"хороший вибір, якщо ви хочете бути мобільним, але не потребуєте великих " -"інвестицій. Підхід полягає в тому, щоб увійти в Odoo на вашому смартфоні, " -"об'єднати сканер Bluetooth зі смартфоном і працювати на складі, завжди час " -"від часу перевіряти свій смартфон і використовувати програмне забезпечення " -"«вручну»." #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:32 msgid "" "For heavy use, the **mobile computer scanner** is the handiest solution. It " -"consists in a small computer with a built-in barcode scanner. This one can " +"consists of a small computer with a built-in barcode scanner. This one can " "turn out to be a very productive solution, however you need to make sure " -"that is is capable of running Odoo smoothy. The most recent models using " +"that is is capable of running Odoo smoothly. The most recent models using " "Android + Google Chrome or Windows + Internet Explorer Mobile should do the " "job. However, due to the variety of models and configurations on the market," " it is essential to test it first." msgstr "" -"Для важкого використання, **мобільний сканер** є найдоступнішим рішенням. " -"Він складається з невеликого комп'ютера із вбудованим сканером штрих-кодів. " -"Це може виявитись дуже продуктивним рішенням, однак ви повинні переконатися," -" що воно здатне працювати з Odoo швидко. Найновіші моделі, що використовують" -" Android + Google Chrome або Windows + Internet Explorer Mobile, повинні " -"виконувати цю роботу. Однак через різноманітність моделей та конфігурацій " -"важливо його спочатку протестувати." #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:42 msgid "Configure your barcode scanner" @@ -494,400 +501,44 @@ msgstr "" "суфікса\" тощо)." #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:3 -msgid "How to activate the barcodes in Odoo?" -msgstr "Як активувати штрих-коди в Odoo?" +msgid "Activate the Barcodes in Odoo" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:5 msgid "" -"The barcode scanning features can save you a lot of the time usually lost " +"The barcode scanning features can save you a lot of time usually lost " "switching between the keyboard, the mouse and the scanner. Properly " "attributing barcodes to products, pickings locations, etc. allows you to " "work more efficiently by controlling the software almost exclusively with " "the barcode scanner." msgstr "" -"Функції сканування штрих-кодів можуть заощадити багато часу, втраченого " -"перемиканням між клавіатурою, мишею та сканером. Правильне встановлення " -"штрих-кодів до товарів, місцезнаходжень та ін. дозволяє працювати більш " -"ефективно, керуючи програмним забезпеченням практично виключно зі сканером " -"штрих-кодів." -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:17 -msgid "" -"Print this document to be able to use your barcode scanner to perform more " -"actions." -msgstr "" -"Надрукуйте цей документ, щоби мати змогу використовувати ваш сканер штрих-" -"кодів для виконання додаткових дій." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:19 -msgid "Document: |download_barcode|" -msgstr "Документ: |download_barcode|" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:23 -msgid "Set products barcodes" -msgstr "Встановіть штрих-коди товарів" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:28 -msgid "" -"In order to fill a picking or to perform an inventory, you need to make sure" -" that your products are encoded in Odoo along with their barcodes. If this " -"is not already done, you can fill in the products barcodes through a handy " -"interface. Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings` " -"and click :menuselection:`Operations --> Barcode Scanner`. Click Save, and " -"go back into the previous screen to click Configure Product Barcodes. This " -"interface can also be accessed via the planner." -msgstr "" -"Щоб заповнити комплектування або провести інвентаризацію, вам слід " -"переконатися, що ваші товари закодовані в Odoo поряд з їх штрих-кодами. Якщо" -" це ще не зроблено, ви можете заповнити штрих-коди товару за допомогою " -"зручного інтерфейсу. Перейдіть до :menuselection:`Складу --> Налаштування " -"--> Налаштування` та натисніть :menuselection:`Операції --> Сканер штрих-" -"коду`. Натисніть Зберегти та поверніться до попереднього екрану, щоб " -"натиснути Налаштувати штрих-коди товарів. Цей інтерфейс також доступний " -"через планувальник." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:39 -msgid "" -"Product variants: be careful to add barcodes directly on the variant, and " -"not the template product (otherwise you won't be able to differentiate " -"them)." -msgstr "" -"Варіанти товару: будьте обережні, щоб додати штрих-код безпосередньо до " -"варіанту, а не до шаблону товару (інакше ви не зможете їх диференціювати)." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:44 -msgid "Set locations barcodes" -msgstr "Встановіть місцезнаходження штрих-кодів" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:49 -msgid "" -"If you manage multiple locations, you will find useful to attribute a " -"barcode to each location and stick it on the location. You can configure the" -" locations barcodes in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> " -"Warehouse Management --> Locations`. There is button in the **Print** menu " -"that you can use to print the locations names and barcodes. There are 4 " -"barcodes per page, arranged in a way that is convenient to print on sticker " -"paper." -msgstr "" -"Якщо ви керуєте кількома місцезнаходженнями та вважаєте за потрібне " -"привласнити штрих-код кожному місцю та прикріпити його до розташування. Ви " -"можете налаштувати штрих-коди місцезнаходжень у :menuselection:`Складі --> " -"Налаштування --> Управління складом --> Місцезнаходження`. У меню **Друк** є" -" кнопка, яку можна використовувати для друку назв місцезнаходжень та штрих-" -"кодів. На кожній сторінці є 4 штрих-коди, розташовані так, що зручно " -"друкувати на наклейковому паперті." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:58 -msgid "" -"Example of location naming: **warehouse short name** - **location short " -"name** - (**Corridor X** - **Shelf Y** - **Height Z**) Example: A032-025-133" -msgstr "" -"Приклад іменування місцезнаходжень: **коротка назва складу** - **коротка " -"назва місцезнаходження** - (**коридор X** - **полиця Y** - **висота Z**) " -"Приклад: A032-025-133" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:65 -msgid "Barcode formats" -msgstr "Формати штрих-кодів" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:67 -msgid "" -"Most retail products use EAN-13 barcodes. They cannot be made up without " -"proper authorization: you must pay the International Article Numbering " -"Association a fee in exchange for an EAN code sequence (that's why no two " -"products in a store will ever have the same EAN code)." -msgstr "" -"Більшість роздрібних товарів використовують штрих-коди EAN-13. Їх не можна " -"скласти без належної авторизації: ви повинні сплатити Міжнародній асоціації " -"нумерації плату в обмін на кодову послідовність коду EAN (саме тому два " -"твари в магазині не матимуть однакового коду EAN)." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:72 -msgid "" -"Still, as Odoo supports any string as a barcode, so you can always define " -"your own barcode format for internal use." -msgstr "" -"Тим не менше, оскільки Odoo підтримує будь-який рядок як штрих-код, ви " -"завжди можете визначити свій власний формат штрих-коду для внутрішнього " -"використання." - -#: ../../inventory/management.rst:3 -msgid "Warehouse Management" -msgstr "Управління складом" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment.rst:3 -msgid "Inventory Adjustment" -msgstr "Інвентаризація" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:3 -msgid "How to make the initial inventory?" -msgstr "Як зробити початкову інвентаризацію?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:5 -msgid "" -"One of the most important feature in an warehouse management software is to " -"keep the inventory right." -msgstr "" -"Одна з найважливіших функцій програмного забезпечення для управління складом" -" полягає в правильному проведенні інвентаризації." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Once your products have been defined, it is time to make your initial " -"inventory. You will reflect reality by inventorying the right quantities in " -"the right locations." -msgstr "" -"Коли ваші товари будуть визначені, потрібно зробити свою початкову " -"інвентаризацію. Ви покажете реальність шляхом інвентаризації потрібних " -"кількостей у потрібних місцях." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:55 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:34 -msgid "Product Configuration" -msgstr "Налаштування товару" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:15 -msgid "" -"In the Inventory module, open the :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> " -"Products`, then click on **Create** to create a new product. Configure the " -"product type so that it is **Stockable** and not a consumable." -msgstr "" -"У модулі Склад відкрийте :menuselection:`Контроль складу --> Товари`, потім " -"натисніть **Створити**, щоб створити новий товар. Налаштуйте тип товару " -"таким чином, щоби він був **Складським**, а не витратним." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:23 -msgid "Start the initial inventory" -msgstr "Розпочніть початкову інвентаризацію" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:26 -msgid "Update the product quantity for one product" -msgstr "Оновіть кількість товару для одного товару" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:28 -msgid "" -"In the product you just created, you can see in the upper tiles that we have" -" 0 product On Hand. Click on the **Update qty on Hand** button." -msgstr "" -"У товарі, який ви щойно створили, у верхній плитці видно, що у нас є 0 " -"товарів на руці. Натисніть кнопку **Оновити кількість в наявності**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:31 -msgid "" -"A new window opens. In the **New Quantity on Hand** field, type the quantity" -" of product you currently hold in stock, then click on **Apply**." -msgstr "" -"Відкриється нове вікно. У полі **Нова кількість в наявності** введіть " -"кількість товару, який у вас зараз є, у списку, після чого натисніть " -"**Застосувати**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:39 -msgid "" -"if you are using multiple locations for your warehouse, you will be able to " -"set the location of your product from this screen." -msgstr "" -"Якщо ви використовуєте кілька місцезнаходжень для вашого складу, ви зможете " -"встановити розташування свого товару з цього екрана." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:42 -msgid "" -"You can now see from the On Hand tab that the quantity has been updated." -msgstr "" -"Тепер ви можете побачити із вкладки \"В наявності\", що кількість оновлено." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:47 -msgid "" -"Now, if you check the **Inventory Adjustments** in the **Inventory Control**" -" menu, you will see that a new line named \"INV: (name of your product)\" " -"has automatically been created and validated by the system." -msgstr "" -"Тепер, якщо ви перевіряєте **Коригування залишків** в меню **Управління " -"складом**, ви побачите, що новий рядок під назвою \"ІНВ: (назва вашого " -"товару)» був автоматично створений та перевірений системою." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:55 -msgid "Multiple products at once" -msgstr "Кілька товарів одночасно" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:57 -msgid "" -"Create all the products for which you want to follow the stock (as stockable" -" products). Once the required products in stock have been defined, use an " -"initial inventory operation to put the current quantities into the system by" -" location. Go to :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Inventory " -"Adjustments` to start your initial inventory." -msgstr "" -"Створіть всі товари, за якими ви хочете стежити (як складські товари). Як " -"тільки визначено необхідні товари на складі, використовуйте початкову " -"операцію інвентаризації, щоби поставити поточні величини в систему за місцем" -" розташування. Перейдіть до :menuselection:`Контроль Складу --> Коригування" -" залишків` , щоби розпочати початкову інвентаризацію." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:63 -msgid "" -"Give it a name (for example Initial Inventory) and select the stock location" -" of your inventory. Note that when you select a parent location (such as " -"Stock, which might be split into sub locations), you can also select the sub" -" (or child) locations." -msgstr "" -"Дайте йому назву (наприклад, Початкова інвентаризація) і виберіть " -"місцезнаходження вашої інвентаризації. Зверніть увагу: якщо ви виберете " -"батьківське розташування (наприклад, Склад, яке може бути розділене на " -"підрозділи), ви також можете вибрати розташування підкатегорії (або " -"дочірнє)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:71 -msgid "" -"You can choose between making an inventory for all products, for a few or " -"only for one. In this case, we choose the **All products** option." -msgstr "" -"Ви можете вибрати інвентаризацію для всіх товарів, для декількох або тільки " -"для одного. У цьому випадку ми виберемо опцію **Усі товари**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:79 -msgid "" -"If you need your stock valuation to be done in a different period than the " -"one that will be selected by default according to the inventory end date, " -"enter the corresponding accounting period in the Force Valuation Period " -"field. The accounting module needs to be installed." -msgstr "" -"Якщо вам потрібна складська оцінка, яка буде зроблена в інший період часу, " -"ніж та, яку буде вибрано за замовчуванням відповідно до дат закінчення " -"інвентаризації, введіть відповідний звітний період у полі \"Ступінь " -"оцінки\". Потрібно встановити модуль бухобліку." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:84 -msgid "" -"Click the **Start Inventory** button. Depending on the type of inventory you" -" have chosen (all products or selected ones) you might have to add products " -"manually by clicking on **Add an item**." -msgstr "" -"Натисніть кнопку **Старт інвентаризації**. Залежно від типу інвентаризації, " -"який ви обрали (всі товари або вибрані), вам, можливо, доведеться додавати " -"товари вручну, натиснувши кнопку **Додати елемент**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:88 -msgid "" -"Add the **Real Quantity** that you have in your stock for each product." -msgstr "" -"Додайте **реальну кількість**, яку ви маєте на своєму складі для кожного " -"товару." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:92 -msgid "" -"additional information will be available according to the options you " -"activated (multi-locations, serial number, consignee stocks)." -msgstr "" -"Додаткова інформація буде доступна відповідно до опцій, які ви активували " -"(кілька місцезнаходжень, серійний номер, склади одержувача)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:98 -msgid "" -"Click the **Validate Inventory** button to confirm the inventory and post " -"it." -msgstr "" -"Натисніть кнопку **Перевірити інвентаризацію**, щоби підтвердити " -"інвентаризацію та опублікувати її." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:102 -msgid "Reporting" -msgstr "Звітність" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:104 -msgid "" -"To check the current stock, go to :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> " -"Products`, and click on the **list button**:" -msgstr "" -"Щоби перевірити поточний запас, перейдіть на :menuselection:`Контроль складу" -" --> Товари` та натисніть кнопку списку:" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:3 -msgid "How to choose between minimum stock rule and make to order?" -msgstr "Як обрати між правилом мінімального запасу та під замовлення?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:5 -msgid "" -"**Minimum Stock rules** and **Make to Order** have similar consequences but " -"different rules. They should be used depending on your manufacturing and " -"delivery strategies." -msgstr "" -"**Правила мінімального запасу** та **Виготовлення під замовлення** мають " -"подібні наслідки, але різні правила. Вони повинні використовуватися в " -"залежності від ваших технологій виробництва та стратегії доставки." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:10 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:10 -msgid "Terminology" -msgstr "Термінологія" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:13 -msgid "Minimum stock rule" -msgstr "Правило мінімального запасу" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:15 -msgid "" -"**Minimum Stock** rules are used to ensure that you always have the minimum " -"amount of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or " -"answer to your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its" -" minimum the system will automatically generate a procurement with the " -"quantity needed to reach the maximum stock level." -msgstr "" -"Правила **Мінімального запасу** використовуються для забезпечення того, що у" -" вас завжди є мінімальна кількість товару на складі для виготовлення вашої " -"продукції та/або відповіді на потреби вашого клієнта. Коли рівень запасу " -"товару досягає мінімального рівня, система автоматично генерує закупівлю з " -"кількістю, необхідною для досягнення максимального рівня запасу." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:22 -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:56 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:22 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:58 -msgid "Make to Order" -msgstr "Зробити на замовлення" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:24 -msgid "" -"The **Make to Order** function will trigger a **Purchase Order** of the " -"amount of the **Sales Order** related to the product. The system will " -"**not** check the current stock valuation. This means that a draft purchase " -"order will be generated regardless of the quantity on hand of the product." -msgstr "" -"Функція **Виготовлення на замовлення** запускає **Замовлення на купівлю** " -"суми **Замовлення на продаж**, пов'язаного з товаром. Система **не** буде " -"перевіряти поточну оцінку складу. Це означає, що проект замовлення на " -"закупівлю буде згенерований незалежно від кількості, що знаходяться в " -"наявності товару." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:30 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:12 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:12 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:37 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:34 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:29 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:9 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:50 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:28 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:21 -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:22 -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:25 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:159 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:164 -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:21 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:18 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:19 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:30 +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:16 +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:14 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:10 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:25 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:29 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:22 -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:18 -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:23 +#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:17 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:10 #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:18 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:30 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:17 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:114 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:16 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:15 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:13 @@ -896,165 +547,72 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Configuration" msgstr "Налаштування" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:33 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:33 -msgid "Minimum stock rules" -msgstr "Правила мінімального запасу" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:35 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:14 msgid "" -"The Minimum Stock Rules configuration is available through the menu " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory Control --> Reordering Rule` in the " -"drop down menu. There, click on **Create** to set minimum and maximum stock " -"values for a given product." +"To use this feature, you first need to activate the *Barcode* functionality " +"via *Inventory > Settings > Barcode Scanner*. Once you have ticked the " +"feature, you can hit save." msgstr "" -"Налаштування правил мінімального запасу доступна в меню " -":menuselection:`Склад --> Контроль складу --> Правило дозамовлення` у " -"випадаючому меню. Тоді натисніть кнопку **Створити**, щоб встановити " -"мінімальні та максимальні значення запасів для даного товару." -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Active" -msgstr "Активно" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:22 +msgid "Set Product Barcodes" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:24 msgid "" -"If the active field is set to False, it will allow you to hide the " -"orderpoint without removing it." +"You can easily assign barcodes to your different products via the " +"*Inventory* app. To do so, go to *Settings > Configure Products Barcodes*." msgstr "" -"Якщо активне поле встановлено на Помилкове, це дозволить вам приховати точку" -" замовлення, не видаливши його." -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Product Unit of Measure" -msgstr "Одиниця вимірювання товару" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Default unit of measure used for all stock operations." -msgstr "" -"Стандартна одиниця вимірювання, що використовується для всіх складських " -"операцій." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Procurement Group" -msgstr "Група забезпечення" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:31 msgid "" -"Moves created through this orderpoint will be put in this procurement group." -" If none is given, the moves generated by stock rules will be grouped into " -"one big picking." +"Then, you have the possibility to assign barcodes to your products directly " +"at creation on the product form." msgstr "" -"Рухи, створені за допомогою цього пункту призначення, будуть поміщені в цю " -"групу закупівель. Якщо нічого не задано, рухи, створені за складськими " -"правилами, будуть згруповані в одне велике комплектування." -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Minimum Quantity" -msgstr "Мінімальна кількість" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:41 msgid "" -"When the virtual stock goes below the Min Quantity specified for this field," -" Odoo generates a procurement to bring the forecasted quantity to the Max " -"Quantity." +"Be careful to add barcodes directly on the product variants and not on the " +"template product. Otherwise, you won’t be able to differentiate them." msgstr "" -"Коли віртуальний запас перевищує мінімальний коефіцієнт, зазначений для " -"цього поля, Odoo генерує забезпечення, щоб довести прогнозовану кількість до" -" максимальної кількості." -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Maximum Quantity" -msgstr "Максимальна кількість" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:46 +msgid "Set Locations Barcodes" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:48 msgid "" -"When the virtual stock goes below the Min Quantity, Odoo generates a " -"procurement to bring the forecasted quantity to the Quantity specified as " -"Max Quantity." +"If you manage multiple locations, you will find useful to attribute a " +"barcode to each location and stick it on the location. You can configure the" +" locations barcodes in *Inventory > Configuration > Locations*." msgstr "" -"Коли віртуальний запас перевищує мінімальну кількість, Odoo генерує " -"закупівлю, щоб довести прогнозовану кількість до кількості, зазначеної як " -"максимальна." -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Quantity Multiple" -msgstr "Кілька кількостей" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:59 msgid "" -"The procurement quantity will be rounded up to this multiple. If it is 0, " -"the exact quantity will be used." +"You can easily print the barcode you allocate to the locations via the " +"*Print* menu." msgstr "" -"Кількість забезпечення буде округлена до цієї кількості. Якщо це 0, буде " -"використано точну кількість." -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Lead Time" -msgstr "Термін виконання" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:63 +msgid "Barcode Formats" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:65 msgid "" -"Number of days after the orderpoint is triggered to receive the products or " -"to order to the vendor" +"Most retail products use EAN-13 barcodes. They cannot be made up without " +"proper authorization. You must pay the International Article Numbering " +"Association a fee in exchange for an EAN code sequence." msgstr "" -"Протягом кількох днів після того, як точка замовлення спрацьовує, щоб " -"отримати товари або замовити у постачальника" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:45 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:69 msgid "" -"Then, click on your product to access the related product form and, on the " -"**Inventory submenu**, do not forget to select a supplier." +"Still, as Odoo supports any string as a barcode, you can always define your " +"own barcode format for internal use." msgstr "" -"Потім натисніть на свій товар, щоб отримати доступ до відповідної форми " -"товару, а в **підменю Склад** не забудьте вибрати постачальника." -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:52 -msgid "" -"Don't forget to select the right product type in the product form. A " -"consumable can not be stocked and will thus not be accounted for in the " -"stock valuation." -msgstr "" -"Не забудьте вибрати правильний тип товару у формі товару. Витратний матеріал" -" не може бути складським, і тому не буде враховано в оцінці запасів." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:58 -msgid "" -"The Make to Order configuration is available on your product form through " -"your :menuselection:`Inventory module --> Inventory control --> Products` " -"(or any other module where products are available)." -msgstr "" -"Налаштування Зробити на замовлення доступне у вашій формі товару через ваш " -":menuselection:`Модуль складу --> Контроль складу --> Товари` (або будь-який" -" інший модуль, де доступні товари)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:62 -msgid "On the product form, under **Inventory**, click on **Make To Order**." -msgstr "" -"На формі товару в розділі **Склад** натисніть **Виготовити на замовлення**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:68 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:70 -msgid "Choice between the two options" -msgstr "Вибір між двома функціями" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:70 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:72 -msgid "" -"The choice between the two options is thus dependent of your inventory " -"strategy. If you prefer to have a buffer and always have at least a minimum " -"amount, the minimum stock rule should be used. If you want to reorder your " -"stocks only if your sale is confirmed it is better to use the Make to Order." -msgstr "" -"Вибір між двома функціями залежить від вашої стратегії складу. Якщо ви " -"вважаєте за краще мати буфер і завжди мати принаймні мінімальну суму, слід " -"використовувати правила мінімальних запасів. Якщо ви хочете перевпорядкувати" -" свої запаси лише за умови підтвердження продажу, краще скористатись кнопкою" -" \"Зробити на замовленням\"." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery.rst:3 -msgid "Delivery Orders" -msgstr "Замовлення на доставку" +#: ../../inventory/management.rst:3 +msgid "Warehouse Management" +msgstr "Управління складом" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:3 msgid "How do I cancel a delivery order?" @@ -1063,23 +621,13 @@ msgstr "Як скасувати замовлення на доставку?" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:6 ../../inventory/overview.rst:3 -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/overview.rst:3 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:6 @@ -1206,189 +754,152 @@ msgstr "" "використовувати з моменту їх створення." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:3 -msgid "" -"How to send products to customers directly from suppliers (drop-shipping)?" +msgid "Send Products to Customers Directly from Suppliers (Drop-shipping)" msgstr "" -"Як відправити товари клієнтам безпосередньо від постачальника (дропшипінг)?" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:6 -msgid "What is drop-shipping?" -msgstr "Що таке дропшипінг?" +msgid "What is Drop-Shipping?" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:8 msgid "" "Drop-Shipping is a system that allows orders taken from your store to be " "shipped straight from your supplier to your customer. On a usual delivery " "system, products are sent from your supplier to your warehouse to be put in " -"stock, and then shipped to your customers after ordering. With drop-" -"shipping, no item is stocked. When a customer places an order in your shop, " -"the item is delivered straight from the supplier to the customer. Therefore," -" the product doesn't need to get through your warehouse." +"stock and then shipped to your customers after ordering." msgstr "" -"Дропшипінг - це система, яка дозволяє замовлення, отримані у вашому " -"магазині, відправляти безпосередньо від вашого постачальника до вашого " -"клієнта. У звичайній системі доставки товари відправляються від вашого " -"постачальника на ваш склад, щоби бути поставленими на склад, а потім " -"відправлені вашим клієнтам після замовлення. З дропшипінгом, жодна позиція " -"не зберігається. Коли клієнт розміщує замовлення у вашому магазині, товар " -"доставляється безпосередньо від постачальника замовнику. Тому товар не " -"повинен проходити через ваш склад." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:18 -msgid "Points to be considered while implementing drop-shipping" -msgstr "Пункти, які слід враховувати при здійсненні дропшипінгу" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:13 +msgid "" +"With drop-shipping, no item is stocked. When a customer places an order in " +"your shop, the item is delivered straight from the supplier to the customer." +" Therefore, the product doesn't need to get through your warehouse." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:20 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:19 +msgid "Points to be Considered while Implementing Drop-Shipping" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:24 msgid "" "Use drop-shipping only for the products you can't or don't want to keep in " -"stock. One reason is that you'll always make smaller margins on items that " -"are drop-shipped, so you should keep it only for items that take up a lot of" -" space in your warehouse." +"stock." msgstr "" -"Використовуйте доставку лише для товарів, які ви не можете або не хочете " -"зберігати в наявності. Одна з причин полягає в тому, що ви завжди будете " -"мати меншу орієнтацію на товари, які постачаються з відвантаженнями, тому ви" -" повинні зберігати їх лише для товарів, які займають багато місця на вашому " -"складі." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:22 msgid "" -"Drop-shipping is best for niche products. Chances are that products that are" -" in high demand are being offered by large suppliers at a fraction of the " -"price you'll be able to charge, so using a more costly shipping method won't" -" be financially rewarding. But if your product is unique, then it makes " -"sense!" +"One reason is that you'll always make smaller margins on items that are " +"drop-shipped, so you should keep it only for items that take up a lot of " +"space in your warehouse." msgstr "" -"Дропшипінг підходить для нішевих товарів. Швидше за все, товари, які " -"користуються великим попитом, пропонують великі постачальники на частку " -"ціни, яку ви зможете стягувати, тому використання більш дорогим способом " -"доставки не буде фінансово корисним. Але якщо ваш товар унікальний, то це " -"має сенс!" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:31 -msgid "" -"To protect your customers from bad experiences, test drop-shipping companies" -" for yourself beforehand and list the best ones." +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:30 +msgid "Drop-shipping is best for niche products." msgstr "" -"Щоби захистити своїх клієнтів від невдалих вражень, перевірте компанії, які " -"перевозять доставку, заздалегідь, і перелічіть найкращі." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:34 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:27 msgid "" -"Make sure time is not against you. Drop-shipping should take a reasonable " -"amount of time and surely not more than it would have taken you to handle it" -" all by yourself. It's also nice to be able to provide your customers with a" -" tracking number." +"Chances are that products that are in high demand are being offered by large" +" suppliers at a fraction of the price you'll be able to charge, so using a " +"more costly shipping method won't be financially rewarding. But if your " +"product is unique, then it makes sense!" msgstr "" -"Переконайтеся, що час не проти вас. Дропшипінг повинен займати достатньо " -"часу і, безумовно, не більше, ніж це дозволить вам самостійно впоратися із " -"замовленням. Також чудово вміти надавати клієнтам номер відстеження." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:39 -msgid "" -"Items have to be available from your supplier. It's good to know if the " -"product you're selling is available upstream. If you don't have that " -"information, inform your customers that you don't hold the item in stock and" -" that it's subject to availability from a third party." +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:33 +msgid "To protect your customers from bad experiences." msgstr "" -"Товари повинні бути доступні у вашого постачальника. Варто дізнатися, чи " -"товар, який ви продаєте, є в наявності. Якщо у вас немає такої інформації, " -"повідомте своїх клієнтів про те, що ви не тримаєте товар на складі і що він " -"залежить від наявності у третіх осіб." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:46 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:33 msgid "" -"For more information and insights on Drop-shipping, read our blog on `What " -"is drop-shipping and how to use it `__." +"Test drop-shipping companies for yourself beforehand and list the best ones." msgstr "" -"Для детальної інформації та розуміння дропшипінгу, прочитайте наш блог про " -"`Що таке дропшипінг та як його використовувати `__." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:50 -msgid "Configuring drop-shipping" -msgstr "Налаштування дропшипінгу" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:52 -msgid "" -"Open the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`. Go " -"to **Location & Warehouse**, locate the **Dropshipping** option and tick the" -" box **Allow suppliers to deliver directly to your customers**. Then, click " -"on **Apply**." +msgid "Configure Drop-Shipping" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:54 +msgid "" +"Activate the functionality in the *Purchase* application by going to " +"*Configuration > Settings*." msgstr "" -"Відкрийте меню :menuselection:`Склад --> Налаштування --> Налаштування`. " -"Перейдіть до **Місцезнаходження та складу**, знайдіть параметр " -"**Дропшипінг** та позначте поле **Дозволити постачальникам доставляти " -"безпосередньо вашим клієнтам**. Потім натисніть кнопку **Застосувати**." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:60 msgid "" -"Then go to the menu :menuselection:`Sales --> Configuration --> Settings`. " -"Locate **Order Routing** and tick the box **Choose specific routes on sales " -"order lines (advanced)**. Click on **Apply**." +"Then, go to the *Inventory* app, in *Configuration > Settings* to activate " +"the *Multi-Step Routes* feature. It will allow you to make the *Route* field" +" appear on the sale order lines to specify you send a product via drop-" +"shipping." msgstr "" -"Потім перейдіть до меню :menuselection:`Продажі --> Налаштування --> " -"Налаштування`.. Знайдіть **Маршрутизацію замовлення** і позначте **Вибрати " -"конкретні маршрути по напрямках замовлення клієнта (розширені)**. Натисніть " -"**Застосувати**." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:67 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:68 msgid "" -"Now, open the menu :menuselection:`Sales --> Sales --> Products`. Add a " -"supplier to the products you want to dropship." +"Now, in the *Sales* app, go to *Products > Products*. Select the product you" +" would like to drop-ship and add a vendor pricelist which contains the right" +" supplier, via the purchase tab." msgstr "" -"Тепер відкрийте меню :menuselection:`Продажі --> Продажі --> Товари`. " -"Додайте постачальника до товарів, якими ви хочете скористатися для " -"дропшипінгу." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:74 -msgid "How to send products from the customers directly to the suppliers" -msgstr "Як відправити товари від клієнтів безпосередньо постачальникам" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:76 -msgid "" -"Create a **Sales Order** and specify on a sales order line for your products" -" that the route is **Dropshipping**." +msgid "Send Products from the Suppliers Directly to the Customers" msgstr "" -"Створіть **Замовлення на продаж** та вкажіть у рядку замовлення на продаж " -"для своїх товарів, що маршрут - це **Дропшипінг**." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:82 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:78 msgid "" -"Open the menu :menuselection:`Purchases --> Purchases --> Requests for " -"Quotation`. The draft purchase order is automatically created from the " -"procurement with the drop-shipping route. Once the order is confirmed, you " -"will see that one shipment has been created." +"Create a *Sales Order* and add the product on which you just set the vendor." +" Add the *Route* field thanks to the widget on the right of the sale order " +"line. Now, you are able to specify that your products’ route is *Drop-" +"Shipping*." msgstr "" -"Відкрийте меню :menuselection:`Купівлі --> Купівлі --> Запит на комерційну " -"проозицію`. Проект замовлення на купівлі автоматично створюється із " -"закупівлі за допомогою маршруту доставки. Після підтвердження замовлення ви " -"побачите, що було створено одне відправлення." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:90 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:89 msgid "" -"To confirm the sending from the vendor to the customer, go back to " -"**Inventory** app. On the dashboard, click on **# TO RECEIVE** on the " -"dropship card." +"Once the sale order is confirmed, Odoo automatically generates a *Request " +"for Quotation* for the supplier who will proceed to the drop-shipping. You " +"can find it in the *Purchase* app, with the sale order as *Source Document*." msgstr "" -"Щоби підтвердити відправлення від постачальника клієнту, поверніться до " -"програми **Склад**. На інформаційній панелі клацніть на **# ОТРИМАТИ** на " -"карті дропшипінгу." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:97 msgid "" -"It will open the list of drop-shipping transfers. Validate the transfer once" -" it has been done. The items will be directly delivered from the partner to " -"the customer without transiting to your warehouse." +"Once this *Purchase Order* is confirmed, a *Receipt Order* is created and " +"linked to it. The source location is the vendor location and the destination" +" location is the customer location. Then, the product won’t go through your " +"own stock when you validate the dropship document." msgstr "" -"Воно відкриє перелік переказів дропшипінгу. Перевірте переказ, як тільки це " -"буде зроблено. Товари будуть безпосередньо доставлені від партнера до " -"замовника, не переходячи на ваш склад." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:103 -msgid ":doc:`inventory_flow`" -msgstr ":doc:`inventory_flow`" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:105 +msgid "" +"You can also easily access the dropship document directly from your " +"inventory dashboard." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:3 msgid "How to choose the right inventory flow to handle delivery orders?" @@ -1558,203 +1069,138 @@ msgstr "" "наприклад, нижню половину типу накладної, вона буде відрізнятися:" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:3 -msgid "How to process delivery orders in one step (shipping)?" -msgstr "Як обробити замовлення на доставку в один крок (доставка)?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:8 -msgid "" -"When an order goes to the shipping department for final delivery, Odoo is " -"set up by default to utilize a one-step operation: once all goods are " -"available, they are able to be shipped in a single delivery order." +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:3 +msgid "Process a Receipt in one step (Receipt)" msgstr "" -"Коли замовлення надходить до відділу доставки для остаточної доставки, Odoo " -"за замовчуванням налаштований на використання одно-етапної операції: після " -"того, як всі товари доступні, вони можуть бути відправлені в одному " -"замовленні на доставку." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:5 msgid "" -"There is no configuration needed. The default outgoing shipments are " -"configured to be directly delivered from the stock." +"There is no configuration needed to receive in one step. The default " +"incoming shipments are configured to be directly received from the vendors " +"to the stock." msgstr "" -"Не потрібно ніяких налаштувань. Відправлення за замовчуванням налаштовуються" -" для безпосередньої доставки зі складу." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:18 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:9 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:9 msgid "" -"However, if **advance routes** is activated and you set another shipping " -"configuration on your warehouse, you can set it back to the one-step " -"delivery configuration. Go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouses` " -"and edit the concerned warehouse." +"However, if advanced routes have been activated and you set another incoming" +" configuration on your warehouse, you can set it back to the one-step " +"receipt configuration. To do so, go to *Configuration > Warehouses* and edit" +" the warehouse in question." msgstr "" -"Проте, якщо активовано **маршрути заздалегідь**, і ви встановите інше " -"налаштуванняя доставки на своєму складі, ви можете встановити його назад до " -"налаштування доставки в один крок. Перейдіть до :menuselection:`Налаштування" -" --> Склад` та редагуйте відповідний склад." + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:14 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:14 +msgid "" +"Set the *Incoming Shipments* option to *Receive goods directly (1 step)*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:21 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:21 +msgid "Create a Purchase Order" +msgstr "Створіть замовлення на купівлю" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:23 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:23 msgid "" -"Set the outgoing shippings the option to **Ship directly from stock (Ship " -"Only)**" +"To create a *Request for Quotation*, go to the *Purchase* application and " +"click on *Create*. Then, add some storable products to receive and confirm " +"the *RfQ*." msgstr "" -"Встановіть опцію відвантаження **Доставка безпосередньо зі складу (Лише " -"доставка)**" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:30 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:68 -msgid "Create a Sales Order" -msgstr "Створіть замовлення на продаж" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:32 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:27 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:27 msgid "" -"Create a sales order (From quotation to sales order) with some products to " -"deliver." +"Notice that, now, we see 1 receipt associated with the purchase order you " +"just created. If you click on the button, you will see your receipt order." msgstr "" -"Створення замовлення клієнта (від комерційної пропозиції до замовлення " -"клієнта) з деякими товарами для доставки." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:35 -msgid "" -"Notice that we now see ``1`` delivery associated with this sales order in " -"the **stat button** above the sales order." +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:35 +msgid "Process a Receipt" msgstr "" -"Зверніть увагу, що зараз ми бачимо ``1`` доставку, пов'язану з цим " -"замовленням на продаж, на **кнопці Статус** над замовленням на продаж." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:41 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:37 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:37 msgid "" -"If you click on the **1 Delivery** stat button, you should now see your " -"picking." +"You can also fin the receipt directly from the *Inventory* app. When on the " +"dashboard, you can click the *1 TO PROCESS* button under the *Receipts* " +"Kanban card. Then, you will see your receipt." msgstr "" -"Якщо ви натиснете кнопку статусу **1 доставка**, ви повинні побачити ваш " -"вибір." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:45 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:99 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:88 -msgid "Process a Delivery" -msgstr "Обробіть доставку" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:47 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:143 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:113 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:44 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:44 msgid "" -"Go to **Inventory** and click on the **# TO DO** link under the **Delivery " -"Orders** kanban card." +"Now, enter the picking that you want to process. You will be able to click " +"on *Validate* to complete the move directly as products coming from " +"suppliers are considered as being always available." msgstr "" -"Перейдіть до **Складу** та натисніть посилання **# Зробити** під карткою " -"канбану **Замовлення на доставку**. " -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:53 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:110 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:130 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:149 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:99 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:119 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:99 -msgid "Click on the picking that you want to process." -msgstr "Натисніть на комплектування, яке ви хочете обробити." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:55 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:51 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:51 msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Output** to the " -"**customer**." +"Once you *Validate* the receipt, the products leave the *Supplier Location* " +"to enter your *WH/Stock Location*. You can easily see that the receipt took " +"place thanks to the status of the document, which is now *Done*." msgstr "" -"Натисніть **Підтвердити**, щоб завершити перехід від " -"**Складу/Відвантаження** до **клієнта**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:58 -msgid "" -"This has completed the **Shipping Step** and the WH/OUT should now show " -"**Done** in the status column at the top of the page, which means the " -"product has been shipped to the customer." -msgstr "" -"Це завершило **Етап доставки**, а Склад/Відвантаження тепер має " -"відображатись як **Готово** у стовпчику статусу у верхній частині сторінки, " -"тобто товар був відправлений клієнту." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:3 -msgid "How can you change the packaging type for your sale order?" -msgstr "Як змінити тип упаковки для вашого замовлення на продаж?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Odoo gives you the possibility to change the default packaging type and " -"adapt the packaging the way you want it, depending on the weight of the " -"order." +msgid "Deliver Products in Packages" msgstr "" -"Odoo дає вам можливість змінити тип упаковки за замовчуванням і адаптувати " -"упаковку так, як вам це потрібно, залежно від ваги замовлення." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:5 msgid "" -"In the **Inventory** module, Go to **Configuration** and then click on " -"**Settings**." +"In Odoo, you have the possibility to deliver your products in different " +"packages, depending on the volume and or weight of your products." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:11 +msgid "" +"First, you need to activate the *Delivery Packages* feature in the " +"*Inventory app > Configuration > Settings*." msgstr "" -"У модулі **Склад** перейдіть до **Налаштування** та натисніть " -"**Налаштування**." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:18 +msgid "Proceed to a Delivery" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:20 msgid "" -"In :menuselection:`Traceability --> Packages`, flag **Record packages used " -"on packing : pallets, boxes,...**" +"Now, you can create a planned delivery with some products in it. You will " +"have the possibility to create new packages and assign them to the stock " +"move lines." msgstr "" -"У :menuselection:`Відстеження --> Пакунки`, поставте прапорець на **Запис " -"пакунків, що використовуються на упаковці: піддони, коробки, ...**" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:24 -msgid "*Sale process*" -msgstr "*Процес продажу*" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:26 -msgid "In the **Sales** module, go to **Sales** and click on **Sale Order**." -msgstr "" -"У модулі **Продажі** перейдіть до розділу **Продажі** та натисніть кнопку " -"**Замовлення на продаж**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:28 -msgid "Create your new Sale Order, and **Confirm the Sale**." -msgstr "Створіть нове Замовлення на продаж і **Підтвердіть продаж**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:33 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:27 msgid "" -"Once you've confirmed the Sale, you need to click on **Delivery**, to be " -"redirected to the Delivery order." +"Then, you can define the package type from this window. Once the delivery " +"order is validated, you can retrieve which products have been included in " +"the package." msgstr "" -"Після підтвердження продажу, вам потрібно натиснути кнопку **Доставка**, " -"щоби перейти до замовлення на доставку." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:36 -msgid "Click on **Edit**, and you can now change the packaging." -msgstr "Натисніть **Редагувати**, тепер ви зможете змінити упаковку." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:41 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:34 msgid "" -"In the **Operations** tab, in the last column, change the **0** and put the " -"number of products that you want to pack together. Then click on **Put in " -"Pack**." +"A button will appear at the delivery stage, allowing you to find all the " +"packages which were part of the delivery order." msgstr "" -"На вкладці **Операції** в останньому стовпці змініть **0** і встановіть " -"кількість товарів, які потрібно скласти разом. Потім клацніть на " -"**Запакувати**." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:48 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:44 +msgid "Use the Put in Pack button" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:46 msgid "" -"Choose the type of packaging that you want. You can also see that the weight" -" has been adapted to your package, and you can change it manually if you " -"want it to be more precise. Then click on **Save**." +"Another way to put products in packs is to use the *Put in Pack* button. It " +"will automatically assign a pack to the number of products which is set as " +"*Done* and duplicate the stock move line if necessary." msgstr "" -"Виберіть потрібний тип упаковки. Ви також можете побачити, що вага " -"адаптована до вашого пакунку, і ви можете змінити її вручну, якщо ви хочете," -" щоби вона була точнішою. Потім натисніть **Зберегти**." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:52 -msgid "Repeat the operation until all the products are put in pack." -msgstr "Повторіть операцію, поки всі товари не запаковані." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:54 -msgid "Finally, click on **Validate** to confirm the delivery." -msgstr "Нарешті, натисніть кнопку **Підтвердити**, щоби підтвердити доставку." +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Then, you will be able to update the different packages created this way, " +"directly via the *Packages* button." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:3 msgid "How is the scheduled delivery date computed?" @@ -1777,6 +1223,7 @@ msgstr "" "від різних часів виконання, налаштованих в Odoo." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:18 msgid "Configuring lead times" msgstr "Налаштування терміну виконання" @@ -1795,6 +1242,7 @@ msgid "Configuration of the different lead times are made as follows:" msgstr "Налаштування різних часів виконання виконується таким чином:" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:22 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:28 msgid "At a product level" msgstr "На рівні товару" @@ -1836,7 +1284,7 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:46 msgid "**Customer lead time**:" -msgstr "**Час виконання клієнта**:" +msgstr "**Термін доставки клієнту**:" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:48 msgid "" @@ -1845,10 +1293,10 @@ msgid "" "select a product, go into the sales tab and indicate your **Customer lead " "time**." msgstr "" -"Час виконання клієнта - це час, необхідний для отримання вашого товару від " -"вашого магазину/складу для вашого клієнта. Він може бути налаштований для " +"Термін доставки клієнту - це час, необхідний для отримання вашого товару від" +" вашого магазину/складу для вашого клієнта. Він може бути налаштований для " "будь-якого товару. Просто виберіть товар, перейдіть на вкладку Продажі і " -"вкажіть **Час виконання клієнта**." +"вкажіть **Термін доставки клієнту**." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:56 msgid "**Manufacturing lead time**:" @@ -1872,6 +1320,7 @@ msgstr "" "маршрути." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:67 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:74 msgid "At the company level" msgstr "На рівні компанії" @@ -1911,12 +1360,9 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:84 msgid "" -"To set ut your security dates, go to :menuselection:`Settings --> General " +"To set up your security dates, go to :menuselection:`Settings --> General " "settings` and click on **Configure your company data**." msgstr "" -"Щоби встановити ваші страхувальні дати, перейдіть до " -":menuselection:`Налаштування --> Загальні налаштування` та натисніть " -"**Налаштувати дані вашої компанії**." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:90 msgid "" @@ -1956,6 +1402,7 @@ msgstr "" "тут." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:110 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:134 msgid "At route level" msgstr "На рівні маршруту" @@ -2000,6 +1447,11 @@ msgstr "" "іншій інформаційній вкладці замовлення на продаж. Якщо ця дата раніше, ніж " "теоретична обчислювана дата, odoo автоматично відображатиме попередження." +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:137 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:173 +msgid "Example" +msgstr "Приклад" + #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:139 msgid "" "As an example, you may sell a car today (January 1st), that is purchased on " @@ -2039,467 +1491,289 @@ msgstr "" "замовлення." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:3 -msgid "How to process delivery orders in three steps (pick + pack + ship)?" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:3 +msgid "Process a Receipt in three steps (Input + Quality + Stock)" msgstr "" -"Як обробити замовлення на доставку в три етапи (комплектування + пакування +" -" доставка)?" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:5 msgid "" -"When an order goes to the shipping department for final delivery, Odoo is " -"set up by default on a **one-step** operation: once all goods are available," -" they can be shipped in bulk in a single delivery order. However, that " -"process may not reflect the reality and your company may require more steps " -"before shipping." +"In many companies, it is necessary to assess the received good. The goal is " +"to check that the products correspond to the quality requirements agreed " +"with the suppliers. Therefore, adding a *quality control step* in the goods " +"receipt process can become essential." msgstr "" -"Коли замовлення надходить до відділу доставки для остаточної доставки, Odoo " -"за замовчуванням встановлюється в **одноетапній** операції: після того, як " -"всі товари доступні, вони можуть бути відправлені оптом у єдиному замовленні" -" на доставку. Однак цей процес може не відображати реальність, і ваша " -"компанія може вимагати додаткових дій до відвантаження." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:14 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:10 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:10 msgid "" -"With the **three steps** process (**Pick + Pack + Ship**), the items are " -"transferred to a packing area, where they will be assembled by area of " -"destination, and then set to outbound trucks for final delivery to the " -"customers." +"Odoo uses routes to define exactly how you will handle the different receipt" +" steps. The configuration is done at the level of the warehouse. By default," +" the reception is a one-step process, but changing the configuration can " +"allow having 3 steps." msgstr "" -"За допомогою процесу у **три етапи** (**Комплектування+пакування+доставка**)" -" товари переносяться в зону пакування, де їх збирають за місцем призначення," -" а потім встановлюють на відвантаження для кінцевої доставки замовникам." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:19 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:15 msgid "" -"A few configuration steps are necessary in order to accomplish **Pick + Pack" -" + Ship** in Odoo. These steps create some additional locations, which by " -"default are called **Output** and **Packing Zone**. So, if your warehouse's " -"code is ``WH``, this configuration will create a location called " -"``WH/Output`` and another one called ``WH/Packing Zone``." +"The 3-steps flow is as follows: You receive the goods in an input area, then" +" transfer them into a quality area for *quality control*. When the quality " +"check has been processed, you can move the goods from QC to stock. Of " +"course, you may change the quantity and only transfer to stock the quantity " +"that is valid and decide that you will return the quantity that is not good." msgstr "" -"Для виконання **Pick + Pack + Ship** в Odoo потрібні декілька етапів " -"налаштування. Ці кроки створюють додаткові розташування, які за " -"замовчуванням називаються **Відвантаженням** і **Зоною пакування**. Таким " -"чином, якщо код вашого складу - ``WH``, це налаштування буде створювати " -"місцезнаходження, яке називається ``WH/Output``, а інший - ``WH/Packing " -"Zone``." + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:23 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:23 +msgid "Multi-Step Routes" +msgstr "Багатокрокові маршрути" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:25 msgid "" -"Goods will move from **WH/Stock** to **WH/Packing Zone** in the first step. " -"Then move from **WH/Packing Zone** to **WH/Output**. Then finally it will be" -" delivered from **WH/Output** to its **final destination**." +"First, you will need to activate the *multi-step routes* option. Indeed, " +"routes provide a mechanism to chain different actions together. Here, we " +"will chain the picking to the shipping." msgstr "" -"На першому кроці товари перейдуть з **WH/Stock** до **WH/Packing Zone**. " -"Потім перемістіть з **WH/Packing Zone** у **WH/Output**. Потім, нарешті, він" -" буде доставлений з **WH/Output** до **кінцевого пункту призначення**." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:30 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:29 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:29 msgid "" -"Check out :doc:`inventory_flow` to determine if this inventory flow is the " -"correct method for your needs." +"To activate *multi-step routes*, open the *inventory app*, and go to " +"*Configuration > Settings* and activate the option. By default, activating " +"*multi-step routes* will also activate *Storage Locations*." msgstr "" -"Перевірте :doc:`inventory_flow` щоб визначити, чи цей складський процес є " -"правильним методом для ваших потреб." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:37 -msgid "Install the Inventory module" -msgstr "Встановіть модуль Склад" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:38 +msgid "Warehouse configuration" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:39 -msgid "From the **App** menu, search and install the **Inventory** module." -msgstr "В меню **Додатки** виконайте пошук і встановіть модуль **Склад**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:44 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:40 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:40 msgid "" -"You will also need to install the **Sales** module to be able to issue sales" -" orders." +"Now that *Multi-Step Routes* is activated, go to *Configuration > Warehouse*" +" and open the one you will use to deliver in 3 steps. Then, you can select " +"the option *Pack good, send goods in output and then deliver (3 steps)* as " +"*Outgoing Shipments*." msgstr "" -"Вам також потрібно буде встановити модуль **Продажі**, щоб мати змогу " -"видавати замовлення на продаж." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:48 -msgid "Allow managing routes" -msgstr "Дозвольте керування маршрутами" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:50 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:48 msgid "" -"Odoo configures movement of delivery orders via **routes**. Routes provide a" -" mechanism to link different actions together. In this case, we will link " -"the picking step to the shipping step." +"Activating this option will lead to the creation of two new locations, " +"*Output* and *Packing Zone*." msgstr "" -"Odoo налаштовує рух замовлень на доставку через **маршрути**. Маршрути є " -"механізмом для об'єднання різних дій. У цьому випадку ми зв'яжемо етап " -"комплектування з етапом доставки." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:54 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:51 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:51 msgid "" -"To allow management of routes, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`" +"Of course, you can rename them if you want. To do so, go to *Configuration >" +" Locations* and select the one you want to rename. Change its name and hit " +"save." msgstr "" -"Щоби дозволити керування маршрутами, перейдіть до " -":menuselection:`Налаштування --> Налаштування`" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:56 -msgid "" -"Under :menuselection:`Location & Warehouse --> Routes`, activate the radio " -"button **Advanced routing of products using rules**. Make sure that the " -"option **Manage several locations per warehouse** is activated as well." -msgstr "" -"У розділі :menuselection:`Місценаходжння та Склад --> Маршрути`, активуйте " -"кнопку **Додаткові маршрутизації товарів за допомогою правил**. " -"Переконайтеся, що активовано параметр **Керування кількома " -"місцезнаходженнями на складі**." +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:56 +msgid "Create a Sales Order" +msgstr "Створити замовлення на продаж" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:64 -msgid "Configure the warehouse for Pick + Pack + Ship" -msgstr "Налаштуйте склад для Комплектування + Пакування + Доставка" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:66 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:58 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:58 msgid "" -"Go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouses` and edit the warehouse " -"that will be used." +"In the *Sales* app, create a quotation with storable products to deliver. " +"Then, confirm it and three pickings will be created and linked to your sale " +"order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:65 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:65 +msgid "Now, click on the button. You should see three different pickings:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:67 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:67 +msgid "The first one, with a reference PICK, designates the picking process;" msgstr "" -"Перейдіть до :menuselection:`Налаштування --> Склад` та відредагуйте склад, " -"який буде використовуватися." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:69 -msgid "" -"For outgoing shippings, set the option to **Make packages into a dedicated " -"location, bring them to the output location for shipping (Pick + Pack + " -"Ship).**" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:69 +msgid "The second one, with a reference PACK, is for the packing process;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:71 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:71 +msgid "The third one, with a reference OUT, designates the shipping process." msgstr "" -"Для вихідних відправлень встановіть опцію **Зробити пакування у спеціальному" -" місцезнаходженні, перенести їх у місце відвантаження для доставки " -"(Комплктування + Пакування + Доставка)**." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:77 -msgid "Create a Sale Order" -msgstr "Створіть замовлення на продаж" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:77 +msgid "Process the picking, packing, and delivery" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:79 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:79 msgid "" -"From the **Sale** module, create a sales order with some products to " -"deliver." +"The first operation to be processed is the picking and has a *Ready* status," +" while the others are *Waiting Another Operation*. The packing will become " +"*Ready* as soon as the picking is marked as *Done*." msgstr "" -"З модуля **Продажі** створіть замовлення на продаж з деякими товарами для " -"доставки." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:81 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:83 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:83 msgid "" -"Notice that we now see ``3`` transfers associated with this sales order in " -"the **stat button** above the sales order." +"You can enter the picking operation from here, or access it through the " +"inventory app." msgstr "" -"Зверніть увагу, що зараз ми бачимо ``3`` переміщення, пов'язані з цим " -"замовленням на продаж, на **кнопці Статус** над замовленням на продаж." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:87 -msgid "If you click the button, you should now see three different pickings:" -msgstr "" -"Якщо натиснути кнопку, ви повинні побачити три різні варіанти " -"комплектування:" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:89 -msgid "The first with a reference **PICK** to designate the picking process," -msgstr "" -"Перший з посиланням **КОМПЛЕКТУВАТИ**, щоби позначити процес комплектування." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:91 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:89 msgid "" -"The second one with the reference **PACK** that is the packing process," -msgstr "Другий з посиланням **ПАКУВАТИ**, який є процесом пакування." +"Note that, if you have the product in stock, it will be automatically " +"reserved and you can validate the picking document." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:93 -msgid "The last with a reference **OUT** to designate the shipping process." -msgstr "Останній з посиланням **ВІДПРАВИТИ**, щоби позначити процес доставки." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:102 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:91 -msgid "How to Process the Picking Step?" -msgstr "Як обробляти етап комплектування?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:104 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:95 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:95 msgid "" -"Ensure that you have enough product in stock and Go to **Inventory** and " -"click on the **Waiting** link under the **Pick** kanban card." +"Now that the picking has been validated, the packing order is ready to be " +"processed. Since the documents are chained, the products that have been " +"picked are automatically reserved on the packing order so you can directly " +"validate it." msgstr "" -"Переконайтеся, що у вас є достатньо товарів на складі, і перейдіть до " -"**Складу**, натисніть посилання **Очікування** під карткою канбану " -"**Комплектування**." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:112 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:101 -msgid "Click on **Reserve** to reserve the products if they are available." -msgstr "" -"Натисніть на **Резерв**, щоби зарезервувати товари, якщо вони доступні." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:114 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:106 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:106 msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Stock** to **WH/Packing" -" Zone**." +"Then, you can validate your packing. In doing so, the delivery order can be " +"processed. Once again, it will be ready to be validated so you can transfer " +"the products to the customer location." msgstr "" -"Натисніть **Перевірити**, щоби завершити переміщення з **WH/Stock** у " -"**WH/Packing Zone**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:116 -msgid "" -"This has completed the picking Step and the **WH/PICK** should now show " -"**Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"moved from **WH/Stock** to **WH/Packing Zone** location, which makes the " -"product available for the next step (Packing)." -msgstr "" -"Це завершить етап комплектування, і **WH/PICK** тепер має відображатися як " -"**Готово** у стовпчику статусу у верхній частині сторінки. Товар був " -"перенесений з **WH/Stock** в зону **WH/Packing Zone**, що робить товар " -"доступним для наступного етапу (Пакування)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:122 -msgid "How to Process the Packing Step?" -msgstr "Як пройти етап пакування?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:124 -msgid "" -"Go to **Inventory** and click on the **# TRANSFERS** link under the **Pack**" -" kanban card." -msgstr "" -"Перейдіть до **Складу** та натисніть посилання **# ПЕРЕМІЩЕННЯ** під картою " -"канбану **Пакунок**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:132 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Packing Zone** to " -"**WH/Output**." -msgstr "" -"Натисніть **Перевірити**, щоби завершити перехід від **WH/Packing Zone** до " -"**WH/Output**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:135 -msgid "" -"This has completed the packing step and the **WH/PACK** should now show " -"**Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"moved from **WH/Packing Zone** to **WH/Output location**, which makes the " -"product available for the next step (Shipping)." -msgstr "" -"Це завершить етап пакування, і **WH/PACK** тепер має відображатися як " -"**Готово** в стовпчику статусу у верхній частині сторінки. Товар був " -"перенесений з **WH/Packing Zone** у **WH/Output location**, що робить товар " -"доступним для наступного етапу (Доставка)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:141 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:111 -msgid "How to Process the Shipping Step?" -msgstr "Як обробляти крок доставки?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:151 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Output** to the " -"**customer** (Click **Apply** to assign the quantities based on the " -"quantities listed in the **To Do** column)." -msgstr "" -"Натисніть **Підтвердити**, щоби завершити перехід від **WH/Output** до " -"**клієнта** (натисніть **Прийняти**, щоби призначити кількість, що базується" -" на кількості, зазначеної у стовпці **Зробити**)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:155 -msgid "" -"This has completed the shipping step and the **WH/OUT** should now show " -"**Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"shipped to the customer." -msgstr "" -"Це завершить етап доставки, і **WH/OUT** тепер має відображатися як " -"**Готово** у стовпчику статусу у верхній частині сторінки. Товар був " -"відправлений замовнику." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:3 -msgid "How to process delivery orders in two steps (pick + ship)?" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:3 +msgid "Process a Receipt in two steps (Input + Stock)" msgstr "" -"Як обробити замовлення на доставку у два етапи (комплектування + доставка)?" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:8 msgid "" -"When an order goes to the shipping department for final delivery, Odoo is " -"set up by default to utilize a **one-step** operation: once all goods are " -"available, they are able to be shipped in a single delivery order. However, " -"your company's business process may have one or more steps that happen " -"before shipping. In the **two steps** process, the items in a delivery order" -" are **picked** in the warehouse and brought to an **output location** for " -"**shipping**. The goods are then shipped." +"Odoo uses routes to define exactly how you will handle the different receipt" +" steps. The configuration is done at the *Warehouse* level. By default, the " +"reception is a one-step process, but changing the configuration can allow " +"you to have 2 steps." msgstr "" -"Коли замовлення надходить до відділу доставки для остаточної доставки, Odoo " -"за замовчуванням налаштований на використання **одно-етапної** операції: " -"після того, як всі товари доступні, вони можуть бути відправлені в одному " -"замовленні на доставку. Проте бізнес-процес вашої компанії може мати один " -"або кілька кроків, які відбуваються перед відправленням. У процесі виконання" -" **двох етапів** товари у замовленні на доставку **комплектуються** на " -"складі та перевозяться до **місця відвантаження** для **доставки**. Потім " -"товар поставляється." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:16 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:13 msgid "" -"In order to accomplish a **Pick + Ship** delivery in Odoo, there are a few " -"necessary configuration steps. These steps create an additional location, " -"which by default is called **Output**. So, if your warehouse's code is " -"``WH``, this configuration will create a location called ``WH/Output``. " -"Goods will move from ``WH/Stock`` to ``WH/Output`` in the first step " -"(picking). Then, they move from ``WH/Output`` to ``WH/Customers`` (in the " -"case of sales orders) in the second step (shipping)." +"The 2 steps flow is like this: you receive the goods in an input area, then " +"transfer them to your stock. As long as the goods are not transferred in " +"your stock, they will not be available for further processing." msgstr "" -"Для виконання доставки **Комплектування + Доставка** в Odoo існує кілька " -"необхідних етапів налаштування. Ці кроки створюють додаткове місце, яке за " -"замовчуванням називається **Відвантаження**. Отже, якщо ваш код складу " -"``WH``, це налаштування буде створювати місцезнаходження, яке називається " -"``WH/Output``. Товари перенесуть з ``WH/Stock`` до ``WH/Output`` на першому " -"кроці (комплектування). Потім вони переміщуються з ``WH/Output`` на " -"``WH/Customers`` (у випадку замовлення на продаж) на другому кроці " -"(доставка)." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:32 -msgid "Allow management of routes" -msgstr "Дозвольте керування маршрутами " +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:19 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:19 +msgid "Activate Multi-Step Routes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:21 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:21 +msgid "" +"The first step is to allow using *multi-step routes*. Indeed, routes provide" +" a mechanism to chain different actions together. In this case, we will " +"chain the unload step in the input area to the step entering the products in" +" stock." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:26 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:26 +msgid "" +"To allow *multi-step routes*, go to *Configuration > Settings* and activate " +"the feature. By default, activating *multi-step routes* will also activate " +"*Storage Locations*." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:34 -msgid "" -"Odoo configures movement of delivery orders via the **routes**. Routes " -"provide a mechanism to chain different actions together. In this case, we " -"will chain the picking step to the shipping step." +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:34 +msgid "Configure warehouse for receipt in 2 steps" msgstr "" -"Odoo налаштовує рух замовлень доставки через **маршрути**. Маршрути " -"забезпечують механізм для об'єднання різних дій. У цьому випадку ми будемо " -"ланцюжком етапу вибору до етапу доставки." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:36 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:36 msgid "" -"To allow management of routes, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`." +"Once *multi-step routes* is activated, you can go to *Configuration > " +"Warehouse* and enter the warehouse which will use receipt in 2 steps. Then, " +"you can select the option *Receive goods in input and then stock (2 steps)* " +"for *Incoming Shipments*." msgstr "" -"Щоби дозволити керування маршрутами, перейдіть до " -":menuselection:`Налаштування --> Налаштування`" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:40 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:45 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:44 msgid "" -"Ensure that the radio button **Advanced routing of products using rules** is" -" checked." +"Activating this option will lead to the creation of a new *Input* location. " +"If you want to rename it, you can go to *Configuration > Locations > Select " +"Input* and update its name." msgstr "" -"Переконайтеся, що **Додаткова маршрутизація товарів, що використовує " -"правила**, перевіряється." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:46 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:54 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:52 +msgid "Create a purchase order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:56 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:54 msgid "" -"Click on **Apply** at the top of the page to save changes (if you needed to " -"check the radio button above)." +"In the *Purchase* application, you can create a *Request for Quotation* with" +" some storable products to receive from a supplier. Once the *RfQ* is " +"confirmed, the receipt picking will be created and automatically linked to " +"your purchase order." msgstr "" -"Натисніть **Застосувати** у верхній частині сторінки, щоб зберегти зміни " -"(якщо потрібно перевірити кнопку вище)." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:50 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:65 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:62 msgid "" -"If you checked option **Advanced routing of products using rules** you may " -"need to activate **Manage several locations per warehouse** if it wasn't " -"activated beforehand." +"Now, by clicking on the *1 Receipt* button, you will see the first picking " +"which will allow entering the product in the *input location*. Then, another" +" picking, an internal transfer, has been created in order to move the " +"products to *Stock*." msgstr "" -"Якщо ви позначили параметр **Додаткові маршрутизації товарів за допомогою " -"правил**, вам може знадобитися активувати **Керування кількома " -"місцезнаходженнями на складі**, якщо це не було активовано заздалегідь." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:55 -msgid "Configure warehouse for Pick + Ship" -msgstr "Налаштуйте склад для Комплектування + Доставка" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:57 -msgid "" -"To configure a **Pick + Ship** move, go to :menuselection:`Configuration -->" -" Warehouses` and edit the warehouse that will be used." +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:71 +msgid "Process the picking and the delivery" msgstr "" -"Щоб налаштувати переміщення **Комплектування+Доставка**, перейдіть до " -":menuselection:`Налаштування --> Склад` та відредагуйте склад, який буде " -"використовуватися." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:61 -msgid "" -"For outgoing shippings, set the option to **Bring goods to output location " -"before shipping (Pick + Ship)**" -msgstr "" -"Для вихідних відправлень встановіть опцію **Переміщення товару до місця " -"відвантаження для доставки (Комплектування + Доставка)**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:70 -msgid "" -"Install the **Sale** if it is not the case, and create a sales order with " -"some products to deliver." -msgstr "" -"Встановіть **Продаж**, якщо його не встановлено, і створіть замовлення на " -"продаж з деякими товарами для доставки." #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:73 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:70 msgid "" -"Notice that we now see ``2`` transfers associated with this sales order in " -"the **Delivery** stat button above the sales order." +"The receipt is the first one to be processed and has a *Ready* status while " +"the internal transfer will only become *Ready* once the receipt has been " +"marked as *Done*." msgstr "" -"Зверніть увагу, що зараз ми бачимо ``2`` перекази, пов'язані з цим " -"замовленням на продаж, у кнопці статусу **Доставка** над замовленням на " -"продаж." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:79 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:77 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:74 msgid "" -"If you click on the **2 Transfers** stat button, you should now see two " -"different pickings, one with a reference **PICK** to designate the picking " -"process and another with a reference **OUT** to designate the shipping " -"process." +"You can enter the receipt operation from the purchase order, or access it " +"through the inventory dashboard." msgstr "" -"Якщо ви натиснете кнопку статусу **2 Переміщення**, тепер ви повинні " -"побачити два різних комплектування, один з посиланням **КОМПЛЕКТУВАТИ**, " -"щоби позначити процес комплектування, а інший з посиланням **ВІДПРАВЛЕННЯ**," -" щоби позначити процес доставки." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:93 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:84 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:80 msgid "" -"Ensure that you have enough product in stock, and go to **Inventory** and " -"click on the **Waiting** link under the **Pick** kanban card." +"By default, a receipt is always considered as ready to be processed. Then, " +"you will be able to directly click on *Validate* to mark it as done." msgstr "" -"Переконайтеся, що у вас є достатньо товарів на складі, і перейдіть до " -"**Складу** та натисніть посилання **Очікування** під картою канбану " -"**Комплектування**." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:103 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:92 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:87 msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Stock** to " -"**WH/Output**." +"Once the receipt has been validated, the internal transfer is ready to be " +"processed. As documents are chained, the products which have been received " +"are automatically reserved on the internal transfer. Once the transfer is " +"validated, those products enter the stock and you will be able to use them " +"to fulfill customer deliveries or manufacture products." msgstr "" -"Натисніть **Перевірити**, щоби завершити перехід від **WH/Stock** до " -"**WH/Output**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:105 -msgid "" -"This has completed the picking step and the **WH/PICK** move should now show" -" **Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"moved from **WH/Stock** to **WH/Output** location, which makes the product " -"**available for the next step** (Shipping)." -msgstr "" -"Це завершить етап комплектування, і рух **WH/PICK** тепер має відображатися " -"як Готово в стовпчику статусу у верхній частині сторінки. Товар був " -"перенесений з **WH/Stock** в місце **WH/Output**, що робить товар " -"**доступним для наступного кроку** (Доставка)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:121 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Output** to the " -"customer (Click **Apply** to assign the quantities based on the quantities " -"listed in the **To Do** column)" -msgstr "" -"Натисніть на **Підтвердити**, щоб завершити переміщення зі " -"**Склад/Відправка** клієнту (Натисніть **Підтвердити**, щоби призначити " -"кількість на основі кількості, зазначеної в колонці **Зробити**)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:125 -msgid "" -"This has completed the shipping step and the **WH/OUT** move should now show" -" **Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"shipped to the customer." -msgstr "" -"Це завершило етап доставки, і переміщення **WH/OUT** тепер повинно " -"відображатися як **Готово** в стовпчику статусу у верхній частині сторінки. " -"Товар був відправлений замовнику." #: ../../inventory/management/incoming.rst:3 msgid "Incoming Shipments" @@ -2603,379 +1877,12 @@ msgid "This is the default configuration in Odoo." msgstr "Це налаштування за замовчуванням в Odoo" #: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:68 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:126 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:97 msgid ":doc:`../delivery/inventory_flow`" msgstr ":doc:`../delivery/inventory_flow`" -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:3 -msgid "How to add a quality control step in goods receipt? (3 steps)" -msgstr "Як додати контроль якості в товарний чек? (3 кроки)" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:8 -msgid "" -"In many companies, it is necessary to assess the received good. The goal is " -"to check that the products correspond to the quality requirements agreed " -"with the suppliers. Therefore, adding a quality control step in the goods " -"receipt process can become essential." +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:68 +msgid "Process the receipt and the internal transfer" msgstr "" -"У багатьох компаніях необхідно оцінити отриманий товар. Мета полягає в " -"перевірці того, що товари відповідають вимогам щодо якості, узгодженим із " -"постачальниками. Тому додавання етапу контролю якості у процесі надходження " -"товарів може стати важливим." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Odoo uses routes to define exactly how you will handle the different receipt" -" steps. The configuration is done at the level of the warehouse. By default," -" the reception is a one step process, but changing the configuration can " -"allow to have 2 or even 3 steps." -msgstr "" -"Odoo використовує маршрути, щоб точно визначити, як ви будете обробляти " -"різні етапи прийому. Налаштування виконується на рівні складу. За " -"замовчуванням прийом - це один крок, але зміна налаштування може призвести 2" -" або навіть 3 кроків." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:18 -msgid "" -"The 3 steps flow is as follows: You receive the goods in an input area, then" -" transfer them into quality area for quality control. When the quality check" -" has been processed, you can move the goods from QC to stock. Of course, you" -" may change the quantity and only transfer to stock the quantity that is " -"valid and decide that you will return the quantity that is not good." -msgstr "" -"Три кроки полягають в наступному: ви отримуєте товари у місці прийому, а " -"потім передаєте їх у зону якості для контролю якості. Коли перевірка якості " -"була оброблена, ви можете перемістити товари з КЯ на склад. Звичайно, ви " -"можете змінити кількість і передати на склад лиш ту кількість, яка є " -"дійсною, і вирішити, яку неправильну кількість ви повернете." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:25 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:18 -msgid "This is the case that will be explained in this document." -msgstr "Це той випадок, який буде пояснено в цьому документі." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:31 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:24 -msgid "Use advanced routes" -msgstr "Використовуйте розширені маршрути" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:33 -msgid "" -"To allow management of routes, go to the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Configuration --> Settings`." -msgstr "" -"Щоб дозволити керування маршрутами, перейдіть до меню :menuselection:`Склад " -"--> Налаштування --> Налаштування`." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:39 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:32 -msgid "" -"Ensure that the routes option **Advance routing of product using rules** is " -"checked, then click on **Apply** to save changes." -msgstr "" -"Переконайтеся, що **Попередня маршрутизація товару з використанням правил** " -"відмічена та натисніть кнопку **Застосувати**, щоб зберегти зміни." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:42 -msgid "" -"Make sure that **Manage several locations per warehouse** is also ticked." -msgstr "" -"Переконайтеся, що також позначено пункт **Керування кількома " -"місцезнаходженнями на складі**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:46 -msgid "How to add a quality control step in goods receipt?" -msgstr "Як додати контроль якості в товарний чек?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:48 -msgid "" -"Go to the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Warehouse` " -"and choose the warehouse where you want to change reception methods." -msgstr "" -"Перейдіть до меню :menuselection:`Склад --> Налаштування--> Склад` і " -"виберіть склад, в якому потрібно змінити методи прийому." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:51 -msgid "" -"By default, warehouses are configured with one step reception (**Receive " -"goods directly into stock**)." -msgstr "" -"За замовчуванням склади налаштовані з одним етапом прийому (**Прийом товару " -"прямо на складі**)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:54 -msgid "" -"To add quality control before transfer goods into stock location, tick " -"**Unload in input location, go through a quality control before being " -"admitted in stock (3 steps)**." -msgstr "" -"Щоб додати контроль якості перед перенесенням товарів у місце розташування, " -"позначте **Розвантажити у місці прийому, перейдіть до контролю якості, перш " -"ніж він буде допущений до складу (3 кроки)**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:62 -msgid "How to control a receipt?" -msgstr "Як контролювати товарний чек?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:65 -msgid "How to process the receipt step ?" -msgstr "Як обробляти етап прийому?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:67 -msgid "" -"In the **Purchase** app, create a **Request for Quotation**. Click on the " -"**Confirm order** button. You can see that there is one **Shipment** related" -" to purchase order in the stat button above the purchase order form view. " -"This is the receipt step." -msgstr "" -"У додатку **Купівля** створіть запит на **Комерційну пропозицію**. Натисніть" -" кнопку **Підтвердити замовлення**. Ви можете побачити, що у розділі Статус " -"над формою перегляду замовлення на купівлю є одне **Відправлення**, " -"пов'язане із замовленням на купівлю. Це етап чеку." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:75 -msgid "" -"Go to **Inventory** and click on the link **# TO RECEIVE** in the " -"**Receipts** card." -msgstr "" -"Перейдіть до **Складу** та натисніть посилання **# ОТРИМАТИ** на картці " -"**Надходження**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:80 -msgid "" -"Click on the receipt that you want to process. Click on **Validate** to " -"complete the move from the **Vendor** location to **WH/Input**." -msgstr "" -"Натисніть на чек, який ви хочете обробити. Натисніть **Перевірити**, щоб " -"завершити переміщення з місцезнаходження **Постачальника** до **WH/Input**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:83 -msgid "" -"This has completed the receipt step and the status column at the top of the " -"page for **WH/IN** should now show **Done**. The product has been moved from" -" the **Vendor** to the **WH/Input** location, which makes the product " -"available for the next step (Move to the quality control zone)" -msgstr "" -"Це завершило етап чеку, а стовпчик статусу у верхній частині сторінки для " -"**WH/IN** тепер повинен відображатися як **Готово**. Товар перенесений від " -"**Постачальника** в місцезнаходження **WH/Input**, що робить товар доступним" -" для наступного кроку (Перехід до зони контролю якості)" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:89 -msgid "" -"How to move your product from the receipt zone to the quality control zone ?" -msgstr "Як перемістити товар з етапу товарного чеку в зону контролю якості?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:91 -msgid "" -"Go to the **Inventory** dashboard. You will see that there is one transfer " -"ready (the move to the quality control zone) and one waiting (the move to " -"the stock after the control). Click on the link **# TRANSFERS** in the " -"**Internal Transfers** to process the quality control." -msgstr "" -"Перейдіть на інформаційну панель **Складу**. Ви побачите, що готовий один " -"перехід (перехід до зони контролю якості) та одне очікування (переміщення до" -" складу після контролю). Натисніть на посилання **# ПЕРЕМІЩЕННЯ** у " -"**Внутрішніх переміщеннях** для обробки контролю якості." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:101 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Input** to **WH/Quality" -" Control**." -msgstr "" -"Натисніть **Підтвердити**, щоб завершити переміщення з **WH/Input** у " -"**WH/Quality Control**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:104 -msgid "" -"This has completed the internal transfer step and the status column at the " -"top of the page for **WH/INT** should now show **Done**. The receipt is now " -"ready to be controlled." -msgstr "" -"Це завершило внутрішній етап переміщення, а статус у верхній частині " -"сторінки для **WH/INT** має відображатися як **Готово**. Тепер товарний чек " -"готовий до контролю якості." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:109 -msgid "How to to process the quality control ?" -msgstr "Як обробляти контроль якості?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:111 -msgid "" -"Go back to the **Inventory** dashboard. The waiting transfer is now ready. " -"Click on the link **# TRANSFERS** in the **Internal Transfers** card to " -"process the quality control." -msgstr "" -"Поверніться до інформаційної панелі **Складу**. Очікування переміщення вже " -"готове. Натисніть на посилання **# ПЕРЕМІЩЕННЯ** у картці **Внутрішніх " -"переміщень** для обробки контролю якості." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:118 -msgid "" -"Click on the last picking to process. Click on **Validate** to complete the " -"move from **WH/Quality Control** to **WH/Stock**." -msgstr "" -"Натисніть на останнє комплектування для обробки. Натисніть **Перевірити**, " -"щоб завершити перехід від **WH/Quality Control** до **WH/Stock**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:121 -msgid "" -"This has completed the quality control step and the status column at the top" -" of the page for **WH/INT** should now show **Done**. The receipt has been " -"controlled and has moved to your stock." -msgstr "" -"Це завершило етап контролю якості, статус у верхній частині сторінки має " -"відображатися для **WH/INT** як **Готово**. Товарний чек перевірили та " -"перемістили на ваш склад." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:127 -msgid ":doc:`two_steps`" -msgstr ":doc:`two_steps`" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:3 -msgid "How to unload your shipment to an input location? (2 steps)" -msgstr "Як завантажити вашу доставку на місце прийому? (2 кроки)" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:13 -msgid "" -"The 2 steps flow is the following : You receive the goods in an input area " -"then transfer them from input area to your stock. As long as the goods are " -"not transferred in your stock, they will not be available for further " -"processing." -msgstr "" -"Процес у два кроки полягає в наступному: ви отримуєте товари в області " -"прийому, після чого перенесіть їх з області прийому до вашого складу. Поки " -"товари не будуть передані на ваш склад, вони не будуть доступні для " -"подальшої обробки." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:26 -msgid "" -"To allow management of routes, go to the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Configuration --> Settings`" -msgstr "" -"Щоб дозволити керування маршрутами, перейдіть до меню :menuselection:`Склад " -"--> Налаштування --> Налаштування`." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:35 -msgid "" -"Make sure that **\"Manage several locations per warehouse\"** is also " -"ticked." -msgstr "" -"Переконайтеся, що також позначено пункт **\"Керування кількома " -"місцезнаходженнями на складі\"**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:39 -msgid "How to configure your warehouse ?" -msgstr "Як налаштувати свій склад?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:41 -msgid "" -"Go to the the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> " -"Warehouse` and choose the warehouse where you want to change reception " -"methods." -msgstr "" -"Перейдіть до меню :menuselection:`Склад --> Налаштування--> Склад` і " -"виберіть склад, в якому потрібно змінити методи прийому." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:44 -msgid "" -"By default, warehouses are configured with one step reception (option " -"**Receive goods directly into stock**)." -msgstr "" -"За замовчуванням склади налаштовані з одним етапом прийому (опція **Прийому " -"товару прямо на складі**)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:47 -msgid "" -"To add the control step, tick **Unload in input location then go to stock (2" -" steps)**." -msgstr "" -"Щоб додати етап контролю, позначте пункт **Розпочати в місці прийому, потім " -"перейти до складу (2 кроки)**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:54 -msgid "How to receipt a shipment in 2 steps?" -msgstr "Як одержати доставку у два кроки?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:57 -msgid "How to process the Receipt step ?" -msgstr "Як обробляти етап прийому?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:59 -msgid "" -"In the purchase module, create a **Request for Quotation**, then click on " -"the **Confirm order** button. You can see that there is one **Shipment** " -"related to purchase order in the **stat button** above the purchase order " -"form view. This is the receipt step." -msgstr "" -"У модулі покупки створіть **Запит на комерційну пропозицію**, потім " -"натисніть кнопку **Підтвердити замовлення**. Ви можете побачити, що на " -"**кнопці статусу** над формою перегляду замовлення на купівлю є одне " -"**Відправлення**, пов'язане із замовленням на купівлю. Це етап товарного " -"чеку." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:67 -msgid "" -"Go to **Inventory** and click on the **# TO RECEIVE** link on the " -"**Receipts** card." -msgstr "" -"Перейдіть до **Складу** та натисніть посилання **# ОТРИМАТИ** на картці " -"**Надходження**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:73 -msgid "" -"Click on the receipt that you want to process, then click on **Validate** to" -" complete the move from the **Vendor** to **WH/Input**." -msgstr "" -"Натисніть на товарний чек, який ви хочете обробити, а потім натисніть кнопку" -" **Підтвердити**, щоб завершити перехід від **Постачальника** до " -"**WH/Input**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:76 -msgid "" -"This has completed the Receipt Step and the move refered with **WH/IN**. The" -" product has been moved from the **Vendor** to the **WH/Input** location, " -"which makes the product available for the next step." -msgstr "" -"Це завершило етап **Товарного чеку**, а переміщення пов'язано з **WH/IN**. " -"Товар був перенесений від **Постачальника** в місце **WH/Input**, що робить " -"товар доступним для наступного кроку." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:81 -msgid "How to transfer the receipt to your stock ?" -msgstr "Як перемістити чек на ваш склад?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:83 -msgid "" -"Go back to the **Inventory** dashboard. The waiting transfer is now ready. " -"Click on the **# TRANSFERS** in the **Internal Transfers** to process the " -"quality control." -msgstr "" -"Поверніться до інформаційної панелі **Складу**. Очікування переміщення вже " -"готове. Натисніть на **# ПЕРЕМІЩЕННЯ** у **Внутрішніх переміщеннях** для " -"обробки **Контролю якості**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:90 -msgid "" -"Click on the picking you want to process. Click on **Validate** to complete " -"the move from **WH/Input** to **WH/Stock**." -msgstr "" -"Натисніть на комплектування, яке ви хочете обробити. Натисніть на " -"**Перевірити**, щоб завершити переміщення з **WH/Input** у **WH/Stock**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:93 -msgid "" -"This has completed the internal transfer step and the move refered with " -"**WH/INT**. The receipt has been moved to your stock." -msgstr "" -"Це завершило внутрішній етап переміщення, а переміщення пов'язане з " -"**WH/INT**. Товарний чек було перенесено на ваш склад." - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:98 -msgid ":doc:`three_steps`" -msgstr ":doc:`three_steps`" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers.rst:3 msgid "Lots and Serial Numbers" @@ -2986,11 +1893,8 @@ msgid "What's the difference between lots and serial numbers?" msgstr "Яка різниця між партіями та серійними номерами?" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:170 msgid "Introduction" -msgstr "Загальний огляд" +msgstr "Вступ" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:8 msgid "" @@ -3075,42 +1979,129 @@ msgstr "" "взагалі не має сенсу." #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:46 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:135 msgid ":doc:`serial_numbers`" msgstr ":doc:`serial_numbers`" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:47 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:129 msgid ":doc:`lots`" msgstr ":doc:`lots`" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:3 -msgid "How to manage lots of identical products?" -msgstr "Управління партіями товарів" +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:3 +msgid "Manage expiration dates" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In many companies, products have expiration dates and they should be tracked" +" based on those dates. In the food industry, for example, tracking stocks " +"based on expiration dates is mandatory to avoid selling expired products to " +"customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:10 +msgid "" +"With Odoo, you can track your products based on their expiration dates, even" +" if they are already tracked by lots or serial numbers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:14 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:15 +msgid "Configurations" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:17 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:18 +msgid "Application configuration" +msgstr "Налаштування програми" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:19 +msgid "" +"To use expiration dates tracking, open the *Inventory* application and go to" +" *Configuration > Settings* and activate the *Lots & Serial Numbers* and " +"*Expiration Dates* features." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:27 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:28 +#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:68 +#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:90 +msgid "Product configuration" +msgstr "Налаштування товару" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:29 +msgid "" +"Now, you have the possibility to define different dates in the *inventory " +"tab* of the product form:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:32 +msgid "" +"Product Use Time: it’s the number of days before the goods start " +"deteriorating, without being dangerous yet. It will be computed using the " +"lot/serial number;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:34 +msgid "" +"Product Life Time: refers to the number of days before the goods may become " +"dangerous and must not be consumed. It will be computed on the lot/serial " +"number;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:36 +msgid "" +"Product Removal Time: shows the number of days before the goods should be " +"removed from the stock. It will be computed on the lot/serial number;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:38 +msgid "" +"Product Alert Time: refers to the number of days before an alert should be " +"raised on the lot/serial number." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:44 +msgid "Expiration Date on Lots/Serial Numbers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:46 +msgid "" +"When receiving a product in stock, the dates will automatically be updated " +"on the corresponding lot/serial number. This update will be based on the " +"reception date of the product and the times set on the product form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:58 +msgid "Expiration Alerts" +msgstr "Сповіщення про закінчення терміну дії" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:60 +msgid "" +"You can access all your expiration alerts from the *inventory* app. To do " +"so, go to *Master Data > Lots/Serial Numbers*. There, you can use the pre-" +"existing filter that shows all the lots/serial numbers that exceeded their " +"alert date." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:3 +msgid "Manage lots of identical products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:5 msgid "" "Lots are useful for products you receive in great quantity and for which a " -"lot number can help in reportings, quality controls, or any other info. Lots" -" will help identify a number of pieces having for instance a production " +"lot number can help in reporting, quality controls, or any other info. Lots " +"will help identify a number of pieces having, for instance, a production " "fault. It can be useful for a batch production of clothes or food." msgstr "" -"Партії використовуються для товарів, які ви отримуєте у великій кількості, і" -" для яких партійний номер може допомогти у звітах, контролю якості або будь-" -"якій іншій інформації. Партія допоможе ідентифікувати декілька творів, " -"наприклад, виробничу помилку. Це може бути корисним для серійного " -"виробництва одягу або їжі." -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:14 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:11 msgid "" -"Odoo has the capacity to manage lots ensuring compliance with the " +"Odoo has the capacity to manage lots, ensuring compliance with the " "traceability requirements imposed by the majority of industries." msgstr "" -"Odoo має можливість управляти партіями, забезпечуючи відповідність вимогам " -"відстеження, встановленими більшістю галузей промисловості." -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:17 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:14 msgid "" "The double-entry management in Odoo enables you to run very advanced " "traceability." @@ -3118,759 +2109,1326 @@ msgstr "" "Управління подвійним введенням в Odoo дає вам можливість запустити дуже " "просунуте відстеження." -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:21 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:19 -msgid "Setting up" -msgstr "Налаштування" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:24 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:22 -msgid "Application configuration" -msgstr "Налаштування програми" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:26 -msgid "" -"You need activate the tracking of lots in the settings. In the **Inventory**" -" application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`, select " -"**Track lots or serial numbers**" +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:18 +msgid "Setting Up" msgstr "" -"Вам потрібно активувати відстеження партій у налаштуваннях. У програмі Склад" -" перейдіть до розділу :menuselection:`Налаштування --> Налаштування`, " -"виберіть **Відстежувати партії або серійні номери**." + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:21 +msgid "Application Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:23 +msgid "" +"First, you need to activate the tracking of lot numbers. To do so, go to " +"*Inventory > Configuration > Settings* and tick *Lots & Serial Numbers*. " +"Then, click on save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:31 +msgid "Product Configuration" +msgstr "Налаштування товару" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:33 msgid "" -"In order to have an advanced management of the lots, you should also select " -"**Manage several locations per warehouse**." +"Now, you have to configure which products you want to track by serial " +"numbers." msgstr "" -"Щоби мати розширене керування партіями, ви також повинні вибрати **Керування" -" кількома місцезнаходженнями на складі**." -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:39 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:31 -#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:27 -#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:26 -msgid "Then click on **Apply**." -msgstr "Потім натисніть **Застосувати**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:42 -msgid "Operation types configuration" -msgstr "Налаштування типів операцій" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:44 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:36 msgid "" -"You also need to set up how you will manage lots for each operations. In the" -" **Inventory** application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Operation Types`." +"Go to *Master Data > Products* and open the product of your choice. There, " +"click on *Edit* and select *Tracking by Lots* in the inventory tab." msgstr "" -"Вам також необхідно налаштувати, як ви будете управляти партіями для кожної " -"операції. У програмі **Склад** перейдіть до :menuselection:`Налаштування -->" -" Типи операції`." -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:48 -msgid "" -"For each type (receipts, internal transfers, deliveries,...), you can set if" -" you can create new lot numbers or only use existing lot numbers." +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:47 +msgid "Manage Lots" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:52 +msgid "" +"In order to receive a product tracked by lots, you have to specify its lot " +"numbers. You have several ways of doing so:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:55 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:65 +msgid "Manually assign the different lot numbers" msgstr "" -"Для кожного типу (чеки, внутрішні переміщення, доставки, ...) ви можете " -"встановити, чи можете ви створювати нові партійні номери або використовувати" -" лише існуючі партійні номери." #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:57 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:36 -msgid "" -"Finally, you have to configure which products you want to track in lots." +msgid "Copy/paste lot numbers from an Excel file" msgstr "" -"Нарешті, ви повинні налаштувати, які товари ви хочете відслідковувати у " -"партіях. " #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:59 -msgid "" -"Go into :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Products`, and open the " -"product of your choice. Click on **Edit**, and in the **Inventory** tab, " -"select **Tracking by Lots**, then click on **Save**." +msgid "First, you need to open the detailed operations of your picking." msgstr "" -"Увійдіть у :menuselection:`Складський контроль --> Товари` та відкрийте " -"товар за вашим вибором. Натисніть **Редагувати**, а на вкладці **Склад** " -"виберіть **Відстеження партій**, потім натисніть **Зберегти**." #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:67 -msgid "Manage lots" -msgstr "Управління партіями" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:70 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:49 -msgid "Transfers" -msgstr "Переміщення" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:72 msgid "" -"In order to process a transfer of a product tracked by lot, you have to " -"input the lot number(s)." +"When opening the detailed operations, you can click on *Add a line*. Then, " +"you will be able to fill the lot number in. Once done, you can click on *Add" +" a line* again to register a new lot number." msgstr "" -"Для обробки переміщення товару, який відстежується за партією, потрібно " -"ввести номер(и) партії." #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:75 -msgid "Click on the lot icon :" -msgstr "Натисніть значок партії:" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:80 -msgid "" -"A window will pop-up. Click on **Add an item** and fill in the lot number " -"and the quantity." +msgid "Copy/paste lot number from an Excel file" msgstr "" -"Відкриється вікно. Натисніть **Додати елемент** та введіть номер партії та " -"кількість." -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:86 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:77 msgid "" -"Depending on your operation type configuration, you will be able to fill in " -"new lot numbers, or only use existing ones." +"Once the spreadsheet containing the lot numbers you received from your " +"supplier and copy the list. Then, you can paste them in the *Lot/Serial " +"Number Name* column for Odoo to automatically create the necessary lines. " +"After that, you will have to manually enter the number of products that are " +"contained in each one of the lots." msgstr "" -"Залежно від налаштування типу операції ви зможете заповнити нові партійні " -"номери або використовувати лише існуючі." - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:90 -msgid "In the scanner interface, you just have to scan the lot numbers." -msgstr "В інтерфейсі сканера вам потрібно сканувати номери партії." #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:93 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:79 -msgid "Inventory adjustment" -msgstr "Інвентаризація " +msgid "Operation Types" +msgstr "Типи операції" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:95 -msgid "Inventory of a product tracked by lot can be done in 2 ways:" +msgid "" +"Of course, you also have the possibility to define how you will manage lots " +"for each operation type. To do so, open the *Inventory* app and go to " +"*Configuration > Operation Types*." msgstr "" -"Інвентаризація товару, який відстежується за партією, може здійснюватися " -"двома способами:" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:97 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:83 -msgid "Classic inventory by products" -msgstr "Класична інвентаризація по товарах" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:99 -msgid "Inventory of a lot" -msgstr "Інвентаризація партій" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:101 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:87 msgid "" -"When doing a classic inventory, there is a **Serial Number** column. If the " -"product has already been assigned with a number, it is already pre-filled." +"For each type (receipts, internal transfers, deliveries, …), you can decide " +"if you allow to create new lot numbers or only use existing ones. By " +"default, the creation of new lots is only allowed at product reception, and " +"using existing lot numbers isn’t allowed in this operation. If you have " +"inter-warehouse transfers and track products by lots, it can be useful to " +"allow using existing lot numbers in receipts too." msgstr "" -"При виконанні класичної інвентаризації є стовпець **Серійний номер**. Якщо " -"товар вже призначений номером, він вже заповнений." - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:105 -msgid "" -"Click on **Add an item** if the product has not been inventoried yet. You " -"can easily create lots, just type in a new lot number in the column." -msgstr "" -"Натисніть **Додати елемент**, якщо товар ще не було інвентаризовано. Ви " -"можете легко створювати партії, просто введіть новий номер партії у стовпці." #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:111 -msgid "" -"You can also just do the inventory of a lot. In this case, you will have to " -"fill in the **Lot number**. You can also create a new lot from here. Just " -"type in the number, a window will pop out to link the number to a product." -msgstr "" -"Ви також можете просто зробити інвентаризацію партій. У цьому випадку вам " -"доведеться заповнити **Партійний номер**. Ви також можете створити нову " -"партію звідси. Просто введіть номер, з'явиться вікно, щоби зв'язати номер із" -" товаром." - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:120 msgid "Lots traceability" msgstr "Відстеження партій" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:122 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:113 msgid "" -"You can check the lot traceability from :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Inventory Control --> Serial Numbers/Lots`" +"The lot number given to the products allows you to keep track of where they " +"were received, put in stock, to whom they were sold and where they were " +"shipped to." msgstr "" -"Ви можете перевірити відстеження партії зі :menuselection:`Складу --> " -"Контроль складу --> Серійні номери/Партії`" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:128 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:122 -msgid "You can have more details by clicking on the **Traceability** button :" +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:117 +msgid "" +"To track an item, open the *Inventory* module and, in *Master Data > " +"Lots/Serial Numbers*, click on the lot number corresponding to your search." msgstr "" -"Ви можете отримати докладнішу інформацію, натиснувши кнопку **Відстеження**:" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:134 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:128 -msgid ":doc:`differences`" -msgstr ":doc:`differences`" +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:124 +msgid "" +"When you open the *Traceability* information, you see in which documents the" +" lot number has been used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:130 +msgid "" +"Now, if you want to locate the lot number, you can do so by clicking on the " +"*Location* stat button." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:3 -msgid "How to work with serial numbers?" -msgstr "Як працювати із серійними номерами?" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Serial Number Tracking is used to track products with serial numbers on " -"every transactions. You can track the current location of the product with " -"serial numbers. When the products are moved from one location to another " -"location, the system will automatically identify the current location of the" -" product based on last movement of the product. So you can get the last " -"location where the products are moved." +msgid "Work with serial numbers" msgstr "" -"Відстеження серійного номера використовується для відстеження товарів із " -"серійними номерами на кожному переміщенні. Ви можете відстежувати поточне " -"місцезнаходження товару із серійними номерами. Коли товари переміщуються з " -"одного місця в інше, система автоматично визначить поточне місцезнаходження " -"товару на основі його останнього руху. Таким чином, ви зможете отримати " -"останнє місце переміщення товарів." -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:24 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:5 msgid "" -"You need activate the tracking of serial numbers in the settings. In the " -"**Inventory** application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`, select **Track lots or serial numbers**." +"To track products with serial numbers, you can use the serial number " +"tracking. With them, you can track the current location of the product and, " +"when the products are moved from one location to another, the system will " +"automatically identify the current location of the product, based on its " +"last movement." msgstr "" -"Вам потрібно активувати відстеження серійних номерів у налаштуваннях. У " -"програмі **Склад** перейдіть до розділу :menuselection:`Налаштування --> " -"Налаштування`, виберіть **Партії або серійні номери**." -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:11 msgid "" -"Go into :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Products`, and open the " -"product of your choice. Click on **Edit**, and in the **Inventory** tab, " -"select **By Unique Serial Number**, then click on **Save**." +"If you want to do it or run very advanced traceability, the Odoo double-" +"entry management is the feature you need." msgstr "" -"Перейдіть до :menuselection:`Контроль складу --> Товари` та відкрийте товар " -"за вашим вибором. Натисніть **Редагувати**, а на вкладці **Склад** виберіть " -"**Унікальний серійний номер**, після чого натисніть **Зберегти**." -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:46 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:20 +msgid "" +"First, you need to activate the serial numbers tracking. To do so, go to " +"*Configuration > Settings* in the *Inventory* application. Then, enable the " +"feature and hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:30 +msgid "" +"Now, you have to configure the products you want to track by serial numbers." +" To do so, go to *Master Data > Products* and open the product of your " +"choice. Edit it and select *Tracking By Unique Serial Number* in the " +"*Inventory tab*. Then, click on save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:42 msgid "Manage Serial Numbers" msgstr "Управління серійними номерами" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:51 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:47 msgid "" -"In order to process a transfer of a product tracked by serial number, you " -"have to input the number(s). In order to be able to assign serial numbers to" -" products with tracking features enabled you will first need to mark your " -"transfer as to do. Click on the **Mark as TODO** button to display the Lot " -"Split icon." +"To receive a product that is tracked by serial number, you have to specify " +"its serial number. Of course, you have several ways of doing so:" msgstr "" -"Для обробки передачі товару, який відслідковується за серійним номером, " -"потрібно ввести номер(и). Щоби мати змогу присвоювати серійні номери товарам" -" із включеними функціями відстеження, вам спочатку потрібно позначити ваше " -"переміщення, як це робити. Натисніть кнопку **Позначити як ЗРОБИТИ**, щоби " -"відобразити значок розділення партій." -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:57 -msgid "Click on the serial number icon :" -msgstr "Натисніть на значок серійного номера:" +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:50 +msgid "Manual assignation" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:62 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:52 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:73 +msgid "Multi-assignation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:54 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:89 +msgid "Copy/pasting from an Excel file" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:56 msgid "" -"A window will pop-up. Click on **Add an item** and fill in the serial " -"numbers." +"Whatever could be your favorite way to assign serial numbers, you firstly " +"need to open the detailed operations of your picking." msgstr "" -"Відкриється вікно. Натисніть на **Додати елемент** і заповніть серійні " -"номери." -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:68 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:63 +msgid "Manual assignation of the different serial numbers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:65 msgid "" -"If you move products that already have serial numbers assigned, those will " -"appear in the list. Just click on the **+** icon to to confirm that you are " -"moving those serial numbers." +"When opening the detailed operations, you can click on *Add a line*. Then, " +"you will be able to fill in the serial number field. Once done, you can " +"click again on *Add a line* to register a new serial number." msgstr "" -"Якщо ви переміщуєте товари, які вже мають присвоєні серійні номери, вони " -"з'являться у списку. Просто натисніть значок **+**, щоби підтвердити, що ви " -"переміщуєте ці серійні номери." -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:76 -msgid "In the scanner interface, you just have to scan the serial numbers." -msgstr "В інтерфейсі сканера вам потрібно відсканувати серійні номери." - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:81 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:75 msgid "" -"Inventory of a product tracked by serial numbers can be done in 2 ways:" +"By using the multi-assignation of serial numbers, Odoo will automatically " +"create the necessary lines. To do so, you have to enter the first serial " +"number of your set and the number of products you have to assign a serial " +"number to." msgstr "" -"Інвентаризація товару, який відслідковується за серійними номерами, може " -"виконуватися двома способами:" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:85 -msgid "Inventory of a serial number" -msgstr "Інвентаризація серійного номера" +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:80 +msgid "Once done, click on *Assign Serial Numbers* and Odoo will do the rest." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:91 msgid "" -"Click on **Add an item** if the product has not been inventoried yet. You " -"can easily create serial numbers, just type in a new number in the column." +"To use copy/pasting, open the spreadsheet containing the serial numbers you " +"received and copy the list. Then, past them in the *Lot/Serial Number Name* " +"column of the wizard. Doing so, Odoo will automatically create the lines you" +" need." msgstr "" -"Натисніть **Додати елемент**, якщо товар ще не було інвентаризовано. Ви " -"можете легко створювати серійні номери, просто введіть новий номер у " -"стовпці." -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:98 -msgid "The quantity should be 1 for each line." -msgstr "Кількість для кожного рядка повинна бути 1." +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:106 +msgid "Operation types" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:100 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:108 msgid "" -"You can also just do the inventory of a serial number. In this case, you " -"will have to fill in the serial number. You can also create a new one from " -"here. Just type in the number, a window will pop out to link it to a " -"product." +"You also have the possibility to define how you will manage lots for each " +"operation type. To define it, go to *Configuration > Operation Types* in the" +" *Inventory* app." msgstr "" -"Ви також можете просто зробити інвентаризацію серійного номера. У цьому " -"випадку вам доведеться заповнити серійний номер. Ви також можете створити " -"новий звідси. Просто введіть номер, з'явиться вікно, щоби зв'язати його з " -"товаром." -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:109 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:112 +msgid "" +"For each type, you can decide if you allow the creation of new lot numbers " +"or want to use existing ones. By default, the creation of new lots is only " +"allowed at product reception." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:120 +msgid "" +"If you have inter-warehouse transfers and track products by lots, it can be " +"useful to allow using existing lot numbers in receipts too." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:124 msgid "Serial Number traceability" msgstr "Відстеження серійного номера" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:111 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:126 msgid "" -"The serial number given to these items allow you to keep track of where they" -" were received, put in stock, to whom they were sold and where they were " -"shipped to." +"Using serial numbers allows you to keep track of where the products were " +"received, put in stock, to whom they were sold, and where they were shipped " +"to." msgstr "" -"Серійний номер, наданий цим елементам, дозволяє вам стежити за тим, де вони " -"були отримані, доставлені на склад, кому вони були продані і де вони були " -"відправлені." -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:115 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:130 msgid "" -"To track an item, open the **Inventory** module, and in " -":menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Serial Numbers/lots`, click on the " -"serial number corresponding to your search." +"Tracking an item is easy: open the *Inventory* app, and go to *Master Data >" +" Lots/Serial Numbers* and click on the serial number corresponding to your " +"search. Then, open the *Traceability* information. There, you will see in " +"which documents the serial number has been used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:142 +msgid "" +"And, if you want to locate a serial number, you can do so by clicking on the" +" *Location* button available on the serial number form." msgstr "" -"Щоби відстежувати елемент, відкрийте модуль **Склад** і в " -":menuselection:`Контроль складу --> Серійні номери/партії`, натисніть на " -"серійний номер, що відповідає вашому запиту." #: ../../inventory/management/misc.rst:3 msgid "Miscellaneous Operations" msgstr "Різні операції" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:2 -msgid "Immediate & Planned Transfers" -msgstr "Негайні та заплановані переміщення" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:4 -msgid "" -"In Odoo, you can create two types of transfers: immediate or planned " -"transfers." +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:3 +msgid "Send Automated Emails at Delivery" msgstr "" -"В Odoo ви можете створити два типи переміщень: негайні або заплановані " -"переміщення." -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:8 -msgid "Immediate Transfers" -msgstr "Негайні переміщення" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:10 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:8 msgid "" -"When you create a transfer manually, it is by default an immediate transfer." +"First, go to the *Inventory* app, then to *Settings* and activate the *Email" +" Confirmation* feature. If you work in multi-company, this configuration is " +"company-specific." msgstr "" -"Коли ви створюєте переміщення вручну, за замовчуванням - негайне " -"переміщення." -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:15 msgid "" -"In the case of an immediate transfer, you directly encode the products and " -"quantities you are processing, there is no reservation that applies. This is" -" why the column \"Initial Demand\" is not editable. You only fill in the " -"column \"Done\" for the quantities." +"When you enable this feature, Odoo automatically creates an email template. " +"Of course, you can modify it if necessary by clicking on the small arrow " +"next to its name." msgstr "" -"У випадку негайного переміщення ви безпосередньо кодуєте товари та обсяги, " -"які ви обробляєте, не існує жодних застережень. Ось чому \"Початкову " -"потребу\" не можна редагувати. Ви заповнюєте лише колонку \"Готово\" для " -"кількості." -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:18 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:23 +msgid "Send email at delivery validation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:25 msgid "" -"This is for example used when you are transferring goods from a location A " -"to a location B and that this is not planned (you are processing the " -"transfer right now)." +"On the inventory dashboard, click on *Create* and fill the form for a " +"specific partner. Once you have added some products in it, *Validate* it and" +" do the same for the delivery." msgstr "" -"Це, наприклад, використовується, коли ви переміщуєте товари з місця A в " -"місце B, і переміщення не планується (ви обробляєте переміщення прямо " -"зараз)." -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:23 -msgid "Planned Transfers" -msgstr "Заплановані переміщення" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:32 msgid "" -"When a transfer is generated automatically (from a sales order or purchase " -"order for example), it is a planned transfer. This means that there is an " -"initial demand and that reservation applies on this initial demand." +"Doing so, an automated email will be sent and will appear in the chatter." msgstr "" -"Коли переміщення автоматично генерується (наприклад, із замовлення на продаж" -" чи замовлення на купівлю), це заплановане переміщення. Це означає, що існує" -" початкова потреба, і це бронювання застосовується до цієї початкової " -"потреби." -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:30 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:38 msgid "" -"If you want to create a planned transfer manually, you can do it from the " -"inventory dashboard." +"If you work with a shipping method, and then have a tracking link, it will " +"be included in the standard email template." msgstr "" -"Якщо ви хочете створити заплановане переміщення вручну, це можна зробити з " -"інформаційної панелі складу." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:36 -msgid "" -"In that case, you will have to enter the initial demand first (how many " -"units are you supposed to proceed), then to mark your transfer as to do. " -"Once this is done, you will be able to reserve the products and to process " -"the transfer." -msgstr "" -"У такому випадку вам доведеться спочатку ввести початкову потребу (скільки " -"одиниць вам необхідно), а потім позначити своє переміщення, як зробити. " -"Після цього ви зможете забронювати товари та обробляти переміщення." #: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:3 -msgid "How to manage stock that you don't own?" -msgstr "Я керувати складом, яким ви не володієте?" +msgid "Manage Stock that you don't own" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Sometimes, suppliers can offer you to store and sell products without having" +" to buy those items. This technique is called *consignee stock*." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:8 msgid "" -"Some suppliers can sometimes offer you to store and sell products without " -"having to buy those items: this technique is called **consignee stock**." -msgstr "" -"Деякі постачальники іноді можуть запропонувати вам зберігати та продавати " -"товари без необхідності купувати їх: ця техніка називається **комісійна " -"торгівля**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:12 -msgid "" "Consignee stock is a great way for manufacturers and suppliers to launch new" -" products. As resellers may be reluctant to buying a product that they are " -"not sure to be able to sell, consignee stock will allow them to propose an " -"item to check its market without having to pay for it in the first place." +" products. As resellers may be reluctant to buy a product they are not sure " +"to be able to sell, consignee stock will allow them to offer an item to " +"check its market without having to pay for it in the first place." msgstr "" -"Комесійний склад - відмінний спосіб для виробників та постачальників для " -"запуску нових товарів. Оскільки посередники можуть не бажати купувати товар," -" який вони не впевнені, що продадуть, комесійний склад дозволить їм " -"запропонувати товар для перевірки свого ринку, не маючи за це першочергової " -"плати." -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:18 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:14 msgid "" -"Odoo has the ability to manage consignee stocks through the advanced " -"settings." +"Of course, Odoo has the ability to manage those consignee stocks through " +"advanced settings." msgstr "" -"Odoo має можливість керувати комісійним складом через розширені " -"налаштування." -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:24 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:20 msgid "" -"Open the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`, and" -" in the **Product Owners** section, select **Manage consignee stocks " -"(advanced)**, then click on **Apply**." +"To use this feature, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Settings* in the " +"inventory app. Then, enable the *Consignment* feature in the *Traceability* " +"section. Now, hit save." msgstr "" -"Відкрийте меню :menuselection:`Склад --> Налаштування --> Налаштування` та в" -" розділі **Власники товарів** виберіть **Управління комісійним складом " -"(розширені)**, потім натисніть кнопку **Застосувати**." -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:32 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:28 msgid "Reception of Consignee Stock" msgstr "Находження комесійного складу" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:34 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:30 msgid "" -"In the Inventory's Dashboard, open the **Receipts** and create a new " -"reception. You can see that in the right side of the page, a new **Owner** " -"line has appeared. You can specify the partner which owns the stock or leave" -" it blank if you are the owner." +"When in the *Inventory* app, open the receipts and create a new reception. " +"On the right side, you will see that a new line called *Assign Owner* has " +"appeared. There, you can specify the partner which owns the stock." msgstr "" -"На інформаційній панелі складу відкрийте **Надходження** та створіть новий " -"прийом. Ви можете побачити, що в правій частині сторінки з'явився новий " -"рядок **Власник**. Ви можете вказати партнера, який володіє складом, або " -"залиште його порожнім, якщо ви є власником." -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:3 -msgid "How to configure and run schedulers?" -msgstr "Як налаштувати та запустити планувальник?" +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:39 +msgid "If you are the owner, you can leave the field blank." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:6 -msgid "What is a scheduler" -msgstr "Що таке планувальник" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:41 msgid "" -"The scheduler is the calculation engine which plans and prioritises " -"production and purchasing automatically according to the rules defined on " -"products. By default, the scheduler is set to run once a day (Odoo " -"automatically creates a **Scheduled Action** for this)." +"Once the receipt is validated, the products enter your stock but still " +"belong to the owner. They don’t impact your inventory valuation." msgstr "" -"Планувальник - це двигун розрахунку, який планує та пріоритетно встановлює " -"виробництво та купівлю відповідно до правил, визначених на товарах. За " -"замовчуванням планувальник встановлюється один раз на день (Odoo автоматично" -" створює **Заплановану дію** для цього)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:14 -msgid "Calculating Requirements / Scheduling" -msgstr "Розрахунок вимог/планування" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:16 -msgid "" -"Scheduling only validates procurements that are confirmed but not yet " -"started. These procurement reservations will themselves start production, " -"tasks or purchases depending on the configuration of the requested product." -msgstr "" -"Планування лише підтверджує закупівлі, які підтверджені, але ще не " -"розпочаті. Ці закупівельні застереження самі розпочинають виробництво, " -"завдання або покупки в залежності від налаштування запитуваного товару." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:21 -msgid "" -"You take into account the priority of operations when starting reservations " -"and procurements. Urgent requests, those with a date in the past, or " -"requests with a date earlier than the others will be started first. In case " -"there are not enough products in stock to satisfy all the requests, you can " -"be sure that the most urgent requests will be produced first." -msgstr "" -"Ви берете до уваги пріоритет операцій при запуску замовлень та купівель. " -"Невідкладні запити, ті, у кого є дата в минулому, або запити з датою раніше," -" ніж інші, які будуть розпочаті спочатку. У випадку, якщо на складі " -"недостатньо товарів для задоволення всіх запитів, ви можете бути впевнені, " -"що перші запити будуть нагадувати спочатку." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:29 -msgid "Configure and run the scheduler" -msgstr "Налаштуйте та запустіть планувальник" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:32 -msgid "Run the scheduler manually" -msgstr "Запустіть планувальник вручну" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:34 -msgid "" -"This feature is not visible by default. You have to enable **debug mode** to" -" see this. To enable debug mode, go to :menuselection:`Help --> About` and " -"click on **Activate the developer mode**." -msgstr "" -"Ця функція не відображається за замовчуванням. Вам потрібно ввімкнути " -"**режим розробника**, щоби побачити це. Щоби увімкнути режим розробника, " -"перейдіть до :menuselection:`Допомога --> Про` та натисніть **Активізувати " -"режим розробника**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:38 -msgid "" -"You can also start the scheduler manually from the menu " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Schedulers --> Run Schedulers`. The scheduler " -"uses all the relevant parameters defined for products, suppliers and the " -"company to determine the priorities between the different production orders," -" deliveries and supplier purchases." -msgstr "" -"Ви також можете запустити планувальник вручну з меню :menuselection:`Склад " -"--> Планувальник --> Запустити планувальник`. Планувальник використовує всі " -"відповідні параметри, визначені для товарів, постачальників та компанії для " -"визначення пріоритетів між різними виробничими замовленнями, поставками та " -"купівлями постачальника." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:48 -msgid "Configure and run the scheduler (only for advanced users)" -msgstr "" -"Налаштуйте та запустіть планувальник (лише для досвідчених користувачів)" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:50 -msgid "" -"This feature is not visible by default. You have to enable **debug mode** to" -" see this. To enable debug mode, go to :menuselection:`Help -> About` and " -"click on **Activate the developer mode**." -msgstr "" -"Ця функція не відображається за замовчуванням. Вам потрібно ввімкнути " -"**режим розробника**, щоби побачити це. Щоби увімкнути режим розробника, " -"перейдіть до :menuselection:`Допомога --> Про` та натисніть **Активізувати " -"режим розробника**." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:54 -msgid "" -"You can set the starting time of the scheduler by modifying the " -"corresponding action in the menu :menuselection:`Settings --> Technical --> " -"Automation --> Scheduled Actions`. Modify the Run mrp Scheduler " -"configuration." -msgstr "" -"Ви можете встановити час запуску планувальника шляхом зміни відповідної дії " -"в меню :menuselection:`Налатування --> Технічні --> Автоматично --> " -"Заплановані дії`. Змініть налаштування запуску mrp планувальника." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:63 -msgid ":doc:`../delivery/scheduled_dates`" -msgstr ":doc:`../delivery/scheduled_dates`" #: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:3 -msgid "How to scrap products?" -msgstr "Як бракувати товари?" +msgid "Scrap Products" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In your warehouse, you sometimes find products that are damaged or that are " +"unusable due to expiry or for some other reasons. You often notice this " +"during picking or physical inventory. Since those products cannot be sold or" +" stored, you have to scrap them." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:10 +msgid "" +"When goods are scrapped, they are not reflected in the system as a part of " +"the inventory. The scrapped material will be physically moved to the scrap " +"area and not taken into account into inventory valuation." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:15 msgid "" "Scrap means waste that either has no economic value or only the value of its" -" basic material" +" basic material content, recoverable through recycling." msgstr "" -"Брак - це зіпсовані товари, які не мають економічної цінності або лише " -"вартість основного вмісту матеріалу, " -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:11 -msgid "content recoverable through recycling." -msgstr "відновлюваний через переробку." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:21 msgid "" -"In your warehouse you sometimes find products that are damaged or that are " -"unusable due to expiry or for some other reason. You often notice this " -"during picking or physical inventory." +"When you install the *Inventory* app, Odoo automatically creates a scrap " +"location. It’s named *Virtual Location/Scap*." msgstr "" -"На вашому складі ви іноді знаходите товари, які є пошкодженими або " -"непридатними для використання через закінчення терміну дії або з якихось " -"інших причин. Ви часто помічаєте це під час комплектування чи " -"інвентаризації." -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:17 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:24 msgid "" -"Since you cannot normally sell or store these products, you have to scrap " -"product." +"Of course, you can create new scrap areas if needed. To do so, go to " +"*Inventory > Configuration > Settings* and activate the *Storage Locations* " +"feature." msgstr "" -"Оскільки ви не можете звичайно продавати або зберігати ці товари, вам " -"потрібно забракувати товар." -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:20 -msgid "" -"When goods are scrapped they are not reflected in the system as a part of " -"the inventory. The scrapped material will be physically moved to scrap area." +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:31 +msgid "Now, go to *Configuration > Locations* and create your scrap location." msgstr "" -"Коли товари забраковані, вони не відображаються в системі як частина складу." -" Вилучений товар буде фізично переміщено в зону браку." -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:27 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:34 msgid "" -"When you install inventory management, odoo automatically creates one " -"default scrap location, namely **Virtual location/Scrapped**." +"You have to check *Is a Scrap Location?* on the location form. In fact, " +"scrap locations cannot be used as normal storage locations and then, a " +"virtual location will be created for scrapped products." msgstr "" -"Коли ви встановлюєте склад, odoo автоматично створює одне місцезнаходження " -"за замовчуванням, а саме **Віртуальне місцезнаходження/Брак**." -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:30 -msgid "" -"To create an extra scrap location, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Configuration --> Settings` and check **Manage several locations per " -"warehouse**, then click on **Apply**." +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:39 +msgid "Different ways to scrap products" msgstr "" -"Щоб створити розташування для браку, перейдіть до :menuselection:`Склад -->" -" Налаштування --> Налаштування` та виберіть пункт **Керувати кількома " -"місцезнаходженнями на складі**, після чого натисніть **Застосувати**" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:41 msgid "" -"After applying **Manage several location per warehouse**, you can create a " -"new scrap location in :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouse Management" -" --> Locations.`" +"With Odoo, you have several ways to scrap products: from receipts, from a " +"delivery order, and from an internal transfer." msgstr "" -"Після застосування **Керування кількома місцезнаходженнями на складі**, ви " -"можете створити нове місце браку у розділі :menuselection:`Налаштування --> " -"Управління складом --> Місцезнаходження.`" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:43 -msgid "" -"To define a scrap location, you have to check **Is a Scrap Location?** on " -"location form view." +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:45 +msgid "Scrap from receipt" msgstr "" -"Щоби визначити місцезнаходження браку, потрібно перевірити, **Чи є " -"місцезнаходженя браку?** на формі місцезнаходження." #: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:47 -msgid "Different ways to scrap product" -msgstr "Різні способи бракування товару" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:49 -msgid "Odoo provides several ways to scrap products." -msgstr "Odoo пропонує декілька способів бракування товару." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:52 -msgid "1) Scrap from Receipt (Initial Demand tab)." -msgstr "1) Брак з надходження (вкладка Початкової потреби)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:54 msgid "" -"To scrap product from incoming shipment, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory -->" -" Dashboard --> Receipts`." +"Scrapping products from receipts is easy. Go to *Inventory > Dashboard > " +"Receipts* or click on *1 TO PROCESS* under the receipts location." msgstr "" -"Щоби перемістити товар з вхідної доставки, перейдіть до " -":menuselection:`Склад --> Інформаційна панель --> Надходження`." -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:60 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:53 msgid "" -"Open the incoming shipment, and in the **Initial demand** tab, click on the " -"scrap products button." +"Now, open the receipt and validate the picking. Once the products entered " +"your stock, the Scrap button appears on the top left corner of your screen." msgstr "" -"Відкрийте вхідну доставку, а на вкладці **Початковий попит** натисніть " -"кнопку браку товарів." -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:67 -msgid "2) Scrap from delivery order (Initial Demand tab) ." -msgstr "2) Брак із замовлення на доставку (вкладка Початковий попит)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:69 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:57 msgid "" -"To scrap product from outgoing shipment, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory -->" -" Dashboard --> Delivery Orders`" +"You can scrap products that were part of the receipt from there. If you do " +"so, it will move them from available stock to the virtual scrap location." msgstr "" -"Щоби перемістити товар з відвантаження доставки, перейдіть до " -":menuselection:`Складу --> Інформаційна панель --> Замовлення на доставку`" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:75 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:68 +msgid "Scrap from delivery order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:70 msgid "" -"Open the outgoing shipment, and in the **Initial demand** tab, click on the " -"scrap products button on stock move in initial demand tab." +"To scrap products from a delivery order, go to *Inventory > Dashboard > " +"Delivery orders* or click on *1 TO PROCESS*." msgstr "" -"Відкрийте доставку на відправлення, а на вкладці **Початковий попит** " -"натисніть кнопку браку товарів." -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:82 -msgid "3) Scrap from internal transfer (Initial Demand tab)." -msgstr "3) Брак із внутрішнього переміщення (вкладка Початковий попит)." - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:84 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:76 msgid "" -"To scrap product from internal transfer, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory -->" -" Dashboard --> Internal Transfers`" +"Once done, open the delivery order. You can see the scrap button in the " +"upper left of the document. If you scrap the product from there, it will be " +"moved from your available stock to the virtual scrap location." msgstr "" -"Щоби перемістити товар з внутрішнього переміщення, перейдіть до " -":menuselection:`Склад --> Інформаційна панель --> Внутрішні переміщення`" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:90 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:80 msgid "" -"Open the internal transfer, and in the **Initial demand** tab, click on the " -"scrap products button on stock move in initial demand tab." +"You can find all the scrap orders made from the picking by clicking on the " +"button on the top right corner of the document." msgstr "" -"Відкрийте внутрішнє переміщення, і на вкладці **Початковий попит** натисніть" -" кнопку Браковані товари." -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:96 -msgid "" -"When you click on scrap button, a popup will open. You can enter the " -"quantity of products, and specify the scrap location, then click on " -"**Scrap**." +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:93 +msgid "Scrap from an internal transfer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:95 +msgid "" +"To do this, the flow is almost the same. In fact, you just have to go to " +"*Inventory > Dashboard > Internal Transfers*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:101 +msgid "" +"There, open the internal transfer that interests you. Now, click on the " +"scrap button that is on the top left of the document." msgstr "" -"Коли ви натиснете кнопку браку, з'явиться спливаюче вікно. Ви можете ввести " -"кількість товарів і вказати місцезнаходження браку, після чого натиснути на " -"**Брак**." #: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:104 msgid "" -"To allow change scrap location on wizard, you have to select **Manage " -"several location per warehouse** in the settings at " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`" +"When scrapping before validating the internal transfer, the product is, by " +"default, moved from the source location to the virtual scrap location. But, " +"if you scrap after validating the internal transfer, it will be moved from " +"the destination location, as opposed to the source location, to the virtual " +"scrap location." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:110 +msgid "" +"Of course, you can manually update the source location of the scrap order if" +" necessary." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:3 +msgid "Send Automated SMS at Delivery" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:8 +msgid "" +"To send automated SMS, you need to activate the *SMS Confirmation* feature. " +"To do so, go to the *Inventory* app *Settings* and enable the feature. In " +"multi-company, this feature is company-specific." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Of course, an SMS template already exists by default in Odoo. You can modify" +" it by clicking on the arrow on the right." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:22 +msgid "Send SMS at delivery validation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:24 +msgid "" +"To use this feature, try to *Create* a delivery order for a specific partner" +" and add some products to it. Then, *Validate* the delivery." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:30 +msgid "Now, the automated SMS that has been sent appears in the chatter." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:36 +msgid "" +"The partner which is set on the transfer needs to have a phone number " +"specified in its contact form for the SMS to be sent." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:39 +msgid "" +"If you work with a shipping method, and then have a tracking link, it will " +"be included in the SMS template." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning.rst:3 +msgid "Planning" +msgstr "Планування" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:3 +msgid "How is the Scheduled Delivery Date Computed?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In most cases, scheduled dates are computed to be able to plan deliveries, " +"receptions, and so on. Depending on your company’s habits, Odoo generates " +"scheduled dates via the scheduler." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:9 +msgid "" +"To make your life easier, the Odoo scheduler computes everything per line, " +"whether it’s a manufacturing order, a delivery order, a sale order, etc." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:14 +msgid "" +"The computed dates are dependent on the different lead times configured in " +"Odoo." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:20 +msgid "" +"Configuring lead times is the first move if you want to compute scheduled " +"dates. Those are the delays promised (in terms of delivery, manufacturing, " +"etc.) to your partners and/or clients." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:25 +msgid "In Odoo, you can configure different lead times." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:30 +msgid "" +"When configuring lead times at the product level, you have three different " +"types to take into account: supplier lead time, customer lead time, and " +"manufacturing lead time." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:35 +msgid "Supplier lead time" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:37 +msgid "" +"The supplier lead time is the time needed for the supplier to deliver your " +"purchased products. To configure it, select a product and click on the " +"inventory tab. There, you will have to add a vendor to your product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:44 +msgid "" +"Now, just open the vendor form and fill its *Delivery lead time*. In this " +"case, the delivery day will be equal to *Date of the Purchase Order + " +"Delivery Lead Time*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:52 +msgid "" +"Do not forget that it is possible to add different vendor pricelists and, " +"thus, different delivery lead times, depending on the vendor." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:56 +msgid "Customer Lead Time" +msgstr "Термін доставки клієнту" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:58 +msgid "" +"It is the time needed to get your product from your store/warehouse to your " +"customer. It can be configured for any product. To add it, select a product " +"and go to the inventory tab. There, simply indicate your *customer lead " +"time*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:67 +msgid "Manufacturing lead time" +msgstr "Термін виконання виробництва" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:69 +msgid "" +"On the same page, it is possible to configure what’s called the " +"*Manufacturing Lead Time*. It is the time needed to manufacture the product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:76 +msgid "" +"At the company level, you can configure security days. Those are useful to " +"cope with eventual dalys and to be sure to meet your engagements. The idea " +"is to subtract backup days from the computed scheduled date in case of " +"delays." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:81 +msgid "" +"Once again, there are three different types of security lead times: for " +"sales, for purchases, and for manufacturing." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:85 +msgid "Security lead time for sales" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:87 +msgid "" +"In sales, security lead time corresponds to backup days to ensure you will " +"be able to deliver your clients in times. They are margins of errors for " +"delivery lead times. Security days are the same logic as the early " +"wristwatch, in order to arrive on time." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:92 +msgid "" +"The idea is to subtract the numbers of security days from the calculation " +"and, thus, to compute a scheduled date earlier than the one you promised to " +"your client. In that way, you are sure to be able to keep your commitment." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:97 +msgid "" +"To set up your security dates, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Settings* " +"and enable the feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:104 +msgid "Security lead time for purchase" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:106 +msgid "" +"It follows the same logic as security lead time for sales except that " +"security lead time for purchase is the margin of error for vendor lead " +"times, not for sales." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:110 +msgid "" +"When the system generates purchase orders for procuring products, they will " +"be scheduled that many days earlier to cope with unexpected vendor delays." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:114 +msgid "" +"To find purchase lead time, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Settings* and" +" enable the feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:121 +msgid "Security lead time for manufacturing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:123 +msgid "" +"The security lead time for manufacturing allows generating manufacturing " +"orders which are scheduled that many days earlier to cope with unexpected " +"manufacturing days." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:127 +msgid "" +"To configure it, go to *Manufacturing > Configuration > Settings* and enable" +" the *Security Lead Time* option. Then, hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:136 +msgid "" +"Sometimes, the internal transfers that a product might do may also influence" +" the computed date. The delays due to internal transfers can be specified in" +" the *Inventory* app when you create a new rule in a route." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:141 +msgid "" +"To specify them, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Routes* and add a push " +"rule to set a delay. Of course, you need to activate *Multi-step Routes* to " +"use this feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:149 +msgid "At the sale order level" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:152 +msgid "Expected date" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:154 +msgid "" +"In the *Sales* application, you have the possibility to activate the option " +"*Delivery Date*. It will allow you to see additional fields on the sale " +"order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:158 +msgid "" +"By enabling this option, Odoo will indicate the *Expected Date* in the " +"*Other Info* tab of the sales order. This one is automatically computed " +"based on the different lead times." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:165 +msgid "" +"If you set a *Commitment Date* to deliver your customer that is earlier than" +" the *Expected Date*, a warning message will appear on the screen." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:175 +msgid "" +"To better understand all the above info, here is an example. You may sell a " +"car today (January 1st), that is purchased on order, and you promise to " +"deliver your customer within 20 days (January 20th). In such a scenario, the" +" scheduler will trigger the following events, based on your configuration:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:181 +msgid "" +"January 19: this is the actual scheduled delivery (1 day of Sales Safety " +"Days);" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:183 +msgid "" +"January 18: you receive the product from your supplier (1 day of Purchase " +"days);" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:185 +msgid "" +"January 10: this is the deadline to order at your supplier (9 days of " +"Supplier Delivery Lead Time);" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:187 +msgid "" +"January 8: trigger a purchase request to your purchase team, since they " +"need, on average, 2 days to find the right supplier and order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:3 +msgid "Configure and Run Schedulers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:6 +msgid "What is a scheduler?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:8 +msgid "" +"The scheduler is the calculation engine that plans and prioritizes " +"production and purchasing. It does it automatically, according to the rules " +"defined on products. By default, the scheduler is set to run once a day." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:14 +msgid "Calculating Requirements / Scheduling" +msgstr "Розрахунок вимог/планування" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:16 +msgid "" +"Scheduling only validates procurements that are confirmed but not yet " +"started. These procurement reservations will start production, tasks or " +"purchases themselves, depending on the configuration of the requested " +"product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:21 +msgid "" +"As a human would do, the scheduler takes the priority of operations into " +"account when starting reservations and procurements. Urgent requests will be" +" started first." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:26 +msgid "" +"In case there are not enough products in stock to satisfy all the requests, " +"you can be sure that the most urgent ones will be produced first." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:31 +msgid "Configure and run the scheduler" +msgstr "Налаштуйте та запустіть планувальник" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:34 +msgid "Run the scheduler manually" +msgstr "Запустіть планувальник вручну" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:36 +msgid "" +"To start the scheduler manually, go to *Inventory > Operations > Run " +"Schedulers*. The scheduler uses all the relevant parameters defined for " +"products, suppliers and the company to prioritize the different production " +"orders, deliveries and supplier purchases." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:45 +msgid "Configure and run the scheduler (for advanced users)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:47 +msgid "" +"To use this feature, you have to enable the debug mode. To do so, go to " +"*Settings > Activate the developer mode*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Then, go to *Settings > Technical > Automation > Scheduled Actions* and " +"modify the *Run MRP Scheduler Configuration*. There, you can set the " +"starting time of the scheduler." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products.rst:3 +msgid "Products" +msgstr "Товари" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:3 +msgid "How to select the right replenishment strategy" +msgstr "Як встановити правильну стратегію поповнення на складі" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Minimum Stock rules and Make to Order have similar consequences but " +"different rules. They should be used depending on your manufacturing and " +"delivery strategies." +msgstr "" +"Правила Мінімального Запасу та Зробити на замовлення мають подібні наслідки," +" але різні правила. Вони повинні використовуватися в залежності від ваших " +"технологій виробництва та стратегії доставки." + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:10 +msgid "Terminology" +msgstr "Термінологія" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:13 +msgid "Minimum stock rule" +msgstr "Правило мінімального запасу" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Minimum Stock rules are used to ensure that you always have the minimum " +"amount of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or " +"answer to your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its" +" minimum the system will automatically generate a procurement order with the" +" quantity needed to reach the maximum stock level." +msgstr "" +"Правила мінімального запасу використовуються для забезпечення того, що у вас" +" завжди є мінімальна кількість товару на складі для виготовлення вашої " +"продукції та/або відповіді на потреби вашого клієнта. Коли рівень запасу " +"товару досягає мінімального рівня, система автоматично генерує замовлення на" +" закупівлю з кількістю, необхідною для досягнення максимального рівня " +"запасу." + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:22 +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:58 +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:71 +msgid "Make to Order" +msgstr "Зробити на замовлення" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:24 +msgid "" +"The Make to Order function will trigger a Purchase Order of the amount of " +"the Sales Order related to the product. The system will **not** check the " +"current stock. This means that a draft purchase order will be generated " +"regardless of the quantity on hand of the product." +msgstr "" +"Функція Зробити на замовленням запускає замовлення на купівлю суми " +"замовлення клієнта, пов'язаного з товаром. Система не буде перевіряти " +"поточний запас. Це означає, що проект замовлення на купівлю буде " +"згенерований незалежно від кількості, що знаходяться в наявності товару." + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:33 +msgid "Minimum stock rules" +msgstr "Правила мінімального запасу" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:35 +msgid "" +"The Minimum Stock Rules configuration is available through your Inventory " +"module. In the Inventory Control menu select \"Reordering Rule\" in the drop" +" down menu. There, click on \"Create\" to set minimum and maximum stock " +"values for a given product." +msgstr "" +"Налаштування правил мінімальних запасів доступне через ваш модуль Складу. У " +"меню Управління складом виберіть \"Правило дозамовлення\" у випадаючому " +"меню. Тоді натисніть \"Створити\", щоби встановити мінімальні та максимальні" +" значення запасів для даного товару." + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:44 +msgid "" +"Show tooltips for \"minimum quantity\", \"maximum quantity\" and \"quantity " +"multiple\" fields" +msgstr "" +"Покажіть підказки для полів \"мінімальна кількість\", \"максимальна " +"кількість\" та \"кілька кількостей\"." + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:47 +msgid "" +"Then, click on your product to access the related product form and, on the " +"\"Inventory submenu\", do not forget to select a supplier." +msgstr "" +"Потім натисніть на товар, щоби отримати доступ до відповідної форми товару, " +"а в \"Підменю складу\" не забудьте вибрати постачальника." + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:54 +msgid "" +"Don't forget to select the right product type. A consumable can not be " +"stocked and will thus not be accounted for in the stock valuation." +msgstr "" +"Не забудьте вибрати правильний тип товару. Витратний матеріал не може бути " +"запакований, і тому не буде враховано в оцінці запасів." + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:60 +msgid "" +"The Make to Order configuration is available on your product form through " +"your :menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory control --> Products` (or any " +"other module where products are available)." +msgstr "" +"Налаштування Зробити на замовлення доступне у вашій формі товару через ваш " +":menuselection:`Склад --> Контроль складу --> Товари` (або будь-який інший " +"модуль, де доступні товари)." + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:64 +msgid "On the product form, under Inventory, click on \"Make To Order\"." +msgstr "На формі товару в розділі \"Склад\" натисніть \"Зробити замовленням\"." + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:70 +msgid "Choice between the two options" +msgstr "Вибір між двома функціями" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:72 +msgid "" +"The choice between the two options is thus dependent of your inventory " +"strategy. If you prefer to have a buffer and always have at least a minimum " +"amount, the minimum stock rule should be used. If you want to reorder your " +"stocks only if your sale is confirmed it is better to use the Make to Order." +msgstr "" +"Вибір між двома функціями залежить від вашої стратегії складу. Якщо ви " +"вважаєте за краще мати буфер і завжди мати принаймні мінімальну суму, слід " +"використовувати правила мінімальних запасів. Якщо ви хочете перевпорядкувати" +" свої запаси лише за умови підтвердження продажу, краще скористатись кнопкою" +" \"Зробити на замовленням\"." + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:3 +msgid "Use Different Units of Measure" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In some cases, handling products in different units of measure is necessary." +" For example, if you buy products in a country where the metric system is of" +" application and sell in a country where the imperial system is used, you " +"will need to convert the units. Another common use case is buying products " +"in bigger packs to your supplier and selling them in units to your " +"customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:12 +msgid "" +"You can set up Odoo to work with different units of measure for one product." +msgstr "" +"Ви можете налаштувати Odoo для роботи з різними одиницями вимірювання для " +"одного товару." + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:18 +msgid "" +"In the *Inventory* application, go to *Configuration > Settings*. In the " +"*Products* section, activate *Units of Measure*, then *Save*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:25 +msgid "Create New Units of Measure" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:27 +msgid "" +"In the *Inventory* application go to *Configuration > UoM*. There, hit " +"*Create*. As an example, we will create a Box of 6 units that we will use " +"for the Egg product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:34 +msgid "" +"The category is important for unit conversion, you will be able to convert " +"products from one unit to another only if those units belong to the same " +"category. The box of 6 is 6 times bigger than the reference unit of measure " +"for the category which is “Units” here." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:43 +msgid "Specify Units of Measure on your Products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:45 +msgid "" +"In the *Inventory application > Master Data > Products*, open the product " +"which you would like to change the purchase/sale unit of measure, and click " +"on *Edit*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:49 +msgid "" +"In the *General Information* tab, you can select the *Unit of Measure* in " +"which the product will be sold, which is also the unit in which internal " +"transfers will take place. You can also select the *Purchase Unit of " +"Measure*, which is the unit in which you purchase the product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:59 +msgid "Transfer from One Unit to Another" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:62 +msgid "Buy in the Pruchase UoM" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:64 +msgid "" +"In the *Purchase* application, *Create* a new request for quotation in which" +" you include the product with the different *Units of Measure* and *Confirm*" +" it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:71 +msgid "" +"On the automatically generated purchase orders, the UoM used is the Box of " +"6, meaning the Purchase UoM. You have of course the possibility to manually " +"modify the UoM if necessary. When you enter the *Receipt* which is linked to" +" the purchase order, you can observe that the 10 boxes of 6 units have been " +"converted in 60 units. Indeed, the stock is managed in units." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:82 +msgid "Replenishment" +msgstr "Поповнення" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:84 +msgid "" +"When doing a replenishment via the *Replenish* button on the product form, " +"you have the possibility to change the unit of measure." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:94 +msgid "Sell in bigger UoM" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:96 +msgid "" +"You can choose the unit of measure on the sale order document and decide to " +"sell the eggs by the dozen. When doing so, the price is automatically " +"computed from Units UoM to adapt to the selected *UoM*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:103 +msgid "" +"In the delivery order, the *UoM* used in the sale order is converted to the " +"*UoM* used for stock management, in our use case, the Units." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:3 +msgid "When Should you Use Packages, Units of Measure or Kits?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:6 +msgid "Units of Measure" +msgstr "Одиниці вимірювання" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Units of measure specify the unit used to handle a product. In Odoo, you " +"have the possibility to specify the unit of measure in which you manage your" +" stock and the one which is used when purchasing the product to your " +"supplier." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:16 +msgid "" +"The *conversion* between the different units of measure is done " +"automatically. The only condition is that all the units have to be in the " +"*same category* (Unit, Weight, Volume, Length,...)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:20 +msgid "" +"For example, if I have the following reordering rule for the egg and I run " +"the scheduler, the quantity added in the automatically generated purchase " +"order will be in dozens but what will enter the stock will be units." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:35 +msgid "Packages" +msgstr "Пакунки" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:37 +msgid "" +"The package is the physical container in which you put one or several " +"products from a picking. For example, when you deliver a product, you can " +"decide to separate the quantity into two different packages. It then allows " +"you to have a report with the quantity of products for each package." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:50 +msgid "Packaging" +msgstr "Упаковка" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:52 +msgid "" +"The packaging is the physical container that protects your product. If you " +"are selling computers, the packaging contains the computer with the notice " +"and the power plug." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:56 +msgid "" +"In Odoo, packagings are used for indicative purposes on sale orders. They " +"can be specified on the product form, in the inventory tab." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:66 +msgid "" +"Another useful use of the packaging is for product reception. By scanning " +"the barcode of the packaging, Odoo adds the number of units contained in the" +" packing on the picking." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies.rst:3 +msgid "Inventory Adjustment" +msgstr "Коригування залишків" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:3 +msgid "Choose Between Reordering Rules and Make to Order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:5 +msgid "" +"*Reordering rules* and *make to order* do both allow to automatically " +"replenish products when necessary. The difference between those tools is how" +" they are triggered." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:9 +msgid "" +"*Reordering rules* are used to ensure that you always have a minimum amount " +"of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or answer to" +" your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its minimum " +"the system will automatically generate a procurement with the needed " +"quantity to reach the maximum stock level." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:15 +msgid "" +"The *Make to Order* route will trigger a procurement (purchase order or " +"manufacturing order) with the necessary quantity to fulfill a product " +"request (coming from a sale order or a manufacturing order). The system will" +" check the quantity on hand for the corresponding product and if the " +"available quantity is higher or equal to the necessary quantity, Odoo will " +"use what is in stock to fulfill the request. In case you don’t have enough " +"available stock to fully fulfill the product request, procurement will be " +"generated for the total quantity requested." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:28 +msgid "Reordering Rules" +msgstr "Правила поповнення" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:30 +msgid "" +"The *Reordering Rules* configuration is available through the menu " +"*Inventory > Master Data > Reordering Rules*. There, click on *Create* to " +"set minimum and maximum stock values for a given product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:37 +msgid "" +"When the forecasted stock goes below the *Minimum Quantity* specified in " +"this field, Odoo generates a procurement to bring the forecasted quantity to" +" the *Maximum Quantity*. The *Quantity Multiple* is used to round the " +"procurement quantity up to this multiple. If it is 0, the exact quantity " +"will be used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:46 +msgid "" +"The *Lead time* is the number of days after the order point is triggered to " +"receive the products or to order them to the vendor." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:49 +msgid "" +"In case you work with multi-warehouses and/or multi-locations, you will be " +"able to specify different reordering rules for the same product in each " +"location." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:54 +msgid "" +"For the reordering rules to be triggered, on the corresponding product, a " +"route should be specified. In case you manufacture your products, make sure " +"to select the route *Manufacture* and create a *Bill of Material* for the " +"product. In case you purchase your products, make sure to select the route " +"*Buy* and add a *Vendor Pricelist*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:66 +msgid "" +"Don't forget to select the product type *storable* in the product form. A " +"consumable can not be stocked and won’t trigger reordering rules." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:73 +msgid "" +"The *Make To Order* configuration is available on your product form through " +"your *Inventory module > Master Data > Products* (or in any other module " +"where products are available)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:77 +msgid "" +"On the product form, in the *Inventory tab*, you can set a route. You can " +"choose *Make To Order* and another route, either *Buy* or *Manufacture*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:81 +msgid "" +"Again, if the *Buy* route is selected, make sure to set a *Vendor pricelist*" +" in the *Purchase tab*. In case you have set a *Manufacture* route, male " +"sure you have a *BoM* for this product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:3 +msgid "Resupply from another Warehouse" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:8 +msgid "" +"In order to be able to resupply from another warehouse, you need to activate" +" \\*multi-warehouses\\* and \\*multi-step routes\\*. Storage locations will " +"be automatically activated when activating multi-warehouses." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:16 +msgid "" +"You can then access your warehouses via \\*Inventory > Configuration > " +"Warehouses\\*. Create the necessary warehouses following this " +"`*documentation* " +"`__." +" Enter the warehouse which should be resupplied by another one. You will " +"have the possibility to directly indicate through which warehouse it gets " +"resupplied." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:26 +msgid "" +"By activating this option, a new route will now be available on your " +"products \\*Supply Product from Second warehouse\\*. It can now be selected," +" along with either a \\*reordering rule\\* or a \\*make to order\\*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:34 +msgid "" +"For the demonstration, I set a reordering rule with a minimum of 5 units in " +"stock and a maximum of 10 units in stock, having currently 0 units on hand. " +"I will run the scheduler by going to \\*Inventory > Operations > Run " +"scheduler\\*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:42 +msgid "" +"The system automatically creates two pickings, one \\*delivery order\\* from" +" my Second Warehouse which contains the necessary products, and a receipt in" +" my main warehouse WH/Stock for the same products. The source document is " +"the \\*reordering rule\\* which triggered the route \\*Supply Product from " +"Second warehouse\\*." msgstr "" -"Щоб дозволити місцезнаходження браку у помічнику, потрібно вибрати " -"**Керування кількома місцезнаходженнями на складі** в налаштуваннях у " -":menuselection:`Склад --> Налаштування --> Налаштування`" #: ../../inventory/management/reporting.rst:3 msgid "Valuation Methods" @@ -3970,7 +3528,7 @@ msgstr "Значення дельти" #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:133 #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:186 msgid "Inventory Value" -msgstr "Значення складу" +msgstr "Складська оцінка" #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:34 #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:39 @@ -4427,12 +3985,6 @@ msgstr "54.68" #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:282 #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:263 #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:281 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:30 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:45 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:52 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:57 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:64 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:72 msgid "Configuration:" msgstr "Налаштування:" @@ -4918,1138 +4470,385 @@ msgstr "" "Варіанти інвентаризації: встановлювати як вхідний/вихідний обліковий запис у" " внутрішній категорії товару" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts.rst:3 -msgid "Main Concepts" -msgstr "Основні поняття" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:5 -msgid "Introduction to Inventory Management" -msgstr "Введення в управління складом" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:7 -msgid "" -"A double-entry inventory has no stock input, output (disparition of " -"products) or transformation. Instead, all operations are stock moves between" -" locations (possibly virtual)." -msgstr "" -"Подвійний запис складу не має вхідних запасів, вихідних (розрізнення " -"товарів) або перетворення. Замість цього, всі операції - складські " -"переміщення між місцезнаходженнями (можливо, віртуальним)." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:16 -msgid "Operations" -msgstr "Операції" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:18 -msgid "" -"Stock moves represent the transit of goods and materials between locations." -msgstr "" -"Складські переміщення представляють переміщення товарів та матеріалів між " -"місцезнаходженнями." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:30 -msgid "Production Order" -msgstr "Замовлення на виробництво" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:24 -msgid "Consume:" -msgstr "Спожито:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "2 Wheels: Stock → Production" -msgstr "2 Колеса: Склад → Виробництво" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bike Frame: Stock → Production" -msgstr "1 Рамка для велосипеда: Склад → Виробництво" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:26 -msgid "Produce:" -msgstr "Вироблено:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:27 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Production → Stock" -msgstr "1 Велосипед: Виробництво → Склад" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Stock: the location the Manufacturing Order is initiated from" -msgstr "Склад: місце, з якого починається замовлення на виробництво" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Production: on the product form, field \"Production Location\"" -msgstr "Виробництво: у формі ndfhe, поле \"Місцезнаходження виробництва\"" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:36 -msgid "Drop-shipping" -msgstr "Дропшипінг" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:33 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Supplier → Customer" -msgstr "1 велосипед: Постачальник → Клієнт" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:36 -msgid "Configurarion:" -msgstr "Налаштування:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Supplier: on the product form" -msgstr "Постачальник: на формі товару" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Customer: on the sale order itself" -msgstr "Клієнт: на самому замовленні на продаж" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:45 -msgid "Client Delivery" -msgstr "Клієнтська доставка" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:39 -msgid "Pick" -msgstr "Комплектувати" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:40 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Stock → Packing Zone" -msgstr "1 велосипед: склад → зона пакування" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:41 -msgid "Pack" -msgstr "Упаковка" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:42 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Packing Zone → Output" -msgstr "1 велосипед: зона пакування → відправлення" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:43 -#: ../../inventory/shipping.rst:3 -msgid "Shipping" -msgstr "Відправлення" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:44 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Output → Customer" -msgstr "1 велосипед: відправка → клієнт" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "on the pick+pack+ship route for the warehouse" -msgstr "на маршруті комплектувати+пакувати+відправити для складу" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:52 -msgid "Inter-Warehouse transfer" -msgstr "Внутрішньо-складські переміщення" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:49 -msgid "Transfer:" -msgstr "Переміщення:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Warehouse 1 → Transit" -msgstr "1 велосипед: Склад 1 → Транзит" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Transit → Warehouse 2" -msgstr "1 велосипед: Транзит → Склад 2" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Warehouse 2: the location the transfer is initiated from" -msgstr "Склад 2: місцезнаходження переміщення запущено з" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Warehouse 1: on the transit route" -msgstr "Склад 1: на маршруті транзиту" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:57 -msgid "Broken Product (scrapped)" -msgstr "Пошкодженні товари (браковані)" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:55 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Warehouse → Scrap" -msgstr "1 велосипед: Склад → Брак" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:58 -msgid "Scrap: Scrap Location when creating the scrapping" -msgstr "Брак: Місцезнаходження браку під час створення браку" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:60 -msgid "Missing products in inventory" -msgstr "Відсутні товари на складі" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:61 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Warehouse → Inventory Loss" -msgstr "1 велосипед: Склад → Втрата запасу" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:62 -msgid "Extra products in inventory" -msgstr "Додаткові товари на складі" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:63 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Inventory Loss → Warehouse" -msgstr "1 велосипед: втрата запасу → склад" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:65 -msgid "Inventory Loss: \"Inventory Location\" field on the product" -msgstr "Втрата запасу: поле на товарі \"місцезнаходження складу\"" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:72 -msgid "Reception" -msgstr "Надходження" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Supplier → Input" -msgstr "1 велосипед: постачальник → прийом" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Input → Stock" -msgstr "1 велосипед: Прийом → Склад" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Supplier: purchase order supplier" -msgstr "Постачальник: замовлення на купівлю постачальника" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Input: \"destination\" field on the purchase order" -msgstr "Прийом: поле на замовленні на купівлю \"призначення\"" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:75 -msgid "Analysis" -msgstr "Аналіз" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:77 -msgid "" -"Inventory analysis can use products count or products value (= number of " -"products * product cost)." -msgstr "" -"Аналіз складу може використовувати кількість товарів або значення товарів (=" -" кількість товарів * вартість товару)." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:80 -msgid "For each inventory location, multiple data points can be analysed:" -msgstr "" -"Для кожного місцезнаходження складу можна проаналізувати декілька точок " -"даних:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:148 -msgid "Procurements & Procurement Rules" -msgstr "Забезпечення та правила забезпечення" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:150 -msgid "" -"A procurement is a request for a specific quantity of products to a specific" -" location. They can be created manually or automatically triggered by:" -msgstr "" -"Забезпечення - це запит на певну кількість товарів у певному місці. Вони " -"можуть бути створені вручну або автоматично спрацьовують:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:159 -msgid "New sale orders" -msgstr "Нове замовлення на продаж" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:157 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:162 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:168 -msgid "Effect" -msgstr "Результат" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:157 -msgid "" -"A procurement is created at the customer location for every product ordered " -"by the customer (you have to deliver the customer)" -msgstr "" -"Забезпечення створюється на місцезнаходженні клієнта для кожного товару, " -"замовленого клієнтом (ви повинні доставити клієнту)" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:160 -msgid "" -"Procurement Location: on the customer, field \"Customer Location\" " -"(property)" -msgstr "" -"Місцезнаходження забезпечення: на клієнті, поле \"Місцезнаходження клієнта\"" -" (влісніть)" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:164 -msgid "Minimum Stock Rules" -msgstr "Правила мінімального запасу" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:163 -msgid "A procurement is created at the rule's location." -msgstr "Забезпечення створюється за місцезнаходженням правил." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:165 -msgid "Procurement location: on the rule, field \"Location\"" -msgstr "Місцезнаходження забезпечення: за правилом, поле \"Місцезнаходження\"" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:168 -msgid "Procurement rules" -msgstr "Правила забезпечення" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:168 -msgid "A new procurement is created on the rule's source location" -msgstr "Нове забезпечення створено на місцезнаходженні джерела правила" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:170 -msgid "" -"*Procurement rules* describe how procurements on specific locations should " -"be fulfilled e.g.:" -msgstr "" -"*Правила закупівель* опишіть, як потрібно виконувати закупівлі на конкретних" -" місцезнаходженнях, наприклад:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:173 -msgid "where the product should come from (source location)" -msgstr "звідки повинен надходити товар (місцезнаходження джерела)" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:174 -msgid "" -"whether the procurement is :abbr:`MTO (Made To Order)` or :abbr:`MTS (Made " -"To Stock)`" -msgstr "" -"чи є забезпечення :abbr:`MTO (Зробити на замовлення)` або :abbr:`MTS " -"(Зробити на склад)`" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:182 -msgid "Routes" -msgstr "Маршрути" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:184 -msgid "" -"Procurement rules are grouped in routes. Routes define paths the product " -"must follow. Routes may be applicable or not, depending on the products, " -"sales order lines, warehouse,..." -msgstr "" -"Правила забезпечення згруповані у маршрутах. Маршрути визначають шляхи, які " -"повинен дотримуватися товар. Маршрути можуть бути застосовані чи ні, залежно" -" від товарів, рядків замовлення на продаж, складу, ..." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:188 -msgid "" -"To fulfill a procurement, the system will search for rules belonging to " -"routes that are defined in (by order of priority):" -msgstr "" -"Для виконання забезпечення система шукатиме правила, що відносяться до " -"маршрутів, які визначені в (за порядком пріоритету):" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:202 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses.rst:3 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses.rst:3 msgid "Warehouses" msgstr "Склади" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:194 -msgid "Warehouse Route Example: Pick → Pack → Ship" -msgstr "" -"Приклад маршруту внутрішнього складу: Укомплектувати → Упакувати → " -"Відправити" +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:3 +msgid "What is the difference between warehouses and locations?" +msgstr "Яка різниця між складом та місцезнаходженням?" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:196 -msgid "Picking List:" -msgstr "Список комплектування:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:197 -msgid "Pick Zone → Pack Zone" -msgstr "Зона комплектування → Зона пакування" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:198 -msgid "Pack List:" -msgstr "Список пакування:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:199 -msgid "Pack Zone → Gate A" -msgstr "Зона пакування → Ворота A" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:201 -msgid "Delivery Order:" -msgstr "Замовлення на доставку:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:201 -msgid "Gate A → Customer" -msgstr "Ворота A → Клієнт" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:203 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:5 msgid "" -"Routes that describe how you organize your warehouse should be defined on " -"the warehouse." +"In Odoo, a **Warehouse** is the actual building/place in which your items " +"are stocked. You can setup multiple warehouses and create moves between " +"warehouses." msgstr "" -"Маршрути, що описують, як ви організовуєте свій склад, повинні бути " -"визначені на складі." +"**Склад** в Odoo - це фактично будівля/місце, в якому складуються ваші " +"товари. Ви можете встановити кілька складів і створювати переходи між ними." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:212 -msgid "A Product" -msgstr "Товар" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:205 -msgid "Product Route Example: Quality Control" -msgstr "Приклад маршруту товару: Контроль якості" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:207 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:217 -msgid "Reception:" -msgstr "Надходження:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:208 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:218 -msgid "Supplier → Input" -msgstr "Постачальник → Прийом" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:209 -msgid "Confirmation:" -msgstr "Підтвердження:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:210 -msgid "Input → Quality Control" -msgstr "Прийом → Контроль якості" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:212 -msgid "Storage:" -msgstr "Зберігання:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:212 -msgid "Quality Control → Stock" -msgstr "Контроль якості → Склад" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:221 -msgid "Product Category" -msgstr "Категорія товару" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:215 -msgid "Product Category Route Example: cross-dock" -msgstr "Приклад маршруту категорії товару: крос-докінг" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:219 -msgid "Cross-Docks:" -msgstr "Крос-докінг:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:220 -msgid "Input → Output" -msgstr "Прийом → Відправка" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:221 -msgid "Delivery:" -msgstr "Доставка:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:222 -msgid "Output → Customer" -msgstr "Відвантаження → Клієнт" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:227 -msgid "Sale Order Line" -msgstr "Рядок замовлення на продаж" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:224 -msgid "Sale Order Line Example: Drop-shipping" -msgstr "Приклад рядка замовлення на продаж: Дропшипінг" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:227 -msgid "Order:" -msgstr "Замовлення:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:227 -msgid "Supplier → Customer" -msgstr "Постачальник → Клієнт" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:230 -msgid "Push Rules" -msgstr "Правила виштовхування" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:232 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:9 msgid "" -"Push rules trigger when products enter a specific location. They " -"automatically move the product to a new location. Whether a push rule can be" -" used depends on applicable routes." +"A **Location**, is a specific space within your warehouse. It can be " +"considered as a sublocation of your warehouse, as a shelf, a floor, an " +"aisle, etc. Therefore, a location is part of one warehouse only and it is " +"not possible to link one location to multiple warehouses. You can configure " +"as much locations as you need under one warehouse." msgstr "" -"Правила натискання спрацьовують, коли товари надходять у певне " -"місцезнаходження. Вони автоматично переміщують товар на нове місце. Чи можна" -" застосувати правило виштовхування, залежить від відповідних маршрутів." +"**Місцезнаходження** - це конкретне місце на вашому складі. Воно може " +"розглядатися як підрозділ вашого складу, полиця, підлога, прохід і т. д. " +"Тому розташування є частиною лише одного складу, і неможливо пов'язати одне " +"місцезнаходження з кількома складами. Ви можете налаштувати стільки " +"місцезнаходжень, скільки вам потрібно під одним складом." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:240 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:88 -msgid "Quality Control" -msgstr "Контроль якості" +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:15 +msgid "There are 3 types of locations:" +msgstr "Існує 3 типи місцезнаходжень:" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:239 -msgid "Product lands in Input" -msgstr "Товари знаходяться у вхідних" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:240 -msgid "Push 1: Input → Quality Control" -msgstr "Натисніть 1: Вхідний → Контроль якості" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:241 -msgid "Push 2: Quality Control → Stock" -msgstr "Натисніть 2: Контроль якості → Склад" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:244 -msgid "Warehouse Transit" -msgstr "Транзит складу" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:243 -msgid "Product lands in Transit" -msgstr "Товар на транзиті" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:244 -msgid "Push: Transit → Warehouse 2" -msgstr "Виштовхування: Транзит → Склад 2" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:247 -msgid "Procurement Groups" -msgstr "Групи забезпечення" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:249 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:17 msgid "" -"Routes and rules define inventory moves. For every rule, a document type is " -"provided:" +"The **Physical Locations** are internal locations that are part of the " +"warehouses for which you are the owner. They can be the loading and " +"unloading area of your warehouse, a shelf or a department, etc." msgstr "" -"Маршрути та правила визначають складські переміщення. Для кожного правила " -"передбачено тип документа:" +"**Фізичні місцезнаходження** - це внутрішні місцезнаходження, які є частиною" +" складу, якого ви є власником. Вони можуть бути областю навантаження та " +"розвантаження вашого складу, полиці або відділу тощо." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:252 -msgid "Picking" -msgstr "Комплектування" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:253 -msgid "Packing" -msgstr "Пакування" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:254 -msgid "Delivery Order" -msgstr "Замовлення на доставку" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:255 -msgid "Purchase Order" -msgstr "Замовлення на купівлю" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:256 -msgid "..." -msgstr "..." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:258 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:21 msgid "" -"Moves are grouped within the same document type if their procurement group " -"and locations are the same." +"The **Partner Locations** are spaces within a customer and/or vendor's " +"warehouse. They work the same way as Physical Locations with the only " +"difference being that you are not the owner of the warehouse." msgstr "" -"Переміщення згруповані в одному документі, якщо їх група забезпечення і " -"розташування однакові." +"**Місцезнаходження партнерів** - це простір на складі клієнта та/або " +"постачальника. Вони працюють так само, як і в \"Фізичних місцезнаходжень\", " +"але лише тому, що ви не є власником складу." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:261 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:25 msgid "" -"A sale order creates a procurement group so that pickings and delivery " -"orders of the same order are grouped. But you can define specific groups on " -"reordering rules too. (e.g. to group purchases of specific products " -"together)" +"The **Virtual Locations** are places that do not exist, but in which " +"products can be placed when they are not physically in an inventory yet (or " +"anymore). They come in handy when you want to place lost products out of " +"your stock (in the **Inventory loss**), or when you want to take into " +"account products that are on their way to your warehouse (**Procurements**)." msgstr "" -"Замовлення на продаж створює групу забезпечення таким чином, щоб " -"комплектування та замовлення на доставку з одного замовлення були " -"згруповані. Але ви також можете визначити певні групи за правилами " -"дозамовлення. (наприклад, для групових закупівель певних товарів разом)" +"**Віртуальні місцезнаходження** - це місця, які не існують, але в них можна " +"розміщувати товари, якщо вони ще не є (або більше) інвентаризованими. Вони " +"стануть у нагоді, коли ви хочете помістити втрачені товари з вашого запасу " +"(у **Втрати складу**) або коли ви хочете взяти до уваги товари, які " +"переходять на ваш склад (**Забезпечення**)." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:3 -msgid "Terminologies" -msgstr "Термінологія" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:31 msgid "" -"**Warehouse**: A warehouse in Odoo is a location where you store products. " -"It is either a physical or a virtual warehouse. It could be a store or a " -"repository." +"In Odoo, locations are structured hierarchically. You can structure your " +"locations as a tree, dependent on a parent-child relationship. This gives " +"you more detailed levels of analysis of your stock operations and the " +"organization of your warehouses." msgstr "" -"**Склад (Warehouse)**: склад в Odoo - це місце, де ви зберігаєте товари. Це " -"або фізичний, або віртуальний склад. Може бути магазин або сховище." +"В Odoo місцезнаходження розташовані ієрархічно. Ви можете структурувати свої" +" місцезнаходження як дерево, залежно від відносин між батьківським та " +"дочірнім. Це дає вам більш детальний рівень аналізу ваших операцій на складі" +" та організації ваших складів." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:9 -msgid "" -"**Location**: Locations are used to structure storage zones within a " -"warehouse. In addition to internal locations (your warehouse), Odoo has " -"locations for suppliers, customers, inventory loss counter-parts, etc." -msgstr "" -"**Місцезнаходження (Location)**: місцезнаходження використовується для зони " -"зберігання на складі. До того ж для внутрішнього розташування (вашого " -"складу) Odoo має місце для постачальників, клієнтів, інвентаризації втрат " -"запасів тощо." +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:37 +msgid ":doc:`warehouse_creation`" +msgstr ":doc:`warehouse_creation`" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:14 -msgid "" -"**Lots**: Lots are a batch of products identified with a unique barcode or " -"serial number. All items of a lot are from the same product. (e.g. a set of " -"24 bottle) Usually, lots come from manufacturing order batches or " -"procurements." -msgstr "" -"**Партії (Lots)**: партії товарів, позначених унікальним штрих-кодом або " -"серійним номером. Усі елементи партії складаються з того ж товару " -"(наприклад, комплект із 24 пляшок). Зазвичай, партії поставляються з " -"виробничих партій або закупівель." +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:38 +msgid ":doc:`location_creation`" +msgstr ":doc:`location_creation`" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:19 -msgid "" -"**Serial Number**: A serial number is a unique identifier of a specific " -"product. Technically, serial numbers are similar to having a lot of 1 unique" -" item." +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:3 +msgid "Create a New Location" msgstr "" -"**Серійний номер (Serial Number)**: серійний номер - це унікальний " -"ідентифікатор певного товару. Технічно серійні номери схожі на наявність " -"партії 1 унікального елемента." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:23 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:8 msgid "" -"**Unit of Measure**: Define how the quantity of products is expressed. " -"Meters, Pounds, Pack of 24, Kilograms,… Unit of measure of the same category" -" (ex: size) can be converted to each others (m, cm, mm) using a fixed ratio." +"In order to be able to create different locations, you will need to activate" +" *Multi-Locations* in the settings which can be done from the *Inventory " +"application > Configuration > Settings*." msgstr "" -"**Одиниця виміру (Unit of Measure)**: визначення, як виражається кількість " -"товарів. Метри, фунти, упаковка в 24, кілограми, ... Одиниця виміру тієї ж " -"категорії (наприклад: розмір) може конвертувати одна одну (м, см, мм) за " -"фіксованим співвідношенням." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:28 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:15 msgid "" -"**Consumable**: A product for which you do not want to manage the inventory " -"level (no quantity on hand or forecasted) but that you can receive and " -"deliver. When this product is needed Odoo suppose that you always have " -"enough stock." +"In the *Inventory application*, you can now go to *Configuration > " +"Locations* and hit *Create* in order to create a new location." msgstr "" -"**Витратний (Consumable)**: товар, для якого ви не хочете керувати рівнем " -"інвентаризації (не маєте кількості або він не прогнозований), але ви можете " -"його отримувати та доставляти. Коли цей товар потрібен, Odoo припускає, що у" -" вас завжди є достатньо запасів." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:33 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:21 msgid "" -"**Stockable**: A product for which you want to manage the inventory level." +"Type the name of the location in the *Location Name* field, and select the " +"*Parent Location* in the list. The parent location can be a physical, " +"partner or virtual location, and you can add as many sub-locations as needed" +" to a location." msgstr "" -"**Запасний (Stockable)**: товар, для якого ви хочете керувати рівнем " -"інвентаризації." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:36 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:29 msgid "" -"**Package:** A package contains several products (identified by their serial" -" number/lots or not). Example: a box containing knives and forks." +"In case you want the location to be suggested when creating a Return or when" +" Scrapping a product, you should check *Is a Scrap Location?* and *Is a " +"Return Location?*." msgstr "" -"**Упаковка (Package)**: упаковка містить кілька товарів (ідентифікованих їх " -"серійним номером/партіями чи ні). Наприклад: коробка, що містить ножі та " -"вилки." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:40 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:33 msgid "" -"**Procurement**: A procurement is a request for a specific quantity of " -"products to a specific location. Procurement are automatically triggered by " -"other documents: Sale orders, Minimum Stock Rules, and Procurement rules. " -"You can trigger the procurement manually. When procurements are triggered " -"automatically, you should always pay attention for the exceptions (e.g. a " -"product should be purchased from a vendor, but no supplier is defined)." +"If you have the *Barcode* application installed, you can specify the barcode" +" which will correspond to this location." msgstr "" -"**Забезпечення (Procurement)**: Закупівля - це запит на певну кількість " -"продуктів у певному місці. Закупівлі автоматично ініціюються іншими " -"документами: замовлення на купівлю, мінімальні фондові правила та правила " -"закупівель. Ви можете запустити закупівлю вручну. Коли закупівлі " -"спрацьовують автоматично, завжди слід звернути увагу на винятки (наприклад, " -"продукт повинен бути придбаний у постачальника, але постачальник не " -"визначено)." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:48 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:37 msgid "" -"**Routes**: Routes define paths the product must follow. Routes may be " -"applicable or not, depending on the products, sales order lines, warehouse,…" -" To fulfill a procurement, the system will search for rules belonging to " -"routes that are defined in the related product/sale order." +"A warehouse also corresponds to a location. As the locations are " +"hierarchical, Odoo will create the parent location of the warehouse, " +"containing all the sublocations in it." msgstr "" -"**Маршрути (Routes)**: Маршрути визначають шляхи, яких слід дотримуватися " -"товару. Маршрути можуть бути застосовані чи ні, залежно від продукції, " -"рядків замовлення на продаж, складу, ... Для виконання закупівель система " -"буде шукати правила, що відносяться до маршрутів, визначених у відповідному " -"товарі/замовленні на продаж." +"Склад також відповідає місцезнаходженню. Оскільки місцезнаходження є " +"ієрархічними, Odoo створить батьківське розташування складу, що містить всі " +"підкласи в ньому." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:54 -msgid "" -"**Push Rules**: Push rules trigger when products enter a specific location. " -"They automatically move the product to a new location. Whether a push rule " -"can be used depends on applicable routes." +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:3 +msgid "Create a New Warehouse" msgstr "" -"**Правила виштовхування (Push Rules)**: правила виштовхування спрацьовують, " -"коли товари надходять у певне місцезнаходження. Вони автоматично переміщують" -" товар на нове місце. Чи можна застосувати правило \"виштовхування\", " -"залежить від відповідних маршрутів." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:58 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:8 msgid "" -"**Procurement Rules** or **Pull Rules**: Procurement rules describe how " -"procurements on specific locations should be fulfilled e.g.: where the " -"product should come from (source location), whether the procurement is MTO " -"or MTS,..." +"In order to create a new warehouse, you should activate the *Multi-" +"Warehouse* settings. Note that the *Multi-Locations* settings will be " +"automatically activated at the same time." msgstr "" -"**Правила забезпечення або Правила витягання (Procurement Rules or Pull " -"Rules)**: правила забезпечення описують, як повинні виконуватися закупівлі " -"на конкретних місцях, наприклад: куди повинен надходити товар " -"(місцеположення джерела), незалежно від того, чи є закупівля МТО чи МТС, ..." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:63 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:12 msgid "" -"**Procurement Group**: Routes and rules define inventory moves. For every " -"rule, a document type is provided: Picking, Packing, Delivery Order, " -"Purchase Order,… Moves are grouped within the same document type if their " -"procurement group and locations are the same." +"In order to do so, go to the *Inventory app > Configuration > Settings*." msgstr "" -"**Група забезпечення (Procurement Group)**: маршрути та правила визначають " -"рух запасів. Для кожного правила передбачено тип документа: вибір, упаковка," -" замовлення на доставку, замовлення на купівлю... Переміщення групуються в " -"один і той же тип документа, якщо їх група забезпечення і розташування " -"однакові." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:69 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:18 msgid "" -"**Stock Moves**: Stock moves represent the transit of goods and materials " -"between locations." +"You can then go to *Inventory > Configuration > Warehouses* and hit *Create*" +" to add a new warehouse." msgstr "" -"**Складські переміщення (Stock Moves)**: складські переміщення представляють" -" транзит товарів та матеріалів між місцезнаходженнями." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:72 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:24 msgid "" -"**Quantity On Hand**: The quantity of a specific product that is currently " -"in a warehouse or location." +"You will be able to enter your warehouse name. You should also choose a " +"short name for your warehouse which is 5-characters long and is used on the " +"different warehouse documents." msgstr "" -"**Кількість в наявності (Quantity On Hand)**: кількість конкретного товару, " -"який на даний момент знаходиться на складі або в місцезнаходженні." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:75 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:28 msgid "" -"**Forecasted Quantity**: The quantity of products you can sell for a " -"specific warehouse or location. It is defined as the Quantity on Hand - " -"Future Delivery Orders + Future incoming shipments + Future manufactured " -"units." +"In the Address field, you can select an existing company or create one on-" +"the-go. Therefore, the address of your warehouse will be the same as the one" +" of the company you selected. You can also leave this field empty and edit " +"it afterward." msgstr "" -"**Прогнозована кількість (Forecasted Quantity)**: кількість товарів, яку ви " -"можете продати для конкретного складу або місця. Вона визначається як " -"кількість в наявності - замовлення на майбутнє + майбутні відправлення + " -"майбутні випущені одиниці." -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:80 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:36 msgid "" -"**Reordering Rules**: It defines the conditions for Odoo to automatically " -"trigger a request for procurement (buying at a supplier or launching a " -"manufacturing order). It is triggered when the forecasted quantity meets the" -" minimum stock rule." +"After the creation of your new warehouse, you can go back to the *Dashboard*" +" and you will see the new operation types automatically created by Odoo due " +"to the creation of a new warehouse." msgstr "" -"**Правила поповнення (Reordering Rules)**: вони визначають умови для Odoo " -"автоматично викликати запит на закупівлю (покупка у постачальника або запуск" -" виробничого замовлення). Воно спрацьовує, коли прогнозована кількість " -"відповідає мінімальному правилу запасу." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:85 -msgid "" -"**Cross-Dock**: Cross-docking is a practice in the logistics of unloading " -"materials from an incoming semi-trailer truck or railroad car and loading " -"these materials directly into outbound trucks, trailers, or rail cars, with " -"no storage in between. (does not go to the stock, directly from incoming to " -"packing zone)" -msgstr "" -"**Крос-док (Cross-Dock)**: перехресна доріжка - це практика логістики " -"вивантаження матеріалів зі вхідного напівпричепа або вагона та завантаження " -"цих матеріалів безпосередньо до вихідних вантажних автомобілів, причепів або" -" вагонів без зберігання між ними (не підходить до запасу, безпосередньо від " -"вхідної до зони упаковки)." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:91 -msgid "" -"**Drop-Shipping**: move products from the vendor/manufacturer directly to " -"the customer (could be retailer or consumer) without going through the usual" -" distribution channels. Products are sent directly from the vendor to the " -"customer, without passing through your own warehouse." -msgstr "" -"**Прямі поставки (Drop-Shipping)**: переміщення товарів від " -"постачальника/виробника безпосередньо до клієнта (може бути роздрібним " -"продавцем чи споживачем), не проходячи звичайні канали розповсюдження. " -"Товари відправляються безпосередньо від постачальника замовнику, не " -"проходячи через ваш власний склад.your own warehouse." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:97 -msgid "" -"**Removal Strategies**: the strategy to use to select which product to pick " -"for a specific operation. Example: FIFO, LIFO, FEFO." -msgstr "" -"**Стратегії вилучення (Removal Strategies)**: стратегія використовувати, " -"щоби вибрати товар для конкретної операції. Приклад: FIFO, LIFO, FEFO." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:100 -msgid "" -"**Putaway Strategies**: the strategy to use to decide in which location a " -"specific product should be set when arriving somewhere. (example: cables " -"goes in rack 3, storage A)" -msgstr "" -"**Товарне сусідство (Putaway Strategies)**: товарне сусідство для вирішення," -" в якому місці певний товар повинен бути встановлений по переїзді. (приклад:" -" кабелі йдуть в стійку 3, зберігання А)." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:104 -msgid "" -"**Scrap**: A product that is broken or outdated. Scrapping a product removes" -" it from the stock." -msgstr "" -"**Брак (Scrap)**: бракований товар або застарілий. Зняття з експлуатації " -"вироби вилучає його із запасу." #: ../../inventory/overview/process.rst:3 msgid "Process Overview" msgstr "Загальний огляд процесу" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:3 -msgid "From procurement to delivery" -msgstr "Від забезпечення до доставки" +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:3 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:25 +msgid "Deliver Products from Stock" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:6 +msgid "Create Storable/Consumable Products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:5 msgid "" -"Inventory is the heart of your business. It can be really complicated, but " -"with Odoo, doing a receipt or a delivery has never been easier. We will show" -" you in this document how easy to do a full process, from the receipt to the" -" delivery." +"The first step to use the inventory application is to create products in " +"your database via the menu *Master Data > Products*. Click the Create button" +" and enter the name of your product." msgstr "" -"Склад є серцем вашого бізнесу. Це може бути складним процесом, але з Odoo " -"робити забезпечення або доставку ніколи не було простіше. Ми покажемо вам у " -"цій документації, як легко виконати повний процес, від забезпечення до " -"доставки." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:12 msgid "" -"Odoo inventory is fully integrated with other applications, such as " -"**Purchase**, **Sales** or **Inventory**. But is not limited to those " -"processes, it is also fully integrated with our **e-Commerce**, " -"**Manufacturing** and **Repairs** applications." +"In case you set the product as *storable*, you will track the stock for this" +" product and know how many units are in stock and what is the forecasted " +"number of units. If you want to include a product on receipts/deliveries but" +" don’t need to track its stock, you can set it as *consumable*." msgstr "" -"Склад Odoo повністю інтегрований з іншими програмами, такими як **Купівлі**," -" **Продажі** та **Склад**. Але це не обмежується лише цими процесами, він " -"також повністю інтегрований з нашими додатками **Електронної комерції**, " -"**Виробництва** та **Ремонту**." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:19 -msgid "How to process a receipt ?" -msgstr "Як обробляти забезпечення?" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:22 -msgid "Install Purchase application" -msgstr "Встановіть додаток Купівля" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:24 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:27 msgid "" -"First, you will need to install the **Purchase Management** application. Go " -"to :menuselection:`Apps` and install it." +"Once you have existing products, you can decide to create a delivery to " +"deliver products to your customers. The process in order to do so is " +"described in the following print screens." msgstr "" -"По-перше, вам потрібно буде встановити додаток **Управління Купівлею**. " -"Перейдіть до :menuselection:`Додатки` і встановіть його." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:31 -msgid "Make a purchase order" -msgstr "Зробіть замовлення на купівлю" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:33 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:37 msgid "" -"Go to the **Purchases** applications. The first screen is the **Request for " -"Quotation** list. Click on the **Create** button." +"On the delivery order, you can specify to whom the products will be " +"delivered along with the different products and their respective quantities." +" When the delivery is complete you can hit *Validate* and the products will " +"go out of your stock." msgstr "" -"Перейдіть у програму **Купівлі**. Перший екран - це **Запит на комерційну " -"пропозицію**. Натисніть кнопку **Створити**." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:36 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:45 msgid "" -"Fill in the **Vendor** information and click on **Add an Item** to add some " -"products to your request for quotation." +"In case you have a delivery that is planned but shouldn’t be immediately " +"validated, you can create a *planned delivery* with a scheduled date in the " +"future. You can indicate the initial demand for each product, corresponding " +"to what has been ordered by your customer. Once the document is filled in, " +"you can hit “Mark as to do” in order to consider it in your product " +"forecasts." msgstr "" -"Заповніть інформацію про **Постачальника** та натисніть **Додати елемент**, " -"щоб додати деякі товари до вашого запиту на комерційну пропозицію." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:42 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:56 +msgid "Deliver Products from Stock from a Sale Order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:58 msgid "" -"Click on **Confirm order** when you are sure about the products, prices and " -"quantity." +"If you have the *Sales* application installed, delivery can be directly " +"created by *validating a quotation*. You will be able to find the " +"corresponding delivery directly on the *sale order*." msgstr "" -"Натисніть **Підтвердити замовлення**, коли ви впевнені щодо товарів, цін та " -"кількості." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:46 -msgid "Retrieve the Receipt" -msgstr "Отримайте забезпечення" +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:3 +msgid "Set your Initial Stock" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:48 -msgid "You can retrieve the receipt order in 2 ways:" -msgstr "Ви можете отримати замовлення на забезпечення двома способами:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:51 -msgid "From the purchase order" -msgstr "Із замовлення на купівлю" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:53 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:12 msgid "" -"On the top right of your purchase order, you will see a button with the " -"related **Receipt**:" +"Set the product as *storable*, in order to track the stock for this product " +"and be able to include it in an inventory adjustment." msgstr "" -"У верхньому правому куті вашого замовлення на купівлю ви побачите кнопку із " -"відповідним **Забезпеченням**:" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:59 -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:136 -msgid "Click on it to see the **Transfer order**." -msgstr "Натисніть на неї, щоби переглянути **Замовлення на переміщення**." +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:19 +msgid "Inventory Adjustment for Multiple Products" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:62 -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:139 -msgid "From the Inventory Dashboard" -msgstr "З інформаційної панелі складу" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:64 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:21 msgid "" -"When opening the **Inventory** application, click on **# to receive** to see" -" the list of your deliveries to process." +"Once you have created all your *storable products*, you can create an " +"*inventory adjustment* to determine their current stock level in Odoo. You " +"therefore need to go to *Operations > Inventory Adjustments* and create a " +"new one." msgstr "" -"Відкриваючи додаток **Склад**, натисніть на **# для отримання**, щоби " -"переглянути список ваших поставок для обробки." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:70 -msgid "In the list, click on the one related to the purchase order:" -msgstr "У списку натисніть на той, що стосується замовлення на купівлю:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:76 -msgid "Process the Receipt" -msgstr "Обробіть забезпечення" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:81 -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:162 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:29 msgid "" -"To process the stock transfer. Simply click on **Validate** to complete the " -"transfer. A message will appear asking if you want to process the whole " -"order, accept it by clicking on **Apply**." +"You have to enter a title for your *inventory adjustment* and you can then " +"decide if you want to proceed to the *inventory adjustment* of all products " +"or only some of them. For a first *inventory adjustment*, I suggest you to " +"keep the *Products* field empty. You can then *Start Inventory*." msgstr "" -"Обробіть складські переміщення. Просто натисніть на **Перевірити**, щоб " -"завершити переміщення. З'явиться повідомлення про те, чи хочете ви обробити " -"все замовлення, прийміть його, натиснувши кнопку **Застосувати**." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:86 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:38 msgid "" -"Procurements can be automated. Please read our document " -":doc:`../../management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto` for more " -"information." +"If you already have some products in stock, Odoo will add the lines with the" +" theoretical quantity currently in stock. You can also add new lines with " +"your other products." msgstr "" -"Закупівлі можуть бути автоматизовані. Будь ласка, прочитайте нашу " -"документацію :doc:`../../management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto` для " -"детальнішої інформації." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:91 -msgid "How to process a delivery order ?" -msgstr "Як обробляти замовлення на доставку?" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:94 -msgid "Install Sales application" -msgstr "Встановіть додаток Управління продажами" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:96 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:46 msgid "" -"First, you will need to install the **Sales Management** application. Go to " -":menuselection:`Apps` and install it." +"If your products are tracked by Serial/Lot numbers, you will have an " +"additional column allowing you to specify those for the different units " +"added to the inventory adjustment." msgstr "" -"По-перше, вам потрібно буде встановити додаток **Управління продажами**. " -"Перейдіть до :menuselection:`Додатки` і встановіть його." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:103 -msgid "Place a sale order" -msgstr "Розмістіть замовлення на продаж" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:105 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:50 msgid "" -"Go to the **Sales** applications. Click on the **Quotations** button of your" -" team." +"Odoo will highlight in red the lines for which there is a difference between" +" the theoretical quantity on hand, which is automatically computed by the " +"system, and the counted quantity you manually entered. Once all the " +"necessary products have been entered, you can hit *Validate Inventory* and " +"the quantities on hand of your different products will be updated." msgstr "" -"Перейдіть до додатків **Продажів**. Натисніть кнопку **Комерційні " -"пропозиції** своєї команди." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:111 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:58 +msgid "Inventory Adjustment for one Product" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:60 msgid "" -"You will get the list of all your quotations. Click on the **Create** " -"button." +"On each storable product, you have access to the *Update Quantity* button." msgstr "" -"Ви отримаєте список всіх ваших комерційних пропозицій. Натисніть кнопку " -"**Створити**." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:114 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:66 msgid "" -"Fill in the **Customer informations** and click on **Add an Item** to add " -"some products to your quotation." +"When clicking this button, you see the current stock you have for this " +"product. You can edit the existing lines or create new ones to add stock of " +"your product in different locations and/or add new serial/lot numbers." msgstr "" -"Заповніть **Інформацію про клієнта** та натисніть **Додати елемент**, щоб " -"додати деякі товари до вашої комерційної пропозиції." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:120 -msgid "Click on **Confirm sale** to place the order." -msgstr "Натисніть **Підтвердити продаж**, щоб розмістити замовлення." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:123 -msgid "Retrieve the Delivery order" -msgstr "Отримайте замовлення на доставку" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:125 -msgid "You can retrieve the delivery order in 2 ways:" -msgstr "Ви можете отримати замовлення доставки двома способами:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:128 -msgid "From the sale order" -msgstr "Із замовлення на продаж" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:130 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:74 msgid "" -"On the top right of your sale order, you will see a button with the related " -"**Delivery**:" +"Once you come back to your product, you see that the quantity on hand as " +"been updated taking your modification into account." msgstr "" -"У верхньому правому куті вашого замовлення на продаж ви побачите кнопку із " -"відповідною **Доставкою**:" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:141 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:81 msgid "" -"When opening the **Inventory** application, click on **# to do** to see the " -"list of your receipts to process." +"If you work with product variants, the quantity on hand will show you the " +"total quantity in stock for the product template, taking the different " +"variants into account." msgstr "" -"Відкриваючи додаток **Складу**, натисніть **# зробити**, щоби переглянути " -"список ваших квитанцій для обробки." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:147 -msgid "In the list, click on the one related to the sale order:" -msgstr "У списку натисніть на той, який пов'язаний із замовленням на продаж:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:153 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:85 msgid "" -"If the product is not in stock, the sale order will be listed as **Waiting**" -" on your dashboard." +"By default, the quantity on hand of the product form will show you the " +"number of products that are part of your warehouse view location, meaning " +"which are part of an internal type sub-location of this warehouse. It means " +"that if you have any product in a location that isn’t under the main " +"warehouse location, they won’t appear in the stock on hand stat button." msgstr "" -"Якщо товар відсутній, замовлення на продаж відображатиметься як " -"**Очікування** на інформаційній панелі." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:157 -msgid "Process the delivery" -msgstr "Обробіть доставку" +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:3 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:22 +msgid "Receive Products in Stock" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:167 -msgid "E-Commerce orders are processed the same way." -msgstr "Замовлення електронної комерції обробляються однаково." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:170 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:24 msgid "" -"You can easily integrate your delivery orders with different delivery " -"methods. Please read the document " -":doc:`../../shipping/setup/delivery_method`." +"Once you have existing products, you can decide to create a receipt to enter" +" products from your supplier in stock. The process in order to do so is " +"described in the following print screens." msgstr "" -"Купівлі можуть бути автоматизовані. Будь ласка, прочитайте нашу документацію" -" :doc:`../../shipping/setup/delivery_method`." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:175 -msgid "Advanced flows" -msgstr "Розширені процеси" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:177 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:34 msgid "" -"In this document, the flows that are explained are the most simple ones. " -"Odoo also suit for companies having advanced warehouse management." +"On the receipt document, you can select the quantity of the different " +"products you receive and the supplier from who you received them. When the " +"receipt is complete, you can hit *Validate* and the products will enter your" +" stock." msgstr "" -"У цій документації пояснені потоки є найбільш простими. Odoo також підходить" -" для компаній, які мають сучасне управління складом." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:180 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:42 msgid "" -"By default, only **receipts** and **deliveries** are configured but you can " -"activate the use of multi-locations and multi-warehouses to do **internal " -"transfers**." +"In case you have a receipt that is planned but shouldn’t be immediately " +"validated, you can create a *planned receipt* with a scheduled date in the " +"future. You can indicate the initial demand for each product, corresponding " +"to what has been ordered to your supplier. Once the document is filled in, " +"you can hit “Mark as to do” in order to consider it in your product " +"forecasts." msgstr "" -"За замовчуванням налаштовуються лише **надходження** та **поставки**, але ви" -" можете активувати використання кількох місцезнаходжень і багатьох складів " -"для здійснення **внутрішніх переміщень**." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:184 -msgid "**Routes**: you can automate flows with push and pull rules" +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:56 +msgid "Receive Products in Stock from Purchase Orders" msgstr "" -"**Маршрути**: ви можете автоматизувати потоки за допомогою правил штовхання " -"та витягання." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:186 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:58 msgid "" -"**Multi-step** receipts and deliveries can be easily configured for each " -"warehouse" +"If you have the *Purchase* application installed, receipts can be directly " +"created by validating a *request for quotation*. You will be able to find " +"the corresponding receipt directly on the *purchase order*." msgstr "" -"**Багатоступеневі** надходження та поставки можуть бути легко налаштовані " -"для кожного складу" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:189 -msgid "" -"Much more: **Barcode scanning**, **serial numbers**, **lots**, **cross-" -"docking**, **dropshipping**, integration with a **third-party** shipper, " -"**putaway** and **removal** strategies.... All of it is possible with Odoo." -msgstr "" -"Багато чого іншого: **Сканування штрих-коду**, **серійні номери**, " -"**партії**, **крос-док**, **дропшипінг**, інтеграція зі **стороннім** " -"відправником, **переміщення** та стратегії **видалення**... Все це можливо з" -" Odoo." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start.rst:3 -msgid "Getting Started" -msgstr "Розпочати" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:3 -msgid "How to setup Odoo inventory?" -msgstr "Як встановити склад в Odoo?" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:5 -msgid "" -"The Odoo Inventory application has an implementation guide that you should " -"follow to configure it. It's a step-by-step manual with links to the " -"different screens you need." -msgstr "" -"У додатку Склад Odoo є впровадження, яке слід дотримуватися, щоби " -"налаштувати його. Це покроковий посібник із посиланнями на різні екрани, які" -" вам потрібні." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:9 -msgid "" -"Once you have installed the **Inventory** application, click on the top-" -"right progress bar to get access to the implementation guide." -msgstr "" -"Після того, як ви встановили програму **Склад**, натисніть на верхній правій" -" панелі, щоб отримати доступ до помічника із встановлення." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:15 -msgid "The implementation guide helps you through the following steps:" -msgstr "Помічник зі встановлення допоможе вам виконати наступні кроки:" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:17 -msgid "Set up your warehouse" -msgstr "Налаштуйте свій склад" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:19 -msgid "Import your vendors" -msgstr "Імпортуйте своїх постачальників" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:21 -msgid "Import your products" -msgstr "Імпортуйте свої товари" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:23 -msgid "Set up the initial inventory" -msgstr "Налаштуйте початкову інвентаризацію" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:25 -msgid "Configure your sales and purchase flows" -msgstr "Налаштуйте потоки продажів і купівлі" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:27 -msgid "Set up replenishment mechanisms" -msgstr "Встановіть механізми поповнення" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:29 -msgid "" -"Configure advanced features like package, traceability, routes and inventory" -" valuation." -msgstr "" -"Налаштуйте розширені функції, такі як упаковка, відслідковування, маршрути " -"та оцінка інвентаризції." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:37 -msgid "" -"If you want to set up operations with barcode scanner in your warehouse, you" -" should install the **Barcode** application that adds features on top of the" -" inventory application. The barcode application will guide you to configure " -"and use your scanner optimally." -msgstr "" -"Якщо ви хочете налаштувати операції зі сканером штрих-кодів на своєму " -"складі, вам слід встановити додаток **Штрих-кодів**, яка додасть функції в " -"додатку до інвентаризації. Програма із штрих-кодом допоможе вам оптимально " -"налаштувати та використовувати сканер." #: ../../inventory/routes.rst:3 msgid "Advanced Routes" @@ -6060,147 +4859,88 @@ msgid "Concepts" msgstr "Поняття" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:3 -msgid "How to organize a cross-dock in your warehouse?" -msgstr "Як організувати крос-докінг на вашому складі?" +msgid "Organize a cross-dock in a warehouse" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:5 msgid "" -"Cross dock area is temporarily area where we are not storing any product " -"instead just managing place according to delivery for further customer. This" -" will save lot of time for inter warehouse transfer and storing process. We " -"are managing our products with docking area where product directly place " -"from supplier location and transfer this to gate pass for customer delivery." +"Cross-docking is the process of sending products that are received directly " +"to the customers, without making them enter the stock. The trucks are simply" +" unloaded in a *Cross-Dock* area in order to reorganize products and load " +"another truck." msgstr "" -"Територія крос-докінгу тимчасово є місцем, де ми не зберігаємо жодного " -"товару, а просто керуємо місцем згідно із доставкою для іншого клієнта. Це " -"заощадить багато часу на переміщення та зберігання між складами. Ми керуємо " -"нашою продукцією за допомогою док-зони, де товар безпосередньо розміщується " -"з місцезнаходження постачальника, і передає його на ворота для доставки " -"клієнтам." -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:17 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:11 msgid "" -"For more information on how to organise your warehouse, read `What is cross " -"docking and is it for me? `_" +"For more information on how to organize your warehouse, read our blog: `What" +" is cross-docking and is it for me? `__" msgstr "" -"Для детальної інформації про те, як організувати ваш внутрішній склад, " -"прочитайте `Що таке крос-докінг і чи підходить він мені? " -"`_" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:24 -msgid "Warehouse and routes" -msgstr "Склад і маршрути" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:26 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:15 msgid "" -"In the **Inventory** module, open :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings" -" --> Location & Warehouse`, then in **Routes**, select **Advanced routing of" -" products using rules**, then click on **Apply**." +"In the *Inventory* app, open *Configuration > Settings* and activate the " +"*Multi-Step Routes*." msgstr "" -"У модулі Склад відкрийте розділ :menuselection:`Налаштування --> " -"Налаштування --> Місцезнаходження та склад`, а потім у **Маршрутах** " -"виберіть **Додаткові маршрутизації товарів за допомогою правил** та " -"натисніть кнопку **Застосувати**." -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:33 -msgid "" -"Open :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouse Management --> Warehouses`," -" then open the warehouse you want to cross-dock from and click on **Edit**." +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:21 +msgid "Doing so will also enable the *Storage Locations* feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:23 +msgid "" +"Now, both *Incoming* and *Outgoing* shipments should be configured to work " +"with 2 steps. To adapt the configuration, go to *Inventory > Configuration >" +" Warehouses* and edit your warehouse." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:28 +msgid "" +"This modification will lead to the creation of a *Cross-Docking* route that " +"can be found in *Inventory > Configuration > Routes*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:34 +msgid "Configure products with Cross-Dock Route" msgstr "" -"Відкрийте :menuselection:`Налаштування --> Управління складом --> Склади`, " -"а потім відкрийте склад, з якого потрібно застосувати крос-докіг, і " -"натисніть **Редагувати**." #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:36 -msgid "In the **Warehouse Configuration** tab, select:" -msgstr "На вкладці **Налаштування складу** виберіть:" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:38 msgid "" -"**Incoming Shipments**: Unload in input location then go to stock (2 steps)" +"Create the product that uses the *Cross-Dock Route* and then, in the " +"inventory tab, select the routes *Buy* and *Cross-Dock*. Now, in the " +"purchase tab, specify the vendor to who you buy the product and set a price " +"for it." msgstr "" -"**Вхідні відправлення**: вивантажте у місці прийому, потім перейдіть до " -"складу (2 кроки)" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:41 -msgid "**Outgoing Shipments**: Ship directly from stock (Ship only)" -msgstr "" -"**Вихідні відправлення**: відправляйте безпосередньо зі складу (тільки " -"доставка)" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:43 -msgid "then click on **Save**." -msgstr "потім натисніть **Зберегти**." - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:48 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:44 msgid "" -"This steps has generated a cross-docking route that you can see in " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configurations --> Routes --> Routes`." +"Once done, create a sale order for the product and confirm it. Odoo will " +"automatically create two transfers which will be linked to the sale order. " +"The first one is the transfer from the *Input Location* to the *Output " +"Location*, corresponding to the move of the product in the *Cross-Dock* " +"area. The second one is the delivery order from the *Output Location* to " +"your *Customer Location. Both are in state *Waiting Another Operation* " +"because we still need to order the product to our supplier." msgstr "" -"Ці кроки спричинили крос-докінг, який ви можете побачити у " -":menuselection:`Склад --> Налаштування --> Маршрути --> Маршрути`." #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:52 -msgid "Cross Docking Route" -msgstr "Маршрут крос-докінгу" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:54 msgid "" -"We will use the route **Buy** for first part of the flow and create a route " -"for the remaining part:" +"Now, go to the *Purchase* app. There, you will find the purchase order that " +"has been automatically triggered by the system. Validate it and receive the " +"products in the *Input Location*." msgstr "" -"Ми використаємо маршрут **Купити** для першої частини потоку та створимо " -"маршрут для решти частини:" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:60 msgid "" -"Each of the procurement rule will now be configured. Cross Dock location is " -"created as an internal physical location." +"When the products have been received from the supplier, you can go back to " +"your initial sale order and validate the internal transfer from *Input* to " +"*Output*." msgstr "" -"Кожне з правил закупівлі буде налаштоване. Місце крос-докінгу створюється як" -" внутрішнє фізичне розташування." -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:67 -msgid ":menuselection:`Input --> Cross Dock`" -msgstr ":menuselection:`Прийом --> Крос-докінг`" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:73 -msgid ":menuselection:`Cross Dock --> Output`" -msgstr ":menuselection:`Крос-докінг --> Відвантаження`" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:79 -msgid ":menuselection:`Output --> Customer`" -msgstr ":menuselection:`Відвантаження --> Клієнт`" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:82 -msgid "Product with cross dock" -msgstr "Товар з крос-докінгом" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:84 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:68 msgid "" -"We have created the Vegetable Fennel product and assigned the routes created" -" above as well as the **Buy** route." +"The delivery order is now ready to be processed and can be validated too." msgstr "" -"Ми створили товар Овочевий фенхель і призначили маршрути, створені вище, а " -"також маршрут **Купити**." - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:87 -msgid "" -"We have also specified a supplier and a minimum order rule which is needed " -"for replenishment of a stockable product." -msgstr "" -"Ми також вказали постачальника та мінімальне правило замовлення, яке " -"необхідне для поповнення запасного товару." - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:95 -msgid ":doc:`use_routes`" -msgstr ":doc:`use_routes`" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:96 -msgid ":doc:`../../management/incoming/two_steps`" -msgstr ":doc:`../../management/incoming/two_steps`" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:3 msgid "How to do inter-warehouses transfers?" @@ -6237,7 +4977,6 @@ msgstr "" "місцезнаходженнями та маршрутами на своєму складі." #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:26 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:9 msgid "Creating a new warehouse" msgstr "Створення нового складу" @@ -6493,8 +5232,8 @@ msgstr "У розділі Правила закупівель натисніть #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:45 msgid "" "Here you can set the conditions of your rule. There are 3 types of action " -"possibles :" -msgstr "Тут ви можете встановити умови вашого правила. Існує 3 види дій:" +"possible :" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:48 msgid "Move from another location rules" @@ -6502,13 +5241,12 @@ msgstr "Переміщення з іншого правила місцезнах #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:50 msgid "" -"Manufacturing rules that will trigger the creation of manufacturing orders." +"Manufacturing rules that will trigger the creation of manufacturing orders" msgstr "" -"Правила виробництва, які спричинять створення замовлень на виробництво." #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:53 -msgid "Buy rules that will trigger the creation of purchase orders." -msgstr "Правила купівлі, які ініціюватимуть створення замовлень на купівлю." +msgid "Buy rules that will trigger the creation of purchase orders" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:56 msgid "" @@ -6570,24 +5308,11 @@ msgid "" "inventory control system are that forecasts are often inaccurate as sales " "can be unpredictable and vary from one year to the next. Another problem " "with push inventory control systems is that if too much product is left in " -"inventory. This increases the company's costs for storing these goods. An " +"inventory, this increases the company's costs for storing these goods. An " "advantage to the push system is that the company is fairly assured it will " "have enough product on hand to complete customer orders, preventing the " "inability to meet customer demand for the product." msgstr "" -"Система виштовхування управління складом включає в себе прогнозування потреб" -" складу для задоволення попиту клієнтів. Компанії повинні передбачити, які " -"товари клієнти купуватимуть разом із визначенням кількості товарів, які буде" -" придбано. Компанія, у свою чергу, виробить достатньо товарів, щоби " -"задовольнити прогнозний попит та продавати товар споживачеві. Недоліками " -"системи контролю якості складу є те, що прогнози часто є неточними, оскільки" -" продажі можуть бути непередбачуваними і відрізнятися з року в рік. Ще " -"однією проблемою, пов'язаною із системами керування складом, є те, що " -"занадто багато товару залишається на складі. Це збільшує витрати компанії на" -" зберігання цих товарів. Перевага системи виштовхування полягає в тому, що " -"компанія досить впевнена, що вона буде мати достатньо товарів у наявності, " -"щоби виконати замовлення клієнтів, запобігаючи неможливості задовольнити " -"потреби покупця на товар." #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:22 msgid "" @@ -6690,6 +5415,66 @@ msgstr "" msgid ":doc:`procurement_rule`" msgstr ":doc:`procurement_rule`" +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:3 +msgid "Taking stock from different warehouses" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When you plan to deliver a customer, you don’t know in advance if the " +"products will come from Warehouse A or Warehouse B. You may, in some cases, " +"need to take stock from different warehouses. With *Odoo*, you can configure" +" this by using the concept of virtual warehouses. Let us show you how to set" +" those virtual warehouses." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:8 +msgid "Set up virtual warehouses" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:10 +msgid "" +"Let’s say you have two warehouses: Warehouse A and Warehouse B. Create a new" +" warehouse, that will be a virtual one. It will allow you to take the stock " +"from A or B. To do so, go to your inventory app settings and enable the " +"multi-warehouses feature. Then, go to the warehouses menu and click on " +"create." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:16 +msgid "" +"The *Storage Location* feature will be automatically enabled. Good news, " +"because you will need it later in the process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:18 +msgid "" +"Now, you have to make sure that the main stock locations of warehouse A and " +"warehouse B are children locations of the main stock location of warehouse A" +" + B. Go to the locations menu, and edit the main location of your two " +"warehouses. Then, change their parent location to main location of warehouse" +" A+B." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:24 +msgid "Sell a product from the virtual warehouse" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:26 +msgid "" +"Let’s say you have two products, one stored in warehouse A and one stored in" +" warehouse B. Now, you can create a new quotation for one of each product. " +"Go to other information and choose Warehouse A+B in the shipping " +"information." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:31 +msgid "" +"Once you have done it, you can convert it to a sales order. Then, a delivery" +" order will be automatically generated, with a product reserved in warehouse" +" A and one in warehouse B." +msgstr "" + #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:3 msgid "How to use routes?" msgstr "Як використовувати маршрути?" @@ -6920,257 +5705,114 @@ msgid "Product Costing" msgstr "Вартість товару" #: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:3 -msgid "How to integrate landed costs in the cost of the product?" -msgstr "Як інтегрувати додаткові витрати у витрати на товар?" +msgid "" +"How to integrate additional costs in the cost of the product? (landed costs)" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:8 -msgid "Landed costs include all charges associated to a good transfer." +msgid "" +"The landed cost feature in Odoo allows to include additional costs " +"(shipment, insurance, customs duties, etc.) into the cost of the product." msgstr "" -"Додаткові витрати включають усі витрати, пов'язані з передачею товару." - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:10 -msgid "Landed cost includes = Cost of product + Shipping + Customs + Risk" -msgstr "" -"Додаткові витрати включають: вартість товару + доставку + розмитнення + " -"ризик." #: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:12 msgid "" -"All of these components might not be applicable in every shipment, but " -"relevant components must be considered as a part of the landed cost. We have" -" to identify landed cost to decide sale price of product because it will " -"impact on company profits." +"Landed costs can only be applied to products with a FIFO costing method and " +"an automated inventory valuation (which requires the accounting application " +"to be installed)." msgstr "" -"Усі ці компоненти можуть бути непридатними для кожної відправки, але " -"відповідні компоненти повинні розглядатися як частина додаткових витрат. Ми " -"мусимо визначити додаткові витрати, щоби визначити ціну продажу товару, " -"оскільки це вплине на прибуток компанії." -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:21 -msgid "Applications configuration" -msgstr "Налаштування додатків" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:23 +#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:20 msgid "" -"First, you need to activate the use of the landed costs. Go to " -":menuselection:`Inventory application --> Configuration --> Setting`. Check " -"accounting option **Include landed costs in product costing computation** & " -"**Perpetual inventory valuation**, then click on **Apply** to save changes." +"First, you need to activate the landed costs feature in " +":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`." msgstr "" -"По-перше, вам потрібно активізувати використання додаткових витрат. " -"Перейдіть до :menuselection:`додатку Склад --> Налаштування --> " -"Налаштування`. Перевірте параметр бухобліку **Включити додаткові витрати на " -"випадок розрахунку вартості товару** та **Безстрокову складську оцінку**, " -"після чого натисніть **Застосувати**, щоб зберегти зміни." -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:32 +#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:27 +msgid "Add costs to products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:29 msgid "" -"Then go to the :menuselection:`Purchase application --> Configuration --> " -"Setting`. Choose costing method **Use a 'Fixed', 'Real' or 'Average' price " -"costing method**, then click on **Apply** to save changes." +"Go in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Operations --> Landed Costs` and click " +"on the **Create** button. You then have to select the transfers on which you" +" want to attribute additional costs and the costs lines you want to add up. " +"Once it's done, click on the **Compute** button to see how the costs lines " +"will be split accross your transfers lines." msgstr "" -"Потім перейдіть до програми :menuselection:`Купівлі --> Налаштування --> " -"Налаштування`. Виберіть метод визначення вартості **Використовувати метод " -"«Виправлено», «Реальний» або «Середній»**, потім натисніть **Застосувати**, " -"щоб зберегти зміни." -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:40 -msgid "Landed Cost Types" -msgstr "Типи додаткових витрат" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:42 -msgid "" -"Start by creating specific products to indicate your various **Landed " -"Costs**, such as freight, insurance or custom duties. Go to " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Landed Cost types`." +#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:38 +msgid "To confirm, click on the **Validate** button." msgstr "" -"Почніть зі створення конкретних товарів, щоби вказати додаткові витрати " -"такі, як вантажні, страхові та митні збори. Перейдіть до " -":menuselection:`Складу --> Налаштування --> Типи додаткових витрат`." - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:50 -msgid "" -"Landed costs are only possible for products configured in real time " -"valuation with real price costing method. The costing method is configured " -"on the product category." -msgstr "" -"Додаткові витрати можливі лише для товарів, налаштованих у реальному часі за" -" допомогою реального методу ціноутворення. Метод калькулювання " -"налаштовується на категорію товару." - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:55 -msgid "Link landed costs to a transfer" -msgstr "Посилання на додаткові витрати на переміщення" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:57 -msgid "" -"To calculate landed costs, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory " -"Control --> Landed Costs`." -msgstr "" -"Для розрахунку додаткових витрат, перейдіть до :menuselection:`Складу --> " -"Контроль складу --> Додаткові витрати`." - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:60 -msgid "" -"Click on the **Create** button and select the picking(s) you want to " -"attribute landed costs." -msgstr "" -"Натисніть кнопку **Створити** та виберіть комплектування, до якого ви хочете" -" застосувати атрибути додаткових витрат." - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:66 -msgid "" -"Select the account journal in which to post the landed costs. We recommend " -"you to create a specific journal for landed costs. Therefore it will be " -"easier to keep track of your postings." -msgstr "" -"Виберіть журнал бухобліку, в якому розміщувати додаткові витрати. Ми " -"рекомендуємо вам створити окремий журнал для додаткових витрат. Тоді легше " -"буде стежити за вашими публікаціями." - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:73 -msgid "" -"Click the **Compute** button to see how the landed costs will be split " -"across the picking lines." -msgstr "" -"Натисніть кнопку **Обчислити**, щоб дізнатись, як розподілені суми витрат " -"будуть розподілені по рядках комплектування." - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:79 -msgid "" -"To confirm the landed costs attribution, click on the **Validate** button." -msgstr "" -"Щоби підтвердити атрибуцію додаткових витрат, натисніть кнопку " -"**Перевірити**." #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies.rst:3 msgid "Putaway & Removal Strategies" msgstr "Стратегії виправлення та видалення" #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:3 -msgid "What is a putaway strategy?" -msgstr "Що таке стратегія викладки товару?" +msgid "What is a Putaway Rule?" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:5 msgid "" "A good warehouse implementation takes care that products automatically move " -"to their appropriate destination location. Putaway is the process of taking " -"products off the receiving shipment and putting them into the most " -"appropriate location." +"to their appropriate destination location. To make that process easier, Odoo" +" uses *Putaway rules*. But what is a putaway rule? Putaway is the process of" +" taking products off the receiving shipments and directly putting them into " +"the most appropriate location." msgstr "" -"Хороша реалізація складу гарантує, що товари автоматично перемістяться до " -"відповідного місця призначення. Викладка - це процес прийому товарів із " -"отримання доставки та розміщення їх у найбільш відповідному місці." -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:7 msgid "" -"If for instance a warehouse contains volatile substances, it is important to" -" make sure that certain products are not stored close to each other because " -"of a potential chemical reaction." +"If, for example, a warehouse contains volatile substances, it is important " +"to make sure that certain products are not stored close to each other " +"because of a potential chemical reaction. That’s where putaway rules " +"intervene, to avoid storing products wrongly." msgstr "" -"Якщо, наприклад, склад містить летючі речовини, важливо переконатися, що " -"певні товари не зберігаються близько один до одного через потенційну хімічну" -" реакцію." -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:17 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:12 msgid "" -"A putaway strategy follows the same principle as removal strategies but " -"affects the destination location. Putaway strategies are defined at the " -"location level (unlike removal strategies which are defined at the product " -"level)." +"In the *Inventory* app, go to *Configuration > Settings* and activate the " +"*Multi-Step Routes*. By doing so, the *Storage Locations* will be " +"automatically activated." msgstr "" -"Стратегія викладки застосовується за тим же принципом, що й стратегії " -"вилучення, але впливає на місце призначення. Стратегії викладки визначаються" -" на рівні розташування (на відміну від стратегій вилучення, які визначаються" -" на рівні товару)." -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:18 +msgid "Setting up a Putaway Rule" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:20 msgid "" -"Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings` and check " -"option **Manage several location per warehouse & Advance routing of products" -" using rules**, then click on **Apply**." +"In some cases, like for a retail shop storing vegetables and fruits, we have" +" to store products in different locations to maintain product quality." msgstr "" -"Перейдіть до :menuselection:`Складу --> Налаштування --> Налашутвання` та " -"позначте **Параметри керування кількома місцезнходженнями на складі та " -"Попередня маршрутизація товарів за допомогою правил**, а потім натисніть " -"кнопку **Застосувати**." -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:33 -msgid "Setting up a strategy" -msgstr "Налаштування стратегії" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:35 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:22 msgid "" -"Let's take as an example a retail shop where we store vegetables and fruits." +"Let’s suppose there are one warehouse location *WH/Stock* and two sub-" +"locations *WH/Stock/Vegatable* and *WH/Stock/Fruits*." msgstr "" -"Давайте розглянемо, наприклад, роздрібний магазин, в якому ми зберігаємо " -"овочі та фрукти." -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:24 msgid "" -"We have to store this type of product in different locations to maintain " -"product quality." +"To manage those locations, we will create putaway rules. To do so, open the " +"*Inventory* app and go to *Configuration > Putaway Rules*. Then, click on " +"create and configure your first rule indicating the main location the " +"product will enter before being redirected to the right location." msgstr "" -"Ми повинні зберігати цей тип товару в різних місцях, щоби підтримувати " -"якість продукції." -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:41 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:27 msgid "" -"Suppose there is one warehouse location **WH/Stock** and there is sub " -"location **WH/Stock/Vegetables** & **WH/Stock/Fruits**." +"The putaway rules can be defined either per product or per product category." msgstr "" -"Припустимо, є одне складське розташування **Вутрішній склад/Склад**, і є " -"підрозділ **Внутрішній Склад/Склад/Овочі** та **Внутрішній " -"Склад/Склад/Фрукти**." -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:44 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:32 msgid "" -"You can create a putaway strategy from :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Configuration --> Locations`. Open any location where you want to set a " -"putaway strategy, click on **Edit** and locate the option **Put Away " -"Strategy**." +"Now, if I purchase apples and carrots to my supplier, they will be grouped " +"in the same receipt but redirected to the right location automatically, " +"thanks to putaway rules. This information is available from *Inventory " +"Report*, under the reporting menu." msgstr "" -"Ви можете створити стратегію викладки зі :menuselection:`Складу --> " -"Налаштування --> Місцезнаходження`. Відкрийте будь-яке місцезнаходження, де " -"потрібно встановити стратегію викладки, натисніть **Редагувати** та знайдіть" -" варіант **Стратегія викладки**." - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:52 -msgid "" -"Open the roll-down menu and click on **Create and Edit**. This will open a " -"form view of put away strategy on which you have to set a name for the " -"strategy, and set the method and fixed location for each category." -msgstr "" -"Відкрийте спадне меню та натисніть **Створити та редагувати**. Це дозволить " -"відкрити форму перегляду стратегії викладки, на якій потрібно вказати назву " -"стратегії, і встановити метод і фіксоване місцезнаходження для кожної " -"категорії." - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:59 -msgid "" -"When you have entered all the necessary information, click on **Save**." -msgstr "" -"Коли ви введете всю необхідну інформацію, натисніть кнопку **Зберегти**." - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:61 -msgid "" -"Now, when you purchase products with those categories, they will " -"automatically be transferred to the correct location." -msgstr "" -"Тепер, коли ви купуєте товари з цими категоріями, вони будуть автоматично " -"переведені у правильне місцезнаходження." - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:64 -msgid "" -"To check current inventory, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory " -"Control --> Current Inventory`" -msgstr "" -"Щоби перевірити поточний склад, перейдіть до :menuselection:`Складу --> " -"Контроль складу --> Поточний склад`" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:67 -msgid "There you can see current inventory by location." -msgstr "Тут ви можете побачити поточний склад за місцезнаходженням." #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:3 msgid "What is a removal strategy (FIFO, LIFO, and FEFO)?" @@ -7383,12 +6025,9 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:125 msgid "" "**Removal Date:** This is the date on which the goods with this serial/lot " -"number should be removed from the stock. Using the FEFO removal strategym " +"number should be removed from the stock. Using the FEFO removal strategy " "goods are picked for delivery orders using this date." msgstr "" -"**Дата вилучення**: це дата, коли товари з цим серійним номером/партією " -"повинні бути вилучені зі складу. Використовуючи товари стратегії вилучення " -"FEFO, вибираються замовлення на доставку за цією датою." #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:129 msgid "" @@ -7559,1060 +6198,9 @@ msgstr ":doc:`../../management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental`" msgid ":doc:`../../management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon`" msgstr ":doc:`../../management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon`" -#: ../../inventory/settings.rst:3 -msgid "Settings" -msgstr "Налаштування" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products.rst:3 -msgid "Products" -msgstr "Товари" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:3 -msgid "How to select the right replenishment strategy" -msgstr "Як встановити правильну стратегію поповнення на складі" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:5 -msgid "" -"Minimum Stock rules and Make to Order have similar consequences but " -"different rules. They should be used depending on your manufacturing and " -"delivery strategies." -msgstr "" -"Правила Мінімального Запасу та Зробити на замовлення мають подібні наслідки," -" але різні правила. Вони повинні використовуватися в залежності від ваших " -"технологій виробництва та стратегії доставки." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:15 -msgid "" -"Minimum Stock rules are used to ensure that you always have the minimum " -"amount of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or " -"answer to your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its" -" minimum the system will automatically generate a procurement order with the" -" quantity needed to reach the maximum stock level." -msgstr "" -"Правила мінімального запасу використовуються для забезпечення того, що у вас" -" завжди є мінімальна кількість товару на складі для виготовлення вашої " -"продукції та/або відповіді на потреби вашого клієнта. Коли рівень запасу " -"товару досягає мінімального рівня, система автоматично генерує замовлення на" -" закупівлю з кількістю, необхідною для досягнення максимального рівня " -"запасу." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:24 -msgid "" -"The Make to Order function will trigger a Purchase Order of the amount of " -"the Sales Order related to the product. The system will **not** check the " -"current stock. This means that a draft purchase order will be generated " -"regardless of the quantity on hand of the product." -msgstr "" -"Функція Зробити на замовленням запускає замовлення на купівлю суми " -"замовлення клієнта, пов'язаного з товаром. Система не буде перевіряти " -"поточний запас. Це означає, що проект замовлення на купівлю буде " -"згенерований незалежно від кількості, що знаходяться в наявності товару." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:35 -msgid "" -"The Minimum Stock Rules configuration is available through your Inventory " -"module. In the Inventory Control menu select \"Reordering Rule\" in the drop" -" down menu. There, click on \"Create\" to set minimum and maximum stock " -"values for a given product." -msgstr "" -"Налаштування правил мінімальних запасів доступне через ваш модуль Складу. У " -"меню Управління складом виберіть \"Правило дозамовлення\" у випадаючому " -"меню. Тоді натисніть \"Створити\", щоби встановити мінімальні та максимальні" -" значення запасів для даного товару." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:44 -msgid "" -"Show tooltips for \"minimum quantity\", \"maximum quantity\" and \"quantity " -"multiple\" fields" -msgstr "" -"Покажіть підказки для полів \"мінімальна кількість\", \"максимальна " -"кількість\" та \"кілька кількостей\"." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:47 -msgid "" -"Then, click on your product to access the related product form and, on the " -"\"Inventory submenu\", do not forget to select a supplier." -msgstr "" -"Потім натисніть на товар, щоби отримати доступ до відповідної форми товару, " -"а в \"Підменю складу\" не забудьте вибрати постачальника." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:54 -msgid "" -"Don't forget to select the right product type. A consumable can not be " -"stocked and will thus not be accounted for in the stock valuation." -msgstr "" -"Не забудьте вибрати правильний тип товару. Витратний матеріал не може бути " -"запакований, і тому не буде враховано в оцінці запасів." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:60 -msgid "" -"The Make to Order configuration is available on your product form through " -"your :menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory control --> Products` (or any " -"other module where products are available)." -msgstr "" -"Налаштування Зробити на замовлення доступне у вашій формі товару через ваш " -":menuselection:`Склад --> Контроль складу --> Товари` (або будь-який інший " -"модуль, де доступні товари)." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:64 -msgid "On the product form, under Inventory, click on \"Make To Order\"." -msgstr "На формі товару в розділі \"Склад\" натисніть \"Зробити замовленням\"." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:3 -msgid "How to use different units of measure?" -msgstr "Як використовувати різні одиниці вимірювання?" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:8 -msgid "" -"In some cases, handling products in different unit of measures is necessary." -" For example, if you buy products in a country where the metric system is of" -" application and sell the in a country where the imperial system is used, " -"you will need to convert the units." -msgstr "" -"У деяких випадках необхідна обробка товарів у різних одиницях вимірювань. " -"Наприклад, якщо ви купуєте товари в країні, де використовується метрична " -"система, і продаєте її в країні, де використовується імперична система, вам " -"доведеться конвертувати одиниці." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:13 -msgid "" -"You can set up Odoo to work with different units of measure for one product." -msgstr "" -"Ви можете налаштувати Odoo для роботи з різними одиницями вимірювання для " -"одного товару." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:19 -msgid "" -"In the **Inventory** application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`. In the **Products** section, select **Some products may be " -"sold/purchased in different units of measure (advanced)**, then click on " -"**Apply**." -msgstr "" -"В додатку **Склад** перейдіть до :menuselection:`Налаштування --> " -"Налаштування`. У розділі **Товари** виберіть **Деякі товари можуть бути " -"продані/придбані в різних одиницях виміру (розширені)**, а потім натисніть " -"кнопку **Застосувати**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:27 -msgid "Setting up units on your products" -msgstr "Налаштування одиниць виміру на ваших товарах" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:29 -msgid "" -"In :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Products`, open the product which " -"you would like to change the purchase/sale unit of measure, and click on " -"**Edit**." -msgstr "" -"У :menuselection:`Контроль складу --> Товари`, відкрийте товар, в якій ви би" -" хотіли змінити одиницю виміру купівлі/продажу, і натисніть кнопку " -"**Редагувати**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:32 -msgid "" -"In the **Unit of Measure** section, select the unit in which the product " -"will be sold and in which internal transfers will be done." -msgstr "" -"У розділі **Одиниця виміру** виберіть одиницю, в якій товар буде " -"продаватися, і в якому буде здійснено внутрішні перекази." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:35 -msgid "" -"In the **Purchase Unit of Measure** section, select the unit in which you " -"purchase the product. When you're done, click on **Save**." -msgstr "" -"У розділі **Одиниця вимірювання купівлі** виберіть одиницю, в якій ви " -"купуєте товар. Коли ви закінчите, натисніть кнопку **Зберегти**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:42 -msgid "Click on the edit button |edit| to create new unit of measures." -msgstr "" -"Натисніть на кнопку редагування |edit|, щоб створити нове одиницю " -"вимірювання." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:46 -msgid "Transfer from one unit to another" -msgstr "Переміщення з однієї одиниці в іншу" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:48 -msgid "" -"When doing inter-unit transfers, the rounding is automatically done by Odoo." -msgstr "" -"При здійсненні переміщень між одиницями, округлення автоматично виконує " -"Odoo." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:51 -msgid "" -"The unit of measure can be changed throughout the whole process. The only " -"condition is that the unit of measure is part of the same category." -msgstr "" -"Одиницю вимірювання можна змінити протягом усього процесу. Єдина умова " -"полягає в тому, що одиниця вимірювання є частиною тієї ж категорії." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:54 -msgid "In this example, we are in the egg business :" -msgstr "У цьому прикладі ми займаємося яєчним бізнесом:" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:56 -msgid "We buy eggs by trays (30 eggs)" -msgstr "Ми купуємо яйця підносами (30 яєць)" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:58 -msgid "We check all eggs individually when receiving it (quality control)" -msgstr "Ми перевіряємо всі яйця індивідуально при отриманні (контроль якості)" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:60 -msgid "We sell eggs by the dozen to the customers" -msgstr "Ми продаємо яйця десяткам покупцям" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:66 -msgid "" -"The **Sale price** is expressed in the **Product unit of measure**. The " -"**Cost price** is expressed in the **Purchase Unit of Measure**." -msgstr "" -"**Ціна продажу** виражається в **одиниці виміру товару**. **Вартість ціни** " -"виражається в **одиниці виміру закупівлі**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:70 -msgid "" -"All internal transfers are expressed in the **Product Unit of Measure**." -msgstr "Усі внутрішні перекази виражаються в **одиниці виміру товару**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:74 -msgid "Procurement" -msgstr "Забезпечення" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:76 -msgid "" -"When doing your procurement request, you can still change the unit of " -"measure." -msgstr "" -"Виконавши запит на забезпечення, ви все одно можете змінити одиницю " -"вимірювання." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:82 -msgid "The unit of measure can also be changed in the purchase order :" -msgstr "Елемент вимірювання також може бути змінений у замовленні на купівлю:" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:90 -msgid "The quality control is done by unit." -msgstr "Контроль якості здійснюється за одиницю." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:92 -msgid "" -"The basic unit of measure of our product is **Unit**. Therefore the quality " -"check is done by unit." -msgstr "" -"Основною одиницею вимірювання нашого товару є **Одиниця**. Тому перевірка " -"якості здійснюється за одиницю." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:99 -msgid "" -"The unit of measure can only be changed when the transfer status is " -"**Draft**." -msgstr "" -"Одиницю вимірювання можна змінити лише тоді, коли статус переміщення - " -"**Чернетка**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:103 -#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:74 -msgid "Delivery process" -msgstr "Процес доставки" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:105 -msgid "" -"The eggs are sold by the dozen. You can choose the unit of measure on the " -"sale order document. When doing it, the price is automatically computed from" -" the unit to the dozen." -msgstr "" -"Яйця продаються десятком. Ви можете вибрати одиницю вимірювання у документі " -"замовлення на продаж. При цьому ціна автоматично обчислюється від одиниці до" -" десяти." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:112 -msgid "" -"In the delivery order, the initial demand is done in the sales order unit of" -" measure :" -msgstr "" -"У замовленні на доставку початкова поставка виконується в одиниці " -"вимірювання замовлення на продаж:" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:118 -msgid "" -"But the transfer is done in the product unit of measure. Everything is " -"converted automatically :" -msgstr "" -"Але переміщення виконується в одиниці виміру товару. Все конвертується " -"автоматично:" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:3 -msgid "When should you use packages, units of measure or kits?" -msgstr "" -"Коли варто використовувати упаковки, одиниці вимірювання та комплекти?" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:6 -msgid "Unit of measures" -msgstr "Одиниця вимірювання" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Units of measures are an indication about the unit used to handle a product." -" Products can be expressed in multiple units of measure at once." -msgstr "" -"Одиниці вимірювання є ознакою одиниці, що використовується для обробки " -"товару. Товари можуть бути виражені в декількох одиницях вимірювання одразу." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:11 -msgid "" -"Activate this option if you are working with several ones in your warehouse." -msgstr "" -"Активуйте цей параметр, якщо ви працюєте з кількома одиницями на вашому " -"складі." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:14 -msgid "" -"The purchase unit of measure might be different that the one you use in your" -" warehouse." -msgstr "" -"Купівельна одиниця вимірювання може відрізнятися від тієї, яку ви " -"використовуєте на своєму складі." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:17 -msgid "" -"The selling unit of measure is set on the sale order and can be different." -msgstr "" -"Продажна одиниця вимірювання встановлюється в порядку продажу та може бути " -"різною." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:24 -msgid "" -"The conversion between the different units of measures is done " -"automatically. The only condition is that all the units have to be in the " -"same category (Unit, Weight, Volume, Length,...)" -msgstr "" -"Конвертація між різними одиницями вимірювань здійснюється автоматично. Єдина" -" умова полягає в тому, що всі одиниці повинні бути в тій же категорії " -"(одиниця, вага, обсяг, довжина ...)" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:29 -msgid "Packages" -msgstr "Пакунки" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:31 -msgid "" -"The package is the physical container in which you put one or several " -"product." -msgstr "" -"Пакунок - це фізичний контейнер, в якому ви розміщуєте один або кілька " -"товарів." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:38 -msgid "Packaging" -msgstr "Упаковка" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:40 -msgid "Packaging is the physical container that protects your product." -msgstr "Упаковка - це фізичний контейнер, який захищає ваш товар." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:42 -msgid "" -"If you are selling computers, the packaging contains the computer with the " -"notice and the power plug." -msgstr "" -"Якщо ви продаєте комп'ютери, упаковка містить комп'ютер із повідомленням та " -"штепсельною розеткою." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:45 -msgid "In Odoo, packagings are just used for indicative purpose." -msgstr "В Odoo упаковки використовуються для індикативних цілей." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:51 -msgid "" -"You can define on the **Packages** which **Packaging** it uses. But it is " -"only for indicative purpose." -msgstr "" -"В **Упаковках** можна визначити, який використовується **Пакунок**. Але це " -"тільки для індикативних цілей." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:55 -msgid "When to use packages, packagings or unit of measures ?" -msgstr "Коли використовувати пакунки, упаковки або одиниці вимірювання?" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:57 -msgid "" -"For example, you are sellings eggs. In your warehouse, you manage the eggs " -"individually. Lots of eggs are scrapped and you do it egg by egg. The **unit" -" of measure** is ``Unit(s)``." -msgstr "" -"Наприклад, ви продаєте яйця. На вашому складі ви керуєте яйцями окремо. " -"Багато яєць бракуються і ви переміщуєте яйце за яйцем. **одиниця виміру** - " -"``Одиниця(і)``." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:61 -msgid "" -"If you are selling eggs by the dozen, the selling **unit of measure** is the" -" ``Dozen``. You will set it on your sale order." -msgstr "" -"Якщо ви продаєте яйця дюжиною, то **одиниця вимірювання** продажу - " -"``Дюжина``. Ви встановите його в замовленні на продаж." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:64 -msgid "" -"The ``cardboard trays`` that contains the dozen of eggs is the " -"**packaging**." -msgstr "``Картонні лотки``, що містять десяток яєць, є **упаковкою**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:66 -msgid "" -"When you are selling several trays, you might wrap all the trays into a " -"``box`` or in a ``plastic`` wrapping. It is the **package**." -msgstr "" -"Коли ви продаєте кілька піддонів, ви можете загорнути всі лотки в " -"``коробку`` або в ``пластикову`` упаковку. Це **пакунок**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:70 -msgid ":doc:`../../overview/start/setup`" -msgstr ":doc:`../../overview/start/setup`" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:71 -msgid ":doc:`uom`" -msgstr ":doc:`uom`" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:3 -msgid "Using product variants" -msgstr "Використання варіантів товару" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:5 -msgid "" -"Product variants are used to manage products having different variations, " -"like size, color, etc. It allows managing the product at the template level " -"(for all variations) and at the variant level (specific attributes)." -msgstr "" -"Варіанти товару використовуються для управління товарами, що мають різні " -"варіанти, наприклад розмір, колір тощо. Це дозволяє керувати товаром на " -"рівні шаблону (для всіх варіантів) та на рівні варіантів (специфічні " -"атрибути)." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:10 -msgid "" -"As an example, a company selling t-shirts may have the following product:" -msgstr "Наприклад, компанія, що продає футболки, може мати такий товар:" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:13 -msgid "B&C T-shirt" -msgstr "Футболка B&C" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:15 -msgid "Sizes: S, M, L, XL, XXL" -msgstr "Розміри: S, M, L, XL, XXL" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:16 -msgid "Colors: Blue, Red, White, Black" -msgstr "Кольори: синій, червоний, білий, чорний" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:18 -msgid "" -"In this example, **B&C T-Shirt** is called the product template and **B&C " -"T-Shirt, S, Blue** is a variant. Sizes and color are **attributes**." -msgstr "" -"У цьому прикладі **футболок B&C** називається шаблоном товару, а **футболка " -"B&C, S**, синій - це варіант. Розміри та колір є **атрибутами**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:22 -msgid "" -"The above example has a total of 20 different products (5 sizes x 4 colors)." -" Each one of these products has its own inventory, sales, etc." -msgstr "" -"У наведеному вище прикладі в цілому 20 різних товарів (5 розмірів на 4 " -"кольори). Кожен з цих товарів має власну інвентаризацію, продаж та ін." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:26 -msgid "Impact of variants" -msgstr "Вплив варіантів" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:28 -msgid "" -"**Barcode**: the code and barcode is associated to a variant, not the " -"template. Every variant may have its own barcode / SKU." -msgstr "" -"**Штрих-код**: код та штрих-код асоціюються з варіантом, а не з шаблоном. " -"Кожен варіант може мати свій штрих-код / ​​SKU." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:31 -msgid "" -"**Price**: every product variant has its own public price that is computed " -"based on the template price ($20) with an optional extra for every variant " -"(+$3 for color red). However, you can define pricelist rules that apply on " -"the template or the variant." -msgstr "" -"**Ціна**: кожен варіант товару має свою публічну ціну, яка обчислюється на " -"основі ціни шаблону ($ 20) за додатковим аксесуаром для кожного варіанта (+ " -"3 дол. США за червоний колір). Тим не менше, ви можете визначити цінові " -"правила, які застосовуються до шаблону або варіанту." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:36 -msgid "" -"**Inventory**: the inventory is managed by product variant. You don't own " -"t-shirts, you only own \"T-shirts, S, Red\", or \"T-Shirts, M, Blue\". For " -"information purpose, on the product template form, you get the inventory " -"that is the sum of every variant. (but the actual inventory is computed by " -"variant)" -msgstr "" -"**Інвентаризація**: інвентаризація керується варіантом товару. Ви не " -"володієте футболками, у вас є тільки \"Футболки, S, червоний\", або " -"\"Футболки, M, синій\". Для інформаційного призначення, у формі шаблону " -"товару ви отримуєте інвентаризацію, яка є сумою кожного варіанту (але " -"фактичний інвентаризація обчислюється за варіантом)." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:42 -msgid "" -"**Picture**: the picture is related to the variant, every variation of a " -"product may have its own primary picture." -msgstr "" -"**Зображення**: картинка пов'язана з варіантом, кожна варіація товару може " -"мати свою основну картину." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:45 -msgid "" -"**Other fields**: most of the other fields belongs to the product template. " -"If you update them, it updates automatically all the variants. (example: " -"Income Account, Taxes)" -msgstr "" -"**Інші поля**: більшість інших полів належить до шаблону товару. Якщо ви їх " -"оновлюєте, він автоматично оновлює всі варіанти (приклад: прибуток, " -"податки)." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:50 -msgid "Should you use variants?" -msgstr "Чи варто використовувати варіанти?" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:53 -msgid "When should you use variants?" -msgstr "Коли слід використовувати варіанти?" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:55 -msgid "Using variants has the following impacts:" -msgstr "Використання варіантів має такі наслідки:" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:57 -msgid "" -"**eCommerce**: in your online shop, the customer will only see product " -"templates in the catalog page. Once the visitor click on such a product, he " -"will have options to choose amongst the variants (colors, sizes, …)" -msgstr "" -"**Електронна комерція**: у вашому інтернет-магазині клієнт побачить лише " -"шаблони товарів на сторінці каталогу. Коли відвідувач натискає на такий " -"товар, він матиме варіанти вибору серед варіантів (кольори, розміри, ...)" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:62 -msgid "" -"**Manufacturing**: Using variants allows to define only one bill of material" -" for a product template and slight variations for some of the variants. " -"Example: instead of creating a Bill of Material for \"T-shirt, Red, S\", you" -" create a bill of material for \"T-shirt\" and add some lines that are " -"specific to the dimension S, and other lines specific to the color Red." -msgstr "" -"**Виробництво**: Використання варіантів дозволяє визначити лише одну " -"специфікацію для шаблону товару та невеликі варіації для деяких варіантів. " -"Приклад: замість створення специфікації для \"Футболки, червоний, S\" ви " -"створюєте специфікацію для \"футболки\" і додаєте рядки, що відповідають " -"конкретному розміру S, а також інші рядки, специфічні для червоного кольору." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:69 -msgid "" -"**Pricing**: The default price of a product is computed using the price of " -"the product template and add the optional extra price on each dimension of " -"the variant. This way, variant prices are easier to maintain since you don't" -" have to set the price for every variant. However, it's possible to create " -"pricelist rules to fix price per variants too." -msgstr "" -"**Ціноутворення**: ціна товару за замовчуванням обчислюється за ціною " -"шаблону товару та додає необов'язкову додаткову ціну за кожним розміром " -"варіанту. Таким чином, варіанти ціни простіше підтримувати, оскільки вам не " -"потрібно встановлювати ціни за кожним варіантом. Однак можна створити цінові" -" правила, щоби встановити ціну за варіантом." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:77 -msgid "When should you avoid using variants?" -msgstr "Коли слід уникати використання варіантів?" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:79 -msgid "" -"Using variants may add a level of complexity on the way you use Odoo. You " -"should consider using variants only if you need it to reduce the complexity " -"of managing lots of products that are similars." -msgstr "" -"Використання варіантів може додати рівень складності в тому, як ви " -"використовуєте Odoo. Ви повинні розглянути можливість використання варіантів" -" лише у тому випадку, коли вам це потрібно, щоб зменшити складність " -"управління багатьма товарами, які є аналогами." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:83 -msgid "" -"As an example, importing your initial product catalog is more complex if you" -" use variants. You can't just import a list of products, you must import " -"product templates and all their related variations." -msgstr "" -"Наприклад, імпорт початкового каталогу товарів є більш складним, якщо ви " -"використовуєте варіанти. Ви не можете просто імпортувати список товарів, ви " -"повинні імпортувати шаблони товарів та всі пов'язані з ними варіанти." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:87 -msgid "" -"In addition to that, you should also carefully select the dimensions that " -"you manage as separate product templates and those as variants. As an " -"example, a company having these products:" -msgstr "" -"Крім того, ви також повинні ретельно вибрати параметри, якими ви керуєте як " -"окремими шаблонами товарів, і ті, що є варіантами. Наприклад, компанія, яка " -"має ці товари:" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:91 -msgid "Quality: T-Shirts, Polos, Shirts" -msgstr "Якість: футболки, поло" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:93 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:105 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:110 -msgid "Color: Red, Blue" -msgstr "Колір: червоний, синій" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:95 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:106 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:111 -msgid "Size: S, M, L, XL" -msgstr "Розмір: S, M, L, XL" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:97 -msgid "" -"In such a use case, you could create 1 template with three dimensions of " -"variants (Layout, T-Shirts, Polos). But, it's recommended to create two " -"different product templates as T-shirts may highly differ from polos or " -"shirts and customer expect to see these as two different products in the " -"e-Commerce:" -msgstr "" -"У такому випадку ви можете створити 1 шаблон з трьома параметрами варіантів " -"(Компонування, футболки, поло). Але рекомендується створити два різні " -"шаблони товарів, оскільки футболки можуть сильно відрізнятись від поло або " -"сорочок, і споживач сподівається побачити їх як два різні товари в " -"електронній комерції:" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:103 -msgid "Product Template: T-shirt" -msgstr "Шаблон товару: футболка" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:108 -msgid "Product Template: Polos" -msgstr "Шаблон товару: поло" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:117 -msgid "Activate the variant feature" -msgstr "Активізуйте функцію варіанту" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:119 -msgid "" -"Before you can use product variants, you must first activate the product " -"variants in the settings. To do so, you must go to the Sales app. In the " -"menu :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`, locate the **Products " -"Variants** line, and tick the option **Products can have several " -"attributes**, then click on **Apply**." -msgstr "" -"Перш ніж використовувати варіанти товару, спочатку потрібно активувати " -"варіанти товару в налаштуваннях. Для цього потрібно перейти до додатку " -"Продажі. У меню :menuselection:`Налаштування --> Налаштування` знайдіть " -"рядок **Варіанти товару** та поставте прапорець біля опції **Товари можуть " -"мати кілька атрибутів**, потім натисніть **Застосувати**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:129 -msgid "Creating products with variants" -msgstr "Створення товарів з різними варіантами" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:131 -msgid "" -"Once you have activated the variant option, you can add variants to your " -"products. To do so, go to the Sales module, :menuselection:`Sales --> " -"Products`. It is also accessible from the Purchase and inventory modules." -msgstr "" -"Після активації варіантів, ви можете додати варіанти до ваших товарів. Для " -"цього перейдіть до модуля :menuselection:`Продажі --> Товари`. Він також " -"доступний у модулі Купівлі та Склад." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:135 -msgid "Now, click on the product you wish to add variants to." -msgstr "Тепер натисніть на товар, до якого потрібно додати варіанти." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:137 -msgid "" -"In the product page, a new tab called Variants has appeared. The number in " -"purple written on top is the number of variants this product currently has. " -"To add new variants, click on the tile. In the new window, click on " -"**Create**." -msgstr "" -"На сторінці товару з'явилася нова вкладка Варіанти. Фіолетовий номер, " -"написаний зверху, - це кількість варіантів цього товару в даний час. Щоби " -"додати нові варіанти, натисніть на плитку. У новому вікні натисніть кнопку " -"**Створити**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:142 -msgid "" -"In **Attributes**, click on the rolldown menu and select the type of " -"variance you wish to add. If the variant does not yet exist, you can create " -"it on the fly by clicking on Create and edit…" -msgstr "" -"У розділі **Атрибути** клацніть на розгорнутому меню та виберіть тип " -"різниці, який ви хочете додати. Якщо варіант ще не існує, ви можете створити" -" його на льоту, натиснувши кнопку Створити та редагуйте..." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:149 -msgid "" -"In the Attributes window, the **Value** field is the description of the " -"attribute such as Green, Plastic or 32GB. The **Attribute** field is the " -"type of variant such as Color, Material or Memory." -msgstr "" -"У вікні Атрибути поле **Значення** - це опис атрибута, такого як Зелений, " -"Пластиковий або «32 Гб». Поле **Атрибут** - це тип варіанта, такого як " -"Колір, Матеріал або Пам'ять." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:156 -msgid "" -"You can add a cost for the variant on the fly by adding it in the " -"**Attribute Price Extra** field, or choose to modify it later. Click on " -"**Save**." -msgstr "" -"Ви можете додати вартість варіанту на льоту, додавши його в поле **Додаткові" -" характеристики** або оберіть його пізніше. Натисніть кнопку **Зберегти**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:160 -msgid "" -"You can also add a different barcode and internal reference to the variant." -msgstr "" -"Ви також можете додати інший штрих-код та внутрішнє посилання на варіант." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:163 -msgid "" -"When you have entered all the specifications of the variant, click on " -"**Save**." -msgstr "" -"Коли ви ввели всі специфікації цього варіанту, натисніть кнопку " -"**Зберегти**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:167 -msgid "Managing Product Variants" -msgstr "Управління варіантами товару" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:172 -msgid "" -"The examples below are all based on this product template that has two " -"variant attributes :" -msgstr "" -"Наведені нижче приклади є основою цього шаблону товару, який має два " -"атрибути варіанта:" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:175 -msgid "T-Shirt B&C" -msgstr "Футболка B&C" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:177 -msgid "Color: Red, Blue, White" -msgstr "Колір: червоний, синій, білий" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:179 -msgid "Size: S, M, L, XL, XXL" -msgstr "Розмір: S, M, L, XL, XXL" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:182 -msgid "Managing combination possibilities" -msgstr "Управління можливостями комбінації" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:184 -msgid "" -"By default, with the above product template, you get 15 different products " -"(3 colors, 5 sizes). If the XXL size only exists for red and blue t-shirts, " -"you can deactivate the white product variant." -msgstr "" -"За замовчуванням, використовуючи вказаний вище шаблон товару, ви отримуєте " -"15 різних товарів (3 кольори, 5 розмірів). Якщо розмір XXL існує лише для " -"червоних та синіх футболок, ви можете деактивувати варіант білого товару." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:188 -msgid "" -"To do this, click on the **Variants** button, select the XXL, White T-shirt." -" From the product form, uncheck the **Active** box of the T-shirt White, " -"XXL." -msgstr "" -"Для цього натисніть кнопку **Варіанти**, виберіть XXL, біла футболка. З " -"форми товару зніміть позначення **Активно** футболки білого кольору XXL." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:197 -msgid "" -"That deactivating a product is different than having an inventory of 0." -msgstr "Деактивація товару відрізняється від наявності інвентаризації 0." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:200 -msgid "Setting a price per variant" -msgstr "Встановлення ціни за варіант" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:202 -msgid "" -"You can add a cost over the main price for some of the variants of a " -"product." -msgstr "" -"Ви можете додати вартість по основній ціні для деяких варіантів товару." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:205 -msgid "" -"Once you have activated the variant option, you can add variants to your " -"products. To do so, go to the Sales module, open :menuselection:`Sales --> " -"Products` and click on the product you want to modify. Click on the " -"**Variant Prices** button to access the list of variant values." -msgstr "" -"Після активації варіантів, ви можете додати варіанти до ваших товарів. Для " -"цього перейдіть до модуля Продажі, відкрийте :menuselection:`Продажі --> " -"Товари` і натисніть на товар, який потрібно змінити. Натисніть кнопку " -"**Варіанти цін**, щоби переглянути список варіантів значень." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:213 -msgid "" -"Click on the variant name you wish to add a value to, to make the 3 fields " -"editable. In the **Attribute Price Extra** field, add the cost of the " -"variant that will be added to the original price." -msgstr "" -"Натисніть на назві варіанту, до якого потрібно додати значення, щоби зробити" -" 3 поля редагованими. У полі **Атрибут додаткової характеристики** додайте " -"вартість варіанту, який буде додано до початкової ціни." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:220 -msgid "When you have entered all the extra values, click on **Save**." -msgstr "" -"Коли ви введете всі додаткові значення, натисніть кнопку **Зберегти**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:3 -msgid "What is the difference between warehouses and locations?" -msgstr "Яка різниця між складом та місцезнаходженням?" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:5 -msgid "" -"In Odoo, a **Warehouse** is the actual building/place in which your items " -"are stocked. You can setup multiple warehouses and create moves between " -"warehouses." -msgstr "" -"**Склад** в Odoo - це фактично будівля/місце, в якому складуються ваші " -"товари. Ви можете встановити кілька складів і створювати переходи між ними." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:9 -msgid "" -"A **Location**, is a specific space within your warehouse. It can be " -"considered as a sublocation of your warehouse, as a shelf, a floor, an " -"aisle, etc. Therefore, a location is part of one warehouse only and it is " -"not possible to link one location to multiple warehouses. You can configure " -"as much locations as you need under one warehouse." -msgstr "" -"**Місцезнаходження** - це конкретне місце на вашому складі. Воно може " -"розглядатися як підрозділ вашого складу, полиця, підлога, прохід і т. д. " -"Тому розташування є частиною лише одного складу, і неможливо пов'язати одне " -"місцезнаходження з кількома складами. Ви можете налаштувати стільки " -"місцезнаходжень, скільки вам потрібно під одним складом." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:15 -msgid "There are 3 types of locations:" -msgstr "Існує 3 типи місцезнаходжень:" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:17 -msgid "" -"The **Physical Locations** are internal locations that are part of the " -"warehouses for which you are the owner. They can be the loading and " -"unloading area of your warehouse, a shelf or a department, etc." -msgstr "" -"**Фізичні місцезнаходження** - це внутрішні місцезнаходження, які є частиною" -" складу, якого ви є власником. Вони можуть бути областю навантаження та " -"розвантаження вашого складу, полиці або відділу тощо." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:21 -msgid "" -"The **Partner Locations** are spaces within a customer and/or vendor's " -"warehouse. They work the same way as Physical Locations with the only " -"difference being that you are not the owner of the warehouse." -msgstr "" -"**Місцезнаходження партнерів** - це простір на складі клієнта та/або " -"постачальника. Вони працюють так само, як і в \"Фізичних місцезнаходжень\", " -"але лише тому, що ви не є власником складу." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:25 -msgid "" -"The **Virtual Locations** are places that do not exist, but in which " -"products can be placed when they are not physically in an inventory yet (or " -"anymore). They come in handy when you want to place lost products out of " -"your stock (in the **Inventory loss**), or when you want to take into " -"account products that are on their way to your warehouse (**Procurements**)." -msgstr "" -"**Віртуальні місцезнаходження** - це місця, які не існують, але в них можна " -"розміщувати товари, якщо вони ще не є (або більше) інвентаризованими. Вони " -"стануть у нагоді, коли ви хочете помістити втрачені товари з вашого запасу " -"(у **Втрати складу**) або коли ви хочете взяти до уваги товари, які " -"переходять на ваш склад (**Забезпечення**)." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:31 -msgid "" -"In Odoo, locations are structured hierarchically. You can structure your " -"locations as a tree, dependent on a parent-child relationship. This gives " -"you more detailed levels of analysis of your stock operations and the " -"organization of your warehouses." -msgstr "" -"В Odoo місцезнаходження розташовані ієрархічно. Ви можете структурувати свої" -" місцезнаходження як дерево, залежно від відносин між батьківським та " -"дочірнім. Це дає вам більш детальний рівень аналізу ваших операцій на складі" -" та організації ваших складів." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:37 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:44 -msgid ":doc:`warehouse_creation`" -msgstr ":doc:`warehouse_creation`" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:38 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:48 -msgid ":doc:`location_creation`" -msgstr ":doc:`location_creation`" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:3 -msgid "How to create a new location?" -msgstr "Як створити нове місцезнаходження?" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:9 -msgid "Creating a new location" -msgstr "Створення нового місцезнаходження" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:11 -msgid "" -"In order to be able to create new locations, you must allow the system to " -"manage multiple locations. In the **Inventory** module, open the menu " -":menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`. In the **Location & Warehouse**" -" section, tick the **Manage several locations per warehouse** box, then " -"click on **Apply**." -msgstr "" -"Щоби мати можливість створювати нові місцезнаходження, ви повинні дозволити " -"системі керувати кількома місцезнаходженнями. В модулі **Склад** відкрийте " -"меню :menuselection:`Налаштування --> Налаштування`. У розділі " -"**Місцезнаходження та склад** позначте пункт **Керування кількома " -"місцезнаходженнями**, після чого натисніть **Застосувати**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:20 -msgid "" -"In the **Inventory** module, open :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Warehouse Management --> Locations` In the Locations window, click on " -"**Create**." -msgstr "" -"У модулі **Склад** відкрийте :menuselection:`Налаштування --> Управління " -"Складом --> Місцезнаходження`. У вікні Місцезнаходження натисніть кнопку " -"**Створити**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:24 -msgid "" -"Type the name of the location in the **Location Name** field, and select the" -" **Parent Location** in the list. The parent location can be a physical, " -"partner or virtual location, and you can add as many sub-locations as needed" -" to a location." -msgstr "" -"Введіть назву місцезнаходження в полі **Назва місцезнаходження** та виберіть" -" **Батьківське місцезнаходження** в списку. Батьківське місцезнаходження " -"може бути фізичним, партнером або віртуальним розташуванням, і ви можете " -"додавати якнайбільше підобластей, якщо це необхідно, до місцезнаходження." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:29 -msgid "" -"You can also fill in the **Additional Information** fields and add a note to" -" describe your location." -msgstr "" -"Ви також можете заповнити поля **Додаткової інформації** та додати примітку," -" щоб описати своє місцезнаходження." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:35 -msgid "When you are finished, click on **Save**." -msgstr "Коли ви закінчите, натисніть кнопку **Зберегти**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:38 -msgid "" -"A warehouse also corresponds to a location. As the locations are " -"hierarchical, Odoo will create the parent location of the warehouse, " -"containing all the sublocations in it." -msgstr "" -"Склад також відповідає місцезнаходженню. Оскільки місцезнаходження є " -"ієрархічними, Odoo створить батьківське розташування складу, що містить всі " -"підкласи в ньому." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:43 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:47 -msgid ":doc:`difference_warehouse_location`" -msgstr ":doc:`difference_warehouse_location`" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:3 -msgid "How to create a new warehouse?" -msgstr "Як створити новий склад?" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:11 -msgid "" -"In order to be able to create a new warehouse, you must allow the system to " -"manage multiple locations. In the **Inventory** module, open the menu " -":menuselection:`Settings --> Configuration`. In the **Location & Warehouse**" -" section, tick the **Manage several locations per warehouse** box, then " -"click on **apply**." -msgstr "" -"Щоби мати можливість створювати новий склад, ви повинні дозволити системі " -"керувати кількома місцезнаходженнями. У модулі **Склад** відкрийте меню " -":menuselection:`Налаштування --> Налаштування`. У розділі **Місцезнаходження" -" та склад** позначте **Керування кількома місцезнаходженнями**, після чого " -"натисніть **Застосувати**." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:20 -msgid "" -"Open the menu :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouse Management --> " -"Warehouses`" -msgstr "" -"Відкрийте меню :menuselection:`Налаштування --> Управління складом --> " -"Склади`" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:22 -msgid "" -"In the warehouses screen, click on **Create**. A new screen appears, with 3 " -"fields :" -msgstr "" -"На екрані складів натисніть кнопку **Створити**. З'явиться новий екран з " -"трьома полями:" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:25 -msgid "In **Warehouse Name**, insert the full name of the warehouse." -msgstr "У **Назві складу** введіть повну назву складу." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:27 -msgid "" -"In the **Short Name** field, insert a 5-characters code for your warehouse. " -"Keep in mind that this code is the one that will appear in the lists, so " -"make sure you choose a name that is easy to understand and easy to enter." -msgstr "" -"У полі **Коротка назва** введіть 5-символьний код для вашого складу. " -"Пам'ятайте, що цей код відображається у списках, тому переконайтеся, що ви " -"вибрали назву, яку легко зрозуміти та легко вводити." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:32 -msgid "" -"In the **Address** field, you can select an existing company or create one " -"on-the-go. Therefore, the address of your warehouse will be the same as the " -"one of the company you selected. You can also leave this field empty and " -"edit it afterwards." -msgstr "" -"У полі **Адреси** ви можете вибрати існуючу компанію або створити її на " -"ходу. Тому адреса вашого складу буде такою ж, як і вибрана вами компанія. Ви" -" також можете залишити це поле порожнім і редагувати його пізніше." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:40 -msgid "Click on **Save** to finish configuring your new warehouse." -msgstr "Натисніть **Зберегти**, щоби завершити налаштування вашого складу." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:43 -msgid "" -"When you create a warehouse, the system will create the necessary picking " -"types and main child locations for this main location in the background." -msgstr "" -"Коли ви створюєте склад, система створює необхідні типи збору та основні " -"дочірні місцезнаходження для цього основного розташування у фоновому режимі." +#: ../../inventory/shipping.rst:3 +msgid "Shipping" +msgstr "Відправлення" #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation.rst:3 msgid "Shipping Operations" @@ -8798,10 +6386,9 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:64 msgid "" -"The real shipping cost are computed when the delivery order is validated." +"The real shipping cost is computed when the delivery order is validated, you" +" can see the real cost in the chatter of the delivery order." msgstr "" -"Реальна вартість доставки обчислюється, коли замовлення доставки " -"перевіряється." #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:70 msgid "" @@ -8863,6 +6450,11 @@ msgstr "" "розділі **Інтеграція з перевізником** позначте транспортні компанії, які ви " "хочете інтегрувати:" +#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:27 +#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:26 +msgid "Then click on **Apply**." +msgstr "Потім натисніть **Застосувати**." + #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:30 #: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:34 #: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:33 @@ -8946,11 +6538,6 @@ msgstr "" "**Загальні налаштування**. Натисніть перше посилання **Налаштувати дані " "вашої компанії**." -#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:68 -#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:90 -msgid "Product configuration" -msgstr "Налаштування товару" - #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:70 #: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:92 msgid "" @@ -9223,6 +6810,10 @@ msgstr "" "реальну ціну та упаковку, а також обробляти друк етикеток. Дивіться " ":doc:`third_party_shipper`" +#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:74 +msgid "Delivery process" +msgstr "Процес доставки" + #: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:82 msgid "" "You can now choose the **Delivery Method** on your sale order. If you want " diff --git a/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po index 3b0debade..a9c5794fc 100644 --- a/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po +++ b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po @@ -4,15 +4,16 @@ # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # # Translators: +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 # Alina Lisnenko , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 11.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-10-19 10:03+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2018-10-19 08:15+0000\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Alina Lisnenko , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Ukrainian (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/uk/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" @@ -25,28 +26,32 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Internet of Things (IoT)" msgstr "Інтернет речей (IoT)" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:3 +#: ../../iot/config.rst:3 +msgid "Configuration" +msgstr "Налаштування" + +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:3 msgid "Connect an IoT Box to your database" msgstr "Підключення IoT Box до вашої бази даних" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:5 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:5 msgid "Install the Internet of Things (IoT) App on your Odoo Database." msgstr "Встановіть програму Інтернет речей (IoT) на базу даних Odoo." -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:10 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:10 msgid "Go in the IoT App and click on Connect on the IoT Boxes page." msgstr "" "Зайдіть в додаток IoT і натисніть на Підключити на сторінці IoT Boxes." -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:15 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:15 msgid "Follow the steps to connect your IoT Box." msgstr "Виконайте вказівки щодо підключення IoT Box." -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:21 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:21 msgid "Ethernet Connection" msgstr "Підключення Ethernet" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:23 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:23 msgid "" "Connect to the IoT Box all the devices that have to be connected with cables" " (ethernet, usb devices, etc.)." @@ -54,27 +59,27 @@ msgstr "" "Підключіть до IoT Box усі пристрої, які повинні бути з'єднані кабелями " "(Ethernet, USB-пристрої тощо)." -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:26 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:26 msgid "Power on the IoT Box." msgstr "Увімкніть IoT Box." -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:28 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:28 msgid "Then click on the Scan button." msgstr "Потім натисніть на кнопку Сканувати." -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:34 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:34 msgid "WiFi Connection" msgstr "З'єднання з WiFi" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:36 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:36 msgid "Power on the IoT Box" msgstr "Увімкніть IoT Box." -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:38 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:38 msgid "Copy the token" msgstr "Скопіюйте токен" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:43 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:43 msgid "" "Connect to the IoT Box WiFi Network (make sure there is no ethernet cable " "plugged in your computer)." @@ -82,7 +87,7 @@ msgstr "" "Підключіть WiFi до IoT Box (переконайтеся, що в комп'ютері не підключено " "кабель Ethernet)." -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:49 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:49 msgid "" "You will be redirected to the IoT Box Homepage (if it doesn't work, connect " "to the IP address of the box). Give a name to your IoT Box (not required) " @@ -92,7 +97,7 @@ msgstr "" "підключіться до IP-адреси коробки). Дайте назву вашому IoT Box (не " "обов'язково) і вставте токен, а потім натисніть кнопку Далі." -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:57 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:57 msgid "" "If you are on Runbot, do not forget to add the -all or -base in the token " "(e.g. this token **http://375228-saas-11-5-iot-" @@ -104,7 +109,7 @@ msgstr "" "f3f920.runbot16.odoo.com\\|4957098401** повинен стати " "**http://375228-saas-11-5-iot-f3f920-all.runbot16.odoo.com\\|4957098401**)." -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:63 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:63 msgid "" "Choose the WiFi network you want to connect with (enter the password if " "there is one) and click on Submit. Wait a few seconds before being " @@ -114,39 +119,137 @@ msgstr "" "є) і натисніть кнопку Надіслати. Зачекайте кілька секунд, перш ніж " "перенаправитися у базу даних." -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:70 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:70 msgid "You should now see the IoT Box." msgstr "Тепер ви можете бачити IoT Box." -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:76 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:76 msgid "IoT Box Schema" msgstr "Схема IoT Box" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:3 +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:3 +msgid "Flashing your SD Card" +msgstr "Записування вашої SD картки" + +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In some case, you may need to reflash your IoT Box’s SD Card to benefit from" +" our latest updates." +msgstr "" +"У деяких випадках вам може знадобитися перепрошивка вашої SD картки IoT Box," +" щоби скористатися нашими останніми оновленнями." + +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:9 +msgid "Updating your SD Card with Etcher" +msgstr "Оновлення вашої SD картки через Etcher" + +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:11 +msgid "" +"Go to Balena’s website and download `Etcher `__, " +"It’s a free and open-source utility used for burning image files. Install " +"and launch it." +msgstr "" +"Перейдіть на веб-сайт Balena та завантажте `Etcher " +"`__, Це безкоштовно, а утиліти з відкритим кодом " +"використовуються для для запису фалів зображень. Встановіть та запустіть це." + +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Now, download the latest image `here " +"`__, and extract it from the " +"zip file. Then, open *Etcher* and select the image. Select the drive to " +"flash (where your SD Card is) and click on *Flash*!." +msgstr "" +"Тепер завантажте останні зображення `тут " +"`__, та витягніть його із " +"zip-файлу. Потім відкрийте *Etcher* і виберіть зображення. Виберіть " +"накопичувач для запису (де знаходиться ваша SD-карта) та натисніть " +"*Записати* !." + +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:19 +msgid "" +"Now, your image will be automatically updated. You just have to wait 5 " +"minutes for it to finish." +msgstr "" +"Тепер ваше зображення автоматично оновиться. Вам лише потрібно зачекати 5 " +"хвилин для завершення." + +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:3 +msgid "IoT Box not found" +msgstr "IoT Box не знайдено" + +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When using your IoT Box, a common issue you might encounter is that your box" +" is not found on your database. Fortunately, there are a few easy steps you " +"can follow to find your IoT box." +msgstr "" +"Під час використання вашого IoT Box, поширеною проблемою, з якою ви можете " +"зіткнутися, є те, що ваш box не буде знайдено у вашій базі даних. На щастя, " +"є кілька простих кроків, які ви можете виконати, щоб знайти свій IoT box." + +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:10 +msgid "HTTPS Issues" +msgstr "Проблеми HTTPS" + +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:12 +msgid "Your IoT Box is not found? You probably have https issues!" +msgstr "Не знайдено ваш IoT Box? У вас імовірно проблеми https!" + +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:14 +msgid "" +"To check it, go to your database and verify if your database address starts " +"with an https (like https://www.odoo.com). If this is the case, then you may" +" have problems with your IoT Box image. It should be version 18.12 or later." +msgstr "" +"Щоби перевірити це, перейдіть у вашу базу даних та перевірте чи адреса вашої" +" бази даних починається з https (like https://www.odoo.com). Якщо це саме " +"той випадок, тоді у вас проблеми із зображенням вашого IoT Box image. " +"Потрібна версія 18.12 або новіша." + +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:19 +msgid "" +"If your IoT Box image is from an earlier version, then you will have to " +"reflash the SD card of your IoT Box to update the image (the latest image " +"can be found `here `__)." +msgstr "" +"Якщо ваше зображення IoT Box старішої версії, тоді вам необхідно " +"перезаписати SD картку вашого IoT Box, щоби оновити зображення (найновіше " +"зображення можна знайти `тут `__)." + +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:23 +msgid "" +"You can find the documentation about SD card flashing here (`here " +"`__)." +msgstr "" +"Ви можете знайти документацію про перепрошивку SD картки (`тут " +"`__)." + +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:3 msgid "Use the IoT Box for the PoS" msgstr "Застосування IoT Box для точки продажу" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:9 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:9 msgid "Prerequisites" msgstr "Передумови" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:11 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:11 msgid "Before starting, make sure you have the following:" msgstr "Перш ніж почати, переконайтеся, що у вас є:" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:13 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:13 msgid "An IoT Box" msgstr "IoT Box" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:15 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:15 msgid "A 2A Power adapter with pi 3 b+ 2.5 A" msgstr "Адаптер 2A Power з pi 3 b+ 2.5 A" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:17 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:17 msgid "A computer or tablet with an up-to-date web browser" msgstr "Комп'ютер або планшет із сучасним веб-браузером" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:19 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:19 msgid "" "A running SaaS or Odoo instance with the Point of Sale and IoT apps " "installed" @@ -154,13 +257,13 @@ msgstr "" "Запущена версія SaaS або Odoo зі встановленими програмами Точки продажу та " "IoT" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:22 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:22 msgid "A local network setup with DHCP (this is the default setting)" msgstr "" "Налаштування локальної мережі за допомогою DHCP (це налаштування за " "замовчуванням)" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:24 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:24 msgid "" "An Epson USB TM-T20 Printer or another ESC/POS compatible printer " "(officially supported printers are listed at the `POS Hardware page " @@ -170,23 +273,23 @@ msgstr "" "список підтримуваних принтерів на `Сторінці пристроїв POS " "`__)" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:28 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:28 msgid "A Honeywell Eclipse USB Barcode Scanner or another compatible scanner" msgstr "Сканер штрих-коду Honeywell Eclipse USB або інший сумісний сканер" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:30 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:30 msgid "An Epson compatible cash drawer" msgstr "Epson-сумісний ящик для готівки" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:32 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:32 msgid "An RJ45 Ethernet Cable (optional, WiFi is built in)" msgstr "Кабель RJ45 Ethernet (необов'язково, вбудований WiFi)" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:35 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:35 msgid "Set Up" msgstr "Встановіть" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:37 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:37 msgid "" "To connect hardware to the PoS, the first step is to connect an IoT Box to " "your database. For this, follow this `documentation " @@ -196,34 +299,34 @@ msgstr "" "бази даних. Для цього перегляньте `документацію " "`__." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:44 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:44 msgid "Then, you have to connect the peripheral devices to your IoT Box." msgstr "Потім, ви повинні підключити периферійні пристрої до вашого IoT Box." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:46 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:46 msgid "" "Officially supported hardware is listed on `the POS Hardware page " "`__, but other hardware" " might work as well." msgstr "" -"Офіційний список підтримуваних пристроїв на`Сторінці пристроїв POS " -"`__, але й інші " +"Офіційний список підтримуваних пристроїв на`Сторінці пристроїв точки продажу" +" `__, але й інші " "пристрої повинні працювати." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:50 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:50 msgid "**Printer**: Connect an ESC/POS printer to a USB port and power it on." msgstr "" "**Принтер**: підключіть ESC/POS-принтер до USB-порту та увімкніть його." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:53 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:53 msgid "" "**Cash drawer**: The cash drawer should be connected to the printer with an " "RJ25 cable." msgstr "" -"**Ящик для готівки**: грошовий ящик повинен бути підключений до принтера за " +"**Касова скринька**: касова скринька повинна бути підключена до принтера за " "допомогою кабелю RJ25." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:56 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:56 msgid "" "**Barcode scanner**: Connect your barcode scanner. In order for your barcode" " scanner to be compatible it must behave as a keyboard and must be " @@ -237,11 +340,11 @@ msgstr "" "коди з символом Enter (кодовий ключ 28). Це, швидше за все, є стандартною " "конфігурацією вашого сканера штрих-коду." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:62 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:62 msgid "**Scale**: Connect your scale and power it on." msgstr "**Ваги**: підключіть ваги і включіть їх." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:64 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:64 msgid "" "**Ethernet**: If you do not wish to use Wi-Fi, plug in the Ethernet cable. " "Make sure this will connect the IoT Box to the same network as your POS " @@ -249,9 +352,9 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "**Ethernet**: Якщо ви не бажаєте використовувати Wi-Fi, підключіть кабель " "Ethernet. Переконайтеся, що він буде з'єднувати IoT Box до тієї ж мережі, що" -" і ваш POS-пристрій." +" і ваш пристрій точки продажу." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:68 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:68 msgid "" "**Wi-Fi**: The current version of the IoT Box has Wi-Fi built in. Make sure " "not to plug in an Ethernet cable when booting, because all Wi-Fi " @@ -263,7 +366,7 @@ msgstr "" "Wi-Fi будуть його обходити під час завантаження, коли доступне дротове " "мережеве з'єднання." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:73 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:73 msgid "" "Once it's done, you can connect the IoT Box to your PoS. For this, go in " "Point of Sale > Configuration > PoS, tick the box \"IoT Box\" and select the" @@ -274,19 +377,19 @@ msgstr "" " \"IoT Box\" і виберіть IoT Box, із яким ви хочете з'єднатися. Збережіть " "зміни." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:77 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:77 msgid "Set up is done, you can launch a new PoS Session." msgstr "Налаштування завершено, ви можете запустити нову сесію Точки продажу." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:80 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:80 msgid "Troubleshoot" msgstr "Усунення несправностей" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:83 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:83 msgid "The PoS cannot connect to the IoT Box" msgstr "Точка продажу не під'єднується до IoT Box" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:85 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:85 msgid "" "The easiest way to make sure the IoT Box is properly set-up is to turn it on" " with the printer plugged in as it will print a receipt indicating any error" @@ -295,10 +398,10 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Найпростіший спосіб переконатися, що IoT Box правильно налаштовано, це " "ввімкнути його, коли підключений принтер, оскільки він надрукує квитанцію, " -"що вказує на будь-яку помилку або IP-адресу IoT Box у разі успіху. Якщо " -"квитанції не роздруковані, виконайте такі дії:" +"що вказує на будь-яку помилку або IP-адресу IoT Box у разі успіху. Якщо чеки" +" не роздруковані, виконайте такі дії:" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:91 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:91 msgid "" "Make sure the IoT Box is powered on, indicated by a brightly lit red status " "LED." @@ -306,7 +409,7 @@ msgstr "" "Переконайтеся, що IoT Box увімкнено, що позначається яскраво-червоним " "індикатором стану." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:94 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:94 msgid "" "Make sure the IoT Box is ready, this is indicated by a brightly lit green " "status LED just next to the red power status LED. The IoT Box should be " @@ -316,17 +419,17 @@ msgstr "" "зеленим індикатором стану поруч із червоним індикатором стану живлення. IoT " "Box повинен бути готовим ~2 хвилини після запуску." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:98 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:98 msgid "" "Make sure the IoT Box is connected to the same network as your POS device. " "Both the device and the IoT Box should be visible in the list of connected " "devices on your network router." msgstr "" -"Переконайтеся, що IoT Box підключений до тієї ж мережі, що і ваш POS-" -"пристрій. І пристрій, і IoT Box повинні бути видимі у списку підключених " -"пристроїв на вашому мережевому роутері." +"Переконайтеся, що IoT Box підключений до тієї ж мережі, що і ваш пристрій " +"точки продажу. І пристрій, і IoT Box повинні бути видимі у списку " +"підключених пристроїв на вашому мережевому роутері." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:102 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:102 msgid "" "If you specified the IoT Box's IP address in the configuration, make sure it" " corresponds to the ip address printed on the IoT Box's status receipt." @@ -334,11 +437,11 @@ msgstr "" "Якщо ви вказали IP-адресу IoT Box у налаштуваннях, переконайтеся, що вона " "відповідає ip-адресі, надрукованій на квитанції про статус IoT Box." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:106 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:106 msgid "Make sure that the POS is not loaded over HTTPS." -msgstr "Переконайтеся, що POS не завантажено через HTTPS." +msgstr "Переконайтеся, що точку продажу не завантажено через HTTPS." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:108 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:108 msgid "" "A bug in Firefox's HTTP implementation might prevent the autodiscovery from " "working reliably. You could also manually set up the IoT Box's IP address in" @@ -348,11 +451,11 @@ msgstr "" "автовідкриття. Ви також можете вручну налаштувати IP-адресу IoT Box у " "налаштуваннях точки продажу." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:113 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:113 msgid "The Barcode Scanner is not working" msgstr "Сканер штрих-коду не працює" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:115 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:115 msgid "" "The barcode scanner must be configured in US QWERTY and emit an Enter after " "each barcode. This is the default configuration of most barcode readers. " @@ -363,7 +466,7 @@ msgstr "" "штрих-кодів. Для отримання додаткової інформації зверніться до документації " "для сканування штрих-кодів." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:120 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:120 msgid "" "The IoT Box needs a 2A power supply to work with some barcode scanners. If " "you are not using the provided power supply, make sure the one you use has " @@ -373,7 +476,7 @@ msgstr "" "2A. Якщо ви не використовуєте наданий блок живлення, переконайтеся, що він " "має достатню потужність." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:124 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:124 msgid "" "Some barcode scanners will need more than 2A and will not work, or will work" " unreliably, even with the provided power supply. In those case you can plug" @@ -384,7 +487,7 @@ msgstr "" "У такому випадку ви можете підключити сканер штрих-коду до автономного USB-" "концентратора." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:129 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:129 msgid "" "Some poorly built barcode scanners do not advertise themselves as barcode " "scanners but as a usb keyboard instead, and will not be recognized by the " @@ -393,11 +496,11 @@ msgstr "" "Деякі погано зібрані сканери штрих-коду не рекламують себе як сканери штрих-" "коду, а як USB-клавіатуру, і не розпізнаються IoT Box." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:134 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:134 msgid "The Barcode Scanner is not working reliably" msgstr "Сканер штрих-коду не працює надійно" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:136 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:136 msgid "" "Make sure that no more than one device with 'Scan via Proxy'/'Barcode " "Scanner' enabled are connected to the IoT Box at the same time." @@ -405,11 +508,11 @@ msgstr "" "Переконайтеся, що до IoT Box одночасно підключено не більше одного пристрою " "з функцією \"Сканування через проксі\"/\"Сканер штрих-коду\"." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:140 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:140 msgid "Printing the receipt takes too much time" -msgstr "Друк квитанції займає надто багато часу" +msgstr "Друк чеку займає надто багато часу" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:142 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:142 msgid "" "A small delay before the first print is expected, as the IoT Box will do " "some preprocessing to speed up the next printings. If you suffer delays " @@ -421,11 +524,11 @@ msgstr "" "виникають затримки, це, швидше за все, пов'язано з поганим мережевим " "зв'язком між точкою продажу та IoT Box." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:148 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:148 msgid "Some characters are not correctly printed on the receipt" -msgstr "Деякі символи не надруковані на квитанції" +msgstr "Деякі символи не надруковані на чеку" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:150 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:150 msgid "" "The IoT Box does not support all languages and characters. It currently " "supports Latin and Cyrillic based scripts, with basic Japanese support." @@ -433,11 +536,11 @@ msgstr "" "IoT Box не підтримує всі мови та символи. В даний час він підтримує " "латинські та кириличні шрифти, з базовою підтримкою для Японії." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:155 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:155 msgid "The printer is offline" msgstr "Принтер офлайн" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:157 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:157 msgid "" "Make sure the printer is connected, powered, has enough paper and has its " "lid closed, and is not reporting an error. If the error persists, please " @@ -447,14 +550,385 @@ msgstr "" "паперу, кришка закрита та не повідомляється про помилку. Якщо помилка не " "зникає, зверніться до служби підтримки." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:162 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:162 msgid "The cashdrawer does not open" msgstr "Готівковий рахунок не відкривається" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:164 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:164 msgid "" "The cashdrawer should be connected to the printer and should be activated in" " the POS configuration." msgstr "" "Каса повинна бути підключена до принтера і повинна активуватися в " "налаштуваннях точки продажу." + +#: ../../iot/devices.rst:3 +msgid "Devices" +msgstr "Пристрої" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Camera" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When using your *IoT Box* in Odoo, you could need to use a camera. As it can" +" be done in a few steps, this device is really easy to configure. Then, you " +"can use it in your manufacturing process and link it to a control point. " +"Doing so will allow you to take pictures when you reach the chosen quality " +"control point." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:12 ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:13 +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:11 +msgid "Connection" +msgstr "Підключення" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:14 +msgid "" +"To connect the camera to the *IoT Box*, simply combine the two by cable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:18 +msgid "In some cases, a serial to USB adapter could be needed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:20 +msgid "" +"If your camera is a `*supported one* `__, there is no need to set up anything as it will be detected as " +"soon as it is connected." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:27 +msgid "" +"In some cases, you could need to restart the box and download your camera’s " +"drivers from the box. To do so, go to your *IoT Box Home Page* and click on " +"*drivers list*. Then, click on load drivers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:35 +msgid "Link a Camera to a Quality Control Point" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:38 ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:42 +msgid "With the Manufacturing app" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:40 +msgid "" +"In your *Quality app*, you can setup the device on a *Quality Control " +"Point*. Go to the *Control Points* menu, under *Quality Control* and open " +"the control point you want to link with the camera." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:44 +msgid "" +"Now, you can edit the control point and select the device from the dropdown " +"list. Now, hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:50 +msgid "" +"Then, your camera can be used with the picked *Control Point*. During the " +"manufacturing process, reaching the *Quality Control Point* you chose before" +" will allow you to take a picture." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Footswitch" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When working, it is always better to have your two hands available. Using " +"Odoo’s *IoT Box* and a footswitch will allow it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:8 +msgid "" +"In fact, you will be able to go from one screen to another by using your " +"foot and the footswitch. Really convenient, it can be configured in a few " +"steps." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Connecting the footswitch to the *IoT Box* is easy, you just have to combine" +" the two by cable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:19 +msgid "In some cases, a serial to USB adapter may be needed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:21 +msgid "" +"If your footswitch is a `supported one `__, there is no need to set up anything since it will be " +"automatically detected when connected." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:28 +msgid "" +"If it is not a supported one, you may need to restart the box and download " +"your footswitch’s drivers from the box. To do so, go to the *IoT Box Home " +"Page* and click on *drivers list*. Then, click on load drivers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:37 +msgid "Link a Footswitch to a Workcenter" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:39 +msgid "" +"To link the footswitch to an action, it needs to be configured on a " +"workcenter. Go to the workcenter you want to use the footswitch in and add " +"the device in the *IoT Triggers* tab. Then, you can link it to an action and" +" also add a key to trigger it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:47 +msgid "" +"Note that the one that is first in the list will be chosen. So, the order " +"matters! In the picture above, using the footswitch will, for example, " +"automatically skip the current part of the process you work on." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:52 +msgid "" +"When you are on the work order screen, a status button indicates if you are " +"correctly connected to the footswitch." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Measurement Tool" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:5 +msgid "" +"With Odoo’s *IoT Box*, it is possible to connect measurement tools to your " +"database. Find the list of supported devices here: `Supported devices " +"`__,." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:10 +msgid "Connect in USB" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:12 +msgid "" +"To add a device connected by USB, just plug the USB cable in the *IoT Box*, " +"restart the Box and the device should appear in your Odoo database." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:19 +msgid "" +"If the device is not found, make sure the drivers have well been loaded on " +"your IoT Box. For this, connect to the *IoT Box Homepage* and click on load " +"drivers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:27 +msgid "Connect in Bluetooth" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:29 +msgid "" +"Activate the Bluetooth on your device (see your device manual for further " +"explanation) and the IoT Box will automatically try to connect to the " +"device." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:33 +msgid "Here is an example of what it should look like:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:39 +msgid "Link a measurement tool to a quality control point" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:44 +msgid "" +"In your *Quality app*, you can setup a device on your *Quality Control " +"Points*. To do so, go to the *Control Points* menu, under *Quality Control* " +"and open the control point to which you want to assign a measurement tool." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:49 +msgid "" +"Now, you can edit the control point and choose the device from the dropdown " +"list. Then, hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:55 +msgid "" +"Now, your measurement tool is linked to the chosen *Control Point*. The " +"value, which needs to be changed manually, will be automatically updated " +"while the tool is being used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Printer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When using your *IoT Box* in Odoo, you could need to use a printer. Doing so" +" is easy and convenient as it can be done in a few steps. Then, you can use " +"it to print receipts, orders or even reports in different Odoo apps." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:13 +msgid "" +"To connect the printer to the *IoT Box*, you just have to combine the two by" +" cable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:17 +msgid "Sometimes, a serial to USB adapter may be needed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:19 +msgid "" +"If your printer is a `supported one `__, there is no need to set up anything because it will be " +"automatically detected as soon as it is connected." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:24 +msgid "The printer can take up to two minutes to appear in your devices list." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:29 +msgid "" +"In some cases, you may need to restart the box and download your printer’s " +"drivers from the box. To do so, go to the *IoT Box Home Page* and click on " +"*drivers list*. Then, click on load drivers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:37 +msgid "Link the Printer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:40 +msgid "To Work Orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:42 +msgid "" +"You can link *Work Orders* to printers via a *Quality Control Point* to " +"print labels for manufactured products." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:45 +msgid "" +"To do so, you need to create a *Quality Control Point* from the *Quality* " +"app. Then, you can select the correct manufacturing operation and the work " +"order operation. In type, choose *Print Label* and hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Now, each time you reach the quality control point for the chosen product, a" +" *Print Label* button will appear." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:60 +msgid "To Reports" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:62 +msgid "" +"You can also link a type of report to a certain printer. In the *IoT* app, " +"go to the *Devices* menu and select the printer you want to set up." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:69 +msgid "Now, go to the *Printer Reports* tab." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:74 +msgid "" +"Hit edit and then, click on *Add a line*. In the window that shows up, check" +" all the types of reports that should be linked to this printer. Click on " +"select and save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:81 +msgid "" +"Now, each time you click on *Print* in the control panel, instead of " +"downloading a PDF, it will send it to the selected printer and automatically" +" print it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:86 +msgid "Print Receipts from the PoS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:88 +msgid "" +"You can link a printer to your *Point of Sale* app so you can print receipts" +" directly from your *PoS*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:91 +msgid "" +"Doing so is really easy. Go to your *Point of Sale* app and open your *PoS* " +"settings, under *Configuration*. There, click on *Edit* and check the *IoT " +"Box* feature. Then, enable the *Receipt Printer*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:98 +msgid "" +"Now, on your *PoS* view, you will be able to print different kinds of " +"tickets: **receipts**, **sale details** and **bills**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:101 +msgid "" +"For the receipt, it will be printed once the order is validated. The process" +" is automated when you enable the feature in your *PoS*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:104 +msgid "" +"Sales details can be printed by clicking on the printer icon on the navbar " +"at the top of the *PoS*. It will print the details of the sales of the " +"current day." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:111 +msgid "" +"As for the bill, it is only available in restaurant mode. In your restaurant" +" settings, activate bills and a *Bill* button will appear in the left panel." +" Click on it and it will print the bill." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:119 +msgid "Print Orders in the kitchen" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:121 +msgid "In restaurant mode, you can send order tickets to the kitchen." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:123 +msgid "" +"To do so, go to the *PoS* app and open your *PoS* settings. Then, tick " +"*Order Printer*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:129 +msgid "" +"Now, go to the *Printers* menu. Hit create and select the *IoT Box* with all" +" the categories of product that should be printed in the *Printer Product " +"Categories* field." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:136 +msgid "" +"In the *PoS*, when you add or remove a product from one of the selected " +"categories, the button *Order* will be green. If you click on it, a ticket " +"will be printed." +msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po index 1a80419f0..f8ac3a1a9 100644 --- a/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po +++ b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po @@ -4,16 +4,16 @@ # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # # Translators: -# Martin Trigaux, 2018 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 # Alina Lisnenko , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 11.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-10-19 10:03+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2018-10-19 08:15+0000\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Alina Lisnenko , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Ukrainian (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/uk/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" @@ -30,237 +30,520 @@ msgstr "Виробництво" msgid "Manufacturing Management" msgstr "Управління виробництвом" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:3 +msgid "Using an alternative Work Center" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:5 +msgid "" +"For many manufacturing companies, a common issue is to have to manufacture, " +"at the same time, several products usually produced at the same work center." +" If in practice, employees can manufacture the goods at another work center," +" it is not that simple." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:10 +msgid "" +"You need to keep track of the job: which work center has been used and when," +" so you can schedule maintenance efficiently. With Odoo, you can configure " +"it so you can keep tracking manufacturing orders and your employees have an " +"alternative work center to use." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:15 +msgid "" +"This way, your process becomes more efficient, and less non-productive time " +"will be noticed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:20 +msgid "Configure your Work Centers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:22 +msgid "" +"The first thing to do is to go to the *Manufacturing* app settings. Then, " +"enable the *Work Orders* feature and hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:30 +msgid "" +"Now, go to the *Work Centers* menu under *Master Data* and create two new " +"work centers. Add the second work centers as an alternative to the first and" +" vice versa." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:39 +msgid "" +"The next step is to create your *routing*. Add your work center and an " +"operation to it before saving." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:47 +msgid "" +"Then, you can create your *Bill of Materials* and add components and routing" +" to it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:56 +msgid "Create your Work Orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:58 +msgid "" +"Now that everything is configured, you can create your *Work Orders*. Go to " +"the *Manufacturing Orders* menu and hit *Create*. There, add your product " +"and plan it. In the *Work Orders* list, you can find it ready to be " +"assembled." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:68 +msgid "" +"Each new *Work Order*, which will be created before the end of the first " +"one, will be scheduled at the alternative work center you configured." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:78 +msgid "" +"Keep in mind that, if you add time after production to your work center, you" +" may have work orders scheduled for your alternative work center even if the" +" usual one is free." +msgstr "" + #: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:3 -msgid "How to create a Bill of Materials" -msgstr "Як створити специфікацію" +msgid "Create Bills of Materials" +msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:5 msgid "" -"A bill of materials (BoM) is a document that describes the component " -"products, the quantity of each component, and the process required to " -"manufacture a product, including a routing and individual steps." +"A *Bill of Materials* is a document defining the quantity of each component " +"required to manufacture a finished product. It also includes the routing and" +" individual steps of the manufacturing process." msgstr "" -"Специфікація (BoM) - це документ, який описує компоненти товару, кількість " -"кожного компонента та процес, необхідний для виготовлення товару, включаючи " -"маршрутизацію та окремі етапи." #: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:9 msgid "" -"In Odoo, each product may have multiple BoMs associated with it, but a BoM " -"can only be associated with a single product. A single BoM can, however, " -"describe multiple variants of the same product." +"With Odoo, you can link multiple BoMs to each product and use it to describe" +" multiple variants of them. Each BoM will, yet, be associated with one " +"product only." msgstr "" -"В Odoo кожен продукт може мати кілька специфікацій, пов'язаних з ним, але " -"специфікацію можна пов'язати лише з одним продуктом. Одна специфікація може " -"описати кілька варіантів того самого продукту." -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:14 -msgid "Setting up a Basic BoM" -msgstr "Налаштування базової специфікації" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:16 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:13 msgid "" -"If you choose to manage your manufacturing operations using manufacturing " -"orders only, you will define basic bills of materials without routings." +"This feature will help optimize your manufacturing process while saving you " +"time." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:17 +msgid "Setting up a BoM" msgstr "" -"Якщо ви вирішите керувати своїми виробничими операціями лише за допомогою " -"замовлень на виробництво, ви визначите основні специфікації без маршрутів." #: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:19 msgid "" -"Before creating your first bill of materials, you will need to create a " -"product and at least one component (components are considered products in " -"Odoo). You can do so from :menuselection:`Master Data --> Products`, or on " -"the fly from the relevant fields on the BoM form. Review the Inventory " -"chapter for more information about configuring products. Once you have " -"created a product and at least one component, select them from the relevant " -"dropdown menus to add them to your bill of materials. A new bill of " -"materials can be created from :menuselection:`Master Data --> Bills of " -"Materials`, or using the button on the top of the product form." +"You can use BoMs without routings. You will use this if you choose to manage" +" your manufacturing operations using manufacturing orders only. In other " +"words, you choose to realize your manufacturing process in one step and do " +"not track the steps the product goes through." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:24 +msgid "" +"Before creating your *BoM*, you have to create the product using the *BoM* " +"and, at least, one of the components. Go to the *Master Data* menu > " +"*Products* and create both the finished product and the component." msgstr "" -"Перед створенням першої специфікації вам доведеться створити продукт і, " -"принаймні, один компонент (компоненти вважаються продуктами в Odoo). Ви " -"можете зробити це за допомогою :menuselection:`Основні дані --> Товари`, або" -" на льоту з відповідних полів у формі BoM. Перегляньте документацію розділу " -"Склад, щоби дізнатися більше про налаштування товарів. Створивши продукт та," -" принаймні, один компонент, виберіть їх у відповідних спадних меню, щоби " -"додати їх до вашої специфікації. Нова специфікація може бути створена за " -"допомогою :menuselection:`Основні дані --> Специфікація`, або за допомогою " -"кнопки у верхній частині форми продукту." #: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:29 msgid "" -"Under the **Miscellaneous** tab, you can fill additional fields. " -"**Sequence** defines the order in which your BoMs will be selected for " -"production orders, with lower numbers having higher priority. **Version** " -"allows you to track changes to your BoM over time." +"Once done, go to the *Bills of Materials* menu under *Master Data*. Now, " +"create it. Choose the product from the dropdown menu and add your components" +" and the quantity. In this case, keep the default *BoM* type, which is " +"*Manufacture this Product*." msgstr "" -"Під вкладкою **Різне** ви можете заповнити додаткові поля. **Послідовність**" -" визначає порядок, в якому ваші BoM будуть обрані для виробничих замовлень, " -"причому нижчі номери мають більш високий пріоритет. **Версія** дозволяє вам " -"відстежувати зміни у вашій специфікації з плином часу." -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:35 -msgid "Adding a Routing to a BoM" -msgstr "Додавання маршрутизації до BoM" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:38 +msgid "Using the same BoM to describe Variants" +msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:37 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:40 msgid "" -"A routing defines a series of operations required to manufacture a product " -"and the work center at which each operation is performed. A routing may be " -"added to multiple BoMs, though a BoM may only have one routing. For more " -"information about configuring routings, review the chapter on routings." +"As said above, you can use *BoM* for *Product Variants*. It is basically the" +" same as for the standard product." msgstr "" -"Маршрут визначає серію операцій, необхідних для виготовлення продукту та " -"робочого центру, на якому виконується кожна операція. Маршрутизація може " -"бути додана до декількох специфікацій, хоча BoM може мати тільки одну " -"маршрутизацію. Щоб отримати додаткові відомості про налаштування маршрутів, " -"перегляньте розділ про маршрути." #: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:43 msgid "" -"After enabling routings from :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`, " -"you will be able to add a routing to a bill of materials by selecting a " -"routing from the dropdown list or creating one on the fly." +"If your *BoM* is for one variant only, then specify which one in the " +"*Product Variant* field. If not, specify the variant it is consumed for on " +"each component line. You can add several variants for each component." msgstr "" -"Після ввімкнення маршрутів з :menuselection:`Налаштування --> Налаштування`," -" ви зможете додавати маршрутизацію до специфікації, вибравши маршрут з " -"випадаючого списку або створивши його на льоту." -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:47 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:52 +msgid "Adding a routing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:54 msgid "" -"You may define the work operation or step in which each component is " -"consumed using the field, **Consumed in Operation** under the **Components**" -" tab. Similarly, you can define the operation at which the product will be " -"produced under the **Miscellaneous** tab using the field **Produced at " -"Operation**. If this field is left blank, the products will be " -"consumed/produced at the final operation in the routing." +"You can add routing to your *BoM*. You will do this if you need to define a " +"series of operations required by your manufacturing process. To use it, " +"enable the *Work Orders* feature in the *Manufacturing* app settings." msgstr "" -"Ви можете визначити робочу операцію або крок, при якому кожен компонент " -"споживається, використовуючи поле, **Споживане в операції** на вкладці " -"**Компоненти**. Аналогічним чином, ви можете визначити операцію, при якій " -"продукт буде виготовлений під вкладкою **Різне**, за допомогою поля " -"**Створено під час операції**. Якщо це поле залишилося порожнім, продукти " -"будуть споживатися/виготовлятися під час остаточної операції в " -"маршрутизації." - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:58 -msgid "Adding Byproducts to a BoM" -msgstr "Додавання побічних товарів до специфікації" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:60 -msgid "" -"In Odoo, a byproduct is any product produced by a BoM in addition to the " -"primary product." -msgstr "" -"В Odoo побічним продуктом є будь-який товар, вироблений BoM, на додаток до " -"основного продукту." #: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:63 msgid "" -"To add byproducts to a BoM, you will first need to enable them from " -":menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`." +"Each *BoM* can have only one routing while each routing can be used multiple" +" times." msgstr "" -"Щоб додати побічні продукти до BoM, вам спочатку потрібно буде ввімкнути їх " -"у :menuselection:`Налаштування --> Налаштування`." -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:69 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:66 msgid "" -"Once byproducts are enabled, you can add them to your bills of materials " -"under the **Byproducts** tab of the bill of materials. You can add any " -"product or products as byproducts. Byproducts are produced in the same step " -"of the routing as the primary product of the BoM." +"Now that you have created your routing, add it to your *BoM*. You can select" +" when, in the work operations, your components are consumed with the " +"dropdown menu." msgstr "" -"Після включення побічних продуктів ви можете додати їх до своєї " -"спеціалізації під вкладкою **Побічні продукти** специфікації. Ви можете " -"додати будь-який продукт або продукти як побічні продукти. Похідні продукти " -"виробляються на одному етапі маршрутизації як основний продукт BoM." -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:78 -msgid "Setting up a BoM for a Product With Sub-Assemblies" -msgstr "Налаштування BoM для продукту з напівфабрикату" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:74 +msgid "Adding By-Products" +msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:80 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:5 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:76 msgid "" -"A subassembly is a manufactured product which is intended to be used as a " -"component of another manufactured product. You may wish to employ sub-" -"assemblies to simplify a complex BoM, to more accurately represent your " -"manufacturing flow, or to use the same subassembly in multiple BoMs. A BoM " -"that employs subassemblies is often referred to as a multi-level BoM." +"In Odoo, a *by-product* is any product produced by a *BoM* in addition to " +"the primary product." msgstr "" -"Напівфабрикат - виготовлений продукт, який призначений для використання як " -"компонент іншого виготовленого продукту. Ви можете використати " -"напівфабрикати для спрощення складного BoM, щоби більш точно відобразити ваш" -" виробничий процес, або використовувати такий самий напівфабрикат у " -"декількох специфікаціях. BoM, який використовує підрозділи, часто називають " -"багаторівневою специфікацією." -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:87 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:12 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:79 msgid "" -"Multi-level bills of materials in Odoo are accomplished by creating a top-" -"level BoM and subassembly BoMs. Next, the procurement route of the " -"subassembly product is defined. This ensures that every time a manufacturing" -" order for the top-level product is created, a manufacturing order for each " -"subassembly is created as well." +"To add *by-products* to a *BoM*, you will first need to enable them from the" +" *Manufacturing* app settings." msgstr "" -"Багатоступеневі специфікації в Odoo виконуються шляхом створення " -"специфікації і напівфабрикатів вищого рівня. Далі визначається маршрут " -"закупівлі продукту напівфабрикату. Це гарантує, що кожного разу, коли " -"створюється замовлення на виробництво для продукту найвищого рівня, " -"створюється також замовлення на виробництво для кожного підрозділу." -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:94 -msgid "Configure the Top-Level Product BoM" -msgstr "Налаштування специфікації продукту найвищого рівня" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:96 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:21 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:85 msgid "" -"To configure a multi-level BoM, create the top-level product and its BoM. " -"Include any subassemblies in the list of components. Create a BoM for each " -"subassembly as you would for any product." +"Once the feature is enabled, you can add your *By-Products* to your *BoMs*. " +"You can add as many *By-Products* as you want. Just keep in mind that you " +"need to register during which operation your by-product is produced." msgstr "" -"Щоб налаштувати багаторівневу специфікацію, створіть продукт найвищого рівня" -" та його специфікацію. Включіть будь-які підрозділи в список компонентів. " -"Створіть BoM для кожного напівфабрикату, як і для будь-якого продукту." -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:104 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:29 -msgid "Configure the Subassembly Product Data" -msgstr "Налаштування даних напівфабрикату" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:3 +msgid "Use flexible components consumption" +msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:106 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:31 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:5 msgid "" -"On the product form of the subassembly, you must select the routes " -"**Manufacture** and **Make To Order**. The **Manufacture** route takes " -"precedence over the **Buy** route, so selecting the latter will have no " -"effect." +"Sometimes, you might need more components than usual to manufacture a " +"product. Let’s say that you produce a desk combination of 4 desks and two " +"chairs but your customer asks you one more desk. Alright, you can do that. " +"But you will need to register it!" msgstr "" -"На формі продукту напівфабрикату необхідно вибрати маршрути **Виробництво** " -"та **Виготовлення під замовлення**. Маршрут **Виробництво** має пріоритет " -"над маршрутом **Купити**, тому вибір останніх не матиме ефекту." -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:114 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:39 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:10 msgid "" -"If you would like to be able to purchase the subassembly in addition to " -"manufacturing it, select **Can be Purchased**. All other fields on the " -"subassembly product form may be configured according to your preference." +"In case this happens, Odoo has the *flexible components consumption* feature" +" available. If you enable it, you will be able to consume as many components" +" as needed and it will make you save time in the registration of your items " +"consumption." msgstr "" -"Якщо ви хочете, щоби цей напівфабрикат можна було придбати до його " -"виготовлення, виберіть **Можна придбати**. Всі інші поля у формі " -"напівфабрикату можуть бути налаштовані відповідно до ваших уподобань." -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:120 -msgid "Using a Single BoM to Describe Several Variants of a Single Product" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:16 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:31 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:66 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:9 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:9 +msgid "Configuration" +msgstr "Налаштування" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:18 +msgid "" +"Using flexible component consumption is easy and can be done in a few steps." +" All you need is a *BoM* and a *Quality Control Point*. Therefore, you will " +"need to activate the feature *Quality* in the *MRP* app settings." msgstr "" -"Використання окремої специфікації для опису декількох варіантів окремого " -"товару" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:122 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:23 +msgid "" +"First, open the *BoM* you want to use for flexible component consumption and" +" edit it. In the *Miscellaneous* tab, choose *Flexible* as the consumption " +"type. Then, save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:30 +msgid "" +"Now, in the *Quality* app, open the *Control Point* menu, under *Quality " +"Control* and create a new *Quality Control Point*. Choose your product, your" +" operation and work order operation. Then, choose *Register Consumed " +"Materials* as type." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:38 +msgid "" +"Next, go back to your *Manufacturing* app and create a *Manufacturing " +"order*. Choose the product for which you have created the flexible *BoM*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:42 +msgid "" +"Then, confirm it and launch the process step. While processing, you will " +"have the possibility to consume more components than expected in the *BoM*. " +"To do so, click on *Continue Consumption*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:49 +msgid "" +"When the job is over, you will find a summary of your component consumption " +"in the *Finished Steps* tab of your work order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:3 +msgid "Sell sets of products as kits" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:5 +msgid "" +"A *kit* is a set of components that are delivered without first being " +"assembled or mixed. *Kits* are described in Odoo using *Bills of Materials*." +" There are two basic ways to configure *kits*, depending on how the stock of" +" the kit product is to be managed. In either case, both the *Inventory* and " +"*Manufacturing* apps must be installed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:12 +msgid "Manage Stock of Component Products" +msgstr "Управління складом компонентів продуктів" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:14 +msgid "" +"If you want to assemble kits as they are ordered, managing stock of the kit " +"components only, you will use a *Kit BoM* without a manufacturing step." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:18 +msgid "" +"A product using a *Kit BoM* will appear as a single line item on a quotation" +" and sales order, but will generate a delivery order with one line item for " +"each of the components of the kit. In the examples below, the first image " +"shows a sales order for the kit *Custom Computer Kit*, while the second " +"image shows the corresponding delivery order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:33 +msgid "" +"From the *Products menu* in either the *Inventory* or *Manufacturing* app, " +"create each component product as you would with any other product, then " +"create the top-level, or kit product. The kit product should have only the " +"*route Manufacture* set, in the *Inventory tab*. Because you cannot track " +"the stock of kit products, the *Product Type* should be set to Consumable. " +"Because a kit product cannot be purchased, then, *Can be Purchased* should " +"be unchecked." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:41 +msgid "" +"All other parameters on the kit product may be modified according to your " +"preference. The component products require no particular configuration." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:48 +msgid "" +"Once the products are configured, create a *bill of materials* for the kit " +"product. Add each component and its quantity. Select the *BoM Type Ship this" +" product as a set of components*. All other options may be left with their " +"default values." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:57 +msgid "Manage Stock of Kit Product and Component Products" +msgstr "Управління складом комплектів товару та компонентів" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:59 +msgid "" +"If you want to manage stock of the *top-level kit product*, you will use a " +"standard *BoM* with a manufacturing step instead of a *Kit BoM*. When using " +"a standard BoM to assemble kits, a *manufacturing order* will be created. " +"The *manufacturing order* must be registered as completed before the kit " +"product will appear in your stock." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:68 +msgid "" +"On the kit product, select the *route Manufacture*. You may also select " +"*Make to Order*, which will create a *manufacturing order* whenever a sales " +"order is confirmed. Select the product type *Storable Product* to enable " +"stock management." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:76 +msgid "" +"When you create the *bill of materials*, select the BoM Type *Manufacture " +"this product*. The assembly of the kit will be described by a *manufacturing" +" order* rather than a packing operation." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:3 +msgid "Process Manufacturing Orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In Odoo, you can manage your manufacturing process in two different ways. " +"You can work with one document, or decide to have more information and " +"control over it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:9 +msgid "" +"In the first case, Odoo makes things easier and helps you manage work with " +"one document only: the manufacturing order. No complex steps during the " +"process, you just have to schedule the job and record the production." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:14 +msgid "" +"But, if you need more control, you can use additional documents (steps) to " +"your manufacturing process. This way, *Manufacturing Orders* are divided " +"into one or more steps defined by *Work Orders* and performed in a sequence " +"defined by *routings*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:19 +msgid "" +"Using Odoo will allow you to precisely schedule the job, analyze your " +"efficiency but also have ease when realizing each step of your manufacturing" +" process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:24 +msgid "Manage Manufacturing Without Routings" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:26 +msgid "" +"If your manufacturing process is limited to one place, one person and one " +"step, you will probably use manufacturing orders without routings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:29 +msgid "" +"In Odoo, it is the default behavior. If work this way, there are two basic " +"phases from planning to production:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:32 +msgid "Create a manufacturing order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:34 +msgid "Record the production" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:37 +msgid "Manage Manufacturing with Routings and Work Centers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:39 +msgid "" +"To use *Work Centers* and *Routings*, you will need to enable the *Work " +"Orders* feature. To do so, go to the *Manufacturing* app settings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:46 +msgid "" +"Now, you can add routings to *BoMs* and configure your operations taking " +"place at different *work centers*. The *Work Centers* are the locations at " +"which work orders are performed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:53 +msgid "" +"When manufacturing this way, each *Work Order* is scheduled individually. " +"You will also have access to time and capacity planning, as well as reports " +"on costing and efficiency for each *Work Center*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:60 +msgid "Thus, the workflow is divided into three basic phases:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:62 +msgid "Create the manufacturing order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:67 +msgid "Schedule the associated work orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:72 +msgid "Perform the scheduled work and record production" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:3 +msgid "Plan Work Orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In some cases, companies need to schedule their work orders. Doing so, they " +"can organize the work for the whole day and be sure everything goes well. It" +" helps to avoid scheduling multiple work orders at the same time when you " +"don’t have the capacity to do so." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:10 +msgid "" +"With Odoo, companies can schedule the planned start date for their " +"manufacturing orders. No possible duplication, no potential issues with the " +"planning. And, if you plan two work orders at the same work center, at the " +"same hour, the second one will be scheduled right after the first one, " +"avoiding work superposition." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:17 +msgid "Create the Work Orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:19 +msgid "" +"The first thing you need to do is to open the *Manufacturing* app. Then, Go " +"to the settings and enable the *Work Orders* feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:25 +msgid "" +"Now, go to the *Manufacturing Orders* menu and hit *Create*. Choose your " +"product and add a *Planned Start Date*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:32 +msgid "" +"The “Deadline Start” field is informative. It shows you until when you can " +"launch the manufacturing order to fulfill the initial demand." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:35 +msgid "" +"Mark your *Manufacturing Order* as todo and plan it. By going to the " +"*Planning* menu, you can access to the scheduled orders. Here is the one we " +"just created:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:43 +msgid "" +"If you plan two work orders at the same hour, the second one will be " +"scheduled after the first one if the jobs need to be done at the same work " +"center. The start date will, then, be automatically updated considering the " +"first free slot on the work center." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:48 +msgid "" +"If you overrun the planned date and begin the job later, you will have a " +"track of it in the *Time Tracking* tab of your work order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:3 +msgid "How to manage BoMs for product variants" +msgstr "Як керувати специфікацією для варіантів товару" + #: ../../manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:5 msgid "" "Odoo allows you to use one bill of materials for multiple variants of the " @@ -271,7 +554,6 @@ msgstr "" " ж продукту. Просто ввімкніть варіанти з :menuselection:`Налаштування --> " "Налаштування`." -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:129 #: ../../manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:12 msgid "" "You will then be able to specify which component lines are to be used in the" @@ -284,7 +566,6 @@ msgstr "" "вказати кілька варіантів для кожного рядка. Якщо не вказано жодного " "варіанта, рядок буде використовуватися для всіх варіантів." -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:134 #: ../../manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:17 msgid "" "When defining variant BoMs on a line-item-basis, the **Product Variant** " @@ -295,262 +576,331 @@ msgstr "" " продукту** у головному розділі специфікації слід залишити порожнім. Це поле" " використовується при створенні BoM для одного варіанту продукту." -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:3 -msgid "How to Sell a Set of Products as a Kit" -msgstr "Як продавати набір товарів у комплекті" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:5 -msgid "" -"A *kit* is a set of components that are delivered without first being " -"assembled or mixed. Kits are described in Odoo using *bills of materials*. " -"There are two basic ways to configure kits, depending on how stock of the " -"kit product is to be managed. In either case, both the Inventory and " -"Manufacturing apps must be installed." +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:3 +msgid "Set routings on kit Bills of materials" msgstr "" -"*Комплект* являє собою набір компонентів, які доставляються без " -"першочергового збирання або змішування. Комплекти описані в Odoo за " -"допомогою *специфікації*. Існує два основних способи налаштування " -"комплектів, залежно від того, як керувати комплектом продукту. У будь-якому " -"випадку, додатки Склад та Виробництво повинні бути встановлені." -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:12 -msgid "Manage Stock of Component Products" -msgstr "Управління складом компонентів продуктів" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:14 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:5 msgid "" -"If you would like to assemble kits as they are ordered, managing stock of " -"the kit *components* only, you will use a Kit BoM without a manufacturing " -"step." +"It often happens that you want to use kit BoM’s within manufactured product " +"BoM’s in order to lighten the list of components for this manufactured " +"product. When doing so, you would like to have the possibility to specify, " +"for each kit component, in which operation they are consumed." msgstr "" -"Якщо ви хочете збирати комплекти, як вони замовляються, керуючи лише складом" -" *компонентів*, ви будете використовувати специфікацію компонентів без " -"виробничого етапу." -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:18 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:11 msgid "" -"A product using a Kit BoM will appear as a single line item on a quotation " -"and sales order, but will generate a delivery order with one line item for " -"each of the components of the kit. In the examples below, the image at left " -"shows a sales order for the kit \"Custom Computer Kit\", while the image at " -"right shows the corresponding delivery order." +"We will see the three use cases that you can face in these kinds of " +"configurations." msgstr "" -"Продукт, який використовує специфікацію компонентів, відображатиметься як " -"окремий рядок у комерційні пропозиції та замовленні клієнта, але створить " -"замовлення на доставку з одним рядком для кожного з компонентів комплекту. У" -" наведених нижче прикладах зображення вище відображає замовлення на продаж " -"для комплекту «Комп'ютерний комплект клієнта», а зображення нижче показує " -"відповідне замовлення на доставку." -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:24 -msgid "|image0|\\ |image1|" -msgstr "|image0|\\ |image1|" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:15 +msgid "Finished Product & Kit Component have the same Routing" +msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:27 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:62 -msgid "Configuration" -msgstr "Налаштування" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:18 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:63 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:107 +msgid "Create BoM for the Finished Product" +msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:29 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:20 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:65 msgid "" -"From the **Products** menu in either the Inventory or Manufacturing app, " -"create each component product as you would any other product, then create " -"the top-level, or kit product. The kit product should have only the route " -"**Manufacture** set. Because you cannot track the stock of kit products, the" -" Product Type should be set to **Consumable**. Because a kit product cannot " -"be purchased, **Can be Purchased** should be unchecked." +"Create a manufactured BoM for the finished product which includes a kit " +"component. Set a routing on your BoM, for example, *Assemble Furniture*." msgstr "" -"У меню **Товари** в додатку Склад або Виробництво створюйте кожен компонент " -"продукту, як і будь-який інший продукт, а потім створіть продукт найвищого " -"рівня або комплект. Комплект продукту повинен мати тільки маршрут " -"**Виробництво**. Оскільки ви не можете відстежувати запас комплектів " -"продуктів, тип продукту слід встановити на **Споживання**. Оскільки комплект" -" продукту неможливо придбати, а **Можна придбати** не повинен бути " -"відмічений." -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:37 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:28 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:73 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:117 +msgid "Create a Kit BoM for the Kit Component" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:30 msgid "" -"All other parameters on the kit product may be modified according to your " -"preference. The component products require no special configuration." +"Update the kit component to define its BoM. Make sure that the routing which" +" is set on this BoM is the same one than on the Finished Product." msgstr "" -"Всі інші параметри продукту можуть бути змінені відповідно до ваших " -"уподобань. Компоненти продуктів не вимагають спеціального налаштування." -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:44 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:36 msgid "" -"Once the products are configured, create a bill of materials for the kit " -"product. Add each component and its quantity. Select the BoM Type **Ship " -"this product as a set of components**. All other options may be left with " -"their default values." +"You can define the operations in which the kit components are used directly " +"in the BoM of the kit." msgstr "" -"Після того, як продукти налаштовані, створіть специфікацію для комплекту " -"продукту. Додайте кожен компонент і його кількість. Виберіть тип " -"специфікації **Доставити цей продукт як набір компонентів**. Всі інші " -"параметри можуть бути залишені зі значеннями за замовчуванням." -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:53 -msgid "Manage Stock of Kit Product and Component Products" -msgstr "Управління складом комплектів товару та компонентів" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:40 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:84 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:127 +msgid "Manufacturing Order" +msgstr "Замовлення на виробництво" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:55 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:42 msgid "" -"If you would like to manage stock of the top-level kit product, you will use" -" a standard BoM with a manufacturing step instead of a Kit BoM. When using a" -" standard BoM to assemble kits, a manufacturing order will be created. The " -"manufacturing order must be registered as completed before the kit product " -"will appear in your stock." +"In the list of components, the kit is split. Two work orders are created as " +"we have two operations defined in the *Assemble Furniture* routing. The " +"components of the kits are well consumed in the operations defined in the " +"kit BoM." msgstr "" -"Якщо ви хочете керувати складом комплектів продукту найвищого рівня, ви " -"будете використовувати стандартну специфікацію з виробничим кроком, а не " -"специфікацію комплекту. При використанні стандартної специфікації для " -"складання комплектів буде створено замовлення на виробництво. Виробниче " -"замовлення повинно бути зареєстроване як завершене, перш ніж комплект " -"продукту з'явиться на вашому складі." -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:64 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:57 +msgid "Finished Product & Kit Component haven’t the same Routing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:60 +msgid "Kit Consumption set on Finished Product BoM" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:75 msgid "" -"On the kit product, select the route **Manufacture**. You may also select " -"**Make to Order**, which will create a manufacturing order whenever a sales " -"order is confirmed. Select the product type **Stockable Product** to enable " -"stock management." +"Update the kit component to define its BoM. In this use case, the routing " +"which is set on this Kit BoM is different than the one of the Finished " +"Product. Specify the operations at which the kit components are consumed in " +"this BoM." msgstr "" -"На продукті виберіть маршрут **Виробництво**. Ви також можете вибрати " -"**Виготовити на замовлення**, який створить замовлення на виробництво, коли " -"замовлення клієнта буде підтверджено. Виберіть тип продукту **Складський " -"продукт**, щоби дозволити управління запасами." -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:72 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:86 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:129 msgid "" -"When you create the bill of materials, select the BoM Type **Manufacture " -"this product**. The assembly of the kit will be described by a manufacturing" -" order rather than a packing operation." +"When the manufacturing order is created for the Manufactured product, the " +"kit is split among its components. When the manufacturing order is planned, " +"three work orders are created in our case, one coming from the routing of " +"the manufactured products, the two other ones coming from the routing of the" +" kit BoM." msgstr "" -"Коли ви створюєте специфікацію, виберіть тип специфікації виробництва " -"**Виробництво цього продукту**. Збір комплекту описується замовленням на " -"виробництво, а не операцією пакування." -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:3 -msgid "How to process a manufacturing order" -msgstr "Як обробляти замовлення на виробництво" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:95 +msgid "The components are all consumed during their respective operations." +msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:6 -msgid "Introduction" -msgstr "Загальний огляд" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:104 +msgid "Kit Consumption set on Kit BoM" +msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:8 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:109 msgid "" -"There are two basic ways to manage manufacturing in Odoo. The first way " -"manages work with one document only. This document is the **manufacturing " -"order**. The second way uses additional documents to give you more precise " -"control over the manufacturing process. In this way, **Manufacturing " -"orders** are divided into one or more steps defined by **work orders**, " -"performed in an order defined by **routings**." +"Create a manufactured BoM for the finished product which includes a kit " +"component. Set a routing on your BoM, for example, *Assemble Furniture*. " +"Precise the consumption of the components on this BoM." msgstr "" -"Є два основні способи управління виробництвом в Odoo. Перший спосіб керує " -"роботою тільки з одним документом. Цей документ є **замовленням на " -"виробництво**. Другий спосіб використовує додаткові документи, щоб дати вам " -"більш точний контроль над виробничим процесом. Таким чином, **замовлення на " -"виробництво** поділяються на один або більше етапів, визначених **робочими " -"замовленнями**, виконаними у порядку, визначеному **маршрутами**." -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:17 -msgid "How to manage manufacturing without routings" -msgstr "Як управляти виробництвом без маршрутів" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:19 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:119 msgid "" -"You will most likely use manufacturing orders without routings if all the " -"work to produce your product is performed in one place, by one person, in " -"one step, and/or you do not need the level of granular control afforded by " -"work orders and routings." +"Update the kit component to define its BoM. In this use case, the routing " +"which is set on this Kit BoM is different than the one of the Finished " +"Product." msgstr "" -"Ви, швидше за все, будете використовувати замовлення на виробництво без " -"маршрутів, якщо вся робота з виготовлення вашого продукту виконується в " -"одному місці, на одну людину в один крок, та/або вам не потрібен детальний " -"контроль, який забезпечується робочими замовленнями та маршрутами." -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:24 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:138 msgid "" -"Managing your operations in this way is the default behavior in Odoo. There " -"are two basic phases from planning to production:" +"All the components of the kits are consumed during the first operation. The " +"last component is consumed during the second operation." msgstr "" -"Управління вашими операціями у такий спосіб є типовим процесом в Odoo. Існує" -" два основні етапи від планування до виробництва:" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:27 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:52 -msgid "Create manufacturing orders" -msgstr "Створення замовлень на виробництво" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:29 -msgid "Record Production" -msgstr "Запис виробництва" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:32 -msgid "How to manage manufacturing with routings and work orders" -msgstr "Як управляти виробництвом з маршрутами та робочими замовленнями" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:34 -msgid "" -"To use work orders and routings, you will need to enable the option **Manage" -" production by work orders** From :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`. You will then be able to add routings to bills of materials, and " -"configure some additional related fields. You will also be able to create " -"**work centers**, the locations at which work orders are performed." -msgstr "" -"Щоб використовувати замовлення та маршрути, вам потрібно буде ввімкнути " -"опцію **Управління виробництвом за робочими замовленнями** з " -":menuselection:`Налаштування --> Налаштування`. Після цього ви зможете " -"додавати маршрути до специфікації та налаштовувати деякі додаткові пов'язані" -" поля. Ви також зможете створювати **робочі центри**, місця, де виконуються " -"робочі замовлення." - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:41 -msgid "" -"When manufacturing with routings and work orders, each work order is " -"scheduled individually. You will also have access to time and capacity " -"planning, and reports on costing and efficiency on a work center level." -msgstr "" -"При виробництві з маршрутами та робочими замовленнями, кожне робоче " -"замовлення заплановано індивідуально. Ви також матимете доступ до планування" -" часу та можливостей, а також звітувати про вартість та ефективність на " -"рівні робочого центру." - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:45 -msgid "" -"Manufacturing using routings can be broken down into several steps. When " -"configuring your BoM, you will need to add a routing defining the component " -"work orders. After planning the manufacturing order, you will have the added" -" step of scheduling work orders." -msgstr "" -"Виробництво з використанням маршрутів можна розбити на кілька кроків. Під " -"час налаштування вашої специфікації вам потрібно буде додати маршрут, який " -"визначає замовлення на склад компонентів. Після планування замовлення на " -"виробництво ви отримаєте додатковий крок для планування робочих замовлень." - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:50 -msgid "The workflow is thus divided into three basic phases, as follows:" -msgstr "Таким чином, робочий процес поділяється на три основні етапи:" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:54 -msgid "Schedule the associated work orders." -msgstr "Розклад пов'язаних робочих замовлень." - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:56 -msgid "Perform the scheduled work and record production." -msgstr "Виконання запланованої роботи та запис продукції." - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:3 -msgid "How to manage BoMs for product variants" -msgstr "Як керувати специфікацією для варіантів товару" #: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:3 -msgid "How to manage semi-finished products" -msgstr "Як керувати напівфабрикатами" +msgid "Manage semi-finished products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In Odoo, you can use subassembly products to simplify a complex *Bill of " +"Materials* or to represent your manufacturing flow more accurately. A " +"*subassembly product* is a manufactured product that is used as a component " +"to make another one." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:10 +msgid "" +"A *BoM* that employs *subassemblies* is referred to as a multi-level BoM. " +"Those are accomplished by creating a *top-level BoM* and *subassembly ones*." +" This process requires a route that will ensure that every time a " +"manufacturing order for the top-level product is created, another one will " +"be for subassemblies." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:17 +msgid "Configure the Subassembly Product" +msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:19 -msgid "Configure the Top -Level Product BoM" -msgstr "Налаштування специфікації товару найвищого рівня" +msgid "" +"To configure a *multi-level BoM*, you will need a top-level product but also" +" its subassemblies. The first step is to create a product form for each of " +"the subassemblies. Select the routes *Manufacture* and *Replenish on Order*." +" Now, hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:27 +msgid "" +"In the *Bill of Materials* menu, under *Master Data*, create a new *Bill of " +"Materials*. Choose the product you just created and add its components." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:35 +msgid "Configure the Main BoM" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:37 +msgid "" +"Now, you can configure the top-level product and its *BoM*. Include any " +"subassemblies in the list of components." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:43 +msgid "" +"Now, each time you will plan a manufacturing order for the top-level " +"product, a manufacturing order will be created for the subassembly one. " +"Then, you will have to manufacture the subassembly in order to make it " +"available before manufacturing the finished product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:3 +msgid "Subcontract the manufacturing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Some businesses subcontract the production of some finished products through" +" subcontractors. This can be easily managed through Odoo." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:11 +msgid "" +"Go to the *Manufacturing app > Configuration > Settings* and tick the box " +"*Subcontracting*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:17 +msgid "" +"You can now define subcontracted *Bill of Materials*. Therefore, you need to" +" go to *Manufacturing > Master Data > Bill of Materials* and hit *Create*. " +"In this *BoM*, list the components which will be used by the subcontractor " +"to manufacture the subcontracted finished product. Specify that the *BoM* " +"type is *Subcontracting*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:22 +msgid "You can also define subcontractors on the BoM." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:24 +msgid "If no subcontractor is set, the BoM can be used by any subcontractor" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:26 +msgid "If some are set, the BoM can only be used for those subcontractors" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:32 +msgid "Receive or buy a subcontracted product" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:34 +msgid "You have two options to trigger the subcontracting of a product:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:36 +msgid "" +"**Option A**: You can buy the subcontracted product from your subcontractor" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:38 +msgid "**Option B**: You can directly receive the subcontracted product" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:40 +msgid "Let’s start with option A (option B is just a simpler version of it)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:42 +msgid "" +"Create a new purchase order. The vendor must be a subcontractor. The unit " +"price should be the cost you are paying to the subcontractor for the " +"subcontracting (thus, it’s not necessarily the total cost of the " +"subcontracted product)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:50 +msgid "" +"The validation of the purchase order automatically creates the receipt. " +"Whenever you receive the product, you can validate the receipt. The " +"following stock moves are created:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:54 +msgid "For the components" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:56 +msgid "From Subcontracting To Production" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:58 +msgid "For the subcontracted product" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:60 +msgid "From Production to Subcontracting" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:62 +msgid "From Subcontracting to Stock" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:64 +msgid "" +"The *Subcontracting Location* represents the place where the products are at" +" your subcontractor’s warehouse. It is configured as an internal location, " +"the components that are sent to the subcontractor are still valued in your " +"stock." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:69 +msgid "" +"For option B, you can simply create the receipt manually with a partner of " +"type subcontractor defined on it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:73 +msgid "Resupply the subcontractor with the components" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:75 +msgid "" +"There are 3 ways to manage the resupply of your subcontractor with the " +"components:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:80 +msgid "**Manually**: You create a delivery order in which you set the" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:79 +msgid "subcontractor as a partner and you choose the components to deliver." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:89 +msgid "**With reordering rules**: You can define a *reordering rule*" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:86 +msgid "" +"on the *Subcontracting location* to ensure that they are always enough " +"components sent to your subcontractors. When the reordering rule is " +"triggered, a delivery order is created for the product is automatically " +"created." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:97 +msgid "**On order**: You can also deliver the components to your" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:95 +msgid "" +"subcontractors each time you order a subcontracted product. For this, you " +"need to tick the route *Resupply Subcontractor on Order* on the wanted " +"components." +msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/unbuild.rst:3 msgid "Unbuild a product" @@ -628,6 +978,163 @@ msgstr "" "Якщо ви розбираєте товар, який ви придбали, ви отримаєте компоненти зі " "специфікації назад на склад." +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:3 +msgid "Use the Master Production Schedule" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:5 +msgid "" +"The Master Production Schedule (MPS) is a valuable tool to plan your " +"production based on your demand forecast." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:11 +msgid "" +"Go to the *Manufacturing app > Configuration > Settings* and activate the " +"Master Production Schedule feature before hitting save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:18 +msgid "" +"In the manufacturing settings, you can define the time range of your MPS " +"(month/week/day) and the number of periods you want to display." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:20 +msgid "" +"Now, go in *Planning > Master Production Schedule* and click on add a " +"product. You can now define your safety stock target (= the stock you want " +"to have on hand at the end of the period) and the minimum and maximum " +"quantities to replenish." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:29 +msgid "" +"The products are ordered in the MPS based on their sequence. You can " +"rearrange that sequence by going on the list of your products and reorganize" +" them with drag and drop." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:36 +msgid "" +"In the MPS view, you can decide which information you would like to show by " +"clicking on *rows*. Some fields can be added to the view, such as *Actual " +"demand*, which will show which quantity of products has already been ordered" +" for the period, or *Available to Promise*, which allows you to know what " +"can still be sold during the period (what you plan to replenish - what is " +"already sold during the period). You can also decide to hide some " +"information if it isn’t necessary." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:48 +msgid "Estimate your demand and launch replenishment" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:50 +msgid "" +"The next step is to estimate the demand for the period. This estimation " +"should be entered in the row *Demand Forecast*. You can easily, at any time," +" compare the demand forecast with the actual demand (= confirmed sales). The" +" demand forecast for a finished product will impact the indirect demand for " +"its components." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:59 +msgid "" +"Then, the quantity to replenish for the different periods will be " +"automatically computed. The replenishments you are supposed to launch based " +"on your lead times (vendor lead time or manufacturing lead time) are " +"displayed in green. You can now launch the replenishment by clicking on the " +"replenish button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:65 +msgid "" +"Depending on the configuration of the product (buy vs. manufacture), " +"requests for quotations or manufacturing orders will be created. You can " +"easily access those by clicking on the *Actual Replenishment* cell." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:75 +msgid "" +"In case you manually edit the *To replenish* quantity, a small cross will " +"appear on the left. In case you want to go back to the automatically " +"computed value given by Odoo, you can click the cross." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:83 +msgid "Cells color signification" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:85 +msgid "" +"The cells, which are part of the *To replenish* line, can take different " +"colors depending on the situation:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:88 +msgid "" +"**Green**: quantity of products which should be replenished to reach the " +"expected safety stock considering the demand forecast and the indirect " +"demand forecast." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:90 +msgid "" +"**Grey**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity " +"still matches current data." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:92 +msgid "" +"**Red**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity " +"was too high considering current data." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:94 +msgid "" +"**Orange**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity" +" was too low considering current data." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:96 +msgid "" +"The *Forecasted stock* line can also contain red cells, which means the " +"stock will be negative during the period in question." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:100 +msgid "What if I have underestimated the demand?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:102 +msgid "" +"You can still increase the demand forecast. It will impact the quantity to " +"replenish. The cell will become orange, and you’ll be able to launch a new " +"replenishment." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:107 +msgid "What if I have overestimated the demand?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:109 +msgid "" +"You can decrease the demand forecast. The cell will become red to inform you" +" that you’ve ordered more than planned. If you’re still able to do it, you " +"can cancel some RFQ or MO manually." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:114 +msgid "What if I wrongly added a product to the MPS?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:116 +msgid "" +"You can easily remove a product from the MPS by clicking the small bin on " +"the right of its name." +msgstr "" + #: ../../manufacturing/overview.rst:5 msgid "Overview" msgstr "Загальний огляд" diff --git a/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po index 4bfce02a6..319ffe6ae 100644 --- a/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po +++ b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po @@ -4,16 +4,16 @@ # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # # Translators: -# Martin Trigaux, 2018 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 # Alina Lisnenko , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 11.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-10-19 10:03+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2018-10-19 08:15+0000\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Alina Lisnenko , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Ukrainian (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/uk/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../point_of_sale.rst:5 msgid "Point of Sale" -msgstr "Касовий термінал" +msgstr "Точка продажу" #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced.rst:3 msgid "Advanced topics" @@ -43,13 +43,16 @@ msgstr "" "вашу ефективність та допомагає вам заощадити час для вас та ваших клієнтів." #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:9 -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:9 #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/mercury.rst:25 #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:8 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:9 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:10 #: ../../point_of_sale/overview/start.rst:22 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:12 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:12 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:13 #: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/setup.rst:9 #: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/split.rst:10 -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:10 msgid "Configuration" msgstr "Налаштування" @@ -69,15 +72,10 @@ msgid "" msgstr "Під категорією IoT Box / Обладнання ви знайдете *Сканер штрих-кодів*." #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:21 -msgid "You can find more about Barcode Nomenclature here (ADD HYPERLINK)" -msgstr "" -"Ви можете дізнатись більше про Номенклатуру штрих-кодів тут (ADD HYPERLINK)" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:25 msgid "Add barcodes to product" msgstr "Додайте штрих-коди до товару" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:27 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:23 msgid "" "Go to :menuselection:`Point of Sale --> Catalog --> Products` and select a " "product." @@ -85,7 +83,7 @@ msgstr "" "Перейдіть до :menuselection:`Точки продажу --> Каталог --> Товари` та " "виберіть товар." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:30 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:26 msgid "" "Under the general information tab, you can find a barcode field where you " "can input any barcode." @@ -93,11 +91,11 @@ msgstr "" "На вкладці загальної інформації ви можете знайти поле штрих-коду, де ви " "можете ввести будь-який штрих-код." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:37 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:33 msgid "Scanning products" msgstr "Сканування товарів" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:39 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:35 msgid "" "From your PoS interface, scan any barcode with your barcode scanner. The " "product will be added, you can scan the same product to add it multiple " @@ -107,226 +105,6 @@ msgstr "" "сканером штрих-кодів. Товар буде додано, ви зможете сканувати той самий " "товар, щоб додати його кілька разів або змінити кількість вручну на екрані." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:3 -msgid "Using discount tags with a barcode scanner" -msgstr "Використання тегів знижок з сканером штрих-кодів" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:5 -msgid "" -"If you want to sell your products with a discount, for a product getting " -"close to its expiration date for example, you can use discount tags. They " -"allow you to scan discount barcodes." -msgstr "" -"Якщо ви хочете продати свої товари зі знижкою, наприклад, для товару, що " -"наближається до дати його закінчення, ви можете використовувати теги знижок." -" Вони дозволяють сканувати штрих-коди зі знижкою." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:10 -msgid "" -"To use discount tags you will need to use a barcode scanner, you can see the" -" documentation about it `here `__" -msgstr "" -"Щоб використовувати теги знижки, вам потрібно буде скористатися сканером " -"штрих-кодів, тут ви можете ознайомитися з документацією " -"`__" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:15 -msgid "Barcode Nomenclature" -msgstr "Номенклатура штрихкодів" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:17 -msgid "To use discounts tags, we need to learn about barcode nomenclature." -msgstr "" -"Щоб використовувати теги знижок, нам потрібно дізнатися про номенклатуру " -"штрих-кодів." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:19 -msgid "" -"Let's say you want to have a discount for the product with the following " -"barcode:" -msgstr "" -"Скажімо, ви хочете отримати знижку для товару з наступним штрих-кодом:" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:25 -msgid "" -"You can find the *Default Nomenclature* under the settings of your PoS " -"interface." -msgstr "" -"Ви можете знайти *Номенклатуру за замовчуванням* в налаштуваннях вашого " -"інтерфейсу точки продажу." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:34 -msgid "" -"Let's say you want 50% discount on a product you have to start your barcode " -"with 22 (for the discount barcode nomenclature) and then 50 (for the %) " -"before adding the product barcode. In our example, the barcode would be:" -msgstr "" -"Скажімо, вам потрібно 50% знижки на товар, для якого вам потрібно буде " -"почати свій штрих-код з 22 (для номеру штрих-коду знижки), а потім 50 " -"(для%), перш ніж додавати штрих-код товару. У нашому прикладі штрих-код " -"буде:" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:43 -msgid "Scan the products & tags" -msgstr "Відскануйте товари і теги" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:45 -msgid "You first have to scan the desired product (in our case, a lemon)." -msgstr "" -"Спочатку потрібно відсканувати потрібний товар (у нашому випадку, лимон)." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:50 -msgid "" -"And then scan the discount tag. The discount will be applied and you can " -"finish the transaction." -msgstr "" -"Потім відскануйте тег зі знижкою. Знижка буде застосована, і ви можете " -"закінчити транзакцію." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:3 -msgid "Manage a loyalty program" -msgstr "Управління програмою лояльності" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:5 -msgid "" -"Encourage your customers to continue to shop at your point of sale with a " -"*Loyalty Program*." -msgstr "" -"Заохочуйте своїх клієнтів продовжувати купувати у вашій точці продажу з " -"*програмою лояльності*." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:11 -msgid "" -"To activate the *Loyalty Program* feature, go to :menuselection:`Point of " -"Sale --> Configuration --> Point of sale` and select your PoS interface. " -"Under the Pricing features, select *Loyalty Program*" -msgstr "" -"Щоб активувати програму лояльності, перейдіть до :menuselection:`Точки " -"продажу --> Налаштування --> Точка продажу` та виберіть свій інтерфейс точки" -" продажу. У розділі Функції ціноутворення виберіть *програму лояльності*" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:19 -msgid "From there you can create and edit your loyalty programs." -msgstr "Звідти ви можете створювати та редагувати свої програми лояльності." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:24 -msgid "" -"You can decide what type of program you wish to use, if the reward is a " -"discount or a gift, make it specific to some products or cover your whole " -"range. Apply rules so that it is only valid in specific situation and " -"everything in between." -msgstr "" -"Ви можете вирішити, який тип програми ви хочете використати, якщо винагорода" -" - це знижка або подарунок, роблячи її конкретною для деяких товарів або " -"охоплюючи весь ваш асортимент. Застосовуйте правила так, щоби вони були " -"дійсними лише у конкретній ситуації та усе, що існує між ними." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:30 -msgid "Use the loyalty program in your PoS interface" -msgstr "Використовуйте програму лояльності у своєму інтерфейсі точки продажу" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:32 -msgid "" -"When a customer is set, you will now see the points they will get for the " -"transaction and they will accumulate until they are spent. They are spent " -"using the button *Rewards* when they have enough points according to the " -"rules defined in the loyalty program." -msgstr "" -"Коли клієнт встановлений, тепер ви побачите пункти, які вони отримають для " -"транзакції, і вони накопичуватимуться, поки вони не будуть витрачені. Вони " -"витрачаються за допомогою кнопки *Нагороди*, якщо у них є достатньо балів " -"відповідно до правил, визначених у програмі лояльності." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:40 -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:45 -msgid "" -"You can see the price is instantly updated to reflect the pricelist. You can" -" finalize the order in your usual way." -msgstr "" -"Ви можете бачити, що ціна моментально оновлюється, щоби відобразити " -"прайслист. Ви можете завершити оформлення замовлення звичайним способом." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:44 -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:49 -msgid "" -"If you select a customer with a default pricelist, it will be applied. You " -"can of course change it." -msgstr "" -"Якщо ви виберете клієнта із прайслистом за замовчуванням, він буде " -"застосований. Ви, звичайно, можете змінити це." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:3 -msgid "Apply manual discounts" -msgstr "Застосування знижок вручну" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:5 -msgid "" -"If you seldom use discounts, applying manual discounts might be the easiest " -"solution for your Point of Sale." -msgstr "" -"Якщо ви рідко користуєтеся знижками, то застосування знижок вручну може " -"стати найлегшим рішенням для вашої точки продажу." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:8 -msgid "" -"You can either apply a discount on the whole order or on specific products." -msgstr "" -"Ви можете або застосувати знижку на усе замовлення або на окремі товари." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:12 -msgid "Apply a discount on a product" -msgstr "Застосуйте знижку на товар" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:14 -msgid "From your session interface, use *Disc* button." -msgstr "З інтерфейсу сесії використовуйте кнопку *Знижка*." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:19 -msgid "" -"You can then input a discount (in percentage) over the product that is " -"currently selected and the discount will be applied." -msgstr "" -"Потім ви можете вносити знижку (у відсотках) на товар, який зараз обраний, і" -" знижка буде застосована." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:23 -msgid "Apply a global discount" -msgstr "Застосуйте загальну знижку" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:25 -msgid "" -"To apply a discount on the whole order, go to :menuselection:`Point of Sales" -" --> Configuration --> Point of sale` and select your PoS interface." -msgstr "" -"Щоб застосувати знижку до всього замовлення, перейдіть до " -":menuselection:`Точки продажу --> Налаштування --> Точка продажу` та " -"виберіть свій інтерфейс точки продажу." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:28 -msgid "" -"Under the *Pricing* category, you will find *Global Discounts* select it." -msgstr "У розділі *Ціни* ви знайдете *Загальні знижки*." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:34 -msgid "You now have a new *Discount* button in your PoS interface." -msgstr "" -"Тепер у вашому інтерфейсі точки продажу з'явилася нова кнопка *Знижка*." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:39 -msgid "" -"Once clicked you can then enter your desired discount (in percentages)." -msgstr "Після натискання ви зможете ввести бажану знижку (у відсотках)." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:44 -msgid "" -"On this example, you can see a global discount of 50% as well as a specific " -"product discount also at 50%." -msgstr "" -"На цьому прикладі ви можете побачити загальну знижку 50%, а також конкретну " -"знижку товарі на 50%." - #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/mercury.rst:3 msgid "Accept credit card payment using Mercury" msgstr "Прийом оплати кредитною карткою через Mercury" @@ -416,104 +194,95 @@ msgstr "" "Тепер ви маєте можливість оплатити кредитну картку під час перевірки " "платежу." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:3 -msgid "Manage multiple cashiers" -msgstr "Управління кількома касирами " - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:5 -msgid "" -"With Odoo Point of Sale, you can easily manage multiple cashiers. This " -"allows you to keep track on who is working in the Point of Sale and when." +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:3 +msgid "Log in with employee" msgstr "" -"З точкою продажу Odoo ви легко можете керувати кількома касирами. Це дає " -"змогу стежити за тим, хто працює у точці продажу та коли." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:9 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:5 msgid "" -"There are three different ways of switching between cashiers in Odoo. They " -"are all explained below." +"With Odoo *Point of Sale*, you can manage multiple cashiers. This feature " +"allows you to keep track of who is working, when and how much each cashier " +"made for that session." msgstr "" -"Є три різні способи перемикання між касирами в Odoo. Всі вони пояснюються " -"нижче." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:13 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:9 msgid "" -"To manage multiple cashiers, you need to have several users (at least two)." +"There are three ways to switch cashiers in Odoo: by *selecting the cashier*," +" by *entering a PIN code* or by *scanning a barcode*." msgstr "" -"Щоб керувати кількома касирами, потрібно мати кілька користувачів (принаймні" -" два)." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:17 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:13 +msgid "" +"To manage multiple cashiers, you need several employees (at least two)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:16 +msgid "Set up log in with employees" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:18 +msgid "" +"To enable the feature, go to your *PoS settings* and check log in with " +"employees on your *PoS form*. Then, add the employees that have access to " +"the cash register." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:25 +msgid "Now, you can switch cashier easily." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:28 msgid "Switch without pin codes" msgstr "Перемикач без PIN-кодів" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:19 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:30 msgid "" -"The easiest way to switch cashiers is without a code. Simply press on the " -"name of the current cashier in your PoS interface." +"The easiest way to switch cashiers is without a code. To do so, click on the" +" cashier name in your PoS interface." msgstr "" -"Найпростіший спосіб переключити касира - без коду. Просто натисніть на ім'я " -"поточного касира у вашому інтерфейсі точки продажу." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:25 -msgid "You will then be able to change between different users." -msgstr "Після цього ви зможете змінювати різних користувачів." +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:36 +msgid "Now, you just have to click on your name." +msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:30 -msgid "And the cashier will be changed." -msgstr "І касир буде змінений." +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:42 +msgid "Switch cashier with pin codes" +msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:33 -msgid "Switch cashiers with pin codes" -msgstr "Переключення касирів із PIN-кодами" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:35 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:44 msgid "" -"You can also set a pin code on each user. To do so, go to " -":menuselection:`Settings --> Manage Access rights` and select the user." +"You can set a pin code on each cashier. To set up a pin code, go to the " +"employee form and add a security PIN, in the *HR settings tab*." msgstr "" -"Ви також можете встановити pin-код для кожного користувача. Для цього " -"перейдіть до:menuselection:`Налаштування --> Керування правами доступу` та " -"виберіть користувача." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:41 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:50 +msgid "Now, when switching cashier, a PIN password will be asked." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:56 +msgid "Switch cashier with barcodes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:58 msgid "" -"On the user page, under the *Point of Sale* tab you can add a Security PIN." +"You can ask your employees to log themselves with their badges. To do so, " +"set up a barcode at the same place you add the PIN code. Print the badge and" +" when they will scan it, the cashier will be switched to that employee." msgstr "" -"На сторінці користувача під вкладкою *Точка продажу* ви можете додати PIN-" -"код захисту." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:47 -msgid "Now when you switch users you will be asked to input a PIN password." +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:67 +msgid "Find who was the cashier" msgstr "" -"Тепер, коли ви переключаєте користувачів, вам буде запропоновано ввести " -"пароль PIN-коду." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:53 -msgid "Switch cashiers with barcodes" -msgstr "Перемкніть касирів зі штрих-кодами" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:55 -msgid "You can also ask your cashiers to log themselves in with their badges." -msgstr "" -"Ви також можете попросити своїх касирів входити до себе за допомогою своїх " -"значків." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:57 -msgid "Back where you put a security PIN code, you could also put a barcode." -msgstr "" -"Зі зворотньої сторони, де ви встановлюєте PIN-код захисту, ви також можете " -"встановити штрих-код." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:62 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:69 msgid "" -"When they scan their barcode, the cashier will be switched to that user." +"Once you have closed your *PoS session*, you can have an overview of the " +"amount each cashier sold for. To do so, go to the orders menu." msgstr "" -"Коли вони сканують свій штрих-код, касир перейде на цього користувача." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:64 -msgid "Barcode nomenclature link later on" -msgstr "Посилання на номенклатуру штрихкодів пізніше" +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:75 +msgid "Now, you can open the order and have a summary of the sold products." +msgstr "" #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:3 msgid "Reprint Receipts" @@ -529,32 +298,321 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:10 msgid "" "To activate *Reprint Receipt*, go to :menuselection:`Point of Sale --> " -"Configuration --> Point of sale` and select your PoS interface." +"Configuration --> Point of sale`. and select your PoS interface." msgstr "" -"Щоб активувати *повторний друк чеку*, перейдіть до :menuselection:`Точки " -"продажу --> Налаштування --> Точка продажу` та виберіть свій інтерфейс точки" -" продажу." #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:13 msgid "" "Under the Bills & Receipts category, you will find *Reprint Receipt* option." msgstr "У розділі Рахунки та чеки ви знайдете функцію *Повторний друк чеку*." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:20 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:17 +msgid "" +"In order to allow the option reprint receipt, you need to activate the " +"receipt printer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:23 msgid "Reprint a receipt" msgstr "Повторно надрукуйте чек" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:22 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:25 msgid "On your PoS interface, you now have a *Reprint receipt* button." msgstr "" "У вашому інтерфейсі точки продажу тепер є кнопка підтвердження *повторного " "друку*." -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:27 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:30 msgid "When you use it, you can then reprint your last receipt." msgstr "" "Коли ви використовуєте його, ви можете повторно друкувати останній чек." +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features.rst:3 +msgid "Advanced Pricing Features" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:3 +msgid "Using discount tags with a barcode scanner" +msgstr "Використання тегів знижок з сканером штрих-кодів" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:5 +msgid "" +"If you want to sell your products with a discount, for a product getting " +"close to its expiration date for example, you can use discount tags. They " +"allow you to scan discount barcodes." +msgstr "" +"Якщо ви хочете продати свої товари зі знижкою, наприклад, для товару, що " +"наближається до дати його закінчення, ви можете використовувати теги знижок." +" Вони дозволяють сканувати штрих-коди зі знижкою." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:10 +msgid "To use discount tags you will need to use a barcode scanner." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:13 +msgid "Barcode Nomenclature" +msgstr "Номенклатура штрих-кодів" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:15 +msgid "To use discounts tags, we need to learn about barcode nomenclature." +msgstr "" +"Щоб використовувати теги знижок, нам потрібно дізнатися про номенклатуру " +"штрих-кодів." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:17 +msgid "" +"Let's say you want to have a discount for the product with the following " +"barcode:" +msgstr "" +"Скажімо, ви хочете отримати знижку для товару з наступним штрих-кодом:" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:23 +msgid "" +"You can find the *Default Nomenclature* under the settings of your PoS " +"interface." +msgstr "" +"Ви можете знайти *Номенклатуру за замовчуванням* в налаштуваннях вашого " +"інтерфейсу точки продажу." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:32 +msgid "" +"Let's say you want 50% discount on a product you have to start your barcode " +"with 22 (for the discount barcode nomenclature) and then 50 (for the %) " +"before adding the product barcode. In our example, the barcode would be:" +msgstr "" +"Скажімо, вам потрібно 50% знижки на товар, для якого вам потрібно буде " +"почати свій штрих-код з 22 (для номеру штрих-коду знижки), а потім 50 " +"(для%), перш ніж додавати штрих-код товару. У нашому прикладі штрих-код " +"буде:" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:41 +msgid "Scan the products & tags" +msgstr "Відскануйте товари і теги" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:43 +msgid "You first have to scan the desired product (in our case, a lemon)." +msgstr "" +"Спочатку потрібно відсканувати потрібний товар (у нашому випадку, лимон)." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:48 +msgid "" +"And then scan the discount tag. The discount will be applied and you can " +"finish the transaction." +msgstr "" +"Потім відскануйте тег зі знижкою. Знижка буде застосована, і ви можете " +"закінчити транзакцію." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:3 +msgid "Manage a loyalty program" +msgstr "Управління програмою лояльності" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Encourage your customers to continue to shop at your point of sale with a " +"*Loyalty Program*." +msgstr "" +"Заохочуйте своїх клієнтів продовжувати купувати у вашій точці продажу з " +"*програмою лояльності*." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:11 +msgid "" +"To activate the *Loyalty Program* feature, go to :menuselection:`Point of " +"Sale --> Configuration --> Point of sale` and select your PoS interface. " +"Under the Pricing features, select *Loyalty Program*" +msgstr "" +"Щоб активувати програму лояльності, перейдіть до :menuselection:`Точки " +"продажу --> Налаштування --> Точка продажу` та виберіть свій інтерфейс точки" +" продажу. У розділі Функції ціноутворення виберіть *програму лояльності*" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:19 +msgid "From there you can create and edit your loyalty programs." +msgstr "Звідти ви можете створювати та редагувати свої програми лояльності." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:24 +msgid "" +"You can decide what type of program you wish to use, if the reward is a " +"discount or a gift, make it specific to some products or cover your whole " +"range. Apply rules so that it is only valid in specific situation and " +"everything in between." +msgstr "" +"Ви можете вирішити, який тип програми ви хочете використати, якщо винагорода" +" - це знижка або подарунок, роблячи її конкретною для деяких товарів або " +"охоплюючи весь ваш асортимент. Застосовуйте правила так, щоби вони були " +"дійсними лише у конкретній ситуації та усе, що існує між ними." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:30 +msgid "Use the loyalty program in your PoS interface" +msgstr "Використовуйте програму лояльності у своєму інтерфейсі точки продажу" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:32 +msgid "" +"When a customer is set, you will now see the points they will get for the " +"transaction and they will accumulate until they are spent. They are spent " +"using the button *Rewards* when they have enough points according to the " +"rules defined in the loyalty program." +msgstr "" +"Коли клієнт встановлений, тепер ви побачите пункти, які вони отримають для " +"транзакції, і вони накопичуватимуться, поки вони не будуть витрачені. Вони " +"витрачаються за допомогою кнопки *Нагороди*, якщо у них є достатньо балів " +"відповідно до правил, визначених у програмі лояльності." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:40 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:45 +msgid "" +"You can see the price is instantly updated to reflect the pricelist. You can" +" finalize the order in your usual way." +msgstr "" +"Ви можете бачити, що ціна моментально оновлюється, щоби відобразити " +"прайслист. Ви можете завершити оформлення замовлення звичайним способом." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:44 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:49 +msgid "" +"If you select a customer with a default pricelist, it will be applied. You " +"can of course change it." +msgstr "" +"Якщо ви виберете клієнта із прайслистом за замовчуванням, він буде " +"застосований. Ви, звичайно, можете змінити це." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:3 +msgid "Apply manual discounts" +msgstr "Застосування знижок вручну" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:5 +msgid "" +"If you seldom use discounts, applying manual discounts might be the easiest " +"solution for your Point of Sale." +msgstr "" +"Якщо ви рідко користуєтеся знижками, то застосування знижок вручну може " +"стати найлегшим рішенням для вашої точки продажу." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:8 +msgid "" +"You can either apply a discount on the whole order or on specific products." +msgstr "" +"Ви можете або застосувати знижку на усе замовлення або на окремі товари." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:12 +msgid "Apply a discount on a product" +msgstr "Застосуйте знижку на товар" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:14 +msgid "From your session interface, use *Disc* button." +msgstr "З інтерфейсу сесії використовуйте кнопку *Знижка*." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:19 +msgid "" +"You can then input a discount (in percentage) over the product that is " +"currently selected and the discount will be applied." +msgstr "" +"Потім ви можете вносити знижку (у відсотках) на товар, який зараз обраний, і" +" знижка буде застосована." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:23 +msgid "Apply a global discount" +msgstr "Застосуйте загальну знижку" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:25 +msgid "" +"To apply a discount on the whole order, go to :menuselection:`Point of Sales" +" --> Configuration --> Point of sale` and select your PoS interface." +msgstr "" +"Щоб застосувати знижку до всього замовлення, перейдіть до " +":menuselection:`Точки продажу --> Налаштування --> Точка продажу` та " +"виберіть свій інтерфейс точки продажу." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:28 +msgid "" +"Under the *Pricing* category, you will find *Global Discounts* select it." +msgstr "У розділі *Ціни* ви знайдете *Загальні знижки*." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:34 +msgid "You now have a new *Discount* button in your PoS interface." +msgstr "" +"Тепер у вашому інтерфейсі точки продажу з'явилася нова кнопка *Знижка*." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:39 +msgid "" +"Once clicked you can then enter your desired discount (in percentages)." +msgstr "Після натискання ви зможете ввести бажану знижку (у відсотках)." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:44 +msgid "" +"On this example, you can see a global discount of 50% as well as a specific " +"product discount also at 50%." +msgstr "" +"На цьому прикладі ви можете побачити загальну знижку 50%, а також конкретну " +"знижку товарі на 50%." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:3 +msgid "Apply time-limited discounts" +msgstr "Застосування сезонних знижок" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Entice your customers and increase your revenue by offering time-limited or " +"seasonal discounts. Odoo has a powerful pricelist feature to support a " +"pricing strategy tailored to your business." +msgstr "" +"Заохочуйте своїх клієнтів та збільшуйте ваші доходи, пропонуючи обмежені за " +"часом знижки або сезонні знижки. Odoo має потужну функцію прайслиста, що " +"підтримує стратегію ціноутворення, адаптовану до вашого бізнесу." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:12 +msgid "" +"To activate the *Pricelists* feature, go to :menuselection:`Point of Sales " +"--> Configuration --> Point of sale` and select your PoS interface." +msgstr "" +"Щоб активувати функцію *прайслистів*, перейдіть до меню " +":menuselection:`Точка продажу --> Налаштування --> Точка продажу` та " +"виберіть свій інтерфейс точки продажу." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:18 +msgid "" +"Choose the pricelists you want to make available in this Point of Sale and " +"define the default pricelist. You can access all your pricelists by clicking" +" on *Pricelists*." +msgstr "" +"Виберіть прайслисти, які ви хочете застосувати в цій точці продажу та " +"визначте прайслист за замовчуванням. Ви можете отримати доступ до всіх своїх" +" *прайслистів*, натиснувши на них." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:23 +msgid "Create a pricelist" +msgstr "Створіть прайслист" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:25 +msgid "" +"By default, you have a *Public Pricelist* to create more, go to " +":menuselection:`Point of Sale --> Catalog --> Pricelists`" +msgstr "" +"За замовчуванням у вас є загальний прайслист, щоб створити більше, перейдіть" +" до :menuselection:`Точки продажу --> Каталог --> Прайслисти`" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:31 +msgid "" +"You can set several criterias to use a specific price: periods, min. " +"quantity (meet a minimum ordered quantity and get a price break), etc. You " +"can also chose to only apply that pricelist on specific products or on the " +"whole range." +msgstr "" +"Ви можете встановити декілька критеріїв використання конкретної ціни: " +"періоди, хв. кількість (задовольняйте мінімальну замовлену кількість та " +"отримуйте перерву на ціну) тощо. Ви також можете вибрати, щоб застосувати " +"цей прайслист лише до певної продукції або всього діапазону." + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:37 +msgid "Using a pricelist in the PoS interface" +msgstr "Використання прайслиста в інтерфейсі точки продажу" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:39 +msgid "" +"You now have a new button above the *Customer* one, use it to instantly " +"select the right pricelist." +msgstr "" +"Тепер у вас є нова кнопка над *Клієнтом*, використовуйте її, щоб миттєво " +"вибрати потрібний прайслист." + #: ../../point_of_sale/analyze.rst:3 msgid "Analyze sales" msgstr "Аналіз продажів" @@ -606,7 +664,7 @@ msgstr "Налаштування модуля податкових даних з #: ../../point_of_sale/belgian_fdm/setup.rst:6 msgid "Introduction" -msgstr "Загальний огляд" +msgstr "Вступ" #: ../../point_of_sale/belgian_fdm/setup.rst:8 msgid "" @@ -671,7 +729,7 @@ msgstr "Налаштування зареєстрованого IoT Box на т #: ../../point_of_sale/belgian_fdm/setup.rst:35 msgid "Setup" -msgstr "Встановіть" +msgstr "Встановити" #: ../../point_of_sale/belgian_fdm/setup.rst:38 msgid "IoT Box" @@ -1028,11 +1086,276 @@ msgstr "Все зроблено, ви закрили свою першу сес #: ../../point_of_sale/overview/start.rst:133 msgid "" "To connect the PoS to hardware with an Odoo IoT Box, please see the section " -":doc:`../../../iot/connect` and :doc:`../../../iot/pos`" +":doc:`../../../iot/config/connect` and :doc:`../../../iot/config/pos`" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment.rst:3 +msgid "Payment Terminals" +msgstr "Платіжні термінали" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:3 +msgid "Connect an Ingenico Payment Terminal to your PoS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Connecting a payment terminal allows you to offer a fluid payment flow to " +"your customers and ease the work of your cashiers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Please note that Ingenico is currently only available for customers in the " +"Benelux." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:15 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:15 +msgid "Connect a Payment Terminal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:17 +msgid "" +"Connecting an Ingenico Payment Terminal to Odoo is a feature that requires " +"an IoT Box. For more information on how to connect an IoT Box to your " +"database, please refer to `this documentation " +"`__." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:22 +msgid "" +"Once the IoT Box is up and running, you’ll need to link your payment " +"terminal to your PoS. Open the Point of Sale app and go to *Configuration > " +"Point of Sale*. Select a PoS, tick the IoT Box Device option and select your" +" payment terminal." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:31 +msgid "Configure the Lane/5000 for Ingenico BENELUX" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:33 +msgid "" +"Click on the F button of the terminal, then go in the *PoS Menu* > settings " +"menu and enter the settings password." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:36 +msgid "" +"Now, click on connexion change and TCP/IP. Type the IP of your *IoT Box* " +"(you can find it on the form view of your IoT Box). Then, enter 9000 as " +"port. The terminal will restart. Once it is done, go on your *IoT Box* form " +"in Odoo and verify that the terminal has been found." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:45 +msgid "Configure the payment method" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:47 +msgid "" +"First, go in the general settings of the POS app, and activate the Ingenico " +"setting." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Go back in *Point of Sale > Configuration > Point of Sale*, go in the " +"payments section and access your payment methods. Create a new payment " +"method for Ingenico, select the payment terminal option Ingenico, and select" +" your payment terminal device." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:62 +msgid "Pay with a payment terminal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:64 +msgid "" +"In your *PoS interface*, when processing a payment, select a *Payment " +"Method* using a payment terminal. Check that the amount in the tendered " +"column is the one that has to be sent to the payment terminal and click on " +"*Send*. When the payment is successful, the status will change to *Payment " +"Successful*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:73 +msgid "" +"If you want to cancel the payment request, click on cancel. You can still " +"retry to send the payment request." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:76 +msgid "" +"If there is any issue with the payment terminal, you can still force the " +"payment using the *Force Done*. This will allow you to validate the order in" +" Odoo even if the connexion between the terminal and Odoo has issues." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:82 +msgid "" +"This option will only be available if you received an error message telling " +"you the connexion failed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:85 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:103 +msgid "" +"Once your payment is processed, on the payment record, you’ll find the type " +"of card that has been used and the transaction ID." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:3 +msgid "Connect SIX/Worldline to your PoS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Connecting a SIX/Worldline payment terminal allows you to offer a fluid " +"payment flow to your customers and ease the work of your cashiers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:9 +msgid "Please note SIX/Worldine is currently only available for UE customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:17 +msgid "" +"Connecting a SIX/Worldline Payment Terminal to Odoo is a feature that " +"requires an IoT Box. For more information on how to connect an IoT Box to " +"your database, please refer to `this documentation " +"`__." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:22 +msgid "" +"Once the *IoT Box* is up and running, you’ll need to link it to your PoS. " +"Open the Point of Sale app and go to *Configuration > Point of Sale*. Select" +" a PoS, tick the IoT Box Device option and select your payment terminal." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:30 +msgid "" +"Then go to your *IoT Box homepage* (accessible from the IoT Box form view in" +" Odoo) and enter the ID of your Six payment terminal." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:36 +msgid "" +"You should now see that the terminal is connected to your IoT Box (it takes " +"+/- 1 min)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:43 +msgid "" +"The terminal should only be connected to the network with the Ethernet. Do " +"not connect it to the IoT Box with a USB Cable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:47 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:16 +msgid "Configure the Payment Method" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:49 +msgid "" +"First, go in the general settings of the POS app, and activate the SIX " +"setting." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:55 +msgid "" +"Back in *Point of Sale > Configuration > Point of Sale*, go in the payments " +"section and access your payment methods. Create a new payment method for " +"SIX, select the payment terminal option SIX, and select your payment " +"terminal device." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:64 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:40 +msgid "Pay with a Payment Terminal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:66 +msgid "" +"In your PoS interface, at the moment of the payment, select a payment method" +" using a payment terminal. Verify that the amount in the tendered column is " +"the one that has to be sent to the payment terminal and click on *Send*. If " +"you want to cancel the payment request, click on cancel." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:74 +msgid "" +"When the payment is done, the status will change to *Payment Successful*. " +"You can always reverse the last transaction by clicking on *Reverse*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:81 +msgid "" +"If there is any issue with the payment terminal, you can still force the " +"payment using the *Force Done*. This will allow you to validate the order in" +" Odoo even if the connexion between the terminal and Odoo encounters issues." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:87 +msgid "Close your Session" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:89 +msgid "" +"At the end of the day, before closing your session, you need to send the " +"balance of the payments to SIX. To do that, click on this button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:95 +msgid "" +"Once the balance has been sent, the SIX shift is closed, meaning you cannot " +"do additional operations with the SIX payment terminal (except if you reopen" +" a shift by clicking on the user name and selecting a cashier)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Vantiv Payment Terminal to your PoS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Connecting a Vantiv payment terminal allows you to offer a fluid payment " +"flow to your customers and ease the work of your cashiers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:9 +msgid "" +"Please note MercuryPay only operates with US and Canadian banks, making this" +" procedure only suitable for North American businesses." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:18 +msgid "" +"First, go in the general settings of the POS app, and activate the Vantiv " +"setting." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:24 +msgid "" +"Back in *Point of Sale > Configuration > Point of Sale*, go in the payments " +"section and access your payment methods. Create a new payment method for " +"Vantiv, select the payment terminal option Vantiv, and create new Vantiv " +"credentials." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:32 +msgid "" +"To create new Vantiv credentials, fill in your merchant ID and password, " +"then save. Make sure the credentials you just created are selected, then " +"save the payment method." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:42 +msgid "" +"In your PoS interface, at the moment of the payment, select your Vantiv " +"payment method and… that’s all." msgstr "" -"Для підключення точки продажу з обладнанням з Odoo IoT Box, будь ласка, " -"перегляньте документацію :doc:`../../../iot/connect` and " -":doc:`../../../iot/pos`" #: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant.rst:3 msgid "Advanced Restaurant Features" @@ -1112,14 +1435,14 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:16 msgid "" "Under the IoT Box / Hardware Proxy category, you will find *Order Printers*." +" Note that you need an IoT Box to connect your Printer to the PoS." msgstr "" -"Під категорією IoT Box / Proxy обладнання ви знайдете *Замовити принтери*." -#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:19 +#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:20 msgid "Add a printer" msgstr "Додайте принтер" -#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:21 +#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:22 msgid "" "In your configuration menu you will now have a *Order Printers* option where" " you can add the printer." @@ -1127,23 +1450,23 @@ msgstr "" "У вашому меню налаштування тепер з'явиться параметр *Замовлення принтерів*, " "де ви можете додати принтер." -#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:28 +#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:29 msgid "Print a kitchen/bar order" msgstr "Друк замовлення на кухні/барі" -#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:33 +#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:34 msgid "Select or create a printer." msgstr "Виберіть або створіть принтер." -#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:36 +#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:37 msgid "Print the order in the kitchen/bar" msgstr "Роздрукуйте замовлення на кухні/барі" -#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:38 +#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:39 msgid "On your PoS interface, you now have a *Order* button." msgstr "На вашому інтерфейсі точки продажу тепер є кнопка *Замовлення*." -#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:43 +#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:44 msgid "" "When you press it, it will print the order on your kitchen/bar printer." msgstr "" @@ -1385,7 +1708,7 @@ msgstr "Додайте чайові до рахунку" msgid "Once on the payment interface, you now have a new *Tip* button" msgstr "Після цього в інтерфейсі платежу з'явиться нова кнопка *Чайові*" -#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/tips.rst:31 +#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/tips.rst:28 msgid "Add the tip your customer wants to leave and process to the payment." msgstr "Додайте чайові, які ваш клієнт хоче залишити та обробіть у платежу." @@ -1645,72 +1968,3 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "Як ви бачите, загальна сума є негативною, щоб закінчити відшкодування, яке " "вам просто потрібно обробити." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:3 -msgid "Apply time-limited discounts" -msgstr "Застосування сезонних знижок" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:5 -msgid "" -"Entice your customers and increase your revenue by offering time-limited or " -"seasonal discounts. Odoo has a powerful pricelist feature to support a " -"pricing strategy tailored to your business." -msgstr "" -"Заохочуйте своїх клієнтів та збільшуйте ваші доходи, пропонуючи обмежені за " -"часом знижки або сезонні знижки. Odoo має потужну функцію прайслиста, що " -"підтримує стратегію ціноутворення, адаптовану до вашого бізнесу." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:12 -msgid "" -"To activate the *Pricelists* feature, go to :menuselection:`Point of Sales " -"--> Configuration --> Point of sale` and select your PoS interface." -msgstr "" -"Щоб активувати функцію *прайслистів*, перейдіть до меню " -":menuselection:`Точка продажу --> Налаштування --> Точка продажу` та " -"виберіть свій інтерфейс точки продажу." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:18 -msgid "" -"Choose the pricelists you want to make available in this Point of Sale and " -"define the default pricelist. You can access all your pricelists by clicking" -" on *Pricelists*." -msgstr "" -"Виберіть прайслисти, які ви хочете застосувати в цій точці продажу та " -"визначте прайслист за замовчуванням. Ви можете отримати доступ до всіх своїх" -" *прайслистів*, натиснувши на них." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:23 -msgid "Create a pricelist" -msgstr "Створіть прайслист" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:25 -msgid "" -"By default, you have a *Public Pricelist* to create more, go to " -":menuselection:`Point of Sale --> Catalog --> Pricelists`" -msgstr "" -"За замовчуванням у вас є загальний прайслист, щоб створити більше, перейдіть" -" до :menuselection:`Точки продажу --> Каталог --> Прайслисти`" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:31 -msgid "" -"You can set several criterias to use a specific price: periods, min. " -"quantity (meet a minimum ordered quantity and get a price break), etc. You " -"can also chose to only apply that pricelist on specific products or on the " -"whole range." -msgstr "" -"Ви можете встановити декілька критеріїв використання конкретної ціни: " -"періоди, хв. кількість (задовольняйте мінімальну замовлену кількість та " -"отримуйте перерву на ціну) тощо. Ви також можете вибрати, щоб застосувати " -"цей прайслист лише до певної продукції або всього діапазону." - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:37 -msgid "Using a pricelist in the PoS interface" -msgstr "Використання прайслиста в інтерфейсі точки продажу" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:39 -msgid "" -"You now have a new button above the *Customer* one, use it to instantly " -"select the right pricelist." -msgstr "" -"Тепер у вас є нова кнопка над *Клієнтом*, використовуйте її, щоб миттєво " -"вибрати потрібний прайслист." diff --git a/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po index e597ab722..9616ed7c0 100644 --- a/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po +++ b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po @@ -4,17 +4,16 @@ # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # # Translators: -# Bohdan Lisnenko, 2018 -# Martin Trigaux, 2018 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 # Alina Lisnenko , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 12.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-11-07 15:38+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2018-10-19 08:15+0000\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:47+0000\n" "Last-Translator: Alina Lisnenko , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Ukrainian (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/uk/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" @@ -52,7 +51,7 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/3_way_matching.rst:18 #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/analyze.rst:24 #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/approvals.rst:9 -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:31 +#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:10 #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/create.rst:13 #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/lock_orders.rst:9 #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/reception.rst:14 @@ -698,440 +697,55 @@ msgid "Once approved, the purchase order follows the normal process." msgstr "Після затвердження замовлення на купівлю слідує звичайному процесу." #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:3 -msgid "Control supplier bills" -msgstr "Контроль рахунків постачальника" +msgid "Bill Control" +msgstr "Контроль рахунку" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:5 msgid "" -"The **Purchase** application allows you to manage your purchase orders, " -"incoming products, and vendor bills all seamlessly in one place." +"With Odoo, you can define a setting to help the control of your bills. *Bill" +" Control* lets you choose if the supplier sends you the bill before or after" +" you receive the goods." msgstr "" -"Додаток **Закупівлі** дозволяє вам керувати замовленнями на покупку, " -"вхідними товарами та рахунками постачальників у єдиному місці." -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:8 +#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:12 msgid "" -"If you want to set up a vendor bill control process, the first thing you " -"need to do is to have purchase data in Odoo. Knowing what has been purchased" -" and received is the first step towards understanding your purchase " -"management processes." +"For this feature to work, go to :menuselection:`Purchases --> Configuration " +"--> Settings` and select which way you want to control your bills." msgstr "" -"Якщо ви хочете налаштувати процес контролю над рахунками постачальника, " -"перше, що вам потрібно зробити - це мати дані про покупку в Odoo. Знання " -"того, що було придбано та отримано, є першим кроком до розуміння процесів " -"управління купівлею." -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:13 -msgid "Here is the standard work flow in Odoo:" -msgstr "Ось стандартний робочий процес в Odoo:" +#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:20 +msgid "Change the control policy" +msgstr "" -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:15 +#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:22 msgid "" -"You begin with a **Request for Quotation (RFQ)** to send out to your " -"vendor(s)." +"While the setting above will be your default method of bill control, you can" +" always select which way you want to invoice your product on each product " +"page under the *Purchase* tab." msgstr "" -"Ви починаєте із **запиту на комерційну пропозицію (RFQ)**, щоб надіслати її " -"вашим продавцям." -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:18 +#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:26 msgid "" -"Once the vendor has accepted the RFQ, confirm the RFQ into a **Purchase " -"Order (PO)**." +"You might want to use different settings for different types of products." msgstr "" -"Після того, як постачальник прийняв Запит RFQ, підтвердьте RFQ в " -"**замовленні на купівлю (PO)**. " - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:21 -msgid "" -"Confirming the PO generates an **Incoming Shipment** if you purchased any " -"stockable products." -msgstr "" -"Підтвердження PO створює **вхідну відправку**, якщо ви придбали будь-які " -"запаковані товари." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:24 -msgid "" -"Upon receiving a **Vendor Bill** from your Vendor, validate the bill with " -"products received in the previous step to ensure accuracy." -msgstr "" -"Отримавши **рахунок постачальника**, підтвердьте рахунок за допомогою " -"товарів, отриманих на попередньому кроці, щоб забезпечити точність. " - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:27 -msgid "" -"This process may be done by three different people within the company, or " -"only one." -msgstr "" -"Цей процес може виконуватись трьома різними людьми всередині компанії або " -"лише однією особою." #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:34 -msgid "Installing the Purchase and Inventory applications" -msgstr "Встановлення додатків Закупівлі та Складу" +msgid "Verify your Vendor Bill" +msgstr "" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:36 msgid "" -"From the **Apps** application, search for the **Purchase** module and " -"install it. Due to certain dependencies, installing purchase will " -"automatically install the **Inventory** and **Accounting** applications." +"If you didn’t receive any of your product yet on *Purchase Order* under the " +"*Shipment* tab," msgstr "" -"У **Додатках** виконайте пошук модуля **Купівлі** та встановіть його. " -"Внаслідок певних залежностей, при встановленні купівлі будуть автоматично " -"встановлюватися програми **Складу** та **Бухобліку**." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:41 -msgid "Creating products" -msgstr "Створення товарів" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:43 msgid "" -"Creating products in Odoo is essential for quick and efficient purchasing " -"within Odoo. Simply navigate to the **Products** submenu under **Purchase**," -" and click **Create**." +"Depending on the billing policy defined above. If you're supposed to be " +"billed based on ordered quantity, Odoo will suggest a bill for the number of" +" units ordered. If you're supposed to be billed based on the received " +"quantities, Odoo will suggest a bill for 0 as shown above." msgstr "" -"Створення товарів в Odoo необхідне для швидкої та ефективної покупки в Odoo." -" Просто перейдіть до підменю **Товари** в розділі **Купівля** та натисніть " -"**Створити**." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:50 -msgid "" -"When creating the product, Pay attention to the **Product Type** field, as " -"it is important:" -msgstr "" -"Під час створення товару зверніть увагу на поле **Тип товару**, оскільки це " -"важливо:" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:53 -msgid "" -"Products that are set as **Stockable** or **Consumable** will allow you to " -"keep track of their inventory levels. These options imply stock management " -"and will allow for receiving these kinds of products." -msgstr "" -"Товари, які встановлюються як **Запасні** або **Витратні**, дозволять вам " -"стежити за рівнями їх запасу. Ці параметри передбачають управління запасами " -"та дозволять отримувати такі види продукції." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:58 -msgid "" -"Conversely, products that are set as a **Service** or **Digital Product** " -"will not imply stock management, simply due to the fact that there is no " -"inventory to manage. You will not be able to receive products under either " -"of these designations." -msgstr "" -"І навпаки, товари, які встановлюються як **Послуга** або **Цифровий товар**," -" не будуть керуватися запасами, просто тому, що немає складу для управління." -" Ви не зможете отримувати товари під будь-яким із цих позначень." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:64 -msgid "" -"It is recommended that you create a **Miscellaneous** product for all " -"purchases that occur infrequently and do not require inventory valuation or " -"management. If you create such a product, it is recommend to set the product" -" type to **Service**." -msgstr "" -"Рекомендується створювати товар як **Різне** для всіх покупок, що " -"трапляються нечасто, і не вимагають оцінки інвентаризації або управління. " -"Якщо ви створюєте такий товар, рекомендується встановити тип товару як " -"**Послуга**. " - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:70 -msgid "Managing your Vendor Bills" -msgstr "Управління рахунками постачальника" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:73 -msgid "Purchasing products or services" -msgstr "Закупівля товарів або послуг" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:75 -msgid "" -"From the purchase application, you can create a purchase order with as many " -"products as you need. If the vendor sends you a confirmation or quotation " -"for an order, you may record the order reference number in the **Vendor " -"Reference** field. This will enable you to easily match the PO with the the " -"vendor bill later (as the vendor bill will probably include the Vendor " -"Reference)" -msgstr "" -"З програми покупки ви можете створювати замовлення на купівлю з такою " -"кількістю товарів, якою вам потрібно. Якщо постачальник надсилає вам " -"підтвердження або комерційну пропозицію для замовлення, ви можете записати " -"номер посиланням на замовлення у полі **Референс постачальника**. Це " -"дозволить вам легко узгодити замовлення з рахунком постачальника пізніше " -"(оскільки рахунок постачальника, ймовірно, включатиме посилання " -"постачальника)" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:85 -msgid "" -"Validate the purchase order and receive the products from the **Inventory** " -"application." -msgstr "" -"Підтвердіть замовлення на купівлю та отримайте товари з програми **Склад**." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:89 -msgid "Receiving Products" -msgstr "Прийом товару" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:91 -msgid "" -"If you purchased any stockable products that you manage the inventory of, " -"you will need to receive the products from the **Inventory** application " -"after you confirm a purchase order. From the **Inventory** dashboard, you " -"should see a button linking you directly to the transfer of products. This " -"button is outlined in red below:" -msgstr "" -"Якщо ви придбали будь-які товари, які можна запакувати, якими ви керуєте на " -"складі, вам потрібно буде отримати товари з програми **Склад** після " -"підтвердження замовлення на купівлю. На інформаційній панелі **Склад** ви " -"побачите кнопку, яка зв'язує вас безпосередньо з переміщенням товарів. Ця " -"кнопка наведена червоним кольором нижче:" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:100 -msgid "" -"Navigating this route will take you to a list of all orders awaiting to be " -"received." -msgstr "" -"Переміщення по цьому маршруту приведе вас до списку всіх замовлень, які " -"очікують на отримання." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:106 -msgid "" -"If you have a lot of awaiting orders, apply a filter using the search bar in" -" the upper right. With this search bar, you may filter based on the " -"**Vendor** (or **Partner**), the product, or the source document, also known" -" as the reference of your purchase order. You also have the capability to " -"group the orders by different criteria under **Group By**. Selecting an item" -" from this list will open the following screen where you then will receive " -"the products." -msgstr "" -"Якщо у вас багато очікуваних замовлень, застосуйте фільтр за допомогою " -"панелі пошуку у верхньому правому куті. За допомогою цієї панелі пошуку ви " -"можете фільтрувати на основі **Постачальника** (або **Партнера**), товару " -"або вихідного документа, також відомого як посилання на ваше замовлення на " -"купівлю. Ви також можете групувати замовлення за різними критеріями **В " -"групі**. Вибравши елемент із цього списку, відкриється наступний екран, де " -"ви отримаєте товари." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:117 -msgid "Purchasing **Service** products does not trigger a delivery order." -msgstr "Закупівлі товарів **Послуги** не викликають замовлення на доставку." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:120 -msgid "Managing Vendor Bills" -msgstr "Управління рахунками постачальників" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:122 -msgid "" -"When you receive a **Vendor Bill** for a previous purchase, be sure to " -"record it in the **Purchases** application under the **Control Menu**. You " -"need to create a new vendor bill even if you already registered a purchase " -"order." -msgstr "" -"Коли ви отримаєте **Рахунок постачальника** за попередню купівлю, " -"обов'язково зареєструйте його в додатку **Купівлі** в **Меню Контроль**. Вам" -" потрібно створити новий рахунок постачальника, навіть якщо ви вже " -"зареєстрували замовлення на купівлі." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:130 -msgid "" -"The first thing you will need to do upon creating a **Vendor Bill** is to " -"select the appropriate **Vendor** as this will also pull up any associated " -"accounting or pricelist information. From there, you can choose to specify " -"any one or multiple purchase orders to populate the vendor bill with. When " -"you select a purchase order from the list, Odoo will pull any uninvoiced " -"products associated to that purchase order and automatically populate that " -"information below. If you are having a hard time finding the appropriate " -"vendor bill, you may search through the list by inputting the vendor " -"reference number or your internal purchase order number." -msgstr "" -"Перше, що вам потрібно буде зробити при створенні **Рахунка постачальника** " -"- вибрати відповідного **Постачальника**, оскільки це також потягне за собою" -" будь-яку відповідну інформацію про бухоблік або прайс-лист. Звідти можна " -"вказати один або кілька замовлень на купівлю, щоб заповнити рахунок " -"постачальника. Коли ви виберете замовлення на купівлю зі списку, Odoo " -"витягує всі невикористані товари, пов'язані з цим замовленням на купівлю, і " -"автоматично заповнить цю інформацію нижче. Якщо вам важко знайти відповідний" -" рахунок постачальника, ви можете здійснити пошук у списку, ввівши номер " -"референсу постачальника або внутрішній номер замовлення на купівлю." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:144 -msgid "" -"While the invoice is in draft state, you can make any modifications you need" -" (i.e. remove or add product lines, modify quantities, and change prices)." -msgstr "" -"Хоча рахунок-фактура знаходиться в стані чернетки, ви можете внести будь-які" -" зміни, які вам потрібні (скажімо, видалити або додати рядки товарів, " -"змінити їх кількість та змінити ціни)." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:149 -msgid "Your vendor may send you several bills for the same purchase order if:" -msgstr "" -"Ваш постачальник може надіслати вам кілька рахунків за те саме замовлення, " -"якщо:" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:151 -msgid "" -"Your vendor is in back-order and is sending you invoices as they ship the " -"products." -msgstr "" -"Ваш постачальник знаходиться у зворотному порядку і надсилає вам рахунки-" -"фактури, коли вони відправляють товару." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:154 -msgid "Your vendor is sending you a partial bill or asking for a deposit." -msgstr "Ваш постачальник надсилає вам частковий рахунок або запит на депозит." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:156 -msgid "" -"Every time you record a new vendor bill, Odoo will automatically populate " -"the product quantities based on what has been received from the vendor. If " -"this value is showing a zero, this means that you have not yet received this" -" product and simply serves as a reminder that the product is not in hand and" -" you may need to inquire further into this. At any point in time, before you" -" validate the vendor bill, you may override this zero quantity." -msgstr "" -"Щоразу, коли ви записуєте новий рахунок постачальника, Odoo буде автоматично" -" заповнювати кількість товару на основі того, що було отримано від " -"постачальника. Якщо це значення показує нуль, це означає, що ви ще не " -"отримали цей товар, і просто слугує нагадуванням про те, що товар не " -"знаходиться в наявності, і вам, можливо, доведеться додатково дізнаватися " -"про це. У будь-який момент часу, перш ніж перевіряти рахунок постачальника, " -"ви можете перевизначити цю нульову кількість." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:165 -msgid "Vendor Bill Matching" -msgstr "Відповідність рахунка постачальника" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:168 -msgid "What to do if your vendor bill does not match what you received" -msgstr "" -"Що робити, якщо рахунок вашого постачальника не відповідає тому, що ви " -"отримали" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:170 -msgid "" -"If the bill you receive from the vendor has different quantities than what " -"Odoo automatically populates as quantities, this could be due to several " -"reasons:" -msgstr "" -"Якщо рахунок, який ви отримуєте від постачальника, має кількості, які не " -"відповідають автоматичному заповненню Odoo, це може бути пов'язано з " -"кількома причинами:" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:174 -msgid "" -"The vendor is incorrectly charging you for products and/or services that you" -" have not ordered." -msgstr "" -"Постачальник неправильно вказує товари та/або послуги, які ви не замовляли." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:177 -msgid "" -"The vendor is billing you for products that you might not have received yet," -" as the invoicing control may be based on ordered or received quantities." -msgstr "" -"Постачальник виставляє рахунки за товари, які ви, можливо, ще не отримали, " -"оскільки контроль за рахунками-фактурами може базуватися на замовлених або " -"отриманих кількостях." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:181 -msgid "Or the vendor did not bill you for previously purchased products." -msgstr "Або постачальник не виставляв рахунки за раніше придбані товари." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:183 -msgid "" -"In these instances it is recommended that you verify that the bill, and any " -"associated purchase order to the vendor, are accurate and that you " -"understand what you have ordered and what you have already received." -msgstr "" -"У цих випадках рекомендується перевірити, чи є рахунок та будь-який " -"пов'язаний з ним порядок купівлі правильним, і ви розумієте, що ви замовили " -"та що ви вже отримали." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:187 -msgid "" -"If you are unable to find a purchase order related to a vendor bill, this " -"could be due to one of a few reasons:" -msgstr "" -"Якщо ви не можете знайти замовлення на купівлю, пов'язане з рахунком " -"продавця, це може бути пов'язано з однією з кількох причин." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:190 -msgid "" -"The vendor has already invoiced you for this purchase order, therefore it is" -" not going to appear anywhere in the selection." -msgstr "" -"Постачальник вже виставив рахунок за це замовлення, тому він не буде " -"з'являтися в будь-якому місці вибору." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:193 -msgid "" -"Someone in the company forgot to record a purchase order for this vendor." -msgstr "" -"Хтось у компанії забув записати замовлення на купівлю для цього " -"постачальника." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:196 -msgid "Or the vendor is charging you for something you did not order." -msgstr "Або постачальник завантажує вас за тим, що ви не замовляли." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:199 -msgid "How product quantities are managed" -msgstr "Яким чином регулюється кількість товару" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:201 -msgid "" -"By default, services are managed based on ordered quantities, while " -"stockables and consumables are managed based on received quantities." -msgstr "" -"За замовчуванням послуги керуються на основі замовлених кількостей, а запаси" -" та витратні матеріали управляються на основі отриманих кількостей." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:204 -msgid "" -"If you need to manage products based on ordered quantities over received " -"quantities, you will need to enable **Debug Mode** from the **About Odoo** " -"information. Once debug mode is activated, select the product(s) you wish to" -" modify, and you should see a new field appear, labeled **Control Purchase " -"Bills**." -msgstr "" -"Якщо вам потрібно керувати товарами на основі замовлених кількостей над " -"отриманими кількостями, вам потрібно буде включити **Режим відстеження** з " -"інформації **Про Odoo**. Після активації режиму налагодження виберіть " -"товари, які ви хочете змінити, і ви побачите нове поле, яке " -"відображатиметься під назвою **Контроль рахунків закупівлі**." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:213 -msgid "" -"You can then change the default management method for the selected product " -"to be based on either:" -msgstr "" -"Потім ви можете змінити метод керування за замовчуванням для вибраного " -"товару на основі:" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:216 -msgid "Ordered quantities" -msgstr "По замовленій кількості" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:218 -msgid "Received quantities" -msgstr "отримані кількості" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:221 -msgid "Batch Billing" -msgstr "Групова оплата" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:223 -msgid "" -"When creating a vendor bill and selecting the appropriate purchase order, " -"you may continue to select additional purchase orders and Odoo will add the " -"additional line items from that purchase order. If you have not deleted the " -"previous line items from the first purchase order the bill will be linked to" -" all the appropriate purchase orders." -msgstr "" -"Під час створення рахунку постачальника та вибору відповідного замовлення на" -" купівлю ви можете продовжувати вибирати додаткові замовлення на купівлю, і " -"Odoo додасть додаткові позиції з цього замовлення. Якщо ви не видалили " -"попередні позиції з першого порядку купівлі, рахунок буде пов'язаний з усіма" -" відповідними замовленнями на купівлю." #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/cancel.rst:3 msgid "Cancel a purchase order" @@ -1352,8 +966,8 @@ msgstr "Постачальник" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/create.rst:0 msgid "You can find a vendor by its Name, TIN, Email or Internal Reference." msgstr "" -"Ви можете знайти продавця за своїм ім'ям, TIN, електронною поштою або " -"внутрішньою довідкою." +"Ви можете знайти продавця за своїм ім'ям, ІПН, електронною поштою або " +"внутрішнім посиланням." #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/create.rst:0 msgid "Vendor Reference" @@ -1365,10 +979,10 @@ msgid "" "matching when you receive the products as this reference is usually written " "on the delivery order sent by your vendor." msgstr "" -"Референс замовлення на продаж або пропозицію від постачальника. Він " +"Посилання на замовлення на продаж або пропозицію вашого постачальника. Він " "використовується для виконання відповідності, коли ви отримуєте товари, " -"оскільки це посилання, як правило, написано в замовленні на доставку, " -"надісланого вашим постачальником." +"оскільки це посилання, як правило, написано в посиланні на доставку, " +"надісланої вашим постачальником." #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/create.rst:0 msgid "Order Date" @@ -1379,8 +993,8 @@ msgid "" "Depicts the date where the Quotation should be validated and converted into " "a purchase order." msgstr "" -"Зображає дату, коли комерційна пропозиція повинна бути перевірена та " -"перетворена в замовлення на купівлю." +"Визначає дату, коли комерційна пропозиція повинна бути підтвердженою та " +"перетвореною у замовлення на купівлю." #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/create.rst:0 msgid "Source Document" @@ -1396,11 +1010,11 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/create.rst:0 msgid "Deliver To" -msgstr "Доставити до" +msgstr "Доставити на" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/create.rst:0 msgid "This will determine operation type of incoming shipment" -msgstr "Це визначатиме тип операції вхідної відправки" +msgstr "Це визначатиме тип операції вхідної доставки" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/create.rst:0 msgid "Drop Ship Address" @@ -1432,8 +1046,9 @@ msgid "" "International Commercial Terms are a series of predefined commercial terms " "used in international transactions." msgstr "" -"Міжнародні комерційні умови - це серія заздалегідь визначених комерційних " -"умов, що використовуються в міжнародних операціях." +"Міжнародні комерційні умови, комплект міжнародних правил з тлумачення " +"найбільш широко використовуваних торговельних термінів в галузі міжнародної " +"торгівлі." #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/create.rst:32 msgid "View *Request for Quotation* in our Online Demonstration" @@ -1878,7 +1493,7 @@ msgstr "Однак, якщо це повідомлення про блокува #: ../../purchase/purchases/tender.rst:3 msgid "Purchase Agreements" -msgstr "Угоди про придбання" +msgstr "Угоди про купівлю" #: ../../purchase/purchases/tender/blanket_orders.rst:3 msgid "Manage Blanket Orders" @@ -2133,14 +1748,14 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../purchase/replenishment/flows/compute_date.rst:28 msgid "Customer Lead Time" -msgstr "Термін поставки" +msgstr "Термін доставки клієнту" #: ../../purchase/replenishment/flows/compute_date.rst:30 msgid "" "The customer lead time, on the other hand, is the time you need to deliver " "the product to your customer." msgstr "" -"Термін виконання замовника, з іншого боку, є часом, який потрібно доставити " +"Термін доставки клієнту, з іншого боку, є часом, який потрібно доставити " "товар до вашого клієнта." #: ../../purchase/replenishment/flows/compute_date.rst:33 @@ -2481,8 +2096,8 @@ msgstr "" " За замовчуванням в Odoo, планувальники будуть запускатися щоночі о 00:00." #: ../../purchase/replenishment/flows/setup_stock_rule.rst:33 -msgid "See also: :doc:`../../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers`" -msgstr "Дивіться також: :doc:`../../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers`" +msgid "See also: :doc:`../../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers`" +msgstr "" #: ../../purchase/replenishment/flows/setup_stock_rule.rst:35 msgid "" diff --git a/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..1dfcf8e91 --- /dev/null +++ b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po @@ -0,0 +1,415 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2015-TODAY, Odoo S.A. +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +# Translators: +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Alina Lisnenko , 2019 +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-11-20 09:24+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Alina Lisnenko , 2019\n" +"Language-Team: Ukrainian (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/uk/)\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Language: uk\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n % 1 == 0 && n % 10 == 1 && n % 100 != 11 ? 0 : n % 1 == 0 && n % 10 >= 2 && n % 10 <= 4 && (n % 100 < 12 || n % 100 > 14) ? 1 : n % 1 == 0 && (n % 10 ==0 || (n % 10 >=5 && n % 10 <=9) || (n % 100 >=11 && n % 100 <=14 )) ? 2: 3);\n" + +#: ../../quality.rst:5 +msgid "Quality" +msgstr "Якість" + +#: ../../quality/alert.rst:3 +msgid "Alert" +msgstr "Попередження" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:3 +msgid "Generate a Quality Alert from a Manufacturing Order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Speaking of manufacturing orders, you have two different situations to " +"consider in Odoo. Those two will result in two different processes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:8 +msgid "You work with a simple manufacturing flow;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:10 +msgid "You work with a complex manufacturing flow that includes routings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:13 +msgid "Simple manufacturing flow" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:15 +msgid "" +"If you work with simple manufacturing orders, the *Quality Alerts* will be " +"launched from the manufacturing order itself. When manufacturing a product " +"for which you need to process quality controls, a button *Quality Alert* " +"will appear on the top of your manufacturing order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:23 +msgid "" +"By clicking on the button, you can specify the quality problem that arose " +"during the process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:29 +msgid "" +"If one of the quality checks failed, the button will be highlighted on the " +"document. If not, the button won’t be highlighted." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:36 ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:50 +msgid "Manufacturing Flow with Routings" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:38 +msgid "" +"If you work with routings defined on your manufacturing orders, the quality " +"alerts will be launched directly from the work orders on which the quality " +"checks took place." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:48 +msgid "" +"Then, a button *Quality Alert* will be available from the work order view. " +"When you click on the button, you can specify the quality problem that " +"appeared during the process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:3 +msgid "Generate a Quality Alert from a Transfer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:6 +msgid "Use the Quality Alert" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Every time you perform some *Quality Checks* on a transfer, a *Quality " +"Alert* button appears. You can always use it. The button is automatically " +"highlighted once you have a failed quality check for the transfer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:16 +msgid "" +"If you click on that *Quality Alert* button, you can specify what was the " +"problem with the product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:22 +msgid "" +"The *Quality Alert* that is created from the transfer can be found via the " +"button appearing on the top right corner of the transfer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:28 +msgid "" +"You can also access all your *Quality Alerts* via the menu, accessible under" +" *Control*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks.rst:3 +msgid "Checks" +msgstr "Чеки" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:3 +msgid "Perform Quality Checks on Manufacturing Orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:5 +msgid "" +"There are two different situations to consider and that will differ in Odoo " +"processes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:8 +msgid "You work with simple manufacturing flows;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:10 +msgid "" +"You work with complex manufacturing flows that are represented by the use of" +" routings in Odoo." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:13 +msgid "Simple Manufacturing Flow" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:16 +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:53 +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:6 +msgid "Create the Quality Control Point" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:18 +msgid "" +"To create a quality control point, open the quality app and go to *Control >" +" Control Points*. There, hit create. Make sure to select *Manufacturing* as " +"operation and choose the type of quality check you want to perform." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:27 +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:69 +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:17 +msgid "Process the Quality Check" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:29 +msgid "" +"Once your *Quality Control Point* has been created, you can create a " +"manufacturing order for your product. Now, and before marking the " +"manufacturing as done, you can register the *Quality Checks*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:39 +msgid "" +"Once you have performed your quality checks, you can find them via the " +"*Quality Checks* button available on the manufacturing order form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:46 +msgid "" +"If you want to access all your quality checks, you can do this by opening " +"the quality checks menu, under quality control." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:55 +msgid "" +"If you want to create a *Quality Control Point*, open the *Quality* app and " +"go to *Control > Control Points*. Then, click on create. Make sure to select" +" *Manufacturing* as operation and select the work order operation on which " +"the quality check should be performed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:64 +msgid "" +"Choosing the work order operation is necessary if you want the quality " +"checks to be performed in the work orders. After that, you can choose the " +"type of quality check." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:71 +msgid "" +"Once your *Quality Control Point* has been configured, create a " +"manufacturing order for your product. You have to plan it if you want to " +"generate the necessary work orders." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:78 +msgid "" +"Now, process the work order and your quality check will appear. In this " +"example, the quality check requests to enter the serial number of the Table " +"Top component." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:3 +msgid "Perform Quality Checks on Transfers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:8 +msgid "" +"To create a *Quality Control Point*, open the *Quality* application. Then, " +"go to *Quality Control > Control Points > Create*. Now, you can define the " +"quality control point you want to apply to a specific product. Don’t forget " +"to select a transfer operation type." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:19 +msgid "" +"Let’s say that we will receive a laptop. First, create a planned receipt for" +" the product. Then, on the receipt, you will see a *Quality Checks* button " +"that appears to proceed to the quality check you configured before." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:27 +msgid "" +"By clicking on it, the instruction set on the quality control point will be " +"displayed and will require the check value." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:33 +msgid "" +"Once the quality check is done, you can find it linked to the corresponding " +"transfer and access it by clicking on the button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:39 +msgid "" +"But, if the quality check failed, the stat button will appear in red " +"(instead of green) and Odoo will suggest you to create a *Quality Alert* by " +"highlighting the corresponding button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:46 +msgid "" +"The quality checks can also be found in the *Quality* application by opening" +" the *Quality Checks* menu, under *Quality Control*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control.rst:3 +msgid "Control" +msgstr "Контроль" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:3 +msgid "Define Quality Control Points" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:6 +msgid "Quality Control Points" +msgstr "Пункти контролю якості" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:8 +msgid "" +"If it is the first *Quality Control Point* that you create, know that you " +"need to open the *Quality* app. Then, go to *Quality Control > Control " +"Points*. Once there, you have to define the product on which the quality " +"control will take place, as well as the operation at which it should take " +"place." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:14 +msgid "" +"The *Quality Control Points* can take place during transfers or during the " +"manufacturing process of the products. If you work with routings on your " +"*Bill of Materials*, you have to precise at which step of the manufacturing " +"process the quality control point should be applied." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:19 +msgid "" +"The control type defines at which frequency the quality checks should take " +"place:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:22 +msgid "" +"All Operations: all the operations will generate quality checks to perform;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:24 +msgid "" +"Randomly: the quality checks will only be performed on x% of the operation. " +"You must define the percentage yourself, on the control point;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:26 +msgid "" +"Periodically: the quality checks will be performed periodically. The " +"periodicity is based on the period you define (once a day, once a week)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:32 +msgid "Quality Control Point Types" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:34 +msgid "" +"Now that the rest is configured, you need to define the type of quality " +"check." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:38 +msgid "" +"Some of the types are only available with the manufacturing application." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:41 +msgid "Text" +msgstr "Текст" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:43 +msgid "" +"This control point type allows you to give instructions to your workers " +"during the transfer, or the manufacturing process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:56 +msgid "Take a Picture" +msgstr "Зробити зображення" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:58 +msgid "" +"This control point type asks you to take a picture of the product in a " +"transfer, or when manufacturing it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:71 +msgid "Pass-Fail" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:73 +msgid "" +"This type of control point requires that you specify if the products pass or" +" fail a specific text. It can be applied for both transfers or manufacturing" +" orders." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:80 +msgid "" +"For this kind of control point type, you have the possibility to define a " +"failure message that will give instructions to follow in case of quality " +"check failure." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:94 +msgid "Take a Measure" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:96 +msgid "" +"This control point type requires you to enter the product’s measurements " +"during a transfer, or during the manufacturing process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:102 +msgid "" +"For this kind of control point type, you also have the possibility to define" +" a failure message that will give instructions to the worker." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:115 +msgid "Register Consumed Materials" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:117 +msgid "" +"This control point type requires you register the component serial/lot " +"numbers during the manufacturing process. It is only available if you work " +"with routings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:128 +msgid "Register By-Products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:130 +msgid "" +"With this control point type, you must register the serial/lot number of the" +" by-products that are manufactured. It is also only available with routings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:141 +msgid "Print Label" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:143 +msgid "" +"This control point type allows you to print labels to add to the product " +"during the manufacturing process." +msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po index c16007235..e6e3d958c 100644 --- a/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po +++ b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po @@ -3,14 +3,18 @@ # This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # +# Translators: +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Alina Lisnenko , 2019 +# #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 11.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-10-19 10:03+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" -"Last-Translator: Alina Lisnenko , 2018\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:47+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Alina Lisnenko , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Ukrainian (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/uk/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -945,24 +949,39 @@ msgid "" " to your business. A pricelist is a list of prices or price rules that Odoo " "searches to determine the suggested price. You can set several critarias to " "use a specific price: periods, min. sold quantity (meet a minimum order " -"quantity and get a price break), etc. As pricelists only suggest prices, " -"they can be overridden by users completing sales orders. Choose your pricing" -" strategy from :menuselection:`Sales --> Settings`." +"quantity and get a price break), etc." msgstr "" -"Odoo має потужну функцію прайс-листа, що підтримує стратегію ціноутворення " -"та адаптування до вашого бізнесу. Прайс-лист - це список цін або правил цін," -" які Odoo шукає для визначення рекомендованої ціни. Ви можете встановити " -"кілька критеріїв для використання конкретної ціни: періоди, мін. продана " -"кількість (задовольняйте мінімальну кількість замовлення та отримуйте " -"перерву на ціну) тощо. Оскільки прайс-листи лише пропонують ціни, їх можна " -"скасувати користувачам, які виконують замовлення на продаж. Виберіть " -"стратегію ціноутворення з :menuselection:`Продажі --> Налаштування`." -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:16 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:9 +msgid "" +"As pricelists only suggest prices, they can be overridden by vendors " +"completing sales orders. Choose your pricing strategy from " +":menuselection:`Sales --> Settings`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:18 +msgid "" +"*A single sale price per product :* doesn't let you adapt prices, it use " +"default product price ;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:19 +msgid "" +"*Different prices per customer segment :* you will set several prices per " +"products ;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:20 +msgid "" +"*Advanced pricing based on formula :* will let you apply discounts, margins " +"and roundings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:23 msgid "Several prices per product" msgstr "Кілька цін на товар" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:18 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:25 msgid "" "To apply several prices per product, select *Different prices per customer " "segment* in :menuselection:`Sales --> Settings`. Then open the *Sales* tab " @@ -973,18 +992,18 @@ msgstr "" "відкрийте вкладку *Продажі* у формі деталей товару. Ви можете вирішити " "наступні стратегії." -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:23 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:30 msgid "Prices per customer segment" msgstr "Ціни на сегмент клієнта" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:25 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:32 msgid "" "Create pricelists for your customer segments: e.g. registered, premium, etc." msgstr "" "Створіть вартість для ваших сегментів клієнтів: наприклад, зареєстрований, " "преміум та ін." -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:30 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:37 msgid "" "The default pricelist applied to any new customer is *Public Pricelist*. To " "segment your customers, open the customer detail form and change the *Sale " @@ -995,17 +1014,17 @@ msgstr "" "відкрийте детальну форму замовника та змініть *Продажну вартість* на вкладці" " *Продажі та покупки*." -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:38 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:45 msgid "Temporary prices" msgstr "Тимчасові ціни" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:40 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:47 msgid "Apply deals for bank holidays, etc. Enter start and end dates dates." msgstr "" "Застосуйте угоди для святкових днів та ін. Введіть дати початку та " "завершення." -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:46 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:53 msgid "" "Make sure you have default prices set in the pricelist outside of the deals " "period. Otherwise you might have issues once the period over." @@ -1013,11 +1032,11 @@ msgstr "" "Переконайтеся, що ціни за замовчуванням встановлені в прайс-листі за межами " "періоду угод. Інакше ви можете мати проблеми після закінчення періоду. " -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:50 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:57 msgid "Prices per minimum quantity" msgstr "Ціни за мінімальну кількість" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:56 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:63 msgid "" "The prices order does not matter. The system is smart and applies first " "prices that match the order date and/or the minimal quantities." @@ -1025,28 +1044,22 @@ msgstr "" "Цінове замовлення не має значення. Система розумна і застосовує перші ціни, " "які відповідають даті замовлення та/або мінімальним кількостям. " -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:60 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:67 msgid "Discounts, margins, roundings" msgstr "Знижки, маржа, округлення" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:62 -msgid "" -"The third option allows to set price change rules. Changes can be relative " -"to the product list/catalog price, the product cost price, or to another " -"pricelist. Changes are calculated via discounts or surcharges and can be " -"forced to fit within floor (minumum margin) and ceilings (maximum margins). " -"Prices can be rounded to the nearest cent/dollar or multiple of either " -"(nearest 5 cents, nearest 10 dollars)." -msgstr "" -"Третій варіант дозволяє встановити правила зміни ціни. Зміни можуть бути " -"відносно списку товарів/цінових каталогів, собівартості продукції або іншого" -" прайс-листа. Зміни розраховуються за допомогою знижок або надбавок, і вони " -"можуть бути розміщені в межах нижнього порогу (мінімальна маржа) та " -"верхнього(максимальна маржа). Ціни можуть бути округлені до найближчої " -"копійки/гривні або кратні (до 5 копійок, найближчі 10 гривень). " - #: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:69 msgid "" +"*Advanced pricing based on formula* allows to set price change rules. " +"Changes can be relative to the product list/catalog price, the product cost " +"price, or to another pricelist. Changes are calculated via discounts or " +"surcharges and can be forced to fit within floor (minumum margin) and " +"ceilings (maximum margins). Prices can be rounded to the nearest cent/dollar" +" or multiple of either (nearest 5 cents, nearest 10 dollars)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:76 +msgid "" "Once installed go to :menuselection:`Sales --> Configuration --> Pricelists`" " (or :menuselection:`Website Admin --> Catalog --> Pricelists` if you use " "e-Commerce)." @@ -1055,7 +1068,7 @@ msgstr "" " Прайслисти` (або :menuselection:`Адміністратор веб-сайту --> Каталог --> " "Прайслисти` якщо ви використовуєте e-Commerce)." -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:77 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:84 msgid "" "Each pricelist item can be associated to either all products, to a product " "internal category (set of products) or to a specific product. Like in second" @@ -1065,7 +1078,7 @@ msgstr "" "внутрішньою категорією товару (набором продуктів) або з певним товаром. Як і" " в другому варіанті, ви можете встановити дати та мінімальні кількості." -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:84 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:91 msgid "" "Once again the system is smart. If a rule is set for a particular item and " "another one for its category, Odoo will take the rule of the item." @@ -1073,42 +1086,42 @@ msgstr "" "Ще раз система є розумною. Якщо для певного елемента встановлено правило, а " "інший - для його категорії, Odoo приймає правило елемента." -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:86 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:93 msgid "Make sure at least one pricelist item covers all your products." msgstr "" "Переконайтеся, що принаймні один пункт прайс-листа охоплює всі ваші товару. " -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:88 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:95 msgid "There are 3 modes of computation: fix price, discount & formula." msgstr "Існує 3 режими обчислення: фіксована ціна, знижка та формула." -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:93 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:100 msgid "Here are different price settings made possible thanks to formulas." msgstr "Ось різні настройки цін, які стали можливими завдяки формулам." -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:96 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:103 msgid "Discounts with roundings" msgstr "Знижки з округленнями" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:98 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:105 msgid "e.g. 20% discounts with prices rounded up to 9.99." msgstr "напр. 20% знижки з цінами, округленими до 9.99." -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:104 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:111 msgid "Costs with markups (retail)" msgstr "Витрати з націнками (роздріб)" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:106 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:113 msgid "e.g. sale price = 2*cost (100% markup) with $5 of minimal margin." msgstr "" "наприклад, ціна продажу = 2*вартість (100% розцінка) з 5 гривень мінімальної" " маржі." -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:112 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:119 msgid "Prices per country" msgstr "Ціни на країну" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:113 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:120 msgid "" "Pricelists can be set by countries group. Any new customer recorded in Odoo " "gets a default pricelist, i.e. the first one in the list matching the " @@ -1120,23 +1133,23 @@ msgstr "" "списку, що відповідає країні. Якщо жодна країна не встановлена для клієнта, " "Odoo бере перший прайс-лист без будь-якої групи-країн." -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:116 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:123 msgid "The default pricelist can be replaced when creating a sales order." msgstr "" "За замовчуванням прайс-лист можна замінити при створенні замовлення на " "продаж." -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:118 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:125 msgid "You can change the pricelists sequence by drag & drop in list view." msgstr "" "Ви можете змінювати послідовність прайс-листів за допомогою перетягування у " "вигляді списку. " -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:121 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:128 msgid "Compute and show discount % to customers" msgstr "Обчисліть та покажіть відсоток знижки покупцям" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:123 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:130 msgid "" "In case of discount, you can show the public price and the computed discount" " % on printed sales orders and in your eCommerce catalog. To do so:" @@ -1145,7 +1158,7 @@ msgstr "" "знижки на друковані замовлення на продаж та у каталозі електронної комерції." " Робіть так:" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:125 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:132 msgid "" "Check *Allow discounts on sales order lines* in :menuselection:`Sales --> " "Configuration --> Settings --> Quotations & Sales --> Discounts`." @@ -1154,15 +1167,15 @@ msgstr "" ":menuselection:`Продажі --> Налаштування --> Налаштування --> Комерційні " "пропозиції та продажі --> Знижки`." -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:126 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:133 msgid "Apply the option in the pricelist setup form." msgstr "Застосовуйте цю опцію у формі встановлення прайс-листа." -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:133 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:140 msgid ":doc:`currencies`" msgstr ":doc:`currencies`" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:134 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:141 msgid ":doc:`../../../ecommerce/maximizing_revenue/pricing`" msgstr ":doc:`../../../ecommerce/maximizing_revenue/pricing`" @@ -1282,10 +1295,735 @@ msgstr "" "додайте \"/ ID\" в кінці заголовку стовпця (наприклад, для атрибутів товару:" " атрибути товару / атрибут / ID товару)." +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:3 +msgid "Using product variants" +msgstr "Використання варіантів товару" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Product variants are used to manage products having different variations, " +"like size, color, etc. It allows managing the product at the template level " +"(for all variations) and at the variant level (specific attributes)." +msgstr "" +"Варіанти товару використовуються для управління товарами, що мають різні " +"варіанти, наприклад розмір, колір тощо. Це дозволяє керувати товаром на " +"рівні шаблону (для всіх варіантів) та на рівні варіантів (специфічні " +"атрибути)." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:10 +msgid "" +"As an example, a company selling t-shirts may have the following product:" +msgstr "Наприклад, компанія, що продає футболки, може мати такий товар:" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:13 +msgid "B&C T-shirt" +msgstr "Футболка B&C" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:15 +msgid "Sizes: S, M, L, XL, XXL" +msgstr "Розміри: S, M, L, XL, XXL" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:16 +msgid "Colors: Blue, Red, White, Black" +msgstr "Кольори: синій, червоний, білий, чорний" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:18 +msgid "" +"In this example, **B&C T-Shirt** is called the product template and **B&C " +"T-Shirt, S, Blue** is a variant. Sizes and color are **attributes**." +msgstr "" +"У цьому прикладі **футболок B&C** називається шаблоном товару, а **футболка " +"B&C, S**, синій - це варіант. Розміри та колір є **атрибутами**." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:22 +msgid "" +"The above example has a total of 20 different products (5 sizes x 4 colors)." +" Each one of these products has its own inventory, sales, etc." +msgstr "" +"У наведеному вище прикладі в цілому 20 різних товарів (5 розмірів на 4 " +"кольори). Кожен з цих товарів має власну інвентаризацію, продаж та ін." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:26 +msgid "Impact of variants" +msgstr "Вплив варіантів" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:28 +msgid "" +"**Barcode**: the code and barcode is associated to a variant, not the " +"template. Every variant may have its own barcode / SKU." +msgstr "" +"**Штрих-код**: код та штрих-код асоціюються з варіантом, а не з шаблоном. " +"Кожен варіант може мати свій штрих-код / ​​SKU." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:31 +msgid "" +"**Price**: every product variant has its own public price that is computed " +"based on the template price ($20) with an optional extra for every variant " +"(+$3 for color red). However, you can define pricelist rules that apply on " +"the template or the variant." +msgstr "" +"**Ціна**: кожен варіант товару має свою публічну ціну, яка обчислюється на " +"основі ціни шаблону ($ 20) за додатковим аксесуаром для кожного варіанта (+ " +"3 дол. США за червоний колір). Тим не менше, ви можете визначити цінові " +"правила, які застосовуються до шаблону або варіанту." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:36 +msgid "" +"**Inventory**: the inventory is managed by product variant. You don't own " +"t-shirts, you only own \"T-shirts, S, Red\", or \"T-Shirts, M, Blue\". For " +"information purpose, on the product template form, you get the inventory " +"that is the sum of every variant. (but the actual inventory is computed by " +"variant)" +msgstr "" +"**Інвентаризація**: інвентаризація керується варіантом товару. Ви не " +"володієте футболками, у вас є тільки \"Футболки, S, червоний\", або " +"\"Футболки, M, синій\". Для інформаційного призначення, у формі шаблону " +"товару ви отримуєте інвентаризацію, яка є сумою кожного варіанту (але " +"фактичний інвентаризація обчислюється за варіантом)." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:42 +msgid "" +"**Picture**: the picture is related to the variant, every variation of a " +"product may have its own primary picture." +msgstr "" +"**Зображення**: картинка пов'язана з варіантом, кожна варіація товару може " +"мати свою основну картину." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:45 +msgid "" +"**Other fields**: most of the other fields belongs to the product template. " +"If you update them, it updates automatically all the variants. (example: " +"Income Account, Taxes)" +msgstr "" +"**Інші поля**: більшість інших полів належить до шаблону товару. Якщо ви їх " +"оновлюєте, він автоматично оновлює всі варіанти (приклад: прибуток, " +"податки)." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:50 +msgid "Should you use variants?" +msgstr "Чи варто використовувати варіанти?" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:53 +msgid "When should you use variants?" +msgstr "Коли слід використовувати варіанти?" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:55 +msgid "Using variants has the following impacts:" +msgstr "Використання варіантів має такі наслідки:" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:57 +msgid "" +"**eCommerce**: in your online shop, the customer will only see product " +"templates in the catalog page. Once the visitor click on such a product, he " +"will have options to choose amongst the variants (colors, sizes, …)" +msgstr "" +"**Електронна комерція**: у вашому інтернет-магазині клієнт побачить лише " +"шаблони товарів на сторінці каталогу. Коли відвідувач натискає на такий " +"товар, він матиме варіанти вибору серед варіантів (кольори, розміри, ...)" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:62 +msgid "" +"**Manufacturing**: Using variants allows to define only one bill of material" +" for a product template and slight variations for some of the variants. " +"Example: instead of creating a Bill of Material for \"T-shirt, Red, S\", you" +" create a bill of material for \"T-shirt\" and add some lines that are " +"specific to the dimension S, and other lines specific to the color Red." +msgstr "" +"**Виробництво**: Використання варіантів дозволяє визначити лише одну " +"специфікацію для шаблону товару та невеликі варіації для деяких варіантів. " +"Приклад: замість створення специфікації для \"Футболки, червоний, S\" ви " +"створюєте специфікацію для \"футболки\" і додаєте рядки, що відповідають " +"конкретному розміру S, а також інші рядки, специфічні для червоного кольору." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:69 +msgid "" +"**Pricing**: The default price of a product is computed using the price of " +"the product template and add the optional extra price on each dimension of " +"the variant. This way, variant prices are easier to maintain since you don't" +" have to set the price for every variant. However, it's possible to create " +"pricelist rules to fix price per variants too." +msgstr "" +"**Ціноутворення**: ціна товару за замовчуванням обчислюється за ціною " +"шаблону товару та додає необов'язкову додаткову ціну за кожним розміром " +"варіанту. Таким чином, варіанти ціни простіше підтримувати, оскільки вам не " +"потрібно встановлювати ціни за кожним варіантом. Однак можна створити цінові" +" правила, щоби встановити ціну за варіантом." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:77 +msgid "When should you avoid using variants?" +msgstr "Коли слід уникати використання варіантів?" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:79 +msgid "" +"Using variants may add a level of complexity on the way you use Odoo. You " +"should consider using variants only if you need it to reduce the complexity " +"of managing lots of products that are similars." +msgstr "" +"Використання варіантів може додати рівень складності в тому, як ви " +"використовуєте Odoo. Ви повинні розглянути можливість використання варіантів" +" лише у тому випадку, коли вам це потрібно, щоб зменшити складність " +"управління багатьма товарами, які є аналогами." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:83 +msgid "" +"As an example, importing your initial product catalog is more complex if you" +" use variants. You can't just import a list of products, you must import " +"product templates and all their related variations." +msgstr "" +"Наприклад, імпорт початкового каталогу товарів є більш складним, якщо ви " +"використовуєте варіанти. Ви не можете просто імпортувати список товарів, ви " +"повинні імпортувати шаблони товарів та всі пов'язані з ними варіанти." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:87 +msgid "" +"In addition to that, you should also carefully select the dimensions that " +"you manage as separate product templates and those as variants. As an " +"example, a company having these products:" +msgstr "" +"Крім того, ви також повинні ретельно вибрати параметри, якими ви керуєте як " +"окремими шаблонами товарів, і ті, що є варіантами. Наприклад, компанія, яка " +"має ці товари:" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:91 +msgid "Quality: T-Shirts, Polos, Shirts" +msgstr "Якість: футболки, поло" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:93 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:105 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:110 +msgid "Color: Red, Blue" +msgstr "Колір: червоний, синій" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:95 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:106 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:111 +msgid "Size: S, M, L, XL" +msgstr "Розмір: S, M, L, XL" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:97 +msgid "" +"In such a use case, you could create 1 template with three dimensions of " +"variants (Layout, T-Shirts, Polos). But, it's recommended to create two " +"different product templates as T-shirts may highly differ from polos or " +"shirts and customer expect to see these as two different products in the " +"e-Commerce:" +msgstr "" +"У такому випадку ви можете створити 1 шаблон з трьома параметрами варіантів " +"(Компонування, футболки, поло). Але рекомендується створити два різні " +"шаблони товарів, оскільки футболки можуть сильно відрізнятись від поло або " +"сорочок, і споживач сподівається побачити їх як два різні товари в " +"електронній комерції:" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:103 +msgid "Product Template: T-shirt" +msgstr "Шаблон товару: футболка" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:108 +msgid "Product Template: Polos" +msgstr "Шаблон товару: поло" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:114 +#: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:10 +msgid "Configuration" +msgstr "Налаштування" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:117 +msgid "Activate the variant feature" +msgstr "Активізуйте функцію варіанту" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:119 +msgid "" +"Before you can use product variants, you must first activate the product " +"variants in the settings. To do so, you must go to the Sales app. In the " +"menu :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`, locate the **Products " +"Variants** line, and tick the option **Products can have several " +"attributes**, then click on **Apply**." +msgstr "" +"Перш ніж використовувати варіанти товару, спочатку потрібно активувати " +"варіанти товару в налаштуваннях. Для цього потрібно перейти до додатку " +"Продажі. У меню :menuselection:`Налаштування --> Налаштування` знайдіть " +"рядок **Варіанти товару** та поставте прапорець біля опції **Товари можуть " +"мати кілька атрибутів**, потім натисніть **Застосувати**." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:129 +msgid "Creating products with variants" +msgstr "Створення товарів з різними варіантами" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:131 +msgid "" +"Once you have activated the variant option, you can add variants to your " +"products. To do so, go to the Sales module, :menuselection:`Sales --> " +"Products`. It is also accessible from the Purchase and inventory modules." +msgstr "" +"Після активації варіантів, ви можете додати варіанти до ваших товарів. Для " +"цього перейдіть до модуля :menuselection:`Продажі --> Товари`. Він також " +"доступний у модулі Купівлі та Склад." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:135 +msgid "Now, click on the product you wish to add variants to." +msgstr "Тепер натисніть на товар, до якого потрібно додати варіанти." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:137 +msgid "" +"In the product page, a new tab called Variants has appeared. The number in " +"purple written on top is the number of variants this product currently has. " +"To add new variants, click on the tile. In the new window, click on " +"**Create**." +msgstr "" +"На сторінці товару з'явилася нова вкладка Варіанти. Фіолетовий номер, " +"написаний зверху, - це кількість варіантів цього товару в даний час. Щоби " +"додати нові варіанти, натисніть на плитку. У новому вікні натисніть кнопку " +"**Створити**." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:142 +msgid "" +"In **Attributes**, click on the rolldown menu and select the type of " +"variance you wish to add. If the variant does not yet exist, you can create " +"it on the fly by clicking on Create and edit…" +msgstr "" +"У розділі **Атрибути** клацніть на розгорнутому меню та виберіть тип " +"різниці, який ви хочете додати. Якщо варіант ще не існує, ви можете створити" +" його на льоту, натиснувши кнопку Створити та редагуйте..." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:149 +msgid "" +"In the Attributes window, the **Value** field is the description of the " +"attribute such as Green, Plastic or 32GB. The **Attribute** field is the " +"type of variant such as Color, Material or Memory." +msgstr "" +"У вікні Атрибути поле **Значення** - це опис атрибута, такого як Зелений, " +"Пластиковий або «32 Гб». Поле **Атрибут** - це тип варіанта, такого як " +"Колір, Матеріал або Пам'ять." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:156 +msgid "" +"You can add a cost for the variant on the fly by adding it in the " +"**Attribute Price Extra** field, or choose to modify it later. Click on " +"**Save**." +msgstr "" +"Ви можете додати вартість варіанту на льоту, додавши його в поле **Додаткові" +" характеристики** або оберіть його пізніше. Натисніть кнопку **Зберегти**." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:160 +msgid "" +"You can also add a different barcode and internal reference to the variant." +msgstr "" +"Ви також можете додати інший штрих-код та внутрішнє посилання на варіант." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:163 +msgid "" +"When you have entered all the specifications of the variant, click on " +"**Save**." +msgstr "" +"Коли ви ввели всі специфікації цього варіанту, натисніть кнопку " +"**Зберегти**." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:167 +msgid "Managing Product Variants" +msgstr "Управління варіантами товару" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:170 +msgid "Introduction" +msgstr "Вступ" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:172 +msgid "" +"The examples below are all based on this product template that has two " +"variant attributes :" +msgstr "" +"Наведені нижче приклади є основою цього шаблону товару, який має два " +"атрибути варіанта:" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:175 +msgid "T-Shirt B&C" +msgstr "Футболка B&C" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:177 +msgid "Color: Red, Blue, White" +msgstr "Колір: червоний, синій, білий" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:179 +msgid "Size: S, M, L, XL, XXL" +msgstr "Розмір: S, M, L, XL, XXL" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:182 +msgid "Managing combination possibilities" +msgstr "Управління можливостями комбінації" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:184 +msgid "" +"By default, with the above product template, you get 15 different products " +"(3 colors, 5 sizes). If the XXL size only exists for red and blue t-shirts, " +"you can deactivate the white product variant." +msgstr "" +"За замовчуванням, використовуючи вказаний вище шаблон товару, ви отримуєте " +"15 різних товарів (3 кольори, 5 розмірів). Якщо розмір XXL існує лише для " +"червоних та синіх футболок, ви можете деактивувати варіант білого товару." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:188 +msgid "" +"To do this, click on the **Variants** button, select the XXL, White T-shirt." +" From the product form, uncheck the **Active** box of the T-shirt White, " +"XXL." +msgstr "" +"Для цього натисніть кнопку **Варіанти**, виберіть XXL, біла футболка. З " +"форми товару зніміть позначення **Активно** футболки білого кольору XXL." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:197 +msgid "" +"That deactivating a product is different than having an inventory of 0." +msgstr "Деактивація товару відрізняється від наявності інвентаризації 0." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:200 +msgid "Setting a price per variant" +msgstr "Встановлення ціни за варіант" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:202 +msgid "" +"You can add a cost over the main price for some of the variants of a " +"product." +msgstr "" +"Ви можете додати вартість по основній ціні для деяких варіантів товару." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:205 +msgid "" +"Once you have activated the variant option, you can add variants to your " +"products. To do so, go to the Sales module, open :menuselection:`Sales --> " +"Products` and click on the product you want to modify. Click on the " +"**Variant Prices** button to access the list of variant values." +msgstr "" +"Після активації варіантів, ви можете додати варіанти до ваших товарів. Для " +"цього перейдіть до модуля Продажі, відкрийте :menuselection:`Продажі --> " +"Товари` і натисніть на товар, який потрібно змінити. Натисніть кнопку " +"**Варіанти цін**, щоби переглянути список варіантів значень." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:213 +msgid "" +"Click on the variant name you wish to add a value to, to make the 3 fields " +"editable. In the **Attribute Price Extra** field, add the cost of the " +"variant that will be added to the original price." +msgstr "" +"Натисніть на назві варіанту, до якого потрібно додати значення, щоби зробити" +" 3 поля редагованими. У полі **Атрибут додаткової характеристики** додайте " +"вартість варіанту, який буде додано до початкової ціни." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:220 +msgid "When you have entered all the extra values, click on **Save**." +msgstr "" +"Коли ви введете всі додаткові значення, натисніть кнопку **Зберегти**." + #: ../../sales/products_prices/taxes.rst:3 msgid "Set taxes" msgstr "Встановіть податки" +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon.rst:3 +msgid "Amazon MWS Connector" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:3 +msgid "Manage Amazon orders in Odoo" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:6 +msgid "Synchronization of orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Orders are automatically fetched from Amazon and synchronized in Odoo at " +"regular intervals. The synchronization is based on the Amazon status: only " +"orders whose status has changed since the last synchronization are fetched " +"from Amazon. For **FBA** (Fulfilled by Amazon), only **Shipped** and " +"**Canceled** orders are fetched. For **FBM** (Fulfilled by Merchant), the " +"same is done for **Unshipped** and **Canceled** orders. For each " +"synchronized order, a sales order and a customer are created in Odoo if they" +" are not yet registered." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:15 +msgid "" +"If you did not request access to Personally Identifiable Information of your" +" customers in the `Developer Registration and Assessment form `_, the customers are created anonymously (the name, postal " +"address and phone number are omitted) and named **Amazon Customer**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:20 +msgid "" +"When an order is canceled in Amazon and was already synchronized in Odoo, " +"the corresponding sales order is canceled in Odoo. When an order is canceled" +" in Odoo, a notification is sent to Amazon who will mark it as such in " +"Seller Central and notify the customer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:25 +msgid "" +"To force the synchronization of an order whose status has not changed since " +"the last synchronization, activate the **Developer mode**, navigate to your " +"Amazon account and modify the date under :menuselection:`Orders Follow-up " +"--> Last Order Sync`. Pick a date anterior to the last status change of the " +"order that you wish to synchronize and save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:30 +msgid "" +"To synchronize immediately the orders of your Amazon account, open that " +"later's form in **Developer mode** and click the button **SYNC ORDERS**. The" +" same can be done with order cancellations and pickings by clicking the " +"buttons **SYNC CANCELLATIONS** and **SYNC PICKINGS**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:36 +msgid "Manage deliveries in FBM" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:38 +msgid "" +"When a **FBM** (Fulfilled by Merchant) order is synchronized in Odoo, a " +"picking is created along with the sales order and the customer. You can " +"either ship all the ordered products to your customer at once or ship " +"products partially by using backorders." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:42 +msgid "" +"When a picking related to the order is confirmed, a notification is sent to " +"Amazon who will, in turn, notify the customer that the order (or a part of " +"it) is on its way." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:46 +msgid "Follow deliveries in FBA" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:48 +msgid "" +"When a **FBA** (Fulfilled by Amazon) order is synchronized in Odoo, a stock " +"move is recorded for each sales order item so that it is saved in your " +"system. Inventory managers can find such moves in :menuselection:`Inventory " +"--> Reporting --> Product Moves`. They pick up products in a specific " +"inventory location called **Amazon**. This location represents your stock in" +" Amazon's warehouses and allows you to manage the stock of your products " +"under the FBA program." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:54 +msgid "" +"To follow your Amazon (FBA) stock in Odoo, you can make an inventory " +"adjustment after replenishing it. You can also trigger an automated " +"replenishment from reordering rules on the Amazon location." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:58 +msgid "" +"The Amazon location is configurable by Amazon account managed in Odoo. All " +"accounts of the same company use the same location by default. It is however" +" possible to follow the stock by marketplace. First, remove the marketplace " +"for which you want to follow the stock separately from the list of " +"synchronized marketplaces. Then, create another registration for this " +"account and remove all marketplaces, except the one to isolate from the " +"others. Finally, assign another stock location to the second registration of" +" your account." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:67 +msgid "Issue invoices and register payments" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:69 +msgid "" +"You can issue invoices for Amazon orders in Odoo. Click **Create Invoice** " +"in the sales order to do so. You can also do it in batch from the list view " +"of orders. Then, confirm and send the invoices to your customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:73 +msgid "" +"To display only Amazon-related orders on the list view, you can filter " +"orders based on the sales team." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:76 +msgid "" +"As the customer has paid Amazon as an intermediary, you should register " +"invoice payments in a payment journal dedicated to Amazon (e.g. Amazon " +"Payments, with a dedicated intermediary account). You can do the same with " +"the vendor bill received from Amazon and dedicated to commissions. When you " +"receive the balance on your bank account at the end of the month and record " +"your bank statements in Odoo, you simply credit the Amazon intermediary " +"account by the amount received." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:83 +msgid "Follow your Amazon sales in sales reporting" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:85 +msgid "" +"As a sales team is set on your account under the tab **Order Follow-up**, " +"this helps you give quick glances at the figures in just a few clicks in " +"Sales reporting. By default, your account's sales team is shared between all" +" of your company's accounts." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:89 +msgid "" +"If you wish, you can change the sales team on your account for another to " +"perform a separate reporting for the sales of this account." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:92 +msgid "" +"It is also possible to perform reporting on a per-marketplace basis in a " +"similar fashion. First, remove the marketplace you wish to track separately " +"from the list of synchronized marketplaces. Then, create another " +"registration for this account and remove all marketplaces, except the one to" +" isolate from the others. Finally, assign another sales team to one of the " +"two registrations of your account." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:3 +msgid "Configure Amazon MWS Connector in Odoo" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:6 +msgid "Get your Amazon MWS Credentials" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:8 +msgid "" +"In order to integrate Amazon with Odoo, a seller account on professional " +"selling plan is required." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:13 +msgid "" +"Visit the `Amazon Marketplace Web Service documentation " +"`_" +" and follow the instructions to register as a developer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:17 +msgid "" +"Fill the Developer Registration and Assessment form as suggested below and " +"provide your own contact information in the **Developer contact " +"information** section. For the other sections, take care to adapt your " +"responses accordingly to your business case. In particular, select the " +"correct region of your seller account and uncheck the **Merchant Fulfilled " +"Shipping** function if you plan to sell exclusively with the Fulfillment by " +"Amazon service." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:23 +msgid "" +"If you select the **Merchant Fulfilled Shipping** function (i.e. you request" +" access to Personally Identifiable Information (PII) of your customers), " +"Amazon may request you to fill out a second form, depending on the data " +"protection policy in the region of your seller account (e.g. GDPR in " +"Europe)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:32 +msgid "Register your Amazon account in Odoo" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:34 +msgid "" +"To register your seller account in Odoo, navigate to :menuselection:`Sales " +"--> Configuration --> Settings --> Connectors --> Amazon Sync --> Amazon " +"Accounts` and click on **CREATE**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:37 +msgid "" +"The **Seller ID** can be found in Seller Central under the link **Your " +"Merchant Token** on the **Seller Account Information** page. The **Access " +"Key** and the **Secret Key** can be found in Developer Central (where the " +"Developer Registration and Assessment form was located)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:41 +msgid "" +"Once the account is registered, the marketplaces available to this account " +"are synchronized and listed under the **Marketplaces** tab. If you wish, you" +" can remove some from the list of synchronized marketplaces to disable their" +" synchronization." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:46 +msgid "Match database products in Amazon orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:51 +msgid "" +"When an Amazon order is synchronized, up to three sales order items are " +"created in Odoo for each product sold on Amazon: one for the marketplace " +"product, one for the shipping charges (if any) and one for the gift wrapping" +" charges (if any)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:55 +msgid "" +"The selection of a database product for a sales order item is done by " +"matching its **internal reference** with the **SKU** for marketplace items, " +"the **shipping code** for delivery charges, and the **gift wrapping** code " +"for gift wrapping charges." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:59 +msgid "" +"For marketplace products, matchings are saved as **Amazon Offers** which are" +" listed under the **Offers** stat button on the account form. Offers are " +"automatically created when the matching is established and are used for " +"subsequent orders to lookup SKUs. If no offer with a matching SKU is found, " +":ref:`the internal reference is used instead `." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:64 +msgid "" +"It is possible to force the matching of a marketplace item with a specific " +"product by changing either the product or the SKU of an offer. The offer can" +" be manually created if it was not automatically done yet. This is useful if" +" you do not use the internal reference as the SKU or if you sell the product" +" under different conditions." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:69 +msgid "" +"If no database product with a matching internal reference is found for a " +"given SKU or gift wrapping code, a default database product **Amazon Sale** " +"is used. The same is done with the default product **Amazon Shipping** and " +"the shipping code." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:73 +msgid "" +"To modify the default products, activate the **Developer mode** and navigate" +" to :menuselection:`Sales --> Configuration --> Settings --> Connectors --> " +"Amazon Sync --> Default Products`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:78 +msgid "Configure taxes of products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:80 +msgid "" +"To allow for tax reporting of Amazon sales with Odoo, the taxes applied to " +"the sales order items are those set on the product or determined by the " +"fiscal position. Make sure to have set the correct taxes on your products in" +" Odoo or to have it done by a fiscal position, to avoid discrepancies in the" +" subtotals between Seller Central and Odoo." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:85 +msgid "" +"As Amazon does not necessarily apply the same taxes as those configured in " +"Odoo, it may happen that order totals differ by a few cents from that on " +"Seller Central. Those differences can be resolved with a write-off when " +"reconciling the payments in Odoo." +msgstr "" + #: ../../sales/sale_ebay.rst:3 msgid "eBay" msgstr "eBay" @@ -1300,15 +2038,11 @@ msgstr "Стимулюйте клієнтів дедлайном комерці #: ../../sales/send_quotations/deadline.rst:5 msgid "" -"As you send quotations, it is important to set a quotation deadline; Both to" +"As you send quotations, it is important to set a quotation deadline, both to" " entice your customer into action with the fear of missing out on an offer " "and to protect yourself. You don't want to have to fulfill an order at a " "price that is no longer cost effective for you." msgstr "" -"Коли ви надсилаєте комерційну пропозицію, важливо встановити її кінцевий " -"термін; Обидва заманюють вашого клієнта в дії з побоюванням позбутися " -"пропозиції та захистити себе. Ви не бажаєте виконувати замовлення за ціною, " -"яка вже не є економічно вигідною для вас." #: ../../sales/send_quotations/deadline.rst:11 msgid "Set a deadline" @@ -1339,8 +2073,8 @@ msgstr "" "/11UaYJ0k67dA2p-ExPAYqZkBNaRcpnItCyIdO6udgyOY/edit>`_." #: ../../sales/send_quotations/deadline.rst:29 -msgid "On your customer side, they will see this." -msgstr "На стороні клієнта вони побачать це." +msgid "On your customer side, they will see this:" +msgstr "" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/different_addresses.rst:3 msgid "Deliver and invoice to different addresses" @@ -1613,10 +2347,6 @@ msgstr "" "шаблон, ви можете надіслати заповнену комерційну пропозицію в найкоротші " "терміни." -#: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:10 -msgid "Configuration" -msgstr "Налаштування" - #: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:12 msgid "" "For this feature to work, go to :menuselection:`Sales --> Configuration --> " diff --git a/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..e2424aa59 --- /dev/null +++ b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po @@ -0,0 +1,516 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2015-TODAY, Odoo S.A. +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +# Translators: +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Alina Lisnenko , 2019 +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-11-20 09:24+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Alina Lisnenko , 2019\n" +"Language-Team: Ukrainian (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/uk/)\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Language: uk\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n % 1 == 0 && n % 10 == 1 && n % 100 != 11 ? 0 : n % 1 == 0 && n % 10 >= 2 && n % 10 <= 4 && (n % 100 < 12 || n % 100 > 14) ? 1 : n % 1 == 0 && (n % 10 ==0 || (n % 10 >=5 && n % 10 <=9) || (n % 100 >=11 && n % 100 <=14 )) ? 2: 3);\n" + +#: ../../sms_marketing.rst:5 +msgid "SMS Marketing" +msgstr "SMS-маркетинг" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:3 +msgid "Build, send and get reports from a SMS mailing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Why to use SMS? Using SMS Marketing as part of my communication strategies " +"can empower me to expand my markets, considering that in some countries " +"emails are not very used or used at all. It also helps to boost my " +"conversion rate, as this strategy has a high open-rate percentage among " +"people who use smartphones - people usually don’t keep unread SMSs!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:8 +msgid "" +"With Odoo’s SMS Marketing app you can plan, organize, schedule and keep " +"track of your mailings with its easy to use interface." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:12 +msgid "Install the app" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:14 +msgid "Go to *Apps*, search for *SMS Marketing* and click on *Install*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:17 +msgid "Build an SMS mailing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:19 +msgid "Go to *SMS Marketing > Create*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:24 +msgid "" +"First, I’ll be able to specify a *subject* name that will help me to " +"remember what the mailing is about. Under *recipients*, I’ll choose to whom " +"I’d like the SMS to be sent. If I choose *Contact*, all my Odoo contacts " +"(vendor, customers, etc.) will receive my SMS. From there, I can refine my " +"recipient list with the *add filter* option. In the example below, I choose " +"to send it to my contacts living in Belgium." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:31 +msgid "" +"The *Mailing list* option, on the other hand, allows me to choose mailing " +"lists I’ve created with specific contacts or people who have subscribed to " +"my Newsletters, or both! I’m allowed to select more than one *Mailing list*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:36 +msgid "" +"Under the *SMS Content* tab, links can be included and Odoo will " +"automatically generate *link trackers*. Thank to those, I’ll be able to get " +"data about those links." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:38 +msgid "" +"On *Settings* I have the option *include opt-out link* available. If " +"activated, the contact will be able to unsubscribe from the mailing list " +"he’s not interested in anymore." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:43 +msgid "" +"in the *Link Tracker* menu under *Configuration*, I can see the history of " +"my sent links, access them and look at statistics." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:48 +msgid "Double-check that you have the phone number of your contacts saved!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:52 +msgid "Sending my mailing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:56 +msgid "" +"Once I have my mailing created, I must choose when I would like it to be " +"delivered:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:58 +msgid "" +"**Put in queue**: the mailing will be triggered with the next automatic run." +" Interesting option if I don’t mind when the triggering will happen." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:59 +msgid "" +"**Send now**: sends the message immediately. Advised to use this option if " +"there are not that many recipients." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:60 +msgid "" +"**Schedule**: allows me to choose a day and time. Best option for mailings " +"that I would like to send during a specific event, to promote an offer while" +" it is active or to simply plan my content strategy in advance." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:61 +msgid "" +"**Test**: allows me to send an SMS to one or multiple numbers for test " +"purposes. Check, for example, if the link provided lands on the right page " +"while making sure they are responsive. If sending it to multiple numbers, I " +"must remember to use a comma between them." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:65 +msgid "Visualize reports" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:66 +msgid "" +"On the *Reporting* menu, with just a few clicks, I am capable of applying " +"filters, measures and adopt different layouts to do an analysis of the " +"performance of my SMS mailings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:71 +msgid "" +"I can also check the price to send an SMS on your country when clicking on " +"the *information* icon when creating a new SMS." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:76 +msgid "" +"**Buy Credits!** In order to take advantage of the app and its features, " +"make sure you’ve purchased credits. For more information on that access: " +":doc:`../sms_marketing/fqapricing`" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:3 +msgid "Contact lists and Blacklist" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:6 +msgid "Contact lists" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:7 +msgid "" +"Creating my own list of contacts, or importing it, is useful when I want to " +"create specific groups of people, such as the subscribers of my newsletter. " +"It is also the best way to get started if I am coming from another system " +"and already have built an audience. It makes the SMS distribution a lot " +"easier." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:9 +msgid "" +"Go to *Contacts lists > Contacts lists > Create*. I’ll choose a name for my " +"*Mailing list*, and activate the option *Public* if I would like to make the" +" mailing list accessible to my recipients in the unsubscription page to " +"allow them to update their subscription preferences." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:12 +msgid "" +"Once inside the list, I can again *Create* or *Import* contacts for that " +"specific list." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:18 +msgid "History with the Log Notes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:19 +msgid "" +"A record of the mailings sent is kept in the chatter of the recipient " +"(whether it is a contact or an opportunity, for example)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:24 +msgid "" +"This is important as I and my team can easily keep track and see a history " +"of interactions with my contacts or prospects, granting me the ability to " +"better understand them. Example: my sales representative can easily find out" +" which SMS mailing promotions a customer has received or not." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:29 +msgid "Blacklist" +msgstr "Чорний список" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:30 +msgid "" +"If I’m coming from another software and have a list of clients who have " +"already asked to be blacklisted from my news, I can import those entries in " +"my database. For that, I’ll go to *Configuration > Phone Blacklist > " +"Import*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:3 +msgid "Integrations and Templates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:4 +msgid "" +"Using SMS to reach people can be a strategy not just used for advertisement " +"purposes but also as a reminder of events or issued invoices to your " +"costumers, for example. As you know, one of the biggest benefits of using " +"Odoo is the capability of the apps to be integrated. With the SMS Marketing " +"app isn’t different!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:9 +msgid "Organize Email Marketing and SMS campaigns" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:10 +msgid "" +"First, make sure to have the necessary feature activated. Go to the *Email " +"Marketing app > Configuration > Settings> activate the option Mailing " +"Campaigns*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Now, I’ll also have the menu *Campaigns* included in my *SMS Marketing* " +"page, allowing me to have an overview of my SMS mailings and my email " +"marketing ones." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:20 +msgid "" +"This feature is especially useful if I have aggregated campaigns, as I have " +"a global reporting view. In addition to that, I can create stages in my " +"kanban view to better organize the work being done." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:26 +msgid "Sending SMSs through the Contacts app" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:27 +msgid "" +"Sending SMSs through the contact’s form is available by default in Odoo. It " +"makes my work easier if I need to send an SMS to a specific contact, for " +"example. For that, I’ll go to the *Contacts* app, select the contact and " +"click on the *SMS* icon next to the phone number." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:33 +msgid "" +"If I’d like to send a message in a batch here, I could go to *List View > " +"select all the contacts > Action > Send SMS*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:39 +msgid "Set up SMS Templates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:40 +msgid "" +"To set up *SMS Templates*, I’ll go to the *Settings* app and activate the " +"*developer mode*. Now, back to *Settings* app, I’ll go to *Technical > " +"Phone/SMS section > SMS Templates* and create the content I need." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:48 +msgid "" +"Use *Dynamic Placeholders* to adapt automatically the content of the SMS to " +"the context." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:52 +msgid "" +"SMS Text Messaging is available throughout Odoo! Here are some of our extra " +"notable integrations:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:54 +msgid "*CRM*: send SMSs to your leads and opportunities." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:55 +msgid "*Subscription*: alert customers about their subscription." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:56 +msgid "*Accounting*: send payment reminders." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:57 +msgid "*Marketing Automation*: automate your SMS marketing campaigns." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:58 +msgid "" +"*Inventory*: send an automatic confirmation when a delivery order is done." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:59 +msgid "" +"*Sign*: receive a validation code to verify your identity before signing a " +"document online." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:60 +msgid "" +"*SEPA debit payment provider*: send a verification code to your customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:61 +msgid "" +"*Studio*: send an SMS according to your needs by using automated actions." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:63 +msgid "" +"For more information about SMS integrations in Odoo and a list of frequently" +" asked questions, go to `Pricing and FQA `__." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:3 +msgid "SMS Pricing and FAQ" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:6 +msgid "Pricing" +msgstr "Ціноутворення" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:7 +msgid "" +"SMS Text Messaging is an In-App Purchase (IAP) service which requires " +"prepaid credits to work. The price of an SMS depends on the destination and " +"the length of the message. With 1 credit, I can send up to 92 SMSs." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:9 +msgid "" +"**For more information, please consult our FAQ page**: `Odoo SMS - FAQ " +"`_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:11 +msgid "" +"To buy credits I will go to *Settings > Buy Credits* (under *Send SMS*); or" +" go to *Settings > View my Services* (under *Odoo IAP*)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:18 +msgid "" +"If you are on Odoo Online (SAAS) and have the Enterprise version, you " +"benefit from free trial credits to test the feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:21 +msgid "FAQ" +msgstr "FAQ" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:22 +msgid "**Is there an expiration time for my credits?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:24 +msgid "No, your credits won’t expire." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:26 +msgid "" +"**Can I send an SMS to a phone number (which is not a mobile phone) because " +"I see the icon in front of the field “phone”?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:28 +msgid "Only if that phone number supports SMS (e.g. SIP phones)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:30 +msgid "**Do I receive an invoice to buy my credits?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:32 +msgid "Yes." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:34 +msgid "**Can the recipient answer to me?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:36 +msgid "No, it is not possible to reply to the SMS." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:38 +msgid "" +"**What happens if I send multiple SMS but I do not have enough credits to " +"send them all?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:40 +msgid "" +"The whole transaction is counted as a single one, so no SMS will be sent " +"until you have enough credits to send them all." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:42 +msgid "**Do I have a history of the sent SMSs?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:44 +msgid "" +"Yes, the SMS is logged as a note under the chatter of the corresponding " +"record, and a complete history of SMS sent is available under Settings> " +"Activate the developer mode > Technical > SMS." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:46 +msgid "**Can I send as many SMSs I want at once?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:48 +msgid "Yes, if you have enough credits." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:50 +msgid "" +"**If I have a number that does not exist in the list of recipients, will I " +"lose credits?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:52 +msgid "" +"Not if the phone number is in the wrong format (e.g. too many digits). " +"Otherwise, if the SMS is sent to the wrong person or to a fake number, the " +"credit will be lost." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:54 +msgid "" +"**What happens if I send my SMS to a paying number (e.g.: a contest to win a" +" ticket for a festival)?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:56 +msgid "" +"The SMS will not be delivered to that kind of number, so you won’t be " +"charged." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:58 +msgid "" +"**Can I identify the numbers that do not exist when I send several SMSs?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:60 +msgid "Only the ones that have an invalid format." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:62 +msgid "**How does the GDPR regulation affect this service?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:64 +msgid "" +"Please find our Privacy Policy here: `Odoo IPA Purchase Privacy Policy " +"`__" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:66 +msgid "**How many types of SMS exist and how many characters make 1 SMS?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:68 +msgid "There are 2 types of SMS message:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:70 +msgid "" +"*Standard* (GSM-7): contains only characters from the GSM-7 set, which can " +"be seen in the following picture." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:75 +msgid "" +"*Unicode*: contains at least one character that is not in the previous " +"table. For Standard SMS the size limit is 160 characters, and for Unicode is" +" 70. Above these limits, the content is divided into a multi-part message. " +"The system will inform you in real-time about the number of SMS your message" +" represents." +msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..c5d8f83d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/locale/uk/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po @@ -0,0 +1,172 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2015-TODAY, Odoo S.A. +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +# Translators: +# Alina Lisnenko , 2019 +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-11-20 09:24+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Alina Lisnenko , 2019\n" +"Language-Team: Ukrainian (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/uk/)\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Language: uk\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=4; plural=(n % 1 == 0 && n % 10 == 1 && n % 100 != 11 ? 0 : n % 1 == 0 && n % 10 >= 2 && n % 10 <= 4 && (n % 100 < 12 || n % 100 > 14) ? 1 : n % 1 == 0 && (n % 10 ==0 || (n % 10 >=5 && n % 10 <=9) || (n % 100 >=11 && n % 100 <=14 )) ? 2: 3);\n" + +#: ../../social_marketing.rst:5 +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:2 +msgid "Social Marketing" +msgstr "Меркетинг соцмереж" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:3 +msgid "Advanced Topics" +msgstr "Розширені теми" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:4 +msgid "" +"One of the biggest challenges of a company is to engage efficiently with " +"their community. Odoo Social helps you to meet your audience with the help " +"of several supports: social media, push notifications, or live chat request." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:10 +msgid "Add your social media and create your feed" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:12 +msgid "" +"You first need to add your social media accounts. To do that, add a Stream " +"and choose your social media account. You’ll need to grant permissions to " +"Odoo Social Marketing application." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:19 +msgid "" +"Once it’s done, you’ll be redirected to your Feed and a column will be " +"automatically added with the publications of your freshly added account. You" +" can then add new streams to your Feed and customize your Kanban view as you" +" like." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:28 +msgid "" +"Adding social media accounts to your Feed will also add some KPIs on it:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:30 +msgid "Audience: Number of followers of your channel" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:32 +msgid "Engagement: Number of times people have engaged with your posts" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:35 +msgid "Stories: Number of times people who have engaged with your channel" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:35 +msgid "" +"have created stories on their friend’s or follower’s feed (Shares, " +"Retweet,..)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:37 +msgid "" +"You can access more information by clicking on the “Insights” link: this " +"will lead you to statistics of the selected social medium." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:41 +msgid "Publish content" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:43 +msgid "" +"To publish content on your social media accounts or send a push notification" +" to your subscribed users, either go to your Feed and click on New Post, or " +"use the “Posts” menu and create it from there. Select all the accounts where" +" you want to post your content, write your post and get an instant preview " +"of how it will look when published." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:49 +msgid "" +"If you select the push notifications, you’ll get some additional fields on " +"the form that will allow you to complete the push notifications " +"configuration and choose your segment between all your subscribed users. You" +" can also send push notifications via the Visitors menu, as explained in the" +" previous paragraph." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:56 +msgid "Enable push notifications on your website" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:58 +msgid "" +"The push notifications system uses a Firebase account, configured by " +"default. This feature allows you to send push notifications to your " +"website’s visitors after they subscribed to it. To enable push notifications" +" on your website, go to the Website application Settings, and configure the " +"notifications permission request." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:67 +msgid "" +"Once it’s done, a popup will appear to your website’s visitors, asking them " +"to allow push notifications. As soon as they subscribe to it, you can start " +"sending them push notifications through the Visitors menu. You can either " +"send it individually or target a bigger segment by selecting multiple " +"visitors in the list view (e.g. all the visitors that visited your " +"Homepage)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:75 +msgid "Interact with your online visitors" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:77 +msgid "" +"You can monitor your online visits via the Visitors menu. You’ll see every " +"visitors that landed on one of your tracked pages (you can configure your " +"tracked pages in the Website application), online or offline. Your online " +"visitors will be authenticated if they’re linked to a lead or an existing " +"partner. You will be able to contact them with an email, a message sms, a " +"push notification (if they have subscribed to it), or even send them a live " +"chat request that they will receive on their next move on one of your " +"tracked pages (if you installed the Live Chat application)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:91 +msgid "Configure your own Facebook and Twitter developer accounts" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:93 +msgid "" +"By default, the Social application is already configured with a Facebook and" +" Twitter developer accounts but you can use your own if necessary. Activate " +"the developer mode, go to Configuration > Settings and enter your own API " +"keys." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:102 +msgid "Configure your own Firebase API" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:104 +msgid "" +"By default, a Firebase project is running on your database so there’s no " +"need to configure it. If you have multiple websites, every website will be " +"linked to a different Firebase project. If you need to configure your own " +"Firebase project, please go to :menuselection:`Website --> Configuration -->" +" Settings` Web Push Notifications section." +msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po index 3c5e683b3..249ac85b4 100644 --- a/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po +++ b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/accounting.po @@ -4,44 +4,53 @@ # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # # Translators: -# v2exerer <9010446@qq.com>, 2018 -# fausthuang, 2018 -# xiaobin wu , 2018 -# bf2549c5415a9287249cba2b8a5823c7, 2018 -# 卓忆科技 , 2018 -# udcs , 2018 -# Jeff Yu - Elico Corp , 2018 -# lttlsnk , 2018 -# waveyeung , 2018 -# Gang LIU , 2018 -# 宣一敏 , 2018 -# yuan wenpu <1140021222@qq.com>, 2018 -# mrshelly , 2018 -# Gary Wei , 2018 -# zpq001 , 2018 -# John Lin , 2018 -# OCA-ALL , 2018 -# snow wang <147156565@qq.com>, 2018 -# Martin Trigaux, 2018 -# Jeffery CHEN Fan , 2018 -# liAnGjiA , 2018 -# Connie Xiao , 2018 -# Richard yang , 2018 -# keecome <7017511@qq.com>, 2018 -# ChinaMaker , 2018 -# neter ji , 2018 -# xu xiaohu , 2018 -# 演奏王 , 2018 +# r <263737@qq.com>, 2019 +# yuan wenpu <1140021222@qq.com>, 2019 +# v2exerer <9010446@qq.com>, 2019 +# xiaobin wu , 2019 +# bf2549c5415a9287249cba2b8a5823c7, 2019 +# keecome <7017511@qq.com>, 2019 +# Jeanphy , 2019 +# 卓忆科技 , 2019 +# OCA-ALL , 2019 +# xu xiaohu , 2019 +# Manga Tsang , 2019 +# udcs , 2019 +# Jeff Yu - Elico Corp , 2019 +# lttlsnk , 2019 +# 卫安琪 , 2019 +# snow wang <147156565@qq.com>, 2019 +# Gang LIU , 2019 +# 张宏奎 , 2019 +# waveyeung , 2019 +# zpq001 , 2019 +# fausthuang, 2019 +# 宣一敏 , 2019 +# Richard yang , 2019 # 黎伟杰 <674416404@qq.com>, 2019 +# mrshelly , 2019 +# Jeffery CHEN , 2019 +# liAnGjiA , 2019 +# Connie Xiao , 2019 +# Gary Wei , 2019 +# John Lin , 2019 +# neter ji , 2019 +# inspur qiuguodong , 2019 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# guohuadeng , 2019 +# 演奏王 , 2019 +# 敬雲 林 , 2019 +# ChinaMaker , 2019 +# Felix Yang - Elico Corp , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 12.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-11-07 15:38+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2018-10-19 08:14+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: 黎伟杰 <674416404@qq.com>, 2019\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:45+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Felix Yang - Elico Corp , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Chinese (China) (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/zh_CN/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -49,36 +58,36 @@ msgstr "" "Language: zh_CN\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=1; plural=0;\n" -#: ../../accounting.rst:5 ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:283 +#: ../../accounting.rst:5 ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:312 msgid "Accounting" msgstr "会计" #: ../../accounting/bank.rst:3 msgid "Bank & Cash" -msgstr "银行及现金" +msgstr "银行&现金" #: ../../accounting/bank/feeds.rst:3 #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "Bank Feeds" -msgstr "银行费用" +msgstr "银行存款" #: ../../accounting/bank/feeds/coda.rst:3 msgid "Import Coda statement files (Belgium only)" -msgstr "导入Coda 对账单文件 (仅比利时)" +msgstr " 导入CODA语句文件（仅比利时） " #: ../../accounting/bank/feeds/coda.rst:5 msgid "" "CODA is a file format for bank statements in Belgium. Most Belgian banks, as" " well as the Isabel software, allows to download a CODA file with all your " "bank statements." -msgstr "CODA 是比利时银行对账单文件格式。多数比利时银行, 以及 Isabel 软件, 允许下载你所有银行对账单 CODA 文件。" +msgstr " CODA是比利时银行对账单的一种文件格式。大多数比利时银行，以及伊莎贝尔软件，允许下载一个CODA文件与您的所有银行报表。 " #: ../../accounting/bank/feeds/coda.rst:9 msgid "" "With Odoo, you can download an CODA file from your bank or accounting " "software and import it directly in Odoo. This will create all bank " "statements." -msgstr "对于Odoo, 你可以从你的银行或者会计软件下载CODA文件并直接导入Odoo。这将创建所有银行对账单。" +msgstr " 使用odoo，您可以从银行或会计软件下载coda文件，并将其直接导入odoo。这将创建所有银行对账单。 " #: ../../accounting/bank/feeds/coda.rst:14 msgid "" @@ -86,8 +95,8 @@ msgid "" "`__" msgstr "" -"现在测试功能 `CODA 示例文件 `__" +" 现在使用这个示例CODA文件 `with this sample CODA file `__" #: ../../accounting/bank/feeds/coda.rst:17 #: ../../accounting/bank/feeds/manual.rst:12 @@ -97,13 +106,13 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/feeds/synchronize.rst:26 #: ../../accounting/bank/misc/batch.rst:21 #: ../../accounting/bank/misc/interbank.rst:14 -#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:20 +#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:16 #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/foreign_currency.rst:22 #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:9 #: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia.rst:25 #: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:33 #: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:24 -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:18 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:21 #: ../../accounting/others/analytic/purchases_expenses.rst:18 #: ../../accounting/others/analytic/timesheets.rst:16 #: ../../accounting/others/configuration.rst:3 @@ -122,17 +131,17 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/deferred_revenues.rst:24 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/installment_plans.rst:20 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/payment_terms.rst:19 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:18 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/check.rst:39 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/check.rst:103 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/credit_cards.rst:40 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/credit_cards.rst:113 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:19 msgid "Configuration" -msgstr "配置" +msgstr "设置" #: ../../accounting/bank/feeds/coda.rst:20 msgid "Install the CODA feature" -msgstr "安装 CODA 功能" +msgstr " 安装CODA功能" #: ../../accounting/bank/feeds/coda.rst:22 msgid "" @@ -141,8 +150,7 @@ msgid "" " move directly to the next section `Import your first coda file " "`_" msgstr "" -"如果您已经安装了Odoo提供的比利时科目表, CODA 导入功能会默认安装。在这种情况下, 您可以直接转到下一章 `导入你的第一个 coda " -"文件` _" +" 如果您安装了Odoo提供的比利时会计科目，默认情况下已经安装了CODA导入功能。在这种情况下，可以直接转到下一节“导入第一个coda文件” " #: ../../accounting/bank/feeds/coda.rst:27 msgid "" @@ -151,12 +159,12 @@ msgid "" "From the accounting settings, check the option **Import of Bank Statements " "in .CODA Format** and apply." msgstr "" -"如果CODA没激活, 你首先激活它。在会计应用中, 去菜单 :menuselection:`配置(Configuration) --> " -"设置(Settings)`。在会计设置中, 检查选项 **以 .CODA 格式导入银行对账单** 并应用。" +" 如果尾波还没有激活，你需要先做。在记帐应用程序中，转到菜单：menuselection:`Configuration --> " +"Settings`。在会计设置中，选中**导入.coda格式的银行对账单**选项并应用。 " #: ../../accounting/bank/feeds/coda.rst:33 msgid "Import your first CODA file" -msgstr "导入你的CODA文件" +msgstr " 导入第一个CODA文件 " #: ../../accounting/bank/feeds/coda.rst:35 msgid "" @@ -356,7 +364,7 @@ msgid ":doc:`../reconciliation/use_cases`" msgstr ":doc:`../reconciliation/use_cases` " #: ../../accounting/bank/feeds/manual.rst:100 -#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:115 +#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:111 msgid ":doc:`../feeds/synchronize`" msgstr ":doc:`../feeds/synchronize` " @@ -720,7 +728,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "一旦你填写了你的凭证,你的银行订阅将会每4小时进行一次同步。" #: ../../accounting/bank/feeds/synchronize.rst:73 -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:533 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:562 msgid "FAQ" msgstr "常问问题" @@ -749,17 +757,15 @@ msgid "" "Moreover, a transaction can be visible in your bank account but not being " "fetched by Yodlee. Indeed, the transaction in your bank account can have the" " status \"pending\" and not the status \"posted\". In that case, Yodlee " -"won't import it, you will have to wait that the status changes." +"won't import it, you will have to wait till the status changes." msgstr "" -"此外, 交易可以在您的银行帐户中可见, 但不能被 Yodlee 提取。实际上, 您的银行帐户中的交易记录可以具有状态 \"挂起 \", 而不是状态 " -"\"已过帐 \"。在这种情况下, Yodlee 不会导入它, 您将不得不等待状态更改。" #: ../../accounting/bank/feeds/synchronize.rst:91 msgid "" "What is important to remember is that Yodlee is not a service fetching " "transactions in real time. This is a service to facilitate the import of the" -" bank statement in the database." -msgstr "值得记住的是, Yodlee 不是实时获取事务的服务。这是一项有助于在数据库中导入银行对帐单的服务。" +" bank statements to the database." +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/feeds/synchronize.rst:95 msgid "Is the Yodlee feature included in my contract?" @@ -791,17 +797,16 @@ msgid "" "This means that Yodlee is only currently working on developing the " "synchronization with this bank. The synchronization could already work or it" " may need a bit more time to have a 100% working synchronization. " -"Unfortunately, there is not much to do about except being patient." +"Unfortunately, there is not much to do about it except for being patient." msgstr "" -"这意味着Yodlee目前只致力于开发与该银行的同步。同步可能已经开始工作，或者可能需要更多的时间来实现100%的工作同步。不幸的是，除了耐心之外，没有什么可做的。" #: ../../accounting/bank/feeds/synchronize.rst:110 msgid "All my past transactions are not in Odoo, why?" msgstr "所有我的过去交易都不在Odoo，为什么？" #: ../../accounting/bank/feeds/synchronize.rst:112 -msgid "Yodlee only allows to fetch up transactions to 3 months in the past." -msgstr "Yodlee只允许在过去3个月内完成交易。" +msgid "Yodlee only allows to fetch transactions up to 3 months in the past." +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/misc.rst:3 ../../accounting/payables/misc.rst:3 #: ../../accounting/payables/misc/employee_expense.rst:187 @@ -911,12 +916,11 @@ msgstr "收到客户支票" #: ../../accounting/bank/misc/batch.rst:69 msgid "" -"Once your record checks received, record them on the bank account on which " -"you plan to deposit them. Once you select the bank account (or check journal" -" is you configured Odoo that way), Odoo proposes you to use a batch deposit." -" Select this option if you plan to deposit the check to your bank." +"Once your checks are received, record them on the bank account on which you " +"plan to deposit them. Once you select the bank account (or check journal if " +"you configured Odoo that way), Odoo proposes you to use a batch deposit. " +"Select this option if you plan to deposit the check to your bank." msgstr "" -"一旦你将登记收到的支票, 作为保证金登记在银行账上。一旦你选择的银行账户(或支票账户), Odoo建议您使用批处理。选择这个选项, 如果你计划批处理。" #: ../../accounting/bank/misc/batch.rst:78 msgid "In the memo field, you can set the reference of the check." @@ -947,9 +951,9 @@ msgstr "" msgid "" "Select the bank, then select the payments (checks) you want to add in this " "deposit. By default, Odoo proposes you all the checks that have not been " -"deposit yet. That way, you can verify that you do not forget or lost a " +"deposited yet. That way you can verify that you do not forget or lost a " "check." -msgstr "选择银行, 然后选择你想要添加的付款(支票)。默认情况下, Odoo建议你保存所有的支票。这样, 您就可以确认你不要忘记或丢失支票。" +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/misc/batch.rst:102 msgid "" @@ -971,10 +975,10 @@ msgstr "当调节银行对账单时, 对账单中将会看到存款单的号码 #: ../../accounting/bank/misc/batch.rst:116 msgid "" -"If you select a batch deposit, Odoo will automatically fills all the checks " -"contained in this deposit for the matching. (2 checks were in this batch " -"deposit the example below)" -msgstr "如果您选择一批存款, Odoo将自动填充所匹配的支票存款。(下面的例子中有2账支票是作为批处理的)" +"If you select a batch deposit, Odoo will automatically fill all the checks " +"contained in this deposit for the matching. (2 checks were in the batch " +"deposit in the example below)" +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/misc/batch.rst:124 #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:113 @@ -993,10 +997,10 @@ msgstr "如果在银行对账单中没有批存款链接, 可能是两个原因 #: ../../accounting/bank/misc/batch.rst:132 msgid "" -"After having installed the batch deposit features, you need to reload the " +"After having installed the batch deposit features you need to reload the " "page so that the browser is aware of this new feature. Just click the reload" " button of your browser." -msgstr "安装批存款功能后, 您需要重新加载页面, 这样浏览器知道这个新特性。点击浏览器的刷新按钮。" +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/misc/batch.rst:136 msgid "You do not have a batch deposit created for this bank account." @@ -1015,9 +1019,9 @@ msgstr "如果银行对账单的金额小于实际批存款的金额, 它可能 #: ../../accounting/bank/misc/batch.rst:145 msgid "" -"In this case, click on the line related to this check to remove it from the " +"In this case click on the line related to this check to remove it from the " "bank statement matching." -msgstr "在这种情况下, 在银行对账单中, 点击相应的行并删除." +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/misc/interbank.rst:3 msgid "How to do a bank wire transfer from one bank to another?" @@ -1045,12 +1049,10 @@ msgstr "检查科目表以及默认转账账户" msgid "" "To handle internal transfers you need a transfer account in your charts of " "account. Odoo will generate an account automatically based on the country of" -" your chart of account. To parameter your chart of account and check the " -"default transfer account go into your the accounting module, select " +" your chart of account. To configure your chart of accounts and check the " +"default transfer account go into the accounting module settings, select " ":menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`." msgstr "" -"处理内部转移你需要在科目表中需要一个转移科目。Odoo将自动生成一个帐户基于你国家的科目表。参数科目表, 在会计模块中检查默认的转账科目, 选择 " -":menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings` ." #: ../../accounting/bank/misc/interbank.rst:25 msgid "" @@ -1101,12 +1103,10 @@ msgstr "记录内部转账" #: ../../accounting/bank/misc/interbank.rst:64 msgid "" -"The first step is to register the internal paiement. To do so, go into your " -"accounting dashboard. click on the **more** button of one of your banks and " +"The first step is to register the internal payment. To do so go into your " +"accounting dashboard, click on the **more** button of one of your banks and " "select :menuselection:`New --> Internal transfer`." msgstr "" -"第一步是注册内部paiement。为此, 进入你的会计仪表板。点击的 **more** 按钮并选择 :menuselection:`New --> " -"Internal transfer` ." #: ../../accounting/bank/misc/interbank.rst:71 msgid "" @@ -1147,13 +1147,11 @@ msgstr "注意, 银行余额在Odoo的计算与银行最新的对账单是不同 #: ../../accounting/bank/misc/interbank.rst:98 msgid "" "That is because we did not import the bank statement confirming the " -"departure and arrival of the money. It's thus necessary to import your bank " +"receiving and sending of the money. It's thus necessary to import your bank " "statement and reconcile the payment with the correct bank statement line. " "Once you receive your bank statements click the **new statement** button of " "the corresponding bank to import them." msgstr "" -"这是因为我们没有导入银行对账单来确认付出和收到的钱。因此需要导入你的银行对账单, 将付款和正确的银行对账单行调节。一旦你收到银行对账单点, " -"在相应的银行点击 **new statement** 导入。" #: ../../accounting/bank/misc/interbank.rst:107 msgid "" @@ -1173,25 +1171,24 @@ msgstr "下列窗口将会打开 :" #: ../../accounting/bank/misc/interbank.rst:120 msgid "" -"You need to choose counterparts for the paiement. Select the correct bank " -"statement line corresponding to the paiement and click on the **reconcile** " +"You need to choose counterparts for the payment. Select the correct bank " +"statement line corresponding to the payment and click on the **reconcile** " "button. Close the statement to finish the transaction" -msgstr "你需要为paiement选择同行。选择正确的银行对账单对应paiement, 点击 **调节** 按钮。关闭对账单来完成这项交易." +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/bank/misc/interbank.rst:127 msgid "" "The same steps will need to be repeated once you receive your second bank " -"statement. Note that if you specify the correct amount, and the same memo in" -" both bank statement and payment transaction then the reconciliation will " +"statement. Note that if you specify the same amount and the same memo in " +"both bank statements and payment transactions then the reconciliation will " "happen automatically." msgstr "" -"一旦你收到第二个银行对账单, 需要重复相同的步骤。注意, 如果指定了正确的金额, 在银行对账单和付款事务有相同的备忘录, 调节就会自动发生。" #: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation.rst:3 #: ../../accounting/others/reporting/main_reports.rst:153 #: ../../accounting/overview/main_concepts/memento.rst:177 msgid "Bank Reconciliation" -msgstr "银行对账" +msgstr "银行核销" #: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/configure.rst:3 msgid "Configure model of entries" @@ -1281,12 +1278,12 @@ msgid "Finally, click on **Reconcile** to finish the process." msgstr "最后, 点击 **调节(Reconcile)** 完成过程." #: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/configure.rst:65 -#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:116 +#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:112 msgid ":doc:`../feeds/manual`" msgstr ":doc:`../feeds/manual` " #: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/configure.rst:66 -#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:114 +#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:110 msgid ":doc:`../feeds/ofx`" msgstr ":doc:`../feeds/ofx` " @@ -1300,130 +1297,128 @@ msgstr "银行对账过程中的使用案例？" #: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:8 msgid "" -"Linking your bank statements with your accounting can be a lot of work. You " -"need to find invoices back, relate payments and that amount of " -"administration can cast a lot of time. Luckily, with Odoo you can very " -"easily link your invoices or any other payment with your bank statements." +"Matching your bank statements with your accounting records can be a tedious " +"task. You need to find the corresponding invoices, compare the amounts and " +"partners' details with those in the bank statement. These steps can take a " +"lot of time. Luckily, with Odoo you can very easily match your invoices or " +"any other payment document with your bank statements." msgstr "" -"将账户链接到银行对账单的工作量比较大。你需要找到发票, 相关的付款, 这需要很多的时间。幸运的是, 使用Odoo, " -"您可以很容易地将发票或是付款链接到相关的银行对账单。" -#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:14 -msgid "Two reconciliation processes exist in Odoo." -msgstr "odoo中存在2种对账过程." +#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:10 +msgid "Two options of the reconciliation process exist in Odoo." +msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:16 -msgid "We can directly register a payment on the invoices" -msgstr "能在发票上直接登记付款" +#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:12 +msgid "We can directly specify the payment on the invoice" +msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:17 +#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:13 msgid "We can reconcile open invoices with bank statements" msgstr "我们可以用银行对账单调整销售发票" -#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:22 +#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:18 msgid "" -"No special configuration is necessary to register invoices. All we need to " -"do is install the accounting app." -msgstr "登记发票不需要特殊设置。我们只需安装会计应用就可以了。" +"No special configuration is necessary to record invoices. All we need to do " +"is to install the accounting app." +msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:29 +#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:25 msgid "Use cases" msgstr "使用案例" -#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:32 +#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:28 msgid "Case 1: Payments registration" msgstr "案例1 : 付款登记" -#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:34 +#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:30 msgid "" -"We received the payment proof for our invoice of 2100 euros issued to Smith " -"& Co." -msgstr "我们收到付款证明, 是史密斯公司的2100欧元。" +"We received the proof of payment of our invoice in the amount of 2100 euros " +"issued to Smith & Co." +msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:37 +#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:33 msgid "" "We start at our issued Invoice of 2100 euros for Smith & Co. Because the " "sold product is a service we demand an immediate payment. Our accountant " -"only handles the bank statements at the end of week, so we have to mark the " -"invoice as paid so we can remember we can start the service with our " -"customer." +"only handles bank statements at the end of week, so we have to mark this " +"invoice as paid immediately in order to indicate that we can start rendering" +" services to our customer." msgstr "" -"我们开了张2100欧元的发票给史密斯公司。因为我们出售的产品是服务, 要求立即付款。而我们的会计只在周末处理银行对账单, 所以我们在发票上做标记为支付," -" 就可以为我们的客户提供服务。" -#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:43 +#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:39 msgid "" "Our customer send us a payment confirmation. We can thus register a payment " "and mark the invoice as paid." msgstr "我们的客户发给我们付款凭证。我们可以登记付款, 相关的发票为已付。" -#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:49 +#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:45 msgid "" "By clicking on **register payment,** we are telling Odoo that our customer " -"paid the Invoice. We thus have to specify the amount and the payment method" -msgstr "通过点击 **付款登记(register payment)** , 我们告诉Odoo, 客户已支付。我们因此需要指定金额和支付方式" +"has paid the Invoice. We thus have to specify the amount and the payment " +"method." +msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:56 +#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:52 msgid "" -"We can always find the payment back from the Invoice by clicking on the " -":menuselection:`Info --> Open Payment`." -msgstr "我们可以找到付款信息, 通过单击发票上 :menuselection:`信息(Info) -->开启付款(Open Payment)` 。" +"Now we can always find the payment details in the Invoice by clicking on the" +" :menuselection:`Info --> Open Payment`." +msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:62 +#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:58 msgid "" "The invoice has been paid and **the reconciliation has been done " "automatically.**" msgstr "发票已经支付, **自动调节已完成** 。" -#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:66 +#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:62 msgid "Case 2: Bank statements reconciliations" msgstr "案例2 : 银行对账单对账" -#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:68 +#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:64 msgid "" "We start at our issued Invoice of 3000 euros for Smith & Co. Let's also " "assume that other Invoices are open for different customers." msgstr "我们开始已开给Smith & Co的3000欧元的发票。让我们也假定其他不同客户的发票未付款。" -#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:74 +#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:70 msgid "" -"We receive our bank statement and not only the invoice of Smith & Co has " -"been paid, the one of Buzz of 92 euros as well." -msgstr "我们收到银行对账单, 不仅是史密斯公司的款已支付, Buzz的92欧元也已支付。" +"We receive our bank statement and find that not only the invoice issued to " +"Smith & Co has been paid, but the one to Buzz of 92 euros as well." +msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:77 +#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:73 msgid "" "**Import** or **Create** the bank statements. Please refer to the documents " "from the Bank Feeds section." msgstr " **导入(Import)** 或 **创建(Create)** 银行对账单。请在银行提要部分参考相关文档。" -#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:83 +#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:79 msgid "On the dashboard, click on **Reconcile # Items**" msgstr "在仪表板, 点击 **调节# 项** " -#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:88 +#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:84 msgid "" "If everything was right (correct partner name, right amount) odoo will do " "the reconciliations **automatically**." msgstr "如果一切是正确的(正确的业务伙伴名字, 金额正确), odoo会 **自动(automatically)** 调节。" -#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:94 +#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:90 msgid "If some issues are found, you will need to take **manual actions**." msgstr "如果发现某些问题, 需要执行 **手工动作** 。" -#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:96 +#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:92 msgid "" "For example, if the partner is missing from your bank statement, just fill " "it in :" msgstr "例如, 如果在银行对账单中缺少业务伙伴, 请填写" -#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:102 +#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:98 msgid "" "If the payment is done with a down payment, just check if it is all right " "and validate all related payments :" msgstr "如果用首付完成了付款, 只检查它是否正确并验证所有相关的付款" -#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:110 +#: ../../accounting/bank/reconciliation/use_cases.rst:106 msgid "Hit CTRL-Enter to reconcile all the balanced items in the sheet." msgstr "点击CTRL-Enter, 调节表格中的所有项。" @@ -1489,6 +1484,7 @@ msgstr "如果你在多公司环境内工作, 如你添加、编辑或删除银 #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:0 #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 msgid "Type" msgstr "类型" @@ -1513,7 +1509,7 @@ msgstr "账户持有人名称" msgid "" "Account holder name, in case it is different than the name of the Account " "Holder" -msgstr "帐户持有人姓名，不同于帐户持有人的名称" +msgstr "帐户持有人姓名，谨防不同于帐户持有人的名称" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/create_bank_account.rst:49 msgid "View *Bank Account* in our Online Demonstration" @@ -1594,13 +1590,11 @@ msgstr "配置货币" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/foreign_currency.rst:36 msgid "" "Once the Odoo is configured to support multiple currencies, you should " -"activate the currencies you plan to work with. To do that, go the menu " +"activate the currencies you plan to work with. To do that, go to the menu " ":menuselection:`Configuration --> Currencies`. All the currencies are " -"created by default, but you should activate the ones you plan to support. " -"(to activate a currency, check his active field)" +"created by default, but you should activate the ones you plan to support (to" +" activate a currency, check its \"Active\" field)." msgstr "" -"一旦Odoo配置为支持多种货币,你应该激活您计划使用的货币。要做到这一点,菜单 :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Currencies` . 。默认情况下,所有货币都已创建. 但是你应该激活你计划的货币。(激活一种货币,检查他的活跃的字段)" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/foreign_currency.rst:42 msgid "" @@ -1702,12 +1696,10 @@ msgstr "如果同一客户有几个不同货币的发票, Odoo将按货币分类 msgid "" "In the above report, the account receivable associated to Camptocamp is not " "managed in a secondary currency, which means that it keeps every transaction" -" in his own currency. If you prefer, you can set the account receivable of " -"this customer with a secondary currency and all his debts will automatically" -" be converted in this currency." +" in its own currency. If you prefer, you can set the account receivable for " +"this customer in a secondary currency and all its debts will automatically " +"be converted to this currency." msgstr "" -"在上面的报告, Camptocamp相关的应收帐款没有用第二种货币管理, 这意味着, 每笔交易都使用自己的货币。如果你喜欢, " -"你可以为该客户的应收帐款设置第二种货币, 他所有的债务将自动转换货币。" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/foreign_currency.rst:115 msgid "" @@ -1766,30 +1758,42 @@ msgid "Select 'General' for miscellaneous operations journals." msgstr "在杂项业务日记账中选择‘通用’。" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Use in Point of Sale" -msgstr "在销售点中使用" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Check this box if this journal define a payment method that can be used in a" -" point of sale." -msgstr "如果这个日记账中定义了能够在‘POS’用的付款方式就勾选这个选项" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Company" msgstr "公司" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Company related to this journal" msgstr "日记账相关的公司" +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Defines how the bank statements will be registered" +msgstr "定义银行对账单的注册方式" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Synchronization Frequency" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Defines when a new bank statement" +msgstr "定义新的银行对帐单的时间" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "will be created when fetching new transactions" +msgstr "将在提取新交易时创建" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "from your bank account." +msgstr "从你的银行账户。" + #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "Short Code" msgstr "简码" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "The journal entries of this journal will be named using this prefix." -msgstr "这个日记账中的日记账分录会被用这个前缀命名." +msgstr "这个日记账中的日记账分录会用这个前缀命名" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "Next Number" @@ -1807,21 +1811,21 @@ msgstr "分录序列" msgid "" "This field contains the information related to the numbering of the journal " "entries of this journal." -msgstr "这个字段包含和这个日记中日记账分录数量相关的信息." +msgstr "该字段包含和这个日记中日记账分录数量相关的信息" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "Dedicated Credit Note Sequence" -msgstr "专用的信用证序列" +msgstr "专用的信用票序列" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "" "Check this box if you don't want to share the same sequence for invoices and" " credit notes made from this journal" -msgstr "勾选此框，则此日记账下的会计发票或信用证不使用同一个序列。" +msgstr "勾选此框，则此日记账下的会计发票或信用票不使用同一个序列。" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Credit Notes: Next Number" -msgstr "信用证：下一号码" +msgid "Credit Notes Next Number" +msgstr "贷项发票下一个编号" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "The next sequence number will be used for the next credit note." @@ -1829,7 +1833,7 @@ msgstr "下一号码将用于下一张退款单." #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "Credit Note Entry Sequence" -msgstr "信用证分录序列" +msgstr "信用票分录序列" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "" @@ -1862,28 +1866,67 @@ msgid "The currency used to enter statement" msgstr "用来输入对账单的币种" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Defines how the bank statements will be registered" -msgstr "定义银行对账单的注册方式" +msgid "Communication Type" +msgstr "讯息类型" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Creation of Bank Statements" -msgstr "创建银行对账单" +msgid "" +"You can set here the default communication that will appear on customer " +"invoices, once validated, to help the customer to refer to that particular " +"invoice when making the payment." +msgstr "您可以在这里设置默认联系方式，该联系方式将显示在客户发票上，一旦验证，以帮助客户在付款时参考该发票联系。" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Defines when a new bank statement" -msgstr "定义新的银行对帐单的时间" +msgid "Communication Standard" +msgstr "通信标准" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "will be created when fetching new transactions" -msgstr "将在提取新交易时创建" +msgid "" +"You can choose different models for each type of reference. The default one " +"is the Odoo reference." +msgstr "您可以为每种参考类型选择不同的模型。默认值是Odoo引用。" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "from your bank account." -msgstr "从你的银行账户。" +msgid "Alias Name" +msgstr "别名" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "It creates draft invoices and bills by sending an email." +msgstr "它通过发送电子邮件创建草稿发票和账单。" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Profit Account" +msgstr "利润科目" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Used to register a profit when the ending balance of a cash register differs" +" from what the system computes" +msgstr "当收银机的关账余额与系统计算的有差异时，用于记录利润" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Loss Account" +msgstr "损失科目" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Used to register a loss when the ending balance of a cash register differs " +"from what the system computes" +msgstr "收银机的期末余额与系统计算的有差异时候用来记录损失" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "Lock Posted Entries with Hash" +msgstr "使用Hash锁定已过账分录" + +#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 +msgid "" +"If ticked, the accounting entry or invoice receives a hash as soon as it is " +"posted and cannot be modified anymore." +msgstr "如果勾選，會計分錄或應收付憑單在過帳後立即完成沖帳/對帳，並且無法再修改。" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "For Incoming Payments" -msgstr "为收款" +msgstr "未收款" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 @@ -1925,55 +1968,6 @@ msgid "" "to your bank. Enable this option from the settings." msgstr "sepa 信用转移: 从您提交到您的银行的 SEPA 信用转移文件支付账单。从设置中启用此选项。" -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Profit Account" -msgstr "利润科目" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Used to register a profit when the ending balance of a cash register differs" -" from what the system computes" -msgstr "当现金出纳机的关账余额与系统计算的有差异时，用于登记利润" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Loss Account" -msgstr "损失科目" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Used to register a loss when the ending balance of a cash register differs " -"from what the system computes" -msgstr "现金登记的期末余额与系统计算的有差异时候用来登记损失" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Group Invoice Lines" -msgstr "分组发票明细行" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"If this box is checked, the system will try to group the accounting lines " -"when generating them from invoices." -msgstr "如果勾选此项, 系统将试图对生成的发票分组" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Post At Bank Reconciliation" -msgstr "银行对账时过账" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Whether or not the payments made in this journal should be generated in " -"draft state, so that the related journal entries are only posted when " -"performing bank reconciliation." -msgstr "是否应在汇票状态下生成本日记账中的付款，以便仅在进行银行对账时才张贴相关的日记账分录。" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Alias Name for Vendor Bills" -msgstr "供应商账单的别名" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "It creates draft vendor bill by sending an email." -msgstr "通过发送邮件创建供应商账单." - #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "Check Printing Payment Method Selected" msgstr "检查已选择的打印付款方式" @@ -1982,7 +1976,7 @@ msgstr "检查已选择的打印付款方式" msgid "" "Technical feature used to know whether check printing was enabled as payment" " method." -msgstr "从技术特征可以知道，是否可将支票作为付款方式。" +msgstr "用于检查支票打印是否作为付款方式启用的技术特征。" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "Check Sequence" @@ -2000,7 +1994,7 @@ msgstr "手动编号" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Check this option if your pre-printed checks are not numbered." -msgstr "勾选此选项如果你的预先印制支票是没有编号的。" +msgstr "如果你的预先印制支票是没有编号的请勾选此选项。" #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 msgid "Next Check Number" @@ -2010,18 +2004,6 @@ msgstr "下一个支票号码" msgid "Sequence number of the next printed check." msgstr "下个打印支票的序列编号" -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "Amount Authorized Difference" -msgstr "授权差异的总金额" - -#: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:0 -msgid "" -"This field depicts the maximum difference allowed between the ending balance" -" and the theoretical cash when closing a session, for non-POS managers. If " -"this maximum is reached, the user will have an error message at the closing " -"of his session saying that he needs to contact his manager." -msgstr "该字段定义了在关闭一个会话时候理论的余额和实际余额的最大差额如果达到该最大值，用户就会得到一个错误信息告知他需要联系他的经理" - #: ../../accounting/bank/setup/manage_cash_register.rst:25 msgid "Usage" msgstr "用途" @@ -2393,6 +2375,401 @@ msgid "" "the functional workflow remains the same as well." msgstr "" +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:3 +msgid "Colombia (ES)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:5 +msgid "**Facturación Electrónica para Colombia**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:8 +msgid "Introducción" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:10 +msgid "" +"La Facturación Electrónica para Colombia está disponible en Odoo V12 y " +"requiere los siguientes Módulos:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:20 +msgid "**l11n_co**:** Contiene los datos básicos para manejar el" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:14 +msgid "" +"módulo de contabilidad, incluyendo la configuración por defecto de los " +"siguientes puntos:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:0 +msgid "a. Plan Contable" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:0 +msgid "b. Impuestos" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:0 +msgid "c. Retenciones" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:0 +msgid "d. Tipos de Documentos de Identificación" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:25 +msgid "**l10n_co_edi**: Este módulo incluye todos los campos" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:23 +msgid "" +"adicionales que son requeridos para la Integración entre Carvajal T&S y la " +"generación de la Factura Electrónica, basado en los requisitos legales de la" +" DIAN." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:28 +msgid "Flujo General" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:31 +msgid "Configuración" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:34 +msgid "1. Instalación de los módulos de Localización Colombiana" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:36 +msgid "" +"Para esto ve a las aplicaciones y busca “Colombia”, luego da click en " +"Instalar a los primeros dos módulos:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:39 +msgid "cz" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:42 +msgid "2. Configuración de las credenciales del Servicio Web de Carvajal T&S" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:46 +msgid "" +"Una vez que los módulos están instalados, para poderte conectar con el " +"Servicio Web de Carvajal T&S, es necesario configurar el Usuario y las " +"Credenciales. Esta información será provista por Carvajal T&S." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:48 +msgid "" +"Ve a Facturación –> Configuración –> Configuración y busca la sección " +"**Facturación Electrónica Colombiana**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:56 +msgid "" +"La funcionalidad de pruebas le permite conectarse e interactuar con el " +"ambiente piloto de Carvajal T&S, esto permite a los usuarios probar el flujo" +" completo y la integración con el Portal Financiero CEN, al cual se accede a" +" través de la siguiente liga: `Cenfinanciero " +"`__," +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:58 +msgid "" +"Una vez que el ambiente de producción está listo en Odoo y en Carvajal T&S " +"el ambiente de pruebas debe ser deshabilitado para poder enviar la " +"información al ambiente de producción de Carvajal, para el cual es utilizada" +" la siguiente URL: `Cenfinanciero `__," +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:64 +msgid "3. Configuración de Información para PDF" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:68 +msgid "" +"Como parte de la información configurable que es enviada en el XML, puedes " +"definir los datos de la sección fiscal del PDF, así como de la información " +"Bancaria." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:70 +msgid "" +"Ve a Contabilidad – Configuración – Ajustes y busca la sección **Facturación" +" Electrónica Colombiana**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:76 +msgid "4. Configuración de los Datos Principales Requeridos en el XML" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:79 +msgid "4.1 Contacto (Tercero)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:82 +msgid "4.1.1 Identificación" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:85 +msgid "" +"Como parte de la Localización Colombiana, los tipos de documentos definidos " +"por la DIAN ahora están disponibles en el formulario de Contactos, por lo " +"cual ya es posible asignarles su número de identificación asociado al tipo " +"de documento correspondiente." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:93 +msgid "" +"Nota: Cuando el tipo de documento es RUT la identificación necesita ser " +"ingresada en Odoo incluyendo el Dígito de Verificación. Odoo separará este " +"número cuando la información sea enviada a los proveedores terceros." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:99 +msgid "4.1.2 Estructura Fiscal (RUT)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:101 +msgid "" +"Los Códigos de tipo de Obligación aplicables a los terceros (sección 53 en " +"el documento de RUT), son incluidos como parte del módulo de Facturación " +"Electrónica, dado que es información requerida por la DIAN." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:105 +msgid "" +"Estos campos se encuentran en Contactos –> Pestaña de Ventas y Compras –> " +"Información Fiscal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:111 +msgid "" +"Adicionalmente dos últimos campos fueron agregados para especificar el " +"régimen fiscal del contacto. Cabe aclarar que para envío de Factura " +"electrónica de Carvajal, únicamente se hace distinción de entre Grandes " +"Contribuyentes y Régimen simplificado, por lo se muestran solo estas dos " +"opciones." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:118 +msgid "4.2 Impuestos" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:122 +msgid "" +"Si tus transacciones de ventas incluyen productos con impuestos, es " +"importante considerar que un campo adicional llamado *Tipo de Valor* " +"necesita ser configurado en la siguiente ruta:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:124 +msgid "" +"Contabilidad – > Configuración –> Impuestos: –> Opciones Avanzadas –>Tipo de" +" Valor" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:129 +msgid "" +"Los impuestos para Retenciones (ICA, IVA y Fuente) también están incluidos " +"en las opciones para configurar tus impuestos, esta configuración es " +"considerada para desplegar correctamente los impuestos en la representación " +"gráfica de la Factura. (PDF)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:138 +msgid "4.3 Diarios" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:140 +msgid "" +"Una vez que la DIAN ha asignado la secuencia y prefijo oficiales para la " +"resolución de la Facturación Electrónica, los Diarios de Ventas relacionados" +" con tus documentos de facturación necesitan ser actualizados en Odoo." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:145 +msgid "" +"La secuencia es configurada usando el modo de desarrollador en la siguiente " +"ruta:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:148 +msgid "Contabilidad –> Configuración –> Diarios –> Liga de Secuencia" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:153 +msgid "" +"Una vez que la secuencia es abierta, los campos de Prefijo y Siguiente " +"Número deben ser configurados y sincronizados con el CEN Financiero." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:160 +msgid "4.4 Usuarios" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:162 +msgid "" +"La plantilla por defecto que es usada por Odoo en la representación gráfica " +"incluye el nombre del Vendedor, así que estos campos deben ser considerados:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:170 +msgid "Uso y Pruebas" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:173 +msgid "Facturas" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:175 +msgid "" +"Una vez que toda la información principal y las credenciales han sido " +"configuradas, es posible empezar a probar el flujo de la Facturación " +"Electrónica siguiendo las instrucciones que se detallan a continuación:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:180 +msgid "1. Invoice Creation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:182 +msgid "" +"El flujo de trabajo funcional que lleva lugar antes de la validación de una " +"factura continua siendo igual con Facturación Electrónica, " +"independientemente de si es creada desde una Orden de Venta o si es creado " +"manualmente." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:187 +msgid "" +"Los cambios principales que son introducidos con la Facturación Electrónica " +"son los siguientes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:190 +msgid "Hay tres tipos de documentos" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:193 +msgid "**Factura electrónica**. Este es el documento normal y aplica" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:193 +msgid "para Facturas, Notas de Crédito y Notas de Débito." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:196 +msgid "**Factura de Importación**. Debe ser seleccionada para" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:196 +msgid "transacciones de importación." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:202 +msgid "**Factura de Contingencia**. Esta es un caso excepcional y es" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:199 +msgid "" +"utilizada como un respaldo manual en caso que la compañía no pueda usar el " +"ERP y hay necesidad de crear la factura manualmente. Al ingresar esta " +"factura en el ERP, se debe seleccionar este tipo." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:208 +msgid "1. Invoice Validation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:210 +msgid "" +"Después que la factura fue validada, un archivo XML es creado y enviado " +"automáticamente al proveedor de la factura electrónica. Este archivo es " +"desplegado en el historial." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:217 +msgid "" +"Un campo adicional es ahora desplegado en la pestaña de “Otra Información” " +"con el nombre del archivo XML. Adicionalmente hay un segundo campo adicional" +" que es desplegado con el estatus de la Factura Electrónica, con el valor " +"inicial **En Proceso**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:226 +msgid "1. Recepción del XML y PDF Legal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:233 +msgid "" +"El proveedor de la Factura Electrónica recibe el archivo XML y procede a " +"validar la información y la estructura contenida. Si todo es correcto, el " +"estatus de la Factura cambia a “Validado”. Como parte de este proceso se " +"generar el XML Legal, el cual incluye una firma digital y un código único " +"(CUFE) y generan el PDF de la Factura (el cual incluye un código QR) y el " +"CUFE." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:237 +msgid "" +"Odoo envía una petición de actualización automáticamente para verificar que " +"el XML fue creado. Si este es el caso, las siguientes acciones son hechas " +"automáticamente." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:240 +msgid "El XML Legal y el PDF son incluidos en un archivo ZIP y desplegados" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:240 +msgid "en el historial de la Factura." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:245 +msgid "El estatus de la Factura Electrónica es cambiado a “Aceptado”." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:250 +msgid "" +"Nota: En caso que el PDF y el XML sean requeridos inmediatamente, es posible" +" mandar manualmente la petición del estatus usando el siguiente botón:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:258 +msgid "1. Errores Frecuentes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:260 +msgid "" +"Durante la validación del XML los errores más comunes usualmente están " +"relacionados con información principal faltante. En estos casos, los " +"detalles del error son recuperados en la petición de actualización y " +"desplegados en el historial." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:268 +msgid "" +"Si la información principal es corregida, es posible re procesar el XML con " +"la nueva información y mandar la versión actualizada usando el siguiente " +"botón:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:279 +msgid "Casos de Uso adicionales" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/colombia_ES.rst:281 +msgid "" +"El proceso para las Notas de Crédito y Débito (Proveedores) es exactamente " +"el mismo que en las Facturas. Su flujo de trabajo funcional se mantiene " +"igual." +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/localizations/france.rst:3 msgid "France" msgstr "法国" @@ -2797,7 +3174,7 @@ msgstr "资产负债表" #: ../../accounting/localizations/germany.rst:24 #: ../../accounting/localizations/nederlands.rst:19 msgid "Profit & Loss" -msgstr "" +msgstr "利润损失" #: ../../accounting/localizations/germany.rst:25 msgid "Tax Report (Umsatzsteuervoranmeldung)" @@ -2820,6 +3197,172 @@ msgid "" "the **Export Datev (csv)** button." msgstr "" +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:3 +msgid "Italy (IT)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Questa guida spiegherà come utilizzare la fattura elettronica in Odoo e come" +" configurare correttamente i dati aziendali, i contatti e la contabilità. " +"Per testare la fattura elettronica i dati devono essere reali e non " +"inventati, altrimenti il sistema dell’agenzia delle entrate non riconoscerà " +"l’interscambio di informazioni." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:12 +msgid "Configurare le informazioni sulla tua Azienda" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:14 +msgid "" +"Il passo successivo è la configurazione delle informazioni necessarie al " +"funzionamento della fatturazione elettronica. Si può accedere alla schermata" +" dall’applicazione Impostazioni: selezionare “Utenti e aziende” e scegliere " +"Aziende. Accedere quindi alle informazioni sulla Azienda per cui si desidera" +" configurare la fatturazione elettronica." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:20 +msgid "" +"I dati necessari al funzionamento dello strumento di fatturazione " +"elettronica sono i seguenti:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:23 +msgid "" +"Server PEC. Le informazioni sul server utilizzato dal tuo indirizzo di posta" +" elettronica certificata sono fornite dal tuo fornitore o dal Ministero. Lo " +"stesso server deve essere configurato come server che gestisce tutta la " +"corrispondenza mail in Odoo, per saperne di più si puo’ consultare la " +"relativa `guida " +"`__." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:30 +msgid "" +"Indirizzo PEC dell’ Azienda, tale indirizzo deve essere lo stesso registrato" +" presso l’Agenzia delle Entrate per l’utilizzo dei servizi di fatturazione " +"elettronica." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:34 +msgid "" +"Indirizzo PEC dell’Agenzia delle Entrate. La mail sarà fornito al momento " +"della registrazione della tua PEC presso l’Agenzia delle Entrate, ricorda " +"che l’Agenzia delle Entrate potrebbe cambiare questo indirizzo in seguito, " +"previa comunicazione." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:39 +msgid "" +"Partita IVA e Codice Fiscale. Per far si che la Fatturazione Elettronica " +"funzioni correttamente, questi cambi devono essere compilati correttamente." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:43 +msgid "" +"Regime Fiscale. Il regime fiscale a cui è sottoposta l’Azienda deve essere " +"selezionato scegliendo dalla lista precompilata fornita da Odoo. Chiedi al " +"commercialista qual’è il corretto regime fiscale!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:47 +msgid "Numero di Iscrizione nel registro delle Imprese." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:54 +msgid "1. Configurare le impostazioni per la Fatturazione Elettronica" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:56 +msgid "" +"Numero di iscrizione nel registro Imprese tenuto presso la Camera di " +"Commercio." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:59 +msgid "" +"Rappresentate Fiscale. Questa opzione è dedicata ad aziende con sede al di " +"fuori del territorio nazionale ma conducenti attività commerciali in Italia " +"rilevanti ai fini dell’IVA. È possibile indicare in questo campo se " +"l’Azienda si avvale di un Rappresentate Fiscale in Italia." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:70 +msgid "1. Configurare il profilo dei clienti" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:72 +msgid "" +"Per un corretto utilizzo dell’applicazione, il profilo di clienti e " +"fornitori, nell’applicazione contatti, deve essere configurato con le " +"necessarie informazioni legali." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:76 +msgid "" +"Selezionando il nome del cliente e accedendo quindi ai suoi dati, si trovano" +" i seguenti campi che devono essere compilati: Indirizzo PEC, Codice Fiscale" +" e Indice PA *che deve contere i 6-7 caratteri contenuti nell’indice PA e " +"necessari per la comunicazione tramite fattura elettronica*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:87 +msgid "Il processo di fatturazione" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:89 +msgid "" +"Si può procedere ad emettere una fattura seguendo le indicazioni " +"dell’applicazione. Il momento che determina il formale invio della fattura è" +" il momento in cui viene selezionata l’opzione “Valida”. La fattura viene " +"quindi inviata: lo stato della sua consegna verrà notificato all’utente " +"tramite pop-up sulla parte iniziale della schermata della fattura." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:102 +msgid "I messaggi che possono apparire sono i seguenti:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:104 +msgid "Fattura invitata. In attesa di accettazione" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:106 +msgid "Invio fallito. Puoi modificare la fattura ed inviarla di nuovo" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:108 +msgid "" +"La fattura è stata correttamente inviata ed accettata dal destinatario." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:111 +msgid "" +"I vari stadi di spedizione e recezione della fattura sono visibili anche " +"dall’elenco delle Fatture nella forma di icone, accanto alla colonna “Stato”" +" dall’applicazione contabilità." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:115 +msgid "*Icona Rossa:* Invio fallito" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:117 +msgid "*Icona Gialla:* Fattura invitata. In attesa di accettazione" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:119 +msgid "*Icona Verde:* Fattura inviata e accettata dal destinatario" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/italy_IT.rst:121 +msgid "" +"Per inviare la fattura tramite PEC e generare il file XML, basterà cliccare " +"su invia. Il documento verrà poi mostrato tra gli allegati." +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:3 msgid "Mexico" msgstr "墨西哥" @@ -2840,9 +3383,9 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:18 msgid "" -"**l10n_mx:** All the basic data to manage the accounting, taxes and the " -"chart of account, this proposed chart of account installed is a intended " -"copy of the list of group codes offered by the `SAT`_." +"**l10n_mx:** All basic data to manage the accounting, taxes and the chart of" +" account, this proposed chart of account installed is a intended copy of the" +" list of group codes offered by the `SAT`_." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:21 @@ -2973,7 +3516,7 @@ msgid "Important considerations when yo enable the CFDI 3.3" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:124 -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:613 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:642 msgid "" "Your tax which represent the VAT 16% and 0% must have the \"Factor Type\" " "field set to \"Tasa\"." @@ -3042,7 +3585,7 @@ msgid "`Certificate Key`_" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:180 -msgid "**Password :** 12345678a" +msgid "**Password:** 12345678a" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:183 @@ -3151,30 +3694,79 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:265 msgid "" -"To generate the payment complement you just must to follow the normal " +"To generate the payment complement you only need to follow the normal " "payment process in Odoo, this considerations to understand the behavior are " "important." msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:268 msgid "" -"All payment done in the same day of the invoice will be considered as It " -"will not be signed, because It is the expected behavior legally required for" -" \"Cash payment\"." +"To generate payment complement the payment term in the invoice must be PPD, " +"because It is the expected behavior legally required for \"Cash payment\"." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:271 -msgid "" -"To test a regular signed payment just create an invoice for the day before " -"today and then pay it today." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:273 -msgid "You must print the payment in order to retrieve the PDF properly." +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:272 +msgid "**1.1. How can I generate an invoice with payment term `PUE`?**" msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:274 msgid "" +"`According to the SAT documentation`_ a payment is classified as ``PUE`` if " +"the invoice was agreed to be fully payed before the 17th of the next " +"calendar month (the next month of the CFDI date), any other condition will " +"generate a ``PPD`` invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:279 +msgid "**1.2. How can I get this with Odoo?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:281 +msgid "" +"In order to set the appropriate CFDI payment term (PPD or PUE), you can " +"easily set it by using the ``Payment Terms`` defined in the invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:284 +msgid "" +"If an invoice is generated without ``Payment Term`` the attribute " +"``MetodoPago`` will be ``PUE``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:287 +msgid "" +"Today, if is the first day of the month and is generated an invoice with " +"``Payment Term`` ``30 Net Days`` the ``Due Date`` calculated is going to be " +"the first day of the following month, this means its before the 17th of the " +"next month, then the attribute ``MetodoPago`` will be ``PUE``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:292 +msgid "" +"Today, if an invoice is generated with ``Payment Term`` ``30 Net Days`` and " +"the ``Due Date`` is higher than the day 17 of the next month the " +"``MetodoPago`` will be ``PPD``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:296 +msgid "" +"If having a ``Payment Term`` with 2 lines or more, for example ``30% Advance" +" End of Following Month``, this is an installments term, then the attribute " +"``MetodoPago`` will be ``PPD``." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:300 +msgid "" +"To test a normal signed payment just create an invoice with payment term " +"``30% Advance End of Following Month`` and then register a payment to it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:302 +msgid "You must print the payment in order to retrieve the PDF properly." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:303 +msgid "" "Regarding the \"Payments in Advance\" you must create a proper invoice with " "the payment in advance itself as a product line setting the proper SAT code " "following the procedure on the official documentation `given by the SAT`_ in" @@ -3182,66 +3774,66 @@ msgid "" "caso de anticipos recibidos**." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:279 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:308 msgid "" "Related to topic 4 it is blocked the possibility to create a Customer " "Payment without a proper invoice." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:284 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:313 msgid "The accounting for Mexico in odoo is composed by 3 reports:" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:286 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:315 msgid "Chart of Account (Called and shown as COA)." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:287 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:316 msgid "Electronic Trial Balance." msgstr "电算试平衡。" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:288 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:317 msgid "DIOT report." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:290 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:319 msgid "" "1 and 2 are considered as the electronic accounting, and the DIOT is a " "report only available on the context of the accounting." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:293 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:322 msgid "" "You can find all those reports in the original report menu on Accounting " "app." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:299 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:328 msgid "Electronic Accounting (Requires Accounting App)" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:302 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:331 msgid "Electronic Chart of account CoA" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:304 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:333 msgid "" "The electronic accounting never has been easier, just go to " ":menuselection:`Accounting --> Reporting --> Mexico --> COA` and click on " "the button **Export for SAT (XML)**" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:311 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:340 msgid "**How to add new accounts?**" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:313 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:342 msgid "" "If you add an account with the coding convention NNN.YY.ZZ where NNN.YY is a" " SAT coding group then your account will be automatically configured." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:316 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:345 msgid "" "Example to add an Account for a new Bank account go to " ":menuselection:`Accounting --> Settings --> Chart of Account` and then " @@ -3251,17 +3843,17 @@ msgid "" " xml." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:326 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:355 msgid "**What is the meaning of the tag?**" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:328 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:357 msgid "" "To know all possible tags you can read the `Anexo 24`_ in the SAT website on" " the section called **Código agrupador de cuentas del SAT**." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:332 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:361 msgid "" "When you install the module l10n_mx and yous Chart of Account rely on it " "(this happen automatically when you install setting Mexico as country on " @@ -3269,11 +3861,11 @@ msgid "" "is not created you can create one on the fly." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:338 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:367 msgid "Electronic Trial Balance" msgstr "电算试平衡" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:340 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:369 msgid "" "Exactly as the COA but with Initial balance debit and credit, once you have " "your coa properly set you can go to :menuselection:`Accounting --> Reports " @@ -3282,28 +3874,28 @@ msgid "" "the previous selection of the period you want to export." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:349 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:378 msgid "" "All the normal auditory and analysis features are available here also as any" " regular Odoo Report." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:353 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:382 msgid "DIOT Report (Requires Accounting App)" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:355 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:384 msgid "**What is the DIOT and the importance of presenting it SAT**" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:357 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:386 msgid "" "When it comes to procedures with the SAT Administration Service we know that" " we should not neglect what we present. So that things should not happen in " "Odoo." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:360 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:389 msgid "" "The DIOT is the Informational Statement of Operations with Third Parties " "(DIOT), which is an an additional obligation with the VAT, where we must " @@ -3311,25 +3903,25 @@ msgid "" "the same, with our providers." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:365 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:394 msgid "" "This applies both to individuals and to the moral as well, so if we have VAT" " for submitting to the SAT and also dealing with suppliers it is necessary " "to. submit the DIOT:" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:369 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:398 msgid "**When to file the DIOT and in what format?**" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:371 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:400 msgid "" "It is simple to present the DIOT, since like all format this you can obtain " "it in the page of the SAT, it is the electronic format A-29 that you can " "find in the SAT website." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:375 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:404 msgid "" "Every month if you have operations with third parties it is necessary to " "present the DIOT, just as we do with VAT, so that if in January we have " @@ -3337,24 +3929,24 @@ msgid "" "to said data." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:380 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:409 msgid "**Where the DIOT is presented?**" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:382 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:411 msgid "" "You can present DIOT in different ways, it is up to you which one you will " "choose and which will be more comfortable for you than you will present " "every month or every time you have dealings with suppliers." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:386 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:415 msgid "" "The A-29 format is electronic so you can present it on the SAT page, but " "this after having made up to 500 records." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:389 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:418 msgid "" "Once these 500 records are entered in the SAT, you must present them to the " "Local Taxpayer Services Administration (ALSC) with correspondence to your " @@ -3363,18 +3955,18 @@ msgid "" "that you will still have these records and of course, your CD or USB." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:395 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:424 msgid "**One more fact to know: the Batch load?**" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:397 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:426 msgid "" "When reviewing the official SAT documents on DIOT, you will find the Batch " "load, and of course the first thing we think is what is that ?, and " "according to the SAT site is:" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:401 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:430 msgid "" "The \"batch upload\" is the conversion of records databases of transactions " "with suppliers made by taxpayers in text files (.txt). These files have the " @@ -3384,7 +3976,7 @@ msgid "" "integration for the presentation in time and form to the SAT." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:408 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:437 msgid "" "You can use it to present the DIOT, since it is allowed, which will make " "this operation easier for you, so that it does not exist to avoid being in " @@ -3392,41 +3984,41 @@ msgid "" "Third Parties." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:413 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:442 msgid "You can find the `official information here`_." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:415 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:444 msgid "**How Generate this report in odoo?**" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:417 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:446 msgid "" "Go to :menuselection:`Accounting --> Reports --> Mexico --> Transactions " "with third partied (DIOT)`." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:422 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:451 msgid "" "A report view is shown, select last month to report the immediate before " "month you are or left the current month if it suits to you." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:428 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:457 msgid "Click on \"Export (TXT)." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:433 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:462 msgid "" "Save in a secure place the downloaded file and go to SAT website and follow " "the necessary steps to declare it." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:437 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:466 msgid "Important considerations on your Supplier and Invice data for the DIOT" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:439 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:468 msgid "" "All suppliers must have set the fields on the accounting tab called \"DIOT " "Information\", the *L10N Mx Nationality* field is filled with just select " @@ -3435,34 +4027,34 @@ msgid "" " suppliers." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:447 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:476 msgid "" "There are 3 options of VAT for this report, 16%, 0% and exempt, an invoice " "line in odoo is considered exempt if no tax on it, the other 2 taxes are " "properly configured already." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:450 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:479 msgid "" "Remember to pay an invoice which represent a payment in advance you must ask" " for the invoice first and then pay it and reconcile properly the payment " "following standard odoo procedure." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:453 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:482 msgid "" "You do not need all you data on partners filled to try to generate the " "supplier invoice, you can fix this information when you generate the report " "itself." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:456 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:485 msgid "" "Remember this report only shows the Supplier Invoices that were actually " "paid." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:458 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:487 msgid "" "If some of this considerations are not taken into account a message like " "this will appear when generate the DIOT on TXT with all the partners you " @@ -3472,26 +4064,26 @@ msgid "" "your partners are correctly set." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:469 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:498 msgid "Extra Recommended features" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:472 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:501 msgid "Contact Module (Free)" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:474 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:503 msgid "" "If you want to administer properly your customers, suppliers and addresses " "this module even if it is not a technical need, it is highly recommended to " "install." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:479 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:508 msgid "Multi currency (Requires Accounting App)" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:481 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:510 msgid "" "In Mexico almost all companies send and receive payments in different " "currencies if you want to manage such capability you should enable the multi" @@ -3501,17 +4093,17 @@ msgid "" "information daily in the system manually." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:488 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:517 msgid "Go to settings and enable the multi currency feature." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:494 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:523 msgid "" "Enabling Explicit errors on the CFDI using the XSD local validator (CFDI " "3.3)" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:496 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:525 msgid "" "Frequently you want receive explicit errors from the fields incorrectly set " "on the xml, those errors are better informed to the user if the check is " @@ -3519,72 +4111,72 @@ msgid "" "debug mode enabled)." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:501 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:530 msgid "" "Go to :menuselection:`Settings --> Technical --> Actions --> Server Actions`" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:502 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:531 msgid "Look for the Action called \"Download XSD files to CFDI\"" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:503 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:532 msgid "Click on button \"Create Contextual Action\"" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:504 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:533 msgid "" "Go to the company form :menuselection:`Settings --> Users&Companies --> " "Companies`" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:505 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:534 msgid "Open any company you have." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:506 -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:529 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:535 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:558 msgid "Click on \"Action\" and then on \"Download XSD file to CFDI\"." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:511 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:540 msgid "" "Now you can make an invoice with any error (for example a product without " "code which is pretty common) and an explicit error will be shown instead a " "generic one with no explanation." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:516 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:545 msgid "If you see an error like this:" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:518 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:547 msgid "The cfdi generated is not valid" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:520 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:549 msgid "" "attribute decl. 'TipoRelacion', attribute 'type': The QName value " "'{http://www.sat.gob.mx/sitio_internet/cfd/catalogos}c_TipoRelacion' does " "not resolve to a(n) simple type definition., line 36" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:524 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:553 msgid "" "This can be caused because of a database backup restored in anothe server, " "or when the XSD files are not correctly downloaded. Follow the same steps as" " above but:" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:528 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:557 msgid "Go to the company in which the error occurs." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:535 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:564 msgid "**Error message** (Only applicable on CFDI 3.3):" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:537 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:566 msgid "" ":9:0:ERROR:SCHEMASV:SCHEMAV_CVC_MINLENGTH_VALID: Element " "'{http://www.sat.gob.mx/cfd/3}Concepto', attribute 'NoIdentificacion': " @@ -3592,43 +4184,43 @@ msgid "" "allowed minimum length of '1'." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:539 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:568 msgid "" ":9:0:ERROR:SCHEMASV:SCHEMAV_CVC_PATTERN_VALID: Element " "'{http://www.sat.gob.mx/cfd/3}Concepto', attribute 'NoIdentificacion': " "[facet 'pattern'] The value '' is not accepted by the pattern '[^|]{1,100}'." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:542 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:571 msgid "" "**Solution:** You forget to set the proper \"Reference\" field in the " "product, please go to the product form and set your internal reference " "properly." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:545 -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:570 -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:580 -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:593 -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:604 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:574 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:599 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:609 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:622 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:633 msgid "**Error message**:" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:547 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:576 msgid "" ":6:0:ERROR:SCHEMASV:SCHEMAV_CVC_COMPLEX_TYPE_4: Element " "'{http://www.sat.gob.mx/cfd/3}RegimenFiscal': The attribute 'Regimen' is " "required but missing." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:549 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:578 msgid "" ":5:0:ERROR:SCHEMASV:SCHEMAV_CVC_COMPLEX_TYPE_4: Element " "'{http://www.sat.gob.mx/cfd/3}Emisor': The attribute 'RegimenFiscal' is " "required but missing." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:552 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:581 msgid "" "**Solution:** You forget to set the proper \"Fiscal Position\" on the " "partner of the company, go to customers, remove the customer filter and look" @@ -3638,20 +4230,20 @@ msgid "" "considerations about fiscal positions." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:559 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:588 msgid "" "Yo must go to the Fiscal Position configuration and set the proper code (it " "is the first 3 numbers in the name) for example for the test one you should " "set 601, it will look like the image." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:567 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:596 msgid "" "For testing purposes this value must be *601 - General de Ley Personas " "Morales* which is the one required for the demo VAT." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:572 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:601 msgid "" ":2:0:ERROR:SCHEMASV:SCHEMAV_CVC_ENUMERATION_VALID: Element " "'{http://www.sat.gob.mx/cfd/3}Comprobante', attribute 'FormaPago': [facet " @@ -3660,11 +4252,11 @@ msgid "" "'26', '27', '28', '29', '30', '99'}" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:575 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:604 msgid "**Solution:** The payment method is required on your invoice." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:582 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:611 msgid "" ":2:0:ERROR:SCHEMASV:SCHEMAV_CVC_ENUMERATION_VALID: Element " "'{http://www.sat.gob.mx/cfd/3}Comprobante', attribute 'LugarExpedicion': " @@ -3678,7 +4270,7 @@ msgid "" "missing." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:587 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:616 msgid "" "**Solution:** You must set the address on your company properly, this is a " "mandatory group of fields, you can go to your company configuration on " @@ -3687,7 +4279,7 @@ msgid "" "info`." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:595 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:624 msgid "" ":2:0:ERROR:SCHEMASV:SCHEMAV_CVC_DATATYPE_VALID_1_2_1: Element " "'{http://www.sat.gob.mx/cfd/3}Comprobante', attribute 'LugarExpedicion': '' " @@ -3695,13 +4287,13 @@ msgid "" "'{http://www.sat.gob.mx/sitio_internet/cfd/catalogos}c_CodigoPostal'." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:598 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:627 msgid "" "**Solution:** The postal code on your company address is not a valid one for" " Mexico, fix it." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:606 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:635 msgid "" ":18:0:ERROR:SCHEMASV:SCHEMAV_CVC_COMPLEX_TYPE_4: Element " "'{http://www.sat.gob.mx/cfd/3}Traslado': The attribute 'TipoFactor' is " @@ -3710,7 +4302,7 @@ msgid "" "is required but missing.\", '')" msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:610 +#: ../../accounting/localizations/mexico.rst:639 msgid "" "**Solution:** Set the mexican name for the tax 0% and 16% in your system and" " used on the invoice." @@ -4282,155 +4874,6 @@ msgstr "如果您手动创建的资产, 你仍然需要建立供应商账单这 msgid "Explanation of the fields:" msgstr "字段的说明 :" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Status" -msgstr "省份" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "When an asset is created, the status is 'Draft'." -msgstr "当资产被创建，则状态为“草稿”。" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"If the asset is confirmed, the status goes in 'Running' and the depreciation" -" lines can be posted in the accounting." -msgstr "如果资产被确认,进入“运行”状态, 折旧行会自动过账。" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"You can manually close an asset when the depreciation is over. If the last " -"line of depreciation is posted, the asset automatically goes in that status." -msgstr "当折旧结束时, 可以手动关闭资产。如果发布的最后一行折旧,资产自动进入那个状态。" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Asset Category" -msgstr "资产类别" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Category of asset" -msgstr "资产类别" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Date" -msgstr "日期" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Date of asset" -msgstr "资产日期" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Depreciation Dates" -msgstr "折旧日期" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "The way to compute the date of the first depreciation." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Based on last day of purchase period: The depreciation dates will be based" -" on the last day of the purchase month or the purchase year (depending on " -"the periodicity of the depreciations)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Based on purchase date: The depreciation dates will be based on the " -"purchase date." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "First Depreciation Date" -msgstr "首次折旧日期" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Note that this date does not alter the computation of the first journal " -"entry in case of prorata temporis assets. It simply changes its accounting " -"date" -msgstr "请注意，该日期不改变第一日记账的计算情况下的临时资产。它只是改变其会计日期" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Gross Value" -msgstr "毛值" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Gross value of asset" -msgstr "资产的毛值" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Salvage Value" -msgstr "剩余价值" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "It is the amount you plan to have that you cannot depreciate." -msgstr "折旧后资产的剩余价值金额" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Computation Method" -msgstr "计算方法" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Choose the method to use to compute the amount of depreciation lines." -msgstr "选择折旧的计算方式." - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Linear: Calculated on basis of: Gross Value / Number of Depreciations" -msgstr "* 线性: 计算基于 : 毛值 / 折旧数" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Degressive: Calculated on basis of: Residual Value * Degressive Factor" -msgstr "* 递减: 计算基于: 残值 * 递减因子" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Time Method Based On" -msgstr "时间方式基于" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Choose the method to use to compute the dates and number of entries." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Number of Entries: Fix the number of entries and the time between 2 " -"depreciations." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"* Ending Date: Choose the time between 2 depreciations and the date the " -"depreciations won't go beyond." -msgstr "*结束日期:选择2个折旧的间隔和折旧的最后期限." - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Prorata Temporis" -msgstr "即时按比例分配" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Indicates that the first depreciation entry for this asset have to be done " -"from the asset date (purchase date) instead of the first January / Start " -"date of fiscal year" -msgstr "资产折旧的第一个凭证是从购买日开始而不是年初开始." - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Number of Depreciations" -msgstr "折旧数量" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "The number of depreciations needed to depreciate your asset" -msgstr "被折旧资产的折旧数量" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "Number of Months in a Period" -msgstr "在一个期间内的月数" - -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:0 -msgid "The amount of time between two depreciations, in months" -msgstr "折旧期间，以月计算" - #: ../../accounting/others/adviser/assets.rst:88 msgid "Try creating an *Asset* in our online demonstration" msgstr "尝试创建一个 *资产* 我们的在线演示" @@ -4527,12 +4970,15 @@ msgstr "如何管理财务预算?" #: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:8 msgid "" -"Managing budgets is an essential part of running a business. It allows you " -"to measure your actual financial performance against the planned one. Odoo " -"manages its budgets using both General and Analytic Accounts." -msgstr "预算管理是企业运营的重要组成部分。你可以对比计划检测实际财务业绩。Odoo使用通用和分析科目管理其预算。" +"Managing budgets is an essential part of running a business. Budgets help " +"people become more intentional with the way money is spent and direct people" +" to organize and prioritize their work to meet financial goals. They allows " +"you to plan your desired financial outcome and then measure your actual " +"performance against the plan. Odoo manages budgets using both General and " +"Analytic Accounts." +msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:12 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:15 msgid "" "We will use the following example to illustrate. We just started a project " "with Smith&Co and we would like to budget the incomes and expenses of that " @@ -4541,14 +4987,14 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "我们将使用下面的例子来说明。我们与Smith&Co刚刚开始一个项目, 我们希望做这个项目的收入和费用的预算。我们计划收入1000, 费用不超700。" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:20 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:23 msgid "" "First we need to install the relevant apps to use budgeting. The main module" " is the accounting app. Go in the app module and install the **Accounting " "and Finance** app." msgstr "首先我们需要安装预算相应的应用程序。会计的主要模块应用。在应用程序模块, 安装 **会计和金融** 应用。" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:27 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:30 msgid "" "Further configuration is as well necessary. Go to :menuselection:`Accounting" " module --> Configuration --> Settings` and enable the **Budget management**" @@ -4557,20 +5003,45 @@ msgstr "" "也进一步配置是必要的。去 :menuselection:`Accounting module --> Configuration --> " "Settings` , 使用 **预算管理** 功能" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:35 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:38 msgid "Budgetary Positions" msgstr "预算状况" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:37 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:40 msgid "" -"Budgetary positions are the general accounts for which you want to keep " -"budgets (typically expense or income accounts). They need to be defined so " -"Odoo can know it which accounts he needs to go get the budget information. " -"Some might be already installed with your chart of accounts." +"Budgetary positions are lists of accounts for which you want to keep budgets" +" (typically expense or income accounts). They need to be defined so Odoo can" +" know it which accounts he needs to go get the budget information." msgstr "" -"预算的位置一般是科目, 用于保存预算(通常是费用或收入科目)。事先需要定义, Odoo才知道怎样去抓取预算信息。有一些可能已在科目表中安装." -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:43 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:45 +msgid "" +"The budgetary positions act as a type of restriction on what can be recorded" +" in the 'practical amount' column in a budget." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:48 +msgid "" +"Each budgetary position can have any number of accounts from the general " +"ledger (the main chart of accounts) assigned to it, though it must have at " +"least one." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:51 +msgid "" +"If you record a transaction that has an analytic account assigned to it that" +" *is* included in a budget line but one of the general ledger accounts *is " +"not* included in the budgetary position for that same budget line, it will " +"not appear within the 'practical amount' column of that budget line." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:56 +msgid "" +"Some budgetary positions might be already installed with your chart of " +"accounts." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:59 msgid "" "To define the positions enter the :menuselection:`Accounting module --> " "Configuration --> Budgetary Positions`." @@ -4578,37 +5049,37 @@ msgstr "" "定义位置, 进入 :menuselection:`Accounting module --> Configuration --> Budgetary " "Positions` ." -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:46 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:62 msgid "" "For our example we need to define what accounts relates to our project's " "expenses. Create a position and add items to select the accounts." msgstr "在我们的示例中, 我们需要定义关联到项目费用的科目。创建一个位置并将条目添加到选择账户。" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:52 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:68 msgid "" "In this case we select the three relevant accounts used wherein we will book" " our expenses." msgstr "在这种情况下, 我们选择使用的三个相关科目, 用来登记费用。" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:58 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:74 msgid "Click on *Select*." msgstr "点击 *选择* 。" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:63 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:79 msgid "Save the changes to confirm your Budgetary position." msgstr "保存变更确认你的预算状况。" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:65 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:81 msgid "" "Repeat this steps to create a revenue budgetary position. Only in this case " "select the relevant income accounts." msgstr "重复这个步骤创建一个收入预算的位置。只有在这种情况下选择相关收入科目。" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:69 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:85 msgid "Analytical account" msgstr "分析会计" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:71 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:87 msgid "" "Odoo needs to know which costs or expenses are relevant to a specified " "budget. To do so we need to link our invoices and expenses to a defined " @@ -4618,30 +5089,30 @@ msgid "" " partner." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:82 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:98 msgid "Set a budget" msgstr "设置预算" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:84 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:100 msgid "" "Let's now set our targets for our budget. We specified that we expect to " "gain 1000 with this project and we would like not to spend more than 700." msgstr "现在, 让我们为我们的预算设定我们的目标。我们规定, 我们期望这个项目获得1000, 话费不超过700。" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:88 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:104 msgid "" "To set those targets, enter the accounting app, select " ":menuselection:`Advisers --> Budgets` and create a new Budget." msgstr "设定这些目标, 进入会计程序, 选择 :menuselection:`Advisers --> Budgets` , 创建一个新的预算。" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:91 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:107 msgid "" "We have to give a name to the budget. In this case we'll call it \"Smith " "Project\". Select the period wherein the budget will be applicable. Next add" " an item to specify your targets in the Budget Line." msgstr "我们需要为这个预算命名。在这种情况下, 我们把它叫做 \"史密斯项目\" 。选择预算适用的期间。下一步, 在预算行定义目标。 " -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:98 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:114 msgid "" "Select the Budgetary Position related to the Budget Line. In other words, " "select the position that points to the accounts you want to budget. In this " @@ -4653,52 +5124,52 @@ msgstr "" "选择相关预算行的预算位置。换句话说, 选择你想要的位置科目。在这种情况下, 我们将开始费用目标, 不超700。选择“成本\" 预算位置, " "指定计划预算金额。我们记录成本, 我们需要指定一个 **负数金额** 。最后, 选择相应的分析科目。 " -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:108 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:124 msgid "" "Click on **Save & new** to input the revenue budget. The Budgetary Position " "is Revenue and the Planned Amount is 1000. Save and close" msgstr "点击 **Save & new** 输入收入预算。预算的位置是收入, 计划是1000。保存并关闭" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:111 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:127 msgid "You'll need to **Confirm** and **Approve** the budget." msgstr "你需要确认并且同意这个预算" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:114 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:130 msgid "Check your budget" msgstr "检查预算" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:116 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:132 msgid "" "You can check your budget at any time. To see the evolution, let's book some" " Invoices and Vendors Bills." msgstr "你可以在任何时间检查你的预算。查看进化, 让我们录入一些发票和供应商账单。" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:121 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:137 msgid "" "if you use analytical accounts remember that you need to specify the account" " in the invoice and / or purchase line." msgstr "如果你使用分析账户, 请记住, 您需要在发票上和/或购买行指定科目。" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:125 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:141 msgid "for more information about booking invoices and purchase orders see:" msgstr "关于发票和采购订单的信息请看 :" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:127 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:143 msgid ":doc:`../../receivables/customer_invoices/overview`" msgstr ":doc:`../../receivables/customer_invoices/overview` " -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:129 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:145 msgid "Go back in the budget list and find the Smith Project." msgstr "返回预算明细并且找到具体项目" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:131 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:147 msgid "" "Via the analytical account, Odoo can account the invoice lines and purchase " "lines booked in the accounts and will display them in the **Practical " "Amount** column." msgstr "通过分析账户, Odoo可以计算发票行和采购发票行, 金额将显示在 **实际金额** 列。" -#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:140 +#: ../../accounting/others/adviser/budget.rst:156 msgid "" "The theoretical amount represents the amount of money you theoretically " "could have spend / should have received in function of the date. When your " @@ -5457,9 +5928,9 @@ msgstr " **科目** " #: ../../accounting/others/analytic/usage.rst:64 #: ../../accounting/others/analytic/usage.rst:157 -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:48 -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:62 -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:74 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:54 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:68 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:80 #: ../../accounting/overview/process_overview/customer_invoice.rst:107 #: ../../accounting/overview/process_overview/customer_invoice.rst:128 msgid "**Debit**" @@ -5467,9 +5938,9 @@ msgstr " **借方** " #: ../../accounting/others/analytic/usage.rst:64 #: ../../accounting/others/analytic/usage.rst:157 -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:48 -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:62 -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:74 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:54 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:68 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:80 #: ../../accounting/overview/process_overview/customer_invoice.rst:107 #: ../../accounting/overview/process_overview/customer_invoice.rst:128 msgid "**Credit**" @@ -5959,7 +6430,7 @@ msgstr "权益" #: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:47 msgid "Current Year Earnings" -msgstr "当本年度收入" +msgstr "本年度收入" #: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:49 msgid "Other Income" @@ -6015,6 +6486,80 @@ msgid "" "button." msgstr "要创建一个新科目, 转到会计应用模块。打开菜单 :menuselection:'顾问 -->科目表', 点击 **新建** 按钮。" +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Account Type is used for information purpose, to generate country-specific " +"legal reports, and set the rules to close a fiscal year and generate opening" +" entries." +msgstr "科目类型用于信息目的，用于生成符合各国财税规范的报告，以及设置会计年度关闭的规则，并生成期初分录" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "Can Create Asset" +msgstr "可创建资产" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Technical field specifying if the account can generate asset depending on " +"it's type. It is used in the account form view." +msgstr "指定帐户是否可以根据其类型生成资产的技术字段。它在帐户窗体视图中使用。" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "Asset Model" +msgstr "资产模型" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "" +"If this is selected, an asset will be created automatically when Journal " +"Items on this account are posted." +msgstr "如果选择此选项，则过帐该帐户的日记帐项目时将自动创建资产。" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "Tags" +msgstr "标签" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "Optional tags you may want to assign for custom reporting" +msgstr "你可能想赋予给定义报表的选项标签" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "Account Currency" +msgstr "科目币种" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "Forces all moves for this account to have this account currency." +msgstr "强制这个科目所有的凭证拥有这个科目的币种." + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "Internal Type" +msgstr "内部类型" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "" +"The 'Internal Type' is used for features available on different types of " +"accounts: liquidity type is for cash or bank accounts, payable/receivable is" +" for vendor/customer accounts." +msgstr " '内部类型' 用于不同类型科目的功能: 流动性用于现金或银行科目, 应付/应收用于供应商/客户科目." + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "Internal Group" +msgstr "内部群组" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "" +"The 'Internal Group' is used to filter accounts based on the internal group " +"set on the account type." +msgstr "'内部组' 是用于基于账户类型上设置的内部组来过滤账户的。" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "Allow Reconciliation" +msgstr "允许核销" + +#: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Check this box if this account allows invoices & payments matching of " +"journal items." +msgstr "如果这个科目能够让发票和付款与日记账的匹配就勾选这个框" + #: ../../accounting/others/configuration/account_type.rst:86 msgid "View *Create Account* in our Online Demonstration" msgstr "在我们的在线演示查看 *创建科目*" @@ -6886,6 +7431,7 @@ msgid "Multi-currency invoices & Vendor Bills" msgstr "多币别发票和供应商账单" #: ../../accounting/others/multicurrencies/invoices_payments.rst:54 +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Invoices" msgstr "发票" @@ -6943,31 +7489,32 @@ msgstr "用你自己的公式如何创建定制报表？" #: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:8 msgid "" -"Odoo 9 comes with a powerful and easy-to-use reporting framework. Creating " -"new reports (such as a tax report or a balance sheet for a specific country)" -" to suit your needs is now easier than ever." -msgstr "Odoo 9提供了一个有用且便捷的报告框架。创建新报告(如税收报告或资产负债表, 在指定国家), 以适应您的需求, 现在比以往更容易。" +"Odoo 13 comes with a powerful and easy-to-use reporting framework. Creating " +"new reports (such as a tax report or a balance sheet or income statement " +"with specific groupings and layout ) to suit your needs is now easier than " +"ever." +msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:13 +#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:14 msgid "Activate the developer mode" msgstr "激活开发者模式" -#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:15 +#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:16 msgid "" "In order to have access to the financial report creation interface, the " "**developer mode** needs to be activated. To do that, first click on the " "user profile in the top right menu, then **About**." msgstr "进入财务报告创建界面, 需激活 **开发人员模式** 。要做到这一点,首先在右上角目录中点击用户资料,然后点击 **About** 。" -#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:22 +#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:23 msgid "Click on : **Activate the developer mode**." msgstr "点击 : **激活开发者模式** 。" -#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:28 +#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:29 msgid "Create your financial report" msgstr "创建财务报表" -#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:30 +#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:31 msgid "" "First, you need to create your financial report. To do that, go to " ":menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Financial Reports`" @@ -6975,43 +7522,43 @@ msgstr "" "首先, 您需要创建您的财务报告。要做到这一点, 去 :menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> " "Financial Reports` " -#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:36 +#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:37 msgid "" -"Once the name is filled, there are two other parameters that need to be " +"Once the name is entered, there are two other parameters that need to be " "configured:" -msgstr "一旦命名, 还需配置两个参数 :" +msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:39 +#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:40 msgid "**Show Credit and Debit Columns**" msgstr " **显示借方和贷方栏位** " -#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:41 +#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:42 msgid "**Analysis Period** :" msgstr " **分析期间**: " -#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:43 -msgid "Based on date ranges (eg Profit and Loss)" -msgstr "基于日期区间(例如损益)" +#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:44 +msgid "Based on date ranges (e.g. Profit and Loss)" +msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:45 -msgid "Based on a single date (eg Balance Sheet)" -msgstr "基于单个日期(例如余额表)" +#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:46 +msgid "Based on a single date (e.g. Balance Sheet)" +msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:47 +#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:48 msgid "" -"Based on date ranges with 'older' and 'total' columns and last 3 months (eg." -" Aged Partner Balances)" -msgstr "根据日期范围的“老\" 和“总计 \"列, 最后的3个月(如. 业务伙伴账龄余额表)" +"Based on date ranges with 'older' and 'total' columns and last 3 months " +"(e.g. Aged Partner Balances)" +msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:50 -msgid "Bases on date ranges and cash basis method (eg Cash Flow Statement)" -msgstr "基于日期范围，以及现金收付制方法(例如现金流量表)" +#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:51 +msgid "Bases on date ranges and cash basis method (e.g. Cash Flow Statement)" +msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:54 +#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:55 msgid "Add lines in your custom reports" msgstr "在定制报表中添加行" -#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:56 +#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:57 msgid "" "After you've created the report, you need to fill it with lines. They all " "need a **name**, a **code** (that is used to refer to the line), a " @@ -7019,24 +7566,24 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "创建了报告之后, 需要填充行。他们都需要一个 **姓名** , **代码** (用于行), **序列号** 和 **级** (用于补充行)。" -#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:63 +#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:64 msgid "" "In the **formulas** field you can add one or more formulas to assign a value" " to the balance column (and debit and credit column if applicable – " "separated by ;)" msgstr "在 **公式** 字段可以添加一个或多个列公式到余额行 (和借方和贷方列如果适用-隔开;)" -#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:67 +#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:68 msgid "You have several objects available in the formula :" msgstr "在公式中有几个可用对象 :" -#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:69 +#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:70 msgid "" "``Ndays`` : The number of days in the selected period (for reports with a " "date range)." msgstr "\" Ndays \\ \": 选择的期间的天数 (报表的日期范围)。" -#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:72 +#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:73 msgid "" "Another report, referenced by its code. Use ``.balance`` to get its balance " "value (also available are ``.credit``, ``.debit`` and ``.amount_residual``)" @@ -7044,7 +7591,7 @@ msgstr "" "另一份报告, 引用的代码。使用“。平衡“获得其余额(也可用\" .credit \\ \",\" .debit \\ \"and\" " ".amount_residual \\ \")" -#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:76 +#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:77 msgid "" "A line can also be based on the sum of account move lines on a selected " "domain. In which case you need to fill the domain field with an Odoo domain " @@ -7056,27 +7603,27 @@ msgstr "" "一行也来自所选域的科目的总和。在何种情况下, 需要填写域字段. 然后一个额外的对象可以在公式, 即''和'', 科目的总和。您还可以使用group " "by字段组合科目行。" -#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:83 +#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:84 msgid "Other useful fields :" msgstr "其余有用的字段 :" -#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:85 +#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:86 msgid "**Type** : Type of the result of the formula." msgstr " **类型**: 公式结果的类型。" -#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:87 +#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:88 msgid "" "**Is growth good when positive** : Used when computing the comparison " "column. Check if growth is good (displayed in green) or not." msgstr " **正数增长是好的吗**: 在计算比较列时使用。检查增长是否是好事(显示在绿色)。" -#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:90 +#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:91 msgid "" "**Special date changer** : If a specific line in a report should not use the" " same dates as the rest of the report." msgstr " **特别日期改变**: 如果报表中一个特定的行不应使用与其余部分相同的日期。" -#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:93 +#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:94 msgid "" "**Show domain** : How the domain of a line is displayed. Can be foldable " "(``default``, hidden at the start but can be unfolded), ``always`` (always " @@ -7085,7 +7632,7 @@ msgstr "" " **Show domain**: 显示行的域。可以折叠(“默认\" , 藏在开始处, 但可以展开), “总是 \"(总是显示)或“never\" " "(永远不会)。 " -#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:98 +#: ../../accounting/others/reporting/customize.rst:99 msgid ":doc:`main_reports`" msgstr ":doc:`main_reports` " @@ -7782,73 +8329,81 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:27 msgid "" "Once this is done, you can configure your taxes in " -":menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Taxes`. You can open a tax " -"and in the *Advanced Options* tab you will see the checkbox *Use Cash " -"Basis*. You will then have to define the *Tax Received Account*." +":menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Taxes`. At first set the " +"proper transitional accounts to post taxes until you register the payment." msgstr "" -"完成这一步骤后，可在以下路径配置税种：menuselection:会计->配置->税种，然后在*高级选项*页签下打开“税种”，勾选*使用收付实现税*，然后定义*税收接收帐户*。" -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:39 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:35 +msgid "" +"In the *Advanced Options* tab you will turn *Tax Due* to *Based on Payment*." +" You will then have to define the *Tax Received* account in which to post " +"the tax amount when the payment is received and the *Base Tax Received " +"Account* to post the base tax amount for an accurate tax report." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:45 msgid "What is the impact of cash basis taxes in my accounting ?" msgstr "收付实现税对我的会计系统将造成何种影响？" -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:41 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:47 msgid "" "Let’s take an example. You make a sale of $100 with a 15% cash basis tax. " "When you validate the customer invoice, the following entry is created in " "your accounting:" msgstr "举个例子，你取得了100美元的销售收入，附带15%的收付实现税。当你验证客户发票时，以下科目会被创建到你的会计系统中：" -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:46 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:52 msgid "Customer Invoices Journal" msgstr "客户发票日记账" -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:50 -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:66 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:56 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:72 msgid "Receivables $115" msgstr "应收15美元" -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:52 -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:76 -msgid "Tax Account $15" -msgstr "税款帐户15美元" - -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:54 -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:80 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:58 #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:82 +msgid "Temporary Tax Account $15" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:60 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:86 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:88 msgid "Income Account $100" msgstr "收入帐户100美元" -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:57 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:63 msgid "A few days later, you receive the payment:" msgstr "几天后，你收到付款：" -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:60 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:66 msgid "Bank Journal" msgstr "银行日记账" -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:64 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:70 msgid "Bank $115" msgstr "银行115美元" -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:69 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:75 msgid "" "When you reconcile the invoice and the payment, this entry is generated:" msgstr "当你对比发票和付款时，生成了以下条目：" -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:72 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:78 msgid "Tax Cash Basis Journal" msgstr "税率现金收付制日记账" -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:78 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:84 msgid "Tax Received Account $15" msgstr "税收帐户15美元" -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:86 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/cash_basis_taxes.rst:92 msgid "" -"The two journal items created in the Income Account are neutral but they are" -" needed to insure correct tax reports in Odoo." -msgstr "在收入帐户下创建的两个日记帐项目为中性，但必需使用它们来确保Odoo中的税收报告准确无误。" +"The last two journal items are neutral but they are needed to insure correct" +" tax reports in Odoo with accurate base tax amounts. We advise to use a " +"default revenue account. The balance of this account will then always be at " +"zero." +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/create.rst:3 msgid "How to create new taxes" @@ -7951,7 +8506,7 @@ msgstr "**标签**:用于客户报告，通常可以不填写。" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/create.rst:69 #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/default_taxes.rst:28 -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:87 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:72 msgid ":doc:`application`" msgstr ":doc:`application` " @@ -8139,117 +8694,120 @@ msgstr "" ":menuselection:`销售->配置->设置（税种显示）,勾选*显示含税(B2C)*。" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:3 -msgid "How to get correct tax rates in the US thanks to TaxCloud" -msgstr "怎样通过TaxCloud获得美国正确的税率" +msgid "How to get correct tax rates in the United States using TaxCloud" +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:5 msgid "" -"The **TaxCloud** integration allows you to calculate the sales tax for every" -" address in the United States and keeps track of which product types are " -"exempt from sales tax and in which states each exemption applies. TaxCloud " -"calculates sales tax in real-time for every state, city, and special " -"jurisdiction in the United States." +"The **TaxCloud** integration allows you to correctly calculate the sales tax" +" for every address in the United States and keeps track of which products " +"are exempt from sales tax and in which states each exemption applies. " +"TaxCloud calculates sales tax in real-time for every state, city, and " +"special jurisdiction in the United States." msgstr "" -"**TaxCloud**集成功能允许用户计算美国各地的销售税，跟踪免除销售税的产品类别，以及哪些州支持免税。TaxCloud可实时计算各州、市以及美国特别司法辖区的销售税。" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:15 -msgid "In Tax Cloud" -msgstr "在TaxCloud税收云上" +msgid "In TaxCloud" +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:16 msgid "" -"Create a free account on `*TaxCloud* `__ " +"Create a free account on `TaxCloud `__ " "website." -msgstr "在*TaxCloud* `__地址下创建一个帐户" +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:18 -msgid "Register your website on TaxCloud to get an *API ID* and an *API Key*." -msgstr "在该网址上注册TaxCloud，获得一个*API ID*和*API密钥*。" +msgid "" +"Register your Odoo website on TaxCloud to get an *API ID* and an *API Key*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:23 +msgid "" +"In Settings on TaxCloud, click *Locations* to enter the location of your " +"Office(s) & Warehouse(s)." +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:24 +msgid "" +"In Settings on TaxCloud, click *Manage Tax States* to verify the states " +"where you collect sales tax." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:27 msgid "In Odoo" msgstr "在Odoo上" -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:25 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:28 msgid "" -"Go to :menuselection:`Invoicing/Accounting --> Configuration --> Settings` " -"and check *Compute sales tax automatically using TaxCloud*. Click *Apply*." -msgstr "进入 :menuselection:`发票/会计->配置->设置，勾选*使用TaxCloud自动计算销售税，点击*应用*。" +"Go to :menuselection:`Invoicing / Accounting --> Configuration --> Settings`" +" and check *TaxCloud - Compute tax rates based on U.S. ZIP codes* (note: " +"actually uses complete street address)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:30 +msgid "Enter your TaxCloud credentials." +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:31 -msgid "Still in those settings, enter your TaxCloud credentials." -msgstr "继续在设置中输入你的TaxCloud证书。" +msgid "Click SAVE to store your credentials." +msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:32 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:36 msgid "" -"Hit *Sync TaxCloud Categories (TIC)* to import TIC product categories from " -"TaxCloud (Taxability Information Codes). Some categories may imply specific " -"rates." -msgstr "点击*同步TaxCloud目录(TIC)*，从TaxCloud中导入TIC（征税信息代码）产品目录。有些目录可能表示特定的税率。" +"Click the Refresh Icon next to *Default Category* to import the TIC product " +"categories from TaxCloud (Taxability Information Codes). Some categories may" +" imply specific rates or attract product/service type exemptions." +msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:39 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:38 msgid "" -"Set default *TIC Code* and taxe rates. This will apply to any new product " -"created. A default sales tax is needed to trigger the tax computation." -msgstr "设置默认的*TIC代码*和税率。这适用于创建的任一新产品。默认税率用于触发税款的计算。" +"Select your default *TIC Code*. This will apply to any new product created." +msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:43 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:40 msgid "" -"For products under a specific category, select it in its detail form (in " -"*Sales* tab)." -msgstr "对于一个特定目录下的产品，请从详情表中进行选择（位于*销售*页签下）。" +"Set a specific TaxCloud TIC Category on the *General Information* tab of the" +" Product, or on the Product Category." +msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:46 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:42 msgid "" -"Make sure your company address is well defined (especially the state and the" -" zip code). Go to :menuselection:`Settings --> General Settings` and click " -"*Configure your company data*." -msgstr "确保你的公司地址是正确的（尤其是邮政编码）。到以下路径进行设置 :menuselection:`设置->通用设置，点击*配置公司信息*。" +"Make sure your company address is complete (including the state and the zip " +"code). Go to :menuselection:`Settings --> Users & Companies --> Companies` " +"to open and edit your Company record." +msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:51 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:47 msgid "How it works" msgstr "工作方式" -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:53 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:49 msgid "" -"Automatic tax assignation works thanks to fiscal positions (see " -":doc:`application`). A specific fiscal position is created when installing " -"*TaxCloud*. Everything works out-of-the-box." -msgstr "由财务状况而定的自动税收分配工作（见doc:’应用’）。安装*TaxCloud*时，特定的财务状况同时被创建。一切工作方式都非常新颖。" - -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:58 -msgid "" -"This fiscal position is set on any sales order, web order, or invoice when " -"the customer country is *United States*. This is triggering the automated " -"tax computation." -msgstr "任何来自*美国*的销售订单、网页订单或发票都可设置这一财务状况，并触发自动税收计算。" - -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:65 -msgid "" -"Add a product with a default sales tax. Odoo will automatically send a " -"request to TaxCloud, get the correct tax percentage based on the customer " -"location (state and zip code) and product TIC category, create a new tax " -"rate if that tax percentage does not already exist in your system and return" -" it in the order item line (e.g. 7.0%)." +"Salestax is calculated in Odoo based on fiscal positions (see " +":doc:`application`). A Fiscal Position for the United States is created when" +" installing *TaxCloud*. Everything works out-of-the-box." msgstr "" -"为产品添加一个默认销售税。Odoo会自动发送请求给TaxCloud，获取基于客户位置（州和城市邮编）和产品TIC目录的准确税率。如果系统中没有合适的税率，则会创建一个税率（例如7.0%）并返回到订单项目行。" -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:75 -msgid "How to create specific tax mappings using TaxCloud" -msgstr "如何使用TaxCloud创建一个特定的税收映射" - -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:77 +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:54 msgid "" -"You can create several fiscal positions using TaxCloud. Check *Use TaxCloud " -"API* to do so. Such fiscal postions can be assigned to customers in their " -"detail form in order to get them by default whenever they buy you something." +"You can configure Odoo to automtically detect which Customers should use " +"this fiscal position. Go to :menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration " +"--> Fiscal Positions` to open and edit the record." msgstr "" -"勾选*使用TaxCloud " -"API*，可以用TaxCloud创建多种财务状况。这些状况可以在详细表中分配给不同的顾客。每次顾客向你购买商品时都可默认取得。" -#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:86 -msgid ":doc:`default_taxes`" -msgstr ":doc:`default_taxes`" +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:61 +msgid "" +"Now, this fiscal position is automatically set on any sales order, web " +"order, or invoice when the customer country is *United States*. This " +"triggers the automated tax computation." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/others/taxes/taxcloud.rst:68 +msgid "" +"Add your product(s). You have two options to get Sales Tax on the Order. " +"You can confirm it, or you can save it and from the *Action* Menu choose " +"**Update Taxes with TaxCloud**." +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/overview/getting_started.rst:3 msgid "Getting Started" @@ -8649,8 +9207,8 @@ msgid "" msgstr "当然, Odoo也支持移动设备。你可以用它随时查看你的账户。" #: ../../accounting/overview/main_concepts/intro.rst:41 -msgid "Try Odoo now, and join 2 millions of happy users." -msgstr "马上试用Odoo, 加入200万欢乐的用户中来。" +msgid "Try Odoo now, and join 2 million happy users." +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/overview/main_concepts/memento.rst:5 msgid "Accounting Memento For Entrepreneurs (US GAAP)" @@ -8723,7 +9281,7 @@ msgstr "资产 = 负债 + 权益" #: ../../accounting/overview/main_concepts/memento.rst:67 msgid "Chart of Accounts" -msgstr "科目表" +msgstr "会计科目" #: ../../accounting/overview/main_concepts/memento.rst:69 msgid "" @@ -8740,6 +9298,7 @@ msgid "Balance = Debit - Credit" msgstr "余额 = 借方 - 贷方" #: ../../accounting/overview/main_concepts/memento.rst:84 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:83 msgid "Journal Entries" msgstr "日记账分录" @@ -8826,7 +9385,7 @@ msgstr "银行账户 :在相关的银行存款日记帐定义" #: ../../accounting/overview/main_concepts/memento.rst:226 #: ../../accounting/overview/main_concepts/memento.rst:242 msgid "Reconciliation" -msgstr "调节" +msgstr "核销" #: ../../accounting/overview/main_concepts/memento.rst:132 msgid "" @@ -8903,7 +9462,7 @@ msgstr "借方" #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/credit_cards.rst:91 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/credit_cards.rst:141 msgid "Credit" -msgstr "贷方" +msgstr "信用" #: ../../accounting/overview/main_concepts/memento.rst:158 msgid "Invoice 1" @@ -9048,7 +9607,7 @@ msgstr "第一个日记帐分录是由注册在发票付款创建的。注册银 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/credit_cards.rst:91 #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/credit_cards.rst:141 msgid "Account" -msgstr "科目" +msgstr "账户" #: ../../accounting/overview/main_concepts/memento.rst:218 #: ../../accounting/overview/main_concepts/memento.rst:244 @@ -9233,10 +9792,10 @@ msgstr "打开或者形式发票" #: ../../accounting/overview/process_overview/customer_invoice.rst:73 msgid "" -"An invoice will usually include the quantity and price the of goods and/or " +"An invoice will usually include the quantity and the price of goods and/or " "services, the date, any parties involved, the unique invoice number, and any" " tax information." -msgstr "发票通常会包括商品和/或服务的数量和价格,日期,客户,唯一的发票号码,和税务信息。" +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/overview/process_overview/customer_invoice.rst:77 msgid "" @@ -9340,7 +9899,7 @@ msgstr "在会计仪表板上创建一个银行对账单,输入金额100美元 #: ../../accounting/overview/process_overview/customer_invoice.rst:149 msgid "Reconcile" -msgstr "调节" +msgstr "核销" #: ../../accounting/overview/process_overview/customer_invoice.rst:151 msgid "Now let's reconcile!" @@ -9428,9 +9987,9 @@ msgstr "资产负债表" #: ../../accounting/overview/process_overview/customer_invoice.rst:225 msgid "" -"The balance sheet summarizes the your company's liabilities, assets and " -"equity at a specific moment in time." -msgstr "资产负债表汇总了一定时期的公司负债,资产和所有者权益。" +"The balance sheet summarizes your company's liabilities, assets and equity " +"at a specific moment in time." +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/overview/process_overview/customer_invoice.rst:234 msgid "" @@ -9461,7 +10020,7 @@ msgstr "如果你想管理供应商发票, 可使用Odoo采购应用程序, 程 #: ../../accounting/overview/process_overview/supplier_bill.rst:18 msgid "Record a new vendor bill" -msgstr "登记一张新的供应商账单" +msgstr "创建新的供应商账单" #: ../../accounting/overview/process_overview/supplier_bill.rst:20 msgid "" @@ -10204,6 +10763,22 @@ msgstr "有发票" msgid "Technical field used for usability purposes" msgstr "用于可用性用途的技术领域" +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Technical field containing the invoice for which the payment has been " +"generated." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "" +"This does not especially correspond to the invoices reconciled with the " +"payment," +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "as it can have been generated first, and reconciled later" +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Hide Payment Method" msgstr "隐藏付款方式" @@ -10212,7 +10787,11 @@ msgstr "隐藏付款方式" msgid "" "Technical field used to hide the payment method if the selected journal has " "only one available which is 'manual'" -msgstr "技术领域用于隐藏的付款方法，如果选择的日记账只有一个可用的是 '手动'" +msgstr "如果选择的日记账只有“手动”选项，则自动隐藏付款方法，" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Payment Method" +msgstr "付款方式" #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Check: Pay bill by check and print it from Odoo." @@ -10233,6 +10812,25 @@ msgid "" "installed" msgstr "" +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Code" +msgstr "代码" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Technical field used to adapt the interface to the payment type selected." +msgstr "用来调整付款方式的字段" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Saved payment token" +msgstr "保存的付款令牌" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "" +"Note that tokens from acquirers set to only authorize transactions (instead " +"of capturing the amount) are not available." +msgstr "请注意，来自设置为仅授权交易（而非获取金额）的收购方的标记不可用。" + #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Show Partner Bank Account" msgstr "显示合作伙伴银行账户" @@ -10244,13 +10842,14 @@ msgid "" msgstr "字段用于告知‘partner_bank_account_id’字段是否需要被显示在付款表单视图中。" #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 -msgid "Code" -msgstr "代码" +msgid "Require Partner Bank Account" +msgstr "需要合作银行帐户" #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "" -"Technical field used to adapt the interface to the payment type selected." -msgstr "技术字段根据付款方式来调整。" +"Technical field used to know whether the field `partner_bank_account_id` " +"needs to be required or not in the payments form views" +msgstr "技术领域用于了解支付表格视图中是否需要字段`partner_bank_account_id`" #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 msgid "Check Number" @@ -10261,7 +10860,15 @@ msgid "" "The selected journal is configured to print check numbers. If your pre-" "printed check paper already has numbers or if the current numbering is " "wrong, you can change it in the journal configuration page." -msgstr "被选的日记账被配置成打印支票号码。如果预先印制支票纸已经有号码或者当前的号码是错误的你可以在日记账配置页面改正" +msgstr "选择的日记账配置上了打印支票号码。如果预先印制支票已经有号码或者当前的号码是错误的，你可以在日记账配置页面修改" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Journal Item Label" +msgstr "日记账项目标签" + +#: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:0 +msgid "Change label of the counterpart that will hold the payment difference" +msgstr "更改对方的标签将导致付款差额" #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/check.rst:80 msgid "Try paying a supplier bill with a check" @@ -10542,7 +11149,6 @@ msgid "" msgstr "SEPA,是唯一欧元付款地, 是欧盟的付款倡议简化欧元转帐。SEPA将付款单发给银行以简化转账。" #: ../../accounting/payables/pay/sepa.rst:10 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:10 msgid "" "SEPA is supported by the banks of the 28 EU member states as well as " "Iceland, Norway, Switzerland, Andorra, Monaco and San Marino." @@ -10865,9 +11471,9 @@ msgstr "安装采购和库存应用" #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/manage.rst:36 msgid "" "From the **Apps** application, search for the **Purchase** module and " -"install it. Due to certain dependencies, Installing Purchase will " +"install it. Due to certain dependencies, installing Purchase will " "automatically install the **Inventory** and **Accounting** applications." -msgstr "从**应用程序**，搜索**采购**模块，并安装。由于一定的关联关系，安装采购模块将自动安装**库存**和**会计**应用程序。" +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/manage.rst:41 msgid "Creating products" @@ -10876,15 +11482,15 @@ msgstr "创建产品" #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/manage.rst:43 msgid "" "Creating products in Odoo is essential for quick and efficient purchasing " -"within Odoo. Simply navigate to the Products submenu under Purchase, and " +"within Odoo. Simply navigate to the Products submenu under Purchase and " "click create." -msgstr "产品创建是采购必不可少的部分。购买下有产品的子菜单，点击创建。" +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/manage.rst:50 msgid "" -"When creating the product, Pay attention to the **Product Type** field, as " -"it is important:" -msgstr "当创建产品时, 注意 **产品类型** 字段, 这很重要 :" +"When creating the product, pay attention to the **Product Type** field, " +"since it is important:" +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/manage.rst:53 msgid "" @@ -10905,10 +11511,9 @@ msgstr "相反，被设置为**服务或数字产品**的产品不用于库存 msgid "" "It is recommended that you create a **Miscellaneous** product for all " "purchases that occur infrequently and do not require inventory valuation or " -"management. If you create such a product, it is recommend to set the product" -" type to **Service**." +"management. If you create such a product, it is recommended to set the " +"product type to **Service**." msgstr "" -"建议生成一个 **杂项** 产品对于那些不是经常采购的并且不需要库存评估和管理的产品。如果你创建类似产品, 建议设置产品类型为 **服务** ." #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/manage.rst:70 msgid "Managing your Vendor Bills" @@ -10944,30 +11549,26 @@ msgstr "接收产品" msgid "" "If you purchased any stockable products that you manage the inventory of, " "you will need to receive the products from the Inventory application after " -"you confirm a Purchase Order. From the **Inventory dashboard**, you should " +"you confirm a purchase order. From the **Inventory dashboard**, you should " "see a button linking you directly to the transfer of products. This button " "is outlined in red below:" msgstr "" -"如果你采购了你管理库存的可库存产品, 在采购单被确认后你需要从 **库存** 中接收产品。在 **库存** 仪表盘, " -"你可以看到一个按钮直接链接你到产品的转移, 这个按钮在以下红色处概述 :" #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/manage.rst:100 msgid "" -"Navigating this route will take you to a list of all orders awaiting to be " +"Navigating this route will take you to a list of all orders waiting to be " "received." -msgstr "按这个路线的引导会带你到所有等待接收的订单清单。" +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/manage.rst:106 msgid "" "If you have a lot of awaiting orders, apply a filter using the search bar in" -" the upper right. With this search bar, you may filter based on the Vendor " -"(Partner), the product, or the source document, also known as the reference " -"of your purchase order. You also have the capability to group the orders by " -"different criteria under **Group By**. Selecting an item from this list will" -" open the following screen where you then will receive the products." +" the upper right. With this search bar, you may filter based on the vendor " +"(partner), the product, or the source document (also known as the reference " +"of your purchase order). You can also group the orders by different criteria" +" under **Group By**. Selecting an item from this list will open the " +"following screen where you then will receive the products." msgstr "" -"如果你有许多待确定的订单, 使用上面右边的搜索栏的过滤功能。你可以基于 **供应商** (或 **合作伙伴** ), 产品, 源文档, " -"或采购单参照来过滤。你也在 **分组** 中可以按不同的标准来对订单分组。从这个清单中选择一个项目会打开如下界面, 然后你可以收取你的产品了。" #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/manage.rst:117 msgid "Purchasing service products does not trigger a delivery order." @@ -10979,34 +11580,30 @@ msgstr "管理供应商账单" #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/manage.rst:122 msgid "" -"When you receive a Vendor Bill for a previous purchase, be sure to record it" +"When you receive a vendor bill for a previous purchase, be sure to record it" " in the Purchases application under the **Control Menu**. You need to create" " a new vendor bill even if you already registered a purchase order." msgstr "" -"当你收到一个以前采购的 **供应商账单** , 确认记录在 **采购** 程序下的的 **控制菜单** 中, " -"你需要创建一个新的供应商账单即使你已经注册了一个采购订单。" #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/manage.rst:130 msgid "" -"The first thing you will need to do upon creating a Vendor Bill is to select" -" the appropriate Vendor as this will also pull up any associated accounting " -"or pricelist information. From there, you can choose to specify any one or " -"multiple Purchase Orders to populate the Vendor Bill with. When you select a" -" Purchase Order from the list, Odoo will pull any uninvoiced products " -"associated to that Purchase Order and automatically populate that " +"The first thing you will need to do upon creating a vendor bill is to select" +" the appropriate vendor, since doing so will also pull up any associated " +"accounting or pricelist information. From there, you can choose to specify " +"one or multiple Purchase Orders to populate the Vendor Bill with. When you " +"select a Purchase Order from the list, Odoo will pull any uninvoiced " +"products associated to that Purchase Order and automatically populate that " "information below. If you are having a hard time finding the appropriate " -"Vendor bill, you may search through the list by inputting the vendor " +"vendor bill, you may search through the list by inputting the vendor " "reference number or your internal purchase order number." msgstr "" -"在你创建 **供应商** 订单前, 首先需要选择正确的 **供应商** , 这将带出相关的财务或价格表信息。从这里, " -"你可以选择指定一个或多个采购单来填充采购供应商账单。当你从清单中选择一个采购单, " -"Odoo会带出所有关联到采购单的没有开发票的产品并自动填补下列信息。如果你很难找到正确的供应商账单, 你可以通过搜索供应商参考号或者你的内部采购单号。" #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/manage.rst:144 msgid "" -"While the invoice is in draft state, you can make any modifications you need" -" (i.e. remove or add product lines, modify quantities, and change prices)." -msgstr "当发票是草稿状态时, 你可以做任何更改(比如移走或添加产品行, 更改数量, 更改价格)" +"While the invoice is in a draft state, you can make any modifications you " +"need (i.e. remove or add product lines, modify quantities, and change " +"prices)." +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/manage.rst:150 msgid "Your vendor may send you several bills for the same Purchase Order if:" @@ -11044,26 +11641,26 @@ msgstr "如果供应商的账单和你收到的产品不符, 怎么办" #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/manage.rst:169 msgid "" -"If the bill you receive from the vendor has different quantities than what " -"Odoo automatically populates as quantities, this could be due to several " +"If the bill you receive from the vendor has quantities that do not match the" +" quantities automatically populated by Odoo, this could be due to several " "reasons:" -msgstr "如果你收到的账单和Odoo自动填写的数量不符, 也许是由以下原因引起的 :" +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/manage.rst:173 msgid "" -"the vendor is incorrectly charging you for products and/or services that you" -" have not ordered," -msgstr "没有订购的产品/或服务需要支付, 供应商账单错误。" +"The vendor is incorrectly charging you for products and/or services that you" +" have not ordered." +msgstr "供应商错误地要你付你没有订购的产品/或服务。" #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/manage.rst:176 msgid "" -"the vendor is billing you for products that you might not have received yet," -" as the invoicing control may be based on ordered or received quantities," -msgstr "可基于订单或收到数量开票。所以, 供应商可对客户还没有收到的产品进行发票," +"The vendor is billing you for products that you might not have received yet," +" as the invoicing control may be based on ordered or received quantities." +msgstr "供应商给你开了你还没有收到产品的发票, 如果开票控制是基于订购或收到数量。" #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/manage.rst:180 -msgid "or the vendor did not bill you for previously purchased products." -msgstr "或者供应商没有将你之前订购的产品开票。" +msgid "The vendor did not bill you for previously purchased products." +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/manage.rst:182 msgid "" @@ -11080,18 +11677,18 @@ msgstr "如果你不能找到和供应商账单关联的定购单, 也许是由 #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/manage.rst:189 msgid "" -"the vendor has already invoiced you for this purchase order, therefore it is" -" not going to appear anywhere in the selection," -msgstr "供应商已为这个采购单开了票, 因此它不会在选项内出现。" +"The vendor has already invoiced you for this purchase order; therefore it is" +" not going to appear anywhere in the selection." +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/manage.rst:192 msgid "" -"someone in the company forgot to record a purchase order for this vendor," -msgstr "公司的某位员工忘了给这个供应商记录采购订单。" +"Someone in the company forgot to record a purchase order for this vendor." +msgstr "公司里某人忘了给这个供应商记录这个采购单。" #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/manage.rst:195 -msgid "or the vendor is charging you for something you did not order." -msgstr "或者供应商要你支付没有定购的东西。" +msgid "The vendor is charging you for something you did not order." +msgstr "" #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/manage.rst:200 msgid "How product quantities are managed" @@ -11137,20 +11734,18 @@ msgstr "批量账单" #: ../../accounting/payables/supplier_bills/manage.rst:225 msgid "" "When creating a vendor bill and selecting the appropriate purchase order, " -"you may continue to select additional purchase orders and Odoo will add the " -"additional line items from that purchase order.. If you have not deleted the" -" previous line items from the first purchase order the bill will be linked " -"to all the appropriate purchase orders." +"you may continue to select additional purchase orders. Odoo will add the " +"additional line items from the purchase orders you select. If you have not " +"deleted the previous line items from the first purchase order, the bill will" +" be linked to all the appropriate purchase orders." msgstr "" -"创建一个供应商账单并选择了相应的采购单, 你可以继续选择添加采购单, Odoo会添加来自于采购单的新的行。如果你没有删除先前的项目行, " -"账单会关联到所有相应的采购单。" #: ../../accounting/receivables.rst:3 msgid "Account Receivables" msgstr "应收账款" #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices.rst:3 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:53 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:77 msgid "Customer Invoices" msgstr "客户发票" @@ -11302,6 +11897,162 @@ msgid "" " If needed, a rounding will be applied to the invoice." msgstr "" +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:3 +msgid "Credit Notes and Refunds" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:4 +msgid "" +"A **credit note**, or **credit memo**, is a document issued to a customer " +"that notifies them that they have been credited a certain amount." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:11 +msgid "There are several reasons that can lead to a credit note, such as:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:9 +msgid "a mistake in the invoice" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:10 +msgid "a return of the goods, or a rejection of the services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:11 +msgid "the goods delivered are damaged" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:14 +msgid "" +"Issuing a credit note is the only legal way to cancel, refund or modify a " +"validated invoice. Don’t forget to *register the payment* afterward if you " +"need to send money back to your customer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:20 +msgid "Issue a Credit Note" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:21 +msgid "" +"You can create a credit note from scratch by going to " +":menuselection:`Accounting --> Customers --> Credit Notes`, and by clicking " +"on *Create*. Filling the Credit Note’s form works the same way as the " +"Invoice’s form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:26 +msgid "" +"However, most of the time, credit notes are generated directly from the " +"invoices they are related to." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:29 +msgid "To do so, open the *Customer Invoice*, and click on *Add Credit Note*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:37 +msgid "You can choose between three options:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:35 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:44 +msgid "Partial Refund" +msgstr "部分退款" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:36 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:55 +msgid "Full Refund" +msgstr "全部退款" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:37 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:66 +msgid "Full refund and new draft invoice" +msgstr "全部退款并创建新的草稿发票" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:40 +msgid "" +"Credit Notes’ numbers start with “R” and are followed by the number of the " +"document they are related to (e.g., RINV/2019/0004)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:45 +msgid "" +"Odoo creates a draft credit note already prefilled with all the necessary " +"information from the original invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:48 +msgid "" +"This is the option to choose to do a partial refund, or if you want to " +"modify any detail on the credit note." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:52 +msgid "" +"This is the only option available for invoices that are already marked as " +"*Paid*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:56 +msgid "" +"Odoo creates a credit note, automatically validates it, and reconciles the " +"original invoice with it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:62 +msgid "" +"This is the option to choose to do a full refund or cancel a validated " +"invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:67 +msgid "" +"Odoo creates a credit note, automatically validates it, reconciles the " +"original invoice with it, and open a new draft invoice prefilled with the " +"same details from the original invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:71 +msgid "" +"This is the option to choose to modify the content of a validated invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:74 +msgid "Record a Vendor Refund" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:75 +msgid "" +"**Vendor Refunds** are recorded the same way you would do with invoices’ " +"credit notes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:77 +msgid "" +"You can either create a credit note from scratch by going to " +":menuselection:`Accounting --> Vendors --> Refund`, and by clicking on " +"*Create*, or by opening the validated *Vendor Bill*, and clicking on *Add " +"Credit Note*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:84 +msgid "" +"Issuing a credit note from an invoice creates a **reverse entry** that " +"zeroes out the journal items generated by the original invoice." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:87 +msgid "Here is an example of an invoice’s journal entry:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/credit_notes.rst:92 +msgid "" +"And here is the credit note’s journal entry generated to reverse the " +"original invoice above:" +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/deferred_revenues.rst:3 msgid "Deferred revenues: how to automate them?" msgstr "递延收入 : 如何自动处理？" @@ -11406,7 +12157,7 @@ msgstr "一些设置好递延收益的产品的例子:" #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/deferred_revenues.rst:69 msgid "Product" -msgstr "产品" +msgstr "费用产品" #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/deferred_revenues.rst:69 msgid "Deferred Revenue Type" @@ -11930,104 +12681,193 @@ msgstr "" msgid ":doc:`cash_discounts`" msgstr ":doc:`cash_discounts` " -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:3 -msgid "How to edit or refund an invoice?" -msgstr "如何编辑或退还发票？" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:4 -msgid "" -"In Odoo, it's not possible to modify an invoice that has been validated and " -"sent to the customer. If a mistake was made on a validated invoice, the " -"legal way to handle that is to refund the invoice, reconcile it with the " -"original invoice to close them and create a new invoice." -msgstr "" -"在Odoo, 不能在发票已经验证并发送给客户之后修改。假如在验证的发票上出现错误, 合法的方式是对发票进行退款, 将它与原始发票调节, 然后创建新发票。" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:10 -msgid "Modifying a validated invoice" -msgstr "修改验证发票" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:12 -msgid "" -"If you need to modify an existing invoice, use the Refund Invoice button on " -"the invoice. In the refund method field, select \"Modify: create a refund, " -"reconcile, and create a new draft invoice\"." -msgstr "如果需要修改现有的发票，使用发票上的退款发票按钮。选择退票方式“修改：创建退票，核销，并创建一个新的草稿发票”。" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:19 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:37 -msgid "Odoo will automatically:" -msgstr "Odoo会自动 :" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:21 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:39 -msgid "Create a refund for your invoice" -msgstr "创建退款发票" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:22 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:40 -msgid "" -"Reconcile the refund invoice with the original invoice (marking both as " -"Paid)" -msgstr "将退票和原始发票核销(两者都到已付状态)" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:23 -msgid "Create a new draft invoice you can modify" -msgstr "创建一个新的发票草案可以修改" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:25 -msgid "" -"Then, you can modify the draft invoice and validate it once it's correct." -msgstr "然后, 你可以修改发票草案, 并对其进行验证, 一旦它是正确的。" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:28 -msgid "Cancelling an invoice" -msgstr "取消发票" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:30 -msgid "" -"If you need to cancel an existing invoice, use the Refund Invoice button on " -"the invoice. In the refund method field, select \"Cancel: create a refund " -"and reconcile\"." -msgstr "如果需要退还部分发票, 使用发票的退款发票按钮。选择退票方式\"取消:创建一张退票并核销\"." - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:42 -msgid "" -"Nothing else needs to be done. You can send the refund by regular mail or " -"email to your customer, if you already sent the original invoice." -msgstr "没有别的需要做的事情。您可以发送退款通过普通邮件或电子邮件给你的客户, 如果你已经发送的原始发票。" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:46 -msgid "Refunding part of an invoice" -msgstr "发票的再融资部分" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:48 -msgid "" -"If you need to refund an existing invoice partially, use the Refund Invoice " -"button on the invoice. In the refund method field, select \"Create a draft " -"refund\"." -msgstr "如果您需要退还部分现有发票, 使用发票的退款发票按钮。在退款方法域, 选择'创建退款草案'。" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:55 -msgid "" -"Odoo will automatically create a draft refund. You may modify the refund " -"(example: remove the lines you do not want to refund) and validate it. Then," -" send the refund by regular mail or email to your customer." -msgstr "" -"Odoo会自动创建一个退款草案。你可以修改的退款（例如 :删除您不想退还线）, 并对其进行验证。然后, 发送退款通过普通邮件或电子邮件给你的客户。" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_invoices/refund.rst:61 -msgid "" -"Refunding an invoice is different from refunding a payment. Usually, a " -"refund invoice is sent before the customer has done a payment. If the " -"customer has already paid, they should be reimbursed by doing a customer " -"payment refund." -msgstr "退票不同于退款。通常情况下，在客户未付款前可退票。如果客户已付款，应退款。" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments.rst:3 msgid "Customer Payments" msgstr "客户付款" +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:3 +msgid "Batch Payments: SEPA Direct Debit (SDD)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:4 +msgid "" +"SEPA, the Single Euro Payments Area, is a payment-integration initiative of " +"the European Union for simplification of bank transfers denominated in EURO." +" With **SEPA Direct Debit**, your customers can sign a **mandate** that " +"authorizes you to collect future payments from their bank accounts " +"automatically." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:10 +msgid "" +"You can record your customer mandates in Odoo, and generate XML files " +"containing pending payments made with an SDD mandate." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:0 +msgid "" +"SDD is supported by all SEPA countries, which includes the 28 member states " +"of the European Union as well as additional countries." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:0 +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:123 +msgid "" +"`List of all SEPA countries. `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:19 +msgid "" +"Go to :menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Settings` nd activate" +" the **SEPA Direct Debit (SDD)** feature. Enter the **Creditor Identifier** " +"of your company. This number is provided by your bank, or the authority " +"responsible for delivering them." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:28 +msgid "SEPA Direct Debit Mandates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:30 +msgid "Create a mandate" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:31 +msgid "" +"The SEPA Direct Debit Mandate is the document that your customers sign to " +"authorize you to collect money directly from their bank accounts." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:34 +msgid "" +"To create a new one, go to :menuselection:`Accounting --> Customers --> " +"Direct Debit Mandates`, click on *Create*, and fill out the new mandate’s " +"form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:41 +msgid "" +"First, export the PDF file by clicking on *Print*. It is then up to your " +"customer to sign this document. Once done, upload the signed file in the " +"**Original Document** field, and click on *Validate* to start running the " +"mandate." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:47 +msgid "" +"First, make sure, that the **IBAN bank accounts details** are correctly " +"recorded on the debtor’s contact form, under the *Accounting* tab, and in " +"your own *Bank Account* settings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:52 +msgid "Close or revoke a mandate" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Direct Debit mandates are closed automatically after their *End Date*. If " +"this field is left blank, then the mandate keeps being *Active* until it is " +"*Closed* or *Revoked*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:60 +msgid "" +"Clicking on **Close** updates the mandate’s end day to the current day. This" +" means that invoices made after the present day won’t be processed " +"automatically with an SDD payment." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:64 +msgid "" +"Clicking on **Revoke** disables the mandate immediately. No SDD payment can " +"be registered anymore, regardless of the invoice’s date. However, payments " +"that have already been registered will still be included to the next SDD XML" +" file." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:70 +msgid "" +"Once a mandate has been *closed* or *revoked*, it cannot be reactivated. If " +"a customer requires to pay with SDD payments again, you will have to create " +"a new mandate from scratch." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:75 +msgid "Get paid with SDD Batch Payments" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:78 +msgid "" +"All new posted invoice issued to customers with an active mandate will " +"automatically register payment and have their status marked as *Paid*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:82 +msgid "" +"If you have unpaid invoices that could be paid with a new mandate, it is " +"still possible to do it. Go on the invoice, click on *Register Payment* and " +"choose *SEPA Direct Debit* as payment method." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:87 +msgid "Generate SEPA Direct Debit XML files to submit payments" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:88 +msgid "" +"To submit your SDD payments to your bank, you will first generate an **XML " +"file** that can be uploaded directly to your bank interface." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:91 +msgid "" +"The files generated by Odoo follow the SEPA Direct Debit **PAIN.008.001.02**" +" specifications as required by the SEPA customer-to-bank Implementation " +"Guidelines, which ensures compatibility with the banks." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:95 +msgid "" +"To generate your XML file for the pending SDD payments, go to the related " +"*bank journal* on your *Accounting dashboard*, then click on *Direct Debit " +"Payments to Collect*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:102 +msgid "" +"Select all the payments in the list that you want to include in your SDD XML" +" file, then click on *Action* and select *Create Batch Payment*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:108 +msgid "" +"Odoo then takes you to your *Batch Payment*’s form. Click on *Validate* and " +"then download the SDD XML file." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:114 +msgid "Finally, upload this file to your bank to process the payments." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:117 +msgid "" +"You can retrieve all the generated SDD XML files by going to " +":menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Customers --> Batch " +"Payments`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:121 +msgid ":doc:`../../bank/setup/create_bank_account`" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/batch_sdd.rst:122 +msgid "" +"`Odoo Academy: SEPA Direct Debit Mandates (SDD) " +"`_" +msgstr "" + #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/check.rst:3 msgid "How to register customer payments by checks?" msgstr "如何用支票登记客户付款？" @@ -12534,128 +13374,6 @@ msgid "" "negative number of due days." msgstr "" -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:3 -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:29 -msgid "Get paid with SEPA" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:5 -msgid "" -"SEPA, the Single Euro Payments Area, is a payment-integration initiative of " -"the European Union for simplification of bank transfers denominated in EURO." -" SEPA Direct Debit allows you to withdraw money from the bank accounts of " -"your customers with their approval." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:13 -msgid "" -"With Odoo, you can record customer mandates, generate an SDD XML file " -"containing customer payments and upload it in your bank interface. The file " -"follows the SEPA Direct Debit PAIN.008.001.02 specifications. This is a " -"well-defined standard that makes consensus among banks." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:21 -msgid "" -"Go in :menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Settings` and " -"activate the SEPA Direct Debit (SDD) Feature. Enter the Creditor Identifier " -"of your company. This number is provided by your bank." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:32 -msgid "Direct Debit Mandates" -msgstr "直接借记的授权范围" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:34 -msgid "" -"Before withdrawing money from a customer bank account, your customer has to " -"sign a mandate. Go in :menuselection:`Accounting --> Sales --> Direct Debit " -"Mandates` and create a new mandate." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:41 -msgid "SEPA Direct Debit only works between IBAN Bank Accounts." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:43 -msgid "" -"Once you have entered all the information in the customer mandate, you can " -"print it and ask your customer to sign it. Once it is done, you can upload " -"the mandate signed by your customer on the mandate in Odoo." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:50 -msgid "You can now validate the mandate." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:55 -msgid "Let's create an invoice for that customer." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:57 -msgid "" -"When you will validate this invoice, the payment will be automatically " -"generated and your invoice will be directly marked as paid." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:61 -msgid "" -"If you already had some invoices for that customer that could be paid using " -"that mandate, it's still possible to do it. Go on the invoice, click on " -"register payment and choose the Sepa Direct Debit as payment method." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:67 -msgid "Generate SDD Files" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:69 -msgid "" -"You can generate the SDD File with all the customer payments to send to your" -" bank directly from the accounting dashboard :" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:75 -msgid "" -"You select the payments in the list that you want to include in your SDD " -"File, click on action and select \"Generate Direct Debit XML\"." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:81 -msgid "" -"You can now download the XML file generated by Odoo and upload it in your " -"bank interface." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:85 -msgid "" -"You can retrieve all the generated XML by activating the developer mode and " -"going in :menuselection:`Accounting --> Configuration --> Payments --> SDD " -"Payment File`." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:89 -msgid "Close or revoke a mandate" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:91 -msgid "" -"The Direct Debit mandate will be closed automatically once the end date " -"defined on it is reached. However, you can **close** a mandate earlier than " -"initially planned. To do that, simply go on the mandate and click on the " -"\"Close\" button.The end date of the mandate will be updated to today's " -"date. This means you will not be able to pay invoices with an invoice date " -"superior to this end date. Be careful, once a mandate is closed, it cannot " -"be reopened." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/payment_sepa.rst:99 -msgid "" -"You can also **revoke** a mandate. In that case, you won't be able to pay " -"any invoice using that mandate anymore, no matter the invoice date.To do " -"that, simply go on the mandate and click on the \"Revoke\" button." -msgstr "" - #: ../../accounting/receivables/customer_payments/recording.rst:3 msgid "What are the different ways to record a payment?" msgstr "有哪些不同的方式来记录付款？" diff --git a/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po index 72e86f32a..bba4d4d1b 100644 --- a/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po +++ b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/crm.po @@ -4,22 +4,25 @@ # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # # Translators: -# Martin Trigaux, 2018 -# Jeffery CHEN Fan , 2018 -# liAnGjiA , 2018 -# Army Hu , 2018 -# Connie Xiao , 2018 -# fausthuang, 2018 +# r <263737@qq.com>, 2019 +# liAnGjiA , 2019 +# Connie Xiao , 2019 +# fausthuang, 2019 +# Army Hu , 2019 # John An , 2019 +# Jeffery CHEN , 2019 +# 演奏王 , 2019 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# guohuadeng , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 12.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-07-03 08:44+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2018-10-19 08:14+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: John An , 2019\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: guohuadeng , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Chinese (China) (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/zh_CN/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -43,52 +46,97 @@ msgstr "线索转换商机" msgid "" "The system can generate leads instead of opportunities, in order to add a " "qualification step before converting a *Lead* into an *Opportunity* and " -"assigning to the right sales people. You can activate this mode from the CRM" -" Settings. It applies to all your sales channels by default. But you can " -"make it specific for specific channels from their configuration form." +"assigning to the right sales people." msgstr "" -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:13 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:9 +msgid "" +"You can activate this mode from the CRM Settings. It applies to all your " +"sales channels by default. But you can make it specific for specific " +"channels from their configuration form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:14 #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:41 -#: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:13 ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:12 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:8 ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:13 +#: ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:12 #: ../../crm/track_leads/prospect_visits.rst:12 msgid "Configuration" -msgstr "配置" +msgstr "设置" -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:15 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:16 msgid "" "For this feature to work, go to :menuselection:`CRM --> Configuration --> " "Settings` and activate the *Leads* feature." -msgstr "" +msgstr "要此功能正常工作，请转到 ：菜单选择：\"CRM --= 配置 --* 设置\"并激活 [潜在顾客] 功能。" -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:21 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:22 msgid "" "You will now have a new submenu *Leads* under *Leads* where they will " "aggregate." -msgstr "" +msgstr "现在，您将在* 引导 *下有一个新的子菜单* 引导 *，这些子菜单将汇总它们。" -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:28 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:29 msgid "Convert a lead into an opportunity" msgstr "将销售线索转换为商机" -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:30 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:31 msgid "" "When you click on a *Lead* you will have the option to convert it to an " "opportunity and decide if it should still be assigned to the same " "channel/person and if you need to create a new customer." -msgstr "" +msgstr "当您单击*引导 *时，您可以选择将其转换为机会，并决定是否仍应将其分配给相同的渠道/人员以及是否需要创建新客户。" -#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:37 +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:38 msgid "" "If you already have an opportunity with that customer Odoo will " "automatically offer you to merge with that opportunity. In the same manner, " "Odoo will automatically offer you to link to an existing customer if that " "customer already exists." msgstr "" +"如果您已经有了该客户的机会，Odoo将自动为您提供与该机会合并的机会。 以相同的方式，Odoo将自动为您提供链接到现有客户（如果该客户已经存在）。" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:44 +msgid "Merge opportunities" +msgstr "合并商机" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:46 +msgid "" +"Odoo will also automatically propose to merge opportunities if they have the" +" same email address. When merging opportunities, Odoo merges the information" +" into the opportunity which was created first, giving priority to the " +"information present on the first opportunity." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:51 +msgid "" +"No information is lost: data from the other opportunity is logged in the " +"chatter and the information fields for easy access." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:57 +msgid "" +"Would you find a duplicate yourself, ...you can also merge opportunities or " +"leads even if the system doesn't propose it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:60 +msgid "" +"Here’s how, from the list view. Select the opportunities or leads you want " +"to merge and the action button will appear. Then, you can select merge." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:66 +msgid "..note::" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/convert.rst:67 +msgid "It is also possible to merge more than 2 opportunities or leads." +msgstr "" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_email.rst:3 msgid "Generate leads/opportunities from emails" -msgstr "" +msgstr "通过电子邮件生成潜在客户/机会" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_email.rst:5 msgid "" @@ -96,10 +144,12 @@ msgid "" "efficiency. By default, any email sent to *sales@database\\_domain.ext* will" " create an opportunity in the pipeline of the default sales channel." msgstr "" +"自动化线索/机会生成将大大提高您的效率。 默认情况下，任何发送到* sales @ database \\ _domain.ext " +"*的电子邮件都会在默认销售渠道的渠道中创造机会。" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_email.rst:11 msgid "Configure email aliases" -msgstr "" +msgstr "配置电子邮件别名" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_email.rst:13 msgid "" @@ -109,25 +159,27 @@ msgid "" "configuration of sales channels under :menuselection:`Configuration --> " "Sales Channels`." msgstr "" +"每个销售渠道都可以拥有自己的电子邮件别名，以生成自动分配给它的销售线索/机会。 如果您管理具有特定业务流程的多个销售团队，这将很有用。 " +"您可以在配置->销售渠道下找到销售渠道的配置。" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:3 msgid "Generate leads/opportunities from your website contact page" -msgstr "" +msgstr "从您的网站联系页面生成潜在客户/机会" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:5 msgid "" "Automating the lead/opportunity generation will considerably improve your " "efficiency. Any visitor using the contact form on your website will create a" " lead/opportunity in the pipeline." -msgstr "" +msgstr "实现潜在客户/机会生成自动化将大大提高您的效率。任何在您的网站上使用联系表单的访问者都将在管道中创建潜在顾客/商机。" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:10 msgid "Use the contact us on your website" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用您网站上的联系我们" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:12 msgid "You should first go to your website app." -msgstr "" +msgstr "您应该首先转到您的网站应用。" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:14 msgid "|image0|\\ |image1|" @@ -135,7 +187,7 @@ msgstr "|image0|\\ |image1|" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:16 msgid "" -"With the CRM app installed, you benefit from ready-to-use contact form on " +"With the CRM app installed, you benefit from a ready-to-use contact form on " "your Odoo website that will generate leads/opportunities automatically." msgstr "" @@ -145,106 +197,205 @@ msgid "" "Configuration --> Settings` under *Communication* you will find the Contact " "Form info and where to change the *Sales Channel* or *Salesperson*." msgstr "" +"要更改为特定销售渠道，请转到 ：菜单选择：'网站 -- = 配置 --* 设置'下 [通信] 您将找到联系表信息以及更改 [销售渠道] 或 [销售人员]" +" 的位置。" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:32 #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:50 msgid "Create a custom contact form" -msgstr "" +msgstr "创建自定义联系人表单" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:34 msgid "" "You may want to know more from your visitor when they use the contact form " -"to contact you. You will then need to build a custom contact form on your " -"website. Those contact forms can generate multiple types of records in the " -"system (emails, leads/opportunities, project tasks, helpdesk tickets, " -"etc...)" +"to you will need to build a custom contact form on your website. These " +"contact forms can generate multiple types of records in the system (emails, " +"leads/opportunities, project tasks, helpdesk tickets, etc.)" msgstr "" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:43 msgid "" -"You will need to install the free *Form Builder* module. Only available in " +"You will need to install the free *Form Builder* module, only available in " "Odoo Enterprise." msgstr "" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:52 msgid "" -"From any page you want your contact form to be in, in edit mode, drag the " -"form builder in the page and you will be able to add all the fields you " -"wish." +"First, go to the page where you want to put your contact form. In edit mode," +" drag the form builder onto the page, and you will be able to add all the " +"fields you wish." msgstr "" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:59 msgid "" -"By default any new contact form will send an email, you can switch to " +"By default, any new contact form will send an email. You can switch to " "lead/opportunity generation in *Change Form Parameters*." msgstr "" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:63 msgid "" -"If the same visitor uses the contact form twice, the second information will" -" be added to the first lead/opportunity in the chatter." +"If the same visitor uses the contact form twice, the second entry will be " +"added to the first lead/opportunity in the chatter." msgstr "" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:67 msgid "Generate leads instead of opportunities" -msgstr "" +msgstr "生成潜在顾客而不是机会" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/generate_from_website.rst:69 msgid "" -"When using a contact form, it is advised to use a qualification step before " -"assigning to the right sales people. To do so, activate *Leads* in CRM " -"settings and refer to :doc:`convert`." +"When using a contact form, you should use a qualification step before " +"assigning the form to the right sales people. To do so, activate *Leads* in " +"CRM settings and refer to :doc:`convert`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:3 +msgid "Lead mining" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:4 +msgid "" +"In any business, getting quality leads is essential to keep the business " +"growing. Lead mining allows you to generate leads from scratch directly from" +" your database. Target your leads based on a set of criteria such as the " +"country, the size of the company, the industry your leads are coming from to" +" make them relevant to your business." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:10 +msgid "" +"For this feature to work, go to :menuselection:`CRM → Configuration → " +"Settings` and activate the **Lead Mining** feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:17 +msgid "Start generating leads" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:18 +msgid "" +"You will now have a new button **Generate Leads** available in your " +"pipeline. You are also able to create lead mining requests from the " +"**Configuration → Lead Mining Requests** and trough **Leads → Leads** where " +"you have the **Generate Leads** button" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:25 +msgid "" +"From there, click on the **Generate Leads** button, a window where you will " +"be able to pick your criteria will pop up." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:32 +msgid "" +"When choosing to target Companied and their contacts you can choose the " +"contacts you are getting based on Role or Seniority. When getting contact " +"information make sure to be aware of the latest EU regulation, get more " +"information about General Data Protection Regulation on `Odoo GDPR " +"`__," +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:37 +msgid "" +"You can decide to filter the leads you are getting depending on the size " +"(number of employees) of the companies. You can pick the countries your " +"leads are coming from. It is possible to pick multiple countries. You can " +"pick the industries your leads are coming from. It is possible to pick " +"multiple countries." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:41 +msgid "" +"You can choose the salesperson and the Salesteam the lead will be assigned " +"to. You can also add tags to track your generated leads." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:45 +msgid "The generated leads will have the name of the company." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:48 +msgid "Pricing" +msgstr "价格" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:49 +msgid "" +"This is an In-App Purchase feature, each generated lead will cost you one " +"credit. If you choose to get contact information each contact will also cost" +" us one additional credit. Here is the pricing for this `feature " +"`__, To buy credits you can " +"either go to CRM > Configuration > Settings > Buy Credits; or go to Settings" +" > In-App Purchases>View my Services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:62 +msgid "" +"The blue box will automatically tell you how many credits are going to be " +"consumed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:65 +msgid "" +"If you are on Odoo Online (SAAS) and have the Enterprise version, you " +"benefit from free trial credits to test the feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../crm/acquire_leads/lead_mining.rst:67 +msgid "" +"More information about `In-App Purchases " +"`__," +" (IAP)." msgstr "" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/send_quotes.rst:3 msgid "Send quotations" -msgstr "" +msgstr "发送报价单" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/send_quotes.rst:5 msgid "" "When you qualify a lead into an opportunity you will most likely need to " "send them a quotation. You can directly do this in the CRM App with Odoo." -msgstr "" +msgstr "当您将潜在顾客限定为商机时，您很可能需要向他们发送报价单。您可以在使用 Odoo 的 CRM 应用程序中直接执行此操作。" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/send_quotes.rst:12 msgid "Create a new quotation" -msgstr "" +msgstr "创建新报价单" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/send_quotes.rst:14 msgid "" "By clicking on any opportunity or lead, you will see a *New Quotation* " "button, it will bring you into a new menu where you can manage your quote." -msgstr "" +msgstr "通过点击任何商机或潜在顾客，您将看到一个 [新报价] 按钮，它会将您带入一个新的菜单，您可以在其中管理您的报价。" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/send_quotes.rst:21 msgid "" "You will find all your quotes to that specific opportunity under the " "*Quotations* menu on that page." -msgstr "" +msgstr "您可以在该页面上的 [报价] 菜单下找到该特定商机的所有报价。" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/send_quotes.rst:28 msgid "Mark them won/lost" -msgstr "" +msgstr "标记他们赢/输" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/send_quotes.rst:30 msgid "" "Now you will need to mark your opportunity as won or lost to move the " "process along." -msgstr "" +msgstr "现在，您需要将机会标记为赢或输，才能推动进程。" #: ../../crm/acquire_leads/send_quotes.rst:33 msgid "" "If you mark them as won, they will move to your *Won* column in your Kanban " "view. If you however mark them as *Lost* they will be archived." -msgstr "" +msgstr "如果将它们标记为赢，它们将移动到看板视图中的 [Won] 列。但是，如果您将它们标记为 [丢失]，它们将被存档。" #: ../../crm/optimize.rst:3 msgid "Optimize your Day-to-Day work" -msgstr "" +msgstr "优化您的日常工作" #: ../../crm/optimize/google_calendar_credentials.rst:3 msgid "Synchronize Google Calendar with Odoo" -msgstr "" +msgstr "将谷歌日历与Odoo同步" #: ../../crm/optimize/google_calendar_credentials.rst:5 msgid "" @@ -271,7 +422,7 @@ msgstr "进入API和服务页面" #: ../../crm/optimize/google_calendar_credentials.rst:19 msgid "Search for *Google Calendar API* and select it." -msgstr "" +msgstr "搜索 [Google 日历 API] 并选择它。" #: ../../crm/optimize/google_calendar_credentials.rst:27 msgid "Enable the API." @@ -281,11 +432,11 @@ msgstr "启用API接口。" msgid "" "Select or create an API project to store the credentials if not yet done " "before. Give it an explicit name (e.g. Odoo Sync)." -msgstr "" +msgstr "选择或创建 API 项目以存储凭据（如果之前尚未完成）。给它一个显式名称（例如 Odoo 同步）。" #: ../../crm/optimize/google_calendar_credentials.rst:35 msgid "Create credentials." -msgstr "" +msgstr "创建凭据。" #: ../../crm/optimize/google_calendar_credentials.rst:40 msgid "" @@ -301,6 +452,8 @@ msgid "" "redirect URI* is your Odoo's instance URL followed by " "'/google_account/authentication'." msgstr "" +"然后，您可以创建客户端 ID。输入应用程序的名称（例如 Odoo 日历）和将重定向的允许页面。[授权 JavaScript 源] 是 Odoo 的实例 " +"URL。[授权重定向 URI] 是您的 Odoo 的实例 URL，后跟\"/google_帐户/身份验证\"。" #: ../../crm/optimize/google_calendar_credentials.rst:55 msgid "" @@ -309,12 +462,14 @@ msgid "" "mandatory. The Consent Screen will only show up when you enter the Client ID" " in Odoo for the first time." msgstr "" +"通过输入产品名称（例如 Odoo 日历）执行\"同意\"屏幕步骤。请随意检查自定义选项，但这不是强制性的。仅当首次在 Odoo 中输入客户端 ID " +"时，才会显示同意屏幕。" #: ../../crm/optimize/google_calendar_credentials.rst:60 msgid "" "Finally you are provided with your **Client ID**. Go to *Credentials* to get" " the **Client Secret** as well. Both of them are required in Odoo." -msgstr "" +msgstr "最后，您得到了您的 [客户端 ID]。也转到 [凭据] 以获取 [客户端机密]。Odoo 中要求两者。" #: ../../crm/optimize/google_calendar_credentials.rst:67 msgid "Setup in Odoo" @@ -324,13 +479,13 @@ msgstr "设置Odoo" msgid "" "Install the **Google Calendar** App from the *Apps* menu or by checking the " "option in :menuselection:`Settings --> General Settings`." -msgstr "" +msgstr "从 [Apps] 菜单安装 [Google 日历] 应用程序，或通过选中 \"菜单选择\"中的选项：\"设置 --= 常规设置\"。\"" #: ../../crm/optimize/google_calendar_credentials.rst:75 msgid "" "Go to :menuselection:`Settings --> General Settings` and enter your **Client" " ID** and **Client Secret** in Google Calendar option." -msgstr "" +msgstr "转到 ：菜单选择：\"设置 --= 常规设置\"，并在 Google 日历选项中输入您的 [客户端 ID] 和 [客户端机密]。" #: ../../crm/optimize/google_calendar_credentials.rst:81 msgid "" @@ -348,7 +503,7 @@ msgstr "没有理由再错过会议了哦！" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:3 msgid "Use VOIP services in Odoo with OnSIP" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用 Odoo 中的 VOIP 服务与 OnSIP" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:6 msgid "Introduction" @@ -360,6 +515,8 @@ msgid "" " case, the installation and setup of an Asterisk server is not necessary as " "the whole infrastructure is hosted and managed by OnSIP." msgstr "" +"Odoo VoIP 可以设置为与 OnSIP （www.onsip.com）协同工作。在这种情况下，不需要安装和设置星号服务器，因为整个基础结构由 " +"OnSIP 托管和管理。" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:10 msgid "" @@ -368,16 +525,18 @@ msgid "" "covered by the service. After opening an OnSIP account, follow the " "configuration procedure below." msgstr "" +"您需要使用 OnSIP 开立帐户才能使用此服务。在执行此操作之前，请确保您的区域和您希望呼叫的区域包含在服务范围内。开立 OnSIP " +"帐户后，请按照以下配置过程操作。" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:15 msgid "Go to Apps and install the module **VoIP OnSIP**." -msgstr "" +msgstr "转到应用并安装模块 [VoIP OnSIP]。" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:20 msgid "" "Go to Settings/General Settings. In the section Integrations/Asterisk " "(VoIP), fill in the 3 fields:" -msgstr "" +msgstr "转到\"设置/常规设置\"。在\"集成/星号 （VoIP）\"一节中，填写以下 3 个字段：" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:22 msgid "" @@ -385,56 +544,58 @@ msgid "" "www.onsip.com. If you don't know it, log in to https://admin.onsip.com/ and " "you will see it in the top right corner of the screen." msgstr "" +"[OnSIP 域] " +"是您在www.onsip.com上创建帐户时选择的域。如果您不知道，请登录https://admin.onsip.com/，您将在屏幕的右上角看到它。" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:23 msgid "**WebSocket** should contain wss://edge.sip.onsip.com" -msgstr "" +msgstr "[Web 套接套] 应包含wss://edge.sip.onsip.com" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:24 msgid "**Mode** should be Production" -msgstr "" +msgstr "[模式] 应该是生产" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:29 msgid "" "Go to **Settings/Users**. In the form view of each VoIP user, in the " "Preferences tab, fill in the section **PBX Configuration**:" -msgstr "" +msgstr "转到 [设置/用户]。在每个 VoIP 用户的表单视图中，在\"首选项\"选项卡中，填写 [PBX 配置] 部分：" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:31 msgid "**SIP Login / Browser's Extension**: the OnSIP 'Username'" -msgstr "" +msgstr "[SIP 登录 / 浏览器的扩展] ： ONSIP '用户名'" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:32 msgid "**OnSIP authorization User**: the OnSIP 'Auth Username'" -msgstr "" +msgstr "[上 SIP 授权用户]：ONSIP\"注册用户名\"" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:33 msgid "**SIP Password**: the OnSIP 'SIP Password'" -msgstr "" +msgstr "[SIP 密码]： 上 SIP \"SIP 密码\"" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:34 msgid "**Handset Extension**: the OnSIP 'Extension'" -msgstr "" +msgstr "[手机扩展]： ONSIP\"扩展\"" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:36 msgid "" "You can find all this information by logging in at " "https://admin.onsip.com/users, then select the user you want to configure " "and refer to the fields as pictured below." -msgstr "" +msgstr "您可以通过登录https://admin.onsip.com/users找到所有这些信息，然后选择要配置的用户，并引用如下图所示的字段。" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:41 msgid "" "You can now make phone calls by clicking the phone icon in the top right " "corner of Odoo (make sure you are logged in as a user properly configured in" " Odoo and in OnSIP)." -msgstr "" +msgstr "现在，您可以通过单击 Odoo 右上角的电话图标拨打电话（确保您以在 Odoo 和 OnSIP 中正确配置的用户身份登录）。" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:45 msgid "" "If you see a *Missing Parameters* message in the Odoo softphone, make sure " "to refresh your Odoo window and try again." -msgstr "" +msgstr "如果您在 Odoo 软电话中看到 [缺少参数] 消息，请确保刷新 Odoo 窗口，然后重试。" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:52 msgid "" @@ -443,16 +604,18 @@ msgid "" "the international country code. E.g.: +16506913277 (where +1 is the " "international prefix for the United States)." msgstr "" +"如果您在 Odoo 软电话中看到 [错误编号] 消息，请确保使用国际格式，并带有加号 （+） " +"符号，后跟国际国家/地区代码。例如：+16506913277（其中+1是美国的国际前缀）。" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:57 msgid "" "You can now also receive phone calls. Your number is the one provided by " "OnSIP. Odoo will ring and display a notification." -msgstr "" +msgstr "您现在还可以接听电话。您的号码是OnSIP提供的号码。Odoo 将振铃并显示通知。" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:63 msgid "OnSIP on Your Cell Phone" -msgstr "" +msgstr "在您的手机上" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:65 msgid "" @@ -461,6 +624,8 @@ msgid "" " VoIP. This is useful for on-the-go calls, but also to make sure to hear " "incoming calls, or simply for convenience. Any SIP softphone will work." msgstr "" +"为了在不在计算机前面时拨打和接听电话，您可以在手机上使用与 Odoo VoIP " +"平行的软电话应用程序。这对于外出通话非常有用，但还可用于确保听到来电，或只是为了方便。任何 SIP 软电话都工作。" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:67 msgid "" @@ -469,26 +634,29 @@ msgid "" " When creating an account, select OnSIP in the list of carriers. You will " "then have to configure it as follows:" msgstr "" +"在 Android 和 iOS 上，OnSIP 已成功测试了\"大流波 " +"[https：//play.google.com/商店/应用程序/详细信息？id_com.grandstream.wave]\"。创建帐户时，在运营商列表中选择" +" OnSIP。然后，您必须按如下方式配置它：" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:69 msgid "**Account name**: OnSIP" -msgstr "" +msgstr "[帐户名称]： ONSIP" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:70 msgid "**SIP Server**: the OnSIP 'Domain'" -msgstr "" +msgstr "[SIP 服务器]： ONSIP \"域\"" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:71 msgid "**SIP User ID**: the OnSIP 'Username'" -msgstr "" +msgstr "[SIP 用户 ID]： ONSIP \"用户名\"" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:72 msgid "**SIP Authentication ID**: the OnSIP 'Auth Username'" -msgstr "" +msgstr "[SIP 身份验证 ID]：ONSIP\"身份验证用户名\"" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:73 msgid "**Password**: the OnSIP 'SIP Password'" -msgstr "" +msgstr "[密码]： 上 SIP \"SIP 密码\"" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:75 msgid "" @@ -500,16 +668,20 @@ msgid "" "Assistant `_." msgstr "" +"除了在手机上发起来自 Grandstream Wave 的呼叫外，您还可以通过在 PC " +"上的浏览器中单击电话号码来发起呼叫。这将使大流波环，并通过您的手机路由呼叫到另一方。此方法有助于避免浪费时间拨打电话号码。为此，您需要 Chrome " +"扩展服务\"OnSIP 呼叫助理 [https：//chrome.google.com/webstore/详细信息/onsip-呼叫-" +"助理/pceelmncldfkkcgjkpapnp？hl_]。" #: ../../crm/optimize/onsip.rst:79 msgid "" "The downside of using a softphone on your cell phone is that your calls will" " not be logged in Odoo as the softphone acts as an independent separate app." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在手机上使用软电话的缺点是，您的呼叫不会记录在 Odoo 中，因为软电话充当独立的独立应用程序。" #: ../../crm/optimize/setup.rst:3 msgid "Configure your VOIP Asterisk server for Odoo" -msgstr "" +msgstr "为 Odoo 配置 VOIP 星号服务器" #: ../../crm/optimize/setup.rst:6 msgid "Installing Asterisk server" @@ -738,11 +910,11 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../crm/performance.rst:3 msgid "Analyze performance" -msgstr "" +msgstr "分析性能" #: ../../crm/performance/turnover.rst:3 msgid "Get an accurate probable turnover" -msgstr "" +msgstr "获得准确可能的营业额" #: ../../crm/performance/turnover.rst:5 msgid "" @@ -751,10 +923,11 @@ msgid "" "giving you an better idea of the probability of closing it, this is " "important to see your expected turnover in your various reports." msgstr "" +"随着销售周期的推进，以及从一个阶段转移到另一个阶段，您可以期望获得有关给定商机的更精确信息，让您更好地了解结束该机会的概率，这一点非常重要，因为您在各种机会中的预期营业额报告。" #: ../../crm/performance/turnover.rst:11 msgid "Configure your kanban stages" -msgstr "" +msgstr "配置看板阶段" #: ../../crm/performance/turnover.rst:13 msgid "" @@ -764,50 +937,51 @@ msgid "" " for your business on stages, you can make your probable turnover more and " "more accurate." msgstr "" +"默认情况下，Odoo看板视图有四个阶段：新建、合格、命题、赢。分别有10、30、70和100%的成功概率。您可以添加阶段以及编辑它们。通过分阶段提高企业成功的默认概率，您可以使可能的营业额越来越准确。" #: ../../crm/performance/turnover.rst:25 msgid "" "Every one of your opportunities will have the probability set by default but" " you can modify them manually of course." -msgstr "" +msgstr "默认情况下，每个机会都会设置概率，但您也可以手动修改它们。" #: ../../crm/performance/turnover.rst:29 msgid "Set your opportunity expected revenue & closing date" -msgstr "" +msgstr "设置商机预期收入 + 结束日期" #: ../../crm/performance/turnover.rst:31 msgid "" "When you get information on a prospect, it is important to set an expected " "revenue and expected closing date. This will let you see your total expected" " revenue by stage as well as give a more accurate probable turnover." -msgstr "" +msgstr "当您获得潜在客户信息时，设置预期收入和预期结算日期非常重要。这将让您按阶段查看预期总收入，并给出更准确的可能营业额。" #: ../../crm/performance/turnover.rst:40 msgid "See the overdue or closing soon opportunities" -msgstr "" +msgstr "查看过期或即将关闭的机会" #: ../../crm/performance/turnover.rst:42 msgid "" "In your pipeline, you can filter opportunities by how soon they will be " "closing, letting you prioritize." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在管道中，您可以按商机的关闭程度来筛选商机，从而确定优先级。" #: ../../crm/performance/turnover.rst:48 msgid "" "As a sales manager, this tool can also help you see potential ways to " "improve your sale process, for example a lot of opportunities in early " "stages but with near closing date might indicate an issue." -msgstr "" +msgstr "作为销售经理，此工具还可以帮助您了解改进销售流程的潜在方法，例如，在早期阶段，许多机会，但接近结束日期可能表明存在问题。" #: ../../crm/performance/turnover.rst:53 msgid "View your total expected revenue and probable turnover" -msgstr "" +msgstr "查看您的总预期收入和可能的营业额" #: ../../crm/performance/turnover.rst:55 msgid "" "While in your Kanban view you can see the expected revenue for each of your " "stages. This is based on each opportunity expected revenue that you set." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在看板视图中，您可以看到每个阶段的预期收入。这基于您设置的每个商机预期收入。" #: ../../crm/performance/turnover.rst:62 msgid "" @@ -817,168 +991,170 @@ msgid "" "probability they will close. This gives you a much better idea of your " "expected revenue allowing you to make plans and set targets." msgstr "" +"作为经理，您可以转到 ：菜单选择：'CRM --= 报告 --= 管道分析'默认为 [可能营业额] " +"设置为度量值。此报告将考虑您为每个商机设置的收入，以及它们关闭的可能性。这使您可以更好地了解您的预期收入，从而制定计划并设定目标。" #: ../../crm/performance/win_loss.rst:3 msgid "Check your Win/Loss Ratio" -msgstr "" +msgstr "检查您的赢/输比率" #: ../../crm/performance/win_loss.rst:5 msgid "" "To see how well you are doing with your pipeline, take a look at the " "Win/Loss ratio." -msgstr "" +msgstr "要查看管道的配合情况，请查看赢/输比。" #: ../../crm/performance/win_loss.rst:8 msgid "" "To access this report, go to your *Pipeline* view under the *Reporting* tab." -msgstr "" +msgstr "要访问此报告，请转到 [报告] 选项卡下的 [管道] 视图。" #: ../../crm/performance/win_loss.rst:11 msgid "" "From there you can filter to which opportunities you wish to see, yours, the" " ones from your sales channel, your whole company, etc. You can then click " "on filter and check Won/Lost." -msgstr "" +msgstr "从那里，你可以过滤到哪些机会，你想看到，你的，那些从你的销售渠道，你的整个公司，等等。然后，您可以单击筛选器并选中\"赢/丢失\"。" #: ../../crm/performance/win_loss.rst:18 msgid "You can also change the *Measures* to *Total Revenue*." -msgstr "" +msgstr "您还可以将 [措施] 更改为 [总收入]。" #: ../../crm/performance/win_loss.rst:23 msgid "You also have the ability to switch to a pie chart view." -msgstr "" +msgstr "您还可以切换到饼图视图。" #: ../../crm/pipeline.rst:3 msgid "Organize the pipeline" -msgstr "" +msgstr "组织管道" #: ../../crm/pipeline/lost_opportunities.rst:3 msgid "Manage lost opportunities" -msgstr "" +msgstr "管理失去的机会" #: ../../crm/pipeline/lost_opportunities.rst:5 msgid "" "While working with your opportunities, you might lose some of them. You will" " want to keep track of the reasons you lost them and also which ways Odoo " "can help you recover them in the future." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在与机会合作时，您可能会失去一些机会。您将希望跟踪您丢失它们的原因，以及 Odoo 可以帮助您在将来恢复它们的方式。" #: ../../crm/pipeline/lost_opportunities.rst:10 msgid "Mark a lead as lost" -msgstr "" +msgstr "将潜在顾客标记为丢失" #: ../../crm/pipeline/lost_opportunities.rst:12 msgid "" "While in your pipeline, select any opportunity you want and you will see a " "*Mark Lost* button." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在管道中，选择所需的任何商机，您将看到一个 [标记丢失] 按钮。" #: ../../crm/pipeline/lost_opportunities.rst:15 msgid "" "You can then select an existing *Lost Reason* or create a new one right " "there." -msgstr "" +msgstr "然后，您可以选择现有的 [失去原因] 或在此处创建新的。" #: ../../crm/pipeline/lost_opportunities.rst:22 msgid "Manage & create lost reasons" -msgstr "" +msgstr "管理 + 创建丢失的原因" #: ../../crm/pipeline/lost_opportunities.rst:24 msgid "" "You will find your *Lost Reasons* under :menuselection:`Configuration --> " "Lost Reasons`." -msgstr "" +msgstr "您将在 ：\"菜单选择：\"配置 --= 丢失的原因\"下找到您的 [丢失原因]。" #: ../../crm/pipeline/lost_opportunities.rst:26 msgid "" "You can select & rename any of them as well as create a new one from there." -msgstr "" +msgstr "您可以选择和重命名其中任何一个，以及从那里创建一个新的。" #: ../../crm/pipeline/lost_opportunities.rst:30 msgid "Retrieve lost opportunities" -msgstr "" +msgstr "检索丢失的机会" #: ../../crm/pipeline/lost_opportunities.rst:32 msgid "" "To retrieve lost opportunities and do actions on them (send an email, make a" " feedback call, etc.), select the *Lost* filter in the search bar." -msgstr "" +msgstr "要检索丢失的机会并对其进行操作（发送电子邮件、拨打反馈电话等），请在搜索栏中选择 [丢失] 筛选器。" #: ../../crm/pipeline/lost_opportunities.rst:39 msgid "You will then see all your lost opportunities." -msgstr "" +msgstr "然后，您将看到所有失去的机会。" #: ../../crm/pipeline/lost_opportunities.rst:41 msgid "" "If you want to refine them further, you can add a filter on the *Lost " "Reason*." -msgstr "" +msgstr "如果要进一步优化它们，可以在 [失去原因] 上添加筛选器。" #: ../../crm/pipeline/lost_opportunities.rst:44 msgid "For Example, *Too Expensive*." -msgstr "" +msgstr "例如，[太贵]。" #: ../../crm/pipeline/lost_opportunities.rst:50 msgid "Restore lost opportunities" -msgstr "" +msgstr "恢复失去的机会" #: ../../crm/pipeline/lost_opportunities.rst:52 msgid "" "From the Kanban view with the filter(s) in place, you can select any " "opportunity you wish and work on it as usual. You can also restore it by " "clicking on *Archived*." -msgstr "" +msgstr "从具有筛选器的看板视图中，您可以选择任何希望的机会，并照常处理。您也可以通过单击 [已存档] 来恢复它。" #: ../../crm/pipeline/lost_opportunities.rst:59 msgid "" "You can also restore items in batch from the Kanban view when they belong to" " the same stage. Select *Restore Records* in the column options. You can " "also archive the same way." -msgstr "" +msgstr "当项目属于同一阶段时，还可以从看板视图中还原批处理中的项。在列选项中选择 [还原记录]。您也可以以相同的方式存档。" #: ../../crm/pipeline/lost_opportunities.rst:66 msgid "To select specific opportunities, you should switch to the list view." -msgstr "" +msgstr "要选择特定商机，应切换到列表视图。" #: ../../crm/pipeline/lost_opportunities.rst:71 msgid "" "Then you can select as many or all opportunities and select the actions you " "want to take." -msgstr "" +msgstr "然后，您可以选择尽可能多的或所有商机，并选择要执行的操作。" #: ../../crm/pipeline/lost_opportunities.rst:78 msgid ":doc:`../performance/win_loss`" -msgstr "" +msgstr ":doc:`../performance/win_loss`" #: ../../crm/pipeline/multi_sales_team.rst:3 msgid "Manage multiple sales teams" -msgstr "" +msgstr "管理多个销售团队" #: ../../crm/pipeline/multi_sales_team.rst:5 msgid "" "In Odoo, you can manage several sales teams, departments or channels with " "specific sales processes. To do so, we use the concept of *Sales Channel*." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在 Odoo 中，您可以管理多个销售团队、部门或具有特定销售流程的渠道。为此，我们使用 [销售渠道] 的概念。" #: ../../crm/pipeline/multi_sales_team.rst:10 msgid "Create a new sales channel" -msgstr "" +msgstr "创建新的销售渠道" #: ../../crm/pipeline/multi_sales_team.rst:12 msgid "" "To create a new *Sales Channel*, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " "Sales Channels`." -msgstr "" +msgstr "要创建新的 [销售渠道]，请转到 ：菜单选择：\"配置 --= 销售渠道\"。" #: ../../crm/pipeline/multi_sales_team.rst:14 msgid "" "There you can set an email alias to it. Every message sent to that email " "address will create a lead/opportunity." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在那里，您可以设置一个电子邮件别名。发送到该电子邮件地址的每封邮件都将创建潜在顾客/商机。" #: ../../crm/pipeline/multi_sales_team.rst:21 msgid "Add members to your sales channel" -msgstr "" +msgstr "将成员添加到销售渠道" #: ../../crm/pipeline/multi_sales_team.rst:23 msgid "" @@ -987,59 +1163,60 @@ msgid "" "lead/opportunity assigned to them will link to the sales channel. Therefore," " you can only be a member of one channel." msgstr "" +"您可以将成员添加到任何频道;这样，这些成员在打开销售渠道时将看到销售渠道的管道结构。分配给他们的任何潜在顾客/商机都将链接到销售渠道。因此，您只能是一个通道的成员。" #: ../../crm/pipeline/multi_sales_team.rst:28 msgid "This will ease the process review of the team manager." -msgstr "" +msgstr "这将简化团队经理的流程评审。" #: ../../crm/pipeline/multi_sales_team.rst:33 msgid "" "If you now filter on this specific channel in your pipeline, you will find " "all of its opportunities." -msgstr "" +msgstr "如果现在筛选管道中的此特定通道，您将找到其所有商机。" #: ../../crm/pipeline/multi_sales_team.rst:40 msgid "Sales channel dashboard" -msgstr "" +msgstr "销售渠道仪表板" #: ../../crm/pipeline/multi_sales_team.rst:42 msgid "" "To see the operations and results of any sales channel at a glance, the " "sales manager also has access to the *Sales Channel Dashboard* under " "*Reporting*." -msgstr "" +msgstr "要一目了然地查看任何销售渠道的运营和结果，销售经理还可以访问 [报告] 下的 [销售渠道仪表板]。" #: ../../crm/pipeline/multi_sales_team.rst:46 msgid "" "It is shared with the whole ecosystem so every revenue stream is included in" " it: Sales, eCommerce, PoS, etc." -msgstr "" +msgstr "它与整个生态系统共享，因此每个收入流都包含在其中：销售、电子商务、PoS 等。" #: ../../crm/track_leads.rst:3 msgid "Assign and track leads" -msgstr "" +msgstr "分配和跟踪潜在顾客" #: ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:3 msgid "Assign leads based on scoring" -msgstr "" +msgstr "根据评分分配潜在顾客" #: ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:5 msgid "" "With *Leads Scoring* you can automatically rank your leads based on selected" " criterias." -msgstr "" +msgstr "通过 [潜在顾客评分]，您可以根据所选条件自动对潜在顾客进行排名。" #: ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:8 msgid "" "For example you could score customers from your country higher or the ones " "that visited specific pages on your website." -msgstr "" +msgstr "例如，您可以对您所在国家/地区的客户或访问您网站上特定网页的客户进行评分。" #: ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:14 msgid "" "To use scoring, install the free module *Lead Scoring* under your *Apps* " "page (only available in Odoo Enterprise)." -msgstr "" +msgstr "要使用评分，请在 [Apps] 页面下安装免费模块 [领导评分]（仅在 Odoo 企业版中提供）。" #: ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:21 msgid "Create scoring rules" @@ -1049,23 +1226,23 @@ msgstr "生成评分规则" msgid "" "You now have a new tab in your *CRM* app called *Leads Management* where you" " can manage your scoring rules." -msgstr "" +msgstr "现在，您的 [CRM] 应用中有一个名为 [潜在顾客管理] 的新选项卡，您可以在其中管理评分规则。" #: ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:26 msgid "" "Here's an example for a Canadian lead, you can modify for whatever criteria " "you wish to score your leads on. You can add as many criterias as you wish." -msgstr "" +msgstr "下面是加拿大潜在顾客的示例，您可以修改您希望对潜在顾客进行评分的任何条件。您可以根据需要添加尽可能多的条件。" #: ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:33 msgid "" "Every hour every lead without a score will be automatically scanned and " "assigned their right score according to your scoring rules." -msgstr "" +msgstr "每小时没有得分的一个线索都会被自动扫描，并根据您的评分规则分配正确的分数。" #: ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:40 msgid "Assign leads" -msgstr "" +msgstr "分配潜在顾客" #: ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:42 msgid "" @@ -1074,39 +1251,41 @@ msgid "" "Management --> Team Assignation` and apply a specific domain on each team. " "This domain can include scores." msgstr "" +"计算分数后，可以使用相同的域机制将潜在顾客分配给特定团队。为此，请转到 ：菜单选择：'CRM -- = 领导管理 -- = " +"团队分配'，并在每个团队中应用特定域。此域可以包含分数。" #: ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:49 msgid "" "Further on, you can assign to a specific vendor in the team with an even " "more refined domain." -msgstr "" +msgstr "此外，您可以向团队中的特定供应商分配更精细的域。" #: ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:52 msgid "" "To do so go to :menuselection:`CRM --> Leads Management --> Leads " "Assignation`." -msgstr "" +msgstr "要执行此操作，请转到 ：菜单选择：'CRM --= 潜在顾客管理 --= 潜在分配。" #: ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:58 msgid "" "The team & leads assignation will assign the unassigned leads once a day." -msgstr "" +msgstr "团队和潜在顾客分配将每天分配一次未分配的潜在顾客。" #: ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:62 msgid "Evaluate & use the unassigned leads" -msgstr "" +msgstr "评估和使用未分配的潜在顾客" #: ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:64 msgid "" "Once your scoring rules are in place you will most likely still have some " "unassigned leads. Some of them could still lead to an opportunity so it is " "useful to do something with them." -msgstr "" +msgstr "一旦你的评分规则到位，你很可能仍然有一些未分配的潜在顾客。其中一些仍然可能导致机会，因此与他们一起做某事是有用的。" #: ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:68 msgid "" "In your leads page you can place a filter to find your unassigned leads." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在潜在顾客页面中，您可以放置一个筛选器来查找未分配的潜在顾客。" #: ../../crm/track_leads/lead_scoring.rst:73 msgid "" @@ -1114,46 +1293,47 @@ msgid "" "Automation` apps to send a mass email to them? You can also easily find such" " unassigned leads from there." msgstr "" +"为什么不使用 ：菜单选择：'电子邮件营销'或 ：菜单选择：'营销自动化'应用程序向他们发送大量电子邮件？您还可以从那里轻松找到此类未分配的潜在顾客。" #: ../../crm/track_leads/prospect_visits.rst:3 msgid "Track your prospects visits" -msgstr "" +msgstr "跟踪潜在客户访问" #: ../../crm/track_leads/prospect_visits.rst:5 msgid "" "Tracking your website pages will give you much more information about the " "interests of your website visitors." -msgstr "" +msgstr "跟踪您的网站页面将为您提供更多有关网站访问者兴趣的信息。" #: ../../crm/track_leads/prospect_visits.rst:8 msgid "" "Every tracked page they visit will be recorded on your lead/opportunity if " "they use the contact form on your website." -msgstr "" +msgstr "如果他们使用您网站上的联系表单，他们访问的每个跟踪页面都会记录在您的潜在客户/商机中。" #: ../../crm/track_leads/prospect_visits.rst:14 msgid "" "To use this feature, install the free module *Lead Scoring* under your " "*Apps* page (only available in Odoo Enterprise)." -msgstr "" +msgstr "要使用此功能，请在 [Apps] 页面下安装免费模块 [领导评分]（仅在 Odoo 企业版中提供）。" #: ../../crm/track_leads/prospect_visits.rst:21 msgid "Track a webpage" -msgstr "" +msgstr "跟踪网页" #: ../../crm/track_leads/prospect_visits.rst:23 msgid "" "Go to any static page you want to track on your website and under the " "*Promote* tab you will find *Optimize SEO*" -msgstr "" +msgstr "转到您要在网站上跟踪的任何静态页面，在 [升级] 选项卡下，您会发现 [优化 SEO]" #: ../../crm/track_leads/prospect_visits.rst:29 msgid "There you will see a *Track Page* checkbox to track this page." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在那里，您将看到一个 [跟踪页面] 复选框来跟踪此页面。" #: ../../crm/track_leads/prospect_visits.rst:35 msgid "See visited pages in your leads/opportunities" -msgstr "" +msgstr "查看潜在客户/商机中访问过的页面" #: ../../crm/track_leads/prospect_visits.rst:37 msgid "" @@ -1162,19 +1342,21 @@ msgid "" "the top right corner of your lead/opportunity you can see a *Page Views* " "button but also further down you will see them in the chatter." msgstr "" +"现在，每次从联系人窗体创建潜在顾客时，它都会跟踪该访问者访问的页面。有两种方法可以查看这些页面，在线索/商机的右上角，您可以看到 [页面视图] " +"按钮，但再往下看，您也会在聊天中看到它们。" #: ../../crm/track_leads/prospect_visits.rst:43 msgid "" "Both will update if the viewers comes back to your website and visits more " "pages." -msgstr "" +msgstr "如果观看者返回您的网站并访问更多页面，两者都将更新。" #: ../../crm/track_leads/prospect_visits.rst:52 msgid "" "The feature will not repeat multiple viewings of the same pages in the " "chatter." -msgstr "" +msgstr "该功能不会重复聊天中同一页面的多次查看。" #: ../../crm/track_leads/prospect_visits.rst:55 msgid "Your customers will no longer be able to keep any secrets from you!" -msgstr "" +msgstr "您的客户将不再能够对您保密！" diff --git a/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po index 064b20956..25a5542aa 100644 --- a/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po +++ b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/db_management.po @@ -4,20 +4,21 @@ # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # # Translators: -# Martin Trigaux, 2018 -# Jeffery CHEN Fan , 2018 -# max_xu , 2018 -# 洋 汪 , 2018 +# r <263737@qq.com>, 2019 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Jeffery CHEN , 2019 +# max_xu , 2019 # 黎伟杰 <674416404@qq.com>, 2019 +# 洋 汪 , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 11.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-07-27 11:08+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2018-10-19 08:15+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: 黎伟杰 <674416404@qq.com>, 2019\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: 洋 汪 , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Chinese (China) (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/zh_CN/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -36,6 +37,9 @@ msgid "" "click on the `Manage Your Databases " "`__ button." msgstr "" +"若要管理数据库，请访问`database management page " +"`（您必须登录）。然后单击`Manage Your Databases " +"`按钮。" #: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:18 msgid "" @@ -118,68 +122,152 @@ msgstr "升级" #: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:53 msgid "" -"Make sure to be connected to the database you want to upgrade and access the" -" database management page. On the line of the database you want to upgrade, " -"click on the \"Upgrade\" button." -msgstr "确保已连接到要升级的数据库并访问数据库管理页面。在要升级的数据库行上，单击“升级”按钮。" +"Upgrading your database to a newer version of Odoo is a complex operation " +"that require time and caution. It is extremely important that you fully test" +" the process before upgrading your production database." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:57 +msgid "" +"Odoo releases new versions regularly (at least once a year), and upgrading " +"your database to enjoy new Odoo features is part of the Odoo Online " +"experience." +msgstr "" #: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:60 msgid "" -"You have the possibility to choose the target version of the upgrade. By " -"default, we select the highest available version available for your " -"database; if you were already in the process of testing a migration, we will" -" automatically select the version you were already testing (even if we " -"released a more recent version during your tests)." +"The upgrade process can take some time, especially if you use multiple apps " +"or apps that manage sensitive data (e.g. Accounting, Inventory, etc.). In " +"general, the 'smaller' the database, the quickest the upgrade. A single-user" +" database that uses only CRM will be processed faster than a multi-company, " +"multi-user database that uses Accounting, Sales, Purchase and Manufacturing." msgstr "" #: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:66 msgid "" -"By clicking on the \"Test upgrade\" button an upgrade request will be " -"generated. If our automated system does not encounter any problem, you will " -"receive a \"Test\" version of your upgraded database." +"Unfortunately, it is impossible to give time estimates for every upgrade " +"request, since Odoo.com will test manually every database upgrade at least " +"once and will need to correct/adapt changes made to the standard Odoo Apps " +"(e.g. through Studio or through a Success Pack) on a case-by-case basis. " +"This can make the process slower, since requests are treated in the order " +"they arrive. This is especially true in the months following the release of " +"a new major version, which can lengthen the upgrade delay significantly." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:73 -msgid "" -"If our automatic system detect an issue during the creation of your test " -"database, our dedicated team will have to work on it. You will be notified " -"by email and the process will take up to 4 weeks." +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:74 +msgid "The upgrade process is quite simple from your point of view:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:76 +msgid "You request a test upgrade" msgstr "" #: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:77 msgid "" -"You will have the possibility to test it for 1 month. Inspect your data " -"(e.g. accounting reports, stock valuation, etc.), check that all your usual " -"flows work correctly (CRM flow, Sales flow, etc.)." +"Once all tests have been validated **by you**, you upgrade your actual " +"database" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:79 +msgid "" +"The process to request a test or a production (*actual*) upgrade is the " +"same." msgstr "" #: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:81 msgid "" -"Once you are ready and that everything is correct in your test migration, " -"you can click again on the Upgrade button, and confirm by clicking on " -"Upgrade (the button with the little rocket!) to switch your production " -"database to the new version." +"First, make sure to be connected to the database you want to upgrade and " +"access the `database management page `__." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:89 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:84 +msgid "" +"You have to have an active session with access to the Settings app in the " +"database you want to upgrade for the button to be visible." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:87 +msgid "" +"On the line of the database you want to upgrade, click on the \"Cog\" menu. " +"If an newer version of Odoo is available, you will see an 'Upgrade' button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:94 +msgid "" +"You have the possibility to choose the target version of the upgrade. By " +"default, we select the highest available version available for your " +"database; if you were already in the process of testing an upgrade, we will " +"automatically select the version you were already testing (even if we " +"released a more recent version during your tests)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:103 +msgid "" +"By clicking on the \"Test upgrade\" button, an upgrade request will be " +"generated. Only one request can be made at time for each database; if a " +"request has already been made, you will see an 'Upgrade Queued' note instead" +" and asking another request will not be possible." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:108 +msgid "" +"A test upgrade will create a copy of your database, upgrade it and make it " +"available to you automatically once successful. If this is the first test " +"you request for this particular database, a manual testing phase will be " +"done by Odoo.com - this could take time (up to several weeks). Subsequent " +"requests will not go through that manual testing step and will usually be " +"made available in a few hours. Once the test database is available, you " +"should receive an e-mail with the URL of the test database." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:116 +msgid "" +"**Testing your database is the most important step of the upgrade process!**" +" Even though we test all upgrades manually, we do not know your work " +"processes. A change in standard worfklows of Odoo in new versions might " +"require you to change internal processes, or some of the customizations you " +"made through Odoo Studio might now work properly. *It is up to you to make " +"sure that everything works as it should!* You can report issues with your " +"test database through our `Support page `__." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:124 +msgid "" +"Make sure to do one last test of your upgrade right before the final upgrade" +" (e.g. the day before) to ensure everything will run smoothly. Downgrading " +"is not possible and post-poning an upgrade is always easier than being " +"prevented to work by an upgrade issue after the fact!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:129 +msgid "" +"Once you are ready and you have validated all your tests, you can click " +"again on the Upgrade button and confirm by clicking on Upgrade (the button " +"with the little rocket!) to switch your production database to the new " +"version. Your database will then be taken offline within the next 10 minutes" +" and will be upgraded automatically; you receive a confirmation e-mail once " +"the process is completed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:139 msgid "" "Your database will be taken offline during the upgrade (usually between " "30min up to several hours for big databases), so make sure to plan your " "migration during non-business hours." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:96 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:146 msgid "Duplicating a database" msgstr "复制数据库" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:98 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:148 msgid "" "Database duplication, renaming, custom DNS, etc. is not available for trial " "databases on our Online platform. Paid Databases and \"One App Free\" " "database can duplicate without problem." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:103 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:153 msgid "" "In the line of the database you want to duplicate, you will have a few " "buttons. To duplicate your database, just click **Duplicate**. You will have" @@ -187,51 +275,51 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "在你想要复制数据库的那一行,你会发现几个按钮.请点击**Duplicate**复制你的数据库.在弹出的窗口中输入数据库副本名字,然后点击**Continue**." -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:110 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:160 msgid "" "If you do not check the \"For testing purposes\" checkbox when duplicating a" " database, all external communication will remain active:" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:113 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:163 msgid "Emails are sent" msgstr "电子邮件已送出" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:115 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:165 msgid "" "Payments are processed (in the e-commerce or Subscriptions apps, for " "example)" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:118 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:168 msgid "Delivery orders (shipping providers) are sent" msgstr "发运单据(承运人)已经发送" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:120 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:170 msgid "Etc." msgstr "等等." -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:122 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:172 msgid "" "Make sure to check the checkbox \"For testing purposes\" if you want these " "behaviours to be disabled." msgstr "如果要禁用这些行为，请务必选中“用于测试目的”复选框。" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:125 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:175 msgid "" "After a few seconds, you will be logged in your duplicated database. Notice " "that the url uses the name you chose for your duplicated database." msgstr "几秒钟之后你就可以登录数据库副本了.请注意你可以在浏览器地址栏里看到数据库副本的名字." -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:129 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:179 msgid "Duplicate databases expire automatically after 15 days." msgstr "数据库副本将在15天后自动过期." -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:137 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:187 msgid "Rename a Database" msgstr "重命名数据库" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:139 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:189 msgid "" "To rename your database, make sure you are connected to the database you " "want to rename, access the `database management page " @@ -239,15 +327,15 @@ msgid "" "to give a new name to your database, then click **Rename Database**." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:150 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:200 msgid "Deleting a Database" msgstr "删除数据库" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:152 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:202 msgid "You can only delete databases of which you are the administrator." msgstr "您只能删除您是管理员的数据库。" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:154 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:204 msgid "" "When you delete your database all the data will be permanently lost. The " "deletion is instant and for all the Users. We advise you to do an instant " @@ -255,46 +343,46 @@ msgid "" "backup may be several hours old at that point." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:160 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:210 msgid "" "From the `database management page `__, " "on the line of the database you want to delete, click on the \"Delete\" " "button." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:167 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:217 msgid "" "Read carefully the warning message that will appear and proceed only if you " "fully understand the implications of deleting a database:" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:173 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:223 msgid "" "After a few seconds, the database will be deleted and the page will reload " "automatically." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:177 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:227 msgid "" "If you need to re-use this database name, it will be immediately available." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:179 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:229 msgid "" "It is not possible to delete a database if it is expired or linked to a " "Subscription. In these cases contact `Odoo Support " "`__" msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:183 +#: ../../db_management/db_online.rst:233 msgid "" "If you want to delete your Account, please contact `Odoo Support " "`__" msgstr "" #: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:7 -msgid "On-premise Database management" -msgstr "预置数据库管理" +msgid "On-premises Database management" +msgstr "" #: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:10 msgid "Register a database" @@ -323,8 +411,9 @@ msgid "" "message:" msgstr "如你无法注册数据库，可能会被提示以下的消息：" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:31 ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:97 -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:130 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:31 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:110 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:143 msgid "Solutions" msgstr "解决方案" @@ -368,7 +457,7 @@ msgid "Do you have the updated version of Odoo 9?" msgstr "你有Odoo9的升级版吗？" #: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:61 -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:190 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:176 msgid "" "From July 2016 onward, Odoo 9 now automatically change the uuid of a " "duplicated database; a manual operation is no longer required." @@ -396,41 +485,66 @@ msgid "" "invoicing proceed effortlessly for your and for us." msgstr "为便于查找，我们用UUID辨别数据库，因此每个数据库都有自己独一的UUID，确保大家能轻松处理注册信息和小票。" +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:80 +msgid "Check your network and firewall settings" +msgstr "" + #: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:82 +msgid "" +"The Update notification must be able to reach Odoo's subscription validation" +" servers. In other words, make sure that the Odoo server is able to open " +"outgoing connections towards:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:86 +msgid "services.odoo.com on port 443 (or 80)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:87 +msgid "services.openerp.com on port 443 (or 80) for older deployments" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:89 +msgid "" +"Once you activated your database, you must keep these ports open, as the " +"Update notification runs once a week." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:95 msgid "Error message due to too many users" msgstr "因用户过多而引发的错误信息" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:84 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:97 msgid "" "If you have more users in your local database than provisionned in your Odoo" " Enterprise subscription, you may encounter this message:" msgstr "如你本地数据库的用户数高于Odoo企业订阅的购买量，可能会收到以下提示：" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:93 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:106 msgid "" "When the message appears you have 30 days before the expiration. The " "countdown is updated everyday." msgstr "你的资料库会在第30天过期，每天更新倒计时天数。" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:99 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:112 msgid "" "**Add more users** on your subscription: follow the link and Validate the " "upsell quotation and pay for the extra users." msgstr "在订阅中**添加用户**：按照以下链接验证追加的报价，并为额外的用户付款。" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:102 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:115 msgid "or" msgstr "或" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:104 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:117 msgid "" "**Deactivate users** as explained in this `Documentation " "`__ and **Reject** the upsell quotation." msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:109 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:122 msgid "" "Once your database has the correct number of users, the expiration message " "will disappear automatically after a few days, when the next verification " @@ -440,104 +554,51 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "数据库得到准确的用户数量后，过期消息会在Odoo自动验证后消失，会是几天的时间。我们理解看到倒计时界面会有一点吓人，所以可以:ref:`force升级通知`立即移除倒计时。" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:116 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:129 msgid "Database expired error message" msgstr "数据库已过期错误消息" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:118 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:131 msgid "" "If your database reaches its expiration date before your renew your " "subscription, you will encounter this message:" msgstr "如果在更新订阅之前数据库临近过期日期，你会收到以下消息提示：" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:126 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:139 msgid "" "This **blocking** message appears after a non-blocking message that lasts 30" " days. If you fail to take action before the end of the countdown, the " "database is expired." msgstr "在非屏蔽消息出现至少30天后，**屏蔽**消息出现。如果倒计时结束前仍未采取任何行动，数据库过期而冻结。" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:134 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:147 msgid "" "Renew your subscription: follow the link and renew your subscription - note " "that" msgstr "更新你的订阅：按照以下链接更新你的订阅-注意" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:133 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:146 msgid "" "if you wish to pay by Wire Transfer, your subscription will effectively be " "renewed only when the payment arrives, which can take a few days. Credit " "card payments are processed immediately." msgstr "如通过电汇付款，只有当汇款到账后订阅方才生效，可能会耽误几天时间。信用卡付款可以立即处理。" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:136 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:149 msgid "Contact our `Support `__" msgstr "联系我们的支持部门：" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:138 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:151 msgid "" "None of those solutions worked for you? Please contact our `Support " "`__" msgstr "以上订阅均不适用？请联系我们的支持部门" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:145 -msgid "Force an Update Notification" -msgstr "强制升级通知" - -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:147 -msgid "" -"Update Notifications happen once every 7 days and keep your database up-to-" -"date with your Odoo Enterprise subscription. If you modify your subscription" -" (i.e. add more users, renew it for a year, etc.), your local database will " -"only be made aware of the change once every 7 days - this can cause " -"discrepancies between the state of your subscription and some notifications " -"in your App Switcher. When doing such an operation on your subscription, you" -" can force an Update using the following procedure:" -msgstr "" -"升级通知每7天出现一次，使数据库与您订阅的Odoo企业版保持一致。如果修改了订阅（即添加了用户、续订一年等情形），你的本地数据库只能识别到每7天一次的更改，这可能会造成实际的订阅状态与App切换器通知之间的差异。在对订阅进行这种操作时，可以通过以下步骤强制升级：" - -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:154 -msgid "Connect to the database with the **Administrator** account" -msgstr "用**管理员**帐号连接数据" - -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:155 -msgid "" -"Switch to the Developer mode by using the **About** option in the top-right " -"menu (in V9) / in **Settings** (in V10): click on **Activate the developer" -" mode**" -msgstr "切换到菜单右上方（V9版本）或**设置**（V10版本）的**关于**选项，选择开发者模式，点击**激活开发者模式**" - -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:158 -msgid "" -"Navigate to the \"Settings\" menu, then \"Technical\" > \"Automation\" > " -"\"Scheduled Actions\"" -msgstr "导航到\"设置\"菜单，选择\"技术\" > \"自动\" > \"预设动作\"" - #: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:160 -msgid "" -"Find \"Update Notification\" in the list, click on it, and finally click on " -"the button \"**RUN MANUALLY**\"" -msgstr "在列表中找到\"升级通知\"并点击，最后点击\"**手动运行**\"按钮" - -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:162 -msgid "Refresh the page, the \"Expiration\" notification should be gone" -msgstr "刷新页面后，\"过期\"通知消失。" - -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:165 -msgid "" -"You may have kept the same UUID on different databases and we receive " -"information from those databases too. So please read :ref:`this " -"documentation ` to know how to change the UUID. After the" -" change you can force a ping to speed up the verification, your production " -"database will then be correctly identified." -msgstr "" -"您可能已经在不同的数据库上保存了相同的UUID，我们也从这些数据库接收到信息。因此，请阅读：参考文献，了解如何更改UUID。在更改之后，您可以强制ping来加速验证，你的生产数据库将正确识别。" - -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:174 msgid "Duplicate a database" msgstr "复制数据库" -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:176 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:162 msgid "" "You can duplicate your database by accessing the database manager on your " "server (/web/database/manager). In this page, you can easily " @@ -546,7 +607,7 @@ msgstr "" "你可以在你的服务器链接(/web/database/manager)上访问数据库管理页面.在这个页面里,可以容易的创建数据库副本(以及其他的数据库操作)." -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:184 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:170 msgid "" "When you duplicate a local database, it is **strongly** advised to change " "the duplicated database's uuid (Unniversally Unique Identifier), since this " @@ -557,7 +618,7 @@ msgstr "" "在你创建了一个本地数据库的副本之后,强烈建议你修改这个数据库副本的UUID(Universally Unique " "Identifier),因为数据库的UUID是在我们服务器上对于你的数据库的标识.如果有2个一样是数据库使用同样的UUID会导致后续的注册以及开票问题." -#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:193 +#: ../../db_management/db_premise.rst:179 msgid "" "The database uuid is currently accessible from the menu **Settings > " "Technical > System Parameters**, we advise you to use a `uuid generator " @@ -630,24 +691,23 @@ msgstr "当你想更新任一用户的状态时,请确保你拥有足够的**管 #: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:39 msgid "" "In your Odoo instance, click on **Settings**. You will have a section " -"showing you the active users on your database. Click on **Manage access " -"rights.**" -msgstr "在你的Odoo实例中,点击**设置**.在左边的菜单部分可以选择用户显示数据库中已经激活的用户账号.点击 **访问权限**." +"showing you the active users on your database. Click on **Manage Users.**" +msgstr "" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:44 -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:82 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:43 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:80 msgid "|settings|" msgstr "|设置|" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:44 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:43 msgid "|browse_users|" msgstr "|浏览用户账号|" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:47 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:46 msgid "You'll then see the list of your users." msgstr "然后你将看到用户账号列表." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:52 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:51 msgid "" "The pre-selected filter *Internal Users* shows your paying users (different " "from the *Portal Users* which are free). If you remove this filter, you'll " @@ -655,28 +715,26 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "筛选器中预设置了\"内部用户\"过滤条件,经过此过滤器条件显示的用户账号是付费账号(区别于免费的*门户账号*\").如果你删掉了这个过滤条件,那就显示所有的用户账号(包括付费账号和免费账号)" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:57 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:56 msgid "" "In your list of users, click on the user you want to deactivate. As soon as " -"you are on the userform, go with your mouse cursor on the status **Active** " -"(top right). Click on Active and you will notice that the status will change" -" to **Inactive** immediately." +"you are on the userform, click on the Action drop down menu, and then click " +"on Archive." msgstr "" -"在你的用户列表中,点击你想要取消激活的用户账号.进入用户表单后,将鼠标移到状态按钮**有效**(右上角)上.点击有效,然后你将看到这个按钮状态立即变为了**取消激活**状态." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:66 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:64 msgid "The user is now deactivated." msgstr "该用户账号目前处于取消激活状态." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:68 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:66 msgid "**Never** deactivate the main user (*admin*)" msgstr "**千万不要**取消激活主用户(*admin*)" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:71 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:69 msgid "Uninstalling Apps" msgstr "卸载应用App" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:73 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:71 msgid "" "Make sure you first test what you are about to do on a :ref:`duplicate " "` of your database before making any changes (*especially*" @@ -685,25 +743,25 @@ msgstr "" "请确保在进行任何正式改动前（*尤其是*安装或卸载App时）在复制数据库的:ref:`duplicate " "`进行第一次测试。" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:77 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:75 msgid "" "In your Odoo instance click on **Settings**; in this app, you will be able " "to see how many applications you have installed. Click on **Browse Apps** to" " access the list of your installed applications." msgstr "在你的Odoo实例中点击**设置**,在应用中,你可以看到所安装的应用.点击**应用**来显示你所安装的应用" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:82 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:80 msgid "|browse_apps|" msgstr "|应用浏览|" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:85 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:83 msgid "" "In your applications' dashboard, you will see all the icons of your " "applications. Click on the application you want to uninstall. Then, on the " "form of the application, click on **Uninstall**." msgstr "在应用看板中,你可以看到所有应用的图标.点击你想卸载的应用.然后在应用表单内,点击**卸载**." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:92 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:90 msgid "" "Some applications have dependencies, like Invoicing, eCommerce, etc. " "Therefore, the system will give you a warning message to advise you of what " @@ -714,20 +772,20 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "有些应用有依赖应用,比如开票,电子商务等等.因此,当你准备卸载这些应用时,系统会弹出一个警告信息,告诉你哪些被依赖的应用会被相应卸载.如果你继续卸载,那所有被依赖应用也会被同时卸载(并且这些应用中的数据也会被永久删除).然后你可以点击按钮**确认**来确认这个卸载操作." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:99 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:97 msgid "" "Last, after having checked the warning message (if any), click **Confirm**." msgstr "最后,在看过警告信息后(如有),点击**确认**" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:104 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:102 msgid "You have finished uninstalling your application." msgstr "你已完成删除应用。" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:107 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:105 msgid "Good to know" msgstr "很高兴可以知道" -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:109 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:107 msgid "" "**Uninstalling apps, managing users, etc. is up to you**: no one else can " "know if your business flow is broken better than you. If we were to " @@ -738,7 +796,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "**卸载应用,管理用户等等,这些决定取决于你**:没有其他人可以比你更了解这些操作是否会影响到你的业务应用.如果我们帮你卸载了应用,那我们也无法告诉你哪些关联数据会被删除或者你的某项业务流程会停摆,因为我们*不知道你的业务运作方式*因此也无法验证这些操作." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:115 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:113 msgid "" "**Odoo Apps have dependencies**: this means that you may need to install " "modules that you do not actively use to access some features of Odoo you " @@ -749,7 +807,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "**Odoo应用有其他的依赖应用**:这意味着一些你并不太会操作的模块,会因为其中的一些特性被需要而被系统自动安装.比如,如果你需要将你的客户报价能用网页的形式展现,那网站构建器这个应用就会被自动安装.可能你完全不需要Odoo的网站,但是这个应用中的在线报价技术特性却是你的需求能正常工作的前提条件." -#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:122 +#: ../../db_management/documentation.rst:120 msgid "" "**Always test app installation/removal on a duplicate** (or on a free trial " "database): that way you can know what other apps may be required, etc. This " diff --git a/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/general.po b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/general.po index ec6218758..b2b3a4767 100644 --- a/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/general.po +++ b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/general.po @@ -4,19 +4,19 @@ # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # # Translators: -# Martin Trigaux, 2018 -# Jeffery CHEN Fan , 2018 -# liAnGjiA , 2018 -# 凡 杨 , 2018 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Jeffery CHEN , 2019 +# liAnGjiA , 2019 +# 凡 杨 , 2019 # John An , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 12.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-11-07 15:38+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2018-10-19 08:15+0000\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" "Last-Translator: John An , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Chinese (China) (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/zh_CN/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" @@ -33,6 +33,16 @@ msgstr "一般" msgid "Authentication" msgstr "身份验证" +#: ../../general/auth/azure.rst:3 +msgid "OAuth" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/auth/azure.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Due to specific requirements in Azure's OAuth implementation, Microsoft " +"Azure OAuth identification is NOT compatible with Odoo at the moment." +msgstr "" + #: ../../general/auth/google.rst:3 msgid "How to allow users to sign in with their Google account" msgstr "如何允许用户用Google账号登录" @@ -91,6 +101,60 @@ msgid "" "You have to insert your Client ID in the **General Settings**." msgstr "完成后会收到两条信息（你的客户端ID和客户端密码）。将前者插入**通用设置**中。" +#: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:3 +msgid "How to allow users to sign in with LDAP" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:5 +msgid "Install the LDAP module in General Settings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:7 +msgid "Click on **Create** in Setup your LDAP Server." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:15 +msgid "Choose the company about to use the LDAP." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:20 +msgid "" +"In **Server Information**, enter the IP address of your server and the port " +"it listens to." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:22 +msgid "Tick **User TLS** if your server is compatible." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:27 +msgid "" +"In **Login Information**, enter ID and password of the account used to query" +" the server. If left empty, the server will be queried anonymously." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:32 +msgid "" +"In **Process Parameter**, enter the domain name of your LDAP server in LDAP " +"nomenclature (e.g. ``dc=example,dc=com``)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:34 +msgid "In **LDAP filter**, enter ``uid=%s``" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:39 +msgid "" +"In **User Information**, tick *Create User* if you want Odoo to create a " +"User profile the first time someone log in with LDAP." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/auth/ldap.rst:41 +msgid "" +"In **Template User**, indicate a template for the new profiles created. If " +"left blanked, the admin profile will be used as template." +msgstr "" + #: ../../general/base_import.rst:3 msgid "Data Import" msgstr "数据导入" @@ -292,14 +356,13 @@ msgstr "在哪里修改数据导入格式？" #: ../../general/base_import/import_faq.rst:81 msgid "" -"Odoo can automatically detect if a column is a date and it will try to guess" -" the date format from a set of most used date format. While this process can" -" work for a lot of simple date format, some exotic date format will not be " -"recognize and it is also possible to have some confusion (day and month " -"inverted as example) as it is difficult to guess correctly which part is the" -" day and which one is the month in a date like '01-03-2016'." +"Odoo can automatically detect if a column is a date, and it will try to " +"guess the date format from a set of most commonly used date formats. While " +"this process can work for many date formats, some date formats will not be " +"recognized. This can cause confusion due to day-month inversions; it is " +"difficult to guess which part of a date format is the day and which part is " +"the month in a date such as '01-03-2016'." msgstr "" -"Odoo可以自动判断一个行是否为日期，并尝试从一系列常用日期格式中判断正确的格式。这一进程可以支持多种日期格式，有一些国外的日期格式可能无法识别，它有可能无法判断（例如天数和月的位置），它难以判断哪一部分是日期，哪一部分是月份，如这样的格式：'01-03-2016'。" #: ../../general/base_import/import_faq.rst:83 msgid "" @@ -733,6 +796,110 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "两个未经修改的文件已经就绪并导入Odoo。导入这两个CSV文件后，有4个联系人、3个公司（前两个联系人服务于同一公司）。你必须首先导入公司，然后导入人员。" +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase.rst:3 +msgid "In-App Purchase" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:3 +msgid "General guide about In-App Purchase (IAP) Services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:4 +msgid "" +"In-App Purchases (IAP) gives access to additional services through Odoo. For" +" instance, it allows me to send SMS Text Messages or to send Invoices by " +"post directly from my database." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:7 +msgid "Buying Credits" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Each IAP Service relies on prepaid credits to work and has its own pricing. " +"To consult my current balance or to recharge my account, go to *Settings> " +"Odoo IAP > View my Services*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:13 +msgid "" +"If I am on Odoo Online (SAAS) and have the Enterprise version, I benefit " +"from free credits to test our IAP features." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:16 +msgid "IAP accounts" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:17 +msgid "" +"Credits to use IAP services are stored on IAP accounts, which are specific " +"to each service and database. By default, IAP accounts are common to all " +"companies, but can be restricted to specific ones by going to *Settings app " +"> Activate the Developer Mode > Technical Settings > IAP Accoun*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:23 +msgid "IAP Portal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:24 +msgid "" +"The IAP Portal is a platform regrouping my IAP Services. It is accessible " +"from *Settings app > Odoo IAP > View my Services*. From there, I can view my" +" current balance, recharge my credits, review my consumption and set a " +"reminder to when credits are low." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:30 +msgid "Get notified when credits are low" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:31 +msgid "" +"To be notified when it’s time to recharge my credits, I’ll go to my IAP " +"Portal through *Settings app> Odoo IAP > View my Services*, unfold a service" +" and mark the Receive threshold warning option. Then, I’ll provide a minimum" +" amount of credits and email addresses. Now, every time that the limit is " +"reached, an automatic reminder will be sent to by email!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:38 +msgid "IAP services available" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:39 +msgid "" +"Different services are available depending on the hosting type of your " +"Database:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:41 +msgid "" +"*Odoo Online (SAAS)*: only the IAP services provided by Odoo can be used " +"(i.e. the SMS, Snailmail, Reveal and Partner Autocomplete features);" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:43 +msgid "" +"*Odoo.sh and Odoo Enterprise (on-premise)*: both the services provided by " +"Odoo and by third-party apps can be used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:46 +msgid "Offering my own services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/in_app_purchase/in_app_purchase.rst:47 +msgid "" +"I am more than welcome to offer my own IAP services through Odoo Apps! It is" +" the perfect opportunity to get recurring revenue for an ongoing service use" +" rather than — and possibly instead of — a sole initial purchase. Please, " +"find more information at: `In-App Purchase " +"`_" +msgstr "" + #: ../../general/odoo_basics.rst:3 msgid "Basics" msgstr "基础" @@ -886,62 +1053,84 @@ msgstr "Unsplash" msgid "How to generate an Unsplash access key" msgstr "" -#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:5 +#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:6 +msgid "" +"**As an SaaS user**, you are ready to use Unsplash. You won't need to follow" +" this guide to set up Unsplash informations, since you will use our own Odoo" +" Unsplash key in a transparent way." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:9 +msgid "Generate an Unsplash access key for **non-Saas** users" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:11 msgid "Create an account on `Unsplash.com `_." msgstr "" -#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:7 +#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:13 msgid "" "Go to your `applications dashboard " "`_ and click on **New " "Application**." msgstr "" -#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:12 +#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:18 msgid "Accept the conditions and click on **Accept terms**." msgstr "" -#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:17 +#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:23 msgid "" "You will be prompted to insert an **Application name** and a " -"**Description**. Once done, click on **Create application**." +"**Description**. Please prefix your application name by \"**Odoo:** \" so " +"that Unsplash can recognize it as an Odoo instance. Once done, click on " +"**Create application**." msgstr "" -#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:22 +#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:28 msgid "" "You should be redirected to your application details page. Scroll down a bit" " to find your **access key**." msgstr "" +#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:34 +msgid "" +"**As a non-SaaS user**, you won't be able to register for a production " +"Unsplash key and will be limited to your test key that has a restriction of " +"50 Unsplash requests per hour." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_access_key.rst:37 +msgid ":doc:`unsplash_application_id`" +msgstr "" + #: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_application_id.rst:3 msgid "How to generate an Unsplash application ID" msgstr "" -#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_application_id.rst:5 +#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_application_id.rst:6 msgid "" "You should first create and set up your Unsplash application with this " -"tutorial: `How to generate an Unsplash access key " -"`_." +"tutorial: :doc:`unsplash_access_key`." msgstr "" -#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_application_id.rst:7 +#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_application_id.rst:8 msgid "" "Go to your `applications dashboard " "`_ and click on your newly created " "Unsplash application under **Your applications**." msgstr "" -#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_application_id.rst:12 +#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_application_id.rst:13 msgid "" "You will be redirected to your application details page. The **application " "ID** will be visible in your browser's URL. The URL should be something like" -" ``https://unsplash.com/oauth/applications/application_id``" +" ``https://unsplash.com/oauth/applications/``" msgstr "" -#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_application_id.rst:17 +#: ../../general/unsplash/unsplash_application_id.rst:19 msgid "" -"Note that if you `apply for a production account " -"`_ and it " -"got approved, your will also find your application ID in the UI. It will be " -"listed next to your **Access Key** on your application details page." +"**As a non-SaaS user**, you won't be able to register for a production " +"Unsplash key and will be limited to your test key that has a 50 Unsplash " +"requests per hour restriction." msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po index 02ce6014d..66d6d88bc 100644 --- a/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po +++ b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/helpdesk.po @@ -4,18 +4,18 @@ # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # # Translators: -# Martin Trigaux, 2018 -# mrshelly , 2018 -# Jeffery CHEN Fan , 2018 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# mrshelly , 2019 +# Jeffery CHEN , 2019 # 演奏王 , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 11.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-10-19 10:03+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2018-10-19 08:15+0000\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" "Last-Translator: 演奏王 , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Chinese (China) (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/zh_CN/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" @@ -28,6 +28,94 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Helpdesk" msgstr "服务台" +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:3 +msgid "" +"After sales features: refund, coupon, return, repair, onsite interventions" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:4 +msgid "" +"As my business grows, having the tools to allow my helpdesk team to record, " +"track and manage issues raised easy and efficiently, is key. Odoo’s Helpdesk" +" app allows me to generate credit notes, return products, grant coupons, do " +"repairs and plan onsite interventions from a ticket’s page." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:7 +msgid "Set up the After Sales services" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Go to *Configuration > Helpdesk Teams* and enable the After Sales options: " +"*Refunds, Returns, Coupons, Repairs and Onsite Interventions*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:14 +msgid "Generate credit notes from tickets" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:15 +msgid "" +"I can use a credit note to refund a customer or adjust the amount due. For " +"that, I’ll simply go to my ticket page, click on *Refund* and select the " +"corresponding *Invoice*. Clicking on *Reverse* the credit note will be " +"generated, and I can *Post* it while still being in the *Helpdesk* app." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:22 +msgid "Allow product returns from tickets" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:23 +msgid "" +"The process of a product return from my customer back to my warehouse will " +"be taken into action when, at the ticket page, I choose the option *Return*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:29 +msgid "Grant coupons from tickets" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:30 +msgid "" +"First, be sure to have your *Coupon Program* planned at the *Sales or " +"Website* app. At the *Helpdesk* app, I will open my ticket and click on " +"*Coupon*, choose the *Coupon Program > Generate*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:37 +msgid "Repairs from tickets" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:38 +msgid "" +"Clicking on *Repair* option, on my ticket page, a new repair order form will" +" be shown. Fill up the rest of the fields as needed and choose the next " +"step." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:44 +msgid "Plan onsite interventions from tickets" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:45 +msgid "" +"At the ticket page, I can now configure my onsite interventions exactly the " +"same way I would do being on the *Field Service* app, clicking on *Plan " +"Intervention*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:52 +msgid "" +"`Coupons `_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../helpdesk/after_sales.rst:53 +msgid ":doc:`../manufacturing/repair/repair`" +msgstr "" + #: ../../helpdesk/getting_started.rst:3 msgid "Get started with Odoo Helpdesk" msgstr "‎开始使用 odoo 服役台‎" @@ -134,10 +222,8 @@ msgstr "" msgid "" "The final option to submit tickets is thru an API connection. View the " "documentation `*here* " -"`__." +"`__." msgstr "" -"提交票证的最终选项是通过 API 连接。查看文档 \"* 在这里* " -"‎`__." #: ../../helpdesk/getting_started.rst:91 msgid "Tickets have been created, now what?" diff --git a/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po index f87e05edf..3b5a7a643 100644 --- a/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po +++ b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/inventory.po @@ -4,28 +4,29 @@ # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # # Translators: -# fausthuang, 2018 -# Jackie Zhang , 2018 -# e2f_cn r14 , 2018 -# Shane Tsoi , 2018 -# zpq001 , 2018 -# Martin Trigaux, 2018 -# mrshelly , 2018 -# Jeffery CHEN Fan , 2018 -# liAnGjiA , 2018 -# Connie Xiao , 2018 -# Gary Wei , 2018 -# e2f_cn c7 , 2018 -# roye w <159820@qq.com>, 2018 +# r <263737@qq.com>, 2019 +# zpq001 , 2019 +# bf2549c5415a9287249cba2b8a5823c7, 2019 +# liAnGjiA , 2019 +# Connie Xiao , 2019 +# Gary Wei , 2019 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# mrshelly , 2019 +# 敬雲 林 , 2019 +# ChinaMaker , 2019 +# Jeffery CHEN , 2019 +# fausthuang, 2019 +# guohuadeng , 2019 +# inspur qiuguodong , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 12.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-11-07 15:38+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2018-10-19 08:15+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: roye w <159820@qq.com>, 2018\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: inspur qiuguodong , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Chinese (China) (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/zh_CN/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -33,7 +34,7 @@ msgstr "" "Language: zh_CN\n" "Plural-Forms: nplurals=1; plural=0;\n" -#: ../../inventory.rst:5 ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:64 +#: ../../inventory.rst:5 msgid "Inventory" msgstr "库存" @@ -46,279 +47,362 @@ msgid "Daily Operations" msgstr "日常作业" #: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:3 -msgid "How to do an inventory adjustment with barcodes?" -msgstr "怎么样使用条码来做库存调整？" +msgid "Process to an Inventory Adjustment with Barcodes" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:5 -msgid "From the Barcode application:" -msgstr "从条形码应用 :" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:7 -msgid "Click on **Inventory**" -msgstr "点击 **盘点** " - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:12 msgid "" -"Scan all the products (if you have 5 identical articles, scan it 5 times, or" -" use the keyboard to set the quantity)." -msgstr "扫描所有的产品(如果有5件产品, 就扫5次, 或者使用键盘设置数量)" +"To process an inventory adjustment by using barcodes, you first need to open" +" the *Barcode* app. Then, from the application, click on *Inventory " +"Adjustments*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:13 +msgid "" +"If you want to fully work with barcodes, you can download the sheet " +"*Commands for Inventory*." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:16 msgid "" -"If you manage multiple locations, scan the location before scanning the " -"products. Eg. scan a shelf's barcode ; scan each product on the shelf ; " -"repeat for each shelf in the wharehouse." -msgstr "如果你进行多库位管理, 在扫描产品之前扫描库位, 例如扫描一个货架的条码；再扫描货架上的所有产品；接着然后对仓库中所有货架重复该操作。" +"Once you have clicked on *Inventory Adjustments*, Odoo will automatically " +"create one. Note that, if you work with multi-location, you first need to " +"specify in which location the inventory adjustment takes place." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:20 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:24 msgid "" -"When you've scanned all the items of the location, validate the inventory " -"manually or by scanning the **Validate** barcode." -msgstr "当完成了该库位的所有产品的扫描, 手工确认盘点或者通过扫描 **确认** 条码确认。" +"If you don’t work with multi-location, you will be able to scan the " +"different products you want to include in the inventory adjustment." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:3 -msgid "How to process delivery orders?" -msgstr "如何处理交货订单?" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:31 msgid "" -"There are two approaches to process delivery orders: you can either work on " -"printed documents (and scan lines on the documents), or on a screen (and " -"scan products directly)." -msgstr "有两种方法去处理发货单：你可以在打印出来的文档上（在文档上逐行扫描）操作，或者在屏幕（并直接扫描产品）上。" +"If you have 5 identical articles, scan it 5 times or use the keyboard to set" +" the quantity." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:10 -msgid "Process printed delivery orders:" -msgstr "处理打印的发货单" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:12 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:34 msgid "" -"Print delivery orders of the day by selecting all documents from the **To " -"Do** list and print **Picking Operations** from the top menu." -msgstr "选择所有在 **待办** 列表中的单据，打印当天的发货单，并且从上方菜单打印 **分拣作业** 。" +"Besides using the barcode scanner, you can also manually add a product if " +"necessary. To do so, click on *Add Product* and fill the information in " +"manually." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/adjustments.rst:44 msgid "" -"Once you start processing your delivery orders, **scan the barcode** on the " -"top-right corner of the document to load the right record on the screen." -msgstr "一旦你开始处理你的发货单, 在文档右上角 **扫码** 下载屏幕上正确的记录" +"When you have scanned all the items of the location, validate the inventory " +"manually or scan the *Validate* barcode." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:19 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:3 +msgid "Work with Barcode Nomenclature" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:5 msgid "" -"Then, **scan the barcode** of every product, or scan the barcode of the " -"product on the picking line if the barcode on the product is not easily " -"accessible, visible or is missing." -msgstr "然后, 给所有产品 **扫描条码** , 或者如果产品上的条码不容易够到, 看不到或者丢失了, 就扫描产品栈板上的条码" +"There are different situations in which barcode nomenclatures can be useful." +" A well-known use case is the one of a point of sales that sells products in" +" bulk. The customers will scale their products themselves and get the " +"printed barcode to stick on the product. This barcode will contain the " +"weight of the product and help compute the price accordingly." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:23 -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:24 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:13 +msgid "Create a Barcode Nomenclature" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:15 msgid "" -"Once you scanned all products, scan the **Validate** barcode action to " -"finish the operation." -msgstr "一旦你扫描了所有的产品, 扫描 **确认** 条码动作来完成操作" +"Odoo supports *Barcode Nomenclatures*, which determine the mapping and " +"interpretation of the encoded information." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:30 -msgid "Process delivery orders from a computer or mobile device:" -msgstr "从电脑上或者移动设备处理所有的交货单" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:32 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:18 msgid "" -"Load all the delivery orders marked as **To Do**, and open the first one." -msgstr "下载所有标记为 **待做** 的发货单, 并且打开第一个" +"To configure the *Barcode Nomenclature*, you need to activate the debug " +"mode. To do so, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Barcode Nomenclature*." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:35 -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:33 -msgid "Pick up and scan each listed product." -msgstr "捡起并扫描每一个被列出的产品。" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:37 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:22 msgid "" -"When you've picked all the items, click the **Validate** button or scan the " -"**Validate barcode** action to finish the Operation." -msgstr "一旦完成所有产品的拣货, 点击 **验证** 按钮或者扫描 **验证条码** 动作来完成该操作" +"You can create a barcode nomenclature from there, and then add a line to " +"create your first rule." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/delivery.rst:40 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:28 msgid "" -"Move to the next delivery order to process by clicking on the top-right " -"right **arrow** or scanning the **Pager-Next** barcode action." -msgstr "通过点击右上角的 **箭头** 或者扫描 **下一页** 条码动作移到下一个发货单 " +"The first step is to specify the *rule name*, for example, *Weight Barcode* " +"with 3 decimals. Then, you have to specify the type for barcode " +"nomenclature, like the *Weighted Product*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:35 +msgid "" +"The *Barcode Pattern* is a regular expression that defines the structure of " +"the barcode. In this example, 21 defines the products on which the rule will" +" be applied. Those are the numbers by which the product barcode should " +"start. The 5 “dots” are the following numbers of the product barcode and are" +" there to identify the product in question. The “N” defines a number and the" +" “D” defines the decimals." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:43 +msgid "" +"You can define different rules and order their priority thanks to the " +"sequence. The first rule that matches the scanned barcode will then be " +"applied." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:48 +msgid "Configure your Product" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:50 +msgid "The barcode of the product should start by “21”;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:52 +msgid "" +"The 5 “dots” are the other numbers of your product barcode, allowing to " +"identify the product;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:54 +msgid "" +"The barcode should contain 0’s when you did defined D’s or N’s. In our case," +" we need to set 5 zeros because we condigures “21………{NNDDD}”;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:56 +msgid "" +"In EAN-13, the last number is a check number. Use an EAN13 generator to know" +" which digit it should be in your case." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:61 +msgid "" +"In case you weight 1,5kg of pasta, the balance will print you the following " +"barcode: *2112345015001*. If you scan this barcode in your PoS, or when " +"receiving the products in your barcode app, Odoo will automatically create a" +" new line for the product, for a quantity of 1,5kg." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:67 +msgid "" +"For the point of sale, a price depending on the quantity will also be " +"computed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:74 +msgid "Rule Types" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:76 +msgid "" +"**Priced Product**: it allows you to identify the product and specify its " +"price, used in PoS;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:78 +msgid "" +"**Discounted Product**: it allows you to create one barcode per applied " +"discount. Then, you can scan your product in the PoS and apply discounts on " +"the product by scanning the discount barcode;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:80 +msgid "" +"**Weighted Product**: it allows you to identify the product and specify its " +"weight, used in both PoS and in Inventory;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:82 +msgid "" +"**Client**: it allows you to identify the customer, for example used with " +"loyalty program;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:84 +msgid "" +"**Cashier**: it allows you to identify the cashier when entering the PoS;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:86 +msgid "" +"**Location**: it allows you to identify the location on a transfer when " +"multi-location is activated;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:88 +msgid "" +"**Package**: it allows you to identify packages on a transfer when packages " +"are activated;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:90 +msgid "" +"**Lot**: it allows you to identify the lot number of a product on a " +"transfer;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:92 +msgid "" +"**Credit Card**: it doesn’t need manual modification, exists for data from " +"the Mercury module;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:94 +msgid "" +"**Unit Product**: it allows you to identify a product for both PoS and " +"Transfers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/barcode_nomenclature.rst:97 +msgid "" +"When the barcode pattern contains .*, it means that it can contain any " +"number of characters. Those characters can be any number." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:3 -msgid "How to do an internal transfer?" -msgstr "如何做内部调拨?" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:5 -msgid "In Odoo, there are two types of internal transfers:" -msgstr "在Odoo中，有两种类型的内部调拨：" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:7 -msgid "" -"Those initiated automatically by the system (for example, a quality control)" -msgstr "系统自动初始化这些（例如，质量控制）" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:10 -msgid "" -"Those created by a worker (for example, through the internal transfer area " -"of the dashboard)." -msgstr "由工人创建的这些(例如，通过仪表板上的'内部调拨'区域)。" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:13 -msgid "To make an Internal Transfer:" -msgstr "要做内部调拨 :" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:15 -msgid "From the home of the barcode application, scan the **source location**" -msgstr "从条码应用的首页, 扫描 **源位置** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:17 -msgid "Pick up and **scan the products**" -msgstr "捡起并 **扫描产品** " - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:19 -msgid "Scan the **destination location**" -msgstr "扫描 **目的位置** " - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:21 -msgid "**Validate** the transfer to finish it" -msgstr " **验证** 以完成调拨" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:3 -msgid "How to handle lots and serial numbers with barcodes?" -msgstr "如何使用条形码来做批次号以及序列号管理?" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:5 -msgid "" -"Lots Numbers can be encoded from incoming shipments, internal moves and " -"outgoing deliveries:" -msgstr "批次号能够在收货, 内部调拨和出货的时候进行编码 :" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:8 -msgid "" -"In the barcode interface, **scan** the products you want create a lot from" -msgstr "在条码界面, **扫描** 你想创建批次的产品" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:10 -msgid "" -"If this product should be manage by lots, a window opens to help you scan " -"the lots/serial numbers" -msgstr "如果该产品需要进行批次管理, 一个窗口会打开帮助你扫描批次号/序列号" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:13 -msgid "" -"**Scan** a lot barcode, **type** one manually or **leave empty** to generate" -" one automatically" -msgstr " **扫描** 一个批次条码, 手工的 **输入** 一个或者 **留空** 自动生成一个" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:16 -msgid "Click or scan **Validate** once you are done" -msgstr "一旦完成, 点击或者扫描 **确认** " - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:18 -msgid "What is the difference between **Lots** and **Serial Numbers**?" -msgstr " **批次号** 和 **序列号** 之间的差别是什么？" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:20 -msgid "" -"**Lot** numbers are attributed to several identical products, so each time " -"you scan a lot number, Odoo will add one on the product count." -msgstr " **批次号** 是一些特定产品的属性, 所以每次当你扫描一个批次号, Odoo会在产品计数上添加一个" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:24 -msgid "" -"On the opposite, a **serial number** is unique, and represented by only one " -"barcode, sticked on only one item. This means that Odoo won't accept " -"scanning the same serial number more than once per operation." +msgid "Process to Transfers" msgstr "" -"相反的, 一个 **序列号** 是独一无二的, 只能用独一的条码表示, 也只能代表唯一一个产品。这样也就意味着Odoo不接受对同一个序列号的多次扫描" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:32 -msgid "Here, we configured **Lu - Petit Beukelaer** tracking by lots." -msgstr "在此, 我们配置 **Lu - Petit Beukelaer** 批次追踪" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:6 +msgid "Simple Transfers" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:37 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:8 msgid "" -"Scan a product from this incoming shipment, then scan the lot number of each" -" product (you can also use the keyboard)." -msgstr "从进来的送货扫描一个产品, 然后扫描每一个产品的批次(也可以使用键盘)" +"To process a transfer from the *Barcode* app, the first step is to go to " +"*Operations*." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/lots_serial_numbers.rst:43 -msgid "Click save/scan **Validate** and you are done." -msgstr "点击保存/扫描 **确认** 然后就做完了。" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:3 -msgid "How to process incoming receipts?" -msgstr "如何处理收货？" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:14 msgid "" -"There are two approaches to process incoming receipts: you can either work " -"on printed documents (and scan lines on the documents), or on a screen (and " -"scan products directly)." -msgstr "有两种处理收货的方法 :可以在打印出来的文档上(在文档上扫描项目行)或者在屏幕上(直接扫描产品)" +"Then, you have the choice to either enter an existing transfer, by going to " +"the corresponding operation type and manually selecting the one you want to " +"enter, or by scanning the barcode of the transfer." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:10 -msgid "Process printed incoming receipts:" -msgstr "处理打印的收货单 :" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:12 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:24 msgid "" -"Print incoming receipts of the day by selecting all documents from the **To " -"Receive** list and print **Picking Operations** from the top menu." -msgstr "从当天 **待接收** 列表中选择单据并打印入库单, 并且从上面菜单打印 **分拣作业** " +"From there, you will be able to scan the products that are part of the " +"existing transfer and/or add new products to this transfer. Once all the " +"products have been scanned, you can validate the transfer to proceed with " +"the stock moves." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:16 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:33 msgid "" -"Once you start processing your incoming receipts, scan the barcode on the " -"top-right corner of the document to load the right record on the screen." -msgstr "一旦开始处理收货单, 扫描收货单右上角的条码从而让该收货单的详细内容在屏幕上显示出来。" +"If you have different storage locations in your warehouse, you can add " +"additional steps for the different operation types." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:20 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:37 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:50 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:45 +msgid "Receipts" +msgstr "收货数量(在途)" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:39 msgid "" -"Then, scan the barcode of every product, or scan the barcode of the product " -"on the picking line if the barcode on the product is not easily accessible, " -"visible or is missing." -msgstr "然后，扫描每个产品的条码或者如果产品上的条码不容易扫到、看到或者丢失，那么就在拣货行上扫描产品的条码。" +"When receiving a product in stock, you need to scan its barcode in order to " +"identify it in the system. Once done, you can either make it enter the main " +"location of the transfer, for example WH/Stock, or scan a location barcode " +"to make it enter a sub-location of the main location." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:28 -msgid "Process incoming receipts from a computer or mobile device:" -msgstr "在电脑或者移动设备处理收货单" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:30 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:48 msgid "" -"Load all the incoming receipts marked as **To Receive**, and open the first " -"one." -msgstr "下载所有标记为 **待收** 的收货单, 并且打开第一个。" +"If you want the product to enter WH/Stock in our example, you can simply " +"scan the next product." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:35 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:52 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery.rst:3 +msgid "Delivery Orders" +msgstr "出库单" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:54 msgid "" -"When you've picked all the items, click the **Validate** button or scan the " -"**Validate** barcode action to finish the Operation." -msgstr "当所有的拣货都完成的时候, 点击 **确认** 按钮或者扫描 **确认** 条码动作来完成操作。" +"When delivering a product, you have to scan the source location if it is " +"different than the one initially set on the transfer. Then, you can start " +"scanning the products that are delivered from this specific location." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:62 msgid "" -"Move to the next incoming receipt to process by clicking on the top-right " -"right **arrow** or scanning the **Pager-Next** barcode action." -msgstr "通过点击右上角的 **箭头** 或者扫描 **下一页** 条码动作，移到下一个待处理收货。" +"Once the different products have been scanned, you have the possibility to " +"scan another location, such as WH/Stock, and another page will be added to " +"your delivery order. You can move from one to the other thanks to the " +"*Previous* and *Next* buttons." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:42 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:137 -msgid "Example" -msgstr "例子" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:44 -msgid "Open operation interface." -msgstr "打开作业界面。" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:49 -msgid "Scan." -msgstr "扫描." - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/receipts.rst:54 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:70 msgid "" -"The picking appears. Scan items and/or fill in informations using the mouse " -"and keyboard." -msgstr "拣货呈现, 逐个扫描或者用鼠标和键盘填写所有的信息。" +"Now, you can validate your transfer. To do so, click on *Next* until you " +"reach the last page of the transfer. There, you will be able to validate it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:78 +msgid "Internal Transfers" +msgstr "内部调拨" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:80 +msgid "" +"When realizing an internal transfer with multi-location, you first have to " +"scan the source location of the product. Then, you can scan the product in " +"itself, before having to scan the barcode of the destination location." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:85 +msgid "" +"If the source and destination of the internal transfers are already correct," +" you don’t need to scan them." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:89 +msgid "Transfers with Tracked Products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:91 +msgid "" +"If you work with products tracked by lot/serial numbers, you have two ways " +"of working:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:94 +msgid "" +"If you work with serial/lot numbers taking all products into consideration, " +"you can scan the barcode of the lot/serial number and Odoo will increase the" +" quantity of the product, setting its lot/serial number." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/internal.rst:99 +msgid "" +"If you have the same lot/serial number for different products, you can work " +"by scanning the product barcode first, and then the barcode of the " +"lot/serial number." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:3 +msgid "Create a Transfer from Scratch" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:5 +msgid "" +"To create a transfer from the *Barcode* application, you first need to print" +" the operation type barcodes. To do so, you can download the *Stock barcode " +"sheet* from the home page of the app." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/operations/transfers_scratch.rst:12 +msgid "" +"Once done, you can scan the one for which you want to create a new document." +" Then, an empty document will be created and you will be able to scan your " +"products to populate it." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup.rst:3 msgid "Setup" @@ -363,26 +447,20 @@ msgid "" "The **bluetooth scanner** can be paired with a smartphone or a tablet and is" " a good choice if you want to be mobile but don't need a big investment. An " "approach is to log in Odoo on you smartphone, pair the bluetooth scanner " -"with the smartphone and work in the warehouse with always the possibility to" -" check your smartphone from time to time and use the software 'manually'." +"with the smartphone and work in the warehouse with the possibility to check " +"your smartphone from time to time and use the software 'manually'." msgstr "" -" **蓝牙扫描枪** 能和一个手机或者平板进行配对, 如果你想要是移动设备但是又不想投入太多, " -"使用蓝牙扫描枪就是不错的选择。方法是使用手机登陆Odoo, " -"并把手机和蓝牙链接即可在仓库中扫描作业。蓝牙扫描能满足你使用手机就可以实时的进行移动操作以及'手工的'登陆系统。" #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:32 msgid "" "For heavy use, the **mobile computer scanner** is the handiest solution. It " -"consists in a small computer with a built-in barcode scanner. This one can " +"consists of a small computer with a built-in barcode scanner. This one can " "turn out to be a very productive solution, however you need to make sure " -"that is is capable of running Odoo smoothy. The most recent models using " +"that is is capable of running Odoo smoothly. The most recent models using " "Android + Google Chrome or Windows + Internet Explorer Mobile should do the " "job. However, due to the variety of models and configurations on the market," " it is essential to test it first." msgstr "" -"在繁忙的业务中, **移动电脑扫描枪** 是最简便的解决方法。它由一个小型电脑和一个内置扫描枪构成。并且该扫描设备是操作最具有生产力的解决方法, 然而," -" 你需要在该设备能流畅的运行Odoo。最近使用Android + 谷歌 Chrome浏览器或者Windows + " -"IE浏览器的移动端的模式可以实现该功能。然而, 由于模式的多样性以及市场上的不同的配置, 有必要先进行测试。" #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/hardware.rst:42 msgid "Configure your barcode scanner" @@ -420,465 +498,118 @@ msgstr "" "ON','申请输入后缀', 等等。)。" #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:3 -msgid "How to activate the barcodes in Odoo?" -msgstr "如何启用条码？" +msgid "Activate the Barcodes in Odoo" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:5 msgid "" -"The barcode scanning features can save you a lot of the time usually lost " +"The barcode scanning features can save you a lot of time usually lost " "switching between the keyboard, the mouse and the scanner. Properly " "attributing barcodes to products, pickings locations, etc. allows you to " "work more efficiently by controlling the software almost exclusively with " "the barcode scanner." msgstr "" -"Odoo的条码特性能让你节省在键盘, 鼠标, 和扫描枪上切换的时间。正确的给产品指定条码, 给拣货类型指定条码, " -"等等。并能让你通过控制几乎完全无缝衔接的扫描枪更加有效的工作。" -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:17 -msgid "" -"Print this document to be able to use your barcode scanner to perform more " -"actions." -msgstr "打印这个文件，以后方可用条码扫描器执行更多操作，" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:19 -msgid "Document: |download_barcode|" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:23 -msgid "Set products barcodes" -msgstr "设置产品条码" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:28 -msgid "" -"In order to fill a picking or to perform an inventory, you need to make sure" -" that your products are encoded in Odoo along with their barcodes. If this " -"is not already done, you can fill in the products barcodes through a handy " -"interface. Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings` " -"and click :menuselection:`Operations --> Barcode Scanner`. Click Save, and " -"go back into the previous screen to click Configure Product Barcodes. This " -"interface can also be accessed via the planner." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:39 -msgid "" -"Product variants: be careful to add barcodes directly on the variant, and " -"not the template product (otherwise you won't be able to differentiate " -"them)." -msgstr "产品变型: 注意，需要在产品变型添加条码，而不是模板产品(否则就不能区分它们)。" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:44 -msgid "Set locations barcodes" -msgstr "设置位置条码" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:49 -msgid "" -"If you manage multiple locations, you will find useful to attribute a " -"barcode to each location and stick it on the location. You can configure the" -" locations barcodes in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> " -"Warehouse Management --> Locations`. There is button in the **Print** menu " -"that you can use to print the locations names and barcodes. There are 4 " -"barcodes per page, arranged in a way that is convenient to print on sticker " -"paper." -msgstr "" -"如果你要管理多库位, 你会发现给每个库位赋予一个条码并贴在库位上。你可以在在如下配置库位条码 :menuselection:`库存 -->配置 --> " -"仓库管理 -->库位` 。在 **打印** 菜单有一个按钮, 你可以用它打印库位名称和条码。每页有4个方便打印在贴纸上的排列的条码。" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:58 -msgid "" -"Example of location naming: **warehouse short name** - **location short " -"name** - (**Corridor X** - **Shelf Y** - **Height Z**) Example: A032-025-133" -msgstr "" -"库位命名例子 : **仓库简称** - **库位简称** - ( **坐标 X** - **货架 Y** - **高度 Z** ) 例如 : " -"A032-025-133" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:65 -msgid "Barcode formats" -msgstr "条码格式" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:67 -msgid "" -"Most retail products use EAN-13 barcodes. They cannot be made up without " -"proper authorization: you must pay the International Article Numbering " -"Association a fee in exchange for an EAN code sequence (that's why no two " -"products in a store will ever have the same EAN code)." -msgstr "" -"大多数产品使用EAN-13条码。这种条码需要付款才能使用 " -":你必须支付国际物品编码协会费后才能使用EAN条码(这就是为什么在商店中任何两个产品都不会有重复条码)。" - -#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:72 -msgid "" -"Still, as Odoo supports any string as a barcode, so you can always define " -"your own barcode format for internal use." -msgstr "和以前一样, Odoo支持所有字符串的条码, 所以你也可以定义内部的条码格式。" - -#: ../../inventory/management.rst:3 -msgid "Warehouse Management" -msgstr "仓库管理" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment.rst:3 -msgid "Inventory Adjustment" -msgstr "库存调整" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:3 -msgid "How to make the initial inventory?" -msgstr "如何进行初始盘点？" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:5 -msgid "" -"One of the most important feature in an warehouse management software is to " -"keep the inventory right." -msgstr "仓库管理系统的一个嘴重要的功能就是保持库存正确" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Once your products have been defined, it is time to make your initial " -"inventory. You will reflect reality by inventorying the right quantities in " -"the right locations." -msgstr "一旦产品被定义好, 就可以做库存的初始化了。你可以通过盘点库位中的存货来正确的管理存货数量。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:55 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:34 -msgid "Product Configuration" -msgstr "产品配置" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:15 -msgid "" -"In the Inventory module, open the :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> " -"Products`, then click on **Create** to create a new product. Configure the " -"product type so that it is **Stockable** and not a consumable." -msgstr "" -"在库存模块下, 打开 :menuselection:`存货控制(Inventory Control) -->产品(Products)` , 然后点击 " -"**创建** 创建新的产品。把产品类型定义为 **库存产品** , 不要定义为消耗品。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:23 -msgid "Start the initial inventory" -msgstr "开始初始盘点" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:26 -msgid "Update the product quantity for one product" -msgstr "为一种产品更新产品数量" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:28 -msgid "" -"In the product you just created, you can see in the upper tiles that we have" -" 0 product On Hand. Click on the **Update qty on Hand** button." -msgstr "在刚刚创建的产品中, 我们可以在上方的标题栏中看到产品在手数量是0。点击 **更新在手数量** 按钮" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:31 -msgid "" -"A new window opens. In the **New Quantity on Hand** field, type the quantity" -" of product you currently hold in stock, then click on **Apply**." -msgstr "一个窗口打开, 在 **最新在手数量** 字段, 输入当前库存中产品的数量, 然后点击 **应用** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:39 -msgid "" -"if you are using multiple locations for your warehouse, you will be able to " -"set the location of your product from this screen." -msgstr "如果使用仓库的多库位, 你可以从这个界面设置产品的库位。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:42 -msgid "" -"You can now see from the On Hand tab that the quantity has been updated." -msgstr "可以看到在手数量标签里面的数量已经变化了" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:47 -msgid "" -"Now, if you check the **Inventory Adjustments** in the **Inventory Control**" -" menu, you will see that a new line named \"INV: (name of your product)\" " -"has automatically been created and validated by the system." -msgstr "" -"现在, 如果在 **库存控制** 菜单下点击 **存货调整** , 你会看到系统自动创建并确认了一个命名为\" INV : (产品名称) \"的行。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:55 -msgid "Multiple products at once" -msgstr "一次多个产品" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:57 -msgid "" -"Create all the products for which you want to follow the stock (as stockable" -" products). Once the required products in stock have been defined, use an " -"initial inventory operation to put the current quantities into the system by" -" location. Go to :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Inventory " -"Adjustments` to start your initial inventory." -msgstr "" -"创建所有你想要追踪产品库存的产品(作为库存类型的产品)。一旦产品在库存中产生需求, 用期初盘点在系统中按照库位放置当前的数量。进入 " -":menuselection:`库存控制 -->库存调整` 开始期初盘点。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:63 -msgid "" -"Give it a name (for example Initial Inventory) and select the stock location" -" of your inventory. Note that when you select a parent location (such as " -"Stock, which might be split into sub locations), you can also select the sub" -" (or child) locations." -msgstr "给之命名(例如期初库存)并选择库存的存放库位。注意, 当你选择了父库位(例如库存可以被分成不同的子库位), 你也可以选择下级(或子)库位。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:71 -msgid "" -"You can choose between making an inventory for all products, for a few or " -"only for one. In this case, we choose the **All products** option." -msgstr "在盘点的时候你可以选择盘所有产品, 部分产品或者只盘一个。在这种状况下, 我们选择 **所有产品** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:79 -msgid "" -"If you need your stock valuation to be done in a different period than the " -"one that will be selected by default according to the inventory end date, " -"enter the corresponding accounting period in the Force Valuation Period " -"field. The accounting module needs to be installed." -msgstr "" -"如果你需要将库存计价在一个不同的会计期间完成, 而不是根据存货结束日期儿自动选择的默认会计期间, " -"在强制计价期间字段输入相应的会计期间。需要安装会计模块。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:84 -msgid "" -"Click the **Start Inventory** button. Depending on the type of inventory you" -" have chosen (all products or selected ones) you might have to add products " -"manually by clicking on **Add an item**." -msgstr "点击 **开始盘点** 按钮。基于选择的盘点类型(所有产品或者部分产品)可能你需要通过点击 **添加条目** 手工地添加产品" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:88 -msgid "" -"Add the **Real Quantity** that you have in your stock for each product." -msgstr "添加库存中每一个产品的 **实际数量** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:92 -msgid "" -"additional information will be available according to the options you " -"activated (multi-locations, serial number, consignee stocks)." -msgstr "通过你激活一些选项之后额外的信息就会出现(多库位, 序列号, 代销库存)。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:98 -msgid "" -"Click the **Validate Inventory** button to confirm the inventory and post " -"it." -msgstr "点击 **验证盘点** 按钮确认该次盘点并过账。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:102 -msgid "Reporting" -msgstr "报表" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/initial_inventory.rst:104 -msgid "" -"To check the current stock, go to :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> " -"Products`, and click on the **list button**:" -msgstr "" -"检查当前的库存, 进入 :menuselection:`库存控制(Inventory Control) -->产品(Products)` , 并且点击 " -"**列表按钮**: " - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:3 -msgid "How to choose between minimum stock rule and make to order?" -msgstr "如何在最小库存和按订单补货规则之间选择？" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:5 -msgid "" -"**Minimum Stock rules** and **Make to Order** have similar consequences but " -"different rules. They should be used depending on your manufacturing and " -"delivery strategies." -msgstr " **最小库存规则** 和 **按订单补货** 有着同样的结果但是却有不同的规则。依赖于生产以及发货的策略, 我们可以选择使用它。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:10 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:10 -msgid "Terminology" -msgstr "术语" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:13 -msgid "Minimum stock rule" -msgstr "最小库存规则" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:15 -msgid "" -"**Minimum Stock** rules are used to ensure that you always have the minimum " -"amount of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or " -"answer to your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its" -" minimum the system will automatically generate a procurement with the " -"quantity needed to reach the maximum stock level." -msgstr "" -" **最小库存** 规则能来确保在你的库存中总是有最少数量的产品用来满足生产或者满足客户的需求。当库存水平到达最低库存时, " -"系统会自动生成一个达到最大库存水平的数量的补货。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:22 -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:56 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:22 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:58 -msgid "Make to Order" -msgstr "按单补货" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:24 -msgid "" -"The **Make to Order** function will trigger a **Purchase Order** of the " -"amount of the **Sales Order** related to the product. The system will " -"**not** check the current stock valuation. This means that a draft purchase " -"order will be generated regardless of the quantity on hand of the product." -msgstr "" -" **按单补货** 的功能会根据 **销售订单** 的产品数量触发一个该产品的 **采购订单** , 系统 **不会** 检查当前的存货计价, " -"也就是系统不考虑产品当前的在手数量会去触发一个采购订单。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:30 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:12 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:12 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:37 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:34 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:29 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:9 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:50 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:28 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:21 -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:22 -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:25 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:159 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:164 -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:21 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:18 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:19 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:30 +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:16 +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:14 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:10 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:25 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:29 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:22 -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:18 -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:23 +#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:17 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:10 #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:18 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:30 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:17 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:114 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:16 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:15 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/multipack.rst:13 #: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:17 #: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:14 msgid "Configuration" -msgstr "配置" +msgstr "设置" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:33 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:33 -msgid "Minimum stock rules" -msgstr "最小库存规则" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:35 +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:14 msgid "" -"The Minimum Stock Rules configuration is available through the menu " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory Control --> Reordering Rule` in the " -"drop down menu. There, click on **Create** to set minimum and maximum stock " -"values for a given product." +"To use this feature, you first need to activate the *Barcode* functionality " +"via *Inventory > Settings > Barcode Scanner*. Once you have ticked the " +"feature, you can hit save." msgstr "" -"最小库存规则的配置是在菜单项 :menuselection:`库存(Inventory) -->存货控制(Inventory Control) --> " -"再定点规则(Reordering Rule)` 的下拉菜单中。然后点击 **创建** 去设置给定产品最小和最大库存数值。" -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Active" -msgstr "有效" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "" -"If the active field is set to False, it will allow you to hide the " -"orderpoint without removing it." -msgstr "如果有效字段被设置为否，系统将会允许你隐藏订货点而不是删除。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Product Unit of Measure" -msgstr "产品量度单位" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Default unit of measure used for all stock operations." -msgstr "所有库存商品的缺省单位。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Procurement Group" -msgstr "补货组" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Moves created through this orderpoint will be put in this procurement group." -" If none is given, the moves generated by stock rules will be grouped into " -"one big picking." -msgstr "通过此订购点创建的移动将放在此补货组中。如果没有被提供，由补货规则生成的移动将被组合到一个大拣货。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Minimum Quantity" -msgstr "最小数量" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "" -"When the virtual stock goes below the Min Quantity specified for this field," -" Odoo generates a procurement to bring the forecasted quantity to the Max " -"Quantity." -msgstr "当虚拟库存小于此字段指定的最小数量，Odoo生成补货以便令预测数量达至最大数量。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Maximum Quantity" -msgstr "最大数量" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "" -"When the virtual stock goes below the Min Quantity, Odoo generates a " -"procurement to bring the forecasted quantity to the Quantity specified as " -"Max Quantity." -msgstr "当虚拟库存小于最小数量，Odoo生成补货以便令数量的预测数量达至最大数量。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Quantity Multiple" -msgstr "数量倍数" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "" -"The procurement quantity will be rounded up to this multiple. If it is 0, " -"the exact quantity will be used." -msgstr "补货数量将会舍入最多为此倍数。如果它是0， 那么会使用确切的数量。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "Lead Time" -msgstr "前置时间" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:0 -msgid "" -"Number of days after the orderpoint is triggered to receive the products or " -"to order to the vendor" -msgstr "在订购点被触发到收到产品或者给供应商下单的天数" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:45 -msgid "" -"Then, click on your product to access the related product form and, on the " -"**Inventory submenu**, do not forget to select a supplier." -msgstr "然后, 在产品点击进入产品表单, 在 **库存子页面** 选择一个供应商。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:52 -msgid "" -"Don't forget to select the right product type in the product form. A " -"consumable can not be stocked and will thus not be accounted for in the " -"stock valuation." -msgstr "不要忘了在产品表单中选择正确的产品类型。销售品不计入库存并且不进行存货计价" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:58 -msgid "" -"The Make to Order configuration is available on your product form through " -"your :menuselection:`Inventory module --> Inventory control --> Products` " -"(or any other module where products are available)." -msgstr "按订单生产可以在产品表单配置 :menuselection:`库存模块 -->存货控制 -->产品` (或者其它模块下有的产品路径下)。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:62 -msgid "On the product form, under **Inventory**, click on **Make To Order**." -msgstr "在产品表单信息的 **库存** 页面, 点击 **按单补货** " - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:68 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:70 -msgid "Choice between the two options" -msgstr "选择两个选项其中一个" - -#: ../../inventory/management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:70 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:72 -msgid "" -"The choice between the two options is thus dependent of your inventory " -"strategy. If you prefer to have a buffer and always have at least a minimum " -"amount, the minimum stock rule should be used. If you want to reorder your " -"stocks only if your sale is confirmed it is better to use the Make to Order." +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:22 +msgid "Set Product Barcodes" msgstr "" -"两种选项的选择依赖于你的库存策略。如果你想有一点库存缓冲并总是在仓库中留有最少的存货数量, " -"那么就可以使用最小库存规则。如果想只是在销售订单确认的状态下才去补充存货, 那么就建议使用按照订单补货。" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery.rst:3 -msgid "Delivery Orders" -msgstr "交货单" +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:24 +msgid "" +"You can easily assign barcodes to your different products via the " +"*Inventory* app. To do so, go to *Settings > Configure Products Barcodes*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:31 +msgid "" +"Then, you have the possibility to assign barcodes to your products directly " +"at creation on the product form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:41 +msgid "" +"Be careful to add barcodes directly on the product variants and not on the " +"template product. Otherwise, you won’t be able to differentiate them." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:46 +msgid "Set Locations Barcodes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:48 +msgid "" +"If you manage multiple locations, you will find useful to attribute a " +"barcode to each location and stick it on the location. You can configure the" +" locations barcodes in *Inventory > Configuration > Locations*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:59 +msgid "" +"You can easily print the barcode you allocate to the locations via the " +"*Print* menu." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:63 +msgid "Barcode Formats" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:65 +msgid "" +"Most retail products use EAN-13 barcodes. They cannot be made up without " +"proper authorization. You must pay the International Article Numbering " +"Association a fee in exchange for an EAN code sequence." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/barcode/setup/software.rst:69 +msgid "" +"Still, as Odoo supports any string as a barcode, you can always define your " +"own barcode format for internal use." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management.rst:3 +msgid "Warehouse Management" +msgstr "仓库管理" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:3 msgid "How do I cancel a delivery order?" @@ -887,23 +618,13 @@ msgstr "如何取消交货单？" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/cancel_order.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/delivery_countries.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/label_type.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:6 ../../inventory/overview.rst:3 -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:6 +#: ../../inventory/overview.rst:3 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/cancel.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:6 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:6 @@ -1002,151 +723,152 @@ msgid "" msgstr "该进程不在后台运行。我们假设你创建了一个销售订单, 你就知道你能使用哪个已经创建的交货方式。" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:3 -msgid "" -"How to send products to customers directly from suppliers (drop-shipping)?" -msgstr "如何直接从供应商发货给客户(直运)？" +msgid "Send Products to Customers Directly from Suppliers (Drop-shipping)" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:6 -msgid "What is drop-shipping?" -msgstr "什么是直运" +msgid "What is Drop-Shipping?" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:8 msgid "" "Drop-Shipping is a system that allows orders taken from your store to be " "shipped straight from your supplier to your customer. On a usual delivery " "system, products are sent from your supplier to your warehouse to be put in " -"stock, and then shipped to your customers after ordering. With drop-" -"shipping, no item is stocked. When a customer places an order in your shop, " -"the item is delivered straight from the supplier to the customer. Therefore," -" the product doesn't need to get through your warehouse." +"stock and then shipped to your customers after ordering." msgstr "" -"直运是一个能让订单在你的系统中完成但是货物直接从供应商发送到客户的系统。在通常的发货系统中, 产品从供应商发到你的仓库中, 然后发送到客户中。在直运中," -" 你仓库中不进行库存。当客户在你的店铺下了单, 货物会直接从供应商发送到客户。因此, 货物不需要通过你的仓库。" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:18 -msgid "Points to be considered while implementing drop-shipping" -msgstr "在实现直运的时候需要考虑到的点" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:13 +msgid "" +"With drop-shipping, no item is stocked. When a customer places an order in " +"your shop, the item is delivered straight from the supplier to the customer." +" Therefore, the product doesn't need to get through your warehouse." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:20 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:19 +msgid "Points to be Considered while Implementing Drop-Shipping" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:24 msgid "" "Use drop-shipping only for the products you can't or don't want to keep in " -"stock. One reason is that you'll always make smaller margins on items that " -"are drop-shipped, so you should keep it only for items that take up a lot of" -" space in your warehouse." +"stock." msgstr "" -"只给那些不不想或者不能在库存中保存的产品。一个理由就是在这个过程中的你总是只有更少的利润率, 所以你只有在这个时候才腾出你的仓库的大量空间进行存储。" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:22 msgid "" -"Drop-shipping is best for niche products. Chances are that products that are" -" in high demand are being offered by large suppliers at a fraction of the " -"price you'll be able to charge, so using a more costly shipping method won't" -" be financially rewarding. But if your product is unique, then it makes " -"sense!" +"One reason is that you'll always make smaller margins on items that are " +"drop-shipped, so you should keep it only for items that take up a lot of " +"space in your warehouse." msgstr "" -"对于消肿产品直运是最好的选择。机会是哪些有着大量需求的且有很多供应商产品你只能赚一小部分。所以使用经济的交货方式不会获得奖励。但是如果产品是独特的, " -"情况就变得不同！" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:31 -msgid "" -"To protect your customers from bad experiences, test drop-shipping companies" -" for yourself beforehand and list the best ones." -msgstr "以防生产环境中出错给客户留下不好的体验, 在交接之前可以在自己的内部公司间测试直运并列出最好的" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:34 -msgid "" -"Make sure time is not against you. Drop-shipping should take a reasonable " -"amount of time and surely not more than it would have taken you to handle it" -" all by yourself. It's also nice to be able to provide your customers with a" -" tracking number." -msgstr "确保时间是可控的。直运的操作时间应该确保在全部由你来处理的时间之内。如果能给客户提供运单号更好。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:39 -msgid "" -"Items have to be available from your supplier. It's good to know if the " -"product you're selling is available upstream. If you don't have that " -"information, inform your customers that you don't hold the item in stock and" -" that it's subject to availability from a third party." +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:30 +msgid "Drop-shipping is best for niche products." msgstr "" -"要确保在供应商那边有足够的库存。如果知道产品在供应链上游的状况是很有用的。如果你没有这些信息, 就告诉客户现在没有库存并且这取决第三方的库存。" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:46 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:27 msgid "" -"For more information and insights on Drop-shipping, read our blog on `What " -"is drop-shipping and how to use it `__." +"Chances are that products that are in high demand are being offered by large" +" suppliers at a fraction of the price you'll be able to charge, so using a " +"more costly shipping method won't be financially rewarding. But if your " +"product is unique, then it makes sense!" msgstr "" -"关于直运的详情以及更加深入, 请阅读我们的博客'直运是什么以及如何使用' `__." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:50 -msgid "Configuring drop-shipping" -msgstr "配置直运" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:33 +msgid "To protect your customers from bad experiences." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:33 +msgid "" +"Test drop-shipping companies for yourself beforehand and list the best ones." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:37 +msgid "Make sure time is not against you." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:36 +msgid "" +"Drop-shipping should take a reasonable amount of time and surely not more " +"than it would have taken you to handle it all by yourself. It's also nice to" +" be able to provide your customers with a tracking number." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:44 +msgid "Items have to be available from your supplier." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:40 +msgid "" +"It's good to know if the product you're selling is available upstream. If " +"you don't have that information, inform your customers that you don't hold " +"the item in stock and that it's subject to availability from a third party." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:47 +msgid "" +"For more information and insights about Drop-Shipping, you can read our " +"blog: `*What is drop-shipping and how to use it* `__." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:52 -msgid "" -"Open the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`. Go " -"to **Location & Warehouse**, locate the **Dropshipping** option and tick the" -" box **Allow suppliers to deliver directly to your customers**. Then, click " -"on **Apply**." +msgid "Configure Drop-Shipping" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:54 +msgid "" +"Activate the functionality in the *Purchase* application by going to " +"*Configuration > Settings*." msgstr "" -"打开菜单 :menuselection:`库存 -->配置 -->设置` 。进入 **库位＆仓库** , 找到 **直运** 选项并勾选 " -"**允许供应商直接发货给客户** , 然后点击 **应用** 。" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:60 msgid "" -"Then go to the menu :menuselection:`Sales --> Configuration --> Settings`. " -"Locate **Order Routing** and tick the box **Choose specific routes on sales " -"order lines (advanced)**. Click on **Apply**." +"Then, go to the *Inventory* app, in *Configuration > Settings* to activate " +"the *Multi-Step Routes* feature. It will allow you to make the *Route* field" +" appear on the sale order lines to specify you send a product via drop-" +"shipping." msgstr "" -"然后进入菜单 :menuselection:`销售 -->配置 -->设置` 。找到 **订单路线** 并选择 **在销售订单选择特定的路线(高级)**" -" 。点击 **应用** 。" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:67 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:68 msgid "" -"Now, open the menu :menuselection:`Sales --> Sales --> Products`. Add a " -"supplier to the products you want to dropship." +"Now, in the *Sales* app, go to *Products > Products*. Select the product you" +" would like to drop-ship and add a vendor pricelist which contains the right" +" supplier, via the purchase tab." msgstr "" -"现在, 打开菜单 :menuselection:`销售(Sales) -->销售(Sales) -->产品(Products)` " -"。给需要直运的产品添加供应商。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:74 -msgid "How to send products from the customers directly to the suppliers" -msgstr "如何把产品直接从供应商处发给客户？" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:76 -msgid "" -"Create a **Sales Order** and specify on a sales order line for your products" -" that the route is **Dropshipping**." -msgstr "创建一个 **销售订单** 并且对某一订单行的路径设置为 **直运** " - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:82 -msgid "" -"Open the menu :menuselection:`Purchases --> Purchases --> Requests for " -"Quotation`. The draft purchase order is automatically created from the " -"procurement with the drop-shipping route. Once the order is confirmed, you " -"will see that one shipment has been created." +msgid "Send Products from the Suppliers Directly to the Customers" msgstr "" -"打开 :menuselection:`采购(Purchases) -->采购(Purchases) -->采购询价单(Requests for " -"Quotation)` 。使用直运路线的补货自动创建采购询价单。一旦订单确认, 你可以看到一个收货送货单已经创建。" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:90 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:78 msgid "" -"To confirm the sending from the vendor to the customer, go back to " -"**Inventory** app. On the dashboard, click on **# TO RECEIVE** on the " -"dropship card." -msgstr "要确认从供应商直接发货到客户, 回到 **库存** app。在仪表盘的直运卡上, 点击 **# 待收** 。" +"Create a *Sales Order* and add the product on which you just set the vendor." +" Add the *Route* field thanks to the widget on the right of the sale order " +"line. Now, you are able to specify that your products’ route is *Drop-" +"Shipping*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:89 +msgid "" +"Once the sale order is confirmed, Odoo automatically generates a *Request " +"for Quotation* for the supplier who will proceed to the drop-shipping. You " +"can find it in the *Purchase* app, with the sale order as *Source Document*." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:97 msgid "" -"It will open the list of drop-shipping transfers. Validate the transfer once" -" it has been done. The items will be directly delivered from the partner to " -"the customer without transiting to your warehouse." -msgstr "这会打开直运单列表。一旦完成就确认该调拨。货物会直接从供应商的仓库到客户仓库而不经过你的仓库。" +"Once this *Purchase Order* is confirmed, a *Receipt Order* is created and " +"linked to it. The source location is the vendor location and the destination" +" location is the customer location. Then, the product won’t go through your " +"own stock when you validate the dropship document." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:103 -msgid ":doc:`inventory_flow`" -msgstr ":doc:`inventory_flow` " +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/dropshipping.rst:105 +msgid "" +"You can also easily access the dropship document directly from your " +"inventory dashboard." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/inventory_flow.rst:3 msgid "How to choose the right inventory flow to handle delivery orders?" @@ -1285,164 +1007,138 @@ msgid "" msgstr "默认的标签类型是纸信, 如果你选了标签类型只有一半, 就能看到不同 :" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:3 -msgid "How to process delivery orders in one step (shipping)?" -msgstr "如何一步处理交货订单(发货)？" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:8 -msgid "" -"When an order goes to the shipping department for final delivery, Odoo is " -"set up by default to utilize a one-step operation: once all goods are " -"available, they are able to be shipped in a single delivery order." -msgstr "一个订单进入到发货部门的最后一步时, Odoo默认会使用一步操作 :　一旦所有的货物都准备好, 就可以使用一张发货单进行发货" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:15 -msgid "" -"There is no configuration needed. The default outgoing shipments are " -"configured to be directly delivered from the stock." -msgstr "无需专门配置, 发货会默认配置为从库存中出货。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:18 -msgid "" -"However, if **advance routes** is activated and you set another shipping " -"configuration on your warehouse, you can set it back to the one-step " -"delivery configuration. Go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouses` " -"and edit the concerned warehouse." +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:3 +msgid "Process a Receipt in one step (Receipt)" msgstr "" -"然而, 如果 **高级路径** 被激活并且在你仓库被设置另外一个交货配置, 你可以在交货配置中把它设置回到一步交货, 进入 " -":menuselection:`配置 -->仓库` 并编辑相关的仓库。" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:5 +msgid "" +"There is no configuration needed to receive in one step. The default " +"incoming shipments are configured to be directly received from the vendors " +"to the stock." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:9 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:9 +msgid "" +"However, if advanced routes have been activated and you set another incoming" +" configuration on your warehouse, you can set it back to the one-step " +"receipt configuration. To do so, go to *Configuration > Warehouses* and edit" +" the warehouse in question." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:14 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:14 +msgid "" +"Set the *Incoming Shipments* option to *Receive goods directly (1 step)*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:21 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:21 +msgid "Create a Purchase Order" +msgstr "创建采购订单" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:23 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:23 msgid "" -"Set the outgoing shippings the option to **Ship directly from stock (Ship " -"Only)**" -msgstr "把出货选项设置为 **直接从库存发货(仅发货)** " +"To create a *Request for Quotation*, go to the *Purchase* application and " +"click on *Create*. Then, add some storable products to receive and confirm " +"the *RfQ*." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:30 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:68 -msgid "Create a Sales Order" -msgstr "创建销售订单" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:32 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:27 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:27 msgid "" -"Create a sales order (From quotation to sales order) with some products to " -"deliver." -msgstr "创建一张需要进行产品发货的销售订单(从询价订单到销售订单)。" +"Notice that, now, we see 1 receipt associated with the purchase order you " +"just created. If you click on the button, you will see your receipt order." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:35 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:35 +msgid "Process a Receipt" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:37 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:37 msgid "" -"Notice that we now see ``1`` delivery associated with this sales order in " -"the **stat button** above the sales order." -msgstr "注意现在我们在销售订单上方的 **状态按钮** 只看到该销售订单相关联的'1'张发货单。" +"You can also fin the receipt directly from the *Inventory* app. When on the " +"dashboard, you can click the *1 TO PROCESS* button under the *Receipts* " +"Kanban card. Then, you will see your receipt." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:41 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:44 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:44 msgid "" -"If you click on the **1 Delivery** stat button, you should now see your " -"picking." -msgstr "如果你点击了状态按钮的 **1张发货单** , 应该可以看到调拨单。" +"Now, enter the picking that you want to process. You will be able to click " +"on *Validate* to complete the move directly as products coming from " +"suppliers are considered as being always available." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:45 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:99 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:88 -msgid "Process a Delivery" -msgstr "处理交货" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:47 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:143 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:113 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:51 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/one_step.rst:51 msgid "" -"Go to **Inventory** and click on the **# TO DO** link under the **Delivery " -"Orders** kanban card." -msgstr "进入 **库存** 点击看板卡上 **发货单** 下方的 **# 待做** 链接。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:53 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:110 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:130 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:149 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:99 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:119 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:99 -msgid "Click on the picking that you want to process." -msgstr "点击你想要处理的分拣单" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:55 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Output** to the " -"**customer**." -msgstr "点击 **确认** 完成从 **库存/出货区域** 到 **客户** 的调拨单。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/one_step.rst:58 -msgid "" -"This has completed the **Shipping Step** and the WH/OUT should now show " -"**Done** in the status column at the top of the page, which means the " -"product has been shipped to the customer." -msgstr "已经完成了 **发货步骤** 并且WH/OUT应该在页面上方的状态栏位已经显示 **完成** 状态, 也就意味着产品已经发货给客户了。" +"Once you *Validate* the receipt, the products leave the *Supplier Location* " +"to enter your *WH/Stock Location*. You can easily see that the receipt took " +"place thanks to the status of the document, which is now *Done*." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:3 -msgid "How can you change the packaging type for your sale order?" -msgstr "如何在销售订单上变更包装方式？" +msgid "Deliver Products in Packages" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:5 msgid "" -"Odoo gives you the possibility to change the default packaging type and " -"adapt the packaging the way you want it, depending on the weight of the " -"order." -msgstr "Odoo能让你变更默认的包装方式并把包装方式变更为你想要的依赖于订单的重量。" +"In Odoo, you have the possibility to deliver your products in different " +"packages, depending on the volume and or weight of your products." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:11 msgid "" -"In the **Inventory** module, Go to **Configuration** and then click on " -"**Settings**." -msgstr "在 **库存** 模块, 进入 **配置** 然后点击 **设置** 。" +"First, you need to activate the *Delivery Packages* feature in the " +"*Inventory app > Configuration > Settings*." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:18 +msgid "Proceed to a Delivery" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:20 msgid "" -"In :menuselection:`Traceability --> Packages`, flag **Record packages used " -"on packing : pallets, boxes,...**" -msgstr "在 :menuselection:`追踪 -->包裹` 中, 标记 **在打包时记录使用的包裹 :栈板, 箱子, ……** " +"Now, you can create a planned delivery with some products in it. You will " +"have the possibility to create new packages and assign them to the stock " +"move lines." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:24 -msgid "*Sale process*" -msgstr "*销售过程 *" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:26 -msgid "In the **Sales** module, go to **Sales** and click on **Sale Order**." -msgstr "在 **销售** 模块, 进入 **销售** 并点击 **销售订单** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:28 -msgid "Create your new Sale Order, and **Confirm the Sale**." -msgstr "创建新销售订单, 并 **确认订单** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:33 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:27 msgid "" -"Once you've confirmed the Sale, you need to click on **Delivery**, to be " -"redirected to the Delivery order." -msgstr "一旦确认了销售订单, 你需要点击 **交货** , 重新指定到交货单。" +"Then, you can define the package type from this window. Once the delivery " +"order is validated, you can retrieve which products have been included in " +"the package." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:36 -msgid "Click on **Edit**, and you can now change the packaging." -msgstr "点击 **编辑** , 现在你能够对包装进行更改了。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:41 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:34 msgid "" -"In the **Operations** tab, in the last column, change the **0** and put the " -"number of products that you want to pack together. Then click on **Put in " -"Pack**." -msgstr "在 **作业** 页面, 在最后一列, 把 **0** 变更为你想要打包在一块的产品的数量。然后点击 **放在包裹中** 。" +"A button will appear at the delivery stage, allowing you to find all the " +"packages which were part of the delivery order." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:48 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:44 +msgid "Use the Put in Pack button" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:46 msgid "" -"Choose the type of packaging that you want. You can also see that the weight" -" has been adapted to your package, and you can change it manually if you " -"want it to be more precise. Then click on **Save**." -msgstr "选择你需要的包材类型, 你会看到重量和包裹保持一致, 如果你想要更加精确的重量, 可以手工进行更改。然后点击 **保存** 。" +"Another way to put products in packs is to use the *Put in Pack* button. It " +"will automatically assign a pack to the number of products which is set as " +"*Done* and duplicate the stock move line if necessary." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:52 -msgid "Repeat the operation until all the products are put in pack." -msgstr "重复该操作直到所有的产品都被放进包裹。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:54 -msgid "Finally, click on **Validate** to confirm the delivery." -msgstr "最终, 点击 **确认** 来确认交货。" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/packaging_type.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Then, you will be able to update the different packages created this way, " +"directly via the *Packages* button." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:3 msgid "How is the scheduled delivery date computed?" @@ -1461,6 +1157,7 @@ msgstr "" "发货单, 销售订单, 等等。计算出来的日期依赖于Odoo中设置号的不同的提前期。" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:18 msgid "Configuring lead times" msgstr "配置提前期" @@ -1476,6 +1173,7 @@ msgid "Configuration of the different lead times are made as follows:" msgstr "按照以下配置不同的提前期 :" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:22 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:28 msgid "At a product level" msgstr "在产品层面" @@ -1540,6 +1238,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "如果需要创建生产路径的话, 不要忘了在库存页面中勾选生产选相框。" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:67 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:74 msgid "At the company level" msgstr "站在公司层面" @@ -1571,11 +1270,9 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:84 msgid "" -"To set ut your security dates, go to :menuselection:`Settings --> General " +"To set up your security dates, go to :menuselection:`Settings --> General " "settings` and click on **Configure your company data**." msgstr "" -"设置安全天数, 进入 :menuselection:`设置(Settings) -->通用设置(General settings)` 然后点击 " -"**配置公司数据** 。" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:90 msgid "" @@ -1608,6 +1305,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "请注意, 你也可以在这里配置制造提前期。" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:110 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:134 msgid "At route level" msgstr "在路线层面" @@ -1643,6 +1341,11 @@ msgid "" " display a warning." msgstr "Odoo也有可能让客户在销售订单的其他信息页面选定一个特定的需求日期。如果该日期比Odoo自动计算出来的理论日期短的话, 系统会弹出报警。" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:137 +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:173 +msgid "Example" +msgstr "例子" + #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/scheduled_dates.rst:139 msgid "" "As an example, you may sell a car today (January 1st), that is purchased on " @@ -1675,370 +1378,289 @@ msgid "" msgstr "1月8 :触发一个给到采购团队的一个采购需求, 因为采购部分平均需要2天询价并下单。" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:3 -msgid "How to process delivery orders in three steps (pick + pack + ship)?" -msgstr "如何处理三步交货(拣货+打包＋发货)？" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:8 -msgid "" -"When an order goes to the shipping department for final delivery, Odoo is " -"set up by default on a **one-step** operation: once all goods are available," -" they can be shipped in bulk in a single delivery order. However, that " -"process may not reflect the reality and your company may require more steps " -"before shipping." +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:3 +msgid "Process a Receipt in three steps (Input + Quality + Stock)" msgstr "" -"当一个订单进入到发货部门进入到最后的发货阶段, Odoo默认的设置是 **一步** 操作 :等所有货物都准备好, 就可以用一张发货单一次性的发货。然而," -" 该过程可能不能准确的反映公司的操作, 你的公司可能在发货之前需要更多的步骤。" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:14 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:5 msgid "" -"With the **three steps** process (**Pick + Pack + Ship**), the items are " -"transferred to a packing area, where they will be assembled by area of " -"destination, and then set to outbound trucks for final delivery to the " -"customers." +"In many companies, it is necessary to assess the received good. The goal is " +"to check that the products correspond to the quality requirements agreed " +"with the suppliers. Therefore, adding a *quality control step* in the goods " +"receipt process can become essential." msgstr "" -"在 **三步** 过程中( **拣货 + 包装 + 发货** ), 货物先被送到包装区域, 在那里按照发货的不同目的地被组合起来, " -"然后发到发货阜用来最终发货给客户。" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:19 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:10 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:10 msgid "" -"A few configuration steps are necessary in order to accomplish **Pick + Pack" -" + Ship** in Odoo. These steps create some additional locations, which by " -"default are called **Output** and **Packing Zone**. So, if your warehouse's " -"code is ``WH``, this configuration will create a location called " -"``WH/Output`` and another one called ``WH/Packing Zone``." +"Odoo uses routes to define exactly how you will handle the different receipt" +" steps. The configuration is done at the level of the warehouse. By default," +" the reception is a one-step process, but changing the configuration can " +"allow having 3 steps." msgstr "" -"在Odoo中要完成 **拣货＋包装＋发货** 一些必要的配置步骤需要被完成。这些步骤创建额外的库位, 这些库位默认的被成为 **出货区域** 和 " -"**包装区域** 。所以如果你的仓库的简称是 **WH** , 该配置会创建一个叫做\" WH/发货区域\\ \\ \\ \"和另外一个叫做\" " -"WH/包装区域\\ \\ \\ \"的库位。" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:15 +msgid "" +"The 3-steps flow is as follows: You receive the goods in an input area, then" +" transfer them into a quality area for *quality control*. When the quality " +"check has been processed, you can move the goods from QC to stock. Of " +"course, you may change the quantity and only transfer to stock the quantity " +"that is valid and decide that you will return the quantity that is not good." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:23 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:23 +msgid "Multi-Step Routes" +msgstr "多步路由" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:25 msgid "" -"Goods will move from **WH/Stock** to **WH/Packing Zone** in the first step. " -"Then move from **WH/Packing Zone** to **WH/Output**. Then finally it will be" -" delivered from **WH/Output** to its **final destination**." +"First, you will need to activate the *multi-step routes* option. Indeed, " +"routes provide a mechanism to chain different actions together. Here, we " +"will chain the picking to the shipping." msgstr "" -"第一步货物会从 **WH/库存** 移动到 **WH/包装区域** .。然后从 **WH/包装区域** 移动到 **WH/发货区域** .。最后从 " -"**WH/发货区域** 移动到 **最后的目的地** ." -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:30 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:29 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:29 msgid "" -"Check out :doc:`inventory_flow` to determine if this inventory flow is the " -"correct method for your needs." -msgstr "检查 :doc:`仓库流程` 确认该仓库流程是否是需要的正确的方法。" +"To activate *multi-step routes*, open the *inventory app*, and go to " +"*Configuration > Settings* and activate the option. By default, activating " +"*multi-step routes* will also activate *Storage Locations*." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:37 -msgid "Install the Inventory module" -msgstr "安装库存模块" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:38 +msgid "Warehouse configuration" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:39 -msgid "From the **App** menu, search and install the **Inventory** module." -msgstr "在 **APP** 菜单, 搜索并安装 **库存** 模块。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:44 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:40 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:40 msgid "" -"You will also need to install the **Sales** module to be able to issue sales" -" orders." -msgstr "为了能小销售订单需要安装 **销售** 模块。" +"Now that *Multi-Step Routes* is activated, go to *Configuration > Warehouse*" +" and open the one you will use to deliver in 3 steps. Then, you can select " +"the option *Pack good, send goods in output and then deliver (3 steps)* as " +"*Outgoing Shipments*." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:48 -msgid "Allow managing routes" -msgstr "允许管理路线" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:50 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:48 msgid "" -"Odoo configures movement of delivery orders via **routes**. Routes provide a" -" mechanism to link different actions together. In this case, we will link " -"the picking step to the shipping step." -msgstr "Odoo通过 **路线** 配置交货单的移动。路线提供了一种把不同动作链接到一块的机制。在该状况下, 我们把拣货步骤链接到发货步骤。" +"Activating this option will lead to the creation of two new locations, " +"*Output* and *Packing Zone*." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:54 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:51 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:51 msgid "" -"To allow management of routes, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`" -msgstr "要管理路径, 进入菜单项 :menuselection:`配置(Configuration) -->设置(Settings)` " +"Of course, you can rename them if you want. To do so, go to *Configuration >" +" Locations* and select the one you want to rename. Change its name and hit " +"save." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:56 -msgid "" -"Under :menuselection:`Location & Warehouse --> Routes`, activate the radio " -"button **Advanced routing of products using rules**. Make sure that the " -"option **Manage several locations per warehouse** is activated as well." -msgstr "" -"在 :menuselection:`库位&仓库 -->路线` 中, 勾选激活 **产品的高级路径规则** 。并确保 **仓库多位置管理** 也被激活。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:64 -msgid "Configure the warehouse for Pick + Pack + Ship" -msgstr "配置仓库为拣货＋包装＋发货" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:66 -msgid "" -"Go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouses` and edit the warehouse " -"that will be used." -msgstr "进入菜单项 :menuselection:`配置(Configuration) -->仓库(Warehouses)` 编辑要使用的仓库。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:69 -msgid "" -"For outgoing shippings, set the option to **Make packages into a dedicated " -"location, bring them to the output location for shipping (Pick + Pack + " -"Ship).**" -msgstr "对于发出的交货, 设置选项为 **使包装到指定的库位, 把它们放到出货区域然后用来发货(拣货＋包装＋发货)。** " - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:77 -msgid "Create a Sale Order" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:56 +msgid "Create a Sales Order" msgstr "创建销售订单" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:58 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:58 +msgid "" +"In the *Sales* app, create a quotation with storable products to deliver. " +"Then, confirm it and three pickings will be created and linked to your sale " +"order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:65 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:65 +msgid "Now, click on the button. You should see three different pickings:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:67 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:67 +msgid "The first one, with a reference PICK, designates the picking process;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:69 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:69 +msgid "The second one, with a reference PACK, is for the packing process;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:71 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:71 +msgid "The third one, with a reference OUT, designates the shipping process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:77 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:77 +msgid "Process the picking, packing, and delivery" +msgstr "" + #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:79 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:79 msgid "" -"From the **Sale** module, create a sales order with some products to " -"deliver." -msgstr "从 **销售** 模块, 创建一张带有要发货产品的销售订单。" +"The first operation to be processed is the picking and has a *Ready* status," +" while the others are *Waiting Another Operation*. The packing will become " +"*Ready* as soon as the picking is marked as *Done*." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:81 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:83 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:83 msgid "" -"Notice that we now see ``3`` transfers associated with this sales order in " -"the **stat button** above the sales order." -msgstr "注意现在在销售订单上方的 **状态** 按钮上有3张转运单和本销售订单关联。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:87 -msgid "If you click the button, you should now see three different pickings:" -msgstr "如果你点击了按钮, 现在就可以看到三个不同调拨单 :" +"You can enter the picking operation from here, or access it through the " +"inventory app." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:89 -msgid "The first with a reference **PICK** to designate the picking process," -msgstr "第一个带有 **拣货** 标识拣货流程。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:91 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:89 msgid "" -"The second one with the reference **PACK** that is the packing process," -msgstr "中间一个带有 **包装** 参照标识包装流程。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:93 -msgid "The last with a reference **OUT** to designate the shipping process." -msgstr "最后一个有 **OUT** 标识发货流程。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:102 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:91 -msgid "How to Process the Picking Step?" -msgstr "如何处理拣货这一步骤？" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:104 -msgid "" -"Ensure that you have enough product in stock and Go to **Inventory** and " -"click on the **Waiting** link under the **Pick** kanban card." -msgstr "要确保在库存中有足够的产品然后进入 **库存** 并点击看板卡上的 **调拨单** 下方的 **等待** 链接。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:112 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:101 -msgid "Click on **Reserve** to reserve the products if they are available." -msgstr "如果可用, 点击 **预留** 预留产品" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:114 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Stock** to **WH/Packing" -" Zone**." -msgstr "点击 **确认** 计算从 **仓库／库存** 到 **库存／包装区域** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:116 -msgid "" -"This has completed the picking Step and the **WH/PICK** should now show " -"**Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"moved from **WH/Stock** to **WH/Packing Zone** location, which makes the " -"product available for the next step (Packing)." +"Note that, if you have the product in stock, it will be automatically " +"reserved and you can validate the picking document." msgstr "" -"已经完成了拣货步骤并且在该 **WH/拣货** 单的页面上方的状态按钮显示已经 **完成** 。产品已经从 **WH/库存** 移动到了 " -"**WH/包装** 区域, 这样下一步的操作就可以进行了(包装)。" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:122 -msgid "How to Process the Packing Step?" -msgstr "如何处理包装这一步骤？" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:124 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:95 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:95 msgid "" -"Go to **Inventory** and click on the **# TRANSFERS** link under the **Pack**" -" kanban card." -msgstr "进入 **库存** 并点击 **包装** 看板下方的 **# TRANSFERS** 链接。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:132 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Packing Zone** to " -"**WH/Output**." -msgstr "点击确认完成从 **仓库／包装区域** 到 **仓库／出货区域** 的调拨。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:135 -msgid "" -"This has completed the packing step and the **WH/PACK** should now show " -"**Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"moved from **WH/Packing Zone** to **WH/Output location**, which makes the " -"product available for the next step (Shipping)." +"Now that the picking has been validated, the packing order is ready to be " +"processed. Since the documents are chained, the products that have been " +"picked are automatically reserved on the packing order so you can directly " +"validate it." msgstr "" -"这样已经完成了包装步骤并且在该 **WH/包装** 单页面上方的状态栏位显示已经 **完成** 。产品已经从 **WH/包装区域** 移动到了 " -"**WH/出货区域** , 这样下一步的操作(发货)就可以进行了。" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:141 -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:111 -msgid "How to Process the Shipping Step?" -msgstr "如何处理发货这一步骤？" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:151 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:106 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:106 msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Output** to the " -"**customer** (Click **Apply** to assign the quantities based on the " -"quantities listed in the **To Do** column)." +"Then, you can validate your packing. In doing so, the delivery order can be " +"processed. Once again, it will be ready to be validated so you can transfer " +"the products to the customer location." msgstr "" -"点击 **确认** 来完成从 **库存／发货区域** 到 **客户库位** 的调拨(基于 **待做** 列表栏的数量, 点击 **应用** " -"来修正数量)。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/three_steps.rst:155 -msgid "" -"This has completed the shipping step and the **WH/OUT** should now show " -"**Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"shipped to the customer." -msgstr "现在已经完成了发货步骤并且 **仓库／发货区** 看板上该单子应该显示为 **完成** 状态。产品已经发到客户那边。" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:3 -msgid "How to process delivery orders in two steps (pick + ship)?" -msgstr "如何处理两步发货(拣货＋发货)？" +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:3 +msgid "Process a Receipt in two steps (Input + Stock)" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:8 msgid "" -"When an order goes to the shipping department for final delivery, Odoo is " -"set up by default to utilize a **one-step** operation: once all goods are " -"available, they are able to be shipped in a single delivery order. However, " -"your company's business process may have one or more steps that happen " -"before shipping. In the **two steps** process, the items in a delivery order" -" are **picked** in the warehouse and brought to an **output location** for " -"**shipping**. The goods are then shipped." +"Odoo uses routes to define exactly how you will handle the different receipt" +" steps. The configuration is done at the *Warehouse* level. By default, the " +"reception is a one-step process, but changing the configuration can allow " +"you to have 2 steps." msgstr "" -"当订单走到发货部门做最后的发货时, 默认的Odoo会使用 **一步** 操作 :当货物都准备好了, 就可以只通过一张发货单就能发货。但是, " -"根据公司的业务流程, 可能在发货之前炫耀更多的步骤。在 **两步** 过程中, 货物在仓库中先被 **拣货** 并且发到 **出货区域** 来 " -"**发货** 。然后货物才被发货。" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:16 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:13 msgid "" -"In order to accomplish a **Pick + Ship** delivery in Odoo, there are a few " -"necessary configuration steps. These steps create an additional location, " -"which by default is called **Output**. So, if your warehouse's code is " -"``WH``, this configuration will create a location called ``WH/Output``. " -"Goods will move from ``WH/Stock`` to ``WH/Output`` in the first step " -"(picking). Then, they move from ``WH/Output`` to ``WH/Customers`` (in the " -"case of sales orders) in the second step (shipping)." +"The 2 steps flow is like this: you receive the goods in an input area, then " +"transfer them to your stock. As long as the goods are not transferred in " +"your stock, they will not be available for further processing." msgstr "" -"为了在Odoo中完成 **拣货＋发货** 的交货, 需要进行必要的配置。这些步骤创建额外的库位, 默认的称之为 **Output** " -"。所以如果你的擦国库的简称是\" WH \\ \", 配置就会创建一个称为\" WH/Output \\ \"的库位。产品首先第一步(拣货)从\" " -"WH/Stock \\ \"移动到\" WH/Output `, 然后, 第二步(发货)从 \\ \"WH/Output\" 移动到 \\ " -"\"WH/Customers\" (如果有销售订单)。 " -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:32 -msgid "Allow management of routes" -msgstr "允许路线管理" +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:19 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:19 +msgid "Activate Multi-Step Routes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:21 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:21 +msgid "" +"The first step is to allow using *multi-step routes*. Indeed, routes provide" +" a mechanism to chain different actions together. In this case, we will " +"chain the unload step in the input area to the step entering the products in" +" stock." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:26 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:26 +msgid "" +"To allow *multi-step routes*, go to *Configuration > Settings* and activate " +"the feature. By default, activating *multi-step routes* will also activate " +"*Storage Locations*." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:34 -msgid "" -"Odoo configures movement of delivery orders via the **routes**. Routes " -"provide a mechanism to chain different actions together. In this case, we " -"will chain the picking step to the shipping step." -msgstr "Odoo通过 **路线** 配置交货单的移动。路线提供了不同动作汇集成链的机制。在该中状况下, 我们可以把拣货步骤和发货步骤链接起来。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:38 -msgid "" -"To allow management of routes, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`." -msgstr "要允许路线管理, 进入菜单项 :menuselection:`配置(Configuration) -->设置(Settings)` 。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:40 -msgid "" -"Ensure that the radio button **Advanced routing of products using rules** is" -" checked." -msgstr "确保选择了无线电按钮 **产品使用规则的高级路径** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:46 -msgid "" -"Click on **Apply** at the top of the page to save changes (if you needed to " -"check the radio button above)." -msgstr "在页面上方点击 **应用** 保存变更(如果需要检查上方的无线电按钮)。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:50 -msgid "" -"If you checked option **Advanced routing of products using rules** you may " -"need to activate **Manage several locations per warehouse** if it wasn't " -"activated beforehand." -msgstr "如果你选择了 **产品的高级路径规则** , 如果没有激活 **仓库多位置管理** 的特性, 那么现在就激活它。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:55 -msgid "Configure warehouse for Pick + Ship" -msgstr "配置仓库为拣货＋发货" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:57 -msgid "" -"To configure a **Pick + Ship** move, go to :menuselection:`Configuration -->" -" Warehouses` and edit the warehouse that will be used." +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:34 +msgid "Configure warehouse for receipt in 2 steps" msgstr "" -"配置一个 **拣货(Pick)＋发货(Ship)** 的调拨, 进入菜单项 :menuselection:`配置(Configuration) --> " -"仓库(Warehouses)` 然后编辑需要使用的仓库。" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:61 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:36 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:36 msgid "" -"For outgoing shippings, set the option to **Bring goods to output location " -"before shipping (Pick + Ship)**" -msgstr "对于出库设置, 设置为 **发货之前先把货物发到出货区域(拣货＋发货)** " +"Once *multi-step routes* is activated, you can go to *Configuration > " +"Warehouse* and enter the warehouse which will use receipt in 2 steps. Then, " +"you can select the option *Receive goods in input and then stock (2 steps)* " +"for *Incoming Shipments*." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:70 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:45 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:44 msgid "" -"Install the **Sale** if it is not the case, and create a sales order with " -"some products to deliver." -msgstr "安装 **销售** 模块并创建需要产品发货的销售订单。" +"Activating this option will lead to the creation of a new *Input* location. " +"If you want to rename it, you can go to *Configuration > Locations > Select " +"Input* and update its name." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:54 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:52 +msgid "Create a purchase order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:56 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:54 +msgid "" +"In the *Purchase* application, you can create a *Request for Quotation* with" +" some storable products to receive from a supplier. Once the *RfQ* is " +"confirmed, the receipt picking will be created and automatically linked to " +"your purchase order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:65 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:62 +msgid "" +"Now, by clicking on the *1 Receipt* button, you will see the first picking " +"which will allow entering the product in the *input location*. Then, another" +" picking, an internal transfer, has been created in order to move the " +"products to *Stock*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:71 +msgid "Process the picking and the delivery" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:73 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:70 msgid "" -"Notice that we now see ``2`` transfers associated with this sales order in " -"the **Delivery** stat button above the sales order." -msgstr "注意现在我们可以看到该销售订单上方的 **发货** 状态按钮有2张调拨单关联" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:79 -msgid "" -"If you click on the **2 Transfers** stat button, you should now see two " -"different pickings, one with a reference **PICK** to designate the picking " -"process and another with a reference **OUT** to designate the shipping " -"process." +"The receipt is the first one to be processed and has a *Ready* status while " +"the internal transfer will only become *Ready* once the receipt has been " +"marked as *Done*." msgstr "" -"如果你选择了 **2步转移** , 现在你应该看到两个不同的调拨, 一个以 **PICK** 开头, 用来处理拣货过程, 另外一个以 **OUT** " -"开头用来处理发货过程。" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:93 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:77 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:74 msgid "" -"Ensure that you have enough product in stock, and go to **Inventory** and " -"click on the **Waiting** link under the **Pick** kanban card." -msgstr "确保有足够的产品在库存中, 然后进入 **库存** 并点击看板卡片上 **调拨单** 下方的 **等待** 链接" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:103 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Stock** to " -"**WH/Output**." -msgstr "点击确认计算从 **仓库／库存** 到 **仓库／发货区域** 的调拨单。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:105 -msgid "" -"This has completed the picking step and the **WH/PICK** move should now show" -" **Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"moved from **WH/Stock** to **WH/Output** location, which makes the product " -"**available for the next step** (Shipping)." +"You can enter the receipt operation from the purchase order, or access it " +"through the inventory dashboard." msgstr "" -"这样已经完成了拣货步骤并且 **WH/拣货** 调拨单页面上方的状态栏位已经显示为 **完成** 。产品已经完成了从 **WH/库存** 到 " -"**WH/出货区** 的调拨。这样产品就 **下一步操作就绪** (发货)。" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:121 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:84 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:80 msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Output** to the " -"customer (Click **Apply** to assign the quantities based on the quantities " -"listed in the **To Do** column)" -msgstr "点击 **确认** 去完成从 **库存／出货区** 到客户的调拨(点击 **申请** 填写基于 **待做** 列表中的数量)" +"By default, a receipt is always considered as ready to be processed. Then, " +"you will be able to directly click on *Validate* to mark it as done." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:125 +#: ../../inventory/management/delivery/two_steps.rst:92 +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:87 msgid "" -"This has completed the shipping step and the **WH/OUT** move should now show" -" **Done** in the status column at the top of the page. The product has been " -"shipped to the customer." -msgstr "这样已经完成了发货步骤并且 **发货单** 的调拨已经在页面上方状态栏位显示 **完成** 。产品已经发给客户。" +"Once the receipt has been validated, the internal transfer is ready to be " +"processed. As documents are chained, the products which have been received " +"are automatically reserved on the internal transfer. Once the transfer is " +"validated, those products enter the stock and you will be able to use them " +"to fulfill customer deliveries or manufacture products." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/incoming.rst:3 msgid "Incoming Shipments" @@ -2124,313 +1746,12 @@ msgid "This is the default configuration in Odoo." msgstr "Odoo中默认的配置" #: ../../inventory/management/incoming/handle_receipts.rst:68 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:126 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:97 msgid ":doc:`../delivery/inventory_flow`" msgstr ":doc:`../delivery/inventory_flow` " -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:3 -msgid "How to add a quality control step in goods receipt? (3 steps)" -msgstr "在收货时如何添加质量检验?(3步)" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:8 -msgid "" -"In many companies, it is necessary to assess the received good. The goal is " -"to check that the products correspond to the quality requirements agreed " -"with the suppliers. Therefore, adding a quality control step in the goods " -"receipt process can become essential." +#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:68 +msgid "Process the receipt and the internal transfer" msgstr "" -"在很多公司, 很必要对接收的货物进行检查。目的是检查接收的货物和与供应商达成的质量标砖一致。因此, 在收货的过程中添加一个质检步骤就变得很有必要。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:13 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Odoo uses routes to define exactly how you will handle the different receipt" -" steps. The configuration is done at the level of the warehouse. By default," -" the reception is a one step process, but changing the configuration can " -"allow to have 2 or even 3 steps." -msgstr "" -"Odoo使用路径精确地定义如何处理不同的接收步骤。该配置可以在仓库层面完成。默认的, 收货是一步完成, 通过变更配置可以允许2步或者3步收货。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:18 -msgid "" -"The 3 steps flow is as follows: You receive the goods in an input area, then" -" transfer them into quality area for quality control. When the quality check" -" has been processed, you can move the goods from QC to stock. Of course, you" -" may change the quantity and only transfer to stock the quantity that is " -"valid and decide that you will return the quantity that is not good." -msgstr "" -"3步流程如下 :在收货区域接收货物, 然后转移他们到质检区域。当质检过程完成后, 就可以把货物从QC区域转移到库存。当然, " -"你可以更改数量并且只转移符合质量要求的产品到库存然后把质量不好的产品退回" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:25 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:18 -msgid "This is the case that will be explained in this document." -msgstr "这个情景会在本文档解释。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:31 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:24 -msgid "Use advanced routes" -msgstr "使用高级路线" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:33 -msgid "" -"To allow management of routes, go to the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Configuration --> Settings`." -msgstr "" -"要管理路径, 进入菜单项 :menuselection:`库存(Inventory) -->配置(Configuration) --> " -"设置(Settings)` 。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:39 -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:32 -msgid "" -"Ensure that the routes option **Advance routing of product using rules** is " -"checked, then click on **Apply** to save changes." -msgstr "确保路径选项 **使用规则产品的高级路线** 有勾选。然后点击 **应用** 来保存变更。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:42 -msgid "" -"Make sure that **Manage several locations per warehouse** is also ticked." -msgstr "确保 **每个仓库管理多库位** 被勾选到。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:46 -msgid "How to add a quality control step in goods receipt?" -msgstr "如何在收货中添加质量控制步骤？" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:48 -msgid "" -"Go to the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Warehouse` " -"and choose the warehouse where you want to change reception methods." -msgstr "" -"进入菜单项 :menuselection:`库存(Inventory) -->配置(Configuration) -->仓库(Warehouse)` " -"然后选择需要变更收货方式的仓库。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:51 -msgid "" -"By default, warehouses are configured with one step reception (**Receive " -"goods directly into stock**)." -msgstr "默认的, 仓库是一步收货( **直接收货入库** )。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:54 -msgid "" -"To add quality control before transfer goods into stock location, tick " -"**Unload in input location, go through a quality control before being " -"admitted in stock (3 steps)**." -msgstr "在把产品转移到库存之前添加质量控制步骤, 点选 **卸货在收货区域, 在入库之前通过质检区域(3步)** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:62 -msgid "How to control a receipt?" -msgstr "如何控制收货？" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:65 -msgid "How to process the receipt step ?" -msgstr "如何处理收货？" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:67 -msgid "" -"In the **Purchase** app, create a **Request for Quotation**. Click on the " -"**Confirm order** button. You can see that there is one **Shipment** related" -" to purchase order in the stat button above the purchase order form view. " -"This is the receipt step." -msgstr "" -"在 **采购** 应用中, 创建一个 **询价单** 。点击 **确认订单** 按钮。你可以看到有一个 **收货单** " -"在采购订单的右上角的状态按钮上和该采购订单关联。这是接收步骤。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:75 -msgid "" -"Go to **Inventory** and click on the link **# TO RECEIVE** in the " -"**Receipts** card." -msgstr "进入 **库存** 然后点击 **收货** 看板上的 **# 待收** 链接。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:80 -msgid "" -"Click on the receipt that you want to process. Click on **Validate** to " -"complete the move from the **Vendor** location to **WH/Input**." -msgstr "点击打开你想要完成的收货单。点击 **确认** 完成从 **供应商** 库位到 **WH/收货区域** 的调拨。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:83 -msgid "" -"This has completed the receipt step and the status column at the top of the " -"page for **WH/IN** should now show **Done**. The product has been moved from" -" the **Vendor** to the **WH/Input** location, which makes the product " -"available for the next step (Move to the quality control zone)" -msgstr "" -"已经完成了收货步骤并且在 **WH/IN** 单上面的状态栏位显示 **完成** 。产品已经从 **供应商** 库位移动了 **收货区域** 库位, " -"这样下一步(移动到质检区域)就可以操作了。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:89 -msgid "" -"How to move your product from the receipt zone to the quality control zone ?" -msgstr "如何把产品从收货区域移动到质检区域？" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:91 -msgid "" -"Go to the **Inventory** dashboard. You will see that there is one transfer " -"ready (the move to the quality control zone) and one waiting (the move to " -"the stock after the control). Click on the link **# TRANSFERS** in the " -"**Internal Transfers** to process the quality control." -msgstr "" -"进入 **库存** 仪表盘。你会看到有一个已经就绪的转移(移动到质检区域的调拨)和一个在等待的移动(在质检之后的往库存移动的调拨)。点击 " -"**内部调拨** 的 **# 转移** 链接完成质检。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:101 -msgid "" -"Click on **Validate** to complete the move from **WH/Input** to **WH/Quality" -" Control**." -msgstr "点击 **确认** 完成从 **库存／收货区域** 到 **库存／质检区域** 的调拨。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:104 -msgid "" -"This has completed the internal transfer step and the status column at the " -"top of the page for **WH/INT** should now show **Done**. The receipt is now " -"ready to be controlled." -msgstr "已经完成了内部调拨步骤并且 **WH/INT** 页面上部的状态显示为 **完成** 。现在收货已经可以被控制了。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:109 -msgid "How to to process the quality control ?" -msgstr "如何处理质检？" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:111 -msgid "" -"Go back to the **Inventory** dashboard. The waiting transfer is now ready. " -"Click on the link **# TRANSFERS** in the **Internal Transfers** card to " -"process the quality control." -msgstr "" -"回到 **库存** 的仪表盘中。等待状态的调拨单现在已经可以转移了, 在 **内部调拨** 的仪表盘卡上点击 **#调拨** 并完成质检过程。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:118 -msgid "" -"Click on the last picking to process. Click on **Validate** to complete the " -"move from **WH/Quality Control** to **WH/Stock**." -msgstr "点击最后一个调拨并完成。点击 **确认** 完成从 **库存／质检区域** 到 **库存／库存** 的调拨。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:121 -msgid "" -"This has completed the quality control step and the status column at the top" -" of the page for **WH/INT** should now show **Done**. The receipt has been " -"controlled and has moved to your stock." -msgstr "已经完成了质检步骤并且 **内部调拨单** 页面上方的状态栏位显示 **完成** 。收货过程很好的的到了控制并且货物已经进入仓库。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/three_steps.rst:127 -msgid ":doc:`two_steps`" -msgstr ":doc:`two_steps` " - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:3 -msgid "How to unload your shipment to an input location? (2 steps)" -msgstr "如何卸货到收货区域?(2步)" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:13 -msgid "" -"The 2 steps flow is the following : You receive the goods in an input area " -"then transfer them from input area to your stock. As long as the goods are " -"not transferred in your stock, they will not be available for further " -"processing." -msgstr "2步过程如下 :在收货区域收货然后再进一步从收货区域转移到库存中。只要产品没有移到库存中, 这些产品就不能被发放到车间或者进行销售。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:26 -msgid "" -"To allow management of routes, go to the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Configuration --> Settings`" -msgstr "" -"要进行路径管理, 进入菜单项 :menuselection:`库存(Inventory) -->配置(Configuration) --> " -"设置(Settings)` " - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:35 -msgid "" -"Make sure that **\"Manage several locations per warehouse\"** is also " -"ticked." -msgstr "确保 **\" 仓库进行多库位管理\\ \\ \\ \"** 被勾选。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:39 -msgid "How to configure your warehouse ?" -msgstr "如何配置仓库？" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:41 -msgid "" -"Go to the the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> " -"Warehouse` and choose the warehouse where you want to change reception " -"methods." -msgstr "" -"进入菜单 :menuselection:`库存(Inventory) -->配置(Configuration) -->仓库(Warehouse)` " -"并选择你想变更收货方式的仓库。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:44 -msgid "" -"By default, warehouses are configured with one step reception (option " -"**Receive goods directly into stock**)." -msgstr "默认情况下, 仓库配置是一步收货(选项是 **收货直接入库** )。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:47 -msgid "" -"To add the control step, tick **Unload in input location then go to stock (2" -" steps)**." -msgstr "要添加一个控制步骤, 勾选 **在进入库存之前先卸货到收货区域(2步)** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:54 -msgid "How to receipt a shipment in 2 steps?" -msgstr "如何2步收货？" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:57 -msgid "How to process the Receipt step ?" -msgstr "如何收货" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:59 -msgid "" -"In the purchase module, create a **Request for Quotation**, then click on " -"the **Confirm order** button. You can see that there is one **Shipment** " -"related to purchase order in the **stat button** above the purchase order " -"form view. This is the receipt step." -msgstr "" -"在采购模块下, 创建一个 **采购询价单** , 然后点击 **确认** 订单。你可以看到在采购订单上方的 **状态栏位** 有一个 **收货单** " -"和采购订单关联。这是收货步骤。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:67 -msgid "" -"Go to **Inventory** and click on the **# TO RECEIVE** link on the " -"**Receipts** card." -msgstr "进入 **库存** 然后点击 **收货** 看板上的 **待收** 链接。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:73 -msgid "" -"Click on the receipt that you want to process, then click on **Validate** to" -" complete the move from the **Vendor** to **WH/Input**." -msgstr "点击想要处理的收货单, 然后点击 **确认** 完成从 **供应商** 到 **库存／收货区域** 的调拨。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:76 -msgid "" -"This has completed the Receipt Step and the move refered with **WH/IN**. The" -" product has been moved from the **Vendor** to the **WH/Input** location, " -"which makes the product available for the next step." -msgstr "" -"已经完成了参照为 **WH/IN** 的收货步骤。产品已经完成了从 **供应商** 到 **WH/收货区域** 的调拨, " -"现在就可以进行下一步骤的操作了。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:81 -msgid "How to transfer the receipt to your stock ?" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:83 -msgid "" -"Go back to the **Inventory** dashboard. The waiting transfer is now ready. " -"Click on the **# TRANSFERS** in the **Internal Transfers** to process the " -"quality control." -msgstr "回到 **库存** 仪表盘。等待状态的调拨已经就绪。点击 **内部调拨** 的 **转移** 完成质检调拨。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:90 -msgid "" -"Click on the picking you want to process. Click on **Validate** to complete " -"the move from **WH/Input** to **WH/Stock**." -msgstr "点击想要处理的调拨单。点击 **确认** 完成从 **库存/收货区域** 到 **库存／库存** 的调拨。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:93 -msgid "" -"This has completed the internal transfer step and the move refered with " -"**WH/INT**. The receipt has been moved to your stock." -msgstr "已经完成了序列号参照为 **WH/INT** 的内部调拨, 收货已经移动到了库存中。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/incoming/two_steps.rst:98 -msgid ":doc:`three_steps`" -msgstr ":doc:`three_steps` " #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers.rst:3 msgid "Lots and Serial Numbers" @@ -2441,9 +1762,6 @@ msgid "What's the difference between lots and serial numbers?" msgstr "批次号和序列号的区别是什么？" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:6 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:170 msgid "Introduction" msgstr "介绍" @@ -2515,661 +1833,1423 @@ msgstr "" "给产品分配序列号是浪费时间的行为。例如给一块面包分配一个序列号是没有一点意义的。" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:46 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:135 msgid ":doc:`serial_numbers`" msgstr ":doc:`serial_numbers` " #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/differences.rst:47 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:129 msgid ":doc:`lots`" msgstr ":doc:`lots` " -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:3 -msgid "How to manage lots of identical products?" -msgstr "如何管理产品的批次号？" +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:3 +msgid "Manage expiration dates" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In many companies, products have expiration dates and they should be tracked" +" based on those dates. In the food industry, for example, tracking stocks " +"based on expiration dates is mandatory to avoid selling expired products to " +"customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:10 +msgid "" +"With Odoo, you can track your products based on their expiration dates, even" +" if they are already tracked by lots or serial numbers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:14 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:15 +msgid "Configurations" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:17 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:18 +msgid "Application configuration" +msgstr "应用配置" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:19 +msgid "" +"To use expiration dates tracking, open the *Inventory* application and go to" +" *Configuration > Settings* and activate the *Lots & Serial Numbers* and " +"*Expiration Dates* features." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:27 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:28 +#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:68 +#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:90 +msgid "Product configuration" +msgstr "产品配置" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:29 +msgid "" +"Now, you have the possibility to define different dates in the *inventory " +"tab* of the product form:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:32 +msgid "" +"Product Use Time: it’s the number of days before the goods start " +"deteriorating, without being dangerous yet. It will be computed using the " +"lot/serial number;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:34 +msgid "" +"Product Life Time: refers to the number of days before the goods may become " +"dangerous and must not be consumed. It will be computed on the lot/serial " +"number;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:36 +msgid "" +"Product Removal Time: shows the number of days before the goods should be " +"removed from the stock. It will be computed on the lot/serial number;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:38 +msgid "" +"Product Alert Time: refers to the number of days before an alert should be " +"raised on the lot/serial number." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:44 +msgid "Expiration Date on Lots/Serial Numbers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:46 +msgid "" +"When receiving a product in stock, the dates will automatically be updated " +"on the corresponding lot/serial number. This update will be based on the " +"reception date of the product and the times set on the product form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:58 +msgid "Expiration Alerts" +msgstr "到期警报" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/expiration_dates.rst:60 +msgid "" +"You can access all your expiration alerts from the *inventory* app. To do " +"so, go to *Master Data > Lots/Serial Numbers*. There, you can use the pre-" +"existing filter that shows all the lots/serial numbers that exceeded their " +"alert date." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:3 +msgid "Manage lots of identical products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:5 msgid "" "Lots are useful for products you receive in great quantity and for which a " -"lot number can help in reportings, quality controls, or any other info. Lots" -" will help identify a number of pieces having for instance a production " +"lot number can help in reporting, quality controls, or any other info. Lots " +"will help identify a number of pieces having, for instance, a production " "fault. It can be useful for a batch production of clothes or food." msgstr "" -"在结构大批量的产品时候使用批次号很有用, 批次号可以在报表中, 质检过程, " -"或者其余的信息中反映出来。批次号能定义一些产品有或者在同一生产环境中。在食品或者服装行业的批量生产中很有用。" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:11 +msgid "" +"Odoo has the capacity to manage lots, ensuring compliance with the " +"traceability requirements imposed by the majority of industries." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:14 msgid "" -"Odoo has the capacity to manage lots ensuring compliance with the " -"traceability requirements imposed by the majority of industries." -msgstr "Odoo有能力管理大多数行业施加规定可追溯性的要求" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:17 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:15 -msgid "" "The double-entry management in Odoo enables you to run very advanced " "traceability." msgstr "Odoo中的复式管理使你进行非常高级的追踪。" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:21 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:19 -msgid "Setting up" -msgstr "设置" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:24 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:22 -msgid "Application configuration" -msgstr "应用配置" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:26 -msgid "" -"You need activate the tracking of lots in the settings. In the **Inventory**" -" application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`, select " -"**Track lots or serial numbers**" +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:18 +msgid "Setting Up" msgstr "" -"在设置中需要激活批次追踪, 在 **库存** 模块中, 进入 :menuselection:`配置 -->设置` , 选择 **跟踪批次或序列号码** " -"。" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:21 +msgid "Application Configuration" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:23 +msgid "" +"First, you need to activate the tracking of lot numbers. To do so, go to " +"*Inventory > Configuration > Settings* and tick *Lots & Serial Numbers*. " +"Then, click on save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:31 +msgid "Product Configuration" +msgstr "产品配置" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:33 msgid "" -"In order to have an advanced management of the lots, you should also select " -"**Manage several locations per warehouse**." -msgstr "为了能对批次进行高级管理, 还要勾选 **仓库进行多库位管理** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:39 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:31 -#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:27 -#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:26 -msgid "Then click on **Apply**." -msgstr "点击 **应用** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:42 -msgid "Operation types configuration" -msgstr "作业类型配置" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:44 -msgid "" -"You also need to set up how you will manage lots for each operations. In the" -" **Inventory** application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Operation Types`." +"Now, you have to configure which products you want to track by serial " +"numbers." msgstr "" -"你还可以对每种操作类型设置如何管理批次。在 **库存** 应用中, 进入菜单 :menuselection:`配置(Configuration) -->" -" 作业类型(Operation Types)` 。" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:48 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:36 msgid "" -"For each type (receipts, internal transfers, deliveries,...), you can set if" -" you can create new lot numbers or only use existing lot numbers." -msgstr "对每种操作类型(收货, 发货, 内部调拨, ……), 你可以设置是否创建新的批次号或者使用现有的批次号。" +"Go to *Master Data > Products* and open the product of your choice. There, " +"click on *Edit* and select *Tracking by Lots* in the inventory tab." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:47 +msgid "Manage Lots" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:52 +msgid "" +"In order to receive a product tracked by lots, you have to specify its lot " +"numbers. You have several ways of doing so:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:55 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:65 +msgid "Manually assign the different lot numbers" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:57 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:36 -msgid "" -"Finally, you have to configure which products you want to track in lots." -msgstr "最后, 需要配置哪些产品你想进行批次追踪。" +msgid "Copy/paste lot numbers from an Excel file" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:59 -msgid "" -"Go into :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Products`, and open the " -"product of your choice. Click on **Edit**, and in the **Inventory** tab, " -"select **Tracking by Lots**, then click on **Save**." +msgid "First, you need to open the detailed operations of your picking." msgstr "" -"进入菜单 :menuselection:`库存控制(Inventory Control) -->产品(Products)` , 并点开所选择的产品。点击" -" **编辑** , 并在 **库存** 页面勾选 **批次追踪** , 然后点击 **保存** 。" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:67 -msgid "Manage lots" -msgstr "管理批次" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:70 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:49 -msgid "Transfers" -msgstr "调拨" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:72 msgid "" -"In order to process a transfer of a product tracked by lot, you have to " -"input the lot number(s)." -msgstr "为了能够进行批次追踪处理发货单, 你需要输入序列号()。" +"When opening the detailed operations, you can click on *Add a line*. Then, " +"you will be able to fill the lot number in. Once done, you can click on *Add" +" a line* again to register a new lot number." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:75 -msgid "Click on the lot icon :" -msgstr "点击批次图标 :" +msgid "Copy/paste lot number from an Excel file" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:80 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:77 msgid "" -"A window will pop-up. Click on **Add an item** and fill in the lot number " -"and the quantity." -msgstr "一个窗口会弹出, 点击 **添加新条目** 并输入批次号和数量。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:86 -msgid "" -"Depending on your operation type configuration, you will be able to fill in " -"new lot numbers, or only use existing ones." -msgstr "基于操作类型的配置, 你可能需要创建新的批次号或者现存批次号。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:90 -msgid "In the scanner interface, you just have to scan the lot numbers." -msgstr "在扫描枪界面, 只需要扫描批次号。" +"Once the spreadsheet containing the lot numbers you received from your " +"supplier and copy the list. Then, you can paste them in the *Lot/Serial " +"Number Name* column for Odoo to automatically create the necessary lines. " +"After that, you will have to manually enter the number of products that are " +"contained in each one of the lots." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:93 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:79 -msgid "Inventory adjustment" -msgstr "库存调整" +msgid "Operation Types" +msgstr "作业类型" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:95 -msgid "Inventory of a product tracked by lot can be done in 2 ways:" -msgstr "仓库中产品的批次追踪有2种方式 :" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:97 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:83 -msgid "Classic inventory by products" -msgstr "根据产品盘点" +msgid "" +"Of course, you also have the possibility to define how you will manage lots " +"for each operation type. To do so, open the *Inventory* app and go to " +"*Configuration > Operation Types*." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:99 -msgid "Inventory of a lot" -msgstr "一个批次的库存" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:101 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:87 msgid "" -"When doing a classic inventory, there is a **Serial Number** column. If the " -"product has already been assigned with a number, it is already pre-filled." -msgstr "在常规盘点时, 有一个 **序列号** 栏位, 如果产品已经有批次号, 那么这个栏位就会预先显示产品的批次号。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:105 -msgid "" -"Click on **Add an item** if the product has not been inventoried yet. You " -"can easily create lots, just type in a new lot number in the column." -msgstr "如果产品还没有盘点过, 点击 **添加条目** 。你可以容易的创建批次, 只是需要在栏位中键入新的批次号。" +"For each type (receipts, internal transfers, deliveries, …), you can decide " +"if you allow to create new lot numbers or only use existing ones. By " +"default, the creation of new lots is only allowed at product reception, and " +"using existing lot numbers isn’t allowed in this operation. If you have " +"inter-warehouse transfers and track products by lots, it can be useful to " +"allow using existing lot numbers in receipts too." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:111 -msgid "" -"You can also just do the inventory of a lot. In this case, you will have to " -"fill in the **Lot number**. You can also create a new lot from here. Just " -"type in the number, a window will pop out to link the number to a product." -msgstr "" -"你还可以对一个批次的产品进行盘点。在该场景中, 你需要输入 **批次号码** 。你还可以在这里创建一个新的批次。只要键入一个号码, " -"一个窗口就会弹出来和这个产品连接。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:120 msgid "Lots traceability" msgstr "批次追踪" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:122 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:113 msgid "" -"You can check the lot traceability from :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Inventory Control --> Serial Numbers/Lots`" +"The lot number given to the products allows you to keep track of where they " +"were received, put in stock, to whom they were sold and where they were " +"shipped to." msgstr "" -"你可以查看批次追踪, 进入菜单 :menuselection:`库存(Inventory) -->存货控制(Inventory Control) " -"-->序列号(Serial Numbers)／批次号(Lots)` " -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:128 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:122 -msgid "You can have more details by clicking on the **Traceability** button :" -msgstr "点击 **追踪** 按钮可以看到详细信息。" +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:117 +msgid "" +"To track an item, open the *Inventory* module and, in *Master Data > " +"Lots/Serial Numbers*, click on the lot number corresponding to your search." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:134 -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:128 -msgid ":doc:`differences`" -msgstr ":doc:`differences` " +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:124 +msgid "" +"When you open the *Traceability* information, you see in which documents the" +" lot number has been used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/lots.rst:130 +msgid "" +"Now, if you want to locate the lot number, you can do so by clicking on the " +"*Location* stat button." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:3 -msgid "How to work with serial numbers?" -msgstr "如何使用序列号" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Serial Number Tracking is used to track products with serial numbers on " -"every transactions. You can track the current location of the product with " -"serial numbers. When the products are moved from one location to another " -"location, the system will automatically identify the current location of the" -" product based on last movement of the product. So you can get the last " -"location where the products are moved." +msgid "Work with serial numbers" msgstr "" -"序列号追踪用来追踪带有序列号的产品的每个调拨移动。你可以追踪带有序列号的当前库位。当产品从一个库位移动到你个一个库位, " -"系统会根据产品的最后一次移动确定产品当前的库位。所有你可以得到产品在移动过程中的每一个位置。" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:24 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:5 msgid "" -"You need activate the tracking of serial numbers in the settings. In the " -"**Inventory** application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`, select **Track lots or serial numbers**." +"To track products with serial numbers, you can use the serial number " +"tracking. With them, you can track the current location of the product and, " +"when the products are moved from one location to another, the system will " +"automatically identify the current location of the product, based on its " +"last movement." msgstr "" -"你需要在设置中激活序列号追踪。在 **库存** 模块中, 进入 :menuselection:`配置 -->设置` , 选择 **跟踪批次或序列号码**" -" 。" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:11 msgid "" -"Go into :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Products`, and open the " -"product of your choice. Click on **Edit**, and in the **Inventory** tab, " -"select **By Unique Serial Number**, then click on **Save**." +"If you want to do it or run very advanced traceability, the Odoo double-" +"entry management is the feature you need." msgstr "" -"进入 :menuselection:`库存控制 -->产品` , 打开所选产品, 点击 **编辑** 并在 **库存** 页面选择 **根据序列号** " -", 然后点击 **保存** 。" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:46 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:20 +msgid "" +"First, you need to activate the serial numbers tracking. To do so, go to " +"*Configuration > Settings* in the *Inventory* application. Then, enable the " +"feature and hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:30 +msgid "" +"Now, you have to configure the products you want to track by serial numbers." +" To do so, go to *Master Data > Products* and open the product of your " +"choice. Edit it and select *Tracking By Unique Serial Number* in the " +"*Inventory tab*. Then, click on save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:42 msgid "Manage Serial Numbers" msgstr "管理序列号" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:51 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:47 msgid "" -"In order to process a transfer of a product tracked by serial number, you " -"have to input the number(s). In order to be able to assign serial numbers to" -" products with tracking features enabled you will first need to mark your " -"transfer as to do. Click on the **Mark as TODO** button to display the Lot " -"Split icon." +"To receive a product that is tracked by serial number, you have to specify " +"its serial number. Of course, you have several ways of doing so:" msgstr "" -"为了能完成序列号标识的产品的调拨, 你需要在产品中维护号码(可以多个)。如果需要产品使用序列号进行追踪, 首先需要把调拨标记为待做的状态。点击 " -"**标记为待做** 按钮使批量分离图标显示出来。" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:57 -msgid "Click on the serial number icon :" -msgstr "点击序列号图标 :" +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:50 +msgid "Manual assignation" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:62 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:52 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:73 +msgid "Multi-assignation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:54 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:89 +msgid "Copy/pasting from an Excel file" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:56 msgid "" -"A window will pop-up. Click on **Add an item** and fill in the serial " -"numbers." -msgstr "一个窗口会弹出, 点击 **添加新条目** 并输入序列号。" +"Whatever could be your favorite way to assign serial numbers, you firstly " +"need to open the detailed operations of your picking." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:68 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:63 +msgid "Manual assignation of the different serial numbers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:65 msgid "" -"If you move products that already have serial numbers assigned, those will " -"appear in the list. Just click on the **+** icon to to confirm that you are " -"moving those serial numbers." -msgstr "如果你要调拨一个已经有序列号的产品, 这就会显示在列表中。只要点击 **＋** 图标, 来确认你是在调拨这些序列号。" +"When opening the detailed operations, you can click on *Add a line*. Then, " +"you will be able to fill in the serial number field. Once done, you can " +"click again on *Add a line* to register a new serial number." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:76 -msgid "In the scanner interface, you just have to scan the serial numbers." -msgstr "在扫描枪页面, 你只需要输入序列号。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:81 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:75 msgid "" -"Inventory of a product tracked by serial numbers can be done in 2 ways:" -msgstr "仓库中的产品的序列号追踪由2种方式 :" +"By using the multi-assignation of serial numbers, Odoo will automatically " +"create the necessary lines. To do so, you have to enter the first serial " +"number of your set and the number of products you have to assign a serial " +"number to." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:85 -msgid "Inventory of a serial number" -msgstr "一个序列号的库存" +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:80 +msgid "Once done, click on *Assign Serial Numbers* and Odoo will do the rest." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:91 msgid "" -"Click on **Add an item** if the product has not been inventoried yet. You " -"can easily create serial numbers, just type in a new number in the column." -msgstr "如果产品还没有诶盘点, 点击 **添加新的条目** , 你就可以轻易的创建序列号, 只需要在栏位中键入新的号码。" +"To use copy/pasting, open the spreadsheet containing the serial numbers you " +"received and copy the list. Then, past them in the *Lot/Serial Number Name* " +"column of the wizard. Doing so, Odoo will automatically create the lines you" +" need." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:98 -msgid "The quantity should be 1 for each line." -msgstr "每一行的数量应该是1" +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:106 +msgid "Operation types" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:100 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:108 msgid "" -"You can also just do the inventory of a serial number. In this case, you " -"will have to fill in the serial number. You can also create a new one from " -"here. Just type in the number, a window will pop out to link it to a " -"product." -msgstr "你也可以给序列号做盘点。在该情景中, 你需要输入序列号, 你还可以在这里创建一个新的。只要键入号码, 一个弹出框就会个产品链接。" +"You also have the possibility to define how you will manage lots for each " +"operation type. To define it, go to *Configuration > Operation Types* in the" +" *Inventory* app." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:109 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:112 +msgid "" +"For each type, you can decide if you allow the creation of new lot numbers " +"or want to use existing ones. By default, the creation of new lots is only " +"allowed at product reception." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:120 +msgid "" +"If you have inter-warehouse transfers and track products by lots, it can be " +"useful to allow using existing lot numbers in receipts too." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:124 msgid "Serial Number traceability" msgstr "序列号追踪" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:111 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:126 msgid "" -"The serial number given to these items allow you to keep track of where they" -" were received, put in stock, to whom they were sold and where they were " -"shipped to." -msgstr "这些货物的序列号能让你对产品从收货开始, 入库, 以及买给谁, 发货到哪里进行追踪。" +"Using serial numbers allows you to keep track of where the products were " +"received, put in stock, to whom they were sold, and where they were shipped " +"to." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:115 +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:130 msgid "" -"To track an item, open the **Inventory** module, and in " -":menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Serial Numbers/lots`, click on the " -"serial number corresponding to your search." -msgstr "要追踪一个产品, 打开 **库存** 模块, 在 :menuselection:`库存控制-->序列号／批次号` , 点击相关的序列号。" +"Tracking an item is easy: open the *Inventory* app, and go to *Master Data >" +" Lots/Serial Numbers* and click on the serial number corresponding to your " +"search. Then, open the *Traceability* information. There, you will see in " +"which documents the serial number has been used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/lots_serial_numbers/serial_numbers.rst:142 +msgid "" +"And, if you want to locate a serial number, you can do so by clicking on the" +" *Location* button available on the serial number form." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/misc.rst:3 msgid "Miscellaneous Operations" msgstr "杂项操作" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:2 -msgid "Immediate & Planned Transfers" +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:3 +msgid "Send Automated Emails at Delivery" msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:4 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:8 msgid "" -"In Odoo, you can create two types of transfers: immediate or planned " -"transfers." +"First, go to the *Inventory* app, then to *Settings* and activate the *Email" +" Confirmation* feature. If you work in multi-company, this configuration is " +"company-specific." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:8 -msgid "Immediate Transfers" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:10 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:15 msgid "" -"When you create a transfer manually, it is by default an immediate transfer." +"When you enable this feature, Odoo automatically creates an email template. " +"Of course, you can modify it if necessary by clicking on the small arrow " +"next to its name." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:13 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:23 +msgid "Send email at delivery validation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:25 msgid "" -"In the case of an immediate transfer, you directly encode the products and " -"quantities you are processing, there is no reservation that applies. This is" -" why the column \"Initial Demand\" is not editable. You only fill in the " -"column \"Done\" for the quantities." +"On the inventory dashboard, click on *Create* and fill the form for a " +"specific partner. Once you have added some products in it, *Validate* it and" +" do the same for the delivery." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:18 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:32 msgid "" -"This is for example used when you are transferring goods from a location A " -"to a location B and that this is not planned (you are processing the " -"transfer right now)." +"Doing so, an automated email will be sent and will appear in the chatter." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:23 -msgid "Planned Transfers" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:25 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/email_delivery.rst:38 msgid "" -"When a transfer is generated automatically (from a sales order or purchase " -"order for example), it is a planned transfer. This means that there is an " -"initial demand and that reservation applies on this initial demand." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:30 -msgid "" -"If you want to create a planned transfer manually, you can do it from the " -"inventory dashboard." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/immediate_planned_transfers.rst:36 -msgid "" -"In that case, you will have to enter the initial demand first (how many " -"units are you supposed to proceed), then to mark your transfer as to do. " -"Once this is done, you will be able to reserve the products and to process " -"the transfer." +"If you work with a shipping method, and then have a tracking link, it will " +"be included in the standard email template." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:3 -msgid "How to manage stock that you don't own?" -msgstr "如何处理不属于你的库存？" +msgid "Manage Stock that you don't own" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Sometimes, suppliers can offer you to store and sell products without having" +" to buy those items. This technique is called *consignee stock*." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:8 msgid "" -"Some suppliers can sometimes offer you to store and sell products without " -"having to buy those items: this technique is called **consignee stock**." -msgstr "有些供应商有时候会给你的店铺送来产品但是你又无需采购这些产品 :这中情景称之为 **代销库存** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:12 -msgid "" "Consignee stock is a great way for manufacturers and suppliers to launch new" -" products. As resellers may be reluctant to buying a product that they are " -"not sure to be able to sell, consignee stock will allow them to propose an " -"item to check its market without having to pay for it in the first place." +" products. As resellers may be reluctant to buy a product they are not sure " +"to be able to sell, consignee stock will allow them to offer an item to " +"check its market without having to pay for it in the first place." msgstr "" -"代销库存是工厂和供应商发布新产品的一个很好的方法。因为零售商可能不愿意购买不确定能卖掉的产品, " -"那么代销库存就能让他们可以先不付款就可以针对一款产品在市场上试销。" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:18 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:14 msgid "" -"Odoo has the ability to manage consignee stocks through the advanced " -"settings." -msgstr "通过高级设置在Odoo可以管理代销库存产品" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:24 -msgid "" -"Open the menu :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`, and" -" in the **Product Owners** section, select **Manage consignee stocks " -"(advanced)**, then click on **Apply**." +"Of course, Odoo has the ability to manage those consignee stocks through " +"advanced settings." msgstr "" -"代开菜单 :menuselection:`库存 -->配置 -->设置` , 在 **产品所有者** 部分选择 **管理代销产品(高级)** , " -"然后点击 **应用** 。" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:32 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:20 +msgid "" +"To use this feature, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Settings* in the " +"inventory app. Then, enable the *Consignment* feature in the *Traceability* " +"section. Now, hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:28 msgid "Reception of Consignee Stock" msgstr "代销库存的收货" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:34 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:30 msgid "" -"In the Inventory's Dashboard, open the **Receipts** and create a new " -"reception. You can see that in the right side of the page, a new **Owner** " -"line has appeared. You can specify the partner which owns the stock or leave" -" it blank if you are the owner." +"When in the *Inventory* app, open the receipts and create a new reception. " +"On the right side, you will see that a new line called *Assign Owner* has " +"appeared. There, you can specify the partner which owns the stock." msgstr "" -"在库存仪表盘中, 打开 **收货** 仪表盘并创建一个新的收货。你可以在页面的右边, 一个新的 **所有者** 行呈现。你可以指定该批产品的所有者, " -"如果所有者是你, 那么就留空。" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:3 -msgid "How to configure and run schedulers?" -msgstr "如何配置并运行排程器？" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:6 -msgid "What is a scheduler" -msgstr "什么是排程器" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:8 -msgid "" -"The scheduler is the calculation engine which plans and prioritises " -"production and purchasing automatically according to the rules defined on " -"products. By default, the scheduler is set to run once a day (Odoo " -"automatically creates a **Scheduled Action** for this)." +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:39 +msgid "If you are the owner, you can leave the field blank." msgstr "" -"排程器就是计划和排定根据产品上设定的规则自动生产或者自动采购的优先级的计算引擎。默认状况下, 排程器被设置为一天运行一次(Odoo自动创建一个 " -"**排程器动作** )。" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:14 -msgid "Calculating Requirements / Scheduling" -msgstr "计算需求／排程" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:16 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/owned_stock.rst:41 msgid "" -"Scheduling only validates procurements that are confirmed but not yet " -"started. These procurement reservations will themselves start production, " -"tasks or purchases depending on the configuration of the requested product." -msgstr "排程器只会确认已经确认的但是还没有开始的补货。该补货会对依赖于需求产品的配置要开始的生产, 任务或者采购进行预留。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:21 -msgid "" -"You take into account the priority of operations when starting reservations " -"and procurements. Urgent requests, those with a date in the past, or " -"requests with a date earlier than the others will be started first. In case " -"there are not enough products in stock to satisfy all the requests, you can " -"be sure that the most urgent requests will be produced first." +"Once the receipt is validated, the products enter your stock but still " +"belong to the owner. They don’t impact your inventory valuation." msgstr "" -"在开始预留和补货的时候你要考虑到操作的优先级。过去的带有日期急迫的需求, 或者那些需求日期比其余的要早的会先开始。以防库存中没有足够的产品满足需求, " -"你可以先确保那些最先需求的产品先进行生产。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:29 -msgid "Configure and run the scheduler" -msgstr "配置并运行排程器" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:32 -msgid "Run the scheduler manually" -msgstr "手工运行排程" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:34 -msgid "" -"This feature is not visible by default. You have to enable **debug mode** to" -" see this. To enable debug mode, go to :menuselection:`Help --> About` and " -"click on **Activate the developer mode**." -msgstr "" -"默认状况下, 该特性是看不到的。你需要激活 **开发者模式** 才能看到。要激活开发者模式, 可以进入 :menuselection:`帮助 --> " -"关于` 并点击 **激活开发者模式** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:38 -msgid "" -"You can also start the scheduler manually from the menu " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Schedulers --> Run Schedulers`. The scheduler " -"uses all the relevant parameters defined for products, suppliers and the " -"company to determine the priorities between the different production orders," -" deliveries and supplier purchases." -msgstr "" -"你还可以手工的开启排程器。进入菜单 :menuselection:`库存 -->排程器 -->运行排程器` 。排程器会使用产品上, 供应商, " -"以及公司上定义的所有相关参数来决定不同生产订单, 交货单以及供应商采购订单之间的优先级。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:48 -msgid "Configure and run the scheduler (only for advanced users)" -msgstr "配置并且运行排程器(只有高级用户才可以)" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:50 -msgid "" -"This feature is not visible by default. You have to enable **debug mode** to" -" see this. To enable debug mode, go to :menuselection:`Help -> About` and " -"click on **Activate the developer mode**." -msgstr "" -"默认状况下, 该特性是看不到的。你需要激活 **开发者模式** 才能看到。要激活开发者模式, 可以进入 :menuselection:`帮助 --> " -"关于` 并点击 **激活开发者模式** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:54 -msgid "" -"You can set the starting time of the scheduler by modifying the " -"corresponding action in the menu :menuselection:`Settings --> Technical --> " -"Automation --> Scheduled Actions`. Modify the Run mrp Scheduler " -"configuration." -msgstr "" -"你可以以下菜单通过更改相关的动作设置开始时间 :menuselection:`设置 -->技术 -->自动 -->排程器动作` " -"。更改运行MRP排程器的配置。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers.rst:63 -msgid ":doc:`../delivery/scheduled_dates`" -msgstr ":doc:`../delivery/scheduled_dates` " #: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:3 -msgid "How to scrap products?" -msgstr "如何报废产品？" +msgid "Scrap Products" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In your warehouse, you sometimes find products that are damaged or that are " +"unusable due to expiry or for some other reasons. You often notice this " +"during picking or physical inventory. Since those products cannot be sold or" +" stored, you have to scrap them." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:10 +msgid "" +"When goods are scrapped, they are not reflected in the system as a part of " +"the inventory. The scrapped material will be physically moved to the scrap " +"area and not taken into account into inventory valuation." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:15 msgid "" "Scrap means waste that either has no economic value or only the value of its" -" basic material" -msgstr "报废意味着没有经济价值或者最基本材料的价值浪费" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:11 -msgid "content recoverable through recycling." -msgstr "内容可以通过循环修复。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:13 -msgid "" -"In your warehouse you sometimes find products that are damaged or that are " -"unusable due to expiry or for some other reason. You often notice this " -"during picking or physical inventory." -msgstr "在仓库中有时候你会发现有些产品坏掉了或者因为到期而不能继续使用或者别的原因。你要经常在拣货调拨或者库存盘点的时候注意这些。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:17 -msgid "" -"Since you cannot normally sell or store these products, you have to scrap " -"product." -msgstr "既然这些产品不适合继续存放或者正常销售, 就需把他们报废。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:20 -msgid "" -"When goods are scrapped they are not reflected in the system as a part of " -"the inventory. The scrapped material will be physically moved to scrap area." -msgstr "已经报废的产品作为库存的一部分不能在系统中反映出来, 报废的材料将会在实际操作中移动到报废区域。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:27 -msgid "" -"When you install inventory management, odoo automatically creates one " -"default scrap location, namely **Virtual location/Scrapped**." -msgstr "当安装库存管理的时候, Odoo会自动创建一个命名为 **虚拟库位／报废** 报废库位。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:30 -msgid "" -"To create an extra scrap location, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Configuration --> Settings` and check **Manage several locations per " -"warehouse**, then click on **Apply**." +" basic material content, recoverable through recycling." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:38 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:21 msgid "" -"After applying **Manage several location per warehouse**, you can create a " -"new scrap location in :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouse Management" -" --> Locations.`" +"When you install the *Inventory* app, Odoo automatically creates a scrap " +"location. It’s named *Virtual Location/Scap*." msgstr "" -"选择应用了 **仓库进行多库位管理** 之后, 你参照以下创建新的报废库位, 进入菜单 " -":menuselection:`配置(Configuration) -->仓库管理(Warehouse Management) --> " -"库位(Locations)` 。" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:43 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:24 msgid "" -"To define a scrap location, you have to check **Is a Scrap Location?** on " -"location form view." -msgstr "要定义一个报废库位, 就需要早库位的视图页面中勾选 **是一个北欧费库位** 。" +"Of course, you can create new scrap areas if needed. To do so, go to " +"*Inventory > Configuration > Settings* and activate the *Storage Locations* " +"feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:31 +msgid "Now, go to *Configuration > Locations* and create your scrap location." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:34 +msgid "" +"You have to check *Is a Scrap Location?* on the location form. In fact, " +"scrap locations cannot be used as normal storage locations and then, a " +"virtual location will be created for scrapped products." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:39 +msgid "Different ways to scrap products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:41 +msgid "" +"With Odoo, you have several ways to scrap products: from receipts, from a " +"delivery order, and from an internal transfer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:45 +msgid "Scrap from receipt" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:47 -msgid "Different ways to scrap product" -msgstr "报废产品的不同方式" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:49 -msgid "Odoo provides several ways to scrap products." -msgstr "Odoo提供了不同的报废产品的方式" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:52 -msgid "1) Scrap from Receipt (Initial Demand tab)." -msgstr "1)收货时候报废(在初始需求标签页面)。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:54 msgid "" -"To scrap product from incoming shipment, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory -->" -" Dashboard --> Receipts`." -msgstr "" -"要在收货过程中包报废产品, 进入菜单 :menuselection:`库存(Inventory) -->仪表盘(Dashboard) --> " -"收货(Receipts)` 。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:60 -msgid "" -"Open the incoming shipment, and in the **Initial demand** tab, click on the " -"scrap products button." -msgstr "打开收货单, 在 **原始需求** 页签面点击报废按钮。" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:67 -msgid "2) Scrap from delivery order (Initial Demand tab) ." -msgstr "2)从发货单报废产品(初始需求标签页面)" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:69 -msgid "" -"To scrap product from outgoing shipment, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory -->" -" Dashboard --> Delivery Orders`" -msgstr "" -"要在发货过承报废产品, 进入菜单 :menuselection:`库存(Inventory) -->仪表盘(Dashboard) --> " -"发货单(Delivery Orders)` " - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:75 -msgid "" -"Open the outgoing shipment, and in the **Initial demand** tab, click on the " -"scrap products button on stock move in initial demand tab." -msgstr "打开发货单, 在 **原始需求** 页面, 点击产品报废按钮" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:82 -msgid "3) Scrap from internal transfer (Initial Demand tab)." -msgstr "3)内部调拨过程中的报废(初始需求页面)" - -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:84 -msgid "" -"To scrap product from internal transfer, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory -->" -" Dashboard --> Internal Transfers`" +"Scrapping products from receipts is easy. Go to *Inventory > Dashboard > " +"Receipts* or click on *1 TO PROCESS* under the receipts location." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:90 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:53 msgid "" -"Open the internal transfer, and in the **Initial demand** tab, click on the " -"scrap products button on stock move in initial demand tab." -msgstr "打开内部调拨单, 在 **原始需求** 页面, 点击产品报废按钮。" +"Now, open the receipt and validate the picking. Once the products entered " +"your stock, the Scrap button appears on the top left corner of your screen." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:96 +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:57 msgid "" -"When you click on scrap button, a popup will open. You can enter the " -"quantity of products, and specify the scrap location, then click on " -"**Scrap**." -msgstr "当你点击报废按钮, 一个弹出框会打开。你可以输入要报废产品的数量, 并制定报废库位, 然后点击 **报废** 。" +"You can scrap products that were part of the receipt from there. If you do " +"so, it will move them from available stock to the virtual scrap location." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:68 +msgid "Scrap from delivery order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:70 +msgid "" +"To scrap products from a delivery order, go to *Inventory > Dashboard > " +"Delivery orders* or click on *1 TO PROCESS*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:76 +msgid "" +"Once done, open the delivery order. You can see the scrap button in the " +"upper left of the document. If you scrap the product from there, it will be " +"moved from your available stock to the virtual scrap location." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:80 +msgid "" +"You can find all the scrap orders made from the picking by clicking on the " +"button on the top right corner of the document." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:93 +msgid "Scrap from an internal transfer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:95 +msgid "" +"To do this, the flow is almost the same. In fact, you just have to go to " +"*Inventory > Dashboard > Internal Transfers*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:101 +msgid "" +"There, open the internal transfer that interests you. Now, click on the " +"scrap button that is on the top left of the document." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:104 msgid "" -"To allow change scrap location on wizard, you have to select **Manage " -"several location per warehouse** in the settings at " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`" +"When scrapping before validating the internal transfer, the product is, by " +"default, moved from the source location to the virtual scrap location. But, " +"if you scrap after validating the internal transfer, it will be moved from " +"the destination location, as opposed to the source location, to the virtual " +"scrap location." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/scrap.rst:110 +msgid "" +"Of course, you can manually update the source location of the scrap order if" +" necessary." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:3 +msgid "Send Automated SMS at Delivery" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:8 +msgid "" +"To send automated SMS, you need to activate the *SMS Confirmation* feature. " +"To do so, go to the *Inventory* app *Settings* and enable the feature. In " +"multi-company, this feature is company-specific." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Of course, an SMS template already exists by default in Odoo. You can modify" +" it by clicking on the arrow on the right." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:22 +msgid "Send SMS at delivery validation" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:24 +msgid "" +"To use this feature, try to *Create* a delivery order for a specific partner" +" and add some products to it. Then, *Validate* the delivery." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:30 +msgid "Now, the automated SMS that has been sent appears in the chatter." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:36 +msgid "" +"The partner which is set on the transfer needs to have a phone number " +"specified in its contact form for the SMS to be sent." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/misc/sms_delivery.rst:39 +msgid "" +"If you work with a shipping method, and then have a tracking link, it will " +"be included in the SMS template." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning.rst:3 +msgid "Planning" +msgstr "计划" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:3 +msgid "How is the Scheduled Delivery Date Computed?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In most cases, scheduled dates are computed to be able to plan deliveries, " +"receptions, and so on. Depending on your company’s habits, Odoo generates " +"scheduled dates via the scheduler." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:9 +msgid "" +"To make your life easier, the Odoo scheduler computes everything per line, " +"whether it’s a manufacturing order, a delivery order, a sale order, etc." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:14 +msgid "" +"The computed dates are dependent on the different lead times configured in " +"Odoo." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:20 +msgid "" +"Configuring lead times is the first move if you want to compute scheduled " +"dates. Those are the delays promised (in terms of delivery, manufacturing, " +"etc.) to your partners and/or clients." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:25 +msgid "In Odoo, you can configure different lead times." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:30 +msgid "" +"When configuring lead times at the product level, you have three different " +"types to take into account: supplier lead time, customer lead time, and " +"manufacturing lead time." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:35 +msgid "Supplier lead time" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:37 +msgid "" +"The supplier lead time is the time needed for the supplier to deliver your " +"purchased products. To configure it, select a product and click on the " +"inventory tab. There, you will have to add a vendor to your product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:44 +msgid "" +"Now, just open the vendor form and fill its *Delivery lead time*. In this " +"case, the delivery day will be equal to *Date of the Purchase Order + " +"Delivery Lead Time*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:52 +msgid "" +"Do not forget that it is possible to add different vendor pricelists and, " +"thus, different delivery lead times, depending on the vendor." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:56 +msgid "Customer Lead Time" +msgstr "客户前置时间" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:58 +msgid "" +"It is the time needed to get your product from your store/warehouse to your " +"customer. It can be configured for any product. To add it, select a product " +"and go to the inventory tab. There, simply indicate your *customer lead " +"time*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:67 +msgid "Manufacturing lead time" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:69 +msgid "" +"On the same page, it is possible to configure what’s called the " +"*Manufacturing Lead Time*. It is the time needed to manufacture the product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:76 +msgid "" +"At the company level, you can configure security days. Those are useful to " +"cope with eventual dalys and to be sure to meet your engagements. The idea " +"is to subtract backup days from the computed scheduled date in case of " +"delays." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:81 +msgid "" +"Once again, there are three different types of security lead times: for " +"sales, for purchases, and for manufacturing." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:85 +msgid "Security lead time for sales" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:87 +msgid "" +"In sales, security lead time corresponds to backup days to ensure you will " +"be able to deliver your clients in times. They are margins of errors for " +"delivery lead times. Security days are the same logic as the early " +"wristwatch, in order to arrive on time." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:92 +msgid "" +"The idea is to subtract the numbers of security days from the calculation " +"and, thus, to compute a scheduled date earlier than the one you promised to " +"your client. In that way, you are sure to be able to keep your commitment." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:97 +msgid "" +"To set up your security dates, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Settings* " +"and enable the feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:104 +msgid "Security lead time for purchase" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:106 +msgid "" +"It follows the same logic as security lead time for sales except that " +"security lead time for purchase is the margin of error for vendor lead " +"times, not for sales." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:110 +msgid "" +"When the system generates purchase orders for procuring products, they will " +"be scheduled that many days earlier to cope with unexpected vendor delays." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:114 +msgid "" +"To find purchase lead time, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Settings* and" +" enable the feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:121 +msgid "Security lead time for manufacturing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:123 +msgid "" +"The security lead time for manufacturing allows generating manufacturing " +"orders which are scheduled that many days earlier to cope with unexpected " +"manufacturing days." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:127 +msgid "" +"To configure it, go to *Manufacturing > Configuration > Settings* and enable" +" the *Security Lead Time* option. Then, hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:136 +msgid "" +"Sometimes, the internal transfers that a product might do may also influence" +" the computed date. The delays due to internal transfers can be specified in" +" the *Inventory* app when you create a new rule in a route." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:141 +msgid "" +"To specify them, go to *Inventory > Configuration > Routes* and add a push " +"rule to set a delay. Of course, you need to activate *Multi-step Routes* to " +"use this feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:149 +msgid "At the sale order level" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:152 +msgid "Expected date" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:154 +msgid "" +"In the *Sales* application, you have the possibility to activate the option " +"*Delivery Date*. It will allow you to see additional fields on the sale " +"order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:158 +msgid "" +"By enabling this option, Odoo will indicate the *Expected Date* in the " +"*Other Info* tab of the sales order. This one is automatically computed " +"based on the different lead times." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:165 +msgid "" +"If you set a *Commitment Date* to deliver your customer that is earlier than" +" the *Expected Date*, a warning message will appear on the screen." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:175 +msgid "" +"To better understand all the above info, here is an example. You may sell a " +"car today (January 1st), that is purchased on order, and you promise to " +"deliver your customer within 20 days (January 20th). In such a scenario, the" +" scheduler will trigger the following events, based on your configuration:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:181 +msgid "" +"January 19: this is the actual scheduled delivery (1 day of Sales Safety " +"Days);" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:183 +msgid "" +"January 18: you receive the product from your supplier (1 day of Purchase " +"days);" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:185 +msgid "" +"January 10: this is the deadline to order at your supplier (9 days of " +"Supplier Delivery Lead Time);" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/scheduled_date.rst:187 +msgid "" +"January 8: trigger a purchase request to your purchase team, since they " +"need, on average, 2 days to find the right supplier and order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:3 +msgid "Configure and Run Schedulers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:6 +msgid "What is a scheduler?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:8 +msgid "" +"The scheduler is the calculation engine that plans and prioritizes " +"production and purchasing. It does it automatically, according to the rules " +"defined on products. By default, the scheduler is set to run once a day." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:14 +msgid "Calculating Requirements / Scheduling" +msgstr "计算需求／排程" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:16 +msgid "" +"Scheduling only validates procurements that are confirmed but not yet " +"started. These procurement reservations will start production, tasks or " +"purchases themselves, depending on the configuration of the requested " +"product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:21 +msgid "" +"As a human would do, the scheduler takes the priority of operations into " +"account when starting reservations and procurements. Urgent requests will be" +" started first." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:26 +msgid "" +"In case there are not enough products in stock to satisfy all the requests, " +"you can be sure that the most urgent ones will be produced first." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:31 +msgid "Configure and run the scheduler" +msgstr "配置并运行排程器" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:34 +msgid "Run the scheduler manually" +msgstr "手工运行排程" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:36 +msgid "" +"To start the scheduler manually, go to *Inventory > Operations > Run " +"Schedulers*. The scheduler uses all the relevant parameters defined for " +"products, suppliers and the company to prioritize the different production " +"orders, deliveries and supplier purchases." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:45 +msgid "Configure and run the scheduler (for advanced users)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:47 +msgid "" +"To use this feature, you have to enable the debug mode. To do so, go to " +"*Settings > Activate the developer mode*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Then, go to *Settings > Technical > Automation > Scheduled Actions* and " +"modify the *Run MRP Scheduler Configuration*. There, you can set the " +"starting time of the scheduler." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products.rst:3 +msgid "Products" +msgstr "租赁产品" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:3 +msgid "How to select the right replenishment strategy" +msgstr "如何选择正确的补货策略" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Minimum Stock rules and Make to Order have similar consequences but " +"different rules. They should be used depending on your manufacturing and " +"delivery strategies." +msgstr "最小库存规则和按单补货的结果相似，但规则不同，应根据你的制造和发货策略来选用。" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:10 +msgid "Terminology" +msgstr "术语" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:13 +msgid "Minimum stock rule" +msgstr "最小库存规则" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Minimum Stock rules are used to ensure that you always have the minimum " +"amount of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or " +"answer to your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its" +" minimum the system will automatically generate a procurement order with the" +" quantity needed to reach the maximum stock level." +msgstr "" +"最小库存规则用于确保你已经有了制造和/或响应消费者需求的最小库存量。当某产品的库存水平到达最小量时，系统自动生成一个采购订单，该订单的数量能满足最小库存量。" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:22 +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:58 +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:71 +msgid "Make to Order" +msgstr "按单补货" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:24 +msgid "" +"The Make to Order function will trigger a Purchase Order of the amount of " +"the Sales Order related to the product. The system will **not** check the " +"current stock. This means that a draft purchase order will be generated " +"regardless of the quantity on hand of the product." +msgstr "按单补货功能将触发与产品相关的销售订单的采购单。系统**不会**检查现有库存。意味着无论现有产品的数量是多少，都会生成一个采购订单草稿。" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:33 +msgid "Minimum stock rules" +msgstr "最小库存规则" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:35 +msgid "" +"The Minimum Stock Rules configuration is available through your Inventory " +"module. In the Inventory Control menu select \"Reordering Rule\" in the drop" +" down menu. There, click on \"Create\" to set minimum and maximum stock " +"values for a given product." +msgstr "最小库存规则可通过库存模块进行配置。在“库存控制”下拉菜单中选择\"再次订购规则\" ，然后点击\"创建\"设置某给定产品的最小与最大库存值。" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:44 +msgid "" +"Show tooltips for \"minimum quantity\", \"maximum quantity\" and \"quantity " +"multiple\" fields" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:47 +msgid "" +"Then, click on your product to access the related product form and, on the " +"\"Inventory submenu\", do not forget to select a supplier." +msgstr "然后点击产品，在\"库存子菜单\"访问相关产品的表单。不要忘记选择一个供应商。" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:54 +msgid "" +"Don't forget to select the right product type. A consumable can not be " +"stocked and will thus not be accounted for in the stock valuation." +msgstr "别忘记选择正确的产品类别。消耗品无法贮存，不可计入库存盘点数。" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:60 +msgid "" +"The Make to Order configuration is available on your product form through " +"your :menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory control --> Products` (or any " +"other module where products are available)." +msgstr "可在产品表单中配置按单补货 :menuselection:`库存 --> 库存控制 --> 产品（或在产品可用的任一其他模块中配置）。" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:64 +msgid "On the product form, under Inventory, click on \"Make To Order\"." +msgstr "在产品表单的库存项下，点击\"按单补货\"。" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:70 +msgid "Choice between the two options" +msgstr "选择两个选项其中一个" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/strategies.rst:72 +msgid "" +"The choice between the two options is thus dependent of your inventory " +"strategy. If you prefer to have a buffer and always have at least a minimum " +"amount, the minimum stock rule should be used. If you want to reorder your " +"stocks only if your sale is confirmed it is better to use the Make to Order." +msgstr "" +"两种选项的选择依赖于你的库存策略。如果你想有一点库存缓冲并总是在仓库中留有最少的存货数量, " +"那么就可以使用最小库存规则。如果想只是在销售订单确认的状态下才去补充存货, 那么就建议使用按照订单补货。" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:3 +msgid "Use Different Units of Measure" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In some cases, handling products in different units of measure is necessary." +" For example, if you buy products in a country where the metric system is of" +" application and sell in a country where the imperial system is used, you " +"will need to convert the units. Another common use case is buying products " +"in bigger packs to your supplier and selling them in units to your " +"customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:12 +msgid "" +"You can set up Odoo to work with different units of measure for one product." +msgstr "在Odoo中你可以设置一个产品可以有不同的计量单位。" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:18 +msgid "" +"In the *Inventory* application, go to *Configuration > Settings*. In the " +"*Products* section, activate *Units of Measure*, then *Save*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:25 +msgid "Create New Units of Measure" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:27 +msgid "" +"In the *Inventory* application go to *Configuration > UoM*. There, hit " +"*Create*. As an example, we will create a Box of 6 units that we will use " +"for the Egg product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:34 +msgid "" +"The category is important for unit conversion, you will be able to convert " +"products from one unit to another only if those units belong to the same " +"category. The box of 6 is 6 times bigger than the reference unit of measure " +"for the category which is “Units” here." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:43 +msgid "Specify Units of Measure on your Products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:45 +msgid "" +"In the *Inventory application > Master Data > Products*, open the product " +"which you would like to change the purchase/sale unit of measure, and click " +"on *Edit*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:49 +msgid "" +"In the *General Information* tab, you can select the *Unit of Measure* in " +"which the product will be sold, which is also the unit in which internal " +"transfers will take place. You can also select the *Purchase Unit of " +"Measure*, which is the unit in which you purchase the product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:59 +msgid "Transfer from One Unit to Another" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:62 +msgid "Buy in the Pruchase UoM" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:64 +msgid "" +"In the *Purchase* application, *Create* a new request for quotation in which" +" you include the product with the different *Units of Measure* and *Confirm*" +" it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:71 +msgid "" +"On the automatically generated purchase orders, the UoM used is the Box of " +"6, meaning the Purchase UoM. You have of course the possibility to manually " +"modify the UoM if necessary. When you enter the *Receipt* which is linked to" +" the purchase order, you can observe that the 10 boxes of 6 units have been " +"converted in 60 units. Indeed, the stock is managed in units." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:82 +msgid "Replenishment" +msgstr "补货" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:84 +msgid "" +"When doing a replenishment via the *Replenish* button on the product form, " +"you have the possibility to change the unit of measure." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:94 +msgid "Sell in bigger UoM" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:96 +msgid "" +"You can choose the unit of measure on the sale order document and decide to " +"sell the eggs by the dozen. When doing so, the price is automatically " +"computed from Units UoM to adapt to the selected *UoM*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/uom.rst:103 +msgid "" +"In the delivery order, the *UoM* used in the sale order is converted to the " +"*UoM* used for stock management, in our use case, the Units." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:3 +msgid "When Should you Use Packages, Units of Measure or Kits?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:6 +msgid "Units of Measure" +msgstr "计量单位" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Units of measure specify the unit used to handle a product. In Odoo, you " +"have the possibility to specify the unit of measure in which you manage your" +" stock and the one which is used when purchasing the product to your " +"supplier." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:16 +msgid "" +"The *conversion* between the different units of measure is done " +"automatically. The only condition is that all the units have to be in the " +"*same category* (Unit, Weight, Volume, Length,...)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:20 +msgid "" +"For example, if I have the following reordering rule for the egg and I run " +"the scheduler, the quantity added in the automatically generated purchase " +"order will be in dozens but what will enter the stock will be units." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:35 +msgid "Packages" +msgstr "包裹" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:37 +msgid "" +"The package is the physical container in which you put one or several " +"products from a picking. For example, when you deliver a product, you can " +"decide to separate the quantity into two different packages. It then allows " +"you to have a report with the quantity of products for each package." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:50 +msgid "Packaging" +msgstr "包装" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:52 +msgid "" +"The packaging is the physical container that protects your product. If you " +"are selling computers, the packaging contains the computer with the notice " +"and the power plug." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:56 +msgid "" +"In Odoo, packagings are used for indicative purposes on sale orders. They " +"can be specified on the product form, in the inventory tab." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/products/usage.rst:66 +msgid "" +"Another useful use of the packaging is for product reception. By scanning " +"the barcode of the packaging, Odoo adds the number of units contained in the" +" packing on the picking." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies.rst:3 +msgid "Inventory Adjustment" +msgstr "库存调整" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:3 +msgid "Choose Between Reordering Rules and Make to Order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:5 +msgid "" +"*Reordering rules* and *make to order* do both allow to automatically " +"replenish products when necessary. The difference between those tools is how" +" they are triggered." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:9 +msgid "" +"*Reordering rules* are used to ensure that you always have a minimum amount " +"of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or answer to" +" your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its minimum " +"the system will automatically generate a procurement with the needed " +"quantity to reach the maximum stock level." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:15 +msgid "" +"The *Make to Order* route will trigger a procurement (purchase order or " +"manufacturing order) with the necessary quantity to fulfill a product " +"request (coming from a sale order or a manufacturing order). The system will" +" check the quantity on hand for the corresponding product and if the " +"available quantity is higher or equal to the necessary quantity, Odoo will " +"use what is in stock to fulfill the request. In case you don’t have enough " +"available stock to fully fulfill the product request, procurement will be " +"generated for the total quantity requested." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:28 +msgid "Reordering Rules" +msgstr "订货规则" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:30 +msgid "" +"The *Reordering Rules* configuration is available through the menu " +"*Inventory > Master Data > Reordering Rules*. There, click on *Create* to " +"set minimum and maximum stock values for a given product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:37 +msgid "" +"When the forecasted stock goes below the *Minimum Quantity* specified in " +"this field, Odoo generates a procurement to bring the forecasted quantity to" +" the *Maximum Quantity*. The *Quantity Multiple* is used to round the " +"procurement quantity up to this multiple. If it is 0, the exact quantity " +"will be used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:46 +msgid "" +"The *Lead time* is the number of days after the order point is triggered to " +"receive the products or to order them to the vendor." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:49 +msgid "" +"In case you work with multi-warehouses and/or multi-locations, you will be " +"able to specify different reordering rules for the same product in each " +"location." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:54 +msgid "" +"For the reordering rules to be triggered, on the corresponding product, a " +"route should be specified. In case you manufacture your products, make sure " +"to select the route *Manufacture* and create a *Bill of Material* for the " +"product. In case you purchase your products, make sure to select the route " +"*Buy* and add a *Vendor Pricelist*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:66 +msgid "" +"Don't forget to select the product type *storable* in the product form. A " +"consumable can not be stocked and won’t trigger reordering rules." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:73 +msgid "" +"The *Make To Order* configuration is available on your product form through " +"your *Inventory module > Master Data > Products* (or in any other module " +"where products are available)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:77 +msgid "" +"On the product form, in the *Inventory tab*, you can set a route. You can " +"choose *Make To Order* and another route, either *Buy* or *Manufacture*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/min_stock_rule_vs_mto.rst:81 +msgid "" +"Again, if the *Buy* route is selected, make sure to set a *Vendor pricelist*" +" in the *Purchase tab*. In case you have set a *Manufacture* route, male " +"sure you have a *BoM* for this product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:3 +msgid "Resupply from another Warehouse" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:8 +msgid "" +"In order to be able to resupply from another warehouse, you need to activate" +" \\*multi-warehouses\\* and \\*multi-step routes\\*. Storage locations will " +"be automatically activated when activating multi-warehouses." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:16 +msgid "" +"You can then access your warehouses via \\*Inventory > Configuration > " +"Warehouses\\*. Create the necessary warehouses following this " +"`*documentation* " +"`__." +" Enter the warehouse which should be resupplied by another one. You will " +"have the possibility to directly indicate through which warehouse it gets " +"resupplied." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:26 +msgid "" +"By activating this option, a new route will now be available on your " +"products \\*Supply Product from Second warehouse\\*. It can now be selected," +" along with either a \\*reordering rule\\* or a \\*make to order\\*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:34 +msgid "" +"For the demonstration, I set a reordering rule with a minimum of 5 units in " +"stock and a maximum of 10 units in stock, having currently 0 units on hand. " +"I will run the scheduler by going to \\*Inventory > Operations > Run " +"scheduler\\*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/replenishment_strategies/virtual_warehouses.rst:42 +msgid "" +"The system automatically creates two pickings, one \\*delivery order\\* from" +" my Second Warehouse which contains the necessary products, and a receipt in" +" my main warehouse WH/Stock for the same products. The source document is " +"the \\*reordering rule\\* which triggered the route \\*Supply Product from " +"Second warehouse\\*." msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/management/reporting.rst:3 @@ -3654,7 +3734,7 @@ msgstr "借方" #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:271 #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:305 msgid "Credit" -msgstr "贷方" +msgstr "信用" #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:255 #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:256 @@ -3691,12 +3771,6 @@ msgstr "54.68" #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:282 #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:263 #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:281 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:30 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:45 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:52 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:57 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:64 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:72 msgid "Configuration:" msgstr "配置 :" @@ -3799,7 +3873,7 @@ msgstr "客户发货" #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:289 #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:288 msgid "Manufacturing Orders" -msgstr "生产单" +msgstr "生产数量" #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon.rst:295 #: ../../inventory/management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental.rst:294 @@ -4134,980 +4208,367 @@ msgid "" "internal category" msgstr "库存变动科目 :在内部产品类别的库存入库／出库科目处进行设置" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts.rst:3 -msgid "Main Concepts" -msgstr "主要概念" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:5 -msgid "Introduction to Inventory Management" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:7 -msgid "" -"A double-entry inventory has no stock input, output (disparition of " -"products) or transformation. Instead, all operations are stock moves between" -" locations (possibly virtual)." -msgstr "复式库存没有库存输入, 输出(产品处置)或者转换。相反的, 所有的操作都是库存在不同的位置(可能是虚拟的)之间移动。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:16 -msgid "Operations" -msgstr "作业" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:18 -msgid "" -"Stock moves represent the transit of goods and materials between locations." -msgstr "库存调拨表示了货物或者材料在不同的库位之间的移动。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:30 -msgid "Production Order" -msgstr "生产单" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:24 -msgid "Consume:" -msgstr "消耗 :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "2 Wheels: Stock → Production" -msgstr "2个车轮 :库存→生产" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bike Frame: Stock → Production" -msgstr "1个车架 :库存→生产" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:26 -msgid "Produce:" -msgstr "生产 :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:27 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Production → Stock" -msgstr "1辆自行车 :生产→库存" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Stock: the location the Manufacturing Order is initiated from" -msgstr "库存 :生产订单初始的位置" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Production: on the product form, field \"Production Location\"" -msgstr "生产 :在产品表单上的 **生产位置** 字段" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:36 -msgid "Drop-shipping" -msgstr "直运" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:33 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Supplier → Customer" -msgstr "1辆自行车 :供应商→客户" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:36 -msgid "Configurarion:" -msgstr "配置 :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Supplier: on the product form" -msgstr "供应商 :产品表单" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Customer: on the sale order itself" -msgstr "客户 :销售订单" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:45 -msgid "Client Delivery" -msgstr "客户发货" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:39 -msgid "Pick" -msgstr "分拣" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:40 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Stock → Packing Zone" -msgstr "1辆自行车 :库存→打包区域" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:41 -msgid "Pack" -msgstr "包裹" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:42 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Packing Zone → Output" -msgstr "1辆自行车 :打包区域→发货" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:43 -#: ../../inventory/shipping.rst:3 -msgid "Shipping" -msgstr "送货" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:44 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Output → Customer" -msgstr "1辆自行车 :出货区域→客户" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "on the pick+pack+ship route for the warehouse" -msgstr "仓库的拣货＋包装＋发货路线" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:52 -msgid "Inter-Warehouse transfer" -msgstr "仓库内部的调拨" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:49 -msgid "Transfer:" -msgstr "调拨 :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Warehouse 1 → Transit" -msgstr "1辆自行车 :仓库1→中转区" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Transit → Warehouse 2" -msgstr "1辆自行车 :中转区→仓库2" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Warehouse 2: the location the transfer is initiated from" -msgstr "仓库2 :调拨的初始位置" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Warehouse 1: on the transit route" -msgstr "仓库1 :中转路线" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:57 -msgid "Broken Product (scrapped)" -msgstr "坏掉的产品(报废)" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:55 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Warehouse → Scrap" -msgstr "1辆自行车 :仓库→报废" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:58 -msgid "Scrap: Scrap Location when creating the scrapping" -msgstr "报废 :在报废的时候需要的报废库位" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:60 -msgid "Missing products in inventory" -msgstr "存货产品丢失" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:61 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Warehouse → Inventory Loss" -msgstr "1辆自行车 :仓库→盘点" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:62 -msgid "Extra products in inventory" -msgstr "存货中的额外产品" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:63 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Inventory Loss → Warehouse" -msgstr "1辆自行车 :盘点→仓库" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:65 -msgid "Inventory Loss: \"Inventory Location\" field on the product" -msgstr "盘点 :产品\" 盘点位置\\ \\ \\ \"字段" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:72 -msgid "Reception" -msgstr "接收" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Supplier → Input" -msgstr "1辆自行车 :供应商→收货" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "1 Bicycle: Input → Stock" -msgstr "1辆自行车 :收货→库存" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Supplier: purchase order supplier" -msgstr "供应商库位 :采购订单供应商" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:0 -msgid "Input: \"destination\" field on the purchase order" -msgstr "收货 :采购订单“目标\" 字段 " - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:75 -msgid "Analysis" -msgstr "分析" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:77 -msgid "" -"Inventory analysis can use products count or products value (= number of " -"products * product cost)." -msgstr "存货分析可以使用产品数量或者产品价值(=产品数量 *产品成本)。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:80 -msgid "For each inventory location, multiple data points can be analysed:" -msgstr "对于每一个盘点库位, 多个数据点可以被分析 :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:148 -msgid "Procurements & Procurement Rules" -msgstr "补货＆补货规则" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:150 -msgid "" -"A procurement is a request for a specific quantity of products to a specific" -" location. They can be created manually or automatically triggered by:" -msgstr "补货就是特定位置的特定产品的特定数量的一个需求。可以手工创建, 或者通过下面的方式自动触发 :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:159 -msgid "New sale orders" -msgstr "新销售订单" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:157 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:162 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:168 -msgid "Effect" -msgstr "结果" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:157 -msgid "" -"A procurement is created at the customer location for every product ordered " -"by the customer (you have to deliver the customer)" -msgstr "补货是在客户库位上创建的客户订单上的产品(需要发货给客户的)" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:160 -msgid "" -"Procurement Location: on the customer, field \"Customer Location\" " -"(property)" -msgstr "补货库位 :在客户信息上的字段\" 客户库位\\ \\ \\ \"(属性)" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:164 -msgid "Minimum Stock Rules" -msgstr "最小库存规则" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:163 -msgid "A procurement is created at the rule's location." -msgstr "补货在规则的位置创建。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:165 -msgid "Procurement location: on the rule, field \"Location\"" -msgstr "补货位置 : 规则字段 \"位置\"" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:168 -msgid "Procurement rules" -msgstr "补货规则" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:168 -msgid "A new procurement is created on the rule's source location" -msgstr "新补货创建在规则的源位置" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:170 -msgid "" -"*Procurement rules* describe how procurements on specific locations should " -"be fulfilled e.g.:" -msgstr "*补货规则* 描述了特定位置上的补货如何满足, 例如 :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:173 -msgid "where the product should come from (source location)" -msgstr "产品从哪里来(源位置 )" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:174 -msgid "" -"whether the procurement is :abbr:`MTO (Made To Order)` or :abbr:`MTS (Made " -"To Stock)`" -msgstr "补货要么是 :abbr:`MTO (Made To Order)` , 要么是 :abbr:`MTS (Made To Stock)` " - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:182 -msgid "Routes" -msgstr "路线" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:184 -msgid "" -"Procurement rules are grouped in routes. Routes define paths the product " -"must follow. Routes may be applicable or not, depending on the products, " -"sales order lines, warehouse,..." -msgstr "补货规则被分组到路线中。路线定义了产品必须遵从的路径。根据产品/销售订单行／仓库, ……路线可能会适用也可能不能适用。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:188 -msgid "" -"To fulfill a procurement, the system will search for rules belonging to " -"routes that are defined in (by order of priority):" -msgstr "要满足补货, 系统会搜索路线中定义的规则(按优先级) :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:202 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses.rst:3 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses.rst:3 msgid "Warehouses" msgstr "仓库" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:194 -msgid "Warehouse Route Example: Pick → Pack → Ship" -msgstr "仓库路线示例 :拣货→包装→发货" +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:3 +msgid "What is the difference between warehouses and locations?" +msgstr "仓库和位置之间的差别是什么？" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:196 -msgid "Picking List:" -msgstr "分拣清单 :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:197 -msgid "Pick Zone → Pack Zone" -msgstr "拣货区域→打包区域" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:198 -msgid "Pack List:" -msgstr "包装清单 :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:199 -msgid "Pack Zone → Gate A" -msgstr "打包区域→门A" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:201 -msgid "Delivery Order:" -msgstr "交货单 :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:201 -msgid "Gate A → Customer" -msgstr "门A→客户" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:203 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:5 msgid "" -"Routes that describe how you organize your warehouse should be defined on " -"the warehouse." -msgstr "描述如何组织你的仓库的路线应该在仓库中定义。" +"In Odoo, a **Warehouse** is the actual building/place in which your items " +"are stocked. You can setup multiple warehouses and create moves between " +"warehouses." +msgstr "在Odoo中, 在Odoo中 **仓库** 是你存放货物的实际的建筑／地方。你可以设置多仓库并在不同的仓库质检调拨。" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:212 -msgid "A Product" -msgstr "产品" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:205 -msgid "Product Route Example: Quality Control" -msgstr "产品路线示例 :质量控制" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:207 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:217 -msgid "Reception:" -msgstr "收货 :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:208 -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:218 -msgid "Supplier → Input" -msgstr "供应商→收货" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:209 -msgid "Confirmation:" -msgstr "确认 :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:210 -msgid "Input → Quality Control" -msgstr "收货→质量控制" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:212 -msgid "Storage:" -msgstr "库存 :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:212 -msgid "Quality Control → Stock" -msgstr "质量控制→库存" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:221 -msgid "Product Category" -msgstr "产品分类" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:215 -msgid "Product Category Route Example: cross-dock" -msgstr "产品类别路线示例 :越库" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:219 -msgid "Cross-Docks:" -msgstr "越库 :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:220 -msgid "Input → Output" -msgstr "收货→发货" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:221 -msgid "Delivery:" -msgstr "发货 :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:222 -msgid "Output → Customer" -msgstr "发货→客户" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:227 -msgid "Sale Order Line" -msgstr "销售订单明细" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:224 -msgid "Sale Order Line Example: Drop-shipping" -msgstr "销售订单行示例 :直运" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:227 -msgid "Order:" -msgstr "订单 :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:227 -msgid "Supplier → Customer" -msgstr "供应商→客户" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:230 -msgid "Push Rules" -msgstr "推送规则" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:232 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:9 msgid "" -"Push rules trigger when products enter a specific location. They " -"automatically move the product to a new location. Whether a push rule can be" -" used depends on applicable routes." -msgstr "当产品进入一个特定库位时, 推式规则会触发。它们会把产品自动移动一个新的库位。推式规则是否能使用起决于适用的路线。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:240 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:88 -msgid "Quality Control" -msgstr "质量管理" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:239 -msgid "Product lands in Input" -msgstr "产品在收货区卸货" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:240 -msgid "Push 1: Input → Quality Control" -msgstr "推式规则1 :收货→质量控制" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:241 -msgid "Push 2: Quality Control → Stock" -msgstr "推式规则2 : 质量控制→库存" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:244 -msgid "Warehouse Transit" -msgstr "仓库中转" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:243 -msgid "Product lands in Transit" -msgstr "产品在中转区卸货" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:244 -msgid "Push: Transit → Warehouse 2" -msgstr "推式 :中转区→仓库 2" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:247 -msgid "Procurement Groups" -msgstr "补货组" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:249 -msgid "" -"Routes and rules define inventory moves. For every rule, a document type is " -"provided:" -msgstr "路线和规则定义库存的移动, 对于每一个规则, 都提供了一个单据类型 :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:252 -msgid "Picking" -msgstr "分拣" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:253 -msgid "Packing" -msgstr "包装" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:254 -msgid "Delivery Order" -msgstr "交货单" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:255 -msgid "Purchase Order" -msgstr "采购订单" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:256 -msgid "..." -msgstr "..." - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:258 -msgid "" -"Moves are grouped within the same document type if their procurement group " -"and locations are the same." -msgstr "如果它们的补货组和库位一样的话, 库存移动就分组到同一单据类型。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/double-entry.rst:261 -msgid "" -"A sale order creates a procurement group so that pickings and delivery " -"orders of the same order are grouped. But you can define specific groups on " -"reordering rules too. (e.g. to group purchases of specific products " -"together)" +"A **Location**, is a specific space within your warehouse. It can be " +"considered as a sublocation of your warehouse, as a shelf, a floor, an " +"aisle, etc. Therefore, a location is part of one warehouse only and it is " +"not possible to link one location to multiple warehouses. You can configure " +"as much locations as you need under one warehouse." msgstr "" -"销售订单创建一个补货组, 所以同一个销售订单的拣货和发货单组合在一起。但是你可以在订货规则上定义特定的组(例如, 可以把特定产品的采购单组合在一起)。" +" **库位** 是仓库中的一个特定的位置。它可以被认为是仓库的下级, 一个货架, 一层楼, 一个通道, 等等。因此, 一个库位只能是你的仓库的一部分, " +"不能把一个库位和多个仓库链接起来。在一个仓库下你可以配置足够多的库位。" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:3 -msgid "Terminologies" -msgstr "名词术语" +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:15 +msgid "There are 3 types of locations:" +msgstr "有3种类型的位置 :" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:17 msgid "" -"**Warehouse**: A warehouse in Odoo is a location where you store products. " -"It is either a physical or a virtual warehouse. It could be a store or a " -"repository." -msgstr " **仓库**: 在Odoo中的仓库就是一个存放产品的地方。可以是一个虚拟位置, 也可以是实际位置。可以是一个店铺也可以是一个储藏室。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:9 -msgid "" -"**Location**: Locations are used to structure storage zones within a " -"warehouse. In addition to internal locations (your warehouse), Odoo has " -"locations for suppliers, customers, inventory loss counter-parts, etc." -msgstr " **库位**: 库位在仓库中用来对存贮区域进行划分。进一步划分为内部库位(你的仓库), Odoo还有供应商, 客户, 盘点对应库位等。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:14 -msgid "" -"**Lots**: Lots are a batch of products identified with a unique barcode or " -"serial number. All items of a lot are from the same product. (e.g. a set of " -"24 bottle) Usually, lots come from manufacturing order batches or " -"procurements." +"The **Physical Locations** are internal locations that are part of the " +"warehouses for which you are the owner. They can be the loading and " +"unloading area of your warehouse, a shelf or a department, etc." msgstr "" -" **批次**: 批次是用特定条码或者序列号指定的一批产品。一个批次的所有产品是同一产品(例如。24瓶一套), 通常的, " -"批次号来自批量生产的工单或者补货。" +" **物理库位** 是你所拥有的仓库中的内部库位, 是你的仓库的一部分。它们可以是仓库中的装货区域, 卸货区域, 货架或者一个区域, 等等。" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:19 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:21 msgid "" -"**Serial Number**: A serial number is a unique identifier of a specific " -"product. Technically, serial numbers are similar to having a lot of 1 unique" -" item." -msgstr " **序列号**: 序列号是一个产品的特定标识。技术上来讲, 序列号可以理解为一个批次只有1个产品。" +"The **Partner Locations** are spaces within a customer and/or vendor's " +"warehouse. They work the same way as Physical Locations with the only " +"difference being that you are not the owner of the warehouse." +msgstr " **业务伙伴库位** 是客户和／或供应商仓库中的位置。它们和物理库位的使用一样, 只不过这些库位的所有者不是你。" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:23 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:25 msgid "" -"**Unit of Measure**: Define how the quantity of products is expressed. " -"Meters, Pounds, Pack of 24, Kilograms,… Unit of measure of the same category" -" (ex: size) can be converted to each others (m, cm, mm) using a fixed ratio." +"The **Virtual Locations** are places that do not exist, but in which " +"products can be placed when they are not physically in an inventory yet (or " +"anymore). They come in handy when you want to place lost products out of " +"your stock (in the **Inventory loss**), or when you want to take into " +"account products that are on their way to your warehouse (**Procurements**)." msgstr "" -" **计量单位**: 定义了产品的数量如何表达。米, 英镑, 24一包, 千克, ……同种类型 (例如 : " -"规格)的计量单位之间可以使用转换率相互之间转换(M, CM, MM)。" +" **虚拟库位** 是指在你仓库中没有实际物理地方的位置, 但是库存中没有实际存放(或是不再有)的产品可以放置在这里。当你要把产品移出你的库存(在 " +"**盘点库位** ), 或者要计算那些已经采购但是还在路途中( **补货库位** )没有到你的仓库的产品的数量的时候, 就可以很方便的使用这种库位。" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:28 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:31 msgid "" -"**Consumable**: A product for which you do not want to manage the inventory " -"level (no quantity on hand or forecasted) but that you can receive and " -"deliver. When this product is needed Odoo suppose that you always have " -"enough stock." +"In Odoo, locations are structured hierarchically. You can structure your " +"locations as a tree, dependent on a parent-child relationship. This gives " +"you more detailed levels of analysis of your stock operations and the " +"organization of your warehouses." msgstr "" -" **消耗品** 一种不需要管理产品库存水平的产品(没有在手数量或者预测数量), 但是可以收货和发货。当对该种产品有需求时, " -"Odoo会认为系统中有足够的库存。" +"在Odoo中, 库位按照级别进行架构组织。根据库位之间的父－子关系, " +"你可以把库位配置为一个树形结构。这能让你对库存操作进行详细的分析以及对仓库进行更好的管理。" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:33 -msgid "" -"**Stockable**: A product for which you want to manage the inventory level." -msgstr " **可库存**: 你想要管理库存水平的产品。" +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:37 +msgid ":doc:`warehouse_creation`" +msgstr ":doc:`warehouse_creation` " -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:36 -msgid "" -"**Package:** A package contains several products (identified by their serial" -" number/lots or not). Example: a box containing knives and forks." -msgstr " **包裹 :** 一个包裹包含一些产品(可以由它们的批次或者序列号标识或者没有)。例如: 一个箱子里面有刀和叉。" +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:38 +msgid ":doc:`location_creation`" +msgstr ":doc:`location_creation` " -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:40 -msgid "" -"**Procurement**: A procurement is a request for a specific quantity of " -"products to a specific location. Procurement are automatically triggered by " -"other documents: Sale orders, Minimum Stock Rules, and Procurement rules. " -"You can trigger the procurement manually. When procurements are triggered " -"automatically, you should always pay attention for the exceptions (e.g. a " -"product should be purchased from a vendor, but no supplier is defined)." +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:3 +msgid "Create a New Location" msgstr "" -" **补货**: 补货就是特定库位对特定数量的产品的需求。补货由其他额单据自动触发: 销售订单, 最小库存你规则, " -"和拉规则。你也可以手动的触发补货。当自动触发补货时, 你需要时刻关注异常(例如, 一个产品需要从一个供应商处采购, 但在系统中该产品却没有维护供应商)。" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:48 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:8 msgid "" -"**Routes**: Routes define paths the product must follow. Routes may be " -"applicable or not, depending on the products, sales order lines, warehouse,…" -" To fulfill a procurement, the system will search for rules belonging to " -"routes that are defined in the related product/sale order." +"In order to be able to create different locations, you will need to activate" +" *Multi-Locations* in the settings which can be done from the *Inventory " +"application > Configuration > Settings*." msgstr "" -" **路线**: 路线定义产品必须遵守的路径。根据产品, 销售订单行, 仓库……可以使用路线, 也可以不适用。要完成一个补货, " -"系统会会搜索定义在相关产品／销售订单上的路线中的规则。" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:54 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:15 msgid "" -"**Push Rules**: Push rules trigger when products enter a specific location. " -"They automatically move the product to a new location. Whether a push rule " -"can be used depends on applicable routes." +"In the *Inventory application*, you can now go to *Configuration > " +"Locations* and hit *Create* in order to create a new location." msgstr "" -" **推规则**: 当产品进入一个特定的库位时会触发推规则。它们会吧产品移动一个新的库位。推规则在路线中维护, 所以推规则是否可用依赖于路线是够可用。" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:58 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:21 msgid "" -"**Procurement Rules** or **Pull Rules**: Procurement rules describe how " -"procurements on specific locations should be fulfilled e.g.: where the " -"product should come from (source location), whether the procurement is MTO " -"or MTS,..." +"Type the name of the location in the *Location Name* field, and select the " +"*Parent Location* in the list. The parent location can be a physical, " +"partner or virtual location, and you can add as many sub-locations as needed" +" to a location." msgstr "" -" **补货规则** 或者 **拉规则**: 补货规则描述了特定库位的补货如何满足, 例如: 产品从何而来(源库位), 补货是MTO 还是MTS, ……" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:63 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:29 msgid "" -"**Procurement Group**: Routes and rules define inventory moves. For every " -"rule, a document type is provided: Picking, Packing, Delivery Order, " -"Purchase Order,… Moves are grouped within the same document type if their " -"procurement group and locations are the same." +"In case you want the location to be suggested when creating a Return or when" +" Scrapping a product, you should check *Is a Scrap Location?* and *Is a " +"Return Location?*." msgstr "" -" **补货组**: 路线和规则定义库存移动。对于每一个规则, 都提供了单据类型, 例如: 拣货, 包装, 交货单, 采购订单, " -"…移动。如果它们的补货组以及位置时相同的, 它们就被分组到相同的单据类型。" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:69 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:33 msgid "" -"**Stock Moves**: Stock moves represent the transit of goods and materials " -"between locations." -msgstr " **库存调拨**: 库存调拨表示任何两个库位中的货物和材料的转移。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:72 -msgid "" -"**Quantity On Hand**: The quantity of a specific product that is currently " -"in a warehouse or location." -msgstr " **在手数量**: 特定产品目前在仓库或者库存中的数量。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:75 -msgid "" -"**Forecasted Quantity**: The quantity of products you can sell for a " -"specific warehouse or location. It is defined as the Quantity on Hand - " -"Future Delivery Orders + Future incoming shipments + Future manufactured " -"units." -msgstr " **预测数量**: 一个特定仓库或者库位的可销售产品的数量。由如下得出: 在手数量－未来交货数量＋未来收货数量＋未来制造数量。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:80 -msgid "" -"**Reordering Rules**: It defines the conditions for Odoo to automatically " -"trigger a request for procurement (buying at a supplier or launching a " -"manufacturing order). It is triggered when the forecasted quantity meets the" -" minimum stock rule." -msgstr " **订货规则**: 定义了Odoo自动触发补货需求(该供应商下单或者发布生产订单)。当预测数量到达最低库存规则的时候会自动触发。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:85 -msgid "" -"**Cross-Dock**: Cross-docking is a practice in the logistics of unloading " -"materials from an incoming semi-trailer truck or railroad car and loading " -"these materials directly into outbound trucks, trailers, or rail cars, with " -"no storage in between. (does not go to the stock, directly from incoming to " -"packing zone)" +"If you have the *Barcode* application installed, you can specify the barcode" +" which will correspond to this location." msgstr "" -" **越库**: 交叉转运是直接从收货区域停靠的半挂车或者火车直接装货到停靠在出货码头的卡车, 火车, 拖车上的一种物流的实践, " -"在卸货和装货过程之间没有存储过程。(无需进入库存, 直接从卸货区域到包装区域)" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:91 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/location_creation.rst:37 msgid "" -"**Drop-Shipping**: move products from the vendor/manufacturer directly to " -"the customer (could be retailer or consumer) without going through the usual" -" distribution channels. Products are sent directly from the vendor to the " -"customer, without passing through your own warehouse." +"A warehouse also corresponds to a location. As the locations are " +"hierarchical, Odoo will create the parent location of the warehouse, " +"containing all the sublocations in it." +msgstr "一个仓库和一个库位对应, 因为库位是分级的, Odoo会自动的创建一个仓库的父库位, 随后所有的库位在该库位下。" + +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:3 +msgid "Create a New Warehouse" msgstr "" -" **直运**: 直接把货物从供应商／工厂发货到客户(可以是零售商或者客户), 而不经过通常的分销渠道。产品直接从供应商送到顾客, " -"无需经过你自己的仓库。" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:97 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:8 msgid "" -"**Removal Strategies**: the strategy to use to select which product to pick " -"for a specific operation. Example: FIFO, LIFO, FEFO." -msgstr " **下架策略** 　 :用在在一个特定库位上拣货的策略。例如: FIFO, LIFO, FEFO。" +"In order to create a new warehouse, you should activate the *Multi-" +"Warehouse* settings. Note that the *Multi-Locations* settings will be " +"automatically activated at the same time." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:100 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:12 msgid "" -"**Putaway Strategies**: the strategy to use to decide in which location a " -"specific product should be set when arriving somewhere. (example: cables " -"goes in rack 3, storage A)" -msgstr " **上架策略** 　 :特定库位的特定产品在入库时候的摆放位置的策略。(例如: 电缆进来摆放在A区, 3巷道)" +"In order to do so, go to the *Inventory app > Configuration > Settings*." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/concepts/terminologies.rst:104 +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:18 msgid "" -"**Scrap**: A product that is broken or outdated. Scrapping a product removes" -" it from the stock." -msgstr " **报废**: 用于当一个产品坏掉或者过期时, 就可以通过报废产品把它从库存中移除。" +"You can then go to *Inventory > Configuration > Warehouses* and hit *Create*" +" to add a new warehouse." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:24 +msgid "" +"You will be able to enter your warehouse name. You should also choose a " +"short name for your warehouse which is 5-characters long and is used on the " +"different warehouse documents." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:28 +msgid "" +"In the Address field, you can select an existing company or create one on-" +"the-go. Therefore, the address of your warehouse will be the same as the one" +" of the company you selected. You can also leave this field empty and edit " +"it afterward." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/management/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:36 +msgid "" +"After the creation of your new warehouse, you can go back to the *Dashboard*" +" and you will see the new operation types automatically created by Odoo due " +"to the creation of a new warehouse." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/overview/process.rst:3 msgid "Process Overview" msgstr "过程概览" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:3 -msgid "From procurement to delivery" -msgstr "从补货到交货" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Inventory is the heart of your business. It can be really complicated, but " -"with Odoo, doing a receipt or a delivery has never been easier. We will show" -" you in this document how easy to do a full process, from the receipt to the" -" delivery." +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:3 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:25 +msgid "Deliver Products from Stock" msgstr "" -"库存是你的业务的中心。库存真的很复杂, 但是在Odoo中, 无论是收货还是发货都简单得不能再简单了。我们将在本文档中演示从收货到发货是如此的简单。" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:13 -msgid "" -"Odoo inventory is fully integrated with other applications, such as " -"**Purchase**, **Sales** or **Inventory**. But is not limited to those " -"processes, it is also fully integrated with our **e-Commerce**, " -"**Manufacturing** and **Repairs** applications." +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:6 +msgid "Create Storable/Consumable Products" msgstr "" -"Odoo库存模块和其他的应用完全的集成, 例如 **采购** , **销售** 或 **库存** 。但它不局限于这些过程, 它还能完全的与 **电商**" -" , **生产** , **维修** 等模块集成。" -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:19 -msgid "How to process a receipt ?" -msgstr "如何处理收货？" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:22 -msgid "Install Purchase application" -msgstr "安装采购模块" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:24 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:5 msgid "" -"First, you will need to install the **Purchase Management** application. Go " -"to :menuselection:`Apps` and install it." -msgstr "首先, 你需要安装 **采购模块** , 进入菜单 :menuselection:`应用(Apps)` 并安装。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:31 -msgid "Make a purchase order" -msgstr "创建采购订单" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:33 -msgid "" -"Go to the **Purchases** applications. The first screen is the **Request for " -"Quotation** list. Click on the **Create** button." -msgstr "进入 **采购** 模块。第一个看到的界面是 **询价需求单** 列表, 点击 **创建** 按钮。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:36 -msgid "" -"Fill in the **Vendor** information and click on **Add an Item** to add some " -"products to your request for quotation." -msgstr "输入 **供应商** 信息并点击 **添加一个新条目** 给询价单添加一些产品。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:42 -msgid "" -"Click on **Confirm order** when you are sure about the products, prices and " -"quantity." -msgstr "一旦确定了产品, 价格和数量等, 可以点击 **确认订单** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:46 -msgid "Retrieve the Receipt" -msgstr "检索收货" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:48 -msgid "You can retrieve the receipt order in 2 ways:" -msgstr "有2种方能式检索收货订单 :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:51 -msgid "From the purchase order" -msgstr "从采购订单" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:53 -msgid "" -"On the top right of your purchase order, you will see a button with the " -"related **Receipt**:" -msgstr "在采购订单的右上角, 你会按到一个与 **收货** 相关的按钮 :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:59 -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:136 -msgid "Click on it to see the **Transfer order**." -msgstr "点击查看 **调拨单** " - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:62 -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:139 -msgid "From the Inventory Dashboard" -msgstr "从库存仪表板" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:64 -msgid "" -"When opening the **Inventory** application, click on **# to receive** to see" -" the list of your deliveries to process." -msgstr "当打开* *库存* *应用程序时,点击* * #接收* *可看到发货的列表。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:70 -msgid "In the list, click on the one related to the purchase order:" -msgstr "在列表中, 点击与采购订单相关的一个" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:76 -msgid "Process the Receipt" -msgstr "处理收货" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:81 -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:162 -msgid "" -"To process the stock transfer. Simply click on **Validate** to complete the " -"transfer. A message will appear asking if you want to process the whole " -"order, accept it by clicking on **Apply**." -msgstr "要处理库存调拨, 只要简单的点击 **确认** 就可以完成调拨。一条信息会弹出问你是否要完成所有数量, 如果是就点击 **应用** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:86 -msgid "" -"Procurements can be automated. Please read our document " -":doc:`../../management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto` for more " -"information." +"The first step to use the inventory application is to create products in " +"your database via the menu *Master Data > Products*. Click the Create button" +" and enter the name of your product." msgstr "" -"补货可以自动进行。详情请参阅我们的文档 :doc:`../../management/adjustment/min_stock_rule_vs_mto`" -" " -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:91 -msgid "How to process a delivery order ?" -msgstr "如何处理发货单？" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:94 -msgid "Install Sales application" -msgstr "安装销售模块" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:96 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:15 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:12 msgid "" -"First, you will need to install the **Sales Management** application. Go to " -":menuselection:`Apps` and install it." -msgstr "首先, 你需要安装 **销售管理** 模块。进入菜单 :menuselection:`应用(Apps)` 并安装。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:103 -msgid "Place a sale order" -msgstr "下销售订单" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:105 -msgid "" -"Go to the **Sales** applications. Click on the **Quotations** button of your" -" team." -msgstr "进入 **销售** 应用, 点击你所在团队的 **报价单** 按钮。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:111 -msgid "" -"You will get the list of all your quotations. Click on the **Create** " -"button." -msgstr "你将得到所有报价单的列表。点击 **创建** 按钮。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:114 -msgid "" -"Fill in the **Customer informations** and click on **Add an Item** to add " -"some products to your quotation." -msgstr "输入 **客户信息** 并点击 **添加新条目** 在报价单中添加一些产品。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:120 -msgid "Click on **Confirm sale** to place the order." -msgstr "点击 **确认销售** 下单。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:123 -msgid "Retrieve the Delivery order" -msgstr "发货的退货" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:125 -msgid "You can retrieve the delivery order in 2 ways:" -msgstr "有2种方式能检索交货订单 :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:128 -msgid "From the sale order" -msgstr "从销售订单" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:130 -msgid "" -"On the top right of your sale order, you will see a button with the related " -"**Delivery**:" -msgstr "在销售订单的右上角, 你会看到和 **发货** 相关的按钮 :" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:141 -msgid "" -"When opening the **Inventory** application, click on **# to do** to see the " -"list of your receipts to process." -msgstr "打开 **库存** 应用, 点击 **＃待办** 查看待处理的收货单列表。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:147 -msgid "In the list, click on the one related to the sale order:" -msgstr "在列表中, 点击与该销售订单相关的一个" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:153 -msgid "" -"If the product is not in stock, the sale order will be listed as **Waiting**" -" on your dashboard." -msgstr "如果库存中没有产品, 销售订单会在看板中的 **等待** 中显示。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:157 -msgid "Process the delivery" -msgstr "处理发货" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:167 -msgid "E-Commerce orders are processed the same way." -msgstr "用同样方法处理电商订单" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:170 -msgid "" -"You can easily integrate your delivery orders with different delivery " -"methods. Please read the document " -":doc:`../../shipping/setup/delivery_method`." +"In case you set the product as *storable*, you will track the stock for this" +" product and know how many units are in stock and what is the forecasted " +"number of units. If you want to include a product on receipts/deliveries but" +" don’t need to track its stock, you can set it as *consumable*." msgstr "" -"你可以容易的把发货单和不同的发货方式集成起来, 请参阅文档 :doc:`../../shipping/setup/delivery_method` ." -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:175 -msgid "Advanced flows" -msgstr "高级流程" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:177 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:27 msgid "" -"In this document, the flows that are explained are the most simple ones. " -"Odoo also suit for companies having advanced warehouse management." -msgstr "在此文档, 解释的流程都是最简单的。Odoo也符合使用高级仓库管理的公司。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:180 -msgid "" -"By default, only **receipts** and **deliveries** are configured but you can " -"activate the use of multi-locations and multi-warehouses to do **internal " -"transfers**." -msgstr "默认状况下, 只配置了 **收货** 和 **发货** , 但是你还可以激活多库位和多仓库来处理 **内部调拨** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:184 -msgid "**Routes**: you can automate flows with push and pull rules" -msgstr " **路线**: 可以通过推/拉规则自动化流程" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:186 -msgid "" -"**Multi-step** receipts and deliveries can be easily configured for each " -"warehouse" -msgstr " **多步骤** 收货和发货可以在每个仓库中很容易的被配置" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/process/sale_to_delivery.rst:189 -msgid "" -"Much more: **Barcode scanning**, **serial numbers**, **lots**, **cross-" -"docking**, **dropshipping**, integration with a **third-party** shipper, " -"**putaway** and **removal** strategies.... All of it is possible with Odoo." +"Once you have existing products, you can decide to create a delivery to " +"deliver products to your customers. The process in order to do so is " +"described in the following print screens." msgstr "" -"更多 : **条码扫描** , **序列号** , **批次** , **越库** , **直运** , 与 **第三方** 货代集成 , **上架**" -" 以及 **下架** 策略……所有这些都可以在Odoo实现。" -#: ../../inventory/overview/start.rst:3 -msgid "Getting Started" -msgstr "入门" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:3 -msgid "How to setup Odoo inventory?" -msgstr "如何设置Odoo的仓库？" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:5 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:37 msgid "" -"The Odoo Inventory application has an implementation guide that you should " -"follow to configure it. It's a step-by-step manual with links to the " -"different screens you need." -msgstr "Odoo的库存应用有一个实施向导, 你可以参照者对系统进行配置。它是一个按部就班的和不同页面链接起来的手册。" +"On the delivery order, you can specify to whom the products will be " +"delivered along with the different products and their respective quantities." +" When the delivery is complete you can hit *Validate* and the products will " +"go out of your stock." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:9 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:45 msgid "" -"Once you have installed the **Inventory** application, click on the top-" -"right progress bar to get access to the implementation guide." -msgstr "在完成安装 **库存** 应用之后, 点击右上角的进度条产看实施向导。" +"In case you have a delivery that is planned but shouldn’t be immediately " +"validated, you can create a *planned delivery* with a scheduled date in the " +"future. You can indicate the initial demand for each product, corresponding " +"to what has been ordered by your customer. Once the document is filled in, " +"you can hit “Mark as to do” in order to consider it in your product " +"forecasts." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:15 -msgid "The implementation guide helps you through the following steps:" -msgstr "实施向导帮你经历以下步骤 :" +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:56 +msgid "Deliver Products from Stock from a Sale Order" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:17 -msgid "Set up your warehouse" -msgstr "设置你的仓库" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:19 -msgid "Import your vendors" -msgstr "导入供应商" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:21 -msgid "Import your products" -msgstr "导入产品" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:23 -msgid "Set up the initial inventory" -msgstr "设置初始库存" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:25 -msgid "Configure your sales and purchase flows" -msgstr "配置销售和采购流程" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:27 -msgid "Set up replenishment mechanisms" -msgstr "设置补给机制" - -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:29 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/deliver_from_stock.rst:58 msgid "" -"Configure advanced features like package, traceability, routes and inventory" -" valuation." -msgstr "配置高级功能, 例如包裹, 追踪, 路线和存货计价。" +"If you have the *Sales* application installed, delivery can be directly " +"created by *validating a quotation*. You will be able to find the " +"corresponding delivery directly on the *sale order*." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/overview/start/setup.rst:37 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:3 +msgid "Set your Initial Stock" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:12 msgid "" -"If you want to set up operations with barcode scanner in your warehouse, you" -" should install the **Barcode** application that adds features on top of the" -" inventory application. The barcode application will guide you to configure " -"and use your scanner optimally." -msgstr "如果你想在你的仓库中用条码扫描枪设置操作, 你需要在库存模块上安装 **条码** 应用。条码应用会引导着你优化配置并使用你的扫描枪。" +"Set the product as *storable*, in order to track the stock for this product " +"and be able to include it in an inventory adjustment." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:19 +msgid "Inventory Adjustment for Multiple Products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:21 +msgid "" +"Once you have created all your *storable products*, you can create an " +"*inventory adjustment* to determine their current stock level in Odoo. You " +"therefore need to go to *Operations > Inventory Adjustments* and create a " +"new one." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:29 +msgid "" +"You have to enter a title for your *inventory adjustment* and you can then " +"decide if you want to proceed to the *inventory adjustment* of all products " +"or only some of them. For a first *inventory adjustment*, I suggest you to " +"keep the *Products* field empty. You can then *Start Inventory*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:38 +msgid "" +"If you already have some products in stock, Odoo will add the lines with the" +" theoretical quantity currently in stock. You can also add new lines with " +"your other products." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:46 +msgid "" +"If your products are tracked by Serial/Lot numbers, you will have an " +"additional column allowing you to specify those for the different units " +"added to the inventory adjustment." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:50 +msgid "" +"Odoo will highlight in red the lines for which there is a difference between" +" the theoretical quantity on hand, which is automatically computed by the " +"system, and the counted quantity you manually entered. Once all the " +"necessary products have been entered, you can hit *Validate Inventory* and " +"the quantities on hand of your different products will be updated." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:58 +msgid "Inventory Adjustment for one Product" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:60 +msgid "" +"On each storable product, you have access to the *Update Quantity* button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:66 +msgid "" +"When clicking this button, you see the current stock you have for this " +"product. You can edit the existing lines or create new ones to add stock of " +"your product in different locations and/or add new serial/lot numbers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:74 +msgid "" +"Once you come back to your product, you see that the quantity on hand as " +"been updated taking your modification into account." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:81 +msgid "" +"If you work with product variants, the quantity on hand will show you the " +"total quantity in stock for the product template, taking the different " +"variants into account." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/initial_stock.rst:85 +msgid "" +"By default, the quantity on hand of the product form will show you the " +"number of products that are part of your warehouse view location, meaning " +"which are part of an internal type sub-location of this warehouse. It means " +"that if you have any product in a location that isn’t under the main " +"warehouse location, they won’t appear in the stock on hand stat button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:3 +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:22 +msgid "Receive Products in Stock" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:24 +msgid "" +"Once you have existing products, you can decide to create a receipt to enter" +" products from your supplier in stock. The process in order to do so is " +"described in the following print screens." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:34 +msgid "" +"On the receipt document, you can select the quantity of the different " +"products you receive and the supplier from who you received them. When the " +"receipt is complete, you can hit *Validate* and the products will enter your" +" stock." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:42 +msgid "" +"In case you have a receipt that is planned but shouldn’t be immediately " +"validated, you can create a *planned receipt* with a scheduled date in the " +"future. You can indicate the initial demand for each product, corresponding " +"to what has been ordered to your supplier. Once the document is filled in, " +"you can hit “Mark as to do” in order to consider it in your product " +"forecasts." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:56 +msgid "Receive Products in Stock from Purchase Orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/overview/process/receive_in_stock.rst:58 +msgid "" +"If you have the *Purchase* application installed, receipts can be directly " +"created by validating a *request for quotation*. You will be able to find " +"the corresponding receipt directly on the *purchase order*." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes.rst:3 msgid "Advanced Routes" @@ -5118,124 +4579,88 @@ msgid "Concepts" msgstr "概念" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:3 -msgid "How to organize a cross-dock in your warehouse?" -msgstr "如何在你的仓库组织越库？" +msgid "Organize a cross-dock in a warehouse" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:5 msgid "" -"Cross dock area is temporarily area where we are not storing any product " -"instead just managing place according to delivery for further customer. This" -" will save lot of time for inter warehouse transfer and storing process. We " -"are managing our products with docking area where product directly place " -"from supplier location and transfer this to gate pass for customer delivery." +"Cross-docking is the process of sending products that are received directly " +"to the customers, without making them enter the stock. The trucks are simply" +" unloaded in a *Cross-Dock* area in order to reorganize products and load " +"another truck." msgstr "" -"越库区域是一个不存放产品的临时区域, 只是用来管理把产品发给客户的地方。这会省掉很多仓库内部调拨时间以及存储过程。我们管理转运区域的产品, " -"在那里产品直接从供应商处, 只需要在我们的仓库过一下就直接发给客户。" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:17 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:11 msgid "" -"For more information on how to organise your warehouse, read `What is cross " -"docking and is it for me? `_" +"For more information on how to organize your warehouse, read our blog: `What" +" is cross-docking and is it for me? `__" msgstr "" -"关于更多关于如何构架你的仓库, 请参阅 `越库是什么, 以及它是否适合我？` _ `" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:24 -msgid "Warehouse and routes" -msgstr "仓库和路线" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:26 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:15 msgid "" -"In the **Inventory** module, open :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings" -" --> Location & Warehouse`, then in **Routes**, select **Advanced routing of" -" products using rules**, then click on **Apply**." +"In the *Inventory* app, open *Configuration > Settings* and activate the " +"*Multi-Step Routes*." msgstr "" -"在 **库存** 模块下, 打开 :menuselection:`配置 -->设置 -->库位&仓库` , 然后在 **路线** 中选择 " -"**产品使用高级路线** , 然后点击 **应用** 。" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:33 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:21 +msgid "Doing so will also enable the *Storage Locations* feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:23 msgid "" -"Open :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouse Management --> Warehouses`," -" then open the warehouse you want to cross-dock from and click on **Edit**." -msgstr "打开 :menuselection:`配置 -->仓库管理 -->仓库` , 然后打开想要进行越库的仓库并点击 **编辑** 。" +"Now, both *Incoming* and *Outgoing* shipments should be configured to work " +"with 2 steps. To adapt the configuration, go to *Inventory > Configuration >" +" Warehouses* and edit your warehouse." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:28 +msgid "" +"This modification will lead to the creation of a *Cross-Docking* route that " +"can be found in *Inventory > Configuration > Routes*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:34 +msgid "Configure products with Cross-Dock Route" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:36 -msgid "In the **Warehouse Configuration** tab, select:" -msgstr "在 **仓库配置** 页面, 选择 :" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:38 msgid "" -"**Incoming Shipments**: Unload in input location then go to stock (2 steps)" -msgstr " **进来的送货**: 先在收货区卸货, 然后再进入库存(2步)" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:41 -msgid "**Outgoing Shipments**: Ship directly from stock (Ship only)" -msgstr " **出去的送货**: 直接从库存发货(仅送货)" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:43 -msgid "then click on **Save**." -msgstr "点击 **保存** " - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:48 -msgid "" -"This steps has generated a cross-docking route that you can see in " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configurations --> Routes --> Routes`." +"Create the product that uses the *Cross-Dock Route* and then, in the " +"inventory tab, select the routes *Buy* and *Cross-Dock*. Now, in the " +"purchase tab, specify the vendor to who you buy the product and set a price " +"for it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:44 +msgid "" +"Once done, create a sale order for the product and confirm it. Odoo will " +"automatically create two transfers which will be linked to the sale order. " +"The first one is the transfer from the *Input Location* to the *Output " +"Location*, corresponding to the move of the product in the *Cross-Dock* " +"area. The second one is the delivery order from the *Output Location* to " +"your *Customer Location. Both are in state *Waiting Another Operation* " +"because we still need to order the product to our supplier." msgstr "" -"本步骤生成了一个越库路线, 你可以在以下地方看到 :menuselection:`库存(Inventory) --> " -"配置(Configurations) -->路径(Routes) -->路径(Routes)` 。" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:52 -msgid "Cross Docking Route" -msgstr "越库路线" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:54 msgid "" -"We will use the route **Buy** for first part of the flow and create a route " -"for the remaining part:" -msgstr "我们在流程的第一部分使用 **购买** 路线, 然后为剩余部分创建一个路线。" +"Now, go to the *Purchase* app. There, you will find the purchase order that " +"has been automatically triggered by the system. Validate it and receive the " +"products in the *Input Location*." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:60 msgid "" -"Each of the procurement rule will now be configured. Cross Dock location is " -"created as an internal physical location." -msgstr "每一个拉规则现在可以被配置。用内部的实体库位类型创建越库位置" +"When the products have been received from the supplier, you can go back to " +"your initial sale order and validate the internal transfer from *Input* to " +"*Output*." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:67 -msgid ":menuselection:`Input --> Cross Dock`" -msgstr ":menuselection:`收货(Input) -->越库` " - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:73 -msgid ":menuselection:`Cross Dock --> Output`" -msgstr ":menuselection:`越库 -->出货区域(Output)` " - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:79 -msgid ":menuselection:`Output --> Customer`" -msgstr ":menuselection:`出货(Output) -->客户(Customer)` " - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:82 -msgid "Product with cross dock" -msgstr "使用越库的产品" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:84 +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:68 msgid "" -"We have created the Vegetable Fennel product and assigned the routes created" -" above as well as the **Buy** route." -msgstr "我们创建蔬菜茴香产品, 并且将路线设置为刚才创建的 **购买** 路线。" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:87 -msgid "" -"We have also specified a supplier and a minimum order rule which is needed " -"for replenishment of a stockable product." -msgstr "我们可以指定一个供应商以及用于补充可库存产品的最小订购规则。" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:95 -msgid ":doc:`use_routes`" -msgstr ":doc:`use_routes` " - -#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/cross_dock.rst:96 -msgid ":doc:`../../management/incoming/two_steps`" -msgstr ":doc:`../../management/incoming/two_steps` " +"The delivery order is now ready to be processed and can be validated too." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:3 msgid "How to do inter-warehouses transfers?" @@ -5265,7 +4690,6 @@ msgid "" msgstr "如果想在你的仓库中管理多库位以及路线就需要勾选该选项。" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/inter_warehouse.rst:26 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:9 msgid "Creating a new warehouse" msgstr "创建一个新的仓库" @@ -5467,8 +4891,8 @@ msgstr "在补货规则部分, 点击添加项目。" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:45 msgid "" "Here you can set the conditions of your rule. There are 3 types of action " -"possibles :" -msgstr "你可以在这里设置规则的条件, 有3种可能的动作。" +"possible :" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:48 msgid "Move from another location rules" @@ -5476,12 +4900,12 @@ msgstr "从其他位置移动规则" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:50 msgid "" -"Manufacturing rules that will trigger the creation of manufacturing orders." -msgstr "制造规则会触发制造订单创建。" +"Manufacturing rules that will trigger the creation of manufacturing orders" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:53 -msgid "Buy rules that will trigger the creation of purchase orders." -msgstr "购买规则会触发采购订单创建。" +msgid "Buy rules that will trigger the creation of purchase orders" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/procurement_rule.rst:56 msgid "" @@ -5537,15 +4961,11 @@ msgid "" "inventory control system are that forecasts are often inaccurate as sales " "can be unpredictable and vary from one year to the next. Another problem " "with push inventory control systems is that if too much product is left in " -"inventory. This increases the company's costs for storing these goods. An " +"inventory, this increases the company's costs for storing these goods. An " "advantage to the push system is that the company is fairly assured it will " "have enough product on hand to complete customer orders, preventing the " "inability to meet customer demand for the product." msgstr "" -"库存控制的推系统包含需要满足客户需求的预测数量。公司在决定采购产品的数量时候需要预测客户将要采购哪些产品。相应的公司会生产足够的产品来满足预测的需求和销售或者把产品推到消费者那里。推库存的缺点是通常情况下预测和实际销售相比不精确," -" " -"差异一年年的不同。推库存的另外一个问题是太多的产品留在了库存中。这就增加了公司的产品存储成本。一个优点是公司可以保证在库存中总是有足够的产品满足客户的订单," -" 防止无法满足客户对产品的需求。" #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/push_rule.rst:22 msgid "" @@ -5629,6 +5049,66 @@ msgstr "在该示例中, 另外一个调拨在等待第二个调拨, 它的逻 msgid ":doc:`procurement_rule`" msgstr ":doc:`procurement_rule` " +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:3 +msgid "Taking stock from different warehouses" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When you plan to deliver a customer, you don’t know in advance if the " +"products will come from Warehouse A or Warehouse B. You may, in some cases, " +"need to take stock from different warehouses. With *Odoo*, you can configure" +" this by using the concept of virtual warehouses. Let us show you how to set" +" those virtual warehouses." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:8 +msgid "Set up virtual warehouses" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:10 +msgid "" +"Let’s say you have two warehouses: Warehouse A and Warehouse B. Create a new" +" warehouse, that will be a virtual one. It will allow you to take the stock " +"from A or B. To do so, go to your inventory app settings and enable the " +"multi-warehouses feature. Then, go to the warehouses menu and click on " +"create." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:16 +msgid "" +"The *Storage Location* feature will be automatically enabled. Good news, " +"because you will need it later in the process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:18 +msgid "" +"Now, you have to make sure that the main stock locations of warehouse A and " +"warehouse B are children locations of the main stock location of warehouse A" +" + B. Go to the locations menu, and edit the main location of your two " +"warehouses. Then, change their parent location to main location of warehouse" +" A+B." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:24 +msgid "Sell a product from the virtual warehouse" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:26 +msgid "" +"Let’s say you have two products, one stored in warehouse A and one stored in" +" warehouse B. Now, you can create a new quotation for one of each product. " +"Go to other information and choose Warehouse A+B in the shipping " +"information." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/stock_warehouses.rst:31 +msgid "" +"Once you have done it, you can convert it to a sales order. Then, a delivery" +" order will be automatically generated, with a product reserved in warehouse" +" A and one in warehouse B." +msgstr "" + #: ../../inventory/routes/concepts/use_routes.rst:3 msgid "How to use routes?" msgstr "如何使用路径？" @@ -5815,203 +5295,114 @@ msgid "Product Costing" msgstr "产品成本" #: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:3 -msgid "How to integrate landed costs in the cost of the product?" -msgstr "如何在产品成本中集成到岸成本" +msgid "" +"How to integrate additional costs in the cost of the product? (landed costs)" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:8 -msgid "Landed costs include all charges associated to a good transfer." -msgstr "到岸成本包含产品转运过程中的所有费用。" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:10 -msgid "Landed cost includes = Cost of product + Shipping + Customs + Risk" -msgstr "到岸成本包含＝产品的成本＋运费+关税＋保费" +msgid "" +"The landed cost feature in Odoo allows to include additional costs " +"(shipment, insurance, customs duties, etc.) into the cost of the product." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:12 msgid "" -"All of these components might not be applicable in every shipment, but " -"relevant components must be considered as a part of the landed cost. We have" -" to identify landed cost to decide sale price of product because it will " -"impact on company profits." -msgstr "" -"所有的这些组件不一定在每个交货单上都能使用, 但是相关的组件必须要作为到岸价格的组成被考虑到。我们必须指定到岸成本来决定产品的销售价格, " -"因为这会影响到公司的利润。" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:21 -msgid "Applications configuration" -msgstr "应用配置" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:23 -msgid "" -"First, you need to activate the use of the landed costs. Go to " -":menuselection:`Inventory application --> Configuration --> Setting`. Check " -"accounting option **Include landed costs in product costing computation** & " -"**Perpetual inventory valuation**, then click on **Apply** to save changes." -msgstr "" -"首先, 你需要激活使用到岸成本。进入 :menuselection: \" 库存应用 -->配置 -->设置 `。检查会计选项 " -"**产品成本计算包含到岸成本** 以及 **永续存货计价** , 然后点击 **应用** 保存变更。 " - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:32 -msgid "" -"Then go to the :menuselection:`Purchase application --> Configuration --> " -"Setting`. Choose costing method **Use a 'Fixed', 'Real' or 'Average' price " -"costing method**, then click on **Apply** to save changes." -msgstr "" -"然后进入 :menuselection:`采购应用-->配置 -->设置` 。勾选成本方法 **使用'固定价','真实价'或者'平均价'成本核算方法**" -" , 然后点击 **应用** 保存变更。" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:40 -msgid "Landed Cost Types" -msgstr "到岸成本类型" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:42 -msgid "" -"Start by creating specific products to indicate your various **Landed " -"Costs**, such as freight, insurance or custom duties. Go to " -":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Landed Cost types`." -msgstr "" -"从创建特定不同的 **到岸成本** 的产品开始, 例如空运费, 保费或者关税。进入 :menuselection:`库存 -->配置 --> " -"到岸成本类型` 。" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:50 -msgid "" -"Landed costs are only possible for products configured in real time " -"valuation with real price costing method. The costing method is configured " -"on the product category." -msgstr "到岸成本只适用于使用实时存货计价和实际成本价方法的产品。成本方法可以在产品类别上设置。" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:55 -msgid "Link landed costs to a transfer" -msgstr "链接到岸成本到转移单上" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:57 -msgid "" -"To calculate landed costs, go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory " -"Control --> Landed Costs`." -msgstr "要计算到岸成本, 进入 :menuselection:`库存-->存货控制 -->到岸成本` 。" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:60 -msgid "" -"Click on the **Create** button and select the picking(s) you want to " -"attribute landed costs." -msgstr "点击 **创建** 按钮然后选择你想分配给该到岸成本的调拨()。" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:66 -msgid "" -"Select the account journal in which to post the landed costs. We recommend " -"you to create a specific journal for landed costs. Therefore it will be " -"easier to keep track of your postings." +"Landed costs can only be applied to products with a FIFO costing method and " +"an automated inventory valuation (which requires the accounting application " +"to be installed)." msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:73 +#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:20 msgid "" -"Click the **Compute** button to see how the landed costs will be split " -"across the picking lines." -msgstr "点击 **计算** 按钮, 查看到岸成本如何根据分配到分拣明细行" +"First, you need to activate the landed costs feature in " +":menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings`." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:79 +#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:27 +msgid "Add costs to products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:29 msgid "" -"To confirm the landed costs attribution, click on the **Validate** button." -msgstr "点击 **验证** 按钮确认到岸成本分配。" +"Go in :menuselection:`Inventory --> Operations --> Landed Costs` and click " +"on the **Create** button. You then have to select the transfers on which you" +" want to attribute additional costs and the costs lines you want to add up. " +"Once it's done, click on the **Compute** button to see how the costs lines " +"will be split accross your transfers lines." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/costing/landed_costs.rst:38 +msgid "To confirm, click on the **Validate** button." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies.rst:3 msgid "Putaway & Removal Strategies" msgstr "上架和下架策略" #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:3 -msgid "What is a putaway strategy?" -msgstr "什么是上架策略？" +msgid "What is a Putaway Rule?" +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:8 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:5 msgid "" "A good warehouse implementation takes care that products automatically move " -"to their appropriate destination location. Putaway is the process of taking " -"products off the receiving shipment and putting them into the most " -"appropriate location." -msgstr "好的仓库实施会考虑到把产品自动的调拨到正确的目的库位。下架就是把产品从收货的产品发出的过程, 该过程把产品调拨到正确的库位。" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:13 -msgid "" -"If for instance a warehouse contains volatile substances, it is important to" -" make sure that certain products are not stored close to each other because " -"of a potential chemical reaction." -msgstr "以防仓库中含有化学性质不稳定的物品, 就要确保这些产品在存放时不能放的太近, 以防止发生化学反映。" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:17 -msgid "" -"A putaway strategy follows the same principle as removal strategies but " -"affects the destination location. Putaway strategies are defined at the " -"location level (unlike removal strategies which are defined at the product " -"level)." -msgstr "上架策略和下架策略有着同样的原则, 但是作用于目标库位。商家策略在库位层面定义(不像下架策略定义在产品层面那样)。" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:25 -msgid "" -"Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Configuration --> Settings` and check " -"option **Manage several location per warehouse & Advance routing of products" -" using rules**, then click on **Apply**." +"to their appropriate destination location. To make that process easier, Odoo" +" uses *Putaway rules*. But what is a putaway rule? Putaway is the process of" +" taking products off the receiving shipments and directly putting them into " +"the most appropriate location." msgstr "" -"进入 :menuselection:`库存 -->配置 -->设置` 并选择 **仓库管理多库位和产品使用高级路径** , 然后点击 **应用** 。" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:33 -msgid "Setting up a strategy" -msgstr "设置一个策略" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:35 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:7 msgid "" -"Let's take as an example a retail shop where we store vegetables and fruits." -msgstr "举个例子 :一个卖蔬菜水果的零售商店" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:38 -msgid "" -"We have to store this type of product in different locations to maintain " -"product quality." -msgstr "我们可以把该类型产品放在不同的位置并维护产品数量。" - -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:41 -msgid "" -"Suppose there is one warehouse location **WH/Stock** and there is sub " -"location **WH/Stock/Vegetables** & **WH/Stock/Fruits**." +"If, for example, a warehouse contains volatile substances, it is important " +"to make sure that certain products are not stored close to each other " +"because of a potential chemical reaction. That’s where putaway rules " +"intervene, to avoid storing products wrongly." msgstr "" -"假设有一个仓库库位 **WH/Stock** 并且有一个下级库位 **WH/Stock/Vegetables** & " -"**WH/Stock/Fruits** ." -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:44 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:12 msgid "" -"You can create a putaway strategy from :menuselection:`Inventory --> " -"Configuration --> Locations`. Open any location where you want to set a " -"putaway strategy, click on **Edit** and locate the option **Put Away " -"Strategy**." +"In the *Inventory* app, go to *Configuration > Settings* and activate the " +"*Multi-Step Routes*. By doing so, the *Storage Locations* will be " +"automatically activated." msgstr "" -"你可以创建一个上架策略, 进入 :menuselection:`库存 -->配置 -->库位` 。打开任何一个你想要设置上架策略的库位, 点击 " -"**编辑** 并选择 **上架策略** 。" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:52 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:18 +msgid "Setting up a Putaway Rule" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:20 msgid "" -"Open the roll-down menu and click on **Create and Edit**. This will open a " -"form view of put away strategy on which you have to set a name for the " -"strategy, and set the method and fixed location for each category." -msgstr "打开滚动菜单并点击 **创建并编辑** 。这会打开一个上架策略的页面表单, 在那里你可以设置上架策略, 设置上架方法, 固定库位等。" +"In some cases, like for a retail shop storing vegetables and fruits, we have" +" to store products in different locations to maintain product quality." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:59 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:22 msgid "" -"When you have entered all the necessary information, click on **Save**." -msgstr "等你把所有必要信息输完之后, 点击 **保存** 。" +"Let’s suppose there are one warehouse location *WH/Stock* and two sub-" +"locations *WH/Stock/Vegatable* and *WH/Stock/Fruits*." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:61 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:24 msgid "" -"Now, when you purchase products with those categories, they will " -"automatically be transferred to the correct location." -msgstr "现在, 当你要采购这些种类的产品时候, 它们会自动的被移动到正确的库位。" +"To manage those locations, we will create putaway rules. To do so, open the " +"*Inventory* app and go to *Configuration > Putaway Rules*. Then, click on " +"create and configure your first rule indicating the main location the " +"product will enter before being redirected to the right location." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:64 +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:27 msgid "" -"To check current inventory, Go to :menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory " -"Control --> Current Inventory`" -msgstr "要检查当前库存, 进入 :menuselection:`库存 -->库存控制 -->当前库存` " +"The putaway rules can be defined either per product or per product category." +msgstr "" -#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:67 -msgid "There you can see current inventory by location." -msgstr "在那里　你可以看到库位中当前的库存" +#: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/putaway.rst:32 +msgid "" +"Now, if I purchase apples and carrots to my supplier, they will be grouped " +"in the same receipt but redirected to the right location automatically, " +"thanks to putaway rules. This information is available from *Inventory " +"Report*, under the reporting menu." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:3 msgid "What is a removal strategy (FIFO, LIFO, and FEFO)?" @@ -6179,9 +5570,9 @@ msgstr "**失效日期：**：本序列/批次货物自此日期起变质，不 #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:125 msgid "" "**Removal Date:** This is the date on which the goods with this serial/lot " -"number should be removed from the stock. Using the FEFO removal strategym " +"number should be removed from the stock. Using the FEFO removal strategy " "goods are picked for delivery orders using this date." -msgstr "**撤柜日期**：本序列/批次货物自此日期起应从商店撤下。通过FEFO 撤柜策略，在此日期收集货物发运。" +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/routes/strategies/removal.rst:129 msgid "" @@ -6324,866 +5715,9 @@ msgstr ":doc:`../../management/reporting/valuation_methods_continental` " msgid ":doc:`../../management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon`" msgstr ":doc:`../../management/reporting/valuation_methods_anglo_saxon` " -#: ../../inventory/settings.rst:3 -msgid "Settings" -msgstr "设置" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products.rst:3 -msgid "Products" -msgstr "产品" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:3 -msgid "How to select the right replenishment strategy" -msgstr "如何选择正确的补货策略" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:5 -msgid "" -"Minimum Stock rules and Make to Order have similar consequences but " -"different rules. They should be used depending on your manufacturing and " -"delivery strategies." -msgstr "最小库存规则和按单补货的结果相似，但规则不同，应根据你的制造和发货策略来选用。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:15 -msgid "" -"Minimum Stock rules are used to ensure that you always have the minimum " -"amount of a product in stock in order to manufacture your products and/or " -"answer to your customer needs. When the stock level of a product reaches its" -" minimum the system will automatically generate a procurement order with the" -" quantity needed to reach the maximum stock level." -msgstr "" -"最小库存规则用于确保你已经有了制造和/或响应消费者需求的最小库存量。当某产品的库存水平到达最小量时，系统自动生成一个采购订单，该订单的数量能满足最小库存量。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:24 -msgid "" -"The Make to Order function will trigger a Purchase Order of the amount of " -"the Sales Order related to the product. The system will **not** check the " -"current stock. This means that a draft purchase order will be generated " -"regardless of the quantity on hand of the product." -msgstr "按单补货功能将触发与产品相关的销售订单的采购单。系统**不会**检查现有库存。意味着无论现有产品的数量是多少，都会生成一个采购订单草稿。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:35 -msgid "" -"The Minimum Stock Rules configuration is available through your Inventory " -"module. In the Inventory Control menu select \"Reordering Rule\" in the drop" -" down menu. There, click on \"Create\" to set minimum and maximum stock " -"values for a given product." -msgstr "最小库存规则可通过库存模块进行配置。在“库存控制”下拉菜单中选择\"再次订购规则\" ，然后点击\"创建\"设置某给定产品的最小与最大库存值。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:44 -msgid "" -"Show tooltips for \"minimum quantity\", \"maximum quantity\" and \"quantity " -"multiple\" fields" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:47 -msgid "" -"Then, click on your product to access the related product form and, on the " -"\"Inventory submenu\", do not forget to select a supplier." -msgstr "然后点击产品，在\"库存子菜单\"访问相关产品的表单。不要忘记选择一个供应商。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:54 -msgid "" -"Don't forget to select the right product type. A consumable can not be " -"stocked and will thus not be accounted for in the stock valuation." -msgstr "别忘记选择正确的产品类别。消耗品无法贮存，不可计入库存盘点数。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:60 -msgid "" -"The Make to Order configuration is available on your product form through " -"your :menuselection:`Inventory --> Inventory control --> Products` (or any " -"other module where products are available)." -msgstr "可在产品表单中配置按单补货 :menuselection:`库存 --> 库存控制 --> 产品（或在产品可用的任一其他模块中配置）。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/strategies.rst:64 -msgid "On the product form, under Inventory, click on \"Make To Order\"." -msgstr "在产品表单的库存项下，点击\"按单补货\"。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:3 -msgid "How to use different units of measure?" -msgstr "如何使用不同计量单位？" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:8 -msgid "" -"In some cases, handling products in different unit of measures is necessary." -" For example, if you buy products in a country where the metric system is of" -" application and sell the in a country where the imperial system is used, " -"you will need to convert the units." -msgstr "有时候, 很有必要使用产品的不同计量单位。例如, 你在使用公制单位的国家采购但是却在使用英制单位的国家销售, 这时就需要在单位之间转换。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:13 -msgid "" -"You can set up Odoo to work with different units of measure for one product." -msgstr "在Odoo中你可以设置一个产品可以有不同的计量单位。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:19 -msgid "" -"In the **Inventory** application, go to :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`. In the **Products** section, select **Some products may be " -"sold/purchased in different units of measure (advanced)**, then click on " -"**Apply**." -msgstr "" -"在 **库存** 模块下, 进入 :menuselection:`配置 -->设置` 。在 **产品** 部分, 选择 " -"**产品的采购/销售时可以使用不同的计量单位(高级)** , 然后点击 **应用** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:27 -msgid "Setting up units on your products" -msgstr "给产品设置计量单位" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:29 -msgid "" -"In :menuselection:`Inventory Control --> Products`, open the product which " -"you would like to change the purchase/sale unit of measure, and click on " -"**Edit**." -msgstr "在 :menuselection:`库存控制 -->产品` , 打开你需要在采购/销售过程中使用不同计量单位的产品并点击 **编辑** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:32 -msgid "" -"In the **Unit of Measure** section, select the unit in which the product " -"will be sold and in which internal transfers will be done." -msgstr "在 **计量单位** 部分, 选择产品销售时候的计量单位以及内部调拨时候的计量单位。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:35 -msgid "" -"In the **Purchase Unit of Measure** section, select the unit in which you " -"purchase the product. When you're done, click on **Save**." -msgstr "在 **采购计量单位** 部分, 选择采购时候的计量单位。完成之后点击 **保存** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:42 -msgid "Click on the edit button |edit| to create new unit of measures." -msgstr "点击编辑按钮|编辑|创建新的计量单位。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:46 -msgid "Transfer from one unit to another" -msgstr "从一种计量单位转换为另外一种" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:48 -msgid "" -"When doing inter-unit transfers, the rounding is automatically done by Odoo." -msgstr "在做计量单位的内部转换时, Odoo会自动的四舍五入。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:51 -msgid "" -"The unit of measure can be changed throughout the whole process. The only " -"condition is that the unit of measure is part of the same category." -msgstr "计量单位在全程都可以变换。唯一的条件是这些计量单位都必须是同一类别。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:54 -msgid "In this example, we are in the egg business :" -msgstr "在本示例中, 我们用鸡蛋做示例 :" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:56 -msgid "We buy eggs by trays (30 eggs)" -msgstr "通常, 我们都是按照一盘为单位购买(一盘30个)" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:58 -msgid "We check all eggs individually when receiving it (quality control)" -msgstr "收货的时候是按照单个(质量检验)" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:60 -msgid "We sell eggs by the dozen to the customers" -msgstr "在卖给客户的时候是按照一打来卖" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:66 -msgid "" -"The **Sale price** is expressed in the **Product unit of measure**. The " -"**Cost price** is expressed in the **Purchase Unit of Measure**." -msgstr " **销售价格** 用 **产品的计量单位** 表示。 **成本价格** 用 **采购计量单位** 表示" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:70 -msgid "" -"All internal transfers are expressed in the **Product Unit of Measure**." -msgstr "所有的内部调拨都用 **产品计量单位** 表示。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:74 -msgid "Procurement" -msgstr "补货" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:76 -msgid "" -"When doing your procurement request, you can still change the unit of " -"measure." -msgstr "在进行补货需求时, 你还是可以更改计量单位。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:82 -msgid "The unit of measure can also be changed in the purchase order :" -msgstr "在采购订单中也可以更改计量单位 :" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:90 -msgid "The quality control is done by unit." -msgstr "质检过程按照单个检验" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:92 -msgid "" -"The basic unit of measure of our product is **Unit**. Therefore the quality " -"check is done by unit." -msgstr "产品的最基本的计量单位是 **个** 。因此产品数量按个数检查。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:99 -msgid "" -"The unit of measure can only be changed when the transfer status is " -"**Draft**." -msgstr "只有当调拨单状态是 **草稿** 状态时, 计量单位才能更改。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:103 -#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:74 -msgid "Delivery process" -msgstr "交货流程" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:105 -msgid "" -"The eggs are sold by the dozen. You can choose the unit of measure on the " -"sale order document. When doing it, the price is automatically computed from" -" the unit to the dozen." -msgstr "鸡蛋按打销售。你可以在销售订单上选择计量单位。在变换计量单位的时候, 单位价格会根据一打的单位价格自动计算。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:112 -msgid "" -"In the delivery order, the initial demand is done in the sales order unit of" -" measure :" -msgstr "在发货单中, 最初的需求用销售订单中的计量单位完成 :" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/uom.rst:118 -msgid "" -"But the transfer is done in the product unit of measure. Everything is " -"converted automatically :" -msgstr "但是调拨使用产品的计量单位已经完成, 所有都自动的转换 :" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:3 -msgid "When should you use packages, units of measure or kits?" -msgstr "何时应该使用包装, 计量单位或者套装？" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:6 -msgid "Unit of measures" -msgstr "计量单位" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:8 -msgid "" -"Units of measures are an indication about the unit used to handle a product." -" Products can be expressed in multiple units of measure at once." -msgstr "计量单位是一个处理产品的标度的单位, 产品可以使用不同计量单位表示。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:11 -msgid "" -"Activate this option if you are working with several ones in your warehouse." -msgstr "如果在你的仓库中使用不同的计量单位就激活该选项。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:14 -msgid "" -"The purchase unit of measure might be different that the one you use in your" -" warehouse." -msgstr "采购的计量单位可以和仓库中使用的计量单位不同。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:17 -msgid "" -"The selling unit of measure is set on the sale order and can be different." -msgstr "销售的计量单位在销售订单上设置, 也可以不同。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:24 -msgid "" -"The conversion between the different units of measures is done " -"automatically. The only condition is that all the units have to be in the " -"same category (Unit, Weight, Volume, Length,...)" -msgstr "不同计量单位之间的转换是自动完成的。唯一的条件是能够转换的计量单位必须是同一个种类(个, 重量, 容积, 长度……)" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:29 -msgid "Packages" -msgstr "包裹" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:31 -msgid "" -"The package is the physical container in which you put one or several " -"product." -msgstr "包裹是一个你想在其中放置一个或者几个产品的实际的容器。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:38 -msgid "Packaging" -msgstr "包装" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:40 -msgid "Packaging is the physical container that protects your product." -msgstr "包装是用来保护产品的物理容器。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:42 -msgid "" -"If you are selling computers, the packaging contains the computer with the " -"notice and the power plug." -msgstr "如果你在销售电脑, 包装里面会有电脑, 说明书以及电源线。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:45 -msgid "In Odoo, packagings are just used for indicative purpose." -msgstr "在Odoo中, 包装使用通常用于标识功能" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:51 -msgid "" -"You can define on the **Packages** which **Packaging** it uses. But it is " -"only for indicative purpose." -msgstr "你可以在 **包装** 中定义使用哪种 **包材** 。但这只是象征性使用。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:55 -msgid "When to use packages, packagings or unit of measures ?" -msgstr "什么时候使用包裹, 包装或者计量单位？" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:57 -msgid "" -"For example, you are sellings eggs. In your warehouse, you manage the eggs " -"individually. Lots of eggs are scrapped and you do it egg by egg. The **unit" -" of measure** is ``Unit(s)``." -msgstr "" -"例如, 你现在在销售鸡蛋, 在你的仓库里单个的管理鸡蛋, 很多鸡蛋坏掉了, 你要一个一个的报废。 **计量单位** 是\" 个(一个或很多) \\ \"" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:61 -msgid "" -"If you are selling eggs by the dozen, the selling **unit of measure** is the" -" ``Dozen``. You will set it on your sale order." -msgstr "如果你按打销售鸡蛋, 销售的 **计量单位** 就是\" 打 \\ \"。你可以在销售订单上进行设置。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:64 -msgid "" -"The ``cardboard trays`` that contains the dozen of eggs is the " -"**packaging**." -msgstr "包含一打鸡蛋的\" 纸片托盘 \\ \"就是 **包材** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:66 -msgid "" -"When you are selling several trays, you might wrap all the trays into a " -"``box`` or in a ``plastic`` wrapping. It is the **package**." -msgstr "当你销售几个托盘的鸡蛋时, 你可能会把不同的托盘放进一个\" 箱子 \\ \"或者一个\" 塑料 \\ \"包装中, 这就是 **包裹** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:70 -msgid ":doc:`../../overview/start/setup`" -msgstr ":doc:`../../overview/start/setup` " - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/usage.rst:71 -msgid ":doc:`uom`" -msgstr ":doc:`uom` " - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:3 -msgid "Using product variants" -msgstr "使用产品型号(变体)" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:5 -msgid "" -"Product variants are used to manage products having different variations, " -"like size, color, etc. It allows managing the product at the template level " -"(for all variations) and at the variant level (specific attributes)." -msgstr "" -"产品变型用来管理有不同变量的产品, 例如尺寸, 颜色等等。它可以让我们在产品模板层面对产品进行管理(所有的变量), " -"也可以在变型层面管理(特定一个属性)。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:10 -msgid "" -"As an example, a company selling t-shirts may have the following product:" -msgstr "例如, 一个销售ｔ血衫的公司可能有以下产品 :" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:13 -msgid "B&C T-shirt" -msgstr "B&C T血衫" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:15 -msgid "Sizes: S, M, L, XL, XXL" -msgstr "尺寸 : S, M, L, XL, XXL" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:16 -msgid "Colors: Blue, Red, White, Black" -msgstr "颜色 :蓝色, 红色, 白色, 黑色" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:18 -msgid "" -"In this example, **B&C T-Shirt** is called the product template and **B&C " -"T-Shirt, S, Blue** is a variant. Sizes and color are **attributes**." -msgstr "在该示例中, **B&C ｔ血衫** 是产品模板, **B&C ｔ血衫, S, 蓝色** 是一个产品变量, 尺寸和颜色是 **属性** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:22 -msgid "" -"The above example has a total of 20 different products (5 sizes x 4 colors)." -" Each one of these products has its own inventory, sales, etc." -msgstr "以上示例总共有20个不同的产品(5中尺寸x4种颜色)。每一个产品都会有自己的库存, 销售信息, 等等。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:26 -msgid "Impact of variants" -msgstr "变型的影响" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:28 -msgid "" -"**Barcode**: the code and barcode is associated to a variant, not the " -"template. Every variant may have its own barcode / SKU." -msgstr " **条码**: 编码和条码关联到一个变型, 而不是一个产品模板。每个型号都可以有自己的条码／SKU。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:31 -msgid "" -"**Price**: every product variant has its own public price that is computed " -"based on the template price ($20) with an optional extra for every variant " -"(+$3 for color red). However, you can define pricelist rules that apply on " -"the template or the variant." -msgstr "" -" **价格**: 每个产品变型有自己的公开价，它基于产品模板的价格 ($20)，以及每个变型的可选额外价格(红色额外加$3)，计算得出。然而, " -"你可以定义应用在产品模板以及产品变型的价格表。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:36 -msgid "" -"**Inventory**: the inventory is managed by product variant. You don't own " -"t-shirts, you only own \"T-shirts, S, Red\", or \"T-Shirts, M, Blue\". For " -"information purpose, on the product template form, you get the inventory " -"that is the sum of every variant. (but the actual inventory is computed by " -"variant)" -msgstr "" -" **库存**: 存货在产品变型层面管理。你拥有的不是T恤衫, 而是\" T恤衫, S, 红色 \", 或者\" T恤衫, M, 蓝色 " -"\"。用于信息目的, 在产品模板表单，你得到的库存，是所有变型的数量总和。(但是实际库存是按变型计算的)" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:42 -msgid "" -"**Picture**: the picture is related to the variant, every variation of a " -"product may have its own primary picture." -msgstr " **图片**: 此图片与变型相关, 每个型号可以有自己的主要图片。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:45 -msgid "" -"**Other fields**: most of the other fields belongs to the product template. " -"If you update them, it updates automatically all the variants. (example: " -"Income Account, Taxes)" -msgstr "" -" **其余字段**: 大部分其他字段属于产品模板。如果你对他么恩进行更新, 它会自动地更新到所有相关的型号上。(例如 : 主营业务收入科目, 税)" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:50 -msgid "Should you use variants?" -msgstr "应该使用产品变型吗？" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:53 -msgid "When should you use variants?" -msgstr "何时应该使用产品变型？" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:55 -msgid "Using variants has the following impacts:" -msgstr "使用变型有以下影响 :" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:57 -msgid "" -"**eCommerce**: in your online shop, the customer will only see product " -"templates in the catalog page. Once the visitor click on such a product, he " -"will have options to choose amongst the variants (colors, sizes, …)" -msgstr "" -" **电商**: 在你的在线商铺, 客户只会在分类页面看到产品模板。一旦访客点击这样的产品, 他将能在众多的型号中间进行选择(颜色, 尺寸, ……)" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:62 -msgid "" -"**Manufacturing**: Using variants allows to define only one bill of material" -" for a product template and slight variations for some of the variants. " -"Example: instead of creating a Bill of Material for \"T-shirt, Red, S\", you" -" create a bill of material for \"T-shirt\" and add some lines that are " -"specific to the dimension S, and other lines specific to the color Red." -msgstr "" -" **生产**: 使用型号可以基于产品模板和各种型号质检的细微差别只定义一个物料表。例如: 你可以创建一个\" T血衫\\ \\ \\ " -"\"并添加一些特定尺寸例如S的行以及特定颜色例如红色的行, 从而代替创建物料表\" T血衫, 红色, S\\ \\ \\ \"。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:69 -msgid "" -"**Pricing**: The default price of a product is computed using the price of " -"the product template and add the optional extra price on each dimension of " -"the variant. This way, variant prices are easier to maintain since you don't" -" have to set the price for every variant. However, it's possible to create " -"pricelist rules to fix price per variants too." -msgstr "" -" **价格**: 产品的默认价格是产品模板的价格加上型号上特定属性的额外价格。这样, 型号的价格维护起来就很容易, 你不必在每个型号上维护, " -"当然也可以使用价格表规则固定每个型号的价格。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:77 -msgid "When should you avoid using variants?" -msgstr "在什么时候应该避免使用产品型号？" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:79 -msgid "" -"Using variants may add a level of complexity on the way you use Odoo. You " -"should consider using variants only if you need it to reduce the complexity " -"of managing lots of products that are similars." -msgstr "使用变量有可能会增加操作的复杂程度, 当你要使用产品的变量属性时, 你要确保这样做只会减少操作的复杂程度。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:83 -msgid "" -"As an example, importing your initial product catalog is more complex if you" -" use variants. You can't just import a list of products, you must import " -"product templates and all their related variations." -msgstr "例如, 如果使用型号的话, 在导入期初数据的时候就比较麻烦。你不能只是导入产品的列表, 还必须要导入产品模板以及相关的型号。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:87 -msgid "" -"In addition to that, you should also carefully select the dimensions that " -"you manage as separate product templates and those as variants. As an " -"example, a company having these products:" -msgstr "另外, 你需要谨慎的选择尺寸作为变量, 这些都术语一个单独的产品模板。局一个例子, 一个公司有如下产品 :" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:91 -msgid "Quality: T-Shirts, Polos, Shirts" -msgstr "质量 :T血衫, 马球, 衬衫" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:93 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:105 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:110 -msgid "Color: Red, Blue" -msgstr "颜色 : 红色, 蓝色" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:95 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:106 -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:111 -msgid "Size: S, M, L, XL" -msgstr "尺寸 : S, M, L, XL" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:97 -msgid "" -"In such a use case, you could create 1 template with three dimensions of " -"variants (Layout, T-Shirts, Polos). But, it's recommended to create two " -"different product templates as T-shirts may highly differ from polos or " -"shirts and customer expect to see these as two different products in the " -"e-Commerce:" -msgstr "" -"在该用户案例中, 你可以创建1个带有尺寸变量的模板(布局, ｔ血衫, 保罗)。但是, 我们还是建议你创建两种不同的产品把保罗或者衬衫分开, " -"并且在你的电脑上网站客户也乐意看到这样分 :" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:103 -msgid "Product Template: T-shirt" -msgstr "产品模板 :T血衫" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:108 -msgid "Product Template: Polos" -msgstr "产品模板 :马球" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:117 -msgid "Activate the variant feature" -msgstr "激活产品型号特性" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:119 -msgid "" -"Before you can use product variants, you must first activate the product " -"variants in the settings. To do so, you must go to the Sales app. In the " -"menu :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`, locate the **Products " -"Variants** line, and tick the option **Products can have several " -"attributes**, then click on **Apply**." -msgstr "" -"在你使用产品变量之前, 你需要在设置中激活产品变量。要这样做, 你需要进入销售模块, 在菜单 :menuselection:`配置 -->设置` , " -"找到 **产品变形** 　行, 然后勾选 **产品可以有多个变体** , 然后点击 **应用** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:129 -msgid "Creating products with variants" -msgstr "创建带有型号的产品" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:131 -msgid "" -"Once you have activated the variant option, you can add variants to your " -"products. To do so, go to the Sales module, :menuselection:`Sales --> " -"Products`. It is also accessible from the Purchase and inventory modules." -msgstr "" -"一旦你激活了变量选项, 你就可以给产品添加变量。要这样做的话, 进入销售模块 :`销售 -->产品` 。还可以从采购和库存模块进入产品页面。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:135 -msgid "Now, click on the product you wish to add variants to." -msgstr "现在, 点击你想添加型号的产品。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:137 -msgid "" -"In the product page, a new tab called Variants has appeared. The number in " -"purple written on top is the number of variants this product currently has. " -"To add new variants, click on the tile. In the new window, click on " -"**Create**." -msgstr "" -"在产品页面, 一个新的变量页面显示出来。在页面上方的紫色数字是当前该产品的变量数量。要添加新的变量, 点击该按钮, 在新的窗口, 点击 **创建** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:142 -msgid "" -"In **Attributes**, click on the rolldown menu and select the type of " -"variance you wish to add. If the variant does not yet exist, you can create " -"it on the fly by clicking on Create and edit…" -msgstr "在 **属性** 中, 点击下拉菜单并选择你要添加的变量类型。。如果变量不存在, 你可以通过点击创建和编辑随手创建……" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:149 -msgid "" -"In the Attributes window, the **Value** field is the description of the " -"attribute such as Green, Plastic or 32GB. The **Attribute** field is the " -"type of variant such as Color, Material or Memory." -msgstr "在属性窗口, **值** 字段是属性的描述例如绿色, 塑料或者32G, **属性** 字段是变量的类型例如颜色, 材料或者内存。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:156 -msgid "" -"You can add a cost for the variant on the fly by adding it in the " -"**Attribute Price Extra** field, or choose to modify it later. Click on " -"**Save**." -msgstr "你可以在 **属性额外价格** 字段顺便给特定型号添加相关成本, 或者选择稍后更改, 点击 **保存** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:160 -msgid "" -"You can also add a different barcode and internal reference to the variant." -msgstr "你也可以给型号添加不同的条码以及内部参考码。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:163 -msgid "" -"When you have entered all the specifications of the variant, click on " -"**Save**." -msgstr "完成输入该型号的所有的特定属性后, 点击 **保存** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:167 -msgid "Managing Product Variants" -msgstr "管理产品型号" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:172 -msgid "" -"The examples below are all based on this product template that has two " -"variant attributes :" -msgstr "以下示例就是一个产品模板上的两个不同属性的型号产品 :" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:175 -msgid "T-Shirt B&C" -msgstr "B&C T血衫" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:177 -msgid "Color: Red, Blue, White" -msgstr "颜色 : 红色, 蓝色, 白色" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:179 -msgid "Size: S, M, L, XL, XXL" -msgstr "尺寸 : S, M, L, XL, XXL" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:182 -msgid "Managing combination possibilities" -msgstr "管理组合可能性" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:184 -msgid "" -"By default, with the above product template, you get 15 different products " -"(3 colors, 5 sizes). If the XXL size only exists for red and blue t-shirts, " -"you can deactivate the white product variant." -msgstr "" -"默认情况下, 使用上述产品的模板,你可以得到15个不同产品(3种颜色, 5个尺寸)。如果XXL只存在与红色和蓝色t恤,您可以设置禁用于白色产品系列。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:188 -msgid "" -"To do this, click on the **Variants** button, select the XXL, White T-shirt." -" From the product form, uncheck the **Active** box of the T-shirt White, " -"XXL." -msgstr "" -"要这样做的话, 点击 **型号** 按钮, 选择XXL, 白色Ｔ血衫。在产品页面上, 不勾选XXL, 白色Ｔ血衫这个产品 **有效** 框。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:197 -msgid "" -"That deactivating a product is different than having an inventory of 0." -msgstr "使产品无效不同于设定产品的库存为0." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:200 -msgid "Setting a price per variant" -msgstr "根据型号设置价格" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:202 -msgid "" -"You can add a cost over the main price for some of the variants of a " -"product." -msgstr "对产品的有些型号你可以添加超过主要价格的成本。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:205 -msgid "" -"Once you have activated the variant option, you can add variants to your " -"products. To do so, go to the Sales module, open :menuselection:`Sales --> " -"Products` and click on the product you want to modify. Click on the " -"**Variant Prices** button to access the list of variant values." -msgstr "" -"一旦你激活了产品变量选项, 你就可以在产品上添加产品变量。要这样做, 进入销售模块, 打开 :menuselection:`销售 -->产品` " -"并点击你想要更改的产品, 点击 **变量价格** 按钮来查看变量列表。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:213 -msgid "" -"Click on the variant name you wish to add a value to, to make the 3 fields " -"editable. In the **Attribute Price Extra** field, add the cost of the " -"variant that will be added to the original price." -msgstr "点击你想要添加值的变量名称, 确保3个字段可编辑。在 **额外属性价格** 字段你, 添加该变量的成本, 他会自动的和原始价格相加。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/products/variants.rst:220 -msgid "When you have entered all the extra values, click on **Save**." -msgstr "一旦你输入了所有的额外值, 点击 **保存** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:3 -msgid "What is the difference between warehouses and locations?" -msgstr "仓库和位置之间的差别是什么？" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:5 -msgid "" -"In Odoo, a **Warehouse** is the actual building/place in which your items " -"are stocked. You can setup multiple warehouses and create moves between " -"warehouses." -msgstr "在Odoo中, 在Odoo中 **仓库** 是你存放货物的实际的建筑／地方。你可以设置多仓库并在不同的仓库质检调拨。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:9 -msgid "" -"A **Location**, is a specific space within your warehouse. It can be " -"considered as a sublocation of your warehouse, as a shelf, a floor, an " -"aisle, etc. Therefore, a location is part of one warehouse only and it is " -"not possible to link one location to multiple warehouses. You can configure " -"as much locations as you need under one warehouse." -msgstr "" -" **库位** 是仓库中的一个特定的位置。它可以被认为是仓库的下级, 一个货架, 一层楼, 一个通道, 等等。因此, 一个库位只能是你的仓库的一部分, " -"不能把一个库位和多个仓库链接起来。在一个仓库下你可以配置足够多的库位。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:15 -msgid "There are 3 types of locations:" -msgstr "有3种类型的位置 :" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:17 -msgid "" -"The **Physical Locations** are internal locations that are part of the " -"warehouses for which you are the owner. They can be the loading and " -"unloading area of your warehouse, a shelf or a department, etc." -msgstr "" -" **物理库位** 是你所拥有的仓库中的内部库位, 是你的仓库的一部分。它们可以是仓库中的装货区域, 卸货区域, 货架或者一个区域, 等等。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:21 -msgid "" -"The **Partner Locations** are spaces within a customer and/or vendor's " -"warehouse. They work the same way as Physical Locations with the only " -"difference being that you are not the owner of the warehouse." -msgstr " **业务伙伴库位** 是客户和／或供应商仓库中的位置。它们和物理库位的使用一样, 只不过这些库位的所有者不是你。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:25 -msgid "" -"The **Virtual Locations** are places that do not exist, but in which " -"products can be placed when they are not physically in an inventory yet (or " -"anymore). They come in handy when you want to place lost products out of " -"your stock (in the **Inventory loss**), or when you want to take into " -"account products that are on their way to your warehouse (**Procurements**)." -msgstr "" -" **虚拟库位** 是指在你仓库中没有实际物理地方的位置, 但是库存中没有实际存放(或是不再有)的产品可以放置在这里。当你要把产品移出你的库存(在 " -"**盘点库位** ), 或者要计算那些已经采购但是还在路途中( **补货库位** )没有到你的仓库的产品的数量的时候, 就可以很方便的使用这种库位。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:31 -msgid "" -"In Odoo, locations are structured hierarchically. You can structure your " -"locations as a tree, dependent on a parent-child relationship. This gives " -"you more detailed levels of analysis of your stock operations and the " -"organization of your warehouses." -msgstr "" -"在Odoo中, 库位按照级别进行架构组织。根据库位之间的父－子关系, " -"你可以把库位配置为一个树形结构。这能让你对库存操作进行详细的分析以及对仓库进行更好的管理。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:37 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:44 -msgid ":doc:`warehouse_creation`" -msgstr ":doc:`warehouse_creation` " - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/difference_warehouse_location.rst:38 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:48 -msgid ":doc:`location_creation`" -msgstr ":doc:`location_creation` " - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:3 -msgid "How to create a new location?" -msgstr "如何创建新的位置？" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:9 -msgid "Creating a new location" -msgstr "创建新库位" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:11 -msgid "" -"In order to be able to create new locations, you must allow the system to " -"manage multiple locations. In the **Inventory** module, open the menu " -":menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`. In the **Location & Warehouse**" -" section, tick the **Manage several locations per warehouse** box, then " -"click on **Apply**." -msgstr "" -"为了能创建一个新的库位, 你需要能让系统进行多库位管理。在 **库存** 模块中, 打开菜单 :menuselection:`配置 -->设置` 。在 " -"**库位＆仓库** 的地方选择 **仓库进行多库位管理** , 然后点击 **应用** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:20 -msgid "" -"In the **Inventory** module, open :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Warehouse Management --> Locations` In the Locations window, click on " -"**Create**." -msgstr "" -"在 **库存** 模块中, 打开 :menuselection:`配置 -->仓库管理 -->库位` , 在库位窗口下, 点击 **创建** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:24 -msgid "" -"Type the name of the location in the **Location Name** field, and select the" -" **Parent Location** in the list. The parent location can be a physical, " -"partner or virtual location, and you can add as many sub-locations as needed" -" to a location." -msgstr "" -"在 **库位名称** 字段键入库位的名称。并在列表中选择 **父库位** 。父库位可以是一个物理库位或者虚拟库位, " -"然后你可以按照需要添加足够多的下级库位。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:29 -msgid "" -"You can also fill in the **Additional Information** fields and add a note to" -" describe your location." -msgstr "你还可以在 **额外信息** 字段输入并为该库位添加一段描述。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:35 -msgid "When you are finished, click on **Save**." -msgstr "完成后, 点击 **保存** ." - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:38 -msgid "" -"A warehouse also corresponds to a location. As the locations are " -"hierarchical, Odoo will create the parent location of the warehouse, " -"containing all the sublocations in it." -msgstr "一个仓库和一个库位对应, 因为库位是分级的, Odoo会自动的创建一个仓库的父库位, 随后所有的库位在该库位下。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/location_creation.rst:43 -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:47 -msgid ":doc:`difference_warehouse_location`" -msgstr ":doc:`difference_warehouse_location` " - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:3 -msgid "How to create a new warehouse?" -msgstr "如何创建一个新的仓库" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:11 -msgid "" -"In order to be able to create a new warehouse, you must allow the system to " -"manage multiple locations. In the **Inventory** module, open the menu " -":menuselection:`Settings --> Configuration`. In the **Location & Warehouse**" -" section, tick the **Manage several locations per warehouse** box, then " -"click on **apply**." -msgstr "" -"为了能够床架一个新的仓库, 你必须要让系统允许管理多库位。在 **库存** 模块下, 打开菜单 :menuselection:`设置 -->配置` 。在" -" **库位&仓库** 位置, 点选 **仓库多位置管理** 的勾选框。然后点击 **应用** 。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:20 -msgid "" -"Open the menu :menuselection:`Configuration --> Warehouse Management --> " -"Warehouses`" -msgstr "打开菜单 :menuselection:`配置 -->仓库管理 -->仓库` " - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:22 -msgid "" -"In the warehouses screen, click on **Create**. A new screen appears, with 3 " -"fields :" -msgstr "在仓库页面中, 点击 **创建** , 一个新的带有3个字段的页面会出来 :" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:25 -msgid "In **Warehouse Name**, insert the full name of the warehouse." -msgstr "在 **仓库名称** , 插入仓库的全名。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:27 -msgid "" -"In the **Short Name** field, insert a 5-characters code for your warehouse. " -"Keep in mind that this code is the one that will appear in the lists, so " -"make sure you choose a name that is easy to understand and easy to enter." -msgstr "在 **简称** 字段, 输入一个仓库的5-位编码。注意该编码会显示在库位的列表中, 所以务必确保该简称能简明且清晰的代表你的仓库。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:32 -msgid "" -"In the **Address** field, you can select an existing company or create one " -"on-the-go. Therefore, the address of your warehouse will be the same as the " -"one of the company you selected. You can also leave this field empty and " -"edit it afterwards." -msgstr "" -"在 **地址** 字段, 你可以选择一个系统存在的公司或者顺手创建一个新的。因此, 你的仓库的地址回合你所选公司的地址一样。你还可以把该字段留空, " -"然后稍后进行编辑。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:40 -msgid "Click on **Save** to finish configuring your new warehouse." -msgstr "点击 **保存** 完成新仓库的配置。" - -#: ../../inventory/settings/warehouses/warehouse_creation.rst:43 -msgid "" -"When you create a warehouse, the system will create the necessary picking " -"types and main child locations for this main location in the background." -msgstr "当你创建了仓库, 系统会自动的在后台创建调拨类型以及该主要库位的下级库位。" +#: ../../inventory/shipping.rst:3 +msgid "Shipping" +msgstr "送货" #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation.rst:3 msgid "Shipping Operations" @@ -7340,8 +5874,9 @@ msgstr "价格会在你 **保存** 订单的时候计算出来。确认订单并 #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:64 msgid "" -"The real shipping cost are computed when the delivery order is validated." -msgstr "在发货单确认的时候, 实际的成本就会自动计算。" +"The real shipping cost is computed when the delivery order is validated, you" +" can see the real cost in the chatter of the delivery order." +msgstr "" #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/invoicing.rst:70 msgid "" @@ -7395,6 +5930,11 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" "在 **库存** 模块, 点击 :menuselection:`配置 -->设置` , 在 **货代接口** 的下方标识你想要集成的货运公司 :" +#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:27 +#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:26 +msgid "Then click on **Apply**." +msgstr "点击 **应用** 。" + #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:30 #: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:34 #: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:33 @@ -7463,11 +6003,6 @@ msgid "" "data**." msgstr "要查看你的信息, 进入 **设置** 应用并点选 **通用设置** 。点击第一个链接 **配置公司信息** 。" -#: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:68 -#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:90 -msgid "Product configuration" -msgstr "产品配置" - #: ../../inventory/shipping/operation/labels.rst:70 #: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/third_party_shipper.rst:92 msgid "" @@ -7690,6 +6225,10 @@ msgstr "" "你可以把Odoo和外部的货代公司进行集成, 这样可以计算实际的价格, 包装, 以及处理打印装箱单的标签等。参照 " ":doc:`third_party_shipper` " +#: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:74 +msgid "Delivery process" +msgstr "交货流程" + #: ../../inventory/shipping/setup/delivery_method.rst:82 msgid "" "You can now choose the **Delivery Method** on your sale order. If you want " diff --git a/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po index cb5677f84..bf86ff635 100644 --- a/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po +++ b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/iot.po @@ -3,14 +3,25 @@ # This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # +# Translators: +# mrshelly , 2019 +# Connie Xiao , 2019 +# fausthuang, 2019 +# 山西清水欧度(QQ:54773801) <54773801@qq.com>, 2019 +# LINYUN TONG , 2019 +# F4NNIU , 2019 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Jeffery CHEN , 2019 +# 敬雲 林 , 2019 +# #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 11.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-10-19 10:03+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" -"Last-Translator: F4NNIU , 2018\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: 敬雲 林 , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Chinese (China) (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/zh_CN/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -22,66 +33,70 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Internet of Things (IoT)" msgstr "物联网（IoT）" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:3 +#: ../../iot/config.rst:3 +msgid "Configuration" +msgstr "基础配置" + +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:3 msgid "Connect an IoT Box to your database" msgstr "将 IoT 盒子连接到你的数据库" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:5 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:5 msgid "Install the Internet of Things (IoT) App on your Odoo Database." msgstr "在你的 Odoo 数据库中安装物联网（IoT）应用" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:10 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:10 msgid "Go in the IoT App and click on Connect on the IoT Boxes page." msgstr "进入 IoT 应用并单击 IoT 盒子页面上的 Connect 链接。" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:15 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:15 msgid "Follow the steps to connect your IoT Box." msgstr "按步骤连接到你的 IoT 盒子。" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:21 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:21 msgid "Ethernet Connection" msgstr "以太网连接" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:23 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:23 msgid "" "Connect to the IoT Box all the devices that have to be connected with cables" " (ethernet, usb devices, etc.)." msgstr "将所有必须使用线缆连接的设备（如：网络、USB 设备等）插入 IoT 盒子。" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:26 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:26 msgid "Power on the IoT Box." msgstr "打开 IoT 盒子的电源" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:28 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:28 msgid "Then click on the Scan button." msgstr "然后点击“扫描”按钮。" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:34 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:34 msgid "WiFi Connection" msgstr "WiFi 连接" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:36 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:36 msgid "Power on the IoT Box" msgstr "打开 IoT 盒子的电源" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:38 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:38 msgid "Copy the token" msgstr "复制 Token" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:43 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:43 msgid "" "Connect to the IoT Box WiFi Network (make sure there is no ethernet cable " "plugged in your computer)." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:49 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:49 msgid "" "You will be redirected to the IoT Box Homepage (if it doesn't work, connect " "to the IP address of the box). Give a name to your IoT Box (not required) " "and paste the token, then click on next." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:57 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:57 msgid "" "If you are on Runbot, do not forget to add the -all or -base in the token " "(e.g. this token **http://375228-saas-11-5-iot-" @@ -89,107 +104,181 @@ msgid "" "**http://375228-saas-11-5-iot-f3f920-all.runbot16.odoo.com\\|4957098401**)." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:63 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:63 msgid "" "Choose the WiFi network you want to connect with (enter the password if " "there is one) and click on Submit. Wait a few seconds before being " "redirected to your database." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:70 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:70 msgid "You should now see the IoT Box." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/connect.rst:76 +#: ../../iot/config/connect.rst:76 msgid "IoT Box Schema" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:3 +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:3 +msgid "Flashing your SD Card" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In some case, you may need to reflash your IoT Box’s SD Card to benefit from" +" our latest updates." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:9 +msgid "Updating your SD Card with Etcher" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:11 +msgid "" +"Go to Balena’s website and download `Etcher `__, " +"It’s a free and open-source utility used for burning image files. Install " +"and launch it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Now, download the latest image `here " +"`__, and extract it from the " +"zip file. Then, open *Etcher* and select the image. Select the drive to " +"flash (where your SD Card is) and click on *Flash*!." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/config/flash_sdcard.rst:19 +msgid "" +"Now, your image will be automatically updated. You just have to wait 5 " +"minutes for it to finish." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:3 +msgid "IoT Box not found" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When using your IoT Box, a common issue you might encounter is that your box" +" is not found on your database. Fortunately, there are a few easy steps you " +"can follow to find your IoT box." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:10 +msgid "HTTPS Issues" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:12 +msgid "Your IoT Box is not found? You probably have https issues!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:14 +msgid "" +"To check it, go to your database and verify if your database address starts " +"with an https (like https://www.odoo.com). If this is the case, then you may" +" have problems with your IoT Box image. It should be version 18.12 or later." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:19 +msgid "" +"If your IoT Box image is from an earlier version, then you will have to " +"reflash the SD card of your IoT Box to update the image (the latest image " +"can be found `here `__)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/config/iot_notfound.rst:23 +msgid "" +"You can find the documentation about SD card flashing here (`here " +"`__)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:3 msgid "Use the IoT Box for the PoS" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:9 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:9 msgid "Prerequisites" msgstr "先决条件" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:11 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:11 msgid "Before starting, make sure you have the following:" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:13 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:13 msgid "An IoT Box" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:15 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:15 msgid "A 2A Power adapter with pi 3 b+ 2.5 A" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:17 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:17 msgid "A computer or tablet with an up-to-date web browser" msgstr "一台带最新的Web浏览器的计算机或平板电脑。" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:19 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:19 msgid "" "A running SaaS or Odoo instance with the Point of Sale and IoT apps " "installed" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:22 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:22 msgid "A local network setup with DHCP (this is the default setting)" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:24 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:24 msgid "" "An Epson USB TM-T20 Printer or another ESC/POS compatible printer " "(officially supported printers are listed at the `POS Hardware page " "`__)" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:28 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:28 msgid "A Honeywell Eclipse USB Barcode Scanner or another compatible scanner" msgstr "霍尼韦尔的Eclipse USB条码扫描仪或其他兼容的扫描仪" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:30 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:30 msgid "An Epson compatible cash drawer" msgstr "爱普生兼容钱箱" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:32 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:32 msgid "An RJ45 Ethernet Cable (optional, WiFi is built in)" msgstr "RJ45 网线（内置 WiFi 可选）" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:35 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:35 msgid "Set Up" msgstr "设置" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:37 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:37 msgid "" "To connect hardware to the PoS, the first step is to connect an IoT Box to " "your database. For this, follow this `documentation " "`__." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:44 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:44 msgid "Then, you have to connect the peripheral devices to your IoT Box." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:46 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:46 msgid "" "Officially supported hardware is listed on `the POS Hardware page " "`__, but other hardware" " might work as well." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:50 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:50 msgid "**Printer**: Connect an ESC/POS printer to a USB port and power it on." msgstr " **打印机**: 一个ESC/ POS打印机连接到USB端口, 并接通电源。" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:53 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:53 msgid "" "**Cash drawer**: The cash drawer should be connected to the printer with an " "RJ25 cable." msgstr " **钱箱**: 钱箱应连接用RJ25电缆连接打印机。" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:56 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:56 msgid "" "**Barcode scanner**: Connect your barcode scanner. In order for your barcode" " scanner to be compatible it must behave as a keyboard and must be " @@ -200,18 +289,18 @@ msgstr "" " **条形码扫描仪**: 连接条形码扫描器。为了使您的条形码扫描仪是兼容的, 必须表现为键盘, 必须配置 **US QWERTY** " "。它还必须一个输入字符(键码28)结束条形码。这很可能是你的条码扫描仪的默认配置。" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:62 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:62 msgid "**Scale**: Connect your scale and power it on." msgstr " **电子磅秤**: 连接你的电子磅秤和接通电源。" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:64 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:64 msgid "" "**Ethernet**: If you do not wish to use Wi-Fi, plug in the Ethernet cable. " "Make sure this will connect the IoT Box to the same network as your POS " "device." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:68 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:68 msgid "" "**Wi-Fi**: The current version of the IoT Box has Wi-Fi built in. Make sure " "not to plug in an Ethernet cable when booting, because all Wi-Fi " @@ -219,26 +308,26 @@ msgid "" "on boot." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:73 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:73 msgid "" "Once it's done, you can connect the IoT Box to your PoS. For this, go in " "Point of Sale > Configuration > PoS, tick the box \"IoT Box\" and select the" " IoT Box you want to connect with. Save the changes." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:77 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:77 msgid "Set up is done, you can launch a new PoS Session." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:80 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:80 msgid "Troubleshoot" msgstr "疑难解答" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:83 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:83 msgid "The PoS cannot connect to the IoT Box" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:85 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:85 msgid "" "The easiest way to make sure the IoT Box is properly set-up is to turn it on" " with the printer plugged in as it will print a receipt indicating any error" @@ -246,90 +335,90 @@ msgid "" "receipt is printed, check the following steps:" msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:91 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:91 msgid "" "Make sure the IoT Box is powered on, indicated by a brightly lit red status " "LED." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:94 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:94 msgid "" "Make sure the IoT Box is ready, this is indicated by a brightly lit green " "status LED just next to the red power status LED. The IoT Box should be " "ready ~2 minutes after it is started." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:98 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:98 msgid "" "Make sure the IoT Box is connected to the same network as your POS device. " "Both the device and the IoT Box should be visible in the list of connected " "devices on your network router." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:102 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:102 msgid "" "If you specified the IoT Box's IP address in the configuration, make sure it" " corresponds to the ip address printed on the IoT Box's status receipt." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:106 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:106 msgid "Make sure that the POS is not loaded over HTTPS." msgstr "确认 POS 部分未开启 HTTPS 访问." -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:108 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:108 msgid "" "A bug in Firefox's HTTP implementation might prevent the autodiscovery from " "working reliably. You could also manually set up the IoT Box's IP address in" " the POS configuration." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:113 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:113 msgid "The Barcode Scanner is not working" msgstr "条码枪不能使用" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:115 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:115 msgid "" "The barcode scanner must be configured in US QWERTY and emit an Enter after " "each barcode. This is the default configuration of most barcode readers. " "Refer to the barcode reader documentation for more information." msgstr "在US QWERTY中配置条形码扫描仪, 扫码后输入。这是大多数条形码扫描仪的默认配置。有关更多信息,请参阅条形码文档。" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:120 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:120 msgid "" "The IoT Box needs a 2A power supply to work with some barcode scanners. If " "you are not using the provided power supply, make sure the one you use has " "enough power." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:124 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:124 msgid "" "Some barcode scanners will need more than 2A and will not work, or will work" " unreliably, even with the provided power supply. In those case you can plug" " the barcode scanner in a self-powered USB hub." msgstr "一些条形码扫描仪将需要超过2A的电源, 有时即使提供了电源也不可靠。在这些情况下,你可以把条形码扫描器连接在自供电的USB集线器上。" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:129 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:129 msgid "" "Some poorly built barcode scanners do not advertise themselves as barcode " "scanners but as a usb keyboard instead, and will not be recognized by the " "IoT Box." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:134 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:134 msgid "The Barcode Scanner is not working reliably" msgstr "条码枪确实不能使用" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:136 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:136 msgid "" "Make sure that no more than one device with 'Scan via Proxy'/'Barcode " "Scanner' enabled are connected to the IoT Box at the same time." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:140 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:140 msgid "Printing the receipt takes too much time" msgstr "打印小票太慢" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:142 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:142 msgid "" "A small delay before the first print is expected, as the IoT Box will do " "some preprocessing to speed up the next printings. If you suffer delays " @@ -337,33 +426,404 @@ msgid "" "and the IoT Box." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:148 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:148 msgid "Some characters are not correctly printed on the receipt" msgstr "收据上打印出来的字母有些错误" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:150 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:150 msgid "" "The IoT Box does not support all languages and characters. It currently " "supports Latin and Cyrillic based scripts, with basic Japanese support." msgstr "" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:155 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:155 msgid "The printer is offline" msgstr "打印机处于离线" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:157 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:157 msgid "" "Make sure the printer is connected, powered, has enough paper and has its " "lid closed, and is not reporting an error. If the error persists, please " "contact support." msgstr "确保打印机是连接, 有电源,有足够的纸, 它的盖子是关闭的, 并且没有报告错误。如果错误出现, 请联系技术支持。" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:162 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:162 msgid "The cashdrawer does not open" msgstr "钱箱无法打开" -#: ../../iot/pos.rst:164 +#: ../../iot/config/pos.rst:164 msgid "" "The cashdrawer should be connected to the printer and should be activated in" " the POS configuration." msgstr "现金盒应该连到打印机, 在POS中应将设置激活。" + +#: ../../iot/devices.rst:3 +msgid "Devices" +msgstr "设备" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Camera" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When using your *IoT Box* in Odoo, you could need to use a camera. As it can" +" be done in a few steps, this device is really easy to configure. Then, you " +"can use it in your manufacturing process and link it to a control point. " +"Doing so will allow you to take pictures when you reach the chosen quality " +"control point." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:12 ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:13 +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:11 +msgid "Connection" +msgstr "连接" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:14 +msgid "" +"To connect the camera to the *IoT Box*, simply combine the two by cable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:18 +msgid "In some cases, a serial to USB adapter could be needed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:20 +msgid "" +"If your camera is a `*supported one* `__, there is no need to set up anything as it will be detected as " +"soon as it is connected." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:27 +msgid "" +"In some cases, you could need to restart the box and download your camera’s " +"drivers from the box. To do so, go to your *IoT Box Home Page* and click on " +"*drivers list*. Then, click on load drivers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:35 +msgid "Link a Camera to a Quality Control Point" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:38 ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:42 +msgid "With the Manufacturing app" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:40 +msgid "" +"In your *Quality app*, you can setup the device on a *Quality Control " +"Point*. Go to the *Control Points* menu, under *Quality Control* and open " +"the control point you want to link with the camera." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:44 +msgid "" +"Now, you can edit the control point and select the device from the dropdown " +"list. Now, hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/camera.rst:50 +msgid "" +"Then, your camera can be used with the picked *Control Point*. During the " +"manufacturing process, reaching the *Quality Control Point* you chose before" +" will allow you to take a picture." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Footswitch" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When working, it is always better to have your two hands available. Using " +"Odoo’s *IoT Box* and a footswitch will allow it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:8 +msgid "" +"In fact, you will be able to go from one screen to another by using your " +"foot and the footswitch. Really convenient, it can be configured in a few " +"steps." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Connecting the footswitch to the *IoT Box* is easy, you just have to combine" +" the two by cable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:19 +msgid "In some cases, a serial to USB adapter may be needed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:21 +msgid "" +"If your footswitch is a `supported one `__, there is no need to set up anything since it will be " +"automatically detected when connected." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:28 +msgid "" +"If it is not a supported one, you may need to restart the box and download " +"your footswitch’s drivers from the box. To do so, go to the *IoT Box Home " +"Page* and click on *drivers list*. Then, click on load drivers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:37 +msgid "Link a Footswitch to a Workcenter" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:39 +msgid "" +"To link the footswitch to an action, it needs to be configured on a " +"workcenter. Go to the workcenter you want to use the footswitch in and add " +"the device in the *IoT Triggers* tab. Then, you can link it to an action and" +" also add a key to trigger it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:47 +msgid "" +"Note that the one that is first in the list will be chosen. So, the order " +"matters! In the picture above, using the footswitch will, for example, " +"automatically skip the current part of the process you work on." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/footswitch.rst:52 +msgid "" +"When you are on the work order screen, a status button indicates if you are " +"correctly connected to the footswitch." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Measurement Tool" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:5 +msgid "" +"With Odoo’s *IoT Box*, it is possible to connect measurement tools to your " +"database. Find the list of supported devices here: `Supported devices " +"`__,." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:10 +msgid "Connect in USB" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:12 +msgid "" +"To add a device connected by USB, just plug the USB cable in the *IoT Box*, " +"restart the Box and the device should appear in your Odoo database." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:19 +msgid "" +"If the device is not found, make sure the drivers have well been loaded on " +"your IoT Box. For this, connect to the *IoT Box Homepage* and click on load " +"drivers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:27 +msgid "Connect in Bluetooth" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:29 +msgid "" +"Activate the Bluetooth on your device (see your device manual for further " +"explanation) and the IoT Box will automatically try to connect to the " +"device." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:33 +msgid "Here is an example of what it should look like:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:39 +msgid "Link a measurement tool to a quality control point" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:44 +msgid "" +"In your *Quality app*, you can setup a device on your *Quality Control " +"Points*. To do so, go to the *Control Points* menu, under *Quality Control* " +"and open the control point to which you want to assign a measurement tool." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:49 +msgid "" +"Now, you can edit the control point and choose the device from the dropdown " +"list. Then, hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/measurement_tool.rst:55 +msgid "" +"Now, your measurement tool is linked to the chosen *Control Point*. The " +"value, which needs to be changed manually, will be automatically updated " +"while the tool is being used." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Printer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:5 +msgid "" +"When using your *IoT Box* in Odoo, you could need to use a printer. Doing so" +" is easy and convenient as it can be done in a few steps. Then, you can use " +"it to print receipts, orders or even reports in different Odoo apps." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:13 +msgid "" +"To connect the printer to the *IoT Box*, you just have to combine the two by" +" cable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:17 +msgid "Sometimes, a serial to USB adapter may be needed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:19 +msgid "" +"If your printer is a `supported one `__, there is no need to set up anything because it will be " +"automatically detected as soon as it is connected." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:24 +msgid "The printer can take up to two minutes to appear in your devices list." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:29 +msgid "" +"In some cases, you may need to restart the box and download your printer’s " +"drivers from the box. To do so, go to the *IoT Box Home Page* and click on " +"*drivers list*. Then, click on load drivers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:37 +msgid "Link the Printer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:40 +msgid "To Work Orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:42 +msgid "" +"You can link *Work Orders* to printers via a *Quality Control Point* to " +"print labels for manufactured products." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:45 +msgid "" +"To do so, you need to create a *Quality Control Point* from the *Quality* " +"app. Then, you can select the correct manufacturing operation and the work " +"order operation. In type, choose *Print Label* and hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Now, each time you reach the quality control point for the chosen product, a" +" *Print Label* button will appear." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:60 +msgid "To Reports" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:62 +msgid "" +"You can also link a type of report to a certain printer. In the *IoT* app, " +"go to the *Devices* menu and select the printer you want to set up." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:69 +msgid "Now, go to the *Printer Reports* tab." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:74 +msgid "" +"Hit edit and then, click on *Add a line*. In the window that shows up, check" +" all the types of reports that should be linked to this printer. Click on " +"select and save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:81 +msgid "" +"Now, each time you click on *Print* in the control panel, instead of " +"downloading a PDF, it will send it to the selected printer and automatically" +" print it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:86 +msgid "Print Receipts from the PoS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:88 +msgid "" +"You can link a printer to your *Point of Sale* app so you can print receipts" +" directly from your *PoS*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:91 +msgid "" +"Doing so is really easy. Go to your *Point of Sale* app and open your *PoS* " +"settings, under *Configuration*. There, click on *Edit* and check the *IoT " +"Box* feature. Then, enable the *Receipt Printer*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:98 +msgid "" +"Now, on your *PoS* view, you will be able to print different kinds of " +"tickets: **receipts**, **sale details** and **bills**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:101 +msgid "" +"For the receipt, it will be printed once the order is validated. The process" +" is automated when you enable the feature in your *PoS*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:104 +msgid "" +"Sales details can be printed by clicking on the printer icon on the navbar " +"at the top of the *PoS*. It will print the details of the sales of the " +"current day." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:111 +msgid "" +"As for the bill, it is only available in restaurant mode. In your restaurant" +" settings, activate bills and a *Bill* button will appear in the left panel." +" Click on it and it will print the bill." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:119 +msgid "Print Orders in the kitchen" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:121 +msgid "In restaurant mode, you can send order tickets to the kitchen." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:123 +msgid "" +"To do so, go to the *PoS* app and open your *PoS* settings. Then, tick " +"*Order Printer*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:129 +msgid "" +"Now, go to the *Printers* menu. Hit create and select the *IoT Box* with all" +" the categories of product that should be printed in the *Printer Product " +"Categories* field." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../iot/devices/printer.rst:136 +msgid "" +"In the *PoS*, when you add or remove a product from one of the selected " +"categories, the button *Order* will be green. If you click on it, a ticket " +"will be printed." +msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po index 3e551ba3e..bb5a16ba7 100644 --- a/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po +++ b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/manufacturing.po @@ -3,14 +3,21 @@ # This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # +# Translators: +# r <263737@qq.com>, 2019 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Jeffery CHEN , 2019 +# liAnGjiA , 2019 +# Shane Tsoi , 2019 +# #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 11.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-10-19 10:03+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" -"Last-Translator: Shane Tsoi , 2018\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Shane Tsoi , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Chinese (China) (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/zh_CN/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -26,179 +33,520 @@ msgstr "制造" msgid "Manufacturing Management" msgstr "制造管理" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:3 +msgid "Using an alternative Work Center" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:5 +msgid "" +"For many manufacturing companies, a common issue is to have to manufacture, " +"at the same time, several products usually produced at the same work center." +" If in practice, employees can manufacture the goods at another work center," +" it is not that simple." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:10 +msgid "" +"You need to keep track of the job: which work center has been used and when," +" so you can schedule maintenance efficiently. With Odoo, you can configure " +"it so you can keep tracking manufacturing orders and your employees have an " +"alternative work center to use." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:15 +msgid "" +"This way, your process becomes more efficient, and less non-productive time " +"will be noticed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:20 +msgid "Configure your Work Centers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:22 +msgid "" +"The first thing to do is to go to the *Manufacturing* app settings. Then, " +"enable the *Work Orders* feature and hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:30 +msgid "" +"Now, go to the *Work Centers* menu under *Master Data* and create two new " +"work centers. Add the second work centers as an alternative to the first and" +" vice versa." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:39 +msgid "" +"The next step is to create your *routing*. Add your work center and an " +"operation to it before saving." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:47 +msgid "" +"Then, you can create your *Bill of Materials* and add components and routing" +" to it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:56 +msgid "Create your Work Orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:58 +msgid "" +"Now that everything is configured, you can create your *Work Orders*. Go to " +"the *Manufacturing Orders* menu and hit *Create*. There, add your product " +"and plan it. In the *Work Orders* list, you can find it ready to be " +"assembled." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:68 +msgid "" +"Each new *Work Order*, which will be created before the end of the first " +"one, will be scheduled at the alternative work center you configured." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/alternative_wc.rst:78 +msgid "" +"Keep in mind that, if you add time after production to your work center, you" +" may have work orders scheduled for your alternative work center even if the" +" usual one is free." +msgstr "" + #: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:3 -msgid "How to create a Bill of Materials" -msgstr "如何创建物料清单" +msgid "Create Bills of Materials" +msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:5 msgid "" -"A bill of materials (BoM) is a document that describes the component " -"products, the quantity of each component, and the process required to " -"manufacture a product, including a routing and individual steps." -msgstr "物料清单 (BoM) 是描述部件产品、每个部件的数量，以及制造产品（包括路由和每个步骤）过程的文件。" +"A *Bill of Materials* is a document defining the quantity of each component " +"required to manufacture a finished product. It also includes the routing and" +" individual steps of the manufacturing process." +msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:9 msgid "" -"In Odoo, each product may have multiple BoMs associated with it, but a BoM " -"can only be associated with a single product. A single BoM can, however, " -"describe multiple variants of the same product." -msgstr "在Odoo中，每个产品可能有多个BoM与其关联，但一个BoM只能与单个产品相关联。而单个BoM可以描述同一产品的多个变量。" +"With Odoo, you can link multiple BoMs to each product and use it to describe" +" multiple variants of them. Each BoM will, yet, be associated with one " +"product only." +msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:14 -msgid "Setting up a Basic BoM" -msgstr "设置基本的BoM" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:16 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:13 msgid "" -"If you choose to manage your manufacturing operations using manufacturing " -"orders only, you will define basic bills of materials without routings." +"This feature will help optimize your manufacturing process while saving you " +"time." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:17 +msgid "Setting up a BoM" msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:19 msgid "" -"Before creating your first bill of materials, you will need to create a " -"product and at least one component (components are considered products in " -"Odoo). You can do so from :menuselection:`Master Data --> Products`, or on " -"the fly from the relevant fields on the BoM form. Review the Inventory " -"chapter for more information about configuring products. Once you have " -"created a product and at least one component, select them from the relevant " -"dropdown menus to add them to your bill of materials. A new bill of " -"materials can be created from :menuselection:`Master Data --> Bills of " -"Materials`, or using the button on the top of the product form." +"You can use BoMs without routings. You will use this if you choose to manage" +" your manufacturing operations using manufacturing orders only. In other " +"words, you choose to realize your manufacturing process in one step and do " +"not track the steps the product goes through." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:24 +msgid "" +"Before creating your *BoM*, you have to create the product using the *BoM* " +"and, at least, one of the components. Go to the *Master Data* menu > " +"*Products* and create both the finished product and the component." msgstr "" -"创建你的第一份物料清单前，你需要创建至少一个部件（在Odoo中也被认为是产品），方法是从 " -":menuselection:`主数据->产品，中选择或在系统运行时从BoM表格的相关字段中选择。一旦创建好一个产品和至少一个部件后，从相关的下拉菜单中选择它们并添加到你的物料清单。新的物料单可从menuselection中创建，选择主数据->物料清单，或使用产品表单之上的按钮进行创建。" #: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:29 msgid "" -"Under the **Miscellaneous** tab, you can fill additional fields. " -"**Sequence** defines the order in which your BoMs will be selected for " -"production orders, with lower numbers having higher priority. **Version** " -"allows you to track changes to your BoM over time." +"Once done, go to the *Bills of Materials* menu under *Master Data*. Now, " +"create it. Choose the product from the dropdown menu and add your components" +" and the quantity. In this case, keep the default *BoM* type, which is " +"*Manufacture this Product*." msgstr "" -"在**杂项**页签下填写额外的字段。**顺序**定义了BoM被选择为生产订单的顺序，数字越小优先级越高。**版本**允许你跟踪BoM在不同时间的版本号变化。" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:35 -msgid "Adding a Routing to a BoM" -msgstr "在BoM中添加路由" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:38 +msgid "Using the same BoM to describe Variants" +msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:37 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:40 msgid "" -"A routing defines a series of operations required to manufacture a product " -"and the work center at which each operation is performed. A routing may be " -"added to multiple BoMs, though a BoM may only have one routing. For more " -"information about configuring routings, review the chapter on routings." +"As said above, you can use *BoM* for *Product Variants*. It is basically the" +" same as for the standard product." msgstr "" -"路由定义制造一个产品所需的一系列操作，以及每个操作执行的工作中心。一个路由可以添加到多个BoM中，而后者每个只能有一个路由。路由配置的更多信息，请参阅路由一章。" #: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:43 msgid "" -"After enabling routings from :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`, " -"you will be able to add a routing to a bill of materials by selecting a " -"routing from the dropdown list or creating one on the fly." -msgstr "启用路由的方法 :menuselection:`配置 -->设置，然后当系统运行时从下拉清单中选择一个路由，即可将路由添加到物料清单。" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:47 -msgid "" -"You may define the work operation or step in which each component is " -"consumed using the field, **Consumed in Operation** under the **Components**" -" tab. Similarly, you can define the operation at which the product will be " -"produced under the **Miscellaneous** tab using the field **Produced at " -"Operation**. If this field is left blank, the products will be " -"consumed/produced at the final operation in the routing." +"If your *BoM* is for one variant only, then specify which one in the " +"*Product Variant* field. If not, specify the variant it is consumed for on " +"each component line. You can add several variants for each component." msgstr "" -"通过**组件**下方的**在工序中消费**字段定义工序或步骤。同样，也可以用**在操作中生产**字段（位于**杂项**页签下）定义产品被生产的操作。如果不填这个字段，产品将在路由的最后操作中被消耗/生产。" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:58 -msgid "Adding Byproducts to a BoM" -msgstr "添加副产品到BoM" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:52 +msgid "Adding a routing" +msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:60 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:54 msgid "" -"In Odoo, a byproduct is any product produced by a BoM in addition to the " -"primary product." -msgstr "副产品指在Odoo中，BoM生产的任何主产品之外的产品。" +"You can add routing to your *BoM*. You will do this if you need to define a " +"series of operations required by your manufacturing process. To use it, " +"enable the *Work Orders* feature in the *Manufacturing* app settings." +msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:63 msgid "" -"To add byproducts to a BoM, you will first need to enable them from " -":menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`." -msgstr "如需将副产品添加到BoM，首先要在 :menuselection:`配置->设置，中选择启用它们。" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:69 -msgid "" -"Once byproducts are enabled, you can add them to your bills of materials " -"under the **Byproducts** tab of the bill of materials. You can add any " -"product or products as byproducts. Byproducts are produced in the same step " -"of the routing as the primary product of the BoM." +"Each *BoM* can have only one routing while each routing can be used multiple" +" times." msgstr "" -"副产品启用后，即可被添加到物料清单**副产品**页签下的物料清单了。你可将任何产品（一个或多个）作为副产品添加。副产品的生产过程与BoM中主产品的路由一致。" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:78 -msgid "Setting up a BoM for a Product With Sub-Assemblies" -msgstr "为产品设置一个带分组件的BoM" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:80 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:5 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:66 msgid "" -"A subassembly is a manufactured product which is intended to be used as a " -"component of another manufactured product. You may wish to employ sub-" -"assemblies to simplify a complex BoM, to more accurately represent your " -"manufacturing flow, or to use the same subassembly in multiple BoMs. A BoM " -"that employs subassemblies is often referred to as a multi-level BoM." +"Now that you have created your routing, add it to your *BoM*. You can select" +" when, in the work operations, your components are consumed with the " +"dropdown menu." msgstr "" -"分组件是一种用于另一制成品部件的制成品。你可能想用分组件来简化一个复杂的BoM、更精确地表示你的制造流，或在多个BoM中使用相同的分组件。BoM使用分组件通常指多级BoM。" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:87 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:12 -msgid "" -"Multi-level bills of materials in Odoo are accomplished by creating a top-" -"level BoM and subassembly BoMs. Next, the procurement route of the " -"subassembly product is defined. This ensures that every time a manufacturing" -" order for the top-level product is created, a manufacturing order for each " -"subassembly is created as well." +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:74 +msgid "Adding By-Products" msgstr "" -"Odoo中的多级物料清单可通过创建顶级BoM和分组件BoM完成。下一步定义分组件产品的采购路线，以确保每次创建了顶级产品的制造订单时，能同时创建每个分组件的制造订单。" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:94 -msgid "Configure the Top-Level Product BoM" -msgstr "配置顶级产品BoM" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:96 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:21 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:76 msgid "" -"To configure a multi-level BoM, create the top-level product and its BoM. " -"Include any subassemblies in the list of components. Create a BoM for each " -"subassembly as you would for any product." -msgstr "为配置多级BoM，请创建顶极产品及其BoM。将所有分组件包括到部件清单中。为每个分组件创建一个BoM（类似为每个产品创建BoM）。" +"In Odoo, a *by-product* is any product produced by a *BoM* in addition to " +"the primary product." +msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:104 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:29 -msgid "Configure the Subassembly Product Data" -msgstr "配置分组件产品数据" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:106 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:31 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:79 msgid "" -"On the product form of the subassembly, you must select the routes " -"**Manufacture** and **Make To Order**. The **Manufacture** route takes " -"precedence over the **Buy** route, so selecting the latter will have no " -"effect." -msgstr "在分组件的产品表中，必须选择**制造**和**按需补货**路由。**制造**路由的优先级高于**购买**路由，因此选后者是无效的。" +"To add *by-products* to a *BoM*, you will first need to enable them from the" +" *Manufacturing* app settings." +msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:114 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:39 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:85 msgid "" -"If you would like to be able to purchase the subassembly in addition to " -"manufacturing it, select **Can be Purchased**. All other fields on the " -"subassembly product form may be configured according to your preference." -msgstr "如需在制造之外采购一些组件，选择**可以购买**。分组件产品表单中的所有其他字段都可根据你的偏好配置。" +"Once the feature is enabled, you can add your *By-Products* to your *BoMs*. " +"You can add as many *By-Products* as you want. Just keep in mind that you " +"need to register during which operation your by-product is produced." +msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:120 -msgid "Using a Single BoM to Describe Several Variants of a Single Product" -msgstr "使用单个的BoM描述单一产品的多个变体" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:3 +msgid "Use flexible components consumption" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Sometimes, you might need more components than usual to manufacture a " +"product. Let’s say that you produce a desk combination of 4 desks and two " +"chairs but your customer asks you one more desk. Alright, you can do that. " +"But you will need to register it!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:10 +msgid "" +"In case this happens, Odoo has the *flexible components consumption* feature" +" available. If you enable it, you will be able to consume as many components" +" as needed and it will make you save time in the registration of your items " +"consumption." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:16 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:31 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:66 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:9 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:9 +msgid "Configuration" +msgstr "设置" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:18 +msgid "" +"Using flexible component consumption is easy and can be done in a few steps." +" All you need is a *BoM* and a *Quality Control Point*. Therefore, you will " +"need to activate the feature *Quality* in the *MRP* app settings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:23 +msgid "" +"First, open the *BoM* you want to use for flexible component consumption and" +" edit it. In the *Miscellaneous* tab, choose *Flexible* as the consumption " +"type. Then, save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:30 +msgid "" +"Now, in the *Quality* app, open the *Control Point* menu, under *Quality " +"Control* and create a new *Quality Control Point*. Choose your product, your" +" operation and work order operation. Then, choose *Register Consumed " +"Materials* as type." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:38 +msgid "" +"Next, go back to your *Manufacturing* app and create a *Manufacturing " +"order*. Choose the product for which you have created the flexible *BoM*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:42 +msgid "" +"Then, confirm it and launch the process step. While processing, you will " +"have the possibility to consume more components than expected in the *BoM*. " +"To do so, click on *Continue Consumption*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/flexible_components_consumption.rst:49 +msgid "" +"When the job is over, you will find a summary of your component consumption " +"in the *Finished Steps* tab of your work order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:3 +msgid "Sell sets of products as kits" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:5 +msgid "" +"A *kit* is a set of components that are delivered without first being " +"assembled or mixed. *Kits* are described in Odoo using *Bills of Materials*." +" There are two basic ways to configure *kits*, depending on how the stock of" +" the kit product is to be managed. In either case, both the *Inventory* and " +"*Manufacturing* apps must be installed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:12 +msgid "Manage Stock of Component Products" +msgstr "管理部件产品库存" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:14 +msgid "" +"If you want to assemble kits as they are ordered, managing stock of the kit " +"components only, you will use a *Kit BoM* without a manufacturing step." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:18 +msgid "" +"A product using a *Kit BoM* will appear as a single line item on a quotation" +" and sales order, but will generate a delivery order with one line item for " +"each of the components of the kit. In the examples below, the first image " +"shows a sales order for the kit *Custom Computer Kit*, while the second " +"image shows the corresponding delivery order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:33 +msgid "" +"From the *Products menu* in either the *Inventory* or *Manufacturing* app, " +"create each component product as you would with any other product, then " +"create the top-level, or kit product. The kit product should have only the " +"*route Manufacture* set, in the *Inventory tab*. Because you cannot track " +"the stock of kit products, the *Product Type* should be set to Consumable. " +"Because a kit product cannot be purchased, then, *Can be Purchased* should " +"be unchecked." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:41 +msgid "" +"All other parameters on the kit product may be modified according to your " +"preference. The component products require no particular configuration." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:48 +msgid "" +"Once the products are configured, create a *bill of materials* for the kit " +"product. Add each component and its quantity. Select the *BoM Type Ship this" +" product as a set of components*. All other options may be left with their " +"default values." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:57 +msgid "Manage Stock of Kit Product and Component Products" +msgstr "管理套件及部件产品的库存" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:59 +msgid "" +"If you want to manage stock of the *top-level kit product*, you will use a " +"standard *BoM* with a manufacturing step instead of a *Kit BoM*. When using " +"a standard BoM to assemble kits, a *manufacturing order* will be created. " +"The *manufacturing order* must be registered as completed before the kit " +"product will appear in your stock." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:68 +msgid "" +"On the kit product, select the *route Manufacture*. You may also select " +"*Make to Order*, which will create a *manufacturing order* whenever a sales " +"order is confirmed. Select the product type *Storable Product* to enable " +"stock management." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:76 +msgid "" +"When you create the *bill of materials*, select the BoM Type *Manufacture " +"this product*. The assembly of the kit will be described by a *manufacturing" +" order* rather than a packing operation." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:3 +msgid "Process Manufacturing Orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In Odoo, you can manage your manufacturing process in two different ways. " +"You can work with one document, or decide to have more information and " +"control over it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:9 +msgid "" +"In the first case, Odoo makes things easier and helps you manage work with " +"one document only: the manufacturing order. No complex steps during the " +"process, you just have to schedule the job and record the production." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:14 +msgid "" +"But, if you need more control, you can use additional documents (steps) to " +"your manufacturing process. This way, *Manufacturing Orders* are divided " +"into one or more steps defined by *Work Orders* and performed in a sequence " +"defined by *routings*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:19 +msgid "" +"Using Odoo will allow you to precisely schedule the job, analyze your " +"efficiency but also have ease when realizing each step of your manufacturing" +" process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:24 +msgid "Manage Manufacturing Without Routings" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:26 +msgid "" +"If your manufacturing process is limited to one place, one person and one " +"step, you will probably use manufacturing orders without routings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:29 +msgid "" +"In Odoo, it is the default behavior. If work this way, there are two basic " +"phases from planning to production:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:32 +msgid "Create a manufacturing order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:34 +msgid "Record the production" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:37 +msgid "Manage Manufacturing with Routings and Work Centers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:39 +msgid "" +"To use *Work Centers* and *Routings*, you will need to enable the *Work " +"Orders* feature. To do so, go to the *Manufacturing* app settings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:46 +msgid "" +"Now, you can add routings to *BoMs* and configure your operations taking " +"place at different *work centers*. The *Work Centers* are the locations at " +"which work orders are performed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:53 +msgid "" +"When manufacturing this way, each *Work Order* is scheduled individually. " +"You will also have access to time and capacity planning, as well as reports " +"on costing and efficiency for each *Work Center*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:60 +msgid "Thus, the workflow is divided into three basic phases:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:62 +msgid "Create the manufacturing order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:67 +msgid "Schedule the associated work orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:72 +msgid "Perform the scheduled work and record production" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:3 +msgid "Plan Work Orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In some cases, companies need to schedule their work orders. Doing so, they " +"can organize the work for the whole day and be sure everything goes well. It" +" helps to avoid scheduling multiple work orders at the same time when you " +"don’t have the capacity to do so." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:10 +msgid "" +"With Odoo, companies can schedule the planned start date for their " +"manufacturing orders. No possible duplication, no potential issues with the " +"planning. And, if you plan two work orders at the same work center, at the " +"same hour, the second one will be scheduled right after the first one, " +"avoiding work superposition." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:17 +msgid "Create the Work Orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:19 +msgid "" +"The first thing you need to do is to open the *Manufacturing* app. Then, Go " +"to the settings and enable the *Work Orders* feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:25 +msgid "" +"Now, go to the *Manufacturing Orders* menu and hit *Create*. Choose your " +"product and add a *Planned Start Date*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:32 +msgid "" +"The “Deadline Start” field is informative. It shows you until when you can " +"launch the manufacturing order to fulfill the initial demand." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:35 +msgid "" +"Mark your *Manufacturing Order* as todo and plan it. By going to the " +"*Planning* menu, you can access to the scheduled orders. Here is the one we " +"just created:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:43 +msgid "" +"If you plan two work orders at the same hour, the second one will be " +"scheduled after the first one if the jobs need to be done at the same work " +"center. The start date will, then, be automatically updated considering the " +"first free slot on the work center." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/plan_work_orders.rst:48 +msgid "" +"If you overrun the planned date and begin the job later, you will have a " +"track of it in the *Time Tracking* tab of your work order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:3 +msgid "How to manage BoMs for product variants" +msgstr "如何管理产品变体的BoM" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:122 #: ../../manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:5 msgid "" "Odoo allows you to use one bill of materials for multiple variants of the " @@ -206,7 +554,6 @@ msgid "" "Settings`." msgstr "Odoo允许你为同一产品的多个变量使用物料清单。启用变量的方式很简单，只需从 :menuselection:`配置->设置中选择。" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:129 #: ../../manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:12 msgid "" "You will then be able to specify which component lines are to be used in the" @@ -215,7 +562,6 @@ msgid "" "variants." msgstr "然后就可以指定每个产品变量的制造中需要用哪些部件行。可以为每个行指定多个变量。如果没有指定变量，这一行可以用于所有的变量。" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/bill_configuration.rst:134 #: ../../manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:17 msgid "" "When defining variant BoMs on a line-item-basis, the **Product Variant** " @@ -223,208 +569,331 @@ msgid "" "used when creating a BoM for one variant of a product only." msgstr "在行与项目对应的基础上定义变量BoM时，BoM主区域的**产品变量**字段应不填内容。这一字段只在为产品的一个变量创建BoM时有用。" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:3 -msgid "How to Sell a Set of Products as a Kit" -msgstr "如何将将一套产品作为一个套件销售" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:5 -msgid "" -"A *kit* is a set of components that are delivered without first being " -"assembled or mixed. Kits are described in Odoo using *bills of materials*. " -"There are two basic ways to configure kits, depending on how stock of the " -"kit product is to be managed. In either case, both the Inventory and " -"Manufacturing apps must be installed." +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:3 +msgid "Set routings on kit Bills of materials" msgstr "" -"**套件**是一套送货前未组装或混合的部件，它们在Odoo中用*物料票（bills of " -"materials）*描述。根据套件产品的管理形式，有两种基本的配置方法。每种方法中，都必须安装“库存”和“制造”App。" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:12 -msgid "Manage Stock of Component Products" -msgstr "管理部件产品库存" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:14 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:5 msgid "" -"If you would like to assemble kits as they are ordered, managing stock of " -"the kit *components* only, you will use a Kit BoM without a manufacturing " -"step." -msgstr "如你希望订货时组装这些套件，只对套件*部件*库存进行管理，则应跳过制造步骤使用Kit BoM。" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:18 -msgid "" -"A product using a Kit BoM will appear as a single line item on a quotation " -"and sales order, but will generate a delivery order with one line item for " -"each of the components of the kit. In the examples below, the image at left " -"shows a sales order for the kit \"Custom Computer Kit\", while the image at " -"right shows the corresponding delivery order." +"It often happens that you want to use kit BoM’s within manufactured product " +"BoM’s in order to lighten the list of components for this manufactured " +"product. When doing so, you would like to have the possibility to specify, " +"for each kit component, in which operation they are consumed." msgstr "" -"使用Kit " -"BoM的产品将作为单行项目在报价和销售订单中显示，但它会为套件中的每个部件都生成一个单行送货单。在以下例子中，左边的图片显示\"自定义电脑套件\"的销售订单，右边的图片显示对应的送货订单。" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:24 -msgid "|image0|\\ |image1|" -msgstr "|image0|\\ |image1|" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:27 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:62 -msgid "Configuration" -msgstr "配置" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:29 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:11 msgid "" -"From the **Products** menu in either the Inventory or Manufacturing app, " -"create each component product as you would any other product, then create " -"the top-level, or kit product. The kit product should have only the route " -"**Manufacture** set. Because you cannot track the stock of kit products, the" -" Product Type should be set to **Consumable**. Because a kit product cannot " -"be purchased, **Can be Purchased** should be unchecked." +"We will see the three use cases that you can face in these kinds of " +"configurations." msgstr "" -"从“库存”或“制造”App的**产品**菜单中为每个需要的部件创建产品，然后创建顶级或套件产品。套件产品应该只有**制造**路由，因为你无法跟踪套件产品的库存，产品类型可设为**消耗品**。由于套件产品是无法购买的，所以应取消“可购买”前面的勾号。" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:37 -msgid "" -"All other parameters on the kit product may be modified according to your " -"preference. The component products require no special configuration." -msgstr "套件产品的所有其他参数都可按照你的偏好进行修改。套件产品无需特别的配置。" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:44 -msgid "" -"Once the products are configured, create a bill of materials for the kit " -"product. Add each component and its quantity. Select the BoM Type **Ship " -"this product as a set of components**. All other options may be left with " -"their default values." -msgstr "产品配置完成后，为套件产品创建一个物料清单。添加每个部件及数量。为BoM类别选择**将本产品作为部件发货**。其他选择可以保持默认值不变。" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:53 -msgid "Manage Stock of Kit Product and Component Products" -msgstr "管理套件及部件产品的库存" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:55 -msgid "" -"If you would like to manage stock of the top-level kit product, you will use" -" a standard BoM with a manufacturing step instead of a Kit BoM. When using a" -" standard BoM to assemble kits, a manufacturing order will be created. The " -"manufacturing order must be registered as completed before the kit product " -"will appear in your stock." +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:15 +msgid "Finished Product & Kit Component have the same Routing" msgstr "" -"如需管理最高等级套件产品的存货，需要采用有制造步骤的标准BoM而不用Kit " -"BoM。使用标准BoM组装套件时将创建一个制造订单。该制造订单必须注册方能在存货中显示套件产品。" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:64 -msgid "" -"On the kit product, select the route **Manufacture**. You may also select " -"**Make to Order**, which will create a manufacturing order whenever a sales " -"order is confirmed. Select the product type **Stockable Product** to enable " -"stock management." +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:18 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:63 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:107 +msgid "Create BoM for the Finished Product" msgstr "" -"在套件产品中选择**制造**路由。也可选择**按单补货**，这会在每次确认销售订单时创建一个制造订单。请选择产品类别为**可贮存品**启用库存管理。" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/kit_shipping.rst:72 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:20 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:65 msgid "" -"When you create the bill of materials, select the BoM Type **Manufacture " -"this product**. The assembly of the kit will be described by a manufacturing" -" order rather than a packing operation." -msgstr "当你创建物料清单时，将BoM类别选择为**制造此产品**。套件的组装由制造订单而非包装操作来定义。" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:3 -msgid "How to process a manufacturing order" -msgstr "如何处理一个制造订单" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:6 -msgid "Introduction" -msgstr "介绍" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:8 -msgid "" -"There are two basic ways to manage manufacturing in Odoo. The first way " -"manages work with one document only. This document is the **manufacturing " -"order**. The second way uses additional documents to give you more precise " -"control over the manufacturing process. In this way, **Manufacturing " -"orders** are divided into one or more steps defined by **work orders**, " -"performed in an order defined by **routings**." +"Create a manufactured BoM for the finished product which includes a kit " +"component. Set a routing on your BoM, for example, *Assemble Furniture*." msgstr "" -"Odoo中有两种管理制造的基本方式。第一种方式只管理唯一的文件，即**制造订单**。第二种方式使用额外的文件，对制造过程进行精确控制。这种方式下，**制造订单**被分割到一个或多个步骤（通过**路由**定义的订单中的**工单**执行）" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:17 -msgid "How to manage manufacturing without routings" -msgstr "如何在没有路由的情况下管理制造" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:19 -msgid "" -"You will most likely use manufacturing orders without routings if all the " -"work to produce your product is performed in one place, by one person, in " -"one step, and/or you do not need the level of granular control afforded by " -"work orders and routings." +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:28 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:73 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:117 +msgid "Create a Kit BoM for the Kit Component" msgstr "" -"如果所有制造产品的工作都在一个地方、由一人以一个步骤执行，以及/或者你不需要工单和路由提供的粒度控制级别，那么你很有可能在没有路由的情况下使用制造订单。" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:24 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:30 msgid "" -"Managing your operations in this way is the default behavior in Odoo. There " -"are two basic phases from planning to production:" -msgstr "这种方式的操作管理是Odoo的默认动作。从规划到制造有两个基本阶段：" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:27 -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:52 -msgid "Create manufacturing orders" -msgstr "创建制造订单" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:29 -msgid "Record Production" -msgstr "记录生产" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:32 -msgid "How to manage manufacturing with routings and work orders" -msgstr "如何以路由和工单管理制造" - -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:34 -msgid "" -"To use work orders and routings, you will need to enable the option **Manage" -" production by work orders** From :menuselection:`Configuration --> " -"Settings`. You will then be able to add routings to bills of materials, and " -"configure some additional related fields. You will also be able to create " -"**work centers**, the locations at which work orders are performed." +"Update the kit component to define its BoM. Make sure that the routing which" +" is set on this BoM is the same one than on the Finished Product." msgstr "" -"为使用工单和路由，你需要从 " -":menuselection:`配置->设置选择并启用**用工单管理生产**，然后将路由添加到物料清单，再配置一些额外的关联字段。你还可以创建**工作中心**，即工单被执行的地点。" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:41 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:36 msgid "" -"When manufacturing with routings and work orders, each work order is " -"scheduled individually. You will also have access to time and capacity " -"planning, and reports on costing and efficiency on a work center level." -msgstr "用路由和工单进行制造时，每个工单都是独立排定的。你还可以进行时间和工作量规划，以及工作中心级别的开销与效率报告。" +"You can define the operations in which the kit components are used directly " +"in the BoM of the kit." +msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:45 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:40 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:84 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:127 +msgid "Manufacturing Order" +msgstr "制造订单" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:42 msgid "" -"Manufacturing using routings can be broken down into several steps. When " -"configuring your BoM, you will need to add a routing defining the component " -"work orders. After planning the manufacturing order, you will have the added" -" step of scheduling work orders." -msgstr "使用路由制造也可分解为多个步骤。配置BoM时，你需要添加路由来定义组件的工单。完成制造订单的规划之后，你就在工单排定中添加了额外的步骤。" +"In the list of components, the kit is split. Two work orders are created as " +"we have two operations defined in the *Assemble Furniture* routing. The " +"components of the kits are well consumed in the operations defined in the " +"kit BoM." +msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:50 -msgid "The workflow is thus divided into three basic phases, as follows:" -msgstr "工作流由此被分解到三个基本阶段中，如下所示：" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:57 +msgid "Finished Product & Kit Component haven’t the same Routing" +msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:54 -msgid "Schedule the associated work orders." -msgstr "计划相关工单的日程" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:60 +msgid "Kit Consumption set on Finished Product BoM" +msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/manufacturing_order.rst:56 -msgid "Perform the scheduled work and record production." -msgstr "执行排定的工作并记录产出" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:75 +msgid "" +"Update the kit component to define its BoM. In this use case, the routing " +"which is set on this Kit BoM is different than the one of the Finished " +"Product. Specify the operations at which the kit components are consumed in " +"this BoM." +msgstr "" -#: ../../manufacturing/management/product_variants.rst:3 -msgid "How to manage BoMs for product variants" -msgstr "如何管理产品变体的BoM" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:86 +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:129 +msgid "" +"When the manufacturing order is created for the Manufactured product, the " +"kit is split among its components. When the manufacturing order is planned, " +"three work orders are created in our case, one coming from the routing of " +"the manufactured products, the two other ones coming from the routing of the" +" kit BoM." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:95 +msgid "The components are all consumed during their respective operations." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:104 +msgid "Kit Consumption set on Kit BoM" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:109 +msgid "" +"Create a manufactured BoM for the finished product which includes a kit " +"component. Set a routing on your BoM, for example, *Assemble Furniture*. " +"Precise the consumption of the components on this BoM." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:119 +msgid "" +"Update the kit component to define its BoM. In this use case, the routing " +"which is set on this Kit BoM is different than the one of the Finished " +"Product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/routing_kit_bom.rst:138 +msgid "" +"All the components of the kits are consumed during the first operation. The " +"last component is consumed during the second operation." +msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:3 -msgid "How to manage semi-finished products" -msgstr "如何管理半成品。" +msgid "Manage semi-finished products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:5 +msgid "" +"In Odoo, you can use subassembly products to simplify a complex *Bill of " +"Materials* or to represent your manufacturing flow more accurately. A " +"*subassembly product* is a manufactured product that is used as a component " +"to make another one." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:10 +msgid "" +"A *BoM* that employs *subassemblies* is referred to as a multi-level BoM. " +"Those are accomplished by creating a *top-level BoM* and *subassembly ones*." +" This process requires a route that will ensure that every time a " +"manufacturing order for the top-level product is created, another one will " +"be for subassemblies." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:17 +msgid "Configure the Subassembly Product" +msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:19 -msgid "Configure the Top -Level Product BoM" -msgstr "配置顶级产品BoM" +msgid "" +"To configure a *multi-level BoM*, you will need a top-level product but also" +" its subassemblies. The first step is to create a product form for each of " +"the subassemblies. Select the routes *Manufacture* and *Replenish on Order*." +" Now, hit save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:27 +msgid "" +"In the *Bill of Materials* menu, under *Master Data*, create a new *Bill of " +"Materials*. Choose the product you just created and add its components." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:35 +msgid "Configure the Main BoM" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:37 +msgid "" +"Now, you can configure the top-level product and its *BoM*. Include any " +"subassemblies in the list of components." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/sub_assemblies.rst:43 +msgid "" +"Now, each time you will plan a manufacturing order for the top-level " +"product, a manufacturing order will be created for the subassembly one. " +"Then, you will have to manufacture the subassembly in order to make it " +"available before manufacturing the finished product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:3 +msgid "Subcontract the manufacturing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Some businesses subcontract the production of some finished products through" +" subcontractors. This can be easily managed through Odoo." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:11 +msgid "" +"Go to the *Manufacturing app > Configuration > Settings* and tick the box " +"*Subcontracting*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:17 +msgid "" +"You can now define subcontracted *Bill of Materials*. Therefore, you need to" +" go to *Manufacturing > Master Data > Bill of Materials* and hit *Create*. " +"In this *BoM*, list the components which will be used by the subcontractor " +"to manufacture the subcontracted finished product. Specify that the *BoM* " +"type is *Subcontracting*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:22 +msgid "You can also define subcontractors on the BoM." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:24 +msgid "If no subcontractor is set, the BoM can be used by any subcontractor" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:26 +msgid "If some are set, the BoM can only be used for those subcontractors" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:32 +msgid "Receive or buy a subcontracted product" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:34 +msgid "You have two options to trigger the subcontracting of a product:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:36 +msgid "" +"**Option A**: You can buy the subcontracted product from your subcontractor" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:38 +msgid "**Option B**: You can directly receive the subcontracted product" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:40 +msgid "Let’s start with option A (option B is just a simpler version of it)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:42 +msgid "" +"Create a new purchase order. The vendor must be a subcontractor. The unit " +"price should be the cost you are paying to the subcontractor for the " +"subcontracting (thus, it’s not necessarily the total cost of the " +"subcontracted product)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:50 +msgid "" +"The validation of the purchase order automatically creates the receipt. " +"Whenever you receive the product, you can validate the receipt. The " +"following stock moves are created:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:54 +msgid "For the components" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:56 +msgid "From Subcontracting To Production" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:58 +msgid "For the subcontracted product" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:60 +msgid "From Production to Subcontracting" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:62 +msgid "From Subcontracting to Stock" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:64 +msgid "" +"The *Subcontracting Location* represents the place where the products are at" +" your subcontractor’s warehouse. It is configured as an internal location, " +"the components that are sent to the subcontractor are still valued in your " +"stock." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:69 +msgid "" +"For option B, you can simply create the receipt manually with a partner of " +"type subcontractor defined on it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:73 +msgid "Resupply the subcontractor with the components" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:75 +msgid "" +"There are 3 ways to manage the resupply of your subcontractor with the " +"components:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:80 +msgid "**Manually**: You create a delivery order in which you set the" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:79 +msgid "subcontractor as a partner and you choose the components to deliver." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:89 +msgid "**With reordering rules**: You can define a *reordering rule*" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:86 +msgid "" +"on the *Subcontracting location* to ensure that they are always enough " +"components sent to your subcontractors. When the reordering rule is " +"triggered, a delivery order is created for the product is automatically " +"created." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:97 +msgid "**On order**: You can also deliver the components to your" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/subcontracting.rst:95 +msgid "" +"subcontractors each time you order a subcontracted product. For this, you " +"need to tick the route *Resupply Subcontractor on Order* on the wanted " +"components." +msgstr "" #: ../../manufacturing/management/unbuild.rst:3 msgid "Unbuild a product" @@ -484,6 +953,163 @@ msgid "" "BoM back in stock." msgstr "" +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:3 +msgid "Use the Master Production Schedule" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:5 +msgid "" +"The Master Production Schedule (MPS) is a valuable tool to plan your " +"production based on your demand forecast." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:11 +msgid "" +"Go to the *Manufacturing app > Configuration > Settings* and activate the " +"Master Production Schedule feature before hitting save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:18 +msgid "" +"In the manufacturing settings, you can define the time range of your MPS " +"(month/week/day) and the number of periods you want to display." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:20 +msgid "" +"Now, go in *Planning > Master Production Schedule* and click on add a " +"product. You can now define your safety stock target (= the stock you want " +"to have on hand at the end of the period) and the minimum and maximum " +"quantities to replenish." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:29 +msgid "" +"The products are ordered in the MPS based on their sequence. You can " +"rearrange that sequence by going on the list of your products and reorganize" +" them with drag and drop." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:36 +msgid "" +"In the MPS view, you can decide which information you would like to show by " +"clicking on *rows*. Some fields can be added to the view, such as *Actual " +"demand*, which will show which quantity of products has already been ordered" +" for the period, or *Available to Promise*, which allows you to know what " +"can still be sold during the period (what you plan to replenish - what is " +"already sold during the period). You can also decide to hide some " +"information if it isn’t necessary." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:48 +msgid "Estimate your demand and launch replenishment" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:50 +msgid "" +"The next step is to estimate the demand for the period. This estimation " +"should be entered in the row *Demand Forecast*. You can easily, at any time," +" compare the demand forecast with the actual demand (= confirmed sales). The" +" demand forecast for a finished product will impact the indirect demand for " +"its components." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:59 +msgid "" +"Then, the quantity to replenish for the different periods will be " +"automatically computed. The replenishments you are supposed to launch based " +"on your lead times (vendor lead time or manufacturing lead time) are " +"displayed in green. You can now launch the replenishment by clicking on the " +"replenish button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:65 +msgid "" +"Depending on the configuration of the product (buy vs. manufacture), " +"requests for quotations or manufacturing orders will be created. You can " +"easily access those by clicking on the *Actual Replenishment* cell." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:75 +msgid "" +"In case you manually edit the *To replenish* quantity, a small cross will " +"appear on the left. In case you want to go back to the automatically " +"computed value given by Odoo, you can click the cross." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:83 +msgid "Cells color signification" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:85 +msgid "" +"The cells, which are part of the *To replenish* line, can take different " +"colors depending on the situation:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:88 +msgid "" +"**Green**: quantity of products which should be replenished to reach the " +"expected safety stock considering the demand forecast and the indirect " +"demand forecast." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:90 +msgid "" +"**Grey**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity " +"still matches current data." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:92 +msgid "" +"**Red**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity " +"was too high considering current data." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:94 +msgid "" +"**Orange**: replenishment order has already been generated, and its quantity" +" was too low considering current data." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:96 +msgid "" +"The *Forecasted stock* line can also contain red cells, which means the " +"stock will be negative during the period in question." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:100 +msgid "What if I have underestimated the demand?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:102 +msgid "" +"You can still increase the demand forecast. It will impact the quantity to " +"replenish. The cell will become orange, and you’ll be able to launch a new " +"replenishment." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:107 +msgid "What if I have overestimated the demand?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:109 +msgid "" +"You can decrease the demand forecast. The cell will become red to inform you" +" that you’ve ordered more than planned. If you’re still able to do it, you " +"can cancel some RFQ or MO manually." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:114 +msgid "What if I wrongly added a product to the MPS?" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../manufacturing/management/use_mps.rst:116 +msgid "" +"You can easily remove a product from the MPS by clicking the small bin on " +"the right of its name." +msgstr "" + #: ../../manufacturing/overview.rst:5 msgid "Overview" msgstr "概览" diff --git a/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po index d0438ced7..e144cf3d5 100644 --- a/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po +++ b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/point_of_sale.po @@ -3,14 +3,25 @@ # This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # +# Translators: +# r <263737@qq.com>, 2019 +# Wall, 2019 +# LINYUN TONG , 2019 +# Cécile Collart , 2019 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Jeffery CHEN , 2019 +# Connie Xiao , 2019 +# fausthuang, 2019 +# Manga Tsang , 2019 +# #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 11.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-10-19 10:03+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n" -"Last-Translator: LINYUN TONG , 2018\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:46+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Manga Tsang , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Chinese (China) (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/zh_CN/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -37,15 +48,18 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:9 -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:9 #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/mercury.rst:25 #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:8 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:9 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:10 #: ../../point_of_sale/overview/start.rst:22 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:12 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:12 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:13 #: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/setup.rst:9 #: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/split.rst:10 -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:10 msgid "Configuration" -msgstr "配置" +msgstr "设置" #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:11 msgid "" @@ -60,209 +74,32 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:21 -msgid "You can find more about Barcode Nomenclature here (ADD HYPERLINK)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:25 msgid "Add barcodes to product" msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:27 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:23 msgid "" "Go to :menuselection:`Point of Sale --> Catalog --> Products` and select a " "product." msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:30 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:26 msgid "" "Under the general information tab, you can find a barcode field where you " "can input any barcode." msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:37 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:33 msgid "Scanning products" msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:39 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/barcode.rst:35 msgid "" "From your PoS interface, scan any barcode with your barcode scanner. The " "product will be added, you can scan the same product to add it multiple " "times or change the quantity manually on the screen." msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:3 -msgid "Using discount tags with a barcode scanner" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:5 -msgid "" -"If you want to sell your products with a discount, for a product getting " -"close to its expiration date for example, you can use discount tags. They " -"allow you to scan discount barcodes." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:10 -msgid "" -"To use discount tags you will need to use a barcode scanner, you can see the" -" documentation about it `here `__" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:15 -msgid "Barcode Nomenclature" -msgstr "条码命名规则" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:17 -msgid "To use discounts tags, we need to learn about barcode nomenclature." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:19 -msgid "" -"Let's say you want to have a discount for the product with the following " -"barcode:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:25 -msgid "" -"You can find the *Default Nomenclature* under the settings of your PoS " -"interface." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:34 -msgid "" -"Let's say you want 50% discount on a product you have to start your barcode " -"with 22 (for the discount barcode nomenclature) and then 50 (for the %) " -"before adding the product barcode. In our example, the barcode would be:" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:43 -msgid "Scan the products & tags" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:45 -msgid "You first have to scan the desired product (in our case, a lemon)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/discount_tags.rst:50 -msgid "" -"And then scan the discount tag. The discount will be applied and you can " -"finish the transaction." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:3 -msgid "Manage a loyalty program" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:5 -msgid "" -"Encourage your customers to continue to shop at your point of sale with a " -"*Loyalty Program*." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:11 -msgid "" -"To activate the *Loyalty Program* feature, go to :menuselection:`Point of " -"Sale --> Configuration --> Point of sale` and select your PoS interface. " -"Under the Pricing features, select *Loyalty Program*" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:19 -msgid "From there you can create and edit your loyalty programs." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:24 -msgid "" -"You can decide what type of program you wish to use, if the reward is a " -"discount or a gift, make it specific to some products or cover your whole " -"range. Apply rules so that it is only valid in specific situation and " -"everything in between." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:30 -msgid "Use the loyalty program in your PoS interface" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:32 -msgid "" -"When a customer is set, you will now see the points they will get for the " -"transaction and they will accumulate until they are spent. They are spent " -"using the button *Rewards* when they have enough points according to the " -"rules defined in the loyalty program." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:40 -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:45 -msgid "" -"You can see the price is instantly updated to reflect the pricelist. You can" -" finalize the order in your usual way." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/loyalty.rst:44 -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:49 -msgid "" -"If you select a customer with a default pricelist, it will be applied. You " -"can of course change it." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:3 -msgid "Apply manual discounts" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:5 -msgid "" -"If you seldom use discounts, applying manual discounts might be the easiest " -"solution for your Point of Sale." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:8 -msgid "" -"You can either apply a discount on the whole order or on specific products." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:12 -msgid "Apply a discount on a product" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:14 -msgid "From your session interface, use *Disc* button." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:19 -msgid "" -"You can then input a discount (in percentage) over the product that is " -"currently selected and the discount will be applied." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:23 -msgid "Apply a global discount" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:25 -msgid "" -"To apply a discount on the whole order, go to :menuselection:`Point of Sales" -" --> Configuration --> Point of sale` and select your PoS interface." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:28 -msgid "" -"Under the *Pricing* category, you will find *Global Discounts* select it." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:34 -msgid "You now have a new *Discount* button in your PoS interface." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:39 -msgid "" -"Once clicked you can then enter your desired discount (in percentages)." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/manual_discount.rst:44 -msgid "" -"On this example, you can see a global discount of 50% as well as a specific " -"product discount also at 50%." -msgstr "" - #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/mercury.rst:3 msgid "Accept credit card payment using Mercury" msgstr "" @@ -329,83 +166,94 @@ msgid "" "You now have a new option to pay by credit card when validating a payment." msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:3 -msgid "Manage multiple cashiers" +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:3 +msgid "Log in with employee" msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:5 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:5 msgid "" -"With Odoo Point of Sale, you can easily manage multiple cashiers. This " -"allows you to keep track on who is working in the Point of Sale and when." +"With Odoo *Point of Sale*, you can manage multiple cashiers. This feature " +"allows you to keep track of who is working, when and how much each cashier " +"made for that session." msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:9 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:9 msgid "" -"There are three different ways of switching between cashiers in Odoo. They " -"are all explained below." +"There are three ways to switch cashiers in Odoo: by *selecting the cashier*," +" by *entering a PIN code* or by *scanning a barcode*." msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:13 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:13 msgid "" -"To manage multiple cashiers, you need to have several users (at least two)." +"To manage multiple cashiers, you need several employees (at least two)." msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:17 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:16 +msgid "Set up log in with employees" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:18 +msgid "" +"To enable the feature, go to your *PoS settings* and check log in with " +"employees on your *PoS form*. Then, add the employees that have access to " +"the cash register." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:25 +msgid "Now, you can switch cashier easily." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:28 msgid "Switch without pin codes" msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:19 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:30 msgid "" -"The easiest way to switch cashiers is without a code. Simply press on the " -"name of the current cashier in your PoS interface." +"The easiest way to switch cashiers is without a code. To do so, click on the" +" cashier name in your PoS interface." msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:25 -msgid "You will then be able to change between different users." +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:36 +msgid "Now, you just have to click on your name." msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:30 -msgid "And the cashier will be changed." +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:42 +msgid "Switch cashier with pin codes" msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:33 -msgid "Switch cashiers with pin codes" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:35 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:44 msgid "" -"You can also set a pin code on each user. To do so, go to " -":menuselection:`Settings --> Manage Access rights` and select the user." +"You can set a pin code on each cashier. To set up a pin code, go to the " +"employee form and add a security PIN, in the *HR settings tab*." msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:41 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:50 +msgid "Now, when switching cashier, a PIN password will be asked." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:56 +msgid "Switch cashier with barcodes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:58 msgid "" -"On the user page, under the *Point of Sale* tab you can add a Security PIN." +"You can ask your employees to log themselves with their badges. To do so, " +"set up a barcode at the same place you add the PIN code. Print the badge and" +" when they will scan it, the cashier will be switched to that employee." msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:47 -msgid "Now when you switch users you will be asked to input a PIN password." +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:67 +msgid "Find who was the cashier" msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:53 -msgid "Switch cashiers with barcodes" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:55 -msgid "You can also ask your cashiers to log themselves in with their badges." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:57 -msgid "Back where you put a security PIN code, you could also put a barcode." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:62 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:69 msgid "" -"When they scan their barcode, the cashier will be switched to that user." +"Once you have closed your *PoS session*, you can have an overview of the " +"amount each cashier sold for. To do so, go to the orders menu." msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multi_cashiers.rst:64 -msgid "Barcode nomenclature link later on" +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/multicashiers.rst:75 +msgid "Now, you can open the order and have a summary of the sold products." msgstr "" #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:3 @@ -420,7 +268,7 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:10 msgid "" "To activate *Reprint Receipt*, go to :menuselection:`Point of Sale --> " -"Configuration --> Point of sale` and select your PoS interface." +"Configuration --> Point of sale`. and select your PoS interface." msgstr "" #: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:13 @@ -428,18 +276,250 @@ msgid "" "Under the Bills & Receipts category, you will find *Reprint Receipt* option." msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:20 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:17 +msgid "" +"In order to allow the option reprint receipt, you need to activate the " +"receipt printer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:23 msgid "Reprint a receipt" msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:22 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:25 msgid "On your PoS interface, you now have a *Reprint receipt* button." msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:27 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced/reprint.rst:30 msgid "When you use it, you can then reprint your last receipt." msgstr "" +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features.rst:3 +msgid "Advanced Pricing Features" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:3 +msgid "Using discount tags with a barcode scanner" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:5 +msgid "" +"If you want to sell your products with a discount, for a product getting " +"close to its expiration date for example, you can use discount tags. They " +"allow you to scan discount barcodes." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:10 +msgid "To use discount tags you will need to use a barcode scanner." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:13 +msgid "Barcode Nomenclature" +msgstr "条码命名规则" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:15 +msgid "To use discounts tags, we need to learn about barcode nomenclature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:17 +msgid "" +"Let's say you want to have a discount for the product with the following " +"barcode:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:23 +msgid "" +"You can find the *Default Nomenclature* under the settings of your PoS " +"interface." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:32 +msgid "" +"Let's say you want 50% discount on a product you have to start your barcode " +"with 22 (for the discount barcode nomenclature) and then 50 (for the %) " +"before adding the product barcode. In our example, the barcode would be:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:41 +msgid "Scan the products & tags" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:43 +msgid "You first have to scan the desired product (in our case, a lemon)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/discount_tags.rst:48 +msgid "" +"And then scan the discount tag. The discount will be applied and you can " +"finish the transaction." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:3 +msgid "Manage a loyalty program" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Encourage your customers to continue to shop at your point of sale with a " +"*Loyalty Program*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:11 +msgid "" +"To activate the *Loyalty Program* feature, go to :menuselection:`Point of " +"Sale --> Configuration --> Point of sale` and select your PoS interface. " +"Under the Pricing features, select *Loyalty Program*" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:19 +msgid "From there you can create and edit your loyalty programs." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:24 +msgid "" +"You can decide what type of program you wish to use, if the reward is a " +"discount or a gift, make it specific to some products or cover your whole " +"range. Apply rules so that it is only valid in specific situation and " +"everything in between." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:30 +msgid "Use the loyalty program in your PoS interface" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:32 +msgid "" +"When a customer is set, you will now see the points they will get for the " +"transaction and they will accumulate until they are spent. They are spent " +"using the button *Rewards* when they have enough points according to the " +"rules defined in the loyalty program." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:40 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:45 +msgid "" +"You can see the price is instantly updated to reflect the pricelist. You can" +" finalize the order in your usual way." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/loyalty.rst:44 +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:49 +msgid "" +"If you select a customer with a default pricelist, it will be applied. You " +"can of course change it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:3 +msgid "Apply manual discounts" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:5 +msgid "" +"If you seldom use discounts, applying manual discounts might be the easiest " +"solution for your Point of Sale." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:8 +msgid "" +"You can either apply a discount on the whole order or on specific products." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:12 +msgid "Apply a discount on a product" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:14 +msgid "From your session interface, use *Disc* button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:19 +msgid "" +"You can then input a discount (in percentage) over the product that is " +"currently selected and the discount will be applied." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:23 +msgid "Apply a global discount" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:25 +msgid "" +"To apply a discount on the whole order, go to :menuselection:`Point of Sales" +" --> Configuration --> Point of sale` and select your PoS interface." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:28 +msgid "" +"Under the *Pricing* category, you will find *Global Discounts* select it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:34 +msgid "You now have a new *Discount* button in your PoS interface." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:39 +msgid "" +"Once clicked you can then enter your desired discount (in percentages)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/manual_discount.rst:44 +msgid "" +"On this example, you can see a global discount of 50% as well as a specific " +"product discount also at 50%." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:3 +msgid "Apply time-limited discounts" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Entice your customers and increase your revenue by offering time-limited or " +"seasonal discounts. Odoo has a powerful pricelist feature to support a " +"pricing strategy tailored to your business." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:12 +msgid "" +"To activate the *Pricelists* feature, go to :menuselection:`Point of Sales " +"--> Configuration --> Point of sale` and select your PoS interface." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:18 +msgid "" +"Choose the pricelists you want to make available in this Point of Sale and " +"define the default pricelist. You can access all your pricelists by clicking" +" on *Pricelists*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:23 +msgid "Create a pricelist" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:25 +msgid "" +"By default, you have a *Public Pricelist* to create more, go to " +":menuselection:`Point of Sale --> Catalog --> Pricelists`" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:31 +msgid "" +"You can set several criterias to use a specific price: periods, min. " +"quantity (meet a minimum ordered quantity and get a price break), etc. You " +"can also chose to only apply that pricelist on specific products or on the " +"whole range." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:37 +msgid "Using a pricelist in the PoS interface" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/advanced_pricing_features/seasonal_discount.rst:39 +msgid "" +"You now have a new button above the *Customer* one, use it to instantly " +"select the right pricelist." +msgstr "" + #: ../../point_of_sale/analyze.rst:3 msgid "Analyze sales" msgstr "分析销售" @@ -827,7 +907,275 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../point_of_sale/overview/start.rst:133 msgid "" "To connect the PoS to hardware with an Odoo IoT Box, please see the section " -":doc:`../../../iot/connect` and :doc:`../../../iot/pos`" +":doc:`../../../iot/config/connect` and :doc:`../../../iot/config/pos`" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment.rst:3 +msgid "Payment Terminals" +msgstr "付款终端" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:3 +msgid "Connect an Ingenico Payment Terminal to your PoS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Connecting a payment terminal allows you to offer a fluid payment flow to " +"your customers and ease the work of your cashiers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Please note that Ingenico is currently only available for customers in the " +"Benelux." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:15 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:15 +msgid "Connect a Payment Terminal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:17 +msgid "" +"Connecting an Ingenico Payment Terminal to Odoo is a feature that requires " +"an IoT Box. For more information on how to connect an IoT Box to your " +"database, please refer to `this documentation " +"`__." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:22 +msgid "" +"Once the IoT Box is up and running, you’ll need to link your payment " +"terminal to your PoS. Open the Point of Sale app and go to *Configuration > " +"Point of Sale*. Select a PoS, tick the IoT Box Device option and select your" +" payment terminal." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:31 +msgid "Configure the Lane/5000 for Ingenico BENELUX" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:33 +msgid "" +"Click on the F button of the terminal, then go in the *PoS Menu* > settings " +"menu and enter the settings password." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:36 +msgid "" +"Now, click on connexion change and TCP/IP. Type the IP of your *IoT Box* " +"(you can find it on the form view of your IoT Box). Then, enter 9000 as " +"port. The terminal will restart. Once it is done, go on your *IoT Box* form " +"in Odoo and verify that the terminal has been found." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:45 +msgid "Configure the payment method" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:47 +msgid "" +"First, go in the general settings of the POS app, and activate the Ingenico " +"setting." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:53 +msgid "" +"Go back in *Point of Sale > Configuration > Point of Sale*, go in the " +"payments section and access your payment methods. Create a new payment " +"method for Ingenico, select the payment terminal option Ingenico, and select" +" your payment terminal device." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:62 +msgid "Pay with a payment terminal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:64 +msgid "" +"In your *PoS interface*, when processing a payment, select a *Payment " +"Method* using a payment terminal. Check that the amount in the tendered " +"column is the one that has to be sent to the payment terminal and click on " +"*Send*. When the payment is successful, the status will change to *Payment " +"Successful*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:73 +msgid "" +"If you want to cancel the payment request, click on cancel. You can still " +"retry to send the payment request." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:76 +msgid "" +"If there is any issue with the payment terminal, you can still force the " +"payment using the *Force Done*. This will allow you to validate the order in" +" Odoo even if the connexion between the terminal and Odoo has issues." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:82 +msgid "" +"This option will only be available if you received an error message telling " +"you the connexion failed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/ingenico.rst:85 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:103 +msgid "" +"Once your payment is processed, on the payment record, you’ll find the type " +"of card that has been used and the transaction ID." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:3 +msgid "Connect SIX/Worldline to your PoS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Connecting a SIX/Worldline payment terminal allows you to offer a fluid " +"payment flow to your customers and ease the work of your cashiers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:9 +msgid "Please note SIX/Worldine is currently only available for UE customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:17 +msgid "" +"Connecting a SIX/Worldline Payment Terminal to Odoo is a feature that " +"requires an IoT Box. For more information on how to connect an IoT Box to " +"your database, please refer to `this documentation " +"`__." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:22 +msgid "" +"Once the *IoT Box* is up and running, you’ll need to link it to your PoS. " +"Open the Point of Sale app and go to *Configuration > Point of Sale*. Select" +" a PoS, tick the IoT Box Device option and select your payment terminal." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:30 +msgid "" +"Then go to your *IoT Box homepage* (accessible from the IoT Box form view in" +" Odoo) and enter the ID of your Six payment terminal." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:36 +msgid "" +"You should now see that the terminal is connected to your IoT Box (it takes " +"+/- 1 min)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:43 +msgid "" +"The terminal should only be connected to the network with the Ethernet. Do " +"not connect it to the IoT Box with a USB Cable." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:47 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:16 +msgid "Configure the Payment Method" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:49 +msgid "" +"First, go in the general settings of the POS app, and activate the SIX " +"setting." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:55 +msgid "" +"Back in *Point of Sale > Configuration > Point of Sale*, go in the payments " +"section and access your payment methods. Create a new payment method for " +"SIX, select the payment terminal option SIX, and select your payment " +"terminal device." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:64 +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:40 +msgid "Pay with a Payment Terminal" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:66 +msgid "" +"In your PoS interface, at the moment of the payment, select a payment method" +" using a payment terminal. Verify that the amount in the tendered column is " +"the one that has to be sent to the payment terminal and click on *Send*. If " +"you want to cancel the payment request, click on cancel." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:74 +msgid "" +"When the payment is done, the status will change to *Payment Successful*. " +"You can always reverse the last transaction by clicking on *Reverse*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:81 +msgid "" +"If there is any issue with the payment terminal, you can still force the " +"payment using the *Force Done*. This will allow you to validate the order in" +" Odoo even if the connexion between the terminal and Odoo encounters issues." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:87 +msgid "Close your Session" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:89 +msgid "" +"At the end of the day, before closing your session, you need to send the " +"balance of the payments to SIX. To do that, click on this button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/six.rst:95 +msgid "" +"Once the balance has been sent, the SIX shift is closed, meaning you cannot " +"do additional operations with the SIX payment terminal (except if you reopen" +" a shift by clicking on the user name and selecting a cashier)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:3 +msgid "Connect a Vantiv Payment Terminal to your PoS" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Connecting a Vantiv payment terminal allows you to offer a fluid payment " +"flow to your customers and ease the work of your cashiers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:9 +msgid "" +"Please note MercuryPay only operates with US and Canadian banks, making this" +" procedure only suitable for North American businesses." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:18 +msgid "" +"First, go in the general settings of the POS app, and activate the Vantiv " +"setting." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:24 +msgid "" +"Back in *Point of Sale > Configuration > Point of Sale*, go in the payments " +"section and access your payment methods. Create a new payment method for " +"Vantiv, select the payment terminal option Vantiv, and create new Vantiv " +"credentials." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:32 +msgid "" +"To create new Vantiv credentials, fill in your merchant ID and password, " +"then save. Make sure the credentials you just created are selected, then " +"save the payment method." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../point_of_sale/payment/vantiv.rst:42 +msgid "" +"In your PoS interface, at the moment of the payment, select your Vantiv " +"payment method and… that’s all." msgstr "" #: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant.rst:3 @@ -896,35 +1244,36 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:16 msgid "" "Under the IoT Box / Hardware Proxy category, you will find *Order Printers*." +" Note that you need an IoT Box to connect your Printer to the PoS." msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:19 +#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:20 msgid "Add a printer" msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:21 +#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:22 msgid "" "In your configuration menu you will now have a *Order Printers* option where" " you can add the printer." msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:28 +#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:29 msgid "Print a kitchen/bar order" msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:33 +#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:34 msgid "Select or create a printer." msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:36 +#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:37 msgid "Print the order in the kitchen/bar" msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:38 +#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:39 msgid "On your PoS interface, you now have a *Order* button." msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:43 +#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/kitchen_printing.rst:44 msgid "" "When you press it, it will print the order on your kitchen/bar printer." msgstr "" @@ -1120,7 +1469,7 @@ msgstr "" msgid "Once on the payment interface, you now have a new *Tip* button" msgstr "" -#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/tips.rst:31 +#: ../../point_of_sale/restaurant/tips.rst:28 msgid "Add the tip your customer wants to leave and process to the payment." msgstr "" @@ -1325,55 +1674,3 @@ msgid "" "As you can see, the total is in negative, to end the refund you simply have " "to process the payment." msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:3 -msgid "Apply time-limited discounts" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:5 -msgid "" -"Entice your customers and increase your revenue by offering time-limited or " -"seasonal discounts. Odoo has a powerful pricelist feature to support a " -"pricing strategy tailored to your business." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:12 -msgid "" -"To activate the *Pricelists* feature, go to :menuselection:`Point of Sales " -"--> Configuration --> Point of sale` and select your PoS interface." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:18 -msgid "" -"Choose the pricelists you want to make available in this Point of Sale and " -"define the default pricelist. You can access all your pricelists by clicking" -" on *Pricelists*." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:23 -msgid "Create a pricelist" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:25 -msgid "" -"By default, you have a *Public Pricelist* to create more, go to " -":menuselection:`Point of Sale --> Catalog --> Pricelists`" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:31 -msgid "" -"You can set several criterias to use a specific price: periods, min. " -"quantity (meet a minimum ordered quantity and get a price break), etc. You " -"can also chose to only apply that pricelist on specific products or on the " -"whole range." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:37 -msgid "Using a pricelist in the PoS interface" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../point_of_sale/shop/seasonal_discount.rst:39 -msgid "" -"You now have a new button above the *Customer* one, use it to instantly " -"select the right pricelist." -msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po index efce6c598..781f8b50e 100644 --- a/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po +++ b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/purchase.po @@ -4,24 +4,27 @@ # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # # Translators: -# max_xu , 2018 -# xiaowenzi , 2018 -# mrshelly , 2018 -# Gary Wei , 2018 -# zpq001 , 2018 -# fausthuang, 2018 -# Martin Trigaux, 2018 -# Jeffery CHEN Fan , 2018 -# 广州救火 <7017511@qq.com>, 2018 +# r <263737@qq.com>, 2019 +# max_xu , 2019 +# xiaowenzi , 2019 +# 湘子 南 <1360857908@qq.com>, 2019 +# inspur qiuguodong , 2019 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# mrshelly , 2019 +# Jeffery CHEN , 2019 +# liAnGjiA , 2019 +# Gary Wei , 2019 +# fausthuang, 2019 +# guohuadeng , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 12.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-11-07 15:38+0100\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2018-10-19 08:15+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: 广州救火 <7017511@qq.com>, 2018\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:47+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: guohuadeng , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Chinese (China) (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/zh_CN/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -56,7 +59,7 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/3_way_matching.rst:18 #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/analyze.rst:24 #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/approvals.rst:9 -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:31 +#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:10 #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/create.rst:13 #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/lock_orders.rst:9 #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/reception.rst:14 @@ -65,7 +68,7 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../purchase/purchases/tender/call_for_tender.rst:9 #: ../../purchase/replenishment/flows/dropshipping.rst:13 msgid "Configuration" -msgstr "配置" +msgstr "设置" #: ../../purchase/purchases/master/import.rst:11 msgid "" @@ -575,345 +578,55 @@ msgid "Once approved, the purchase order follows the normal process." msgstr "一旦确认, 采购订单就按照正常的步骤。" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:3 -msgid "Control supplier bills" -msgstr "" +msgid "Bill Control" +msgstr "账单控制" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:5 msgid "" -"The **Purchase** application allows you to manage your purchase orders, " -"incoming products, and vendor bills all seamlessly in one place." -msgstr " **采购** 程序允许你在同一个地方无缝管理你的采购单, 买入的产品, 和供应商账单。" +"With Odoo, you can define a setting to help the control of your bills. *Bill" +" Control* lets you choose if the supplier sends you the bill before or after" +" you receive the goods." +msgstr "" -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:8 +#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:12 msgid "" -"If you want to set up a vendor bill control process, the first thing you " -"need to do is to have purchase data in Odoo. Knowing what has been purchased" -" and received is the first step towards understanding your purchase " -"management processes." -msgstr "如果你要设置供应商订单控制流程, 首先你要在Odoo里有采购数据.知道什么被采购和收到货是理解你的采购管理流程的第一步。" +"For this feature to work, go to :menuselection:`Purchases --> Configuration " +"--> Settings` and select which way you want to control your bills." +msgstr "" -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:13 -msgid "Here is the standard work flow in Odoo:" -msgstr "odoo标准工作流程 :" +#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:20 +msgid "Change the control policy" +msgstr "" -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:15 +#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:22 msgid "" -"You begin with a **Request for Quotation (RFQ)** to send out to your " -"vendor(s)." -msgstr "从发送一个 **申购单** (RFQ)给你的供应商(们)开始。" +"While the setting above will be your default method of bill control, you can" +" always select which way you want to invoice your product on each product " +"page under the *Purchase* tab." +msgstr "" -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:18 +#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:26 msgid "" -"Once the vendor has accepted the RFQ, confirm the RFQ into a **Purchase " -"Order (PO)**." -msgstr "一旦供应商接受这询价单, 确认这询价单为 **采购订单(PO)** 。" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:21 -msgid "" -"Confirming the PO generates an **Incoming Shipment** if you purchased any " -"stockable products." -msgstr "确认采购当生成一个 **新进货物** 如果你采购的是库存产品。" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:24 -msgid "" -"Upon receiving a **Vendor Bill** from your Vendor, validate the bill with " -"products received in the previous step to ensure accuracy." -msgstr "一旦当你从你的供应商处收到一个 **供应商账单** , 和前一步收到的货物做一个验证来确保准确性。" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:27 -msgid "" -"This process may be done by three different people within the company, or " -"only one." -msgstr "这个过程也许在同一家公司由三个人做, 也可能只是一个人。" +"You might want to use different settings for different types of products." +msgstr "" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:34 -msgid "Installing the Purchase and Inventory applications" -msgstr "安装采购和库存应用" +msgid "Verify your Vendor Bill" +msgstr "" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:36 msgid "" -"From the **Apps** application, search for the **Purchase** module and " -"install it. Due to certain dependencies, installing purchase will " -"automatically install the **Inventory** and **Accounting** applications." +"If you didn’t receive any of your product yet on *Purchase Order* under the " +"*Shipment* tab," msgstr "" -"从 **Apps** 应用程序, 搜索并安装 **采购** 模块。由于关联性, 在安装采购时系统会自动安装 **库存** 和 **财务** 模块。" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:41 -msgid "Creating products" -msgstr "创建产品" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:43 msgid "" -"Creating products in Odoo is essential for quick and efficient purchasing " -"within Odoo. Simply navigate to the **Products** submenu under **Purchase**," -" and click **Create**." -msgstr "在Odoo里生成产品是快速高效的采购的前提。在 **产品** 子菜单下, 点击 **创建** 。" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:50 -msgid "" -"When creating the product, Pay attention to the **Product Type** field, as " -"it is important:" -msgstr "当创建产品时, 注意 **产品类型** 字段, 这很重要 :" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:53 -msgid "" -"Products that are set as **Stockable** or **Consumable** will allow you to " -"keep track of their inventory levels. These options imply stock management " -"and will allow for receiving these kinds of products." -msgstr "产品设成 **库存产品** 或 **可消耗** 将允许你追踪它们的库存情况。这些选择意味有库存管理和允许接收这些类型的产品。" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:58 -msgid "" -"Conversely, products that are set as a **Service** or **Digital Product** " -"will not imply stock management, simply due to the fact that there is no " -"inventory to manage. You will not be able to receive products under either " -"of these designations." +"Depending on the billing policy defined above. If you're supposed to be " +"billed based on ordered quantity, Odoo will suggest a bill for the number of" +" units ordered. If you're supposed to be billed based on the received " +"quantities, Odoo will suggest a bill for 0 as shown above." msgstr "" -"相反地, 产品被设成 **服务** 或 **电子产品** 不会有库存管理, 简单来说, 实际上没有库存可以管理.你将不会收到在这些名称下的产品。" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:64 -msgid "" -"It is recommended that you create a **Miscellaneous** product for all " -"purchases that occur infrequently and do not require inventory valuation or " -"management. If you create such a product, it is recommend to set the product" -" type to **Service**." -msgstr "" -"建议生成一个 **杂项** 产品对于那些不是经常采购的并且不需要库存评估和管理的产品。如果你创建类似产品, 建议设置产品类型为 **服务** ." - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:70 -msgid "Managing your Vendor Bills" -msgstr "管理你的供应商账单" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:73 -msgid "Purchasing products or services" -msgstr "采购产品或服务" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:75 -msgid "" -"From the purchase application, you can create a purchase order with as many " -"products as you need. If the vendor sends you a confirmation or quotation " -"for an order, you may record the order reference number in the **Vendor " -"Reference** field. This will enable you to easily match the PO with the the " -"vendor bill later (as the vendor bill will probably include the Vendor " -"Reference)" -msgstr "" -"从采购程序, 你可以创建你需要的产品的采购单。如果供应商发给你一个确认或报价。你可以在 **供应商参考** " -"字段填写订单参考编号。这可以使你方便地和稍后的供应商订单匹配(因为供应商账单可能会包含供应商参考内容)" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:85 -msgid "" -"Validate the purchase order and receive the products from the **Inventory** " -"application." -msgstr "从 **库存** 程序验证采购单和接收产品。" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:89 -msgid "Receiving Products" -msgstr "接收产品" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:91 -msgid "" -"If you purchased any stockable products that you manage the inventory of, " -"you will need to receive the products from the **Inventory** application " -"after you confirm a purchase order. From the **Inventory** dashboard, you " -"should see a button linking you directly to the transfer of products. This " -"button is outlined in red below:" -msgstr "" -"如果你采购了你管理库存的可库存产品, 在采购单被确认后你需要从 **库存** 中接收产品。\n" -"在 **库存** 仪表盘, 你可以看到一个按钮直接链接你到产品的转移, 这个按钮在以下红色处概述 :" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:100 -msgid "" -"Navigating this route will take you to a list of all orders awaiting to be " -"received." -msgstr "按这个路线的引导会带你到所有等待接收的订单清单。" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:106 -msgid "" -"If you have a lot of awaiting orders, apply a filter using the search bar in" -" the upper right. With this search bar, you may filter based on the " -"**Vendor** (or **Partner**), the product, or the source document, also known" -" as the reference of your purchase order. You also have the capability to " -"group the orders by different criteria under **Group By**. Selecting an item" -" from this list will open the following screen where you then will receive " -"the products." -msgstr "" -"如果你有许多等待的订单, 使用上面右边的搜索栏的过滤功能。你可以基于 **供应商** (或 **合作伙伴** ), 产品, 源文档, " -"或采购单参照来过滤。你也在 **分组** 中可以按不同的标准来对订单分组。从这个清单中选择一个项目会打开如下界面, 然后你可以收取你的产品了。" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:117 -msgid "Purchasing **Service** products does not trigger a delivery order." -msgstr "采购 **服务** 类型的产品不会触发收货单。" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:120 -msgid "Managing Vendor Bills" -msgstr "管理供应商账单" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:122 -msgid "" -"When you receive a **Vendor Bill** for a previous purchase, be sure to " -"record it in the **Purchases** application under the **Control Menu**. You " -"need to create a new vendor bill even if you already registered a purchase " -"order." -msgstr "" -"当你收到一个以前采购的 **供应商账单** , 确认记录在 **采购** 程序下的的 **控制菜单** 中, " -"你需要创建一个新的供应商账单即使你已经注册了一个采购订单。" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:130 -msgid "" -"The first thing you will need to do upon creating a **Vendor Bill** is to " -"select the appropriate **Vendor** as this will also pull up any associated " -"accounting or pricelist information. From there, you can choose to specify " -"any one or multiple purchase orders to populate the vendor bill with. When " -"you select a purchase order from the list, Odoo will pull any uninvoiced " -"products associated to that purchase order and automatically populate that " -"information below. If you are having a hard time finding the appropriate " -"vendor bill, you may search through the list by inputting the vendor " -"reference number or your internal purchase order number." -msgstr "" -"在你创建 **供应商** 订单前, 你需要选择正确的 **供应商** 这将带出相关的财务或价格表信息。从这里, " -"你可以选择指定一个或多个采购单来填充采购供应商账单。当你从清单中选择一个采购单, " -"Odoo会带出所有关联到采购单的没有开发票的产品并自动填补下列信息。如果你很难找到正确的供应商账单, 你可以通过搜索供应商参考号或者你的内部采购单号。" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:144 -msgid "" -"While the invoice is in draft state, you can make any modifications you need" -" (i.e. remove or add product lines, modify quantities, and change prices)." -msgstr "当发票是草稿状态时, 你可以做任何更改(比如移走或添加产品行, 更改数量, 更改价格)" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:149 -msgid "Your vendor may send you several bills for the same purchase order if:" -msgstr "你的供应商也许寄给你几张同样产品的账单如果 :" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:151 -msgid "" -"Your vendor is in back-order and is sending you invoices as they ship the " -"products." -msgstr "你的供应商有欠单并且当他们发货时寄给你账单。" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:154 -msgid "Your vendor is sending you a partial bill or asking for a deposit." -msgstr "你的供应商寄给你部分账单，或要求押金。" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:156 -msgid "" -"Every time you record a new vendor bill, Odoo will automatically populate " -"the product quantities based on what has been received from the vendor. If " -"this value is showing a zero, this means that you have not yet received this" -" product and simply serves as a reminder that the product is not in hand and" -" you may need to inquire further into this. At any point in time, before you" -" validate the vendor bill, you may override this zero quantity." -msgstr "" -"每次你记录一个新的采购账单, Odoo会自动弹出基于从供应商处收到的产品数量。如果数量是零, 意味着你没有收到产品并简单提供一个提醒产品不在手, " -"也许你需要进一步查询。在任何你验证供应商账单前的时间点, 你可以重写这个零数量。" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:165 -msgid "Vendor Bill Matching" -msgstr "供应商账单匹配" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:168 -msgid "What to do if your vendor bill does not match what you received" -msgstr "如果供应商的账单和你收到的产品不符, 怎么办" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:170 -msgid "" -"If the bill you receive from the vendor has different quantities than what " -"Odoo automatically populates as quantities, this could be due to several " -"reasons:" -msgstr "如果你收到的账单和Odoo自动填写的数量不符, 也许是由以下原因引起的 :" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:174 -msgid "" -"The vendor is incorrectly charging you for products and/or services that you" -" have not ordered." -msgstr "供应商错误地要你付你没有订购的产品/或服务。" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:177 -msgid "" -"The vendor is billing you for products that you might not have received yet," -" as the invoicing control may be based on ordered or received quantities." -msgstr "供应商给你开了你还没有收到产品的发票, 如果开票控制是基于订购或收到数量。" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:181 -msgid "Or the vendor did not bill you for previously purchased products." -msgstr "或者供应商没有为你之前订购的产品开票。" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:183 -msgid "" -"In these instances it is recommended that you verify that the bill, and any " -"associated purchase order to the vendor, are accurate and that you " -"understand what you have ordered and what you have already received." -msgstr "在这些例子中, 建议你验证账单和其他与此供应商有关的采购是准确的, 并且知道哪些是你订购的, 哪些是你已经收到的。" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:187 -msgid "" -"If you are unable to find a purchase order related to a vendor bill, this " -"could be due to one of a few reasons:" -msgstr "如果你不能找到和供应商账单关联的定购单, 也许是由以下原因之一造成的 :" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:190 -msgid "" -"The vendor has already invoiced you for this purchase order, therefore it is" -" not going to appear anywhere in the selection." -msgstr "供应商已经为这个采购单开了票, 因此它不会再这里出现。" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:193 -msgid "" -"Someone in the company forgot to record a purchase order for this vendor." -msgstr "公司里某人忘了给这个供应商记录这个采购单。" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:196 -msgid "Or the vendor is charging you for something you did not order." -msgstr "或者供应商要你付你没有定购的东西。" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:199 -msgid "How product quantities are managed" -msgstr "产品数量如何管理" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:201 -msgid "" -"By default, services are managed based on ordered quantities, while " -"stockables and consumables are managed based on received quantities." -msgstr "一般, 服务是基于订单数量管理, 而库存商品和消耗品都是基于到货数量管理。" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:204 -msgid "" -"If you need to manage products based on ordered quantities over received " -"quantities, you will need to enable **Debug Mode** from the **About Odoo** " -"information. Once debug mode is activated, select the product(s) you wish to" -" modify, and you should see a new field appear, labeled **Control Purchase " -"Bills**." -msgstr "" -"如果你需要管理产品基于订购数量而不是收到数量, 你需要从 **关于Odoo** 处激活 **开发者模式** 。一旦开发者模式被激活, " -"选择你要更改的产品(s), 你可以看到一个标签是 **控制采购订单** 的新字段显现。" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:213 -msgid "" -"You can then change the default management method for the selected product " -"to be based on either:" -msgstr "然后你可以更改默认管理方法基于 :" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:216 -msgid "Ordered quantities" -msgstr "订购数量" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:218 -msgid "Received quantities" -msgstr "收到数量" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:221 -msgid "Batch Billing" -msgstr "批量账单" - -#: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/bills.rst:223 -msgid "" -"When creating a vendor bill and selecting the appropriate purchase order, " -"you may continue to select additional purchase orders and Odoo will add the " -"additional line items from that purchase order. If you have not deleted the " -"previous line items from the first purchase order the bill will be linked to" -" all the appropriate purchase orders." -msgstr "" -"当创建了一个供应商账单并选择了相应的采购单, 你可以继续选择添加采购单, Odoo会添加新加的项目行到采购单。如果你没有删除先前的项目行, " -"账单会关联到所有相应的采购单。" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/cancel.rst:3 msgid "Cancel a purchase order" @@ -1085,7 +798,7 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/create.rst:0 msgid "Receipt" -msgstr "收货" +msgstr "入库" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/create.rst:0 msgid "Incoming Shipments" @@ -1097,7 +810,7 @@ msgstr "供应商" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/create.rst:0 msgid "You can find a vendor by its Name, TIN, Email or Internal Reference." -msgstr "你可以通过它的名字，TIN，电子邮件或内部参考找到一个客户。 " +msgstr "你可以通过它的名字，TIN，EMail或内部参考找到一个客户。 " #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/create.rst:0 msgid "Vendor Reference" @@ -1108,7 +821,7 @@ msgid "" "Reference of the sales order or bid sent by the vendor. It's used to do the " "matching when you receive the products as this reference is usually written " "on the delivery order sent by your vendor." -msgstr "销售订单的参照或者供应商发出的投标。当你接收产品的时候被显示在收货单上。主要用来做匹配" +msgstr "销售订单的参照或者供应商发出的投标。当你接收产品的时候被显示在入库单上。主要用来做匹配" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/create.rst:0 msgid "Order Date" @@ -1122,13 +835,13 @@ msgstr "记录询价单被确认并被转化为采购订单的日期" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/create.rst:0 msgid "Source Document" -msgstr "源单据" +msgstr "源文档" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/create.rst:0 msgid "" "Reference of the document that generated this purchase order request (e.g. a" " sales order)" -msgstr "生成此采购订单请求的文档的引用（例如销售订单）" +msgstr "生成此采购订单请求的文档参考（例如销售订单）" #: ../../purchase/purchases/rfq/create.rst:0 msgid "Deliver To" @@ -1514,7 +1227,7 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../purchase/purchases/tender.rst:3 msgid "Purchase Agreements" -msgstr "采购协议" +msgstr "采购申请" #: ../../purchase/purchases/tender/blanket_orders.rst:3 msgid "Manage Blanket Orders" @@ -1983,7 +1696,7 @@ msgid "" msgstr "" #: ../../purchase/replenishment/flows/setup_stock_rule.rst:33 -msgid "See also: :doc:`../../../inventory/management/misc/schedulers`" +msgid "See also: :doc:`../../../inventory/management/planning/schedulers`" msgstr "" #: ../../purchase/replenishment/flows/setup_stock_rule.rst:35 diff --git a/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..b1c27159c --- /dev/null +++ b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/quality.po @@ -0,0 +1,416 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2015-TODAY, Odoo S.A. +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +# Translators: +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# Jeffery CHEN , 2019 +# Felix Yang - Elico Corp , 2019 +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-11-20 09:24+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Felix Yang - Elico Corp , 2019\n" +"Language-Team: Chinese (China) (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/zh_CN/)\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Language: zh_CN\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=1; plural=0;\n" + +#: ../../quality.rst:5 +msgid "Quality" +msgstr "质量" + +#: ../../quality/alert.rst:3 +msgid "Alert" +msgstr "警告" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:3 +msgid "Generate a Quality Alert from a Manufacturing Order" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Speaking of manufacturing orders, you have two different situations to " +"consider in Odoo. Those two will result in two different processes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:8 +msgid "You work with a simple manufacturing flow;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:10 +msgid "You work with a complex manufacturing flow that includes routings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:13 +msgid "Simple manufacturing flow" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:15 +msgid "" +"If you work with simple manufacturing orders, the *Quality Alerts* will be " +"launched from the manufacturing order itself. When manufacturing a product " +"for which you need to process quality controls, a button *Quality Alert* " +"will appear on the top of your manufacturing order." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:23 +msgid "" +"By clicking on the button, you can specify the quality problem that arose " +"during the process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:29 +msgid "" +"If one of the quality checks failed, the button will be highlighted on the " +"document. If not, the button won’t be highlighted." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:36 ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:50 +msgid "Manufacturing Flow with Routings" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:38 +msgid "" +"If you work with routings defined on your manufacturing orders, the quality " +"alerts will be launched directly from the work orders on which the quality " +"checks took place." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_mo.rst:48 +msgid "" +"Then, a button *Quality Alert* will be available from the work order view. " +"When you click on the button, you can specify the quality problem that " +"appeared during the process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:3 +msgid "Generate a Quality Alert from a Transfer" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:6 +msgid "Use the Quality Alert" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Every time you perform some *Quality Checks* on a transfer, a *Quality " +"Alert* button appears. You can always use it. The button is automatically " +"highlighted once you have a failed quality check for the transfer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:16 +msgid "" +"If you click on that *Quality Alert* button, you can specify what was the " +"problem with the product." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:22 +msgid "" +"The *Quality Alert* that is created from the transfer can be found via the " +"button appearing on the top right corner of the transfer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/alert/alert_transfer.rst:28 +msgid "" +"You can also access all your *Quality Alerts* via the menu, accessible under" +" *Control*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks.rst:3 +msgid "Checks" +msgstr "支票" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:3 +msgid "Perform Quality Checks on Manufacturing Orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:5 +msgid "" +"There are two different situations to consider and that will differ in Odoo " +"processes:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:8 +msgid "You work with simple manufacturing flows;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:10 +msgid "" +"You work with complex manufacturing flows that are represented by the use of" +" routings in Odoo." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:13 +msgid "Simple Manufacturing Flow" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:16 +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:53 +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:6 +msgid "Create the Quality Control Point" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:18 +msgid "" +"To create a quality control point, open the quality app and go to *Control >" +" Control Points*. There, hit create. Make sure to select *Manufacturing* as " +"operation and choose the type of quality check you want to perform." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:27 +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:69 +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:17 +msgid "Process the Quality Check" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:29 +msgid "" +"Once your *Quality Control Point* has been created, you can create a " +"manufacturing order for your product. Now, and before marking the " +"manufacturing as done, you can register the *Quality Checks*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:39 +msgid "" +"Once you have performed your quality checks, you can find them via the " +"*Quality Checks* button available on the manufacturing order form." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:46 +msgid "" +"If you want to access all your quality checks, you can do this by opening " +"the quality checks menu, under quality control." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:55 +msgid "" +"If you want to create a *Quality Control Point*, open the *Quality* app and " +"go to *Control > Control Points*. Then, click on create. Make sure to select" +" *Manufacturing* as operation and select the work order operation on which " +"the quality check should be performed." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:64 +msgid "" +"Choosing the work order operation is necessary if you want the quality " +"checks to be performed in the work orders. After that, you can choose the " +"type of quality check." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:71 +msgid "" +"Once your *Quality Control Point* has been configured, create a " +"manufacturing order for your product. You have to plan it if you want to " +"generate the necessary work orders." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_mo.rst:78 +msgid "" +"Now, process the work order and your quality check will appear. In this " +"example, the quality check requests to enter the serial number of the Table " +"Top component." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:3 +msgid "Perform Quality Checks on Transfers" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:8 +msgid "" +"To create a *Quality Control Point*, open the *Quality* application. Then, " +"go to *Quality Control > Control Points > Create*. Now, you can define the " +"quality control point you want to apply to a specific product. Don’t forget " +"to select a transfer operation type." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:19 +msgid "" +"Let’s say that we will receive a laptop. First, create a planned receipt for" +" the product. Then, on the receipt, you will see a *Quality Checks* button " +"that appears to proceed to the quality check you configured before." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:27 +msgid "" +"By clicking on it, the instruction set on the quality control point will be " +"displayed and will require the check value." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:33 +msgid "" +"Once the quality check is done, you can find it linked to the corresponding " +"transfer and access it by clicking on the button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:39 +msgid "" +"But, if the quality check failed, the stat button will appear in red " +"(instead of green) and Odoo will suggest you to create a *Quality Alert* by " +"highlighting the corresponding button." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/checks/quality_transfers.rst:46 +msgid "" +"The quality checks can also be found in the *Quality* application by opening" +" the *Quality Checks* menu, under *Quality Control*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control.rst:3 +msgid "Control" +msgstr "控制" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:3 +msgid "Define Quality Control Points" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:6 +msgid "Quality Control Points" +msgstr "质量控制点" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:8 +msgid "" +"If it is the first *Quality Control Point* that you create, know that you " +"need to open the *Quality* app. Then, go to *Quality Control > Control " +"Points*. Once there, you have to define the product on which the quality " +"control will take place, as well as the operation at which it should take " +"place." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:14 +msgid "" +"The *Quality Control Points* can take place during transfers or during the " +"manufacturing process of the products. If you work with routings on your " +"*Bill of Materials*, you have to precise at which step of the manufacturing " +"process the quality control point should be applied." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:19 +msgid "" +"The control type defines at which frequency the quality checks should take " +"place:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:22 +msgid "" +"All Operations: all the operations will generate quality checks to perform;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:24 +msgid "" +"Randomly: the quality checks will only be performed on x% of the operation. " +"You must define the percentage yourself, on the control point;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:26 +msgid "" +"Periodically: the quality checks will be performed periodically. The " +"periodicity is based on the period you define (once a day, once a week)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:32 +msgid "Quality Control Point Types" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:34 +msgid "" +"Now that the rest is configured, you need to define the type of quality " +"check." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:38 +msgid "" +"Some of the types are only available with the manufacturing application." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:41 +msgid "Text" +msgstr "文本" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:43 +msgid "" +"This control point type allows you to give instructions to your workers " +"during the transfer, or the manufacturing process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:56 +msgid "Take a Picture" +msgstr "拍照" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:58 +msgid "" +"This control point type asks you to take a picture of the product in a " +"transfer, or when manufacturing it." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:71 +msgid "Pass-Fail" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:73 +msgid "" +"This type of control point requires that you specify if the products pass or" +" fail a specific text. It can be applied for both transfers or manufacturing" +" orders." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:80 +msgid "" +"For this kind of control point type, you have the possibility to define a " +"failure message that will give instructions to follow in case of quality " +"check failure." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:94 +msgid "Take a Measure" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:96 +msgid "" +"This control point type requires you to enter the product’s measurements " +"during a transfer, or during the manufacturing process." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:102 +msgid "" +"For this kind of control point type, you also have the possibility to define" +" a failure message that will give instructions to the worker." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:115 +msgid "Register Consumed Materials" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:117 +msgid "" +"This control point type requires you register the component serial/lot " +"numbers during the manufacturing process. It is only available if you work " +"with routings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:128 +msgid "Register By-Products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:130 +msgid "" +"With this control point type, you must register the serial/lot number of the" +" by-products that are manufactured. It is also only available with routings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:141 +msgid "Print Label" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../quality/control/control_points.rst:143 +msgid "" +"This control point type allows you to print labels to add to the product " +"during the manufacturing process." +msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po index c7f2422b1..59e953f56 100644 --- a/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po +++ b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/sales.po @@ -4,26 +4,29 @@ # FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. # # Translators: -# mrshelly , 2018 -# liAnGjiA , 2018 -# Gary Wei , 2018 -# 宣一敏 , 2018 -# Martin Trigaux, 2018 -# Jeffery CHEN Fan , 2018 -# udcs , 2018 -# fausthuang, 2018 -# John Lin , 2018 -# bower Guo <124358678@qq.com>, 2018 +# r <263737@qq.com>, 2019 +# udcs , 2019 +# 宣一敏 , 2019 +# bower Guo <124358678@qq.com>, 2019 +# liAnGjiA , 2019 +# fausthuang, 2019 +# 演奏王 , 2019 +# John Lin , 2019 # 黎伟杰 <674416404@qq.com>, 2019 +# Martin Trigaux, 2019 +# mrshelly , 2019 +# Jeffery CHEN , 2019 +# Connie Xiao , 2019 +# Gary Wei , 2019 # #, fuzzy msgid "" msgstr "" -"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 11.0\n" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" "Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" -"POT-Creation-Date: 2018-10-19 10:03+0200\n" -"PO-Revision-Date: 2018-10-19 08:15+0000\n" -"Last-Translator: 黎伟杰 <674416404@qq.com>, 2019\n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-10-03 09:47+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Gary Wei , 2019\n" "Language-Team: Chinese (China) (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/zh_CN/)\n" "MIME-Version: 1.0\n" "Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" @@ -269,41 +272,41 @@ msgid "" "When you confirm a sale, you can create an invoice and select a down payment" " option. It can either be a fixed amount or a percentage of the total " "amount." -msgstr "" +msgstr "确认销售时，您可以创建发票并选择预付款选项。它可以是固定金额或总金额的百分比。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/down_payment.rst:16 msgid "" "The first time you request a down payment you can select an income account " "and a tax setting that will be reused for next down payments." -msgstr "" +msgstr "首次申请首付款时，您可以选择收入账户和将重新用于下一次首付款的税设置。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/down_payment.rst:22 msgid "You will then see the invoice for the down payment." -msgstr "" +msgstr "然后，您将看到预付款的发票。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/down_payment.rst:27 msgid "" "On the subsequent or final invoice, any prepayment made will be " "automatically deducted." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在后续或最终发票上，任何预付款将自动扣除。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/down_payment.rst:34 msgid "Modify the income account and customer taxes" -msgstr "" +msgstr "修改收入帐户和客户税" #: ../../sales/invoicing/down_payment.rst:36 msgid "From the products list, search for *Down Payment*." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在产品列表中，搜索 [预付款]。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/down_payment.rst:41 msgid "" "You can then edit it, under the invoicing tab you will be able to change the" " income account & customer taxes." -msgstr "" +msgstr "然后，您可以在\"开票\"选项卡下对其进行编辑，您可以更改收入帐户和客户税。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/expense.rst:3 msgid "Re-invoice expenses to customers" -msgstr "" +msgstr "向客户重新开具费用发票" #: ../../sales/invoicing/expense.rst:5 msgid "" @@ -312,18 +315,19 @@ msgid "" "consultant paying an hotel to work on the site of your client. As a company," " you would like to be able to invoice that expense to your client." msgstr "" +"经常的情况是，您的员工在为您的客户做项目时，不得不花费个人资金。让我们以顾问支付酒店在客户网站上工作为例。作为一家公司，您希望能够向客户开具该费用的发票。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/expense.rst:12 #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:64 msgid "Expenses configuration" -msgstr "" +msgstr "费用配置" #: ../../sales/invoicing/expense.rst:14 #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:66 msgid "" "To track & invoice expenses, you will need the expenses app. Go to " ":menuselection:`Apps --> Expenses` to install it." -msgstr "" +msgstr "要跟踪和发票费用，您将需要费用应用程序。转到 ：菜单选择：\"应用程序 -= 费用\"来安装它。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/expense.rst:17 #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:69 @@ -331,87 +335,87 @@ msgid "" "You should also activate the analytic accounts feature to link expenses to " "the sales order, to do so, go to :menuselection:`Invoicing --> Configuration" " --> Settings` and activate *Analytic Accounting*." -msgstr "" +msgstr "您还应激活分析科目功能以将支出链接到销售订单，为此，请转到 ：菜单选择：\"开票 --* 配置 --= 设置\"并激活 [会计分录]。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/expense.rst:22 #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:74 msgid "Add expenses to your sales order" -msgstr "" +msgstr "向销售订单添加费用" #: ../../sales/invoicing/expense.rst:24 #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:76 msgid "" "From the expense app, you or your consultant can create a new one, e.g. the " "hotel for the first week on the site of your customer." -msgstr "" +msgstr "从费用应用中，您或您的顾问可以创建一个新的应用程序，例如，在客户网站上第一周的酒店。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/expense.rst:27 #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:79 msgid "" "You can then enter a relevant description and select an existing product or " "create a new one from right there." -msgstr "" +msgstr "然后，您可以输入相关描述并选择现有产品或从该名称中创建新产品。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/expense.rst:33 #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:85 msgid "Here, we are creating a *Hotel* product:" -msgstr "" +msgstr "在这里，我们正在创建一个[酒店]产品：" #: ../../sales/invoicing/expense.rst:38 msgid "" "Under the invoicing tab, select *Delivered quantities* and either *At cost* " "or *Sales price* as well depending if you want to invoice the cost of your " "expense or a previously agreed on sales price." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在\"开票\"选项卡下，选择 [交付数量] 和 [按成本] 或 [销售价格]，具体取决于您是否要为费用成本或先前商定的销售价格开具发票。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/expense.rst:45 #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:97 msgid "" "To modify or create more products go to :menuselection:`Expenses --> " "Configuration --> Expense products`." -msgstr "" +msgstr "要修改或创建更多产品，请转到 ：菜单选择：\"费用 --* 配置 --= 费用产品\"。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/expense.rst:48 #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:100 msgid "" "Back on the expense, add the original sale order in the expense to submit." -msgstr "" +msgstr "返回费用时，在要提交的费用中添加原始销售订单。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/expense.rst:54 #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:106 msgid "It can then be submitted to the manager, approved and finally posted." -msgstr "" +msgstr "然后，它可以提交给经理，批准，并最终发布。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/expense.rst:65 #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:117 msgid "It will then be in the sales order and ready to be invoiced." -msgstr "" +msgstr "然后，它将在销售订单中，并准备开票。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/invoicing_policy.rst:3 msgid "Invoice based on delivered or ordered quantities" -msgstr "" +msgstr "基于已交付或订购数量的发票" #: ../../sales/invoicing/invoicing_policy.rst:5 msgid "" "Depending on your business and what you sell, you have two options for " "invoicing:" -msgstr "" +msgstr "根据您的业务和所售产品，您有两种开票选项：" #: ../../sales/invoicing/invoicing_policy.rst:8 msgid "" "Invoice on ordered quantity: invoice the full order as soon as the sales " "order is confirmed." -msgstr "" +msgstr "已订购数量的发票：一旦确认销售订单，就为全部订单开具发票。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/invoicing_policy.rst:10 msgid "" "Invoice on delivered quantity: invoice on what you delivered even if it's a " "partial delivery." -msgstr "" +msgstr "交货数量的发票：您交付的发票，即使它是部分交货。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/invoicing_policy.rst:13 msgid "Invoice on ordered quantity is the default mode." -msgstr "" +msgstr "订单数量的发票是默认模式" #: ../../sales/invoicing/invoicing_policy.rst:15 msgid "" @@ -419,52 +423,52 @@ msgid "" "of business, when you sell material, liquids or food in large quantities the" " quantity might diverge a little bit and it is therefore better to invoice " "the actual delivered quantity." -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用 [交付数量发票] 的好处取决于您的业务类型，当您大量销售物料、液体或食品时，数量可能会稍有偏差，因此最好为实际交付数量开具发票。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/invoicing_policy.rst:21 msgid "" "You also have the ability to invoice manually, letting you control every " "options: invoice ready to invoice lines, invoice a percentage (advance), " "invoice a fixed advance." -msgstr "" +msgstr "您还可以手动开票，从而控制每个选项：发票准备发票行，发票百分比（预付款），发票固定预付款。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/invoicing_policy.rst:26 msgid "Decide the policy on a product page" -msgstr "" +msgstr "在产品页面上决定策略" #: ../../sales/invoicing/invoicing_policy.rst:28 msgid "" "From any products page, under the invoicing tab you will find the invoicing " "policy and select the one you want." -msgstr "" +msgstr "从任何产品页面，在\"开票\"选项卡下，您将找到开票策略并选择所需的策略。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/invoicing_policy.rst:35 msgid "Send the invoice" -msgstr "" +msgstr "发送发票" #: ../../sales/invoicing/invoicing_policy.rst:37 msgid "" "Once you confirm the sale, you can see your delivered and invoiced " "quantities." -msgstr "" +msgstr "确认销售后，您可以看到已交付和开票数量。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/invoicing_policy.rst:43 msgid "" "If you set it in ordered quantities, you can invoice as soon as the sale is " "confirmed. If however you selected delivered quantities, you will first have" " to validate the delivery." -msgstr "" +msgstr "如果按订购数量将其设置，则可以在确认销售后立即开具发票。如果您选择了交货数量，则首先必须验证交货。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/invoicing_policy.rst:47 msgid "" "Once the products are delivered, you can invoice your customer. Odoo will " "automatically add the quantities to invoiced based on how many you delivered" " if you did a partial delivery." -msgstr "" +msgstr "产品交付后，您可以向客户开具发票。如果您执行部分交货，Odoo 将根据您交付的数量自动将数量添加到开票中。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/milestone.rst:3 msgid "Invoice project milestones" -msgstr "" +msgstr "发票项目流程" #: ../../sales/invoicing/milestone.rst:5 msgid "" @@ -475,40 +479,41 @@ msgid "" "throughout the project lifetime and for the client who can monitor the " "project's progress and pay in several installments." msgstr "" +"开票流程可用于昂贵或大型项目，每个流程代表一个明确的工作序列，这些工作将逐步建立到合同完成。这种开票方法既适合确保在整个项目生命周期内获得稳定的现金流的公司，也适合能够监控项目进度并分期付款的客户。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/milestone.rst:13 msgid "Create milestone products" -msgstr "" +msgstr "创建里流程式产品" #: ../../sales/invoicing/milestone.rst:15 msgid "" "In Odoo, each milestone of your project is considered as a product. To " "configure products to work this way, go to any product form." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在 Odoo 中，项目的每个流程都被视为产品。要将产品配置为以这种方式工作，请转到任何产品窗体。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/milestone.rst:18 msgid "" "You have to set the product type as *Service* under general information and " "select *Milestones* in the sales tab." -msgstr "" +msgstr "您必须在常规信息下将产品类型设置为 [服务]，并在销售选项卡中选择 [流程]。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/milestone.rst:25 msgid "Invoice milestones" -msgstr "里程碑开票" +msgstr "开票流程" #: ../../sales/invoicing/milestone.rst:27 msgid "" "From the sales order, you can manually edit the quantity delivered as you " "complete a milestone." -msgstr "" +msgstr "从销售订单中，您可以在完成流程时手动编辑交付的数量。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/milestone.rst:33 msgid "You can then invoice that first milestone." -msgstr "" +msgstr "然后，您可以为该里程碑开票。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/proforma.rst:3 ../../sales/invoicing/proforma.rst:22 msgid "Send a pro-forma invoice" -msgstr "" +msgstr "发送形式发票" #: ../../sales/invoicing/proforma.rst:5 msgid "" @@ -519,170 +524,171 @@ msgid "" "or for customs purposes in importation. They differ from a normal invoice in" " not being a demand or request for payment." msgstr "" +"形式发票是货物交付前的简略发票或估计发票。它记录了货物的种类和数量、价值以及其他重要信息，如重量和运输费用。形式发票通常用作带有报价的初步发票，或用于进口中的海关目的。它们不同于普通发票，不是付款要求或要求。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/proforma.rst:13 #: ../../sales/send_quotations/different_addresses.rst:10 msgid "Activate the feature" -msgstr "" +msgstr "激活功能" #: ../../sales/invoicing/proforma.rst:15 msgid "" "Go to :menuselection:`SALES --> Configuration --> Settings` and activate the" " *Pro-Forma Invoice* feature." -msgstr "" +msgstr "转到 ：菜单选择：'销售 --= 配置 --= 设置'并激活 [模拟 发票] 功能。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/proforma.rst:24 msgid "" "From any quotation or sales order, you know have an option to send a pro-" "forma invoice." -msgstr "" +msgstr "从任何报价单或销售订单中，您知道可以选择发送形式发票。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/proforma.rst:30 msgid "" "When you click on send, Odoo will send an email with the pro-forma invoice " "in attachment." -msgstr "" +msgstr "当您单击发送时，Odoo 将发送一封包含附件中形式发票的电子邮件。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/subscriptions.rst:3 msgid "Sell subscriptions" -msgstr "" +msgstr "销售订阅" #: ../../sales/invoicing/subscriptions.rst:5 msgid "" "Selling subscription products will give you predictable revenue, making " "planning ahead much easier." -msgstr "" +msgstr "销售订阅产品将为您提供可预测的收入，使提前规划变得更加容易。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/subscriptions.rst:9 msgid "Make a subscription from a sales order" -msgstr "" +msgstr "从销售订单进行订阅" #: ../../sales/invoicing/subscriptions.rst:11 msgid "" "From the sales app, create a quotation to the desired customer, and select " "the subscription product your previously created." -msgstr "" +msgstr "从销售应用中，为所需客户创建报价单，然后选择您以前创建的订阅产品。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/subscriptions.rst:14 msgid "" "When you confirm the sale the subscription will be created automatically. " "You will see a direct link from the sales order to the Subscription in the " "upper right corner." -msgstr "" +msgstr "确认销售时，将自动创建订阅。您将在右上角看到从销售订单到订阅的直接链接。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:3 msgid "Invoice based on time and materials" -msgstr "" +msgstr "基于时间和材料的发票" #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:5 msgid "" "Time and Materials is generally used in projects in which it is not possible" " to accurately estimate the size of the project, or when it is expected that" " the project requirements would most likely change." -msgstr "" +msgstr "时间和材料通常用于无法准确估计项目规模或预计项目需求最有可能发生变化的项目。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:9 msgid "" "This is opposed to a fixed-price contract in which the owner agrees to pay " "the contractor a lump sum for the fulfillment of the contract no matter what" " the contractors pay their employees, sub-contractors, and suppliers." -msgstr "" +msgstr "这与固定价格合同相反，在这种合同中，业主同意向承包商支付一笔总付，以支付合同的履行，无论承包商向其员工、分包商和供应商支付什么。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:14 msgid "" "For this documentation I will use the example of a consultant, you will need" " to invoice their time, their various expenses (transport, lodging, ...) and" " purchases." -msgstr "" +msgstr "对于这个文件，我将使用顾问的例子，您将需要发票他们的时间，他们的各种费用（交通，住宿，...）和购买。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:19 msgid "Invoice time configuration" -msgstr "" +msgstr "发票时间配置" #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:21 msgid "" "To keep track of progress in the project, you will need the *Project* app. " "Go to :menuselection:`Apps --> Project` to install it." -msgstr "" +msgstr "要跟踪项目中的进度，您需要 [项目] 应用。转到 ：菜单选择：\"应用程序 -= 项目\"以安装它。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:24 msgid "" "In *Project* you will use timesheets, to do so go to :menuselection:`Project" " --> Configuration --> Settings` and activate the *Timesheets* feature." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在 [项目] 中，您将使用时间表，为此转到 ：菜单选择：\"项目 --* 配置 --* 设置\"并激活 [时间表] 功能。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:32 msgid "Invoice your time spent" -msgstr "" +msgstr "为您花费的时间开具发票" #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:34 msgid "" "From a product page set as a service, you will find two options under the " "invoicing tab, select both *Timesheets on tasks* and *Create a task in a new" " project*." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在设置为服务的产品页面中，您将在\"开票\"选项卡下找到两个选项，选择两个选项 [任务时间表] 和 [在新项目中创建任务]。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:41 msgid "You could also add the task to an existing project." -msgstr "" +msgstr "您还可以将任务添加到现有项目中。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:43 msgid "" "Once confirming a sales order, you will now see two new buttons, one for the" " project overview and one for the current task." -msgstr "" +msgstr "确认销售订单后，您现在将看到两个新按钮，一个用于项目概述，另一个用于当前任务。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:49 msgid "" "You will directly be in the task if you click on it, you can also access it " "from the *Project* app." -msgstr "" +msgstr "如果您单击该任务，您将直接参与该任务，您也可以从 [项目] 应用访问它。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:52 msgid "" "Under timesheets, you can assign who works on it. You can or they can add " "how many hours they worked on the project so far." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在时间表下，您可以分配谁对它进行工作。您可以添加，也可以添加到目前为止他们在项目上工作的小时数。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:58 msgid "From the sales order, you can then invoice those hours." -msgstr "" +msgstr "然后，可以从销售订单中为这些工时开票。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:90 msgid "" "under the invoicing tab, select *Delivered quantities* and either *At cost* " "or *Sales price* as well depending if you want to invoice the cost of your " "expense or a previously agreed on sales price." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在\"开票\"选项卡下，选择 [交付数量]和 [按成本] 或 [销售价格] 以及您是否要开具费用成本发票或先前商定的销售价格。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:120 msgid "Invoice purchases" -msgstr "" +msgstr "采购发票" #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:122 msgid "" "The last thing you might need to add to the sale order is purchases made for" " it." -msgstr "" +msgstr "您可能需要添加到销售订单的最后一件事是购买。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:125 msgid "" "You will need the *Purchase Analytics* feature, to activate it, go to " ":menuselection:`Invoicing --> Configuration --> Settings` and select " "*Purchase Analytics*." -msgstr "" +msgstr "您将需要 [购买分析] 功能，以激活它，转到 ：菜单选择：'开票 -- * 配置 --* 设置'并选择 [购买分析]。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:129 msgid "" "While making the purchase order don't forget to add the right analytic " "account." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在下达采购订单时，不要忘记添加正确的分析帐户。" #: ../../sales/invoicing/time_materials.rst:135 msgid "" "Once the PO is confirmed and received, you can create the vendor bill, this " "will automatically add it to the SO where you can invoice it." -msgstr "" +msgstr "确认并接收采购订单后，您可以创建供应商帐单，这会自动将其添加到 SO 中，您可以在其中开具发票。" #: ../../sales/products_prices.rst:3 msgid "Products & Prices" @@ -705,24 +711,24 @@ msgid "" "Check *Allow multi currencies* in :menuselection:`Invoicing/Accounting --> " "Settings`. As admin, you need *Adviser* access rights on " "Invoicing/Accounting apps." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在 ：\"菜单选择\"中选中 [允许多种货币]：\"开票/记帐 -* 设置\"。作为管理员，您需要对开票/会计应用的 [顾问] 访问权限。" #: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/currencies.rst:10 msgid "" "Create one pricelist per currency. A new *Currency* field shows up in " "pricelist setup form." -msgstr "" +msgstr "按货币创建一个价目表。\"新建\" 货币 + 字段显示在价目表设置窗体中。" #: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/currencies.rst:13 msgid "" "To activate a new currency, go to :menuselection:`Accounting --> " "Configuration --> Currencies`, select it in the list and press *Activate* in" " the top-right corner. Now it will show up in currencies drop-down lists." -msgstr "" +msgstr "要激活新货币，请转到 ：菜单选择：\"会计 --= 配置 --= 货币\"，在列表中选择它，然后按右上角的 [激活]。现在，它将显示货币下拉列表。" #: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/currencies.rst:17 msgid "Prices in foreign currencies can be defined in two fashions." -msgstr "" +msgstr "外币价格可以分两种方式定义。" #: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/currencies.rst:20 msgid "Automatic conversion from public price" @@ -732,7 +738,7 @@ msgstr "从公开价格自动转换" msgid "" "The public price is in your company's main currency (see " ":menuselection:`Accounting --> Settings`) and is set in product detail form." -msgstr "" +msgstr "公开价格以您公司的主要货币（请参阅 ：菜单选择：\"会计 --* 设置\"），并在产品详细信息窗体中设置。" #: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/currencies.rst:28 msgid "" @@ -741,6 +747,8 @@ msgid "" "European Central Bank at your convenience: manually, daily, weekly, etc. See" " :menuselection:`Accounting --> Settings`." msgstr "" +"转换率可在 ：菜单选择：\"会计 -= 配置 -= 货币\"中找到。他们可以更新从雅虎或欧洲中央银行在您的方便：手动，每日，每周等。请参阅 " +"：菜单选择：\"会计 --= 设置\"。" #: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/currencies.rst:40 msgid "Set your own prices" @@ -750,7 +758,7 @@ msgstr "设置你自己的价格" msgid "" "This is advised if you don't want your pricing to change along with currency" " rates." -msgstr "" +msgstr "如果您不希望定价随货币汇率而变化，建议这样做。" #: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/currencies.rst:49 msgid ":doc:`pricing`" @@ -758,7 +766,7 @@ msgstr ":doc:`pricing`" #: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:3 msgid "How to adapt your prices to your customers and apply discounts" -msgstr "" +msgstr "如何根据客户调整价格并应用折扣" #: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:5 msgid "" @@ -766,179 +774,208 @@ msgid "" " to your business. A pricelist is a list of prices or price rules that Odoo " "searches to determine the suggested price. You can set several critarias to " "use a specific price: periods, min. sold quantity (meet a minimum order " -"quantity and get a price break), etc. As pricelists only suggest prices, " -"they can be overridden by users completing sales orders. Choose your pricing" -" strategy from :menuselection:`Sales --> Settings`." +"quantity and get a price break), etc." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:16 -msgid "Several prices per product" +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:9 +msgid "" +"As pricelists only suggest prices, they can be overridden by vendors " +"completing sales orders. Choose your pricing strategy from " +":menuselection:`Sales --> Settings`." msgstr "" #: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:18 msgid "" +"*A single sale price per product :* doesn't let you adapt prices, it use " +"default product price ;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:19 +msgid "" +"*Different prices per customer segment :* you will set several prices per " +"products ;" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:20 +msgid "" +"*Advanced pricing based on formula :* will let you apply discounts, margins " +"and roundings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:23 +msgid "Several prices per product" +msgstr "每个产品有几个价格" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:25 +msgid "" "To apply several prices per product, select *Different prices per customer " "segment* in :menuselection:`Sales --> Settings`. Then open the *Sales* tab " "in the product detail form. You can settle following strategies." msgstr "" +"要应用每个产品的若干价格，请在 ：菜单选择中选择 [每个客户细分的不同价格]：\"销售 --= 设置\"。然后在产品详细信息窗体中打开 [销售] " +"选项卡。您可以按照以下策略结算。" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:23 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:30 msgid "Prices per customer segment" msgstr "每个客户群的价格" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:25 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:32 msgid "" "Create pricelists for your customer segments: e.g. registered, premium, etc." -msgstr "" +msgstr "为您的客户细分创建价目表：例如注册、溢价等。" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:30 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:37 msgid "" "The default pricelist applied to any new customer is *Public Pricelist*. To " "segment your customers, open the customer detail form and change the *Sale " "Pricelist* in the *Sales & Purchases* tab." -msgstr "" +msgstr "应用于任何新客户的默认价目表是 \" 公共价目表]。要细分客户，请打开客户详细信息表单，并在 \"销售 + 购买\" 选项卡中更改 \"销售价目表\"。" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:38 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:45 msgid "Temporary prices" -msgstr "" +msgstr "临时价格" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:40 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:47 msgid "Apply deals for bank holidays, etc. Enter start and end dates dates." -msgstr "" +msgstr "申请银行假日等优惠。输入开始日期和结束日期。" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:46 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:53 msgid "" "Make sure you have default prices set in the pricelist outside of the deals " "period. Otherwise you might have issues once the period over." -msgstr "" +msgstr "请确保您在交易期间之外的价目表中设置了默认价格。否则，一旦期间结束，可能会出现问题。" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:50 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:57 msgid "Prices per minimum quantity" msgstr "每个最小数量价格" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:56 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:63 msgid "" "The prices order does not matter. The system is smart and applies first " "prices that match the order date and/or the minimal quantities." -msgstr "" +msgstr "价格顺序并不重要。该系统是智能的，并应用与订单日期和/或最小数量相匹配的第一个价格。" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:60 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:67 msgid "Discounts, margins, roundings" msgstr "折扣、利润、凑整" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:62 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:69 msgid "" -"The third option allows to set price change rules. Changes can be relative " -"to the product list/catalog price, the product cost price, or to another " -"pricelist. Changes are calculated via discounts or surcharges and can be " -"forced to fit within floor (minumum margin) and ceilings (maximum margins). " -"Prices can be rounded to the nearest cent/dollar or multiple of either " -"(nearest 5 cents, nearest 10 dollars)." +"*Advanced pricing based on formula* allows to set price change rules. " +"Changes can be relative to the product list/catalog price, the product cost " +"price, or to another pricelist. Changes are calculated via discounts or " +"surcharges and can be forced to fit within floor (minumum margin) and " +"ceilings (maximum margins). Prices can be rounded to the nearest cent/dollar" +" or multiple of either (nearest 5 cents, nearest 10 dollars)." msgstr "" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:69 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:76 msgid "" "Once installed go to :menuselection:`Sales --> Configuration --> Pricelists`" " (or :menuselection:`Website Admin --> Catalog --> Pricelists` if you use " "e-Commerce)." msgstr "" +"安装后转到 ：菜单选择：'销售 -- = 配置 --= 价目表'（或 ：菜单选择：'网站管理员 --] 目录 --* 如果使用电子商务，则价格表）。" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:77 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:84 msgid "" "Each pricelist item can be associated to either all products, to a product " "internal category (set of products) or to a specific product. Like in second" " option, you can set dates and minimum quantities." -msgstr "" +msgstr "每个价目表项目都可以关联到所有产品、产品内部类别（产品集）或特定产品。与第二个选项一样，您可以设置日期和最小数量。" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:84 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:91 msgid "" "Once again the system is smart. If a rule is set for a particular item and " "another one for its category, Odoo will take the rule of the item." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:86 -msgid "Make sure at least one pricelist item covers all your products." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:88 -msgid "There are 3 modes of computation: fix price, discount & formula." -msgstr "" +msgstr "再次，该系统是智能的。如果为特定项设置了规则，为其类别设置了另一个规则，Odoo 将采用该项的规则。" #: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:93 -msgid "Here are different price settings made possible thanks to formulas." -msgstr "" +msgid "Make sure at least one pricelist item covers all your products." +msgstr "确保至少有一个价目表项目涵盖您的所有产品。" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:96 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:95 +msgid "There are 3 modes of computation: fix price, discount & formula." +msgstr "有3种计算模式：固定价格，折扣和公式。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:100 +msgid "Here are different price settings made possible thanks to formulas." +msgstr "以下是不同的价格设置，由于公式。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:103 msgid "Discounts with roundings" msgstr "舍入折扣" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:98 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:105 msgid "e.g. 20% discounts with prices rounded up to 9.99." -msgstr "" +msgstr "20% 的折扣，价格四舍五入到 9.99。" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:104 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:111 msgid "Costs with markups (retail)" -msgstr "" - -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:106 -msgid "e.g. sale price = 2*cost (100% markup) with $5 of minimal margin." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:112 -msgid "Prices per country" -msgstr "" +msgstr "加价成本（零售）" #: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:113 +msgid "e.g. sale price = 2*cost (100% markup) with $5 of minimal margin." +msgstr "例如，销售价格 = 2+成本（100% 加价），最低保证金为 5 美元。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:119 +msgid "Prices per country" +msgstr "每个国家/地区的价格" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:120 msgid "" "Pricelists can be set by countries group. Any new customer recorded in Odoo " "gets a default pricelist, i.e. the first one in the list matching the " "country. In case no country is set for the customer, Odoo takes the first " "pricelist without any country group." msgstr "" - -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:116 -msgid "The default pricelist can be replaced when creating a sales order." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:118 -msgid "You can change the pricelists sequence by drag & drop in list view." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:121 -msgid "Compute and show discount % to customers" -msgstr "" +"价目表可以按国家/地区组设置。在 Odoo " +"中记录的任何新客户都会获得一个默认价目表，即列表中第一个与国家/地区匹配的客户。如果未为客户设置任何国家/地区，Odoo " +"会获取没有任何国家/地区组的第一个价目表。" #: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:123 +msgid "The default pricelist can be replaced when creating a sales order." +msgstr "创建销售订单时，可以替换默认价目表。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:125 +msgid "You can change the pricelists sequence by drag & drop in list view." +msgstr "您可以通过在列表视图中拖放来更改价目表序列。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:128 +msgid "Compute and show discount % to customers" +msgstr "计算并向客户显示折扣百分比" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:130 msgid "" "In case of discount, you can show the public price and the computed discount" " % on printed sales orders and in your eCommerce catalog. To do so:" -msgstr "" +msgstr "在折扣的情况下，您可以在打印的销售订单和电子商务目录中显示公共价格和计算的折扣百分比。为此，" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:125 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:132 msgid "" "Check *Allow discounts on sales order lines* in :menuselection:`Sales --> " "Configuration --> Settings --> Quotations & Sales --> Discounts`." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:126 -msgid "Apply the option in the pricelist setup form." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在 \"菜单选择\"中选中 [允许销售订单行的折扣]：'销售 --= 配置 --= 设置 --= 报价 = 销售 --= 折扣。" #: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:133 +msgid "Apply the option in the pricelist setup form." +msgstr "在\"价目表\"设置窗体中应用该选项。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:140 msgid ":doc:`currencies`" msgstr ":doc:`currencies`" -#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:134 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/prices/pricing.rst:141 msgid ":doc:`../../../ecommerce/maximizing_revenue/pricing`" msgstr ":doc:`../../../ecommerce/maximizing_revenue/pricing`" #: ../../sales/products_prices/products.rst:3 msgid "Manage your products" -msgstr "" +msgstr "管理您的产品" #: ../../sales/products_prices/products/import.rst:3 msgid "How to import products with categories and variants" -msgstr "" +msgstr "如何导入具有类别和变体的产品" #: ../../sales/products_prices/products/import.rst:5 msgid "" @@ -970,7 +1007,7 @@ msgid "" "Don't change labels of columns you want to import. Otherwise Odoo won't " "recognize them anymore and you will have to map them on your own in the " "import screen." -msgstr "" +msgstr "不要更改要导入的列的标签。否则，Odoo 将不再识别它们，您必须在导入屏幕中自行映射它们。" #: ../../sales/products_prices/products/import.rst:18 msgid "" @@ -978,6 +1015,7 @@ msgid "" " in Odoo. If Odoo fails in matching the column name with a field, you can " "make it manually when importing by browsing a list of available fields." msgstr "" +"要添加新列，可以随意添加新列，但字段需要存在于 Odoo 中。如果 Odoo 未能将列名称与字段匹配，则可以通过浏览可用字段的列表在导入时手动进行导入。" #: ../../sales/products_prices/products/import.rst:24 msgid "Why an “ID” column" @@ -987,7 +1025,7 @@ msgstr "为什么要用ID行" msgid "" "The ID is an unique identifier for the line item. Feel free to use the one " "of your previous software to ease the transition to Odoo." -msgstr "" +msgstr "ID 是行项的唯一标识符。随意使用您以前的软件之一，以缓解过渡到 Odoo。" #: ../../sales/products_prices/products/import.rst:29 msgid "" @@ -1027,25 +1065,681 @@ msgstr "" "可以使用关联的记录或ID号导入。当两个记录的名称相同时需要ID号进行区分，即在行标题的末尾添加。\" / ID\"。（如产品属性：产品属性/属性 / " "ID）" +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:3 +msgid "Using product variants" +msgstr "使用产品型号(变体)" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Product variants are used to manage products having different variations, " +"like size, color, etc. It allows managing the product at the template level " +"(for all variations) and at the variant level (specific attributes)." +msgstr "" +"产品变型用来管理有不同变量的产品, 例如尺寸, 颜色等等。它可以让我们在产品模板层面对产品进行管理(所有的变量), " +"也可以在变型层面管理(特定一个属性)。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:10 +msgid "" +"As an example, a company selling t-shirts may have the following product:" +msgstr "例如, 一个销售ｔ血衫的公司可能有以下产品 :" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:13 +msgid "B&C T-shirt" +msgstr "B&C T血衫" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:15 +msgid "Sizes: S, M, L, XL, XXL" +msgstr "尺寸 : S, M, L, XL, XXL" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:16 +msgid "Colors: Blue, Red, White, Black" +msgstr "颜色 :蓝色, 红色, 白色, 黑色" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:18 +msgid "" +"In this example, **B&C T-Shirt** is called the product template and **B&C " +"T-Shirt, S, Blue** is a variant. Sizes and color are **attributes**." +msgstr "在该示例中, **B&C ｔ血衫** 是产品模板, **B&C ｔ血衫, S, 蓝色** 是一个产品变量, 尺寸和颜色是 **属性** 。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:22 +msgid "" +"The above example has a total of 20 different products (5 sizes x 4 colors)." +" Each one of these products has its own inventory, sales, etc." +msgstr "以上示例总共有20个不同的产品(5中尺寸x4种颜色)。每一个产品都会有自己的库存, 销售信息, 等等。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:26 +msgid "Impact of variants" +msgstr "变型的影响" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:28 +msgid "" +"**Barcode**: the code and barcode is associated to a variant, not the " +"template. Every variant may have its own barcode / SKU." +msgstr " **条码**: 编码和条码关联到一个变型, 而不是一个产品模板。每个型号都可以有自己的条码／SKU。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:31 +msgid "" +"**Price**: every product variant has its own public price that is computed " +"based on the template price ($20) with an optional extra for every variant " +"(+$3 for color red). However, you can define pricelist rules that apply on " +"the template or the variant." +msgstr "" +" **价格**: 每个产品变型有自己的公开价，它基于产品模板的价格 ($20)，以及每个变型的可选额外价格(红色额外加$3)，计算得出。然而, " +"你可以定义应用在产品模板以及产品变型的价格表。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:36 +msgid "" +"**Inventory**: the inventory is managed by product variant. You don't own " +"t-shirts, you only own \"T-shirts, S, Red\", or \"T-Shirts, M, Blue\". For " +"information purpose, on the product template form, you get the inventory " +"that is the sum of every variant. (but the actual inventory is computed by " +"variant)" +msgstr "" +" **库存**: 存货在产品变型层面管理。你拥有的不是T恤衫, 而是\" T恤衫, S, 红色 \", 或者\" T恤衫, M, 蓝色 " +"\"。用于信息目的, 在产品模板表单，你得到的库存，是所有变型的数量总和。(但是实际库存是按变型计算的)" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:42 +msgid "" +"**Picture**: the picture is related to the variant, every variation of a " +"product may have its own primary picture." +msgstr " **图片**: 此图片与变型相关, 每个型号可以有自己的主要图片。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:45 +msgid "" +"**Other fields**: most of the other fields belongs to the product template. " +"If you update them, it updates automatically all the variants. (example: " +"Income Account, Taxes)" +msgstr "" +" **其余字段**: 大部分其他字段属于产品模板。如果你对他么恩进行更新, 它会自动地更新到所有相关的型号上。(例如 : 主营业务收入科目, 税)" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:50 +msgid "Should you use variants?" +msgstr "应该使用产品变型吗？" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:53 +msgid "When should you use variants?" +msgstr "何时应该使用产品变型？" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:55 +msgid "Using variants has the following impacts:" +msgstr "使用变型有以下影响 :" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:57 +msgid "" +"**eCommerce**: in your online shop, the customer will only see product " +"templates in the catalog page. Once the visitor click on such a product, he " +"will have options to choose amongst the variants (colors, sizes, …)" +msgstr "" +" **电商**: 在你的在线商铺, 客户只会在分类页面看到产品模板。一旦访客点击这样的产品, 他将能在众多的型号中间进行选择(颜色, 尺寸, ……)" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:62 +msgid "" +"**Manufacturing**: Using variants allows to define only one bill of material" +" for a product template and slight variations for some of the variants. " +"Example: instead of creating a Bill of Material for \"T-shirt, Red, S\", you" +" create a bill of material for \"T-shirt\" and add some lines that are " +"specific to the dimension S, and other lines specific to the color Red." +msgstr "" +" **生产**: 使用型号可以基于产品模板和各种型号质检的细微差别只定义一个物料表。例如: 你可以创建一个\" T血衫\\ \\ \\ " +"\"并添加一些特定尺寸例如S的行以及特定颜色例如红色的行, 从而代替创建物料表\" T血衫, 红色, S\\ \\ \\ \"。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:69 +msgid "" +"**Pricing**: The default price of a product is computed using the price of " +"the product template and add the optional extra price on each dimension of " +"the variant. This way, variant prices are easier to maintain since you don't" +" have to set the price for every variant. However, it's possible to create " +"pricelist rules to fix price per variants too." +msgstr "" +" **价格**: 产品的默认价格是产品模板的价格加上型号上特定属性的额外价格。这样, 型号的价格维护起来就很容易, 你不必在每个型号上维护, " +"当然也可以使用价格表规则固定每个型号的价格。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:77 +msgid "When should you avoid using variants?" +msgstr "在什么时候应该避免使用产品型号？" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:79 +msgid "" +"Using variants may add a level of complexity on the way you use Odoo. You " +"should consider using variants only if you need it to reduce the complexity " +"of managing lots of products that are similars." +msgstr "使用变量有可能会增加操作的复杂程度, 当你要使用产品的变量属性时, 你要确保这样做只会减少操作的复杂程度。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:83 +msgid "" +"As an example, importing your initial product catalog is more complex if you" +" use variants. You can't just import a list of products, you must import " +"product templates and all their related variations." +msgstr "例如, 如果使用型号的话, 在导入期初数据的时候就比较麻烦。你不能只是导入产品的列表, 还必须要导入产品模板以及相关的型号。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:87 +msgid "" +"In addition to that, you should also carefully select the dimensions that " +"you manage as separate product templates and those as variants. As an " +"example, a company having these products:" +msgstr "另外, 你需要谨慎的选择尺寸作为变量, 这些都术语一个单独的产品模板。局一个例子, 一个公司有如下产品 :" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:91 +msgid "Quality: T-Shirts, Polos, Shirts" +msgstr "质量 :T血衫, 马球, 衬衫" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:93 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:105 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:110 +msgid "Color: Red, Blue" +msgstr "颜色 : 红色, 蓝色" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:95 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:106 +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:111 +msgid "Size: S, M, L, XL" +msgstr "尺寸 : S, M, L, XL" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:97 +msgid "" +"In such a use case, you could create 1 template with three dimensions of " +"variants (Layout, T-Shirts, Polos). But, it's recommended to create two " +"different product templates as T-shirts may highly differ from polos or " +"shirts and customer expect to see these as two different products in the " +"e-Commerce:" +msgstr "" +"在该用户案例中, 你可以创建1个带有尺寸变量的模板(布局, ｔ血衫, 保罗)。但是, 我们还是建议你创建两种不同的产品把保罗或者衬衫分开, " +"并且在你的电脑上网站客户也乐意看到这样分 :" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:103 +msgid "Product Template: T-shirt" +msgstr "产品模板 :T血衫" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:108 +msgid "Product Template: Polos" +msgstr "产品模板 :马球" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:114 +#: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:10 +msgid "Configuration" +msgstr "设置" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:117 +msgid "Activate the variant feature" +msgstr "激活产品型号特性" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:119 +msgid "" +"Before you can use product variants, you must first activate the product " +"variants in the settings. To do so, you must go to the Sales app. In the " +"menu :menuselection:`Configuration --> Settings`, locate the **Products " +"Variants** line, and tick the option **Products can have several " +"attributes**, then click on **Apply**." +msgstr "" +"在你使用产品变量之前, 你需要在设置中激活产品变量。要这样做, 你需要进入销售模块, 在菜单 :menuselection:`配置 -->设置` , " +"找到 **产品变形** 　行, 然后勾选 **产品可以有多个变体** , 然后点击 **应用** 。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:129 +msgid "Creating products with variants" +msgstr "创建带有型号的产品" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:131 +msgid "" +"Once you have activated the variant option, you can add variants to your " +"products. To do so, go to the Sales module, :menuselection:`Sales --> " +"Products`. It is also accessible from the Purchase and inventory modules." +msgstr "" +"一旦你激活了变量选项, 你就可以给产品添加变量。要这样做的话, 进入销售模块 :`销售 -->产品` 。还可以从采购和库存模块进入产品页面。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:135 +msgid "Now, click on the product you wish to add variants to." +msgstr "现在, 点击你想添加型号的产品。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:137 +msgid "" +"In the product page, a new tab called Variants has appeared. The number in " +"purple written on top is the number of variants this product currently has. " +"To add new variants, click on the tile. In the new window, click on " +"**Create**." +msgstr "" +"在产品页面, 一个新的变量页面显示出来。在页面上方的紫色数字是当前该产品的变量数量。要添加新的变量, 点击该按钮, 在新的窗口, 点击 **创建** 。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:142 +msgid "" +"In **Attributes**, click on the rolldown menu and select the type of " +"variance you wish to add. If the variant does not yet exist, you can create " +"it on the fly by clicking on Create and edit…" +msgstr "在 **属性** 中, 点击下拉菜单并选择你要添加的变量类型。。如果变量不存在, 你可以通过点击创建和编辑随手创建……" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:149 +msgid "" +"In the Attributes window, the **Value** field is the description of the " +"attribute such as Green, Plastic or 32GB. The **Attribute** field is the " +"type of variant such as Color, Material or Memory." +msgstr "在属性窗口, **值** 字段是属性的描述例如绿色, 塑料或者32G, **属性** 字段是变量的类型例如颜色, 材料或者内存。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:156 +msgid "" +"You can add a cost for the variant on the fly by adding it in the " +"**Attribute Price Extra** field, or choose to modify it later. Click on " +"**Save**." +msgstr "你可以在 **属性额外价格** 字段顺便给特定型号添加相关成本, 或者选择稍后更改, 点击 **保存** 。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:160 +msgid "" +"You can also add a different barcode and internal reference to the variant." +msgstr "你也可以给型号添加不同的条码以及内部参考码。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:163 +msgid "" +"When you have entered all the specifications of the variant, click on " +"**Save**." +msgstr "完成输入该型号的所有的特定属性后, 点击 **保存** 。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:167 +msgid "Managing Product Variants" +msgstr "管理产品型号" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:170 +msgid "Introduction" +msgstr "介绍" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:172 +msgid "" +"The examples below are all based on this product template that has two " +"variant attributes :" +msgstr "以下示例就是一个产品模板上的两个不同属性的型号产品 :" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:175 +msgid "T-Shirt B&C" +msgstr "B&C T血衫" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:177 +msgid "Color: Red, Blue, White" +msgstr "颜色 : 红色, 蓝色, 白色" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:179 +msgid "Size: S, M, L, XL, XXL" +msgstr "尺寸 : S, M, L, XL, XXL" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:182 +msgid "Managing combination possibilities" +msgstr "管理组合可能性" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:184 +msgid "" +"By default, with the above product template, you get 15 different products " +"(3 colors, 5 sizes). If the XXL size only exists for red and blue t-shirts, " +"you can deactivate the white product variant." +msgstr "" +"默认情况下, 使用上述产品的模板,你可以得到15个不同产品(3种颜色, 5个尺寸)。如果XXL只存在与红色和蓝色t恤,您可以设置禁用于白色产品系列。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:188 +msgid "" +"To do this, click on the **Variants** button, select the XXL, White T-shirt." +" From the product form, uncheck the **Active** box of the T-shirt White, " +"XXL." +msgstr "" +"要这样做的话, 点击 **型号** 按钮, 选择XXL, 白色Ｔ血衫。在产品页面上, 不勾选XXL, 白色Ｔ血衫这个产品 **有效** 框。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:197 +msgid "" +"That deactivating a product is different than having an inventory of 0." +msgstr "使产品无效不同于设定产品的库存为0." + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:200 +msgid "Setting a price per variant" +msgstr "根据型号设置价格" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:202 +msgid "" +"You can add a cost over the main price for some of the variants of a " +"product." +msgstr "对产品的有些型号你可以添加超过主要价格的成本。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:205 +msgid "" +"Once you have activated the variant option, you can add variants to your " +"products. To do so, go to the Sales module, open :menuselection:`Sales --> " +"Products` and click on the product you want to modify. Click on the " +"**Variant Prices** button to access the list of variant values." +msgstr "" +"一旦你激活了产品变量选项, 你就可以在产品上添加产品变量。要这样做, 进入销售模块, 打开 :menuselection:`销售 -->产品` " +"并点击你想要更改的产品, 点击 **变量价格** 按钮来查看变量列表。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:213 +msgid "" +"Click on the variant name you wish to add a value to, to make the 3 fields " +"editable. In the **Attribute Price Extra** field, add the cost of the " +"variant that will be added to the original price." +msgstr "点击你想要添加值的变量名称, 确保3个字段可编辑。在 **额外属性价格** 字段你, 添加该变量的成本, 他会自动的和原始价格相加。" + +#: ../../sales/products_prices/products/variants.rst:220 +msgid "When you have entered all the extra values, click on **Save**." +msgstr "一旦你输入了所有的额外值, 点击 **保存** 。" + #: ../../sales/products_prices/taxes.rst:3 msgid "Set taxes" msgstr "设置税率" +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon.rst:3 +msgid "Amazon MWS Connector" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:3 +msgid "Manage Amazon orders in Odoo" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:6 +msgid "Synchronization of orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:8 +msgid "" +"Orders are automatically fetched from Amazon and synchronized in Odoo at " +"regular intervals. The synchronization is based on the Amazon status: only " +"orders whose status has changed since the last synchronization are fetched " +"from Amazon. For **FBA** (Fulfilled by Amazon), only **Shipped** and " +"**Canceled** orders are fetched. For **FBM** (Fulfilled by Merchant), the " +"same is done for **Unshipped** and **Canceled** orders. For each " +"synchronized order, a sales order and a customer are created in Odoo if they" +" are not yet registered." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:15 +msgid "" +"If you did not request access to Personally Identifiable Information of your" +" customers in the `Developer Registration and Assessment form `_, the customers are created anonymously (the name, postal " +"address and phone number are omitted) and named **Amazon Customer**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:20 +msgid "" +"When an order is canceled in Amazon and was already synchronized in Odoo, " +"the corresponding sales order is canceled in Odoo. When an order is canceled" +" in Odoo, a notification is sent to Amazon who will mark it as such in " +"Seller Central and notify the customer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:25 +msgid "" +"To force the synchronization of an order whose status has not changed since " +"the last synchronization, activate the **Developer mode**, navigate to your " +"Amazon account and modify the date under :menuselection:`Orders Follow-up " +"--> Last Order Sync`. Pick a date anterior to the last status change of the " +"order that you wish to synchronize and save." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:30 +msgid "" +"To synchronize immediately the orders of your Amazon account, open that " +"later's form in **Developer mode** and click the button **SYNC ORDERS**. The" +" same can be done with order cancellations and pickings by clicking the " +"buttons **SYNC CANCELLATIONS** and **SYNC PICKINGS**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:36 +msgid "Manage deliveries in FBM" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:38 +msgid "" +"When a **FBM** (Fulfilled by Merchant) order is synchronized in Odoo, a " +"picking is created along with the sales order and the customer. You can " +"either ship all the ordered products to your customer at once or ship " +"products partially by using backorders." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:42 +msgid "" +"When a picking related to the order is confirmed, a notification is sent to " +"Amazon who will, in turn, notify the customer that the order (or a part of " +"it) is on its way." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:46 +msgid "Follow deliveries in FBA" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:48 +msgid "" +"When a **FBA** (Fulfilled by Amazon) order is synchronized in Odoo, a stock " +"move is recorded for each sales order item so that it is saved in your " +"system. Inventory managers can find such moves in :menuselection:`Inventory " +"--> Reporting --> Product Moves`. They pick up products in a specific " +"inventory location called **Amazon**. This location represents your stock in" +" Amazon's warehouses and allows you to manage the stock of your products " +"under the FBA program." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:54 +msgid "" +"To follow your Amazon (FBA) stock in Odoo, you can make an inventory " +"adjustment after replenishing it. You can also trigger an automated " +"replenishment from reordering rules on the Amazon location." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:58 +msgid "" +"The Amazon location is configurable by Amazon account managed in Odoo. All " +"accounts of the same company use the same location by default. It is however" +" possible to follow the stock by marketplace. First, remove the marketplace " +"for which you want to follow the stock separately from the list of " +"synchronized marketplaces. Then, create another registration for this " +"account and remove all marketplaces, except the one to isolate from the " +"others. Finally, assign another stock location to the second registration of" +" your account." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:67 +msgid "Issue invoices and register payments" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:69 +msgid "" +"You can issue invoices for Amazon orders in Odoo. Click **Create Invoice** " +"in the sales order to do so. You can also do it in batch from the list view " +"of orders. Then, confirm and send the invoices to your customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:73 +msgid "" +"To display only Amazon-related orders on the list view, you can filter " +"orders based on the sales team." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:76 +msgid "" +"As the customer has paid Amazon as an intermediary, you should register " +"invoice payments in a payment journal dedicated to Amazon (e.g. Amazon " +"Payments, with a dedicated intermediary account). You can do the same with " +"the vendor bill received from Amazon and dedicated to commissions. When you " +"receive the balance on your bank account at the end of the month and record " +"your bank statements in Odoo, you simply credit the Amazon intermediary " +"account by the amount received." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:83 +msgid "Follow your Amazon sales in sales reporting" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:85 +msgid "" +"As a sales team is set on your account under the tab **Order Follow-up**, " +"this helps you give quick glances at the figures in just a few clicks in " +"Sales reporting. By default, your account's sales team is shared between all" +" of your company's accounts." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:89 +msgid "" +"If you wish, you can change the sales team on your account for another to " +"perform a separate reporting for the sales of this account." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/manage.rst:92 +msgid "" +"It is also possible to perform reporting on a per-marketplace basis in a " +"similar fashion. First, remove the marketplace you wish to track separately " +"from the list of synchronized marketplaces. Then, create another " +"registration for this account and remove all marketplaces, except the one to" +" isolate from the others. Finally, assign another sales team to one of the " +"two registrations of your account." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:3 +msgid "Configure Amazon MWS Connector in Odoo" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:6 +msgid "Get your Amazon MWS Credentials" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:8 +msgid "" +"In order to integrate Amazon with Odoo, a seller account on professional " +"selling plan is required." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:13 +msgid "" +"Visit the `Amazon Marketplace Web Service documentation " +"`_" +" and follow the instructions to register as a developer." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:17 +msgid "" +"Fill the Developer Registration and Assessment form as suggested below and " +"provide your own contact information in the **Developer contact " +"information** section. For the other sections, take care to adapt your " +"responses accordingly to your business case. In particular, select the " +"correct region of your seller account and uncheck the **Merchant Fulfilled " +"Shipping** function if you plan to sell exclusively with the Fulfillment by " +"Amazon service." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:23 +msgid "" +"If you select the **Merchant Fulfilled Shipping** function (i.e. you request" +" access to Personally Identifiable Information (PII) of your customers), " +"Amazon may request you to fill out a second form, depending on the data " +"protection policy in the region of your seller account (e.g. GDPR in " +"Europe)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:32 +msgid "Register your Amazon account in Odoo" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:34 +msgid "" +"To register your seller account in Odoo, navigate to :menuselection:`Sales " +"--> Configuration --> Settings --> Connectors --> Amazon Sync --> Amazon " +"Accounts` and click on **CREATE**." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:37 +msgid "" +"The **Seller ID** can be found in Seller Central under the link **Your " +"Merchant Token** on the **Seller Account Information** page. The **Access " +"Key** and the **Secret Key** can be found in Developer Central (where the " +"Developer Registration and Assessment form was located)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:41 +msgid "" +"Once the account is registered, the marketplaces available to this account " +"are synchronized and listed under the **Marketplaces** tab. If you wish, you" +" can remove some from the list of synchronized marketplaces to disable their" +" synchronization." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:46 +msgid "Match database products in Amazon orders" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:51 +msgid "" +"When an Amazon order is synchronized, up to three sales order items are " +"created in Odoo for each product sold on Amazon: one for the marketplace " +"product, one for the shipping charges (if any) and one for the gift wrapping" +" charges (if any)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:55 +msgid "" +"The selection of a database product for a sales order item is done by " +"matching its **internal reference** with the **SKU** for marketplace items, " +"the **shipping code** for delivery charges, and the **gift wrapping** code " +"for gift wrapping charges." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:59 +msgid "" +"For marketplace products, matchings are saved as **Amazon Offers** which are" +" listed under the **Offers** stat button on the account form. Offers are " +"automatically created when the matching is established and are used for " +"subsequent orders to lookup SKUs. If no offer with a matching SKU is found, " +":ref:`the internal reference is used instead `." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:64 +msgid "" +"It is possible to force the matching of a marketplace item with a specific " +"product by changing either the product or the SKU of an offer. The offer can" +" be manually created if it was not automatically done yet. This is useful if" +" you do not use the internal reference as the SKU or if you sell the product" +" under different conditions." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:69 +msgid "" +"If no database product with a matching internal reference is found for a " +"given SKU or gift wrapping code, a default database product **Amazon Sale** " +"is used. The same is done with the default product **Amazon Shipping** and " +"the shipping code." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:73 +msgid "" +"To modify the default products, activate the **Developer mode** and navigate" +" to :menuselection:`Sales --> Configuration --> Settings --> Connectors --> " +"Amazon Sync --> Default Products`." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:78 +msgid "Configure taxes of products" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:80 +msgid "" +"To allow for tax reporting of Amazon sales with Odoo, the taxes applied to " +"the sales order items are those set on the product or determined by the " +"fiscal position. Make sure to have set the correct taxes on your products in" +" Odoo or to have it done by a fiscal position, to avoid discrepancies in the" +" subtotals between Seller Central and Odoo." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sales/sale_amazon/setup.rst:85 +msgid "" +"As Amazon does not necessarily apply the same taxes as those configured in " +"Odoo, it may happen that order totals differ by a few cents from that on " +"Seller Central. Those differences can be resolved with a write-off when " +"reconciling the payments in Odoo." +msgstr "" + #: ../../sales/sale_ebay.rst:3 msgid "eBay" msgstr "eBay" #: ../../sales/send_quotations.rst:3 msgid "Send Quotations" -msgstr "" +msgstr "发送报价" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/deadline.rst:3 msgid "Stimulate customers with quotations deadline" -msgstr "" +msgstr "用报价截止时间刺激客户" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/deadline.rst:5 msgid "" -"As you send quotations, it is important to set a quotation deadline; Both to" +"As you send quotations, it is important to set a quotation deadline, both to" " entice your customer into action with the fear of missing out on an offer " "and to protect yourself. You don't want to have to fulfill an order at a " "price that is no longer cost effective for you." @@ -1053,15 +1747,15 @@ msgstr "" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/deadline.rst:11 msgid "Set a deadline" -msgstr "" +msgstr "设置截止日期" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/deadline.rst:13 msgid "On every quotation or sales order you can add an *Expiration Date*." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在每个报价单或销售订单上，您可以添加 [到期日期]。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/deadline.rst:19 msgid "Use deadline in templates" -msgstr "" +msgstr "在模板中使用截止时间" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/deadline.rst:21 msgid "" @@ -1071,31 +1765,34 @@ msgid "" "`_." msgstr "" +"您还可以在 [报价模板] 中设置默认截止时间。每次在报价单中使用该模板时，都会应用该截止时间。您可以在这里找到有关报价模板的更多信息 `here " +"`_." #: ../../sales/send_quotations/deadline.rst:29 -msgid "On your customer side, they will see this." +msgid "On your customer side, they will see this:" msgstr "" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/different_addresses.rst:3 msgid "Deliver and invoice to different addresses" -msgstr "" +msgstr "将和发票递送到不同的地址" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/different_addresses.rst:5 msgid "" "In Odoo you can configure different addresses for delivery and invoicing. " "This is key, not everyone will have the same delivery location as their " "invoice location." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在 Odoo 中，您可以为交货和开票配置不同的地址。这是关键，不是每个人都会具有相同的交货位置作为他们的发票位置。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/different_addresses.rst:12 msgid "" "Go to :menuselection:`SALES --> Configuration --> Settings` and activate the" " *Customer Addresses* feature." -msgstr "" +msgstr "转到 ：菜单选择：'销售 --= 配置 --= 设置'并激活 [客户地址] 功能。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/different_addresses.rst:19 msgid "Add different addresses to a quotation or sales order" -msgstr "" +msgstr "向报价单或销售订单添加不同的地址" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/different_addresses.rst:21 msgid "" @@ -1104,58 +1801,60 @@ msgid "" "both but you can, of course, change it instantly and create a new one right " "from the quotation or sales order." msgstr "" +"如果选择具有发票和交货地址集的客户，Odoo 将自动使用这些地址。如果只有一个，Odoo " +"会将该一个用于两者，但您也可以立即更改它，并从报价单或销售订单中直接创建新的。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/different_addresses.rst:30 msgid "Add invoice & delivery addresses to a customer" -msgstr "" +msgstr "向客户添加发票和交货地址" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/different_addresses.rst:32 msgid "" "If you want to add them to a customer before a quotation or sales order, " "they are added to the customer form. Go to any customers form under " ":menuselection:`SALES --> Orders --> Customers`." -msgstr "" +msgstr "如果要在报价单或销售订单之前将其添加到客户，则它们将添加到客户窗体中。转到以下任何客户表单：'销售 --= 订单 --= 客户'。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/different_addresses.rst:36 msgid "From there you can add new addresses to the customer." -msgstr "" +msgstr "从那里，您可以向客户添加新地址。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/different_addresses.rst:42 msgid "Various addresses on the quotation / sales orders" -msgstr "" +msgstr "报价单/销售订单上的各种地址" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/different_addresses.rst:44 msgid "" "These two addresses will then be used on the quotation or sales order you " "send by email or print." -msgstr "" +msgstr "然后，这两个地址将用于您通过电子邮件发送或打印的报价单或销售订单。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/get_paid_to_validate.rst:3 msgid "Get paid to confirm an order" -msgstr "" +msgstr "获得付款以确认订单" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/get_paid_to_validate.rst:5 msgid "" "You can use online payments to get orders automatically confirmed. Saving " "the time of both your customers and yourself." -msgstr "" +msgstr "您可以使用在线付款自动确认订单。节省客户和您自己的时间。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/get_paid_to_validate.rst:9 msgid "Activate online payment" -msgstr "" +msgstr "激活在线付款" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/get_paid_to_validate.rst:11 #: ../../sales/send_quotations/get_signature_to_validate.rst:12 msgid "" "Go to :menuselection:`SALES --> Configuration --> Settings` and activate the" " *Online Signature & Payment* feature." -msgstr "" +msgstr "转到 ：菜单选择：'销售 --= 配置 --= 设置'并激活 [在线签名 + 付款] 功能。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/get_paid_to_validate.rst:17 msgid "" "Once in the *Payment Acquirers* menu you can select and configure your " "acquirers of choice." -msgstr "" +msgstr "一旦进入 [付款收购者] 菜单，您可以选择并配置您选择的收购者。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/get_paid_to_validate.rst:20 msgid "" @@ -1165,12 +1864,14 @@ msgid "" "<../../ecommerce/shopper_experience/authorize>`_, and others under the " "`eCommerce documentation <../../ecommerce>`_." msgstr "" +"您可以找到各种文件，了解如何支付与付款收购方，如\"Paypal " +"../../电子商务/购物者[经验/贝宝]，\"Authorize.Net（信用卡支付）[.]/../电子商务/购物者[经验/授权]，以及\"电子商务文档\"下的其他人员。/../电子商务*。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/get_paid_to_validate.rst:31 msgid "" "If you are using `quotation templates <../quote_template>`_, you can also " "pick a default setting for each template." -msgstr "" +msgstr "如果使用\"报价模板\"。./报价_模板__，您还可以为每个模板选择一个默认设置。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/get_paid_to_validate.rst:36 msgid "Register a payment" @@ -1179,22 +1880,22 @@ msgstr "登记付款" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/get_paid_to_validate.rst:38 msgid "" "From the quotation email you sent, your customer will be able to pay online." -msgstr "" +msgstr "从您发送的报价电子邮件中，您的客户将能够在线付款。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/get_signature_to_validate.rst:3 msgid "Get a signature to confirm an order" -msgstr "" +msgstr "获取签名以确认订单" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/get_signature_to_validate.rst:5 msgid "" "You can use online signature to get orders automatically confirmed. Both you" " and your customer will save time by using this feature compared to a " "traditional process." -msgstr "" +msgstr "您可以使用在线签名自动确认订单。与传统流程相比，您和您的客户都将通过使用此功能节省时间。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/get_signature_to_validate.rst:10 msgid "Activate online signature" -msgstr "" +msgstr "激活在线签名" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/get_signature_to_validate.rst:19 msgid "" @@ -1202,126 +1903,124 @@ msgid "" "=11UaYJ0k67dA2p-ExPAYqZkBNaRcpnItCyIdO6udgyOY>`_, you can also pick a " "default setting for each template." msgstr "" +"如果您使用的是\"报价模板`_,您还可以为每个模板选择默认设置。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/get_signature_to_validate.rst:23 msgid "Validate an order with a signature" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用签名验证订单" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/get_signature_to_validate.rst:25 msgid "" "When you sent a quotation to your client, they can accept it and sign online" " instantly." -msgstr "" +msgstr "当您向客户发送报价单时，他们可以接受报价并立即在线签名。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/get_signature_to_validate.rst:30 msgid "Once signed the quotation will be confirmed and delivery will start." -msgstr "" +msgstr "一旦签署报价将被确认，交货将开始。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/optional_items.rst:3 msgid "Increase your sales with suggested products" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用建议产品提高销售额" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/optional_items.rst:5 msgid "" "The use of suggested products is an attempt to offer related and useful " "products to your client. For instance, a client purchasing a cellphone could" " be shown accessories like a protective case, a screen cover, and headset." -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用建议的产品是试图向您的客户提供相关和有用的产品。例如，购买手机的客户可能会看到保护套、屏幕盖和耳机等配件。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/optional_items.rst:11 msgid "Add suggested products to your quotation templates" -msgstr "" +msgstr "将建议的产品添加到报价模板" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/optional_items.rst:13 msgid "Suggested products can be set on *Quotation Templates*." -msgstr "" +msgstr "建议的产品可以在 [报价模板] 上设置。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/optional_items.rst:17 msgid "" "Once on a template, you can see a *Suggested Products* tab where you can add" " related products or services." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在模板上一次，您可以看到一个 [建议产品] 选项卡，您可以在其中添加相关产品或服务。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/optional_items.rst:23 msgid "You can also add or modify suggested products on the quotation." -msgstr "" +msgstr "您还可以在报价单上添加或修改建议的产品。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/optional_items.rst:26 msgid "Add suggested products to the quotation" -msgstr "" +msgstr "将建议的产品添加到报价中" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/optional_items.rst:28 msgid "" "When opening the quotation from the received email, the customer can add the" " suggested products to the order." -msgstr "" +msgstr "从收到的电子邮件中打开报价单时，客户可以将建议的产品添加到订单中。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/optional_items.rst:37 msgid "" "The product(s) will be instantly added to their quotation when clicking on " "any of the little carts." -msgstr "" +msgstr "当点击任何小购物车时，产品将立即添加到他们的报价。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/optional_items.rst:43 msgid "" "Depending on your confirmation process, they can either digitally sign or " "pay to confirm the quotation." -msgstr "" +msgstr "根据您的确认过程，他们可以进行数字签名或付款以确认报价。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/optional_items.rst:46 msgid "" "Each move done by the customer to the quotation will be tracked in the sales" " order, letting the salesperson see it." -msgstr "" +msgstr "客户对报价单的每次移动都将在销售订单中进行跟踪，让销售人员看到。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:3 msgid "Use quotation templates" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用报价模板" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:5 msgid "" "If you often sell the same products or services, you can save a lot of time " "by creating custom quotation templates. By using a template you can send a " "complete quotation in no time." -msgstr "" - -#: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:10 -msgid "Configuration" -msgstr "配置" +msgstr "如果您经常销售相同的产品或服务，则可以通过创建自定义报价模板来节省大量时间。通过使用模板，您可以不及时发送完整的报价单。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:12 msgid "" "For this feature to work, go to :menuselection:`Sales --> Configuration --> " "Settings` and activate *Quotations Templates*." -msgstr "" +msgstr "要此功能正常工作，请转到 ：菜单选择：\"销售 --* 配置 --* 设置\"并激活 [报价模板]。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:19 msgid "Create your first template" -msgstr "" +msgstr "创建第一个模板" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:21 msgid "" "You will find the templates menu under :menuselection:`Sales --> " "Configuration`." -msgstr "" +msgstr "您将在 ：菜单选择：\"销售 -* 配置\"下找到模板菜单。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:24 msgid "" "You can then create or edit an existing one. Once named, you will be able to" " select the product(s) and their quantity as well as the expiration time for" " the quotation." -msgstr "" +msgstr "然后，您可以创建或编辑现有。命名后，您可以选择产品及其数量以及报价单的过期时间。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:31 msgid "" "On each template, you can also specify discounts if the option is activated " "in the *Sales* settings. The base price is set in the product configuration " "and can be alterated by customer pricelists." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在每个模板上，如果选项在 [销售] 设置中激活，您还可以指定折扣。基本价格在产品配置中设置，可以由客户价目表更改。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:38 msgid "Edit your template" -msgstr "" +msgstr "编辑模板" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:40 msgid "" @@ -1330,60 +2029,61 @@ msgid "" "products. When you click on *Edit Template* you will be brought to the " "quotation editor." msgstr "" +"您可以编辑他们看到的模板的客户界面，以接受或支付报价单。这使您能够描述您的公司、服务和产品。当您单击 [编辑模板] 时，您将被带到报价编辑器。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:51 msgid "" "This lets you edit the description content thanks to drag & drop of building" " blocks. To describe your products add a content block in the zone dedicated" " to each product." -msgstr "" +msgstr "这样，通过拖放构建基块，您可以编辑描述内容。要描述您的产品，在专用于每个产品的区域中添加内容块。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:59 msgid "" "The description set for the products will be used in all quotations " "templates containing those products." -msgstr "" +msgstr "产品的描述集将用于包含这些产品的所有报价模板。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:63 msgid "Use a quotation template" -msgstr "" +msgstr "使用报价单模板" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:65 msgid "When creating a quotation, you can select a template." -msgstr "" +msgstr "创建报价单时，您可以选择模板。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:70 msgid "Each product in that template will be added to your quotation." -msgstr "" +msgstr "该模板中的每个产品都将添加到您的报价单中。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:73 msgid "" "You can select a template to be suggested by default in the *Sales* " "settings." -msgstr "" +msgstr "您可以在 [销售] 设置中选择要默认建议的模板。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:77 msgid "Confirm the quotation" -msgstr "" +msgstr "确认报价单" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:79 msgid "" "Templates also ease the confirmation process for customers with a digital " "signature or online payment. You can select that in the template itself." -msgstr "" +msgstr "模板还简化了具有数字签名或在线付款的客户确认流程。您可以在模板本身中选择它。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:86 msgid "Every quotation will now have this setting added to it." -msgstr "" +msgstr "现在，每个报价单都将添加此设置。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/quote_template.rst:88 msgid "" "Of course you can still change it and make it specific for each quotation." -msgstr "" +msgstr "当然，您仍然可以更改它，并使其特定于每个报价单。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/terms_and_conditions.rst:3 msgid "Add terms & conditions on orders" -msgstr "" +msgstr "为订单添加条款和条件" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/terms_and_conditions.rst:5 msgid "" @@ -1392,42 +2092,43 @@ msgid "" "information which include products and company policy; allowing the customer" " to read all those terms everything before committing to anything." msgstr "" +"指定条款和条件对于确保客户和卖家之间的良好关系至关重要。每个卖家必须申报所有正式信息，包括产品和公司政策;允许客户在承诺任何事情之前阅读所有条款的所有内容。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/terms_and_conditions.rst:11 msgid "" "Odoo lets you easily include your default terms and conditions on every " "quotation, sales order and invoice." -msgstr "" +msgstr "Odoo 可让您在每个报价单、销售订单和发票上轻松包含默认条款和条件。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/terms_and_conditions.rst:15 msgid "Set up your default terms and conditions" -msgstr "" +msgstr "设置默认条款和条件" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/terms_and_conditions.rst:17 msgid "" "Go to :menuselection:`SALES --> Configuration --> Settings` and activate " "*Default Terms & Conditions*." -msgstr "" +msgstr "转到 ：菜单选择：'销售 --= 配置 --= 设置'并激活 [默认条款和条件]。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/terms_and_conditions.rst:23 msgid "" "In that box you can add your default terms & conditions. They will then " "appear on every quotation, SO and invoice." -msgstr "" +msgstr "在该框中，您可以添加默认条款和条件。然后，它们将显示在每个报价单、SO 和发票上。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/terms_and_conditions.rst:33 msgid "Set up more detailed terms & conditions" -msgstr "" +msgstr "设置更详细的条款和条件" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/terms_and_conditions.rst:35 msgid "" "A good idea is to share more detailed or structured conditions is to publish" " on the web and to refer to that link in the terms & conditions of Odoo." -msgstr "" +msgstr "一个好主意是分享更详细的或结构化的条件是在网上发布，并在Odoo的条款和条件中引用该链接。" #: ../../sales/send_quotations/terms_and_conditions.rst:39 msgid "" "You can also attach an external document with more detailed and structured " "conditions to the email you send to the customer. You can even set a default" " attachment for all quotation emails sent." -msgstr "" +msgstr "您还可以将包含更详细和结构化条件的外部文档附加到发送给客户的电子邮件中。您甚至可以为所有发送的报价电子邮件设置默认附件。" diff --git a/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..712886f54 --- /dev/null +++ b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/sms_marketing.po @@ -0,0 +1,519 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2015-TODAY, Odoo S.A. +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +# Translators: +# liAnGjiA , 2019 +# 老窦 北京 <2662059195@qq.com>, 2019 +# guohuadeng , 2019 +# John Lin , 2019 +# Felix Yuen , 2019 +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-11-20 09:24+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: Felix Yuen , 2019\n" +"Language-Team: Chinese (China) (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/zh_CN/)\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Language: zh_CN\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=1; plural=0;\n" + +#: ../../sms_marketing.rst:5 +msgid "SMS Marketing" +msgstr "短信营销" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:3 +msgid "Build, send and get reports from a SMS mailing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:5 +msgid "" +"Why to use SMS? Using SMS Marketing as part of my communication strategies " +"can empower me to expand my markets, considering that in some countries " +"emails are not very used or used at all. It also helps to boost my " +"conversion rate, as this strategy has a high open-rate percentage among " +"people who use smartphones - people usually don’t keep unread SMSs!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:8 +msgid "" +"With Odoo’s SMS Marketing app you can plan, organize, schedule and keep " +"track of your mailings with its easy to use interface." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:12 +msgid "Install the app" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:14 +msgid "Go to *Apps*, search for *SMS Marketing* and click on *Install*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:17 +msgid "Build an SMS mailing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:19 +msgid "Go to *SMS Marketing > Create*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:24 +msgid "" +"First, I’ll be able to specify a *subject* name that will help me to " +"remember what the mailing is about. Under *recipients*, I’ll choose to whom " +"I’d like the SMS to be sent. If I choose *Contact*, all my Odoo contacts " +"(vendor, customers, etc.) will receive my SMS. From there, I can refine my " +"recipient list with the *add filter* option. In the example below, I choose " +"to send it to my contacts living in Belgium." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:31 +msgid "" +"The *Mailing list* option, on the other hand, allows me to choose mailing " +"lists I’ve created with specific contacts or people who have subscribed to " +"my Newsletters, or both! I’m allowed to select more than one *Mailing list*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:36 +msgid "" +"Under the *SMS Content* tab, links can be included and Odoo will " +"automatically generate *link trackers*. Thank to those, I’ll be able to get " +"data about those links." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:38 +msgid "" +"On *Settings* I have the option *include opt-out link* available. If " +"activated, the contact will be able to unsubscribe from the mailing list " +"he’s not interested in anymore." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:43 +msgid "" +"in the *Link Tracker* menu under *Configuration*, I can see the history of " +"my sent links, access them and look at statistics." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:48 +msgid "Double-check that you have the phone number of your contacts saved!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:52 +msgid "Sending my mailing" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:56 +msgid "" +"Once I have my mailing created, I must choose when I would like it to be " +"delivered:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:58 +msgid "" +"**Put in queue**: the mailing will be triggered with the next automatic run." +" Interesting option if I don’t mind when the triggering will happen." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:59 +msgid "" +"**Send now**: sends the message immediately. Advised to use this option if " +"there are not that many recipients." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:60 +msgid "" +"**Schedule**: allows me to choose a day and time. Best option for mailings " +"that I would like to send during a specific event, to promote an offer while" +" it is active or to simply plan my content strategy in advance." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:61 +msgid "" +"**Test**: allows me to send an SMS to one or multiple numbers for test " +"purposes. Check, for example, if the link provided lands on the right page " +"while making sure they are responsive. If sending it to multiple numbers, I " +"must remember to use a comma between them." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:65 +msgid "Visualize reports" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:66 +msgid "" +"On the *Reporting* menu, with just a few clicks, I am capable of applying " +"filters, measures and adopt different layouts to do an analysis of the " +"performance of my SMS mailings." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:71 +msgid "" +"I can also check the price to send an SMS on your country when clicking on " +"the *information* icon when creating a new SMS." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_build_send-and_get_reports_from_a_SMS_mailing.rst:76 +msgid "" +"**Buy Credits!** In order to take advantage of the app and its features, " +"make sure you’ve purchased credits. For more information on that access: " +":doc:`../sms_marketing/fqapricing`" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:3 +msgid "Contact lists and Blacklist" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:6 +msgid "Contact lists" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:7 +msgid "" +"Creating my own list of contacts, or importing it, is useful when I want to " +"create specific groups of people, such as the subscribers of my newsletter. " +"It is also the best way to get started if I am coming from another system " +"and already have built an audience. It makes the SMS distribution a lot " +"easier." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:9 +msgid "" +"Go to *Contacts lists > Contacts lists > Create*. I’ll choose a name for my " +"*Mailing list*, and activate the option *Public* if I would like to make the" +" mailing list accessible to my recipients in the unsubscription page to " +"allow them to update their subscription preferences." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:12 +msgid "" +"Once inside the list, I can again *Create* or *Import* contacts for that " +"specific list." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:18 +msgid "History with the Log Notes" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:19 +msgid "" +"A record of the mailings sent is kept in the chatter of the recipient " +"(whether it is a contact or an opportunity, for example)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:24 +msgid "" +"This is important as I and my team can easily keep track and see a history " +"of interactions with my contacts or prospects, granting me the ability to " +"better understand them. Example: my sales representative can easily find out" +" which SMS mailing promotions a customer has received or not." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:29 +msgid "Blacklist" +msgstr "黑名单" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_contact_lists_and_blacklist.rst:30 +msgid "" +"If I’m coming from another software and have a list of clients who have " +"already asked to be blacklisted from my news, I can import those entries in " +"my database. For that, I’ll go to *Configuration > Phone Blacklist > " +"Import*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:3 +msgid "Integrations and Templates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:4 +msgid "" +"Using SMS to reach people can be a strategy not just used for advertisement " +"purposes but also as a reminder of events or issued invoices to your " +"costumers, for example. As you know, one of the biggest benefits of using " +"Odoo is the capability of the apps to be integrated. With the SMS Marketing " +"app isn’t different!" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:9 +msgid "Organize Email Marketing and SMS campaigns" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:10 +msgid "" +"First, make sure to have the necessary feature activated. Go to the *Email " +"Marketing app > Configuration > Settings> activate the option Mailing " +"Campaigns*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:15 +msgid "" +"Now, I’ll also have the menu *Campaigns* included in my *SMS Marketing* " +"page, allowing me to have an overview of my SMS mailings and my email " +"marketing ones." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:20 +msgid "" +"This feature is especially useful if I have aggregated campaigns, as I have " +"a global reporting view. In addition to that, I can create stages in my " +"kanban view to better organize the work being done." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:26 +msgid "Sending SMSs through the Contacts app" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:27 +msgid "" +"Sending SMSs through the contact’s form is available by default in Odoo. It " +"makes my work easier if I need to send an SMS to a specific contact, for " +"example. For that, I’ll go to the *Contacts* app, select the contact and " +"click on the *SMS* icon next to the phone number." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:33 +msgid "" +"If I’d like to send a message in a batch here, I could go to *List View > " +"select all the contacts > Action > Send SMS*." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:39 +msgid "Set up SMS Templates" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:40 +msgid "" +"To set up *SMS Templates*, I’ll go to the *Settings* app and activate the " +"*developer mode*. Now, back to *Settings* app, I’ll go to *Technical > " +"Phone/SMS section > SMS Templates* and create the content I need." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:48 +msgid "" +"Use *Dynamic Placeholders* to adapt automatically the content of the SMS to " +"the context." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:52 +msgid "" +"SMS Text Messaging is available throughout Odoo! Here are some of our extra " +"notable integrations:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:54 +msgid "*CRM*: send SMSs to your leads and opportunities." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:55 +msgid "*Subscription*: alert customers about their subscription." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:56 +msgid "*Accounting*: send payment reminders." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:57 +msgid "*Marketing Automation*: automate your SMS marketing campaigns." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:58 +msgid "" +"*Inventory*: send an automatic confirmation when a delivery order is done." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:59 +msgid "" +"*Sign*: receive a validation code to verify your identity before signing a " +"document online." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:60 +msgid "" +"*SEPA debit payment provider*: send a verification code to your customers." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:61 +msgid "" +"*Studio*: send an SMS according to your needs by using automated actions." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/SMS_mkt_integrations_and_template.rst:63 +msgid "" +"For more information about SMS integrations in Odoo and a list of frequently" +" asked questions, go to `Pricing and FQA `__." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:3 +msgid "SMS Pricing and FAQ" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:6 +msgid "Pricing" +msgstr "价格" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:7 +msgid "" +"SMS Text Messaging is an In-App Purchase (IAP) service which requires " +"prepaid credits to work. The price of an SMS depends on the destination and " +"the length of the message. With 1 credit, I can send up to 92 SMSs." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:9 +msgid "" +"**For more information, please consult our FAQ page**: `Odoo SMS - FAQ " +"`_" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:11 +msgid "" +"To buy credits I will go to *Settings > Buy Credits* (under *Send SMS*); or" +" go to *Settings > View my Services* (under *Odoo IAP*)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:18 +msgid "" +"If you are on Odoo Online (SAAS) and have the Enterprise version, you " +"benefit from free trial credits to test the feature." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:21 +msgid "FAQ" +msgstr "常问问题" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:22 +msgid "**Is there an expiration time for my credits?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:24 +msgid "No, your credits won’t expire." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:26 +msgid "" +"**Can I send an SMS to a phone number (which is not a mobile phone) because " +"I see the icon in front of the field “phone”?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:28 +msgid "Only if that phone number supports SMS (e.g. SIP phones)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:30 +msgid "**Do I receive an invoice to buy my credits?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:32 +msgid "Yes." +msgstr "是." + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:34 +msgid "**Can the recipient answer to me?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:36 +msgid "No, it is not possible to reply to the SMS." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:38 +msgid "" +"**What happens if I send multiple SMS but I do not have enough credits to " +"send them all?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:40 +msgid "" +"The whole transaction is counted as a single one, so no SMS will be sent " +"until you have enough credits to send them all." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:42 +msgid "**Do I have a history of the sent SMSs?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:44 +msgid "" +"Yes, the SMS is logged as a note under the chatter of the corresponding " +"record, and a complete history of SMS sent is available under Settings> " +"Activate the developer mode > Technical > SMS." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:46 +msgid "**Can I send as many SMSs I want at once?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:48 +msgid "Yes, if you have enough credits." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:50 +msgid "" +"**If I have a number that does not exist in the list of recipients, will I " +"lose credits?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:52 +msgid "" +"Not if the phone number is in the wrong format (e.g. too many digits). " +"Otherwise, if the SMS is sent to the wrong person or to a fake number, the " +"credit will be lost." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:54 +msgid "" +"**What happens if I send my SMS to a paying number (e.g.: a contest to win a" +" ticket for a festival)?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:56 +msgid "" +"The SMS will not be delivered to that kind of number, so you won’t be " +"charged." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:58 +msgid "" +"**Can I identify the numbers that do not exist when I send several SMSs?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:60 +msgid "Only the ones that have an invalid format." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:62 +msgid "**How does the GDPR regulation affect this service?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:64 +msgid "" +"Please find our Privacy Policy here: `Odoo IPA Purchase Privacy Policy " +"`__" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:66 +msgid "**How many types of SMS exist and how many characters make 1 SMS?**" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:68 +msgid "There are 2 types of SMS message:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:70 +msgid "" +"*Standard* (GSM-7): contains only characters from the GSM-7 set, which can " +"be seen in the following picture." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../sms_marketing/fqapricing.rst:75 +msgid "" +"*Unicode*: contains at least one character that is not in the previous " +"table. For Standard SMS the size limit is 160 characters, and for Unicode is" +" 70. Above these limits, the content is divided into a multi-part message. " +"The system will inform you in real-time about the number of SMS your message" +" represents." +msgstr "" diff --git a/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po new file mode 100644 index 000000000..aaf10c21d --- /dev/null +++ b/locale/zh_CN/LC_MESSAGES/social_marketing.po @@ -0,0 +1,173 @@ +# SOME DESCRIPTIVE TITLE. +# Copyright (C) 2015-TODAY, Odoo S.A. +# This file is distributed under the same license as the Odoo package. +# FIRST AUTHOR , YEAR. +# +# Translators: +# Jeffery CHEN , 2019 +# guohuadeng , 2019 +# +#, fuzzy +msgid "" +msgstr "" +"Project-Id-Version: Odoo 13.0\n" +"Report-Msgid-Bugs-To: \n" +"POT-Creation-Date: 2019-11-20 10:20+0100\n" +"PO-Revision-Date: 2019-11-20 09:24+0000\n" +"Last-Translator: guohuadeng , 2019\n" +"Language-Team: Chinese (China) (https://www.transifex.com/odoo/teams/41243/zh_CN/)\n" +"MIME-Version: 1.0\n" +"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n" +"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n" +"Language: zh_CN\n" +"Plural-Forms: nplurals=1; plural=0;\n" + +#: ../../social_marketing.rst:5 +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:2 +msgid "Social Marketing" +msgstr "社交媒体营销" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:3 +msgid "Advanced Topics" +msgstr "高级话题" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:4 +msgid "" +"One of the biggest challenges of a company is to engage efficiently with " +"their community. Odoo Social helps you to meet your audience with the help " +"of several supports: social media, push notifications, or live chat request." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:10 +msgid "Add your social media and create your feed" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:12 +msgid "" +"You first need to add your social media accounts. To do that, add a Stream " +"and choose your social media account. You’ll need to grant permissions to " +"Odoo Social Marketing application." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:19 +msgid "" +"Once it’s done, you’ll be redirected to your Feed and a column will be " +"automatically added with the publications of your freshly added account. You" +" can then add new streams to your Feed and customize your Kanban view as you" +" like." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:28 +msgid "" +"Adding social media accounts to your Feed will also add some KPIs on it:" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:30 +msgid "Audience: Number of followers of your channel" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:32 +msgid "Engagement: Number of times people have engaged with your posts" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:35 +msgid "Stories: Number of times people who have engaged with your channel" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:35 +msgid "" +"have created stories on their friend’s or follower’s feed (Shares, " +"Retweet,..)" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:37 +msgid "" +"You can access more information by clicking on the “Insights” link: this " +"will lead you to statistics of the selected social medium." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:41 +msgid "Publish content" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:43 +msgid "" +"To publish content on your social media accounts or send a push notification" +" to your subscribed users, either go to your Feed and click on New Post, or " +"use the “Posts” menu and create it from there. Select all the accounts where" +" you want to post your content, write your post and get an instant preview " +"of how it will look when published." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:49 +msgid "" +"If you select the push notifications, you’ll get some additional fields on " +"the form that will allow you to complete the push notifications " +"configuration and choose your segment between all your subscribed users. You" +" can also send push notifications via the Visitors menu, as explained in the" +" previous paragraph." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:56 +msgid "Enable push notifications on your website" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:58 +msgid "" +"The push notifications system uses a Firebase account, configured by " +"default. This feature allows you to send push notifications to your " +"website’s visitors after they subscribed to it. To enable push notifications" +" on your website, go to the Website application Settings, and configure the " +"notifications permission request." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:67 +msgid "" +"Once it’s done, a popup will appear to your website’s visitors, asking them " +"to allow push notifications. As soon as they subscribe to it, you can start " +"sending them push notifications through the Visitors menu. You can either " +"send it individually or target a bigger segment by selecting multiple " +"visitors in the list view (e.g. all the visitors that visited your " +"Homepage)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:75 +msgid "Interact with your online visitors" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:77 +msgid "" +"You can monitor your online visits via the Visitors menu. You’ll see every " +"visitors that landed on one of your tracked pages (you can configure your " +"tracked pages in the Website application), online or offline. Your online " +"visitors will be authenticated if they’re linked to a lead or an existing " +"partner. You will be able to contact them with an email, a message sms, a " +"push notification (if they have subscribed to it), or even send them a live " +"chat request that they will receive on their next move on one of your " +"tracked pages (if you installed the Live Chat application)." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:91 +msgid "Configure your own Facebook and Twitter developer accounts" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:93 +msgid "" +"By default, the Social application is already configured with a Facebook and" +" Twitter developer accounts but you can use your own if necessary. Activate " +"the developer mode, go to Configuration > Settings and enter your own API " +"keys." +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:102 +msgid "Configure your own Firebase API" +msgstr "" + +#: ../../social_marketing/social_marketing/social_marketing.rst:104 +msgid "" +"By default, a Firebase project is running on your database so there’s no " +"need to configure it. If you have multiple websites, every website will be " +"linked to a different Firebase project. If you need to configure your own " +"Firebase project, please go to :menuselection:`Website --> Configuration -->" +" Settings` Web Push Notifications section." +msgstr ""